Trueman's UGC NET Library & Information Science 9788189301323, 1611001554437094278, 8189301322

Table of contents :
Cover
Title
Contents
UNIT I
UNIT II
UNIT III
UNIT IV
UNIT V
UNIT VI
UNIT VII
UNIT VIII
UNIT IX
UNIT X

Citation preview

   


NTA UGC-NET/SET Code No. : 59

Produced and Published by Danika Publishing Company 4352/4C, Ansari Road, Daryaganj, New Delhi -110002 Ph.: 011-23278083, 23242482 e-mail: [email protected] Can also be had from Trueman Book Company 4353/4C, Ansari Road, Daryaganj, New Delhi -110002 Ph.: 011-23242483 H.O. Jalandhar (Pb.) -144008 website: truemanbooks.com © Reserved with the Publishers No part of this book be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by any transformation storage and retrieval system without prior written permission from the Publishers. Indemnification Clause: This book is being sold/distributed subject to the exclusive condition that neither the author nor the publisher, individually or collectively, shall be responsible to indemnify the buyer/user/possessor/owner of this book beyond the selling price of this book for any reason under any circumstances. If you do not agree to it, please do not buy/accept/use/possess this book.

ISBN : 9788189301323

New Edition : 2021

Printed at:

Data Processing: Inhouse

Subject to New Delhi Jurisdiction only

Globe Offset New Delhi.

NTA

U N I T

I

SYLLABUS v v v v v v v v v v

Data, Information, Knowledge and Wisdom. Information Life Cycle – Generation, Collection, Storage and Dissemination. Role of Information in Planning, Management, Socio-economic, Cultural, Educational and Technological Development. Information Science – Relationship with other subjects, Information Society and Knowledge Society. Communication – Concept, Types, Theories, Models, Channels and Barriers; Trends in Scholarly Communication. Information Industry – Generators, Providers and Intermediaries. IPR and Legal Issues – Categories, Conventions, Treaties, Laws. Plagiarism: Concept and Types. Right to Information Act (RTI); Information Technology Act. National Knowledge Commission; National Mission on Libraries.

(1)

2 D Library and Information Science Specific

DATA, INFORMATION, KNOWLEDGE AND WISDOM Data, Information, Knowledge and Wisdom are the products of the mind. The Data, Information, Knowledge, and Wisdom are evaluated in an ascending scale of values, Data having the least value, Wisdom the greatest.

Data The word “data” is Latin in origin and literally, it means anything that is given. In sum, the term includes facts, figures, letters, symbols, words, charts and graphs that represent an idea, object or condition. Webster’s Third New International Dictionary defines data as “something given or admitted facts or principles granted or presented, that upon which an interference or argument is based, or from which an ideal system of any sort is constructed.” According to Oxford Encyclopedic English Dictionary, Data are “Known facts or things used as a basis for interference or reckoning.” UNESCO defines data as “facts, concepts or instructions in a formalized manner suitable for communication, interpretation or processing by human or automatic means”. In simple, Data is a unit of fact and a raw material of information. It is derived by observation and experiences. By nature, data are either quantitative or qualitative. Quantitative data are numerical and qualitative data are descriptive. It is also possible to transform qualitative data into numerical values. Additionally, in science, data can also be graphic in nature. The data possesses the following characteristics. The following are the properties of data: (i) Amenability to Use. Data must be amenable to use. The use may differ with the context. (ii) Clarity. Data should necessarily display clarity. (iii) Accuracy. Accuracy is an essential property of data. (iv) Essence. Data should be compressed and refined. Only the refined data can present the essence of value.

Information The word “information” is derived from two Latin words “forma” and “formatio”. Both the words convey the notion of giving shape to something and of forming a pattern. Information is the processed data, organized and presented by someone. The data becomes information when these are collected, processed, interpreted, presented or communicated to some one in an organized or in logical form to facilitate a better comprehension of the concerned issue. Information is the knowledge concerning some particular fact, subject or events in any communicable form. It is a structured collection of data, i.e., sets of data, relation between data. It consists of data that have been retrieved, processed or otherwise used for informative or inference purpose, argument or as a basis for forecasting or decision making. Let us mention some of the definitions of Information: n According to Harrod’s Librarian’s Glossary and Reference book compiled by Ray Prytherch, 7th ed, 1990, information is “an assemblage of data in a comprehensible form capable of communication”.

Unit-I D 3 n n n

n

n

n

Mikhailov et.al (1966) has cited Brillounin’s definition. According to them “information is the raw material and consists of a mere collection of data”. Hayes (1969) defines information as “result of data, usually formalized in processing”. Davis (1974) has defined information as “data that has been processed into a form that is meaningful to the recipient and is of real perceived value in current or prospective decision”. Stevens (1986) has defined information as “the factual data, ideas and other knowledge emanating from any segment of society that are identified as being of value sometimes gathered on a regular basis, organized in some fashion, transmitted to others and used in some meaningful fashion”. According to S.C. Blumenthal in “Management Information System” (1969), “information is data, recorded, classified, organized, related or interpreted within context to convey meaning”. According to A.J. Evans et al, information is a “sensible statement, opinion, fact, concept or idea, or an association of statement, opinions or ideas. It is closely associated with knowledge in that once information has been assimilated, correlated and understood it becomes knowledge”.

Knowledge The word “knowledge” means an assured belief or that which is known. It is the information read, heard or seen and understood. It is an organized set of statements of facts or ideas – presenting a reasoned judgments or an experimental result which is transmitted to others through some communication medium in some systematic form. When information is stored in mind, it constitutes knowledge, particularly when relationships are established between items of information. The Webster’s New International Dictionary of English language defines knowledge as, “Familiarity gained by actual experience, practical skill, technical acquaintance”. It has also been defined by Webster as “Acquaintance with fact; the state of being aware of something or of possessing information; hence scope of information”. When man knows the entities (things or concepts), knowledge is established. As man knew more and more about entities knowledge grew. In order that knowledge already gathered is not lost from the scope of posterity it must exist in recorded and stored format. Due to the comparatively larger age of human, living of three generations in a family within society, ability to reason and analyse and ability to transfer the accumulated knowledge to its posterity increase his/her stock of knowledge. Knowledge is the ability of an actor to respond to a body of facts and principles accumulated over a period of time. The quality of knowledge depends on the properties of the agent. Knowledge can be viewed in terms of the following: (a) Knowledge is the structure or organization of information including the relationship among items of information. (b) Knowledge is created and modified by new information. (c) When information is applied by people it becomes knowledge. (d) Knowledge is universally regarded as a much wider concept than information, both in the everyday world and within the specialty theory and practice.            

4 D Library and Information Science Specific Further, knowledge is individual to each person and does not depend upon humans to exist; when it exists apart from information it can only be useful if it becomes a commodity or a resource. Knowledge can only reside in an organic brain.  As soon as it is objectified outside of a biological organism it becomes disembodied information, capable of entering production similar to a manufactured product or commodity. Some of the characteristics of knowledge are: (a) It is dynamic, ever growing and continuing. (b) It is contained in the subjective realm. (c) It is structured, coherent and often of enduring significance. (d) It is a stock, largely resulting from the flow, inputs of information. (e) It is the basis for action.

Wisdom Wisdom is the distilled and integrated knowledge and understanding. It is the most precious human capital in all developmental processes. Cleveland, Ohio Association for System Management, 1979 has treated raw data from “birth” into evaluated form as information, through maturity as knowledge, to “death” and inclusion in the knowledge base. It may be noted in passing that in common social process, data, information and knowledge are regarded as mutually sustaining elements at times distinctly different, on occasions overlapping, and interchangeable. Both data and information have intrinsic properties. While information is shareable, knowledge is individual to each person. Again, information depends upon humans to exist but knowledge does not depend upon only humans to exist. Information is the aggregation and assemblage of data in a comprehensible form recorded on paper or in some other medium and is capable of communication. Knowledge is the potential for action on information. The information, knowledge and wisdom in their totality constitute valuable human intellectual assets.

INFORMATION LIFE CYCLE Cycle means a series of events that are regularly repeated in the same order. Transfer of information from its generation to its end user becomes possible through many processes. These processes are also regularly repeated in the same order. These processes complete a cycle, which is called Information Transfer Cycle (ITC). The ITC comprises generation, collection, storage, communication and retrieval. (a) Information Creation/Generation. Information is created with the happening of incidents and activities of humans. If an activity or an incident does not happen, no information is created. Information is mostly created by research and development programmes, government activities, survey and census of population, business and industrial organizations etc. and presented in format by author, scientist, researcher, editor, writer, poets, novelists, dramatists, etc. Over the web, information is produced by the general people irrespective of their background and is not restricted only to academics such as scholars, scientists, etc.

Unit-I D 5 (b) Information Production and Dissemination. It is the mass production of knowledge through publishing companies or others that will help the mass distribution of knowledge in some physical or electronic form. Previously the information had been disseminated in the form of book. Many conventional and non conventional, printed and non printed sources of information are nowadays available which are different in shape, size, type and format. Over the web, the production is accelerated by posting the information electronically over some kind of websites. It speeds up the transfer of information globally at a rapid rate instead of taking months or years to get published on paper. (c) Information Storage, Organization, Retrieval and Communication. The storage is the process by which the information described and presented in the documents are stored. Information is collected and stored by libraries, documentation centers, information analysis centers, data banks, data centres, etc. Computer has been accepted as a boon for storing of information. It can store a huge amount of information in the form of database. Besides, the computer, disks and CDROMs are the newly developed and very significant tools of storing information. (i) Organization is how that representation of knowledge is found among others of its kind. In the library environment, the classification and catalogue, shelf list, various kinds of guides, etc. facilitate the retrieval function. All these tools are equipped with controlled vocabulary. In the computer environment, organization is facilitated by databases, search engines, etc. Knowledge is individual and the users determine its usefulness; so keyword and natural language searching in computer environment is more attractive. (ii) Retrieval is a process of getting information from the collection of a library, for providing answer to the queries of the users, etc. (iii) Communication is the process of transmission of information from one place to another, from the creator of information to its users. It is necessary for the best use of the same. It is the process of social exchange. In the library environment, communication of information can be made through telephone, CAS services, SDI services, teleconferencing, e-mail, etc. Sometimes the publisher also brings different kinds of information sources to the notice of the user community. (d) Information Diffusion and Utilization. Diffusion is viewed as a more targeted flow of information to a particular segment of society. The diffusion of information should find its way to people who actually need it instead of targeting the people who will use it for their own benefit. Utilization is the adoption and implementation of the knowledge by the user. Information is needed by each and every person of modern society for some purpose or the other. When information is consumed by one person it gives new dimension to his knowledge. This knowledge when he applied to some other purposes it gives birth to new information. Thus the information cycle is continuum in nature. (e) Information Preservation and Destruction. The different kinds of libraries, archives are trying to preserve information in different format. Over web, the Internet archive and the cached page of search engines are serving some purpose in this regard. The information that is less frequently accessed or has met its assigned retention periods may be considered for relocation to an archive. Then from the archive, it needs to be weeded at some time or other by means of appropriate procedure for the content.

6 D Library and Information Science Specific The meaning of information cycle relates to that unit of knowledge from where the information is generated and then transmitted to the users with the state of various processes. The whole process of information from its creation to its use is called the information cycle.

Information Transfer Definitions Information. Items of data. Knowledge. Knowledge is derived from an explicit theory or theories, embedded in a social context of explanation, and are endorsed by a discipline or group of practitioners. Tacit Knowledge. Knowledge that is in people’s hands or in their own files as distinguished from explicit knowledge, which is in documents or databases. Tacit knowledge is learning by doing. It is codifiable and, therefore, a “knowledge asset” for an organization Public Knowledge. Knowledge created through scholarly and scientific inquiry the results of which are made public for understanding and use. Public knowledge is shared knowledge. Organizational Knowledge. Organized company knowledge made available to staff via various access points and systems. Knowledge Management. A set of proactive activities to support an organization in the creation, production, dissemination, organization, diffusion, utilization, preservation, and destruction of knowledge. Content Management. Bringing together all assets of an organization - hardware, software, people - to build an organization’s Web site.

Information Transfer Cycle Information Need. The process of becoming aware of the relevance of information. Knowledge Creation. Externally-produced, empirically-grounded knowledge through research and development or internally generated through research and development. Knowledge Dissemination. The one-way spreading of information that helps the user seek and acquire alternative sources of information and learn about options. Another level of dissemination is interactive and provides for a multidirectional flow of information into systems. Dissemination systems supply information to reduce costly ignorance (Klein & Gwaltney, 1991). Knowledge Organization. A systematic arranging of data, information, and knowledge to facilitate identification, access and retrieval. Knowledge Diffusion. The deliberate - sometimes accidental - spreading of knowledge, especially through contact. The exchange and multi-flow of knowledge. Diffusion is the process by which an innovation is communicated through certain channels over time among members of a social system. Rogers five stage innovation diffusion model consists of: awareness, interest generation and knowledge acquisition, attitude formation, trial decision, adoption or rejection (Rogers, 1983). Knowledge Utilization. A process which aims at increasing the employment of knowledge to solve problems and improve the quality of organizational decision-making. Utilization involves designing strategies that help put knowledge to use (Backer, 1991). Knowledge Preservation. The faithful storage and maintenance of documents to facilitate future use.

Unit-I D 7 Knowledge Destruction. The deliberate or accidental loss of knowledge. Knowledge Needs Diagnosis. The process consists of client interviews, observation, examination of information use patterns, and client feedback. Knowledge Repackaging. A service that consists of diagnosing a client’s information needs, information counseling, consolidation, and compression. It is adding value to information by facilitating physical and conceptual access.

ROLE OF INFORMATION IN PLANNING The concept of information easily allows room for confusion, dependent on the methodological point of departure. Information can be looked upon as a piece that one needs in the different stages of the planning process; in the first stage one needs information in order to be able to develop a clear definition of the problem that should be tackled by means of planning. In a later stage one needs information about different alternatives and the consequences of these alternatives. After one has put the result of a planning process into practice one needs information in order to make an evaluation. The role of information is then analyzed as something that should be available at the right moment in the planning process. It must be said that, in this respect, the role of information has received a lot of attention and that the way in which information presently is used is sophisticated in comparison with earlier experiences. Particularly the computerized gathering and processing of information has had great influence in this respect.

Management A fusion of Science and Technology as integrated framework of reference resulted offering much greater explanatory power. Technology is the instrumental mode of rational action, this new methodological development is also known as “intellectual technology” which constitutes a set of algorithm that are embodied in a computer program to represent a formalisation of judgements. Their routine application to many situations is becoming predominant in the management of organisation and enterprises today.

Socio-economic Development The organising principle for information systems and services today is a mix of Science, Technology and Social Information (STSI). Development, being a complex and multidimensional process, involves information and knowledge inputs of Science and Technology and their applications. They combine with other forms of society-related information such as political, economic, sociological, demographic, occupational, health, legal, regulatory and environmental information to provide a complete information universally. Development is said to be not merely cultivating the physical resources, but human resources as well. Any imbalance in these development approaches weakens the overall capacity of a society to transform itself. Information Technology has revolutionised information processing, storage, dissemination and distribution and has been the chief instrument and a major contributing factor to changes in society. These technologies are not merely rapidly developing, but

8 D Library and Information Science Specific they are also converging and integrating, giving an unprecedented push to growth and development in every space. The daily life of an ordinary person is dependent on the access to information for his day-to-day activities. With the advent of IT, access to such information is made very easy such as News on current events, activities and personalities, weather, current programmes on television, radio, theatre, films, travel (road, rail, water and air), recipes, games and quizzes, information for children, consumer advice, health tips, home shopping, home banking, even encyclopedia information, etc. A consumer today is also informed through a variety of trade literature and advertisements in newspapers, etc. The living standard and the socio-economic condition of the society has improved substantially.

Technology Transfer Information and knowledge have become a tremendous source of economic and political power as they have become the principal driving force for the acquisition of wealth, political strength and more knowledge. Information rich countries of today are becoming even more powerful. Hence, there is a strong need of technology transfer which is possible though education, research and development, mass contact, Government policies, business and industry, etc.

INFORMATION SCIENCE Relationship with other Subjects Linkage of LIS with Other Disciplines. Library and Information Science is an interdisciplinary body of knowledge, taking shape in the form of new paradigmatic science recognizable from its theoretical foundations and broad agreement as to its purpose and methods and the approach it employs. This interdisciplinary subject has derived and drawn the benefits from most of the traditional subjects which include Chemistry, Computer Science, Education, Linguistics, Logic, Mathematics, Physics, Psychology and so on. In the following paragraphs an attempt has been made to discuss the contribution of some other subjects towards library and information science. The discussion has been arranged according to the alphabetical order of the name of the discipline. (a) Chemistry. Chemistry is the science of matter. It deals with the composition of substances and their properties and reactions upon one another. The Alchemists did much of the ground work leading up to modern chemistry of which Antoine Lavoisier (1743-94) is considered the founder. Chemistry helps the Library and Information Science in the preservation and conservation of different types of documents. It is extensively used to save the print and/or digital counterparts from different biological agents. (b) Computer Science. Computer science is the study of computation. It is the discipline that is concerned with the methods and techniques related to data processing performed by automatic means. It deals with theories of understanding computing systems and methods; designing methodology, algorithms and tools; dealing with the methods for the testing of concepts, methods of analysis and verification; and

Unit-I D 9

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

knowledge representation and implementation. Library and Information Science often needs to handle very large quantity of data which always demands the use of computer. In recent times, the work of every branch of Library and Information Science relies directly or indirectly on the use of computer i.e. it is used for library administration, acquisition, retrospective searching, current awareness, SDI services, online database searching, machine translation, etc. It helps to reduce the burden of handling the ever-increasing amount of information. It helps to automate the whole house keeping operation and so on. The computer science with operation research or cybernetics helps in the study and development of information processing, psychology and the behavioral sciences, through putting light on the human processes involved in knowledge-transfer such as communication process, analysis of user needs and man – machine interaction. Economics. Economics is the branch of social science that deals with the production, distribution and consumption of goods and services and their management. It includes interest rates, gross national product, inflation, unemployment, inventories, as tools to predict the direction of the economy, etc. Library is a non profit making institution. So, its service must be justified in terms of demand and uses. Economic theories are used for the evaluation of different types of reference sources. It is extensively used to study the document procuring and processing cost of the staff, cost of storage, cost of maintenance, cost of retrieval of information, overhead cost etc. It is also used for the cost benefit and cost effectiveness studies in the context of different services. Education. Education encompasses teaching and learning specific skills, and also something less tangible but more profound: the imparting of knowledge, good judgment and wisdom. It also imparts culture from generation to generation. Every seeker of information is a student in one sense and they need initiation into the library and information system, tools and technique. The libraries and information centre also serves as institutions of informal education. It teaches the library patron about how to use the library material through user education programme, gives assistance through reference services, and provides information service when the users need it. In addition, the subject education, works out programmes of education and training for the profession itself regarding the design and execution of courses, method of evaluation, certification, etc. Law. Law is the combination of those rules and principles of conduct promulgated by legislative authority. It is derived from court decisions and established by local custom. In library environment there are also laws governing registration of newspaper and periodical, ISBN / ISSN number, censorship, copyright, delivery of books act, transmission & communication of information, etc. Within the premises of library itself, library rules are in existence for the proper use of library material. Various states also have library legislation which enables the establishment, maintenance, financing and governing the public library system within the states. In the computer environment also there are laws related to data flow, networking, and uses of information which are governed by special regulation. Library and Information Science demands the detail study and evaluation of all these laws. Linguistics. Linguistics is the scientific study of human language. In the library environment linguistics is of great significance in information processing, indexing and abstracting of document, automatic indexing, artificial intelligence, machine

10 D Library and Information Science Specific

(g)

(h)

(i)

(j)

(k)

(l)

translation etc. In the process of indexing, the indexer has to choose the terms from natural language by taking into consideration different syntactic and semantic problems as the phrase or word chosen should match the vocabulary of the text and the search terms of the user. Logic. Logic is the branch of philosophy that deals with the formal properties of arguments and the philosophical problems associated with them. It means gathering and reasoning; investigating the principles governing correct or reliable inference and deals with the canons and criteria of validity in thought and demonstration. The system of reasoning is applicable to any branch of knowledge or study. In Library and Information Science, it is used in the classification and indexing of document, and widely used in decision making by the librarian. Management. According to ALA Glossary of Library and Information Science “management may be defined as the process of coordinating the total resources of an organization towards the accomplishment of the desired goals of that organization through the execution of a group of interrelated function  such as planning, organizing, staffing, directing and controlling. Management science helps in system analysis, system design, and system management and by this way helps in managing a LIS centre most efficiently. It is responsible for deciding the line of authority and the objectives of the institution, analysing and describing a job and fixing policies for recruitment and so on. Mathematics. Mathematics is the science dealing with quantity, form, measurement and  arrangement, and in particular, with the methods for discovering by concepts and by models the properties and interrelationship of quantities and magnitudes. The mathematics helps in programming as well as in the study of economics of information, estimate cost, performance evaluation, etc. Various information models are needed in preparing different types of library software packages. Again, bibliometrics is a branch of Library and Information Science where mathematical principles are used to a great extent. Philosophy. The term philosophy is drawn from a combination of the Greek words “philos” meaning love and “Sophia” meaning wisdom (love of wisdom). So, it is the study of the most general and abstract features of the world and categories with which we think mind, matter, reason, proof, truth and so on. It is the tool for the generation and development of information. Physics. Physics (from the Greek ‘phusikos’ means natural and ‘phusis’ means nature) is the science of Nature in the broadest sense. It is concerned with the study of the behaviour and properties of matter in a wide variety of contexts, ranging from the sub-nuclear particles from which all ordinary matter is made (particle physics) to the behaviour of the material universe as a whole (cosmology). Different types of machines that are widely used in the library are product of the physics. It includes reprographic, automatic binding machine, etc. Psychology. Psychology is the scientific study of human behaviour (derived from the Greek word ‘psyche’ meaning breath, spirit, or soul and ‘logos’ means ‘study’), mental processes, and how they are affected and/or affect individuals or groups physical state, mental state, and external environment. Its goal is to describe, understand, predict, and modify behaviour.  Though it is largely concerned with humans, the behaviour and thought of animals is also studied. Library and

Unit-I D 11 Information Centers have to provide information service based on user needs. But the users have different psychological temperaments, which makes knowledge of human psychology important in LIS. The human psychology helps the Library and Information Science professional to understand the user correctly, analyze his/ her problem or need precisely to provide the specific information in a form most suitable to him/her, and to treat the user appropriately. The knowledge of psychology is also important in designing and developing an information retrieval system as it helps to select a term which majority of the users is likely to use. (m) Sociology. Sociology, the study of the social lives of humans, groups, and societies, is sometimes defined as the study of social interactions. It concerns itself with the social rules and processes that bind and separate people not only as individuals, but as members of associations, groups, and institutions. Library is a social institution. In Library and Information Science sociology examines the legal and social aspects of information processing, transfer and use. (n) Statistics. Statistics is concerned with the collections, classification, analysis and interpretation of numerical facts or data. Statistics obtains data from a study of a large quantity of numerical data which need not be exact but should approximate the true value. Statistical methods in Library and Information Science help in improving the existing services of the library. The statistical analysis is used to assess the users’ needs and ascertain views on library services, to measure productivity of library staff, to justify the need of reference service, cost benefit analysis, library performance evaluation and so on. Library and Information Science and other traditional subjects are inter-linked. It is sure that information science is benefited by other traditional subject. But in return it also gives its best to other subject. It takes the sole responsibility of the literary heritage of other subjects, its document collection, conservation and preservation, dissemination and uses and by this way also helps in their subsequent generation of new information. Again, it is only the library that manages the literary heritages on which our modern civilization exists. Without the help of Library and Information Science, the society will again move to the traditional days of human civilization. When we come to the electronic environment, much of the information available over the internet as a whole, is the product of the Library and Information Science or devised in consultation with the help of the Library and Information Science professional.

Information Society By the turn of the millennium, the use of the concept of information society had already become widespread and was not only an everyday term in the social science vocabulary but was a term preferred by those involved in political planning, political marketing and in the world of business. In addition, it had triumphantly penetrated the language of the written and electronic media. However, it is exactly because of this sudden popularity that the content(s) of the expression has become “diluted”, and its use is now laden with contradictions and vagueness. What is more, some overambitious counter concepts have been proposed. If there were a generally accepted interpretation or definition based on the best arguments in the professional and scientific literature of information society, it might be easier to clarify the contentious questions and to restructure the sphere of problems that has become increasingly chaotic. However, there are numerous information

12 D Library and Information Science Specific society theories stemming from different areas of science built on diverging traditions. Thus, instead of a systematization based on “shared or common codes” there is a constant battle going on between individual and original information society concepts. l A society that organises itself around knowledge in the interest of social control, and the management of innovation and change... (Daniel Bell) l A new type of society, where the possession of information (and not material wealth) is the driving force behind its transformation and development […] (and where) human intellectual creativity flourishes. (Yoneji Masuda) l The information society is an economic reality and not simply a mental abstraction ...The slow spread/dissemination of information ends […] new activities, operations and products gradually come to light. (John Naisbitt) l A society where […] information is used as an economic resource, the community harnesses/exploits it, and behind it all an industry develops which produces the necessary information ... (Nick Moore) l A social structure based on the free creation, distribution, access and use of information and knowledge […] the globalisation of various fields of life. (Hungarian) l A new type of society in which humanity has the opportunity to lead a new way of life, to have a higher standard of living, accomplish better work, and to play a better role in society thanks to the global use of information and telecommunication technologies.(Béla Murányi) TABLE: DIMENSIONS OF THE INFORMATION SOCIETY ACCORDING TO DANIEL BELL Pre-industrial

Industrial

Post-industrial

Extractive Primary Agriculture Mining Fishing Timber

Fabrication Secondary Goods producing Manufacturing Durable products Non-durable products

Oil and gas

Construction industry

Processing; Recycling Services Tertiary Quaternary Transportation Trade Utilities Finance Insurance Quinary Real estate Health, education, research, government, recreation

Natural power wind, water, draft animals, human muscle Raw materials Craft Artisan, manual worker, farmer Common sense, trial and error; experience

Created energy Electricity - oil, gas, coal, nuclear power

Information Computer and data-transmission systems

Financial capital Machine technology Engineer, semiskilled worker Empiricism, experimentation

Design

Orientation to the past Game against nature

Axial principle

Traditionalism

Ad hoc adaptiveness, experimentation Game against fabricated future Economic growth

Knowledge Intellectual technology Scientist, technical and professional occupations Abstract theories, models, simulations, decision theory, system analysis Future orientation: forecasting and planning Game between futures

Mode of Production Economic sector

Transforming resource

Strategic resource Technology Skill base Methodology

Time perspective

Codification of theoretical knowledge

Unit-I D 13 TABLE: THE SIX CHARACTERISTIC AND DETERMINING COMPONENTS OF INFORMATION SOCIETY BY SCHEMENT AND CURTIS Category

“Content” behind the category

Information commodities Information industry

market- and commercial processes related to their production industries built on the large-scale manufacturing, production, distribution and consumption of information in an increasingly global competitive arena, where information export is the measure of economic “fitness” traditional employment indicators are gradually shifting towards more employers (and professions) dealing with information due to the nature of the work involved increasing social complexity and labour distribution are realised through increasingly indispensable technological support systems, while technology facilitates the emergence of secondary networks in addition to the traditional (primary) ones the cohesive power of communities of increasing size, independent of the debates surrounding the disfunctions of the (new) media Strengthening of new community formulae versus traditional (economic, scientific and political) elites.

Information work

Interconnectedness

Parallel use of several media Interaction of technological and social progress

Knowledge Society The term knowledge society refers to a society in which the creation, dissemination, and utilization of information and knowledge has become the most important factor of production. In such a society, knowledge assets are the most powerful producer of wealth, sidelining the importance of land, the volume of labour, and physical or financial capital. The term knowledge society has several meanings. First, it is used by social scientists to describe and analyze the transformation toward so-called postindustrial society. Second, it is used to refer to a normative vision that nations or companies should aspire to fulfill. Third, it is used as a metaphor, rather than a clear-cut concept, under which various topics are examined. It is used interchangeably with notions such as ‘knowledge economy’, ‘knowledge driven economies’, ‘economies of innovation’ and the ‘information society’. A knowledge society is a formal association of people with similar interests, who try to make effective use of their combined knowledge about their areas of interest and in the process, contribute to this knowledge. Knowledge society as a society that operates within the paradigm of the economics of information. It values human capital as the prime input to production and innovation. A knowledge society is well connected via modern ICTs to the dematerialized economy, and has access to relevant and usable information. A highly sophisticated physical infrastructure underpins this economic model and allow the delivery of the material objects that are accessed and manipulated in the dematerialized world of modern ICTs.

COMMUNICATION Communication is the process of transmitting the idea generated by the human mind, following as event or fact. Communication is essential as it helps information to reach

14 D Library and Information Science Specific its defined destination. In earlier times, people used to transmit information via process of ‘Smriti and Shruti’ as printing mode was not known. As a result the piece of information used to die away with the person. Similarly, a number of facts were communicated by way of symbols and signs representing occurrences but that could not be preserved. Later, with the invention of printing, the facts could be transformed into words, preserved communication in printed form. When a fact is communicated to others, then it becomes universally known i.e. which constitutes knowledge. Communication is closely related to information. In today’s world the only way to strike a balance between the information explosion and increase in research work is the expeditious communication of information by adopting new technologies. Information communicated at a particular time has its value, which if not received in time may be useless or cause some mishap. Hence, there should be free flow of information and any barriers in its free flow should be removed.

Meaning and Definition Communication is the process of exchange of information by way of speech, writing or signs. In this process, two or more people share their experiences which increases the knowledge of both the parties. The term communication is derived from a Latin word ‘communicate’ which means ‘to talk together’. In the words of Fausti and Edward, communication may be defined as, “It is an ongoing process. Ideas originate in an individual’s cognitive framework, they are coded and sent through some channel or channels. The messages are received and decoded by another person who responds according to his own cognitive framework.” Similarly, Shannon and Weaver explains “The word communication can be used in a broad sense to include all the procedures by which one mind may affect another. This of course involves not only written and oral speech, but also music, the pictorial arts, the theatre, the ballet, and in fact all human behaviour.” Eldridge tries to describe it by saying “a social interaction involving the transmission of meanings through the use of symbols.” It is thus, said to involve three basic components in communication, they are : (a) Source (b) Channel (c) Recipient

Features of Communication (a) According to Egar Dale the following are the implications of communication: He emphasised on need to buildup common understanding or consensus. He suggested that the communication involves interaction i.e. give & take or exchanging ideas. Communication gives us freedom to learn & criticize, also it assumes in the philosophy i.e. the dignity and respect of all who enter into communication and the absence of manipulation of other persons. Communication allows to lead the ideas to others i.e. idea of getting into the other fellow self (eupathy) and having the courtesy to let him yours. (b) Communication is a continuous process that requires a medium for transmission and reception. It shares ideas, emotions, facts, etc. which are expressed in the course of speech, codes, writing, etc. Communication is always between more than one person i.e. a communicator and a recipient.

Unit-I D 15

Rules for Free and Better Communication 1. The message communicated should be authentic & easy to understand. 2. The communicator should ensure that, the fact, information is well understood by the recipient. 3. The communicator should be well acquainted with the subject matter, so that he is able to communicate properly and answer the queries. 4. The medium adopted for communication should be in accordance with the changing trends.

Components of Communication S. Parasarthi suggests following components: 1. Communicator. A person who generates the ideas, facts, data or information and transmits them to other people through speech, writings, teachings, etc., is a communicator. 2. Message. The information represented by the communicator, is the message. It would consist of ideas, facts, data & statistics treated uniformly before presentation. 3. Language. It is the carrier of the message. Thus, should be simple and easy to understand. 4. Medium. The means of transmitting information are called mediums of communication. It may reach in a number of ways like formal, informal or audiovisual means depending upon the audience. The formal means like books, periodicals, standards, monographs, etc. are meant for scientists, research persons, students, etc. Similarly, for the audience constituting of children adolescents, illiterates, the audio-visual medium is most suitable. It is in the form of illustrations, Charts, maps, slides, films, videotapes, etc. So, the medium has an important role to play in the optimum utilisation and effectiveness of communication. 5. Recipient. The person who requires the information makes use of that information and ultimate receiver of the message is called the recipient. He is the one who decides whether a particular information is clear in understanding or the medium used to communicate was efficient enough or not.

Channels of Communication The two major modes or channels of communication are formal and informal.

The Formal Mode/Channel This usually refers to the printed and published mode of transfer to reach out a wide audience. The quantity of use of that information is the measure of its quality. The recorded information are in the form of periodicals, printed and other forms of reports, tapes, etc. Indexing and abstracting services, books, encyclopaedia, summaries, bibliographic reviews, annual reviews and state-of-art reports, conference proceedings, cord catalogues, etc., audio visual materials, etc. The recorded form of information is authentic and consistent and hence very popular. The only drawback is the time lag in publication.

16 D Library and Information Science Specific The Informal Mode/Channel This mode is both oral as well as written and helpful for community of scientists or research scholars working in small groups. Some of the common sources of informal communications are: 1. Discussions and talks via telephone, internet telephony or conferencing or personal letters. 2. Distribution of manuscripts, among friends and scientists. 3. Direct talks with friends, colleagues, etc. 4. Exchange of ideas in conferences and group discussions. 5. Work in progress. 6. Unpublished thesis and dissertations. 7. Technological gatekeepers.

Communication Media Some of the communication mediums in popular use are:

Oral Communication It is one of the oldest and speedier medium, though the major shortcoming is that information may not be long-lived as it is not recorded. Education imparted in most of the academic institutions use this method for transmitting the information.

Verbal Communication It means the recorded information in printed form like books, periodicals, encyclopedias, dictionaries, etc. These documents are able to assist the users in retrospective as well as recent information search and hence, are also most sought after documents in libraries and academic institutions.

Audio-Visual Communication This includes pictures, charts, illustrated maps, slides, film strips, video tapes, cassettes, etc. These modes may be combined with oral and verbal medium to produce more effective communication.

Mass Media of Communication It comprises of the film, the radio and the television. It is the most effective medium as it is able to bring the information as soon as it occurs, to the masses. In a developing society, it speedily and timely spreads information, education and culture. Two significant developments in this field are linking up micrographics with computer technology and other is video-recording with computer systems.

Tele-Communication Telecommunication encompasses the electronic transmission of voice, data and video information from one location to another. The telecommunication technology has been an essential factor in the speedy growth of computer based library systems, such as the use of centralised cataloguing and online search services. As a result, a large collection of bibliographic data on variety of computer systems throughout the world can easily be

Unit-I D 17 accessed from a terminal in the library or information centre. The terminals in various libraries and information centres are linked to either a local computer system or to one or more remote computer systems for data transmission.

Satellite Communication The advancements in space technology and communication have narrowed the gap between time and space, as information is relayed from one corner of the world to another through satellites.

Promoting Agencies of Information Communication The agencies involved in the systematic generation of information are termed as promoting agencies of information communication. These agencies assist in bringing the information in touch with the users, by presenting it in understandable manner.

Author Ideas generated in the mind of authors are published in the form of journals, periodicals or books in a systematic manner before the researchers, scientists and scholars.

Libraries Library is a place where information is collected, organised and disseminated to the right person at the right time. This information is contained in the documents like books, periodicals, magazines, newspapers, etc. The different sources of information are gathered together so that the queries of different types of users coming to the library, may be answered. The library tries to serve its users by providing the required information as soon as possible for which it tries to provide information services like Current Awareness Service, Selective Dissemination of Information, Bibliographic Services, Translation Services, Reprographic Services, Indexing and Abstracting Services. All of which, are aimed at facilitating the information search and provision process.

Universities A university is an academic institution imparting knowledge to the students at various levels.

Government Publications The national government of countries, produce the maximum number of publications which reflect their policies and practices, in trade and commerce, education, foreign relations, defence and economic policies, etc. Access to these publications, is essential in understanding national issues and in relating them to international developments. Learned bodies and autonomous institutions: Institutions like ICAR, ICMR, BARC, CSIR, etc. are engaged in the work of research, production, commerce and science. The progress and result of these researchers are published in their newsletters, bulletins, research reports and souvenirs.

Industrial Houses Their R & D progress results into a considerable amount of scientific and technical literature.

18 D Library and Information Science Specific Book Trade It is concerned with the publishing of documents of various kinds like books, periodicals, reviews, monographs, etc.

Mass Media The information through radio, television, motion pictures, etc. reach out to masses quickly & easily.

Barriers in Communication of Information The barriers to communication of information can be classified into following parts: 1. Institutional barriers 2. Financial barriers 3. Technical barriers 4. Linguistic (Foreign language) barriers 5. Social & Psychological barriers 6. Political & Administrative barriers In addition to these, communication is interrupted by a number of factors. Any barrier to the access of information will prevent communication and proper flow of information which may cause serious problems and losses for the client. The various factors are mentioned below:

1. Foreign Language Language is an important component of communication. If the user of that information is not able to follow the language, in which the material is presented, then that data has no utility. As information is generated in different languages, it is not possible either for a person to be proficient in all the languages. Thus, a common man is restricted to the material available in his own language or known language. The problems faced due to language factor may be overcome by the following attempts: (a) Common Language. A common language could be a solution to the language problem. If every individual could understand a common language, then communication would become an easy affair. (b) Teaching of Foreign Language. Teaching of foreign language should be encouraged in which more literature is published like English, Russian, French, German, etc. (c) Translation Centres. The libraries and information centres have included translation services as an essential part of their activities. The information centres like INSDOC, provides a panel of translators to facilitate the job. Besides, index of the available translations are also published. These indexes guide the users towards the indexed articles, which have been translated to facilitate user access. (d) Machine Translation. Computers are being made use of to convert a document in one language to another. The translation can be letter by letter, word-by-word, or phrase-by-phrase.

Unit-I D 19

2. Political Barrier The developments in Science & Technology have created political consciousness among the different countries. This has affected the flow of information, which affects the growth of the developing and under-developed countries most.

3. Economic Problems India, being a developing country, its libraries are not in a position to acquire all the material published in a particular area. Specially, foreign documents are very expensive, which leads to minimum subscription. As a result, we are left out of some of the important information regarding achievements in advanced countries. Economic barrier increases the cost of information. It may be of following types : (a) Due to rising cost in production (b) Due to rise in postal/courier charges (c) Due to costs to run LIS centres (d) Due to Royalties.

4. Time Lag The publication of a document is a lengthy and time consuming process thus, the time lag caused belates the information and tends to lose its importance.

5. Procedural Complexities The procurement of foreign publications involves procedural difficulties and foreign exchange problems. The foreign documents, after undergoing all the procedure, reach us quite late. This also, acts as a barrier in the free flow of information which is accelerated by delays and negligence.

6. Lack of Literate/Technical Manpower Information is stored in various machine readable forms like computers, magnetic tapes, discs, CD-ROM's, etc. To access these information technical understanding is required which may not be adequate and this again restricts the free-use of information. It may arise due to : (a) poor presentation (b) lack of equipment tools (c) complicated and hybrid system (d) under-qualified staff (e) lack of bibliographical centres

7. Lack of Co-operation As information is a very important aspect of development, the acquisition of every piece of information is a must. We are not economically strong to be able to have access to all the published material. For this, we have to largely depend on co-operation, the only means to make use of the available material, both at national and international level. But due to political differences and financial problems, the co-operation between countries is affected, which hinders the free communication of information.

Coding and Decoding in Communication Guirdham (1995) developed a model to illustrate possible sources of error at each stage of the communication process.

20 D Library and Information Science Specific Stages of the communication process Transmission

Sender Idea Idea in sender’s mind

Idea not clearly formulated

Receiver

Coding Sender's words, voice, gestures

Medium Phone, face-toface, writing, etc.

Environment Home, office, public places

Decoding Receiver's ears, eyes, vocabulary

Inaccurate expression

Modifies message

Noise: distracts, distorts

Selects, distorts

Idea Receiver's mind

Different frame of reference

FIGURE: SOURCES OF ERROR AT EACH STAGE IN THE COMMUNICATION PROCESS

This table shows some of the reasons why errors can occur in the communication process. TABLE: ERRORS IN THE COMMUNICATION PROCESS Stage

Why errors may occur

Sender: idea

Ideas may not be clearly formulated before coding and transmission begins. For example, you may want to dispute a decision but you haven’t thought about alternative ways forward. You don’t have the right vocabulary to express your thoughts. You use overly complex language or jargon that the receiver cannot understand. The medium may modify the message. For example, if you communicate by telephone or in writing, the receiver cannot use your non-verbal signals to help interpret your message. The environment can distort the message. For example, noise in a telephone line could distort a message. Things happening around the sender or receiver (e.g. other people speaking, coming into the room, etc.) may distract them from the message. Decoding may distort the message. The receiver may not hear the correct words, or may read written communications too quickly and misunderstand the message. The receiver’s perceptions may distort the message. For example, their beliefs or mindset based on previous experience may create a barrier so that they don’t listen to the message.

Sender: coding Transmission: medium Transmission: environment

Receiver: decoding Receiver: idea

In ongoing communication, as messages go backwards and forwards between sender and receiver, the potential for error increases. In group situations, such as meetings, where all the participants have differing perceptions, the scope for errors increases still further. It is not unusual for a group of people to come out of a meeting with very different ideas about what has been agreed. One way to avoid or at least minimize these errors is to use feedback to check understanding. Continually check back, asking, ‘Does that mean…?’, ‘So do we agree…?’ ‘Can we go back…?’ to confirm that the message has been transmitted accurately.

Perceptions and Context Environment The environment in which the communication takes place may contain physical or emotional barriers.

Unit-I D 21 Physical barriers include: n interference – distractions, noise, problems with technology n discomfort – circumstances which affect concentration such as being too hot or too cold, feeling ill, etc. Emotional barriers, such as one person feeling angry or unhappy, can affect the atmosphere in a meeting and distort messages.

Language Language is at the heart of the coding and decoding processes. Problems can arise if the language used is unfamiliar to one of the parties, for example: n Jargon: many professions rely heavily on jargon and have their own ‘language’ that is impenetrable to outsiders. Senders can use jargon as a form of power over those who are not ‘in the loop’. n Acronyms and abbreviations: although these can form a useful shorthand, they exclude receivers who are not familiar with their meaning. A prime example of the problems that inappropriate language can raise is the use of ‘text language’ in transmitting both phone messages and e-mails. Although the message may be perfectly comprehensible to someone who texts regularly, it will be meaningless to others who haven’t acquired this skill. A second problem with language is that we assume words have the same meaning for different people. Our understanding of a word is influenced by our background knowledge, culture and experience.

Culture Culture can impact on the interpretation of non-verbal signals. Pease and Pease (2004) identify a range of noticeable cultural differences in the ways that people: n greet each other. For example, some cultures kiss while other are satisfied with the briefest of handshakes n use gestures: a potential minefield since even the most seemingly innocuous gesture (to the British) such as pointing with the forefinger can be offensive to some Asian cultures n use personal space: in general, northern Europeans and Americans are less comfortable with touching than southern Europeans, Indians and people from the Middle East.

Perceptions The term ‘perceptions’ encompasses a range of thought processes, including the assumptions we make, and our subconscious attitudes that form our values and beliefs. Differing perceptions can form major barriers in communication. Because perceptions are often ‘invisible’ and subconscious they frequently go undetected. In some cases perceptions are used to manipulate people’s thinking. 1. Jumping to conclusions. 2. Unstated assumptions about the other person’s beliefs and intentions. 3. Stereotyping. 4. Assuming that the audience has the knowledge or capacity to understand the message.

22 D Library and Information Science Specific 5. Perceived status particularly if we think that the person we’re communicating with is of much higher or lower status than we are 6. Values and beliefs.

The Organisation The organisation or group in which we operate can be a barrier to communication because of: n lack of appropriate communication channels. For example, you know that someone in the organization has the information you need but you don’t know who they are n culture that discourages informal communication by insisting on putting everything in writing n culture of individualism that makes it difficult to obtain a corporate view n culture that discourages individual expression n culture of conflict that leads to information being distorted or withheld. It would be impossible to overcome all these barriers: human beings are simply not perfect enough to put their thoughts into words without sometimes distorting them. We can, however, reduce the risk of miscommunication by taking some simple steps. n Be clear in your own mind about what you want to communicate. n Select the right medium and use it appropriately. n Step into the receiver’s shoes and anticipate the impact of your communication. n Use feedback to encourage two-way communication and check understanding. n When possible, communicate directly, face-to-face so that you can use non-verbal signals. n Limit the number of links in the communication chain.

INFORMATION INDUSTRY Many of the modern societies are moving towards a knowledge economy, wherein information has become a very powerful ingredient for bringing about economic and social progress and development. In practically every sphere of human 438 Information Intermediaries as Sources of Information activity today, information and knowledge are indispensable vital resources. Information accessibility and availability have, however, become much more complicated and complex as compared to situations existing for similar activities a few decades ago. In fact, in the past, information searching and acquiring required information were far simpler for users. They could easily navigate to obtain relevant reference with the background knowledge of their respective fields and easy procedures for searching. But today, with the fast growing volume and variety of information in multiple forms and subjects/disciplines, a need for a different group of specialists arises who could supply users with the relevant information, providing a high quality service. Added to the complexities of information access, there are users involved in a variety of highly specialised activities. All the needs of the different categories of information users have propped up the emergence of a new group of experts and institutions who/which could serve as a vital link between users and their specific information needs. These groups of experts/institutions are termed as “Information

Unit-I D 23 Intermediaries”. Persons who are operating as intermediaries are not only subject experts in their respective fields but also are equally skilled and knowledgeable in information searching and making the desired information available to users with the speed that is demanded/ expected. In other words, intermediaries are experts who serve as an important link between users and information, who collect relevant information for users, process and disseminate them. In essence, they act as an interface between producers and users of information. Information Intermediaries are basically of two types. The first type constitutes Information brokers, Information consultants, Online vendors, etc. who charge a fee for their services, as a business venture, being motivated to earn a profit. Reference librarians and information officers and a few other groups and agencies who offer some of the current functions of the information intermediaries do not charge a fee, as they are motivated by a spirit of service. In recent decades, new types of information intermediaries have also cropped up such as invisible colleges, technological gatekeepers, and information filters. There are Experts Systems and Internet Services that are also playing the role of information intermediaries. Apart from these types of information intermediaries, groups such as extension workers, paramedical professionals, block development officers have also been offering a highly specialised information services in rural and semi-urban settings as agents of information transfer, particularly in the Indian context.

IPR AND LEGAL RIGHTS I. Intellectual Property Intellectual property comprises all entities arising from human intellect activity such as ideas, intentions, words (fact and fiction), music, theatre or art. It includes document of all kinds, archives, databases (whether online, CD-ROM, or delivered by other mechanisms), material on the Internet, individual items in a database, computer software, and inventive pieces of hardware that are subject to patent coverage. The subject of intellectual property (IP) has assumed international importance especially in respect of the implications and impact of patent laws on science and technology. The facilitation of quick sharing and commercialization of new knowledge requires protection of such knowledge through appropriate IP laws so as to prevent illegal use or copying. The right to IP encourages the creativity in man. The creative person contributes to the development of the society and in return enjoys the economic benefits of his labour. IP includes all property resulting from the exercise of the human mind or intellect.

II. Intellectual Property Right (IPR) IPR connotes the rights to literary, artistic and scientific work; performances of performing artists; phonograms and broadcasts; inventions in all fields of human endeavour; scientific discoveries; industrial designs; trademarks; service marks and commercial names and designations; and all other products resulting from intellectual activity in the industrial, scientific, literary and artistic fields. It is a generic term covering patent, registered design, trade mark, copyright, layout of integrated circuits, trade secrets, geographical indicators and anti-competitive practices in contractual licences.

24 D Library and Information Science Specific The legal profession views IP as real (physical) property which can be mortgaged, sold, rented and passed on to heirs and successors. The owner of an IP has certain rights which prevent third parties from using it without permission.

Patent A patent is a legal monopoly granted for a limited period to the owner of an invention. Patent rights are granted as well as revoked by the state. The patent law is property right and it can be given away, inherited, sold, licensed and even abandoned.

Copyright It is one of the important IP that protect the labour, skill and judgement of someone— author, artist or some creator—expends in the creation of an original piece of work. In some countries copyright is an automatic right i.e., no registration is required. The owner of copyright has the right to prevent others from copying, selling, hiring out, performing, broadcasting or amending the work. The skill, labour and judgement of the author are protected irrespective of the form in which the product appears. Fair Dealing or Fair Use, permits copying for certain specific purposes and under certain conditions. It is intended as a defence against an infringement action, and relies on the argument that the individual made the copy (or under certain circumstances, even multiple copies) of not too substantial a part if the literary work and the copying would not damage the legitimate interests of the copyright owner. What is Fair Dealing is expected to be specified in the local legislation. Typically, national legislations will permit Fair Dealing/Use for such purposes as private research, commercial research, private study, criticism and book reviewing, reporting current events, and educational purposes. The Reproduction Rights Organizations (RROs) are a well-established part of the copyright scene. RROs are typically owned wholly or in part by publishers representatives, and have authority to issue blanket licences to organisations so that they may photocopy copyright materials beyond the legally permitted limits—for a fee. Following are the different types of work covered under copyright: 1. Original literary, dramatic, musical and artistic works, computer programs/software. 2. Cinematographic film 3. Sound recording The Copyright Act, 1957 as amended in 1983, 1984, 1992, 1994 and 1999 governs the copyright protection in India. The total term of protection for literary work is the author’s life plus sixty years. For cinematographic films, records, photographs, posthumous publications, anonymous publication, works of government and international agencies the term is 60 years from the beginning of the calendar year following the year in which the work was published. For broadcasting, the term is 25 years from the beginning of the calendar year following the year in which the broadcast was made. Copyright gives protection for the expression of an idea and not for the idea itself. For example, many authors write textbooks on physics covering various aspects like mechanics, heat, optics etc. Even though these topics are covered in several books by different authors, each author will have a copyright on the book written by him / her, provided the book is not a copy of some other book published earlier. India is a member of the Berne Convention, an international treaty on copyright. Under this Convention,

Unit-I D 25 registration of copyright is not an essential requirement for protecting the right. It would, therefore, mean that the copyright on a work created in India would be automatically and simultaneously protected through copyright in all the member countries of the Berne Convention. The moment an original work is created, the creator starts enjoying the copyright. However, an undisputable record of the date on which a work was created must be kept. When a work is published with the authority of the copyright owner, a notice of copyright may be placed on publicly distributed copies. The use of copyright notice is optional for the protection of literary and artistic works. It is, however, a good idea to incorporate a copyright notice. As violation of copyright is a cognizable offence, the matter can be reported to a police station. It is advised that registration of copyright in India would help in establishing the ownership of the work. The registration can be done at the Office of the Registrar of Copyrights in New Delhi. It is also to be noted that the work is open for public inspection once the copyright is registered. Computer program in the Copyright Act has been defined as a set of instructions expressed in words, codes, schemes or any other form, including a machine-readable medium, capable of causing a computer to perform a particular task or achieve a particular result. It is obvious that algorithms, source codes and object codes are covered in this definition. It is advisable to file a small extract of the computer program at the time of registration rather than the full program. It is important to know that the part of the program that is not being filed, would remain a trade secret of the owner but would have to be kept well guarded by the owner. It may be noted that computer programs will become important in the area of medicines when one talks about codification of DNA and gene sequencing. Generally, all copyrightable expressions embodied in a computer program, including screen displays, are protectable. However, unlike a computer program, which is a literary work, screen display is considered an artistic work and therefore cannot be registered through the same application as that covering the computer program. A separate application giving graphical representation of all copyrightable elements of the screen display is essential. In the digital era, copyright is assuming a new importance as many works transacted through networks such as databases, multi media work, music, information etc. are presently the subject matter of copyright.

Infringement of Copyright Copyright gives the creator of the work the right to reproduce the work, make copies, translate, adapt, sell or give on hire and communicate the work to public. Any of these activities done without the consent of the author or his assignee is considered infringement of the copyright. There is a provision of ‘fair use’ in the law, which allows copyrighted work to be used for teaching and research and development. In other words making one photocopy of a book for teaching students may not be considered an infringement, but making many photocopies for commercial purposes would be considered an infringement. There is one associated right with copyright, which is known as the ‘moral right’, which cannot be transferred and is not limited by the term. This right is enjoyed by the creator for avoiding obscene representation of his /her works. Following acts are considered infringement of copyrights: (A) In the case of literary, dramatic or musical work, not being a computer program/ software: (a) to reproduce the work in any material form including the storing of it in any medium by electronic means.

26 D Library and Information Science Specific (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (B)

(C)

(D)

(E)

to issue copies of the work in public not being copies already in circulation. to perform the work in public or communicate it to the public; to make any translation of the work. to make any adaptation of the work; and to do, in relation to a translation or an adaptation of the work, any of the acts specified in relation to the work in sub-clauses (a) to (e). In the case of computer program/software: (a) to do any acts specified in (A); and (b) to sell or give on hire, or offer for sale or hire any copy of the computer program, regardless of whether such copy has been sold or given on hire on earlier occasions. In the case of an artistic work: (a) to reproduce the work in a material form including depiction in three dimensions of a two dimensional work or in two dimensions of a three dimensional work; (b) to communicate the work to the public; (c) to issue copies of the work to the public not being copies already in circulation; (d) to include the work in any cinematograph film; (e) to make any adaptation of the work; and (f) to do in relation to an adaptation of the work, any of the acts specified in relation to the work in sub-clauses (a) to (e). In the case of cinematograph film: (a) to make a copy of the film including a photograph of any image forming part thereof; (b) to sell or give on hire, any copy of the film, regardless of whether such copy has been sold or given on hire on earlier occasions; and (c) to communicate the film to the public. In the case of sound recording: (a) to make any other sound recording embodying it. (b) to sell or give on hire, or offer for sale or hire, any copy of the sound recording, regardless of whether such copy has been sold or given on hire on earlier occasions; and (c) to communicate the sound recording to the public.

Images Images are not covered by “Literary Works”, but instead are known as “Artistic Works”. The term includes photographs, microfilms, paintings and drawings, models of buildings, sculptures, diagrams, maps, slides, including OHP transparencies, engravings, etchings; the design part of any trade mark or trade name; product labels; peoples’ signatures; charts, engineering drawings, and plans. The owner of the copyright in an existing work or prospective owner of the copyright in a future work may assign to any person the copyright, either wholly or partially in the following manner. (i) for the entire world or for a specific country or territory; or (ii) for the full term of copyright or part thereof ; or (iii) relating to all the rights comprising the copyright or only part of such rights.

Unit-I D 27 One of the important requirements of copyright is that the work/expression should be fixed in a tangible medium for copyright protection. Protection attaches automatically to an eligible work of authorship, the moment the work is sufficiently fixed. A work is fixed when it is sufficiently permanent or stable to permit it to be perceived, reproduced, or otherwise communicated for a period of more than a transitory duration. A work may be fixed in words, numbers, notes, sounds, pictures, or any other graphic or symbolic indicia; may be embodied in a physical object in written, printed, photographic, sculptural, punched, magnetic, or any other stable form; and may be capable of perception either directly or by means of any machine or device now known or later developed. Basically, the fixation of a work should allow perceiving, reproducing, or communicating the work either directly or thorough some machine. For instance, floppy disks, compact discs (CDs), CD-ROMs, optical disks, compact discs-interactive (CD-Is), digital tape, and other digital storage devices are all stable forms in which works may be fixed and from which works may be perceived, reproduced or communicated by means of a machine or device.

III. IPR in India (a) Patent Facilitating Cell The IP system in India was enforced back in 1856 & re-enacted in 1859. The process of revision continued with the most recent development of setting up the “Patent Facilitating Cell” (PFC) set up by the Department of Science & Tech. (DST), Government of India with following objectives: 1. To introduce patent information as a vital input in the process of promotion of R&D programmes; 2. To provide patenting facilities to scientists and technologists in the country for Indian and foreign patents on a sustained basis; 3. To keep a watch on developments in the area of IPR and make important issues known to policy makers, scientists, industry, etc.; and 4. To create awareness and understanding about patents and the challenges and opportunities in this area through workshops, seminars and conferences. The services offered by PFC include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

CD-ROM based patent search for European and US patents; On-line patent searches in international databases via the Internet; Mechanism for obtaining full patent documents and patent searching elsewhere; Conducting patent awareness workshops; Responding to queries relating to IPR, etc.; and Facilities for patenting of inventions carried out in universities, R&D institutions, etc.

(b) Designs The law for copyright for Indian designs was incorporated as the Designs Act, 1911 from 20 April, 1972.

(c) Copyright In India, the first Copyright Act was passed in 1914, with a number of amendments this act was effected in 1983 mainly to avail the benefits arising from the revision of the

28 D Library and Information Science Specific Bureau Convention and the Universal Copyright Convention, to which India is an adherent.

(d) Computer Software In India, computer software is covered by the Copyright Act of 1957, amended in June 1994. The Act makes it illegal to make or distribute copies of software without proper or specific authorisation. Also, it prohibits the sale, or to give on hire, or offer of sale or hire, any copy of a computer program without specific authorisation of the copyright holder. The National Association of Software & Services Companies (NASSCOM) and Manufacturers’ Association of Information Technology (MAIT) have jointly formed the Indian Federation Against Software Theft (INFAST) to minimise software piracy.

IV. Databases Databases, whether comprising words or numbers, will be considered in most legislations as compilations, which is typically a collection of individual items that may or may not in themselves merit copyright protection. It is generally recognized that the making of databases requires considerable investment of human, technical and financial resources but such databases can be copied or accessed at a fraction of the cost needed to design them independently, with the help of digital technology. The European Community and USA have proposed a suigener is system for protection of databases. It has been proposed to treat the subject as a protocol to the Berne Convention on Copyrights. Databases can be simultaneously protected that represent a substantial investment in terms of human, technical and financial resources in the collection, assembly verification, organization or presentation of the contents of the database. The rights provided for under this system shall attach when a database meets the above requirements and shall endure for at least 25 or 15 years from the first day of January in the year following the date when the database first met the above requirements The protection shall be granted to databases irrespective of the form or medium in which they are embodied (electronic and non-electronic forms) regardless to the availability to the public. Compilations of data or other material (databases), in any form, which by reason of the selection or arrangement of their contents constitute intellectual creations, are protected as such. The term “Extraction” has been clearly defined as “the permanent or temporary transfer of all or a substantial part of the contents of a database to another medium by any means or in any form.” In this sense, the term “extraction” is a synonym for “copying” or “reproduction”. The maker of a database shall have the right to authorize or prohibit the extraction or utilisation of its contents. It is clearly stated that the protection provided does not preclude any person from independently collecting, assembling or compiling works, data or materials from any source other than from the protected database. In the case of database that is made available to the public, in whatever manner, before the expiry of the period, the term of protection shall endure for at least 25 or 15

Unit-I D 29 years from the first day of January following the date when the database was first made available to public. When a database is substantially changed it becomes a new database, entitled to its own term of protection, provided the task of change involves substantial investment. The protection provided for in the proposal may not be subject to registration, notice, marking, or any other formality. Enforcement provisions of the TRIPS Agreement will be applicable in this case as well.

V. Internet and Copyright E-mail messages, material loaded on to FTP sites or www servers, and anything else put on the Internet is copyright. Internet URLs, e-mail addresses and so on are facts, and can be copyright, just as are Internet indexes such as those created by Yahoo, FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) collections on Usenet newsgroups are copyright. A World Wide Web Home Page is copyright, and to copy it to use as the basis of another Home Page is clearly copyright infringement, and may involve infringement of Trade Mark Rights (another form of Intellectual property) if the WWW page included some device or logo that is a Registered Trade Mark.

VI. Electrocopying, Electronic Copyright, Multimedia, Networking Electrocopying means the conversion of printed materials into machine readable form using document image processing and OCR technology. It is violation of copyright to convert without prior permission items owned by third parties into machine readable form and to store them on a database. Scanning of material in preparation for sending it down a network without permission is “adoption” of the work. Sending material via a telecom network, and printing out copies at a remote terminal without permission is infringement. Publishers provide a key means of controlling the information explosion by maintaining quality. Bypassing their systems will be a serious step with implications for bibliographic control and the quality of research. There is already a delicate and tense relationship between data owners and data users. Electrocopying is an example of a new technological development that threatens to upset the relationship. Developments such as the video recorder, audio cassette, PC, cable television and photocopier, have led to changes in the law. A major difficulty arises with developments in electronic communication as a major means for the transfer of scholarly information. A networked environment gives users access to vast quantities and variety of material, some of it unpublished but still available for inspection, downloading and re-dissemination. This creates a potential conflict between the right holders’ need to retain control and earn income, and the users’ right to make use of the material. Hence there is a clear need, for the development of robust, reliable, economic and tamper-proof mechanisms to identify, or tag, copyright material and/or to control the usage of such material. Such a mechanism would give publishers the reassurance that they more readily give permission for the release of their material in machine readable form, or for the digitisation by clients of print material that they own. An Electronic Copyright Management System (ECMS) can address these issues. One type is software that would automatically tag the document in a tamper proof fashion.

30 D Library and Information Science Specific This could be read by anyone to identify the original author and/or copyright owner of the material, and to identify who had made any amendments to the document. Another type of ECMS is a software solely to govern or control distribution of the work, which may be in printed or electronic form. This can be used to limit what can be done with the original or a copy of the file containing the work. It can also limit the number of times the work can be retrieved, opened, duplicated or printed.

VII. IPR and International Conventions (i) Berne Convention. It is an international agreement governing copyright, which was first accepted in Berne, Switzerland, in 1886 and revised five times till 1971 and amended in 1979. The Berne Convention formally mandated several aspects of modern copyright law; it introduced the concept that a copyright exists the moment a work is "fixed", rather than requiring registration. It also enforces a requirement that countries recognize copyrights held by the citizens of all other signatory countries. It is administered by WIPO, based in Geneva, Switzerland. (ii) Patent Cooperation Treaty. It is an international patent law treaty, concluded in 1970 and became effective in 1978. It provides a unified procedure for filing patent applications to protect inventions in each of its contracting states. (iii) Paris Convention. It was one of the first intellectual property treaties. It established a Union for the protection of industrial property. The Convention is currently still in force. The substantive provisions of the Convention fall into three main categories: national treatment, priority right and common rules. As of September 2014, the Convention has 176 contracting member countries, which makes it one of the most widely adopted treaties worldwide. The Paris Convention is administered by the World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO). (iv) Madrid System. Madrid system (officially the Madrid system for the international registration of marks) is the primary international system for facilitating the registration of trademarks in multiple jurisdictions around the world. Its legal basis is the multilateral treaty Madrid Agreement Concerning the International Registration of Marks of 1891, as well as the Protocol Relating to the Madrid Agreement (1989). The Madrid system provides a centrally administered system of obtaining a bundle of trademark registrations in separate jurisdictions. Madrid now permits the filing, registration and maintenance of trade mark rights in more than one jurisdiction, provided that the target jurisdiction is a party to the system. The Madrid system is administered by the International Bureau of the World Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) in Geneva, Switzerland. There are 90 countries part of the Madrid System. (v) The Universal Copyright Convention (UCC). It was adopted in Geneva, Switzerland, in 1952, and is one of the two principal international conventions protecting copyright; the other is the Berne Convention. The UCC was developed by UNESCO as an alternative to the Berne Convention for those states which disagreed with aspects of the Berne Convention. Since almost all countries are either members or aspiring members of the World Trade Organization (WTO), and are thus conforming to the Agreement on Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights Agreement (TRIPS), the UCC has lost significance.

Unit-I D 31 (vi) Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS). It is an international agreement administered by the World Trade Organization (WTO) that sets down minimum standards for many forms of intellectual property (IP) regulation as applied to nationals of other WTO Members. It was negotiated at the end of the Uruguay Round of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) in 1994 and became effective in 1995. TRIPS requires WTO members to provide copyright rights, covering content producers including performers, producers of sound recordings and broadcasting organizations; geographical indications, including appellations of origin; industrial designs; integrated circuit layout-designs; patents; new plant varieties; trademarks; trade dress; and undisclosed or confidential information. TRIPS also specifies enforcement procedures, remedies, and dispute resolution procedures.

Legislation The Patent System in India is governed by the Patents Act, 1970 (No. 39 of 1970) as amended by the Patents (Amendment) Act, 2005 and the Patents Rules, 2003, as amended by the Patents (Amendment) Rules 2006 effective from 05-05-2006.

Administration The Patent Office, under the Department of Industrial Policy & Promotion, Ministry of Commerce & Industry, performs the statutory duties in connection with the grant of patents for new inventions and registration of industrial designs. Patent Offices are located at Kolkata, Mumbai, Chennai and Delhi to deal with the applications for patents originating within their respective territorial jurisdictions. Patent Information System (PIS) located at Nagpur maintains a comprehensive collection of patent specifications and patent related literature, on a worldwide basis and provides technological information contained in patent or patent related literature through search services and patent document supply services. Intellectual Property Training Institute (IPTI) located at Nagpur provides training to the officials of IP offices and other users of the system who are working in the field of Intellectual Property Rights.

International Treaties India is a member-state of Word Intellectual Property Organisation (WIPO), an International Organisation, responsible for the promotion of the protection of intellectual property throughout the world. India is a member of the following International Organisations and Treaties in respect of Patents: (a) World Trade Organization (WTO) with effect from 01-01-1995. (b) Convention establishing World Intellectual Property Organisation, (WIPO). (c) Paris Convention for the protection of Industrial Property with effect from Dec. 7, 1998. (d) Patent Co-operation Treaty (PCT) with effect from Dec. 7, 1998. (e) Budapest Treaty with effect from 17th December, 2001.

32 D Library and Information Science Specific

PLAGIARISM “Plagiarism is the copying or paraphrasing of other people’s work or ideas without full acknowledgement” – University of Oxford, United Kingdom

Forms of Plagiarism Plagiarism has been observed to occur in various forms as given even in the presence of citation to original source. 1. Verbatim copy of another person’s work without use of quotation mark. Unacceptable version: Essential medicines are defined as those drugs that satisfy the health care needs of the majority of the population. Acceptable version: Essential medicines are defined by World Health Organization as “those drugs that satisfy the health care needs of the majority of the population”. 2. Copy of another person’s work with interchange of a few words or voice of the sentence or poor paraphrasing of sentences – also called as Mosaic Plagiarism. Original content from the source: A major step towards rational use of medicines was taken in 1977, when WHO established the 1st Model List of Essential Medicines to assist countries in formulating their own national lists. The present definition of rational use was agreed at an international conference in Kenya in 1985. In 1989, the International Network for the Rational Use of Drugs (INRUD) was formed to conduct multi-disciplinary intervention research projects to promote more rational use of medicines. Following this, the WHO/INRUD indicators to investigate drug use in primary health care facilities were developed and many intervention studies conducted. Unacceptable version. In 1977, an important step towards rational use of medicines was taken and the 1st Model List of Essential Medicines was established by WHO to assist countries in making their own national lists. The current definition of rational use was accepted in International conference in Kenya (1985). The international network for the rational use of drugs (INRUD) was formed in 1989 to conduct research projects for the promotion of rational use of medicines. WHO and INRUD indicators were developed and many studies were conducted. Acceptable version. Although the concept of rational use of medicines originated way back in 1977 with the introduction of the 1st WHO Model List of Essential Medicines, it took 8 years to frame a definition for rational use of medicines in 1985, at an International Conference in Kenya. The slow growth of this concept highlighted a definite need to promote research in rational use of medicines, resulting in the formation of the International Network for Rational use of Drugs (INRADs) in 1989. INRUD along with WHO promoted research in rational use of medicines and also developed the assessment tools for studying drug usage patterns which can be used by other researchers especially in a primary health care setting. This resulted in an increasing number of studies being conducted in the field of rational use of medicines. 3. Using the style of another authors work in your own manuscript – Style Plagiarism. While writing a review article or a review of literature, there can be a

Unit-I D 33

4.

5.

6.

7.

tendency to select one good article and construct the review following the same headings or flow of ideas. This results in a significant portion of the review resembling the structure of the single source from which the review has been constructed. Such a manuscript lacks originality in its style. Even though the writing need not be exactly similar to the source article, this can still be considered as plagiarism since the style of the manuscript resembles that of the original author. Use of metaphors or analogy that has been used by the original author in the same context – Metaphor plagiarism. Authors may use metaphors to creatively explain their concept and it is an expression of their creativity. When such a metaphor is used by another author in his/her own manuscript in a similar context, without giving due credit to the original author, it is considered as plagiarism of metaphor. Original content from source. A red blood cell is like a truck. They both transport essential supplies from one place to another through a system of passageways. The RBC can only carry so much oxygen. Need the truck (RBC), truck driver (hemoglobin) and load (oxygen) to work. Increasing oxygen without enough trucks doesn’t work. Copying the idea of an original author and claiming it as your own – Idea plagiarism. Although certain information are well known or considered as general knowledge, formulation of a unique and novel idea to use the information in a certain way can get published as a literature. If a person who has read that published literature, uses that idea to publish it as his/her own idea without making it clear to the readers the original source of the idea, it is considered as plagiarism. E.g: Original source: xxxxxx et al. Indian J. Clin Pharmacol. 2014; 2(4): 69–73: The importance of rational use of medicines in a developing country such as India has been stressed by many independent workers and organizations such as World Health Organization. The focus of attention has always been on the prescription pattern by the treating physician and health care policy of the hospitals. However, in addition to self-medication by general population by use of over the counter medicines, a major contributor for irrational use of antibiotics are the pharmacy stores which are manned by untrained staffs who prescribe antibiotics by a mere guess work based on sales pattern without any knowledge regarding the use of medicine. An assessment of burden of irrational drug use must also include instruments to measure the contribution of these unskilled staffs prescribing antibiotics in local pharmacy stores of that region. Plagiarism using patches of content from various sources. Content from many sources can be taken as ‘cut copy paste’ and patched up to form a single manuscript. Such instances occur during preparation of a review of literature for a thesis or a review article. Some author may even attempt to paraphrase the sentences though not adequately. This is not acceptable since there is no originality in the manuscript and the contents are just a collection of work done by others. An ideal way to write a review of literature or a review article is to read the source articles, understand the concepts, interpret and write your understanding in your own words. When it is necessary to use contents verbatim, proper quotation must be used and made clear to the readers regarding the original source of the content. Plagiarism of entire content of an entire and submitting the same as one’s own original work. This constitutes a very serious form of plagiarism where original contribution to a manuscript is minimal to zero. In this method, a person may take

34 D Library and Information Science Specific an article published from the internet or elsewhere and submit the same under his/her name. In certain instances, articles published in other languages such as Chinese/Japanese may be translated to English and published in an alternate journal. 8. Self-plagiarism and Auto-plagiarism – Use of previously published or submitted work for a new project. Self or auto-plagiarism is a common occurrence and often debatable. Although the definition of plagiarism deals with use of another person’s content, when an author uses his/her own content in a newer project it is also considered as unacceptable and the term self or auto-plagiarism is used. This is often an issue for those researchers who work in the same field for many years to decades. However, it is not acceptable for the following reasons: (a) Violation of copyright. Very often, the copyrights are held with the publishers for the manuscripts published in a journal or book. Even the author cannot reuse the content in a fresh project without obtaining copyrights from the publisher. (b) Questionable credentials. Publication of a manuscript using previously published contents increases the publication count and this in turn reflects upon questionable academic credits compared to others.

RIGHT TO INFORMATION ACT (RTI) Right to Information Act, 2005 Right to Information (RTI) is act of the Parliament of India to provide for setting out the practical regime of the right to information for citizens and replaces the erstwhile Freedom of information Act, 2002. Under the provisions of the Act, any citizen of India may request information from a “public authority” (a body of Government or “instrumentality of State”) which is required to reply expeditiously or within thirty days. The Act also requires every public authority to computerise their records for wide dissemination and to proactively certain categories of information so that the citizens need minimum recourse to request for information formally. This law was passed by Parliament on 15 June 2005 and came fully into force on 12 October 2005. Every day, over 4800 RTI applications are filed. In the first ten years of the commencement of the act over 17,500,000 applications had been filed. In India, the organisation called Mazdoor Kisan Shakti Sangathan was instrumental in the passage of RTI Act. Aruna Roy is the mastermind behind the RTI Act 2005. RTI is a legal right for every citizen of India. The authorities under RTI Act 2005 are called quasijudicial authorities. This act was enacted in order to consolidate the fundamental right in the Indian constitution ‘freedom of speech’. Information disclosure in India is restricted by the Official Secrets Act 1923 and various other special laws, which the new RTI Act relaxes. Right to Information codifies a fundamental right of the citizens of India. RTI has proven to be very useful, but is counteracted by the Whistleblowers Act.

Unit-I D 35

Governance and Process The Right to information in India is governed by two major bodies: n Central Information Commission (CIC). Chief Information commissioner who heads all the central departments and ministries with their own public Information officers (PIO)s. CICs are directly under the President of India. n State Information Commissions. State Public Information Officers or SPIOs head over all the state department and ministries. The SPIO office is directly under the corresponding State Governor. n State and Central Information Commissions are independent bodies and Central Information Commission has no jurisdiction over the State Information Commission.

Intellectual Property Rights Many civil society members have recently alleged the subversion of the right to information Act by the invocation of Intellectual Property rights argument by the government agencies from time to time. Most notable are: n The Right to Information denied by RBI on Demonetization citing Intellectual Property Laws. n The Right to Information Denied by Uttar Pradesh Irrigation Department after more than 8 months of a wait on under construction Gomti Riverfront Development Project. A group of researchers requested for environment Impact and Project Report on the project which is flagged for negative impacts, tax money wastage by environmental scientists and research reports.

Information Technology Act, 2000 The Information Technology Act, 2000 (also known as ITA-2000, or the IT Act) is an Act of the Indian Parliament (No 21 of 2000) notified on 17 October 2000. It is the primary law in India dealing with cybercrime and electronic commerce. It is based on the UNCITRAL Model Law on International Commercial Arbitration recommended by the General Assembly of United Nations by a resolution dated 30 January 1997.

Background The bill was passed in the budget session of 2000 and signed by President K.R. Narayanan on 9 May 2000. The bill was finalised by group of officials headed by then Minister of Information Technology Pramod Mahajan. The original Act contained 94 sections, divided into 13 chapters and 4 schedules. The laws apply to the whole of India. Persons of other nationalities can also be indicted under the law, if the crime involves a computer or network located in India. The Act provides a legal framework for electronic governance by giving recognition to electronic records and digital signatures. It also defines cyber crimes and prescribes penalties for them. The Act directed the formation of a Controller of Certifying Authorities to regulate the issuance of digital signatures. It also established a Cyber Appellate Tribunal to resolve disputes rising from this new law. The Act also amended various sections of

36 D Library and Information Science Specific the Indian Penal Code, 1860, the Indian, 1872, the Banker’s Book Evidence Act, 1891, and the Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 to make them compliant with new technologies.

Amendments A major amendment was made in 2008. It introduced Section 66A which penalized sending of “offensive messages”. It also introduced Section 69, which gave authorities the power of “interception or monitoring or decryption of any information through any computer resource”. It also introduced provisions addressing child porn, cyber terrorism and voyeurism. The amendment was passed on 22 December 2008 without any debate in Lok Sabha. The next day it was passed by the Rajya Sabha. It was signed into law by President Pratibha Patil, on 5 February 2009.

Offences List of offences and the corresponding penalties: Section Offence 65

66

66B

66C

66D 66E

66F

67

Tampering with computer source documents

Description

Penalty

If a person knowingly or intentionally conceals, Imprisonment up to three years, or/ destroys or alters or intentionally or knowingly and with fine up to Rs. 200,000 causes another to conceal, destroy or alter any computer source code used for a computer, computer programme, computer system or computer network, when the computer source code is required to be kept or maintained by law for the time being in force. Hacking with If a person with the intent to cause or knowing Imprisonment up to three years, or/ computer system that he is likely to cause wrongful loss or damage and with fine up to Rs. 500,000 to the public or any person destroys or deletes or alters any information residing in a computer resource or diminishes its value or utility or affects it injuriously by any means, commits hack. Receiving stolen A person receives or retains a computer resource Imprisonment up to three years, computer or or communication device which is known to be or/and with fine up to Rs. 100,000 communication device stolen or the person has reason to believe is stolen. Using password of A person fradulently uses the password, digital Imprisonment up to three years, or/ another person signature or other unique identification of and with fine up to Rs. 100,000 another person. Cheating using If a person cheats someone using a computer Imprisonment up to three years, or/ computer resource resource or communication. and with fine up to Rs. 100,000 Publishing private If a person captures, transmits or publishes Imprisonment up to three years, or/ images of others images of a person's private parts without and with fine up to Rs. 200,000 his/her consent or knowledge. Acts of cyberterrorism If a person denies access to an authorised Imprisonment up to life. personnel to a computer resource, accesses a protected system or introduces contaminant into a system, with the intention of threatening the unity, integrity, sovereignty or security of India, then he commits cyberterrorism. Publishing information If a person publishes or transmits or causes to be Imprisonment up to five years, or/ which is obscene in published in the electronic form, any material and with fine up to Rs. 1,000,000 electronic form. which is lascivious or appeals to the prurient interest or if its effect is such as to tend to deprave and corrupt persons who are likely,

Unit-I D 37 Section Offence

67A 67B

Publishing images containing sexual acts Publishing child porn or predating children online

67C

Failure to maintain records

68

Failure/refusal to comply with orders

69

Failure/refusal to decrypt data

70

Securing access or attempting to secure access to a protected system

71

Misrepresentation

Description

Penalty

having regard to all relevant circumstances, to read, see or hear the matter contained or embodied in it. If a person publishes or transmits images Imprisonment up to seven years, or/ containing a sexual explicit act or conduct. and with fine up to Rs. 1,000,000 If a person captures, publishes or transmits Imprisonment up to five years, or/ images of a child in a sexually explicit act and with fine up to Rs. 1,000,000 on or conduct. If a person induces a child into a first conviction. Imprisonment up to sexual act. A child is defined as anyone seven years, or/and with fine up to under 18. Rs. 1,000,000 on second conviction. Persons deemed as intermediatary Imprisonment up to three years, or/ (such as an ISP) must maintain required records and with fine. for stipulated time. Failure is an offence. The Controller may, by order, direct a Certifying Imprisonment up to three years, or/ Authority or any employee of such Authority to and with fine up to Rs. 200,000 take such measures or cease carrying on such activities as specified in the order if those are necessary to ensure compliance with the provisions of this Act, rules or any regulations made thereunder. Any person who fails to comply with any such order shall be guilty of an offence. If the Controller is satisfied that it is necessary or Imprisonment up to seven years expedient so to do in the interest of the sovereignty and possible fine. or integrity of India, the security of the State, friendly relations with foreign States or public order or for preventing incitement to the commission of any cognizable offence, for reasons to be recorded in writing, by order, direct any agency of the Government to intercept any information transmitted through any computer resource. The subscriber or any person in charge of the computer resource shall, when called upon by any agency which has been directed, must extend all facilities and technical assistance to decrypt the information. The subscriber or any person who fails to assist the agency referred is deemed to have committed a crime. The appropriate Government may, by notification Imprisonment up to ten years, or/ in the Official Gazette, declare that any computer, and with fine. computer system or computer network to be a protected system. The appropriate Government may, by order in writing, authorise the persons who are authorised to access protected systems. If a person who secures access or attempts to secure access to a protected system, then he is committing an offence. If anyone makes any misrepresentation to, or Imprisonment up to three years, or/ suppresses any material fact from, the Controller and with fine up to Rs. 100,000 or the Certifying Authority for obtaining any license or Digital Signature Certificate.

38 D Library and Information Science Specific

NATIONAL KNOWLEDGE COMMISSION The 21st Century has been acknowledged worldwide as the 'Knowledge Century'. Every nation now finds itself operating in an increasingly competitive and globalised international environment where the information infrastructure, research and innovation systems, education and lifelong learning, and regulatory frameworks are crucial variables. In the next few decades India will probably have the largest set of young people in the world. Given this demographic advantage over the countries of the West and even China, we are optimally positioned, in the words of our Prime Minister, to "leapfrog in the race for social and economic development" by establishing a knowledge-oriented paradigm of development. It is with this broad task in mind that the National Knowledge Commission (NKC) was established on 13th June 2005 and given a time-frame of three years from 2nd October 2005 to 2nd October 2008 to achieve its objectives. The overall task before the National Knowledge Commission is to take steps that will give India the ‘knowledge edge’ in the coming decades, i.e. to ensure that our country becomes a leader in the creation, application and dissemination of knowledge. Creation of new knowledge principally depends on strengthening the education system, promoting domestic research and innovation in laboratories as well as at the grassroots level, and tapping foreign sources of knowledge through more open trading regimes, foreign investment and technology licensing. Application of knowledge will primarily target the sectors of health, agriculture, government and industry. This involves diverse priorities like using traditional knowledge in agriculture, encouraging innovation in industry and agriculture, and building a strong e-governance framework for public services. Dissemination of knowledge focuses on ensuring universal elementary education, especially for girls and other traditionally disadvantaged groups; creating a culture of lifelong learning, especially for skilled workers; taking steps to boost literacy levels; and using Information and Communication Technology (ICT) to enhance standards in education and widely disseminate easily accessible knowledge that is useful to the public.

National Mission on Libraries The National Mission on Libraries is an initiative of the Ministry of Culture under the Government of India, works to modernise and digitally link nearly 9,000 libraries across India to provide readers access to books and information. Under the Scheme, the Mission will upgrade infrastructure of selected libraries and upgrade technology in 35 State Central Libraries and 35 District Libraries (to be identified by State Governments) and 6 Libraries under the Ministry of Culture.

Salient features of the National Mission on Libraries 1. This mission is designed for the students, researchers, scientists, professionals, children, artists and differently abled persons. 2. The Government of India appointed the Kolkata-based Raja Rammohun Roy Library Foundation (RRRLF) as nodal body to implement this mission. 3. Under this mission, the National Virtual Library will be created to facilitate a comprehensive database on digital resources, carry out a census on the resources available in the libraries and conduct a study on the reading habits in different regions of the country.

U N I T

II

SYLLABUS v v v v v v

v v v v

Historical Development of Libraries in India; Committees and Commissions on Libraries in India. Types of Libraries – Academic, Public, Special and National. Library Legislation and Library Acts in Indian States; The Press and Registration of Books Act; The Delivery of Books and Newspapers (Public Libraries) Act. Laws of Library Science. Library and Information Science Profession - Librarianship as a Profession, Professional Skills and Competences; Professional Ethics. Professional Associations - National – ILA, IASLIC, IATLIS; International – IFLA, ALA, CILIP, ASLIB, SLA; Role of UGC, RRRLF and UNESCO in Promotion and Development of Libraries. Library and Information Science Education in India. Library Public Relations and Extension Activities. Type of Users - User Studies, User Education. Information Literacy - Areas, Standards, Types and Models; Trends in Information Literacy.

(39)

40 D Library and Information Science Specific

HISTORICAL DEVELOPMENT OF LIBRARIES IN INDIA Library Movement in India The first libraries were only partly libraries, and stored most of the unpublished records, which are usually viewed as archives. The archeological as well as literary evidence (written by Chinese travellers in India) make it clear that writing and reading of manuscripts were regularly practiced in ancient period since the fourth century B.C. to the sixth century after Christ. This must have led to the growth and development of collection of manuscripts in important centers of learning. The important library of that period was that of Nalanda University of Bihar in the fourth century AD. The library was said to be in three grandest buildings, the area of which was called "Drama Ganja" meaning mast of religion. The other important academic library of that period was Vikramsila, Odantapuri, Somapuri, Jaggadal, Mithila, Vallabhi, Kanheri, etc. During that period there was a considerable activity in South India too, and there was a tradition about the libraries in that period known as sangam age. The Buddhist of India laid special emphasis on the writing of manuscripts and maintaining their collection. The Jains and Hindus also made immense contribution in the field of learning. They patronized education and literary activities, established innumerable institution called Upasrayas and Temple College. Acharya Nagarjuna, the founder of Mahayana Buddhism is known to have maintained a library on the top floor of the university building. It was also said that Taxila has a rich library.

(a) Medieval Period The medieval cycle may be roughly taken to have ended with the seventeenth century. It was during the ascending phase of this cycle that the giant intellectual and spiritual leaders such as Sankara, Ramanuja and Madheva flourished. (i) Personnel Libraries. From the earliest times the kings and nobles of India patronized education and encouraged writing of manuscripts and their preservation. Even the princes of small states maintained their manuscripts libraries. The tradition was continued till the nineteenth century. The emperors of Timuride dynasty were patrons of learning. With the exception of Aurangzeb all the early Mughal rulers extended their support to art, music and literature. The libraries also made remarkable progress during their times. Humayun converted a pleasure house in purana quila in Delhi into a library. Akbar maintained an "imperial library"; he was also instrumental in introducing reforms in the classification and storage of books. Jahangir is said to have maintained a personnel library which moved with him wherever he went. (ii) Public Libraries. In the seventeenth and the eighteenth century, the development of libraries received an impetus due to rise of European settlement in India. From 1690, Calcutta began to develop as one of the principal English settlement, when a large number of British began to settle there. Subsequently, the circulation and subscription libraries came into being.

Unit-II D 41 The East India Company established the Fort St. David library in 1707 at Cuddalore. In the year 1709, the society for promotion of Christian Knowledge sent out a circulating library to Calcutta, the first of its kind in India. Subsequently, a number of such libraries were established in India, the notable among them were Fort St. George library (1714), East India Company's library, Bombay (1715), John Andrews circulating library at Fort William, Calcutta (1770), The Calcutta Circulating library (1787), etc.

Period of Modern Cycle (till Nineteenth Century) (i) Public Libraries. The role of Mughal rulers and missionaries in establishment of some libraries also find their way to modern cycle. Some of the scattered manuscripts of the early periods have been collected and preserved in many modern manuscripts li braries. The se are found in many states in I ndia. Th ose of Baroda, Banaras, Bombay, Calcutta, Madras, Mysore, Poona, Tanjavur and Trivandrum are well known. The year 1808 is considered an important period during which the then government of Bombay initiated a proposal to register libraries which were to be given copies of books published from “funds for the encouragement of literature”. This has been the first attempt to register the libraries and assist them with literature by the government. In the early 19th century John Andrew’s circulating library at Fort William, Calcutta (established in 1770) was converted into a public library. A few public libraries started appearing sporadically here and there during the same period in this country. The notable among them are Asha Granthalaya, Waltair (1800), Calcutta Literary Society’s Library (1818), United Services Library, Poona (1818), Raghunandan Library, Puri (1821), Bombay General Library (1830), etc. In August 1835, the Calcutta public library was established. It was meant to serve the needs of all ranks and classes without distinction. In 1860, a small library was established by Jean Mitchel in Madras as a part of the Museum. It was opened to the public in 1896. It was named Connemera Public Library, this library can be claimed to be the first true public library, only a nominal refundable deposit was required. In 1948, it becomes State Central library. In 1867, the Government of India enacted the Press and Registration of Books Act (XXV) under which the publisher of a book was supposed to deliver free, to the provincial government concerned, one copy of the book and one or two more copies, if the provincial government so desired, to be transmitted to the central government. In 1876, Khuda Baksh Oriental public library (Patna) was established. Maulvi Muhammod Baksh Khan, on his death left a collection of 1500 manuscripts. It formed the nucleus of the library. In 1891, the library was opened to the public. The imperial library was also established at Calcutta in 1891. Lord Curzon, the viceroy of India promulgated the imperial library act 1902, which is based on Registration of books act of 1867, amalgamating Calcutta public library with imperial library. Soon after independence the Government of India passed the National Library Act in 1948 following which the imperial library was renamed as the National library of India. By the end of nineteenth century, all the provincial capitals as well as many of the district towns, especially in the three presidencies (Bombay, Calcutta and Madras)

42 D Library and Information Science Specific had so called public libraries. Even princely states such as Indore and TravancoreCochin had public libraries in their capital. However, the masses in general did not take full advantage of these institutions. (ii) Academic Libraries. The first college to be started in this country is the Fort William College in 1800. Sir John Colville in 1857, introduced the bill to establish universities in India. In the same year Lord Delhousie, then the Governor General of India, gives immediate consent to this bill. As a result, the first three modern universities were started at Calcutta, Bombay and Madras in 1857 based on the patterns of London University. n Calcutta University Library. Calcutta University was the first to be established on January 24, 1857. On February 24, 1869 Mr. Joy Kissen Mookherjee of Uttar para donated Rs. 5,000.00 to the University for purchasing books for the library. The senate in the year 1872 succeeded in constructing a beautiful building at a cost of Rs. 4, 34,697.00. This is the first and oldest university library that was established in British India. In 1874, the library also started a collection of periodicals. In 1876-77, Calcutta University library had a good collection of books with printed catalogue service to the user. In 1934, a new library building was set up in the Calcutta University. In 1937, the Calcutta University Library appointed the professionally qualified librarian, Dr. Nihar Ranjan Roy. He, for the first time in India introduced the DDC and AACR rule for providing effective library services to the user. n Madras University Library. The Madras University Library was opened in 1907. The government of India gave a special grant of Rs. 1,00,000.00 to the library to develop its book collection. In 1924, Dr. S. R. Ranganathan joined the Madras University Library as librarian. He was the first professionally qualified librarian in Indian history. Due to his active involvement he was able to receive Rs. 6,000.00 and Rs. 10,00,000.00 in the year 1926. This was the first grant to be received from the government in the history of the university libraries in India. As a result of this grant, the University Library that was in-house at the Connemara Public Library since 1908, was shifted to the new location in 1936. Again five well-trained reference librarians were appointed to provide special reference service to the user. This was done for the first time in the Indian history. n Bombay University Library. The Bombay University library was established very lately due to the lack of donation. It was the university authorities of Bombay that offered a donation of Rs. 20,000.00 for construction of library building. In 1931, a very special grant of Rs. 10,000 was given by Kikabhai and Meneklen the sons of late Premchand Roy Chand. In 1939, the Central government provides a special grant of Rs. 50,000.00 to the University of Bombay library to strengthen its collection. n Punjab University Library. Punjab University was established in 1882 and in the year 1908 Punjab University Library was opened. n Banaras Hindu University Library. Banaras Hindu University was established in 1916. In 1926-27 the construction of the library was made by the handsome donation of Rs. 2,00,000.00 by the late Sir Siyaji Rao, the Maharaja of Borada. (iii) Research Libraries. The Asiatic society of Bengal that was established at Calcutta in 1784 started building up a good research library since its inception. The Asiatic

Unit-II D 43 Society of Bombay, founded in 1804, also developed a good library. The first technical library to be founded in this country is the Victoria Technical library at Nagpur in 1806. The Madras Literary Society had founded its library in 1812.

Twentieth Century (i) Role of Individual. The development of public libraries as a movement may be said to have started by Maharaja Sayajirao Gaekwad III, the ruler of Baroda state in 1906. During his visit to USA he was impressed by the public libraries system in that country. In order to organize libraries along modern lines, the Maharaja appointed an American librarian by name William Allenson Borden as curator of libraries of his state. During his tenure of office that is in between 1910-13, Borden could organize a very good network of free library services in the state. However, this example did not set a pace in the later development due to lack of interest on the part of the state government. But the contribution made by Maharaja Sayajirao III would be written in golden letters in the history of public library movement in India. The library movement in Baroda originated as the peoples movement under the leadership of Motibhai Amin (a public leader) in the form of Mitra Mandal (Society of Friends) as early as 1906 which received state patronage in 1960. Newton Mohan Dutta, curator of libraries at Baroda also did good work. There has been a number of pioneers who made contribution to the library movement in Andhra Pradesh. Out of them Sir Iyyanki Venkata Ramanayya holds a place of pride. From Bengal we have the name of Monindra Dev Rai Mahashaya. Master Motilal (1876-1949), by his own effort and meagre resource established Shri Sanmati Pustakalaya (a public library) in Jaipur in 1920. From Punjab we had Sant Ram Bhatia, who played an important role in promoting the cause of public libraries in Punjab. In Assam, the library movement at its true spirit was led by Late Kumudeshar Barthakur (1893 - 8th  November 1966), a retired Secondary School teacher under the brand name of Assam Library Association. The contribution of S.R. Ranganathan is unique and remarkable. He is regarded as the father of Indian library movement. The idea of an integrated library system was first introduced by him at the first “All Asia Educational Conference” held at Benerai in 1930. There he presented a model library act that form the basis of the Tamil Nadu, Andhra Pradesh and Karnataka library legislation and as a whole the subsequent library legislation in India. (ii) Role of Library Association and Organization. Library association also played a vital role in the progress and development of library movement in India. The Andhra Desa Library Association, founded in 1914, is the first of its kind in India. It started the first full fledged professional periodical in 1925 under the title “Indian Library Journal”. All Indian Library Association was also set up in 1920, but it could not do anything for libraries and their development. By Dr. S.R. Ranganathan’s effort Indian Library Association was set up in 1933 in its present form with its head quarter in Calcutta (Kolkata). The association published a quarterly periodical named ABGILA. Raja Rammohun Roy Library Foundation (RRRLF) was set up in 1972, on the occasion of the bicentenary of Raja Rammohun Roy who raised the banner of revolt against obscurantism in the society and devoted his life to fight against injustice. RRRLF is

44 D Library and Information Science Specific an autonomous organization of Dept of Culture, Govt of India and it provides different types of grant to different public libraries. Bengal Library Association (1925), Madras Library Association (1928), Punjab Library Association (1929), Assam Library Association (Sadau Assam Puthibharal Sanga) (1938), etc. played vital roles for the growth and development of public libraries in the respective states of origin. (iii) Role of Union and State Government n First Five Year Plan (1951-56). The government of India in its first five year plan of educational development includes the scheme of “Improvement of Library Service”. This scheme envisaged a network of libraries spread all over the country. The proposal of setting up a National central library at New Delhi was also made. During the first five year plan nine state governments i.e. Assam, Madhya Pradesh, Punjab, etc. decided to set up state central libraries. n Second Five Year Plan (1956-1961). Under the second five year plan the government of India allocated about Rs. 140 lakhs for setting up a country wide network of libraries in 320 districts. Under this plan, the “Institute of Library Science” at University of Delhi was also established. The refresher course on “The public library and national development” on March 2, 1959 also started. n Third Five Year Plan. During the third plan period besides the Institute of Library science, University of Delhi other universities also upgraded the facilities for training library personnel and enhanced the facilities for research in library science. n Fourth Five Year Plan. The government of India announced on July 16, 1964, appointment of a 16 member education commission to make a compressive review of the entire field of education and advice the government on evolving a national pattern at all stages of education. The commission has formed various sub committees to prepare report on various aspect of education including the libraries, which plays a great role towards the betterment of libraries in India. During the fourth five year plan, the government of India set up the Raja Rammohan Roy Library Foundation in 1972 to make the bicentenary of the birth of Raja Rammohan Roy, the father of modern India. (iv) Role of UGC. The UGC gave a new life to the university and college libraries. It gave librarian a status, prestige and a better life. The major commission and committees formed by UGC for the growth and development of college and university libraries are n Library Committee (1957). The UGC programme (Commission) appointed a committee under the chairmanship of Dr. S.R. Ranganathan to advise on a wide range of subjects including the standards and principles for the designing of library building, fitting and furniture, administration of university libraries, training of librarianship etc. n Review Committee (1961). In order to consider the question of improving and coordinating the standards of teaching, and conducting research in the department of library science in Indian Universities under the chairmanship of Dr. S.R. Ranganathan a review committee was formed in July 1961. The first meeting of the committee was held on 15th July 1961, in which a questionnaire was finalized on the basis of data supplied by the Indian Universities. In response

Unit-II D 45 to this questionnaire a note was prepared by the UGC, which form the back bone of many developments in the subject of library science. Other mentionable Committees and Commissions are: – Education Commission (1964): Chairman D. S. Kothari. – Pal Committee (1970): Chairman A. B. Lal. – Mehrotra Committee (1983): Chairman R. C. Mehrotra. – Committee on National Network System for Universities (1988): Chairman Yash Pal. – Curriculum Development Committee on LISc (1990). n Work Flow Seminar. UGC organized a seminar on “work flow” in libraries in New Delhi from March 4-7, 1959, Dr. C. D. Deshmukh, the then chairman of UGC, extended assistance to libraries for constructing building and furniture as well as for the engaging the staff on a scale which is, relatively speaking, larger than found in many other countries. The recommendations of the seminar were circulated to the universities and colleges all over the country. These comments were considered by the commission and were accepted. n Revision of Pay Scale. Another great improvement in the history of universities and college libraries is the revision of salary scales of professionally qualified librarian under the third five year plan. (v) Role of UNESCO. The great contribution of UNESCO towards the library profession in India is that it gave it an international status. UNESCO for the first time started the first pilot project by establishing the Delhi Public Library in October 1951. The main aim of this project was to provide information on the problem of public library services for the parts of India in particular and for Asia in general. The Indian National Scientific Documentation Centre (INSDOC) was set up in 1952 by the government of India with technical assistance from UNESCO. In 1964, UNESCO assisted INSDOC again in setting up its regional centre in Bangalore. The second eminent step that the UNESCO took in this direction was the holding of a seminar on the development of public libraries in Asia in Delhi from October 626, 1955. It was the first international meeting on this subject to be organized in an Asian country. On the whole, the seminar was a great success for the library profession in India. Another UNESCO seminar which had far reaching effect on library profession in India was the “Regional seminar on library development in South Asia”. It was held in the University of Delhi library from 3-14 October 1960. The most significant achievement of this seminar was the “grading of staff”, “salary scales” and “status of librarian”. Besides these, the UNESCO honored the Indian librarians by inviting them to advice on various library projects meant for the member country. The prominent among those are Dr. S.R. Ranganathan, B.S. Kesavan, S.S. Saith and a few others. Indian National Commission is the official agency of UNESCO, the National Information System for Science and Technology (NISSAT) in Department of Scientific and Industrial Research (DSIR) is the focal point for UNISIST (PGI) and is also the coordinating centre for ASTINFO programme. NASSDOC of ICSSR is the focal point for UNESCO supporting APINESS programme.

46 D Library and Information Science Specific

TYPES OF LIBRARIES National Library National libraries are those libraries which are responsible for acquiring and conserving copies of all significant publications published in the country and are functioning as a ‘deposit’ library, either by law or under other arrangements. A national library is a library designated by the appropriate national body and funded by the national government. Its functions may include the comprehensive collection of the publication output of the nation (frequently as a copyright depository library), the compilation and maintenance of a national bibliography, the comprehensive collection and organization of publications on an international scale for the scholarly community, the production of bibliographic tools, the coordination of a library network, the provision of library services to the government or some of its agencies, and other responsibilities delineated by the national government.

Functions of a National Library (a) Collection Development National library have the comprehensive collection of not only national outputs but also of documents published outside the country that are about the nation. It has also the responsibility of preserving these documents for posterity. Hence National library serves as a central and comprehensive collection of national output, acquired through legal deposits, gifts or exchange. It also collects the specialised materials such as books for the blind, dramatic composition, engravings, medals, music compositions, cinematic films, photographs, sound recordings, etc.

(b) National Bibliographies National library prepares and produces national bibliographies of books, periodicals and other non-print materials, in printed, microforms and computer readable forms. By products of these may be directories of publishers, authors of repute with their addresses and current statistics relating to production of books and other documents. National Library compiles the retrospective or current bibliographies on various subjects also in anticipation and on request. Retrospective bibliographies include past publications over a period of time, while current bibliographies confine only to current publications. For example, the compilation and publication of Bibliography on Indology of the National Library of India is a continuing project, in which four volumes have been published viz. Indian anthropology; Indian Botany (2 volumes); Bengali language and literature. Current bibliographies are usually compiled on request by national libraries for scholars and institutions on current topics, most of which may be short and selective.

(c) Indexing and Abstracting National library disseminates the information through the index to currently published journals literature appearing in research periodicals. If no other institution or agency compiles and publishes indexes to current research journals, national libraries may

Unit-II D 47 undertake this responsibility. National libraries also prepare and produce the abstracts on current literature on the subjects of national interest. For example, the Indian Science Abstracts in being brought out by the INSDOC.

(d) Readers’ Services The National libraries provide the following types of services to the readers: (1) They provide facilities for reading, consulting, etc. on the premises, including research rooms for serious readers such as researchers, scholars and writers. (2) They offer reference, information and bibliographic services to their readers. (3) They also provide inter-library lending and serve as a national inter library loan centre.

National Library of India Our present National Library was started by the Calcutta Public Library, founded by the public and scholars of Calcutta in 1835 by collecting their 68000 books in Metcalfe House. In 1902, the then Viceroy Lord Curzen changed its name by an act as Imperial Library. He also declared open the library for public in 1903. In 1948, with the dawn of freedom, the founding fathers of new nation, transformed library as National Library of the country. Shri B.S. Kesawan was appointed its first librarian. Since then the library has been working as the National Library of the country. The details about National Library of India are as follows:

(a) Organisation/Management National Library functions under the Ministry of Human Resources Development of India. It is organised on the functional basis. The technical and professional functions operate under two main decisions viz., Professional and Conservation. The library is accommodated in four buildings. For the management of this library, a committee functions, which is called Council for National Library. The following are the members of the same. (1) Chairman : Education Advisor of Government of India (2) Secretary : Librarian of the National Library (3) 2 Members : Central government (4) 2 Members : West Bengal government, where it is situated. (5) 1 Member : Calcutta University (6) 1 Member : Each from every central universities of the country (7) 4 Members : From other States

(b) Departments and Staff The technical and professional functions of the library are operated under two main divisions professional and conservational. There are 42 professional divisions for looking after acquisition, processing, maintenance of reading material and related services. The divisions of reprography, preservation and laboratory work under the second division. The highest rank in the library is the Director, Two professional librarians assist the director. There are other deputy and assistant librarians to do technical functions of the library. Two administrative officers assist the director in administrative matters. The

48 D Library and Information Science Specific laboratory division is headed by a chemical expert. All other divisions are looked after by assistant librarians. In this way nearly one thousand workers are providing their services in National Library of the country.

(c) Material Collection The National Library has a collection of nearly 19 lakhs of books and other materials. The collections is built up through (1) books received by the Delivery of Books Act, (2) Purchase, (3) gifts, (4) Exchange (5) depository privileges. The majority of books are in English and in other Indian languages and the rest are in few foreign languages. It has some notable gifts collections of Sir Ashutosh Mukherji (76000), Ramdas Sen, Barid Baran, Jadunath Sakar, Dr. S. N. Sen, Vaiyapuri Pillai and the archival papers of Sir Tej Bahadur Sapru. It is also being a repository for UN documents and its agencies.

(d) Functions and Services (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)

It collects all the literature published in India. It also collects a copy of the rare books available in other libraries. It functions as a depository library for the nation. It provides reading services to all the people of the country. It represents as a representative library of the country. It also provides books on inter library loan. It prepares union catalogue also and prepares and union catalogue of all IIT’s. It compiles national bibliographies on various subjects at national levels. It also compiles the National Bibliography of the country. It establishes a national network of the libraries in the country. In introduces the other libraries by the developed new and recent methods and techniques of libraries. (12) It also provides services to specific types of the readers such as labourers, skilled persons, fishermen, etc. (13) It functions on the consideration of library classification scheme also. (14) It also compiles international bibliographies.

Library of Congress, A National Library of America The Library of Congress, which is at present the National Library of USA, was originally established to serve the United States Congress. It was established primarily in 1800 with a small collection of reading material. In the modern time this library ranks as one of the largest national libraries of the world and occupies an eminent place in the world of learning.

Organisation and Management The librarian is the chief executive of the library, who is appointed directly by the President of USA. The librarian of the same has vested with enormous powers and responsibilities. In addition to the librarian, there are other top ranking professional library experts, scholars and specialists to assist him. Library of Congress is organised into 8 major departments. They are: (1) Office of the Librarian, (2) Management Services, (3) Congressional Research Service (4) Copyright Office, (5) Law Library (6) Processing Services (7) Research Services and (8) National Programmes.

Unit-II D 49

Functions and Services Some of the functions and services of this library are briefly described as under: (a) Collection Development. This library is the largest centre for information storage in the world, having 19 million volumes, books representing only one fourth of its collection, the other 59 millions of stored data are on sound records, motion pictures reels, computer taps or in the form of manuscripts, maps, prints and photographs. Less than one-fourth of its collection is in English. The collection development of this library is done through (1) Copyright depository system (2) Exchange, (3) Gifts, and (4) Purchase. More than 40 million dollars worth of foreign materials are purchased every year, which includes books, periodicals, newspapers and other special materials. The rare books division of this library alone has a collection over 6 million books, some of them are most precious. (b) Processing Standards. Library of Congress has developed its own techniques and methods for processing its huge mass of materials, many of which have become national and international standards. (c) Departmental Service. The Law library of this national library serves the legal community. The Research Service serve the scholars and academicians. The Copyright division serves the authors, writers, musicians, artists, etc. who rely on the copyright to protect their intellectual products. The National Programmes division of this library serves many national programmes. (d) National Library Activities. Several activities at national level are organised by this library, such a National Union Catalogue, the CIP Project and Library Automation Programme, more particularly the computerization of LC catalogue which is known as MARC project. The National Union Catalogue compiled, maintained and printed by LC is an index to world publications and is considered to be a most valuable service. LC has a successful cooperative cataloguing projects. The printed catalogue cards distribution service has been providing libraries a facility to acquire them to build their own local cataloguing data on the verso of the title page of a book. (e) Computerized Services. LC’s computer activities for library automation and machine readable bibliographical records have been a pace setter. LC offers a variety of computer services, the most notable of them being the services available to the members of the congress through a number of database and MARC of the library. Hence we see that Library of Congress is indeed a highly complex institution but a very active centre. It is no wonder that scholars all over the world regard the library as a heaven for the questing mind and the realm of intellect.

Public Library Public libraries are social institutions offering services based upon books and information for various public groups on social, political, economic, cultural and other matters. Among the different types of libraries evolved by society in modern times, public libraries are the most popular because of the functions they perform. They play a very significant role in the welfare of the society. The most widely accepted definition of a public library was formulated by UNESCO in 1949 which was later revised in 1972.

50 D Library and Information Science Specific According to UNESCO manifesto, the definition of a public library is as follows: (a) Public library is financed for the most part out of public funds. (b) It charges no fees from users and yet is open for full use by the public. (c) It is intended as an auxiliary educational institution providing a means of self education which is end less. (d) It houses educative and informative materials giving reliable information freely and without partiality.

Functions of a Public Library A public library generally performs the following functions: (1) Access to Tools of Information and Education. It is the primary function of a public library to select and to organise need-based literature and other means of information and education suitable to the requirements of the local community in which the library is located. (2) As an Instrument of Informal Self Education. Public library is one of the agencies on which an adult heavily relies. It proves to be suitable learning material to develop his skill and competence in areas of his interests. Self education may be obtained through a public library such as methods of agricultural operations, scientific methods of poultry, bee keeping, etc. (3) Promotion of Cultural and Social Activities. A public library lends active support to many sociocultural groups, such as children’s club, Youth Forum, Dramatic Club, Teachers Association, Lawyers or Doctors Associations, Film Society, etc. to conduct their activities through its premises or through its rich informative, educative and cultural materials. (4) Preservation of Local Cultural Materials. Another important function fulfilled by a modern public library is to identify and collect cultural materials of importance available in its area. These may be works of art or sculpture, paintings, documents, musical instruments, etc. In short, a public library goes in search of all such materials which link the people of the locality with its cultural past. (5) Development of Understanding. A public library by providing all shades of opinion on a particular topic or issue engaging the attention of a person at a particular time interval gives him an opportunity to think over the issue dispassionately and objectively. In short, by being an impartial information agency, it stimulates thinking and thinking dispels ignorance and hatred and replaces it buy understanding love and knowledge. (6) Strengthening of Democratic Spirit. By bringing together in its sociocultural activities seemingly different segments of the society on a single platform, the library slowly develops a sense of amity, a sense of respect for other groups, an appreciation of the differences in languages, religion, customs and manners. Thus sectarian life styles are substituted by democratic life patterns. In this sense, a public library justifies its existence as a democratic institution.

Academic Library—University Library University libraries provide additional facilities for higher learning, research and dissemination of knowledge publications. The university library is governed by the statutory laws of the concerned university. Today university libraries have a very large role to play

Unit-II D 51 to meet a variety of demands of information and knowledge to cope up with the multidimensional activities of university.

Objectives and Functions of a University Library University library helps the university in achieving the objectives of the university. The major functions that are derived form these objectives are as follows: (a) Development of Collection The collection of a university library is distinctly different from college libraries. The collection have to cater to the needs of not only teaching and learning, but also research, publication, conservation of ideas and knowledge, etc. A major responsibility of the university library is to build a collection of documents and other non-print material carefully geared to the academic needs of students, teachers, researchers and other involved in academic pursuits. The collection has to be made on the basis of experts' advice. This is normally achieved by constituting book selection committees, in which faculty members are usually represented. As the library meets the requirements of research of a large number of specialised projects, it is necessary to acquire relevant documents such as reports, conference proceedings, theses, dissertations, patents and standards and similar others. Besides print materials, non-print materials such as microforms, audiovisual kits, videoaudio cassettes also should be acquired. (b) Technical Processing and Organisations The large stock of material acquired by the library should be housed properly. As such classification system should be used which is acceptable to the user community. The physical storage and filing of all documents must be conducive to use. The catalogue of the library is a consulted tool. Therefore the standard practices of cataloguing should be adopted. UGC is also providing special grant for each university library in the country. Therefore, no effort should be spared, if facilities and opportunities are existed in the universities for computerization of the libraries. (c) Services The university libraries offer a number of library, documentation and information services, which are as follows: (1) Library services. A university library consists of the library services, such as lending, reference, reading room facilities assistance in the use of library and display of current additions etc. (2) CAS. CAS in university libraries is provided through current contents of journals, alerting services to important literature in selected fields, SDI and newspaper clipping service. (3) Bibliographic Services. Bibliographic services of a university library include literature search, compilation of bibliographies on specific topics and index to current literature. (4) Condensation Services. These services includes preparation of abstracts on specific topics, digest services, preparation of reviews progress/advances on specific subjects and state-of-art reports. (5) Other Services. In other services university libraries offer document supply service, reprographic service, translation service and computer-based information retrieval.

52 D Library and Information Science Specific (6) Specialised Services. University libraries also provide some specialised services, such as users education, exhibition and special displays, lectures and demonstrations, and user oriented seminars, workshops, etc.

Agencies which Contributed in the Development of Academic Libraries in India Education and libraries are the two joint sisters so one cannot be separated from the other. And libraries are the main base of academic system and today they are treated as the heart of educational organisations. The progress and development of a country is mostly depend only on the libraries specially on academic libraries. In our country, there is no better arrangement and system of libraries in comparison with some other countries like USSR, USA, UK, France and Germany, etc. Therefore efforts have been made since very beginning to constitute various committees and commissions at time to time for the betterment of academic libraries in India. These committees and commissions are called the agencies. Here we give below their contributions. (a) Hunter Commission (1882). Hunter Commission was set up in India in 1882 in British period for the improvement of libraries. This commission reported that the students have only the interest in reading the books of their study. They did not have interests in other books of general knowledge. Therefore, commission suggested for establishing the libraries in schools and colleges. (b) Indian University Commission (1902). Indian University Commission was set up in 1902 with the efforts of the then Viceroy Lord Curzon in relation with the matters of academic libraries of India. This commission also forced to organise well the academic libraries in the country for the progress and development. (c) Saddler Commission (1917). With the aim of bringing improvement in the educational system of India, Saddler Commission was set up in 1917. This commission recognised the library as one of the necessary organ of the university and forced to give a rank of its librarian also. It recommended also that a librarian is not less than a professor in any case in the university and he should be treated equivalent to the professor in his rank, scale, post, services, etc. (d) Radhakrishanan Committee (1948). After independence in free India in 1948, a committee under the chairmanship of Dr. S. Radhakrishanan, the great educationist, was set up which was also called University Education Commission. The committee reported so many suggestions regarding academic libraries for their betterment. (e) Secondary Education Commission (1953). This commission was set up for doing efforts for the extension and developments of secondary education in 1953 in India. The commission accepted the importance of the libraries in secondary schools. (f) University Grants Commission (1953). In fact, the development in the field of education in India have only been with the establishment in 1953 of UGC. UGC developed a system in the libraries for the progress of education, in which it announced to give regular and extra grant for the books, periodicals, furniture, buildings, tools and machines and staff of the libraries of colleges and universities. As a result of it, the place of libraries became important in college and universities of the country. (g) Ranganathan Committee (1957). UGC of India set up Ranganathan Committee in 1957. Dr. Ranganathan, the chairman of the committee determined the

Unit-II D 53 standards for every worker of the libraries. The committee reported so many necessary and important suggestions regarding academic libraries, as a result of which such development and improvement at various levels of academic libraries became possible in India. (h) Advisory Committee (1958). The Indian government set up in 1957 an advisory committee in the chairmanship of Dr. K. P. Sinha to give suggestions and advices regarding academic libraries. It is also called as Sinha Committee which studied all the suggestions given by all other earlier committees or commissions. In the end it advised in its report (1958) to give financial grant for the development of libraries by the government and to buy books for all the libraries. (i) Kothari Commission (1964). The Indian government set up a commission in 1964 in the chairmanship of Dr. D. S. Kothari. This Commission gave its report which was quite different from the previous commission’s reports. This commission recommended that the provisions should be made in university libraries to spend Rs. 25 per student and Rs. 500 per teacher. (j) New Educational Policy (1986). The Indian government accepted new education policy in 1986. It is regretted that no provisions had been made for the development of libraries in this policy. In this situation, this is only the responsibility of UGC in India to think and support to the libraries of the country.

Special Library A library is supposed to be the most powerful and effective media for bulk communication of ideas for the betterment of the society. And society has different categories of users. The special libraries serve as information centre for special type of the users. Hence, in special libraries, the information requirements of users are of specialized nature. Special libraries exist in a wide variety of organisation, most of them being units of larger organisation. Special libraries are that which are specialized on a particular subject or group of subjects. They are formed in research and development establishments, government departments, directorates, bureaus, industrial and business undertakings, learned societies and professional association, trade and business associations, hospital and health services, social and welfare organisations, museums, etc. Hence special libraries are established to serve a particular group of users or an activity or specialists working on a subject or a group of subjects or a particular type of documents.

Examples of Special Libraries (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

Libraries for blind, children or hospital patients. A library of films, video cassettes or manuscripts. Libraries of any IITs of India. Library of Indian Institute of Forest Management, Bhopal. Library of Indian Institute of Petroleum, Dehradun.

Characteristics of Special Libraries The basic characteristics of any special library is based on account of its various aspects of special librarianship. The characteristics are as follows: (a) It exists as a service unit within an organisation.

54 D Library and Information Science Specific (b) (c) (d) (e)

It is concerned with the single definite subject field. It is limited but specialized collection of documents. It mainly satisfies the information needs of its users only. The users of special libraries are the specialists in their own field and serve their parent organisations. (f) The librarian of the special libraries transforms himself as and active member of research group and becomes the partner of the same.

LEGISLATION AND LIBRARY ACTS IN INDIAN STATES Model Library Act, 1930 In the 1920’s an ideal library system as conceived by Dr. S.R. Ranganathan hardly existed. Even though United Kingdom had the most efficient and earliest legislation for libraries in the modern world, the library network extending from village library through intermediary levels of district, state and zonal levels to State and National Central Libraries, coordinated by a national agency is not conceived by the U.K. legislation. In 1927 Kenyan Committee had pointed out that library authorities grew rapidly in an uncoordinated fashion and standards of library service varied greatly between various library authorities and areas. In 1925 while sailing back home after a tour to England, Ranganathan was thinking about a library legislation for India without the defects seen in U.K. legislation. He worked out on it and by 1930 drafted a Model Library Act. At this time Prof. P. Seshadri of Banaras Hindu University asked him to be the Secretary of the Library Service Session of the First All-Asia Educational Conference which was to be held in Banaras (Varanasi) in 1930. This provided him an opportunity to place the draft Model Act for discussion. The Draft Act presented by Ranganathan and the originality and precision of his plan impressed the participants. A complete session of the conference was devoted to a detailed discussion of the several clauses in the Act and the amendments suggested were recorded.

Model Bills and Plans for States For library legislation in the constituent states Ranganathan drafted the following six Model Library Bills and plans; each an improvement over earlier one. Year of Bill

Place Discussion/Publication

1930

In the First All-Asia Educational Conference at Banaras. It was also published in his book Five laws of library science. Fifth All India Library Conference, Bombay, also published as book by ILA. Published in his book: Library Development Plan: Thirty Year Programme for India with Draft Library Bills for Union and the States. A revised Model Bill in the new edition of Five laws of library science. Published in the Quarterly Library Science with a Slant to Documentation. Model Public Libraries Act revised after the evaluation of the working of existing Acts was published in the book Public Library System edited by him.

1942 1950 1957 1964 1972

Unit-II D 55 Year

State

Year

State

1946 1947 1947 1953 1957 1958 1961

Madras Travancore Bombay Hyderabad Andhra Pradesh Uttar Pradesh Mysore (Karnataka)

1946 1947 1949 1957 1958 1959 1964

Central Provinces Cochin United Provinces Madhya Pradesh West Bengal Kerala Assa m

Draft Union Library Bill In 1948, the Government of India appointed a committee to examine the provision for the National Central Library. In order to make the work of the committee proceed along constructive lines, S.R. Ranganathan who was one of its members, drafted a Union Library Bill and presented it at the second meeting of the Committee held on 14 May, 1948; which was generally approved by the Committee. But no further action was taken by the Government. Sir Maurice Gwyer, the then vice-chancellor of the University of Delhi, a person who was highly interested in Library Development asked Ranganathan not to feel dejected at the indifference of the Government and published his plan including the Draft Union Bill from the University of Delhi so that any future Ministry if interested could make use of that Bill and Plan. Ranganathan published a revised Union Bill in his second edition of Five laws of library science in 1957. The influence of these works by Ranganathan in Indian Library movement was tremendous. In most of the states the Library Associations, Legislators or other interested social activists urged the Government to enact library legislation on the Model suggested by Ranganathan. Everywhere movement for legislation became strong.

Library Legislation in States The writings of Ranganathan, his Model Acts, Bills and Library Development Plans created in the States movements for library legislation and gave them strength and clear-cut principles. Whenever it became possible, Ranganathan personally went to the States and gave expert advice and support to these activities.

Movement for Library Legislation in Kerala Ranganathan was responsible for blowing into Kerala also, the modern concept of public library as a system, which shattered the traditional independent self sufficient public library idea. When Ranganathan was the President of Indian Library Association, he made extensive library tour in Kerala in 1944 and 1946. In the second tour he also participated in the library conference organised by Kerala Granthasala Sangham and gave an inspiring talk on the need for library legislation in the state. In the same year Sir C.P. Ramaswamy Aiyar, the then Dewan of Travancore requested Ranganathan to draft a library bill for Travancore. Accordingly he drafted a bill. He had also appended to the bill a thirty year library development plan for Travancore.

Library Bill for Travancore, 1947 The library bill and development plan for Travancore was sent to the Dewan. During the library tour in 1947 Ranganathan tried to discuss it with the Dewan. As the Dewan had to

56 D Library and Information Science Specific leave for Delhi he ordered the Director of Education to meet Ranganathan and to discuss the library bill and development plan with him. Accordingly, the Director of Education and the Director of Co-operative Societies met Ranganathan. They complained that thirty years for the library development suggested by him was too long. They also objected to many of the other clauses and provisions in the bill and plan. They lacked the interest and ideas the Dewan had on this matter. During his visits to Kerala, Ranganathan met many noted activists of social, cultural and library fields. He discussed with them the need for library legislation and influenced them to urge the government to enact a library legislation. He also gave a copy of his draft bill to Granthasala Sangham. The bill was placed for discussion in the annual conference of the Sangham. Most of the participants who wanted the state to have an efficient system for library and information service to the people were fascinated by Ranganathan’s plan. But the conference, instead of recommending the bill objected to its acceptance by Government.

Library Bill for Cochin, 1947 On the same tour, Ranganathan visited Cochin also and met its Education Minister Panampally Govinda Menon; as the Minister had invited him to discuss about library development in Cochin. When they met, Menon told Ranganathan, “A few years ago, I was a student of the Law College in Madras. I was then a regular reader in your splendid library. You might not have noticed me; one of the thousands of students who came there. I was impressed by your organization and service. Your library was so charming. It had an atmosphere. One day I wrote in my diary, Cochin State must have a library like this. As soon as I became the Education Minister, I turned through the pages of my diary to refresh my memory with my dreams of youth. I also read the news about your last visit to Kerala to inaugurate the library conference and your talk on library development and legislation. So I invited you to give guidance for enacting a library legislation in Cochin. Tell me how I should proceed.” In response to the request of Menon; Ranganathan after returning to Benares prepared and sent to Cochin a draft library Bill with a thirty year library development plan for Cochin. But before Menon could take any action, important political changes came and Travancore and Cochin were merged into a single state.

Attempts by First Communist Ministry During the next decade government had to settle many other political and administrative problems and no considerable move came from the part of government or Sangham to enact a library legislation. During the time of the first Communist Ministry Sri E.M.S. Namboodiripad, the Chief Minister invited Ranganathan to visit Kerala as a consultant for the development of the state library system and for drafting a bill to be introduced in the Legislature. Joseph Mundasseri, the then Education Minister and an eminent literary figure of Kerala also wrote similarly. Ranganathan gladly accepted the invitation and came to Kerala. He had his first meeting with the two Ministers on 6th July 1959. In the meeting Mundasseri outlined the problems on which Ranganathan was expected to work. During his stay in Kerala, Ranganathan had many discussions with Director of Public Instruction, Secretary for Education and other concerned higher officials, on the bill and the library development plans. He visited many libraries of Kerala to study the situation.

Unit-II D 57

Library Bill for Kerala, 1959 In a conference in which, Education Minister, Director of Public Instruction, Secretary for Education and other concerned officials were present Ranganathan presented the Library development plan, with a draft library bill for the Kerala State. It was a comprehensive report in five parts which touched all aspects of the development of a public library system in the state. It consisted of the general principles for the design of a public library system as part one. The second part was the Kerala Public Library Bill. It was based on the earlier bill made for Travancore and the Madras Library Act. But carefully evaluating a decade’s working of the Madras Library Act, Ranganathan had rectified its weak points in the bill for Kerala. He also considered all the later developments throughout the world while preparing this new bill. The system envisaged in the bill was one having a state Central Library for the whole state, a city library for every city having a population of more than 1,00,000, about 250 branch libraries and about 10,000 service stations. The bill contained provisions for State Library Authority, the Chairman of which would be Minister for Education. There were provisions for State Library Committee, City Library Authority and Rural Library Authority. Provisions were also there for executive committees, sub-committees, branch committees and village library committees with specified duties and powers. There was also provision for collection of library cess by local authorities and for transmission to the local library authorities concerned within the end of three months after the collection. Third part of the report provided model rules. Fourth part suggested several phases for the implementation of the Act, during which integration of the innumerable small libraries and establishment of viable number of central and branch libraries was to be achieved. An estimate is made of the ultimate and immediate number of professional and semiprofessional staff required and their qualifications, salary scales and status. The last part of the report explained the need for immediate recognition of Trivandrum Public Library, the oldest and largest collection of documents existing at that time as state central library in such a way that it will fit in with the system and that collection will become useful for all the people of Kerala. The pooling together of the resources of Education Library, Kerala Legislature Library, Secretariat Central Library etc., for the mutual benefit was also suggested. In the plan Ranganathan had included even the syllabus for Bachelor’s Degree and Certificate Courses in Library Science; which were to train professionals required for the system. The document also pointed out the limitations of the existing set-up and trends.

Madras Public Library Act, 1948 It was the untiring efforts of Ranganathan that resulted in the enactment of the first library legislation in India at Madras. In 1946, Mr. Avinasilingam Chettiyar a student of Ranganathan became Education Minister of Madras, Ranganathan directly discussed with the Minister his Draft Bill for Madras. Minister got it examined through Law Department. Some modifications were made in it by legal experts. The Minister then piloted the bill in the Legislature which was enacted as the Official Bill of the Government. Thus we got the Madras Public Library Act which was assented by the Governor General on 29th January, 1949 which ushered in a new phase in library history of India.

58 D Library and Information Science Specific Hyderabad Public Library Act, 1955 The second state that enacted library law in India was Hyderabad. This Act emerged in an atmosphere charged with enthusiasm for the library movement and it was the result of pressure exerted by a group of enthusiasts which included the State’s Minister of Education. The draft bill prepared by Ranganathan was discussed in a seminar directed by him in which Members of the Legislature, officers of Government, Education Minister and Chief Minister were present. Everyone including Education Minister was convinced with the bill. They presented it in the Legislature and the same was enacted in 1955.

Andhra Pradesh Public Library Act, 1960 Andhra Pradesh was the third state to enact library legislation in 1960. A peculiar situation arose in the state with the bifurcation of the then composite Madras State in 1955 and merging of the several districts from the disintegrated Hyderabad State. So two Library Acts were in operation in the districts of Andhara Pradesh; one Madras Library Act 1948 and the other Hyderabad Public Libraries Act, 1955. To remove the anomaly created by the provisions of the two different Acts, the Government consulted Ranganathan and enacted the Andhra Pradesh Public Library Act in 1960.

Karnataka Public Library Act, 1965 Karnataka was the fourth State to bring a Library Act into operation. In 1962, Ranganathan having retired from the North established DRTC at Bangalore. He also founded the Karnataka Library Association with Mr. Vaikunta Baliga, Speaker of Karnataka Legislative Assembly as its President. Due to the request of the Association, Government set up a Library Committee to draft a library bill and development plan for the State with Ranganathan as Chairman and Education Minister also as a member. The Committee provided Ranganathan maximum freedom to draft a comprehensive Library Bill with some new classes not provided in earlier acts but necessitated by the later developments. Ranganathan submitted the bill for consideration of Government. The draft bill was accepted by the Government and enacted into Karnataka Public Library Act in 1965.

Maharashtra Public Library Act, 1967 Maharashtra government through its officials prepared a draft library bill based on some earlier bills of Ranganathan. The bill was enacted into Maharashtra Public Libraries Act in 1967. The Act made certain departures from the earlier Acts as it did not provide for library cess, but had a provision for library grants by the government for the maintenance and development of libraries.

West Bengal, Manipur, Kerala and Haryana Acts West Bengal was the fifth state to enact public library legislation. It has carefully studied the working of the existing acts and accordingly revised the Bill prepared for that state by Ranganathan in 1958 which was enacted as West Bengal Public Libraries Act 1979. After that Manipur has enacted a legislation. By enacting Kerala Public Library Act in May 1989, Kerala became the seventh state to have Library legislation. But it followed a totally different pattern than other states. Haryana enacted Library Legislation in September

Unit-II D 59 1989 and it accepted most of the principles of Ranganathan and the good aspects of the other existing Library Acts.

Chattopadhyaya Committee, 1986 While constituting Raja Ram Mohan Roy Library Foundation, Government of India entrusted it the work of formulating a National Policy on Library and Information System. In 1984, the Foundation submitted a draft policy. In 1985 Indian Library Association also submitted another draft policy. So the Government of India set up a committee under the Chairmanship of Prof. D.P. Chattppadhyaya for considering these drafts and for the formulation of a final document on National Library and Information Policy in the context of the expanding library movement. The committee submitted its report in May 1986. The committee stressed that establishing, maintaining and strengthening free public library service in the country and enabling them to work as a system is the most important task before the Government. The committee also suggested that the Central Government should revise the Model Public Library Bill in the light of the experience gained and the developments happened after its preparation and urged upon the states to enact uniform legislations based on this revised Model Act so that national level coordination will become possible. All libraries in the state should form part of a network extending from the community library of the village through intermediary levels to the district and to the state central library. This state network should eventually be connected with the national level network. IMPORTANT CHRONOLOGY IN LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE Library Associations of World Library Association (UK)-1877 now known as Chartered institute of Library and Information Professionals (From 2002) American Library AssociationAssociation of Special Libraries and Information Beureaux -ASLIB IFLA-1929 Special Library Association (SLA) FID UNESCO India Library Association IASLIC RRRLF

1877 (now name changed in 2002 as CILIP) 1876 1926 1929 UBC-1974, UAP-1976 1909 1982 1945 1933 1955 1972

Classification of Library DDC by Melvil Dewey Expansive Classification by C.A. CutterLibrary of Congress Classification Subject Classification by J. D. Brown Colon Classification Bibliographic Classification by H. E. Bliss International Classification by F. Rider

1876 1879 1902 1906 1933 1935 1961

60 D Library and Information Science Specific Cataloguing and Bibliographic Description Standards, Subject Headings Library of Congress Subject Headings AACR first published Sears List of Subject Headings (SLSH) MARC AACR-I CCF ISBD UNIMARC AACR-II

1898 1908 1923 1966 1967 1972 1974 1977 1978

Library Acts of Indian States No. State

Name

Nature of Law

Year

1.

Tamil Nadu Andhra Pradesh

3.

Karnataka

4. 5. 6. 7.

Maharashtra West Bengal Manipur Kerala

Maharashtra Public Libraries Act West Bengal Public Libraries Act Manipur Public Libraries Act Kerala Public Libraries Act

library cess (10%) on property tax. library cess (8%) on lands and buildings; library cess (6%) on lands, buildings, vehicles and profession. No library cess No library cess 1 No library cess library cess (5%) on property tax and not less than 1% of State expenditure on education. Local bodies to levy cess No library cess Surcharge on IFML @ 0.50 ps. Per ltr. And 0.50 No library cess No library cess

1948

2.

Tamil Nadu (formerly Madras) Public Libraries Act. Andhra Pradesh Public Libraries Act. Karnataka Public Library Act

8. Haryana 9. Mizoram 10. Goa

Haryana Public Libraries Act Mizoram Public Libraries Act Goa Public Libraries Act

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

Gujarat Public Libraries Act Orissa Public Library Act

Gujarat Orissa Rajasthan Uttar Pradesh Uttrakhand Pondichery

1960 1965

1967 979 1988 1989

1989 1993 1993 2002 2002 2005 2005 2005 2007/2008

Library Networks–World Online Computer Library Centre (OCLC) Research Library Group (RLG)-RLIN Joint Academic Network (JANET) Consortium of University Research Libraries (CURL) China Academic Library & Information System Australian Academic & Research Library Network

1967 1974 1997 1998

Library Networks –India NICNET ERNET DELNE MALIBNET UGC INFONET

1977 1986 1992 1993 2002

CALIBNET INFLIBNET ADINET MYLIBNET HELINET

1986 1988 1993 1994 2003

Unit-II D 61 UNESCO Contributions (Library Networks) Asia and Pacific Information Network (APIN) Information Society program for Latin America and The Caribbean (INFOLAC) Global Network for Education in Journalism Orbicom UNESCO Network for Associated Library (UNAL) UNISIST Programme

1986 1999 1994 1971

Library Related Software Library Management Software and Digital Library Software CDS/ISIS SOUL DSPACE NEWGENLIB

1985 2000 2002 2007

WINISIS GREENSTONE KOHA EPRINTS

1995 1997 2000 2000

Programming Languages FORTRAN VB C++ PHP

1957 1991 1983 1995

JAVA C JAVA SCRIPT

1994 1972 1995

Indexing Pre-Coordinate Indexing 1 2 3 4 5 6

Kaisers systematic Indexing Chain Indexing Relational Indexing- J.E.L. Farradane Coats Subject Indexing- E.J. Coats PRECIS-Derek Austin POPSI- G. Bhattacharya

1911 1950 1963 1974 1964

Post-Coordinate Indexing 1

UNITERM- Martimer Taube

1953 Year of Pub. 1974 1973 1978

Science Citation Index Social Science Citation Index Arts & Humanities Citation Index Thesaurus 1

Roget’s Thesaurus 1852

Scopus J-Store (1995) Emeralds Science ERIC J-Gate (2001) Project MUSE (1993) EBSCO Pubmed IndMed

Abstract and citation database of research literature Journal Storage Full text Journal Publishers Direct full-text scientific database Education Resources Information Center, is the world's largest digital library of education literature J-Gate is an electronic gateway to global e-journal literature Online database of more than 200 journals from nonprofit publishers Reference Databases citations for biomedical articles from MEDLINE A Bibliographic Database of Indian Biomedical Literature is an indexing of medical and other biomedical journals from India not cover in Medline

62 D Library and Information Science Specific INIS LISA Genamics Journal Seek

Econlit

REPEC

OCLC Worldcat

The INIS Database, contains over 3 million bibliographic records Library and Information Science Abstracts is an international abstracting and indexing tool designed for library professionals and other information specialists Genamics JournalSeek is the largest completely categorized database of freely available journal information available on the internet. The database presently contains 95320 titles. Journal information includes the description (aims and scope), journal abbreviation, journal homepage link, subject category and ISSN. The American Economic Association’s electronic bibliography, EconLit, indexes more than thirty years of economics literature from around the world. Compiled and abstracted in an easily searchable format, EconLit is a comprehensive index of journal articles, books, book reviews, collective volume articles, working papers and dissertations Research Papers in economics. Collaborative volunteer effort to enhance the dissemination of research in economics. The database contains information on more than 585,000 items A global catalog of library collections.

Libraries & Library Information Science Training in India National Library of India Delhi Public Library DRTC, Bangalore Raja Ram Mohan Roy Library Foundation Connemara Public Library Khuda Baksha Oriental Public Library Asiatic Society Library, Mumbai Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, Pune Rampur Raza Library, Uttar Pradesh Sarasvati Mahal Library National Medical Library, New Delhi

1951 1962 1972 1890 1891 1917 1774 1918 1947

LAWS OF LIBRARY SCIENCE The five laws of Library Science were enunciated by S. R. Ranganathan in 1928 and were published in 1931. These constitute the philosophical basis for work and services of all types of libraries. For this purpose he formulated normative principles consisting of laws, canons, principles. Law. It is a discipline, such as Library Science. Canon. It is an activity, such as book selection, classification and cataloguing. Principle. It is an activity, such as facet sequence in classification and alphabetization in cataloguing. The essence of his work is that books are meant for use and user is the prime factor, his time must be saved. These laws have provided a scientific approach to Library Science. These laws are: (i) Books are for use (ii ) Every reader gets his/her book (iii) Every book is for its reader (iv) Save time of the reader (v) A library is a growing organism.

Unit-II D 63 Later on Ranganathan himself revised these laws as follows: 1. Documents are for use 2. Every reader gets his document 3. Every document is for its reader 4. Save the time of the reader 5. A library is growing organisation. Updated form of five laws by Walt Crawford and Michael Garman : 1. Libraries serve humanity 2. Respect all forms by which knowledge is communicated 3. Use technology intelligently to enhance service 4. Protect free access to knowledge 5. Honor the past and create the future. According to Pauline Atherton, “Laws offer the students the guidance and the rationale we need when we critically review how we follow the cataloguing practices which prevail, how we evaluate the libraries we use, or work in, and how we work to improve the practices we follow and the library services we manage.” Today, various technologies such as electronic devices, databases, networking, desk top publishing, CD-ROM, hyper text, multimedia, e-mail, etc. are being used for information handling in the libraries. So some of the schools of library science are of the view that as a result of development and use of information technology, the five laws of library science are now no more valid. So for this we have to re-evaluate these five laws as follows:

(i) First Law: Books are for Use In order to ensure that the books are put to use, we normally keep in view the location of library, library hours, building, furniture and equipment, qualified and trained library staff. Now the books have been replaced as an electronic and digitised document. In order to keep such type of documents, necessary computer networking and internet facilities have been provided and specialised training is being important to the library staff to handle these modern gadgets. To satisfy the first law of Library Science the following factors should be kept in mind:

(a) Modern Library Earlier, a library was regarded as a storehouse and books were meant for preservation. The librarian was supposed to be a custodian, who did not encourage the use of books. He merely served as a care taker. Libraries tended to be passive and archival institutions. Thus there was total neglect of the first law of Library Science. However, a modern library, with a few exceptions, is regarded as a service institution. Its aim is to enable the users to make the most effective use of the resources and services rendered in the library. This type of library acquires documents, processes it, and makes it available for use rather than preservation. A modern librarian feels satisfied only if the users keep on emptying the shelves constantly.

(b) Library Staff In order that a library is put to maximum use, it is essential that library staff should be qualified and efficient. The staff should believe and follow the philosophy of service to users. They should be approachable, courteous, helpful and willing to appreciate the point of view of visitors.

64 D Library and Information Science Specific The library authorities should offer proper working conditions such as suitable salary scales, status, promotion prospects, etc. so as to be able to attract the right kind of persons. These incentives play an important role in creating right kind of attitudes and environment, leading to better performance.

(c) Library Building The library building should be well planned. The exterior should be attractive and the interior inviting. The building should be easily accessible to the users. It should be a functional one providing space for different purposes. The fittings and furniture should meet the requirements adequately, keeping in view standards set by Indian Standards Institution (ISI). Provision for lighting and ventilation should meet the standards set by ISI. For example, ISI standard says that height of rack should be 2.175 metres. This is the height, which an average person can reach at comfortably.

(d) Location of a Library Location of a library should be conveniently accessible to the community to be served. The location will influence the extent of the use of the services. A public library should be at a place, which most people are likely to find convenient. This should be the place, where normally public visits more often than any other place. Therefore, a place where they go for shopping might be found suitable. A university library should be centrally located near the places of instruction. In case of school and college libraries, distances are small, therefore location does not matter very much, though it would be preferable to have it centrally located. A special, say, library is a factory should be near the factory entrance or factory canteen or staff canteen.

(e) Library Hours A library should be kept open for suitable and long duration. This will lead to greater use. In case a library is kept open for short hours, or opened at odd hours, then the users will find it inconvenient to use the library.

(f) Book Selection The books should be selected and acquired keeping in view the present and potential requirements of users. A public or college library should avoid purchase of costly books which are not likely to be in frequent demand. In a children library, the books should be inviting and in bolder type face, meeting their level.

(g) Shelf Arrangement There can be many ways to arrange the books on shelves, such as by author, subject, publisher, size, colour of binding, etc. Author arrangement would be useful to those users, who want a book by a particular author. Similarly subject arrangement would be helpful to those who approach through subject.

(h) Reference Service Reference service involves spirit of humanism which aims to establish right contact between a right book and a right reader at a right time. A collection of documents would not be used fully unless a reference librarian makes efforts to help the users to exploit

Unit-II D 65 the resources of the library. This personal service would lead to greater use of books. Thus the role of a reference librarian becomes extremely important.

(i) Maintenance Library is a living organism. Collection, users and staff may grow. Collection may have to be reorganized to meet the needs of the users. This may involve shifting of collections. The documents are arranged in a library in different collections/sequences to meet the requirements of users effectively. For this purpose, we may form permanent and temporary sequences. Dusting and cleaning of books should be done on regular basis. Books lying in dark corners for a long period undisturbed have a greater possibility of being eaten by silver fish. Dust reduces the life of a book. Users and reference staff would also not like to use dusty books. If tags on books are found missing or get faded, then necessary action should be taken. Books in need of binding or repair should be taken out regularly from the shelves for maintenance work.

(ii) Second Law: Every Reader gets His/Her Book Here emphasis is on the reader. A user of a library is the primary factor. Thus this law implies that “books are for all”. This means that books are not merely for scholars but for all including poor, sick, blind, prisoner, old, etc. In the present age, the reader and the book are replaced by user and information. From the heap of rest information, the pre printed information can be searched quickly, accurately and comprehensively only with the help of various electronic devices, computers, databases, on-line searching and using networking for resource sharing at global level. Factors supporting second law are:

(a) Library Legislation Steps should be taken to ensure that each reader gets his/her book. In order to meet this goal, it is desirable that economic factor should not stand as a barrier. In other words, second law requires that free library service should be provided to all. This is possible through library legislation, which will provide for finance required to establish and maintain a network of public libraries at various levels to achieve free library service for all. It would be desirable to integrate public library system with academic and special library systems.

(b) Book Selection Ideally speaking, a library should have all books published up to date. No library can dream of collecting all the books due to limited finance. So book selection needs to be done judiciously so that the collection meets demands of the users adequately. The subject(s), language(s) and style of exposition of books to be selected should be closely related to the requirements of the users. This means that a librarian must know the users and their requirements so that he can provide them right books. This will also enable him to provide right books/information for every user. In order to determine the information needs of users, user studies should be carried out. A book selector must keep in mind different categories of users, such as economically, socially, culturally, educationally and physically disadvantaged people. Thus books must be selected to cater to the needs of blind, mentally ill, partially sighted, patients, elderly,

66 D Library and Information Science Specific prisoners, minorities, neoliterates, children, young adults, women, etc. For example, for patients, who are too weak to sit, ceiling books may be provided. Blinds should be provided braille books and cassette players. Partially sighted persons should be given well illustrated books.

(c) Shelf Arrangement Our experience tells us that more users request for books on a particular subject than author. Therefore, keeping in view the subject approach, it would be found helpful if all the books on a given subject are brought together. It would certainly add to usefulness, if within the subject, books are further arranged by language.

(d) Cataloguing Some books are composite in nature. Therefore, their hidden contents should be brought to the notice of the users of a library catalogue by means of subject analytical entries. Unless subject analytical entries for such books are prepared, every user would not be able to get the documents of his interest, though some pages of certain books could serve the need.

(e) Maintenance In an open access library, users have the freedom to choose books of their choice from the shelves. Some books are liable to be misplaced intentionally or unintentionally by users and staff. Therefore, it is essential that documents are maintained in proper order and in physical condition fit for being handled by the users and staff. Books can get misplaced even in close access. Misplaced books must be restored to their proper places by reading the shelves systematically and shifting the misplaced books to their proper places.

(f) Reference Service The second law emphasises on the reader. A reference librarian should know about the users and their requirements, so that he can provide right books/information for every reader. He should also know thoroughly about the collection available in the library. He should not only be able to provide a specific book on demand but he should also actively help the user to find his or her book, which will specifically meet his requirements.

(g) Resource Sharing A given library would not have finance to purchase documents in occasional demand. This is especially true of small libraries. Therefore, second law would suggest the formation of a national library network to share the resources especially for the purpose of interlibrary loan.

(h) Open Access In open access, books are kept on open shelves. This makes it possible for reader to approach books directly and handle these personally without any barrier. A user can thus browse amongst the world of books. He will have better chances of choosing a right book than merely consulting the catalogue. It has been found that provision of open access

Unit-II D 67 encourages browsing leading to greater use of books. This is equally true for all types of libraries. Therefore, the second law makes a plea for open access.

(i) Responsibility of the Users A user must realize that library rules are framed to enable the users to get the maximum out of the library resources and to prevent misuse of library resources. The rules are aimed at increasing the use of the library rather than curbing its use. Thus the users should regard the rigid enforcement of the rules as an aid rather than a hinderance in the use of the library. It is the obligation of a user to borrow the number of volumes he is entitled to and return on or before due date.

(iii) Third Law: Every Book is for its Reader The emphasis is on the book. This law desires that every book in a library must find its reader. It implies that there should be maximum use of books by their users. This law also suggests that the library should have made some arrangements, such as open access system, alternative book arrangements, display of new books, book exhibitions, detailed catalogue, so that every book in the stock can get its reader. But in the present age of information technology, on-line Public Access Catalogue (OPAC), creation and availability of databases for searching, quick compilation of latest addition to the libraries, opening of the home page on internet and use of modern techniques in book exhibitions, the application of third law in libraries has become more simpler, easier and more relevant indeed. This law can be fulfilled through different devices. These are:

(a) Book Selection Books in language(s), subject(s) and level(s) for which there are not going to be many users, should not be selected. Therefore, for books required occasionally, one can depend on inter-library loan.

(b) Shelf Arrangement Books should be so arranged that every book finds a reader. At least the possibility for getting a reader should be very high. If the books are arranged so that the subjects get arranged according to the degree of mutual relationship, then each book would have a high probability of getting its reader. This will meet the demands of third law. Incidently, this will also satisfy the second law.

(c) Cataloguing A well planned arrangement of books on shelf is highly desirable. But it is incapable of getting every book a reader, merely by itself. Provision of catalogue provides great support to shelf arrangement in this regard. Both are complimentary to one another. The series entries and cross reference entries are highly useful in drawing attention of readers. A reader, who directly goes to shelf may overlook book because of its uninspiring physical appearance or unfanciful title. But series entries or cross reference entries might help to know about the contents of the book, making him feel attracted. It is considered that provision of analytical entries in a catalogue increases the chances of a composite book getting its readers.

68 D Library and Information Science Specific (d) Reference Service A reference librarian should know about the world of books and try to find out a reader for every one of these. He should find out who will benefit most from a given book. He should not miss any opportunity to bring a right book and a right reader together. The book may be informative or inspirational or educational but a reference librarian should aim to find a reader for it. Thus a reference librarian should act as a canvassing agent for each book. This is the direction of the third law.

(e) Accessibility Accessibility is an important factor in getting every book its reader. Devices such as open access, setting up of special sequences of books (recent additions, rare books, Gandhian collection, Tagore collection, general education collection, festivals of India collection, etc.) at prominent places to attract readers, placing of books on shelves within convenient reach of a user of average height etc. increase accessibility. A library should not have double rows of books on a shelf. This will decrease accessibility.

(f) Extension Service According to Ranganathan, “Apart from different methods of publicity, libraries are nowa-days developing certain new types of work, which in addition to their being directly educative or recreational, lead also to publicity as an important secondary product”. This has been termed as extension service. The objective of extension service is to encourage reading. The broader objective of a library is to create and stimulate good reading habits. The library achieves its objective by bringing books and readers in close contact. The library attracts readers by converting itself into a social and cultural centre. A library does it by organizing a lecture, a musical concert, a puppet show, a magic show, celebration of a local festival, a story hour, etc. Once people come to any of these functions, then library can make an attempt to bring books and readers together.

(iv) Fourth Law: Save the Time of the Reader A user must be assumed to be a busy person, and his time must be saved. For saving the time of the readers, libraries use appropriate classification scheme to classify, appropriate code for cataloguing, time saving lending process of books. Time consuming processes are discouraged. With the advent of information technology, the classification and cataloguing of documents can be done instantly by using OCLC database or OPAC by scanning the catalogues of other libraries on line. Computerized circulation system has resulted in saving of time and energy of users as well as the library staff. The factors supporting are:

(a) Shelf Arrangement The arrangement of books according to the degree of mutual relationship of subjects would lead to saving his time. A user interested in political science would also like to browse books in the fields of history and economics. Therefore, books on these three fields should be placed side by side. In addition, if within each subject, books are arranged by language, and within language by their year of publication, then it would lead to more saving of time. It should be understood that an alphabetical arrangement of subjects will be found unhelpful and time consuming.

Unit-II D 69

(b) Cataloguing In order to save the time of the user, the library catalogue should aim to provide for different approaches of the users. It should include analytical entries for composite books. Sometimes such entries can be very useful in tracing an excellent description on a topic given in the form of a chapter or part of a book, which would be missed otherwise. In order to serve the users of a catalogue adequately a catalogue must be well made. It means that it must be prepared by a qualified professional cataloguer, who knows the job thoroughly.

(c) Centralized Cataloguing and Classification In case processes such as cataloguing and classification are centralized within a library system(s), then it would become possible to save manpower. Persons released from cataloguing and classification can be diverted to service-points. As a result reference services can be strengthened leading to saving of the time of the users.

(d) Library Services Library services should be so planned and organized that a user is able to get information/ documents required by him promptly. The services like current awareness service, provision of short-range reference service and long range reference services, etc., are important means of helping the readers, so that their time can be saved. In order to provide library and information services, a reference librarian must take full advantage of services being provided by various agencies at local, national and international levels. Provision of reprographic service serves an extremely useful purpose.

(e) Qualifications of a Reference Librarian A reference librarian should be an alert person, who knows about the collection and makes an attempt to provide information/documents to the users promptly. Personal help provided by him can go a long way in saving the time of users.

(f) Accessibility The collection should be processed and well organized. It should be made freely accessible without any barriers. In this context, open access has been found to be extremely useful. This will enable the user to get the document required by him promptly.

(g) Signage System Signage refers to science of signs. Wayfinding (process of finding one’s way) in a library is an important aspect of designing library. Wayfinding is aided or frustrated by signage system. Librarians have not given enough attention to problems related to way finding. A signage system can be used for a variety of purposes, such as (i ) giving of direction (ii ) identification of specific collections, services (iii ) provision of instructions in the use of a service/tool/equipment (iv) information regarding rules and regulations. A good signage system is expected to provide correct information, at proper location, in a highly interesting way, in an attractive, readable and legible form.

70 D Library and Information Science Specific (h) Library Guide A guide to the library should be brought out in the form of a pamphlet. This may provide guidance about how to use the library. It may include objectives, functions, services, rules and regulations, etc. This can be extremely helpful to new members of the library.

(i) Location of a Library The location of a library is of great importance. It must be centrally located so that it is conveniently accessible to the community being served. In case of a university library, having departments scattered over a large area, fourth law requires that departmental libraries should be set up. In case of a public library in a large city, branch libraries should be established.

(j) Special Sequences of Books Setting up of special sequences of books is an excellent device to attract the attention of the readers to various collections in a library. “Recent Additions” are usually located near the entrance. If these are displayed properly, then this can prove to be an important attraction. Special sequences can be put on display on the occasion of special events or festivals.

(k) Library Publicity Publicity is an excellent device to attract readers to a library. Publicity is used to tell about the progress of the library or to explain the activities, policies and problems of the library to the public. Publicity organized to publicize the services of a library is extremely important.

(l) Information Technology There is an increasing volume and variety of literature to be handled by libraries especially in science and technology. As also, very often, the number of users to be handled is large, so that it becomes difficult to know all the interests of the users being served. Besides the interests keep on changing. Under these circumstances, manual operations prove to be inadequate. For instance, provision of SDI (Selective Dissemination of Information) manually has been found too slow and inadequate to serve the objectives of such a service.

(m) Management of Libraries Over years, many of the libraries have become large and complex organizations presenting a challenge to the managers. Managing a large library is a highly specialized and complicated job. In order to meet the challenge, library managers have started using principles and techniques of management. This has revolutionized the management of libraries. The aim has been to provide effective and efficient services to users through effective and efficient management so that time can be saved.

(n) Saving Time of the Staff The aim of management of libraries has been to achieve effective and efficient management. This leads to saving of manpower. Application of information technology further leads to saving of manpower. As a consequence, manpower can be diverted to provide service to the users. Ultimately, it can lead to saving of the time of the users.

Unit-II D 71

(v) Fifth Law: Library is a Growing Organism Library is a social institution, it will keep on growing like an organism. A library will grow in terms of documents, readers and staff. Libraries grow numerically, and in maturity or in quality. Keeping this law in view, the library buildings, stacks, physical form of catalogues, staff strength, readers area, and acquisition policies are planned. Modular buildings are preferred for future expansions. Compact and adjustable stack system has been devised which requires less space for stack area. Micro documents and computer readable documents are preferred for storage in the libraries. CDs and tapes have solved the very concept of space problem in the libraries. Some significant factors to be considered are as follows:

(a) Implications of Growth Collection of a national central library or a state central library will keep on growing. No limit can be put to size of their collections. Their staff will also keep on growing. Once adult stage is reached, then the number of users to be served will stabilize. There are certain implications of this kind of growth. In order to maintain live collection, a library must procure new books and journals. Library buildings must be planned keeping in view the present and future needs. In order to take care of growing collection, there must be a provision for compact storage within the library and provision for repository ware houses to accommodate less used materials.

(b) Choice of a Classification Scheme The universe of knowledge is dynamic, therefore, we should use a scheme for classification, which is able to meet the onslaught of knowledge reasonably well. Such a scheme should be in a position to keep pace with the developments in the universe of subjects.

(c) Shelf Arrangement A library being a dynamic organization, it will grow in terms of documents, readers and staff. The shelf arrangement should be such that it should facilitate the service of books irrespective of the size of the library or its rate of growth in terms of documents and staff.

(d) Choice of a Catalogue Code A library being a growing organism it will acquire newer kinds of documents. A catalogue code to be chosen must be able to provide treatment to all kinds of library materials yet conceived as well as take care of newer materials likely to be conceived in future.

(e) Physical Form of a Catalogue A library is a growing organism. Therefore, it follows that a library catalogue will keep growing. Physical form of a catalogue has accordingly undergone many changes. The process is continuing. We find that development of library catalogues runs parallel to the growth of libraries. New forms are still being discovered. The future holds immense possibilities. Since 1960s computer-printed catalogues have become increasingly common in Western countries. COM (Computer-output-microfilm) catalogue produced on microfilm or microfiche also became quite popular in some of the developed countries. A computer itself is now used as a catalogue.

72 D Library and Information Science Specific (f) Reference Service The new books received by the library should be brought to the notice of the readers. Even earlier books lying on the shelves should be brought to their attention. The number of documents being published each year are extremely large but a library is able to acquire only a small percentage of books, therefore, it must resort to resource sharing including inter library loan.

(g) User Education Users should be provided user education so that they are not overawed by the complexity of library tools and practices. User education is constituted of the four interrelated components: (a) User awareness (b) Library orientation (c) Interest profiling; and (d) Bibliographic instruction. Once users have been made aware of the library as a primary source of information, then they must be oriented to library facilities. Thus user awareness is the initial stage, preceding library orientation. Interest profiling should precede bibliographic instruction. Library orientation and bibliographic instruction form the basic components of user education.

(h) Library Orientation A new member of a library is generally not familiar with the ways of that library. He would not know about rules, regulations and services of that library. The variety and size of a library collection especially in a large library can easily bewilder him. The tools (e.g. library catalogues, bibliographies, accession lists, etc.) of the library assist the user in their use, but these have an element of artificiality about them being based on conventions unfamiliar to them. It is not easy to understand the use of these tools. There are many peculiarities about the arrangement of documents, layout of various sections and the kind of services, being provided. The provision of a system of guides and placards in a library is helpful but these are not sufficient by themselves. All this requires that some sort of orientation for freshman to a library should be provided. Orientation is concerned with introducing library to freshmen so that they can use it in a meaningful and effective way. Larger the library, the more essential it becomes.

(i) Staff When a library grows, sanctioned staff at some stage would become inadequate. In order to provide effective services, it would be necessary to increase the staff.

(j) Restraint The first four laws of library science can sometimes lead to over enthusiasm. The fifth law serves a restraint. It serves as a warning regarding implications of the growth of a library in terms of users, documents and staff. An analysis of the five laws reveals that: (i) the 1st law focuses on the usable items, (ii) the 2nd and 3rd laws focus on the user and the usable item, (iii) the 4th law is a general appeal,

Unit-II D 73 (iv) the 5th law focuses on the organisation, and (v) the object appearing in the 1st law is a component of the organisation figuring in the 5th law.

LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE PROFESSION Librarianship as a Profession A Code of Professional Ethics for Librarians describes that "The goal of librarianship is to mediate between humanity and humanity's store of recorded knowledge and information; to encourage an informed, enlightened and empowered citizenry; and to join with others in the ' fight for intellectual freedom and access to information." To build up this 'image for the library and information profession, and to establish quality, a set of ethical codes has to be formulated and is to be practiced by librarians and information professionals. But before we get to discuss these codes; we shall see to what extent librarianship can be deemed to be a profession. The generally recognized professions, such as medicine, law, have certain characteristics or attributes that are enumerated below: n Extensive period of training (usually formal education); n Dominance of intellectual component in work activities; n Expertise; n Service orientation; n Altruistic motivation; n Self motivation; n Autonomy. Another set of criteria for a vocation to be considered a profession, is as follows: (a) A fairly complex, personalized client-professional relationship - usually involving a fee; (b) A certain amount of independence on the part of the professional (he is rarely closely supervised, and is rarely responsible to anyone to a greater degree than he is to his client;) (c) A clear-cut body of professional technique and practice held in common by all practioners; (d) A professional association with real power i.e. power of enforcement and power of certification. Taking into consideration these sets of criteria, librarianship cannot, perhaps, be placed on par with the’ more well-established professions like medicine, law, accountancy, etc. However, there is certainly a clear-cut body of professional techniques in librarianship that would involve its recognition as a profession: Librarianship in various degree fulfills some of the other characteristics like intellectual component, expertise, service orientation, altruistic motivation, self motivation and autonomy. The Five Laws of Library Science of Ranganathan also provide the right set of guiding principles that could govern and motivate persons towards service orientation; intellectual involvement in developing

74 D Library and Information Science Specific tools and techniques and a body of professional knowledge to get recognition for librarianship as a profession: The Library Association of U.K. recognized the importance of and an urgent need for giving some broad definition of professional library work to indicate to employers the particular skills which professional librarians can bring to oraganisations, and to help librarians themselves to identify and assert the special skills which they have. One of the reasons for low pay and none too complimentary images of professionals is undoubtedly the fact that there is a lack of clarity, among library and information professionals, about what they actually do. The Association produced a report in two sections, one aimed at employers, and the other aimed at professionals. The section for employers provided a brief guide to the special skills that library and information professionals have and how they apply them. It included a note on professional qualifications, a description of professional skills and activities and gave the following definition: “Professional librarians formulate; plan, direct and deliver library and information services by identifying the needs and demands of actual and potential users; collecting, retrieving and organising knowledge and ideas in a variety of forms; from books and manuscripts to computerised databases; and disseminating and marketing library and information services to clients.”

Library and Information Profession A profession is defined as “a calling requiring specialized knowledge and often long and intensive preparation including instruction in skills and methods as well as in the scientific, historical, or scholarly principles underlying such skills and methods, maintaining by force of organization or concerted opinion, high standards of achievement and conduct and committing its members to continued study and to a kind of work which has for its prime purpose the rendering of a public service.” Often a question has been raised whether or not librarianship is a profession. The answer to this question will depend upon whether or not librarianship possesses major characteristic of a profession.

The Major Characteristics of a Library Professional (i ) Body of specialized knowledge and technical skills. A profession calls for specialized knowledge and technical skills. There is no doubt that librarianship requires specialized knowledge and technical skills. (ii ) Formal training and experience. It requires intensive preparation for acquiring the necessary knowledge of methods for putting knowledge to work and technical skills. For this there should be formalized method of acquiring training and experience. Experience shows that an intensive course of two years training leading to Master’s degree in library and information science is desirable. In practice large majority of professionals possess a degree or postgraduate diploma of the duration of one academic year. This should be considered insufficient for senior jobs. (iii ) An ethical code or standard of conduct. There should be an ethical code or standard of conduct to be followed by its members with clients and colleagues. Various library associations have laid down code of professional ethics for their members. IASLIC has done this for its members. However, there is no universal code of ethics. (iv) A commitment to public service rather than to monetary gain. The main aim being to render public service, therefore, it requires that its members should regard service to customers/clients/patrons as the basis of their work rather than

Unit-II D 75 monetary gain. Librarianship is a service profession, therefore, the user is regarded as a king. (v) Formal organization to espouse professionalization. There should be some formal organisation that will bind all the members together for the smooth and efficient functioning of the profession. The aim of the formal organization being to: (a) achieve a high standard of performance on the part of its professionals; (b) work towards a common goal; (c) carry out collective thinking; (d) serve as a forum for achieving consensus on matters of professional concern. Large number of library associations have come into being at different levels. Some of these are general. Others are highly specialized. They are supposed to espouse professionalization. But library associations have succeeded only to a small extent in this regard. (vi ) Licensing of practitioners. In medicine, each person who intends to practice medicine, gets himself registered with Medical Council of India (MCI). Then he is given a license to practice. There is no practice of this kind for librarians prevailing in India.

A Few Other Characteristics (i ) Rigid rules and high standards of qualifications. There should be rigid rules and high standards of qualifications for new entrants into the profession. Standards of qualifications of professional staff have been laid down in certain sectors. In many cases, these are lowered down to fit internal candidates who may be found otherwise suitable. (ii ) Bond of trust between its members and clients. There should be a bond of trust between its members and customers/patrons/clients. A bond of trust does exist in the field of librarianship. This is more true in advanced countries. (iii ) Financial return not the measure of success. In it, financial return is not regarded as a measure of success. Due to changing values of Indian society, library professionals have sometimes given more value to financial return. This is not desirable. (iv) Pursued for the sake of others. It is pursued for the sake of others and not merely for one’s own sake. Librarianship is service oriented and user is the king. In recent times, user studies are getting more importance so that library services could be based on actual and anticipated information needs of the users. Libraries are treated the heart of educational set up and system, and play a vital and important role in the development of a country. The libraries of today are not only the store house of the books but also are the analysis centres of information, hence their responsibilities towards the users increase from the points of view of the usage and application of the information. Today, in the libraries, various functions related with information providing for the users, are executed, for which libraries need an experienced, skillful, and technically expert person, which is called the librarian. But as librarianship has become a technical profession, for which the librarians must have the high level of personal abilities and qualities alongwith educational, technical, professional and other general qualifications. The librarian serves different types of the users by his different abilities and efficiencies, and satisfies their information needs. His all the services are only for

76 D Library and Information Science Specific users of the libraries, and he gets salary against these. In this way indirectly the librarian earns the money by selling his services to the users of the library. Hence, the librarianship is also a profession, like other professions.

Professional Ethics in Librarianship While it is easy to think of ethical values as essential to ensure quality of professional performance, it is very difficult to design a universally acceptable standard code far professional ethics. Individual/personal ethics are fundamental to any set of ethical codes which are not explicitly stated in any professional code, as they are very often assumed to be basic to every situation. There are also differences in the conception of ethical behavior in different societies and cultures. In order to be effective, therefore, professional ethics have to be perceived at various levels, appropriate to different cultures and situations. These levels may be at the primary, institutional; professional, national and international levels. Primary levels are a set of basic guiding principles which are fundamental to human behavior with. reference to any activity, such as honesty, good conduct, adherence to truth and so on. At the professional and organizational levels, there are likely to be occasional conflicts, particularly when a person has to make a judgement in making a choice for a course of action. For instance; professional ethics may at times clash with organizational loyalty. Similarly, there may be conflicts between professional, national and international ethics in performing a particular task. These types of conflicts appear in any professional activity. Therefore, designing ethical codes becomes not only too ideal to be realistic but it is also difficult to implement, particularly because, no ethical code can ever be enforced as they are not statutory laws. The ALA Ethical code attempted to define and regulate the relations of librarians to n the governing authority; n their constituency; n their fellow employees within the library; n their profession. The national debate, however, on the articles relating-to the above stated areas went on in the next decades. In 1975 ALA adopted a new Statement on Professional Ethics which replaced the 1938 code. The same year, the ALA Council instituted and authorised a standing committee on professional ethics to augment the Statement on Professional Ethics by explanatory interpretations and additional statements. At the ALA membership meeting in 1981, the Code of Ethics was officially adopted. Responding to numerous criticisms on the 1981 Code, the ALA Standing Committee on Professional Ethics decided to proceed towards further revision. In 1990,the American Association for Information Science (ASIS) also, published a draft of the ASIS Code of Ethics for Information professionals in the August/September 1990 issue of the - Bulletin of the ASIS: This Code comprised a preamble and four categories of ethical Librarianship as a Profession responsibilities to: (a) individual persons, (b) society, (c) the sponsor, (d) the client or employer, (e) and the profession. The ASIS Code of Ethics for Informational Professionals has, however, remained in draft form pending acceptance by the Association’s Board of Directors.

UK Experience In 1978 the Working Party on Professional Ethics was established within the United Kingdom’s Library Association to develop a draft code of ethics. A draft was prepared for

Unit-II D 77 discussion and debate in 1980; the final version of the code, the Code of Professional Conduct was adopted by the Council of the UK Library Association at its 100th Annual General Meeting in 1983. The Code includes the procedures and regulatory actions that will follow a breach of the code by a member of the Library Association. A unique feature of the LA’s Code of Professional Conduct is its implementation mechanism that involves sanctions imposed by the LA’s Disciplinary Committee on those who ignore the professional conduct set by the Code. The features of the Code relate to: (a) the competency of the librarian; (b) the question of discretion and respect of a client’s privacy; (c) professional independence and intellectual freedom; (d) the impartiality of the library profession; (e) financial ethics and (f) the integrity of members.

Indian Situation Indian adventure of designing a professional code of ethics have remained at the level of efforts to survey literature on professional ethics and no more.. Mention has already been made about discussions at a national conference of IASLIC in 1984. The subject of professional ethics has been dealt with in A.K. Mukherjee’s book, Librarianship – Its Philosophy and History (1966) and R.L. Mittal’s, Library Administration (1964). Two articles by Meganand in Indian Librarian in 1962 and a literature survey by Amitabh Chatterji appearing in Iaslic Bulletin in September 1965 are additional literature references. The only effort to consider this subject seriously in a professional forum appears to be at the Iaslic Conference in 1984. There were ten papers presented at the Conference five of these give a good overview of professional ethics, four on professional ethics for persons working in university, special and other institutional libraries, and another on Ranganathan’s Five Laws vis-à-vis professional ethics with special reference to a research library. All these papers have a good number of references which would facilitate further readings on the subject.

PROFESSIONAL ASSOCIATIONS Library Associations in India, UK and USA— ILA, IASLIC, IATCIS, SIS, LA, ASCIB, SLA, ALA A lone person or a single institution cannot possibly do much to deal with wider and far reaching issues of concerned professions. For this, a collective action by interested group is necessary, which can only be performed by collective efforts. These collective efforts can only be done by associations, which are called Professional Associations. These associations serve as a forum for coordinated efforts for their concerned professions.

78 D Library and Information Science Specific Library associations are also the professional associations, the main objective of which is to foster a spirit of public service among their members, promote library services, project the interests of their members and build up the image of the library profession. If library associations play their part well, they can help in spreading public library movement in a country and ensure better library service. They indeed assist in clarifying concepts of libraries and library and information services and also present appropriate proposals to right quarters.

Role of Library Associations (a) The main aim of library associations is to herald library movement in the country to spread knowledge and information, hence to fulfil this aim, they interact with governments from time to time using every conceivable opportunity for sound development of a library system in the country by advising, representing and helping in drafting legislation, policy statements, guidelines, etc. (b) Library associations make the people conscious towards utility of the libraries, so that the people may demand their rights for accessing to public library services and may mobilise social pressure for healthy development of library services. (c) These associations strive for an evolution of an integrated library and information system at national level based on the national policy. (d) These also bring the attention of authorities to defects, distortions in the existing library infrastructure. (e) These also provide a common forum for library professionals for exchange of their information, ideas, experiences and expertise, etc. (f) These work for betterment of salaries, grades, service conditions of library staff, and also for improving their status in the society. (g) These also work towards sharing of resources and avoiding duplication of efforts among the libraries. (h) These also contribute towards the development of manpower for library and information work. For this, they arrange education and training programmes for library personnels. (i) These hold the image of library profession high in the society and promote cooperation among libraries and among the professionals of the libraries. Few associations have been described as follows:

ILA— Indian Library Association Indian Library Association was founded in 1933 at Calcutta. Although the first effort for the foundation of an association of library personnels in India at national level was done in 1920, the association was set up named with All India Association of Public Libraries, in Calcutta, but due to some reasons it could not run. Again in 1933, with the efforts of Dr. Ranganathan, Indian Library Association was founded on legal basis. Since then ILA has been running successfully in the country. The ILA aims at establishing high standards of librarianship and library services in the country.

Activities of ILA (i) Meetings and Seminars. ILA holds All India conference every year in different parts of the country. In addition, national seminars on themes of topical interest

Unit-II D 79

(ii )

(iii)

(iv)

(v)

(v i)

are also arranged from time to time. The association arranges lectures, round table discussions, etc., mostly in Delhi. A study circle meeting is held regularly once in a month at Delhi for discussing technical subjects. It associates itself with libraries, other library associations, institutions, etc. in the programmes, generally organised during the National Library Week in November each year. Education and Training. ILA undertakes continuing Education Programme for the benefits of working professionals in different cities on computer application to library and information activities. Professional Issues. ILA takes up with the state governments, the issue of enacting library legislation in order to develop the public library system. It has been sending reminder memorandum persuading the governments to initiate action on legislation about the libraries. It has been pursuing with the governments, UGC and other management at all levels on matters relating to betterment of salary, grades, service conditions and status of library professionals. A number of resolutions are usually passed on matters of professional interest and concern in its meetings held every year for taking up with appropriate authorities for implementation. Projects. The ILA completed successfully a project for technical processing of about 35,000 volumes of a special collection for the Lal Bahadur Shastri (LBS) National Academy of Administration, Mussourie. UNESCO also assigned two projects to this association, being influenced by its working and achievements. The projects are (a) Rendering of Asian Names, (b) Directory of Asian Periodicals. Under the chairmanship of Dr. Ranganathan (1948-53) the association caused to be acquainted at international level also. ILA also founded a Research Group. Relation with Other Associations. ILA is the member of IFLA and COMLA. ILA also organised the UAP seminar in 1985 and FID/CR Regional Seminar in November, 1985 in Delhi. ILA also represents in Raja Ram Mohan Roy Library Foundation, Good Office Committee, National Bureau of Standards, Executive Committee-2 (NBS), Section Committee on Documentation Standards, UNESCO National Commission and National Book Trust, World Book Fair Committee. ILA also plays a leading role in the Joint Council of Library Associations in India towards evolving a coordinated approach and a common strategy on professional issues of concern to all library associations. It has also good working relations with IASLIC and state library associations. Publications. ILA started the publication of a periodical in 1942 named Library Bulletin, which was continued only upto 1946. And hence a new periodical ABGILA (Annual Bulletin of Government of India Libraries Association) was started in 1949 which was continued upto 1954, and became popular as a research journal. In 1955 it became closed and in place of it, a new journal namely Journal of ILA was started.

Membership The membership of ILA is open to all individuals and institutions who are interested in the development of libraries and library professions, such as library staff, library users, publishers, etc. It has following eight categories of membership: (i ) Patron members (ii ) Honorary members (iii ) Foreign members (iv) Life members

80 D Library and Information Science Specific (v) Ordinary members (vii ) Library associations

(vi ) Institutional members (viii ) Associate members

IASLIC The full name of IASLIC is Indian Association of Special Libraries and Information Centres. It is an association of special libraries and information centres in India, which was formed in Calcutta on 3rd Sept., 1955 by efforts done by Dr. S. L. Hara and he was also elected first president of this association. Its first session was held in 1956.

Organisation of IASLIC The organisational arrangement of this association is performed by a council, which is the top most agency for looking after the functioning of this association. The formation of the council is constituted by its all members through election. The council is constituted with 34 members, out of them 14 are the officials and 20 are the members of the association. There are two other committees also for the help of the council of the association. The committees are (a) Executive Committee, (b) Finance Committee.

Activities of IASLIC IASLIC performs the following activities: 1. Publication. The association has published so many books and periodicals of high standard, out of which following are the main and important. (a) IASLIC Bulletin. It is a current periodical, in which the articles on the topics of library and information science are published. The bulletin is provided free to the members of the association. (b) IASLIC Newsletters. The news related with the persons engaged with library profession and the news related with activities of the association are published in the Newsletters. Newsletters are also provided free to the members. (c) Indian Library Science Abstracts (ILSA). In this abstracting periodical, the abstracts of the articles of the periodicals of library and information science published in India, are included. It is not provided free. It has some cost even to the members. (d) Directory. This association has also published a directory of special and research libraries. 2. Document Reproduction and Translation Services. This association also provides document reproduction and translation services for researchers, teachers and schools. 3. Education and Training. By observing the need of libraries and information centres, this association organises short term training and education programmes at time to time on the topics such as applications of computers, safety of documents, methods and techniques of indexing, etc. 4. Conferences. This association also organises seminars twice in a year and conferences once in a year. Conferences are arranged in every part of the country. Topics for discussing in conferences are the subjects related with library and information science. Some of the conferences, that have been held are as follows: In 1956 at Calcutta In 1979 at Roorkee In 1960 at Calcutta In 1985 at Bangalore

Unit-II D 81 In 1965 at Trivendrum In 1987 at Tirupati In 1975 at Lucknow In 2000 at Agra 5. Training in German and Russian Languages. It also organises and arranges the training classes of German and Russian languages in a centre in Calcutta for the personnels engaged in library and information services. 6. Cooperation with International Associations. This association always cooperates with international organisations such as IFLA, FID and UNESCO, and is more active in India in comparison to Indian Library Association (ILA).

IATLIS Indian Association of Teachers of Library and Information Science, IATLIS, a national professional organisation was born to further the cause of library education in India. The general body meeting of IATLIS was held on 21st December, 1970.

Aims and Objectives The main objectives of the association are: 1. To promote exchange of ideas on education in library science. 2. To promote research in education in library science. 3. To promote the publication of books and periodicals on education in library science. 4. To hold conferences, seminars and colloquia for the development and propagation of ideas on education in library science. 5. To give consultation service on education in library science. 6. To promote the training of the teachers of library science in India. 7. To promote the welfare of the teachers of library science in India.

Structure The association is governed in its activities by a duly elected Executives Committee consisting of 17 members. The General Body of the Association is scheduled to meet every year. The Office-Bearers and Executive Committee members are elected for two years.

Members The association has three types of membership: Individual, Associated and Life. The membership is open to teachers of library science: staff of recognized libraries, students and others interested in library education and research can also join as Associate Members.

Awards IATLIS has instituted the following awards: 1. IATLIS– Motiwalwe Best Teacher Award; 2. IATLIS– Ratna Laxman Rao Award For Women Professional.

SIS—Society for Information Science The Society for Information Science is a scientific society registered under Registration Act XXI of 1860. It is the only professional body devoted to the development of Information Science in all its ramifications.

82 D Library and Information Science Specific Aims and Objectives The undermentioned are the aims and objectives of the society: 1. To promote and interchange information on information science among specialists and between the specialists and the public. 2. To encourage and assist the professionals engaged in information science to maintain professional integrity and competence. 3. To foster a sense of partnership among professionals.

Membership The society has three types of membership, namely: Individual, Life and Institutional. Membership of the society is open to those persons who are either a graduate from a course of study from an accredited institution or a practitioner employed for some time in the field of interest of SIS. The membership of the Society has been growing over the years.

SIS Functions The SIS functions through four main divisions viz., Computer Applications, Training and Career Development, Information Resources and Reprographics and Micrographics. There are presently also the ad hoc special interest Groups of the Society.

Society’s Programmes The Society has organized many Annual Conventions, one at Hyderabad in 1981, two at Delhi in 1982 and in 1983, the one at Madras in 1984. The SIS has conducted about a dozen specialized short-term courses for information personnel. The Society organized two Refresher Courses in 1985; one on ‘MINISIS’ Package Programme and another on Word Processors, Life Membership of Affiliate Membership or student Membership is open to qualified professionals alone.

Awards The SIS awards fellowships to members in recognition of their outstanding contributions in Information Science and Information Services. There are twelve Fellows of the society.

LA—Library Association (UK) The Library Association (UK) is another oldest and largest library association like ALA. It was founded in 1877 in London as the Library Association of the United Kingdom at First International Conference of Librarians held at Brussels in Oct. 1877. The name of this association was changed in 1896 to Library Association. It started the publication of the Library Association Record as official journal of the Association. It became entirely a professional association in 1992 when new bye-laws came into operation.

Activities and Functions 1. Library Legislation. The Library Association played very important role in promoting legislation in all quarters. The Public Libraries Act of 1892, Public Libraries Act of 1919 and the revision of the bye-laws of the Public Libraries and Museums Act of

Unit-II D 83

2. 3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

1964 were all due to the initiatives taken by Library Association. Library Association has been active in clarifying issues from legislations, whenever situation warrants. Research Programmes. The Library Association has also given prominence to research and developments. It sponsors numerous projects on its own initiatives and resources. In this field it also cooperates with British Library and ASLIB. Conferences and Seminars. The Library Association holds its annual conference regularly. In additions to this, its branches and groups also arrange their own conferences, meetings and study schools, and they release printed proceedings of their conferences. Since some years the Library Association has been organising courses for inspiring librarians, planning syllabus, conducting examinations, and maintaining a professional register. It has also encouraged formation of library schools in the country. Hence it plays an important part in continuing professional education and training programmes. Standards in Libraries. This association has been advocating high standards of library services. Therefore, it has promoted a code of ethics for the library profession. It has taken interest in evolving standards and guidelines of techniques, procedures, equipments, etc., and has been working for the betterment of salary, status and service conditions of library personnels. Relation with Other Institutions. This association is represented in many official bodies and committees and has been offering advisory service and professional assistance in many programmes of library development. It had a role in the establishment of the British Library in 1973. It also collaborates with UNESCO, IFLA and FID and participates in their programmes towards international cooperation and exchange of experience and expertise. It is active in relations with Commonwealth countries and also helped in establishing the COMLA (Commonwealth Library Association.) Publications. This association has its own publication programmes, and its publications are brought out by Library Association Publishing Ltd. The following are its serial publications. (a) Library Association Record (Monthly). (b) Journal of Librarianship (Quarterly). (c) British Humanities Index (Quarterly). (d) Current Technology Index (Monthly). (e) Applied Social Science Index and Abstracts (Bi-weekly). (f) Library and Information Science Abstracts (Bi-monthly). (g) Current Research in Library and Information Science. Awards. This association also distributes awards to recognise excellence and outstanding performance in library field. Some of them are: (a) Carnegie Medal for best children’s book, (b) Kate Greenway Medal for best illustrated children’s book, (c) Wheatley Medal for outstanding index, (d) Besterman Medal for outstanding bibliography, (e) McColvin Medal for best reference work.

84 D Library and Information Science Specific

ASLIB The Association for Special Libraries and Information Bureaux (ASLIB) has earned a great reputation among all other national and international library associations, by its record of professional service. First it was known as the Association for Information Management but now is known as ASLIB. This Association was founded in 1926 as ASLIB. The British Society for International Bibliography was merged into it in 1949. By demonstrating its usefulness, this association could secure the recognition of the British Government as a research association.

Aims and Objectives ASLIB aims to facilitate the coordination and systematic use of sources of knowledge and information in all public affairs and in commerce and industry. It aims to increase the contribution of information to the economic, social and cultural life of the community by the promotion of effective information management.

Organisation (a) Membership. Any corporate body including industrial and business organisations, professional and learned societies, public, academic and national libraries, publishers and database providers can take the membership of this association. (b) No. of Members. There are more than 2000 registered members of this association, and approximately a quarter of which are in the countries other than the UK. (c) Branches. ASLIB has its branches in Scotland, the North of England and Midlands. (d) Groups. Subjects groups have been formed in biological and agricultural sciences, chemistry, economics and business information, electronics, engineering, transport and planning and private view data. There are also technique groups covering translations, informatics and computer applications.

Functions and Activities 1. Information Management. ASLIB is regarded itself as a resource for management. It offers information services to its members. In addition to referral service, it advises its members in practical aspects of information management, such as online information retrieval methods and systems, library automation, networking and local area network, application software and modern library and information resource management. 2. Conferences and Seminars. ASLIB and its various specialist groups organise seminars, conferences, study circles and such other meetings to discuss issues of current importance and relevance to library and information personnels. The papers presented in these meetings get published in its proceedings. The annual conference of this association is devoted to a major theme and it is largely attended. 3. Training Courses. ASLIB organises a number of short courses for both members and non-members. Wide range of topics are covered in training programmes. Most of them have practical value. Near about 40 courses can be organised in a year. The courses are repeated many times on some topics and the main attention is paid to the courses on newly emerging areas. Its training programmes have earned reputation and recognition.

Unit-II D 85 4. Library of ASLIB. The library of ASLIB has 20,000 volumes relevant to documentation and information science and it subscribes several periodicals also. For providing translation services to its members ASLIB keeps registers of specialist translators. It maintains an index of translation into English of articles on scientific and technical subjects. 5. Publications. The occasional publications of ASLIB consist of monographs, directories, reports, proceedings, bibliographies, etc. Its all publications have a wide recognition and appeal for their content and standard. For example, ASLIB’s Handbook of Special Librarianship and Information Work is widely distributed and serves as a valuable guide to develop library and information services and systems. ASLIB serial publications are as follows: (a) ASLIB Proceedings (Monthly) (b) ASLIB Booklets (Monthly) (c) ASLIB Information (Monthly) (d) ASLIB Newsletters (Monthly) (e) Index to thesis (Annual) (f) Journal of Documentation (Quarterly) (g) Program: News of computers in libraries (Quarterly) (h) Forthcoming International Scientific & Technical Conference (Quarterly) (i) Technical Translation Bulletin (3 issues) (j) Netlike (3 issues). 6. Future’s Perspectives. Now the information management is the core programme of ASLIB. It is becoming a service centre. ASLIB will continue to have its influence and impact on special libraries and library field in UK and elsewhere.

SLA— Special Libraries Association Special Libraries Association was founded in 1909 at Bretton conference of ALA. Today its membership is open to librarians and information specialists all over the world who work in special libraries serving business, research, government, universities, newspapers, museums and institutions that use or produce specialized information.

Objectives 1. To encourage and promote the utilization of knowledge through the collection, organization and dissemination of information; 2. To develop the usefulness and efficiency of special libraries or information centres; 3. To stimulate research in the field of information services; 4. To promote high professional standards; 5. To facilitate communication among its members; and 6. To cooperate with organizations that have similar and allied interests.

Membership SLA has the following categories of membership: A. Individual Membership for practising as well as retired professionals (called Retired Member) and those interested in the information field (called Associate Member); B. Students enrolled in a school of library/information science;

86 D Library and Information Science Specific C. Organizations interested in supporting the objectives and programs of the Association; and D. Patron, Sponsor, Sustaining Member for organizations or individuals wishing to support the objectives and programs of the SLA.

ALA—American Library Association American Library Association, which is more popular in its abbreviated name ALA, is professional and national organisation of library personnels of the country USA. The work of forming library association at national level in America was started in 19th century and finally it was established at the time of a conference held in 1876 at Philadelphia. The founder of ALA was Dr. Melvil Dewey, the propounder of the World famous Decimal Classification Scheme. ALA is the biggest association in the world and its head office is at Chicago. ALA has near about 40000 members out of which 32000 are the private persons and 8000 are corporate bodies. Near about 300 staff members are working in its office. The administration of this association is performed by a constituted council of 150 members. The main aim of ALA is to work for the welfare of the library personnels of the country. Its principal aim is to promote friendship among library personnels of the world.

Functions, Activities and Contribution of ALA 1. Training in Librarianship. The first training in library profession in the world was started by Dr. Melvil Dewey, who was the founder of ALA also. He started imparting training in Columbia University of America under one of the proposals of ALA. 2. Progress in Library Science. The progress and developments which are seen today in the field of library science has only been possible due to the establishment and cooperation of ALA. Besides it, there is no such important development in the field of library science, in which ALA has not played its potential role. 3. Professional Education. The most important functions of ALA have been related with the professional education of library staff only. 4. Management of Library Services. The activities of ALA have generally been related with the progress and developments of management of library services of the country to acquire its aims. 5. Library Bill or Rights. This Bill of ALA has been important and according to this Bill every citizen of America is free to consult anything in the library. 6. Censorship Bill. ALA made efforts for enacting the Censorship Bill in the country, which was passed in 1953 with the cooperation of Book Publisher’s Council of America, and the Bill was very useful for librarians for their personal interest. 7. Use of Modern Technology. ALA always made efforts to encourage the use of modern technology in libraries of the country. 8. Publication of Professional Literature. ALA stimulates the publication of professional literature published by other publishers and publishes it itself. 9. Library Service Act. The great success of this association was to do efforts for passing the Library Service Act in 1956 in America and it was revised in 1964 also. 10. Federal Policy. The Council of ALA approved its federal policy in 1965, the meaning of which was related with the progress and development of all types of libraries in the country.

Unit-II D 87 11. Standardization. ALA prescribed some standards for public libraries at time to time. In 1956, seventy survey principles were prescribed for standards of public library services and systems. 12. Publishing Work. This association has been publishing most of the library literature continuously. It has published more than 2000 articles upto now, in which ALA catalogue, AACR, American Library Laws, Books for college libraries are the examples for quotations. American Libraries has been its main periodical which is published eleven times in a year. It has also started publishing of a magazine namely Journal of Information Science and Library Automations. 13. Coordinations. It cooperates and coordinates with other national and international associations also.

Library and Information Service Education in India There are different types of libraries like public libraries, academic libraries (i.e. University, College and school libraries) and special libraries (research libraries, children’s libraries, hospital libraries, prison libraries, libraries for the blind, etc.) Although the mission of all these libraries is information and book service, there are differences in respect of the nature of their book collection, nature of clientele served, organisation and services. Librarians should be concerned with all these and they should form part of the course content of Library and Information Science. Objective of Library and Information Science education can broadly be categorised in two groups viz. (i) General objective; and (ii) course based objective.

General Objectives The objectives enumerated below may be considered to be general objectives i.e., objectives to be fulfilled by all levels of courses: (i) to prepare sufficient and appropriate manpower for the management of libraries at all levels. (ii) to teach and train students in techniques concerning management and housekeeping of libraries. (iii) to acquaint the students with the major branches, concepts, practices and information services in different disciplines (iv) to train working librarians (v) to inculcate in the students the quality of public relation, liaison, and service mindedness.

Course Based Objectives In our country Library and Information Science education is imparted mainly at three levels viz. Certificate, Bachelor, and Master level, besides M.Phil and Ph.D. Level. Some institutions and organizations, mainly polytechnics are conducting Diploma level courses. It is higher than certificate level course but the present Diploma can not be equated with B.Lib & I.Sc. The reason being that minimum qualification for admission to present diploma course (and certificate course too) is 10th or 10 + 2, whereas for admission to Bachelor degree course it is graduation. In other words certificates and diplomas are post matric courses whereas Bachelor of Lib. Sc. course is a postgraduate course. Objectives of these three levels of courses, as suggested by the Review Committee (Ranganathan Committee) set up by the University Grants Commission (UGC) is as under.

88 D Library and Information Science Specific Certificate Course Objectives (i ) To give the student knowledge of the elements of Library Science. (ii ) To train the student in library routine. Scheme of Papers (i) Library routine (ii) Library service and organization (iii) Library classification (iv) Library cataloguing (v) Record of practical work.

B. Lib. Sc. Course The following provisions of the B.Lib. Sc. course form a core showing the necessary items of curriculum for the course. It is possible to have different grouping by different departments in the light of the needs or special facilities available to them. Such a change should always be commensurate with the general standards suggested here. Objectives (i) To give the student an understanding of the basic principles and fundamental laws of library science. (ii) To enable the student to understand and appreciate the functions and purposes of library in the changing social and academic set up of the society. (iii) To train the student in the techniques of librarianship and management of libraries. Scheme of Papers (i) Library Organization (ii) Library Administration (iii ) Physical Bibliography and Book Selection (iv) Document Bibliography and Reference Service (v) Library Classification (Theory) (vi) Library Classification (Practice) (vii) Library Catalogue (Theory) (viii) Library Catalogue (Practice) (ix) Record of Practical Work.

M.Lib. Sc. Course The following provisions of the M. Lib. Sc. syllabus are based on the present practice in the departments of library science conducting the course may vary when departments begin to conduct the course and prefer other kinds of specialization or emphasis. Objectives (i) To acquaint the student with: (a) the organization and development of the universe of knowledge; (b) research organization and research methods. (ii) To give the student specialised knowledge in respect of: (a) kinds of reading and kindred materials, and of documentation lists; (b) different types of libraries. (iii) To make the student proficient in: (a) advanced library techniques in the methodology of documentation; and (b) advanced management and administration of selected types of libraries. Scheme of Papers (i) Universe of Knowledge. Its development and structure; (ii) Depth Classification (Theory); (iii) Depth Classification (Practice); (iv) Advanced Library Catalogue; (v) Any one of the following: (a) Public Library System (b) Academic Library System (c) Research and Technical Library System (d) Documentation; (vi) Project during term time: any one of the following projects: (a) Preparation of a project on an approved topic falling within the area of any one of the subjects offered as an optional paper under (v) above (b) preparation of a documentation list on a approved topic on the basis of a set of approved periodicals for one year.

Unit-II D 89 (vii) Literature survey in one of the following fields; (a) Indology (b) a subject in Humanities, e.g., [(1) Literature (2) Linguistics (3) Religion (4) Philosophy (5) Psychology,] (c) A subject in Social Sciences, e.g., Geography, History, Political Science, Sociology, Law, etc. (d) One of the Pure Sciences. (e) One of the Applied Sciences, e.g. Civil Engineering, Electrical Engineering, Nuclear Engineering, Mechanical Engineering, Production Engineering, Chemical Engineering, Technology, Agriculture, Forestry, Animal Husbandry, Medicine, Pharmacology, etc.

LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE EDUCATION IN INDIA UGC Efforts The UGC efforts in the development of LIS education are well evidenced by the three committees that were constituted to formulate model curriculum and pedagogic guidelines for the LIS courses in India. The Ranganathan reports on University and College Libraries and Library Science Education were the first landmarks in this regard. Later, report of the Kaula Committee on Curriculum Development in LIS Education was published in 1992. This was followed with the Karisiddappa Committee report on Curriculum Development in LIS in 2002. This committee brought into focus the modular approach to curriculum design and expanded it to suit the local needs. The impact of these efforts were first seen in the continuous development of the curriculum with changing times. Second, the UGC recognised LIS as a discipline on par with other pure and applied subjects. Third was the growth of teaching departments in various universities. And finally, it also necessitated the need for qualified personnel to teach the subject, which gave impetus to start the masters and research degrees programmes. Thus the curriculum, developed over the years for the LIS matches with the modern and contemporary developments in the field and has been responsible for the creation of manpower to man the different types of professional responsibilities, in practice and teaching.

Role of Professional Bodies and Other Agencies The role of professional associations in India in the promotion of the LIS education and its systematic development has also been noteworthy. The three main professional associations—the Indian Library Association (ILA), the Indian Association of Special Libraries and Information Centres (IASLIC), and the Indian Association of Teachers of Library and Information Science (IATLIS)—have been holding annual conferences at the national and international levels to take stock of manpower needs and supply of qualified manpower from the departments. In particular, the IATLIS has been focusing much closer on the education sector than the other two; it widened the scope of the membership to practicising librarians so that the teachers and practitioners share a common platform towards the developments of education sector and the needs of the practice sector. The

90 D Library and Information Science Specific IATLIS with ILA and IASLIC also organised jointly a National Seminar on ‘Hundred years of Library Science Education and its Future’ in October 1987. IATLIS and AGLIS again organised jointly a National Seminar on ‘IT and its Impact on LIS Education and Library Management’ in 1996. Two unique courses were developed by the Documentation Research and Training Centre (DRTC) and the Indian National Science and Documentation Centre (INSDOC) to cater to the needs of special libraries in particular. However, the inculcation of the graduates from these institutions in teaching programmes have given a new direction to the educational paradigm of LIS. While DRTC is an autonomous central institute under the Indian Statistical Institute, INSDOC is a constituent centre of the Council of Scientific and Industrial Research. The National Centre for Science Information is also offering a postmasters degree course with intensive application of IT to LIS.

Levels of Courses in LIS in India In India a variety of courses in LIS are offered and as such the learners have a wide choice. From a three months Certificate Course to two years Diploma Courses are available to create para-professionals. The Bachelors, Masters, M.Phil and Ph.D. degree programmes are also offered by most of the universities conducting LIS courses. Even at the Masters’ degree level, there are two courses offering one year BLISc, and one year MLISc or a two years integrated MLISc programme. Besides these, library science is also offered as an optional subject at the three years degree programme to inculcate professional knowledge with college level itself. The UGC report of the CDC gives more details on the structure of these categories.

Distance Education in LIS in India Besides the formal educational programmes in LIS, India also has a good infrastructure of distance education programmes in LIS. As many as 52 universities are offering distance education prgrammes in LIS; some of them such as the Indira Gandhi National Open University (IGNOU) are providing this facility exclusively. IGNOU offers Bachelors, Masters, and Postmasters degrees and even is in the line to extend doctoral programmes in LIS through distance education mode. The course material and the audio-video lessons prepared by IGNOU can match to any international standards in this regard.

Curriculum Development and Research Growth The curriculum of LIS has been continuously revised by the departments at least once in five years. In some cases, it is even once in three years. It takes recourse to the progress of the subject in its various dimensions. The three committees, mentioned already, have been the examples to this continuity of curriculum. The research in LIS in India started at a very slow pace because of the lack of proper identity to the subject. First Ph.D. in LIS in India was awarded in 1950s. The second came only after 20 years. But, today the number of Ph.Ds in LIS far exceeds the time frame; there are 1000 estimated Ph.D. holders in India and each one of them has been guiding several students from their respective departments. In the next five years the number of Ph.D. holders in LIS in India would be around 5000—estimated at about five times more then today. A national meeting on Research in LIS was held in 1994 and numbers of papers on this subject were published to take stock of research output.

Unit-II D 91

Infrastructure and Other Physical Facilities UGC’s initiative in providing adequate infrastructure to the LIS departments has enabled them to equip with IT laboratories to provide intensive training in their use. It is a matter of pride that among the developing nations India has the best suited curriculum with orientation to ‘technology applications’, (India has been the earliest to include a compulsory paper on library automation as early as in 1980s). The National Accreditation and Assessment Council (NAAC) under UGC have provided enough impetus towards creating good infrastructure, for both libraries and teaching departments. The faculty to teach the traditional and IT related subjects is also available in good number as is evidenced by the large number of conferences, workshops and refresher courses organised by several professional bodies, and the Academic Staff Colleges. The IATLIS also organised a National Conference on the Study of the Infrastructure Facilities available in the LIS departments of the country.

IT in LIS Education After the USA, the UK and some European countries, India is one among the few countries, where information and communication technology (ICT)-oriented LIS teaching is being provided. In late 1960s and early 1970s teaching of computer application commenced in Indian library science departments. The courses run by the DRTC and INSDOC also included a paper on ‘library automation’. The starting of the INFLIBNET and the Online Information Retrieval Experiments carried out at National Aeronautical Laboratory and INSDOC gave boost to the inculcation of new technology trends. The contributions of private agencies, in particular the online and CD-ROM database search services started by Informatics (India) are responsible for the initiation of technology culture in Indian libraries and among the library science teachers. A detailed account of technology application in India libraries and library science education has been given by Kumar. The National Information System in Science and Technology/Department of Scientific and Industrial Research (NISSAT/DSIR) and other research and development organisations like Defence Scientific Information and Documentation Centre (DESIDOC) and Sectoral Information Centres under NISSAT have also contributed to this process of technology application in libraries and the manpower development to man many of these libraries and information centres. Today, India with many projects on digital libraries on hand can be considered as technologically advanced in LIS education with IT applications. Many national and international conferences organised in this aspect gives a clear idea of its technological capabilities.

LIBRARY PUBLIC RELATIONS AND EXTENSION ACTIVITIES Libraries play a special role in the modern society. The aim of the modern libraries today is to provide services not only to its registered members but also to every member of the society, so that the libraries may become familiar in the local public. To make the libraries familiar, extension services should be arranged so that the people may get maximum benefit from them.

92 D Library and Information Science Specific Extension services are undertaken in two ways, i.e., internal extension services which are arranged within the libraries. The other one are external extension services which are arranged outside the libraries. In fact, the external extension services are the real extension services. The objective of an extension service is to convert a library into a social, cultural and intellectual centre, which encourages reading. Thus an extension service aims at converting non-readers into readers. It creates and stimulates the desire for good reading. This is done by bringing books and readers together. This results in exploitation and promotion of collection.

Forms of Extension Service The extension service may take the following forms: (i ) To organize reading circles (ii ) To organize reading to illiterates from books or other reading materials; (iii ) To offer meeting place for local learned organizations; (iv) To arrange public lectures and talks by eminent persons; (v) To arrange a drama, a puppet show, a musical concert, a film show, a magic show, etc. (vi ) To arrange for the celebration of festivals; (vii ) To organize a fair; (viii ) To organize library exhibitions relating to various events (local, regional, national or international); and (ix) To organize story hour for children. Few of them have been explained as follows:

(a) Reading Circles A library may organize reading circles. Persons with common subject interest may be brought together by the library to a reading circle. Each reading circle should be given necessary facilities regarding reading materials and a suitable place to hold the meetings. Organization of reading circles is a special feature of public libraries.

(b) Reading to Illiterates In the Indian context, reading hour for adults who cannot read is a special function, which needs to be performed by a public library. If there is no public library in a particular place, then this function should be performed by a school library. The illiterates will thus get education, information, entertainment, inspiration and recreation. It is just possible that some of them might feel inspired to undertake learning and writing. Once they have become neo-literates, then the public library should take upon itself to see it that they do not lapse into illiteracy again. In a developing country like India, large majority of the illiterates are also economically, socially and culturally disadvantaged people. These would include tribals, people belonging to schedule castes and backward classes. Public libraries in India have a special responsibility towards them. In India, there is a lack of suitable literature in Indian languages, which could meet the requirements of illiterates. Therefore, a public library would have to request a

Unit-II D 93 member(s) of the community to translate readily available books into the local language. These may be religious or recreational or books of useful knowledge.

(c) Local Learned Organizations If a library offers a suitable place for meetings of local learned organizations and provides necessary facilities to them, then this will serve as a nice gesture. This will lead to social and personal contacts between leading members of society including scholars and library staff. This will enable library to bring the members of learned organizations and books together to satisfy the third law of library science. As a result, the library will become an intellectual centre of the community.

(d) Public Lectures and Talks A library should organize public lectures and talks by eminent persons and also by the library staff. The subjects to be chosen should be of wide range with special reference to current topics. These should be widely announced. On each occasion information about books available in the library on the concerned topic should be announced.

(e) Cultural Programmes A library may arrange a drama, a puppet show, a music concert, a film show, a magic show, etc. Such a cultural programme can prove great attraction for the community. On such occasions, a book exhibition related to the programme being organized can be arranged. This can help in arousing interest in books on the related subject.

(f ) Exhibitions At the time of a talk, festival, fair, drama, etc. a book exhibition on the relevant topic may be organized. It should be well organized and located at a suitable place so that it attracts every body who comes to attend the event/function. A member(s) of the library staff should be present so that visitors can be assisted in selecting of books to read, if necessary the book(s) can be issued on the spot or reserved for issue later. In organizing book exhibitions, not only books but also other kinds of documents (such as charts, magazines, manuscripts, graphs, gramophone records, microfilms, etc.) can be displayed.

(g ) Story Hour of Children Story hour for children, if planned and implemented properly can prove to be a big attraction. Separate sessions should be organized for different age groups. Similarly drama, puppet shows, talks, etc. can be organized for children group-wise. If well organized, children would love to attend these. However, the aim of a library should be to bring books and readers together. These are not ends but the means.

TYPE OF USERS In the context of database the user is the ‘searcher’ he may be a ‘researcher’; he may be a middle man or a liaison officer in the dissemination of information. Thus, the term ‘User’ is complex, varied and unclear.

94 D Library and Information Science Specific Some characteristics of the main groups of the library users. 1. Academic Users (a) In academic libraries, students, teachers and researchers are the frequent users of the libraries (b) These libraries record the highest level of core demands of their users (c) Academic users make little use of library staff assistance (d) There is low level of urgency (e) There is high use of background material (f) Heavy use of textbooks.

2. Users of Industries (a) In industries the scientific and technological community is more concerned with practical problems (b) These are infrequent users of the library (c) These are more dependent on library staff in using library services (d) There is high demand for specific information and documents (e) There is lower interest in keeping up dated (f) Hardpressed for time (g) Tend to obtain useful results along anticipated lines rather than the unexpected.

3. Government Officials (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

Government officials also are infrequent users of libraries These make more use of outside sources of information Their demands for information are relatively low But demands for specific documents are quite high They make little use of library staff assistance.

Types of Users Studies There have been carried out so far various types of surveys and studies about the information needs of the users. They are as follows:

1. Behaviour Studies The studies and the surveys which are conducted to find out the pattern of overall interaction of the user’s community with the communication system, without reference to any specific information receiving event, are called communication behaviour studies. Perhaps the most comprehensive study of communication was survey conducted by the Operations Research Group of the Case Institute of Technology in 1958. Though the sample of this study was a group of homogeneous users—chemists, yet some of the findings have been found to be universal. This study reveals that scientists generally spend almost half of the time of their working hours in some forms of communication such as pursuing literature, looking up for references, actual reading, talking or listening to a colleague and so on. When this only half of the time is available for actual reading as the other half is spent in

Unit-II D 95 searching and other communication activities. Perhaps two much time is spent in searching for information. If more time is to be spent on actual reading then the searching time has to be cut down, otherwise it would be at the cost of other work. It would be still better if more time could be released for research work. This study also reveals that the locus of half of the reading was within a group of nine periodicals only.

2. Use Studies In the second category, those surveys and studies are placed which are conducted to find out the use of any communication medium, such as a primary periodical, a secondary periodical, etc. In this a large number of surveys have been conducted to find out the relative use of different channels in response to question like, where would you search for information ? Or how did you find the reference? etc. The possible channels that could be named in response to such questions are—by chance, personal recommendation, from abstracting and indexing services, as cited references through regular perusal of journals, etc. In some studies no destination has been made between finding by chance and by regular perusal or between finding by chance and from cited references and so on. As a consequence the results from these surveys are not completely compatible. Even then efforts have been made, from time to time, to compare the findings and find out the reasons for the difference.

3. Information Flow Studies The third category includes surveys which are conducted to find out the pattern of flow of information in the communication system. Information flow studies have been made from different points of view. Some excellent studies have been made by Garvey and Griffith regarding the communication system in the field of Psychology. There appears to be a surprising degree sequence in the system and their findings seem to hold good for the entire science communication system. Here we say about the preparation and communication of an article in the journal. A work published in a journal this month can be said, with a fair degree of accuracy, to have started sometimes 30 to 36 months ago and then must have gone through the subsequent stages of preparation of report, first oral reports, report at a conference, technical report, and then finally writing for the journal. Similarly the same paper would be flowing through the channels of abstracting and reviewing services in the next 21 months. All these events when plotted on a time scale will give the picture as clear.

Methods of Users’ Studies Some of the methods used for these studies have been given here as follows.

1. Measurement of Use This method of assessing users’ needs for information has been quite common among all types of the libraries. Analysis of issue statistics, use of documents by readers within the library, reference questions and similar other records, have yielded useful clues to determine priorities, allocation of funds and other related issues.

2. Surveys of the Users Surveys about the library users have become very widespread in the last 20 years, which have been undertaken to assess the information gathering habits of library users, their

96 D Library and Information Science Specific approach to seek the use of documents, the extent of reliance of collection in libraries, etc. It has been done by interacting with a representative body of the library users, by giving them questionnaires, or by personal interviews or both. These studies have been quite large in academic and special libraries, particularly in the field of science and technology.

3. Community Profiles Most of the public libraries tend to conduct some type of research into the sociological structure of their area and its population, and use this information to draw a variety of inferences about the reading habits of the community. For this community profiles are made to guide selection policies, attempting a more direct method of orienting book and library services to cater the needs of the users.

User Education Libraries are service institutions like hospitals, and the stock of documents they hold, the information these documents carry are all for intensive use. Experiences have shown that our libraries which have a very comprehensive collection of documents are very much unused and under used. This is largely because most of the users are not generally aware either of the collections or the library services. It is, therefore, considered necessary to build skills in users for making full use of libraries. Hence it has become very essential for the libraries to organise and conduct short courses of education and training in the use of libraries and their sources. These courses to educate the users for using the libraries can be broadly grouped under following three categories: (1) User’s Orientation Programmes (2) Bibliographical Guidance Programmes (3) Academic training to use the modern technological gadgets.

1. User’s Orientation Programmes User’s orientation means to familiarise the users with the environment, circumstances, facets of the library, i.e. the users of libraries should get themselves acquainted with the environment of the library, its collections and their physical location in the library, the tools that provide access to the collections and other types of services offered by the library. While this acquaintance with the library, skills to use the library collections and services can be acquired by a person through experience, it is more helpful if a person gets a systematic initiation in the use of libraries and information sources and services. User’s orientation programmes are usually organised of short ones, ranging form one hour introduction to the library and its services, to two or three days programme depending on the types of users. These programmes can be organised for the benefit of various types of users.

2. Bibliographical Guidance Programmes The orientation programmes acquaint the user only with the library collections and services, but do not give detailed instructions to any user on the variety of the collected documents and other problems of their use. It is important to note that these programmes will have to be designed with great care and with imagination so that these courses really help the users to hold themselves in the use of library collection and its system.

Unit-II D 97 Persons actively engaged in higher learning or research projects usually spend a great deal of time on the material for their information needs. These programmes need much more guidance for the use of information sources than a mere orientation to libraries and their services. To know where the information exists, would greatly decrease time spent in searching for information. The solution to this problem is half obtained, where at the moment the user knows the source of information that may suggest a solution. Courses, on bibliographical guidance should usually be offered to research students, scientists, project workers, middle level officers who have the responsibility of collecting information.

3. Academic Training to Use the Modern Technological Gadgets These days, the computer is mostly being used in the house keeping operations and for various services in the libraries. In addition to the use of computers, communication technology has also developed database for the communication of information. This would create a new demand for getting special skills in the use of different technological gadgets such as computer terminals, off and on line searching, inland and foreign database, use of various electronic copiers, use of micro form reader-printer and similar other facilities made available in the libraries. While these education programmes can be part of orientation programmes or bibliographic guidance, it may be necessary to provide exclusive training facilities for the use of technological gadgets. The persons who are supposed to provide such programmes, must be experts in handling these gadgets and equipments. The different aspects that need attention here are the mechanism to access information through machine readable catalogues within the library; online access to foreign database through formulation of queries and search strategies and knowledge of foreign database in different subjects and information relating to business, industry, government affairs, etc.

INFORMATION LITERACY “Information literacy is the set of integrated abilities encompassing the reflective discovery of information, the understanding of how information is produced and valued, and the use of information in creating new knowledge and participating ethically in communities of learning.”  (ACRL Framework for Information Literacy for Higher Education 2015) n In its narrowest sense information literacy includes the practical skills involved in effective use of information technology and information resources, either print or electronic. n Information literacy is a new liberal art which extends beyond technical skills and is conceived as the critical reflection on the nature of information itself, its technical infrastructure and its social, cultural and even philosophical context and impact. n The information literacy curriculum includes: – Tool literacy. The ability to use print and electronic resources including software. – Resource literacy. The ability to understand the form, format, location and access methods of information resources.

98 D Library and Information Science Specific – – –

Social-structural literacy. Knowledge of how information is socially situated and produced. It includes understanding the scholarly publishing process. Research literacy. The ability to understand and use information technology tools to carry our research including discipline-related software. Publishing literacy. The ability to produce a text or multimedia report of the results of research.

Objectives of Information Literacy Within the frame work of the United Nations Literacy Decades (2003-2012), the new Information Literacy Program of UNESCO was launched during 2004-2005. The general objectives are; 1. To foster the development of information literate citizen with the technical and critical thinking skills and abilities needed to identify, acquire, manage and use the information to enrich all aspects of their work and personal lives. 2. To identify and encourage effective practices in information literacy around the world. 3. To promote information literacy through regional approaches and to facilitate exchanges. 4. To propose innovative curricula about information literacy. 5. To improve co-operation between government officials, researchers, educators, librarians, and media practitioners.

Special Aspects of Information Literacy Information literacy consists of the following aspects: n Tool literacy or the ability to understand and use the practical and conceptual tools of current information technology relevant to education and the areas of work and professional life that the individual expects to inhabit. n Resource literacy or the ability to understand the form, format, location and access methods of information resources, especially daily expanding networked information resources. n Social-structural literacy or knowing how information is socially situated and produced. n Research literacy or the ability to understand and use the IT-based tools relevant to the work of today’s researcher and scholar. n Publishing literacy, or the ability to format and publish research and ideas electronically, in textual and multimedia forms (including via World Wide Web, electronic mail and distribution lists, and CDROMs). n Emerging technology literacy, or the ability to adapt to, understand, evaluate and make use of the continually emerging innovations in information technology so as not to be a prisoner of prior tools and resources, and to make intelligent decisions about the adoption of new ones. n Critical literacy or the ability to evaluate critically the intellectual, human and social strengths and weaknesses, potentials and limits, benefits and costs of information technologies.

Unit-II D 99

Development of the Concept A seminal event in the development of the concept of information literacy was the establishment of the American Library Association’s Presidential Committee on Information Literacy whose final report outlined the importance of the concept. The concept of information literacy built upon and expanded the decades-long efforts of librarians to help their users learn about and utilize research tools (e.g., periodical indexes) and materials in their own libraries. Librarians wanted users to be able to transfer and apply this knowledge to new environments and to research tools that were new to them. Information literacy expands this effort beyond libraries and librarians, and focuses on the learner, rather than the teacher (Grassian, 2004; Grassian & Kaplowitz, 2001, pp.1420). The timeline of origin and growth of the Concept of ‘IL’: n 1974. The related term ‘Information Skills’ was first introduced by Zurkowski to refer to people’s ability to solve their information problems by using relevant information sources and applying relevant technology (Zurkowski, 1974). n 1983. ‘A Nation at Risk: The Imperative for Education Reform’ shows that Americans are “rising a new generation of Americans that is scientifically and technologically illiterate.” n 1986. ‘Educating Students to Think: The Role of the School Library Media Program’ outlines the roles of the library and the information resources in school education. n 1987. ‘Information Skills for an Information Society: A Review of Research’ includes library skills and computer skills in the definition of information literacy. n 1988. Information Power: Guidelines for School Library Media Programs. n 1989. National Forum on Information Literacy (NFIL), a coalition of more than 65 national organizations, had its first meeting. n 1998. ‘Information Power: Building Partnerships for Learning’ emphasizes that the mission of the school library media program is to ensure that students and staff are effective users of ideas and information.

Information Literacy is a Life-long Learning Information literacy forms the basis for lifelong learning. It is common to all disciplines, to all learning environments, and to all levels of education. It enables learners to master content and extend their investigations, become more self-directed, and assume greater control over their own learning. An information literate individual is able to: n Determine the extent of information needed. n Access the needed information effectively and efficiently. n Evaluate information and its sources critically. n Incorporate selected information into one’s knowledge base. n Use information effectively to accomplish a specific purpose and n Understand the economic, legal, and social issues surrounding the use of information, and access and use information ethically and legally.

100 D Library and Information Science Specific

Information Literacy Standards for Teacher Education The information Literacy standards for Teacher Education were approved by ACRL board of directors on May 11, 2011. The main purposes of the Information Literacy Standards for Teacher Education are to: n Guide teacher education faculty and instruction librarians in developing information literacy instruction for teacher education students. n Enable the evaluation and assessment of such instruction and curricula through benchmarking outcomes. The Standards also aim to lead teacher education students to consider how they might integrate information literacy into their future curriculum, instruction, and assessment activities once they become members of the teaching profession. n The information literate teacher education student defines and articulates the need for information and selects strategies and tools to find that information. n The information literate teacher education student locates and selects information based on its appropriateness to the specific information need and the developmental needs of the student. n The information literate teacher education student organizes and analyzes the information in the context of specific information needs and the developmental appropriateness for the audience. n The information literate teacher education student synthesizes, processes, and presents the information in a way that is appropriate for the purpose for which information is needed. n The information literate teacher education student knows how to ethically use and disseminate information. Though the standards are used as a guide to assessment, it has been found that use of these standards on the college campuses has not been absolute- rather pieces have been used as a framework for discussion and components have been adopted to reflect the need of constituencies. Cain (2002) has been critical of the standards as an assessment tool. She claimed that assessment tools assume that there is discernible evidence or proof of what is being measured.” Without a concrete understanding of what is meant by information and with thought processes and the like being difficult to measure exactly, applying standards may well result in the measurement of existing knowledge rather than the development of knowledge. The importance of these information literacy standards for higher education lies in the fact that it provides frameworks for teaching information literacy as well as assessing the information literacy level of individuals (Senlson & Stillwell, 2001). The standards can be used to develop information literacy programs and will ensure that information literacy training efforts will be unified and will contribute towards the clarification of desired outcomes (O’Connor, Radcliff, & Gedeon, 2001).

Information Literacy Standards Association of College and Research Libraries (ACRL, 2000), a division of the American Library Association (ALA), released the ‘Information Literacy Competency Standards for Higher Education’. There are five standards, which are directly linked to a host of

Unit-II D 101 performance indicators. These standards and performance indicators are often considered the best practices against which institutions of higher education can implement and assess information literacy programs. The standards are: n Standard One. The information literate student determines the nature and extent of the information needed. n Standard Two. The information literate student accesses needed information effectively and efficiently. n Standard Three. The information literate student evaluates information and its sources critically and incorporates selected information into his or her knowledge base and value system. n Standard Four. The information literate student, individually or as a member of a group, uses information effectively to accomplish a specific purpose. n Standard Five. The information literate student understands many of the economic, legal, and social issues surrounding the use of information and accesses and uses information ethically and legally. These standards are meant to span from the simple to more complicated, or in terms of Bloom’s Taxonomy of Educational Objectives, from the “lower order” to the “higher order”. Lower order skills would involve for instance being able to use an online catalogue to find a book in an academic library. Higher order skills would involve critically evaluating and synthesizing information from multiple sources into a coherent interpretation or argument. There are five standards and twenty two performance indicators for assessing information literacy competency. The standards focus upon the needs of the students in higher education at all levels of education. The standards also list a range of outcomes for assessing students’ progress towards information literacy. These outcomes serve as guidelines for faculty, librarians and others in developing local methods for measuring students learning in the context of an institution’s unique mission.

Information Literacy Model Different models have been developed and propagated by authors, theorists, and academicians. n Information Search process (Kuhlthau C.C., 1993). Information Search process model based on the constructivist approach was developed by Kuhlthau. The model has seven stages which include initiation, selection, pre-focus exploration, formulation, collection, presentation, and assessment. This model demonstrates the users’ approach to the research process and how users’ confidence increases. n Seven Pillars of Information Literacy (Society of College, 1999). SCONUL Advisory Committee on Information Literacy developed Seven Pillars of Information Literacy model in 1999. The model has seven competence levels which include the ability to recognise a need for information, the ability to distinguish way in which the information gap may be addressed, the ability to construct strategies for locating information, the ability to locate and access information, the ability to compare and evaluate information obtained from different sources, the ability to organise, apply and communicate information to others in ways appropriate to the situation and the ability to synthesise and build upon existing information, contributing to the creation of new knowledge.

102 D Library and Information Science Specific n

n

n

The Big 6 Skills (Eisenberg & Berkowitz, 1990). This is a process model developed to solve an information problem. It has 6 stages of the information problem-solving process that students apply in their information problem-solving process, namely task definition, information seeking strategies, location, and access, use of information synthesis and evaluation. Research Process Model (Stripling & Pitts, 1988) is used by students as a guide through the stages of creating a research paper. It has ten steps starting from choosing a research topic and ending with the presentation of the final topic. Pathways to Knowledge (Pappas & Tepe, 2002). The Information Inquiry model by Pappas and Tepe includes pathways to knowledge and is meant to encourage students to continuously explore and re-assess as they go about with their information process. The model has six steps namely appreciation and enjoyment, pre-search, search, interpretation, communication, and evaluation.

U N I T

III

SYLLABUS v v v v

v v v v v v

Information Sources – Nature, Characteristics, Types and Formats. Sources of Information – Primary, Secondary and Tertiary; Documentary and Non-Documentary. Primary Information Sources (Print and Electronic) – Journals, Conference Proceedings, Patents, Standards, Theses & Dissertations, Trade Literature. Secondary Information Sources (Print and Electronic) – Dictionaries, Encyclopedias, Bibliographies, Indexing & Abstracting, Statistical sources, Handbooks and Manuals. Tertiary Information Sources (Print and Electronic)- Directories, Year Books, Almanacs. Reference Sources – Bibliographical, Biographical, Educational, Language and Geographical. Electronic Information Resources – Subject Gateways, Web Portals, Bulletin Boards, Discussion Forums/Groups. Databases: Bibliographic, Numeric, Full text, Multimedia; Open Access Databases. Institutional and Human Resources. Evaluation of Reference Sources and Web Resources.

(103)

104 D Library and Information Science Specific

SOURCES OF INFORMATION (PRIMARY, SECONDARY AND TERTIARY) There are various sources of information which are broadly classified into two categories, viz., Documentary sources, that include primary, secondary and tertiary sources (the primary sources are the first to appear, secondary sources came out next and tertiary sources are the last to appear); and Non-documentary sources (formal and informal).

Documentary Sources Primary Sources Primary sources of information are the first published records of original research and development or description of new application or new interpretation of an old theme or idea. These are original documents representing unfiltered original ideas. These constitute the latest available information. A researcher producing new information can make it available to the particular community through the primary sources. Often, it may be the only source of information in existence. Primary sources are unorganized sources, which are rather difficult to use by themselves. The secondary sources help us to use these. These are important sources of information. These aid the researchers to: (a) keep themselves up-to-date and well informed of the new developments, (b) avoid duplication in research, and (c) help others to build on this by means of further work and thus generate more information. Primary sources are published in a variety of forms. Normally, these take the form of a journal article, research monograph, research report, patent, dissertation, etc. Some of these may be unpublished. These are described below: (i) Periodicals. Periodicals include journals, bulletins, transactions, proceedings or similar works, which appear regularly and continuously in numbered sequence. However, the newspapers and annuals are excluded. The bulk of primary source literature appears in the form of periodicals. There are many periodicals which are exclusively devoted to reporting original researches. The periodical article is the main means of communication for the exchange of scientific information. The same can be said about many other areas of knowledge. It may be pointed out that an article in a journal would be considered a primary source if it contains information representing original thinking or a report of a new discovery of something. (ii) Research Monographs. Research monographs are “separately published reports on original research that are too long, too specialized, or otherwise unsuitable for publication in one of the standard journals. Each monograph is self-contained, frequently summarizes existing theory or practice before presenting the author’s original and previously unpublished work, and is likely to be one of a series of such research monographs in the same field.” (iii) Research Reports. Research reports are reports regarding research and development projects. These are primitive form of literature because these are produced earlier

Unit-III D 105

(iv)

(v)

(vi)

(vii)

(viii)

in a research programme. Often these take the form of progress reports which serve as temporary reference. Due to the inadequacies of the periodicals, research reports issued as separate documents offer a successful alternative. These form vital part of primary sources especially in the areas of aeronautics and applied atomic energy. Patents. A patent is a government grant of exclusive privilege which allows making use or selling of a new invention for a term of years. A patent takes the form of an official document, having the seal of government attached to it, which confers an exclusive privilege or right over a period of time to the proceeds of an invention. Patents are regarded as a part of the primary sources because an invention has to be new, only then it can be patented. Standards. Standards form primary source of information. The importance of standards can be gauged from the fact that progress of modern society would be difficult without standards. These lead to simplification of production and distribution of products produced by a manufacturer. These ensure reliability for the consumers. As a result of standardisation, those items which do not follow prescribed standards get eliminated from the market. A typical standard is a pamphlet covering definitions, methods, properties, measurements, etc. Trade Literature. Trade literature is an important source for getting information about particular products and their development. Often, it may be the only source for such information. As such, when the required information is not available elsewhere, then particular trade literature may become a primary source. Trade literature aims to describe and also illustrate equipment or goods or processes or services relating to manufacturers. The basic objective of such a literature is to sell products produced by a manufacturer or to advance the prestige. Dissertations. Universities normally require a candidate working towards a doctorate degree to write a dissertation (sometimes called thesis) under the supervision of a guide. These are usually expected to show evidence of original research, and are supposed to form an important category of documents for researchers in the concerned field. These should be considered primary sources of information. Much of what is worthwhile in dissertations is later published in the primary periodicals or books but frequently certain data relating to an important original work may never get included in traditional forms of literature. Unpublished Sources. There are certain primary sources of information, which remain unpublished. Very often, these may be consulted for historical interest. In some of the subjects in social sciences, their percentage is as high as 40 per cent of the total literature. Examples: (a) Laboratory notebooks (b) Memoranda (c) Diaries (A diary is a personal record of what interested the diarist, usually it is kept from day-to-day) (d) Letters to or from a particular individual (e) Company files (f) Internal research reports

106 D Library and Information Science Specific (g) (h) (i) (j)

State papers Inscriptions on tombstones Portraits Oral history (Oral history memoirs are records of interview. It consists of a systematic attempt to obtain from the lips of living persons, who led significant lives, a fullest record of their contribution to the political, economic and cultural life of their nation. It can be both detailed and as intimate as any private correspondence and often more reflective in nature. The interviewer and the subject can also verify the transcript). (k) Coins, etc.

Secondary Sources Secondary sources of information are those which are either compiled from or refer to primary sources of information. These contain information regarding primary or original information. The original information having been usually modified, selected or reorganized so as to serve a definite purpose or group of users. Such sources contain information arranged and organized on the basis of some definite plan. These contain organized repackaged knowledge rather than new knowledge. Information given in primary sources is made available in a more convenient form. Due to their very nature, secondary sources are more easily and widely available than primary sources. These not only provide digested information but also serve as bibliographical key to primary sources of information. The primary sources are the first to appear, these are followed by secondary sources. Secondary sources are described as follows: (i) Periodicals. All periodicals do not report original work. There are a number of periodicals which specialise in interpreting and providing opinions on developments reported in primary sources of information. Such periodicals may be considered as secondary sources. (ii) Indexes. An Index to a work contains an alphabetical list of names, topics, places, formulae, titles of any significant item referring to material presented in the main part of the work. Sometimes, these items may be arranged chronologically, geographically or in some other way. A well compiled index adds to usefulness of a work. (iii) Bibliographies. A bibliography is an organized list of primary or other sources relating to a given subject(s) or person. It is usually arranged alphabetically by author or chronologically or topic-wise. It may be comprehensive or selective. Sometimes, it may be provided with annotations. It may be published as a part of a larger work or as a separate work. The basic aim of a bibliography is to assist the user in locating the existence of or identifying a book or any other material which may be of interest to him. A well prepared bibliography provides a definitive coverage of documents over a period of time within specified limits. Thus, it also serves the purpose of retrospective searching of literature. (iv) Indexing Periodicals. An indexing periodical is a regularly issued compilation of titles of articles that appear in current primary source journals. Generally, titles of new books, pamphlets, etc., are also included. (v ) Abstracting Periodicals. Abstracts appear in different formats. The best known format for abstracting services is periodical. An abstracting periodical “is a regularly

Unit-III D 107

(vi)

(vii)

(viii)

(ix)

(x)

(xi)

issued compilation of concise summaries of (i) significant articles (often in a very limited subject field) that appear in current primary source journals, and (ii) important new research monographs, reports, patents, and other primary source publications in that field.” An abstracting periodical serves as an index, a tool for retrieval of information on a specific subject and provides survey of current state of the art about the specific subject. However, indexing periodicals are earlier to appear than abstracting periodicals. Reviews (Survey Type). A review is a survey of the primary literature. It aims to digest and correlate the literature over a given period. It also indicates the developments and trends in the concerned field. It may appear as a collection of papers on regular basis (annual or quarterly or monthly) or in the form of an article in a periodical. A review provides background information to a new problem in a suitable form and serves as a key to literature. List of references given in a review can serve as a first rate bibliography of the concerned subject for a period covered by it. Treatises. A treatise is a comprehensive compilation or summary of information on a subject. A treatise on a subject provides enough information to a person to acquire basic knowledge, so essential for carrying out advanced research. It also provides facts, along with discussion. The facts may include physical constants, methods of preparation and purification of compounds., etc. Usually, it is limited to a broad field (e.g., Organic Chemistry, Heat, Light, etc.) Due to the very nature, these become out of date within a short period of time. Monographs. A monograph is a short treatise on a specific subject. A monograph and a treatise serve the same purposes with the difference that a monograph is an attempt on a limited scale. Very often, a monograph may be brought out as a part of a series. Textbooks. The primary aim of a text book is not to impart information about a specific subject but to enable one to develop proper understanding of the subject. Presentation is extremely important and it is prepared to serve a particular level of readership. It cannot be comprehensive. Often presentation is colourful and attractive, giving plenty of illustrations and diagrams. A good textbook takes into consideration the method of teaching and level of readership. Keeping in view new developments and changing methodology of teaching, it is generally revised from time to time. Reference Books. These form an important part of secondary source of information. Reference books, which contain the desired information itself are considered secondary sources of information. These include encyclopaedias, dictionaries, handbooks, tables, formularies, etc. These are sources of ready reference. These are compiled so that everyday information can be provided readily. Encyclopaedias. An encyclopaedia gives information on all branches of knowledge or a specific subject. It is an ideal book, which deals with concepts. An encyclopaedia is a storehouse of knowledge giving all information of significance. However, it is best used for finding answers to background questions related to general information and self-education. One often turns to encyclopaedias for one’s every day information requirements. This is also true of scientists and technologists.

108 D Library and Information Science Specific (xii) Dictionaries. A dictionary deals with words of a language or of some special subjects, authors, etc. Thus a dictionary is a word book. Although a dictionary is supposed to deal with words but often it may go beyond this. (xiii) Handbooks. A handbook is a compilation of miscellaneous information in a compact and handy form. It contains data, procedures, principles, etc. Tables, graphs, diagrams and illustrations are provided. Scientists and technologists use handbooks in their fields rather frequently. (xiv) Manuals. In common practice, a manual is an instruction book, which instructs how to do something by means of specific and clear directions. (xv) Tables. Many of the handbooks contain data in the form of tables. Some of the handbooks devote substantial portion of the work to tables as compared with text. Tables are a convenient form to present data (e.g., density, melting points, atomic weights, boiling points, reactions, etc.). These are extremely useful in science especially physical sciences and technology. (xvi) Translations. Translations are an important part of secondary sources. Their characteristics are the same as those of primary or secondary or tertiary sources from which these are translated. Many of the authors of research papers prefer to cite original sources rather than translations.

Tertiary Sources Tertiary sources of information contain information distilled and collected from primary and secondary sources. The primary function of tertiary sources of information is to aid the searcher of information in the use of primary and secondary sources of information. Most of these sources do not contain subject knowledge. Due to increase in literature, tertiary sources are becoming increasingly important. Out of various kinds of sources, tertiary sources are the last to appear. These are described as below: (i) Bibliography of Bibliographies. A bibliography of bibliographies lists bibliographies which direct readers to useful bibliographies through subject, name of an individual place, institution, etc. The bibliographies referred to may be in the form of a separately published book or part of the book or part of a periodical article or some other type of document. As the number of bibliographies published every year is large, therefore, bibliographies of bibliographies are highly selective in nature. (ii ) Directories. A directory is a list of names and addresses of persons, organizations, manufacturers; or periodicals. It may list information in a way which best serves the requirements of its users so as to enable them to get the required information readily. The word ‘directory’ may or may not appear in the title. The range of subjects dealt by directories is tremendous. (iii) Guides to Literature. A guide to literature assists a user to use literature of a specific subject. It helps to evaluate and introduce literature. It lays emphasis on literature rather than the content of a specific subject. It mainly covers secondary and tertiary sources.

Non-documentary Sources Non-documentary sources of information form a substantial part of communication especially in science and technology. Users studies have underlined importance of such sources. These sources provide information which other sources do not. There are two

Unit-III D 109 kinds of sources (formal and informal). Formal sources include research organizations, societies, industries, government departments, universities, consultants, etc. Informal sources include conversation with colleagues, visitors, attendance at professional meetings, etc. Very often, the conversation or discussion would point out primary or secondary sources (documentary sources). Informal sources are live sources, which are extremely important in the process of communication. Very often, if a scientist working on an experiment needs some data, he would turn to his colleague working in the same laboratory rather than consult a printed page. Informal sources tend to be more convenient sources because it is certainly easier to have a dialogue with an expert than use a bibliography or index or card catalogue or even consultation of a reference librarian. The documents essentially are monologues but a dialogue with a human being can assist in clarifying one’s requirement for information.

REFERENCE SOURCES These are encyclopaedias, dictionaries, geographical sources, biographical sources, yearbooks/ almanacs, directories and handbooks, statistical (salient features and evaluation). Reference sources are meant for preliminary perusal and casual consultation. Hence, these are less frequently used. Those works are also described as approach material as the entries in a reference work provide a basic information on a subject. In order to provide quick reference, mostly the entries in a reference work are arranged alphabetically. Each entry is an independent piece of information, not related with the earlier entry. A reference work is compiled and edited by an individual or a team, with several contributors, who are generally experts on various branches. The volume of reference work are set in a definite pattern with regard to contents, presentation and format. The volume of reference work are definitely voluminous and thus difficult to revise and keep it up-to-date. Generally some of the reference works are supported by annual supplements to keep up-to-date. As reference books do not warrant continuous reading and as they are costly and abnormal they are to be consulted within the premises.

Evaluation of Reference Books Reference books are different in their purpose from ordinary books, therefore, a different approach is required for their study and evaluation. It is convenient to lay down check points for their appraisal. These points are mentioned below : (a) Authority. The authoritativeness of a reference book can usually be judged on the basis of qualifications, experience and reputation of the sponsoring body (if any), publisher, distributor, author(s), editor(s), compiler(s). (b) Scope. The scope of a reference book can be understood properly by finding out answers to the following questions: What is the purpose of the work as stated by the editor himself? Has this purpose been fulfilled in the main work?

110 D Library and Information Science Specific

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

(g)

Does it follow a definite plan consistently? What is the extent of supervision provided by the editor(s)? What are the limitations with regard to subject, class of readers, up-to-dateness of materials? What is the overall coverage? Treatment. How thorough, reliable and complete is the information, e.g. facts, statistics, place-names, names of persons, names of organizations, bibliography, whichever is applicable? Does it show any bias on controversial topics? Has the space allocated for a topic related to the degree of importance attached to a topic? Has the work been written for scholars or laymen, adults or children? How readable is the writing? Arrangement. It is essential that one should be able to locate information easily and quickly. Good arrangement adds to the value of a reference book. The kind of arrangement used should have a sound basis such as chronological or geographic or alphabetical or some other. Index to the main text is extremely important. The index should be detailed one providing reasonable number of approaches complemented by cross references. The index can be alphabetical or classified or some other. Special Features and Drawbacks. The answers to the following questions will bring out the concerned information: What distinguishes it from other reference books of similar type? Does it include supplementary lists or appendices? Are the bibliographies up-to-date and useful? What are the devices used to keep it up-to-date? Format. Format refers to binding, quality of paper, typefaces, page make up, illustrations, plates, diagrams, maps, etc. Do binding, quality of paper, typefaces and layout satisfy the minimum specifications? (Binding is of special consideration for bulky works likely to be used heavily.) Are the illustrations, plates, diagrams, maps, etc., of good quality and well produced? Are these directly related to the main text? Conclusion. Conclusion should include overall judgement about the reference books. It should also include answers to the following questions: Should it be recommended for a library or not? If so, indicate the kind of library which will benefit most. Different types of reference sources are mentioned below.

Encyclopaedias An encyclopaedia is a work, which represents synthesis of knowledge. It attempts to bring some order to the knowledge, reflecting state of knowledge as it exists during the period of its compilation. Earlier encyclopaedias were intended for intellectual elite but present day encyclopaedias are directed mostly to general readers. Now-a-days, many encyclopaedias are being brought out, which are directed towards a particular kind of readership. The contents and the style of writing are adopted to serve the requirements

Unit-III D 111 of these, such as children, laymen, specialists in the subject, young people, etc. Usually readers expect anything and everything from a general multi-volumed encyclopaedia, such as Encyclopaedia Americana or New Encyclopaedia Britannica. However, no encyclopaedia can claim to be complete and inclusive. Therefore, the editor of an encyclopaedia has to use his judgement to provide right kind of articles to serve the requirements of expected audience in an effective manner. An encyclopaedia is a compendium of knowledge. Knowledge is related to kind of readership, which an encyclopaedia intends to serve. An encyclopaedia can either be general or a specialized one. A general encyclopaedia is a systematic summary of all information, which may be considered significant to mankind. Similarly, the same can be said about a specialized encyclopaedia in the concerned field of knowledge or area of interest. The general encyclopaedia is a work containing information articles giving essential general information on subjects in various branches of knowledge, arranged alphabetically by subject and names. The specialized encyclopaedia is a work containing informational articles giving essential general information limited to a special field of knowledge or area of interest, arranged alphabetically by subject and names. Encyclopaedias serve the following purposes: (i ) Provide facts. (ii ) Provide illustrations (children’s encyclopaedias are especially useful for coloured illustrations), (iii ) Provide ideas of a particular period (earlier editions of encyclopaedias can also be used for this purpose), (iv) Provide different point of views on a given topic (by reading the description of a topic in different encyclopaedias), (v) Provide valuable bibliographies, which are appended to principle articles. These assist a reader to locate additional readings on a given subject. This can be useful for a specialist or a student or layman depending upon the nature of bibliographies provided. The few leading general encyclopaedias are as follows: (a) Hindi Visva-Bharati (b) Hindi Visvakosa (c) New Encyclopaedia Britannica (d) Encyclopaedia Americana (e) Colier’s Encyclopaedia Specialized encyclopaedias are as follows: (a) Encyclopaedia India (b) Encyclopaedia of Library and Information Science (c) Encyclopaedia of Religion and Ethics (d) International Encyclopaedia of Social Sciences (e) Mc Graw-Hill Concise Encyclopaedia of Service and Technology (f) Van Nostrand’s Scientific Encyclopaedia.

112 D Library and Information Science Specific

Dictionaries A dictionary contains the words of a language or the terms of a subject, profession or vocation arranged according to some definite order usually alphabetical one giving their meaning, pronunciation, spelling, syllabication, use, etc. Thus, a dictionary is concerned with the word. On the other hand, an encyclopaedia gives information regarding the thing represented by the word. Thus, the basic difference between the two is that a dictionary defines words and an encyclopaedia provides general information about topics. The making of a dictionary is a big job carried out by lexicographers. This requires collection of a large amount of data about the language or language(s) in a careful manner. The data is then classified and sound conclusions are drawn. Next step consists of presentation of information in the form of definitions and other necessary explanations. The quality of a dictionary depends upon the experience, accuracy and capability of the editors involved in the work. The following are the alternative names of dictionaries (i ) Glossary (a list of terms alongwith some explanation in a special field); (ii ) Thesaurus (a treasury of words); and (iii ) Lexicon (a dictionary of some foreign languages). For our purpose, we may divide dictionaries into the following types: (a) General dictionaries; Unabridged and desk dictionaries; (b) Subject dictionaries (c) Supplementary language books or word books, which deal with words or aspects of words, namely quotations, synonyms, antonyms, usage, abbreviations, slang, dialect, rhyme, grammar, etc. These can also be called special purpose dictionaries. These supplement general language dictionaries. These have a wide range and variety.

Uses The following are the main uses of a dictionary: (i ) To check the spelling, syllabication and hyphenation of a word (ii) To find the meaning of words, phrases and expressions (iii ) To check the pronunciation of a word. The other uses, which are secondary in nature are: (i ) (ii ) (iii ) (iv) (v) (vi ) (vii ) (viii )

To trace the history of a word including its origin, derivation, etc. To determine the usage of a word in terms of current, archaic, rare, slang, etc. To indicate the dialect, if any To determine abbreviations, acronyms, signs and symbols To determine synonyms, antonyms and homonyms To indicate major place names (rivers, mountains, cities, etc.) To indicate major personal names from history, mythology To list foreign terms (a dictionary for English language may include terms like sine qua non, modus operandi, ad hoc, etc. which are foreign terms) (ix) To provide quotations (some dictionaries contain illustrative quotations, which can often be used or identify a given quotation). The dictionaries may be many as: (a) The Oxford English Dictionary

Unit-III D 113 (b) (c) (d) (e) (f )

Webster’s New Recreational Dictionary of the English Language Funk and Wagnall’s New Dictionary of the English Language Random House Dictionary of the English Language Roget’s International Thesaurus Comprehensive English-Hindi Dictionary by Governmental and Educational Words and Phrases (g) Comprehensive English-Hindi Dictionary (h) Bhargava’s Standard Illustrated Dictionary of English Language — Anglo-Hindi, etc.

Geographical Sources The improvement in the means of communication has led to increase in travel all over the world. As a result the people are becoming more interested in knowing about the places they would like to visit or have already seen. There is also increasing emphasis on the teaching of geography. Geographical sources consist primarily of graphic representations. Most of them are produced through team effort. These are made use of to find out answers to geographical questions. Geographical questions are concerned with information about places such as cities, towns, mountains, lakes, rivers, forests, etc., regarding their location, description and other details. For instance, location of Varanasi, distance between Delhi and Jaipur, population of Tokyo, etc. Sources of information, which can be used for getting geographical information are as follows: (i) Bibliographies and Indexes. Bibliographies are useful for locating geographical sources. Indexing and abstracting periodicals are helpful for locating articles on cities, towns, places of interest, etc. These do not contain the information itself but direct one to sources, which contain information. (ii) Encyclopaedias. These are extremely useful sources of geographical information regarding countries, states, cities, etc. These are also good sources for maps. But for small areas and thematic maps, one should consult geographical sources. Encyclopaedias provide enough information about historical and socio-economic aspects of places covered by it. In this respect, encyclopaedias are superior to geographical sources. Besides, the articles in encyclopaedias are usually more detailed and comprehensive covering many facets. On the other hand description given in a gazetteer lays emphasis on geographical details (iii) Dictionaries. These provide definitions of geographical terms. These also help in the identification of large cities and towns. Very often, these provide population figures for countries, states, towns, etc. (iv) Sources of Statistics. These provide data in tabular forms and also thematic maps. Sources of statistics, very often, give geographical data in readily accessible form. (v) Biographical Sources. These are extremely useful for biographies of geographers and cartographers. (vi) Geographical Sources. These are specific sources, which are specifically prepared to provide geographical information. These occur in large variety, varying in scope and form. For our purpose, we may recognize the following types of geographical sources.

114 D Library and Information Science Specific (a) Gazetteers, (b) Guide books, (c) Atlases, maps and globes. (a) Gazetteers. A gazetteer is a geographical dictionary of places arranged alphabetically. It serves as a finding list for geographical places like towns, cities, oceans, rivers, lakes, mountains, etc., giving indication about location (usually in the form of exact latitude and longitude) and a brief description (such as pronunciation, population, area, historical and socio-economic information, etc.). It is essential that it should provide officially standardized form of spelling of placenames, alongwith cross-references to variant spellings. The emphasis should be on inclusiveness of entries. The information should be up-to-date. The following criteria may be laid down for the evaluation of a gazetteer: Authority, scope, number of entries, arrangement, amount of information, special features, drawbacks and conclusion. Authoritativeness of the work can usually be judged on the basis of the reputation of the sponsoring body (if any), publisher, distributor, author or compiler. In this regard, it is essential to know the subject and academic qualifications of the author or compiler. Scope refers to the limitations of the work as stated by the author or compiler, with regard to geographical area covered or limitations of some other kind. For instance, Webster’s Geographical Dictionary is an international gazetteer but does not include towns under 1500 population in the US and under 25,000 in Japan, China, and the USSR. Number of entries, gives some idea about the comprehensiveness of the work. The number of cross references indicates the adequacy or inadequacy of such a provision. Usually the arrangement of entries is alphabetical by place-name. Items of information may include name of place, pronunciation, location, area, population, geographical and physical description, economic and historical data, etc. A detailed account would enhance the value of a gazetteer. (b) Guide Books. Due to improvement in the means of communication, more and more people are beginning to travel. Those who want to travel require the help of guidebooks. A guidebook is defined as, “a handbook for travellers that gives information about a city, region or country or a similar handbook about a building, museum, etc.” The aim of a guidebook is primarily to tell the traveller as to what he should see, where he should stay, where he should take his food, and how he should reach the place. This type of reference book is a handy work, easy to carry and handle, written for travellers. It is supposed to contain enough local information about countries, places (sights worth seeing, places of amusements, etc.), routes, accommodation, exchange rate, fares, climate, custom duty, etc. It should include all that a traveller to a new place would like to know. These are very useful in a reference section for historical and geographical information. For certain kind of local information, such as local maps, plans of cities, places worth visiting, places of amusements, etc., these are certainly more useful than gazetteers as these tend to provide detailed information. (c) Maps, Atlas and Globes. Maps, atlases and globes form important sources of geographical information. These are necessary reference sources in any type of library. Indian libraries have not given enough attention to this kind of materials.

Unit-III D 115 A map is defined as, “a representation of a part or the whole of the surface of the earth or of a celestial body, delineated on a plane surface, each point in the drawing intended to correspond to a geographical or a celestial position.” Thus a map is a representation of the outer boundaries of a part or the whole of the earth or moon or planets on a plane surface. A map may be of a city or village or of a smaller area irrespective of the scale or extent of area. There are a variety of maps such as physical map, political map, route map, thematic map, etc. An atlas is a volume consisting of a collection of maps. These vary a great deal in quality and also are pretty expensive. Therefore, these must be selected carefully, keeping in view the views of the experts. One should examine these personally for their suitability. It may be mentioned that general atlases, which cover the whole world differ a great deal in their content. For example, an American atlas will include more or larger maps for American regions. Evaluation of maps can be done by considering following points: Authority (Name and nationality of the maker would indicate quality of the work), Date (Indicates currency which is an important consideration as place names change frequently), Method of showing relief (Has the method been used effectively?), Types of maps (political, physical, historical, etc.), Projection, scales, size of maps, Use of colours (have colours been used purposefully?), Showing of details (How effectively the details have been shown?) Accuracy (Are the maps accurate in the matter of details?), Evaluation of atlas can be done by following points: Authority (The experience and reputation of publisher, editorial staff and special contributors) Scope and purpose, Currency (Dates of publication, copyright, preface and revision would indicate currency), Arrangement and organization of maps, text and indexes, Range and quality of maps (A good map should be accurate, easy to read and good to look at), Quality of index, Supplementary matter such as bibliographies, charts, illustrations, tables, photographs, descriptive text, statistical information, etc.,

Year Books, Almanacs (i ) Year Book is an annual volume of current information in descriptive and/or statistics form, sometimes limited to a special field. It is annual compendium of current information. It aims to cover activities, which have taken place during a period of one year. Sometimes, it may be restricted by subject or country or region. Although a yearbook is likely to provide fairly recent information, yet in case of changes which might have taken place subsequent to its publication, one should examine publications called current reference sources.

116 D Library and Information Science Specific (ii ) Almanac is (a) Annual Publication containing a calendar, frequently accompanied by astronomical data and other information. (b) An annual yearbook of statistics and other information sometimes in a particular field. These are cheap enough and cover much common ground. However, each has certain special features. These heavily derive from government sources for statistics. These mainly carry the same basic information from year to year but for updating and revision of information. Revision becomes necessary to keep the size within reasonable limit. Year books, almanacs usually contain the following kinds of information: (i ) Chronological list of the important events of the year, (ii ) Summaries of the political, social and cultural events of the year, (iii ) Major developments and trends in various fields including science and technology during the year, (iv) Short biographies of notable living persons and also obituaries of leading personalities, (v) Information about organizations, (vi) Statistical information about different fields including about important sports events, prizes, awards, population, etc. (vii ) In short, relatively brief current information on a subject or person or organization or event. These sources of information may be used to find answers to following questions: (i ) Who won a Noble Prize in Physics last year? (ii ) What were the important developments in chemistry during last year? (iii ) Who won Wimbledon’s single’s final in last year? (iv) What were the trends in fashion in last year? (v) Which were the outstanding movies of last year? Some other information a year book can provide is as follows: (i ) (a) Important Indian events of last year, and (b) Important events of the world which happened during last year, (ii ) Address of Advertising Manager, the Times of India, (iii ) (a) Book production for last year and (b) number of books published in political science in last year in India. (iv) Number of cinemas in Delhi and their seating capacity. (v) Length of Indian border adjoining its neighbouring countries. (vi) List of book clubs in UK. (vii) How many languages and dialects are spoken in India, (viii) Who elects the President in India and his powers, (ix) Percentages of illiterates in states in census, (x) How many states were merged in 1947 with India and Pakistan respectively. (xi) National bird of India. (xii) Outline of the constitutions of USA and France, (xiii) Difference between UN and UNO, (xiv) Complete list of Noble Prize winners in medicine, (xv) Who won the Davis cup in previous year,

Unit-III D 117 (xvi) (xvii) (xviii) (xix) (xx) (xxi) (xxii) (xxiii) (xxiv) (xxv) (xxvi) (xxvii) (xxviii) (xxix) (xxx) (xxxi) (xxxii) (xxxiii) (xxxiv) (xxxv) (xxxvi) (xxxvii) (xxxviii) (xxxix) (xl) (xli) (xlii) (xliii)

Names of outstanding movies of the past year, Salaries of the Prime Minister of UK and President of USA, Name of Indians, who have won a Noble Prize, Names of currencies used in Germany, Italy and Peru, Names of commonwealth countries, Names of national laboratories in India, Length of river Nile, Height of Mount Everest, Amount of wheat produced in Andhra Pradesh, Names of seven wonders of the world, Total amount of money given as award to a Nobel Prize winner, Longest river of the world, Highest dam in the world, Major item of export from India, Capital of Nova-Scotia, Fastest train in the world and its speed, Names of countries, which are the members of UNO, City having largest population, Pension paid to the President of India, National Anthem of India, Average rainfall in Delhi, Number of radio stations in India, Brief account about the activities of UNESCO, Location of major steel plants in India, Total number of post offices in India, Functions of ILO, The official language of Denmark, Recent developments in physics.

Directories A directory is “a list of persons or organizations systematically arranged, usually in alphabetic or classes order, giving addresses, affiliation, etc., for individuals and addresses, officers, functions and similar data for organization.” In practice the term directory is employed in a wider sense. Even a list of periodicals or newspapers or places may be termed a directory. The amount of information provided varies from one directory to another. Usually alphabetic arrangement is used in such a list.

Types of Directories There are following types of directories: (a) General. International, National/Regional, local. (b) Others. Scientific and learned societies, trades, professions, etc. Majority of directories are brought out by commercial firms (Publishers). Telephone companies also publish a very large number of directories. Government agencies form a large publisher in this area. Associations bring out directories relating to their members.

118 D Library and Information Science Specific Handbooks and Manuals A handbook is a compilation of miscellaneous information in a compact and handy form. It may contain data, procedures, principles, etc. Tables, graphs, diagrams, and illustrations are provided. Scientists and technologists use handbooks in their field rather frequently. In common practice, a manual is an instruction book, which provides instructions as how to perform a job or how to do something by means of specific and clear directions. Information that may be located in current reference services, Sources of statistics, handbooks and manuals.

Current Reference Sources [Illustration for a year in late 70s] (i) Summary of news about bomb explosion, which killed L. N. Mishra (Minister of Railways, Government of India). (ii) Summary of news about relations between Bangladesh and India during 1976. (iii) News summary of Agricultural Prices Commission’s (India) recommendations (1975). (iv) Development of Bauxite in Ghana (1974): A summary of news. (v) Results of general elections to the Lok Sabha (India) held in April 1977. (vi) Brief summary of Sarkaria Commission’s report (India) 1977. (vii) Summary of news about trial of Bhutto (ex-Prime Minister of Pakistan).

Sources of Statistics (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii)

Number of books published in India in 2014. Net area under irrigation in the states of Indian union in 2012. Average yield of principal crops in India. Population of Meerut district. Number of states and districts in India. Number of daily newspapers published in UK. Number of foreign tourists, who visited France in 2015.

Handbooks and Manuals (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) (x) (xi) (xii)

Who invented tooth brush? Who was the first man to jump off the Brooklyn Bridge? Who invented can opener? Who was the first person to be conferred Doctor of music in United States? Date of the laying of cornerstone of Capital of the United States. Melting point of copper. Properties of sulphuric acid. Density of gold. Formula for calculating illumination of surface. Formula for calculating correlation between two variables. How to identify gems? Formulae for normal distribution density function (Gaussian function), harmonic mean, Pearson correlation coefficient. (xiii) How to transplant roses?

Unit-III D 119

Bibliographical Sources Bibliographies, Union Catalogues, Indexing and Abstracting Journals The bibliography is defined as, ‘the list of written, printed or otherwise produced record of civilization, which may include books, serials, pictures, films, maps, records, manuscripts and any other media of communications’. The best known bibliography in a library is the card catalogue which helps to identify and locate books in a particular library, but it fails when a particular book is not available in the collection of a library. For location of such book or books, one has to consult other bibliographical tools. “Bibliography is a complex structure of lists which extends from the local library to the region, nation and world. A bibliography records not only what is available, but what has been available in the past and what will be available in the immediate future.”

Functions of Bibliography (a) Its aim is to make it possible for intellectual workers, to learn of publications recording the developments in their fields of interest not only in their own countries but also throughout the world. (b) Promote the effectiveness of a particular project in research. (c) Contribute to the cultural development and enjoyment which are derived from records of learning and culture. (d) Assist in promoting useful applications of existing knowledge and in making the applications which have been developed in one country, widely known to all countries.

Types of Bibliography (a) Incunabula or Book Rarities. This type of bibliography lists the early printed material upto 15th century. It was considered a cradle period of printing and the systematic order in arranging various parts of a book was not followed. (b) Universal or General Bibliography. A universal bibliography is the survey of all records of civilization in all fields of knowledge and is not restricted by time, place, language, subject or author. It should include all published materials, whether books or parts of them, or periodicals or articles in them, or combination of them on all subjects, in all languages, in all countries, at all times. In fact, there is no universal bibliography as such, but the published catalogues of great libraries of the world can be stated to be the nearest approaches to this type of bibliography. For example, Library of Congress Catalogue of books and British Museum General catalogue of printed books. (c) Trade Bibliography. Such types of bibliographies are brought out by large publishing firms engaged in book trade. The books available for sale are listed therein. There are a number of trade bibliographies such as British Books in Print, Books in Print in USA, Indian Books in Print, etc. (d) National Bibliography. Ideally speaking, a national bibliography should record all documents, published or unpublished, irrespective of the agency issuing them, covering trades as well as non-trade items, irrespective of the form of material,

120 D Library and Information Science Specific language, subject, or time of publication. Dr. Ranganathan recognises the following categories of national bibliography: 1. List of all books published in a country. 2. List of all books on a country. 3. List of all the books published by all the citizens of a country. 4. List of all the books published on all the citizens of the country, and 5. Any one combination of the above. Indian National Bibliography and British National Bibliography are the most important examples of national bibliographies. (e) Selected or Eclectic Bibliography. This kind of bibliography is concerned with the listing of only selected and the best books. (f) Subject Bibliography. It is comprehensive list of all books, periodical articles, pamphlets and other reading material in a particular subject. (g) Author Bibliography or Bio-bibliography. It records books, articles, etc. written about by an author or attributed to him, and the material written about the author by others. (h) Bibliography of Bibliographies. It is a list of bibliographies recorded in a systematic and logical order. It includes all types of bibliographies in various subject fields, separately published.

Union Catalogues A union catalogue is an important location tool. It indicates who has what. It is a catalogue listing in one sequence the holdings or part of the holdings of two or more libraries. It has been defined as an, ‘inventory common to several libraries and listing some or all of their publications maintained in one or more order of arrangement.’ The user consults the union list to locate a given book, periodicals or newspapers in another library which may be in the same city or elsewhere. Given the location and operation of an inter-library loan or copying process, the user can have the particular book, or any other item, borrowed from the other library, or he can visit the holding library to consult in its premises. The union catalogue may also help the libraries to make a cooperative effort to reduce the duplication of certain titles and ensure the availability of a larger number of titles in a city, or state. It also reveals the total document resources of libraries in a given region and indicates the strength and weakness of the holdings in that area. The union catalogue is extremely useful for reference librarian. Union catalogues can be distinguished according to the geographical location of participating libraries, local, regional and national. A local union catalogue lists the holdings of local libraries. Regional union catalogues are especially found in the countries whose big size makes one national union catalogue inadequate. The national union catalogue are the most natural form. Union catalogues can also be distinguished on the basis of subjects of research and the types of literature with which they deal.

Indexing An index is a systematic guide to the text of any reading matter or to the contents of other collected documentary material, comprising a series of entries, with headings arranged in alphabetical or other chosen order, and with references to show where each item

Unit-III D 121 indexed is located. It is a detailed alphabetical list of the names, terms, topics, places, formulae, numbers or other significant items in a completed work (such as book, set or bound journal) with exact page references to material discussed in that work. Thus, an index is a list arranged systematically, providing enough details about each item so that it can be identified and traced. It may be published separately or form part of another work. Usually, an index is arranged alphabetically but may sometimes by arranged chronologically, geographically, numerically or in any other suitable manner, depending upon the requirements.

Evaluation of Index Authority. Which is the sponsoring body? Is it recognized? Has the indexing been done by a competent person? Scope. (a) What are the limitations with regard to the subject (is it broad or specialized?), languages (are foreign periodicals covered?), place of origin of periodicals and length of period covered (does it index, current or retrospective issues of periodicals?) for the periodical(s) indexed. (b) What is the number of periodicals indexed? What are the kinds of periodicals (whether established or likely to be of permanent interest to the users, whether they are of a popular, technical or scholarly nature?) Are they fully representative of the field? Is the choice of periodicals biased in any way? (c) Does the index include material other than articles in periodicals (e.g., pamphlets, documents, dissertations, patents, books, etc.?) Is it a current indexing service or a retrospective one?

Arrangement Alphabetical: (a) Dictionary-wise (author, title, subject entries and references arranged in a single sequence). (b) Author-wise (c) Subject-wise (d) Author and subject-wise State whether it is a unique publication. Compare it with other services in the same field and determine overlap and other features. (Is there any special emphasis?) Is the indexing service convenient, easy and simple to use? Format. Are the headings bold enough to stand out clearly? Are the typefaces clear and legible? Has a suitable difference been made between different types of headings or not? Conclusion. Conclusion should include overall judgement about the work. Should it be recommended for a library or not? If so, indicate the kind of library which will benefit most.

Types of Indexes (i) Book Indexes (ii) Indexes of Collections (iii) Periodical Indexes (iv) Newspaper indexes (i ) Book Indexes. The term is self explanatory. Therefore, it is not taken into account here in this book.

122 D Library and Information Science Specific (ii) Indexes of Collections. These index are collections of poems, fiction, plays, songs, essays, stories, biographies, etc. (iii ) Periodical Indexes. Broadly speaking, these are of three types, general indexes, subject indexes and indexes to single periodicals. (a) General Indexes. General indexes may cover periodicals in a wide field of knowledge. The Reader’s Guide to Periodical Literature is an example of a general index. Indexes covering a number of titles usually appear in the form of alphabeticosubject indexes to the contents of the predetermined list of periodicals. (b) Subject Indexes. These are those indexes which cover several periodicals. Very often these also include new books, pamphlets, conference proceedings, reports, etc. The subject is restricted to a narrow field. Education index and Library literature are good examples of subject indexes. (c) Indexes to Single Periodicals. Indexes to individual periodicals vary in quality and completeness. They are usually on an annual basis. If a given periodical does not issue its index, a librarian may have to prepare one on his own. (iv) Newspaper Indexes. These are generally of two types: (i) indexing many newspapers and (ii) indexing a single newspaper. Indian news index is an example of the first and Index to The Times of India is an example of the second. A study of indexing services show the variety of services offered in different fields. These play a very important role in the growth and development of different disciplines. Over the years, this kind of publication has improved a great deal, mainly due to the application of computers. It is also to be noted that indexes and indexing periodicals are becoming costlier with the result that many libraries cannot afford to purchase many of the services.

Abstracting Services Due to the increase in available literature, an average scholar is usually unable to keep him self up-to-date with or sometimes even keep track of documents or information in his field. It is in this respect that abstracting services can play a very important role in keeping him well informed. They help in bringing information to the notice of those who need it rather quickly, and are extremely useful tools. An abstract is the terse presentation in (as far as possible) the author’s own language, of all the points made in the same order as in the original piece of primary documentary information— that can be a book, a research report, a periodical article, a speech, the proceedings of a conference, an interview, etc. It is simply a condensation that presents succinctly, the objectives, scope, and findings of a document. This information is usually conveyed together with an indexing system, which further helps to identify document content. An abstract, as a rule, is aimed at a specific group of users who either may not have easy access to the original document.

Types of Abstracts There are two major kinds of abstracts, namely, indicative and informative. “Indicative abstracts merely tell briefly what the document is about”. It summarizes the contents in brief, indicating the scope and contents of the documents. It is a short abstract written so that a reader is able to decide for himself whether or not to read the original document.

Unit-III D 123 This kind of abstract cannot serve as a substitute for the original article. However, it is very useful for providing current awareness services. “Informative abstracts are longer and present the essential data and conclusions so that the reader has no need to refer to the original document.” An informative abstract, usually contains scope, purpose, methods used, kind of treatment, results or findings, conclusion, or interpretation of the results obtained by the author. Informative abstract is more popular and more used as well as more important than indicative abstract. However indicative abstract can be prepared in a shorter time and is economical. It meets the requirements of generalists, but experience shows that specialists prefer informative abstracts. On the basis of informative abstract, a reader can decide whether or not the given contribution is a basic and primary one. However, an informative abstract is no substitute for the original document. Sometimes, this kind of abstract may serve the propose to the extent that one may not be required to consult the original document. In practice, it is observed that the distinction between the two kinds of abstracts is not sharp enough.

Uses of Abstract An abstract serves many useful purposes as given below: (i ) It helps in keeping one up-to-date with new knowledge. (ii ) It indicates, whether the article is of value to the user or not. Thus the user need not search unnecessarily and waste his time. (iii ) It serves as a rapid survey of retrospective literature. (iv) It helps the user to overcome the language barrier to some extent because the abstract of an article in a language not known to him can be made available in a language he knows. (v) It helps in improving indexing. (vi ) Classified abstracts bring together material on the same subject, which may otherwise be found scattered in a journal and elsewhere. (vii ) An informative abstract, sometimes can serve as a substitute to the original document. (viii ) It aids in the writing of reviews. (ix) It enables one to make a retrospective search for literature in a field.

ELECTRONIC INFORMATION RESOURCES Technology has been an important driving force for change. The wholesale integration of information technology into mainstream organisational routines has affected everyone. A fully networked organisation is considered to be a powerful way of fostering more collaboration and cooperation between individuals, reshaping work styles and improving communication flows. Many organisations are moving strategically towards a more digital culture. At one extreme is the computing industry where a combination of flexible working routines, advanced telecommunications and high end office technology is seen as an important investment in developing a more customer-centred approach. This is resulting

124 D Library and Information Science Specific in a growing community of remote, distributed and mobile workers with an increasing infrastructure. Virtually all libraries, at least in the most-developed countries, are now members of networks that greatly facilitate the location of sources of information and the gaining of access to them. Card catalogues have largely been replaced by online catalogues and these are being expanded through the addition of materials not previously included. The whole idea of what a catalogue should be is changing; it is no longer seen as a tool bounded by the collections of a single library but one that reveals the availability of resources in a network of libraries or even one that is essentially a gateway to a universe of information resources in printed, electronic or other forms.

(a) E–Documents There are such information sources also, which are counted in the category of nondocumentary sources in addition to documentary sources for transferring the information and the paper is not used in making them, hence they are without paper i.e. paperless. Sources, in which the paper is not used are called non-paper sources, which are day by day increasing very fast. Hence it is said that the modern society is changing towards paperless society. In these sources, microforms, audio-visual materials, and electronic formats are included. Thus the sources which are in electronic formats are called electronic documents and in brief E-documents. So, E-documents are those sources of information which communicate the information via electronic media. Electronic media is a computer based media for storage and dissemination of information. The advances in the field of electronic media has totally changed the process of information dissemination and retrievals.

Characteristics of E–Documents Computer technology has made possible the creation of many new types of documents. Such type of documents exist only inside a computer system in digital format. Documents of this sort are created using an appropriate authoring tool, stored in the memory of the computer system and subsequently displayed using suitable audio and/or visual display technologies. Electronic documents are acquired in format and published by releasing them to a central database. They can then be distributed by floppy disk, CD-ROM or communication link. Such documents can be browsed quickly using a computer, and can embed text, static pictures, sound animation, motion pictures and various tactile modes of communication. These can be easily transformed, processed by computer and transferred from one location to another by means of communication Network. E-documents are found in the following two formats: 1. Machine Readable (Online) Databases. Database is an organised set of data stored in a computer and which can be searched automatically. It contains usable raw data like physical chemical properties, statistical or other numerical data or bibliographical information carrying description of source documents or nonbibliographical information relating to institutions, projects, specialists, etc. While the term is predominantly used in computer field, it may be taken to mean, for our purpose, as a repository or secondary information on a specific topic.

Unit-III D 125 2. Compact Discs. Compact discs which were introduced commercially as a storage medium in early 1985, belong to optical disc technology. The CDs are plastic discs of 4.72 inches diameter each with a storage capacity that is equivalent to about 2,50,000 pages of normal book-sized textual material. CDs are read on a player that can be attached to a desktop PC. Pits etched on the discs are read by a laser. Complete texts of many publications are available as CDs, e.g. the well known Oxford English Dictionary, is available in 3 pieces of CDs. Many indexing and abstracting services are also available in CDs. Thus CDs are the most important electronic documents for storing, retrieving, and disseminating information.

(b) E–Books Electronic publishing is the use of computers to design, edit, and distribute material that traditionally would have been produced on printing presses. Electronic publishing represents the third stage of a computer-based publishing revolution. First came computerized typesetting, in which computers produced printed galleys of text. Second came desktop publishing. Editors and designers used computers to edit text and lay out pages. The pages were then assembled at least partly by computer and printed on presses. In the third stage, completely electronic publishing, books, magazines, newspapers, and other materials appear only electronically. These materials are distributed on floppy disks or CD-ROMs, or are sent out over a vast computer network called the Internet. In addition, publishers of printed books, magazines, and newspapers are distributing electronic versions of their products. Electronic publishing offers several advantages over print publishing. An electronic publication can use features that print cannot use, including animations, videos, and sounds. Electronic publications can be updated quickly and distributed almost instantly. Electronic publishing also has the capacity to provide vast amounts of information. Printed material must often be edited and cut to fit the number of pages available. In electronic publishing, space is much less limited. A standard CD-ROM, for example, can hold the equivalent of more than 160,000 pages of single-spaced text. With Internet distribution, text length is a relatively minor concern. Much more important is the size of sound and visual files, which can take a long time to transmit to a computer.

(c) E–Journals Information is one of the basic resources that are needed and utilised by human beings for their development and prosperity. Information is nothing but the recorded experience that is used for decision making. The world has moved from industrial revolution to information revolution. The modern world depends upon the information for social, economic, scientific, and technical development. The very fabric of scientific society is deeply rooted in primary sources for information. Normally, periodicals are the providers of this information. Periodical is defined as a literary publication, magazines, etc., published at regular intervals longer than a day, as weekly, monthly, etc. The periodical is classified into three namely, Journals, Magazines and Newspapers. Among these journals are the most important medium of scientific communication and therefore the providers of up-to-date information to the scientific community. The Encyclopaedic dictionary of Library and Information Science defines a Journal as “the record of proceedings or transactions of a learned society”. An electronic journal is a

126 D Library and Information Science Specific journal for which the full end product is available on optical disc, over a network or in any other electronic form—strictly a journal in which all the process is carried out electronically. In other words an E.J. is one where the writing, editing, refereeing and distributions of item are carried out without any paper intermediaries. The main motive behind this is that the information can be brought out to the scientific community quickly when compared to its counter part where the delay is caused in communicating the information to the end user because of the slowness in the flow of manuscripts, the peer review process, type setting, proof reading and page lay out. This problem of time lag can be overcome if the author, publisher, referee, etc. are brought in a network. The user friendly packages help in reducing the tedious job of proof reading and also help in reducing the time. Electronic Journals involve the process of writing, editing, referring and distribution of information electronically through telecommunication networks where the information is stored digitally and made accessible through network. The technology of the 1980’s namely the CD-ROM technologies help a lot in electronic publishing. The E.J.’s are other wise called “Virtual Journals”. The virtual journals are the focus of attention because of the rising cost of conventional printing coupled with the falling price of electronic equipments and the vast capabilities of the emerging technologies.

DATABASES Before coming on to databases, we should be clear about what data is? ‘Data’ means the information prepared for and used on a computer program. Data are collected from a study involving observations, experimentations or surveys. Such data are called ‘raw data’. Raw data needs organization and synthesis. The organized or synthesized data are called ‘systematized data’. The systematized data need to be stored and made accessible to the user who may be a scientist, a technologist, a planner, a business executive, an industrialist or even the common man. In the same way, the data may be scientific data, technical data, techno-economic data, business data, industrial data, manpower data, socio-demographic data and like.

Database How database was developed? The total data processing requirements for an organization have normally been split into a series of applications with a separate file or files for each application. This practice has led to proliferation of files, some with similar data. This not only creates problems in updating and maintenance aspect, but also lead to conflicting information being circulated due to delays in updating of individual files. This situation led to the development of an integrated approach to information processing. The database concept is but a step in this direction. Thus, database is a collection of records or a file or a collection of files brought together as a single file commonly accessible by a given set of programs. The database approach can be employed wherever storage and manipulation of data are required. It is most useful when relationships between data are numerous and complex, and information requirements are subject to change. Common examples of databases

Unit-III D 127 are: (1) a student database containing enrolment data for all persons currently attending classes, and (2) a parts database established by a company for inventory-control purposes.

Characteristics of Database Characteristics of a well-designed database are: (i ) It is an organized, integrated collection of data. (ii ) It can be referred to by all relevant applications with relative ease and with no (or, in practice, limited) duplication of data. (iii ) It is a model of the natural relationships of the data in the real-world environment. Database may be stored on magnetic tape, disc and optical media such as CD-ROM and a variety of other media. It can be accessed either locally or remotely. Some of the databases hold publicly accessible information such as abstracting and indexing databases, full text of reports, encyclopaedias and directories, whilst other databases will be databases that are shared within an institution or group of institutions.

Properties of Databases Major properties of the databases can be summarized as follows: (1) Databases are integrated with provisions for different applications. (2) These eliminate or reduce duplication of data. (3) These enhance data independence by permitting application programme to be insensitive to changes in the database. (4) These permit shared access. (5) These permit finer granularity. (6) These provide facilities for centralized control of accessing and security control functions.

Role of Database in Dissemination of Information The retrieval of exact information today has become a difficult task due to the exponential growth of the information in all fields of human knowledge. The generation, collection, retrieval and dissemination of information through creation of databases and systematic information services are becoming essential to meet the increasing demand. This must be done more rapidly and accurately. The advances in computer and telecommunication technologies simplify this job in a more sophisticated way, that is database creation. Databases are the medium which have changed the way we perceive and disseminate information. Databases help to access any remote information. Databases are used for various activities of handling of information, such as resource sharing, reference service, abstracting and indexing services, easy retrieval of information. Hence databases have totally changed the scenario of resource sharing, current awareness service, selective dissemination of information, document delivery service, and inter library loan, etc. In other way, sharing of sound, video, photographs, graphics, text, and hyper text in digital form to libraries and their users have played major role in the dissemination of information. In addition to above, databases are affecting the following library services also. (a) Online catalogue has major value to affect the document delivery. (b) Another value of on-line catalogues will be their availability as platforms for other on-line services.

128 D Library and Information Science Specific (a) Bibliographic Database Bibliographical database contains descriptive information about documents—books, periodical articles—the data typically included in these databases are titles, authors, journal names, volume and number, dates, keywords, abstracts, etc. Inquiries about the database are intended to develop a list of document numbers of references which satisfy the needs of users concerning a particular subject. Such databases exist for numerous fields. Categories of Bibliographic Databases Exchange of information through electronic mail, online facility or a terminal is possible if a database is created. A database is an organised, integrated and often inter-related collection of computer-based data, records, files, or information. According to John Convey databases are collections of records in machine-readable form that are made available for searching from remote computer terminals. In bibliographic databases the data stored comprise inputs of bibliographic details of a document for identification, storage and retrieval purposes. Bibliographic databases can be divided into two categories: (1) Internal databases and associated services (2) External databases and associated services. The internal bibliographic databases are those created by libraries and information centres of their published holdings, such as: (1) books, (2) serials, (3) articles in periodicals, (4) proceedings of conferences, subject reports, etc. (5) manuscripts, theses, etc. External bibliographic databases comprise online catalogues of the following types: (a) Abstracting and citation databases like PSYCINFO, the machine-readable counterpart of Psychological Abstracts. And SCISEARCH, the machine-readable counterpart of Science Citation Index and Current Contents, the publications of the Institute for Scientific Information, USA. (b) Local, metropolitan, regional, national and international bibliographic networks. The following are examples. Local. A network in a campus or an institution such as IIT Bombay, or IIT Kanpur. Metropolitan. A city network like DELNET or CALIBNET. Regional. A proposed network like NELIB-NET for North-East India. National. A network like INFLIBNET. International. A network like OCLC that has outgrown its local, regional and national character and is used the world over. (c) Databases of indexes to newspaper e.g. New York Times Information Index or National Newspaper Index published in USA. (d) Databases of union catalogues e.g. National Union Catalogue of scientific serials in India (INSDOC). (e) Databases of references services like Ulrich’s Periodical Directory. (f) Full text databases provide the relevant information directory and give complete texts of documents.

Unit-III D 129

(b) Full Text Database The category of databases contains not only full text of the document but tells source also, hence we can get primary information alongwith full text. Therefore, these are called full text databases by which the users do not have to do more other efforts for searching, because the full text is already present there. E.g. The New York Times via NEXTS.

(c) Numeric Database Numeric database contains numeric, statistical or survey type information to give answers to numeric queries. Generally, the difference between bibliographic and numeric information may not be clear, but practically differentiating both of these is must. This may be clear by the possible answer of a particular query. Such as what is the diameter of mars? The answer of the same may be obtained 6972 km from numeric database. While in bibliographical databases, a list of so many documents is obtained for answering these types of queries. Bibliographic reference may be available in numerical databases from which the information is obtained.

Evaluation for the Capability of a Database in Library A database is collection of related data, which means known facts that can be recorded and that have implicit meaning. For example, considering the names, telephone numbers and addresses of all people we know. We may have recorded this data in an indexed address book, or you may have stored it on a personal computer using software such as dBASE III or Lotus-123. This is collection of related data with an implicit meaning and hence it is a database. The above definition of database is quite general; for example we may consider the collection of words that make up this page of text to be related data hence a database. However the common use of the term database is usually more restricted. A database is a logically coherent collection of data with some inherent meaning. A random assortment of data cannot be referred to as a database. The database are evaluated on the same criterion on which the printed reference sources are evaluated. In addition to those, there are some other measures in evaluating online databases, such as storage of materials in the databases and their forms, deep and quick knowledge of information, the common and specific type of need of the users that differs in each database. How and in how many quantity databases can be updated, and which type of hardware and software may be needed? Therefore the following points can be considered for evaluation of a database.

Scope (1) For the scope of database, it is considered that all the periodicals, journals, reports, documents, etc., which are indexed and abstracted in printed forms, are included in the database or not. (2) Whether the manufacturer or the vendor has clarified that which periodicals are indexed in the database and which are indexed on the selection basis? The publishers who print the index, use this method occasionally, but manufacturers of the databases never use this method. (3) The periodicals which are indexed in the database, whether their publication addresses alongwith short names of the publisher are given in the database or not?

130 D Library and Information Science Specific (4) Whether ISSN has been used or not? (5) How much database is overlapping and how it can be updated? (6) Whether the database represents citation/reference only or represents the abstracts also? (7) Whether the full bibliographical details of the periodicals is given in the database or not? It is very difficult to get information about the required document without full bibliographical details of the periodical. (8) Which method is used in indexing? And for that how analysis of the subject is done? The used method should be in that position, so that the retrieval of information may be possible from the points such as year, language, geographical location and other items. (9) Whether the number of search terms and Boolean operators have been used properly? The Boolean operators make the searching work easy and simple. (10) Whether in indexing the specific terminology for online database is used or not? The simple terminology cannot be used to represent the micro and extensive thoughts of the subjects? (11) How much is the effectiveness of the access points in the databases which are represented for search? i.e. the terms under which the organization of searching is, how they are helpful in search? (12) Whether the vender of the database has provided rules, regulation and guidance for using the database or not? In this way, the databases which are evaluated on the measures and criteria that have been stated above are most useful to the users.

U N I T

IV

SYLLABUS v v v v

v v v v

v

v

Community Information Services. Reference Service – Concept and Types; Referral Services Alerting Services – CAS, SDI, Inter Library Loan and Document Delivery. Mobile based Library Services and Tools – Mobile OPAC, Mobile Databases, Mobile Library Website, Library Apps, Mobile Library Instructions, Augmented Reality, SMS Alerts, Geo-Location, Reference Enquiry. Web 2.0 and 3.0 – Library 2.0- Concept, Characteristics, Components; Instant Messaging, RSS Feeds, Podcasts, Vodcasts, Ask a Librarian Collaborative Services- Social Networks, Academics Social Networks, Social Tagging, Social Bookmarking. Web – Scale Discovery Services National Infor mation Systems and Networks: NISCAIR, DESIDOC, SENDOC, ENVIS, INFLIBNET, DELNET, NICNET, ERNET, National Knowledge Network (NKN), Biotechnology Information System Network International Information Systems and Networks: INIS, AGRIS, INSPEC, MEDLARS, BIOSIS, ERIC, Patent Information System (PIS), Biotechnology Information System (BIS). Library Resource Sharing and Library Consortia – National and International.

(131)

132 D Library and Information Science Specific

COMMUNITY INFORMATION SERVICE Though the origin of community information service can be traced back to the end of the 19th century, it became more significant during the crisis of second world war, when men returning from the war to their communities needed advice on their rehabilitation. However, the present phenomenal growth in community information services stems only from the late sixties. Since librarians in the last few decades have increasingly felt that they too have a part to play in meeting the information needs, it is high time to look at the means by which public library involvement in the field of community information can be achieved. The community is a multifaceted unit involved with .a number of organizations working in it or on it. Though a direct relationship exist between the community and the library in a democratic society, owing to lack of awareness among the librarians for the most part they have not been actively involved in community development. Inspite of the common belief that everyone has needs which a library can meet, the percentage of nonusers is still substantial. A major problem may be the failure of libraries to focus on what the users want, not what they think the user should have (Ellis, 1986). The study of community involves an understanding of its cultural, geographical, political, social and economic processes and problems operating there in. The public library should appreciate the problems of the community and suggest possible solutions. In the process of service to the community, the library needs some support. It depends on the community for the economic as well as moral support. When it depends on the community it is accountable to the community. A public library can not survive without the involvement and support of the community where it functions. The libraries can be used as the best media centres in communicating the information to the communities, thereby increasing the effectiveness of the libraries as providers of information to the public. Martin (1976) suggests that if a library is to develop goals according to the main characteristics and peculiarities of its own community, then it must critically attempt an analysis of the community. Thus public libraries must come out of their traditional roles and provide commercial and technical information and they can not do this as individual institutions but with the help of library associations and government support (Oguara, 1969). This demands an emerging role of the librarian as the information consultant, learning advocate and communication mediator (Penland, 1981), They should not make the libraries only the gossip and information centres giving them the look of anything more than the middle class clubs. The librarians must be social workers as much as anything else. Healy (1984) considers the attitude of the public to the idea of the librarians ‘as the successful information providers of community information. Due to the growing interest in community information services, the Library Association in UK set up a Community Information Project (CIP) in 1977 with the financial assistance from the British Library to collect, analyses, process and disseminate information on the area of concern solely to community information in libraries, particularly in public libraries. Besides, a large number of non-public library information giving organizations in the field of community information such as, the Citizens Advice Bureaux (CABx), the Consumers Advice Centres (CACs), the Housing Advice Centers (HACs), the Neighborhood Advice Centers (NACs), the Legal. Advice Centers and the Local Authority Information

Unit-IV D 133 Centers have developed in Britain. Further description about these centres is not done here, since extensive descriptions about these centres are available in literature. In the opinion of Jackman (1978) the public libraries have failed to grasp the opportunity to participate effectively in providing information to the community as this role has been usurped by the non-public library organizations. However, the development of community information provision in public libraries in UK could assist improved decision-making both by the general public by certain groups of people and by library staff.

REFERENCE SERVICES Reference and Information Services The term reference services is defined as the sympathetic and informed personal aid in interpreting library collection for study and research. The primary aim of the library is to promote the use of reading material contained in it. Techniques like classification of documents and their subject-wise arrangement on the shelves in a helpful order, providing open access to the readers, preparation of tools like the library catalogue and similar others, are all indirect forms of assistance to users to find their documents in the library. However, the more direct method that will promote the use of documents is to bring together documents and their readers by personal efforts by the staff of the library. This method of providing personal attention to readers in terms of meeting their specific needs of documents or for any information contained in them, is known as Reference Service. According to Ranganathan, right contact means, “contact between the right reader and the right book at the right time and in the right personal way.” He is of the view that the establishment of such a contact is “the only available and effective method” of discharging the function of converting the users into habitual users. He has named this method as reference service. Thus, he adds that “Reference service is the establishing of contact between reader and book by personal service.” Reference work includes the direct, personal aid within a library to persons in search of information for whatever purpose, and also various library activities especially aimed at making information as easily available as possible.

Purpose and Need of Reference Service The purpose and need of reference service in the libraries is related with the following:

1. User’s Information Needs After the World War II, a number of new institutions in almost every field of science, technology, industry and business were created and established, where specialized groups of people have been working with different functions and responsibilities. This in turn had given rise to the need for information and knowledge on the various aspects of work. These developments naturally brought pressure on the libraries to innovate new type of intensive reference service to meet the growing demand for information. Each group has a distinct purpose for information support. Hence different types of groups of users are satisfied by providing reference services to them.

134 D Library and Information Science Specific 2. Growth in Collections The need and purpose of information users have necessitated the creation and establishment of different types of libraries, which offer some of these services. The new activities have resulted in the growth of collections, their proper organisation, display and control, creation of different types of tools for accessing them and providing specialized types of services. 3. Library Tools and Techniques Libraries have designed a number of tools and services for providing help to the users based on best techniques like standard classification scheme for organisation of documents on shelves, cataloguing of documents providing access, compilation of special bibliographies for specific type of users, building up a good bibliographic apparatus of specialized subject bibliographies, indexing and abstracting services, CA bulletins reviews and others to help the users. These type of services have to be explained to users. Libraries have been conducting regular short courses to users at different levels. These are known as user’s education programmes of reference service. 4. Volume and Variety of Documents There has been a large growth in the number of publications. The growth is not merely in number but in their variety of forms and languages. Most of the users are not aware of the organised structure of literature in their respective disciplines. These aspects of growth of literature have to be explained to users. In recent years, this type of personal assistance to users in making use of the literature sources, has become part of reference service.

5. Information Technology Libraries have been applying computer and communication technologies for all their housekeeping operations such as acquisition, cataloguing, serial control, circulation, information storage and retrieval and others. These bring a total change in the nature and use of a library. These developments naturally will introduce new tools and techniques, which will be difficult to understand for the users. The reference staff will act as mediators in making information available to users in addition to help themselves using these new techniques.

Kinds of Reference Services The kinds of reference services being performed would vary from library to library. We may divide services into three groups, namely: (a) basic ones, (b) those performed usually, and (c) those performed sometimes. The services being rendered would depend upon (i) Local situation, (ii) Local traditions, (iii) Kinds of users, (iv) Size of the library, (v) Resources of the library and (vi) Philosophy of the chief librarian regarding organization and administration.

(a) Basic Services These are those services which every library should try to perform. This is the minimum, which we can expect. That is why, we may call these as basic services. It is suggested that the services given below should be regarded as the basic ones.

Unit-IV D 135 (i ) Provision of General Information. The following are the kinds of questions, which may be included under general information: (a) Where are stacks? (b) Where is textbook section? (c) Where does the chief librarian sit? (d) Where can I smoke? (e) I want to become a member, could I get a copy of the rules for membership? (ii ) Provision of Specific Information. Provision of specific information would require the use of documents available in the library or consultation of another colleague of another library. The extent of the service provided will vary from library to library or sometimes from user to user. (iii ) Assistance in Searching and Location of Documents. Assistance means that aid is given so that the user is able to find an answer to a query in hand but instruction is systematic approach to teach the user as to how to use the library profitably. We can differentiate between assistance and instruction but the borderline is not always sharp. Here a distinction has been made between location and searching of documents. Location refers to the place on the shelf where the document should normally be available. In case it is not available on the shelf, then a search would be necessary. (iv) Assistance in the Use of Library Catalogue. Library catalogue is an important tool, which is a record of the holdings of a library. In order to make the full use of a library, a user must know how to make use of a library effectively. But it has an element of artificiality about it being based on conventions. It is not easy to understand. Therefore, it is essential that a reference librarian should provide assistance in its use. (v) Assistance in the Use of Reference Books. The reference books have an element of artificiality about them. These have peculiarities of their own to the extent that these vary in the arrangement of information, level of presentation, etc. As a result, very often a user might need assistance in their use.

(b) Services Performed Usually The following are the services performed usually: (i ) Inter-library loan, (ii ) Reservation of documents, (iii ) User education, (iv) Library tour: Taking visitors and new members around the library, (v) Holding of library exhibitions including display of new additions to the library, (vi ) Issue of library use permit to casual users (non-members), (vii ) Contributing to or preparing library publications, (viii) Readers’ advisory service (to guide in the selection of documents), (ix) Indexing and abstracting services, (x) Compilation of bibliographies, (xi) Maintenance of clippings and (xii) Maintenance of vertical files containing pamphlets like prospectuses, reports, etc.

136 D Library and Information Science Specific (i ) Inter-library Loan. Inter-library loan refers to request for a document not available in the library. Whatever might be the nature of a library, but it should take advantage of borrowing books from other libraries especially those in the same town itself. It can prove to be a boon. (ii ) Reservation of Documents. In case a document has been loaned, then a user who needs it, can get it reserved, so that when the document is returned then the user can be informed and he can get it issued. (iii ) User Education. Here assistance to a user has been distinguished from provision of user education. Assistance refers to the aid given to the user so that he is able to find answer to the query in hand. User education is a systematic approach to teach the user as to how to use the library profitably. (a) General instructions in the use of library and (b) Special instructions required to use the tools like library catalogue, bibliographies, references works, microfilm reader, etc. Library orientation is also a part of user education. However, orientation is given in the beginning but user education continues. User education is a teaching function. When a student in an academic library approaches the reference librarian for assistance, he should also be instructed as to how to use the library on his own. This is a continuation of initiation of a freshman. (iv) Library Tour. Visitors to the library may be taken around the library. A library tour can serve a useful purpose for freshmen (new members). (v) Holding of Library Exhibitions. Holding of exhibitions is essential to attract users. Display of new additions to the library is a very important function. This is one way by which a reader can become aware of new documents added to the library. Browsing new additions can be very fruitful for users and reference staff also. (vi ) Issue of Library Use Permits. When a casual user (non-member) wants to use a library, the library staff will satisfy themselves that the person is a genuine user and he would be permitted use of the library for a particular period. Such a person is usually not given borrowing facilities. (vii ) Contributing to or Preparing Library Publication. A reference section may bring out a handbook of the library, library catalogue, bibliographies, indexing and abstracting services, etc. Reference section can also assist other sections to bring out publications. Publication programme can bring prestige to a reference section. (viii ) Reader’s Advisory Service. It is concerned with providing reading guidance to individuals. That is, what they might read. When a user does not know what he might read, then a reference librarian should be in a position to suggest specific titles and subject headings to meet his specific interests. It is more required in public libraries than in academic and special libraries. The reasons being that teachers, students and specialists are motivated to read and use the library. However, this may be less true for children using school libraries. The school children need this kind of service very much. (ix) Indexing and Abstracting Services. In special libraries indexing and abstracting services are becoming increasingly important. A special library may produce such a service locally, which may or may not be published. In case these are not published, the library may maintain information on slips or cards, which can be consulted for providing information to the readers. Other types of libraries can also produce these services, depending upon the requirements of its users and availability of resources.

Unit-IV D 137 (x) Compilation of Bibliographies. This service may be done on demand or in anticipation. This is a service, which should be provided in different types of libraries. This can greatly help in increasing the use of a library. (xi) Maintenance of Clippings. Clippings from newspapers, magazines, pamphlets, etc. form a special class of material. These have their own importance. (xii ) Maintenance of Vertical Files. The vertical files containing pamphlets, prospectuses, reports, press clippings, etc. form an important source of information.

(c) Services Performed Sometimes The services performed sometimes are listed below: (i ) Display of current periodicals. (ii ) Maintenance of special files, e.g. files relating to the present activities, past correspondence of the parent body, (iii ) Reproduction of documents (xerox, microfilming etc.), (iv) Translation service and (v) Referral service Besides the above services, a reference section may have to perform the following functions: (i ) Book selection, (ii ) Processing of theses and dissertations, (iii ) Maintenance of library catalogues, (iv) Shelving of documents, (v) Binding and (vi) Any special project. According to American Library Association’s Reference Services Division, there are two types of reference services—direct and indirect. Under direct reference service, personal assistance is provided directly to the users. It may take the form of library instruction and information service (to provide information sought by the user). Indirect reference service consists of preparation and development of catalogues, bibliographies, other reference aids, selection of documents, organization and administration of reference section, evaluation of reference section, maintenance of relevant files, miscellaneous functions such as photo copying, supervision of reading rooms, etc.

Theories of Reference Service Different types of libraries prefer different approaches. Quite often, the approach adopted by a reference librarian may depend upon the category of user being served.

Conservative, Moderate and Liberal Theories of Reference Service James I. Wyer recognised three theories of reference service. These are mentioned below.

(a) Conservative This theory is based on the supposition that occasional personal assistance to users is more than sufficient. Assistance should be limited to instruction and guidance only. An inexperienced or a perplexed user needs to be pointed out the way only. Here the aim is to

138 D Library and Information Science Specific provide the books to the users and keep out of their way to the possible extent. Those who believe in this theory consider too much of assistance would hinder the attempt of a user to become self-dependent. As such users should be allowed to use the resources of the library on their own without any hindrance from the reference librarian. A reference librarian should not approach a user unless requested to by him. He is not expected to adopt the attitude of ‘May I help you’. Thus the assistance provided by a reference librarian should be limited to tackle ordinary reference questions, requiring the use of ready reference tools. Each query should be finished in short time.

(b) Liberal Conservative theory of reference service is one extreme of service while liberal theory belongs to the other extreme. Here a reference librarian is supposed to provide assistance to the maximum. A reference librarian should go out of the way to give help to the users. In case, a user feels perplexed or confused, a reference librarian should approach him and say, ‘May I help you’. Time, kinds of sources of information required, source of their availability and other such considerations do not matter. Information has got to be provided at any cost. The effort to locate information may require an extensive search. For example, one may be required to trace origin of a particular concept or compile a documentation list or get a document on inter-library loan.

(c) Moderate Moderate theory represents a compromise between the two extremes. It represents a middle path. However, it is difficult to demarcate a fixed line. An average reference librarian should prefer this approach. In case, the number of users to be served is large, then the provision of assistance to the maximum would increase the cost. Therefore, under the circumstances, a reference librarian would have to adopt moderate theory of reference service.

Minimal, Middling and Maximum Theories of Reference Service Samuel Rothstein has given three theories of reference service. These theories are based on primary concept of fear, expediency and faith respectively.

(a) Minimal A reference librarian, who lacks confidence and does not possess the necessary ability is apt to have a fear in his mind. As far as possible, he would try to keep himself out of the way of the user. Therefore, he would provide minimum assistance to the user. Thus minimal theory of reference service is based on the primary concept of fear. A reference librarian may know his job very well but due to pressure of demand, he may be able to provide only minimum assistance. In that case fear cannot be considered as the basis of minimal service.

(b) Maximum A reference librarian, who knows his job well is apt to have confidence in his ability to provide reference service. Such a person would have faith in his capabilities to serve the users and would even go out of the way to help users. In case, he finds a user confused or perplexed, he would approach him and say that ‘May I help you’. He would be in a position to provide maximum help to the users. The maximum theory of reference service is

Unit-IV D 139 based on the primary concept of faith. As pointed out earlier, a reference librarian may have full faith in his capability but due to pressure of demand, he may unable to provide information itself. In that case faith exists but minimum assistant is given not due to fear but because of circumstances over which the reference librarian may have no control. It is just possible that the reference librarian may not know the answer himself but may take the help of one of his colleagues and be able to give full information. Thus we can see that the very intention of providing information can overcome the lack of confidence and produce effective results.

(c) Middling A pragmatic reference librarian might decide to provide reference service to the extent considered suitable for the occasion. What would be considered suitable is difficult to define. However, such a decision is based upon judgement and common sense of a reference librarian. Sometimes, a reference librarian would provide maximum or minimum assistance as the occasion might demand. The theory of reference service based on primary concept of expediency (suitable to the occasion) is called middling theory.

Laws of Library Science Ranaganathan’s writings on reference service are based on five laws of library science. The five laws are fundamental laws of library science. These are equally applicable to reference service. The first law says, “Books are for use.” The term book should be interpreted broadly to stand for document. The first law would feel satisfied, if a right book and a right reader can be brought together. The aim of reference service should be to achieve the same. A collection of documents would not be used fully unless a reference librarian makes efforts to help the users to help themselves. The personal service would lead to greater use of books. The second law say, “Every reader his book.” Here emphasis is on a reader. A reference librarian should know the readers and their requirements, so that he can provide right books/information for every reader. The third law say, “every book its reader.” The emphasis is on a book. A reference librarian should know about the world of books and try to find out a reader for every one of these. He should find out who will benefit most from a given book. Thus he should act as a canvassing agent for each book. The fourth law says, “save the time of the reader.” A user must be assumed to be a busy person and his time must be saved. This is possible if the reference librarian is an alert person, who knows about the collection and makes an attempt to provide information/ documents to the users promptly. The services like current awareness services, provision of short range reference service and long range reference service on full scale, etc., are important means of helping the readers, so that their time can be saved. According to fifth law, “a library is a growing organism.” The library will grow in terms of documents, readers and staff. The new books received by the library should be brought to the notice of the readers. Even earlier books lying on the shelves should be brought to their attention. As a library is able to acquire only a small percentage of books, therefore, it must resort to inter-library loan. New readers must be given instruction in the use of the library resources and provided assistance to the maximum.

140 D Library and Information Science Specific

Referral Service Referral services are one of the part of reference service. We know that libraries have been providing reference service using reference collections and offer services through borrowed materials that are not available in their stock. Reference service also includes institutions other than libraries or persons which can provide required knowledge to answer specific queries to direct enquirers to a source of information, which may be a directory, an organization or an individual expert is called the referral services. In the wordings, reference and referral services both seem to be the same, even they differ to each other. Reference service is provided by directing the enquirers to a document available in the library. Often the information sought is also supplied in addition to the document that may carry the required information. On the other hand, the referral service provides only source to information and no more. Referral services have been taken over by referral centres whose functions are to locate sources of information with all the details of information required. Thus the basic purpose of referral centres which provide referral services, is to ease the stress on a single information institution. Referral centres can be established at local, national, regional as well as international levels. At international levels the name of United Nations Environmental Programmes (UNEP) can be considered, which provides referral service globally for all sources of environmental information. At national level the name of National Referral Centre of U.S.A. can be taken which provides referral service for science and technology.

Functions of Referral Centre 1. To collect on a world-wide basis information about information/data sources within the subject or mission. 2. To prepare a comprehensive inventory of the types of information/data services available from these sources with a detailed subject index to facilitate its access. 3. To guide users to the appropriate sources where from the required data or information may be obtained. 4. To function as an intermediary between enquirer and the organisation and/or individuals who possess specialised knowledge on the subject of enquiry.

Basic Tasks of Referral Centre In order to fulfil the above listed functions, a Referral Centre is required to perform some basic tasks such as to: 1. Take stock of all significant information sources in all subject fields; i.e. in Physical Sciences, Social Sciences and Engineering; 2. Compile directories of information sources; new and revised (to fill-up the gaps); and 3. Analyse the operative relationship that exists in the scientific information complex.

Unit-IV D 141

ALERTING SERVICES CAS—Current Awareness Services Any service intended to meet the current approach is generally known as current awareness service. Therefore, it can be defined as a system of service which ensures that all the current information likely to influence the progress of a research worker or a research team is made available to them at the right time and in convenient form. It is basically a process of dissemination of current information, which means the information contents of current published primary documents, for which the researchers have need. These are systems for reviewing newly available documents, selecting items relevant to the needs of an individual or group, and recording them so that notifications may be sent to those individuals or groups to whose needs they are related. Current awareness service involves review of, “publications immediately upon receipt, selecting information pertinent to the programme of the organisation served, and note individual items to be brought to the attention, by one means or another, of those persons to whose work they are related”. It is a device for alerting specialists towards latest developments and new publications acquired by the library/information centre.

Techniques for Providing CAS (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

Telephone calls to individuals Recording individual references and forwarding them to the concerned persons. Periodical routing Maintaining card files of references of information by manual or machine methods Issuing of library bulletins Circulation of duplicated contents of periodical literature.

Kinds of CAS Two kinds of current awareness services may be recognised. These are enumerated below: (a) Those services which are directed towards individuals or group of users. These may include communication of information to individuals or groups through informal conversation or via telephone; message sent on notification form; selective dissemination of information (SDI); selective dissemination of documents; routing of (or automatic loan) and other documents. (b) Those services which are directed towards all users of the services. These may include accession lists (a list of recent acquisitions), bibliographies, indexing and abstracting services bibliographic surveys, literature surveys, table of contents of periodicals received in the library, etc. This may take the form of current awareness bulletin, which may include any of these item(s) as well as information about current developments concerning ideas, problems, methods, techniques, etc.

142 D Library and Information Science Specific Steps in CAS The steps in the provision of CAS are given below: (i ) Review or scan documents (sometimes records of documents) immediately upon receipt. (ii ) Select information and record individual documents pertinent to the programme of the individuals of the organisation being served. This may be done by comparing the documents/information with the needs of users being served. (iii ) Send notification to the users about items or information of interest to them.

Need for CAS A user may try to keep himself abreast of the recent developments on his own. But CAS offers additional advantages to the users. Its coverage may be wider and hopefully it would come out regularly. On the other hand, a user would not be able to scan literature as widely and regularly as could be done by a CAS. CAS can lead to the saving of time. An individual or group of library/information centre professionals can scan sources of information and notify the members of the institution (parent body) or community being served, thus saving their valuable time. In case each user scans literatures individually then this will lead to unnecessary duplication of efforts. There may be users, who do not possess the ability or willingness to do scanning. In such cases, CAS will come to their aid. During the period of scarcity of financial sources, it is essential to promote and market library services. CAS is one of the best ways to bring the resources of the library/ information centre to the notice of the users. This will, in turn, lead to greater demand for library services, giving opportunity to the library to prove its value and justification for the money spent on it. Thus we can say that CAS is a very useful thing and its uses are shown as below: (i ) CAS is the best way to bring the resources of a library to the notice of its users. (ii ) CAS is produced by an external agency, then it may list primary sources of information, which the library may not possess, then there would be need for ‘back up’ libraries. The ‘back up’ libraries should be able to supply documents on interlibrary loan or photocopies. (iii ) CAS leads to increase in demand for inter-library loan and photocopiers. In addition, there may be greater demand for procurement of additional titles. The library should be prepared to meet these additional demands. (iv) Before starting CAS it is a must to ensure the availability of required resources (personnel, equipment, material and finance) and their continuance in future. In case, the service proves effective, then users are likely to support the case of library for provision of sufficient resources for the purpose. (v) The success of current awareness services would largely depend upon enthusiasm, knowledge and resourcefulness of the librarian, response from the users and organization of the library. An effective CAS serves as the best media for the publicity of a library. It contributes to the success of its users and in turn of its parent body. (vi ) The librarians should not remain merely busy with traditional services but should aim to provide current awareness services on a large scale. CAS forms an important aspect of information service. The prestige lies in this area.

Unit-IV D 143

SDI—Selective Dissemination of Information This is a type of CAS, the objective of which is to keep users informed with the new developments of their respective areas of interest without over burdening them with non-relevant and unwanted documents. It provides notifications of new primary documents as and when added to the information dissemination system of a library giving bibliographical details with or without abstracts of each document. Notifications are based on a match between user’s interest profile and document profiles. Libraries, particularly special libraries operate on information. It is their main function to communicate information about new documents and acquisitions to their scientists and technicians. For alerting them, bringing out Library Bulletin, Information Bulletin, Index to Current Literature, local Documentation lists etc. are the different methods. It is a debatable point that how each individual scientist is really alerted by such methods. A new dimension can be given to CAS by individualising it, i.e. by rendering to each individual scientist an alerting service, which is exclusively restricted to his areas of interest. This is called the Selective Dissemination of Information (SDI) system. H.P. Luhn designed the mechanism of SDI service. He defined SDI as “It is a service within the organisation which concerns itself with channelling of new items of information from various services to those points within the organisation where they usefully serve someone’s interests”. Hence we say that SDI system is a technique to communicate information in such a manner as to keep each researcher and scientist informed of latest publications appearing in their restricted field of research at periodic intervals. It is achieved by preparing two profiles–the User’s Profile and the Document Profile.

Pre-requisites and Techniques Involved in SDI System The following are the pre-requisites and techniques which are involved in SDI system. 1. The information system, i.e. library or information centre should be organised on the basis of a Key-Word system. 2. The users of the information system should profile their interests of research in terms of Key-words also known as code numbers or simple terms selected from a dictionary of technical terms, i.e. thesaurus, maintained by the system. The field of interest of each user is thus recorded in terms of specific set of key words. Such a record of interest translated into the Keywords is called a profile. This profile is transferred to computer storage for processing. The departmental address of the user is also included in user’s profile. 3. The incoming documents are analysed and the subject of each of them is presented in the same language as used in user’s profile. The incoming information after being indexed in terms of Key-Words is similarly stored. 4. The user’s profiles are then matched with document profiles. When a close match is observed in both the profiles, the details of both are noted. 5. If any close match is observed between the details of both the profiles, the user gets notification from the system that the certain documents are likely to be relevant to his interest.

144 D Library and Information Science Specific 6. The user, in turn, furnishes feedback on the actual relevance of the document. 7. Response received from the user is carefully analysed and if necessary, the profile adjusted or the level of match altered. User’s profile is thus continuously revised on such feed back, resulting in an increasing ratio of relevant information and a decrease of noise delivered by the system.

Computer Based SDI is Provided in Libraries with the Help of Following Procedure Selective Dissemination of Information (SDI) was developed with a specific purpose of providing a researcher at regular intervals a carefully selected list of all publications in his particular area of interest that have been published in the preceding interval in all the significant journals of the world. The use of computers and databases has greatly increased the potential of SDI service and expanded its scope so that what was originally concerned as a local service for an individual research organisation, has now acquired the function of providing a national or international service.

Operational Aspects of SDI Once the policy aspects associated with the design of a SDI system are decided by the concerned authority, appropriate decisions as regards to the components of SDI system are taken. After this task is accomplished, the next stage is to organise the SDI system step by step and operate it. The essential steps needed for this purpose are mentioned below:

1. Creation of Database (Document Profile) This work comprises the following operations. (a) Selection of appropriate bibliographical items to be included in the database or document profile. (b) Transfer of the references into computer readable media (input preparation). (c) Reading of the references by an appropriate input device and storing of the information on storage media. (d) Conversion of the references into an appropriate bibliographic record format. (e) If in case an externally generated database is used for providing SDI service, reformatting of the entire database into the processing format of the search software. (f) Preparation of searchable file.

2. Profile Construction The construction of users’ search profiles is an essential task, which demands an intellectual effort from both the user and the information specialist or librarian. The search profile is nothing but a list of terms used for describing the user queries. In other words, a user profile is made up of technical term or terms significant to user’s query. Whenever any user intends to avail the services of an SDI system he is requested to specify his field of interest in a narrative way in plain language, describing his interest in a detailed way. The user may provide a list of significant terms which precisely define the subject of his interest. On the basis of the user’s statements the information specialists design and construct the individual search profiles for the users of the SDI system.

Unit-IV D 145

3. Searching for Information Retrieval System A search term in a search profile can be a single word, a sequence of words in a string, an author’s name, the name of an institution or organisation, the title of journal, a subject heading and a classification code. A search term may occur in the reference as a description both of the contents of the document (title, key word, subject heading, classification code) and of the document itself, the title of the source publication, organisation/institution, report numbers, patent number. In controlled vocabulary systems, the terms are restricted to those in a glossary or a thesaurus compiled for the system. The information scientists construct the search profile by selecting the search terms from thesaurus and other reference tools. As the search is performed by matching the contents of the database with search terms in the search profiles, all variations in the spelling have to be considered (i.e. gaging, gauging etc.). Both letters and numbers (alphabets and numerals) are searched in the search procedure. In order to get as many relevant references as possible the list of search terms in the search profile has to be somewhat exhaustive. One of the most important aspects concerning the organisation of SDI system is notification of search results (Output) based on the user profiles to the individual users to the system and monitoring of the feedback so that the feedback from the users could be incorporated into the system for the improvement of system performance.

MOBILE BASED LIBRARY SERVICES The growth of mobile communication system is a fascinating tale of man’s quest to conquer the communication medium. The history of telecommunication starts with the innovative smoke, fire and drum sounds of prehistoric time. The basic electrical signaling system was first introduced in 1838 when the first telegraph signals were successfully tested. The seed for the mobile telecommunication was sown in 1973 although the first successful testing of INMARSAT, ship to shore satellite telecommunication is the precursor of all the satellite based communication systems of today. From what used to be cumbersome bulky gadgets of yesteryears, today’s mobile phones are sleek and savvy and come with an array of services which envy a modern desktop. If invention of mobile telephones are considered to be the advancement of human exploration, then the rapid and speedy delivery of the mobile telephone services and fast internet services which deliver such services to the remote destinations are the ultimate imagination of human endeavour.

Mobile Communication System and Academic Institutions Mobile learning is the experience and opportunity afforded by the evolution of educational technologies. It is anywhere, anytime learning enabled by instant, on-demand access to a personalized world filled with the tools and resources we prefer for creating our own knowledge, satisfying our curiosities, collaborating with others, and cultivating experiences otherwise unattainable. Mobile learning implies adapting and building upon the latest advances in mobile technology, redefining the responsibilities of teachers and students, and blurring the lines between formal and informal learning. The concept of learning has been redefined because of these observations which has absolved all the technological advancements into the realm of learning.

146 D Library and Information Science Specific With the fascinating growth of the mobile communication system it is worth noting the growth of its user base especially amongst the academic community. Olatokun observes that “Mobile phones have become an inseparable part of everyday life”

Mobile Communication System and Libraries Scott McQuiggan et. al. (2015) points out that the “on-demand, perpetual connectivity of mobile devices changes the way we communicate with one another, gather and store data, and indulge our curiosity—all of which have great implications for education. Mobile devices enable users not only to be constantly connected to their data and resources, but also always to be connected to one another” Another important factor in the influence of mobile technology in educational institutions are that the convergence of teachers, students, classrooms, textbooks and information sources through a single mode of access which has provided an unenviable power in learning. This is an important context in the educational institutions since libraries are one such place which connect students, teachers as well as the wealth of information. With the rapidly changing ICT environment and with swift advancements in the mobile technologies and its applications throughout the world, the libraries and its services were left with no other choice than to join the mobile bandwagon to realign their strategies and services to suit the mobile users who are “connected to educational opportunities from virtually anywhere, making almost every situation a potential learning environment” (McQuiggan et. al., 2015, p.50). With more and more e-commerce and entertainment sectors are gearing-up for the mobile revolution, it is imperative that the libraries also take stock of the opportunities these mobile services offer to libraries and the challenges lay ahead in providing mobile services to its patrons. The hard truth in libraries is that while the innovations of mobile technology have captured the imagination of e-commerce and the entire learning eco-system it has not dramatically caught-up with the libraries. It’s worth observing that libraries are just starting to make their first step into the world of mobile learning especially learning through mobile phones (Walsh, 2009). In the mobile app market place the libraries have not started making any significant inroads. Scott LaCounte observes that with computers and internet facilities libraries had the upper hand and provided state of art services to their clients but with regards to mobile applications out of the hundreds of thousands of mobile applications available for phones, the amount of apps that librarians have built for libraries can be counted on one hand! Theoretically while all the operations in the library can be transferred into mobile based applications, the ignition needed to spark that revolution is still missing. There is no doubt that the libraries are slowly moving towards offering mobile based applications but the concentration seems to be on providing some specific or isolated part of the library service as mobile application. Jason Griffey observes that “libraries over the past five years, focused heavily on providing digital services, especially reference services, via mobile channels” (Griffey, 2010). The focus of libraries with regards to mobile technology seems to be the ready reference queries. This concept is slowly changing with the advent of smartphones. Smartphones have redefined the mobile communication paradigm and has reinvented the mobile computing phenomena. It is predicted that the next five years will be an explosion of fully featured smartphones. Similar to the library automation trend during the early nineties, the commercial library system vendors have once again started taking the initiative to drive the mobile

Unit-IV D 147 based library application market. It is worth noting that most of the Integrated Library Systems (ILS) have mobile component for their OPACs. Some ILS provide other allied mobile services also, especially alert systems using Short Message Services (SMS) but most of them remain as add-on applications. Some libraries use SMS to interact with members and utilize to sending alerts and notifications as a general value added service.

WEB 2.0 AND 3.0 “Web 2.0” describes the changing trends in the use of World Wide Web technology and web design that aim to enhance creativity, communications, secure information sharing, collaboration and functionality of the web. Web 2.0 concepts have led to the development and evolution of web culture communities and hosted services, such as social networking sites, video sharing sites, wikis, blogs, and folksonomies. The term ‘Web 2.0’ was coined by technology commentator Tim O’Reilly who tried to define it as follows: “Web 2.0 is the network as platform, spanning all connected devices; Web 2.0 applications are those that make the most of the intrinsic advantages of that platform: delivering software as a continually-updated service that gets better the more people use it, consuming and remixing data from multiple sources, including individual users, while providing their own data and services in a form that allows remixing by others, creating network effects through an 'architecture of participation' and going beyond the page metaphor of Web 1.0 to deliver rich user experiences".

Features of Web 2.0 Web 2.0 websites typically include some of the following features/techniques that Andrew McAfee used the acronym SLATES to refer to them: n Search the ease of finding information through keyword search which makes the platform valuable. n Links guides to important pieces of information. The best pages are the most frequently linked to. n Authoring the ability to create constantly updating content over a platform that is shifted from being the creation of a few to being the constantly updated, interlinked work. In Wikis, the content is iterative in the sense that the people undo and redo each other’s work. In blogs, content is cumulative in that posts and comments of individuals are accumulated over time. n Tags categorization of content by creating tags that are simple, one-word descriptions to facilitate searching and avoid rigid, pre-made categories. n Extensions automation of some of the work and pattern matching by using algorithms e.g. amazon.com recommendations. n Signals the use of RSS (Really Simple Syndication) technology to notify users with any changes of the content by sending e-mails to them.”

Web 2.0 Characteristics The following web 2.0 characteristics take the common technologies together and describe well what is new about them.

148 D Library and Information Science Specific n

n

n

n

n

n

n

Participation. Every aspect of Web 2.0 is driven by participation. The transition to Web 2.0 was enabled by the emergence of platforms such as blogging, social networks, and free image and video uploading, that collectively allowed extremely easy content creation and sharing by anyone. Participatory architecture is an architecture where user can add or edit value to the application according to their requirement. Contrary to the traditional web which was somewhat one-sided, with a flow of content from the provider to viewer, Web 2.0 allows the users to actively participate online. Standards. Standards provide an essential platform for Web 2.0. Common interfaces for accessing content and applications are the glue that allows integration across the many elements of the emergent web. Decentralization. Web 2.0 is decentralized in its architecture, participation, and usage. Power and flexibility emerges from distributing applications and content over many computers and systems, rather than maintaining them on centralized systems. It is about communication and facilitating community. Openness. The world of Web 2.0 has only become possible through a spirit of openness whereby developers and companies provide open, transparent access to their applications and content. Modularity. Web 2.0 is the antithesis of the monolithic. It emerges from many, many components or modules that are designed to link and integrate with others, together building a whole that is greater than the sum of its parts. Users are able to pick and choose from a set of interoperating components in order to build something that meets their needs. User Control. A primary direction of Web 2.0 is for users to control the content they create, the data captured about their web activities, and their identity. This powerful trend is driven by the clear desires of participants. Identity. Identity is a critical element of both Web 2.0 and the future direction of the internet. We can increasingly choose to represent our identities however we please, across interactions, virtual worlds, and social networks. We can also own and verify our real identities in transactions if we choose.

Web 2.0 technologies and Its Implementation for the Libraries Web 2.0 encompasses several technologies and services, viz.

Blogs It is a powerful two-way based tool. A blog is a website where library users can enter their thoughts, ideas, suggestions, and comments. Blogs entries known as blog posts are made in journal style and are usually displayed in reverse chronological order; entries listed in specific categories that can be searched; links to other sites of interest and places for comments; and a monthly archive of previous entries. A blog entry might contain text, images or links to other blogs and web pages. Any library user can publish a blog post easily and cheaply through a web interface, and any reader can place a comment on a blog post.

Unit-IV D 149

Applications n n n n n

Blogs serve as a platform where the users can file their concerns, queries and suggestions regarding the services and activities of the library, Blogs can also be used for the collection development where the users request the resources, Blogs can be used tools for marketing of the information as well as the library, Can be used as tool for posting Minutes of the Meetings for necessary actions, Blogs can serve as discussion forum.

COLLABORATIVE SERVICES Social Networking and Social Bookmarking is a great way to share our favorite links with the world! Social Bookmarks provide more then back links they also can provide additional traffic to sites. Social bookmarking sites are search engine friendly, and within seven days of submission links start to appear in all major search engines. It suggests that this feature of social software can facilitate an approach to learning that is qualitatively different from and capable of significantly augmenting traditional methods, with especial benefits for lifelong learners.

Social Bookmarking Social bookmarking is the practice of saving bookmarks to a public Web site and “tagging” them with keywords. Bookmarking, on the other hand, is the practice of saving the address of a Web site they wish to visit in the future on their computer. To create a collection of social bookmarks, register with a social bookmarking site, which lets store bookmarks, add tags of choice, and designate individual bookmarks as public or private. Some sites periodically verify that bookmarks still work, notifying users when a URL no longer functions. Social bookmarking began in crude form in the late 1990’s. It then fell out of favor online due to changes in the web. It came back in 2005 and has been getting increasingly popular ever since. Social bookmarking is a method for Internet users to organize, store, manage and search for bookmarks of resources online. Unlike file sharing, the resources themselves aren’t shared, merely bookmarks that reference them. Social tagging, which is also known as collaborative tagging, social classification, and social indexing, allows ordinary users to assign keywords, or tags, to items.

Social Tagging Social tagging websites have become very popular over the last few years because they give users more social tools with which to manage their bookmarked sites. A folksonomy is a system of classification derived from the practice and method of collaboratively creating and managing tags to annotate and categorize content this practice is also known as collaborative tagging, social classification, social indexing, and social tagging. Social tagging can be a useful tool for users. Instead of individually saving the site in a variety of folders, just type a few keywords called tags and their sites are organized

150 D Library and Information Science Specific automatically with sites saved by other users, using those same keywords. All levels of user can benefit from social tagging. Potentially, it is another efficient tool both free and commercial user can use.

Web Syndication The term Really Simple Syndication (RSS) is often used to refer to web feeds or web syndication in general, although not all feed formats are RSS. A web feed is a data format used for providing users with frequently updated content. Content distributors syndicate a web feed, thereby allowing users to subscribe to it. Making a collection of web feeds accessible in one spot is known as aggregation, which is performed by an aggregator. A web feed is also sometimes referred to as a syndicated feed. D Shivalingaiah and Umesha Naik Web syndication is a form of syndication in which website material is made available to multiple other sites. Most commonly, web syndication refers to making web feeds available from a site in order to provide other people with a summary of the website’s recently added content (for example, the latest news or forum posts). The term can also be used to describe other kinds of licensing website content so that other websites can use it. RSS is a family of web feed formats used to publish frequently updated works such as blog entries, news headlines, audio, and video in a standardized format. An RSS document includes full or summarized text, plus metadata such as publishing dates and authorship. Web feeds benefit publishers by letting them syndicate content automatically. They benefit readers who want to subscribe to timely updates from favored websites or to aggregate feeds from many sites into one place. RSS feeds can be read using software called an “RSS reader”, “feed reader”, or “aggregator”, which can be web-based, desktopbased, or mobile-device-based. For the receiving site, content syndication is an effective way of adding greater depth and immediacy of information to its pages, making it more attractive to users. For the transmitting site, syndication drives exposure across numerous online platforms. This generates new traffic for the transmitting site making syndication a free and easy form of advertisement. Commercial web syndication can be categorized in three ways: 1. by business models, 2. by types of content, 3. by methods for selecting distribution partners

Knowledge Tag A knowledge tag is a type of meta information that describes or defines some aspect of an information resource. Knowledge tags are more than traditional non hierarchical keywords or terms. They are a type of metadata that captures knowledge in the form of descriptions, categorizations, classifications, semantics, comments, notes, annotations, hyper data, hyperlinks, or references that are collected in tag profiles. These tag profiles reference an information resource that resides in a distributed, and often heterogeneous, storage repository.

Semiotics of Social Networking Social semiotics is thus the study of the social dimensions of meaning, and of the power of human processes of signification and interpretation in shaping individuals and societies.

Unit-IV D 151 Social semiotics focuses on social meaning-making practices of all types, whether visual, verbal or aural in nature. Social media gives humans an instant connection to communicate with others. Social media is “used to describe the type of media that is based on conversation and interaction between people online. Where media means digital words, sounds & pictures which are typically shared via the internet and the value can be cultural, societal or even financial. One important way to explore this form of communication as social networking is through semiotics.

Social Bookmarking Sites There are two ways to use Social Bookmark sites: 1) Use the free link code to get a button that links to a generic bookmark page 2) Create a premium account that allows to generate special code so that one can edit their website and track its activity. On can decide how many or how few bookmarking services to display on the blog and the bookmark are free set it and forget it traffic generators for their website. List of Social Book Marking and Social Tagging Sites 8. Conclusion There are many ways that social software can fail to address the needs of learners. The list is no doubt incomplete, but without adherence to each of these tools it is unlikely that social software will be successful in self organizing for the benefit of learners. These tools are highly interconnected, D Shivalingaiah and Umesha Naik each feeding from or informing one or more others and two in particular (connectivity and scale) are more meta-principles than guidelines. Each bookmarking site has its own pros and cons, and it takes meticulous planning and research before one can consider submitting his/her site content to a social bookmarking service. From the most basic press release to more complex articles, all site content is examined and then the appropriate site is determined for submission. Social software in education offers great potential pedagogic and practical benefits, both through the amplification and creation of social ties, and through allowing learners to choose whether to control or be controlled in a learning transaction. This accounts to some extent for the enormous popularity of social systems like Google and Wikipedia which may fast be becoming the dominant learning tools of this first decade of the twentyfirst century. Google and other major search engines have decided to go content-centric; the more places they have their content, the more traffic we generate. Social Bookmarking has recently developed into a powerful technique for search engine optimization, gaining back links to their sites and developing their internet presence. But the problem is bookmarking these many, many sites is a time consuming process.

WEB – SCALE DISCOVERY SERVICES Web-scale discovery services—tools that search seamlessly across a wide range of local and remote content and provide relevance-ranked results—have the ambitious goal of providing a single point of entry into a library’s collections. The four major vendors are OCLC, EBSCO, ProQuest, and Ex Libris. Ideally all possible online content providers are indexed, as well as the library’s local holdings. After four years of development, these products have come close to this ideal, but gaps persist.

152 D Library and Information Science Specific Discovery services face complex challenges. For example, to accommodate the concerns of proprietary-content providers, discovery services must differentiate publicly available search results from content offered only to authenticated users. In addition, access to resources must be aligned with each library’s subscription and database selections. Discovery services only allow access to resources that a library is authorized to use through paid subscriptions, open access licenses, or the public domain. Often a library is a subscriber to both the discovery service and the content resource, allowing the best results. Database publishers tend to make their materials available to discovery service providers to improve access and increase usage statistics, thus encouraging library renewals. In many cases, the full text of e-journal articles and other content is indexed along with the basic metadata required to retrieve citations. Abstracting and indexing (A&I) services, such as those provided by Thompson Reuters/ ISI, PubMed, and PsychInfo, are one area of controversy. These products are based on proprietary information—structured discipline-specific vocabularies, abstracts, and other elements that provide great value to the discovery process. In the form of standalone databases, A&I services offer precise search tools that aid researchers in finding scholarly articles. But A&I providers frequently express concerns that web-scale discovery services will weaken interest in their products. The current business environment surrounding web-scale discovery reflects these complications. Of the major vendors, two (EBSCO and ProQuest) also publish major aggregations of content based on proprietary subject indexes. Because of a variety of business concerns, these two companies do not yet fully cooperate with competing discovery service providers. EBSCO, for example, does not provide metadata associated with its popular EBSCO host databases to other discovery services for inclusion in their indexes, though it does offer access to the EBSCO Discovery Service API for libraries with mutual subscriptions. This type of noncooperation has been a point of frustration. The Orbis Cascade Alliance, a consortium of academic libraries in the Pacific Northwest, has engaged in a public discussion of its concerns about EBSCO not providing metadata to Ex Libris for inclusion in its Primo Central index. It is also very difficult to quantify the relative coverage of these discovery services. One major consideration in selecting a service involves determining how comprehensively each product covers the library’s collection. This process involves a careful analysis of library holdings versus the stated coverage lists provided by each service. A related concern involves how discovery services rank search results. A fully objective relevance ranking would order results without bias toward any given content provider. If the discovery service company is also a major content provider, libraries need reassurance that search results are not skewed. Discovery services can play a vital role in a library’s strategic infrastructure. But it’s not a one-size-fits-all arena. The needs of public and academic libraries, for example, differ enormously. Libraries can select from a variety of options to deliver the best user experience, but they must be well-equipped with data and perspective as they place their bets in this critical area.

Unit-IV D 153

NATIONAL INFORMATION SYSTEMS AND NETWORKS National Institute of Science Communication and Information Resources (NISCAIR) National Institute of Science Communication and Information Resources (NISCAIR). The National Institute of Science Communication (NISCOM), the erstwhile Publications and Information Directorate (PID) was set up in 1951 to published scientific journals, periodicals and to compile information on the country’s raw material in the form of an encyclopedia of great importance. Again, the Indian National Scientific Documentation Centre (INSDOC) was set up in 1952, with the technical assistance from UNESCO. Both the institute NISCOM and INSDOC merged on 30th September, 2002 giving rise to National Institute of Science Communication and Information Resources (NISCAIR), which devotes itself to science communication, dissemination and Science & Technology information management systems and services user with the application of modern Information Technology infrastructure. (a) Aims and Objectives The main aims and objectives of NISCAIR are: (i) Mission Statement. To become the prime custodian of all information resources on current and traditional knowledge systems in science and technology in the country, and to promote communication in science to diverse constituents at all levels, using the most appropriate technologies (ii) Mandate of NISCAIR n To provide formal linkages of communication among the scientific community in the form of research journals in different areas of S & T; n To disseminate S & T information to general public, particularly school students, to inculcate interest in science among them; n To collect, collate and disseminate information on plant, animal and mineral wealth of the country; n To harness information technology applications in information management with particular reference to science communication and modernizing libraries; n To act as a facilitator in furthering the economic, social, industrial, scientific and commercial development by providing timely access to relevant and accurate information; n To develop human resources in science communication, library, documentation and information science and S&T information management systems and services; n To collaborate with international institutions and organizations having objectives and goals similar to those of NISCAIR; n Any other activity in consonance with the mission statement of NISCAIR. (b) Activities and Services Broadly the core activity of NISCAIR is to collect/store, publish and disseminate S & T information through a mix of traditional and modern means, which benefits different segments of society.

154 D Library and Information Science Specific (i) Acquisition of Information Resources. One of the core activities of NISCAIR is to collect, organize and disseminate S & T information generated in India as well as in the world which has relevance to Indian S & T community. Under this programme, the institute is building comprehensive collection of S & T publications in print as well as in electronic form and disseminating through traditional as well as modern means benefiting different segments of the society. (ii) National Science Library. The National Science Library (NSL), which was set up in 1964 has a comprehensive collection of over 2,00,000 volumes including monographs and bound volumes of journals in the country and is offering services on a national scale. NSL also acts as a referral centre and clearing house for the best utilisation of the existing collection in the country. The NSL is enrich with electronic resourcdes, online databases, CD-ROM Databases. (iii) In-house Databases. The database developed by NISCAIR includes: n National Union Catalogue of Scientific Serials in India (NUCSSI). n Indian Patents (INPAT) Database. n Medicinal and Aromatic Plants Abstracts (MAPA). n Indian Science Abstract (ISA). (iv) Raw Materials Herbarium & Museum. NISCAIR has set up a Herbarium and Museum housing economically important raw materials of plant, animal and mineral origin from India at one place, to cater to the needs of scientists, researchers, industrialists students and the public.  The NISCAIR Herbarium & Museum has been assigned the acronym RHMD (Raw Materials Herbarium & Museum, Delhi) by the International Association for Plant Taxonomy, which appears in the publiication “Index Herbarium, New York, USA”. The Herbarium houses over 6000 specimen of economic and medicinal plants of India and the Museum comprises over 2500 samples of crude-drugs, animal and mineral specimens. (v) Consultancy Services. Under this programme, services are offered in the identification of plants and crude drug samples against payment. Information on plants regarding availability, use, cultivation, export/import data is provided on request. Services on other important aspects of plants, animals and minerals of commercial and industrial uses are also supplied against payment. (vi) Official Certifying Centre (OCC). Based on the herbarium and museum of crude drug samples and in-house expertise, NISCAIR herbarium serves as one of the nodal agencies in India for authentication of crude drugs used in the Indigenous Systems of Medicine. (vii) NISCAIR Citizen Charter. The charter would essentially incorporate citizen’s entitlement to public services, wide publicity of standards of performance, quality of services, access to information, simplified procedures of complaints, time-bound redressal of grievances and provision for independent scrutiny of performance.   (viii) E-journals Consortia. NISCAIR is the nodal agency for developing a “Consortium for CSIR Laboratories for Accessing e-journals”. The activity ranges from creation to monitoring of the access facility of scientific periodicals published by leading international institutions. (ix) Translation Service. NISCAIR provides translation of S & T documents from 20 foreign languages into English. The languages include Chinese, Czech, Danish, Dutch, French, German, Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Norwegian, Polish,

Unit-IV D 155

(x)

(xii)

(xiii)

(xiv)

Portuguese, Rumanian, Russian, Serbo-Croatian, Spanish, Swedish, etc. The clients include National Laboratories, S&T institutes, R&D organisations, Corporate and Public Sector Undertakings, Universities, Research Scholars, etc. NISCAIR also provides reverse translation (English into foreign language). Document Copy Supply Service (DCSS). NISCAIR provides DCSS to the Indian scientific community by supplying copies of articles from Indian and foreign journals at nominal charges Copies of Indian and foreign patents and standards can also be obtained from NISCAIR. Human Resource Development. NISCAIR conducts training programs in library and information science, documentation, science communication and herbarium techniques with an objective of human resource development. Short-Term/ Attachment/On-site Training Programmes including a two year master’s level academic course [Associateship in Information Science (AIS)] in information science (one course every year) is the peculiarity of NISCAIR. Publication. The institute brings out 17 primary and two secondary scientific journals of international repute. The institute also brings out three popular science magazines in Hindi, English and Urdu to meet the scientific quest of the masses. Encyclopaedic volumes of “The Wealth of India” and “Bharat Ki Sampada”, which deal with the natural resources of the country, cater to the needs of enterpreneurs, progressive farmers, students, researchers, etc. Besides, Fortnightly issues of CSIR News (in English) and monthly issues of CSIR Samachar (in Hindi) serve as an effective link between various CSIR constituents and users of information on various R & D programs and other activities of CSIR, other R&D organizations, university departments and industry. The journals published by the institute includes Indian Journal of Traditional Knowledge (IJTK) and Medicinal and Aromatic Plants Abstracts (MAPA). It also publishes digitized versions of Indian Science Abstracts (ISA), Medicinal and Aromatic Plants Abstracts (MAPA), The Wealth of India, Raw Materials Series. International Collaboration. NISCAIR is the National Centre of the ISSN International Centre for assigning ISSN numbers for serials published in India. NISCAIR exchanges publications with over 150 institutions in 44 countries in the world. Distinguished experts from other countries visit the institute every year. NISCAIR’s scientists also attend international conferences, seminars, workshops and training programmes.

Conclusion In addition, NISCAIR provides various services such as Medicinal and Aromatic Plants Information Service; Contents, Abstracts and Photocopy Service (CAPS); Literature Search Service; S & T Translation Service; Bibliometric Service; Editing, Designing, Production and Printing of scientific publications

Defence Scientific Information and Documentation Centre (DESIDOC) Defence Scientific Information and Documentation Centre (DESIDOC). DESIDOC started functioning in 1958 as Scientific Information Bureau (SIB). It was a division of the Defence Science Laboratory (DSL) which is presently called as Laser Science & Technology Centre

156 D Library and Information Science Specific (LASTEC). The Defence Research and Development Organisation (DRDO) library which had its beginning in 1948 became a division of Scientific Information Bureau (SIB) in 1959. In 1967 SIB was reorganised with augmented activities and named Defence Scientific Information and Documentation Centre (DESIDOC). It still continued to function under the administrative control of Defence Science Laboratory (DSL). Defence Scientific Information and Documentation Centre (DESIDOC) became a self-accounting unit and one of the laboratories of DRDO on 29 July 1970. The Centre was functioning in the main building of Metcalfe House, a landmark in Delhi and a national monument. In August 1988 it moved to its newly built five-storied building in the same Metcalfe House complex. Since it became a self-accounting unit, DESIDOC has been functioning as a central information resource for DRDO. It provides science & technology information, based on its library and other information resources, to the DRDO headquarters, and its various laboratories at various places in India. (a) Organization DESIDOC has been divided into various sections such as Documentation Section, Translation Section, Reprography Section, Technical Section, Administrative Section, Library Section, Multicopier Section, Publication Section, etc. (b) Services and Facilities Available The main services of DESIDOC are: (i) Information Processing & Dissemination. Collection of Science and & Technology information of DRDO interest, provide current awareness services to DRDO Scientists. This includes Newspaper Clippings Service, IEE/IEEE contents, Current contents in Military Science and Technology. (ii) Training. Training in the areas of library automation, database development, online searching, e-mail and internet use, technical communication, multimedia development and other relevant aspects of information technology. (iii) Technical Services. Providing reprography (photography, audio, video presentation materials), translation, communication (e-mail, Internet) and printing services. (c) Internet and E-mail Access DESIDOC took initiative and started providing e-mail and Internet access to the DRDO Laboratories spread over the country, through 64 kbps leased line connection from VSNL, Presently about 25 dial up TCP/IP internet  connection for top management are also being managed and monitored. (i) Multimedia Laboratory. The Laboratory was established to provide multimedia authoring, designing and presentation facilities to the top management and the Scientific Adviser to the Defence Minister. Expertise has been established in image processing, CD-writing, audio-video designing, desktop CD publishing and multimedia CD-ROM production. A few multimedia products were published and consultancy was provided to establish multimedia laboratories both within and outside DRDO. (ii) Reprographic Facility. This Facility helps DRDO top management and scientists in their technical presentations. The Facility is equipped with a computer-based 35 mm multicolour slide making system, a digital colour copier, high quality colour printers and video recorders, and provides high quality presentation materials.

Unit-IV D 157 (iii) Printing Facility. A full-fledged high quality Printing Facility has been established which includes designing, layout, typesetting, DTP, processing and printing units for in-house production of DRDO publications. High quality multicolour printing is carried out with the help of commercial printing agencies. (d) DRDO Publications DESIDOC functions as the publication wing of DRDO and brings out a number of publications, covering current developments in Indian Defence Research & Development. The periodicals published are (i) Defence Science Journal (ii) Technology Focus (iii) DRDO Newsletter (iv) DRDO Samachar (v) DESIDOC Bulletin of Information Technology (DBIT)

SENDOC The Small Enterprises National Documentation Center (SENDOC) was set up in 1970 at Small Industries Extension Training Institute (now known as National Institute of Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises), Hyderabad, to revitalize the micro, small and medium enterprises in India and developing countries by providing their required information. Gradually it has developed as a one-stop global and IT powered IC for a wide spectrum of micro, small and medium enterprises and academia, students, research institutions, industry associations, and entrepreneurs.

Objectives of SENDOC The main objectives of SENDOC are: n To collect, collate and store information, data and documents useful for the technological and managerial advancement of micro, small, and medium industries; n To disseminate information to the persons or organizations engaged in activities related to micro, small, and medium industries development; and n To be the national center for coordinating and collaborating with the information activities of other national institutions and maintaining liaison with similar centers in other countries.

Activities of SENDOC The main functions of SENDOC are collection and dissemination of information relating to organization, technology, machineries, government and other institutional programs and policies, statistics, etc. needed by persons connected with micro, small, and medium industries for the development of their respective enterprises. More specifically, the activities of SENDOC are: n Library services. The library of the center has over 50,000 books, 10,000 back volumes of journals, 13,500 reports, 65,000 journal abstracts, 5448 product profiles, and subscribes to 600 national and international periodicals. It has also a collection that provides information on statistics, economics, production, finance, marketing, technology, machinery and equipment, raw materials, consultants, government policies and programs, exports and imports, investment, trade and area literature,

158 D Library and Information Science Specific

n

n n

n

n

licensing, etc. Experts working in the center scan and arrange information systematically for quick retrieval. The services available in the library include, besides lending, interlibrary loan of documents; reference service, including preparation of bibliographies and literature search; newspaper clipping service; and technical inquiry service. Certain information is also accessible through the center’s website. Consultancy services. SENDOC provides the following consultancy services: answering technical enquiries; conducting pre-investment studies; preparing product profiles; and SDI service to small entrepreneurs; Photocopying service. SENDOC provides photocopying service to small entrepreneurs; Publications. SENDOC publishes some journals which are important for micro, small and medium entrepreneurs: SEDME Journal (quarterly); SME Technology (bimonthly); SME Policy (bimonthly); MSME Clusters News (quarterly); and ni-msme Bulletin (monthly). Continuing education. SENDOC organizes short-time training courses/workshops on different aspects of rendering information services, especially indexing and abstracting. Cooperation. SENDOC also cooperates with national and international organizations working in the field of micro, small, and medium industries and also serves as a clearing house for information related to such industries.

Environmental Information System (ENVIS) Realising the importance of Environmental Information, the Government of India, in December, 1982, established an Environmental Information System (ENVIS) as a plan programme. ENVIS is a decentralised system with a network of distributed subject oriented Centres ensuring integration of national efforts in environmental information collection, collation, storage, retrieval and dissemination to all concerned. Presently the ENVIS network consists of Focal Point at the Ministry of Environment and Forest and ENVIS Centres setup in different organizations/establishments in the country in selected areas of environment. These Centres have been set up in the areas of pollution control, toxic chemicals, central and offshore ecology, environmentally sound and appropriate technology, bio-degradation of wastes and environment management, etc. ENVIS India has already established Eighty One partner nodes, which include thirty government departments, Thirty Six Institutions and Fifteen NGOs. These nodes are supposed to create websites on specific environment related subject areas. 1. Aims and Objectives. ENVIS focal point ensures integration of national efforts in environmental information collection, collation, storage, retrieval and dissemination to all concerned. Long-term objectives (a) To build up a repository and dissemination centre in Environmental Science and Engineering; (b) To gear up the modern technologies of acquisition, processing, storage, retrieval and dissemination of information of environmental nature; and (c) To support and promote research, development and innovation in environmental information technology.

Unit-IV D 159 Short-term objectives (a) To provide national environmental information service relevant to present needs and capable of development to meet the future needs of the users, originators, processors and disseminators of information; (b) To build up storage, retrieval and dissemination capabilities with the ultimate objectives of disseminating information speedily to the users; (c) To promote, national and international cooperation and liaison for exchange of environment related information; (d) To promote, support and assist education and personnel training programmes designed to enhance environmental information processing and utilization capabilities; (e) To promote exchange of information amongst developing countries. 2. Functions (i) EMCBTAP. ENVIS has started implementing the World Bank assisted Environment Management Capacity Building Technical Assistance Project (EMCBTAP) since January, 2002 which aims at structuring the ENVIS scheme by extending its reach through involvement of Institutions/Organizations in State Governments, academia sector, corporate sector, NGO sector, etc. (ii) ENVIS-Nodes. To strengthen ENVIS in disseminating information pertaining to environment and sustainable development, ENVIS India establishes different ENVIS Nodes by involving Organizations, institutions, Universities and Government departments working in diverse areas of environment. Conclusion. ENVIS due to its comprehensive network has been designed as the National Focal Point (NFP) for INFOTERRA, a global environmental information network of the United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP). In order to strengthen the information activities of the NFP, ENVIS was designated as the Regional Service Centre (RSC) of INFOTERRA of UNEP in 1985 for the South Asia Sub-Region countries.

ERNET, NICNET, DELNET, JANET, BLAISE, OCLC, INFLIBNET Sharing of resources among organisations has been becoming more and more important and useful these days which gave birth to a new concept in resource sharing. That is called networking. The term network is used to cover several related but different developments. In a broad sense, networking is a joint effort taken up by two or more organisations to improve their resources and to provide better facilities and services to the members. Thus a network is a form of arrangement or an administrative structure that links a group of individuals or organisations who have agreed to work together and share resources. A formal dictionary meaning of networking implies a physical connection between the component parts. These days, the concept of information network in place of network is very much popular. The information networks are essentially a voluntary structure where those who have information want to share it in the fulfillment of the purposes for which they exist. Thus, the very objective of networking is to promote avenues for the effective utilization of information through sharing of resources by a group of libraries. The increasing popularity of information networking has brought about qualitative changes in the services of the libraries by promoting greater accessibility to information.

160 D Library and Information Science Specific The basic objectives of any information network are to identify and establish better ways for improving the flow of information among the members and member institutions.

Essentials Conditions for Networking For successful networking, working together interdependently needs certain essentialities. 1. A significant level of financial and organisational commitment is needed from all members. 2. All members must reach consensus on policies, objectives, operations, rules and contracts to make sure there is balanced distribution of the workload, as well as equal access to network information and services. 3. Members must agree on assigning roles and tasks and on specific guidelines for participants in line with members commitments and capabilities. 4. Common standards should be developed for organizing data collection, information storage and retrieval. 5. Guidelines should be formulated for selecting items to be included in the network collection of information. 6. Resources should be developed collaboratively, for example by cooperative acquisition, storage and browsing, rotating collections and keeping all members informed on available resources. 7. A central bibliographic file or catalogue should be established to locate in the network quickly and easily. 8. Evaluation criteria and procedures should be formulated so there is feedback about how to improve operations and services. 9. Training programmes must be organized.

ERNET—Education and Research NET Work The name of network which has been working in the field of education and research in the country is ERNET. The establishment of the same was done by electronic department of Government of India in 1986 in New Delhi, that is the first and important network in the country in the field of education and research. The full name of which is Education and Research NET work. ERNET architecture has been modelled to ultimately realise on open system interconnection or environment. The network architecture is based on multinetwork Internet concept. This network adopts a satellite channel as the medium. The approach of ERNET is normally similar to the one followed in advanced countries of leasing terrestrial circuits and making use of the National Public Data Network.

Objectives ERNET has the following objectives: (a) To setup a nationwide network for academic and research community of the country. (b) To promote national capabilities in the area of design, development, research, education and training on state-of-art concepts of computer networking and related emerging technologies. (c) To provide massive training programme to generate efficient manpower needed by industry and users in the field.

Unit-IV D 161

Facilities and Services The main emphasis is given by this network to the community related with research and development, establishment of other networks, and the functions for creating interactive cooperation. For doing these functions, the following facilities are being provided by ERNET network to the users of the country. (a) Joint product development (b) Technology transfer (c) Consultancy services (d) Education and training facilities (e) Arrangement of precise contacts. For doing and arranging above functions ERNET has done the provision of the following services. (i) Electronic mail service (ii) File transfer service (iii) Remote log on (Terminal access) (iv) Bibliographic database access (v) Audio and Audio Plus conferencing (vi) Bulletin board service. It is also supporting a multi-vendor computing environment based on OSE-7 layer model. All the above mentioned services are being supported its first phase. In the second phase it has also started document and graphic exchange, voice/video conferencing services. The communication sub-network of ERNET is also supporting a variety of communication terminal for specialized services to demonstrate telematic service.

NICNET—National Information Centre NET Work NICNET whose full form is National Information Centre NETwork, was established by National Information Centre as a information network in the country. It has primarily been set up to link various departments of the government for decision optimisation, i.e., to use new technologies of computer networking to ensure a systematic procedure for information exchange between the Centre and the States, between the States and their districts, and among various departments/ministries of the state and Central government as well as between them and the public.

Aims and Objectives NICNET was established to fulfill the following objectives: (a) (b) (c) (d)

To design, develop and implement advanced computer based methodology. To promote adoption of computer based management techniques. To generate specialized manpower in the field of information. To set up a compute r ne twork fo r co nnecting the various government departments\ministries. (e) To establish information centres at state capitals and district information centres at all districts in India with linkage to NIC at four centres.

162 D Library and Information Science Specific (f) To join internally together through the computer networks to all of the departments, autonomous bodies and organisations of central government of India in the form of a government information system of the country.

Architecture NICNET has more than 250 micro earth stations operating in different parts of the country. It links four regional nodes at Delhi, Pune, Bhuvneshwar and Hyderabad and established 32 nodes at the state and union territories levels and 439 nodes at district headquarters. By this architecture NICNET facilitates the provision of reliable data communication to the government agencies at the place of work. A number of information systems have been established under this network in the areas of accounts, budgets, customs and central excises, import-export distribution, estate duties, etc. It has established District Information System which is a network based data bank of NIC for better planning and efficient decision making about the districts.

Programmes and Services NICNET has been established as an important national information system for the transmission, dissemination and communication of information in the country, which is based on multiple access technique and uses a C-200 Services Micro Earth Station. Till now NICNET has developed so many databases and networks. Several types of services are being provided through this network. They are as follows: (a) E-mail. Electronic mail service of NICNET is the value added electronic mail. This service enables all users to transmit and receive mail. This mail service has been custom designed taking into consideration the network architecture and operation environment. (b) Bulletin Service. In bulletin service, it provides personal, employment and transport information especially by NIC offices to plan their visits to the head quarters. It also contains reservation facilities for all the trains form Delhi to other parts of the country. (c) Bibliographic Service. A major bibliographic application that is available on this network is the bibliographic biomedical information. NIC has established ICMRNIC centres for biomedical information is 1986, which has been providing services to users in the country form MEDline, POPline, CHEMBANK and cancer databases. This centre also conducts training courses, workshops and seminars aimed at preparing a cadre of biomedical librarians, well versed in the latest information technologies. (d) Patent Information System. NIC also developed a computerized online patent information system based on bibliographic data available from the International Patent Documentation Centre (INPADOC), Vienna. This system creates informational and multi-valued index directory files which facilitate faster and efficient retrieval of patent documents according to the International Patent Classification Code. (e) Doormats Service. Doordarshan and NIC have developed together a telematics project called INTEXT. It is day to day service of the NICNET to the public wherever TV transmission is received. In this service page after page of information can be seen about airline and train arrivals and departures, detailed weather information political events of the day, etc.

Unit-IV D 163 (f) Dial for Data Service. From 1989 NICNET is offering dial for data service which is accessible from public booths with one billion bytes of information is this system called GISNIC. It offers Information of direct relevance to the public, like what courses does a university offer, what are the price trends in commodities, etc. (g) Election Information Service. Since 1989 NICNET is providing this service for 3 Loksabha elections held in the country. NIC has also developed a software in C language for poll results processing.

DELNET—Delhi Libraries Net Work — Developing Library Network DELNET is an important and popular operational library network in the information environment of the country. By giving importance and significance to this network its name has been changed from Delhi Libraries NETwork (DELNET) to DEveloping Library NETwork (DELNET). At present the number of libraries incorporated with this network has been increased to near about 200, in which 117 libraries of Delhi, 72 libraries of other states of the country and 6 foreign libraries are included. A controlling body is working for its organisation and administration, which is constituted with library staff in addition to some experts having computer knowledge.

Aims and Objectives Its main aim is to promote resources sharing in the form of a network among all the libraries of the metropolitan area of Delhi.

Architecture DELNET was established in the first phase in 1988 and it has provided libraries a dial up modem with a synchronous part connected to it. And in the second phase it provided multiple data path to connected system and also make use of I-NET.

Services and Facilities (a) Facility of the Software. Providing softwares is the chief working of this network. In the beginning it provided CDS\ISIS named software of UNESCO in India through NISSAT. But now it is providing its own developed software DELSIS which is able software for complex cataloguing and union cataloguing work. (b) Standardization. There is one standardization committee, that has determined so many standards for many operations. It emphasizes on the use of CCF for inter library exchange of bibliographic data, and accepted AACR-2 for cataloguing. The subject headings lists of LC, i.e. LCSH is recommended for thesaurus. (c) Database Service. DELNET has developed so many databases, which are available to all member libraries online. Presently, the databases related with union catalogue of books, union list of current serials, articles of periodicals, union catalogue of periodicals, union lists of Indian expects and video recordings, union list of newspapers are available. (d) E-mail Service. This is the network that provided E-mail service first in the country, which was started to provide in 1991 through National Information Centre (NIC) on low prices. This service is available to all member libraries of this network.

164 D Library and Information Science Specific (e) Referral Centre. DELNET has also established a referral centre, that provides reference facilities to all member libraries. This referral centre also helps the members who get access of international databases. (f) Online Inter Library Loan Service. This network has been providing inter library loan and document supply service online from the very beginning. In beginning this service was based on courier, but now a three wheeler vehicle has been provided for this purpose. (g) DEL LISTSERV Service. This network is also providing LISTSERV current awareness services, which are as follows: (i) MED-Clip (ii) LIBJOBS (iii) NET-Happenings (h) Training Programmes. This network organises training programmes at time to time for the professional development of library and information science personnels, which may be on the topics such as Delnet Services, Softwares, E-mail, Subject headings list of Library of Congress, AACR-II and Internet, etc. (i) Publications. This network has been publishing since January 1994 DELNET Newsletters to understand the information related with latest developments being held in the fields of networking and resources sharing.

JANET—Joint Academic NETwork JANET is the main and important library and research network of Great Britain, the full name of the same is Joint Academic NETwork, which was established in Britain in 1984 by the Council of Computer Board for Universities and Research. The network functions as a communication system, that is connected with so many other networks of Europe and USA. Hence JANET is a joint programme of research network and library network of Britain, which is very much useful and convenient network in that country from the point of view of documentation and information services.

Aims and Objectives The first aim of the establishment of this network in Britain was to provide access of public network and the foreign networks to the users, but later the aim of the same is to promote research and study & teaching and to provide high quality information services in the country.

Services For the users, this network facilitates the following services: (a) E-mail Service. The O phase of this network was only added to it in order to establish E-mail service. This network began its operation with the inauguration of E-mail. Nearly 30 libraries are now using E-mail and 22 E-mail nodes have been established. DELNET has started using the new E-mail software with the following features. (i) Mail could be sent internationally as it has access to ERNET (ii) It has provision for usage statistics (iii) Folder could be created. Now DELNET libraries are being offered access to NICMAIL and NIC databases. This is being done to bring information resources available with NIC closer to users through the libraries in Delhi.

Unit-IV D 165 (b) Document Supply Centre. It is also the service of this network to provide access to the services of British Library and to facilitate the demands of the users to documents supply centres of British library. (c) File Transfer. This network uses cataloguing databases for the transfer of catalogue records. In 1985 this was started in this network by which near about 30 libraries of the country had been successful upto 1988 in providing their catalogues to the user through this network. (d) Communication Services. This network also have arranged to provide the facility of communication of the information for academic libraries of the country, by which the function of shared cataloguing, document supply, public data network, and lending among academic libraries which is provided by E-mail, can easily be performed. (e) New Service. This network provides details of informative materials of all libraries linked in the network through JANET NEWS, which has a bulletin board and consists with directory of files. In addition to this, it also provides JANET User Group for Libraries named news service to the users which has the file of JANET OPACS and consists of access for JANET catalogue and their database. Bibliography, directory of libraries and their addresses are also available in it. (f) Online Directory. JANET has started online directory service and also provides main bulletin board services for providing information on softwares and services at national level. (g) Online Catalogue Service. Online catalogue service is also one of the main service of this network which acquaintance with the documents available in the college, universities and polytechnic institutions. (h) Database Services. This network provides database services such as Cambridge Structural Data Bank, Inorganic Crystal Structures Data File, Crystal Data Identification File, Type Series Data Bank, Agricultural Database, etc. (i) Other Services. This network not only link the universities and polytechnic institutes for getting financial help from Research Council but link the local area network also so that the services may be provided in the premises also.

OCLC—Online Computer Library Centre The Online Computer Library Centre is called in its abbreviated form as OCLC. It is the information and library network of America, and is a very big and wide information network in the World. This network is a useful centre of providing the access of all the resources and informations available in the libraries of America. Upto 1971 its name was Ohio College Library Centre, which has been changed now to Online Computer Library Centre (OCLC). This information network was established in 1967 in Doublin (Ohio), which has become very popular as it was used very much as a state level information network. In 1971, the online service also was started by this centre, therefore its nature has also been a good and important development in this direction. At present this network is very wide area information network not only in USA but also in the World.

166 D Library and Information Science Specific Aims of OCLC The main aim of this information network is to be a convenient automatic system for completing the library services such as ordering acquisition and cataloguing of the documents and to be a exhaustive system of inter library loan for providing reference and documentation services for reference librarians.

Activities and Programmes of OCLC (a) Acquisition sub-system. This network provides the facilities of the acquisition sub-system to its users, the said system is known as SUBY\OCLC. This sub-system provides the facilities of making online acquisitions order to librarians of the participating libraries. This centre receives and prints these orders and send them to the book sellers to supply the books. (b) Full Cataloguing of Periodicals. The full cataloguing of the periodicals is also done in this centre and the facilities of verification demand and union cataloguing is also provided through this system. (c) Printing of Catalogue Cards. In 1972, this centre mixed together the records of all member libraries and LC, so the titles of the records may be identified and their catalogue cards may be prepared. As a result of the same, this centre was established as a Catalogue Production System, for which MARC tapes were used for providing proper library services and for this purpose the catalogue cards were printed and were distributed among member libraries. (d) Inter Library Loan. This centre provides inter library loan under reference and documentation services. The sub-system of this centre make available the material for inter library loan service in the New York state. (e) Database Services. The collection of this centre is made in the form of database of the records of member libraries, MARC tape of LC, National Library of Medicine and GPO Monthly catalogue. The identification of the publications, published after 1968 can be done by its databases. (f) MARC Tape. The provision of MARC tape is done in this centre not only for itself but also is provided on online through DIALOG, and they can be purchased. The material published before 1968 have not been added in MARC Tapes. Hence more than 60 lacs retrospective material is provided on online and the access of literature of 468 languages of the World available through MARC tape. (g) Local Services. The centre is only the national programme of USA but it has also started many library units, so that the libraries can get the facilities of central cataloguing service and online reference and information services. (i) Union Catalogue. This centre is also a by-product system of inter library loan of shared cataloguing which is its sub-system. It provides facilities of online union catalogue, which is made by affiliated libraries for providing regular information of their collections. The knowledge and identification of current collections of the participating libraries is made available very easily by union catalogues of OCLC. It saves the time of the users.

Unit-IV D 167

INFLIBNET INFLIBNET is the major programme towards modernization of libraries and information centres in the country with the application of computers and communication technologies. It is a cooperative network like UTLAS of Canada and JANET of UK which is aimed to contribute to pooling, sorting and optimization of resources, facilities and services of libraries and information centres in the university system as well as research and development complexes. This programme was launched by UGC in 1989.

Infrastructure of INFLIBNET (a) One national centre has been working at Ahmedabad. (b) Four regional centres have also been working. (c) The computer system is proposed to be in all the libraries of universities, colleges and research institutions of the country. (d) The following will be interconnected by 400 underground terminals. (i) 170 university libraries (ii) 500 autonomous college libraries (iii) 200 research and development institutions (iv) 10 documentation resource centres. (e) All of above will be internally connected with chain of satellite. (f) Its communication system will be very much strong and efficient.

Objectives Its main aim was to connect as a computer network of the libraries of all the universities, colleges and research institutions of the country. The other important aims are as follows: (i) To establish a national network progamme of all the libraries of universities, colleges, research institutions and documentation/information centres. (ii) To promote the efficiencies and expertises of these libraries and documentation/ information centres. (iii) To computerize the working systems, arrangement and services of these institutions by adopting a standard among them. (iv) To provide ready information to the users living at every place of the country about books, periodicals, and other reading materials. (v) To prepare databases of experts, institutions and programmes to give online information services. (vi) To provide document delivery service by establishing resource centres in the libraries accomplished for documentation services. (vii) To do maximum use of information sources by the programmes in the libraries, such as cooperative cataloguing, inter library loan, etc. (viii) To encourage for cooperation among the libraries, documentation and information centres of the country.

168 D Library and Information Science Specific Services and Application of INFLIBNET In this programme, the real time services has still not been started however when the network is fully completed, it will aim to offer the following services: (a) Catalogue based services (i) Shared cataloguing of books, serials and non-book materials. (ii) Union catalogue of books, serials and non-book materials. (iii) Online catalogue access of shared cataloguing and location identification. (b) Catalogue production in cards, books, magnetic tape, floppy, CD-ROM form, book processing and preparation. The final aim is to gather 9 million retrospective catalogue record of 179 universities into a common catalogue, the end result is the machine readable catalogue (MARC), of a standardized pattern, for this CD-ROM technology will be used. (c) Database services (i) Bibliographic database services (ii) Retrospective searches, SDI, CAS (iii) Database on non-bibliographical information such as on going and completed projects of institutions and specialists. (d) Document supply services (i) Inter library loan service (ii) Document delivery by fax or nonfax. (e) Collection development (i) Acquisition and assistance in selection and procurement. (f) Communication-based (i) E-mail service (ii) Bulletin board file transfer service (iii) Computer audio and video conferencing.

National Knowledge Network The Government’s decision to set up National Knowledge Network was announced in the Budget Speech, 2008-09. An initial amount of Rs. 100 crore for FY 2008-09 was allocated to the Department for establishing the National Knowledge Network. A High Level Committee (HLC) was set up under the Chairmanship of Principal Scientific Adviser to the Government of India to coordinate and monitor the establishment of the National Knowledge Network. Government has approved the project on Establishment of National Knowledge Network in March, 2010 with an outlay of Rs. 5990 Cr. over a period of 10 years. National Informatics Centre (NIC) is the implementing agency.

Objective The objective of the National Knowledge Network (NKN) is to interconnect all institutions of higher learning and research with a high speed data communication network to facilitate knowledge sharing and collaborative research. NKN will facilitate advanced distance education in specialized fields like engineering, science, medicine etc. as well as enable an ultra-high speed eGovernance backbone. It will bridge the existing knowledge gap in

Unit-IV D 169 the country and help the country evolve as a Knowledge Society and also spur economic activities in the Knowledge domain.

Application Areas The application areas envisaged under the National Knowledge Network cover: 1. Agriculture 2. Education 3. Health 4. e-governance 5. Grid Computing (High Performance Computing)

Current Status 1. 1586 links to Institutions have been commissioned and made operational. This includes 383 links to institutions under NMEICT, which have been migrated to NKN. 2. 66 Virtual Classrooms have been set up. 3. NKN connectivity has also been extended to 461 NIC district centers. 4. NKN has established its International PoP at the NetherLight switch at Amsterdam with a 10G link. 5. NKN enables collaboration among researchers from international educational networks like TEIN4 and organizations such as CERN. 6. NKN and Internet of USA have signed a Memorandum of Understanding to create a robust collaboration program between the two national research and education (R&E) networks.

Biotechnology Information Systems Network (BTISNET) Recognizing the importance of information technology for pursuing advanced research in modern biology and biotechnology, a bioinformatics programme, envisaged as a distributed database and network organisation, was launched during 1986-87.    The programme has become a very successful vehicle for transfer and exchange of information, scientific knowledge, technology packages and references in the country involving 10-12 thousand scientific personnel. Six Centres of Excellence, Eleven Distributed Information Centres and an Apex Centre at the Department of Biotechnology, 51 SubDistributed Information Centres and 98 Bioinformatics Infrastructure Facilities located in Universities and Research Institutes of national importance, are fully engaged in this task. Six national facilities have been set up for interactive graphics based molecular modelling and other biocomputational needs. Five long term courses at the level of post M.Sc. Diploma in Bioinformatics, at Pune University, Jawaharlal Nehru University, Calcutta University, Pondicherry University and Madurai Kamaraj University, are fullfilling the long outstanding need for trained human resources in this inter-disciplinary area. The entire network has emerged as a very sophisticated scientific infrastructure for bioinformatics involving state-of-the-art computational and communication facilities.

Objectives The broad objectives of Biotechnology Information System Network programme are:

170 D Library and Information Science Specific (i) To provide a national bioinformation network designed to bridge the interdisciplinary gaps on biotechnology information and establish link among scientists in organisations involved in R&D and manufacturing activities in the country. (ii) To build information resources, prepare databases on biotechnology and to develop relevant information handling tools and techniques. (iii) To continuously assess information requirements, create and improve necessary infrastructure and to provide informatics based support and services to the national community of users working in biotechnology and allied areas. (iv) To coordinate efforts to access Biotechnology information worldwide including establishing linkages with some of the international resources of Biotechnology information (e.g. Databanks on genetic materials, published literature, patents, and other information of scientific and commercial value).

INTERNATIONAL INFORMATION SYSTEMS AND NETWORKS AGRIS The success story of the INIS as an international information system in nuclear sciences has shown the way embarking upon similar type of information systems in other fields also such as agriculture, population, development science, etc. AGRIS is one of them which was closely modelled on INIS system. AGRIS become operational in 1975 and is sponsored by the Food and Agricultural Organization (FAO) of United Nations.

Aims and Objectives The main objective of establishing AGRIS, is to provide a comprehensive agricultural information among nations of the world on the basis of multilateral cooperation and to avoid wasteful duplication of work in the field. It also aims at meeting the international needs of developing countries and help them to train their scientific and technical personnels.

Organization AGRIS is a cooperative information system consisting of 146 national and 25 regional and international centres, which participate and submit about 11,000 items per month. Two regional centres submit input on behalf of 9 countries in their respective regions. The system is managed by the AGRIS/CARIS Coordinating Centre, Library and Documentation Systems Division, FAO, Rome. AGRIS uses computer configuration and software packages located at the Vienna, the INIS centre.

Salient Features The salient features of AGRIS are: (i) The international cooperative venture (ii) Maximum decentralization and minimum centralization

Unit-IV D 171 (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix)

Output utilization Formulation of standards and rules in the field of information science Computer based information retrieval system Document retrieval systems Source for subject indexing Indexing and abstracting services Use of modern techniques in the field of information processing and mission oriented information system.

Services AGRIS provides following services to its users. Since 1975, when the system became operational AGRIS has accumulated a database of more than 2.2 million references. The data forwarded by participating countries is processed at Vienna at the AGRIS processing unit which is hosted, under contractual agreement, by the Technical Information division of the IAEA. It is made available in the following ways as service. (a) AGRINDEX, the monthly bibliography in which approximately 21% of the current entries include abstracts. (b) Magnetic tapes with same information, which are sent to AGRIS centres on demand. (c) Online access to the global database is provided by a number of hosts, is available online at IAEA Vienna. The users, who are equipped with a suitable microcomputer or terminal can reach the hosts via international telecommunication network. In addition to the above facilities AGRIS is able to provide its users the following various kinds of information services also, which may be undertaken by national, regional or international participating centres. These are as follows: (i) Retrospective search through databases. (ii) Selective Dissemination of Information service by which users can ask to be kept informed of any new AGRIS entries on specific subjects of interest to them. (iii) National bibliographies, containing all entries either generated in the country or concerning the country, published outside. (iv) Subject bibliographies prepared by specialized cooperating centres.

India’s Participation India has been participating in the AGRIS programme with the Agricultural Research Information Centre of ICAR of India, as the national centre. On an average 3500 bibliographical entries are passed on to AGRIS database as Indian input every year. A computerized SDI service is operational using Burrough’s B-4700 computer systems at Pusa (New Delhi). The centre is also providing trainings on AGRIS methodology, indexing, abstracting and AGRIS classification scheme including use of AEROVAC. The centre is also providing training of information and documentation personnels from developing countries.

INIS — International Nuclear Information System The advent of computer as a major tool in information processing and possibility of creating machine readable databases, have now opened up new opportunities for development of international information systems. In these systems, there is one system named

172 D Library and Information Science Specific International Nuclear Information System (INIS) which has shown the way for embarking upon other similar systems such as AGRIS, DEVSIS, SPINES, etc. INIS is a mission oriented information system covering more or less the entire field of nuclear science. INIS started its functioning in 1970, sponsoring by IAEA, Vienna. INIS is one of the practical example of how international cooperation in the development of computer based information system can be achieved.

Aims and Objectives INIS has the objective of achieving maximum economy in time, money and efforts and avoiding duplication in handling nuclear science literature. The main purpose of establishing INIS is to assist IAEA in fostering the exchange of scientific and technical information on peaceful uses of atomic energy; to encourage the exchange and training of scientists and experts in the field of atomic energy; and to cater the information needs of the developing countries.

Organisation INIS is now a large decentralised, non-commercial information network consisting of 87 countries and 17 international and inter governmental organisations. The organisation of INIS comprises following three levels: (i) The first level is the INIS Centre or Secretariat of Agency. (ii) The second level is represented by National INIS centres and INIS centres of International Organisation. (iii) The third level comprises the individual or local users of INIS.

Salient Features The salient features of INIS are: (a) international IR system, (b) cooperative venture communication with participants, (c) maximum decentralization and minimum centralization, (d) adherence to standards and rules, (e) computer based systems, (f) a document retrieval system, (g) use of thesaurus for subject indexing, (h) indexing and abstracting service with a high quality input, (i) a dynamic and flexing system, (j) machine readable information service and (k) a mission oriented system.

Services INIS provides the following services to the users of nuclear science.

(a) Document Delivery Service This service is of a particular usefulness to developing countries who have special difficulties in obtaining copies of the full text of documents reported in INIS Atomindex. INIS provides this by an agency to all member states. For this all hard copies of nonconventional literature is micro filmed by the photographic unit of INIS.

(b) Document Retrieval Service The national centre of INIS has its own system of information dissemination based on the INIS output. These centres provide various types of information services, two most common are: (i) Selective Dissemination of Information (ii) Retrospective Search Service and CAS.

Unit-IV D 173

(c) Online Service Since 1980 the INIS online service, like magnetic tape service is available only to the member states participating in INIS. More than 880,000 items have been included in the INIS database. This database is available for online searching on the computer centre at the IAEA headquarters. The connection to the INIS database in Vienna can be through either telephone or telex, or through networks such as Tymnet.

(d) Thesaurus for Subject Headings INIS subject indexing is controlled by the INIS thesaurus. INIS thesaurus is a dynamic entity and a number of new terms have been added, deleted or changed with time, experience and literary warrant. The entire thesaurus is maintained in machine readable form at INIS headquarters. The thesaurus serves as an important tool in indexing and comprises nuclear physics and reactor technology in great depth.

(e) Indian Participation India is the first country to join INIS and has been participating in it. The Library and Information Service Division of Bhabha Atomic Research Centre (BARC), Bombay is the national centre responsible for INIS activities in India. On account of participation in INIS, Indian scientists have no longer any problem in having access to nuclear science literature of the world.

MEDLARS — MEDical Literature Analysis and Retrieval System The National Library of Medicine of USA has been providing traditional network services in the libraries of the country since 1880 and also has been publishing an international index named Index Medicus, a biggest printed index of the articles of the research periodicals in the field of medical sciences and its related subjects. But in 1964 bibliographical database was made as a method by changing the formation of Index Medicus which is called MEDLARS, whose full form is MEDical Literature Analysis and Retrieval System. MEDLARS is a computer aided indexing service. It was developed in 1968 for online search and in 1972 MEDLARS online established in the form of MEDLINE as a national service in USA. In first stage its scope was not so wide as it was in MEDLARS, but since 1977 the scope of MEDLINE service has become equal to earlier. These days it is providing access of the material of more than 5 lacs research periodicals through the computer in 350 medical libraries of the country.

Utility of MEDLARS MEDLARS is known as the biggest bibliographical database of international level. It is important not only for the experts of medical science, but also for other scientists, sociologists, trades and businessmen, etc. It has become more and more useful and its scope is very much wide. Its present form MEDLINE has not been useful for online search like MEDLARS, but later on, it has become very much useful. It also has been useful for the people which are not concerned with medical sciences.

Input In this index, the reviews of medical sciences are produced in the bibliography mainly in the subject author part according to subjects and authors. The controlled indexing language

174 D Library and Information Science Specific is given in the issue of month January, which is called Medical subject headings and the whole list of the periodicals is also given. The selection of subject headings is done from the above list. On average 12 headings are given to each 4 articles, the printing of these is done under 4 or 5 subject headings in Index Medicus.

Output As soon as the material is adjusted in the computer, the mechanism of the work is started. On analysing the periodical indexes, two types of the result (output) are obtained. (a) The printed copies of Index Medicus. (b) Magnetic tapes preparation.

Printouts The extra access of citations is obtained on searching the information through computer and using the MEDLARS index. Its second useful benefit is to printout the citations.

Delivery of Documents MEDLINE does not deliver the documents, but it delivers only the citations of the documents and references. National Library of Medicine (USA) links to MEDLINE by the facilities of inter library loans. Near about 1100 documents are required and the library provides the answers of 30000 questions per year. The information needs of the users in this connection is provided by the 3 documents delivery places.

MEDLINE Search The four examples of the citation of documents remain present in MEDLINE search, which clarifies the differences. In Index Medicus, three citations out of each four become clear by indicating digits of the headings of documents, and the fourth one is not received, which only can be online searched by International Nursing Index, which is not presented in Index edicts. Hence for their bibliographic description Nursing Index is observed.

Cooperation MEDLARS has established contract with 8 countries like Britain, Sweden, France, Germany, Japan, Australia, Canada and WHO. In this programme MEDLARS provides computer tapes, documentation service training and Index of 15000 articles for each centre.

INSPEC—Information Service for the Physics and Engineering Community INSPEC is the world’s leading English-language database covering Electronics, computers and computing, Physics, electrical engineering, IT. INSPEC is a division of the Institution of electrical Engineers (London) who first began providing abstracts in 1898 with the publication of science abstracts. In 1969, it became one of the first information services to computerise its operations and the resultant database currently contains almost 2.5 million items. By scanning and processing the world’s output of scientific and technical literature, INSPEC is liable to provide information in a variety of forms suitable for scientist.

Unit-IV D 175

INSPEC Services INSPEC services are in daily use in university libraries and research centres, industrial research centres, manufacturing plants, engineering and scientific consultancies, defence establishments and public libraries, and that they are used by engineers, scientists, librarians, information specialists and students.

Source Material for INSPEC Database Consists of worldwide published Information in Science and Technology, Electrical Engineering, Control Engineering, Electronics, Computers, Physics and Information Technology.

INSPEC Products IT FOCUS; CCA EEA PA; Current Papers; Key Abstracts; SDI Topics; Japan update; Magnetic Tape Services; and online services.

Abstract Journals INSPEC publishes three abstract Journals as mentioned below: (a) Computer and Control Abstracts (b) Electrical and Electronic Abstracts (c) Physics Abstracts.

BIOSIS BIOSIS previews is an English-language, bibliographic database service, with abstracts and citation indexing. It is part of Clarivate Analytics Web of Science suite. BIOSIS Previews indexes data from 1926 to the present. BIOSIS Previews is part of the Life Sciences in Web of Science. Its coverage encompasses the life sciences and biomedical sciencesliterature, with deep global coverage on a wide range of related subject areas. This is accomplished with access to indexed journal content from Biological Abstracts, and supplemental indexed non-journal content from Biological Abstracts/Reports, Reviews, Meetings (BA/RRM or Biological Abstracts/RRM) and the major publications of BIOSIS. This coverage includes literature in pre-clinical and experimental research, methods and instrumentation, animal studies, environmental and consumer issues, and other areas. The database is also provided by EBSCO Information Services through a partnership with Clarivate Analytics. Biological Abstracts consists of 350,000 references for almost 5,000 primary journal and monograph titles. Biological Abstracts/RRM additionally includes more than 200,000 nonjournal citations.

Education Resources Information Center (ERIC) The Education Resources Information Center (ERIC) is an online digital library of education research and information. ERIC is sponsored by the Institute of Education Sciences of the United States Department of Education. The mission of ERIC is to provide a comprehensive, easy-to-use, searchable, Internetbased bibliographic and full-text database of education research and information for

176 D Library and Information Science Specific educators, researchers, and the general public. Education research and information are essential to improving teaching, learning, and educational decision-making. ERIC provides access to 1.5 million bibliographic records (citations, abstracts, and other pertinent data) of journal articles and other education-related materials, with hundreds of new records added every week. A key component of ERIC is its collection of grey literature in education, which is largely available in full text in Adobe PDF format. Approximately one quarter of the complete ERIC Collection is available in full text. Materials with no full text available (primarily journal articles) can often be accessed using links to publisher websites and/or library holdings. ERIC usually includes education related articles in its database. Sample articles include “The Economic, Social and Administrative Pharmacy (ESAP) Discipline in US Schools and Colleges of Pharmacy”, “Aesthetics in Young Children’s Lives: From Music Technology Curriculum Perspective”, and “Digital Game’s Impacts on Students’ Learning Effectiveness of Correct Medication”. The ERIC Collection, begun in 1966, contains records for a variety of publication types, including: n journal articles n books n research syntheses n conference papers n technical reports n dissertations n policy papers, and n other education-related materials ERIC provides the public with a centralized Web site for searching the ERIC collection and submitting materials to be considered for inclusion in the collection. Users can also access the collection through commercial database vendors, statewide and institutional networks, and Internet search engines. To help users find the information they are seeking, ERIC produces a controlled vocabulary, the Thesaurus of ERIC Descriptors. This is a carefully selected list of education-related words and phrases used to tag materials by subject and make them easier to retrieve through a search. Prior to January 2004, the ERIC network consisted of sixteen subject-specific clearinghouses, various adjunct and affiliate clearinghouses, and three support components. The program was consolidated into a single entity, with upgraded systems, and paper-based processes converted to electronic, thus streamlining operations and speeding delivery of content.

Patent Information System Government of India, Ministry of Commerce and Industry, Department of Industrial Policy and Promotion established Patent Information System (PIS), in the year 1980 with the following objectives. n To obtain and maintain a comprehensive collection of patent specification and patent related literature on a world wide basis to meet the needs for technological information, of various users in R&D establishments, Government Organizations, Industries, Business, Inventors and other users.

Unit-IV D 177 To provide technological information contained in patents through, search services and patent copy supply service; Functions. The PIS caters to user needs on the basis of patent documentation and computerized system for retrieval and dissemination of patent information. n

Information of Patent Documentation at PIS PATENT SEARCH TOOLS AVAILABLE AT PIS, NAGPUR Name of the Search Tool

Nature of Carrier

Contents

Range

ESPACE/ACCESS

CD-ROM

1978 onwards

Patents Abstracts of Japan (PAJ) MICROPATENT

CD-ROM

EPC

CD-ROM

INPADOC

MICROFICHE

EPIDOS

CD-ROM (NDB /PFS PCS)

GLOBALPATH

CD-ROM

US-CAPS/APS Gazette of India 1963 to Dec 2004 ESPACE-ACCESS Europe

CD-ROM PAPER

Bibliographic data and abstracts of EPO patents and Bibliographic data of PCT applications Bibliographic data and abstracts of Japanese patents Bibliographic data and abstracts of DE, EP, FR, GB, JP, US, WO/PCT Bibliographic data from 29 member states of the EPO Bibliographic data including title of patents from more than 70 countries Bibliographic data including title of patents from more than 70 countries Bibliographic data and abstracts of CH, DE, FR, EP, GB, US and WO patents Bibliographic data and abstracts of US patents Notifications issued by the Patent Office regarding Indian patents Bibliographic data relating to patent application from BE, CH, LU, NL, UK, PT

DATABASE

CD-ROM

1976 onwards 1971 onwards 2005 onwards 1968 to Aug 1998 1998 to 2005 1971 to 1998 1975 to 2004 Part III Sec.(2) 1990 to Dec 2004

Patent Information Services The PIS offers patent information services on payment of appropriate charges including postal charges for services provided by post. The payment may be made against a proforma invoice. Alternately the user may open an account with PIS under the subscribe advance payment (SAP) scheme of PIS.

SAP Scheme/Search Services/sPatent Copy Supply Service Subscriber Advance Payment Scheme (SAP) of PIS In order to provide Patent Information Service to any interested person/organisation, PIS operates subscriber advance payment scheme. Under this scheme, users interested in availing regular service by way of procurement of Patent Information, may remit an amount of not less than Rupee 1,000/- or in multiples thereof and open an account in their names. On receipt of this payment, the user will be allotted a subscriber account number by office of the Patent Information System (PIS) Nagpur. The amount towards the cost of services rendered by PIS will be adjusted against the advance payment made by the subscriber against his/her account number.

178 D Library and Information Science Specific The service will be rendered by PIS, on receipt of written request from the subscriber either by letter, telefax or e-mail (paper copy in confirmation of e-mail duly signed is required). On providing the service, PIS will intimate to the subscriber, the cost of service rendered and the balance available in his/her account. If, at any time, the balance amount in the account of the subscriber falls short of Rupee 200/-, the subscriber will be informed of the same with a request to remit further amount immediately. The subscriber on receipt of such intimation has to remit the amount which shall not be less than Rupee 1,000/- at any time. If at any time the subscriber wants to deposit further amount in their account, such payment also should not be less than Rupee 1,000/-. At the end of each financial year i.e. after 31st march of each year, PIS will issue a statement of account containing details of the amount received, cost of service rendered and the balance available subscriber will scrutinize the account and return a copy of the statement duly certifying the correctness of the account. No special form is needed to open the above mentioned account. A request on plain paper clearly specifying that the user wishes to open an account under Subscriber Advance Payment Scheme alongwith payment as mentioned above is all that is needed.

LIBRARY RESOURCE SHARING AND LIBRARY CONSORTIA Resource Sharing Resource sharing means an operation in which more than two parties agree to share voluntarily the fruits and cost of the operation, and in which a member has something useful to contribute to other members. It is also known as library cooperation. In the context of library, cooperation denotes sharing of resources. It means sharing of resources of a group of libraries. In nutshell it “denotes a mode of operation where library functions are shared in common by a number of libraries. The goals are to provide (a) positive net effect on the library users in terms of access to more materials or services and/or (b) on the library budget in terms of providing level service at less cost, or more service at less cost, or increased service at less cost, or much more service at less cost than if undertaken individually. The goals should be realised without harm to the mission of the participating libraries”. Resource Sharing in the libraries is a very important area of their management, which not only enhances the use and utilization of library resources and services but also ensures optimum benefits to their users in the utilization of library resources of all kinds. It serves not only to effect economy in terms of time and money but also ensures much better services to the users. The word Resources-Sharing can be analysed as follows: Resources ® All of the resources of the library Sharing ® To be participated in sharing of the resources. Hence in the context of libraries the meaning of resources sharing is to provide resources of the libraries to other libraries on demand, when they are needed.

Unit-IV D 179

Objectives of Resource Sharing and Networking The objectives of resource sharing, as seen by Kaula (1986), is to maximize the availability of material and services and to minimize expenses. In other words, the principle behind resource sharing has been the availability of maximum service at the minimum cost or the maximum service at the same cost. The objectives of resource sharing are to create an environment in which libraries can offer better services and more materials for the same cost. It aims to make the resources of one library available to users of other library and vice-versa. The main objectives, therefore, are: n increase availability of resources n extend the accessibility of resources n diminish cost, and n promote full utilization of resources Allen Kent, Bhargava (1986) stated the objectives of resource sharing networks as: “Library user should have access to more materials or services providing level service at less cost, increased service at level cost, or much more service at less cost.” It is noticeable that many possible objectives can be identified for specific networks. These objectives can be achieved without adversely affecting the agenda of the participating libraries, although their methods of operation must be adjusted as required. Similarly, the objectives can be realized by sharing materials and resources in a mutually beneficial way, by n sharing of the burden of purchasing materials; n sharing of the burden of processing the materials; n sharing of services; and n sharing of human expertise.

Areas of Resource Sharing The area and the scope of resource sharing are wide, comprising mainly people, processes, materials or any other possession of the library. All these are subject to common sharing for mutual benefits. According to Sharma (1992), some of the areas of cooperation may be enumerated as under: “shared or cooperative acquisition, storage, technical processing, lending or inter library loan, as well as any other cooperative ventures.”

Essential Factors Affecting Networking/Resource Sharing The major factors that affect the networking of libraries are: n availability of computerized databases; n availability of communication facilities (computer, telephone, satellite communication, reprography, fax, e-mail, etc.); n standardization of library organizational practice; n availability of financial resources; n efficiency in the governance of network; n basic agreement.

Factors Necessary for Resource Sharing (a) Literature Explosion. Tremendous growth of literature has made it impossible for a library to attain self-sufficiency. Exponential growth of library material available

180 D Library and Information Science Specific in the form of books, periodicals, research papers and not-book materials has made it beyond the control of a library to acquire all the materials which are being produced. Therefore, it becomes necessary to share resources with other library. (b) Reader’s Demand. Due to tremendous increase in the number of users of a library and their varied demands, on one hand, governments’ policy to increase literate population, mass education, and open learning and the changing nature of libraries (which are serving as a cultural, information, and community centre) have resulted in increase of readers population. On the other hand, advancements in the entire field of knowledge interdisciplinary approach in education have resulted in diversified demands by various sections of readers to quench their thirst of knowledge and information needs. (c) Limited Resources. Limited resources of libraries in terms of money, space and manpower also stress upon the need for cooperation. A single library is not capable of meeting all the requirements of its clients. Even the most resourceful library of the most affluent country can not afford to acquire, organize and put to use all the material that may be required by its clients. Due to inflation, rising cost of books and space constraints a library cannot afford to buy all the available material. Therefore, it becomes necessary for sharing its resources. (d) Observations. The laws like Every Reader gets his/her Book; and Every Book gets its Reader, and the concepts like books are for all, Free flow of information, Universal Availability of Publication (UAP) etc., make it obligatory on the part of a library to provide to its readers every reading material they are interested in. On the other hand the factors explained above, and the concepts like “maximum number of books at least cost” would make it impossible for a library to acquire, preserve and put to use all these materials to its readers out of its own resources. According to Unesco (1985) the major networking and resource sharing functions and activities are identified as under: Functions. Cooperative acquisition; Assignment of specialization in material acquisition; Co-oriented subscription; Exchange of duplicate holding; Cooperative cataloguing; Interlibrary loan; Reciprocal borrowing privileges; and Reference and/ or referral service. Activities. Union catalogue of books and periodicals; Indexing and abstracting services; List of new arrivals on accessions/acquisitions list; Bibliography development; Network newsletters; Directories and inventories; Manuals; Translation service; Users interest survey; Joint research project; In-service personnel training; Workshops and meetings; Marketing of network services; Photocopying service, etc.

Prerequisites of Resource Sharing (a) Government’s Sanction. Sanction of the government by enacting legislation or by framing administrative rules makes a scheme of cooperation more successful. (b) Agreement among Library Authorities. For resource sharing, the participating libraries should agree on the following basic issues. (i ) The participating libraries should agree to share all resources they have. The terms and conditions in this regard can be spelt out on mutual basis. (ii ) There should be a written agreement on division of responsibilities on acquisition. (iii ) There should be an agreement on document description also. If all the participating libraries in the system, agree to follow the same classification scheme and

Unit-IV D 181 cataloguing code, shared cataloguing will be feasible. The use of computers in all participating libraries will pose less problems. (iv) There should also be an agreement in respect of some details, like loan period, payment for loss of materials, etc. (c) Union Catalogue. If the participating libraries have once agreed on the above issues, the stage has been set for the resource sharing. After setting the system of resource sharing among the libraries, the immediate problem that arises up then, is how to know that which library is having a particular document. For this all the libraries of the system may be tried until the document is found. The process is time and labour consuming, which should be avoided and an alternative should be resorted to. For this, the best alternative is to compile a union catalogue within all the libraries. (d) Computerized Library Network. The use of computer and library networking have given resource sharing a new direction. A mainframe computer interconnects a very large number (more than 1000) of libraries into a well-knit network. Having complete computerization of the network, a library within the network can know instantaneously the holdings of other libraries participating in the system. It is also possible to know how many libraries have already placed order for a new book. (e) Scheme of the System. For this scheme, for instance, if we take into account two libraries, each one of them has two terminals. One for the users and the other for the librarian. The user can access the union database which contains the detailed catalogue of the holdings of both the libraries.

Networking Network is any arrangement or any structure that links a group of individuals or organisations such as libraries also. According to Smith and Parker, as quoted by Zhang (1990), “Networking is more structured type of cooperation in which definite regions or areas or definite organisations are connected by electronic or other means to promote inter-library loaning of materials, in-service training and other sharing of resources.” The concept of network is very much popular these days. This concept is usually referred to describe a form of arrangement or/and administrative structure that links a group of individuals or organisations who have agreed to work together and to share resources. In the library world, libraries can form network primarily to achieve better sharing of their resources. Resources may consist of bibliographic information and of collections and better services to the users. Over the last so many years, libraries have become dependent upon computer and telecommunicators technologies to carry out many of their functions. These functions include not only in providing service to end users, such as information retrieval, inter-library loan and document delivery, but also those that support end user services, such as cataloguing and acquisitions.

Library Network A library network is a description of an activity which existed before the nomenclature was devised. When any two or more libraries talk to each other, we have the fundamental condition for networking, that is exchange. Libraries form networks primarily to achieve better sharing of resources. When one library provides a service to another we have the rudiments of network behaviour. Inter library loan or bibliographic exchange in any form is the chief justification of a network.

182 D Library and Information Science Specific Causes for Establishment of Networking among Libraries The following are the main causes for establishing networking among the libraries: 1. To promote sharing of resources by inter library loan among the libraries through computerized networking for maximum use of resources. 2. To assist member libraries in cataloguing of books, serials, non-book materials and production of catalogue. 3. To facilitate and promote delivery of documents manually or mechanically. 4. To coordinate efforts for suitable collection development and reduce unnecessary duplication wherever possible. 5. To establish referral centres to monitor or facilitate catalogue search and maintain a central on-line union catalogue of books, serials and non-book materials of all the participating libraries. 6. To develop a specialist bibliographic database of books, serials and non-book materials for search and access. 7. To create a database of projects, specialists and institutions for providing on-line information service. 8. To implement computerization of operations and electronic services in the libraries for fast communication of information. 9. To coordinate with other regional, national and international networks for exchange of information and documents for the use of libraries and users. 10. To evolve standards, and uniform guidelines in techniques, methods, procedures, hardware and software, services and so on and promote adopting in actual practice by all libraries, in order to facilitate pooling, sharing and exchanging resources.

Characteristics of Library Network Library networks have the following characteristics: Data : Bibliographic records (MARC) Retrieval

:

Author/title/number (subject) keyword/code

Access

:

Telecommunication network/private network/hard wired network

Users

:

Librarians and library clients

The above characteristics show that library networks have the following features: (i) one type of data, (ii) committed user base, (iii) high professional needs, (iv) low end-user needs. The various characteristics of L and I networks can be identified as follows: (1) Equal Opportunity of Access to total information resources to every individual regardless of location, social status or physical condition. The access to network is for all those who are connected through communication links. (2) Interdependence. Libraries are no longer self sufficient in terms of collections, personnel or services. Libraries are dependent on one another for sharing their resources. Accordingly, interdependence has become a characteristic of L & I network concept. Several L & I networks can work in collaboration and derive benefits of interdependence.

Unit-IV D 183 (3) Large Databases. Networks can control and provide access on cooperative basis to very large scale bibliographic databases. (4) Standards and Quality. Networks develop, use and propagate the use of well developed bibliographic standards of universal implementation and help in improving the quality of bibliographic services. This is a critical element of L & I networks. (5) Loss of Autonomy. Participation in network may result in loss of autonomy for individual library or information centre. (6) Shared Decision Making. Policy decisions are arrived on mutual benefit and collective agreements among participants. (7) All Library Services. Networks are generally designed to provide whole range of library services. (8) Integration and Coordination of efforts, collection, money, manpower and expertise of participants. Earlier it was felt that an integration by merging specialized information centres and services would form the basis of networking. Things did not happen in the expected way and the specialized information centres became more specialized remaining as independent, offering specific services outside the mainstream of library network development. L & I network development has emerged as consisting of separate operations largely different from those offered by specialized information centres. (9) Centralization. The network activities are centralized, large bibliographic databases centrally stored and monitored, at times a national apex body holds the responsibility of network management. (10) Cost and Productivity. Cost involved is distributed over several participants and the productivity is increased in terms of total information services or information products. (11) Research and Development. Networks provide opportunity for research and development work in the field of L & I services through exhaustive, comprehensive, multi-access databases, their on line use, feedback, etc. (12) Internationalism. Network may have gateways to access other networks and database at global level and hence work to achieve internationalism. (13) On line Computers and Telecommunication. They are the obvious components of the network. (14) Top up/Bottom Down. The national scientific panels, generally, advocated the development of L & I network staffing at the national level. However, this approach was not considered as essential to network concept. Instead both in practice (e.g. OCLC) and in theory (e.g. NCLIS programme statement of USA) the approach from the grass root level was accepted. Hence, building a network from the bottom-up based libraries, their willingness to support and sustain the network activities, was desirable.

Library Consortia in India Consortium refers to cooperation, coordination and collaboration among the libraries for the purpose of sharing information resources. In India, the real drive for cooperation was seen during 1980s due to the developments in Information and Communication Technology.

184 D Library and Information Science Specific Some of the academic libraries in India have formed consortia. A few of the major consortia in India are given below: n INDEST n FORSA n UGC – INFONET n CSIR E – CONSORTIA n HELINET n IIM CONSORTIA

INDEST (Indian National Digital Library in Engineering Sciences and Technology) INDEST stands for Indian National Digital Library in Engineering Sciences and Technology. It is a “consortia based subscription to Electronic Resources for Technical Education Systems in India”, set up by the Ministry of Human Resource Development based on the recommendations made by the Expert Group appointed by the Ministry under the Chairmanship of Prof. N. Balakrishnan. The headquarter of the consortium is located at Indian Institute of Technology, Delhi. The main objectives of the INDEST consortium are to: n provide a common gateway of journal literature subscribed by seven IITs and the Indian Institute of Science, to subscribe, access and manage their journals. n provide common access and search interface for the journals subscribed by all members. n provide access to the common database for the usage benefit of students and researchers in regional engineering colleges (National Institutes of Technology) and support them in sharing the collection of IITs and IISc. The common features of INDEST are: n It provides common access to TOCs (Table of Contents) and full text articles; n It allows to search common TOCs and database for both print as well as online journals with scholarly content subscribed by all members of consortium; n It provides links to full text articles, where available; n It facilitates to search a bibliographic database of articles and links to full text; n It has provision to mirror the content in the server of each participating consortium member; n It has also provision to view the list of journals subscribed by each consortium member; and n It is possible to send E-mail request for the photocopies from one consortium member to the other.

Operation The Consortium operates through its Headquarter. The Ministry of Human Resource Development (MHRD) has agreed to provide funds required for: n subscription to electronic resources for IISc, IITs, NITs, RECs and a few other institutions; and n operation of the consortium. The consortium headquarter functions under a National Steering Committee, which consists of 21 members, for inter-institutional coordination and for taking decisions on policy issues under the overall policy direction of the Government of India. The Ministry has also set-up a National Review Committee, which comprises 6 members, for the INDEST Consortium. The National Review Committee shall be responsible for overall policy, monitoring and coordination with UGC and AICTE for this Consortium.

Unit-IV D 185

Membership Based on the recommendations of the MHRD Task Force, institutions have been grouped into three categories as detailed below: n Category I (Core Members) The members in this category include IITs , IIScs, Nits, ISM, SLIET, NERIST, IISER, IIMs, IIITs, IIITM and NITIE. Ministry of Human Resource Development provides funds for differential access to e-resources to core members. These are 62 in number. n Category II (AICTE supported members) These members are provided funds to access e-resources by AICTE. At present they are 60 in number. It includes government engineering colleges and other technical institutions. n Category III (Self- supported institutions) The category includes all other AICTE accredited and UGC recognised engineering institutions. These institutions pay themselves for the e-resources accessed by them. At present around 1233 institutions are registered under this category.

E-Resources The following are the Electronic Resources available through INDEST for different categories of members as mentioned above. The details of resources, and the category of members who can access the resources are mentioned hereunder. These can be searched by journal title, words in a title and name of publisher: DETAILS OF RESOURCES AND MEMBER CATEGORY Resources Full Text Sources IEL Onlin Science Direct and Ideal* Science Direct (on trial) Springer Verlag*$ ABI/INFORM ACM Digital Library ASTP India Informer* CRIS INFAC Business Intelligence Service* CERC’s Insight* Springer’s Link Bibliographic Databases COMPENDEX + and INSPEC Web of Science SciFinder Scholar MathSciNet JCCC (J-Gate Custom Content for Consortia) J-Gate (Free for the first year * Print subscription to be maintained by the beneficiary institutions $ Limits on number of downloads

Member Category who can access the resources All Categories I II I & II I & III I & III II & III III III III III I I I I I, II, and III I and II

186 D Library and Information Science Specific FORSA (Forum for Resource Sharing in Astronomy/Astrophysics) In the early 1980s, librarians working in institutes where astronomy and astrophysics was one of the major research areas felt the need to establish a forum among the libraries to enable sharing of resources due to the following reasons: n Very few institutes in the country were involved in research in astronomy and astrophysics; n Considerable interaction already existed between astronomers of institutes doing research in astronomy and astrophysics; n No library can be self-sufficient in the resources, and access to the holdings of the member libraries would help in minimising duplication; and n The information resources should be used to the mutual advantage of the members as well as for optimum use. Based on the proposed plans made by the members of Forum, the first meeting of the Forum for Resource Sharing in Astronomy/Astrophysics (FORSA) held on July 29, 1981, at Raman Research Institute, Bangalore. Emphasis was placed on obtaining detailed information related to literature in Astronomy and Astrophysics for speedier dissemination of information. The objectives of FORSA are: n Collection development in IT environment; n Facilitate e-access to journals and books; n Actively participate in resource sharing, ILL; n Document delivery by fax, e-mail, speed post, courier, etc.; n Database merging by library holdings ( books/ journals) and facilitate access to merged database; n Digitisation of archival materials of the institutes and making available on website for access by all; n To facilitate access to website of each institute’s library; n Participate actively in consortia plans for sharing e-journals, e-books and other databases with various publishers and academic societies publications and joining existing consortia where forum members are benefited; n To come forward for open access and to develop institutional repositories; and to welcome new members of institutes where astronomy is one of the subjects and library has collection pertaining to the subject”.

Members FORSA has 12 members. The member libraries are: n Aryabhatta Research Institute of Observational Sciences (ARIES) , Manora Peak, Nainital n Bose Institute, Kolkata. n Harish Chandra Institute, Allahabad. n Indian Institute of Astrophysics (IIA), Bangalore. n Inter-University Centre for Astronomy and Astrophysics (IUCAA), Pune. n National Centre for Radio Astrophysics (NCRA), Pune. n Nizamiah Observatory, Department of Astronomy, Osmania University, Hyderabad.

Unit-IV D 187 n n n n n

Physical Research Laboratory (PRL), Ahmedabad. Raman Research Institute (RRI), Bangalore. S.N. Bose National Centre for Basic Sciences, Kolkata. Saha Institute of Nuclear Physics, Kolkata. Tata Institute of Fundamental Research (TIFR), Mumbai.

Services All the participating libraries are well equipped with recourses and share them for mutual benefit. They provide the following services: n Access to OPAC n Access to online journals n Inter library loan n Document Delivery (by e-mail, speed post, courier and fax).

Workshops and Conferences FORSA organises workshops and conferences on emerging areas. Some such programmes were organised on KOHA and DSpace. A meeting is done every year along with the Annual Meeting of the Astronomical Society of India.

UGC – INFONET University Grants Commission (UGC) is a national body for the coordination, determination, and maintenance of the standards of University Education in India. It initiated a programme called the UGC-Infonet E-Journals Consortium to provide online access to electronic journals and databases in all disciplines to the universities in India. The programme aimed at increasing accessibility of electronic resources to the universities. INFLIBNET is the coordinating and monitoring agency in the UGC - Infonet Project. INFLIBNET is also responsible for providing training to university library professionals in the use of this network for providing variety of services to the users. The project aimed to provide e-resources and state-of-the-art technology for providing access to these resources. The part responsible for providing connectivity for the e-resources has been closed with effect from 31st March 2012.

Subscription to Electronic Journals With globalisation of education and competitive research, demand for journals has increased over the years. Due to lack of funds and increase in the prices of journals, libraries have been forced to cut subscriptions of journals. Infonet provides access to more than 7500 core and peer-reviewed and peer-reviewed journals and 10 bibliographic databases from 26 publishers and aggregators in different disciplines. So far 209 universities including 14 National Law Schools and central universities along with private universities who are associate mebers have been provided differential access to e-journals.

UGC-Infonet Training Training manpower is one of the most critical resources for successful implementation of high-tech programmes like UGC-Infonet. INFLIBNET/ERNET is giving training to network managers and library professionals for managing the WAN connectivity, network

188 D Library and Information Science Specific security, Mail Server, Web Server configuration and e-journal access management at their premises. More than 108 network managers from around 99 universities have been trained at ERNET India, New Delhi. Around 63 Library professionals from more than 63 universities have been trained at ERNET India, New Delhi. Above 63 Library professionals from 63 universities have been trained for e-resources management at INFLIBNET Centre, Ahmedabad.

National Knowledge Resource Centre (NKRC) CSIR E-Journals Consortium has been re-named as NKRC due to the change in its scope. Earlier it served the laboratories of Council of Scientific and Industrial Research (CSIR) but now it serves 24 Department of Science and Technology institutions and 39 CSIR laboratories. It provides access to more than 5,000 e-journals, patents, standards, citations and bibliographic databases. It also provides access to large number of open access resources in science and technology. The Council of Scientific and Industrial Research (CSIR) which has thirty eight constituent laboratories together subscribes to over 4,000 scholarly and research journals at a cost about Rs. 25 crores every year. The collection of print editions creates an annual depository of 5,00,000 plus printed articles spread across the labs in stand-alone manner. In order to enhance the accessibility, use and increase the resource base of world S&T literature, the fifth meeting of the Heads of CSIR Laboratories and Information Centres held at RRL in Trivendrum in February 2001, had recommended that a Consortium for access to E-journals be set up. Consequently, Director General, CSIR set up a Study Group to collect and compile information on the journals presently subscribed to by the CSIR laboratories, including CSIR Headquarter and also to study the feasibility and economic viability of CSIR laboratories subscribing to identified journals online on a consortium basis and devise a system for the management of the consortium and equitable sharing of the expenditure thereof. The Study Group submitted its report in October 2001 with the following recommendations: n The CSIR must set up a Consortium to provide electronic/online access to journals for the CSIR laboratories. n No major additional requirements of manpower or hardware are foreseen. n Informational resources are a basic necessity for an R&D organisation. n CSIR is a premier R&D organisation and presently invests around Rs.25 crore annually for books and journals, some of which are being subscribed in duplicates/ triplicates by the labs of CSIR. n Individual labs of CSIR spend between Rs.10 and Rs.150 lakhs per annum on information resource building. n Many publishers now are offering their products in electronic formats. They encourage the formation of consortia and accordingly offer consortia friendly pricing strategies. n Information technology has enabled users to access online many of the research journals. Publishers of the journals offer concessional rates of their e-format journals subject to maintain status-quo of print subscription. Based on the recommendations made by study group, the CSIR accepted the recommendations and decided to set up a consortium, ‘CSIR E – Journals Consortium’ for electronic access to journals.

Unit-IV D 189 The main objectives of the CSIR E – Journals Consortium are: n To provide CSIR S&T staff electronic access to world S&T literature to strengthen the facilities for pooling, sharing and electronically accessing the CSIR information resources; n To provide access to world S&T literature to CSIR labs; and n To nucleate the culture of electronic access with a view to catalyse the evolution of digital libraries.

Activities of Consortium The following are the broad activities envisaged to be involved in carrying out the project: n Identification of vendors n Invitation of proposals n Negotiation n Signing of agreement n Enabling access n Training n Payment to vendors n Monitoring n Usage statistics n Analysis n Reports

Roles and Responsibilities of NISCAIR National Institute of Science Communication and Information Resources (NISCAIR formerly INSDOC), New Delhi is the nodal organisation of the Consortium. As nodal agency of the consortium, it performs the following roles and responsibilities: n to collect the link-up fee from CSIR and release payment as per the contract terms and conditions to vendor(s); n to make certification of bills; n to receive and keep secret the passwords that are supplied by the publishers to the laboratories as well as NISCAIR; n to co-ordinate training to staff of participating labs for E-journals access; n to monitor the analysis of usage data and appropriate reports generation and use the report for strategic planning; n to undertake various studies related to E-journals for planning, monitoring, etc.; n to monitor complaints and access problems of the laboratories; and n to maintain smooth functioning of the Consortium.

Resources available through Consortium As a first step, CSIR entered into an agreement with Elsevier Science which is one of the leading publishers of S&T journals, to enable all its laboratories access to 1,200 odd electronic/online journals. Afterwards it started subscribing to e-journals from many publishers. At present, all 38 CSIR laboratories have access to 3500 e-journals of different publishers. In addition, the labs have access to about 1500 e-journals from Directory of

190 D Library and Information Science Specific Open Access Journals (DOAJ) which are free for every one. Thus, the consortium provides an opportunity for CSIR labs to have access to 5000 international reputed e-journals.

IIM Consortium The Indian Institutes of Management are premier national business management education institutions set up by the Government of India. They are independent societies governed by independent Board of Governors. The major objective of the institutions is to train young graduates to become professional managers. The IIMs are available at 6 places – Ahmedabad, Bangalore, Calcutta, Indore, Kozhikode, and Lucknow. The concept of IIM Library Consortium was floated a few years back. Since the year 2000, the Librarians of all the IIMs had been interacting extensively on the possible resource sharing of the CD-ROM/Digital Databases being regularly subscribed to by them. A pilot study was conducted in this regard on the CD-ROM/Digital Databases being currently subscribed to by the various IIMs and it was found that: n ABI/Inform (Abstracts), ABI/Inform (Full-Text - Business Periodicals Ondisk - BPO) are being subscribed to by IIMA, IIMB, and IIMC respectively, n Business Source Elite (BSE), the Full-Text journal service of EBSCO, is being subscribed to by IIMA, IIMI, and IIMK, and n Econlit (Silver Platter) is received at IIMA and IIMK, and Econlit (Ovid) at IIMI. The Librarians of IIMs discussed and deliberated in one of their meetings and resolved that: n while doing this exercise, the information resources of any of the Institute(s) should not be affected in any manner, and shall ensure quality improvement and revenue saving to each Institute. n it is high time for all IIMs to jointly approach publishers for journals and databases of common interest for better services and prices. n they may approach publishers of CD-ROM Databases to begin with, as Consortia, for better pricing and services. n eventually, other digital databases and journals shall also be covered by the Consortia programme. n the proposal of IIM Library Consortium seeks the authorisation and guidance of the Heads of all the IIMs, to proceed further. Based on the above, four of IIMs placed orders for databases such as BSE and Econlit and the rest two IIMs placed orders for ABI/Inform. Subsequently, the Directors of all IIMs in one of their meetings held in August 2001 approved the formation of IIM Library Consortium and encouraged the librarians to actively participate for mutual benefit. The objectives of the IIM Consortia are to: n ensure among the IIMs, optimum utilisation and enhancement of the resources; n minimise the expenditure by consortia based subscriptions to the commonly subscribed databases and journals; n approach publishers of CD-ROM databases to begin with as a consortia for better pricing and services; and n cover other digital databases and journals by the programme.

Unit-IV D 191

E-Resources In the case of journals, all the six IIMs put together subscribes to over 2550 scholarly titles of which around 1200 are duplications (overlapping titles). Among these, 33 titles are being subscribed to by all the IIMs. Having convinced on the dire need for journals consortia, major publishers such as Elsevier, Kluwer, Wiley, Blackwell and MCB University Press were approached and they all represented in the second meet which was held at IIM Bangalore in 2001. The end result has been highly praiseworthy, that over 740 Ejournals IIMs are able to get online access, across all the IIMs, by paying a nominal additional amount. The present information resource base of the IIM Consortium is as follows: n Blackwell Hss Collection n Capitaline n Nexis.com+Corporate Information n ISI Emerging Markets n Kluwer Online n Talyor & Francis n John Wiley.

HELINET (Health Sciences Library and Information Network) The Rajiv Gandhi University of Health Sciences (RGUHS) launched HELINET (Health Sciences Library and Information Network) Consortium, on the 15th of March 2003. The importance and the role of quality medical journals in medical education are known. Moreover, in a survey conducted in early 2002, the colleges of RGUHS were spending enormous amount of money to get only about 150 journals each, and even among these 150, many were duplicates. This spurred the need for reducing the cost while making the core medical journals more affordable and easily accessible. The main objectives of the consortium are to: n “network the libraries in the colleges affiliated to the University to promote resource sharing; n move these libraries gradually to digital main-stream; and n bring all the libraries under HELINET for minimising the cost of acquisition and maintenance of learning resources and maximising their utilisation, among the faculty, students and researchers the colleges and institutions affiliated to the University”.

E-Resources Under the HELINET scheme, the member libraries can get access to around 600 scholarly, international biomedical journals, from 24 leading publishers, at about one-third the price of their print subscription. Moreover, the member libraries can get all time access to the current journals as well as archives i.e. the backvolumes of journals for a period of 7-10 years. The University has already spent Rs. 2 crores for establishing the consortium on a cooperative e-access model. For this purpose, the university has set up digital library

192 D Library and Information Science Specific infrastructure for managing and providing access to e-content. Participating institutes can get access to full-text of e-resources through 11 gateways, n Science Direct; n Ovid; n MD Consult; n Springer; n Theme Verlag; n Taylor and Francis; n Blackwell; n Bentham; n Ebrary; and n Oxford University Press.

Membership There are members from colleges of medicine, dentistry, pharmacy, nursing, physiotherapy, ayurveda/ unani/ homeopathy and other paramedics. A differential fee is charged from the categories, highest from the users in medicine and lowest from other paramedics.

U N I T

V

SYLLABUS v v

v v v v v v v v

Universe of Knowledge - Nature and Attributes; Modes of Formation of Subjects. Knowledge Organisation - Classification – Theories, Cannons, and Principles; Simple Knowledge Organisation System (SKOS), Taxonomies, Folksonomy, Trends in Classification. Mapping of Subjects in Library Classification Schemes – DDC, UDC and CC. Knowledge Organisation: Cataloguing - Cannons and Principles; Centralized and Co-operative Catalogue; Library Cataloguing Codes: CCC and AACR - II. Standards of Bibliographic Record Formats and Description – ISBD, MARC 21, CCF, RDA, FRBR, Bibframe. Standards for Bibliographic Information Interchange & Communication – ISO 2709, Z39.50, Z39.71. Metadata Standards: Dublin Core; MARC21, METS, MODES, EAD. Indexing Systems and Techniques: Assigned - Pre-coordinate; Post-Coordinate; Derived- Title-based; Vocabulary Control. Abstracting – Types and Guidelines. Information Retrieval System – Features, Components, Models and Evaluation.

(193)

194 D Library and Information Science Specific

UNIVERSE OF KNOWLEDGE Management of Knowledge/Information The application of the principles of management to the acquisition, organisation, control, dissemination and use of information in the libraries and information centres is called the information management. The term information management is ambiguously used in various fields. In computer science it is used as a synonym for information technology and is identical to data management. In business or management studies it has similar connotations to technology management. In the context of library and information science, it is more widely concerned with the meaning of information for the information usage and with information retrieval issues. Information management systems should be based on certain specific qualities, which include storing of tremendous amount of information, responding as quickly as possible and also to support exploration among alternatives for deciding about the information to be gathered, how to structure or share it. Knowledge Management is a form of application of sound management practices to human resources as a whole which are the carrying vectors of knowledge. In a sense, it is the management of the organisation towards the continuous renewal of the organisational structure, facilitation of organisational members, putting information technology instruments with emphasis on teamwork and diffusion of knowledge into place. Knowledge management process is a question of proper vision, organisational networks, educated decisions and the best use of lessons learned as the key to organisational learning. Hence knowledge management is needed in the libraries to improve library services, record information, create knowledge and enables users to share and learn by providing user friendly approach in all the activities.

Information Management vs Knowledge Management Knowledge management involves not only all activities of information management but some more specialised activities centred around creation and recording of new knowledge and its sharing. Information management basically deals with information present in the documents while knowledge management deals not only with the information content of documents but also with the knowledge present in the employees’ brains. Also, in information management, coded information becomes knowledge for the future use but in knowledge management, coded knowledge becomes information for future knowledge base. Information management and knowledge management have different challenges to meet. For information management, the challenges lie in evaluating separate information items and demonstrate the power of information management in the context of profit margins, increased organisational efficiency, etc. As far as knowledge management is concerned, the challenge lies in tapping the tacit knowledge (knowledge which cannot be easily codified) and create an environment that would facilitate creation of new knowledge and sharing it for organisational developments.

Unit-V D 195

KNOWLEDGE ORGANISATION Library Classification—Canons and Principles The word classification is derived from the Latin word “classes”. Classification is a process of grouping. It involves putting together like entities and separating unlike entities. Classification pervades all the various activities of our life. Library classification aims to create a system out of disorder and provides a comprehensive view of the documents on a subject. Once an orderly arrangement has been achieved then it will save the time of successive readers as well as the librarian. Dr S. R. Ranganathan has defined classification in five senses as mentioned below: SENSE I: The meaning of classification in SENSE I is division. Division means grouping of same characteristics. SENSE II: The meaning of classification in SENSE II means ‘‘Assortment’’. Assortment is the process of division of a universe into groups, plus that of arranging the groups in a definite sequence that is assigning a rank to each resulting group. SENSE III: In SENSE III classification means ‘‘Ordinal numbers in a filiatory sequence’’. Classification in SENSE III is practised on a wide scale. SENSE IV: The meaning of classification in SENSE IV is ‘‘Filiatory sequence coupled with class numbers’’. In a filiatory sequence, each multiple class formed in the process of complete assortment is incorporated in its filiatory sequence. SENSE V: The meaning of classification in SENSE V is ‘‘each class have unique class number representing it’’.

Purpose of Library Classification Following are the main purposes of library classification. (a) Helpful Sequence. Classification arranges the documents in a method most convenient to the users and to the library staff. The document should be arranged in classes and based on the mutual relations between them. This would bring together closely related classes. The basic idea is to bring the like classes together and separate these from unlike classes. The arrangement should be such that user should be able to retrieve it so that it will make a helpful sequence. (b) Correct Replacement. Documents whenever taken out from shelf should be replaced in their proper places. It is essential that library classification should enable the correct replacement of documents after this has been returned from use. This would require a mechanized arrangement so that arrangement remains permanent. (c) Mechanized Arrangement. It means to adopt a particular arrangement suitable for that library so that the arrangement remains permanent. The sequence should be determined once for all, so that one does not have to predetermine the sequence of documents once again when these are returned after being borrowed. (d) Addition of New Document. Library would acquire new documents from time to time. Therefore, library classification should help in finding the most helpful place for each of those among the existing collection and the library. There are two possibilities in this regard. The new books may be on a subject already provided for

196 D Library and Information Science Specific in the scheme of library classification, or it may be on a newly emerging subject that may not have been provided in the existing scheme. (e) Withdrawal of Document from Stock. In this case if the need arises to withdraw a document from the store for some reason, then library classification should facilitate such a withdrawal. (f) Book Display. Display is adopted for a special exhibition of books and other materials on a given topic. The term is used to indicate that the connection in an open access library is well presented and guided. Library classification should be helpful in the organisation of books displays. (g) Other Purposes (i ) Compilation of bibliographies, catalogues and union catalogues (ii ) Classification of information (iii ) Classification of reference queries (iv) Classification of suggestions received from the users (v ) Filing of non book materials such as photographs films, etc.

Process of Classification Following activities are performed for classifying a book. (a) First step in classification of book starts with determining the specific subject of a book. It is derived from the title and sub title of a book. If the title of the book is very general then subject content of the book is determined by going through table of contents or preface. (b) Once the specific subject of a book is determined then specific number is given to the book by consulting schedules of a particular scheme. In other words class number are allotted to a particular book (c) Once the book is classified the classifier allots subject headings. The subject headings can be assigned according to different lists of subject headings such as Library of Congress list of subject headings, Sear’s list of subject headings, Ranganathan chain procedure, PRECIS, etc.

Types of Library Classification Ranganathan has enumerated six different types of classification. (i ) Purely Enumerative Scheme of Classification. This scheme of classification consists essentially of a single schedule enumerating all the subjects of past, present and anticipatable future, e.g. Library of Congress Classification. (ii ) Almost Enumerative Scheme. Consists of a large schedule enumerating most of subjects of the past, present and anticipatable future and in addition a few schedules of common isolates, e.g. DDC. (iii ) Almost Faceted Scheme. It consists of a large schedule enumerating most of the subjects of the past, present and anticipatable future and in addition a few schedules of common isolates and also some of special isolates, e.g. UDC, Bibliographic Classification. (iv) Rigidly Faceted Classification. In rigidly faceted scheme of classification, the facets and their sequence are predetermined for all the subjects going with a basic class. In this facet formula is provided for each basic class, e.g. Colon Classification.

Unit-V D 197 (v) Almost Freely Faceted Scheme of Classification. Here concept of fundamental categories is used and each fundamental category is provided with connecting symbols so some of the rigidity is reduced, e.g. Colon Classification Edition 4, 5, 6. (vi ) Fully Freely Faceted. Freely faceted scheme of classification is not subjected to any predetermined formula for a compound subject going with basic subject. Each compound subject determines its own facets, facet sequence and class numbers.

Work of Classification in Three Planes Ranganathan provided a specific norm for designing a scheme of classification and classify the documents according to it. In designing a scheme of classification, classification has to deal with dynamic, infinite and multidimensional universe knowledge which need to be clearly and thoroughly analysed, thereafter it is required to be transformed into an artificial language for smooth and convenient use of the scheme as well as systematic and helpful arrangement of documents. To make this complicated process systematic and smooth, Ranganathan separated the work of classification in three planes. The cannons are also accordingly provided for these three different planes that provide the guidance in the goals to be achieved. Ranganathan identified the following three planes. (i) Idea Plane. In idea plane, all aspects of the universe of knowledge are analyzed by its structure, dimensions, qualities, characteristics, kinds of relationship and bond of strength among each item of knowledge. On this depends the format of a scheme for classification— actual grouping and arranging isolate ideas, determining the correct places for ever emerging new subjects in the existing subjects without disturbing their sequence. So the work in idea plane is paramount. (ii) Verbal Plane. Verbal plane helps to decide the type of terminology to be used in the scheme of classification. (iii) Notational Plane. Has the responsibility of implementing the findings of the idea plane. While designing the scheme of classification the idea plane decides the necessary characteristics to be used for the arrangement of the universe of subjects in a filiatory sequence. The notational plane, therefore, has to provide the mechanism in the form of notational system for the helpful and systematic arrangement for existing as well as for future unknown subjects in a scheme for classification.

Canons I. Canons for the Idea Plane Canon means a rule, regulation or law. It can also be defined as a principle, model, standard or criterion. Hence various models, principles, test used for the working and efficiency of different schemes of classification are called Canons of classification. A scheme for classification implies the prior concept of scheme of classes and involves the following 5 inherent concepts which belong essentially to the idea plane

(a) Canon for Characteristics Every object, body, organism, thing or entity possesses certain peculiarities, specialities and features or attributes. At time, we group certain entities according to their special

198 D Library and Information Science Specific features and separate certain things according to their peculiarities. This classification is the arranging of things according to their likeness and dislikeness. Different principles that recommend certain characteristics to be selected for the process of classification are called ‘‘Canons for characteristics’’. Ranganathan has given the following four canons of characteristics. (i) Canon of Differentiation. The canon of differentiation states that a characteristic used as the basis for the classification of a universe should differentiate some of its entities, that is, it should give rise at least to two classes, or ranked isolates. In the example of a classroom, the students may be divided into two distinct groups i.e., boys and girls on the basis of sex. But we cannot divide the class on the basis of such attributes as students on possession of face, because all the individuals of the class share these attributes. (ii) Canon of Relevance. The canon of relevance stipulates that a characteristic used as the basis for classification of universe should be relevant to the purpose of the classification. It may be noted that not all the characteristics possessed by the entities of a group are relevant to the purpose of classification. For example, the selection of some sportsmen in the play field. The colour, beauty, etc. would be irrelevant characteristics, but physical strength and physical fitness are relevant characteristics or taking the universe of book, it suits the needs of library, reader, subject matter, language, date of publication and author are relevant. The size, pages, print and format are irrelevant. (iii) Canon of Ascertainability. According to canon of ascertainability a characteristic used as the basis for the classification of a universe should be definite and ascertainable. For example, if the universe of authors is to be divided for their literary works, the date of birth if selected as a characteristic will be ascertainable than the date of death which may not be ascertained at different times. (iv) Canon of Performance. The canon of performance states that a characteristic used as the basis for the classification of a universe should continue to be unchanged, so long as there is no change in the purpose of classification. The canon demands that the characteristics once closed should have a permanent value and should not be changed unless the purpose of classification is changed. For example, if a scheme of classification divides various books available in a library according to the publishers as well as the physical make up of the books, with the passage of time the physical make up of the books or name of the publisher can be changed in the later editions and hence the characteristics chosen for dividing the universe of books was not of permanent value and that the canon of permanence is violated.

(b) Canon for Succession of Characteristics To guide the succession of characteristics Dr. S.R. Ranganathan has formulated the following three canons. (i ) Canon of concomitance (ii ) Canon of relevant succession (iii ) Canon of consistent succession The above canons are common sense canons.

Unit-V D 199 (i) Canon of Concomitance. The canon of concomitance states that no two characteristics should be concomitant, that is they should not give rise to the same array or subjects or of isolate ideas. The word concomitance generally means ‘accompanying’. For example, deafness and failing eyesight are concomitant of the old age. This means that no two characteristics should divide a subject into the same subdivision. (ii) Canon of Relevant Succession. The canon of relevant succession stipulates that the succession of the characteristics in the associated scheme of characteristics should be relevant to the purpose of the classification. For example, in the main class chemistry in CC edition I, the problem facet was kept as the first facet and subject facet as the second one. But the users find it to be inconvenient. The sequence–substance and problem are found to be more relevant. Hence changed to in the next edition of CC. (iii) Canon of Consistent Succession. According to canon of consistent succession, the succession of the characteristics in the associated scheme of characteristics should be consistently adhered to, as long as there is no change in the purpose of the classification. This canon demands that the sequence of application of chosen characteristics should be followed consistently. For example, DC has chosen ‘Geographical area’ and ‘period’ as the required characteristics in the main class history. The users of DC should follow the same characteristics in the same succession.

(c) Canon for Array An array is the sequence of the classes of a universe derived from it on the basis of a single characteristic and arranged themselves according to their ranks. The various classification schemes the universe of knowledge has been divided into various co-ordinate classes independent to each other. These classes are said to be array of classes. In the second stage each of the main classes is divided into sequence of facets in any array as sub divisions of a subject. University Students

Undergraduates

Postgraduates

Doctorate

For Example, PMEST are the five facets in which almost every main class has been divided in colon classification. Ranganathan has enunciated four canons for the formation of arrays at various levels and stages. These are: (i) Canon of Exhaustiveness. The canon of exhaustiveness demands that the classes in an array of classes and the ranked isolates in an array of ranked isolates should be totally exhaustive of their respective common immediate universe. This canon underlines that in the process of assortment, no entity should be left behind in the immediate common universe.

200 D Library and Information Science Specific For Example, a particular characteristic gender when applied to the universe of students divided it into boys and girls and no entity is left behind in the immediate universe. Universe of Individuals

Children

Adolescents

Adults

Old People

E.g.

Students’ Sex

Male Child

Adolescent

Adult

Child

Female

(age)

Adolescent

Adult

In DC 290 other and comparative religion 291 comparative religions 292 classical religions 293 germanic religions 294 religions of Indic origin 295 Zoroastrians 296 Judaism 297 Islam and religions derived from it 298 Other religions (ii) Canon of Exclusiveness. The canon of exclusiveness states that the classes in an array of classes and the ranked isolates in an array of ranked isolates should be mutually exclusive. This canon implies that no entity should be common between the classes of an array. In other words, the classes forming an array should not overlap each other. For example, the sub curriculum has been placed in three different places in the same array–curriculum of elementary education has been placed under the class no 372 curriculum of secondary education under 375. Therefore, it is the violation of the canon of exclusiveness. (iii) Canon of Helpful Sequence. The canon of helpful sequence implies that the sequence of the classes in an array of classes, and of the ranked isolates in an array and of the ranked isolates should be helpful to the purpose of those for whom it is intended. The canon demands that the sequence of co-ordinate class in an array should be most helpful to the various users of classification. To arrange the classes of an array in a helpful order, or in other words, to implement the canon of helpful sequence, Ranganathan formulated certain

Unit-V D 201 guidelines in the form of principles of helpful sequence. These principles are listed below: (1) Principles of later in time. (2) Principles of earlier in time. (3) Principles of later in evolution. (4) Principles of earlier in evolution. (5) Principles of spatial contiguity. (6) Principles of increasing quantity. (7) Principles of decreasing quantity. (8) Principles of increasing complexity. (9) Principles of decreasing complexity. (10) Principles of canonical sequence. (11) Principles of decreasing literary warrant. (12) Principles of increasing literary warrant. (13) Principles of alphabetical sequence.

(d) Canon for Chain A chain is defined as a group of subordinate classes in which each successive class is derived from the preceding class. Each class of a chain is called a link. For example: World

¯ Asia

¯ India

¯ Maharashtra

¯ Mumbai In progressive classification, when such chain is formed, they should satisfy the following two canons: (i) Canon of Decreasing Extension. It states that while moving down a chain from its first link to its last, the extension of the classes or of the ranked isolates, as the case may be, should decrease and intension should increase at each step. Extension is quantitative and intension is qualitative. For example: World Order 0 Asia Order 1 India Order 2 Maharashtra Order 3 (ii) Canon of Modulation. In a chain of classes there should be a link to represent each and every order that lies between the order of the first link and the last link in the chain. For example, as shown above, if Asia or India or Maharashtra is missing, the chain would be described as un-modulated.

202 D Library and Information Science Specific (e) Canon for Filiatory Sequence Filiatory sequence consists of two cannons as mentioned below: (i) Canon of Subordinate Classes. If in a classification scheme A1, A2, A3, etc. are subdivisions of A, A1, A2, A3, etc. should immediately follow A. No other class should intervene in between A, A1, A2, A3, etc. becomes a coalesced array. (ii) Canon of Coordinate Classes. In a coalesced array if class A and Class B had originated in one and same array and are consecutive in it, A and B should be kept together. They should not be separated by any other class or classes other than the sub division of A i.e. A1, A2, A3, etc.

II. Canons of Verbal Plane In verbal plane terms are used to denote—that is to name the classes or ranked isolates in scheme for classification. Canons for terminology are as follows. The terminology in a scheme of classification should satisfy the following four cannons: (a) Canon of context (b) Canon of enumeration (c) Canon of currency (d) Canon of reticence (a) Canon of Context The denotation of a term in a scheme of classification should be determined in the light of different classes or ranked isolates of lower order (upper link) belonging to the same primary chain. For example, Agriculture

¯

here the denotation of the term India is to be determined in the light of upper links (Rice, Agriculture)

Rice

¯ India (b) Canon of Enumeration The denotation of a term should be determined in the light of subclasses or ranked isolate (lower links). For example, in DC subdivision of the class ‘‘Arithmetic’’ includes only ‘‘lower Mathematics’’ whereas CC includes both ‘‘lower Mathematics’’ and ‘‘higher Mathematics’’. (c) Canon of Currency The term used in a scheme of classification must be the one current in usage among the users. Obsolete one is to be replaced with current terms. (d) Canon of Reticence The term used in a scheme of classification should not be critical.

III. Canons of Notational Plane Notation is defined as a system of symbols, correlative to the order of classification and it is subsidiary.

Unit-V D 203

Aims of Notation It provides a clear alternative name to the subject. It is distinguishable from all other symbols. Relate the subject to subordinate, coordinate, subordinate and collateral subjects.

Role of Notation It is basically ordering device. It assists in guiding of a library. Synthesis in number building leads to enormous economy in the construction and the physical size of schedule.

Qualities of a Good Notation A good notation should have following qualities of simplicity, brevity, Synthesis, mnemonics, flexibility.

Types of Notation Pure and mixed notation. There are two basic cannons the notational system of a scheme for classification should satisfy. (i) Canon of Synonym. This cannon states that one and only one class number should represent each subject. (ii) Canon of Homonym. This cannon implies that each class number should represent one and only one subject.

Recent Developments in Classification (a) Construction of Thesauri. Various thesauri have been constructed with the help of classification schemes because these schemes function as the big sources for selection and getting most of the used terms in thesauri. Hence so many research projects have been established for construction of thesauri. (b) Standard Switching Language. Due to the explosion of knowledge, the need of standard switching language was felt for timely use in indexing terms and in indexing language. And UDC was treated suitable for using this switching language, as it was at that time suitable for computerized retrieval and dissemination of information. FID is using UDC for constructing thesauri and terminology. (c) Automated Classification. By doing so many experiments in the field of automated classification process and system, the efforts have been made to develop the same. The use of automated classification in specific database is becoming more helpful. (d) Computerized MARC Project. The information storage is being done in micro and machine readable forms. Hence it is needed to develop such a classification scheme which can be useful in this age of information technology. Library of Congress (LC) and Decimal Classification scheme are being used in MARC project. (e) Unisist. UNISIST planned for a universal information system and network, for which the need is to provide classification schemes in a new pattern. Because the present classification schemes do not have the efficiency of organising the computerized stored information.

New Trends in Classification The following trends are seen on the basis of various surveys in the field of library classification.

204 D Library and Information Science Specific (1) The use of LC and DDC is increasing day by day. (2) The trend of using UDC is also increasing day by day. (3) The use of SC in Britain is becoming less and in place of it the use of DDC is continuously increasing. (4) The use of LC in the libraries of colleges and universities in USA is increasing. But DDC is being used more than LC in the three types of libraries. (5) The use of UDC is increasing in the special libraries of most of the countries. Its use is increasing more in information and documentation centres also. (6) The SC was used in the public libraries of UK, but now they have begun the use of DDC, because it is up to date. (7) It is felt that at present no classification scheme is suitable to classify the computerized stored information. But being revised, the LC and DDC will be existential in future. The use of UDC is also possible in special libraries. (8) The efforts are being done in the direction of centralized classification service. The MARC project of LC and BNB have been active in the field of library classification.

Contributions done by International Research Groups for the Library Classification (a) FID/CR The role of FID is most important in the field of research in library classification. The committee named FID/CA was constituted for the same objectives in 1946, but in 1962 its name was changed to FID/CR (Classification Research). At that time 62 countries were the members of this committee, so it affected more on international level. This committee organised two international conferences, to consider the matters concerned with classification research, respectively in 1964 at Elsinore and in 1975 at Bombay. A new separate section named FID/CR News was opened in 1991, which publishes the articles on classification research. Dr. Ranganathan of India, has played a significant role in FID/CR and he remained Reporter General of this committee for a long time.

(b) CRG (London) A.G. Wells and B.C. Vikery of England founded CRG (Classification Research Group) at London in 1952. Its first meeting was held in February 1952, in which so many experts, having interest in classification, participated. In this way, this research group gave an steering for research in library classification. CRG (London) has prepared classified Thesauri, and efforts were made to prepare plan for automated information retrieval system with the help of UK–MARC project, and efforts were also made to develop special classification scheme. Library Association (UK) have appointed this research group as its agency for research work in classification.

(c) Classification Research Study Group (USA) FID Bureau emphasized to organise the study and research groups for classification at national levels in 1959, so that adequate progress can be made in library classification and problems, if any, may be solved. As a result, research groups were established in so many countries of the world. But in USA and Canada, these groups could not be continued and in 1965, this group became inactive.

Unit-V D 205

(d) DRTC (India) Documentation Research and Training Centre (DRTC) was founded in India in 1962 at Bangalore with the efforts made by Dr. Ranganathan. Basically this centre was founded to develop documentation activities and programmes in the country, but provisions were also made in its aims to work in other fields of library science also, such as classification, cataloguing, formation of subjects, schedules of classification, documentation, etc. Dr. Neelamegham and Dr. Seetharam were also engaged in research with Dr. Ranganathan at the centre.

MAPPING OF SUBJECTS IN LIBRARY CLASSIFICATION SCHEMES DDC The Dewey Decimal Classification (DDC) system is a general knowledge organization tool that is continuously revised to keep pace with knowledge. The system was conceived by Melvil Dewey in 1873 and first published in 1876. The Dewey Decimal Classification is the most widely used classification system in the world. Libraries in more than 135 countries use the DDC to organize and provide access to their collections, and DDC numbers are featured in the national bibliographies of sixty countries. Libraries of every type apply Dewey numbers on a daily basis and share these numbers through a variety of means (including WorldCat, the OCLC Online Union Catalog). Dewey is also used for other purposes, e.g., as a browsing mechanism for resources on the Web. One of Dewey's great strengths is that the system is developed and maintained in a national bibliographic agency, the Library of Congress.

Editions The Dewey Decimal Classification is published in two editions, full and abridged. The Classification is kept up-to-date electronically through electronic versions: Dewey for Windows, a CD-ROM product that is updated annually and released in January; and WebDewey in CORC, a Web-based product that is updated quarterly.

Structure and Notation The DDC is built on sound principles that make it ideal as a general knowledge organization tool: meaningful notation in universally recognized Arabic numerals, well-defined categories, well-developed hierarchies, and a rich network of relationships among topics. In the DDC, basic classes are organized by disciplines or fields of study. At the broadest level, the DDC is divided into ten main classes, which together cover the entire world of knowledge. Each main class is further divided into ten divisions, and each division into ten sections (not all the numbers for the divisions and sections have been used). The three summaries of the DDC follow this introduction. The first summary contains the ten main classes. The first digit in each three-digit number represents the main class. For example, 500 represents natural sciences and mathematics.

206 D Library and Information Science Specific The second summary contains the hundred divisions. The second digit in each threedigit number indicates the division. For example, 500 is used for general works on the sciences, 510 for mathematics, 520 for astronomy, 530 for physics. The third summary contains the thousand sections. The third digit in each three-digit number indicates the section. Thus, 530 is used for general works on physics, 531 for classical mechanics, 532 for fluid mechanics, 533 for gas mechanics. Arabic numerals are used to represent each class in the DDC. A decimal point follows the third digit in a class number, after which division by ten continues to the specific degree of classification needed. A subject may appear in more than one discipline. For example, "clothing" has aspects that fall under several disciplines. The psychological influence of clothing belongs in 155.95 as part of the discipline of psychology; customs associated with clothing belong in 391 as part of the discipline of customs; and clothing in the sense of fashion design belongs in 746.92 as part of the discipline of the arts.

Hierarchy Hierarchy in the DDC is expressed through structure and notation. Structural hierarchy means that all topics (aside from the ten main classes) are part of all the broader topics above them. Any note regarding the nature of a class holds true for all the subordinate classes, including logically subordinate topics classed at coordinate numbers. Notational hierarchy is expressed by length of notation. Numbers at any given level are usually subordinate to a class whose notation is one digit shorter; coordinate with a class whose notation has the same number of significant digits; and superordinate to a class with numbers one or more digits longer. The underlined digits in the following example demonstrate this notational hierarchy: 600 Technology (Applied sciences) 630 Agriculture and related technologies 636 Animal husbandry 636.7 Dogs 636.8 Cats "Dogs" and "Cats" are more specific than (i.e., are subordinate to) “Animal husbandry”; they are equally specific as (i.e., are coordinate with) each other; and “Animal husbandry” is less specific than (i.e., is superordinate to) “Dogs” and “Cats.” Sometimes, other devices must be used to express the hierarchy when it is not possible or desirable to do so through the notation. Relationships among topics that violate notational hierarchy are indicated by special types of headings, notes, and entries.

Arrangement of the DDC The print version of Edition 21 is composed of nine major parts in four volumes as follows: Volume 1 (A) New Features. A brief explanation of the special features and changes in Edition 21 (B) Introduction. A description of the DDC and how to use it (C) Glossary. Short definitions of terms used in the DDC (D) Index to the Introduction and Glossary

Unit-V D 207 (E) Tables. Seven numbered tables of notation that can be added to class numbers to provide greater specificity: T1 Standard Subdivisions T2 Geographic Areas, Historical Periods, Persons T3 Subdivisions for the Arts, for Individual Literatures, for Specific Literary Forms T3-A Subdivisions for Works by or about Individual Authors T3-B Subdivisions for Works by or about More than One Author T3-C Notation to Be Added Where Instructed in Table 3-B, 700.4, 791.4, 808– 809 T4 Subdivisions of Individual Languages and Language Families T5 Racial, Ethnic, National Groups T6 Languages T7 Groups of Persons Except for notation from Table 1 (which may be added to any number unless there is an instruction in the schedules or tables to the contrary), table notation may be added only as instructed in the schedules and tables (F) Lists that compare the previous edition with the new edition: Relocations and Reductions; Comparative and Equivalence Tables; Reused Numbers Volumes 2 and 3 (G) Schedules. The organization of knowledge from 000–999 Volume 4 (H) Relative Index. An alphabetical list of subjects with the disciplines in which they are treated subarranged alphabetically under each entry (I) Manual. A guide to classifying in difficult areas, information on new schedules, and an explanation of the policies and practices of the Decimal Classification Division at the Library of Congress. Information in the Manual is arranged by the numbers in the tables and schedules

Entries Entries in the schedules and tables are composed of a DDC number in the number column (the column at the left margin), a heading describing the class that the number represents, and often one or more notes. All entries (numbers, headings, and notes) should be read in the context of the hierarchy. The first three digits of schedule numbers (main classes, divisions, sections) appear only once in the number column, when first used. They are repeated at the top of each page where their subdivisions continue. Subordinate numbers appear in the number column, beginning with a decimal point, with the initial three digits understood.

Options Numbers and notes in parentheses provide options to standard practice. These options enable the Classification to serve needs beyond those represented in the standard Englishlanguage edition.

208 D Library and Information Science Specific Unused Numbers Numbers in square brackets represent topics that have been relocated or discontinued, or are unassigned. Square brackets are also used for standard subdivision concepts that are represented in another location. Numbers in square brackets are not used.

UDC The UDC (Universal Decimal Classification) is the world's foremost multilingual classification scheme for all fields of knowledge and a sophisticated indexing and retrieval tool. It is a highly flexible classification system for all kinds of information in any medium. Because of its logical hierarchical arrangement and analytico-synthetic nature, it is suitable for physical organization of collections as well as document browsing and searching. The UDC is structured in such a way that new developments and new fields of knowledge can be readily incorporated. The code itself is independent of any particular language or script (consisting of arabic numerals and common punctuation marks), and the accompanying class descriptions have appeared in many translated versions.

Use of UDC The scheme is in worldwide use, and has been published in whole or in part in over 40 different languages. It is used in bibliographic services, documentation centres and libraries in around 130 countries world-wide. Library collections indexed by UDC can be found in library OPACs and databases.

Management of UDC The International Federation for Information and Documentation (FID) managed the UDC, from its creation around the year 1900 until 1992, when it became clear that a more broadly based and financially autonomous organization was needed to administer and exploit UDC. FID, together with the publishers of the Dutch, English, French, Japanese and Spanish editions, became the founder members of a new body: the UDC Consortium (UDCC). The Consortium assumed ownership of UDC on 1 January 1992. The UDCC appoints the UDC Editorial Team and the UDC Advisory Board with international membership to oversee the content of UDC and contribute to its revision.

Scope of UDC All branches of human knowledge have a place in UDC, and are treated as parts of a balanced whole. Because of the nature of the subjects, the listed subdivisions in science and technology outweigh those of the arts and social sciences, but these subjects demand different criteria, and are also properly provided for. UDC allows for detailed indexing of documents in all subjects. This is achieved through two main features of UDC: 1. detailed subdivision of hierarchies. 2. analytico-synthetic nature of the system, i.e. provision for synthesis of subjects, attributes and general characteristics across the universe of knowledge. The level of detail and specificity of UDC cannot be observed based on the hierarchy levels or from the number of UDC classes as most of compound and complex subjects are described through combination of simple UDC numbers in the process of indexing.

Unit-V D 209 UDC has been modified and extended over many years to cope with the increasing output in all disciplines, and is still under continuous review so as to take account of new developments.

Universal Decimal Classification

Main tables

Auxiliaries

Common Auxiliaries

Signs

Special Auxiliary Subdivision

Common Auxiliary Subdivisions

Independent Auxiliary Tables

Dependent Auxiliary Tables

CC The colon classification (CC), conceived and developed from 1924 to 1928, was first published by the Madras Library Association in 1933. The latest and the first edition published after the death of Ranganathan was the 7th in 1987. The CC is a general scheme, which aims to classify by discipline all subjects and all forms of documents — books, periodicals, reports, pamphlets, microforms, and electronic media in all kinds of libraries. For bibliographic records, requiring depth classification, it is especially suitable. Scheme is described as analytico-synthetic which implies that it does not go in for making any exhaustive list of all possible subjects known at a time, as was usually done in those days. This objectively formulated and dynamic theory is enshrined comprehensively in his ‘Prolegomena’ (1937/1957/1967). For designing a classification system, Ranganathan divided the work into three successive planes. Idea plane is the message, verbal its expression; notational plane its visible representation in short hand symbols.

Notations The notation in the CC-7 comprising of 74 digits (60 semantic and 14 indicator digits) has been divided into the following six species: A/Z (Roman capitals) 26 D (Greek Delta) 01 0/9 Indo-Arabic numerals 10 a/z Roman smalls (i, l, o excluded) 23

210 D Library and Information Science Specific Indicator digits with anteriorising value 03 *“¬ Ordinary indicator digits 11= 74 &’. : ; , - = ® + ( ) The notational base of the CC is the widest ever in any classification system. On this count, the CC-7 notation is wide-based, thus very spacious and accommodating, though it has made the notation and consequently the system quite complicated.

Division of Knowledge in CC The CC presumes the entire body of knowledge woven in a system vis-à-vis, sees an underlying unity in it. Ranganathan identified three types of subjects in the universe of knowledge: Basic, Compound and Complex analogous to chemical substances. ‘Basic subjects’ are unitary subjects, such as Physics, Thermodynamics, Economics, Marxian Economics, Music, Law, and Library Science. ‘Compound subjects’ are basic subjects with subdivisions or additional facets, e.g., Velocity of light, Transport economics, Guitar music, or Law of marriage, and Libraries in India. Compound subjects are virtually infinite in number. ‘Complex subjects’ are mostly interdisciplinary in nature, e.g., Mathematics for engineers, Russian for librarians, or Comparative physiology. Ranganathan postulated that every subject, be it of any type or level, has a basic subject which forms the first facet in constructing a class number.

Shelf Arrangement Principle of Inversion. The CC follows the Principle of Inversion first used by the Universal Decimal Classification (UDC). It means that the citation order of facets in the facet formula is reverse of their arrangement on the shelves. Within a given specific class he arranged documents on the shelves in what he termed as the APUPA pattern.

KNOWLEDGE ORGANISATION Library Cataloguing Canons and Principles Introduction One of the basic functions of library is to make its resources readily available to its patrons. These resources constitute not only print material but also non-print material comprising audio-visual aids and various other media. It becomes the primary duty of the library to list, process, arrange all kinds of reading material in such a way that the clientele make use of them without hindrance. The library is, therefore, a contact point between the records of human thought and experience and the users. The effective tool that performs this function is the library catalogue on which the librarians concentrate to make it adequate and satisfactory means for retrieval of information. So, much depends on the intrinsic and extrinsic quality of the catalogue which brings the reader’s needs into relation with the intellectual contents of the library. Cataloguing involves certain steps which should be understood by the users also. The cataloguing process entails the establishment of the heading, bibliographical description

Unit-V D 211 of a particular book or other material for the entry, determining of classification number, assignment of subject headings, labelling and filing of catalogue cards in cabinet. The word ‘catalogue’ comes from the Greek phrase Katalogos. Kata means ‘‘according to’’ or ‘‘by’’, Logos has different meanings. Sometimes it means simply ‘‘words’’, sometimes ‘‘order’’ and at other times ‘‘reason’’. We may, therefore, explain ‘‘catalogue’’ as a work in which the contents are arranged in a ‘‘reasonable’’ way in a particular ‘‘order’’ or according to set ‘‘plan’’. Generally speaking a library catalogue is a list of books and other materials in a particular library, arranged according to a definite plan or determined order and containing specified items of bibliographical information for the purpose of identification and location of the materials catalogued. According to C.A. Cutter, “A library catalogue is a list of books which is arranged on some definite plan. As distinguished from a bibliography it is a list of books in same library or collections’’.

Purpose of a Library Catalogue The purpose of a library catalogue is to help the library user in identifying a document and also help in selecting a work or works expeditiously and exactly to his or her requirements. The library catalogue helps the librarians to achieve these purposes by satisfying various approaches of a reader; giving bibliographical details for further assistance in the selection of exact documents; and bringing together other relevant information by analytical entries, cross references, etc., to sharpen the search and leading to the exact location of all relevant documents in the library.

Function of a Library Catalogue According to Dr. Ranganathan, the function of the Catalogue ‘is to help the explosion of resources of the library in conformity with the laws of library science.’ They are summarized by the statement that a library catalogue should be so designed as to: (i) Disclose to every reader his or her document. (ii) Secure for every document its readers. (iii) Save the time of the reader, and for this purpose; (iv) Save the time of the staff.

Forms of Catalogue (i) Printed Book Catalogue A printed book catalogue is that in which entries are made in a conventional page form and is bound into volume or volumes like books. It was the best and cheapest form of catalogue. Its use has long been abandoned in the libraries of Europe and America. It has been replaced by card catalogue. Examples of a few conventional book catalogues include: National Library of India, the British Museum Author Catalogues London, Glasgow and Liverpool Catalogues, the catalogue of books represented by the Library of Congress printed cards, etc. In US the first Harvard catalogue in book form was published in 1723. The Yale Book catalogue was first published in 1745.

212 D Library and Information Science Specific Advantage It is the easiest form of catalogue and is available in multiple copies. A printed page of entries can be scanned with greater speed and less error than any other arrangement. It occupies less space than card catalogues. It can be split into sections according to subjects. The number of copies may be increased according to the demand of the users. The printed book catalogue is portable and can be consulted in any part of the library. It is specially suitable for special collection. Printed book catalogues of national libraries or large special libraries carry immense value as bibliographical tools and cataloguing aids. Disadvantages It is highly expensive to produce by conventional methods and get out of date immediately after publication. Insertion of new entries, withdrawal, correction or deletion is not possible, although this can be handled by way of issuing supplements. The recent additions are written in the interleaved blank page. It cannot exactly reflect the book–stock position because of periodic losses, pilferage and withdrawal of books in the library.

(ii) Sheaf Catalogue A sheaf catalogue is similar to printed book catalogue in which slips of paper are put into a loose leaf binder and is bound by some mechanical device into a sheaf or volume. The present day sheaf catalogue consists of slips held together in specially produced loose– sheaf binders. The size of slips being 7–3/4 by 4 inches. Each binder holds approximately 500–650 slips. They are notched at the left edge and protected by means of boards put at the front and back-called binder. Advantages It is flexible because addition and withdrawal of entries can be carried out easily. It is easier to handle and consult as it is in the form of an ordinary book. The sheaf catalogue can be removed from its stand and consulted in any part of the library. It occupies far less space than the card catalogue. It is cheap to produce. Duplicate entries can be made. The sheaf catalogue is very useful in small libraries where limited cataloguing is followed. Disadvantages Several disadvantages are also there. It is cumbersome to insert and withdraw entries in sheaf catalogue as the binders have to be unlocked and locked time and again. Slips are less durable than cards. The author name/main entry which starts from the first indention is not always easy to read due to binding system. The user may not always replace the binder to the correct place on the shelves. It is prone to be misplaced anywhere in the library. It prevents any scheme of cooperative cataloguing where unit cards are used for entries exchange. Likewise the sheaf catalogue does not allow the use of printed cards.

(iii) Card Catalogue The most widely used type of catalogue in the world is the card catalogue. It was developed in its modern format in the latter part of the nineteenth century, but it was popularized at global level in the early part of the twentieth century. The availability of printed cards from the Library of Congress began in 1901. It was a major factor that made the card catalogue well established in US, Europe and elsewhere. The availability of printed card

Unit-V D 213 with high standards of cataloguing from other commercial agencies also added more popularity to card catalogue. The standard size of the cards measures 7.5 × 12.5 centimetres (5 × 3 inches). The cards measuring 5 × 3 inches are considered as slightly bigger than the size measured in centimetres. The cards stand in a card–cabinet drawer about half a centimetre from the bottom of the card. The thickness of cards approximate 0.025 cm. One drawer can accommodate around 1000 cards. Advantages The card catalogue has certain inherent qualities which are the main factors of its popularity. They are enumerated as follows: (1) Flexibility (a) Cards can be arranged in any way suitable to a library, alphabetically, numerically or by call numbers. (b) The catalogue can be in dictionary of divided format. (c) Can be updated by adding or removing card with ease. (d) Drawers can be removed or replaced without any problem. (2) Ease of Use (a) It is relatively easy to use if the user reads only instructions. (b) Guide cards, references, and consistency in the forms of author’s names and subject headings make the card catalogue and efficient tool for the users. (c) Printed or typed cards are easy to read. (3) Cost of Maintenance (a) Updating the card catalogue is highly cheap as compared to other formats. (b) Printed and computer–produced cards are easily available. In house–production is also inexpensive. (c) Reproduction of cards with any method is relatively easy and cheap. (d) Maintenance is far less cumbersome. It is easy to add or remove cards from the catalogue. Disadvantages Many criticisms are found about the card catalogue although its superiority over others is still unchallenged. Some notable criticisms are as follows: (a) It can be consulted only at the place where it is located in the library. It is not portable like book or sheaf catalogue. (b) At the time of consulting the catalogue single person monopolizes a considerable number of drawers leaving others to await, while a book catalogue or computer terminal display can show numerous entries. (c) The growing card catalogue of a modern library presents serious space problems. The growth in size also brings in many complex problems making the catalogue administratively unmanageable. (d) With the passage of time, inconsistency in names and subjects headings appears. (e) Revision and/or use of different cataloguing rules and subjects headings over a period of time disturbs and impairs consistency. It creates chaos. (f) This catalogue is relatively expensive piece of equipment for smaller libraries to purchase.

214 D Library and Information Science Specific (g) More often cards are damaged, torn or defaced by the users. (h) The user has to copy all information by hand while a computer terminal display can give print-out of the desired information.

(iv) Guard Book Catalogue In a guard book catalogue entries are typed on large sheets of paper and bound together by mechanical means. The second method is one in which slips of entries are mounted in an appropriate place by pasting only one end of the slip. Spaces are left for additions. When no further addition in the current position on a page is possible, the entries are lifted and redistributed over two or more pages. Extra leaves may be mounted on guards. When a volume becomes congested, it is broken-up into two or more volumes.

(v) Horizontal Card Index In this system the card lies flat. Each card projects a little in front of the one following. The cards lie in shallow drawers of about half an inch height. The full entry is typed on the card in the ordinary way and on the projecting piece only details necessary for the recognition of an item are recorded. To consult, the card is to be raised to vertical position. This index is mostly used in the periodicals department of a library. Insertion of new cards will be some what inconvenient.

(vi) Computer–Produced Book Catalogue Beginning in the 1960s, a new type of book catalogue appeared. It was based on the use of computer. These computer–produced catalogues vary greatly in format, typography, extent of bibliographical detail and method of updating. The output may be in the form of line printer output, or may be computer typeset and presented in a form similar to printed book or index.

(vii) Microform Catalogue The microform catalogue contains bibliographic records in microimages and requires the use of microform reader for viewing. Microform catalogues became popular with the development of computer-output microform (COM). There are various media for producing microform catalogue such as microfilm (continuous negative) microcard (positive) and microfiche (negative). This format has the advantage of economy in duplication. It is cheaper to duplicate than a book catalogue. A microform catalogue may be produced by photographing book catalogues. But now it is produced directly from machine–readable records. The method is known as computer– output microform (COM) as stated above. The COM method converts the digital information contained on the computer–generated magnetic tape into print displayed on microform.

(viii) Microfilm or Microfiche Microfilm or Microfiche are commonly used for this purpose. Microfilm may be on a single reel, but more usually it is housed in a cassette containing two reels so that the film can be wounded backward and forwards within its container. Microfiche is a transparent ‘card’type format. A reduction of 42 × would give 200 frames per card. Microfiche has the

Unit-V D 215 advantage of direct access to a particular frame whereas microfilm requires a ‘serial’ search through the film to reach a required entry point. Microfiche are generally produced with eye-readable dictionary captions across the top of each card. This makes fairly simple to locate the correct fiche. Also colour coded captioned fiche can be used to distinguish segments of a divided catalogue or supplements to catalogue. Microfiche, therefore, prove more useful for large library catalogue.

(ix) Machine–Readable Catalogue (MARC) A machine–readable format is that which permits input and storage (on disc, etc.) for manipulation in a computer. Access to computer may be online or offline. Offline contact concerns operation without continuous or instant continuous communication with the computer. Data is processed in ‘batches’ which limits utility and flexibility. Online systems are linked directly with the computer which can be used immediately for processing and searching. Results are displayed on a screen or visual display unit and may also be output to disc or printed in hard copy.

(x) Online Catalogue An online catalogue is an organized, machine–readable accumulation of bibliographic records which are maintained on disks or other direct–access computer storage media for retrieval by library users and staff members working at interactive terminals or appropriately configured microcomputer work stations. In addition to saving space and automating file maintenance, online catalogues permit remote access by authorized persons equipped with compatible terminals, and they can support information retrieval operations—such as keyword searching of titles and series names— which are not conveniently possible with card or book form catalogues.

(xi) CD-ROM Catalogue The MARC format has been CD-ROM (Compact Disc Read Only Memory). CD-ROMs are optical discs which are written and read by a laser beam. Data is impressed on the surface as a series of pits of a variable length and the discs can store vast amounts of data in digital form. The CD-ROM catalogue is used in a very similar way to online access and may provide excellent search facilities but it is an offline format, and like microform, is out of date as soon as it is produced. Currency is, therefore, problem. One great advantage of the CDROM is its transportability, a complete catalogue can easily be sent by post.

(xii) Author Catalogue An author catalogue mainly consists of authors’ names in the headings arranged alphabetically. But the entries in this catalogue usually include those for editors, translators. It also includes title entries for works such as serials, anonymous works.

(xiii) Name Catalogue It is a ‘‘compound’’ catalogue or a mixed form of catalogue—a combined author catalogue and a subject catalogue in which the subject entries are limited to personal and corporate names, e.g., for lives of individuals, history of corporate bodies, etc. Name catalogue is a variation of the Author Catalogue and in it author, name–title and name–subject entries

216 D Library and Information Science Specific are arranged in one alphabetical sequence. It will contain entries for works of an author and books written about him. It also contains entries for corporate bodies as ‘author’ and as ‘subjects’ as well as for name–series. A place name may also appear in the name catalogue only when it forms a part of an author heading. Some versions are restricted to personal name only.

(xiv) Title Catalogue A title catalogue contains entries of books under their titles arranged alphabetically. A word or words of the title of a book are used to form entry. As it is restricted to titles of books only its use is very much restricted from any other angle. The best substitute for this catalogue emerged in the form of author–title catalogue which is limited to author, distinctive and selected titles, and series entries with reference to the accepted form of author name from that not used.

(xv) Alphabetical Subject Catalogue An alphabetical subject catalogue attempts to bring together all books on one subject at the one place. In this catalogue entry is made under the name of the specific subject of a book. These entries are then arranged in alphabetical order. The basic principle of entry in an alphabetical subject catalogue is to enter a work under the specific or the narrowest form that will represent its subject, and not under the heading of a class which includes that subject. For example, a book on birds will be listed under the headings BIRDS. A book on ‘Butterflies’ will be listed under BUTTERFLIES and not under ZOOLOGY or MOTHS.

(xvi) Dictionary Catalogue A dictionary catalogue is that in which all the entries, i.e., author, title, subject, added analytical series reference are filled together in one alphabetical order. A dictionary catalogue is therefore of a mixed variety—a combination of the authortitle catalogue and the alphabetical subject catalogue. It is a combination of two distinct and different approaches: (i) the author or the title approach for the reader who knows the books or the author he wants; (ii) the subject approach for the reader who does not know the book he wants for the material on some definite subject.

(xvii) Classified Catalogue A classified catalogue is that in which subject entries are arranged according to some scheme of classification. The entries made under the class symbol (notations) represent the subject of a book in the classification scheme chosen. The subject entries arrangement follows the order of classification schemes used in a particular library. The success of the classified catalogue depends upon the viability of the classification scheme in use.

(xviii) Alphabetical Classified Catalogue Alphabetico–classed catalogue is that in which entries under broad subject headings are arranged in alphabetical order but each broad heading is subdivided into more specific subject divisions which are also alphabetically arranged. It, therefore, has many subsequences within the main sequences.

Unit-V D 217

Canons (1) Canons of Ascertainability ‘‘The choice and rendering of main entry and specific added entry and the heading and any other element in either entry should be determined by the information found in the title–page of the document and its overflow pages, in extreme cases information may be taken from the other pages of the work, but in no case from out of the work’’. Ranganathan was of the opinion that the information needed for the Main Entry, each section of a Cross–Reference Entry, the heading of each Book Index Entry, all sections other than the Heading and directing section of a Cross Index Entry and each section other than the directing section of a Cross–Reference Index Entry other than name entry should be ascertained from the title page and other pages of the book.

(2) Canon of Prepotence ‘‘The potency to decide the position of an entry among various entries in a catalogue should if possible be concentrated totally in the leading section and even there it should be concentrated as much as possible in the entry element and further if total concentration in the leading section is not possible, the minimum possible potency should be allowed to overflow beyond it to later section and even this spill-over should be distributed in the later section in a decreasing sequence of intensity’’. The essence of library catalogue is arrangement of entries. The entries get sorted letter-by-letter or digit-by-digit beginning with the very first of these found in an entry. The potency goes on decreasing downwards from the first letter or digit. Any mistake in the first letter or digit will, therefore, be fatal. The entry will virtually be lost in some far off region of the catalogue. The range within which the entry may get lost goes on decreasing as we move on from the first letter or digit to the last.

(3) Canon of Sought Heading ‘‘The decision whether an entry with a particular type of heading or with a particular choice for the heading, or with a particular rendering of the choice, or with a particular added entry arising out of it should be based on the answer to the question—Is reader or library staff likely to look for a book under the particular type or choice or rendering of heading”. The answer to this question is matter of judgment. The judgment should be based on experience in reference service, i.e., by eliciting from readers their requirements, experience in book selection; etc.

(4) Canon of Context ‘‘The rule in a catalogue code should be determined in the context of the nature of the cataloguing features of a book prevalent in the mode of book production, the nature of organization of libraries prevalent in regard to mode and quality of library service, and the coming into existence of published bibliographies and particularly bibliographic periodicals’’. The rules of a catalogue code should be changed from time to time to keep step with changes in context.

218 D Library and Information Science Specific (5) Canon of Permanence ‘‘No element in an entry and the heading in particular should be subjected to change by the rules of a catalogue code except when the rules themselves are changed in response to the Canon of Context.” Canon of ascertainability helps Canon of Permanence by prescribing to use the information available in title page and overflow pages of a work and one need not go the market place to ascertain as to which is the latest names, what was the earlier title, etc.

(6) Canon of Currency ‘‘The term used to denote a subject in a subject heading of a dictionary catalogue and of a Class Index Entry in a classified catalogue should be one in current usage’’. The Canon of Currency has to face a dilemma. The question is current among whom? “The specialist or non-specialist.’’ It is advised to use the term current among nonspecialists. Because, specialist knows the term current among non-specialists but not vice-versa.

(7) Canon of Consistence ‘‘The rules of a catalogue code should provide for all the added entries of a document to be consistent with its main entry. Also the main entries of the document should be consistent with one another in certain essentials such as choice of heading’’. The catalogue code should not prescribe different rules for different books by reason of origin, publication, etc. It does not insist uniformity with regard to details and compulsory cataloguing of all books.

(8) Canon of Purity ‘‘The rules of a catalogue code should not make one type of entry serve the purpose of another’’. Some of the codes earlier were prescribing subject heading in the place of author heading for the main entry in several of its rules for corporate authorship.

(9) Canon of Recall Value ‘‘Choose the term which has the highest recall value in the name of a corporate body as the entry element’’. The universe of knowledge is dynamic and increasing. Professional organizations are also progressing in number contributing to the increase in the universe of knowledge through research and publication. Besides the innumerable and complex names of personal authors, the general readers as well as specialists have to cope-up with the increasing number of corporate bodies. With the increase in the number of institutions in each specific field of study, the names are also turning out increasingly multi–worded with number of permutations and combination of terms indicative of exact subject, geographical area, nature of organization, etc. It is psychologically impossible for even a specialist in the field to recall or remember the names of these corporate bodies exactly in the order they occur in the title page of documents or in citation. Human memory cannot keep pace with the growing complexity in the names and number of corporate bodies. In the context of this increase in corporate authorship and limitations of memory of readers, the solution seems to rest with the catalogue. If the catalogue can provide a clue

Unit-V D 219 to the reader, he will be able to recall or callback to the memory and recognize the entity about which he had only a vague memory or may have forgotten.

Principles (1) Law of Symmetry ‘‘The principle that of two entities in situations which admit of being regarded as symmetrical counterparts of each other, if one of the entities context, the other entry or situation should also be given a corresponding weight’’. In case of a joint author’s work, law of symmetry suggests that in the heading of the Main Entry, we are obliged to write the names of the two authors in the sequence in which they occur on the title pages. CCC prescribed the rules at the directive of law of symmetry in case of joint authors. No other code made such a provision.

(2) Principle of Local Variation This principle states that an international catalogue code should mark out the factors to be left to the care of each national catalogue code. A national catalogue code should mark out the factors to be left to the care of each linguistic catalogue code in a multilingual country such as India; a national catalogue code or a linguistic catalogue code as the case may be should mark out the factors to be left to the care of the local catalogue codes in each individual library. The catalogue codes in each hierarchical line should be consistent with the one another without any mutual contradiction; and each lower link in each hierarchical line should be a supplement to all the upper links taken together.

(3) Principles of Osmosis The principle state that when a change in the catalogue code or in the scheme of classification becomes necessary in difference to the canon of context on and after a chosen date, all the new accessions be catalogued and classified according to the new catalogue code and the new scheme of classification; just those of the old collection as are known to be in much use be recalculated and reclassified with an additional temporary staff, if necessary, during the first few months; the new accessions and the recatalogued and reclassified books be kept in a new collection and similarly their catalogue cards too kept in a new collection; the rest of the old collection be kept as old collection and similarly their catalogue cards be kept as old collection; Reader’s attention be invited by the Reference Librarian to the existence of the two collections; and if any book is taken out by a reader from the old collection, on its return by him, it be recatalogued and absorbed in the new collection and similarly with its catalogue cards.

(4) Law of Parsimony ‘‘Between two or more possible alternative rules bearing on a particular phenomenon, the one leading to overall economy of manpower, materials, money and time considered together with proper weightage is to be preferred.’’ This principle though brought in vogue by Ranganathan, it is in practice in many disciplines and suggested by various catalogue codes over a period of time. For example, the distinction made in RDC between ‘full’ and ‘short’ style in catalogue is a contribution of law of parsimony.

220 D Library and Information Science Specific

Library Cataloguing Codes—CCC and AACR-II (A) CCC Classified Catalogue Code (CCC) is a unique and significant work and contribution of Dr. Ranganathan to the field of cataloguing. The Classified Catalogue Code, which is very popular in its abbreviated form as CCC, was first published in 1934. Although it is an Indian contribution even then the effort has been made for bringing it at international level. It is the first code complete in every respect for a classified catalogue. The subject approach of the users has been recognised as the dominant one in this code. The code has been developed on functional basis and the foundation of the code is based on the normative principles and the canons of cataloguing which Ranganathan evolved.

Features of Classified Catalogue Code (CCC) (i) Complete Catalogue Code. CCC in all respect is a complete code for cataloguing the books and other reading material. (ii) One Man Effort. CCC is the unique contribution of the labour and devotion of Dr. Ranganathan. There is no other man’s contribution in it. (iii) Rules for Classified Catalogue. In this code mainly the rules for preparation of classified catalogue are only given, which is based on the class numbers. (iv) Rules also for Dictionary Catalogue. Rules also have been provided for preparing dictionary catalogue in its first edition which was published named as Classified Catalogue Code with additional rules for Dictionary catalogue. (v) Based on Canons and Principles. CCC is altogether a distinct cataloguing code based on canons and principles evolved by Ranganathan. Hence the foundation of the code is based on the normative principles and canons of cataloguing. (vi) Objectives. The main aim of constructing this code was to satisfy the subject approach of the readers coming in the library. Therefore, it was originally prepared for subject cataloguing, but the rules of dictionary catalogue are also provided in it by Ranganathan. (vii) Special Rules. There is special provision of rules for compilation of union catalogues, periodical publications, national bibliographies, indexing and abstracting periodicals also. (viii) Use of Chain Procedure. The chain procedure is the unique device in CCC which is most important contribution of Dr. Ranganathan for the art of cataloguing. It is a mechanical device to derive the subject headings from class number either for class index or for subject headings to be used for a dictionary catalogue. (ix) Language of the Library. Keeping in view the language of the library this code is constructed, the language of the library is that in which the number of books is more and is called the first language and the second number language is called favoured script. (x) Economical. The economy is the main feature of this code. It does not allow the use of imprint and collation in the catalogue entry which are considered to be a part and facet of an entry for identification of the documents. The book number constructed in accordance with Colon Classification of Dr. Ranganathan indicates

Unit-V D 221 the year of publication of the document, an additional information to the title statement of the entry in CCC is the edition of the books. (xi) Symbiosis. CCC has established a symbiosis of classification and cataloguing. (xii) Free from Language Problem. CCC is free from the restriction of language unlike the other codes inspite of their non-local nature. It has achieved this by taking into account the following basic concepts. (a) Language of the library (b) Scale of language.

(B) AACR–II Before coming on to AACR-II, the general principles of AACR should be studied. The general principles of AACR are: (i) A book should be entered under its author or the principle author when one can be determined. (ii) A work should be entered under its editor when there is no author or no principle author and the editor is primarily responsible for the existence of a book. (iii) A work should be entered under the compiler name on the title page in case of collection by various authors. Note: In AACR-II such works are entered under title. (iv) A work whose authorship is diffused or unknown should be entered under the title, i.e, uniform title. The basic arrangement of AACR is as follows: Chapter–I deals with entry i.e, it establishes under which heading the main entry should be made. Chapter–II deals with form of heading i.e, how to enter a person’s name. Chapter–III deals with heading for corporate author. Chapter–IV deals with uniform title. Chapter–V covers the making of reference. Chapter–VI deals with description of monographs i.e, the various parts of cataloguing monographs (describing contents of monograph) Chapter–VIII gives special rules for description of serials. Chapter VIII–IX deal with special material, non-book material, photographic material

AACR II (Anglo American Cataloguing Rules: 1978) It is called as the second edition of AACR published in 1978 by the joint steering committee of North America and Britain. AACR II does not supersede AACR but is a sequel (continuation) in spite of the change in the presentation and content. The underlying fact is that AACR II still has the same principles and objective as that of its first edition. AACR II incorporates latest international standard making provision for whole range of new material and media. It also takes notice of the impact of MARC and other automated bibliographic systems. The basic objectives of AACR II are as follows: (i) To reconcile in a single text the North American and Britain text of AACR of 1967.

222 D Library and Information Science Specific (ii) To incorporate in a single text all amendments and changes agreed to be implemented in AACR (iii) To consider and include all proposals for amendment in cataloguing which were under discussion between the ALA, the library association of London, Library of Congress, the Canadian library Association, British library and others. (iv) To provide for an international interest in AACR by facilitating its use in country other than United States, UK and Canada.

STANDARDS OF BIBLIOGRAPHIC RECORD FORMATS AND DESCRIPTION Bibliographic Records—International Standards—ISBDs, MARC and CCF For the computerized cataloguing in libraries, a database is essentially required, which consists of a number of data files. In these data files, the most important data files are the local cataloguing data file and the location and holdings data file. The local cataloguing data file contains the descriptive data which characterises each item in the library collection. The location and holdings data file serves to identify the particular bibliographic item and provides information on the specific aspect needed. In any case the database must adopt a standard bibliographic record format, where bibliographic record is defined as the sum of all the areas and elements, which are used to describe, identify or retrieve any document or a publication of information content. For each designed item, a bibliographic record is constructed according to the agreed rules and standards of the system.

(A) Bibliographic Record Format It is necessary to know about the key concepts for an understanding of bibliographic data formats. They are as follows: (i) Records, Fields and Subfield. A record is a group of related data element treated as a unit by a computer programme designed to perform a specific procedure. Each record contains data which refer to a separate entity, object or unit recognised by the system. In bibliography and library applications the units are books, journals, articles, clients, book suppliers, etc. Fields and subfields may contain one or more data elements, depending upon the designers of the system who choose to treat the data. (ii) Character or Character Sets. Records can also be described as string of characters, which is any symbol representing a letter of the alphabet, a digit or a sign. A record is described as 500 characters in length or may regarded as a string of 500 characters. And a character set is a group of machine (binary) equivalents of the total number of characters that can be exactly represented within a given computer system. (iii) Record Format. Record format refers to the arrangement and identification of data for computer handling. A machine readable bibliographic record is arranged

Unit-V D 223 according to a particular format. Record format may be fixed or variable. Fixed records contain the same number of fields always of a prescribed length. And in variable records, the length can be adjusted to suit the bibliographic data.

Machine Record Format The existence of a Machine Format for bibliographic records is essential to any storage and retrieval system of documents. Here format of records refers to a method of organising data, so that each item of the data can be unambiguously identified. In traditional catalogues, data elements are readily identified usually by such characteristics as position, sequence and spacing. For a machine readable record format, however, one needs a more explicit way of determining the end of one data element and the beginning of another. Various approaches are taken to the identification, organisation and storage of data in machine readable format. The machine format consists of (i) data element (i.e. the lowest unit of information such as ISBN). (ii) field, i.e. a collection of elements, e.g. a field relating to authorship consisting of the data elements of a name, date of birth and death of a person. The fields are of two kinds (a) fixed fields, which contain data elements that are always expressed in a pre-determined number of characters; (b) variable field, which contain data elements with no pre-determined length. (iii) Record, which is the complete collection of files treated as unit. Components of Machine Record Format The machine readable record format has 3 major following components: (a) Structure of a Record. It is the physical representation of data on the machine readable medium. The structure of record is compared to an empty container that provides a basic framework for the record and allows its contents to be transported from one centre to other. (b) Content Designators. These are the means of identifying the data elements or providing additional information about each data element or sometimes referred to as codes to represent data elements. (c) Content of the Record. These are the data elements themselves.

(B) Standardization in Library and Information Fields Today standardization is becoming increasingly important to ensure greater effectiveness of information services in all the countries and the use of information and information systems across national, regional and borders. Standardization is the setting up by authority of common consent of a quality, quantity, pattern, method on unit of measurement for adoption as a common minimum or as an example for imitation. Thus standards are indispensable aids to library authorities and libraries. This can be helpful in developing an adequate book stock, employing trained staff and occupying suitable quarters. We can define standardization as follows: Standardization is the process of formulating and applying rules for an orderly approach to a specific activity for the benefit and with the cooperation of all concerned, and in particular for the promotion of optimum overall economy taking due account of functional conditions and safety requirements.

224 D Library and Information Science Specific Thus, standardization as defined above clarifies the fact that it is the result of a particular standardization effort approved by recognised authority. The importance of standards in libraries can best be understood as follows: (1) To bring uniformity and order; (2) Guide for establishment of new libraries and for the improvement of the existing libraries; (3) Guide to the level of financial, material and human support necessary to ensure that libraries will be able to fulfil their responsibilities to the users; (4) Essential for planning and evaluation of library services; and (5) To upgrade libraries, providing sub-standard institutions with yardsticks by which to measure their deficiencies. In the library and information field, a number of standardizing agencies have been established to bring uniformity in processes, procedures, products, tools, etc. The following are the areas of library and information field in which standards have been adopted. They are library classification and cataloguing, alphabetical arrangement, transliteration, library building, equipment, furniture and fittings, lighting arrangement, book binding, and computerization.

(C) ISBD The tremendous and rapid growth of information and knowledge in the documents has increased the curiosity among the scholars to know more and more again. This change calls for standardization at a global level. A number of agencies at national as well as international levels are issuing quasi standards as guide or agency standards. The FID and IFLA are the international organisations who have made useful contributions to the world of international standards in the field of documentation. One of these standards is International Standard Bibliographic Description (ISBD) adopted by IFLA committee on Cataloguing held in Liverpool in 1971. Its first edition was published in 1974 by the name ISBD(M) and its latest consolidated edition was published in 2011.

Objectives of ISBD The following were the aims and objectives of ISBD: (i ) It facilitates a common communication media which is understood by users in any part of the world. (ii ) The record produced by one country can be integrated into files of lists or various kinds, alongwith records of other countries. (iii ) It facilitates the conversion of written or printed material to machine readable form with minimum of editing. Besides these above objectives, it is intended to provide data required for various bibliographical activities, like library catalogue announcement of new publications for acquisition and distribution of books and their handling both in libraries and by the book trade, i.e. to meet the requirements of different interests of users.

Structure of an ISBD Record The ISBD defines nine areas of description. Each area, except area 7, is composed of multiple elements with structured classifications. Elements and areas that do not apply

Unit-V D 225 to a particular resource are omitted from the description. Standardized punctuation (colons, semicolons, slashes, dashes, commas, and periods) is used to identify and separate the elements and areas. The order of elements and standardized punctuation make it easier to interpret bibliographic records when one does not understand the language of the description. 0: Content form and media type area 1: Title and statement of responsibility area, consisting of 1.1 Title proper 1.2 Parallel title 1.3 Other title information 1.4 Statement of responsibility 2: Edition area 3: Material or type of resource specific area (e.g., the scale of a map or the numbering of a periodical) 4: Publication, production, distribution, etc., area 5: Material description area (e.g., number of pages in a book or number of CDs issued as a unit) 6: Series area 7: Notes area 8: Resource identifier and terms of availability area (e.g., ISBN, ISSN) Example A typical ISBD record looks like this: Text : unmediated A manual for writers of research papers, theses, and dissertations : Chicago style for students and researchers / Kate L. Turabian ; revised by Wayne C. Booth, Gregory G. Colomb, Joseph M. Williams, and University of Chicago Press editorial staff. — 7th ed. — Chicago : University of Chicago Press, 2007. — xviii, 466 p. : ill. ; 23 cm. — (Chicago guides to writing, editing, and publishing). — Includes bibliographical references (p. 409435) and index. — ISBN 9780226823362 (cloth : alk. paper) : USD35.00. — ISBN 9780226823379 (pbk. : alk. paper) : USD17.00

(D) MARC The organisation of record data elements in a particular record is called Record Format (structure) for entering the information and to display output in a particular database. In this field MARC format also came into existence, which was developed by Library of Congress in 1966 as a pilot project. It was the designing of a format capable of incorporating bibliographic description for all forms of materials, i.e. books, periodicals, articles, etc. Before MARC, there was no standard for bibliographic format. Each library was using different tag numbers to represent the data. This complexity led to emergence of MARC (Machine Readable Catalogue). The format was designed with the aim to communicate bibliographic and related information in machine readable form in such a way that records could be reformatted under any conceivable purpose.

226 D Library and Information Science Specific Record Structure and Field Designations The MARC standards define three aspects of a MARC record: the field designations within each record, the structure of the record, and the actual content of the record itself. Field Designations Each field in a MARC record provides particular information about the item the record is describing, such as the author, title, publisher, date, language, media type, etc. Since it was first developed at a time when computing power was low, and space precious, MARC uses a simple three-digit numeric code (from 001999) to identify each field in the record. MARC defines field 100 as the primary author of a work, field 245 as the title and field 260 as the publisher, for example. Fields above 008 are further divided into subfields using a single letter or number designation. The 260, for example, is further divided into subfield 'a' for the place of publication, 'b' for the name of the publisher, and 'c' for the date of publication. Record Structure MARC records are typically stored and transmitted as binary files, usually with several MARC records concatenated together into a single file. MARC uses the ISO 2709 standard to define the structure of each record. This includes a marker to indicate where each record begins and ends, as well as a set of characters at the beginning of each record that provide a directory for locating the fields and subfields within the record. In 2002, the Library of Congress developed the MARCXML schema as an alternative record structure, allowing MARC records to be represented in XML; the fields remain the same, but those fields are expressed in the record in XML markup. Libraries typically expose their records as MARCXML via a web service, often following the SRU or OAIPMH standards. MARC Formats MARC FORMATS Name Authority records

Bibliographic records Classification records

Community Information records Holdings records

Description provide information about individual names, subjects, and uniform titles. An authority record establishes an authorized form of each heading, with references as appropriate from other forms of the heading. describe the intellectual and physical characteristics of bibliographic resources (books, sound recordings, video recordings, and so forth). MARC records containing classification data. For example, the Library of Congress Classification has been encoded using the MARC 21 Classification format. MARC records describing a service providing agency, such as a local homeless shelter or tax assistance provider. provide copy specific information on a library resource (call number, shelf location, volumes held, and so forth).

Content MARC encodes information about a bibliographic item, not about the content of that item; this means it is a metadata transmission standard, not a content standard. The actual content that a cataloger places in each MARC field is usually governed and defined by standards outside of MARC, except for a handful of fixed fields defined by the MARC standards

Unit-V D 227 themselves. Resource Description and Access, for example, defines how the physical characteristics of books and other items should be expressed. The Library of Congress Subject Headings (LCSH) are a list of authorized subject terms used to describe the main subject content of the work. Other cataloging rules and classification schedules can also be used.

MARC 21 MARC 21 was designed to redefine the original MARC record format for the 21st century and to make it more accessible to the international community. MARC 21 has formats for the following five types of data: Bibliographic Format, Authority Format, Holdings Format, Community Format, and Classification Data Format. Currently MARC 21 has been implemented successfully by The British Library, the European Institutions and the major library institutions in the United States, and Canada. MARC 21 is a result of the combination of the United States and Canadian MARC formats (USMARC and CAN/MARC). MARC21 is based on the ANSI standard Z39.2, which allows users of different software products to communicate with each other and to exchange data. MARC 21 allows the use of two character sets, either MARC8 or Unicode encoded as UTF8. MARC8 is based on ISO 2022 and allows the use of Hebrew, Cyrillic, Arabic, Greek, and East Asian scripts. MARC 21 in UTF8 format allows all the languages supported by Unicode.

MARCXML MARCXML is an XML schema based on the common MARC21 standards. MARCXML was developed by the Library of Congress and adopted by it and others as a means of facilitating the sharing of, and networked access to, bibliographic information. Being easy to parse by various systems allows it to be used as an aggregation format, as it is in software packages such as MetaLib, though that package merges it into a wider DTD specification. The MARCXML primary design goals included: n Simplicity of the schema n Flexibility and extensibility n Lossless and reversible conversion from MARC n Data presentation through XML stylesheets n MARC records updates and data conversions through XML transformations.

(E) CCF The importance of information and the need for its exchange activated the innovation of a number of bibliographical formats. One of them is Common Communication Format (CCF) which is a structure format for creating bibliographical record and for exchange of records between group of information agencies and libraries. An international symposium in Taormina, Sicily by UNESCO was held in April 1978 of experts from information community, for the proliferation of the international bibliographic exchange format and lack of compatibility among them. On the recommendation of the Symposium, UNESCO/PGI formed the adhoc group on the establishment of a Common Communication Format (CCF). The first edition of CCF was published in 1984 and its second edition was published in 1998 in two volumes called CCF/B and CCF/F. Several countries has adopted this standard for exchange and creation of bibliographical records at national level.

228 D Library and Information Science Specific Structure of CCF The structure of CCF is the implementation of the ISO 2709. It consists of the following; 1. Record Lable. Each CCF record being with a level of 24 characters. 2. Directory. Directory is of 14 characters length and comprises of 5 parts. 3. Data Fields. There are four basic components to a data field, they are indicators, subfield indentifier, subfield, field separator. 4. Record Separator. The last data field separator is followed by the record separator which is the final character of the record.

Segments CCF has the facility to accommodate within a single bibliographic record, description of more than one bibliographic item. The description of each item occupies a single record segments. The item for which the bibliographical record is being generated is called the target item and the description of the target item occupies the primary segment of the record. Other items described in the record occupy the secondary segments. The relationships among these items are expressed through segments links. All the fields which describe and/or identify a single item in a record, make up a segment. In many cases a record contains only single segment and in few cases, it is essential to describe more than one item within a single bibliographical record. In it, segments are connected or linked through two relationships, i.e., vertical and horizontal relationships.

Segment Links Segment links are devised for linking one segment within a record with another in the same record. CCF has five segment linking fields, for linking record segments of which 080 is meant for general vertical relationship and 081, 082 for vertical relationship from monograph, multi-volumed monograph and serial respectively. 085 is meant for horizontal relationship. The segment linking field (SLF) represents the relationship between items appearing in different segments and appears in the segment where from the link is to be made. The tag number of the SLF appears in the directory. The indicators corresponding to the tag number appear as the first two characters. In all the cases of SLF, the indicators are 00. The next two characters are subfield indentifiers like a A. The segment relationship codes (vide section 4.12 and 4.13 of the CCF-II) indicates in the case of fields 080 to 083 whether the segment in which the code occurs is lower or higher in hierarchy. In case of the field 085 the codes give an indication of the content of the target segment. The source segment contains the link and the segment to which the link is made is called the target segment. As given above, the segment relationship code is followed by subfield identifier, segment identifier code and the field separator.

Field to Field Linking Provision for linking related fields appearing within a single segment is available in CCF. The method of linking the fields involves the following: (a) Occurrence identifier represented in the directory. (b) Linking field (Field 086): Subfield A, B, C.

Unit-V D 229

Data Elements The data elements have been provided in numerical order of the three digits tag numbering 56. The data fields are spread over from tag number 001 to 620 with enough gap in between tag numbers.

Resource Description and Access (RDA) Resource Description and Access (RDA) is a standard for descriptive cataloging initially released in June 2010, providing instructions and guidelines on formulating bibliographic data. Intended for use by libraries and other cultural organizations such as museums and archives, RDA is the successor to Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules, Second Edition (AACR2). RDA emerged from the International Conference on the Principles & Future Development of AACR held in Toronto in 1997. It is published jointly by the American Library Association, the Canadian Federation of Library Associations, and the Chartered Institute of Library and Information Professionals (CILIP) in the United Kingdom. Maintenance of RDA is the responsibility of the RDA Steering Committee (RSC). As of 2015, RSC is undergoing a transition to an international governance structure, expected to be in place in 2019. RDA instructions and guidelines are available through RDA Toolkit, an online subscription service, and in a print format. RDA training materials and texts are available online and in print. RDA is a package of data elements, guidelines, and instructions for creating library and cultural heritage resource metadata that are well-formed according to international models for user-focused linked data applications. The underlying conceptual models for RDA are the Functional Requirements for Bibliographic Records (FRBR), Functional Requirements for Authority Data (FRAD), and Functional Requirements for Subject Authority Data (FRSAD) maintained by IFLA, and will be compliant with the IFLA Library Reference Model that consolidates them.

RDA Vocabularies RDA Vocabularies is a representation of the RDA entities, elements, relationship designators, and controlled terms in RDF (Resource Description Framework). The Vocabularies are intended to support linked data applications using RDA. They are maintained in the Open Metadata Registry, a metadata registry, and released via GitHub and the RDA Registry. The human-readable labels, definitions, and other textual annotations in the Vocabularies are known as RDA Reference. The RDA Reference data are used in the production of RDA Toolkit content. The RDA Vocabularies and RDA Reference are available under an open license.

Internationalization RDA is in step with the Statement of International Cataloguing Principles published by IFLA in 2009, and updated in 2016. The Committee of Principals for RDA, now the RDA Board, announced its commitment to internationalization of RDA in 2015. This is reflected in the new governance structure

230 D Library and Information Science Specific with representation based on the United Nations Regional Groups, comprising, Africa, Asia, Europe, Latin America and the Caribbean, North America, and Oceania. As of May 2017, the RDA Toolkit has been translated from English into Catalan, Chinese, Finnish, French, German, Italian, and Spanish RDA Reference is currently being translated into these languages as well as others including Arabic, Danish, Dutch, Greek, Hebrew, Swedish, and Vietnamese.

Adoption of RDA In March 2012 the Library of Congress announced that it would fully implement RDA cataloging by the end of March 2013. Library and Archives Canada fully implemented the standard in September 2013. British Library, National Library of Australia, and Deutsche Nationalbibliothek and other national libraries have since implemented RDA.

Functional Requirements for Bibliographic Records (FRBR) Functional Requirements for Bibliographic Records (FRBR) is a conceptual entity– relationship model developed by the International Federation of Library Associations and Institutions (IFLA) that relates user tasks of retrieval and access in online library catalogues and bibliographic databases from a user’s perspective. It represents a more holistic approach to retrieval and access as the relationships between the entities provide links to navigate through the hierarchy of relationships. The model is significant because it is separate from specific cataloguing standards such as Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules (AACR) or International Standard Bibliographic Description (ISBD).

User Tasks The ways that people can use FRBR data have been defined as follows: to find entities in a search, to identify an entity as being the correct one, to select an entity that suits the user’s needs, or to obtain an entity (physical access or licensing). FRBR comprises groups of entities: n Group 1 entities are work, expression, manifestation, and item (WEMI). They represent the products of intellectual or artistic endeavor. n Group 2 entities are person, family and corporate body, responsible for the custodianship of Group 1’s intellectual or artistic endeavor. n Group 3 entities are subjects of Group 1 or Group 2’s intellectual endeavor, and include concepts, objects, events, places.

BIBFRAME BIBFRAME (Bibliographic Framework) is a data model for bibliographic description. BIBFRAME was designed to replace the MARC standards, and to use linked data  principles to make bibliographic data more useful both within and outside the library community. The MARC Standards, which BIBFRAME seeks to replace, were developed by Henriette Avram at the US Library of Congress during the 1960s. By 1971, MARC formats had become the national standard for dissemination of bibliographic data in the United States, and the international standard by 1973. In a provocatively titled 2002 article, library technologist Roy Tennant argued that “MARC Must Die”, noting that the standard was old; used only within the library community;

Unit-V D 231 and designed to be a display, rather than a storage or retrieval format. A 2008 report from the Library of Congress wrote that MARC is “based on forty-year old techniques for data management and is out of step with programming styles of today.” In 2012, the Library of Congress announced that it had contracted with Zepheira, a data management company, to develop a linked data alternative to MARC. Later that year, the library announced a new model called MARC Resources (MARCR). That November, the library released a more complete draft of the model, renamed BIBFRAME. The Library of Congress released version 2.0 of BIBFRAME in 2016.

Design BIBFRAME is expressed in RDF and based on three categories of abstraction (work, instance, item), with three additional classes (agent, subject, event) that relate to the core categories. While the work entity in BIBFRAME may be “considered as the union of the disjoint work and expression entities” in IFLA’s Functional Requirements for Bibliographic Records (FRBR) entity relationship model, BIBFRAME’s instance entity is analogous to the FRBR manifestation entity. This represents an apparent break with FRBR and the FRBR-based Resource Description and Access (RDA) cataloging code. However, the original BIBFRAME model argues that the new model “can reflect the FRBR relationships in terms of a graph rather than as hierarchical relationships, after applying a reductionist technique.” Since both FRBR and BIBFRAME have been expressed in RDF, interoperability between the two models is technically possible.

Specific Formats While the BIBFRAME model currently includes a serial entity, there are still a number of issues to be addressed before the model can be used for serials cataloging. BIBFRAME lacks several serials-related data fields available in MARC. A 2014 report was very positive on BIBFRAME’s suitability for describing audio and video resources. However, the report also expressed some concern about the highlevel Work entity, which is unsuitable for modeling certain audio resources.

Implementations n n n

Colorado College’s Tutt Library has created several experimental apps using BIBFRAME. 14 other research libraries are testing the model. ExLibris published a roadmap to implement BIBFRAME in its library systems, which includes a MARC-to-BIBFRAME transformation.

STANDARDS FOR BIBLIOGRAPHIC INFORMATION INTERCHANGE AND COMMUNICATION ISO 2709 A format for the exchange of bibliographic Information, it was developed in the 1960s under the direction of Henriette Avram of the Library of Congress to encode the information printed on library cards. It was first created as ANSI/NISO Standard Z39.2, one of the first

232 D Library and Information Science Specific standards for information technology, and called Information Interchange Format. The 1981 version of the standard was titled Documentation—Format for bibliographic information interchange on magnetic tape. The latest edition of that standard is ANSI/NISO Z39.2-1994 (R2016) (ISSN 1041-5653). The ISO standard supersedes Z39.2. As of December 2008 the current standard is ISO 2709:2008.

Basic Structure An ISO 2709 record has three sections: n Record label the first 24 characters of the record. This is the only portion of the record that is fixed in length. The record label includes the record length and the base address of the data contained in the record. It also has data elements that indicate how many characters are used for indicators and subfield identifiers. n Directory the directory provides the entry positions to the fields in the record, along with the field tags. A directory entry has four parts and cannot exceed twelve characters in length: l Field tag (3 characters) l Length of the field (4 characters) l Starting character position of the field (5 characters) l (Optional) Implementation-defined part n Datafields (Variable fields) a string containing all field and subfield data in the record. n Record separator a single character (IS3 of ISO 646). Note that although tags are often displayed as labels on bibliographic fields and each bibliographic field has an associated tag, the tags are stored in the directory not in the bibliographic field.

Fields There are three kinds of fields in the ISO 2709 record: n Record identifier field identifying the record and assigned by the organization that creates the record. The record identifier field has tag 001. n Reserved fields Reserved fields supply data which may be required for the processing of the record. Reserved fields always have a tag in the range 002–009 and 00A–00Z. n Bibliographic Fields these are in the range 010–999 and 0AA–ZZZ. The bibliographic fields contain data and a field separator (IS2 of ISO 646). They can also have these optional sub-parts: l Indicator (0–9 characters, as coded in the Leader). Indicators generally provide further information about the contents of the field, the relationship between the field and other fields in the record, or about action required in certain data manipulation processes (including display labels). l Identifier (0–9 characters). This identifies data within the bibliographic field. Where used, identifiers are composed of a delimiter (1 char, IS1 of ISO 646) and an identifying code (1–9 chars, as defined in the leader), plus a variable length string containing the data.

Unit-V D 233

Example MARC21 is an instance of ISO 2709 that has the following characteristics: n tags are in the range 002–999 only. n there is a two-character indicator on each field, and each character is a separately defined data element. n the identifier within data fields (called “subfield code” in MARC21) is a single ASCII character preceded by IS1 of ISO 646.

Z39.50 Z39.50 is an international standard client–server, application layer communications protocol for searching and retrieving information from a database over a TCP/IP computer network. It is covered by ANSI/NISO standard Z39.50, and ISO standard 23950. The standard’s maintenance agency is the Library of Congress. Z39.50 is widely used in library environments, often incorporated into integrated library systems and personal bibliographic reference software. Interlibrary catalogue searches for interlibrary loan are often implemented with Z39.50 queries. Work on the Z39.50 protocol began in the 1970s, and led to successive versions in 1988, 1992, 1995 and 2003. The Contextual Query Language (formerly called the Common Query Language) is based on Z39.50 semantics.

Search Syntax The protocol supports search, retrieval, sort, and browse. Search queries contain attributes, typically from the bib-1 attribute set which defines six attributes to specify information searches on the server computer: use, relation, position, structure, truncation, completeness. The syntax of Z39.50 allows for very complex queries. In practice, the functional complexity is limited by the uneven implementations by developers and commercial vendors. The syntax of Z39.50 is abstracted from the underlying database structure. For example, if the client specifies an author search using attribute 1003, the server must determine how to map that search to the indexes it contains. This allows Z39.50 queries to be formulated without knowing anything about the target database, but it also means that results for the same query can vary widely among different servers. One server may have an author index and another may use its index of personal names, whether they are authors or not. A third may have no name index and fall back on its keyword index, and yet another may have no suitable index and return an error. An attempt to remedy the inconsistency is the Bath Profile (named after Bath, England, where the working group first met in 1999). This document rigidly specifies the search syntax to employ for common bibliographic searches, and the expected response of Bathcompliant servers. Implementation of the Bath Profile has been slow but is gradually improving the Z39.50 landscape. The Bath Profile is maintained by Library and Archives Canada.

Modernization Efforts Z39.50 is a pre-Web technology, and various working groups are attempting to update it to fit better into the modern environment. These attempts fall under the designation ZING (Z39.50 International: Next Generation), and pursue various strategies.

234 D Library and Information Science Specific The successors to Z39.50 are the twin protocols SRU/SRW (Search/Retrieve via URL/ Search/Retrieve Web service), which drop the Z39.50 communications protocol (replacing it with HTTP) while still attempting to preserve the benefits of the query syntax. SRU is RESTbased, and enables queries to be expressed in URL query strings; SRW uses SOAP. Both expect search results to be returned as XML. These projects have a much lower barrier to entry for developers than the original Z39.50 protocol, allowing the relatively small market for library software to benefit from the web service tools developed for much larger markets. Alternatives include the following. n Open Archives Initiative Protocol for Metadata Harvesting (OAI-PMH). n SPARQL.

Firewall Information The registered internet IP port for Z39.50 is 210. Although the majority of servers use this port, there are dozens of other port numbers used worldwide by Z39.50 (e.g. 2100, 2200, 2210, 2213, 3520, or in one case, ports 2101 and higher for different databases).

Z39.71 The ANSI/NISO Z39.71 holdings display standard is a combination of two things: the conceptual holdings elements (officially called Data Areas), and nine principles for recording the holdings elements (officially called the Principles).

METADATA STANDARDS There are six Data Areas, or fields. A Data Area can sometimes be further subdivided into multiple subfields. These are officially referred to as Data Elements. The order of the Data Areas is not specified by the standard. However, within each Data Area, the order of the Data Elements is prescribed. The six Data Areas are: n Item Identification Area. This is the link from the holdings record to the bibliographic record; it identifies the bibliographic record the holdings record should be attached to. The actual link (technically referred to as the identifier) can vary: ISSN, ISBN, OCLC record number, etc. It can even be a partial bibliographic description. n Location Data Area. Identifies the exact location of the item. It can be in free text, although some systems mandate specific formats. It has four Data Elements: the library code, the branch or sublocation, copy number, and call number. n Date of Report Area. The date the holdings record was created or updated. It is recorded in YYYYMMDD format. An unknown date is recorded as 00000000. n General Holdings Area. Contains general holdings information, such as whether an item is a book or a DVD. This is subdivided into five Data Elements, and each element has a series of coded values. Systems typically convert the coded values into full-text for OPAC displays: l Type of Unit. Is it a volume, a supplement, or an index? l Physical Form Designator. Is it a hardback, a paperback, or an ebook?

Unit-V D 235 Completeness Designator. If it’s a serial, how much of the serial do you hold? Acquisition Status Designator. Is it on order, currently acquired, or ceased publication? l Retention Designator. The library’s retention policy. Is the item retained until replaced by microfilm? Or permanently kept? Extent of Holdings Area. For serial publications, this field contains specific holdings information about the range of volumes held by the library. It consists of five Data Elements: l Name of Unit. Is it a volume, an issue, a bund, or a tome? l Extent of Unit. How many parts does the item have? l Enumeration. The actual number of the volume. l Chronology. The date on the volume. l Specific Extent Note. Information clarifying the contents of any of the other Data Elements (e.g., bound, unbound). Holdings Note Area. Free-text note field relating to the holdings (not the bibliographic record). Examples of notes include whether or not the item circulates, or its physical condition. l l

n

n

Dublin Core The Dublin Core Schema is a small set of vocabulary terms that can be used to describe digital resources (video, images, web pages, etc.), as well as physical resources such as books or CDs, and objects like artworks. The full set of Dublin Core metadata terms can be found on the Dublin Core Metadata Initiative (DCMI) website. The original set of 15 classic metadata terms, known as the Dublin Core Metadata Element Set (DCMES), is endorsed in the following standards documents: n IETF RFC 5013 n ISO Standard 15836-1:2017 n NISO Standard Z39.85 Dublin Core metadata may be used for multiple purposes, from simple resource description to combining metadata vocabularies of different metadata standards, to providing interoperability for metadata vocabularies in the linked data cloud and Semantic Web implementations. “Dublin” refers to Dublin, Ohio, USA where the schema originated during the 1995 invitational OCLC/NCSA Metadata Workshop, hosted by the OCLC (Online Computer Library Center), a library consortium based in Dublin, and the National Center for Supercomputing Applications (NCSA). “Core” refers to the metadata terms as “broad and generic being usable for describing a wide range of resources”. The semantics of Dublin Core were established and are maintained by an international, cross-disciplinary group of professionals from librarianship, computer science, text encoding, museums, and other related fields of scholarship and practice. Starting in 2000, the Dublin Core community focused on “application profiles” – the idea that metadata records would use Dublin Core together with other specialized vocabularies to meet particular implementation requirements. During that time, the World Wide Web Consortium’s work on a generic data model for metadata, the Resource Description Framework (RDF), was maturing. As part of an extended set of DCMI metadata terms, Dublin Core became one of the most popular vocabularies for use with RDF, more recently in the context of the linked data movement.

236 D Library and Information Science Specific The Dublin Core Metadata Initiative (DCMI) provides an open forum for the development of interoperable online metadata standards for a broad range of purposes and of business models. DCMI’s activities include consensus-driven working groups, global conferences and workshops, standards liaison, and educational efforts to promote widespread acceptance of metadata standards and practices. In 2008, DCMI separated from OCLC and incorporated as an independent entity.[ Currently, any and all changes that are made to the Dublin Core standard, are reviewed by a DCMI Usage Board within the context of a DCMI Namespace Policy (DCMINAMESPACE). This policy describes how terms are assigned and also sets limits on the amount of editorial changes allowed to the labels, definitions, and usage comments. Levels of the Standard The Dublin Core standard originally included two levels: Simple and Qualified. Simple Dublin Core comprised 15 elements; Qualified Dublin Core included three additional elements (Audience, Provenance and Rights Holder), as well as a group of element refinements (also called qualifiers) that could refine the semantics of the elements in ways that may be useful in resource discovery. Since 2012, the two have been incorporated into the DCMI Metadata Terms as a single set of terms using the RDF data model. The full set of elements is found under the namespace http://purl.org/dc/terms/. Because the definition of the terms often contains domains and ranges, which may not be compatible with the pre-RDF definitions used for the original 15 Dublin Core elements, there is a separate namespace for the original 15 elements as previously defined: http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/. Dublin Core Metadata Element Set The original DCMES Version 1.1 consists of 15 metadata elements, defined this way in the original specification: 1. Contributor. “An entity responsible for making contributions to the resource.” 2. Coverage. “The spatial or temporal topic of the resource, the spatial applicability of the resource, or the jurisdiction under which the resource is relevant.” 3. Creator. “An entity primarily responsible for making the resource.” 4. Date. “A point or period of time associated with an event in the lifecycle of the resource.” 5. Description. “An account of the resource.” 6. Format. “The file format, physical medium, or dimensions of the resource.” 7. Identifier. “An unambiguous reference to the resource within a given context.” 8. Language. “A language of the resource.” 9. Publisher. “An entity responsible for making the resource available.” 10. Relation. “A related resource.” 11. Rights. “Information about rights held in and over the resource.” 12. Source. “A related resource from which the described resource is derived.” 13. Subject. “The topic of the resource.” 14. Title. “A name given to the resource.” 15. Type. “The nature or genre of the resource.”

Unit-V D 237

Applications One document type definition based on Dublin Core is the Open Source Metadata Framework (OMF) specification. OMF is in turn used by Rarian (superseding Scroll Keeper), which is used by the GNOME desktop and KDE help browsers and the Scroll Server documentation server. PBCore is also based on Dublin Core. The Zope CMF’s Metadata products, used by the Plone, ERP5, the Nuxeo CPS Content management systems, Simple DL, and Fedora Commons also implement Dublin Core. The EPUB e-book format uses Dublin Core metadata in the OPF file.

MARC Standards MARC (Machine-Readable Cataloging) standards are a set of digital formats for the description of items catalogued by libraries, such as books. Working with the Library of Congress, American computer scientist Henriette Avram developed MARC in the 1960s to create records that could be read by computers and shared among libraries. By 1971, MARC formats had become the US national standard for dissemination of bibliographic data. Two years later, they became the international standard. There are several versions of MARC in use around the world, the most predominant being MARC 21, created in 1999 as a result of the harmonization of U.S. and Canadian MARC formats, and UNIMARC, widely used in Europe. The MARC 21 family of standards now includes formats for authority records, holdings records, classification schedules, and community information, in addition to the format for bibliographic records.

Record Structure and Field Designations The MARC standards define three aspects of a MARC record: the field designations within each record, the structure of the record, and the actual content of the record itself.

Field Designations Each field in a MARC record provides particular information about the item the record is describing, such as the author, title, publisher, date, language, media type, etc. Since it was first developed at a time when computing power was low, and space precious, MARC uses a simple three-digit numeric code (from 001-999) to identify each field in the record. MARC defines field 100 as the primary author of a work, field 245 as the title and field 260 as the publisher, for example. Fields above 008 are further divided into subfields using a single letter or number designation. The 260, for example, is further divided into subfield “a” for the place of publication, “b” for the name of the publisher, and “c” for the date of publication.

Record Structure MARC records are typically stored and transmitted as binary files, usually with several MARC records concatenated together into a single file. MARC uses the ISO 2709 standard to define the structure of each record. This includes a marker to indicate where each record begins and ends, as well as a set of characters at the beginning of each record that provide a directory for locating the fields and subfields within the record. In 2002, the Library of Congress developed the MARCXML schema as an alternative record structure, allowing MARC records to be represented in XML; the fields remain the same, but those fields are expressed in the record in XML markup. Libraries typically

238 D Library and Information Science Specific expose their records as MARCXML via a web service, often following the SRU or OAIPMH standards.

Content MARC encodes information about a bibliographic item, not about the content of that item; this means it is a metadata transmission standard, not a content standard. The actual content that a cataloger places in each MARC field is usually governed and defined by standards outside of MARC, except for a handful of fixed fields defined by the MARC standards themselves. Resource Description and Access, for example, defines how the physical characteristics of books and other items should be expressed. The Library of Congress Subject Headings (LCSH) are a list of authorized subject terms used to describe the main subject content of the work. Other cataloging rules and classification schedules can also be used.

MARC 21 MARC 21 was designed to redefine the original MARC record format for the 21st century and to make it more accessible to the international community. MARC 21 has formats for the following five types of data: Bibliographic Format, Authority Format, Holdings Format, Community Format, and Classification Data Format. Currently MARC 21 has been implemented successfully by The British Library, the European Institutions and the major library institutions in the United States, and Canada. MARC 21 is a result of the combination of the United States and Canadian MARC formats (USMARC and CAN/MARC). MARC21 is based on the NISO/ANSI standard Z39.2, which allows users of different software products to communicate with each other and to exchange data. MARC 21 allows the use of two character sets, either MARC-8 or Unicode encoded as UTF-8. MARC-8 is based on ISO 2022 and allows the use of Hebrew, Cyrillic, Arabic, Greek, and East Asian scripts. MARC 21 in UTF-8 format allows all the languages supported by Unicode.

Metadata Encoding and Transmission Standard (METS) The Metadata Encoding and Transmission Standard (METS) is a metadata standard for encoding descriptive, administrative, and structural metadata regarding objects within a digital library, expressed using the XML schema language of the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). The standard is maintained as part of the MARC standards of the Library of Congress, and is being developed as an initiative of the Digital Library Federation (DLF). METS is an XML Schema designed for the purpose of: n Creating XML document instances that express the hierarchical structure of digital library objects. n Recording the names and locations of the files that comprise those objects. n Recording associated metadata. METS can, therefore, be used as a tool for modeling real world objects, such as particular document types. Depending on its use, a METS document could be used in the role of Submission Information Package (SIP), Archival Information Package (AIP), or Dissemination

Unit-V D 239 Information Package (DIP) within the Open Archival Information System (OAIS) Reference Model.

Digital Libraries vs Traditional Libraries Maintaining a library of digital objects requires maintaining metadata about those objects. The metadata necessary for successful management and use of digital objects is both more extensive than and different from the metadata used for managing collections of printed works and other physical materials. METS is intended to promote the preservation of, and interoperability between digital libraries. n Where a traditional library may record descriptive metadata regarding a book in its collection, the book will not dissolve into a series of unconnected pages if the library fails to record structural metadata regarding the book’s organization, nor will scholars be unable to evaluate the book’s worth if the library fails to note, for example, that the book was produced using a Ryobi offset press. n The same cannot be said for a digital library. Without structural metadata, the page image or text files comprising the digital work are of little use, and without technical metadata regarding the digitization process, scholars may be unsure of how accurate a reflection of the original the digital version provides. n However, in a digital library it is possible to create an eBook-like PDF file or TIFF file which can be seen as a single physical book and reflect the integrity of the original.

Flexibility and Interoperability The open flexibility of METS means that there is not a prescribed vocabulary which allows many different types of institutions, with many different document types, to utilize METS. The customization of METS makes it highly functional internally, but creates limitations for interoperability. Interoperability becomes difficult when the exporting and importing institutions have used vocabularies. As a workaround for this problem the creation of institutional profiles has become popular. These profiles document the implementation of METS specific to that institution helping to map content in order for exchanged METS documents to be more usable across institutions.

The 7 Sections of a METS Document n n

n

n

METS header metsHdr: the METS document itself, such as its creator, editor, etc. Descriptive Metadata dmdSec: May contain internally embedded metadata or point to metadata external to the METS document. Multiple instances of both internal and external descriptive metadata may be included. Administrative Metadata amdSec: Provides information regarding how files were created and stored, intellectual property rights, metadata regarding the original source object from which the digital library object derives, and information regarding the provenance of files comprising the digital library object (such as master/ derivative relationships, migrations, and transformations). As with descriptive metadata, administrative metadata may be internally encoded or external to the METS document. File Section fileSec: Lists all files containing content which comprise the electronic versions of the digital object. File elements may be grouped within fileGrp elements

240 D Library and Information Science Specific

n

n

n

to subdivide files by object version. Although this section is not required, it is typically included in most METS documents as it adds a level of functionality to the structure of the document. Structural Map structMap: Outlines a hierarchical structure for the digital library object, and links the elements of that structure to associated content files and metadata. The Structural Map is the only section required for all METS documents. Structural Links structLink: Allows METS creators to record the existence of hyperlinks between nodes in the Structural Map. This is of particular value in using METS to archive Websites. Behavioral behaviorSec: Used to associate executable behaviors with content in the METS object. Each behavior has a mechanism element identifying a module of executable code that implements behaviors defined abstractly by its interface definition.

METS Profiles A profile is expressed as an XML document. There is a schema for this purpose. The profile expresses the requirements that a METS document must satisfy. A sufficiently explicit METS Profile may be considered a data standard.

METS Profiles in Use n n n n n n n n n

Musical Score (may be a score, score and parts, or a set of parts only) Print Material (books, pamphlets, etc.) Music Manuscript (score or sketches) Recorded Event (audio or video) PDF Document Bibliographic Record Photograph Compact Disc Collection

MODS The Library of Congress’ Network Development and MARC Standards Office, with interested experts, developed the Metadata Object Description Schema (MODS) in 2002 for a bibliographic element set that may be used for a variety of purposes, and particularly for library applications. As an XML schema it is intended to be able to carry selected data from existing MARC 21 records as well as to enable the creation of original resource description records. It includes a subset of MARC fields and uses language-based tags rather than numeric ones, in some cases regrouping elements from the MARC 21 bibliographic format. As of May 2015 this schema is in its third version (version 3.6). MODS is expressed using the XML schema language of the World Wide Web Consortium. The standard is maintained by the MODS Editorial Committee with support from the Network Development and MARC Standards Office of the Library of Congress.

Uses MODS could potentially be used as follows:

Unit-V D 241 n n n n n n

as an SRU specified format. as an extension schema to METS (Metadata Encoding and Transmission Standard) to represent metadata for harvesting. for original resource description in XML syntax. for representing a simplified MARC record in XML. for metadata in XML that may be packaged with an electronic resource.

Advantages of MODS MODS is intended to complement other metadata formats. For some applications, particularly those that have used MARC records, there will be advantages over other metadata schemes. Some advantages are: n The element set is richer than Dublin Core. n The element set is more compatible with library data than ONIX. n The schema is more end user oriented than the full MARCXML schema. n The element set is simpler than the full MARC format.

Features of MODS n n n n

The elements generally inherit the semantics of MARC. Some data has been repackaged; in some cases what is in several data elements in MARC may be brought together into one in MODS. MODS does not assume the use of any specific cataloging code. Several elements have an optional ID attribute to facilitate linking at the element level.

Limitations of MODS MODS includes a subset of data from the MARC 21 Format for Bibliographic Data. As an element set that allows for the representation of data already in MARC-based systems, it is intended to allow for the conversion of core fields while some specific data may be dropped. As an element set for original resource description, it allows for a simple record to be created in some cases using more general tags than those available in the MARC record. However, the schema does not target round-tripability with MARC 21. In other words, an original MARC 21 record converted to MODS may not convert back to MARC 21 in its entirety without some loss of specificity in tagging or loss of data. In some cases if reconverted into MARC 21, the data may not be placed in exactly the same field that it started in because a MARC field may have been mapped to a more general one in MODS. However the data itself will not be lost, only the detailed identification of the type of element it represents. In other cases the element in MARC may not have an equivalent element in MODS and then the specific data could be lost when converting to MODS. MODS does not include business rules for populating the elements. The fields listed under “xsd:documentation” are intended as comments, to refer the user to where the semantics for the elements listed may be found. These MARC 21 elements listed are not intended to provide a crosswalk between MODS and MARC; additional instructions would need to be provided for conversion details.

242 D Library and Information Science Specific Order of Elements Note that the order of elements in the MODS schema does not assume display order. A stylesheet would be used to control display order of MODS records.

Encoded Archival Description (EAD) Archival records differ from the items in a library collection because they are unique, usually unpublished and unavailable elsewhere, and because they exist as part of a collection that unifies them. For these reasons, archival description involves a hierarchical and progressive analysis that emphasizes the intellectual structure and content of the collection and does not always extend to the level of individual items within it. Following the development of technologies in the middle to late 1980s that enabled the descriptive encoding of machine-readable findings, it became possible to consider the development of digital finding aids for archives. Work on an encoding standard for archival description began in 1992 at the University of California, Berkeley, and in 1998 the first version of EAD was released. A second version was released in 2002, and the latest version, EAD3, was released in August 2015. The Society of American Archivists and the Library of Congress are jointly responsible for the maintenance and development of EAD. EAD is now used around the world by archives, libraries, museums, national libraries and historical societies. Through a standardized system for encoding the descriptions of archival finding aids, EAD allows users to locate primary sources that are geographically remote. At its highest level, an EAD finding aid includes control information about the description as well as a description of the collection itself. EAD3 was revised in 2018 to address concerns relating to the ease of access to archival descriptions and its ability to interface with other systems. Archives by their very nature are different from libraries. While libraries contain individual items, such as books and journals, of which multiple, identical copies exist, archives contain records that are both unique and interrelated. Archives represent the activities of a person, family or organization that are created and accumulated naturally in the course of their ordinary activities. In contrast to the items in a library, therefore, all the items in an archival collection share a relationship. The entire body of the records of an organization, family or individual have been created and accumulated as a byproduct of the organization or individual’s existence, and therefore share a common origin, which is referred to by archivists as its provenance; provenance refers to both the origin of an item or collection as well as its custody and ownership. Archivists refer to the entire body or records of an individual or organization as its fonds; the fonds is thus a conceptual whole that reflects the process of the production or accumulation of records that share a common function or activity and exhibit a natural unity. A fonds may contain anywhere from one item to millions of items, and may consist in any form, including manuscripts, charts, drawings, maps, audio, video or electronic records. Because published materials differ in significant and fundamental ways from the collections of interrelated and unique materials found in archives, there are significant differences in bibliographic and archival description. A bibliographic description represents an individual published item, is based on and derived from the physical item, and is thus considered item-level. Archival description, by contrast, represents a collection, or a fonds, often containing individual items of various media, sharing a common origin, or

Unit-V D 243 provenance. The description of archival materials, therefore, involves a complex hierarchical and progressive analysis. It begins by describing the whole, then moves down to subcomponents; the description frequently does not extend to the item level. In this way archival description focuses on the intellectual structure and content of the collection rather than its physical characteristics. A finding aid is a tool that helps users to find materials within an archive through the description of its contents. Most findings aids provide similar types of information, including, at a minimum, a title that connects the finding aid to the creator of the collection; a summary of the material contained in the finding aid; background and context of the collection, including major figures involved; and information about the custody of the collection as well as any conditions or restrictions regarding its use. The unique nature of archival records and the geographic distribution of individual collections has presented a challenge for those wishing to locate and access them for over 150 years. With the advent of international networked computing and online catalogs, however, the potential emerged for making archival collections searchable online. EAD originated at the 1993 Society of American Archivists annual meeting in New Orleans and was headed by Daniel Pitti at the University of California, Berkeley. The project’s goal was to create a data standard for describing archives, similar to the MARC standards for describing bibliographic materials. The initial EAD Version 1.0 was released in the fall of 1998. Such a standard enables archives, museums, libraries, and manuscript repositories to list and describe their holdings in a manner that would be machine-readable and therefore easy to search, maintain and exchange. Since its inception, many archives and special collections have adopted it. In addition to the development and maintenance work done by the Society of American Archivists and the Library of Congress, the Research Libraries Group (RLG) has developed and published a set of “Best Practice” implementation guidelines for EAD, which lays out mandatory, recommended, and optional elements and attributes. RLG has also provided a kind of clearinghouse for finding aids in EAD format, known as ArchiveGrid. Member libraries provide RLG the URL for their finding aids; RLG automatically harvests data from the finding aids, indexes it, and provides a search interface for the index, thus giving researchers the ability to search across several hundred institutions’ collections with a single query. RLG also has developed the “RLG Report Card,” an automated qualitychecking program that will analyze an EAD instance and report any areas where it diverges from the best practices guidelines. SAA’s Technical Subcommittee for Encoded Archival Description, which include international representation, embarked on a revision of the EAD standard in 2010. The latest version, EAD3, was released in August 2015.

Adoption A number of repositories in the United States, Canada, the United Kingdom, France, Australia and elsewhere have adopted and implemented EAD with varying levels of technical sophistication. One of the most ambitious efforts is the Online Archive of California, a union catalog of over 5000 EAD finding aids covering manuscripts and images from institutions across the state. The French National Library Francois Mitterrand publishes more than 90000 EAD finding aids covering archives and manuscripts.

244 D Library and Information Science Specific EAD Element Set The EAD standard’s XML schema specifies the elements to be used to describe a manuscript collection as well as the arrangement of those elements (for example, which elements are required, or which are permitted inside which other elements). The EAD tag set has 146 elements and is used both to describe a collection as a whole, and also to encode a detailed multi-level inventory of the collection. Many EAD elements have been, or can be, mapped to content standards (such as DACS and ISAD(G)) and other structural standards (such as MARC or Dublin Core), increasing the flexibility and interoperability of the data. EAD 1.0 was an SGML document type definition (DTD). EAD 2002, the second incarnation of EAD, was finalized in December 2002 and made available as an XML DTD. The latest version of EAD, EAD3, is available as both an XML schema and a DTD.

INDEXING SYSTEMS AND TECHNIQUES Pre-coordinate and Post-coordinate Word ‘‘index’’ is derived from the root ‘‘indicare’ which means to indicate. Therefore, Index is basically concerned with indicating an object or idea to one who does not know where that object or idea is located. Index is defined as a systematic guide to: (i) Items contained in or (ii) Concepts derived from a collection. These items or derived concepts are represented by entries arranged in a known or stated searchable order. ‘‘Collection’’ here, in context of documentary resources means any body of material indexed, may be a simple or composite text, a group of such texts, a set up of such representations, etc. ‘‘Entry’’ would mean basic unit of an index and it would consist of (i ) A means of identifying an item in or concept derived from the collection and (ii ) A means of locating the item or material related to the concept. Indexing is a process of preparing entries using the index. Thus the preparation of a series of entries for inclusion in a subject catalogue or printed index is known as indexing. Indexing is a technique providing service operation and an index or a subject catalogue is a tool. It is a means to an end, never an end in itself. In other words, indexing is a communication link between a collection of a library and those who intend to obtain some information from it. The process of indexing involves the application of a model indexing system. The indexing system is a means whereby an indexing language can be applied to make an index.

Uses of Indexing 1. Indexes guide users to documents and other things, they are not, however the material itself. Index entries are not intended to describe the material indexed.

Unit-V D 245 2. Author indexes guide users to the names of people and lead searchers to documents related by subject, because authors tend to specialize. There are many kinds of specialized indexes such as indexes to molecular formulae, organic rings, taxonomic names and citations. 3. Indexes provide guide to material that the user may wish to recall or that he may not know exists; that is indexes are used for questions of recall or discovery. Indexes save time and make practical searches that would otherwise be given up. 4. Indexes provide, in highly compact form, useful information about a person or field. A general view of a subject area can be obtained from a subject index.

Types of Indexes 1. Alphabetic subject index 2. Classified index 3. Subject indexes 4. Coordinate indexes 5. Citation indexes 6. Computer-aided indexes The indexing systems can be divided into two basic groups (1) Pre-coordinate systems, and (2) Post-coordinate systems. On the basis of practical experience, it is stated that not every index necessarily exhibits all the features of either of these two types of indexing systems, and in fact it has been observed that some indexes do possess characteristics of both types of indexing systems.

(1) Pre-coordinate Indexing Pre-coordinate indexing systems are conventional systems mostly found in printed indexes. In this type of systems, a document is represented in the index by a heading or headings comprising a chain or string of terms. These terms taken together are expected to define the subject content of the document. The leading term determines the position of the entry in the catalogue or index, while the other terms are subordinate to it. Let us consider a title—The use of computer in library activities might be shown a heading such as: LIBRARY ACTIVITIES: Use of computers COMPUTERS: Use in library activities. Since the coordination of index terms in the index description is decided before any particular request is made, the index is known as pre-coordinate index. These types of indexes are mostly prevalent as printed indexes, and are compiled both manually as well as with the help of computers. In conclusion it may be stated that in all pre-coordinate indexes the subject description is composed of a set of terms. Because this method of indexing coordinates the elements of compound subjects before any particular request is placed for information on that particular compound subject, it is known as pre-coordinate indexing. Examples (a) Chain Indexing of Ranganathan (b) POPSI of G. Bhattacharya (c) PRECIS of Derek Austin. Chain Indexing. Chain indexing creates a number of index entries. The second and subsequent entries cater for the hidden terms in the first entry. Each heading becomes at the same time simpler and less specific. The first reference comprises all the

246 D Library and Information Science Specific components in the heading, but in inverted order. The second reference retains the order of the first (i.e. inverted), but the first element of the preferred citation order is removed. Other references follow, with the progressive removal of terms. If A, B, C, and D are index terms chain procedure creates the following four entries: ABCD BCD CD D E.g. for a document on law concerning corruption in bureaucracy in India. Law: Corruption: Bureaucracy: India Corruption: Bureaucracy: India Bureaucracy: India India PRECIS. PRECIS is the acronym that stands for Preserved Context Index System. The system intends to allow the user of an alphabetical subject index to enter the index at any of the significant terms that together make up a compound subject statement. The user finds the full context in which his chosen term has been considered by the author. Index phrases of PRECIS represent brief statements of subjects of documents through the component terms of phrases designated as strings in the vocabulary of the system. Thus all the important components in a string serve as approach points in turn.

(2) Post-Coordinate Indexing These systems are also called coordinate indexing systems. Even with the evaluation of pre-coordinate indexing the problems relating to indexes did not come to an end. Most of the pre-coordinate indexes were prepared by the indexer and the sequence of terms determined, but in case, the sequence laid down by the indexer did not tally with the user’s sequence, it would create problems in searching. Post-coordinate indexes were developed to remove these flaws. Instead of pre-coordinating the terms, the terms were kept loose and the users were allowed to retrieve documents according to their own coordinations. So, the coordination of terms was done by the users at the stage of outputting, thus, it is called post-coordinate indexing, sometimes simply coordinate indexing. In many cases, post–coordinate indexing now involves the use of controlled vocabulary of indexing terms. Example (a) Uniterm Indexing of M. Taube (b) Batten System of W.E. Batten (c) Peek–a–boo System (d) Optical Coincidence System Uniterm. The simplest form of post coordinate index is the uniterm index, introduced by Mortimer Taube in 1953. The name is blend of two words, i.e. unit and term, and is intended to emphasize the system’s use of single terms as opposed to composite headings. In other words, the uniterm system involves the indexing of documents under single words (uniterms) extracted from the document itself or chosen from a prescribed list of subjects (descriptions), which are, to the maximum extent possible in the form of single words.

Unit-V D 247

ABSTRACTING Abstracting is an operation which offers two important advantages: first, it reduces considerably the amount of primary information and second, it lays emphasis on aspects of particular interest to users.

Functions of an Abstract Abstracting serves three functions: (a) dissemination of information; (b) selection of information by the end-user; (c) retrieval of information, especially in computerized information storage-and- retrieval systems.

Type of Abstracting Different types of abstracts can be recognised on the basis of information that they contain and the person who has prepared them.

(a) By the Type of Information 1. Titular Abstract is also known as title only abstract. The author’s title is used without amplification to describe the contents of a document. Most titular abstracts are subject-oriented rather than findings-oriented. 2. Indicative Abstract: Effective tool for providing current-awareness services where the original documents are readily available. 3. Mini-abstract or Micro-abstract is the highly condensed indicative abstract which provides only a line or two about the document. This is used in fields of high commercial significance and in highly competitive and dynamic technical fields. The “CA- Condensates” are cited as example for mini abstracts. 4. Informative Abstract provides a concise summary of the significant contributions made by the document to the field of knowledge. These are of surrogate type and try to obviate the necessity of referring to the original, which in practice, is not possible. In certain cases, it might serve as an adequate substitute for the original for obtaining specific information.

(b) By Computer 1. Auto-abstracts are produced by a computer analysis of the frequency of the use of significant words in a document and the frequency with which these “high frequency” words appear in the same sentence in which they occurred and their position noted. A score is then assigned to each sentence based on the number and position of the high-frequency words it contains. The resultant auto-abstract is a collection of typical sentences from the original document. 2. Telegraphic abstract is provided by selecting significant words from the document, assigning role indicators (code symbols) and punctuation symbols which separate and group the words into various meaningful units. In this style of writing, grammatical or function words and even verbs are eliminated, leaving a mere listing of topics. This type of abstract is prepared in two stages. First a lengthy informative

248 D Library and Information Science Specific abstract is prepared and telegraphic abstract is made out of the first abstract in the second stage. 3. Statistical or numerical abstracts present data in tabular or numerical form. The technique is also applicable to scientific papers in which the author summarises results in a data table, which can be reproduced with the citation to form an abstract.

(c) By the Type of a Writer of the Abstract 1. Author abstract is the abstract prepared by the author of the document and forms a part of the original paper. This may be an indicative or informative abstract depending on the nature of publication and the publisher. Most of the international abstracting periodicals use author abstract with modifications as and when necessary. 2. Subject Experts’ abstract is an informative or indicative abstract prepared by a peer in the specific discipline of the document either by education or specialisation and experience. As such specialist has his style of writing.

INFORMATION RETRIEVAL SYSTEM Information retrieval (IR) is the activity of obtaining information system resources that are relevant to an information need from a collection of those resources. Searches can be based on full-text or other content-based indexing. Information retrieval is the science of searching for information in a document, searching for documents themselves, and also searching for the metadata that describes data, and for databases of texts, images or sounds. Automated information retrieval systems are used to reduce what has been called information overload. An IR system is a software system that provides access to books, journals and other documents; stores and manages those documents. Web search engines are the most visible IR applications.

Overview An information retrieval process begins when a user enters a query into the system. Queries are formal statements of information needs, for example search strings in web search engines. In information retrieval a query does not uniquely identify a single object in the collection. Instead, several objects may match the query, perhaps with different degrees of relevancy. An object is an entity that is represented by information in a content collection or database. User queries are matched against the database information. However, as opposed to classical SQL queries of a database, in information retrieval the results returned may or may not match the query, so results are typically ranked. This ranking of results is a key difference of information retrieval searching compared to database searching. Depending on the application the data objects may be, for example, text documents, images, audio, mind maps or videos. Often the documents themselves are not kept or

Unit-V D 249 stored directly in the IR system, but are instead represented in the system by document surrogates or metadata. Most IR systems compute a numeric score on how well each object in the database matches the query, and rank the objects according to this value. The top ranking objects are then shown to the user. The process may then be iterated if the user wishes to refine the query.

Model Types For effectively retrieving relevant documents by IR strategies, the documents are typically transformed into a suitable representation. Each retrieval strategy incorporates a specific model for its document representation purposes. The picture on the right illustrates the relationship of some common models. In the picture, the models are categorized according to two dimensions: the mathematical basis and the properties of the model.

First Dimension: Mathematical Basis n

n

n

n

Set-theoretic models represent documents as sets of words or phrases. Similarities are usually derived from set-theoretic operations on those sets. Common models are: l Standard Boolean model. l Extended Boolean model. l Fuzzy retrieval. Algebraic models represent documents and queries usually as vectors, matrices, or tuples. The similarity of the query vector and document vector is represented as a scalar value. l Vector space model. l Generalized vector space model. l (Enhanced) Topic-based Vector Space Model. l Extended Boolean model. l Latent semantic indexing a.k.a. latent semantic analysis. Probabilistic models treat the process of document retrieval as a probabilistic inference. Similarities are computed as probabilities that a document is relevant for a given query. Probabilistic theorems like the Bayes’ theorem are often used in these models. l Binary Independence Model. l Probabilistic relevance model on which is based the okapi (BM25) relevance function. l Uncertain inference. l Language models. l Divergence-from-randomness model. l Latent Dirichlet allocation. Feature-based retrieval models view documents as vectors of values of feature functions (or just features) and seek the best way to combine these features into a single relevance score, typically by learning to rank methods. Feature functions are arbitrary functions of document and query, and as such can easily incorporate almost any other retrieval model as just another feature.

250 D Library and Information Science Specific Second Dimension: Properties of the Model n

n

n

Models without term-interdependencies treat different terms/words as independent. This fact is usually represented in vector space models by the orthogonality assumption of term vectors or in probabilistic models by an independency assumption for term variables. Models with immanent term interdependencies allow a representation of interdependencies between terms. However the degree of the interdependency between two terms is defined by the model itself. It is usually directly or indirectly derived (e.g. by dimensional reduction) from the co-occurrence of those terms in the whole set of documents. Models with transcendent term interdependencies allow a representation of interdependencies between terms, but they do not allege how the interdependency between two terms is defined. They rely an external source for the degree of interdependency between two terms. (For example, a human or sophisticated algorithms.)

U N I T

VI

SYLLABUS v v

v

v

v v v v v v

Management – Principles, Functions and Schools of thought. Library and Information Centers Management – Book Selection Tools and Principles; Library Acquisition, Technical Processing, Circulation, Serial Control, Maintenance and Stock Verification; Preservation and Conservation; Hazards and Control Measures of Library Materials. Human Resource Management – Planning, Job Analysis, Job Description, Job Evaluation, Selection, Recruitment, Motivation, Training and Development, Performance Appraisal; Staff Manual. Financial Management in Libraries – Sources of Finance, Resource Mobilisation, Budgeting Methods; Cost Effective and Cost Benefit Analysis, Annual Reports & Statistics; Library Authority and Committee. Project Management – SWOT, PEST, PERT / CPM. Total Quality Management (TQM) – Concepts, Principles and Techniques, Six Sigma; Evaluation of Services of Libraries and Information Centers. Library Building, Furniture and Equipments; Green Library Building; Information Commons; Makers Space; Security and Safety. Management Information System (MIS), MBO, Change Management, Disaster Management, Crisis Management. Knowledge Management – Principles, Tools, Components and Architecture. Marketing of Library Products and Services – Plan, Research, Strategies, Mix, Segmentation, Pricing and Advertising; Management Consultancy.

(251)

252 D Library and Information Science Specific

MANAGEMENT Principles, Functions, Schools of Thought Management is practiced since the beginning of human civilization for better understanding of nature, human relations, organization and governance. An organisation is a set of people working together to achieve common goals. Whenever there is an organised group of people working towards a common goal, some type of management becomes essential. No organisation can run successfully unless there is someone to manage its activities. Management is a universal process in all organised and social and economic activities.

Definition of Management The management is a social process entailing responsibility for the effective and economical planning and regulation of the operations of an enterprise, in fulfilment of a given purpose or task, such responsibility involving (a) judgement and decision in determining plans and in using data to control performance and progress against plans, (b) the guidance, integration, motivation, and supervision of the personnel composing the enterprise and carrying out its operations. It is an art of getting things done through and with people in formally organised groups. It is an art of creating an environment in which people can perform and individuals could cooperate towards attaining of group goals. Management is regarded as profession by many people. Profession is a calling in which one professes to have acquired specialised knowledge which is used either in instructing, guiding or advising others. For all this, perfect management is required.

Library Management Library management is defined as the process of coordinating total resources of an organisation towards the accomplishment of desired goals of that organisation through the execution of a group of inter related functions such as planning, organizing, staffing, directing and controlling. Library is a non-profit making institution so it is necessary that finances be properly managed. General principles of management are applicable to library management.

Principles of Management Management of libraries has become very important these days. Librarians are expected to deal with number of problems in their day to day working. Some guidelines are needed which will help them to run their concern smoothly and efficiently. Principles of management are generalizations based on experience and careful analysis of case studies. These are universally applicable. These are not rigid. Change in circumstances would require adaptation of these. Intelligence, judgement, experience and understanding of human relations are necessary for adaptation of principles. Principles of management is a powerful tool in the hands of an administrator/manager but these must be used rather carefully after analysis of the problem and its diagnosis.

Unit-VI D 253 Henri Fayol was the first to put forward a list of general administrative principles. On the whole, his observations are valid, even today. Henri Fayol is regarded as the father of classical school. Sometimes, this school is referred to as the “traditional” or “universalist” school. Fayol used scientific approach. He observed that management was an activity common to all human undertakings whether in home, business or government. His principles are described below: 1. Division of Work. In a small one-man library one person would be carrying out all the functions such as ordering, classification, cataloguing, preparation, shelving, servicing of documents, etc., there would be no division of work. But in a large library if all the professional assistants carry out all these functions, then this would lead to inefficiency and confusion. As the library grows, there should be a division of duties, and the activities. As division of work takes place, it will lead to specialization. This is desirable in a large set up. Division of work should be carried out up to a point. 2. Authority. Authority can be either statutory or personal. Statutory authority belongs to a person due to his position. Personal authority is achieved due to qualities of leadership. Possession of authority means responsibility for actions. Actual work in the library may be done by different persons but the ultimate responsibilities lie with the chief librarian for all that goes on. He can delegate authority for a certain job. If the same is misused, then it can be withdrawn. An individual should be given authority equal to his responsibility. In case a person is given responsibility for a given job/task, then he should also be delegated authority to take necessary action to make it possible to fulfil the job/task successfully. 3. Discipline. In the best interest of the organization, there should be complete obedience diligence, energy and outward marks of respect. This is equally applicable to every body. The best way to establish and maintain discipline is to provide good leadership to staff, dissolve disputes with justice and enforce penalties without prejudice. 4. Unity of Command. An employee should be responsible to, and also receive orders from only one superior. Any order by the chief librarian to a professional assistant should be transmitted through an assistant librarian, who is in-charge of the section. Thus an organizational structure should be such that each employee is supervised by only one supervisor. He should be responsible for given assignments to him and also assess his work. This principle protects an employee from awkward situations if he is supervised by two or more supervisors. 5. Unity of Direction. According to Fayol, there should be “one manager and one plan for all the operations which have the same objective in view”. Unity of command depends on working of staff together properly but unity of direction is provided by means of properly arranging the organization so that there is one head and one plan to make it sure that co-ordinated effort would be achieved. 6. Subordination of Individual Interest to General Interest. According to this principle individual interests must be subordinated for the sake of common good. Thus primary concern of an employee should be the growth and development of the organisation. Head of the order section should not be permitted to take long leave during the last days of the financial year, if funds remain to be spent and bills have to be passed before the end of the financial year.

254 D Library and Information Science Specific 7. Remuneration. Salaries to employees and method of payment should be fair enough comparable to other staff of the parent body with equivalent qualifications. Employees should be given incentives for successful efforts. 8. Centralization. Centralization of administration may be carried out in varying degrees, depending upon the local situation. Anything that increases the importance of the role of a subordinate should be decentralized. On the other hand any thing that decreases the importance of the role of a subordinate should be centralized. In a university library system book selection should be highly decentralized because heads of departmental libraries know more about their fields of specialization than other librarian of the central library. But ordering should be centralized so that there is no duplication of bibliographical tools, records and books. Managerial functions should be decentralized to a limited extent. As a result, the operation would improve and it would be possible to take advantage of the special knowledge acquired by the members of the staff working in departmental libraries. 9. Scalar Chain. This principle implies that authority and responsibility should flow in a clear unbroken line from the highest executive to the lowest rank. This refers to hierarchy. A hierarchy consists of a series of steps, extending in an unbroken line from chief librarian to the lowest employee, an attendant. This line serves as a means of communication. Authority flows from superior to subordinates throughout the entire organization. Orders go down along the line travelling from top to bottom. However information and appeal travel in the reverse direction. 10. Order. Order refers to the best possible arrangement to achieve the most efficient operation of the organization. As regards movement of materials, it would be economical if order section and cataloguing section are located side by side. As regards employees, a right person must be given a right job most suitable to him. It would be a wrong decision to put an expert classifier in the maintenance section. A right place or job must be identified for everything and every individual. 11. Equity. In dealing with employees treatment of equality must be put into practice. Justice must be combined with friendliness and kindness by those in executive towards staff. Salary scales must be based on education, ability, experience and level of responsibility. 12. Stability of Tenure of Personnel. Stability of staff is an important factor. Rapid turnover of staff should cause anxiety. In this context it is better to fill up some positions in a library with mediocre persons, who will stay with the library relatively for long periods. At the same time there should be promotion avenues for competent persons. 13. Initiative. It is essential that initiative of employees must be cultivated and encouraged. Incentives may be offered in this regard. Provision of incentives can stimulate output, leading to greater efficiency and effectiveness. 14. Espirit De Corps. This principle refers to ‘strength in unity’ being an extension of principle of unity of command. Library administration should create environment which leads to harmony and unity. Equity, initiative, unity of command and leadership qualities of the senior staff can do much to promote espirit de corps. It requires team work. Communication

Unit-VI D 255 is considered as the key to the satisfaction of a working group, resulting in team work. Besides principles put forward by Fayol, other principles often included are span of control; coordination; line and staff; and accountability.

Functions of Management According to Gulick, there are seven functions of management. These are known as POSDCORB, These are as follows:

(a) Planning Planning is a programme made in advance. It is a blueprint for action. Successful planning consists of setting objectives, choosing the course of action, making subordinate units and plans, and budgeting. Good plan has following characteristics (i ) Good plan is flexible. Flexibility helps in easy adjustment to changes and better chances of survival at time of crises. (ii ) Good plan is adaptable. Review of plans indicates whether institutions activities are moving in planned direction. If there are any deviations from the normal, plans are redrawn to meet the changed conditions. (iii ) Good plan should involve both short range as well as long-range plans. Long -range plans cover the entire period of plan or operation. Thus today’s decision will have futuristic effects. Whereas short range plans are meant to meet near time objectives within the framework of overall plan. Good plan is effective only when short-range plans form integral part of long-range plan. Steps in Planning (i) Identification of a problem (ii) Collecting of available information regarding problem (iii) Assessing the possible alternatives and methods for solving the problem (iv) Taking decision to act (v) Putting decision into action (vi) Evaluation of solution on the basis of experience Plans are evaluated on the basis of attaining an objective. For e.g., in library planning the locality, its make-up as regards to its physical features, its linguistic divisions, its cultural diversities and educational needs, etc., are taken into account before providing a service Pros and cons are properly studied so that the service is effective.

(b) Organizing Planning provides a necessary scheme for achieving the goals. Human efforts are required to translate the plans of action. Organizing devises a mechanism through which efforts of people are directed and coordinated towards goal achievement. Organization is defined as the cooperative endeavour of human beings to achieve set objectives through formal relationships. The structure also defines the roles of the functionaries, their relationships, authority and responsibilities. The structure is needed to bring together all the staff members in such a scientific way that the work is done most efficiently and smoothly. PETER DRUCKER has given three ways to determine the kind of organization suited for a

256 D Library and Information Science Specific specific organization. These are activities analysis, decision analysis, and relation’s analysis.

(c) Staffing Efficient working of organization depends on proper staffing and recruitment policies. Staff employed should have special aptitudes and capabilities for performing a particular kind of job. In an organization, it is a continuous process of determining manpower requirements, selecting employees, training them and motivating them to achieve organizational objectives. Staffing process generally includes: (i ) (iii ) (v) (vii )

Determination of personal requirement Selection Orientation Transfer

(ii ) Recruitment (iv) Placement (vi ) Promotion

With the increasing complexities of libraries and the services that are expected from them; the staffing pattern constantly changes. The library staff is divided into three categories: (i ) Professional (ii ) Semiprofessional (iii ) Supporting

(d) Directing In this function manager guide, teaches, supervises and issues direction in order to accomplish organizational goals. The manager who directs must see that his orders are carried out properly. The subordinates should do their jobs properly. Directing refers to the process by which performance of subordinates is guided towards common goal. A good manager helps his subordinates to improve their skills and tell them exactly, how and when to perform their tasks. He takes into consideration capacity of his staff to do a particular job and inspires them with willingness to do their jobs. In order to direct effectively a manager must motivate, communicate and lead efficiently. Libraries have hierarchical organization structure which is not very conducive for innovation. Staff members lack enthusiasm. So library manager should see that employees are treated equally, rewards and recognition is given for their achievements.

(e) Coordination Coordination of various activities and unit is necessary so as to achieve maximum efficiency. Organization can achieve its aims and objectives only through coordinated efforts of all its units. Coordinating helps to achieve harmonious operation by interrelating various parts of an organization. Various parts of an organization needs to be continuously adjusted to each other whereby all procedures, operation, activities lead to maximum contribution. In libraries coordination may refer to the organization as a whole or to any one of its unit. For e.g. in libraries, reference section and cataloguing section is not fully coordinated. So efforts should be made wherein library’s objective of providing documents and services to the users is fulfilled. Collection building, processing them for use and offering various kinds of services should be coordinated to eliminate the wastage of time and money.

Unit-VI D 257

(f) Reporting Reporting means, keeping informed those to whom the executive is responsible, as to what is going on, which includes keeping himself and its his subordinates informed through records, research and inspection. Research enables interrelation of different parts of the organization into the total system. Due to this process decision makers are well informed so that right decisions are taken.

(g) Budgeting Budgeting is an important activity accomplishing financial planning, accounting and control. It is defined as a numerical statement that expresses the plans, policies and goals of an organization for a definite period of time. During budget making, changing needs and resources of the library can be assessed.

Schools of Thought Management has been concern to organized society to a certain degree throughout period of civilized history. However, systematic study of management as a separate branch of knowledge is of recent origin and is largely the product of twentieth century. During the present century, certain schools of management thought have developed. Each school reflects the problems of the period during which they were popular. Those schools which have survived today are influencing management thought. We may recognize the following three group of schools of management thought: (a) Scientific Schools. (b) Human Relations Schools. (c) Decision Theory Schools.

Scientific Schools (i) Scientific Management School The basic assumption of this school is that workers are economically motivated and they will respond with their best efforts if material rewards are closely related to work efforts. The emphasis is on maximum output with minimum effort by eliminating waste and inefficiency at the operative level. In United States, the work of Frederick Winslow Taylor has dominated in the field of management. Taylor is considered as the father of the Scientific Management School. Efficiency was the central theme of his writings. He was the most important advocate of scientific method approach. He took many of his concepts from the bureaucratic model developed by Max Weber. Frank and Lilian Gilbreth were his contemporaries. They evolved performance appraisals. Henry L. Gantt Developed task and bonus system.

(ii) Classical School This school was developed in France. Sometimes, this school is referred to as the “traditional” or “universalist” school. It regards management as a universal process. The management process is analysed, conceptual framework is established, principles are identified and a theory of management is built from it. Henri Fayol, a Frenchman is considered as the father of the classical school. He applied scientific approach but looked at administration from the top to down.

258 D Library and Information Science Specific The principles of administration as stated by Fayol are given below: 1. Division of Work. As an organization grows, there should be an early division of duties. Activities concerning management should also be separated out and made distinct. As decision of work takes place, it leads to development of specialization. 2. Authority and Responsibility. Responsibility is a corollary of authority. 3. Discipline. Discipline is essential in an efficient organization. 4. Unity of Command. This principle implies that a subordinate should receive orders from one senior only. 5. Unity of Direction. There should be one head and one plan for a group of activities having the same objective. 6. Subordination of Individual Interest to General Interest. Growth of the organization should be the primary concern. 7. Remuneration of Personnel. Remuneration and methods of payment should be fair. 8. Centralization. There should be centralization of authority. 9. Scalar Chain. There should be unbroken line of authority and command from highest to the lowest level in the organization. 10. Order. There must be place for everyone and everyone must be in its place. A right person must be given a right job most suitable to him. 11. Equity. In dealing with subordinates, justice and human approach is essential. 12. Stability of Tenure of Personnel. Management should aim at minimizing employee turnover. Unnecessary turnover is both the cause as well as effect of bad management. 13. Initiative. The principle of initiative refers to the ability and quality of a manager to think and execute a plan. Every manager should encourage subordinates to develop quality of taking initiative. 14. Espirit de Corps. This principle emphasizes teamwork and the importance of effective communication in achieving the same.

(iii) Systems School Max Weber emphasized specialization within an organization and considered hierarchy of the decision-making process of great importance. He analysed the authority and responsibility of the “Office” rather than the individual. He made monumental contribution to authority structures in a complex organization. Luther Gulick, an American, has described the functions of an executive in terms of an acronym POSDCORB, representing planning, organizing, staffing, directing, coordinating, reporting and budgeting.

Human Relations School The Human Relations Schools consider that as managing involves getting things done through people, therefore, management studies should be evolved around interpersonal relations. Thus the main emphasis is on the individual and the informal group in the formal organization. The basic concern is to study people as human beings rather than

Unit-VI D 259 as mere work units. Sociologists and psychologists have been very active in developing these schools of thought.

(i) Human Behaviour School The focus of the Human Behaviour School is on behaviour of the individual, the group, and the organization. This theory looks at the human factor as the central theme. It lays greater emphasis on interpersonal relations, leadership, group dynamics and motivation of personal. The basic assumption is that if the management can keep the employees happy, then this will result in the maximum performance. Mary Follett emphasized the psychological and sociological aspects of management. She looked at management as a social process and felt that coordination was the most important principle. Elton Mayo and a group of industrial psychologists conducted experiments at the Western Electric Hawthorne Plant in Chicago. They came to the conclusion that social interaction and psychological factors are important in determining the level of productivity and satisfaction.

(ii) Social System School The Social System School encourages employees to develop social groups on the job, to participate in management and allows democratic functioning in the enterprise. Chester Barnard has written about contribution-satisfaction equilibrium. He has identified four specific inducements. He regards communication as the first function of a manager. In 1950s Peter Druker introduced “Management by Objectives”. He has been supported by Douglas McGregor in his “Theory Y”. Abraham Maslow has further built up his “Need Theory”. According to it man has a hierarchy of needs starting with lowest needs (physiological needs—food, shelter, and clothing), ultimately proceeding to highest needs (intangible needs—self-actualizing and fulfilment). He concluded that when one set of needs is satisfied, then that kind of need ceased to be a motivator. His identification of basic needs has been fairly popular.

Decision Theory School These schools perceive management in terms of decision making. These are primarily concerned with the study of rational decision procedures and also the way managers actually reach decision. The inbuilt assumption being that mathematical models and quantitative processes can serve as a basis of all management. Therefore, we can conclude that, different schools of management thought have provided different versions regarding management creating confusion. Classical school regards management as a universal process. The behaviourists consider human factor as the central theme, which simply involves interpersonal relations. Some consider management simply as decision-making. However, the different schools of management thought are interrelated. All the schools are concerned with management process. However, none of these provides a comprehensive view. Each has strong and weak points.

260 D Library and Information Science Specific

LIBRARY AND INFORMATION CENTERS MANAGEMENT Book Selection Tools and Principles Information Resources Development is an important activity of any library or information centre as it ensures efficient and effective functioning of libraries. This is because it facilitates not only provision of appropriate reading material to users, but also forms the basis for the generation of information services and products. Information resources development is possible only by the use of appropriate selection tools or guides or sources giving information about the different publications. These sources, in their turn, may either give information of existing publications and / or new and forthcoming publications. While to the former belong the category of bibliographies and published Manny catalogues emanating form publishers, printers, booksellers, etc., the latter - namely, sources for new and forthcoming publications – are brought out by a number of booksellers in the form of an announcement service/mechanism for new publications, as well as by institutions like National Library of India, Calcutta (Indian National Bibliography) or trade agencies (Indian Books in Print, American Book Publishing Record, British Books in Print, etc.), or periodical publishers (book reviews) or news-papers which have a convention of publishing book reviews in their weekly sections under the caption "new arrivals". In addition, Current Accession Lists issued by scientific and technological institutions can form tools for document selection. The six general categories of selection aides are: n Current lists of books which are produced in the form of pamphlets, bulletins, leaflets, announcement folders, etc. n Catalogues and bibliographies. n National bibliographies. n Subject bibliographies. n Current reviews. n Special lists that give data on books recommended or booksellers, or core publications in a particular area or discipline.

Current Lists Current books – those that are published during the year – represent the majority of materials usually acquired by most libraries, although it may not always be so in case of large research, industrial and academic libraries which cater to the special requirements of their respective users. But even in these libraries, a large proportion of their acquisition may relate to current books. In countries with a high volume of publications in a year such as the USA and the UK, there may be weekly listings of new books. Listing of this type normally provides information on author, title, publisher, place of publication, year of publication, pagination, special features including series information, and International Standard Book Number (ISBN). Sometimes cataloguing data, including subjects are also given. Information on subject contents in the form of subject headings, is particularly valuable, as very often the titles of documents do not convey adequate information about their contents.

Unit-VI D 261 Monthly lists are common, either as cumulations of weekly lists or as first listing; there may be quarterly, half yearly, and annual cumulations of such lists. Lists of forthcoming publications are also issued frequently, but there are two limiting factors in these cases. Quite often they may not be on schedule and in a few cases, these titles never get released for one reason or the other.

Catalogues and Bibliographies There are a number of commercial organisations like publishers, booksellers, distributors and printers whose main activity is to bring out publications about publications with a business motive. These publications are brought out at periodic intervals, i.e., regular periodicity, and' while some of these are priced publications, some are sent free to institutions and individuals either on request or in anticipation of a demand. Their coverage may be national and/or international. Some of the best examples are:

Book Trade Periodicals (1) Cumulative Book Index. A World List of Books in English Language. 1898 - (Monthly with quarterly, half-yearly and annual cumulations) Fl. W. Wilson, New York. Being one of the comprehensive book selection tools and the production cost being considerably high, it is not available on a regular subscription basis, but subscription is charged on a service basis. (2) American Book Publishing Record. (Monthly, covers American Publications). R.R. Booker, New York. Cumulated annually, with entries arranged subjectwise. Useful for preparing ad hoc bibliographies. (3) Indian Book Industry. Monthly, Sterling Publishers, New Delhi. (4) Publishing in India. A monthly Journal of Book Trade and Industry: D.I. Publishers Distributions (P) Ltd. New Delhi. (5) A Catalogue. Monthly South Asia Publications, New Delhi. (6) Concept News. Monthly, Concept Publishing Company, New Delhi. (7) AMS Publications Update. Bimonthly. American Mathematical Society (8) Providence. Rhode Island, U.S.A. (9) New Arrivals. A monthly news of book trade and industry. Manas Publications, New Delhi. (10) Booklist and Reference Books' Bulletin. A fortnight publication between September and June and monthly in July and August. American Library Association, Chicago. The purpose of Booklist is to provide materials worthy of consideration by small and medium-size libraries and school library media centres.

Bibliographies Those who produce bibliographies fall into the following chain if arranged in evolutionary sequence; the kinds of bibliographies corresponding to each is shown in juxtaposition. The kinds of bibliographies cited above can be either primary or secondary, depending upon whether or not: (a) the agency producing it is a publisher or the copyright authority; and (b) it is prepared by a physical examination of the books included in it.

262 D Library and Information Science Specific Agents

Sources of bibliographies

Type of bibliographies

(a)

Producers (Thought)

(b)

Producers (Material)

Authors Printers Binders Governments Publishers Booksellers Bibliophiles

(c) (d)

Distributors (Material) Distributors

Author’s bibliographies Printer’s bibliographies Binder’s bibliographies Copyright lists Publisher’s catalogue Bookseller’s catalogue Bibliophiles Bibliographies Book selection list Library catalogue Subject bibliographies

(e)

Consumers

Book selection agencies Library Cataloguers Reference Librarians Authors Readers

Author bibliographies Reading lists

Library catalogues, bibliophilic bibliographies, printer’s bibliographies, and binder’s bibliographies are some of the primary bibliographies. Another example would be the Deutsche National Bibliography. The often used secondary bibliographies are: n Bookseller’s catalogues n Book-selection lists n Library catalogues n Subject catalogues n Author bibliographies and n Reading lists. From the point of view of book-selection value, the sequence of preference maybe as follows: n Copyright lists n Publisher’s catalogues n Bookseller’s catalogues n Book-selection lists n Library catalogues n Subject bibliographies n Reading lists n Author’s bibliographies n Author bibliographies n Bibliophilic bibliographies n Printer’s bibliographies and n Binder’s bibliographies.

Current Bibliographies n

n

n

Reed Reference Publishing Catalogue 1996. It not only includes the regularly updated editions of the organisations well established reference works but also the introduction of new products, such as, Bowker-Saur’s European Research and Development Data-base. Aslib Publications Catalogue 1995. London. Announces a selection of new books and editors of titles in demand, directories, CD-ROM, CEC Publications, Translations, Journals, etc. Indian Books 1995: An annual bibliography. Today and Tomorrow’s Book Agency, New Delhi.

Retrospective Bibliographies n

Indian Books in Print: A bibliography of Indian books in English language published by Indian Bureau of Bibliographies, Delhi.

Unit-VI D 263 n n

Books in Print, New York, R.R. Bowker 1948 - Annual. British Books in Print. London, Whitaker 1976 - Annual.

National Bibliographies Ranganathan defines the term National Bibliography as “A list of books, periodicals, and of their reprographs published in a country or on the country, or the citizens of the country, or in the language of the country, or written by any citizen of the country irrespective of the country of publication”. Thus, national bibliographies are not necessarily confined to books or printed materials but may bring out national lists of films, records, audio-visuals and other type of non-print material. Depending upon the policy, it may include only one of the above categories or any combination of them. As publication of a book is a continuous process, a national bibliography may be published weekly, monthly, quarterly, or as fasicules and cumulated at intervals of time ranging from quarterly to yearly or more. Most countries with a book trade, except the United States of America, have some form of national bibliography. They are authoritative and highly reliable sources of information of recorded knowledge of a country. Therefore they serve as excellent selection tools not only for current materials but also good for retrospective materials. The only limitation is that they represent only the national outputs. We describe below the national bibliographies of India and Great Britain. Indian National Bibliography 1958- Monthly. Central Reference Library, Calcutta. The Indian National Bibliography (INB) is a classified list of current Indian publications in all the major Indian languages and English. INB is compiled from the materials received at the National Library under the Delivery of Books and Newspapers Act, 1954 (as amended in 1956 to include newspaper). The categories of publications excluded are: (a) musical sources, (b) maps, (c) periodicals and newspapers, except the first issue of a new periodical and the first issue of the periodical under a new title, (d) keys and guides to text-books and (e) ephemeral items. INB was published in two parts – general publications and government publications, during 1959 to 1972, From 1973, the two parts have been combined into one, comprising two sections – classified and alphabetical. The arrangement of entries in the classified section is by Dewey Decimal Classification. Bibliographic data given are class number, author, title, imprint, pagination, illustrations, size, price, series note, etc. The second section is an alphabetical index to the classified part, with author and subject approaches. The author and title of publications in Indian languages are transliterated into Roman script and arranged in one alphabetical sequence under each class. For current and retrospective selection of Indian books, this is perhaps the best source. The only limitations are time lag in the publication of INB and the items left out because of non supply of these by publishers.

Subject Bibliographies Subject bibliographies are useful selection tools for retrospective books. If they are compiled by professionals with a subject background of the field, these bibliographies could be of great value in selection and collection development.

264 D Library and Information Science Specific Some examples of subject bibliographies are: Aiyar C.P R. Bibliography of Indian Philosophy. Madras, Sanskrit College, 1968.2V. Alexandrowicz, C.H : Bibliography of Indian Law, Madras, University of Madras, 1958. Council of Scientific and Industrial Research. Indian Scientific and Technical Publications: a Bibliography, New Delhi, 1950. Kanitkar, J.M. Bibliography of Indology Von Indian Anthropology. Calcutta, National Library, 1960. Narayanasamy, V Bibliography of Indology V.2 Indian Botany. Calcutta, National Library, 1961. These types of publications usually do not get disseminated in time and widely, and hence access to them becomes difficult. Many of these types of bibliographies are not always available in print and so special efforts have to be made to get them for the library. The limitations of this type of tools are the quality of items selected, currentness and availability of documents listed. As indicated earlier, no single source can meet all the requirements of selection and collection development. A judicious combination of selection tools, both for current and retrospective publications has to be made and their inflow into the library must be assured.

Current Reviews Review columns appearing in newspapers and periodicals are an important aid for book selection. While selection tools discussed so far do not give sufficient information to judge the value of a book in terms of quality, or suitability to a particular requirement, one can infer the quality of a book to a certain extent from the reputation of the author and the publishers. Book reviews appearing in newspapers and periodicals are often reliable sources to evaluate the quality of books. A book review, in general, gives information about the contents of a book, the treatment of the topic discussed in it, its quality as also its suitability for a particular type of user in a library. It is, in essence, a critical evaluation of it. Book reviews can be divided into three general types: (i) reviews for persons in the book trade and for libraries; (ii) reviews for specialists in different subjects; (iii) reviews for the general public. Book selectors use all three types, but the greatest use is made of trade and professional reviews. Some differences in emphasis do exist among types of libraries in making use of book reviews. As noted earlier, special libraries make the least use of reviews, but when reviews are needed the first two categories are given the greatest credence, with a preference for the specialist review. In academic institutions also, the first two types of reviews are used extensively. Public libraries, on the other hand, make use of popular reviews more often.

Library Journal Publishes quarterly lists of scientific, technical and medical books announced for publication by publishers.

Unit-VI D 265 The third category of review sources is directed towards the general public. Daily newspapers have a convention of publishing book reviews of selected books in their weekly review sections and are indeed very valuable. Reviews of Times Literary Supplement, New York Time Book Review, those that appear in leading Indian daily newspapers (in their weekly supplements) carry valuable sources for book selection, particularly for public libraries. Book Review Digest (BRD) and Book Review Index (BRI) are two publications exclusively devoted to book reviews. Both are American Publications. BRD publishes every year 5000 to 6000 summaries of new books, covering 70 leading journals and newspapers. BRI notices reviews that appear in 325 journals and provides citation to 40,000 reviews each year. In addition, many of the general periodical indexes include book review citations which also provide access to reviews. While book reviews are excellent sources for book selections, there are limitations which compel us to look for other sources. A small percentage of published books get reviewed; even these reviews appear with a time gap of several months after the book has been published; and the quality of reviews varies. In spite of all these limitations, book reviews serve as very important selection tools.

Special Lists Special lists of best books, recommended books, core collections in specific areas and for specified periods are compiled and produced. They serve as useful selection tools for building up representative collections in a subject or for a particular group. Examples of this type of list are: Public Library Catalogue, H.W. Wilson, New York; Books for Secondary Schools, R.R. Bowker, New York. Books for College Libraries, American Library Association, Chicago. The choice of items in these compilations is made by the compilers and hence subjective.

Library Acquisitions Library acquisitions is the department of a library responsible for the selection and purchase of materials o r re sources. The department may sele ct vendo rs, negotiate consortium pricing, arrange for standing orders, and select individual titles or resources. Libraries, both physical and digital, usually have four common broad goals that help dictate these responsibilities. These goals are significant to libraries in order to maintain the basic principle of access. 1. To acquire material as quickly as possible 2. To maintain a high level of accuracy in all work procedures 3. To keep work processes simple in order to achieve the lowest possible unit cost 4. To develop close, friendly working relationships with other library units and vendors There are generally five steps taken in order to acquire material for a library collection, whether physical or digital. 1. Request processing 2. Verification 3. Ordering 4. Reporting (fiscal management) 5. Receiving orders

266 D Library and Information Science Specific There are eight types of acquisition methods followed by libraries: 1. Firm orders. Orders that are determined by name specifically. For example, a specific book, textbook, or journal that the library wants. 2. Standing orders. Open orders for all titles that fit a particular category or subject. For example, these are usually developed for serials and the library knows that it will want anything published in that particular series. A benefit to this style of ordering is that it is automatic—the acquisitions department does not have to order the next in series. 3. Approval plans. Similar to standing orders except they cover quite a few topic areas, are sent from the vendor, and the library is only charged for the specific titles that they accept into their collection. Under these circumstances the library is free to return anything it does not wish to add to its collections. A benefit to this style of ordering is that the acquisitions department can sometimes make better decisions with the materials in hand versus an order form. 4. Blanket orders. Largely a combination of both a firm order and an approval plan. Blanket orders are the library making a commitment to purchase all of something. For example, a library makes a contract with a certain publisher or vendor and will purchase everything that this publisher or vendor has available in regards to a topic. A benefit to this style of ordering is an automatic acquisition of materials for a particular field, which can be especially beneficial to specialized or academic libraries. 5. Subscriptions. Generally utilized for journals, newspapers, or other serials that a library will acquire. Like standing and blanket orders, a library only has to develop a contract once with a vendor or publisher and the items are automatically delivered when printed. Often, subscriptions are for a specific length of time and must be renewed at the end of the contract. 6. Leases. Contracts that allow access to particular resources for a period of time. Leases are most commonly utilized with electronic resources such as databases, journals, and web-based materials. The library is paying for access to the material versus paying for ownership of the material. 7. Gifts. In some cases libraries may allow gifts that people give to the library. It is the job of the acquisitions department to determine whether or not the gift will be kept and incorporated into the library’s collection. This method is typically used by large academic institutions, and the persons giving the gifts are mostly alumni of that institution. A library’s collection development policy usually states whether the library accepts gifts. 8. Exchanges. Exchanges can be broken into two subcategories: exchange of unwanted duplicate/gift materials AND the exchange of new materials between libraries. Again, the institutions that usually have a process for this type of acquiring are larger academic or research libraries. This is also a process of consortia.

Library Technical Services Library technical services are the ongoing maintenance activities of a library’s collection, including the three broad areas of collection development, cataloging, and processing. Technical services are the infrastructure that enable the user’s experience of many library services.

Unit-VI D 267

Collection Development n n n

Identification locating potentially worthwhile items to add to the collection. Selection deciding which of the identified items to add to the collection. Acquisitions securing items for the collection, including the purchase of books, databases, e-books, and multimedia materials for a library’s collection.

Cataloging n

n

Cataloging and metadata tasks: creating and adapting records for library materials and licensed content, allowing users to search and discover these resources in the library catalog. These records, often based on MARC standards and available for online public access, may include descriptive elements—such as author, title, and subject—to assist users in identifying relevant resources to meet their needs. Organization and classification: indexing and arranging the items acquired in a manner that will aid the end-user in locating materials in the collection. Materials are often organized by established classification systems such as Dewey or Library of Congress.

Processing n

n

Preparation: labeling, binding, repairing, conservation, and otherwise making items ready for (and maintained during) storage in a manner that allows for easy retrieval and maintenance of what is in a collection. Preservation: maintaining and repairing of both print and electronic materials. The former includes repairing damaged books, binding journals into hardcover volumes, and reformatting print materials to digital. The latter includes digital curation, where archivists work to preserve electronic materials from data deterioration, and periodically migrate data from older formats to newer one.

Related Systems and Services Technical services may also include a range of activities broadly related to the above core functions: from security processing (using RFID tags or similar), to interlibrary loan services, to maintaining the library’s technology resources: such as servers, staff and public computers, scanners, or the integrated library system software that facilitates circulation. The circulation control system is one of the important components of any library system. The primary function of any circulation control system is to make available library materials including books and non-book materials to all customers as and when the demand arises without loss of time. In order that the collection of the library is made available to all the users, libraries must control the circulation effectively. The control must be based on sound principles. The basic requirements of a circulation control system are to record items on loan, and to whom, to find and trap items requested by other users, and to indicate overdue items. For this purpose the libraries need to maintain records which specify: n What material is in the library stock or could be readily obtained through other channels; n Which material is on loan, and from whom or where it can be retrieved;

268 D Library and Information Science Specific When will the material on loan be next available in the library for other users; and What are the borrowers (users) and their borrowing facilities. Different libraries accord different priorities to these functions depending upon the extent and level of demand that they experience and the nature and urgency of the requests that they handle. Also, the materials and the customers can be grouped and differentiated. For example, academic libraries operate short term loan collections for documents in great demand and also follow different loan periods for students and staff. In addition to the basic functions mentioned earlier, many of the libraries like their circulation control system to: n recognise and trap the reserved books on their return from loan; prepare overdue and mail notices; n keep records of the number of books on loan to individual borrowers, and notify over borrowing harrowers; n facilitate renewals; n facilitate the calculation and collection of fines; n collect issue statistics; and n provide adequate management information. n n

Basic Components of Circulation Control System The main component of a circulation control system is the transactions or loans database. This database contains a series of records one for each transaction. Each record must contain: n details of the document such as document number, etc. n details regarding user such as user number, his address, etc. n the data of the transaction such as issue or return date, etc. It is possible to use a Database Management System for the creation of the transactions or loans database, which is a set of three files, one for bibliographic details, one for user information and a third for transaction records. The last file may use numbers which have appeared in the other two files and might thus permit the merging of these three files when required (i.e., for sending the overdue notices). Online searching is possible for overdue and reserved items. Also report generator facilities will allow production of any relevant notice using the information contained in the three files. It is common to keep bibliographic details in a separate file. Generally, this database is same as the catalogue of collections acquired for the library. It provides information on titles, authors and publishing details. Some of these details are used in notifying users the overdues. Most of the packages for circulation control use bar-code readers as the simplest way of matching reader and the item (i.e., at the time of loan transactions). Alternatives such as keying in names and titles at each transaction, or numbers for user and the item (document) borrowed, are time-consuming and prone to operator errors, unless the software includes an error-trapping routine for the number input. It must be mentioned that in the specification of a circulation control system there are a number of points to be kept in mind, other than the obvious one of whether the package has the capacity to handle all the loan records. Messages relating to various functions will be required and will include the fact that an item is overdue or that a user has other

Unit-VI D 269 overdue items; that the item is required for or the user has exceeded his loan entitlement. The system may have to cope up with the varying loan facilities for different categories of user, as well as different loan periods for the different types of material. All these are essential points which need to be ensured for the effective management of any circulation control system of a library.

Circulation Control System We are dealing with the maintenance of stack rooms which involves the following work: n Preparation and maintenance of guides n Shelf rectification n Maintenance of shelf register/list n Maintenance routines n Tools needed in the maintenance section. We shall discuss each of the above in the following sub-sections.

Stack Guides Guides are to be put up at different places in the library in order to enable a user to find his/ her way into different parts of the library with minimum of assistance from library staff. In a stack room, the following guides will have to be provided. Tier Guide. Each tier of stacks should have one tier guide showing the arrangement of books on the shelves in that tier. These should show the subjects covered in the respective tier giving the inclusive class numbers and their verbal headings. Gangway Guide. Each gangway should be provided with a gangway guide, indicating the subjects covered in the particular gangway with the help of class numbers and equivalents in the form of verbal headings. Bay Guide. Every bay of shelves be provided with a bay guide containing the concerned class numbers and their verbal headings. Shelf Guide. Every shelf should be provided with a shelf guide giving the class numbers to denote the subject on which the books are found in a particular shelf. General Guide. A guide giving an overall view of the stacks and the arrangement of books has to be provided preferably in the lobby or somewhere near the entrance. General Instruction Guides. The maintenance section should provide the following guides: (a) No Smoking Please (b) Talk and Walk Softly (c) Silence Please (d) Do not shelve the books. Leave them on the table etc.

Shelf Register/Shelf List Shelf register or shelf list is an important record of books; which shows the position of any book on the shelves. In order to control the movement of books in a library a shelf list is, made use of. A shelf list is usually maintained in standard size cards. These cards are arranged parallel to the corresponding arrangement of books on the shelves. Books in the library are kept in multiple sequences. Therefore, there would be many groups of shelf list card. The shelf list enables the library to maintain correct sequence on the shelves. It can also indicate immediately the position of any book on the shelf.. Shelf list is nothing

270 D Library and Information Science Specific but a stock register and therefore comes in handy for stock verification purposes. Since the shelf list is an important record, it should be kept under the safe custody and also kept up-to-date.

Maintenance Routine In Addition to the areas of responsibility related to the different functions like stacking, shelf arrangement and stock verification, the maintenance section/division should also attend to day-to-day routines. The duties of routine maintenance work are the following: n dusting and cleaning of the shelves; n shelving the newly processed books from the processing section; n shelving the books returned by borrowers sent by the circulation section; n shelf study and rectification; n identifying and separating the torn and otherwise mutilated books for mending or for rebinding; n shifting and resifting books whenever warranted; n locating particular books on the shelves upon request by readers when they are unable to find them; n maintenance of book tags, etc. Dusting and Cleaning of Shelves. These are important and indispensable routines of libraries which have to be attended meticulously. Books have to be protected from dust and dirt. No room should be given to readers to complain about dust and dirt on the shelves. In a library where stack area is very large, cleaning can be done by mechanical devices like vacuum cleaners. Shelving. Books received from the processing sections of the library need to be displayed for a week or ten days on the latest additions shelf, before are taken to the stacks for shelving. This may be a weekly activity. But books received from borrowers must be returned to the shelves regularly, preferably the same day so that they are readily available for use by others. Shelf Study and Shelf Rectification. The maintenance staff at all levels in a library would do well to devote their free time to studying the books on the shelves so as to develop a fair knowledge of their contents. This knowledge is of vital importance to the efficiency of their work, particularly in their relation to the reference section. An intimate knowledge of the book collection would be invaluable in answering reference enquiries which involves prolonged search. Books are very often misplaced on the shelves by readers who browse through them. Readers are to be strictly instructed not to replace books on shelves but still 'it may happen quite often. A book wrongly placed is as good as lost. Hence restoring order among the books is absolutely essential. This work is referred to as shelf rectification. Damaged Books. Shelf study and shelf rectification would also enable the maintenance staff to identify books that need mending, repair, rebinding, etc. Unsocial elements could also multilate books which can be discovered during shelf study or rectification. These books have to be withdrawn from circulation temporarily till they are repaired or replaced by a fresh copy if they are important. Shifting and Reshifting Books. In order to take away the monotony of appearance of shelf arrangement and to introduced an element of novelty, books have to be reshuffled to

Unit-VI D 271 keep in tune with the changing popularity of subjects with the reading public. While this cannot be done too frequently, the entire library may be reshuffled once in five years. But this is necessary, though it involves extra work and some dislocation in service. Assistance to Readers. Readers often need advice and help in locating and identifying books of their interest. Although reference assistant may do this job, the maintenance staff who have a closer knowledge of the contents of me library could go to the name of their colleagues in the reference section. Maintenance of Book Tags. Book tags carry call number of books fixed at the bottom of books or on their spines. This helps the arrangement of books on the shelf. These book tags get damaged or worn out after repeated use and they have to be refixed if they get soiled. In many libraries, book tags have been replaced by tooling, a process by which call numbers of books could be written on the spines or at the bottom of the covers. This will reduce the work of the library.

Tools The maintenance section needs to be provided with the following tools: n Books ends or book supporters. At least two book supporters are required for each plank of the shelves to ensure that the books are standing upright. n Book lifts and trollies. In a multistoreyed library building book lifts are needed to carry books from one floor to another. Similarly book trollies are needed to transfer books from one end to the other end of each floor. n Shelving tables. One table for sorting out books for shelving should be made available on each floor of stacks. n A number of stools for short persons to browse books kept on top shelves and also for easy replacement of the books. n Two step or three step ladders for reaching upper shelves for shelving, cleaning and dusting.

Preservation and Conservation of Library Materials in the Digital Age The print and electronic materials are vital and delicate. The way they are handled can affect the life span of the records contained in them. Records must be preserved and conserved for future use. The process of encoding and recording information has evolved over a thousand years. The way in which generations expressed their ideas, skills, emotions, etc., has led to the production of information materials since time immemorial. Every generation desires to leave a mark of documented issues, concerns, ideas, discourse and events, and the only way to do this was by leaving a legacy in the form of documented matter. One of the earliest forms of recording human experiences on earth has been through rock paintings found in most parts of the world. The media of recording information, has however, evolved overtime. In the past, stone, wood, metal, clay and paper served as information storage media. The written heritage of human kind, found in libraries, museum, temples, monasteries, and private collections, consists of different types of cultural materials incised or written with ink on palm leaf, bark, wooden tablets and traditional paper. These information media, however, posed

272 D Library and Information Science Specific different challenges at efforts to preserve them in the face of harsh elements of nature (Morrow, 1983). The challenges of preserving paper-based information materials increased with the discovery of the fourdrinier machine in 1806, which was designed to meet the high demand for paper. The demand for paper caused alkaline or ‘traditional’ paper, which was longfibre, stable and durable, to be supplanted by modern mass production methods, based on materials other than rags. These paper making materials have an inbuilt decay factor, due to the nature of the raw materials adopted and extensive use of chemicals. The use of machines, which mechanically ground wood into pulp, also greatly reduced the wood fibres. This caused paper to be vulnerable to deterioration and decay, because the chemicals induced deterioration and the midst of transition from essentially output of information in paper format to output in a variety of media. We are now increasingly in the multimedia era, where information is output as picture, sound, text or a combination of these and increasingly being stored in electronic media (Zulu, 2005). Information resources in electronic era, ranging from simple text based files such as word processed files to highly sophisticated web-based resources such as databases, websites mails are preserved in a wide range of storage media such as, flash drives, CD ROM and others. Preservation and conservation is one of the most urgent issues to be tackled by libraries all over the world. The preservation and conservation issue is complicated by the diverse nature of library materials, both in composition and structure. Fortunately, librarians, information scientists, manufacturers, conservators and publishers are becoming more cognizant of preservation and conservation issue and as such, they are gradually resolving them. The concept preservation, in this paper is used to refer to all necessary strategies, measures and steps invested into prolonging the lives of library information resources. As supported by Lasisi (1999), preservation is used to denote all those activities and measures intended at conserving library materials for posterity. Murray (2005) explained that preservation is an indirect method of treatment in which the environment around an item is changed. This includes stabilizing, maintaining and monitoring temperature, humidity, light exposure, air pollution, dirt, dust and mold preservation also includes surveying the proper storage and handling techniques, security, including theft, vandalism, disaster prevention, education, training and out reach programs for staff, patrons, clients, and the public, while conservation is a direct method of treatment in which an item is physically or chemically changed. This includes cleaning, repairing, rebinding and reformatting. All conservation treatments entail the least intrusive methods possible and use of acid-neutral materials.

Nature of Library Materials Library materials are in wide variety of sizes, shapes and formats which often present problems in relation to library storage and access procedures. Some of the materials like television sets, cassettes, cartridges, film recording, computers etc. can prove heavy and cumbersome for handling, while others like slides, filmstrips and multimedia kits can prove very difficult to organize, shelve and control. Media records quite often have standards laid down that are associated with storage and control. Enright (1972) stated that playing a videotape removes minute layers of the original, and a librarian concerned with media records has to be aware of the point at

Unit-VI D 273 which the technical condition of an item will militate against its effective use. It is necessary to mention that many media materials are more vulnerable to careless treatment and abuses than books. The annoyance and frustration caused to users and audience by providing damaged or defective materials can dent the reputation of a library and deflect a user’s confidence in its services. And, this can be very monumental indeed.

Causes of Deterioration of Library Materials Materials deteriorate as a result of: (i) Internal or inherent vices are caused by weakness in the chemical or physical make-up of an object introduced during its manufacture. Early paper was made from clean lines, cotton, flax and strong fibers. It was not treated with bleaching agents and was not sized with rosin and alum. This type of paper was permanent, durable and was chemically and physically strong enough to endure the wear and tear of the ages. Modern paper (paper produced since 19th century) has wood pulp as its basic raw materials instead of cotton and line rages. The wood pulp is bleached with chlorine and the paper sized with alum and rosin. This makes the paper acidic thereby placing the paper in a low PH condition Ph is a symbol used to signify the degree of acidity or alkalinity of any organic material. (ii) The external agents can be classified as: n Biological Causes. Mold, mildew can cause serious, often irreparable damage to paper materials. The most common species affecting library and archives materials are silver fish, bookworms, booklice and cockroaches. Most insects are not attracted to the paper, but rather to sizing, adhesives and starches that are dark, wet, dirty, clustered and undisturbed. Mold and mildew are types of fungi, micro organisms that depend on other organisms for sustenance. Molds excrete enzymes that allow them to digest organic materials such as paper and book bindings, altering and weakening those materials. Harvey (1993) suggested that a clean, well-ventilated and climate-controlled environment goes a long way toward preventing infestation by any of these pests. n Environmental Causes. Researches indicate that cooler temperatures are preferred for library materials. According to Library of Congress preservation recommendations, an ideal environment for books is 550F storage areas. Mixed use storage areas should be kept at 700F. If library materials are stored separately from use areas, the temperature can be brought down further to 650F or less. Uncontrolled humidity levels can cause mechanical damage. If conditions are too humid, material will swell and warp, resulting in cockling and other physical distortions. These dimensional changes weaken physical bonds and set up stresses that can shorten the life of most materials. If conditions are too dry, materials will become brittle and more susceptible to cracking, particularly during handling. Light is very vital in the provision of library services since materials have to be identified and read. On the other hand, it is one of the greatest enemies of library materials, especially paper. Evans (1995) explained that non-print materials are particularly sensitive to the effects of ultraviolet light, so videotapes and microforms should never be shelved near a window.

274 D Library and Information Science Specific n

n

Chemical causes. Airborne contaminants in the form of gases and particulates can jeopardize the preservation of library materials. Gaseous pollutants can originate indoors from photocopiers, painting, cleaning supplies, untreated wood and certain kinds of adhesives and plastics. Particulate pollution is also a great concern. Particulates come in the form of tiny solid substance from smoke, dust and vehicle engines. The library should be fully air-conditioned, air conditioners are highly recommended for books. Air conditioners help in stabilizing the temperature and humidity for libraries. They also help to filter out particulates and chemical pollutants. Mechanical causes. Mechanical damage to library materials includes the human factor and natural disaster. Alegbeleye (1993) argues that archives and libraries are prone to disasters that can be classified broadly as natural and man-made. Natural damage to materials can be caused by earthquakes, fire, flood or water, while the human factors include careless handling, vandalism and improper support during storage.

The Need for Preservation and Conservation The deterioration of library materials form the basic problem of libraries and given rise to preservation and conservation needs. In the course of preserving materials, there is need to adequately consider the value of records in terms of its educational, socio-political and economic impact on society, and decide the period during which each class of documents might be kept for use and then destroyed or permanently preserved for future use. However, no library material is infinite. By their very nature, they are susceptible to deterioration, hence preserving and conserving them become ultra-important. In order to retain the information contained in all media of communication for effective use by future generations, there is the need to preserve, conserve or effect both activities on them. There is a need to preserve titles which have arteactual, biographical or intellectual values. It is instructive to note that paper, for instance, deteriorates very fast because of their ephemeral nature. Machinemade paper is made of wood, pulp containing harmful acids that cause it to deteriorate fast. Materials used for binding also contain harmful ingredients that cause deterioration. Environmental factors like high temperature and relative humidity, exposure to light, air pollution, and careless handling by increasing number of users in open access repositories cause deterioration and object damage to materials that are very valuable. Three main factors are important in the process of taking decisions regarding preservation and conservation. They are: (i) The building. To identify potential hazard arising from security, fire, flood and other natural disasters. (ii) The interior building. Including reading and storage areas, to assess the environmental conditions and the physical state of shelving units, taking measurements of lighting levels, temperature and humidity, and assessing levels of dust and atmospheric pollution, and (iii) The collection. To identity the scale of damage to paper including assessment of paper embitterment, damage due to mould or insect and damage to bindings, etc.

Electronic Means of Preservation For some decades now, there has been a revolution in information storage media. Data is now stored electronically in digitized formats. Computers are presently very basic to library

Unit-VI D 275 functions and services. Mostly, they act as gateways in libraries and information can only be accessed, nay retrieved through them. Physical materials are of lesser interest to the end – users in an environment where information is electronically accessible. The problem of storage, and practically that of preservation of information is removed from the point of use (where it has traditionally been located) to the point of supply. The information producer bothers about location of extensive databases for storage and preservation from where users can access whatever they needed. According to Feather (1996), there has been exponential growth in the creation, use and significance of electronic data and there has been great diversification of its sources of origin. Until about 1990, librarians had little need to concern themselves with the preservation of electronic data, they were merely interested in the means of keeping output media like audio- CDs and CD – ROM in a usable condition for a reasonable length of time. The concept and development of electronic library has changed this attitude. This is not surprising because, automation brings with it a lot of dynamism and we must try to keep pace with the changes. In situations where the preservation responsibilities rest absolutely on the information producer, the librarian or information provider, who is the interface between the producer and the end – user, need only to contend with making his output media survive in usable condition for at least the period when updated versions of the output would be produced. Then, the librarian subscribes to the latest versions of the out- put media. The problem of long-term survival stays with the data producer, of course, this can only be appropriate in a network environment. Digitisation as a tool for the preservation of information originally created in conventional formats, especially newpapers, has been canvassed widely in recent years Feather (1996). Convertion to a digital format gives the user a whole range of new search tools, since what is created is a file that is flexible and can be manipulated just like any other electronic data file. Digitization is an expensive option for preservation though legitimately viable. Challenges of Digital Material Preservation Challenges of preserving or archiving digital information are not new, and have been explored at many force over the last five decades. Several scholars and institutions, respectively, such as Garret and Walter (1996), Lin, Ramah and Wal (2003), Caplan (2004), Wamukoga and Mutual (2005) and the national library of Ausralia (2003), have cited the following challenges to the preservation of digital materials: n Technological obsolescence; n Continuous migration; n Lack of legislation, policy and strategy; n Lack of awareness; n Lack of collaboration and partnership; n Deterioration of the digital media; n Disaster planning and recovery.

Types of Disasters The term disaster may be defined as any occurrence that threatens human safety and/ or causes damage to library facilities and materials. Disasters can be natural or manmade depending on their origin. Disasters related to extreme weather events (floods, cyclones, tornadoes, blizzards, droughts) occur regularly. Disasters cannot be predicted

276 D Library and Information Science Specific and there is little that can be done to prevent these disasters as most of the disasters occur suddenly and perhaps unexpectedly. Disasters can be minor or major, and range from roof and plumbing leaks which can be repaired by in-house personnel; to broken water mains, power disruptions which require large effort and money for repairs; to major catastrophes, such as earthquakes, floods, tornadoes etc. in which all the organisation’s operations are disrupted, all utilities are out of order, and destruction occurs on a massive scale. These disasters include fires, floods, earthquakes, hurricanes, tornadoes, and workplace violence. Any of these disasters, large or small, natural or man-made, has the potential to harm the library’s collections, the building, the library employees, and the library users. In addition to potential damage, the disaster may disrupt the services that the library offers to its users. As Henson has put it “A library disaster is a threat that might cause harm to the library collection, building, staff, or users, or it is an unscheduled disruption of normal library services”. Having a disaster response plan in place before a disaster strikes can help the library minimise the impact of a disaster and restore collections and services in an optimum time. Let us first understand the various kinds of disasters that library and information centres face.

Fire Fire-related disasters are often even more destructive than those caused by water alone. Fires produce enormous amounts of heat, smoke, and toxic gases, and the process of extinguishing the fire sometimes causes as much or more damage than the fire itself. Causes of fire include natural phenomena such as lightning and earthquakes, as well as old or defective wiring or heating equipment, accumulations of combustible materials, and arson.

Water Violent floods and storms that cause wind or water-related damage are typical natural disasters for libraries and information centres. The floods that may result from such events can be devastating. Besides natural occurrences such as hurricanes, tornadoes, and floods, water damage can come from malfunctioning plumbing, sprinkler, and airconditioning systems. Floods, rain, sprinkler pipe breaks and other disasters can leave paper records, microfilm and other library materials soaked with water. Once water has entered the collection areas, a danger of a mold problem arises, especially if the humidity is high.

Earthquake Earthquake is a natural catastrophe that may effect the collections in a library or museum. During an earthquake walls, ceilings, and shelves may collapse causing structural damage. The library buildings may be destroyed and the collections buried underneath covered in debris and mud. The damage to archival collections due to earthquake could be irreplaceable.

Theft and Vandalism Library collections are also effected by theft and vandalism. Other man-made disasters are war, terrorism, rioting. All these lead to the destruction of collections of libraries and

Unit-VI D 277 museums. During war a number of factors which affect libraries apart from the shelling are phenomena like the movement of people from the affected areas. Recent conflicts in Africa, in the former Yugoslavia, Iraq and Afghanistan have shown the risks to the archival heritage from the devastating effects of armed conflict.

Chemicals Plaster dust, sawdust, and other particulates filter into the atmosphere and then into the collections. They abrade the paper and act as a catalyst for chemical damage. Various chemicals present in the atmosphere, are spread from one area to another by air-handling systems, normal air currents, and traffic. When structural damage occurs, the person in charge of the over-all building maintenance should assess the structural damage and determine when it is safe to enter the building. After this preliminary assessment, damage to the affected materials needs to be assessed. In addition to the “traditional” disasters caused by wind, water, and fire, libraries and archives should be well prepared to face threats of terrorism in all forms. Bombings, and other terrorist acts are also capable of causing mass destruction. Disaster planning for these types of extreme events presents an enormous challenge for librarians.

Preparedness for Disasters Often it is found that the advantages of emergency preparedness are learned through hard experience when an emergency becomes a full-fledged disaster. However, the affects of disasters can often be mitigated or avoided altogether by a comprehensive, systematic, disaster-preparedness programme. A disaster management plan provides a means for recognizing and preventing risks, and for responding effectively to emergencies and disasters. It is increasingly being realised by the information professionals now that small-scale emergencies can be contained and in the case of a large-scale disaster, damage can be limited, if staff members are prepared to react quickly. The basic principle of disaster preparedness is “to plan for a disaster that one hopes will never occur”. A disaster plan is a document that describes the procedures devised to prevent and prepare for disasters, and those proposed to respond to and recover from disasters when they occur. The responsibility for performing these tasks is allocated to various staff members who comprise ‘the disaster team’ (Lyall, 1993). The basic elements of a disaster management programme are a written document, both in paper and on the library’s website, and a well-trained Library staff. The document should be reviewed and updated at least annually. The various disaster management strategies should be discussed at any new staff orientation programme as well as in periodic refresher sessions for long-term staff. A well-documented disaster management programme enables to keep the staff members well prepared in the face of any emergency. Thus, formulating a written plan is a basic step towards preparing for disasters. Disaster planning is a complex process. The entire process must be supported at the highest level of the organisation if it is to be effective. Various guidelines for the Disaster Planning Process are mentioned below. The disaster plan should include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following steps. (1) Assigning responsibility. A proper disaster team must be formed with one staff member having the main responsibility for organising and updating the plan. The

278 D Library and Information Science Specific

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

disaster team must comprise participants from different library backgrounds. Other personnel in the organisation—such as building maintenance staff, engineers, and security experts—should also be members of the team. Conducting preliminary research. The disaster team should review literature on disaster planning and recovery, examine disaster plans from similar types of institutions, and attend relevant workshops thus conducting preliminary research before formulating a disaster plan. Identification and Assessment of potential hazards. The team should make a survey to identify the type of disasters that may occur and determine the probability of their occurrence. Various geographic and climatic hazards and other risks that could jeopardise the building and collections should be identified. These might include the institution’s susceptibility to hurricanes, tornadoes, flash flooding, earthquakes etc. and also to man-made disasters such as power outrages, sprinkler discharges, fuel or water supply failures, chemical spills, arson, bomb threats, or other such problems. Within the building, fire protection systems, electrical systems, plumbing, and environmental systems should also be examined. The condition of the electrical wiring, if it is old or overloaded, whether electrical appliances are unplugged at night or not, the condition of water/ drainage pipes, problems if any with the climate control system, installation of sufficient number of fire extinguishers in the building, whether they inspected regularly or not, existence of fire alarms and fire suppression system, if they are well maintained or not, provision for fire exits, is any fire exit blocked — all these questions should be taken into account. Then an assessment should be made regarding the extent of danger each of the identified disaster poses to the institution and its continued operation. Based on this assessment, a list of the required preemptive measure to protect the institution’s facilities should be prepared and finalised. Identification of resources. Sources of assistance in a disaster should be identified. The various supplies required in the event of a crisis for disaster response and salvage efforts should be identified. Basic supplies like sponges, flashlights, plastic sheeting, small plastic buckets, paper towels and sponges, masking tape and duct tape, scissors, latex or rubber gloves, dust masks, cleaning products and disinfectants, etc. should be procured and kept in an easy to locate place. A list of required supplies and a list of suppliers’ names, addresses, and phone numbers should also be prepared and maintained. Setting up liaisons with local emergency agencies. The team should make an assessment of the area’s potential hazards, such as fire, floods, earthquakes etc. The team should also consult fire fighting personnel and see that the building is in conformity with the fire norms. Local service like fire service providers should be asked to visit your institution to become familiar with your site plan and collections in advance of an emergency. All appropriate disaster-response and recovery services, ranging from police, fire, and ambulance services to maintenance workers, insurance adjustors, and utility companies, should be identified. Several companies provide disaster-recovery services such as dehumidification and vacuum freeze drying. Liaisons should be maintained with local emergency services so that they can respond appropriately in case of disaster. Establishment of goals and tasks for team members. In addition to their primary responsibilities the various team members should be assigned other tasks as well.

Unit-VI D 279 These tasks should be well-defined and prepare them to take needed action in case of any disaster. The list of tasks should be updated regularly. Proper deadlines should be set for the completion of the various stages of the disaster planning process.

HUMAN RESOURCES MANAGEMENT Planning In the libraries, there are so many resources, such as reading material, human resources and technique resources. But today human resources are acknowledged as the most valuable and important asset in any organisation as well as in the libraries. These are no longer associated with problems and costs but instead recognised as a valued resource with potential. The only difference between one organisation and another is the performance of the workers. Thus, management has began to visualise human resource in its correct perspective in organisation. Thus human resource management is a major subsystem of all the organisations including libraries. It is concerned with plans, procedures and policies for filling up the operative positions. Since recruitment, selection, development, utilization of motivation of personnels are integral aspects of any organised effort, human resource management is inherent in all the organisations. It is a major component of the managerial process.

Role of Human Resource Management Human resource management has acquired an important place in modern management. The rationale behind recognising the role of human resource management is that persons i.e. human resources, who are employed in the organisation are human beings, with same aspirations and ambitions in life. Though they are utilized as means to an end in the productive processes, they are ultimate sharers of profits and consumers as well, being a part of the community. Thus an organisation cannot be viewed in isolation, but as a part and parcel of the social system. These factors have led to the modification of employers outlook and an organisation can prosper only if the human resource is happy and contented with the organisation. In order to give better treatment in the organisation, the appointment of personnel managers has become essential, who performs managerial as well as operative functions. Thus he performs the basic functions of management like planning, organising, directing and controlling to manage his own department of the organisation. In all these he has to play an important role in the following area: (a) To help management, in the preparation, adoption and continuing evaluation of personnel programmes and policies. (b) To aid management in assuring the effective communication throughout the organisation. (c) To establish the mechanism for the administration of personnel services that are delegated to the personnel department of the organisation. This includes the maintenance of a stable work force, training and development, working conditions welfare services, etc.

280 D Library and Information Science Specific (d) To undertake personnel research that will keep management continually informed so that better decisions may be made by management on matters affecting personnel. (e) To develop an effective appraisal system which will be used by the management to provide a current inventory of manpower resources in the organisation. (f) To maintain a programme of education and training which will provide members of the organisation with information required to do various jobs and develop themselves.

Job Analysis Standards are necessary for planning, organising and controlling the work of the library. They are as necessary for the effective use of human resources in the library as for physical forces. Important research has been carried out in this field and three principal personnel research techniques have been found out. Out of them one is Job Analysis. Job analysis is the process of investigating and analysing the functions in a work assignment or group of assignments. The resulting facts aid in determining the relations between the conditions and requirements of the work and the individuals who must do it. Thus job analysis is a technique for investigating general work assignments or jobs. In it, the term job is a general work assignment. An operative job assignment is the ultimate unit of responsibility in organization structure.

Methods of Job Analysis Three methods have been used in making analysis of operative jobs. They are (i) interview and observation of the worker on the job, (ii) interviews with its his superiors, and (iii) questionnaires. We have considered the first method when the worker is on the job. The information may be obtained by observing the employee at work, noting what he does and how he does it. For example, the analyst may find that the work is very fine, that it requires content attention and courses considerable eye strain. As a result of his observations and conversation with the employee, the analyst will amass a great deal of information regarding the job, this may be recorded on a job analysis work sheet used for this purpose. The accuracy of the information obtained from this study should be checked by an interview with the department head. The employee’s idea of his job and his head’s ideas of it are not always the same. The head’s opinion is not always correct. The employee because of his closer contact with the job, may point out certain personnel elements in it that his superior has not appreciated. His superior, conversely, may point out certain angles that are not apparent to the employee because he is not looking at it from a managerial point. One of the problems of analyst is to harmonize these different points of view and to determine the actual personnel requirements for the job. He must bear in mind that it is rarely possible to secure the ideal man for the job. The analyst, therefore, must determine the minimum qualifications as well as desirable ones. The questionnaire method is unsatisfactory for several reasons. It is difficult to design one questionnaire that will draw out all the essential information concerning each job. Which may be grouped into two classes, i.e. (a) that which concerns the job, (b) that which concerns the workers.

Unit-VI D 281

Job Description In the context of human resource management in libraries, job analysis leads to job description. A job description is essential for the purpose of recruitment, training needs and later for performance evaluation of the personnels of the libraries. For an employee job description give a full understanding of the activities to be performed, duties and responsibilities. Once a job, a work and an activity is established, a description of these (job, work and activity) has to be written, giving all details about them. The details such as major functions, duties and responsibilities, relationship of each to other units of library, minimum qualifications and experience of the personnel are given in job description. Although job descriptions vary from library to library, these contain generally the following elements. (a) Title of the job (b) Scale of the salary and the total emoluments (c) To whom to report or to work under. (d) Details of the job and procedure including a description of the tasks to be performed (e) Duties and responsibilities to be performed (f) Relationship of the job to other units of work in the library (g) Minimum academic and professional qualifications (h) Minimum experience (i) Promotional avenues (j) Methods of performance ratings

Merits of Job Description The following are the benefits obtained by preparing the job description of each person in the libraries. (1) Job description satisfies various administrative and personal important needs of the persons. (2) Job description is essential for the purpose of recruitment, training needs and later for performance appraisal for personnel section of the library. (3) Job description gives a full understanding of the activities, duties and responsibilities to be performed by an employee.

Example of Job Description An example of job description for a professional assistant of a library is being given here as follows: Title : Professional Assistant (Reference) Scale of pay : Rs. 5000-8000. To report : To Assistant Librarian (Reference Section) Job description : To assist readers who come to library. To attend to reference queries of the readers by telephone or by post. Duties and responsibilities : Recording every enquiry in standard format, Maintaining reference stock displayed in

282 D Library and Information Science Specific

Minimum Qualifications Minimum Experience Promotional avenues

: : :

Methods of Performance evaluation

:

reference rooms, Assist the Head of the section, Other duties assigned by the head of the section. M.Lib. ISc. 4 years professional job experience On the performance evaluation eligible to higher promotion. According to prescribed performance sheets.

Selection Procedure Selection of the personnels specifically in the libraries, has become a critical process these days because it requires a heavy investment of money to get right type of staff. If the right type of persons are not chosen, it will lead to a huge loss to the employer in terms of time, effort and money. Therefore, it is essential to devise a suitable selection procedure. Each step in the selection procedure should help in getting more and more information about the applicant to facilitate decision making in the area of selection. The major steps followed by modern organisations to get right type of persons are as follows: (a) Preliminary Interview. In most of the organisations, the selection procedure begins with preliminary interview. It consists of a short exchange of the information with respect to organization’s interest in hiring and the candidate’s enquiry. Some organisations follow the practice of holding the preliminary interview, but in the case of libraries, generally it is not applied. (b) Application form. An important step in this regard is to get a written record of the qualifications, experience and any other speciality of the candidates in the application forms. Application forms are used to obtain information in the applicant’s own handwriting sufficient to properly identify him and to make tentative inferences regarding his suitability for the post applied for. Obviously the application form should be as simple as possible and incorporate questions having been given on the fitness of the applicant of the job. (c) Tests. Individuals differ in almost all aspect one can think of. They differ with respect to physical characteristics, capacity, level of mental ability, their likes and dislikes and also with respect to personality traits. Matching of individual’s physical, mental and temperamental pattern with the requirement of job or field of training is a difficult task. But where this matching takes place, the result is happiness for the individual and greater prosperity for the organisation and the society. Hence before deciding upon the job or jobs suitable for a particular individual, one should know the level of his ability and the knowledge, the pattern of his interest and aptitudes in detail. This will require the use of selection tests. These tests may be as (i) intelligence tests (ii) aptitude tests, (iii) proficiency tests, (iv) interest tests, (v) personality tests, etc. (d) Interviews. The purpose of interview is to find out the suitability of the candidates and to seek more information about the candidates. For this personal interview is perhaps the most widely used method of interview. But it has certain limitations also. The proper physical arrangement for the interview is of great importance, which enhances the reputation of the organisation in the eyes of the candidates.

Unit-VI D 283 The interview should be arranged in a separate room free from any disturbances and in a quiet environment. (e) Medical Examination. An organisation may place the medical examination relatively early in the process so as to avoid time and expenditure to be incurred on the selection of medically unfit person. Medical examination serves to ascertain the applicant’s physical capabilities to meet the job requirements. Medical examination should disclose the physical characteristics of the individual. A proper medical examination will ensure higher standard of health and physical fitness of the candidate. (f) Final Selection and Placement. After a candidate has cleared all the hurdles in the selection procedure, he is formally appointed by issuing him an appointment letter or by concluding with him a service agreement . Generally, the candidates are not appointed on permanent basis because it is considered better to try them for one or two years on the job itself, which is called probation period. If during this period, candidate is not found suitable, the management may transfer him to some other job or to give up the service.

Recruitment Staffing in an organization as well as in libraries, is an important element of the scientific management. The staffing in libraries consists of the different categories of persons with experience and expertise. So we can say that staffing is assessment of the staff, which is meant to give the library a competent staff in all the different categories and to get the best out of them. The assessment of the staff make help the process of recruitment; where recruitment means employing persons to work in an organisation to fit into positions with a well defined job description.

Process of Recruitment of the Staff for the Library The process of recruitment is completed in the following three steps: (a) Planning of Recruitment Programme. The planning of the recruitment programme has to be done with reference to a proper assessment of the staff requirements in terms of the number of new posts and filing up existing vacancies in the library. This should also be ensured that the newly created posts have been cleared by appropriate authorities. After that the calling for applications should be done through the advertisement in newspapers properly. Advertisement should clearly give all related basic data about the posts. The application forms to be filled by the applicants should carefully be designed to get all the particulars of the candidates. The selection committee constituted for selection of dates for meetings have to be taken care of well in advance. Once the last date is crossed, the selection process starts. (b) Selection of the Candidates. The primary purpose of selection is to achieve a good match between the qualification and experience of the candidate selected and the requirements of the post. As the wrong selection will only create problems to the library, so the successful matching of a candidate to a post is very important. The selection process in the libraries, generally includes analysis of the data obtained through application forms, selection tests, personal interviews, verification of post performance and background of the selected candidates and finally issuing the appointment orders.

284 D Library and Information Science Specific (c) Induction of the Appointed Persons. Induction of the newly appointed persons in the libraries is of considerable importance. The purpose of initiation of new comers into the libraries is to instil confidence into them to fit into a new environment of the library, motivate them to give their best and to participate in the work of the libraries with interests and full involvement. This objective is achieved through well designed various orientating programmes.

Motivation The term motivation is derived from the word motive which may be defined as needs, wants, drives or impulses within an individual. Motivation may be defined as the complex of force inspiring a person at work to intensify his willingness to use his capacities for the achievement of certain objectives. Motivation is something that motivates a person into action and continues him in the courses of action enthusiastically. It determines the behaviour of the person to a great extent. Motivation simply means something within an individual that prompts him to action. According to D.E. McFarlend, “motivation refers to the way in which urges, drives, desires, aspirations, striving or needs direct control or explain the behaviour of human beings.” Thus from the definition, we can say that the motivation is an effective instrument in the hands of management in inspiring the work force.

Significance of Motivation Motivation is called core of management. It is the major task of every manager to motive his subordinates or to create the will to work among the subordinates. It should also be remembered that worker may be immensely capable of doing some work, nothing can be achieved if he is not willing to work. Creation of will to work in motivation is simple but is the true sense of the term. In order to motivate workers to work for achieving the goals, the manager must determine the motives or needs of the workers and provide an environment in which appropriate incentives are available for their need satisfaction. If the management is successful in doing so, it will also be successful in increasing the willingness of the workers to work. This will be better utilization of resources and abilities and capabilities of the workers, Higher motivation leads to job satisfaction of the workers which can reduce the absenteeism, turnover and unrest of the labour in factories. This will create better relations in the enterprise, since there are opportunities in the organisation for the satisfaction of the workers needs. Workers will be willing to join the organisation. Motivation will also foster team spirit among the workers and increase their loyalty to the work group. Motivation is intimately connected with moral. Good motivation leads to high moral. Poor moral is the manifestation of defective motivating process. Thus the issues behind motivation are surely vast and complex. They might involve a deep and penetrating insight into the human nature. (1) Maslow’s Theory of Motivation Maslow suggested that human motivation was dependent on the desire to satisfy various levels of needs being organized in a hierarchy.

Unit-VI D 285

Self actualisation Esteem Love and Belongingness Safety Physiological needs

Once the lowest need is satisfied individual is motivated to satisfy the need that is next in the hierarchy, so higher needs can become operative once a lower need has been satisfied. Further Maslow suggests that once a need has become satisfied it ceases to motivate an individual, although higher needs of esteem and self actualization are more powerful and self sustaining and so satisfaction of these needs motivates a person towards further satisfaction of these needs. (2) Herzberg’s Theory Herzberg expressed his theory of motivation in terms of satisfaction. Herzberg developed his theory by interviewing accountants and engineers. They were asked to name the factors that resulted in their improved performance and factors, which led to reduced job satisfaction. Strong determiners of job satisfaction were achievement, recognition, the work itself, responsibility and advancement, and these Herzberg termed as motivators. The major dissatisfiers were company policy and administration, supervision, salary, interpersonal relationships and working conditions, and these Herzberg termed as hygiene factors. According to this theory, high pay will never make employee feel satisfied from their jobs, but giving them a challenge, so that they can feel a sense of achievement on completion of task, will lead to feelings of satisfaction. This theory assumes that a satisfied employee will be a productive employee. Previous theories of motivation assumed that people would behave in order to satisfy their needs. EXPECTANCY theory sates that each individual will have different goals and people will act to achieve their goals if they feel there is reasonable expectation that their action will lead to the desired goals. There are two types of goals: (i) Direct Goals. Which arise directly from increased performance (ii) Indirect Goals. Which might be given as reward for the increased performance. For example Promotion. The value of goal will effect motivation and behaviour. Expectancy theory suggests some of the measures for improvement of motivation and performance. Firstly there should be redesigning of pay and benefit systems and also redesigning of tasks and jobs to enable people to satisfy their needs through work. (3) McGregor’s Theory McGregor in his theory of motivation has described the views about the way people inside organization are managed which he called as theory of X and theory of Y.

286 D Library and Information Science Specific Theory X is of traditional view, which suggests that every management decisions are taken with certain specific view about human nature and behaviour. It assumes that human being has an inherent dislike for work and will avoid it if possible. So most of the people will have to be controlled, directed and threatened with punishment to get them to make an effort in the direction of the organizations goals. Theory Y is participative view, which suggests that physical and mental effort at work, is as natural as rest or play. Threats of punishment or control are not the only ways of achieving the goals of the organization. People do exercise self-control and self direction if they are committed to organizational goals. The average human being is willing to seek out and take responsibility under certain circumstances. Similarly, many people are capable of exercising imagination, ingenuity and creativity in solving the problems of the organization. These are some of the theories that may help the manager in dealing with human resources and motivating them. Some of the factors that can be employed in an organization for motivating the employee are: (i) Employees should be appreciated and encouraged for the good work (ii) Job enrichment (iii) Lessening of anxiety (iv) Financial incentives (v) Allowing greater freedom and responsibility (vi) Reward and punishment (vii) Proper personnel policies, which consider employee as an asset of the organization (viii) Participative and consultative style of management (ix) Fair wages and salary administration (x) System of performance appraisal and merit rating of employees

Training The main aim of personnel management of any organisation is to get the best quality maximum output from the staff by their performance and the total efficiency of the library depends directly on how well its staff are trained. Hence trained staff is very much essential to fulfil the objectives of personnel management. Among the many requirements which promote best performance of staff, training facilities is also essential which contribute to high performance of the staff. Training is concerned with imparting specific skills for purposes. The training of the staff in libraries includes orientation programmes for new entrants to the libraries; in service training when new tasks are assigned to members of the staff or when new techniques or technologies are introduced in the libraries for any of its operations; and continuing education programmes to keep the staff “well informed of current developments.” The term development refers broadly to the nature and direction of change induced among employees through the process of training and education.

Need for Training (a) It is not possible to recruit trained or experienced hands for all jobs. Therefore, training by the employer is the method for untrained persons to learn how to perform the job.

Unit-VI D 287 (b) Even in case of trained recruits, some special training has to be given by the employer to do specific task of the libraries. (c) The nature of the job is fast changing. New processes and technologies make obsolete many established jobs. Employees also change their jobs, so they have to be retained for these changing tasks and responsibilities.

Merits of Training of the Library Staff The following are the major benefits of training of the staff in the libraries: (a) A systematic training programme helps to reduce the learning time to reach acceptable level of performance. (b) A well trained person usually shows a greater increase and a higher quality of work output than an untrained person. The training increases the skill of the staff members in the performance of particular job of the library. (c) Through the training the best available methods of performing the work can be standardised and made available to all the staff members of the libraries. Standardization will make high level of performance rule rather the exception. (d) Trained staff member is able to make better and economical use of materials and equipments of the library. (e) If the staff member are given proper training the responsibility of the management is lessened. (f) The proper training increases the morale of the staff members of the library and it helps in reducing the dissatisfactions, complaints and absenteeism in the staff members of the library. (g) Under the umbrella of training, several useful functions of management can be performed. Training reduces the need for constant and close supervision.

Leadership There are so many members or workers in an organisation to perform various tasks of the organisation. Everyone of them influences everyone else but not everyone is a leader. Leader is a person who like everyone else and have personnel needs and hopes. In addition he enjoys the formal authority of an influential position. The task of a leader is called leadership. The term leadership, therefore, can be defined as the exercise of influence in an organisation in which, the other persons attribute leadership qualities to the leader. Leaders are leaders because other persons view them as much. So in the case of libraries the librarian is the leader of all the staff.

Importance of Leadership in Libraries Leadership in the libraries can be discussed as under: (a) Guidance and Motivation of the Staff. Planning is to be implemented, we have to convert blue prints into action. This requires continuous guidance and motivation. The librarian guides, directs and motivates his all subordinates who work with and for him to accomplish the results as per the plans and policies. Good leadership in the library itself is a motivating factor for the personnel of the libraries.

288 D Library and Information Science Specific (b) Creating Confidence in the Staff. The librarian can create confidence in other staff members by directing them, giving them advice and getting through them good results in the library. Once an individual person with the help of the librarian puts in high efficiency, he tries to maintain it as he acquires certain level of confidence towards his capacity. (c) Building Morale. Morale is expected as attitude of the staff towards organization, management and voluntary cooperation to offer their ability to the library. High morale leads to high services. Through providing good leadership in the library, staff members can be ensured high services and stability in the library. (d) Use of Persuasion. The librarian must take in the language which all other members of the library can understand. Then only persuasion can deliver the goods. (e) Voluntary Cooperation and Discipline. The librarian must develop voluntary cooperation and voluntary discipline practice in the staff members of the library. Self imposed discipline is most effective. (f) Calculated Risks. The librarian must take calculated risks in all the matters of the library.

Leadership Styles A leadership style refers to a leader behaviour. Behavioural patterns, which the leader reflects in his role as a leader is often described as leadership style. Leadership styles are the results of leaders philosophy, personality, experience and value system. It also depends upon the types of followers and the organizational atmosphere prevailing in the enterprise leader. Different types of leadership styles of leadership styles are discussed below: (1) Autocratic Style. This corresponds to bossing type. In this style little freedom is given to the subordinates. The methods usually followed are scanty delegation of power, issuing instruction, keeping close supervision. Main advantage of autocratic style is that it facilitates quick decisions and helps in getting work done through the subordinates who have necessary knowledge and experience and who prefer to avoid the responsibility. The main disadvantage of autocratic style is that, it results in stifling the initiative of subordinates to whatever extent they possess it an dampening their morale. (2) Free Rein Style. It gives subordinate full power to make decisions and manager acts as a passive onlooker, but supplies necessary information and guidance when sought. The methods adopted by the manager include maximum delegation of authority, minimum of supervision and open door communication. The advantage of this style is, it encourages personal initiative, promotes management development, and improves productivity. Main disadvantage of this style is that subordinate if not competent will make frequent mistakes and he may also lack necessary initiative. (3) Consultative Style. Manager takes his employee in confidence and develops them into working teams with high group loyalty. Consultation is there at all important stages from making of a plan to the enforcement of control measures. Procedures followed in the consultative styles are informal meetings, formal conferences and suggestion from subordinates. The advantages of the above style are that it creates a sense of belongingness among the subordinates through participation, it leads to

Unit-VI D 289 better productivity and manager gets information, which is helpful to accomplish the goals. The limitation of this style is loss of time in holding conferences.

Staff Manual The main and end aim of personal management of any organisation, is to get the maximum quality output from the staff by their best performance. The necessary conditions and environment must exist in the organisation for the staff to fulfil the objectives of personnel management. Among many requirements which promote best performance of the staff, the provision of staff manuals is one of them, which contributes to high performance to the staff. To provide best services to the users, there must be a such type of method also in the libraries, which can ensure their policies and principles. For this, libraries determine their projects, programmes and activities in a booklet, which, in the language of library science, is called Staff Manual. Staff Manuals are needed in the libraries to understand the objectives, duties and responsibilities of the staff members. In this way, staff manuals are guides of work routines giving detailed descriptions of rules, procedures and methods of performing various activities. Every job is analysed in detail with flow charts and diagrams with explanations, indicating junction points with other jobs, giving a total view of work blocks at different levels. Job skills and positions are also usually indicated for different operations. Pictures, photographs and other types of graphic illustrations are provided to supplement the written material.

Aims The main purpose of staff manuals is to help new entrants to get acquainted with every job routine. Staff manuals help supervisory staff to detect bottlenecks in work flow and to restore their smooth functioning. In large libraries, staff manuals are prepared for many of the operations such as book selection, book ordering, preparation of books for stacks, classification and cataloguing, reference queries, bibliographical compilation; circulation control, periodicals receipt and control, preparation of various kinds of documentation lists. In fact for every aspect of work of the libraries, staff manuals are prepared.

Functions of Staff Manuals The staff manuals in libraries are prepared to use for the following functions: (a) Staff manual gets acquainted new entrants with the aims and policies of the library. (b) It determines the number of staff members. (c) The determination of functions and scope of these functions can only be possible through the staff manual in the libraries. (d) It provides all information about the library. (e) Because these are prepared with interactive cooperation in the libraries, hence the experience holder can organise their functions in a better way.

Outlines of Staff Manuals The outlines of a staff manual of any library are as follows: (1) The title page (2) Preface and Introduction

290 D Library and Information Science Specific (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

Introduction of the library Whole details of the staff Details about circulation of documents Details about reference service Index Annexure.

Performance Evaluation Performance evaluation means the systematic evaluation of each individual of the library with respect to his performance on the job and his potential for development is concerned with the determination of the differences between the working of various individuals of a library. It employs rating techniques for comparing individual member among the workgroup in terms of personal efficiencies or deficiencies and the requirements of their respective jobs. Performance evaluation is also termed as performance appraisal, personal appraisal, merit rating, personal rating, etc. Although formal personal appraisal systems are of relatively recent origin. In this way, performance evaluation in the libraries, is the process of evaluating the performance of workers on the job in terms of requirement for the job.

Significance of Performance Evaluation in Libraries (a) Performances evaluation has become a very significant activity in most of the libraries because it provides data about past, present and expected performance of the staff members which is helpful in taking decisions on selection, training and development, increase in pay, promotion, transfers and the like. These days a large amount of money is being spent on the performance evaluation of the staff in the libraries. We receive the following benefits of performance evaluation to justify the expenses on dividing and implementing an appropriate system of performance evaluation. Performance evaluation helps the librarian to find out the performance and to know the potentials of their subordinates systematically. It also helps to assign work to individuals for which they are best suited. Thus, it facilitates the correct placement of the staff of the library. (b) It helps in guiding the staff members of the libraries. The librarian may use the result of the system for the purpose of constructively guiding the staff members in the efficient performance of the work. The members of the staff also come to know where they stand and consequently they try to improve their performance. (c) It also helps in designing the training programmes in a better way. Weaknesses of the members of the staff are revealed by such evaluation and the training programmes can be developed and modified accordingly. (d) It can be used as a basis of sound personal policy in relation to transfer and promotion. If the performance of a staff member of the library is better than others, he can be recommended for promotion but if a person is not doing well on a job, he may be transferred to some other job for which he is considered to be better suited. (e) If the performance evaluation is done scientifically and systematically, it will prevent grievances and develop a sense of confidence amongst the staff members because they are convinced of the impartial basic of evaluation.

Unit-VI D 291

FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT IN LIBRARIES Libraries also have a set of goals to achieve just like other organizations. For achieving their goals libraries have to do so many arrangements regarding staff, reading materials, services and other matters. Finances are very much necessary for doing such arrangements. The basic knowledge of library finances and the items in which the finances used is called financial management. In other words, we can say that financial management is the study of principles and practices involved in financial operations in a library. Financial management deals with the problems of acquisition, distribution and utilization of funds, balancing of revenue and expenditure.

Principles of Financial Management In the libraries, some guiding principles for effective financial management are necessary. They are as follows: (a) Effective Control. Financial control can work efficiently only when it is controlled properly. Control on finances is also essential for the economical use and channelization of resources of income so that there is little wastage and the limited financial resources could be put to maximum use. (b) Simple Procedures. Financial management procedures should be simple and easy in operation. By applying simplicity in the management of finances, we may get efficiency and economy. (c) Regularity and Farsightedness. Financial management should have a typical time table so that every member of the library may acquaint with his expected work to do at a particular point of time. For example, in the budget preparation should come from the heads of sections who would in turn expect cooperation from their staff. The preparation of the budget would be time-bound and submitted to the authorities so that the sanction for the budget could be obtained in time to operate it. The present needs alongwith future needs should also be kept in view. (d) Economy. Economy is must in every activity in financial matters of the library. Therefore, all precautions should be taken to avoid unnecessary expenditure and wasteful use of scarce finances. (e) Flexibility. Financial management should be elastic in nature so as to adjust itself according to circumstances. Only then it can be successful in times of emergency and crisis. The flexibility should be within the framework of financial rules and procedures. This type of adjustment is usually done at the fag end of the financial year. Hence, we may say that the above principles are very much useful in operating and managing finances in various types of libraries, and every librarian should follow them.

Resource Generation The finance plays a very significant role in the organization and management of the libraries, as it is one of the most important elements of management. As libraries are not profit making institution, they have a special requirement for money to manage their finance. Libraries heavily depend on continuous supply of funds for organising their

292 D Library and Information Science Specific activities, programmes and services smoothly. For continuous supply of funds there should be some assured sources of income for each and every library. Different types of libraries receive funds from different sources, though some of them are common to all types of libraries, such as government grants.

Sources of Income for a University Library The following are the sources of income for a university library in our country: (a) From their Own University. The university libraries get financial support from their respective universities out of their own funds. Funds from the university budget, is the chief source of finance for a university library. Allocations are normally made directly to the library by the university. The university has to make allocations sure for its own library out of its own budget. (b) UGC. University Grants Commission, a central agency of the government established for improvement and development of higher education in the country, is the second major source of income to the university library. UGC provides funds to the university libraries in order to enable them to stand on their own feet. The UGC grants are mainly of three types—recurring, non-recurring and ad hoc grants. The recurring grants are given for the purchase of books and periodicals, maintenance of regular services and for anticipated contingency. The non-recurring grants are given for specific purposes like purchase of furniture and some equipments. The ad hoc grant is given for special purposes on the recommendations of the visiting UGC groups. (c) Government. The government grants are not given directly to the university libraries. First the government provides grants to the university and then university allots the necessary share to the library. The grants given by state governments share to the library. The grants given by state governments to the libraries of various universities are mainly non-plan grants. (d) Fees and Caution Money. Some university libraries charges fees form the students who become their members for the use of libraries. Research scholars of each department also charged fee and caution money, which would be returned to them in future. This amount cannot be considered as an adequate source of income for the university library. (e) Fine and Penalties. Perhaps each of the university libraries impose fines and penalties on the late return of books or against loss or misuse of books. Although income from this source is very little therefore it cannot be considered as a main source of income. (f) Other Small Sources. Other small sources may be money received by the rent of seminar hall of the library, sale of any publication and waste paper of reprographic services, rendered, etc.

Types of Budgeting The most central aspect of financial management of the library is the budget, which is a statement of income of and expenditure of the library. The budget provides guidance in spending the appropriated funds through a period of time. It is also an instrument of control, communication, coordination, evaluation, and motivation.

Unit-VI D 293 There are a few methods of preparing library budgets, which include both the traditional approaches used by money organizations and the more innovative ones that have recently found their way into libraries.

Methods of Library Budgeting (a) Line-by-Line Budget. In this type of budget, the items of expenditure are divided line-by-line, into broad categories such as books and journals, salaries and allowances, equipments, contingencies, etc. with further subdivisions of each of these broad categories. This is the usual traditional method which, by taking into account past expenditure on each item, prepares the current budget. The budget is prepared with a small increase of say, 5 to 10 per cent for each major item of expenditure of the previous year’s allocation, assuming that all current programmes are as good and necessary. This budgetary method does not go into the evaluation of activities and services of performance. The advantage of this method is that it is relatively easy to prepare, present and understand. (b) Programme Budget. Programme budget does not estimate the expenditure on the basis of individual items. It is focused on the activities and the funds are to be earmarked for programmes or services that the library plans to provide. Hence the budget is prepared on the basis of the cost of programmes. Every year, the library have to decide whether a programme has to continue, get modified or deleted. The budget is prepared accordingly. In it, provision can be made to each department for various activities. (c) Performance Budget. This method is similar to programme budget but in this method the emphasis is given to performance in place of programmes. The expenditure is based on the performance of activities and the stress is given upon operational efficiency. The careful accumulation of quantitative data on all the activities over a period of time is required. Management techniques such as cost benefit analysis are used to measure the performance and establish norms. Hence this method measure only quantity not quality. (d) Planning Programming Budgeting System (PPBS). PPBS method combines the best of both programme budget and performance budget, and focuses on planning. It begins with the establishment of goals and objectives and ends with formulation of programmes or services. This method combines the functions of planning activities, programmes and services, translating them into tangible projects and finally presents the requirements in budgetary terms. (e) Zero Based Budget. This method is similar to PPBS conceptually but does not take into account of what happened in the past but it emphasises on the current activities. Every programme and activity is spelled out in detail, and request for financial support for these has to be established afresh every year. In fact, no activity could continue simply because that activity was undertaken in the previous year.

Cost-Benefit Analysis There are some basic techniques that are applicable for evaluation of a library or an information centre. They are performance measurement, performance evaluation, costeffectiveness analysis, bibliometrics and cost-benefit analysis.

294 D Library and Information Science Specific Cost benefit analysis happens to be one of the most important aspects of management in general and decision making in particular. To study the feasibility of any system, to evaluate it or to choose one system out of several alternatives the decision making authorities have to make a cost-benefit analysis. In this process, total cost involved in terms of equipments, materials and manpower have to be taken into account and also value of all the benefits, i.e., economy in terms of money, efforts and time involved, being occurred from it, have to be calculated. If the value of benefits is more as compared to the cost involved the system is suitable and if the results are opposite to this, the system is misfit. It is, therefore, essential to have a cost benefit analysis in the libraries instead of blindly following other techniques.

Cost-Benefits Analysis Cost-benefit analysis is that in which economic and social costs are duly considered side by side with economic and social benefits. To proceed with a project, the benefit cost ratio must be more than one or the benefits must be greater than costs. Benefit-cost ratio =

Rupees of benefits Rupess of cost

The ratio must exceed one. The financial analysis looks after economic cost benefit analysis and determines economic profitability from the business enterprise view point primarily. However, a business enterprise is a socioeconomic and open adaptive system. It is expected to fulfil social responsibilities and must show social awareness in its project evaluation and implementation. We consider the total costs (economic and social) and total benefit (economic and social) which will be associated in our project development programme. The project must satisfy economic as well as social aspirations and expectations. Acceptability or otherwise of any project ultimately depends upon its financial implications. We have to evolve a project which is financially viable and sound. We estimate (a) Project cost (b) Project operating cost (c) Project funds requirements. The financial analysis will also indicate relative position of the project as compared with other opportunities available for investment. Present value (PV) technique rate of return (TRR), ratio analysis and cost-volume profit study are the usual tools employed in the financial analysis.

PROJECT MANAGEMENT SWOT Analysis SWOT is a strategic planning tool used to evaluate the strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats to a project. It involves specifying the objective of the project and identifying the internal and external factors that are favourable and unfavourable to achieving that objective. The strengths and weaknesses usually arise from within an organisation, and the opportunities and threats from external sources.

Unit-VI D 295 The SWOT analysis is an important part of the project planning process: n Strengths attributes of the organisation that help achieve the project objective. n Weaknesses attributes of the organisation that stop achievement of the project objective. n Opportunities external conditions that help achieve the project objective. n Threats external conditions that could damage the project. Use the following grid to record each factor: STATE PROJECT OBJECTIVE Strengths (internal factors)

Weaknesses (internal factors)

Track record (similar successes) Resource availability Skill levels Processes and systems Reputation Opportunities (external factors) Technology and infrastructure development Changing consumer behaviour Emerging and developing markets New innovations (R&D) Market demand

Gaps in knowledge and expertise Timescale and deadlines Budget and funding Competing projects Processes and systems Threats (external factors) Political influences Environmental factors Competitor activity Economy Seasonal effects

With a SWOT analysis it is useful to ask these questions: n How can we use our strengths? n How can we address each weakness? n How can we exploit each opportunity? n How can we guard against each threat? Advantages of SWOT n Straightforward and only costs time to do. n Produces new ideas to help take advantage of an organisation’s strengths and defends against threats. n Awareness of political and environmental threats allows an organisation to have response plans prepared. Disadvantages of SWOT n May persuade organisations to compile lists rather than think about what is essential to achieving objectives. n Presents lists uncritically and without clear prioritisation so, for example, weak opportunities may appear to balance strong threats. n Usually, a simple list and not critically presented.

Pest Analysis PEST is a strategic planning tool used to evaluate the impact political, economic, social, and technological factors might have on a project. It involves an organisation considering the external environment before starting a project.

296 D Library and Information Science Specific The PEST analysis is an important part of the project planning process: n Political factors include areas such as tax policy, employment laws, environmental regulation, trade restrictions and tariffs and political stability. n Economic factors are economic growth, interest rates, exchange rates and inflation rate. n Social factors often look at the cultural aspects and include health consciousness, population growth rate, age distribution, career attitudes and emphasis on safety. n Technological factors look at elements such as R&D activity, automation, technology incentives and the rate of technological change. Use the following grid to record each factor: STATE PROJECT OBJECTIVE Political

Economic

Political stability Tax law Employment law Trade restrictions and tariffs Environmental regulations Social Role of men and women in society Division of wealth in society Health and safety Population growth rate

State of the economy Interest rates Exchange rates Inflation rate Taxation Technological Rate of technological change Automation Innovation Recent technological developments

Advantages of PEST n Straightforward and only costs time to do. n Provides an understanding of the wider business environment. n Encourages the development of strategic thinking. n May raise awareness of threats to a project. n Can help an organisation to anticipate future difficulties and take action to avoid or minimise their effect. n Can help an organisation to identify and exploit opportunities. Disadvantages of PEST n Usually, a simple list and not critically presented. n The rapid pace of change in society makes it increasingly difficult to anticipate developments that may affect an organisation in the future. n Collecting large amounts of information may make it difficult to see the wood for the trees and lead to ‘paralysis by analysis’. n Basing the analysis on assumptions that may prove to be unfounded. n PEST analysis only covers the external environment and the results need considering alongside other factors, such as the organisation itself, competitors and the industry in which it is working.

PERT and CPM The acronym PERT stands for Program Evaluation Review Technique and CPM stands for Critical Path Method. Upto this time, we have been using Gantt charts for scheduling

Unit-VI D 297 tasks within projects. PERT is a more precise method for scheduling tasks within projects. PERT is a more precise method for scheduling tasks. While Gantt charts show sequence and time, PERT charts shows sequence by detailed activity and time by hours, days or weeks PERT also shows which task of a system development project or implementation may become a bottleneck. In other words, PERT charts enable the planner to determine which task may be the one that could delay the entire project. You should use PERT charting when a more precise and detailed planning methodology is required. PERT is a planning and control tool for defining and controlling the efforts necessary to accomplish project objective on schedule. PERT is a unique method of graphically illustrating the interrelationships of events and activities required to bring a project objectives on schedule. PERT is a unique method of graphically illustrating the interrelationships of events and activities required to being a project to its conclusion. PERT was development jointly by the United States Navy and the Lockheed Aircraft Corporation; CPM was developed by the Dupoint company. The basic difference between PERT and CPM is that in PERT 3 time estimates are used, while in CPM only one time estimate is used. PERT is a statistical technique. It is both diagnostic and prognostic, and it is used for quantifying knowledge about the uncertainties that are faced in completing all of the individual project activities that lead to the successful conclusion of a major system project. It is a method of focussing management attention on: (i ) Danger signals that require remedial decision in order to prevent the materialization of problems. (ii ) Areas of efforts in which tradeoffs in time, resources, or technical performance might increase the possibility of meeting the major schedule dates of a product. PERT is a tool that aids the decision-maker but does not make the decisions. It is a technique that the systems analyst can use to: (1) Establish coordinated and definitive job activities at the lowest organizational responsibility level. (2) Determine relative importance of each activity. (3) Simulate real or proposed changes in the project and show the effect of these changes on the project. The department manager or the project leader needs a method to organize activities. PERT offers them a method of visually seeing what must be done. PERT provides these management people with: (a) An excellent medium for coordinating the various project tasks, particularly if the project tasks are separated geographically. (b) A definite plan in which each analyst really understands each portion of the whole task and the relative importance of each activity is easily determined. (c) A basis for determining the time to complete each task within the project, as well as the total time required to complete the entire project. (d) Identification of tasks that will delay the entire project if specific tasks do not meet the planned schedule. (e) The means for rescheduling in order to reduce the total time required to meet the projects objective. (f) The criteria for measuring the projects progress.

298 D Library and Information Science Specific PERT is management tools for defining and integrating what must be done to accomplish the project’s objectives on time. It providers a precise method of planning for the development of a new product, the installation of a new computer, the planning of a major systems study and many other projects. PERT can be carried out either by using hand calculation methods or by using a computerised PERT program. When the analyst is using a computerised program, the input format and the specialised output format of the PERT program for whichever computer the company has, must be learned first. PERT hand calculations are often advantageous for small networks of a approximately 150 events or less. Even when a computer facility is available, usable results often may be obtained by hand in a shorter overall elapsed time and at less cost than is possible with use of the computer. A PERT network consists of events and activities. All of the required events are connected by arrows that indicate the preceding and succeeding events. An event (A, B, C, D or E) is the beginning or ending of an activity. An event is looked as a milestone C Start

A

E B

Finish

D

Events have no time dimension and usually are represented by a circle or a box. An activity links 2 successive events together and represents the work required between these 2 events. An activity must be accomplished before the following event can occur. Activities are represented by an arrow. This example of a PERT network contains 5 events (letter A through E) and 6 activities (represented by arrow). In summary, each event represents the accomplishment of a task and each activity represents the time it takes to accomplish that task.

TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT The aim of any profit making organisation or a company is to earn profit, and for that it is important for the company to do more and more business. This can be achieved by having better quality in the business. Total Quality Management is a step towards this desired goal. The concept of TQM has come out through the meaning of quality. Therefore, it is necessary to understand the meaning of quality first.

What is Quality ? The quality of an organization is always focused on customer satisfaction. This is achieved only when all the factors governing customer satisfaction are given even attention. This is quality approach. Quality is a continuous and unending process. Many people including professionals are confused about what quality means. The confusion arises because the term quality cannot be easily defined. A common man might define quality as superior or

Unit-VI D 299 exceptionally high standards of goods and services. The experts in this field, defines quality as a value, conformance to requirements. In other words quality is a measure of achievement of an organization in terms of customer satisfaction. For example, an organisation does not give satisfaction to customers, if the staff are unfriendly or unhelpful when dealing with customers. This act would be regarded Poor Quality Service, which would bring discredit to the organization, despite its good and defect free products.

Concepts The concept of quality has given the concept of total quality management in the field of management or organization. Total Quality Management (TQM) is a concept which make quality the responsibility of all people within an organization. All the persons involved are expected to contribute to the overall improvement of quality. TQM is the preferred method to increase the user satisfaction. It reduces the defects of the organization and increases the productivity.

Characteristics of Total Quality Management The following are the main characteristics of Total Quality Management: (1) To become user driven rather than self-focused. (2) To concentrate on process rather than to be preoccupied with results. (3) Use of workers heads in addition to their hands. (4) External and internal alignment. (5) Total involvement, continuous improvement and leadership commitment. (6) Requires fundamental changes in workers management, beating them as an everappreciating asset. Total Quality Management is a way of managing to improve the effectiveness, efficiency, flexibility and competitiveness of an organization as a whole and it involves whole organization getting organized and committed to quality in each department, each activity and each person at each level. For the success of TQM effecting training, effective implementation and executive involvement is essential.

Six Sigma Six Sigma is a disciplined, statistical-based, data-driven approach and continuous improvement methodology for eliminating defects in a product, process or service. It was developed by Motorola and Bill Smith in the early 1980’s based on quality management fundamentals, then became a popular management approach at General Electric (GE) with Jack Welch in the early 1990’s. The approach was based on the methods taught by W. Edwards Deming, Walter Shewhart and Ronald Fisher among many others. Hundreds of companies around the world have adopted Six Sigma as a way of doing business. Sigma represents the population standard deviation, which is a measure of the variation in a data set collected about the process. If a defect is defined by specification limits separating good from bad outcomes of a process, then a six sigma process has a process mean (average) that is six standard deviations from the nearest specification limit. This provides enough buffer between the process natural variation and the specification limits.

300 D Library and Information Science Specific The martial arts belt structure is used to recognize proficiency in training and application in Six Sigma, using the following colors: n White Belt – Overview, DMAIC. n Yellow Belt – White Belt + process mapping, data collection and charting, assisting with a project. n Green Belt – Yellow Belt + Project leader, core Six Sigma tools (Gage R&R, SPC, Capability, ANOVA, Regression), change management, hypothesis tests and more. n Black Belt – Green Belt + advanced statistical analysis and experiments, change management, nonnormal distributions. n Master Black Belt – Black Belt + Design for Six Sigma, more advanced statistical analysis, unique tools for specific industries and processes, working with leadership, implementing successful improvement programs.

Evaluation of Services of Library and Information Centres Libraries and Information Centre is a service organization, which requires constant transformation in order to exist in the fast changing world today. Presently the library professionals are very keen in assessing the library, its components, processes, services and their performance at regular intervals to make sure that the library meets its objective and satisfying their users with needed information in time. Libraries assess their services with a vast amount of information collected on numerical data on expenditure, documents added and journals subscribed, documents issued etc. They assess their effectiveness to meet the document and information requirements of the users. Libraries evaluate their operations and services and compare the results with stipulated standards to see whether their works and services are up-to a desire level. It was also made certain whether the users were satisfied with the library resources and services as a means for assessing the quality of library resources and services. Libraries, even in the past, evaluated or measured the quality of their operations and services, in one-way or the others, based on quantitative data. But they did not measure the quality aspects like the role of friendliness of staff or attractiveness of building and furniture or cleanliness of library premises, or accessibility etc. in using the library effectively. Now library professional find themselves in a situation where they cannot just be satisfied with the traditional way of evaluating or measuring books and journals, its loan, use etc., but they also have to evaluate and assess their target users, their needs, interests and tastes, the perception of service quality etc. Greater attention to evaluation, performance, measurement, and audit in libraries and information center is needed today mainly because of growing demand for greater accountability in university libraries. Wallace & Van Fleet (2001) and others have noted that there are a growing number of reasons why it is essential for librarians and other information professionals to evaluate their organizations’ operations, resources, and services. Among those reasons are the needs for organizations to – (i) account for how they use their limited resources, (ii) explain what they do, (iii) enhance their visibility, (iv) describe their impact (v) increase efficiency (vi) avoid errors (vii) support planning activities (viii) express concern for their public (ix) support decision making and (x) strengthen their political position.

Unit-VI D 301 For this study library evaluation, performance evaluation, performance measurement, performance audit and how these terms are related among themselves have been discussed. How these evaluation techniques have been applied in the field of library and information science to give better services to its users with the minimum economy and highest efficiency and effectiveness.

Library Evaluation Every organization is aimed to attain its objectives efficiently, effectively, economically and timely. Evaluation is the process through which it is testified that whether the objectives are achieved and if so, to what extent. It also testifies whether the resources spent have properly resulted in the attainment of the desired objectives. The changing needs of library management necessitate the library evaluation and enhanced possibilities of analysis. There is a culture of evaluation exists in libraries, but the methods of evaluation used are different. Evaluation of library and information services is an integral part of good library management. It is necessary to convince the funders and users that the service is delivering the expected benefits. It is an internal control mechanism to ensure that the resources are effectively and efficiently used. Evaluation is a judgment of worth, assessing the value of the organization to the people for whom it is meant. It assesses the performance against users’ expectations, or it is  the testing of an organization or system for effectiveness and efficiency. Lancaster (1977) suggested three levels of library evaluation, namely measurement of effectiveness, costeffectiveness, and cost-benefit. Similarly, Vickery & Vickery (1987) have suggested the evaluation of the effectiveness of economic efficiency and value of system and Moore (1989) evaluated the library in three levels, namely efficiency, performance, and effectiveness. Alemna (1999) discussed library evaluation methods might be either subjective or objective. Subjective method is based on user opinions or attitudes. Questionnaire or interview method is used here to collect user opinions to measure the effectiveness of a library. It is assumed that user evaluations are the valid indicators of library performance. The evaluation of a library will show how far the library objectives are met through the physical facilities, collection, information, and services offered to the users. Evaluation or measurement of library effectiveness is a complex issue, as there are no universally accepted measures, measuring units or methods for this study. There is little agreement about what is to be measured. It is necessary to find out things, processes, and phenomena that are measurable and where the measures would be valid indicators of effectiveness and benefits.

Performance Evaluation in Libraries and Information Centers Performance evaluation of a library and information system or its components can be required for different reasons. For example, the evaluation of the performance of library and information systems and the resulting data could be used to assess how well the system meets its objectives or for justification of continuance of a service. It can be used to convince institutions that the library needs the same relative share of the institutional budget, even if the budget itself is shrinking. It may allow a librarian to demonstrate how one’s library stands in relation to others. It can help the librarian to describe the extent, range, and importance of the service being provided and that it is being given efficiently.

302 D Library and Information Science Specific It may be used to assess how well the library and information system contributes to achieving the goals of parent constituents. It can diagnose particular problem areas of service or monitor progress towards specification or even compare past, current and desired level of performance. It can identify areas where improvement is needed. Finally, it can identify what we have yet to accomplish and to communicate what we do, how well we do it and what we need to accomplish them or to provide evidence that the expectations of a variety of stakeholders are being met. However, there is an overwhelming agreement that library and information systems first and foremost have to justify their existence and the cost to their constituencies. Secondly, they have to be evaluated in order for their managers to find out if there are any deficiencies in the system and to determine what needs to be improved. Therefore, we can say that performance evaluation is done for both “internal” and “external” purposes. Performance Measurement in Libraries and Information Centers An emphasis on efficiency and cost-effectiveness in library and information services has led to an increasing focus on performance measures. Shepherd (2000) defines performance measurement as ‘about assessing how well a service fulfills its purpose, and how well it makes its contribution. There is often an implication that it involves relating contribution (or outcomes) to inputs (or resources).’ Although studies on the measurement of the effectiveness of services in libraries were carried out in the 1970s and 1980s, the last decade has seen a sharp rise in the number of studies of performance measurement in library and information services (LIS) worldwide. The seminal work of Van House et al. (1990) presented a set of practical output measures for academic libraries that were service orientated with an emphasis on user satisfaction surveys to inform the development of the measures. King Research Ltd. (1990) developed performance measures for public libraries, while McClure & Lopta, (1996) compiled a draft set of performance indicators for the International Standards Organization (ISO, 1995). In 1996 IFLA produced guidelines that concentrated on measuring the effectiveness of a library in meeting its goals (Poll & Boekhorst, Measuring Quality: International Guidelines for Performance Measurement in Academic Libraries. IFLA Section of University Libraries and Other General Research Libraries, 1996) & Measuring Quality: Performance Measurement in Libraries (Poll & Boekhorst, Measuring Quality, Performance Measurement in Libraries, 2007) while focusing mainly on traditional measures, these guidelines included the innovative performance indicator ‘User satisfaction with services offered for remote users’. About this time, also, the Joint Funding Council’s group produced a framework for evaluating the performance of UK academic libraries entitled ‘The effective academic library’.

LIBRARY BUILDINGS AND EQUIPMENTS Library is a place where interaction between the user and his required document takes place. To carry out this activity, the library must be planned well and the building of the same must be at the place, which is approachable by the users easily. Its design should be inviting and attractive. For all of this, the building of the library should be planned before its construction very carefully.

Unit-VI D 303 The library building is the outcome of a close relationship of the librarian with the architect. An ideal library is a happy combination of both function and design. The librarian not only draws up the preliminary plan based on the considerations such as users, location, resources, and team work, etc., but he should also be in touch with architect at every stage of the plan. For building up a library, the following points also must be considered. (1) Selection of Suitable Site of Building. For selecting the site to build up a library, so many factors are determined. While a central location is of paramount consideration in an academic campus, the same consideration is not suitable in case of special library. Sometimes safety and other considerations are also decided. Some other aspects such as good elevation, adequate space for future expansion and land with good soil conditions are also considered before selecting the site for he library. (2) Size of the Library Building. Second factor for building up a library is the size for consideration. For this, the consideration points are the number of users, variety and range of services provided, size and types of stored documents, total present collection and the rate of the growth, the strength of the staff and extension, etc. (3) Architecture of the Library. Building of any library should be designed by keeping in view the library activities as specialized activities. For this a congenial environment is required. The design should be based upon and correlated with the functions and services of the library. Library is a speciality with the functions and services of the library. Library is a specialized institution likes a temple, church or a hospital, therefore, its speciality and individuality should be reflected in its architecture. (4) Lighting Arrangement. The main activity in a library is the reading for which adequate lighting is essential. Poor light strains on the eyes of the readers. On the hand, glare is equally strenuous, and direct sunlight on the books is positively harmful. Hence glare of the Sun inside the library building should be avoided, so also shadows cast by artificial lighting particularly in the reading and service areas. It is not only the quantity of light that is important, but also the quality of light has to be made to blend and complement natural light and artificial light. Provision for emergency lighting should also be made in the building.

Performance Evaluation of Libraries/Information Centres and Services Evaluation of any service, process or activity in management usually refers to determining its worth or assessment, valuation, appraisal, criticism, review, calculation, measurement or need to know closely the utility.

Objectives of Evaluation (i ) It assesses the reasons, specific successes and failures (ii ) It helps to uncover principles underlying success (iii ) Explores techniques of improving effectiveness (iv) Establishes foundation for further resources Evaluation of library and information centre is of 2 types, viz. Micro evaluation and Macro evaluation: (a) In macro evaluation it considers library as a whole system and details of its components are not taken into consideration. Here result after evaluation is statement of performance.

304 D Library and Information Science Specific (b) Micro evaluation in this evaluation system and its components are considered separately. Micro evaluation can enable recommendations to made for improvements to a system, whereas macro evaluation cannot do more than indicated improvements are required.

Green Library Buildings This world is very beautiful creation of God. Earlier it was green everywhere. In green forest varieties of animals, insects, respiratory, mammals were found. Population of human being are increasing day-by-day and for the survival of human beings, greenery of these forests is decreasing. Continuous destructions of natural resources have taken place in the form of natural disasters like earthquake, flood, and change in climate, tsunami and man-made disasters etc. We, human beings are the civilized being and we should use different types of techniques to preserve our resources. Numbers of awareness programme are organized by different types of institutions, Government bodies, social organization, NGOs for the sustenance and protection of our environment. Water pollution, air pollution, climate change, soil erosion, loss in energy etc. are the major problems in our earth, and because of these problems different types of disasters occur on our environment. Modern architectures are using latest technologies to construct modern buildings as energy efficient or eco-friendly building so that buildings do not harm the natural environment but become capable to preserve the environmental entities and based on these techniques a library building can be exist. According to Wikipedia “a green library is designed to minimize negative impact on the natural environment and maximize indoor environmental quality by means of careful site selection, use of natural construction materials and biodegradable products, conservation of resources and responsible waste disposal”. LEED as an international council for rating the green buildings all over the world and IGBC rates buildings in India.

IGBC Indian Green Building Council (IGBC) was formed by Confederation of Indian Industry (CII) in 2001. They are continuously striving towards wider adoption of eco-friendly and green building concepts in the Indian industries. The Confederation of Indian Industry (CII) – Green Business Centre building in Hyderabad is one of the green buildings in India. The vision of the council is, "To enable a sustainable built environment for all and facilitate India to be one of the global leaders in the sustainable built environment by 2025". The council is committee-based, member-driven and consensus-focused. All the stakeholders of construction industry comprising of architects, developers, product manufacturers, corporate, Government, academia and nodal agencies participate in the council activities through local chapters. The council also closely works with several State Governments, Central Government, World Green Building Council, bilateral multilateral agencies in promoting green building concepts in the country. Green building rating brings together a host of sustainable practices and solutions to reduce the environmental impacts. Green building design provides an integrated approach considering life cycle impacts of the resources used. An important development in the growth of green building movement in India is the launch of the following IGBC Green Building Rating Systems:

Unit-VI D 305 n n n n n n n n

IGBC Green New Buildings n IGBC Green Homes n IGBC Green Interiors n IGBC Green Schools n IGBC Green Campus n IGBC Green Townships n IGBC Green SEZs n IGBC Green Mass Rapid Transit System

IGBC Green Existing Buildings IGBC Green Residential Societies IGBC Green Healthcare IGBC Green Factory Buildings IGBC Green Villages IGBC Green Cities IGBC Green Landscapes

How are Libraries Becoming Green? Green design is an integrated process. None of the aspect of a building's architecture makes its green architecture. Without proper integration from the earliest moments of the planning phase, redundancies can occur, eliminating many of the potential benefits of sustainable design. Good sustainable design capitalizes on the synergistic relationships that occur between the various design elements. Buildings can be designed in such a way in which, good design in one category helps another category to fulfil its goal. LEED and IGBC mainly focused on these elements into five categories: 1. Site selection. Choosing a good site for the library building is very important. Site has a large impact on how ecologically friendly the library will be. LEED provides guidelines for site selection. There are a number of questions to consider that will help guide the site selection process, including what kind of impact will construction have on the local environment, will there be erosion, what can be done with storm runoff, and is the site already green? Libraries should be located in a densely populated area, near a number of other service related buildings. People should be able to reach the building via public transportation and the parking lots should give priority, parking to those driving energy efficient automobiles, like bi-cycle, electric car, etc. The heat island effect can be reduced by shading hard surfaces, putting them underground, or by implementing a vegetative roof. 2. Water conservation. Most of the Asian countries are water stressed and in countries like India, the water table has reduced drastically over the last decade. IGBC Green New Buildings rating system encourages use of water in a selfsustainable manner through reduce, recycle and reuse strategies. There are so many ways for libraries to conserve water. A number of them rely on proper site selection. If a site is selected properly, strategies can be used to capture rainwater runoff to be used in irrigation. Extra tank can be maintained for rainwater harvesting and it can use for toilets, bathrooms, irrigations, cleaning and for other things. 3. Energy conservation. Use of Solar and Wind Power can be utilised inside the library and energy can be saved. The building sector is a large consumer of electrical energy. Through IGBC rating system, buildings can reduce energy consumption through energy efficient building envelope, lighting, air conditioning systems, etc., Energy efficiency is considered by many to be the most important category in becoming sustainable. In the LEED rating system it is the heaviest weighted of all the categories. On site renewable energy systems, includes solar, wind, and geothermal, provide an independent supply of energy.

306 D Library and Information Science Specific 4. Building materials. Recycled waste products are to be used as materials for library buildings without causing too much damage to the natural environment. Recycled products can be unused papers, plastics, tyres of cars, broken furnitures etc. And these products can save many trees for not using wood. It also includes use of biodegradable materials, non-use of plastics and other such products. 5. Indoor air quality. Building should be designed well for indoor air quality. Proper use of ventilation is to be made for air filtration. The lack of ventilation makes buildings expensive to cool and also traps harmful toxins that can do serious headache, fatigue, sinus congestion, nausea, skin irritation etc. Toxins come from a variety of sources. Materials that are used for making the library, including paints and carpeting; have volatile organic compounds (VOCs). They produce ground-level ozone after reacting with sunlight and nitrogen. The carbon dioxide that people breathe into the atmosphere is another toxic gas. To improve air quality, materials having low VOC content and CO2 monitors, thermal comfort, Air Contaminant Concentrations, Combustion Products have to be installed which give a pleasing comfort to people who are spending maximum time inside the rooms. Therefore, green buildings need to be designed in a way in which the air gets recycled and does not stay stagnant. A green library is not just about taking care of the environment, it is about taking care of the health and well-being of those who work in it and patronize it. Some Green Library Buildings in the World: n National Library, Singapore n Public Library of Charlotte and Mecklenburg County n Children's Museum of Pittsburgh n University of California, Merced Kolligian Library n Minneapolis Public Library n Council Tree Library, Fort Collins, Co n Candler Library, Emory University, Atlanta, GA n Dexter Libary, Ashland n Eden Prairie Library, Eden Prairie. n Harperwoods Public Library n Kilton Public Library, West Lebanon n Osining Public Library, New York Some Green Library Buildings in India: n Anna-Centenary Library, Chennai n Perma Karpo Library, Ladakh n National Library of India, Kolkata n Karnataka University Library n NIT, Library Silchar Assam, India n NIT Trichy – Library n Delhi University Library n Culcutta University Library n Madras University Library n Mumbai University Library

Unit-VI D 307

INFORMATION COMMONS An information commons is an information system, such as a physical library or online community, that exists to produce, conserve, and preserve information for current and future generations. Wikipedia could be considered to be an information commons to the extent that it produces and preserves information through current versions of articles and histories. Other examples of an information commons include Creative Commons. The concept of the “information commons” refers to the shared knowledge-base and the processes that facilitate or hinder its use. It also refers to a physical space, usually in an academic library, where any and all can participate in the processes of information research, gathering and production. The term commons refers to the land (or common grounds) that villagers shared for grazing purposes in simpler times. The issues that fall under this topic are varied and include: n Licenses written to access digital content, n Copyright law and similar intellectual property, n Freedom of information, n International trade, n Privacy, n Open-source software, n Open-access publishing, n Academic libraries integrated with CIT facilities, particularly in the United States, but including: l Information Commons, a learning and study space at the University of Sheffield; l Business/SPEA Information Commons, Indiana University, created August 2007. Some believe that the increasing control and commodification of information restricts humanity’s ability to encourage and foster positive developments in its cultural, academic, and economic growth.

The Internet The internet took the information commons to another level. The internet age empowered consumers to become creators, producers, and distributors of information. The internet facilitated a decentralized production and distribution of information. It bypasses the control of some of the more traditional publishing methods. These information are neither regulated by managers nor are they coordinated by price signals in the market. This result in a common-based production of knowledge that can be easily shared among individuals.

Software Commons The software commons consists of all computer software which is available at little or no cost and which can be reused with few restrictions. It includes open source software which can be modified with few restrictions. However the commons also includes software outside of these categories – for instance, software which is in the public domain.

308 D Library and Information Science Specific Many innovative programmers have and released open source applications to the public, without the restrictive licensing conditions of commercial software. A popular example is Linux, a open source operating system. The server computers for Google Search run Linux.

Licensing Commons Licensing is the process that copyright owners use to monitor reproduction, distribution, or other use of creative works. Many commercial licensing conditions are costly and restrictive. Licensing models used in information commons typically grant permission for a wide range of uses. The GNU General Public License (GPL), developed by Richard Stallman at MIT in the 1980s is one such license: ”The GNU Free Documentation License is a form of copyleft intended for use on a manual, textbook or other document to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifications, either commercially or non-commercially.”

Scholarly Commons “In the 1980s, many professional societies turned over their journal publishing to private firms as a way to contain membership fees and generate income.” Prices of scholarly journals rose dramatically and publishing corporations restricted access to these journals through expensive licenses. Research libraries had no other choice but to cut many of their journal subscriptions. European and American academic communities began to find alternate ways to distribute and manage scholarly information. The Scholarly Publishing and Academic Resources Coalition (SPARC) was founded in 1998. “It is an international alliance of academic and research libraries working to correct imbalances in the scholarly publishing system. Its pragmatic focus is to stimulate the emergence of new scholarly communication models that expand the dissemination of scholarly research and reduce financial pressures on libraries.”

Library Makerspace A library makerspace, also named Hackerspace or Hacklab, is an area and/or service that offers library patrons an opportunity to create intellectual and physical materials using resources such as computers, 3-D printers, audio and video capture and editing tools, and traditional arts and crafts supplies. In the field of library science, makerspaces are classified as a type of library service offered by librarians to patrons. In a library makerspace or maker program, patrons of varying ages can work together, alone, or with library staff on creative projects. These spaces often give community members access to tools, technology, and social connections that may not be easily accessible otherwise. The goal of a makerspace is to allow patrons to learn through direct experimentation and from each other. Library makerspaces do not require specified areas; a pre-existing space can be temporarily modified (or “made”) to better suit the needs of participants. It is more about the intentions of the makers than about the qualities of the space itself. The force behind the initial “maker movement” is believed to be the creation of Make: magazine in 2005, which published information about maker-related projects. The momentum grew when the magazine devised a series of venues for makers to express themselves and share their creations deemed “maker faires”. Libraries took notice and

Unit-VI D 309 began offering programs and redesigning spaces to address related interests within their communities. The first public library with a maker space was the Fayetteville Free Library.

Purposes A library makerspace is intended to allow community members to experience technology or activities that they previously were not able to access. As many maker spaces include technology like 3D printers, sewing machines, soldering guns, coding, robotics, and wood carving machines, patrons are invited to experiment freely. The purpose of a maker space is often expressed to be inspiring an interest in science, technology, design, and lifelong learning in the people who are served by the library. Over time, it is expected that the available activities within each individual maker space will grow to reflect the interests of each community in which the library is housed. Makerspaces are also intended to allow minorities or underrepresented populations, like women, or people with disabilities, to become involved with technology and fields they may not have previously considered.

Types of Activities and Technology There are many types of makerspaces offered as a library service. They are usually developed around a certain type of medium, technology, or even patron age group. Some examples include computer programming and coding, CryptoParties, digital privacy workshops, Free Software advocacy, robotics and electronics, 3D modeling and printing, laser cutting, board games, and traditional arts and crafts. Although experts in the area may be available, the community atmosphere of the space allows patrons to learn from each other and experiment rather than receive lessons. Maker spaces have also grown to allow patrons to take classes to develop a certain skill, like cooking, sewing or yoga.

Security and Safety in Library Safety is an issue of great importance in libraries of all types, though the most pressing safety issues are ever-evolving. There are a number of resources to assist with safeguarding patrons, employees, and property. In the 21st century this topic also extends to internet safety and security. Many libraries are establishing resource guides with indepth information related to safety and security. A good example that covers basic safety can be found at Wayne State University Library’s web site: https://library.wayne.edu/ info/policies/safety/general/tips.php. Another good example can be found at Mugar Memorial Library at Boston University http://www.bu.edu/library/mugar-memorial/ about/security/. There are at least four subtopics to the general topic: (1) precautions to protect patrons and staff against acts of violence; (2) safeguarding collection materials from theft/ vandalism; (3) internet protection; and, (4) procedural safeguards and response plans for natural and man-made disasters. This wiki primarily treats subtopic 1, personal safety (for patrons and staff): precautions against acts of violence, and subtopic 2, precautions to protect against theft, as these two aspects are what primarily affect patrons. Subtopic 3 is generally best treated in forums associated with IT, while subtopic 4 has a well-established body of literature referred to

310 D Library and Information Science Specific as disaster preparedness or disaster planning. A 5th topic, workplace safety, which deals with occupational safety hazards, is most commonly considered with employment issues.

Creating Policies and Procedures For libraries that do not yet have a robust set of policies and procedures, one good way to get started is to first read short general treatments of the subject with hints for addressing low-hanging fruit. A very useful and motivating step in establishing a security program in an academic library is to establish a set of web pages on the public side of the library’s website with basic information on safety and security within the context of one’s parent institution. Examples include publishing a clear code of acceptable conduct with consequences for violations; links to campus safety resources such as police sponsored student escort services; routines to follow in reporting loss of property (i.e., lost and found and theft reports); pages giving applicable statutes prohibiting theft or mutilation of library materials; and/or pages noting special access procedures usually enforced for special collections. At a minimum, every academic library should have a page with tips on personal safety and security.

LIBRARY MANAGEMENT Management Information System (MIS) MIS is the use of information technology, people, and business processes to record, store and process data to produce information that decision makers can use to make day to day decisions. MIS is the acronym for Management Information Systems. In a nutshell, MIS is a collection of systems, hardware, procedures and people that all work together to process, store, and produce information that is useful to the organization.

The need for MIS The following are some of the justifications for having an MIS system: n Decision makers need information to make effective decisions. Management Information Systems (MIS) make this possible. n MIS systems facilitate communication within and outside the organization – employees within the organization are able to easily access the required information for the day to day operations. Facilitates such as Short Message Service (SMS) and Email make it possible to communicate with customers and suppliers from within the MIS system that an organization is using. n Record keeping – management information systems record all business transactions of an organization and provide a reference point for the transactions.

Components of MIS The major components of a typical management information system are: n People – people who use the information system.

Unit-VI D 311 n n n n

Data – the data that the information system records. Business Procedures – procedures put in place on how to record, store and analyze data. Hardware – these include servers, workstations, networking equipment, printers, etc. Software – these are programs used to handle the data. These include programs such as spreadsheet programs, database software, etc.

Types of Information Systems The type of information system that a user uses depends on their level in an organization. The following diagram shows the three major levels of users in an organization and the type of information system that they use. Transaction Processing Systems (TPS) This type of information system is used to record the day to day transactions of a business. An example of a Transaction Processing System is a Point of Sale (POS) system. A POS system is used to record the daily sales. Management Information Systems (MIS) Management Information Systems are used to guide tactic managers to make semistructured decisions. The output from the transaction processing system is used as input to the MIS system. Decision Support Systems (DSS) Decision support systems are used by top level managers to make semi-structured decisions. The output from the Management Information System is used as input to the decision support system. DSS systems also get data input from external sources such as current market forces, competition, etc.

MBO Management by objectives (MBO) is a strategic management model that aims to improve the performance of an organization by clearly defining objectives that are agreed to by both management and employees. According to the theory, having a say in goal setting and action plans encourages participation and commitment among employees, as well as aligning objectives across the organization.

The Basics of Management by Objectives Management by objectives (MBO) is the establishment of a management information system to compare actual performance and achievements to the defined objectives. Practitioners claim that the major benefits of MBO are that it improves employee motivation and commitment and allows for better communication between management and employees. However, a cited weakness of MBO is that it unduly emphasizes the setting of goals to attain objectives, rather than working on a systematic plan to do so. In his book that coined the term, Peter Drucker set forth several principles. Objectives are laid out with the help of employees and are meant to be challenging but achievable. Employees receive daily feedback, and the focus is on rewards rather than punishment.

312 D Library and Information Science Specific Personal growth and development are emphasized, rather than negativity for failing to reach objectives. Drucker believed MBO was not a cure-all but a tool to be utilized. It gives organizations a process, with many practitioners claiming that the success of MBO is dependent on the support from top management, clearly outlined objectives, and trained managers who can implement it.

Key Takeaways n

n

n

Management by objectives (MBO) is a strategic management model that aims to improve the performance of an organization by clearly defining objectives that are agreed to by both management and employees. According to the theory, having a say in goal setting and action plans encourages participation and commitment among employees, as well as aligning objectives across the organization. The strategy was formulated by Peter Drucker in the 1950s, following five steps that organizations should follow. Management by Objectives in Practice. Management by objectives outlines five steps that organizations should use to put the management technique into practice. 1. The first step is to either determine or revise organizational objectives for the entire company. This broad overview should be derived from the firm's mission and vision. 2. The second step is to translate the organizational objectives to employees. Drucker used the acronym SMART (specific, measurable, acceptable, realistic, time-bound) to express the concept. 3. Step three is stimulating the participation of employees in setting individual objectives. After the organization's objectives are shared with employees, from the top to the bottom, employees should be encouraged to help set their own objectives to achieve these larger organizational objectives. This gives employees greater motivation since they have greater empowerment. 4. Step four involves monitoring the progress of employees. In step two, a key component of the objectives was that they are measurable in order for employees and managers to determine how well they are met. 5. The fifth step is to evaluate and reward employee progress. This step includes honest feedback on what was achieved and not achieved for each employee.

Change Management Change management is the discipline that guides how we prepare, equip and support individuals to successfully adopt change in order to drive organizational success and outcomes. While all changes are unique and all individuals are unique, decades of research shows there are actions we can take to influence people in their individual transitions. Change management provides a structured approach for supporting the individuals in your organization to move from their own current states to their own future states.

Unit-VI D 313

Three Levels of Change Management Individual Change Management While it is the natural psychological and physiological reaction of humans to resist change, we are actually quite resilient creatures. When supported through times of change, we can be wonderfully adaptive and successful. Individual change management requires understanding how people experience change and what they need to change successfully. It also requires knowing what will help people make a successful transition: what messages do people need to hear when and from whom, when the optimal time to teach someone a new skill is, how to coach people to demonstrate new behaviors, and what makes changes “stick” in someone’s work. Individual change management draws on disciplines like psychology and neuroscience to apply actionable frameworks to individual change. After years of studying how individuals experience and are influenced in times of change, Prosci developed the ADKAR Model for individual change. Today, it is one of the most widely used change models in the world.

Organizational/Initiative Change Management While change happens at the individual level, it is often impossible for a project team to manage change on a person-by-person basis. Organizational or initiative change management provides us with the steps and actions to take at the project level to support the hundreds or thousands of individuals who are impacted by a project. Organizational change management involves first identifying the groups and people who will need to change as the result of the project, and in what ways they will need to change. Organizational change management then involves creating a customized plan for ensuring impacted employees receive the awareness, leadership, coaching, and training they need in order to change successfully. Driving successful individual transitions should be the central focus of the activities in organizational change management. Organizational change management is complementary to your project management. Project management ensures your project’s solution is designed, developed and delivered, while change management ensures your project’s solution is effectively embraced, adopted and used.

Enterprise Change Management Capability Enterprise change management is an organizational core competency that provides competitive differentiation and the ability to effectively adapt to the ever-changing world. An enterprise change management capability means effective change management is embedded into your organization’s roles, structures, processes, projects and leadership competencies. Change management processes are consistently and effectively applied to initiatives, leaders have the skills to guide their teams through change, and employees know what to ask for in order to be successful. The end result of an enterprise change management capability is that individuals embrace change more quickly and effectively, and organizations are able to respond quickly to market changes, embrace strategic initiatives, and adopt new technology more quickly

314 D Library and Information Science Specific and with less productivity impact. This capability does not happen by chance, however, and requires a strategic approach to embed change management across an organization.

Disaster Management Disaster Management can be defined as the organization and management of resources and responsibilities for dealing with all humanitarian aspects of emergencies, in particular preparedness, response and recovery in order to lessen the impact of disasters.

Crisis Management A sudden and unexpected event leading to major unrest amongst the individuals at the workplace is called as organization crisis. In other words, crisis is defined as any emergency situation which disturbs the employees as well as leads to instability in the organization. Crisis affects an individual, group, organization or society on the whole.

Characteristics of Crisis Crisis is a sequence of sudden disturbing events harming the organization. Crisis generally arises on a short notice. Crisis triggers a feeling of fear and threat amongst the individuals.

Why Crisis? Crisis can arise in an organization due to any of the following reasons: n Technological failure and Breakdown of machines lead to crisis. Problems in internet, corruption in the software, errors in passwords all result in crisis. n Crisis arises when employees do not agree to each other and fight amongst themselves. Crisis arises as a result of boycott, strikes for indefinite periods, disputes and so on. n Violence, thefts and terrorism at the workplace result in organization crisis. n Neglecting minor issues in the beginning can lead to major crisis and a situation of uncertainty at the work place. The management must have complete control on its employees and should not adopt a casual attitude at work. n Illegal behaviors such as accepting bribes, frauds, data or information tampering all lead to organization crisis. n Crisis arises when organization fails to pay its creditors and declares itself a bankrupt organization.

Crisis Management The art of dealing with sudden and unexpected events which disturbs the employees, organization as well as external clients refers to Crisis Management. The process of handling unexpected and sudden changes in organization culture is called as crisis management.

Need for Crisis Management n

Crisis Management prepares the individuals to face unexpected developments and adverse conditions in the organization with courage and determination.

Unit-VI D 315 n n n n

Employees adjust well to the sudden changes in the organization. Employees can understand and analyze the causes of crisis and cope with it in the best possible way. Crisis Management helps the managers to devise strategies to come out of uncertain conditions and also decide on the future course of action. Crisis Management helps the managers to feel the early signs of crisis, warn the employees against the aftermaths and take necessary precautions for the same.

Essential Features of Crisis Management n

n n n n n n

Crisis Management includes activities and processes which help the managers as well as employees to analyze and understand events which might lead to crisis and uncertainty in the organization. Crisis Management enables the managers and employees to respond effectively to changes in the organization culture. It consists of effective coordination amongst the departments to overcome emergency situations. Employees at the time of crisis must communicate effectively with each other and try their level best to overcome tough times. Points to keep in mind during crisis Don’t panic or spread rumours around. Be patient. At the time of crisis the management should be in regular touch with the employees, external clients, stake holders as well as media. Avoid being too rigid. One should adapt well to changes and new situations.

KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT Knowledge management is concerned with the exploitation and development of the knowledge assets of an organization with a view to furthering the organization’s objectives. The knowledge to be managed includes both explicit, documentary knowledge and tacit or subjective knowledge, which resides in the minds of employees. Knowledge management embraces all of the processes associated with the identification, sharing and creation of information. Successful knowledge management requires systems for the management of knowledge repositories, and to cultivate and facilitate the sharing of knowledge and organizational learning. Knowledge management projects focus on one or more of the following four objectives: (a) To create knowledge repositories, which store both knowledge and information, often in documentary form. A common feature is ‘added value’ through categorization and pruning. (b) To improve knowledge access, or to provide access to knowledge or to facilitate its transfer among individuals; here the emphasis is on connectivity, access and transfer, and technologies such as video conferencing systems, document scanning and sharing tools and telecommunications networks are central to this objective. (c) To enhance the knowledge environment so that the environment is conducive to more effective knowledge creation, transfer and use. This involves tackling organizational norms and values as they relate to knowledge.

316 D Library and Information Science Specific (d) To manage knowledge as an asset, and to recognize the value of knowledge to an organization. Assets, such as technologies that are sold under license or have potential value, customer databases and detailed parts catalogues are typical of companies’ intangible assets to which a value can be assigned.

MARKETING OF LIBRARY PRODUCTS AND SERVICES Marketing of Information Products and Services The nature of the information marketplace is under continual evolution. Two of the most powerful drivers of change in ‘the new economy’, information and communication technology and the internationalization of the marketplaces, are impacting even more strongly on the marketplace for information products and services than on other business sectors. All organizations in the information industry, irrespective of whether they are in the public or private sector, need to form new strategic alliances, identify new market segments, and evolve new products and, in general, manage changing relationships between suppliers and customers. If organizations in the information marketplace are to survive and flourish, they need to be confident about their mission and role, and to be continually alert to technological, economic, political and social factors that are re-shaping the context in which they seek to serve users, contribute to communities, attract and retain customers, and establish and maintain relationship with other organizations. In such an environment, suppliers need to employ the full armory of marketing concepts, approaches and tactics. An organization that embraces the marketing concept tries to provide products that satisfy customer needs through a co-ordinate set of activities that also allow the organization to achieve its goals. Customer satisfaction is the major aim of marketing. The marketing concept should affect all areas and activities of the organization and not just promotional activities, or those activities performed through the marketing department. Marketing needs to permeate the organization; it should influence operational, tactical and strategic decision- making and actions. Rowley (2006) defines information marketing “as the Marketing of information-based products and services”. The Typical information- based products include books, DVDs, CDs, journals articles, databases, electronic journals, newspapers and databanks. Typical information-based services include services providing access to databases, electronic current-awareness service, business consultancy services, subject gateways and portals, and web-based information services. Libraries, bookshops, database producers, online search services, business intelligence services and portals act as the interface between the consumer and producer in respect of these products. Marketing of information products and services in India is fairly a new concept in the library and information service field. As a result of the complex and multidimensional activities of the society, the demand for information products and services is steadily expanding. In addition, the factors such as rising cost of the documents, change in information demand, increasing competition from the emerging information industry etc. necessitate the use of marketing techniques in libraries. To survive in the modern technological and competitive world, libraries must rise up to the situation to provide the right information to the right user at the right time in the required manner. For this

Unit-VI D 317 purpose libraries have to use marketing strategies, which are used in other service organizations. Users’ satisfaction in the 21st century will surely go beyond the boundaries of any library as the emphasis in librarianship is focused on customer service. As information is no longer location-dependent, librarians must now accept the fact that they cannot assume that users will continue to view them as the principal information providers. Developments in information and communications technologies (ICTs) and the Internet are two catalysts of change in the info academic environment. They are leading, to a large extent, to the replacement of the physical library with the virtual library of resources available elsewhere. The Internet and World Wide Web (WWW) have made it possible for users to locate what they need without entering the library. Online subject search is now the order of the day and the virtual library is the challenge of the future. This move from traditional manual to electronic procedures means that librarians have to change their attitude and techniques to offer a more proactive service. Librarians should now be aware that they are no longer the sole link between information users and the online store of knowledge, as users are able to independently search the Internet and the Web themselves. Internet technologies provide unique opportunities by bringing together people who are geographically distant but belong to similar communities. Scholars in the same fields of specialization share their views and visions online. The virtual library is certainly the library of the future, and librarians need a change of attitude to enable them embrace this new challenge to their profession. Limited financial and personnel resources will be no excuse for not being in the centre of the information universe. Marketing of Information Product in Library ICTs are an important tool for development, but they do not create development. Information development becomes sustainable when the people that use information participate in its production and information becomes knowledge through the process of being used. Users need to be educated and trained on how to use ICT effectively to enhance their teaching and research. Librarians must rethink access tools, develop intelligent databases and redesign their organizations to enable them to face the challenge of ICTs. Professional library staff should be trained in ICT skills to enable them assist and educate users. Training in ICT skills and management expertise should be a continuous exercise. Staff needs this expertise to enable them to handle the change from traditional to electronic ways of managing library resources, as a dynamic information environment demands continual renewal of skills. With ICT, libraries have to re-order their priorities; old systems have to make way for new and useful ones to suit the electronic age. For effective services, the acquisition of relevant skills is vitally important. Just as a library is only as good as its catalogue, so the value of the Internet depends to a large extent on the tools used to search it. The use of search tools such as AltaVista, Google and Info seek, to find Internet resources on specific subjects often leads to disappointing results as lots of irrelevant sources are obtained. Librarians are thereby challenged to develop sophisticated search tools to enable them select and evaluate internet resources in particular disciplines and subjects. Meeting users’ needs by improving resources and expertise in searching techniques is a good index of an active library. Users’ perceptions of a library service that undertakes this approach usually change for the better. Expertise in database search (print and electronic) is thus an important factor in the marketing of information services; and signs of active marketing indicate that the services being rendered are healthy and competitive.

318 D Library and Information Science Specific A. Concept of Marketing Concept Marketing of any commodity means working with market to actualize potential exchange for the purpose of satisfying human needs and wants of that commodity. It is the whole business seen from the point of view of its final result that is from the point of view of the customer. Marketing is the systematic gathering, recording and analyzing of data about problems relating to the marketing of products (goods) and services. Thus, marketing shall at least encompass the following aspects: n Flow of goods from producer to customer or consumer in exchange for money i.e. through value exchange. n Satisfaction of wants and needs of the customers or consumers. Chartered Institute of Marketing expressed that “Marketing is the management process responsible for identifying, anticipating and satisfying customer requirements profitably”.

B. Marketing of Information Products and Services: Information is power and libraries and information centers are the reservoir of this power. The marketing of information implies transference of information to the perspective or potential user for a consideration. Marketing of information is a set of activities by which information products and services are channeled to the potential users. The core of marketing concept is user oriented. Therefore marketing and its techniques if applied to library and information services can help in vital to fulfill the expected needs of information of the users. Marketing helps in increasing user satisfaction, and brings in an element of competition, which results in providing better services. Focus is on saving time, money and labour and also adapting to the latest information technology. In libraries users are made to pay for the services in the form of annual subscription, caution deposit, fine, penalty for lost books/ damaged book etc. This was only to make the user prompt in using library facilities. Of late the concept changed dramatically and information became a tradable commodity now, which has led to the emergence of marketing in libraries. Today the high value of information and its importance as a strategic resource for the development of a nation has changed the information into a product for selling in the markets.

C. Some Information Product Categories (a) Documents (most exist in both print and electronic formats) 1. Periodicals n Learned journals academic journals n Professional journals n Magazines n Newspapers n Newsletters and bulletin boards 2. Reference documents n Encyclopedias n Dictionaries n Bibliographies and bibliographic databases n Directories and databanks

Unit-VI D 319 3. Books n Adult fiction, classics n Adult fiction, popular n Adult non-fiction, learned, textbooks n Adult non-fiction, popular n Children’s fiction n Children’s non- fiction n Paperback books n Hardcover books 4. Others n Published reports from Government and other agencies n Videos n Music CDs n DVDs n Multimedia documents n Government publications n Corporate reports-technical and business n Patents n Conference proceeding 5. Services n Information services n Document delivery and inter-library loans services n End-user training n Market research agencies n Information service providers (ISPs) n Alerting services n Helpdesk services n Consultancy services n Financial and business information services n Entertainment services n Computing services. Rowley (2006).

D. Marketing Skills in Librarians: Modern world is the world of mechanization and computerization. Every technological development has immediately on its invention influenced librarianship and library services tremendously. Due to various technological developments the face of library profession has changed dramatically. Library and information technologists predict a paperless society and an electronic future for the libraries. Today, libraries are concentrating on speedy access to information. The information super highway and Internet enables access to knowledge from one place at any time at the touch of a button. Thus, today the users are better equipped to seek and select the required information in required form by using sophisticated technologies. Now there has been an increasing demand for information in electronic form rather than print.

320 D Library and Information Science Specific All these factors are forcing the professionals engaged in library and information services to rethink about the skill they have. The competitive marketing for products and services of information necessitate librarians to cultivate some of the following skills. 1. Analytical skills. The two basic analytical skills that a librarian must have are market analysis and product analysis. The market analysis is what the user wants and product analysis is what we are providing. A librarian should know the needs of his information users. Thus he should effort to provide library services in accordance with the needs of the users. 2. Planning Skills. The librarian must be skilled with various planning skills like product development, distribution, promotion etc. Hence librarian should try to provide best services with minimum time and cost. He should also determine proper ways for the circulation of products as well as its accessibility to its target market. 3. Organizing skills. The marketing of information products and services should be a part and parcel of the organization policy. The staff for marketing should be properly trained and skilled. The whole organization of which the library is a part, need to be motivated for marketing activity. 4. Control skills. These types of skills require controlling the market. The librarian should keep himself/herself informed of the behavioral responses. This will help the librarian to gear the services to the ever-changing demands of the users.

E. The Marketing Mix The ‘Marketing mix’ is a one way of profiling the offering that an organization seeks to make to its chosen customer groups. The marketing mix is frequently described in terms of the combination of four major tools of marketing viz., product, price, place and promotion known widely as the 4Ps. The extended marketing mix adds people, process, and physical environment (the 7Ps). For marketing mix the organization needs to undertake a range of processes in order to identify customer needs. One valuable source of such information is customers’ responses to current product offerings, which will be evident through sales and usage levels, customer’s server’s complaints and other channels through which the organization listens to its customers. Other data may be collected on customers’ attitude to potential new products, services or communication messages and to competitors’ products. (i) Product. This is the aspect of marketing mix that deals with the management of product. A product is everything that is received by the customer in a marketing exchange. Products can be ideas, goods, services, experience, organizations, persons or places, or a combination of two or more of these. The information industry offers access to information goods, such as books and databases, and also to services such as traditional library services, market research services and alerting services. A service is an activity or benefit that one party can offer to another that is essentially intangible and does not result in the ownership of anything Kotler, Keller, Koshy & Jha (2007). As differentiation from competitor offerings becomes more difficult on the basis of goods or services, organizations are increasingly looking to ‘experiences’ as their core offering. Experiences are memorable and personal, and extend beyond their component goods or services. Most organizations have many products described as their product portfolio. They may for example offer a number of different information services or licenses for a

Unit-VI D 321 range different databases. Information products are products whose core is information or knowledge. There is some discussion whether information products should be treated as a separate category of product, due to the unique nature of information. Products have both functional characteristics and psychological characteristics; the later are captured by the brand. For example, an MP3 player has product attributes such as a storage capacity, size, colour, software, sound quality and battery life. It will also have psychological characteristics based on the user’s perceptions of the benefits that it offers such as ease of use, quality, innovative features, stylishness and reliability. There is typically a relationship between the functional and psychological characteristics of a product, and for services it can be particularly difficult to differentiate functional and psychological characteristics. For example, the customer’s perspectives will define whether helpfulness of staff or accessibility of information sources are functional or psychological characteristics. Product decisions are important because they directly involve creating products that satisfy customers needs and wants. An organization needs to maintain a satisfactory set of products, this involves introducing new products modifying existing products and eliminating products that no longer satisfy customers and / or yield acceptable profits, (ii) Price. This covers activities associated with establishing pricing objectives and strategies and determining product prices. Price represents the agreed value of an exchange. Price may be used as a competitive tool and it is one of the marketing mix variables that can be changed relatively quickly to respond to changes in the environment. Price plays both an economic and psychological role. From an economic perspective, price is closely associated with costs and profits. From a psychological perspective, price may be used as an indicator of quality. In the service sector the psychological role of price is magnified because consumers must rely on price as the sole indicator of service quality, because the intangible nature of service means that other quality indicators are absent. (iii) Place. Products must be available at the right time and at a convenient location. Place is concerned both with consumer service delivery points such as retail outlets and libraries, but also with the distribution network that ensures that products make their way from producer or creator to the user or consumer. Delivery channels are significant factors within an industry and involve a complex web of organization relationship, in which collaboration and competition are equally important. (iv) Promotion. This can also be termed marketing communication and relates to activities used to inform one or more groups of people about an organization and its products. Promotion can be used more generally to increase public awareness of an organization and of new or existing products or alternatively, it can be used to educate consumer about product features, or to maintain public awareness of existing products. Promotion includes advertising, public relation, personal selling, online marketing communication and direct marketing. Promotion is one element of the two-way communication with customers that forms the basis for customer relationship. Promotion of services presents specific difficulties because of their intangible nature. The intangible element is depicted in advertising, so service advertising

322 D Library and Information Science Specific needs to emphasize tangible clues, such as physical facilities or other concepts that project an image that reflects services. Tangible clue may be embedded in the environment, such as the building and service points occupied by a library building or the professionalism or the appearance of staff, but may also be used in picture form on publicity and websites. Personal selling is potentially powerful in services because this form of promotion allows customers and sales persons to interact. Customer contact personnel therefore have an important promotional function. (v) People. Most services use people in service delivery, often creating and delivering the product in interaction with the customer. The quality of the interaction between the service agent and the customer is a major influence on satisfaction. In services where the level of contact is high, as an in dentistry or physiotherapy, the customer needs to feel comfortable with service agent, to trust them and to develop a rapport with them, probably over a service relationship that comprises several service episodes. Even where the service is less intimate, as in a shop or a library, the attitude and responsiveness of the staff can make a difference to the acceptability of the service experience, and customer evaluation of service quality. (vi) Process. Services are manufactured and consumed live, and because they involve an interaction between two people, it is more difficult to exercise control and ensure consistency. The service process needs careful design; it may include queuing arrangements, processing customer detail payment, as well as elements of the core service delivery. For example call centre operator and help lines may have standard set or questions that they ask each caller. Once a customer has experienced a service process once, she/he will start to learn ‘the script’ which helps her/him to feel more comfortable with the process. In self-service environment as, for example, with a public access kiosk, the customer is taken through a process by the prompts on the computer screen. These prompts form the dialogue or the online script. The quality of the service delivery in online environment depends on customer’s competence even more heavily then in physical service delivery. It is important to remember that customers, as well as service agent, are part of service delivery. (vii) Physical Evidence. This is concerned with the physical surrounding from which a service is delivered, and with other tangible elements in a service episode. Physical evidence is important in service delivery because it is usually the only tangible clue that the customer has about the quality of the service experience. Thus information services should pay attention to the presentation of staff, atmosphere, and ambience, design of premises, cleanliness, colour palettes, tidiness, signage, heating, seating, accessibility and lighting. In online environments physical evidence is extremely limited. This is a very significant challenge in the marketing of digital information services since the absence of physical clue removes an important channel of communication with customers, and for customers an important source of evidence on which to base their preliminary judgment. In multichannel or hybrid environment physical evidence from the ‘bricks’ channel may be used to support impressions relating to online channels. Where this is not possible, other elements of marketing-mix, such as product and their attributes and branding, become more important.

U N I T

VII

SYLLABUS v v v v v v v v v v

Computer Technology – Character Representation (ASCII, ISCII, Unicode); Computer Hardware, Software; Storage Devices; Input and Output Devices. Types of Software – System Software, Application Software. Programming Languages – Object Oriented, Procedural, High Level, Scripting; Web Languages. Telecommunication – Transmission Channels, Mode, and Media, ISDN, PSDN, Multiplexing, Modulation, Standards and Protocols. Wireless Communication – Media, Wi-fi, Li-fi, Satellite Communication, Mobile Communication. Computer Networks - Topologies, Types of Networks – LAN, MAN, WAN. Internet - Web browsers, WWW, E-mail; Search Engines, Meta and Entity Search engines. Internet Protocols and Standards – HTTP, SHTTP, FTP, SMTP, TCP/IP, URI, URL. Hypertext, Hypermedia, Multimedia, Video conferencing, Virtual Reality, Augmented Technologies. Data Security, Network Security, Firewalls, Cryptographic Techniques, Antivirus software, Anti-spyware, Intrusion Detection System.

(323)

324 D Library and Information Science Specific

COMPUTER TECHNOLOGY Character Representation Within computers, each character is designated by a single number, because computer can only understand numbers and, that too, only in the form of electrical current flow. But actual process is even more complex as computer is an electronic device and it only understands voltage ON and OFF. That is why a notation is developed to represent voltage ON and OFF as ‘1’ and ‘0’ respectively. This particular system of notation is known as ‘Binary system’ and coding of characters using such system is known as ‘character encoding’. In ASCII, when ‘A’ labeled key is pressed, computer understands it as ‘01000001’ (or decimal 65) and prints ‘A’ on the screen. REPRESENTATION OF CHARACTER IN COMPUTER Character on the screen to process it

Binary value used the screen

Character on to process it

Binary value used

0110001 0110010 0110011 0110100 0110101

A B C D E

1000001 1000010 1000011 1000100 1000101

1 2 3 4 5

American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) ASCII-1963 ASCII was developed by a working committee known as X3.4 constituted by IBM, AT&T and its subsidiary Teletype. Basically, this code was 8-bit character coding system and the arrangement was logical, i.e., if one wants to write sorting programs he/she can manage using ASCII value. But this particular version of code considered only the upper case characters and there, a lot of blank positions were left assuming that it could be used for Roman smalls.

ASCII- 1967 Same committee in 1967 came out with a modified version of ASCII code. This version included Roman smalls and few more additional characters, which were absent in the ASCII 1963 version, like {, }, |, ~, etc. Strictly speaking, ASCII is not an 8-bit code rather it is a 7-bit code, that means it uses only 128 character positions. It should be noted that the numbers ‘0-9’ are given 48 to 57; Capital letters ‘A-Z’ are given 65 to 90 and small letters ‘a-z’ are given 97 to 122, to get correct results when words or lines are sorted.

Extended ASCII (Latin – +) Before networking of personal computers became common font and software developers for languages written in non-Roman scripts laid out non-standard character maps, usually employing extended ASCII positions 128-256, to accommodate non-Roman characters. The non-standard character maps made it possible to use non-roman characters with many stand-alone applications and, after loading special fonts, even on the Web. But interoperability remains problematic with non-standard schemes [Monotype Imaging Inc].

Unit-VII D 325 The increasing popularity of the Internet has made interoperability a major issue. HTML (RFC1866) has relied for character encoding on ISO-8859-1, known as Latin-1, a version of extended ASCII, which is appropriate only for English and Western European languages. However, ISO-8859 has made it possible to standardise character sets for some widely used scripts and it now includes a series of 10 standardised character sets for writing in occidental alphabetic languages: n Latin1 (West European) n Latin2 (East European) n Latin3 (South European) n Latin4 (North European) n Latin-Cyrillic n Latin-Arabic n Latin-Greek n Latin-Hebrew n Latin5 (Turkish) n Latin6 (Nordic) Compared to Unicode, these ISO-8859 character sets are extremely limited but they are usable on the Internet, for instance, with MIME software, and they are a major improvement over the 7-bit US-ASCII. Characters 0 to 127 are always identical with USASCII and the upper positions hold characters for other scripts.

Problems with ASCII No doubt ASCII was a great invention. After the invention of Internet, the world started talking about global village and then it seemed less desirable to have English as imposed language on the Internet and, thus, everybody started talking about multilingualism. When ASCII uses 1-byte character encoding it can only handle 256 characters that means after 128 characters it can accommodate 128 more. So it can hardly handle one or at most two languages and that shows its limitation to handle all world languages. So definitely at this juncture ASCII fails and UNICODE seems to be a promising solution which covers all the world languages scripts.

Indian Scenario and Indian Standard Code for Information Interchange (ISCII) The BIS standard IS 13194:1991 is 8-bit code. It covers 10 Indic languages derived out of Bramhi. ISCII (Indian Standard Code for Information Interchange) is an extended ASCII. It uses last 128 characters position for characters representation in Indic scripts. It uses the same Keyboard as of ASCII with Inscription of other 10 languages over it. It uses control characters SO (Shift out) and SI (Shift in) for selection of ASCII and ISCII respectively. The arrangement of characters in ISCII is phonetic. Switching from one language to other transliterates the text [http://tdil.mit.gov.in]. ISCII is no doubt a solution for the Indian scenario but when it comes to global representation of characters both ASCII and ISCII fail to represent the characters at a stretch, as both use single byte code. In ISCII, ASCII characters are placed in the lower half (0-127) of the 8-bit code table while Indian script characters are in the upper half (160-255). ISCII caters to the following 10 Indian scripts – Devanagari, Gujarati, Punjabi, Bengali, Assamese, Oriya, Telugu, Tamil, Malayalam, Kannada. The ISCII code table is a superset of all the characters required for the above mentioned scripts. First version was released in 1983 and adopted by the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) in 1991 after revisions in 1986 and 1988.

326 D Library and Information Science Specific The GIST Card Graphics and Intelligence based Scripting Technology (GIST), developed by CDAC (India), supports major Indic languages. GIST technology uses ASCII code for character representation using the extended ASCII table. GIST product uses underlying standards like ISCII, ISFOC (for font representation on screen) and INSCRIPT (common keyboard layout for Indian scripts). The Indic languages can be divided in two parts – Consonants and Vowels. The lay out of script of all the Indic languages are same. GIST is developed on 8-bit encoding system, i.e., it is an extended ASCII system. It uses same code for same vowel and consonant in different Indic language. Thus transliteration becomes very handy. Only it is required to change the mode (or switches) of language. Indian languages (multilingual) word-processing software, like iLeap, also developed by C-DAC, work on the same principle and enables transliteration. ISCII REPRESENTING DEVANAGARI CHARACTERS Hex

Hex Dec

0 0

1 16

2 32

3 48

4 64

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR

DLF DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS

SP ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + . –

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < =

@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M

Web Applications and GIST GIST helps in development of web based solutions. The software called iPlugin gives facility to develop the website in Indic languages. It provides facility to create chat room and email facility in any Indic language. The biggest advantage with iPlugin is that now one need not download the language font on the local machine. Necessary plugins directly get loaded on the machine when website is accessed, which is known as Dynamic fonts. Many of the websites in Indian languages are using GIST.

Constraints with ISCII The main disadvantage with ISCII is that it is impossible to represent more than one Indian scripts in the same screen as ISCII uses the same name space, i.e., 160-255 for all the Indian scripts. With ISCII, one can have content in English and one the Indian languages, but not two or more Indian languages at a time. The major problem with ISCII is its character encoding. It uses 8-bit character. Even to convert from English to any Indic language, it requires a lot of labour and from other language to any Indic language

Unit-VII D 327 it is very difficult. Translingual operations in two or more Indian languages is not possible using ISCII.

UNICODE UNICODE is developed by UNICODE consortium which is a group of software organisations like IBM, Microsoft, Xerox, Oracle, etc. They came out with a 16-bit code and called it UNICODE, as it promises to cover all the world’s scripts. The promising feature of UNICODE is that it can represent 65,536 characters. The first version of UNICODE came in 1991. Since then two more versions came in and the present one is version 3.0. Unicode, which is identical with ISO 10646 BMP, is based on 16-bit encoding that permits 65,535 characters instead of the 256 characters of Latin-1 (and in the 32-bit version a capacity of 2,080,000,000 characters). The BMP stands for Basic Multilingual Plane, sometimes referred to as Plane Zero. While Latin-1 assigns a value of 1-256 to a character, Unicode assigns the value U+nnnn to a character where nnnn is a four digit number in hexadecimal notation; this value is referred to as a code point [Johnson, Dave]. Unicode can be represented using 7-bit, 8-bit, and 16-bit format standards. UTF-7 (Universal Character Set Transformation Format-7) is a format that breaks the Unicode code point into 7-bit values; these can be transferred through email (which uses the 7-bit ASCII encoding) and on the Internet. This format presents difficulties because some values are ambiguous, but it is still usable. The 8-bit UTF-8 (Universal Character Set Transformation Format-8) format breaks Unicode values into 8-bit sequences, which work well on the Web. UCS-2 (Universal Character Set -2) stores each character as a 16-bit value and each value corresponds directly to its value (code point) in the Unicode standard. Unicode encodes text by script, not by language. This avoids duplication of letters. For instance, the Latin A is used without distinction for text in Catalan, English, Indonesian, Swedish, or Swahili. Similarly a letter in Devanagari script could be used in Sanskrit, Hindi or Nepali. Character set standards relates to basic interchange of text. They do not include attributes regarding language, display format, color, or typeface. Unicode characters are made visible through a distinct rendering process that maps characters (entities used in data interchange that generically specify a particular symbol) to glyphs (the particular shapes of a given characters as they are displayed) [Monotype Imaging Inc.]. For example, in English lower-case ‘c’ is the character (a code for a generic lower-case ‘c’) transmitted. When the code is received, it is converted into a glyph, a letter with a particular shape that will be displayed on the screen or sent to a printer. Unicode is fully compatible with ASCII, i.e., the first 128 characters are ASCII characters. Thus, any software using ASCII is compatible with UNICODE without any specific changes. UNICODE has defined different language zones for their corresponding scripts. For example, Devanagari characters start at 2304 and end at 2431. Thus, it includes all the scripts of the world.

Design Principles of UNICODE The general design principles on which UNICODE is developed are: n It is a 16-bit code. n For future expansion surrogate area has been defined which can generate combinations of two 2-bytes packets. n UNICODE is concerned about characters not glyphs.

328 D Library and Information Science Specific n n

It renders logical ordering for writing, i.e., from left to right and in case of Hebrew, Urdu, etc. right to left. Combining characters also follow logical order. Combining characters are nonspacing characters, which form combination to represent a new character.

Structure of UNICODE UNICODE initially was the interest of software organisations. Earlier, to produce a different language software, it was required to use ASCII code in the same language. But once UNICODE came up, it was really not needed to rewrite the software for different language. So it has become a boon for software developing organisations; side-by-side it became popular as it supports multilingual communication, which ASCII fails to do. UNICODE is fully compatible to ISO/IEC 10646 set of standard developed by International Organization for Standardisation and International Electrotechnical Commission in 1993. This is another very interesting venture, which also promises 16-bit code, but it does not restrict to 16-bits. It promises to give even 32-bit code, if it really required for character representation. The use of term multiple octet is used because multiples of 8-bits are used in system. This code is called as Universal Multiple-Octet Code (UCS). Since this character code system uses 16-bit and 32-bit, it is known as UCS-2 and UCS-4 respectively.

UNICODE and Its Features It is known that UNICODE is a 16-bit character code and is an effort to tame all the existing word scripts. But there are few challenges also sought with it: n It has to take care of existing ASCII coding system (with respect to Indian scripts). n There are characters, which use a combination of characters; so such combinations have to be managed. (Strictly speaking this problem has not been solved yet, because it is the property of the fonts which are used in writing UNICODE characters).

Sixteen Bit Character Code It is known that UNICODE is 16-bit character code. It can accommodate 65,536 characters. But, the consortium has not exhausted all the character positions, 2048 character positions are left for the future characters. This region of UNICODE is known as Surrogate area. Surrogate area covers 55,296-57,343 character positions. There are two types of Surrogates: (a) High Level Surrogate. It starts from character position 55,296 and ends at 56,319, i.e., total 1024 character positions. (b) Low Level Surrogate. It starts from character position 55,320 and ends at 57,343, i.e., total 1024 character positions. High level surrogates and Low level surrogates make a pair and represent a character. That means these characters are 4-byte characters, and that way total 10,48,576 characters can be represented which can be used for future. This combination of High level surrogate and Lower level surrogate makes a Surrogate pair.

Efficiency UNICODE is no doubt a very efficient code. All like characters are not repeated. They can be simply borrowed from some other group where they actually occur. For example, Hindi characters are from 2304 to 2431, Bengali is from 2432 to 2559, Telugu is from 3072 to 3199 and so on.

Unit-VII D 329 For Carriage Return (CR) the code value is 14 (good old ASCII value) and is retained in UNICODE along with English alphabets. While encoding other scripts where CR is required, UNICODE still uses the value 14. After all, Kannada CR is not different from English CR. This is uniformly applied to all the special characters of ASCII. Thus UNICODE avoids the repetition and adds efficiency to the coding system.

Characters not Glyphs In a sentence the smallest unit is a character, which can be written and can have semantic value. Glyphs are nothing but exposition of characters in graphical form, i.e., how a character appears on display, for example, bold, italics, or whatever. Glyphs are decided by the fonts and the actual value of UNICODE character will remain the same. To display the character glyph, it is necessary that a font must have a glyph in its source, that is why, it is said that it is the property of font used for writing. If one tries to write in the word ‘JAVATM’ the appearance of TM on the head of JAVA is due to glyph which shows superscript and is supported by the font. But the value of T will be 84 and M will be 77. That is why it is said that UNICODE is a code for characters not for glyphs.

Plain Text As it has been mentioned above that UNICODE has nothing to do with glyphs, that means it only works out the plain text. For example, if a character is written ‘65’ it is represented as ‘A’ (which has value in binary system 0000000001000001) irrespective of the format added with the character, which is known as ‘Rich character’. To produce a Rich text any markup language can be used like HTML or XML, or even one can use software like MSOffice, etc.

Logical Order UNICODE stores characters in logical order. Logical order means the order in which characters are stored in memory is same as the order characters are keyed in using the keyboard. At certain places it has to be violated because the representation of the text is reverse. For example, Urdu. Urdu is written from right to left and same is the case with Hebrew too. So when a character is typed it displays form right to left, but the order in which the character is represented in the memory is same. And UNICODE does it automatically. This particular feature of UNICODE is known as bi-directional ordering.

Unification UNICODE has taken care to identify the same character within different language and put it at one place in UNICODE table. For example, Punctuation marks, common letter, etc. The characters of East Asian scripts are taken in a separate table called as Han table. It covers Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK) characters because these scripts have a lot of overlapping characters, many a time the same character is used in all languages. Similarly, UNICODE has ‘Combining characters table’ which covers non-spacing characters that can be combined with other characters.

330 D Library and Information Science Specific Compatibility Characters Compatibility characters are the characters, which actually would not have been encoded because these are the variant form of some characters, which are already encoded. For example, Colon (:) {character position 58} has two Compatibility characters - one at character position 847, i.e., ‘Ratio’ and other is 1417, i.e., Armenian full stop. There is only formatting variance between Colon and Ratio. In ‘ratio’ the distance between the points is more. These characters reside in Compatibility area as one can see the index of character positions, but it is not necessarily true that all characters reside in this area only. For example, the variant of Latin character ‘A’ (character position 65) has another variant Full length Latin character ‘A’ which is given a position at the end of UNICODE table.

Dynamic Composition Dynamic composition is used to generate different accent forms. There is a block in UNICODE character set map called as ‘Combining Characters’. To generate, À, the characters A and ’ are used. À ® A + ’ Of course, the glyph À is permitted in the font set used. In Indic languages, both vowels and consonants can be used as combining characters (non-spacing characters).

Equivalent Sequence These are pre-imposed character codes available in the UNICODE character set. But same characters may be generated using composed characters. For example, À ® A + ’ 192 65 768 So, in this case, 192 is equivalent to 65 and 768. That means value 65 + 768 is canonical to 192. It is the responsibility of the system to convert the values in any one form, i.e., either 192 or 65 + 768. This is known as ‘Normalization’.

Convertibility UNICODE promises conversion to any standard code, because each character is given a distinct number. This particular feature of UNICODE had emerged in 1993 version of code.

Applications of UNICODE UNICODE promises to cover all the world scripts including extinct scripts. It also takes challenge of future addition of scripts.

Multilingual Encoding Most popular use of UNICODE is in multilingual editing. One can write in any language, if he/she knows the language and codes. But the problem of such writing is to know codes for all characters. So definitely some multilingual editor is needed, with which we can write in any language. The advantage of it is that each script can be read in any UNICODE compatible editor.

Unit-VII D 331

Multilingual Transliteration Once being aware of the character codes, the approach towards transliteration can be taken. This feature is particularly advantageous with regard to Indian languages because all Indian languages use more or less the same consonants and vowels. Though some languages have some additional characters but in UNICODE these are arranged in such a way that there is fixed difference in the value of same phonetic character belonging to different scripts. For example, the difference between all Telugu and Devanagari characters is 768.

Multilingual Works In Unicode multilingual works like polyglots can be composed and also searched online with the text in different languages.

Applying Unicode to the Libraries India is a country of diversity. Many languages are spoken and many scripts are used. According to one survey, English is the language spoken by less than 10% . Besides, India holds voluminous information in many of the native languages. Libraries particularly Digital libraries can record information in the language and script of the source document. Even the bibliographic information can be represented in the language of the document. Once UNICODE is adopted, one can exploit the advantages of transliteration so that data can be transliterated wherever and whenever it is required. It is not uncommon that much of the Sanskrit literature is available in different scripts of India. In such cases, even if the Sanskrit text is keyed in using Devanagari, one can read the same text in his script (for example Telugu). In other words, it is not required to enter the text in Telugu, rather the Devanagari script can be transliterated on the fly. In case of metadata (bibliographic information), the semantics of information can be given using XML (Extensible Mark Up Language), provided that libraries participating in the program should have consensus on a definite set of tags. Thus catalogue of one library can be seen and read in other language.

COMPUTERS—HARDWARE, SOFTWARE, STORAGE DEVICES, INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES Computer Computer is a machine that is being used in a variety of activities, to perform. Computer is also known by the names as processor, calculator, micro-processor, artificial intelligence, etc. Government departments, agencies, institutions and other similar organizations are making use of it in variety of their activities such as data processing and management information systems. The use of computer is also being done in library and information centres to improve their operational efficiency. The word computer has been derived from the Latin word Compute, which means to calculate. Hence the word computer can applied logically to any calculating device.

332 D Library and Information Science Specific Characteristics of a Computer (i ) It is Electronic. The computer uses electronic devices such as transistors, resistors, diodes based on two measurable states (i.e. ON and OFF). (ii ) It has Internal Storage. The computer has an internal storage (memory) for storing both the program and the data processed by the computer. (iii ) It has a Stored Program. The program of instruction that specifies the sequence of operations to be followed is stored in the internal memory. It is this stored program that makes the computer “automatic’, because the entire set of steps to be taken is determined in advance and no human intervention is required during its execution.

Capabilities and Efficiencies of Computers Computer is an electronic machine which accepts the information in prescribed format and then provides desired results in outputs. The computer is, therefore, being very much used due to its variety of capabilities and efficiencies as mentioned below: (a) Handles Large Chunk of Data with Ease. The computer never becomes tired due to high load of work as the man feels himself tired in doing hard and more works. The processing of the same is always reliable. (b) Much Faster and More Powerful than Human. Being an electronic machine, the computer is very much faster and completes the work very soon. It is more powerful than the man. Its working efficiency is measured in microseconds, i.e. one millionth of second. (c) Range of Activities is Very High. The man can only be efficient in one or two activities. But the computer if directed properly, then the field of its working will be very wide and multidimensional. Any type of work can be completed by the computer. Although its field of working is limited but it has wide areas for its business applications. (d) Functions without Human Intervention. If the computer is directed properly, it can function without human intervention regularly for so many hours as well as days and there will be no error in its operations. (c) Limitless Capacity: The computer possesses limitless capacity to perform any function if properly instructed with maximum speed, accuracy and efficiency.

Application of a Computer 1. Fine Arts (i ) (ii ) (iii ) (iv)

To draw something. To make changes in photograph. Makes scanning. It helps the artist to decide colour combination make changes.

2. Business/Commerce (i) Works get done faster, accurately, efficiently. (ii) With the use of E-mail, faster to deal which other parties.

Unit-VII D 333 (iii) Update which the knowledge, new market trends. (iv) keep the records. 3. Banks (i ) Records of the customers put into the machine. (ii ) Withdrawal is faster. (iii ) Update your bank record regularly. (iv) Communication between the banks has improved. 4. Sports (i ) Solve, see the sports action. (ii ) Play against the computer e.g. chess. (iii ) Help to sportsman to improve his quality. (iv) Keep the cricket records. 5. Home (i ) Do the shopping. (ii ) Keep your home budget. (iii ) Use it for entertainment. (iv) You can do your office works. (v) Store your family records, photographs. (vi ) Use for education, distance learning. (vii ) You can give exams on computers. 6. Publishing (i ) Computers do desk top publishing. (ii ) Design of document can be made more attractive. (iii ) Editing becomes very easy. (iv) Able to publish in electronic form. 7. Education (i ) Distance learning becomes possible. (ii ) Self-learning packages are available. (iii ) Teaching become more faster. (iv) The computer can explain certain topic stepwise that cannot be explained, e.g., Training for pilot. (v) Solving mathematics problem, science. (vi ) Records of the student can be maintained in better way. (vii ) Help in school administration. (viii ) Student and teacher can update with new knowledge. 8. Entertainment (i ) Use to play games. (ii ) Use in Audio, video. (iii ) Helps in film editing, audio editing. (iv) Animation effects can be created.

334 D Library and Information Science Specific 9. Communication (i ) Communicate large distance in a short time. (ii ) E-mail—communicate send your message within a short time and you can get reply very fast. (iii ) Mobile technology. 10. Medicine (i ) Patients records i.e. how many patients were admitted (ii ) Equipment used by computer. (iii ) Used in pathology. (iv) Doctors can communicate with the other doctors. (v) It helps the doctor how to carry out the operation. (vi ) Helps doctors to keep up to date with current knowledge. 11. Libraries (i ) To do routine job in the faster way. (ii ) Keep statistical data. 12. Insurance/Stock Exchange (i ) Record of the person who has insurance policy. (ii ) Generate the notices. (iii ) Record of the policy in detail. (iv) Used in share market. (v) Stock translation is possible from any part of the country. 13. Transport (i ) Reservation can be possible, e.g. Railway, plane reservation. (ii ) Tickets, passes through the computer. (iii ) Used in metro trains. (iv) Automatic lifts. 14. Researches And Development (i ) Connecting data. (ii ) Interpreting and getting output. (iii ) Research becomes faster. (iv) Duplicate research can be avoided. (v) Updated with new research records. 15. Space Science (i ) It gives data about the satellites. (ii ) Helps in study of astrology. (iii ) Doing research on space activities. 16. Telecommunications (i ) Bill can be generated for each customer, if one knows the number of calls that are made by the customer in a given month, rental charges and the unit rate of each call.

Unit-VII D 335 (ii ) It helps in the computerization of directory information i.e. name of the subscriber, address and telephone number can be put on the computer.

Hardware The main part of a computer system is in the terms of hardware and software. Hardware is that part of the computer which is seen first when we look at the computer system. In general, hardware is the name given to all physical components (largely electronic) from which the computer is made up. The computer hardware automatically, (a) Accept and store input data. (b) Process the data accepted. (c) Output the processed result. Hardware is divided into:

(i) Central Processing Unit The CPU does all manipulation of data. CPU is also called as the brain of the computer. Processing of data may require arithmetic operations, logical decisions and movement of data to different locations. The CPU also controls and supervises all the input, output and storage devices. CPU is made up of 3 parts. (a) Primary Storage Section. It holds instructions and data until needed by processor (b) Arithmetic and Logical Unit. Performs all arithmetic calculations and take logical decisions. (c) Control Unit. Coordinates and controls the operation of entire computer system.

(a) Primary Storage Section. It is also called as main memory and may be compared to that portion of the brain where data and instructions get stored. Main memory is used to: n Temporarily hold data received from input devices and make them ready for processing. n Hold data being processed and the intermediate results being generated therein. n Hold the finished result of processing until released to the output devices. n Hold the system software and application software in use. The separate areas used for these four general purposes are not fixed by the built in physical boundaries in the storage section. Rather, they can vary from one application to another. Thus, a specific physical space may store input data in one

336 D Library and Information Science Specific application, output result in another and processing instructions in a third. The person writing the application instruction determines how the space will be used for each job. (b) The Arithmetic Logic Section. The arithmetic logic section and control section together make up the CPU. All calculation is performed and all comparisons are made in the arithmetic logic section of the CPU. Once data are fed into primary storage from input devices, they are held and transferred as needed to the arithmetic logic section where processing takes place. No processing occurs in primary storage. Intermediate results generated in ALU are temporarily placed in a designated working storage area until needed at a later time. Data may thus move from primary storage to the ALU and back again to ALU storage many times before processing is finished. Once completed, the final results are released to an output storage section and from there to an output device. (c) Control Unit. Control Unit is that portion of the CPU that controls each operation. Control Unit synchronizes and sequences operation of the CPU for ensuring correct execution of programs. In other words, this unit acts as the central nervous system for various components of the computer without as such performing the actual processing. Control Unit has a special register called the program counter that contains the address of the next instruction to be fetched from the processor memory. In order to sequence the instructions, the control unit goes through the following sequence of steps: (i ) Retrieve the instruction from the processor memory addressed by the program counter. (ii ) Determine what action is being requested by the instruction. (iii ) Retrieve the appropriate data from the processor memory. (iv) Direct the CPU component to perform the operation indicated by instruction. (v) Determine if the operation is carried out properly. (vi ) If not flag the error message to the user, through the output device. (vii ) Or else, store the result in the CPU memory for further processing. (viii ) Determine the location of the next instruction to be retrieved. Control processing unit is divided again into primary storage area or memory unit. In primary storage area data is stored in small boxes or cell or Register. Each cell has a specific location number. Depending on capacity of computer it is fixed that how many character each register or cell can store. Capacity of cell depend on type of computer, like if your computer capacity of each storage location is either fixed with number of character in a storage location or is variable word length storage. For fixed length only that character is taken and leaves that much amount of space. So space is lost but for variable length facility this is not the problem. Different types of memory are as follows: (a) RAM (Random Access Memory). In RAM memory computer can pick up data from anywhere in the disk. (b) ROM (Read Only Memory) n Information is burnt in to the ROM chip at manufacturing time.

Unit-VII D 337 It cannot be altered. No new information can be written on it. n When power is off, information stored on ROM chips are not lost. n From ROM chips information can be transferred to RAM chips for processing, e.g., booting. n Non-volatile storage. (c) PROM (Programmable Read Only Memory) n ROM chips can be programmed once. n After that no changes can be made. n Non-volatile storage. (d) EPROM (Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) n Information on ROM chips can be erased once and can be programmed new. n Non-volatile storage. n n

(ii) Input Devices Input devices facilitate the users to translate their data into binary coded electronic pulses and send to processor of the computer. Input devices can be connected/ disconnected/reconnected to the computer as and when required. These devices are known as peripherals. Some of the input devices are as follows: (a) Punched Cards. Earlier punched card and punched tape was used to input data in computer. Punched card had 80 columns and 12 rows. Each character is represented as one column as a combination of 1, 2 or 3 holes. The cards are bulky to handle. If mistake made in punching a card, whole card has to be discarded. Modification punched card came is punched tape. Tape is a continuous strip of paper divided into 8 tracks. Each character is represented by a unique hole pattern in one column. It is bulky compared to punch card but difficult to correct if mistakes are made. (b) Mouse. Mouse is a pointing device. A pointing device is used to move the cursor on the screen and to issue commands. The most common pointing device is the mouse. It is so named because it slides desktop and has a wire or “tail” attached to the computer. A mouse is a small plastic box mounted on two metal wheels that axes are at right angles. Each wheel of the mouse is connected to a shaft encoder, which emits an electrical pulse for every incremental rotation of the wheel. The mouse is rolled on a flat surface. The flat surface need not have any embedded wires. As mouse is rolled, 2 wheels in perpendicular direction sense its movement. The distance moved is found by counting the pulse received from shaft encoder. Push buttons are mounted on top of the mouse and user can press them as he move the mouse. (c) Keyboard. Keyboard is also one of input device through which we can input data into a computer system as well as instruct computer what to do. Simplest keyboard is made up of 84 keys that whereas enhanced keyboard is of 101 keys. There is a wire grid below the keys that passes on the message to the computer system. Some of important keys in keyboard are enter key through which commands are executed in the computer system. Then it has alphabet keys, number keys. There are arrow keys to move your cursor on the screen. In addition, there are also page up and

338 D Library and Information Science Specific page down key. Here it goes page wise then there is a shift key, control key, caps lock key, numlock, escape key, backspace key, function keys, delete key, and insert key. There is a key called print screen and pause key. Spaced box key help to leave space between the characters. Tab key helps to jump from I position to other position. (d) Joystick. A joystick is a stick mounted on a spherical ball that moves in a socket. The stick can be moved left to right, potentiometer is used to sense the movement. The cursor can be moved to any position by manipulating Joystick. Joystick is generally used in the computer to play games. Signals from the joystick through tracker ball passes on to the computer and accordingly the command is executed. It is connected by cable to the computer. (e) Mark and Character Recognition Input Device. These devices recognizes certain mark or character written with special ink and data is directly stored into the computer. There are three methods and in all method data is directly copied from the original to the computer. No data entry is to be made there. (i) OMR or Mark Reading. It is used to read data through OMR reader i.e. special marks or symbols has to be filled in the form which the OMR reader can recognize. It recognizes mark made up of pen or pencil, form is directly put in OMR reader and the light will pass on, then the form data would be captured and directly stored into the computer. It is used mainly for objective type of marking and population survey, etc. (ii) MICR—Magnetic Ink Character Recognition. Here in this method characters in the document are written with special magnetic ink and with special style. The document is put inside MICR readers. The light passes and machine reads magnetized ink character and data is directly stored into the computer. Standard MICR character are developed which are used in bank for writing the cheque number, etc. (iii) OCR—Optical Character Recognition. OCR readers or scanners can read any character or any image typed or handwritten in different sizes or shapes and directly record it in to the computer. There are different types of scanners available, scanners, which can read only black and white, or scanners that can read the coloured data also. Scanners are also available in different size i.e. from smaller size to a drawing board size. When paper is put in scanner, light will pass and it will capture image from the paper and would be recorded in to the computer. (f) Light Pens and Bar Coding. Each document has a barcode made of vertical lines of different thickness. The code represents the details of the book in which a library has light pen which passes on this code, light is passed on the bar code and the data is automatically loaded in to the computer system. The light pen is connected to the computers. To access this facility the special software and hardware is required. Libraries can generate their own bar code for every document. (g) Voice Input Devices. A microphone is attached to the computer and special software is loaded in to a computer to recognize the voice coming through the microphone. To input data through microphone the voice has to be specially trained. (h) Touch Sensitive Screens. Screens are attached to the monitor of the computer and spot is marked on the screen to which if somebody touches, automatically the command is activated in to the computer.

Unit-VII D 339 (i) Sensors. They are generally used to measure temperature or vibrations occurring in an environment and are used for immediate recording.

(iii) Output Devices Output devices produce the results after processing in the computer. A printer provides hard copy output on paper. The basic criteria for evaluating printers are the quality of the output and the speed, although the sound level is often a consideration. Different types of output devices are mentioned below. (a) Chain Printer. The chain printer has two steel band on which the characters set are embossed. For printing a line, all the characters in a line are sent from the memory to the printer buffer register. The band is rotated at a high speed. As the band rotates, a hammer is activated, when the desired character as specified in the buffer register comes in front of it. Generally hammers are positioned to strike the carbon ribbon that is placed between the chain, paper and hammer. Movement of hammer and chain movement should be properly synchronized. (b) Dot Matrix Head. In this type of printers the characters are formed as a combination of dot. Wires fixed to print head produce the dot. These wires are operated by a solenoid (a coil producing a magnetic field when a current is passed through that) operated by signal from CPU. When operated they protrude, strike there ribbon against paper producing dots and go back in to the head which means more dot in a image and better quality printer. From a pin to 24 pins in printer head are available. Dot matrix printers are available in 2 types 80 column printer or 132 column printer. It can print on loose paper or on fan folded paper. Quality of printing in dot matrix could be draft, normal, double strike and better quality. Better quality printing means instead of striking twice on the same dot the pin strikes second time little inside from the dot. But these printers are very noisy. The quality is not very good but they are cheaper and can print 50 to 480 character/ sec. (c) Daisy Wheel Printer. It has flat plastic or metal disc. Characters are embossed on the edge of the disc. This disc is known as daisy wheel. The daisy wheel continuously rotates in all directions. There is a hammer on the disc that presses the character to be printed on the ribbon and from the ribbon image is passed on to the paper. For different type faces different daisy wheels are available. The speed of daisy printer is 25 to 60 characters/sec. (d) Laser Printer. As per the command given for printing the laser beam comes out of the laser gun, passes through the lens and falls on the drum. The drum is rotating continuously. The neutral area when comes below the toner which also has positive power ink is deposited only on the neutral area of the drum. The paper put in the printer has negative power and the image created on the drum has positive power so when the paper passes from the drum the image from the drum gets deposited on the paper. Cleaner cleans up any ink left on the drum after the image is printed on the paper. Laser printer is very useful for DTP. The models available in laser printer are 300 dot/inch to 1200 dot/inch. It can print only single sheet. It can print depending on its quality 8 pages/min to 120-300 pages/min.

340 D Library and Information Science Specific (e) Plotters. Plotters are used to get output from the computer in graphical form. There are 2 types of plotters. (i) Flat Bed Device. Paper is kept on a flat surface and the graph is automatically plotted on paper. (ii) Drum Plotters. Plotting paper is rolled on a round drum, as the drum rotates as per the instruction given, the graph is plotted on the paper with the pen. (f) Line Printers. Prints one whole line at a time. Generally speed of line printer is around 150 line to 2500 lines/min with 96 to 160 characters on a 15 inch line. Line printer requires a set of characters to be printed. With the printer we get different types of character set, generally we get 64 or 96 character set. (g) Video Display Unit or the Monitor. Monitor is attached to the keyboard, so any key we press can be seen on the monitor. Inside monitor there is a vacuum picture tube known as cathode ray tube that has vacuum inside. Front portion of tube is the screen that we are able to see. The backside of screen is made up of phosphorous. There is an electron gun in the monitor that throws light on the phosphorous layer and thus forming the image on the screen. Electron gun can be of two types. For monochrome monitor only one electron gun is present, for coloured monitor, there are 3 electron gun present which means red, blue and green colour.

(iv) Storage Devices This device stores the data as well as programmes for future and also stores results after processing. (a) Magnetic Tapes. Magnetic tape is a widely used technology for data storage. As with magnetic disks the use of magnetic tape for data storage requires the use of both a tape drive also known as a tape deck, and media. In the case of magnetic tape, the drive is a machine which is broadly analogous to a tape-recorder. For mainframes and most minicomputers, specially developed drives are utilized and these often incorporate special arrangements such as columns of air to buffer tape movement to protect the tape itself from damage including stretching during the rapid movement and frequent starts and stops characteristic of data storage use. (b) Magnetic Disks. Magnetic disks exist in a wide variety of forms, but all share certain common characteristics in the way they store data. A magnetic disk unit consists of two major elements: the drive and the media. The drive (disk drive) contains the necessary equipment to receive and send signals to add from the CPU, and also a motor that serves to rotate the media at very high speed. The media is one or more thin plates or disks or more or less rigid material the surface of which have a thin coating of magnetisable material. Data is recorded on the media in the form of minute magnetized or demagnetized spots that represent the zeros and one of the binary system. Data is recorded onto and read from the disk by means of read/write heads that are positioned immediately next to the magnetized surface. To change the tracks, read and write head jump between tracks in a process called seek. For immediate access applications, magnetic disks are used. These devices can retrieve data or information very quickly. So these are called Direct Access Storage Devices (DASD). Magnetic Disk storage can be of the following types: n Hard Disk (Disk pack, Winchester Disk, etc.) n Floppy Diskette.

Unit-VII D 341 (c) Disk Pack. It is also called exchangeable disk unit. Generally six or more disks are mounted together on spindle to form a stack. In a disk pack of 6 disks, there will be 10 recording surfaces. For every surface, there will be a read write head. These read-write heads are connected to the arms, which form a comb like mechanism. At any time, these read-write heads will be positioned on the tracks. These tracks here 10, at any time; together form a stack of tracks, which is regarded as forming a cylinder or seek area. The disk stack may be permanently fixed to the drive or it may be removable as a complete pack. The drive rotates generally at the speed of 2400 of 3600 revolutions per minute. The speed of rotation causes the head to float approximately 1/4000th of an inch (0.064 mm) from the surface of the disk. There are two classifications based on the read and write mechanism, fixed and moving head drives. (i) Fixed Head Drive. There is a set of read or write heads equal to the numbers of tracks, for every surface. The time taken to find an item of data is generally 10 to 550 milliseconds. (ii) Moving Head Drive. There is only one read or write head per disk surface. The heads are fixed to an arm that moves in and out between the disks. Access time is generally 25 to 100 milliseconds. (d) Hard Disks. The disk packs are also hard disks but the term hard disk was coined with the advent of disk storage for microcomputers. These are made of aluminium platters, polished with magnetic oxide recording surface. It is also a direct access (random access) storage device. They store more data than the floppy diskettes. These disks can be used with mainframe computers, storing gigabyte that is billions of characters. But the hard disks attached to personal computer stores five to hundred megabytes that is millions of characters. The 10, 20, and 30 Megabytes hard disks are popular with microcomputers. Their data transfer rate is also fast. Some disks rotate at a speed of 3000 to 5000 revolutions per minute. Some hard disks units have removable disk cartridges. Other hard disks are called fixed disks because they are permanently fixed in a sealed unit. Hard disks are better than floppy diskettes in many ways. A small hard disk stores ten megabytes, which is not possible for a floppy diskette. Normally, microcomputer based hard disks are fixed type, whereas others are removable type. Every piece of information can be accessed faster than a floppy diskette. Access time is less than tenth of a second. (e) Winchester Disks. It is the standard hard disk used with microcomputers. It is a type of hard disk permanently sealed in plastic unit. It is becoming more and more popular with micros due to its huge storage capacity compared to floppy diskettes. The times it takes to access a particular record of information has three components: (i) Seek time, (ii) Latency time, (iii) Data transfer time. (i) Seek Time. The time it takes to position the read or write head to a particular position is known as seek time. (ii) Latency Time. Latency time or rotational delay is the time, it takes for the desired record to spin around to the read or write head. (iii) Data Transfer Time. The time it takes for the complete record to pass under the read or write head is known as data transfer time.

342 D Library and Information Science Specific (f) Floppy Diskette. Floppy diskettes are also random devices like the magnetic disks. Floppy diskette systems are like record players. It stores data similar to disk pack for hard disks in concentric circles, which are called tracks. These tracks are also divided into sectors. A floppy can be considered like one surface of a disk pack. Double sided floppy can be considered like two surfaces in a disk pack. The floppy diskette acquired its name from its flexible plastic base. This base is coated with magnetic oxide.

Software Software is list of instruction or data loaded into the computer to do certain activities in the computer. Software of computer allows and manages the hardware of computer to run properly. Physical unit of the computer cannot work unless instructions are given to the computer on how each part of the computer should function. This list of instruction or programme to carry out functions in the computer is known as software of the computer. Software may be put on disk, cassette, magnetic tape or semiconductor memory. Software programs that are permanently stored in semiconductor read only memory are called firmware. This type of program user can read but cannot alter them. Further in power off condition it is not lost.

TYPE OF SOFTWARE System Software System software are also referred to as system programs. System software directly affect the operation of the computer. It is designed to facilitate the use of the hardware and to help in the functioning of the computer system efficiently and quickly. It is written specifically for a particular type of computer and cannot be used without modification on different machines. Systems softener are normally supplied ready-made by the computer manufacturer with the intension of making the computer easier to use. System software are initially written in a general fashion to meets as many user requirements as possible. However, they can be modified or tailored to meet a particular organisation’s specific needs. The system programmers must have the technical background needed to understand the complex internal operations of the computer. System software can be grouped essentially in 4 main categories, operating system, utility programs, database management systems and data communications software. System Software

Operating System

Utility Programs

Database Management System

CHART SHOWING SYSTEM SOFTWARE

Data Communications Software

Unit-VII D 343 (i) Operating System (O.S.). It is an intermediary between user and computer. It is an integrated set of specialized programmes i.e. is used to manage the resources and overall operation of a computer. It supervises the progress and use of all other application software. It monitors and control which programme is to operate at a time. It provide the resource manage controlling and allocation of memory and peripheral to programme. It ensures memory protection so that one programme and its data cannot interfere with another programme and its data. (ii) Utility Programs. Utility programs, also known as utility routines, are generalpurpose programs which carry out a given function on whatever data is presented to them. They are used to carry as wide variety of functions that are regularly used in data processing work. The programs have often been optimized and perform more efficiently than a program written by an average programmer. More importantly, they avoid the need to ‘reinvent the wheel’. Utilities exist for a wide range of functions like the following. (1) Sorting, that is taking data in one sequence and rendering it on the basis of another key into a different sequence. (2) Merging, that is mixing two streams of data into a single stream whilst preventing its sequence. (3) Dumping that is moving the contents of file, a backing storage device or primary storage to another location. For example dumping the contents of a magnetic disk on to a magnetic tape for security or back-up purpose. (4) Software monitor that are programs designed to check the activity of specific aspects of the computer system to ascertain where bottlenecks exist. (iii) Database Management Systems. A database management system (DBMS) is the software system used to manage large quantities of data in a way that is more or less independent of the specific applications for which they are used. Both computer manufacturers and also software houses supply DBMS. Depending on the particular DBMS chosen it will have some or all of the following features. (1) Handling of data stored (2) Allocation of space to data (3) Maintenance of the pointers and chains used to access the data. (4) Logging of changes to the data stored. (5) Logging of access to the data stored. (6) Password or security access control (7) A special high level language to manipulate the data. (8) Data dictionary facility to help track what data is contained in the databases and how it is used. (iv) Data Communication Software. Data communication software is necessary whenever computing is conducted across telephone lines or other links. This software, which in some respects may be thought of as an extension of the operating system in that it is concerned with I/O and control functions, varies considerably depending on the type and speed of communications software may be obtained from equipment vendors or software houses.

344 D Library and Information Science Specific

Application Software The application software is especially written or adapted to deal with a particular task, to solve particular problems. Application software may be provided by the computer manufacturer or supplier, but in many cases the users develop their own application software, which is called user program. The typical examples are inventory control and accounting programs. The job of the application software programmes is to use the capabilities of the computer to solve specific problems. Application programs can be written by a programmer without an in-depth knowledge of the computer. If the problem to be solved is clearly defined and understood, the task of writing program to solve it is greatly simplified. Under the class of application software come (a) user application software (b) application packages.

PC Software Personal Computers (PCs) have brought in a revolution in the use of computers because of their lowest price. Even small libraries can afford to purchase them. World processing is the most common application software available on PCs.

PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES Object Oriented Object Oriented programming is a programming style which is associated with the concepts like class, object, Inheritance, Encapsulation, Abstraction, Polymorphism. Most popular programming languages like Java, C++, C#, Ruby, etc. follow an object-oriented programming paradigm. As Java being the most sought-after skill, we will talk about object-oriented programming concepts in Java. An object-based application in Java is based on declaring classes, creating objects from them and interacting between these objects.

Procedural Language A procedural language is a computer programming language that follows, in order, a set of commands. Examples of computer procedural languages are BASIC, C, FORTRAN, Java, and Pascal. Procedural languages are some of the common types of programming languages used by script and software programmers. They make use of functions, conditional statements, and variables to create programs that allow a computer to calculate and display a desired output. Using a procedural language to create a program can be accomplished by using a programming editor or IDE, like Adobe Dreamweaver, Eclipse, or Microsoft Visual Studio. These editors help users develop programming code using one or more procedural languages, test the code, and fix bugs in the code.

Unit-VII D 345

High-level Language A high-level language (HLL) is a programming language such as C, FORTRAN, or Pascal that enables a programmer to write programs that are more or less independent of a particular type of computer. Such languages are considered high-level because they are closer to human languages and further from machine languages. In contrast, assembly languages are considered low-level because they are very close to machine languages.

Scripting Language A scripting language is a programming language designed for integrating and communicating with other programming languages. Some of the most widely used scripting languages are JavaScript, VBScript, PHP, Perl, Python, Ruby, ASP and Tcl. Since a scripting language is normally used in conjunction with another programming language, they are often found alongside HTML, Java or C++. One common distinction between a scripting language and a language used for writing entire applications is that, while a programming language is typically compiled first before being allowed to run, scripting languages are interpreted from source code or bytecode one command at a time. Although scripts are widely employed in the programming world, they have recently become more associated with the World Wide Web, where they have been used extensively to create dynamic Web pages. While technically there are many client-side scripting languages that can be used on the Web, in practice it means using JavaScript.

TELECOMMUNICATION The process of transmitting and receiving the information or the messages is called communication. The transfer of information i.e. communication is the base of automation. In recent years, enormous strides have been made in the development of the technologies of communication process. So today communication is often referred to as telecommunication, that means the use of telephone, telegraph, radio or television facilities to transmit information, either directly or via computer. The era of telecommunication began in 1844 with invention of the telegraph. Fifty years after it, another major development took place in 1893 in Boston when A. G. Bell invented telephone by which the transmission of information was possible through wires. After this, the ability to communicate long distances without wire came in the end of 19th century when Marconi developed the first wireless telegraph. In this way, we see that there has been a great development in the communication technology. Telecommunication was not popular during the period of 1950-60, because more attention was being paid towards mass media. At that time it was more suitable for economists and journalists. But today it is to transmit, represent of information (signal) between remote locations. Most telecommunication systems in operation today employ electrical or electromagnetic media including light waves as carriers of signals. Modern telecommunication technology is based on the principle of digital transmission. In the

346 D Library and Information Science Specific course of last 20 years the concept of telecommunication has led to the renewal of communication network into telecommunication network. The present age is basically based on computers, information and telecommunication. Today world wide network dealing with specialized information allows people to do all their banking, stock trading and currency buying over the telephone, a part of telecommunication system. In fact this technological advance is ubiquitous and affects everything. Terms like telemedicine, teleconferencing, telepresence have become so common in this field. The cost reduction and capacity increment, have combined to produce fibre optical system currently capable of 1000 Gbps Km using 1.6 m wave division multiplexing with attenuation approaching its theoretical minimum, delivered to customers at low price. Moreover exploratory designs for fast packet switches are available with 1000 inputs, each operating at 50 Mbps and with 16 inputs, each operating at 1 Gbps. These capabilities offer the possibility for a wide range of new telecommunication services. In fact today telecommunication is a sine-qua-non for the over all development of a nation. Today advanced telecommunication services such as fax and data transmission over telephone and leased circuits for business customers are being made available. Public pay phones, including smart card pay phones, cellular phones have been widely deployed in the people these days. A number of new services including electronic mail, video text, videotext, video-conferencing, and audio-conferencing are being provided through the telecommunication systems. Hence we conclude that throughout the world, telecommunication has changed significantly in the last decade, not only in technology but also in services offered.

Transmission Channels The basic purpose of any transmission system is to transmit information in the form of voice or data from one end to the other. Transmission media are the electronic roadways along which signals are transferred. Thus these mediums are the channels through which the information is transmitted from source to destination. There are many types of transmitting media whose types are as follows: (a) Two Wires Open Lines. It consists of a simple pair of bare metallic wires made of copper or some times aluminium of between 0.4 to 1 mm diameter, each wire is insulated from the other. Open wire lines were the original telephone and telegraph transmission media. This type of media is used for communication within a short distance upto about 50 meters. (b) Twisted Pair Cables. It consists of a pair of insulated conductors that are twisted together. It provides better immunity in comparison to two wires open lines from spurious noise signals. It is used for communications upto a distance of 2 km and can achieve transfer rates 100 mb/s. It is widely used in telephone networks, LAN of computers. (c) Coaxial Cables. It consists of a solid conductor running coaxially inside a solid or braided outer annular conductor. The space between two conductors is filled with a dielectric insulating material. A coaxial cable can be used over a distance of about 20 km and can achieve a transfer rate of upto 500 mb/s. It is of two types i.e. 75 ohms broad band cable which is used by the cable TV operators, and 50 ohms base band cable which is used in high speed computer networks.

Unit-VII D 347 (d) Fibre Optical Cables. A fibre optical cable carries signals in the form of fluctuating light in a glass or plastic fibre. An optical fibre cable consists of a glass or plastic core surrounded by a cladding made of a similar material but with a lower refractive index. The core transmits the light while the change in refractive index between the core and the cladding causes total internal reflection. Thus minimizes the loss of light from fibre. As light waves give a much wider bandwidth than the electrical signal and are immune from electromagnetic interferences, this leads to high rates of data transmission of about 2000 mb/s and can be used for long and medium distance communication links. (e) Line of Sight Transmission. In this type of data transmission system data are sent into the air transmission by infrared, lasers, microwaves and radio. Each of these is well suited for certain applications. For long distance transmission, such as telephone and television transmission microwave radio transmission is widely used. (f) Satellite Transmission. In satellite transmission data or signals are transmitted from an Earth station (VSAT) amplify them and retransmitted them to another Earth station. It is widely used for telephones, TV signals and high speed Fax. This transmission is practical for users to erect an antenna on the roof of his building and completely bypass the telephone system security which is usually provided by the telephone system. Satellite communications have some interesting properties that make them attractive for certain applications.

Switching System A communication network has to share its transmission capacity among all its users. But since only a few users on either end of the network are connected at any one time some type of control equipment switching system is required. The switching system is nothing but circuit switch allows an incoming channel to be switched to any one of the outgoing channels. The switching system increases the utilization of the communication line in the network. Hence the switching system is the line control equipment. There are four different categories of such line control equipments available. They are multiplexers, concentrators, communication controllers and switching devices of various types.

Types of Switching System There are following three types of switching systems.

(a) Circuit Switching System With a circuit switching system, the physical transmission path is switched. A dedicated path between two stations is connected with sequence of link between nodes. Example, telephone network is circuit switching system. The advantages of the circuit switching are: (i) Data transfer being bursty in nature, the set up time is in excess as the actual data transfer lasts for a few seconds or fraction of a second. (ii) One bad link in the system will affect the quality of the system. (iii) The speed of operation of the circuit is limited by the slowest link in the circuit. (iv) The required bandwidth is statically allocated and the unused bandwidth is wasted. (v) The end systems have no control over errors that are controlled by the network.

348 D Library and Information Science Specific

(b) Packet Switching System Here the data to be transmitted are broken down into small blocks of data called as packets. Each packet contains data plus an address, a packet number and the number of the last packet. The packet can be transmitted separately and in any order. However, at the reception point they are combined in the correct order. The packets of data sent from one user or node to another user or node can take different routes to reach their destination. Every node on receiving a packet, if it is not the addressed node, routes it to the next node to reach subsequently the addressed node. This system contains two approaches. (i) Data gram approach—Each packet is treated independently. (ii) Virtual circuit approach—A logical connection is established before any packets are sent. The main characteristic of this system is that a route between stations is setup prior to data transfer. Example: Intelligence Network on telephone lines, I-Net, etc.

(c) Message Switching System This system is basically a variation of packet switching system in which the data packets can be switched in route. If a station wishes to send a message, it appends a destination address to message. The message is then passed through the network from node to node. At each node, the entire message is received, stored and then transmitted to the next node. This system is also known as Store and Forward message system, which is used in some long distance data networks. Example: E-mail, telegram, etc.

Unit-VII D 349

The node processor performs the following functions: (i) To receive the user message and to store the same. (ii) To verify the message for data transmission errors and to perform error recovery. (iii) To determine the destination address from the user message. (iv) To select an appropriate link towards destination. (v) To forward the message to the next node on the selected link.

Bandwidth Bandwidth is a measure of the amount of information that can be transmitted in a given time. The bandwidth, or grade, of a communication channel determines the rate or speed that data can be transmitted over a channel. The term bandwidth is often shortened to band. Bandwidth is measured in bits per second (bps) by the difference in the highest and lowest frequencies that can be transmitted over the line of transmission. This is also quite high in case of optical fibre cable used for digital transmission compared to the cable used for analog transmission. In this way, the bandwidth is the communication rate of the speed at which data travels over a communication channel . Communication rate is measured in bits per second (bps) or band rate. There are three bands for communication channels. (a) Narrow Band. In information transmission the narrow band channel is used where the volume of the data is relatively low and which transmits data at the rate between 40 to 150 bits per second (bps). Telegraph lines are an example of narrow band channels, and their transmission rate is slow. (b) Voice Band. It is the medium speed transmission and has the efficiency of transmitting the data at the rate between 150 to 9600 bits per second (bps). Telephone lines are an example of voice band channels. In many cases, a terminal operator at a remote location uses the regular dial-up telephone switching network, calls a number at the control processor location and enters the data. For large volume of data, it is cheaper for an organization to acquire its own dedicated or leased line which can be used for both voice and data transmission. (c) Broad Band. The broad band channels are used where data volumes are large and which transmit data at rate upto several megabits per second. Microwaves coaxial cables, fibre optics and communication satellites are the examples of broad band channels. This band is able to send data at the rate between 19200 to 50000 bits per second.

350 D Library and Information Science Specific Use of Bands in Satellite Transmission Satellite transmission is broadcast and received by an one using different bands for signals. Every satellite uses two different bands (frequencies) for transmission. Sends and receives data on different bands. Transmission from Earth station to satellite is called uplink transmission, and back transmission is called downlink transmission. The following are three main and important commercial bands for transmission needed and used in satellite transmission. Band c Ku Ka

Downlink Transmission (bandwidth) 3.7 GHz-4.2 GHz 11.7 GHz-12.2 GHz 17.7 GHz-21.00 GHz

Uplink Transmission (Bandwidth) 6.72 GHz-7.02 Ghz 14.00 GHz-14.5 GHz 27.5 GHz-31.0 GHz

Multiplexing Multiplexing is the process of combining the transmission, character by character, from several devices, into a single data stream that can be transmitted over a single communication channel. A multiplexer is a device that produces multiplexing. It is also used at the receiving end to separate the transmissions and send them back in their original order for processing. A multiplexer allows the communication channels to transmit much more data, at any one time, then what a single device can send. Multiplexers are more efficient and less expensive.

Methods of Multiplexing The following methods are used by multiplexers. (a) Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM). This method of multiplexing uses separate frequencies to establish multiple channels within a broad band medium. To do this the multiplexer creates special broad band carrier signals that operate on different frequencies. Data signals are added to the carrier signals and are removed, at the opposite end of the media segment by another multiplexer. This method is used in broad band local area networks (LANs) to separate different directions the traffic on the cable and to provide special services like dedicated connections between machines. (b) Time Division Multiplexing (TDM). This system divides a single channel into short time slots. Bits, blocks of bits, bytes or frames can be placed into each time interval. Time division is a multiplexing technique that you can use on base band systems. We can also use it on an individual channel of a broad band Frequency Division Multiplexing System. Conventional Time Division Multiplexing systems are sometimes called synchronous TDM because the time-divisions are fixed when the multiplexers are set up. The time slots are always the same length and are assigned in the same order. (c) Statistical Time Division Multiplexing (STDM). Conventional synchronous TDM systems waste bandwidth if many of the time slots are left unused. Statistical time division multiplexing solves this problem by dynamically allocating time slots to active devices on a first-came-first-served priority basis. A control field identifies the owners of each slot’s data so that the receiving multiplexer can appropriately split out all the individual signals.

Unit-VII D 351

Modulation Data is represented as electrical pulse. A pulse is either present or not present. It represents a 1 bit or a 0 bit respectively. Today basic communication channels are ordinary telephone lines. Sending electrical signals in the form 0 bit and 1 bit pulses long distance over such channels give rise to two problems: (i ) The signals tend to drop in intensity due to the physical resistance of the lines (ii ) The signals tend to pick up interference, called noise. To overcome these problems, the electrical signals must be boosted. However, electrical signals in pulse form are difficult to boost during transmission. So, in conventional voicegrade networks, the signals are converted into waveform for transmission purposes. The process of converting signals from a binary digit pattern to a continuous analog pattern is called modulation. The reverse of this process converting from waveform to pulse form, thereby reconstructing the electrical signal is called demodulation. Computers handle and produce digital signal. While using the ordinary telephone lines, the digital signals are to be converted to analog wave pattern. Similarly, the receiving unit has to do the reverse operation. This process of conversion and reconversion is called modulation and demodulation. A modem or acoustic coupler is used for this purpose. There are two types of modems internal and external. An internal modem comes on a printed circuit board that is placed inside the computer, whereas an external modem is connected to the computer via a cable attached.

Protocols Some rules and standards are established relating with data communication in an information transmission system. These rules and standards are called protocols in language of data communication. Thus protocol is a rule or complete set or rules and standards that allows different devices to hold conversations. These rules may vary depending on the devices being used. Thus we say that protocol is a set of rules which govern the interchange of data between two communicating computers. The word protocol has been borrowed from common usage to describe computer communication. In brief, the word means something similar in both instances. It describes conventional social behaviour on the one hand and the orderly exchange of information between computing equipment on the other. On common example of the social analogy is the college classroom. If all the students spoke simultaneously, as they felt the urge, the professor would struggle to make sense of the chaos and valuable information would be lost. For this reason, classroom protocol (rules) defines a process of raising hands on which students request that they be permitted speak, resulting in the orderly exchange of data between several different people. Following is an example of set of rules and standards in which network service requesters and service providers can communicate. (i ) How is the transmission media physically set up? (ii ) How do network entities contact one another? (iii ) How do network entities know how much data can be transmitted? (iv) How are network entities guaranteed that a message has been received correctly?

352 D Library and Information Science Specific (v) How are bits transmitted on the media? (vi ) How do network entities, with disparate languages, communicate? (vii ) How do network entities know when to transmit data? When we formally agree that we will both use the same language in future communication, we have established a communication protocol. Typically protocols are created by computer networking standards organisations and vendors. Once a protocol has been established, the hardware and software vendors implement it in their various products. In computing, a protocol is necessary in order for two computers to create a path for exchanging information. The physical path may have some kind of analogy to a digital communication path connecting the two devices. The protocol is merely the logical abstraction of the process which allows two different machines to share information. These are following functions, a protocol performs. 1. Establishing necessary conventions; 2. Establishing a standard communication path; 3. Establishing a standard data element. The final job of protocol is to establish standard data elements for use in communication over the path. In this way, the protocol creates virtual data element to exchange between computing elements. For instance, two computers may wish to swap character streams. Sometimes, they need to deal in a simple data element, such as a letter or memo, which at other times, they deal in entire files. Or system may be constructed for exchanging a programme or a job between the two machines. Finally, in some applications the element which needs to be transferred may be as complex as a graphic display. In conclusion we can say that protocols are the formal rules and conventions governing the exchange of information between computers, defined to provide reliable and efficient transfer of information. Without protocols to guide the orderly exchange of data between points in a network, there would be chaos, not communication.

WIRELESS COMMUNICATION In the information communication mediums for transmitting the information from one place to the other, the wireless communication medium is the most important, most modern and multi-useful medium these days. The ability to communicate long distances without wires came in 1895 when G. Marconi developed the first wireless telegraph. Reginald Fesseden, an American physicist, demonstrated the first radio transmission of voices in 1900. Until then radio messages had been sent using the Morse’s dot dash code. In 1901 Marconi transmitted a radio message across the Atlantic. However, commercial broadcasting began in 1920 in USA. Today the following two methods are used in wireless communication of information.

Microwave Communication In the modern time, the meaning of wireless transmission is taken to microwave transmission that were noticed during the World War II with their use in radar. Microwave signals are transmitted by antennas placed on the top of the buildings or mountains. Microwave signals provide very high speed data transmission. Microwave transmission

Unit-VII D 353 is widely used for broad band communication and telephone services. Microwave signals are transmitted through the atmosphere rather than through wire cables, similar to the way radio and television signals are transmitted. Microwave signals must be transmitted in a straight line, they don’t bend around the curve of the earth. Transmitter stations redirect and boost the signals.

Satellite Communication Recent advances in communication and space technologies have narrowed the gap between time and space. Now it has become possible to relay information through satellites from one corner of the world to the other. Satellites have brought a major revolution in the technology of economics of long distance communications. They have the capability to provide continental telephone channels as cheap as today’s inter-urban circuits and are able to beam up to 200 alternative TV programmes direct to antennae at home. However, the beginning of the era was marked by launching of two satellites in 1962 by USA and USSR. In the 1990’s larger satellites assembled in space, which may be able to house extra terrestrial computers and databases. With the help of satellites, it has become possible to transmit data (signals) around the globe by bouncing them from one satellite to an earth station and then to another satellite. Satellite transmissions are cheaper because the data circuits are much faster and they are shared. Dozen of satellites are now in orbit to handle international and domestic data, voice and video and video communications. Compared to wire cables, microwave has a much lower error rate making it more reliable. Also, because there are no physical links between sending and receiving systems, communication links can be made over large distance and rough terrains. Microwave communication is widely used for telephones, TV signals and high speed Fax. Satellite transmission is inherently a very high capacity and high speed operation matched only by fibre optic transmission. In 1963, USA government set up INTELESAT, through which the third of the world international transactions takes place. This satellite has a capacity of 12,000 simultaneous two way telephone circuits and two television channels, using advanced technologies. India has also entered in the space world by launching of Apple, but it was an experimental telecommunication satellite. In 1982, INSAT-IA was launched. It was a joint venture of some departments of Indian government.

Wi-Fi Wi-Fi is a low power wireless communication, that is used by various electronic devices like smart phones, laptops, etc. In this setup, a router works as a communication hub wirelessly. These networks allow users to connect only within close proximity to a router. WiFi is very common in networking applications which affords portability wirelessly. These networks need to be protected with passwords for the purpose of security, otherwise it will access by others.

Li-fi Li-fi is a wireless optical networking technology that uses light-emitting diodes (LEDs) for data transmission.

354 D Library and Information Science Specific LiFi is designed to use LED light bulbs similar to those currently in use in many energyconscious homes and offices. However, LiFi bulbs are outfitted with a chip that modulates the light imperceptibly for optical data transmission. LiFi data is transmitted by the LED bulbs and received by photoreceptors. LiFi's early developmental models were capable of 150 megabits-per-second (Mbps). Some commercial kits enabling that speed have been released. In the lab, with stronger LEDs and different technology, researchers have enabled 10 gigabits-per-second (Gbps), which is faster than 802.11ad.

Benefits of LiFi Higher speeds than Wi-Fi. 10000 times the frequency spectrum of radio. n More secure because data cannot be intercepted without a clear line of sight. n Prevents piggybacking. n Eliminates neighboring network interference. n Unimpeded by radio interference. n Does not create interference in sensitive electronics, making it better for use in environments like hospitals and aircraft. By using LiFi in all the lights in and around a building, the technology could enable greater area of coverage than a single WiFi router. Drawbacks to the technology include the need for a clear line of sight, difficulties with mobility and the requirement that lights stay on for operation. n n

Mobile Communication Systems The advancement of mobile networks is enumerated by generations. Many users communicate across a single frequency band through mobile phones. Cellular and cordless phones are two examples of devices which make use of wireless signals. Typically, cell phones have a larger range of networks to provide a coverage. But, Cordless phones have a limited range. Similar to GPS devices, some phones make use of signals from satellites to communicate.

Bluetooth Technology The main function of the Bluetooth technology is that permits you to connect a various electronic devices wirelessly to a system for the transferring of data. Cell phones are connected to hands free earphones, mouse, wireless keyboard. By using Bluetooth device the information from one device to another device. This technology has various functions and it is used commonly in the wireless communication market.

Advantages of Wireless Communication n n n n

Any data or information can be transmitted faster and with a high speed. Maintenance and installation is less cost for these networks. The internet can be accessed from anywhere wirelessly. It is very helpful for workers, doctors working in remote areas as they can be in touch with medical centers.

Unit-VII D 355

Disadvantages of Wireless Communication n n

An unauthorized person can easily capture the wireless signals which spread through the air. It is very important to secure the wireless network so that the information cannot be misused by unauthorized users

Applications of Wireless Communication Applications of wireless communication involve security systems, television remote control, Wi-Fi, Cell phones, wireless power transfer, computer interface devices and various wireless communication based projects.

COMPUTER NETWORKS As the time is changing very fast, sharing of resources among organizations is becoming more and more important and so their inter-independence on the other organization is increasing day by day. The use of computer has been of great help in the work of sharing of resources. The computer and its communication circuit links to other computers or to terminals constituting an integral information machine for sharing of resources. This is called networking. Networking can be defined as a group of individuals or organizations that are interconnected as a common form or through the computer. This linking includes a communication mechanism, and may networks exist to express purpose of facilitating certain types of communication among their member organizations. Thus networking is a system with a predominant flow of service and a reverse flow of demand. A network is a form of arrangement or an administrative structure that links a group of individuals or organisations who have agreed to work together and share their resources. A formal dictionary meaning of network implies a physical connection between the component parts. The application of computer has facilitated the forming of network among organisations very simple and easy. When a group of organisations using computers decide to exchange information through the computer applications, a computer network is developed. A computer network is created when several computers and terminal devices are connected together by data communication system. The set of computers may include microprocessors, mini computers, medium scale computers and large scale computers. The set of terminal devices may include dumb terminals, intelligent terminals, dumb as well as intelligent terminals, etc. and miscellaneous devices such as modems, commonly, used for data transmission. Each computer in a network can have its own processing capabilities and can also share computer hardware, programs, software and data files.

Topologies The network topology means the structure or the arrangement of nodes for a network, where each computer or device in a network is called a node. The topology or the structure of the network depends upon the pure for which organizations use it. The topology includes the physical arrangement or the geographic pattern by which the nodes are connected. It

356 D Library and Information Science Specific also includes the logical arrangement; the possible destinations to which each can route data. A number of organizations would join the network that offers the facilities to make their functioning simpler, better and more cost effective. Interconnection of the network system can be achieved in many ways, but basically network topologies are classified into the following anatomical structures. Thus the geographical arrangement of computer resources, remote devices, communication facilities is known as network topology.

Network Topologies A network can be made in one of the following five different topologies. (a) Bus Network. In a bus network, each computer is connected to a single communication cable via an interface and every computer can directly communicate with every other computer or device in the network. This topology is commonly used alongwith the local area networks. (b) Ring Network. In a ring network, several devices or computers are connected to each other in a closed loop by a single communication cable. A ring network is also called loop network. In the ring network, data must travel around the ring to each station in turn until they arrive at the required station. In it a ring can be unidirectional or bidirectional. In a unidirectional ring, data moves in one direction only and in a bidirectional ring, data moves in both directions, but in only one direction at a time. In the unidirectional ring, a special software is needed if one computer should break down, whereas, in the bidirectional ring, message can be sent in the opposite direction to meet the requirement. (c) Star Network. In a star network, several devices or computers are connected to one centralized computer. The disadvantage of star network is that none of the other computers can communicate with each other if the centre computer breads down. If it is desired to transmit information from one computer to another, it can be done only by sending the details to the central computer, which in turn sends them to the destination. A star network is used in banking sector for centralized record keeping in an on-line branch office environment. (d) Tree Network. In a tree network, several devices or computers are linked in a hierarchical fashion. Therefore, tree network is also known as hierarchical network. This type of distribution system is commonly used in the organization where headquarters communicate with regional offices and regional offices communicate with district offices and so on. (e) Mesh Network. A mesh network has point-to-point connections between every device in the network. Each device requires an interface for every other device on the network, mesh topologies are not usually considered practical. In addition, unless each station frequently sends signal to all the other stations, an excessive amount of network bandwidth is wasted. However mesh networks are extremely fault tolerant, and each link provides guaranteed capacity. Mesh topology may be used in a hybrid network with just the largest or most important sites interconnected. (f) Star-Ring Network. In this topology, two topologies have been combined with the aim of achieving the best of the both. Electrically the star-ring operates exactly in the same way as a normal ring. The difference is that the physical wiring is arranged as a series of inter connected stars.

Unit-VII D 357

Types of Networks LAN—Local Area Network In a LAN, two or more computers are directly linked within a small well defined area such as a room, office building or a campus. It has relatively small number of users. They are widely used to connect personal computers and work stations in company offices and factories to share resources and exchange information. These are distinguished from other kinds of networks by the three characteristics (i) their size, (ii) topology, and (iii) transmission technology. LAN links a number of computers (work stations) together to allow many people to use the same computer programs and share information. Each user can access the network from an individual personal computer work station. It provides multiuser environment which allows sharing of data as well as expensive resources like printers and storage. It also provides modularity, connectivity, superior performance, security and reliability in its operation. It can fit any site requirement and in it any number of users can be accommodated. It allows sharing of mass central storage and printers and also file record locking. It can be tailored to suit any type of application. Main benefit of LAN is the reduction of hardware and software costs because users can share several computers, peripheral devices such as colour plotters, hard disks, modem, LAN platform software. Another benefit is that the users can share the same data.

MAN—Metropolitan Area Network It is a network that is basically a bigger version of LAN. It is called metropolitan since it normally covers the area of a big city. It might be either private or public. Different hardware and transmission media are often used in MANs because they must efficiently cover these distances upto a few tens of kilometres. A MAN can support both data and voice, and might even be related to the local cable television network. A MAN has just one or two cables and does not contain switching elements, which shunt packets over one of the several potential output lines.

WAN—Wide Area Network A WAN is composed of a number of autonomous computers that are distributed over a large-geographical area, often a country or continent. It can be implemented with the help of private networks as well as public networks. Private networks are built within one corporation. The implementors lease circuits for private use which are usually telephone lines and construct a network. On the other hand, public networks are built by government telecommunication agencies. The transmission and switching facilities are shared by several corporations and organisations. In most of the WANs, the network contains numerous cables or telephone lines. It has many uses and it makes file transfer easier. They are useful in data collection. In addition to these, WANs have many other uses, including software distribution, the ability to use expensive resources, such as computer servers and high resolution colour graphic printers, remotely and importantly, the ability to manage networks centrally. Wide Area Networks are usually limited to use by the large organisations and government agencies due to high costs involved in building and maintaining them. It is a satellite based wide area network with national coverage.

358 D Library and Information Science Specific Examples: MANs WANs

DELNET, CALIBNET, PUNENT, BONET, MALIBNET, etc. NICNET, INDONET, I-NET, INFLIBNET, ERNET, VIDYANET, etc.

INTERNET Web Browser A web browser is a software program that allows a user to locate, access, and display web pages. In common usage, a web browser is usually shortened to "browser." Browsers are used primarily for displaying and accessing websites on the internet, as well as other content created using languages such as Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) and Extensible Markup Language (XML). Browsers translate web pages and websites delivered using Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) into human-readable content. They also have the ability to display other protocols and prefixes, such as secure HTTP (HTTPS), File Transfer Protocol (FTP), email handling (mailto:), and files (file:). In addition, most browsers also support external plug-ins required to display active content, such as in-page video, audio and game content. A variety of web browsers are available with different features, and are designed to run on different operating systems. Common browsers include Internet Explorer from Microsoft, Firefox from Mozilla, Google Chrome, Safari from Apple, and Opera. All major browsers have mobile versions that are lightweight versions for accessing the web on mobile devices. Web browsers date back to the late 1980s when an English scientist, Tim Berners-Lee, first developed the ideas that led to the World Wide Web (WWW). This consisted of a series of pages created using the HTML language and joined or linked together with pointers called hyperlinks. Following this was the need for a program that could access and display the HTML pages correctly - the browser. In 1993, a new browser known as Mosaic was developed, which soon gained widespread usage due to its graphical-interface capability. Marc Andreesen, a member of the Mosaic development team, left in 1994 to develop his own commercial browser based on Mosaic. He called it Netscape Navigator, and it quickly captured over 90 percent of the nascent browser market. It soon faced stiff competition in 1995 from Microsoft's Internet Explorer, which was freely bundled with Windows 95 (and later versions of Windows). It was pointless to buy Navigator when Internet Explorer was free, and as a result, Navigator (and Netscape) were driven into the ground. But while Mosaic and Netscape are no longer around, the age of the browser was launched and continues to this day, as more and more applications move to the web.

World Wide Web (WWW) The World Wide Web (WWW), commonly known as the Web, is an information system where documents and other web resources are identified by Uniform Resource Locators

Unit-VII D 359 (URLs, such as https://www.example.com/), which may be interlinked by hypertext, and are accessible over the Internet. The resources of the WWW may be accessed by users by a software application called a web browser. English scientist Tim Berners-Lee invented the World Wide Web in 1989. He wrote the first web browser in 1990 while employed at CERN near Geneva, Switzerland. The browser was released outside CERN in 1991, first to other research institutions starting in January 1991 and then to the general public in August 1991. The World Wide Web has been central to the development of the Information Age and is the primary tool billions of people use to interact on the Internet. Web resources may be any type of downloaded media, but web pages are hypertext media that have been formatted in Hypertext Markup Language (HTML). Such formatting allows for embedded hyperlinks that contain URLs and permit users to navigate to other web resources. In addition to text, web pages may contain images, video, audio, and software components that are rendered in the user's web browser as coherent pages of multimedia content. Multiple web resources with a common theme, a common domain name, or both, make up a website. Websites are stored in computers that are running a program called a web server that responds to requests made over the Internet from web browsers running on a user's computer. Website content can be largely provided by a publisher, or interactively where users contribute content or the content depends upon the users or their actions. Websites may be provided for a myriad of informative, entertainment, commercial, governmental, or non-governmental reasons.

E-mail E-mail is a service which allows us to send the message in electronic mode over the internet. It offers an efficient, inexpensive and real time mean of distributing information among people.

E-Mail Address Each user of email is assigned a unique name for his email account. This name is known as E-mail address. Different users can send and receive messages according to the e-mail address. E-mail is generally of the form username@domainname. For example, [email protected] is an e-mail address where webmaster is username and tutorialspoint.com is domain name. l The username and the domain name are separated by @ (at) symbol. l E-mail addresses are not case sensitive. l Spaces are not allowed in e-mail address.

E-mail Message Components E-mail message comprises of different components: E-mail Header, Greeting, Text, and Signature. These components are described in the following diagram:

360 D Library and Information Science Specific

E-mail header

From : [email protected] Mon Jun 03 10:30 EDT 2018 Date : Mon 03 2018 10:30:29 EDT 2018 -300 (EDT) To : [email protected] Subject : review Cc : [email protected]

Greeting

Hi Guys, When you see the arrival guest coming in, open the main entrance by using switch beside of the front desk.

Signature

–Vin Bhar Vin Bhar 85 VPO East West Ladpur Delhi

Body

Text

| office : (011) 2303205 | fax : (011) 2303205

E-mail Header The first five lines of an E-mail message is called E-mail header. The header part comprises of following fields: n FROM. The From field indicates the sender's address i.e. who sent the e-mail. n DATE. The Date field indicates the date when the e-mail was sent. n TO. The To field indicates the recipient's address i.e. to whom the e-mail is sent. n SUBJECT. The Subject field indicates the purpose of e-mail. It should be precise and to the point. n CC. CC stands for Carbon copy. It includes those recipient addresses whom we want to keep informed but not exactly the intended recipient. n BCC. BCC stands for Black Carbon Copy. It is used when we do not want one or more of the recipients to know that someone else was copied on the message. n GREETING. Greeting is the opening of the actual message. E.g., Hi Sir or Hi Guys etc. n TEXT. It represents the actual content of the message. n SIGNATURE. This is the final part of an e-mail message. It includes Name of Sender, Address, and Contact Number. Advantages E-mail has proved to be powerful and reliable medium of communication. Here are the benefits of E-mail: n Reliable. Many of the mail systems notify the sender if e-mail message was undeliverable. n Convenience. There is no requirement of stationary and stamps. One does not have to go to post office. But all these things are not required for sending or receiving an mail.

Unit-VII D 361 n n n n n

Speed. E-mail is very fast. However, the speed also depends upon the underlying network. Inexpensive. The cost of sending e-mail is very low. Printable. It is easy to obtain a hardcopy of an e-mail. Also an electronic copy of an e-mail can also be saved for records. Global. E-mail can be sent and received by a person sitting across the globe. Generality. It is also possible to send graphics, programs and sounds with an email.

Disadvantages Apart from several benefits of E-mail, there also exists some disadvantages as discussed below: n Forgery. E-mail doesn't prevent from forgery, that is, someone impersonating the sender, since sender is usually not authenticated in any way. n Overload. Convenience of E-mail may result in a flood of mail. n Misdirection. It is possible that you may send e-mail to an unintended recipient. n Junk. Junk emails are undesirable and inappropriate emails. Junk emails are sometimes referred to as spam. n No Response. It may be frustrating when the recipient does not read the e-mail and respond on a regular basis.

E-mail Protocols E-mail Protocols are set of rules that help the client to properly transmit the information to or from the mail server. Here in this tutorial, we will discuss various protocols such as SMTP, POP, and IMAP.

SMPTP SMTP stands for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. It was first proposed in 1982. It is a standard protocol used for sending e-mail efficiently and reliably over the internet. Key Points: n n n n n n n n n

SMTP is application level protocol. SMTP is connection oriented protocol. SMTP is text based protocol. It handles exchange of messages between e-mail servers over TCP/IP network. Apart from transferring e-mail, SMPT also provides notification regarding incoming mail. When you send e-mail, your e-mail client sends it to your e-mail server which further contacts the recipient mail server using SMTP client. These SMTP commands specify the sender's and receiver's e-mail address, along with the message to be send. The exchange of commands between servers is carried out without intervention of any user. In case, message cannot be delivered, an error report is sent to the sender which makes SMTP a reliable protocol.

362 D Library and Information Science Specific SMTP Commands The following table describes some of the SMTP commands: S. No. 1 2

Command Description HELLO. This command initiates the SMTP conversation. EHELLO. This is an alternative command to initiate the conversation. ESMTP indicates that the sender server wants to use extended SMTP protocol. MAIL FROM. This indicates the sender's address. RCPT TO. It identifies the recipient of the mail. In order to deliver similar message to multiple users this command can be repeated multiple times. SIZE. This command let the server know the size of attached message in bytes. DATA. The DATA command signifies that a stream of data will follow. Here stream of data refers to the body of the message. QUIT. This commands is used to terminate the SMTP connection. VERFY. This command is used by the receiving server in order to verify whether the given username is valid or not. EXPN. It is same as VRFY, except it will list all the users name when it used with a distribution list.

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

IMAP IMAP stands for Internet Mail Access Protocol. It was first proposed in 1986. There exist five versions of IMAP as follows: 1. Original IMAP, 2. IMAP2, 3. IMAP3, 4. IMAP2bis, 5. IMAP4 Key Points: n n n

n n

IMAP allows the client program to manipulate the e-mail message on the server without downloading them on the local computer. The e-mail is hold and maintained by the remote server. It enables us to take any action such as downloading, delete the mail without reading the mail. It enables us to create, manipulate and delete remote message folders called mail boxes. IMAP enables the users to search the e-mails. It allows concurrent access to multiple mailboxes on multiple mail servers.

IMAP Commands The following table describes some of the IMAP commands: S. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Command Description IMAP_LOGIN. This command opens the connection. CAPABILITY. This command requests for listing the capabilities that the server supports. NOOP. This command is used as a periodic poll for new messages or message status updates during a period of inactivity. SELECT. This command helps to select a mailbox to access the messages. EXAMINE. It is same as SELECT command except no change to the mailbox is permitted. CREATE. It is used to create mailbox with a specified name. DELETE. It is used to permanently delete a mailbox with a given name. RENAME. It is used to change the name of a mailbox. LOGOUT. This command informs the server that client is done with the session. The server must send BYE untagged response before the OK response and then close the network connection.

Unit-VII D 363 POP POP stands for Post Office Protocol. It is generally used to support a single client. There are several versions of POP but the POP 3 is the current standard. Key Points l l l l l l l

POP is an application layer internet standard protocol. Since POP supports offline access to the messages, thus requires less internet usage time. POP does not allow search facility. In order to access the messaged, it is necessary to download them. It allows only one mailbox to be created on server. It is not suitable for accessing non mail data. POP commands are generally abbreviated into codes of three or four letters. E.g. STAT.

POP Commands The following table describes some of the POP commands: S. No.

Command Description

1 2 3 4 5 6

LOGIN. This command opens the connection. STAT. It is used to display number of messages currently in the mailbox. LIST. It is used to get the summary of messages where each message summary is shown. RETR. This command helps to select a mailbox to access the messages. DELE. It is used to delete a message. RSET. It is used to reset the session to its initial state.

7

QUIT. It is used to log off the session.

Email Operations Here we will discuss the operation s th at can be performed on an e-mail. But first of all we will learn how to create an email account.

Creating Email Account Th ere are vari ou s emai l service provider available su ch as Gmai l, h otmail , ymail, rediff mail etc. Here we will learn how to create an account using Gmail. n Open gmail.com and click create an account. n Now a form will appear. Fill your details here and click Next Step.

364 D Library and Information Science Specific n n n n

This step allows you to add your picture. If you don't want to upload now, you can do it later. Click Next Step. Now a welcome window appears. Click Continue to Gmail. Wow!! You are done with creating your email account with Gmail. It's that easy. Isn't it? Now you will see your Gmail account as shown in the following image:

Key Points l n n

Gmail manages the mail into three categories namely Primary, Socialand Promotions. Compose option is given at the right to compose an email message. Inbox, Starred, Sent mail, Drafts options are available on the left pane which allows you to keep track of your emails.

Composing and Sending Email Before sending an email, we need to compose a message. When we are composing an email message, we specify the following things: n Sender's address in To field n Cc (if required) n Bcc (if required) n Subject of email message n Text n Signature You should specify the correct email address; otherwise it will send an error back to the sender. Once you have specified all the above parameters, It's time to send the email. The mailer program provides a Send button to send email, when you click Send, it is sent to the mail server and a message mail sent successfully is shown at the above.

Reading Email Every email program offers you an interface to access email messages. Like in Gmail, emails are stored under different tabs such as primary, social, and promotion. When you click one of tab, it displays a list of emails under that tab. In order to read an email, you just have to click on that email. Once you click a particular email, it gets opened.

Unit-VII D 365 The opened email may have some file attached with it. The attachments are shown at the bottom of the opened email with an option called download attachment.

Replying Email After reading an email, you may have to reply that email. To reply an email, click Reply option shown at the bottom of the opened email. Once you click on Reply, it will automatically copy the sender's address in to the To field. Below the To field, there is a text box where you can type the message. Once you are done with entering message, click Send button. It's that easy. Your email is sent.

Forwarding Email It is also possible to send a copy of the message that you have received along with your own comments if you want. This can be done using forward button available in mail client software. The difference between replying and forwarding an email is that when you reply a message to a person who has send the mail but while forwarding you can send it to anyone. When you receive a forwarded message, the message is marked with a > character in front of each line and Subject: field is prefixed with Fw.

Deleting Email If you don't want to keep email into your inbox, you can delete it by simply selecting the message from the message list and clicking delete or pressing the appropriate command. Some mail clients offers the deleted mails to be stored in a folder called deleted items or trash from where you can recover a deleted email.

E-mail Features Now a day, the mail client comes with enhanced features such as attachment, address book, and MIME support.

Attachment Ability to attach file(s) along with the message is one of the most useful features of email. The attachment may be a word document, PowerPoint presentation, audio/video files, or images. n In order to attach file(s) to an email, click the attach button. As a result, a dialog box appears asking for specifying the name and location of the file you want to attach. n Once you have selected the appropriate file, it is attached to the mail. n Usually a paper clip icon appears in the email which indicates that it has an attachment. n When adding an attachment it is better to compress the attached files so as to reduce the file size and save transmission time as sending and downloading large files consumes a lot of space and time.

Address Book Address book feature of a mail program allows the users to store information about the people whom they communicate regularly by sending emails. Here are some of the key features of an Address book:

366 D Library and Information Science Specific n n n n

Address book includes the nick names, email addresses, phone number etc. of the people. Using address book allows us not to memorize email of address of a person, you just have to select recipient name from the list. When you select a particular name from the list, the corresponding email address link automatically get inserted in to the To: field. Address book also allows creating a group so that you can send a email to very member of the group at once instead of giving each person email address one by one.

Search Engine A web search engine or Internet search engine is a software system that is designed to carry out web search (Internet search), which means to search the World Wide Web in a systematic way for particular information specified in a textual web search query. The search results are generally presented in a line of results, often referred to as search engine results pages (SERPs). The information may be a mix of links to web pages, images, videos, infographics, articles, research papers, and other types of files. Some search engines also mine data available in databases or open directories. Unlike web directories, which are maintained only by human editors, search engines also maintain real-time information by running an algorithm on a web crawler. Internet content that is not capable of being searched by a web search engine is generally described as the deep web. Google adopted the idea of selling search terms in 1998, from a small search engine company named goto.com. This move had a significant effect on the SE business, which went from struggling to one of the most profitable businesses in the Internet. Search engines were also known as some of the brightest stars in the Internet investing frenzy that occurred in the late 1990s. Several companies entered the market spectacularly, receiving record gains during their initial public offerings. Some have taken down their public search engine, and are marketing enterprise-only editions, such as Northern Light. Many search engine companies were caught up in the dot-com bubble, a speculation-driven market boom that peaked in 1999 and ended in 2001. Around 2000, Google's search engine rose to prominence. The company achieved better results for many searches with an algorithm called PageRank, as was explained in the paper Anatomy of a Search Engine written by Sergey Brin and Larry Page, the later founders of Google. This iterative algorithm ranks web pages based on the number and PageRank of other web sites and pages that link there, on the premise that good or desirable pages are linked to more than others. Larry Page's patent for PageRank cites Robin Li's earlier RankDex patent as an influence. Google also maintained a minimalist interface to its search engine. In contrast, many of its competitors embedded a search engine in a web portal. In fact, Google search engine became so popular that spoof engines emerged such as Mystery Seeker. By 2000, Yahoo! was providing search services based on Inktomi's search engine. Yahoo! acquired Inktomi in 2002, and Overture (which owned AlltheWeb and AltaVista) in 2003. Yahoo! switched to Google's search engine until 2004, when it launched its own search engine based on the combined technologies of its acquisitions.

Unit-VII D 367 Microsoft first launched MSN Search in the fall of 1998 using search results from Inktomi. In early 1999 the site began to display listings from Looksmart, blended with results from Inktomi. For a short time in 1999, MSN Search used results from AltaVista instead. In 2004, Microsoft began a transition to its own search technology, powered by its own web crawler (called msnbot). Microsoft's rebranded search engine, Bing, was launched on June 1, 2009. On July 29, 2009, Yahoo! and Microsoft finalized a deal in which Yahoo! Search would be powered by Microsoft Bing technology. As of 2019, active search engine crawlers include those of Google, Sogou, Baidu, Bing, Gigablast, Mojeek, DuckDuckGo and Yandex

Meta Search Engine A meta search engine is a type of search engine that gives results based on a combination of results from other search engine databases. It specializes in concatenating databases from a variety of search engines and linking search results to relevant sources. A meta search engine is also known as a metasearch engine. Meta search engines use a complex algorithm that allows virtual databases to be generated on the fly. A virtual database "virtually" mirrors the physical database results of other search engines. All search result information and data are listed in a virtual database, and searches may be concentrated according to varied criteria. Thus, no two meta search engines are alike because they all operate with different criteria, such as news sites and newsgroups, depending on the algorithm designed to perform specified search functions.

INTERNET PROTOCOLS AND STANDARDS HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure) HTTP is for Web sites using additional security features such as certificates. HTTPS is used when Web transactions are required to be secure. HTTPS uses a certificate based technology such as VeriSign. Certificate-based transactions offer a mutual authentication between the client and the server. Mutual authentication ensures the server of the client identity, and ensures the client of the server identity. HTTPS, in addition to using certificate-based authentication, encrypts all data packets sent during a session. Because of the encryption, confidential user information cannot be compromised. To use HTTPS, a Web site must purchase a certificate from a third-party vendor such as VeriSign, CertCo, United States Postal Service, or other certificate providers. When the certificate is issued to a Web site from a third-party vendor, the Web site is using trusted communication with the client. The communication is trusted because the third party is not biased toward either the Web site or the client. To view a certificate during a HTTPS session, simply double-click the lock icon in the lower-right area of the Web browser. HTTPS operates on port 443 and uses TCP for communication.

368 D Library and Information Science Specific

HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) HTTP is often called the protocol of the Internet. HTTP received this designation because most Internet traffic is based on HTTP. When a user requests a Web resource, it is requested using HTTP. The following is a Web request: http://www.example.com When a client enters this address into a Web browser, DNS is called to resolve the Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) to an IP address. When the address is resolved, an HTTP get request is sent to the Web server. The Web server responds with an HTTP send response. Such communication is done several times throughout a single session to a Web site. HTTP uses TCP for communication between clients and servers. HTTP operates on port 80.

FTP (File Transfer Protocol) One of the earliest uses of the Internet, long before Web browsing came along, was transferring files between computers. The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is used to connect to remote computers, list shared files, and either upload or download files between local and remote computers. FTP runs over TCP, which provides a connection-oriented, guaranteed data-delivery service. FTP is a character-based command interface, although many FTP applications have graphical interfaces. FTP is still used for file transfer purposes, most commonly as a central FTP server with files available for download. Web browsers can make FTP requests to download programs from links selected on a Web page. You should become familiar with the basic commands available in an FTP session. To begin a character based command session on a Windows computer, follow these steps. n Open a Command prompt window, type ftp at the prompt, and press Enter. n This will begin an FTP session on the local machine but will not initialize a connection to another machine. n Without a connection to another machine, you will not be able to do anything. To connect, type open example.com or open 10.10.10.1, in which exmple.com or 10.10.10.1 is the name or IP address of a host that is available as an FTP server. Most FTP servers require a logon id and password, or they will accept anonymous connections. At this point you will be prompted for a logon ID and password. n Once you are connected, you can list the files on the remote server by typing dir. n If you have create privileges on the remote server, you can create a new directory by typing mkdir. n To download a file, type get filename.txt where filename.txt is the name of the file you are downloading. n To upload a file, typeput filename.txt.

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) SMTP is a standard electronic-mail protocol that handles the sending of mail from one SMTP to another SMTP server. To accomplish the transport, the SMTP server has its own MX (mail exchanger) record in the DNS database that corresponds to the domain for which it is configured to receive mail.

Unit-VII D 369 When equipped for two-way communication, mail clients are configured with the address of a POP3 server to receive mail and the address of an SMTP server to send mail. The clients can configure server parameters in the properties sheets of the mail client, basing the choices on an FQDN or an IP address. SMTP uses TCP for communication and operates on port 25. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the application-layer protocol used for transmitting e-mail messages. SMTP is capable of receiving e-mail messages, but it's limited in its capabilities. The most common implementations of SMTP are in conjunction with either POP3 or IMAP4. For example, users download an e-mail message from a POP3 server, and then transmit messages via an SMTP server.

TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol, A connection based Internet protocol responsible for breaking data into packets, which the IP protocol sends over the network. IP is located at the TCP/IP Internet layer which corresponds to the network layer of the OSI Model. IP is responsible for routing packets by their IP address. IP is a connectionless protocol which means, IP does not establish a connection between source and destination before transmitting data, thus packet delivery is not guaranteed by IP. Instead, this must be provided by TCP. TCP is a connection based protocol and, is designed to guarantee delivery by monitoring the connection between source and destination before data is transmitted. TCP places packets in sequential order and requires acknowledgment from the receiving node that they arrived properly before any new data is sent.

TCP/IP Model Application layer Transport layer

Network layer Data link layer Physical layer

DHCP - DNS - FTP - HTTP - IMAP4 - IRC - NNTP - XMPP - MIME - POP3 - SIP - SMTP - SNMP - SSH - TELNET - BGP - RPC - RTP - RTCP - TLS/SSL - SDP - SOAP - L2TP - PPTP This layer deals with opening and maintaining connections, ensuring that packets are in fact received. This is where flow-control and connection protocols exist, such as: TCP - UDP - DCCP SCTP - GTP IP (IPv4 - IPv6) - ARP - RARP - ICMP - IGMP - RSVP - IPSec - IPX/SPX ATM - DTM - Ethernet - FDDI - Frame Relay - GPRS - PPP Ethernet physical layer - ISDN - Modems - PLC - RS232 - SONET/SDH - G.709 - Wi-Fi

URI This document defines a way to encapsulate a name in any registered name space, and label it with the name space, producing a member of the universal set. Such an encoded and labelled member of this set is known as a Universal Resource Identifier, or URI. The universal syntax allows access of objects available using existing protocols, and may be extended with technology. The specification of the URI syntax does not imply anything about the properties of names and addresses in the various name spaces which are mapped onto the set of URI strings. The properties follow from the specifications of the protocols and the associated usage conventions for each scheme.

370 D Library and Information Science Specific

URL For existing Internet access protocols, it is necessary in most cases to define the encoding of the access algorithm into something concise enough to be termed address. URIs which refer to objects accessed with existing protocols are known as "Uniform Resource Locators" (URLs) and are listed here as used in WWW, but to be formally defined in a separate document.

HYPERTEXT, HYPERMEDIA, MULTIMEDIA, VIDEO CONFERENCING, VIRTUAL REALITY, AUGMENTED TECHNOLOGIES Hypertext The hypertext technology is a new phenomenon and it was envisioned five decades ago in 1945 by Vannevan Bush as a way of storing all kinds of information. Hypertext differs from existing on-line retrieval systems in which they encourage informal, personalised, content-oriented information seeking strategies and user can apply information during the retrieval process by noting context, during browsing by sharing, linking or transferring text or images. Hypertext supports the end users through flexible and powerful human computer interface which balances browsing strategies with analytical strategies. The researchers, using hypertext systems, can quickly follow trails of footnotes and related materials without losing their original context. The extension of hypertext is hypermedia in which authors can create a linked body of materials that include text, static graphics, animated graphics, video and sound. Hypertext and hypermedia systems allow the users to traverse complex network of information quickly. It can easily link passages and references quickly; collapse or expand outlines; freely move among text fragments to find sources of quotations; journal articles, references, definitions and related passages.

Advantages of Hypertext Though intertextual references are not a new concept, the machine supported hypertext interlinks the traditional literature in an efficient manner and they are organized hierarchically. It also offers new possibilities for accessing large and complex information sources. The operational advantages of hypertext are as follows: (a) Tracing or references becomes easy. (b) The creation of new references becomes easy. (c) Information structuring is easy. (d) Global and local views can be mixed effectively. (e) Text segments can be threaded. (f) Same text segments can be viewed simultaneously from several places. (g) Consistency of information. (h) User can have several paths of enquiry. (i) Several authors can collaborate with the documents.

Unit-VII D 371

Classification of Hypertext (1) Macro-literary systems Examples: Bush’s Trigg’s (2) Problem-exploration systems Examples: Horst Rittal’s David Lowe’s (3) Structure browsing systems Examples: Emac’s Symbolic’s (4) General purpose systems Examples: Disessa’s MCC’s

MEMEX TEXTNET IBIS SYNVIEW INFO Subsystem DOCUMENT EXAMINER Boxer Plane Text

Hypermedia (Multimedia) Multimedia is one of the recent developments in information technology which brings together all the ideas like text, audio, video, animation, graphics and image aids, a clear meaning to the information, and simultaneously it includes virtual reality to enhance the users believe-ability. The multimedia provides the feel of information by sensitising eyes and ears simultaneously which is essential for information intensive world. Multimedia is a term of two separate words connected i.e. multi (so many) mediums. Thus it is most commonly applied to the simultaneous use of sound, text, image and video (they are all in number more than one) in preparing presentations for promotional or educational purposes. Mainly Personal Computers are capable or supporting multimedia applications such as multimedia encyclopaedias and games, etc. The extension of multimedia into communication world is a phenomenon of the few years back. It is fuelled by the availability of suitable transport networks and effective compression techniques to reduce the vast data rates required by video and, to a lesser extent, voice such that communication across the available networks becomes practical. Multimedia is a new way for presenting the information. It is the most widely used and simpler technology which presents the information in text, graphics, images, video, audio and animation interactively in a computer environment. The term multimedia refers to deliver information in a simpler and understandable way to the endorsers. The developments in optical store mediums like CD-ROM, CD-I, DV-I and DVD has made the multimedia presentation possible. The audio, video and graphics files with required more storage space can be captured easily with this optical medium. The technological developments like increasing PC powers, digital technology and optical storage made possible the multimedia information revolution. The main reason which is responsible for popularising multimedia, is that on the one hand it stores a huge amount of data and on the other hand it presents the information in an understandable form. It is largely used in business houses, educational institutions, government offices and at home for information and recreational purposes. The major difference in the traditional systems and the multimedia system is the

372 D Library and Information Science Specific three dimensional presentation of information by multimedia. The traditional systems just show one view, whereas multimedia shows it as if it is alive, it represents the different views of the system with images, graphics and sound. The traditional systems are static whereas multimedia system is more dynamic one, which changes over a period of time. Multimedia allows the user to interact with system whereas traditional systems are passive. Communication of information is easy, efficient and effective which is the vital mechanism behind multimedia. It captures the data, process it to aid meaning to it and present it as a valuable information by integrating.

Types of Multimedia There are two types of multimedia technology, which are discussed below: (a) Non-interactive Multimedia. In this kind of multimedia the audience plays a rather passive role, they receive the information presented to them in the form of video, text, images, sound, animations, etc. projected to a large screen using an LCD projector. (b) Interactive Multimedia. It is oriented specifically to the individual use. Exchange of data in two different environment (called navigation) is possible because data exists in nonlinear manner. The basis of interactive multimedia is hypermedia or hypertext, which is a mechanism in which highlighted text can be activated to obtain more information.

Applications of Multimedia in the Library The applications of multimedia for accessing the information are mentioned below: (1) Reference sources like encyclopaedias, which are bulky in size, are now available in multimedia. Because multimedia includes the sound, video, animation, texts and graphics, so it gives and presents a clear and understandable picture of information. The complexities in information may be avoided with the help of multimedia. The examples of multimedia encyclopaedias, which are presently available in the markets are: New Grolier Multimedia Encyclopaedia; McGraw Hill Encyclopaedia of Science and Technology; Compton’s Encyclopaedia of Science and Technology and Compton’s Interactive Multimedia. Another most popular multimedia encyclopaedia is Microsoft Encarta (recent edition is Encaster 97). (2) Multimedia allows the users to search any information in encyclopaedia and simultaneously he can also see the animations and illustrations, etc. referred to that information. The Library of Congress is also providing scope to convert its millions of items to digital form and to distribute them on Internet or DC’s. If our computer has multimedia facility and Internet connection, we may have access of information of Library of Congress also. (3) Scientific literature which often consists of difficult designs cannot clearly describe through text and two dimensional graphics. But the presentations of these developments through proper animation, graphics, text, video and sound can give understandable meaning to the scientists. The scientific journals published in this form gives better results than the traditional one. In multimedia network environment, researchers can send voice, text, images or video to others.

Unit-VII D 373 (4) Video conferencing which allows face to face communication over networked environment is also a remarkable achievement. It is possible due to advanced multimedia platform which supports multimedia networking. (5) Virtual reality is a substitution of man made input to one or more of the senses. Virtual reality is a technology that provides with sensations and the control of perspective so that one experiences the illusion of being in the presence of the object, within a situation, or surrounded by a place. Multimedia is now largely used in the virtual environment to enhance the users believe, so that the user can feel like a real life situation. The multimedia virtual environment can be used in libraries for providing resources to the users. The model library system can be created in hypermedia.

Video Conference Through video conferencing people can interact with each other face to face. To have a video conference we need only a web cam at the starting its more expensive but now the rates are reducing.  Audio and Video Conference software is very pricey it can also be download and installed from the web sites with no cost. 

Advantages of Video Conferencing 1. Free download of easy to use software that can be used via Internet to connect student, instructor, or guest speaker to class and enable both sides to see & hear. 2. Enables individual (usually limited to one connection) to participate in synchronous learning experiences from any location worldwide. Users can connect from home, work or other location easily accessible to them. 3. Specifically useful for guest speaker who is far away from face-to-face class location, or student who cannot be in face-to-face class. 4. Enables students to take virtual field trips to remote locations (either just by viewing the video (e.g. African Voices) or engaging in an interactive lesson (see African Masks field trip). This is especially an advantage to students who attend schools in isolated communities, but is an advantage to all students regardless of location or socio-economic factors. See extensive list of examples at SBC Video-conference Adventures; also Ball State University Electronic Field Trips. 5. Can be used to record vodcast or podcast and uploaded to course website (for webenhanced, hybrid, or fully online classes). As video conferencing technology improves, this can become a far cheaper alternative to ITV or systems like PolyCom in enabling school districts to offer specialized subjects by having one teacher teach a class to students at a number of schools (e.g. in foreign language

Disadvantages of Video Conferencing 1. Typically on free systems only one or a very limited number of users can connect to the host (instructor) computers at a time, so video/audio conferencing can be used only for individual access rather than as a larger scale tool and learning environment. However, newer systems such as Camfrog enable multi-user video conferencing.

374 D Library and Information Science Specific 2. Depending on the stability of the connection, users may be disconnected during the class and have to reconnect. Difficult to see and hear people who are not close to the microphone/camera, especially when using one of the low-cost systems (such as iSight camera). Thus difficult to have multiple people at one site, sharing a computer to communicate with users at other sites.

Virtual Reality The definition of virtual reality comes, naturally, from the definitions for both ‘virtual’ and ‘reality’. The definition of ‘virtual’ is near and reality is what we experience as human beings. So the term ‘virtual reality’ basically means ‘near-reality’. This could, of course, mean anything but it usually refers to a specific type of reality emulation. We know the world through our senses and perception systems. In school we all learned that we have five senses: taste, touch, smell, sight and hearing. These are however only our most obvious sense organs. The truth is that humans have many more senses than this, such as a sense of balance for example. These other sensory inputs, plus some special processing of sensory information by our brains ensures that we have a rich flow of information from the environment to our minds. Everything that we know about our reality comes by way of our senses. In other words, our entire experience of reality is simply a combination of sensory information and our brains sense-making mechanisms for that information. It stands to reason then, that if you can present your senses with made-up information, your perception of reality would also change in response to it. You would be presented with a version of reality that isn’t really there, but from your perspective it would be perceived as real. Something we would refer to as a virtual reality. So, in summary, virtual reality entails presenting our senses with a computer generated virtual environment that we can explore in some fashion.

Augmented Technologies Augmented reality (AR) is an interactive experience of a real-world environment where the objects that reside in the real world are enhanced by computer-generated perceptual information, sometimes across multiple sensory modalities, including visual, auditory, haptic, somatosensory and olfactory. AR can be defined as a system that fulfills three basic features: a combination of real and virtual worlds, real-time interaction, and accurate 3D registration of virtual and real objects. The overlaid sensory information can be constructive (i.e. additive to the natural environment), or destructive (i.e. masking of the natural environment). This experience is seamlessly interwoven with the physical world such that it is perceived as an immersive aspect of the real environment. In this way, augmented reality alters one's ongoing perception of a real-world environment, whereas virtual reality completely replaces the user's real-world environment with a simulated one. Augmented reality is related to two largely synonymous terms: mixed reality and computer-mediated reality. The primary value of augmented reality is the manner in which components of the digital world blend into a person's perception of the real world, not as a simple display of data, but through the integration of immersive sensations, which are perceived as natural parts of an environment. The earliest functional AR systems that provided immersive

Unit-VII D 375 mixed reality experiences for users were invented in the early 1990s, starting with the Virtual Fixtures system developed at the U.S. Air Force's Armstrong Laboratory in 1992. Commercial augmented reality experiences were first introduced in entertainment and gaming businesses. Subsequently, augmented reality applications have spanned commercial industries such as education, communications, medicine, and entertainment. In education, content may be accessed by scanning or viewing an image with a mobile device or by using markerless AR techniques. An example relevant to the construction industry is an AR helmet for construction workers which displays information about construction sites. Augmented reality is used to enhance natural environments or situations and offer perceptually enriched experiences. With the help of advanced AR technologies (e.g. adding computer vision, incorporating AR cameras into smartphone applications and object recognition) the information about the surrounding real world of the user becomes interactive and digitally manipulated. Information about the environment and its objects is overlaid on the real world. This information can be virtual or real, e.g. seeing other real sensed or measured information such as electromagnetic radio waves overlaid in exact alignment with where they actually are in space. Augmented reality also has a lot of potential in the gathering and sharing of tacit knowledge. Augmentation techniques are typically performed in real time and in semantic contexts with environmental elements. Immersive perceptual information is sometimes combined with supplemental information like scores over a live video feed of a sporting event. This combines the benefits of both augmented reality technology and heads up display technology (HUD).

DATA SECURITY Data security refers to protective digital privacy measures that are applied to prevent unauthorized access to computers, databases and websites. Data security also protects data from corruption. Data security is an essential aspect of IT for organizations of every size and type. Data security is also known as information security (IS) or computer security.

Network Security Network security is any activity designed to protect the usability and integrity of your network and data. It includes both hardware and software technologies. Effective network security manages access to the network. It targets a variety of threats and stops them from entering or spreading on your network.

Firewalls In computing, a firewall is a network security system that monitors and controls incoming and outgoing network traffic based on predetermined security rules. A firewall typically establishes a barrier between a trusted internal network and untrusted external network, such as the Internet. Firewalls are often categorized as either network firewalls or host-based firewalls. Network firewalls filter traffic between two or more networks and run on network

376 D Library and Information Science Specific hardware. Host-based firewalls run on host computers and control network traffic in and out of those machines. The term firewall originally referred to a wall intended to confine a fire within a building. Later uses refer to similar structures, such as the metal sheet separating the engine compartment of a vehicle or aircraft from the passenger compartment. The term was applied in the late 1980s to network technology that emerged when the Internet was fairly new in terms of its global use and connectivity. The predecessors to firewalls for network security were the routers used in the late 1980s, because they separated networks from one another, thus halting the spread of problems from one network to another.

Cryptographic Techniques Cryptography is one of the essential technologies used in building a secure VPN. Different applications of the same basic algorithms can provide both encryption that keeps data secret and authentication that ensures the two security peers in a VPN are who they claim to be. This chapter introduces some basic concepts in cryptography and demonstrates how they can be used in practice to provide data confidentiality. The next chapter continues this theme with a discussion of mutual authentication using cryptographic algorithms. Data confidentiality may be provided by one of two categories of encryption algorithm, namely symmetric cryptography and asymmetric cryptography. Symmetric, or conventional, cryptography requires that the sender and receiver share a key, which is an item of secret information used to encrypt and decrypt data. The process by which two peers agree upon a key over an insecure medium can be problematic as, until the key is agreed, the peers have no way to communicate in secret. Asymmetric, or Public Key, cryptography solves the key exchange problem by using two keys, either of which may be used to encrypt a message. The encrypted data may then only be decrypted by means of the other key. Messages may be received securely by publishing one of the keys (for example, in the footer of an e-mail message) as a Public Key and keeping the second, the Private Key, secret. Anyone wishing to send a secure communication may then encrypt the message with the recipient's Public Key and, providing the Private Key has not been disclosed, only the intended recipient will be able to decrypt the encrypted text and recover the original message.

Antivirus Software Antivirus software, or anti-virus software (abbreviated to AV software), also known as anti-malware, is a computer program used to prevent, detect, and remove malware. Antivirus software was originally developed to detect and remove computer viruses, hence the name. However, with the proliferation of other kinds of malware, antivirus software started to provide protection from other computer threats. In particular, modern antivirus software can protect users from: malicious browser helper objects (BHOs), browser hijackers, ransomware, keyloggers, backdoors, rootkits, trojan horses, worms, malicious LSPs, dialers, fraudtools, adware and spyware. Some products also include protection from other computer threats, such as infected and malicious URLs, spam, scam and phishing attacks, online identity (privacy), online banking attacks, social engineering techniques, advanced persistent threat (APT) and botnet DDoS attacks.

Unit-VII D 377

Identification Methods One of the few solid theoretical results in the study of computer viruses is Frederick B. Cohen's 1987 demonstration that there is no algorithm that can perfectly detect all possible viruses. However, using different layers of defense, a good detection rate may be achieved. There are several methods which antivirus engine can use to identify malware: n Sandbox detection a particular behavioural-based detection technique that, instead of detecting the behavioural fingerprint at run time, it executes the programs in a virtual environment, logging what actions the program performs. Depending on the actions logged, the antivirus engine can determine if the program is malicious or not. If not, then, the program is executed in the real environment. Albeit this technique has shown to be quite effective, given its heaviness and slowness, it is rarely used in end-user antivirus solutions. n Data mining techniques one of the latest approaches applied in malware detection. Data mining and machine learning algorithms are used to try to classify the behaviour of a file (as either malicious or benign) given a series of file features, that are extracted from the file itself.

Signature-based Detection Traditional antivirus software relies heavily upon signatures to identify malware. Substantially, when a malware arrives in the hands of an antivirus firm, it is analysed by malware researchers or by dynamic analysis systems. Then, once it is determined to be a malware, a proper signature of the file is extracted and added to the signatures database of the antivirus software. Although the signature-based approach can effectively contain malware outbreaks, malware authors have tried to stay a step ahead of such software by writing "oligomorphic", "polymorphic" and, more recently, "metamorphic" viruses, which encrypt parts of themselves or otherwise modify themselves as a method of disguise, so as to not match virus signatures in the dictionary. Antivirus software has some drawbacks, first of which that it can impact a computer's performance. Furthermore, inexperienced users can be lulled into a false sense of security when using the computer, considering their computers to be invulnerable, and may have problems understanding the prompts and decisions that antivirus software presents them with. An incorrect decision may lead to a security breach. If the antivirus software employs heuristic detection, it must be fine-tuned to minimize misidentifying harmless software as malicious. Antivirus software itself usually runs at the highly trusted kernel level of the operating system to allow it access to all the potential malicious process and files, creating a potential avenue of attack. The US National Security Agency (NSA) and the UK Government Communications Headquarters (GCHQ) intelligence agencies, respectively, have been exploiting anti-virus software to spy on users. Anti-virus software has highly privileged and trusted access to the underlying operating system, which makes it a much more appealing target for remote attacks. Additionally anti-virus software is "years behind security-conscious client-side applications like browsers or document readers. It means that Acrobat Reader, Microsoft Word or Google Chrome are harder to exploit than 90 percent of the anti-virus products out there", according to Joxean Koret, a researcher with Coseinc, a Singapore-based information security consultancy.

378 D Library and Information Science Specific

Anti-Spyware Anti-spyware is a type of software that is designed to detect and remove unwanted spyware programs. Spyware is a type of malware that is installed on a computer without the user's knowledge in order to collect information about them. This can pose a security risk to the user, but more frequently spyware degrades system performance by taking up processing power, installing additional software, or redirecting users' browser activity. Anti-spyware may also be called apyware on the Internet. Because "a" and "s" sit next to each other on the keyboard, many people accidentally type "apyware" when they try to search "spyware." Manufacturers and other interested parties capitalize on this by advertising "apyware."

Intrusion Detection System An intrusion detection system (IDS) is a device or software application that monitors a network or systems for malicious activity or policy violations. Any malicious activity or violation is typically reported either to an administrator or collected centrally using a security information and event management (SIEM) system. A SIEM system combines outputs from multiple sources, and uses alarm filtering techniques to distinguish malicious activity from false alarms. IDS types range in scope from single computers to large networks. The most common classifications are network intrusion detection systems (NIDS) and host-based intrusion detection systems (HIDS). A system that monitors important operating system files is an example of an HIDS, while a system that analyzes incoming network traffic is an example of an NIDS. It is also possible to classify IDS by detection approach: the most well-known variants are signature-based detection (recognizing bad patterns, such as malware); and anomaly-based detection (detecting deviations from a model of "good" traffic, which often relies on machine learning), another is reputation-based detection (recognizing the potential threat according to the reputation scores). Some IDS products have the ability to respond to detected intrusions. Systems with response capabilities are typically referred to as an intrusion prevention system. Intrusion detection systems can also serve specific purposes by augmenting them with custom tools, such as using a honeypot to attract and characterize malicious traffic.

U N I T

VIII

SYLLABUS v v v v v v v v v v

Library Automation – Areas, Planning, Selection of Hardware and Software, Implementation and Evaluation; Standards for Library Automation. Barcode, RFID, QR Code, Biometric, Smartcard: Features and Applications. Digitization – Planning, Selection of Materials, Hardware, Software, Process, Issues. Digital Library: Genesis, Characteristics, Types, Architecture; Standards, Formats and Protocols, DOI. Digital Preservation - Need, Purpose, Standards, Methods, Techniques, Projects (National and International). Digital Library Initiatives – National and International. Institutional Repositories - Need, Purpose, Types and Tools; Institutional Repositories in India; ROAR, DOAR, SHARPA-ROMIO. Content Management Systems – Architecture, Data Integration, CMS Software – Selection, Implementation and Evaluation. Application of Artificial Intelligence, Expert Systems and Robotics in Libraries; Social Mobile Analytics Cloud (SMAC); Cloud Computing. Ontology – Tools (RDF, RDFS, Potege); Semantic Web, Linked Data, Big Data, Data Mining, Data Harvesting.

(379)

380 D Library and Information Science Specific

LIBRARY AUTOMATION Automation is a technique to make a system automated, i.e. self active. For this the electronic machines are used to automate the libraries. Thus library automation means the application of machines to perform the different routines, repetitive and clerical jobs involved in functions and services of the libraries. Before the birth of the computer, other types of machines such as punched cards, unit record machines were used for automating the library functions. These machines required considerable human supervision and intervention. Now on the other hand computers have become capable of introducing a greater degree of automation in operations, processes, techniques and methods of the libraries, since they are electronic, programmable and are capable of exercising control over the processes performed. Therefore, library automation means principally the use of computers, associated with magnetic tapes, disks, optical disks, etc., computer based products and services in library work. Thus library automation is the (a) Computerisation of all the house keeping operations of the library. (b) Operate a computerized library management system. (c) Offer new services based on the technologies and also integrate the traditional library operations in the era. (d) Improve control over increased volume of work load of the library.

Areas and Planning Computer has its impact on almost every step of life. Libraries are not exceptions to that, Automation, i.e. use of computer has changed the whole structure and working environment of the library. In the present day context, automation is needed in libraries and information centres because: 1. It is difficult to handle a large amount of increasing information without computer. 2. To share the resources with other libraries. 3. Availability of information in machine readable form can only be accessed by adopting computer technology. 4. A machine readable record can be used by many users for various purposes at many number of times. For example, a record created for acquisition section can be used for some other purpose. 5. Library automation relieves the library staff of repetitive work. 6. It takes less time to process data and retrieve information thus saving the time of the users and staff. In addition to the above, by automation, library activities such as acquisition, circulation, serial control, information retrieval, cataloguing and indexing can be mechanised by using library softwares.

Essential for the Automation The essential things for the automation of a library are:

Unit-VIII D 381

(i) Good Collection Computerisation is not just for the sake of computerisation. Computerisation of the university library collection and other library services is to serve the users better and to provide access to information. For this purpose, first of all the collection of the university library should be good and comprehensive. If the collection is not good what is the use of automation. The university library should have a book acquisition policy and norms for the building up of a good collection. Collection building is much more difficult task than purchasing a computer system. Computer can supplement and enhance the quality of the library collection but it cannot altogether replace the library collection.

(ii) Finances Finance is the backbone of any venture. UGC norms stipulate that the university library be allocated 10% of the university budget. Finances are required in the university library for: (a) The collection building (b) Computer system (c) Recurring expenditure For collection building every university in view of the rising costs of reading materials and the declining purchasing value of rupee, should provide at least 15% of the university budget annually. Then only it can be felt that the university administration is really interested in the university library. Secondly, the university library would require a minimum non-recurring amount of Rs 10-12 lakhs for establishing a computer system. Thirdly the university library would need an amount of Rs 3 to 5 lakhs annually for the maintenance of the computer system and its updating and uninterrupted power supply, etc.

Selection of Hardware and Software Selection and purchase of a computer is a complex procedure. The university library should decide first what type of computer it suitable for its work. There are variety of computers and computer makers. There are mini-frame computers to main frame computers. A university library would require a computer system rather than a single PC-XT. In computer systems there are LAN, WAN, etc. A university library would at least require a LAN with facilities for E-mail and Internet. There are different types of firms and organisations to supply computer hardware and parts such as: (a) Computer manufacturers (b) Independent terminal and peripheral manufacturers (c) Selling companies (d) Brokers (e) Leasing companies (f) Retail shops.

382 D Library and Information Science Specific User Friendly Computer Software Computer software are generally expensive. A software will include (a) Utilities format, conversion programmes (b) Application software (c) Database management system and data dictionary software (d) Dated communication software (e) Programming aids, testing aids, etc. (f) Additional system software. A software is generally a package. It is invisible and unverifiable till it is acquired. There are many library need-based software packages today in the market. Some of these are CDS\ISIS, WHIZKID, TULIPS, LIBSYS, LIBRIS OASIS, BASIS PLUS, TECHLIB plus, etc. Though it is not possible to evaluate exhaustively all these software packages.

Implementation and Evaluation 1. House Keeping Operations. In libraries, the house keeping operations means those functions or tasks which are done in the background so that the library may fulfil its goals of service to the users. The house keeping operations of libraries are the cataloguing, classification, circulation of books and serial control. 2. Information Retrieval. The enormous growth in the published information and increasing specialized nature of the literature have resulted in serious problems in accessing information, i.e., retrieving information on a given topic and in becoming aware of new pieces of information. The use of computers has become an important application for solving these problems and permit access to the users. These access are called Information Retrieval (IR) systems. IR systems for bibliographic applications are generally characterized by the fact that they permit verylarge record sizes, Boolean search capabilities and flexible output formatting. 3. Computerized Indexes. The indexes are compiled by computers in KWIC indexing. In computerized indexing the need of making content analysis has already become low and there is no need to analyse the whole text. The document and information should be according to KWIC indexing. It is easily prepared in a very short time by computer with the aid of key punchers. 4. Searching Process. The catalogues are prepared for searching the material in the libraries, but these are not fully capable to search out the required material out of large chunk of the literature. By the use of computers a file is prepared for all possible entries of the documents and the file is organized in such a way that all the queries, the entries prepared to provide access to the users are filled. The search for a record of a document may be done for various types of accesses in this system. It has become possible only due to the methods of searching by machine readable file, and which has become due to the efficiency of quick searching of the computers. The computer searches the information from the file and also tests the same. 5. International Information System. The application of computers has given the help in establishing international system for information dissemination, that was sometimes not possible. It is not difficult to compile universal bibliography today about which Paul Outlet and Henery La Fontaine thought first before a period of

Unit-VIII D 383 100 years. In this way the computer has made possible the establishment of information systems of international levels, such as INIS, AGRIS, etc. 6. Other Programmes. The automation has made various library and information services very simple and economical. It has also made the CAS and SDI services for the users very easy and active and many accesses of the users are fulfilled by it.

Qualities for Selecting the Software Software is the means by which the general purpose hardware of a computer system is made to perform specific tasks. Therefore, for doing automation in a library, first one, that is expected, is software. Today quite a number of software packages both foreign and Indian are available for library automation. Many of the librarians with their limited experience of handling software, might find it difficult to select an appropriate package for their use. Hence they need some guidelines for this purpose. Obviously, a number of factors have to be considered prior to the commitment to a specific software package. These may be considered as follows: 1. Cost. Each library has limited funds of money. Hence it is essential to give more attention on the cost of the software to be selected. It is also be kept in mind that the cost, that is being paid for the software would equally be useful or not. Since the full success of the library automation mostly depends on the qualities of the software used, hence a good software decreases the cost of the working of the library. 2. Hardware. At the time of selecting a software, to give attention on the hardware of the computer system is also necessary. Library must purchase softwares compatible to already existing hardwares or that software should be selected for which the cost of hardware is less. Although more and softwares are available in Indian markets but hardwares suitable to them are not easily available. 3. Operating System. At the time of selecting a software, it is also a considerable point to think about its operating system. All of operating systems have their own qualities. Some of them are more convenient and some are not so. Therefore, keeping in mind the qualities of all operating systems, the softwares should be purchased. 4. Programming Language. For selecting a software for computerization of the library, its programming language should also be kept in mind. A software has how many facilitates, this depend on the language in which the software is written. All the programming languages have their own qualities also. 5. Data Storage Technique and Search Response Time. When a reader wants to get information about a document in a computerized library, how much time the computer will take in searching the document, depends on so many things such as size of the file, arrangement, operating systems, hardware platforms, etc. Data storing technique also plays role in determining the time taken in searching of the information. It has been felt that the speed of searching of the structure of invert file is quicker than the structure of simple file. 6. Library Services. Even the services provided by all the libraries are mostly similar but even then they differ at some instant. Some of the libraries provide specialized services. Hence it is essential to observe the services, which are provided in the library to the users, whether they all are combined in the software or not. It is not necessary that all of the services may be available in all the softwares.

384 D Library and Information Science Specific 7. Updateness. Updateness of the softwares always is necessary, for this the facility of changing the software according to essentiality is also necessary. The experience show that software developed by private agencies are more up-to-date. 8. Easy is Use. The library should adopt such type of software, which are easy for use. The user guidelines for the same should also be simple.

BARCODE, RFID, QR CODE, BIOMETRIC, SMARTCARD: FEATURES AND APPLICATIONS Barcode A barcode (also spelled bar code) is a method of representing data in a visual, machine-readable form. Initially, barcodes represented data by varying the widths and spacings of parallel lines. These barcodes, now commonly referred to as linear or one-dimensional (1D), can be scanned by special optical scanners, called barcode readers. Later, two-dimensional (2D) variants were developed, using rectangles, dots, hexagons and other geometric patterns, called matrix codes or 2D barcodes, although they do not use bars as such. 2D barcodes can be read or deconstructed using application software on mobile devices with inbuilt cameras, such as smartphones. The barcode was invented by Norman Joseph Woodland and Bernard Silver and patented in the US in 1951 (US Patent 2,612,994). The invention was based on Morse code that was extended to thin and thick bars. However, it took over twenty years before this invention became commercially successful. An early use of one type of barcode in an industrial context was sponsored by the Association of American Railroads in the late 1960s. Developed by General Telephone and Electronics (GTE) and called KarTrak ACI (Automatic Car Identification), this scheme involved placing colored stripes in various combinations on steel plates which were affixed to the sides of railroad rolling stock. Two plates were used per car, one on each side, with the arrangement of the colored stripes encoding information such as ownership, type of equipment, and identification number. The plates were read by a trackside scanner, located for instance, at the entrance to a classification yard, while the car was moving past. The project was abandoned after about ten years because the system proved unreliable after long-term use. Barcodes became commercially successful when they were used to automate supermarket checkout systems, a task for which they have become almost universal. Their use has spread to many other tasks that are generically referred to as automatic identification and data capture (AIDC). The very first scanning of the now-ubiquitous Universal Product Code (UPC) barcode was on a pack of Wrigley Company chewing gum in June 1974. QR codes, a specific type of 2D barcode, have recently become very popular. Other systems have made inroads in the AIDC market, but the simplicity, universality and low cost of barcodes has limited the role of these other systems, particularly before technologies such as radio-frequency identification (RFID) became available after 1995.

Unit-VIII D 385

RFID RFID is an acronym for "radio-frequency identification" and refers to a technology whereby digital data encoded in RFID tags or smart labels are captured by a reader via radio waves. RFID is similar to barcoding in that data from a tag or label are captured by a device that stores the data in a database. RFID, however, has several advantages over systems that use barcode asset tracking software. The most notable is that RFID tag data can be read outside the line-of-sight, whereas barcodes must be aligned with an optical scanner. RFID belongs to a group of technologies referred to as Automatic Identification and Data Capture (AIDC). AIDC methods automatically identify objects, collect data about them, and enter those data directly into computer systems with little or no human intervention. RFID methods utilize radio waves to accomplish this. At a simple level, RFID systems consist of three components: an RFID tag or smart label, an RFID reader, and an antenna. RFID tags contain an integrated circuit and an antenna, which are used to transmit data to the RFID reader (also called an interrogator). The reader then converts the radio waves to a more usable form of data. Information collected from the tags is then transferred through a communications interface to a host computer system, where the data can be stored in a database and analyzed at a later time.

RFID Tags and Smart Labels An RFID tag consists of an integrated circuit and an antenna. The tag is also composed of a protective material that holds the pieces together and shields them from various environmental conditions. The protective material depends on the application. For example, employee ID badges containing RFID tags are typically made from durable plastic, and the tag is embedded between the layers of plastic. RFID tags come in a variety of shapes and sizes and are either passive or active. Passive tags are the most widely used, as they are smaller and less expensive to implement. Passive tags must be "powered up" by the RFID reader before they can transmit data. Unlike passive tags, active RFID tags have an onboard power supply (e.g., a battery), thereby enabling them to transmit data at all times. Smart labels differ from RFID tags in that they incorporate both RFID and barcode technologies. They're made of an adhesive label embedded with an RFID tag inlay, and they may also feature a barcode and/or other printed information. Smart labels can be encoded and printed on-demand using desktop label printers, whereas programming RFID tags are more time consuming and requires more advanced equipment.

RFID Applications n n n n n n n

Inventory management Asset tracking Personnel tracking Controlling access to restricted areas ID Badging Supply chain management Counterfeit prevention (e.g. in the pharmaceutical industry)

386 D Library and Information Science Specific

QR Code QR code (abbreviated from Quick Response Code) is the trademark for a type of matrix barcode (or two-dimensional barcode) first designed in 1994 for the automotive industry in Japan. A barcode is a machine-readable optical label that contains information about the item to which it is attached. In practice, QR codes often contain data for a locator, identifier, or tracker that points to a website or application. A QR code uses four standardized encoding modes (numeric, alphanumeric, byte/binary, and kanji) to store data efficiently; extensions may also be used. The Quick Response system became popular outside the automotive industry due to its fast readability and greater storage capacity compared to standard UPC barcodes. Applications include product tracking, item identification, time tracking, document management, and general marketing. A QR code consists of black squares arranged in a square grid on a white background, which can be read by an imaging device such as a camera, and processed using ReedSolomon error correction until the image can be appropriately interpreted. The required data is then extracted from patterns that are present in both horizontal and vertical components of the image.

Biometrics Biometrics is the technical term for body measurements and calculations. It refers to metrics related to human characteristics. Biometrics authentication (or realistic authentication) is used in computer science as a form of identification and access control. It is also used to identify individuals in groups that are under surveillance. Biometric identifiers are the distinctive, measurable characteristics used to label and describe individuals. Biometric identifiers are often categorized as physiological versus behavioral characteristics. Physiological characteristics are related to the shape of the body. Examples include, but are not limited to fingerprint, palm veins, face recognition, DNA, palm print, hand geometry, iris recognition, retina and odour/scent. Behavioral characteristics are related to the pattern of behavior of a person, including but not limited to typing rhythm, gait, and voice. Some researchers have coined the term behaviometrics to describe the latter class of biometrics. More traditional means of access control include token-based identification systems, such as a driver's license or passport, and knowledge-based identification systems, such as a password or personal identification number. Since biometric identifiers are unique to individuals, they are more reliable in verifying identity than token and knowledgebased methods; however, the collection of biometric identifiers raises privacy concerns about the ultimate use of this information.

Smartcard: Features and Applications A smart card, chip card, or integrated circuit card (ICC) is a physical electronic authorization device, used to control access to a resource. It is typically a plastic credit

Unit-VIII D 387 card sized card with an embedded integrated circuit. Many smart cards include a pattern of metal contacts to electrically connect to the internal chip. Others are contactless, and some are both. Smart cards can provide personal identification, authentication, data storage, and application processing. Applications include identification, financial, mobile phones (SIM), public transit, computer security, schools, and healthcare. Smart cards may provide strong security authentication for single sign-on (SSO) within organizations. Several nations have deployed smart cards throughout their populations.

Development of Contactless Systems Contactless smart cards do not require physical contact between a card and reader. They are becoming more popular for payment and ticketing. Typical uses include mass transit and motorway tolls. Visa and MasterCard implemented a version deployed in 2004-2006 in the U.S., with Visa's current offering called Visa Contactless. Most contactless fare collection systems are incompatible, though the MIFARE Standard card from NXP Semiconductors has a considerable market share in the US and Europe. Use of "Contactless" smart cards in transport has also grown through the use of low cost chips NXP Mifare Ultralight and paper/card/PET rather than PVC. This has reduced media cost so it can be used for low cost tickets and short term transport passes (upto 1 year typically). The cost is typically 10% that of a PVC smart card with larger memory. They are distributed through vending machines, ticket offices and agents. Use of paper/ PET is less harmful to the environment than traditional PVC cards. Smart cards are also being introduced for identification and entitlement by regional, national, and international organizations. These uses include citizen cards, drivers' licenses, and patient cards. In Malaysia, the compulsory national ID MyKad enables eight applications and has 18 million users. Contactless smart cards are part of ICAO biometric passports to enhance security for international travel.

Design A smart card may have the following generic characteristics: n Dimensions similar to those of a credit card. ID-1 of the ISO/IEC 7810 standard defines cards as nominally 85.60 by 53.98 millimetres (3.37 in × 2.13 in). Another popular size is ID-000, which is nominally 25 by 15 millimetres (0.98 in × 0.59 in) (commonly used in SIM cards). Both are 0.76 millimetres (0.030 in) thick. n Contains a tamper-resistant security system (for example a secure cryptoprocessor and a secure file system) and provides security services (e.g., protects in-memory information). n Managed by an administration system, which securely interchanges information and configuration settings with the card, controlling card blacklisting and applicationdata updates. n Communicates with external services through card-reading devices, such as ticket readers, ATMs, DIP reader, etc. n Smart cards are typically made of plastic, generally polyvinyl chloride, but sometimes polyethylene-terephthalate-based polyesters, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene or polycarbonate.

388 D Library and Information Science Specific Contact Smart Cards Contact smart cards have a contact area of approximately 1 square centimetre (0.16 sq in), comprising several gold-plated contact pads. These pads provide electrical connectivity when inserted into a reader, which is used as a communications medium between the smart card and a host (e.g., a computer, a point of sale terminal) or a mobile telephone. Cards do not contain batteries; power is supplied by the card reader.

Contactless Smart Cards Contactless smart cards communicate with and are powered by the reader through RF induction technology (at data rates of 106-848 kbit/s). These cards require only proximity to an antenna to communicate. Like smart cards with contacts, contactless cards do not have an internal power source. Instead, they use an inductor to capture some of the incident radio-frequency interrogation signal, rectify it, and use it to power the card's electronics. Contactless smart media can be made with PVC, paper/card and PET finish to meet different performance, cost and durability requirements.

Applications Smart cards serve as credit or ATM cards, fuel cards, mobile phone SIMs, authorization cards for pay television, household utility pre-payment cards, high-security identification and access badges, and public transport and public phone payment cards. Smart cards may also be used as electronic wallets. The smart card chip can be "loaded" with funds to pay parking meters, vending machines or merchants. Cryptographic protocols protect the exchange of money between the smart card and the machine. No connection to a bank is needed. The holder of the card may use it even if not the owner. Examples are Proton, Geldkarte, Chipknip and Moneo. The German Geldkarte is also used to validate customer age at vending machines for cigarettes. These are the best known payment cards (classic plastic card): n Visa. Visa Contactless, Quick VSDC, "qVSDC", Visa Wave, MSD, payWave n Mastercard. PayPass Magstripe, PayPass MChip n American Express. ExpressPay n Discover. Zip n Unionpay. QuickPass

Benefits The benefits of smart cards are directly related to the volume of information and applications that are programmed for use on a card. A single contact/contactless smart card can be programmed with multiple banking credentials, medical entitlement, driver's license/public transport entitlement, loyalty programs and club memberships to name just a few. Multi-factor and proximity authentication can and has been embedded into smart cards to increase the security of all services on the card. For example, a smart card can be programmed to only allow a contactless transaction if it is also within range of another device like a uniquely paired mobile phone. This can significantly increase the security of the smart card. Governments and regional authorities save money because of improved security, better data and reduced processing costs. These savings help reduce public budgets or enhance

Unit-VIII D 389 public services. There are many examples in the UK, many using a common open LASSeO specification. Individuals have better security and more convenience with using smart cards that perform multiple services. For example, they only need to replace one card if their wallet is lost or stolen. The data storage on a card can reduce duplication, and even provide emergency medical information.

Advantages The first main advantage of smart cards is their flexibility. Smart cards have multiple functions which simultaneously can be an ID, a credit card, a stored-value cash card, and a repository of personal information such as telephone numbers or medical history. The card can be easily replaced if lost, and, the requirement for a PIN (or other form of security) provides additional security from unauthorised access to information by others. At the first attempt to use it illegally, the card would be deactivated by the card reader itself. The second main advantage is security. Smart cards can be electronic key rings, giving the bearer ability to access information and physical places without need for online connections. They are encryption devices, so that the user can encrypt and decrypt information without relying on unknown, and therefore potentially untrustworthy, appliances such as ATMs. Smart cards are very flexible in providing authentication at different level of the bearer and the counterpart. Finally, with the information about the user that smart cards can provide to the other parties, they are useful devices for customizing products and services. Other general benefits of smart cards are: n Portability n Increasing data storage capacity n Reliability that is virtually unaffected by electrical and magnetic fields.

Smart Cards and Electronic Commerce Smart cards can be used in electronic commerce, over the Internet, though the business model used in current electronic commerce applications still cannot use the full potential of the electronic medium. An advantage of smart cards for electronic commerce is their use customize services. For example, in order for the service supplier to deliver the customized service, the user may need to provide each supplier with their profile, a boring and time-consuming activity. A smart card can contain a non-encrypted profile of the bearer, so that the user can get customized services even without previous contacts with the supplier.

DIGITIZATION Digitization, less commonly digitalization, is the process of converting information into a digital (i.e. computer-readable) format, in which the information is organized into bits. The result is the representation of an object, image, sound, document or signal (usually an analog signal) by generating a series of numbers that describe a discrete set of its points or samples. The result is called digital representation or, more specifically, a digital

390 D Library and Information Science Specific image, for the object, and digital form, for the signal. In modern practice, the digitized data is in the form of binary numbers, which facilitate computer processing and other operations, but, strictly speaking, digitizing simply means the conversion of analog source material into a numerical format; the decimal or any other number system that can be used instead. Digitization is of crucial importance to data processing, storage and transmission, because it "allows information of all kinds in all formats to be carried with the same efficiency and also intermingled". Though analog data is typically more stable, digital data can more easily be shared and accessed and can, in theory, be propagated indefinitely, provided it is migrated to stable formats as needed. This is why it is a favored way of preserving information for many organisations around the world.

Process The term digitization is often used when diverse forms of information, such as an object, text, sound, image or voice, are converted into a single binary code. The core of the process is the compromise between the capturing device and the player device so that the rendered result represents the original source with the most possible fidelity, and the advantage of digitization is the speed and accuracy in which this form of information can be transmitted with no degradation compared with analog information. Digital information exists as one of two digits, either 0 or 1. These are known as bits (a contraction of binary digits) and the sequences of 0s and 1s that constitute information are called bytes. Analog signals are continuously variable, both in the number of possible values of the signal at a given time, as well as in the number of points in the signal in a given period of time. However, digital signals are discrete in both of those respects – generally a finite sequence of integers – therefore a digitization can, in practical terms, only ever be an approximation of the signal it represents. Digitization occurs in two parts: n Discretization. The reading of an analog signal A, and, at regular time intervals (frequency), sampling the value of the signal at the point. Each such reading is called a sample and may be considered to have infinite precision at this stage; n Quantization. Samples are rounded to a fixed set of numbers (such as integers), a process known as quantization. In general, these can occur at the same time, though they are conceptually distinct. A series of digital integers can be transformed into an analog output that approximates the original analog signal. Such a transformation is called a DA conversion. The sampling rate and the number of bits used to represent the integers combine to determine how close such an approximation to the analog signal a digitization will be.

Library Preservation In the context of libraries, archives, and museums, digitization is a means of creating digital surrogates of analog materials, such as books, newspapers, microfilm and videotapes, offers a variety of benefits, including increasing access, especially for patrons at a distance; contributing to collection development, through collaborative initiatives; enhancing the potential for research and education; and supporting preservation activities. Digitization can provide a means of preserving the content of the materials by creating

Unit-VIII D 391 an accessible facsimile of the object in order to put less strain on already fragile originals. For sounds, digitization of legacy analogue recordings is essential insurance against technological obsolescence. A fundamental aspect of planning digitization projects is to ensure that the digital files themselves are preserved and remain accessible; the term "digital preservation," in its most basic sense, refers to an array of activities undertaken to maintain access to digital materials over time. The prevalent Brittle Books issue facing libraries across the world is being addressed with a digital solution for long term book preservation. Since the mid-1800s, books were printed on wood-pulp paper, which turns acidic as it decays. Deterioration may advance to a point where a book is completely unusable. In theory, if these widely circulated titles are not treated with de-acidification processes, the materials upon those acid pages will be lost. As digital technology evolves, it is increasingly preferred as a method of preserving these materials, mainly because it can provide easier access points and significantly reduce the need for physical storage space. Cambridge University Library is working on the Cambridge Digital Library, which will initially contain digitised versions of many of its most important works relating to science and religion. These include examples such as Isaac Newton's personally annotated first edition of his Philosophiæ Naturalis Principia Mathematica as well as college notebooks and other papers, and some Islamic manuscripts such as a Quran from Tipu Sahib’s library. Google, Inc. has taken steps towards attempting to digitize every title with "Google Book Search". While some academic libraries have been contracted by the service, issues of copyright law violations threaten to derail the project. However, it does provide – at the very least – an online consortium for libraries to exchange information and for researchers to search for titles as well as review the materials.

Digitization versus Digital Preservation There is a common misconception that to digitize something is the same as digital preservation. To digitize something is to convert something from an analog into a digital format An example would be scanning a photograph and having a digital copy on a computer. This is essentially the first step in digital preservation. To digitally preserve something is to maintain it over a long period of time. Digital preservation is more complicated because technology changes so quickly that a format that was used to save something years ago may become obsolete, like a 5¼" floppy drive. Computers are no longer made with them, and obtaining the hardware to convert a file from an obsolete format to a newer one can be expensive. As a result, the upgrading process must take place every 2 to 5 years, or as newer technology becomes affordable, but before older technology becomes unobtainable. The Library of Congress provides numerous resources and tips for individuals looking to practice digitization and digital preservation for their personal collections. Digital preservation can also apply to born-digital material. An example of something that is born-digital is a Microsoft Word document saved as a .docx file or a post to a social media site. In contrast, digitization only applies exclusively to analog materials. Borndigital materials present a unique challenge to digital preservation not only due to technological obsolescence but also because of the inherently unstable nature of digital storage and maintenance. Most websites last between 2.5 and 5 years, depending on the purpose for which they were designed.

392 D Library and Information Science Specific Many libraries, archives, and museums, as well as other institutions struggle with catching up and staying current in regards to both digitization and digital preservation. Digitization is a time-consuming process, particularly depending on the condition of the holdings prior to being digitized. Some materials are so fragile that undergoing the process of digitization could damage them irreparably; light from a scanner can damage old photographs and documents. Despite potential damage, one reason for digitizing some materials is because they are so heavily used that digitization will help to preserve the original copy long past what its life would have been as a physical holding. Digitization can also be quite expensive. Institutions want the best image quality in digital copies so that when they are converted from one format to another over time only a high-quality copy is maintained. Smaller institutions may not be able to afford such equipment. Manpower at many facilities also limits how much material can be digitized. Archivists and librarians must have an idea of what their patrons wish to see most and try to prioritize and meet those needs digitally. Labour resources and funding also limit digital preservation in many institutions. The cost of upgrading hardware or software every few years can be prohibitively expensive. Training is another issue, since many librarians and archivists do not have a computer science background. Intellectual control of digital holdings presents yet another issue which sometimes occurs when the physical holdings have not yet been entirely processed. One suggested timeframe for completely transcribing digital holdings was every ten to twenty years, making the process an ongoing and time-consuming one.

DIGITAL LIBRARY A digital library, digital repository, or digital collection, is an online database of digital objects that can include text, still images, audio, video, or other digital media formats. Objects can consist of digitized content like print or photographs, as well as originally produced digital content like word processor files or social media posts. In addition to storing content, digital libraries provide means for organizing, searching, and retrieving the content contained in the collection. Digital libraries can vary immensely in size and scope, and can be maintained by individuals or organizations. The digital content may be stored locally, or accessed remotely via computer networks. These information retrieval systems are able to exchange information with each other through interoperability and sustainability.

Library Genesis Library Genesis or LibGen is a search engine for articles and books on various topics, which allows free access to content that is otherwise paywalled or not digitized elsewhere. Among others, it carries PDFs of content from Elsevier's Science Direct web-portal. Started around 2008 by Russian scientists, it absorbed the contents of, and became the functional successor to, library.nu, which was shut down by legal action in 2012. In 2015, the website became involved in a legal case when Elsevier accused it of providing pirate access to articles and books. In response, the admins accused Elsevier of gaining most of its profits from publicly funded research which should be freely available

Unit-VIII D 393 as they are paid for by taxpayers. LibGen is reported to be registered in both Russia and Amsterdam, making it unclear which legislation applies, and whether defendants will show up in a United States court hearing. LibGen is blocked by a number of ISPs in the United Kingdom, but such DNS-based blocks are claimed to do little to deter access. In late October 2015, the District Court for the Southern District of New York ordered LibGen to shut down and to suspend use of the domain name (libgen.org), but the site is accessible through alternate domains. As of 28 July 2019, Library Genesis states that its database contains more than 2.3 million non-fiction books, 76 million science magazine articles, 2 million comics files, 2.2 million fiction books, 0.4 million magazine issues.

Terminology The term digital library was first popularized by the NSF/DARPA/NASA Digital Libraries Initiative in 1994. With the availability of the computer networks the information resources are expected to stay distributed and accessed as needed, whereas in Vannevar Bush's essay As We May Think (1945) they were to be collected and kept within the researcher's Memex. The term virtual library was initially used interchangeably with digital library, but is now primarily used for libraries that are virtual in other senses (such as libraries which aggregate distributed content). In the early days of digital libraries, there was discussion of the similarities and differences among the terms digital, virtual, and electronic. A distinction is often made between content that was created in a digital format, known as born-digital, and information that has been converted from a physical medium, e.g. paper, through digitization. It should also be noted that not all electronic content is in digital data format. The term hybrid library is sometimes used for libraries that have both physical collections and electronic collections. For example, American Memory is a digital library within the Library of Congress. Some important digital libraries also serve as long term archives, such as arXiv and the Internet Archive. Others, such as the Digital Public Library of America, seek to make digital information from various institutions widely accessible online.

Types of Digital Libraries Institutional Repositories Many academic libraries are actively involved in building institutional repositories of the institution's books, papers, theses, and other works which can be digitized or were 'born digital'. Many of these repositories are made available to the general public with few restrictions, in accordance with the goals of open access, in contrast to the publication of research in commercial journals, where the publishers often limit access rights. Institutional, truly free, and corporate repositories are sometimes referred to as digital libraries. Institutional repository software is designed for archiving, organizing, and searching a library's content. Popular open-source solutions include DSpace, EPrints, Digital Commons, and Fedora Commons-based systems Islandora and Samvera.

Digital Archives Physical archives differ from physical libraries in several ways. Traditionally, archives are defined as:

394 D Library and Information Science Specific 1. Containing primary sources of information (typically letters and papers directly produced by an individual or organization) rather than the secondary sources found in a library (books, periodicals, etc.). 2. Having their contents organized in groups rather than individual items. 3. Having unique contents. The technology used to create digital libraries is even more revolutionary for archives since it breaks down the second and third of these general rules. In other words, "digital archives" or "online archives" will still generally contain primary sources, but they are likely to be described individually rather than (or in addition to) in groups or collections. Further, because they are digital, their contents are easily reproducible and may indeed have been reproduced from elsewhere. The Oxford Text Archive is generally considered to be the oldest digital archive of academic physical primary source materials. Archives differ from libraries in the nature of the materials held. Libraries collect individual published books and serials, or bounded sets of individual items. The books and journals held by libraries are not unique, since multiple copies exist and any given copy will generally prove as satisfactory as any other copy. The material in archives and manuscript libraries are "the unique records of corporate bodies and the papers of individuals and families". A fundamental characteristic of archives is that they have to keep the context in which their records have been created and the network of relationships between them in order to preserve their informative content and provide understandable and useful information over time. The fundamental characteristic of archives resides in their hierarchical organization expressing the context by means of the archival bond. Archival descriptions are the fundamental means to describe, understand, retrieve and access archival material. At the digital level, archival descriptions are usually encoded by means of the Encoded Archival Description XML format. The EAD is a standardized electronic representation of archival description which makes it possible to provide union access to detailed archival descriptions and resources in repositories distributed throughout the world. Given the importance of archives, a dedicated formal model, called NEsted SeTs for Object Hierarchies (NESTOR), built around their peculiar constituents, has been defined. NESTOR is based on the idea of expressing the hierarchical relationships between objects through the inclusion property between sets, in contrast to the binary relation between nodes exploited by the tree. NESTOR has been used to formally extend the 5S model to define a digital archive as a specific case of digital library able to take into consideration the peculiar features of archives.

Features of Digital Libraries The advantages of digital libraries as a means of easily and rapidly accessing books, archives and images of various types are now widely recognized by commercial interests and public bodies alike. Traditional libraries are limited by storage space; digital libraries have the potential to store much more information, simply because digital information requires very little physical space to contain it. As such, the cost of maintaining a digital library can be much lower than that of a traditional library. A physical library must spend large sums of money paying for staff, book maintenance, rent, and additional books. Digital libraries

Unit-VIII D 395 may reduce or, in some instances, do away with these fees. Both types of library require cataloging input to allow users to locate and retrieve material. Digital libraries may be more willing to adopt innovations in technology providing users with improvements in electronic and audio book technology as well as presenting new forms of communication such as wikis and blogs; conventional libraries may consider that providing online access to their OP AC catalog is sufficient. An important advantage to digital conversion is increased accessibility to users. They also increase availability to individuals who may not be traditional patrons of a library, due to geographic location or organizational affiliation. n No physical boundary. The user of a digital library need not to go to the library physically; people from all over the world can gain access to the same information, as long as an Internet connection is available. n Round the clock availability. A major advantage of digital libraries is that people can gain access 24/7 to the information. n Multiple access. The same resources can be used simultaneously by a number of institutions and patrons. This may not be the case for copyrighted material: a library may have a license for "lending out" only one copy at a time; this is achieved with a system of digital rights management where a resource can become inaccessible after expiration of the lending period or after the lender chooses to make it inaccessible (equivalent to returning the resource). n Information retrieval. The user is able to use any search term (word, phrase, title, name, subject) to search the entire collection. Digital libraries can provide very user-friendly interfaces, giving click able access to its resources. n Preservation and conservation. Digitization is not a long-term preservation solution for physical collections, but does succeed in providing access copies for materials that would otherwise fall to degradation from repeated use. Digitized collections and born-digital objects pose many preservation and conservation concerns that analog materials do not. Please see the following "Problems" section of this page for examples. n Space. Whereas traditional libraries are limited by storage space, digital libraries have the potential to store much more information, simply because digital information requires very little physical space to contain them and media storage technologies are more affordable than ever before. n Added value. Certain characteristics of objects, primarily the quality of images, may be improved. Digitization can enhance legibility and remove visible flaws such as stains and discoloration. n Easily accessible.

Software There are a number of software packages for use in general digital libraries, for notable ones see Digital library software. Institutional repository software, which focuses primarily on ingest, preservation and access of locally produced documents, particularly locally produced academic outputs, can be found in Institutional repository software. This software may be proprietary, as is the case with the Library of Congress which uses Digiboard and CTS to manage digital content. The design and implementation in digital libraries are constructed so computer systems and software can make use of the information when it is exchanged. These are referred

396 D Library and Information Science Specific to as semantic digital libraries. Semantic libraries are also used to socialize with different communities from a mass of social networks. DjDL is a type of semantic digital library. Keywords-based and semantic search are the two main types of searches. A tool is provided in the semantic search that create a group for augmentation and refinement for keywordsbased search. Conceptual knowledge used in DjDL is centered around two forms; the subject ontology and the set of concept search patterns based on the ontology. The three type of ontologies that are associated to this search are bibliographic ontologies, communityaware ontologies, and subject ontologies.

Metadata In traditional libraries, the ability to find works of interest is directly related to how well they were cataloged. While cataloging electronic works digitized from a library's existing holding may be as simple as copying or moving a record from the print to the electronic form, complex and born-digital works require substantially more effort. To handle the growing volume of electronic publications, new tools and technologies have to be designed to allow effective automated semantic classification and searching. While full-text search can be used for some items, there are many common catalog searches which cannot be performed using full text, including: n finding texts which are translations of other texts. n differentiating between editions/volumes of a text/periodical. n inconsistent descriptors (especially subject headings). n missing, deficient or poor quality taxonomy practices. n linking texts published under pseudonyms to the real authors (Samuel Clemens and Mark Twain, for example). n differentiating non-fiction from parody (The Onion from The New York Times)

Searching Most digital libraries provide a search interface which allows resources to be found. These resources are typically deep web (or invisible web) resources since they frequently cannot be located by search engine crawlers. Some digital libraries create special pages or sitemaps to allow search engines to find all their resources. Digital libraries frequently use the Open Archives Initiative Protocol for Metadata Harvesting (OAI-PMH) to expose their metadata to other digital libraries, and search engines like Google Scholar, Yahoo! and Scirus can also use OAI-PMH to find these deep web resources. There are two general strategies for searching a federation of digital libraries: distributed searching and searching previously harvested metadata. Distributed searching typically involves a client sending multiple search requests in parallel to a number of servers in the federation. The results are gathered, duplicates are eliminated or clustered, and the remaining items are sorted and presented back to the client. Protocols like Z39.50 are frequently used in distributed searching. A benefit to this approach is that the resource-intensive tasks of indexing and storage are left to the respective servers in the federation. A drawback to this approach is that the search mechanism is limited by the different indexing and ranking capabilities of each database; therefore, making it difficult to assemble a combined result consisting of the most relevant found items.

Unit-VIII D 397 Searching over previously harvested metadata involves searching a locally stored index of information that has previously been collected from the libraries in the federation. When a search is performed, the search mechanism does not need to make connections with the digital libraries it is searching - it already has a local representation of the information. This approach requires the creation of an indexing and harvesting mechanism which operates regularly, connecting to all the digital libraries and querying the whole collection in order to discover new and updated resources. OAI-PMH is frequently used by digital libraries for allowing metadata to be harvested. A benefit to this approach is that the search mechanism has full control over indexing and ranking algorithms, possibly allowing more consistent results. A drawback is that harvesting and indexing systems are more resource-intensive and therefore expensive.

DIGITAL PRESERVATION In library and archival science, digital preservation is a formal endeavor to ensure that digital information of continuing value remains accessible and usable. It involves planning, resource allocation, and application of preservation methods and technologies, and it combines policies, strategies and actions to ensure access to reformatted and "borndigital" content, regardless of the challenges of media failure and technological change. The goal of digital preservation is the accurate rendering of authenticated content over time. The Association for Library Collections and Technical Services Preservation and Reformatting Section of the American Library Association, defined digital preservation as combination of "policies, strategies and actions that ensure access to digital content over time." According to the Harrod's Librarian Glossary, digital preservation is the method of keeping digital material alive so that they remain usable as technological advances render original hardware and software specification obsolete.

Appraisal Archival appraisal (or, alternatively, selection) refers to the process of identifying records and other materials to be preserved by determining their permanent value. Several factors are usually considered when making this decision. It is a difficult and critical process because the remaining selected records will shape researchers' understanding of that body of records, or fonds. Appraisal is identified as A4.2 within the Chain of Preservation (COP) model created by the Inter PARES 2 project. Archival appraisal is not the same as monetary appraisal, which determines fair market value. Archival appraisal may be performed once or at the various stages of acquisition and processing. Macro appraisal, a functional analysis of records at a high level, may be performed even before the records have been acquired to determine which records to acquire. More detailed, iterative appraisal may be performed while the records are being processed. Appraisal is performed on all archival materials, not just digital. It has been proposed that, in the digital context, it might be desirable to retain more records than have traditionally been retained after appraisal of analog records, primarily due to a combination of the declining cost of storage and the availability of sophisticated discovery tools which

398 D Library and Information Science Specific will allow researchers to find value in records of low information density. In the analog context, these records may have been discarded or only a representative sample kept. However, the selection, appraisal, and prioritization of materials must be carefully considered in relation to the ability of an organization to responsibly manage the totality of these materials. Often libraries, and to a lesser extent, archives, are offered the same materials in several different digital or analog formats. They prefer to select the format that they feel has the greatest potential for long-term preservation of the content. The Library of Congress has created a set of recommended formats for long-term preservation. They would be used, for example, if the Library was offered items for copyright deposit directly from a publisher.

Identification (Identifiers and Descriptive Metadata) In digital preservation and collection management, discovery and identification of objects is aided by the use of assigned identifiers and accurate descriptive metadata. An identifier is a unique label that is used to reference an object or record, usually manifested as a number or string of numbers and letters. As a crucial element of metadata to be included in a database record or inventory, it is used in tandem with other descriptive metadata to differentiate objects and their various instantiations. Descriptive metadata refers to information about an object's content such as title, creator, subject, date etc... Determination of the elements used to describe an object are facilitated by the use of a metadata schema. Extensive descriptive metadata about a digital object helps to minimize the risks of a digital object becoming inaccessible. Another common type of file identification is the filename. Implementing a file naming protocol is essential to maintaining consistency and efficient discovery and retrieval of objects in a collection, and is especially applicable during digitization of analog media. Using a file naming convention, such as the 8.3 filename, will ensure compatibility with other systems and facilitate migration of data, and deciding between descriptive (containing descriptive words and numbers) and non-descriptive (often randomly generated numbers) file names is generally determined by the size and scope of a given collection. However, filenames are not good for semantic identification, because they are non-permanent labels for a specific location on a system and can be modified without affecting the bitlevel profile of a digital file.

Integrity The cornerstone of digital preservation, "data integrity" refers to the assurance that the data is "complete and unaltered in all essential respects"; a program designed to maintain integrity aims to "ensure data is recorded exactly as intended, and upon later retrieval, ensure the data is the same as it was when it was originally recorded". Unintentional changes to data are to be avoided, and responsible strategies put in place to detect unintentional changes and react as appropriately determined. However, digital preservation efforts may necessitate modifications to content or metadata through responsibly-developed procedures and by well-documented policies. Organizations or individuals may choose to retain original, integrity-checked versions of content and/or modified versions with appropriate preservation metadata. Data integrity practices also apply to modified versions, as their state of capture must be maintained and resistant to unintentional modifications.

Unit-VIII D 399

Fixity File fixity is the property of a digital file being fixed, or unchanged. File fixity checking is the process of validating that a file has not changed or been altered from a previous state. This effort is often enabled by the creation, validation, and management of checksums. While checksums are the primary mechanism for monitoring fixity at the individual file level, an important additional consideration for monitoring fixity is file attendance. Whereas checksums identify if a file has changed, file attendance identifies if a file in a designated collection is newly created, deleted, or moved. Tracking and reporting on file attendance is a fundamental component of digital collection management and fixity.

Characterization Characterization of digital materials is the identification and description of what a file is and of its defining technical characteristics often captured by technical metadata, which records its technical attributes like creation or production environment.

Sustainability Digital sustainability encompasses a range of issues and concerns that contribute to the longevity of digital information. Unlike traditional, temporary strategies, and more permanent solutions, digital sustainability implies a more active and continuous process. Digital sustainability concentrates less on the solution and technology and more on building an infrastructure and approach that is flexible with an emphasis on interoperability, continued maintenance and continuous development. Digital sustainability incorporates activities in the present that will facilitate access and availability in the future. The ongoing maintenance necessary to digital preservation is analogous to the successful, centuries-old, community upkeep of the Uffington White Horse (according to Stuart M. Shieber) or the Ise Grand Shrine (according to Jeffrey Schnapp).

Renderability Renderability refers to the continued ability to use and access a digital object while maintaining its inherent significant properties.

Physical Media Obsolescence Physical media obsolescence can occur when access to digital content requires external dependencies that are no longer manufactured, maintained, or supported. External dependencies can refer to hardware, software, or physical carriers.

Format obsolescence File format obsolescence can occur when adoption of new encoding formats supersedes use of existing formats, or when associated presentation tools are no longer readily available. While the use of file formats will vary among archival institutions given their capabilities, there is documented acceptance among the field that chosen file formats should be "open, standard, non-proprietary, and well-established" to enable long-term archival use. Factors that should enter consideration when selecting sustainable file

400 D Library and Information Science Specific formats include disclosure, adoption, transparency, self-documentation, external dependencies, impact of patents, and technical protection mechanisms. Other considerations for selecting sustainable file formats include "format longevity and maturity, adaptation in relevant professional communities, incorporated information standards, and long-term accessibility of any required viewing software". For example, the Smithsonian Institution Archives considers uncompressed TIFFs to be "a good preservation format for born-digital and digitized still images because of its maturity, wide adaptation in various communities, and thorough documentation". Formats proprietary to one software vendor are more likely to be affected by format obsolescence. Well-used standards such as Unicode and JPEG are more likely to be readable in future.

Examples of Initiatives The Library of Congress founded the National Digital Stewardship Alliance which is now hosted by the Digital Library Federation. n The British Library is responsible for several programmes in the area of digital preservation and is a founding member of the Digital Preservation Coalition and Open Preservation Foundation. Their digital preservation strategy is publicly available. The National Archives of the United Kingdom have also pioneered various initiatives in the field of digital preservation. n Centre of Excellence for Digital Preservation is established at C-DAC, Pune, India as a flagship project under National Digital Preservation Program (NDPP) sponsored by Ministry of Electronics & Information Technology, Government of India. A number of open source products have been developed to assist with digital preservation, including Archivematica, DSpace, Fedora Commons, OPUS, SobekCM and EPrints. The commercial sector also offers digital preservation software tools, such as Ex Libris Ltd.'s Rosetta, Preservica's Cloud, Standard and Enterprise Editions, CONTENTdm, Digital Commons, Equella, intraLibrary, Open Repository and Vital. n

Large-scale Initiatives Many research libraries and archives have begun or are about to begin large-scale digital preservation initiatives (LSDIs). The main players in LSDIs are cultural institutions, commercial companies such as Google and Microsoft, and non-profit groups including the Open Content Alliance (OCA), the Million Book Project (MBP), and HathiTrust. The primary motivation of these groups is to expand access to scholarly resources. Approximately 30 cultural entities, including the 12-member Committee on Institutional Cooperation (CIC), have signed digitization agreements with either Google or Microsoft. Several of these cultural entities are participating in the Open Content Alliance and the Million Book Project. Some libraries are involved in only one initiative and others have diversified their digitization strategies through participation in multiple initiatives. The three main reasons for library participation in LSDIs are: access, preservation, and research and development. It is hoped that digital preservation will ensure that library materials remain accessible for future generations. Libraries have a perpetual responsibility for their materials and a commitment to archive their digital materials. Libraries plan to use digitized copies as backups for works in case they go out of print, deteriorate, or are lost and damaged.

Unit-VIII D 401

DIGITAL LIBRARY INITIATIVES Information is considered as the fulcrum for power and prosperity. It is very essential for economic and social development of the society. The revolution in Information and Communication Technology has started delivering information in digital format with greater speed and economy which triggered development of digital library. The ICT provides greater opportunities in archiving, accessing, digitizing and preserving the traditional knowledge. The open source software movements added newer avenues for greater expansion of digital libraries worldwide. Traditional knowledge available in one or another form is being explored, documented, preserved, and made accessible through networks of digital libraries and archives. The popularity of the word "Digital Library" can be traced to the Digital Library Initiatives (DLI) that was started in 1994 as a joint initiative of the National Science Foundation (NSF), Department of Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA), and the National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA). Six universities were given the funds for investigation and development of underlying technologies for digital libraries. The second phase of the project was initiated in February 1998. The landmark initiatives that led the path towards the Digital Library movement are the project MERCURY at Carnegie Mellon University; CORE project at Cornell University, the TULIP project and ENVISION at Cornell Institute of Digital Collection, Open Book Project at Yale University, Networked Digital Library of Theses and Dissertation (NDLTD), National Science, Mathematics, Engineering and Technology Education Digital Library (NSDL). Digital Library development in India is taken up for preserving art culture and heritage of India in mid 1990s. India became de-facto signatory of the UNESCO Universal Declaration on Cultural Diversity, adopted unanimously by the UNESCO General Conference at its 31st session held on 2 November 2001 to strengthen the access to diverse cultural resources available across the country (Das, 2012). Indian state and non-state agencies in collaboration with the Carnegie Mellon University, Universal Digital Library project of the US-NSF (under and Indo-US Science and Technology Collaboration initiatives) have taken significant initiatives in digitization and preservation of vast pool of knowledge available in the physical forms of manuscripts, rare books, out-of-print books and archival materials. Also, those agencies have collaborated with neighboring South Asian countries and shared to a networked community using an online platform. Besides, individual institutions and universities are participating in global digital library movement such as Networked Digital Library of Theses and Dissertations (NDLTD). Moreover, Library and information centre of higher education and research institutes have taken up task setting up institutional repositories with in- house digital content like research reports, publications of researchers, theses and dissertation etc. Several organizations including research institutes and academic institutes are making their existing journals available in open access, e.g. INSA, IAS, CSIR, etc. INFLIBNET Centre has taken-up various open access initiatives such as OJAS: a platform offered to faculty and researchers in universities to host their open-access journals, institutional repositories, namely ShodhGanga, ShodhGangotri and IR@INFLIBNET, IndCat: union catalogue of various library resources i.e. books, journals and theses, VIDWAN: Subject Expert Database, Info-Portal: A Subject Gateway to Indian Scholarly Internet Resources, etc.

402 D Library and Information Science Specific The module, Digital library Initiatives in India, is divided in two parts. The first part discusses about the problem encountered for digital library initiatives in India. It also discusses major digital library initiatives in India. The second part of the module elaborates on initiatives taken towards library consortia, open courseware, metadata harvesting services, etc.

Problems and Challenges The digitization initiatives in India are encountered with the problems such as lack of national policy, preservation policy, intellectual property rights policy for content development of digital information, rigidity in the publishers' policies and data formats, OCR facilities for Indian languages, etc. Jeevan (2004) and Dr. Gurram Sujatha (2008), in their separate papers, have encountered following problems of the digitization initiatives in India: n Lack of clear cut policy at National level with main focus on sustainability n Outdated software and hardware and difficulty in upgrading the same. n Non-availability of cost effective new technological advancement. n Lack of multiple Indian language OCR facilities. n Non-standard technical activities, data description and transmission characteristics. n Non-availability of well-trained skilled personnel. n Lack of management support n Lack of proper preservation policy n No Intellectual Property Rights policy for content development of digital information. n Rigidity in the publishers' policies and data formats n Implementation of Access Right n Selection and Security of Content n Efficient Internet bandwidth n Financial Support The above mentioned problems affect the success of digitization initiatives and the creation of digital libraries. These problems have to be addressed positively for development of digital libraries in the country. Three factors that need to be considered more seriously to ensure planned digital resource development programmes and digital libraries in the country are national policy for digitization, sustainability issues and digital divide, as identified by Gurram Sujatha (2008).

Current Digital Library Initiatives in India Government institutions of national importance, national level institutions, research organization, universities, state government institutions, financial institutions, private institutions are key player for initiating digital libraries in India. Some of the important digital library initiatives and programmes initiated across the country are as follow:

Digital Library of Books Digital Library of India (http://www.dli.ernet.in/) Year of Establishment: 2003 Implemented By. Indian Institute of Science (IISc), Bangalore

Unit-VIII D 403 Mega Scanning Centres. Indian Institute of Information Technology Hyderabad (IIIT Hyderabad); Centre for Development of Advanced Computing, Noida (CDAC Noida); Centre for Development of Advanced Computing, Kolkata (CDAC Kolkata) Participating Institutions. Indian Institute of Information Technology Hyderabad; ERNET (Education and Research Network) India; Centre for Development of Advanced Computing (CDAC) Supported By. Ministry of Communications and Information Technology, Government of India, National Science Foundation, USA Alternative URL. http://tera-3.ul.cs.cmu.edu/ULIB/ Description: Digital Library of India was formally launched by the then president of India Dr. A. P J. Abdul Kalam on 8th September 2003 to preserve knowledge and cultural heritage of India. It is part of the Universal Digital Library Project of the US-NSF and Million Books Project envisaged by Carnegie Mellon University, USA. The project is supported by the Ministry of Communications and Information Technology, Government of India and coordinated by Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore. It digitizes and preserves all significant libraries, artistic and scientific works in its three regional mega scanning centre and 21 scanning centers and makes it freely available to world for education and research. The structured metadata of scanned document is created and uploaded to Digital Library Portal which provides a searchable interface to access full-text contents. Current Status: At present, Digital Library of India hosts 4,80,335 books containing about 168 million pages. The books came from about 48 different languages in various subjects. Vigyan Prasar Digital Library (http://www.vigyanprasar.gov.in/digilib/) Year of Establishment: 1989 Implemented By. Vigyan Prasar, Noida Participating Institutions: National Council for Science & Technology Communication (NCSTC), New Delhi; NCSTC Network, Delhi; National Children's Science Congress Supported By. Department of Science & Technology, Government of India Alternative URL: http://www.vigyanprasar.gov.in/dream/index.asp Description: Vigyan Prasar, an autonomous organization under Department of Science and Technology, Government of India, was established in 1989 for communication of science and technology. Vigyan Prasar maintains an open access digital library to spread scientific knowledge, where the digital collection contains digitized full-text versions of all significant scientific works that are being published by Vigyan Prasar. Current Status: 80 books in English, 49 books in Hindi and 17 books in other languages and audio video scientific content in CD ROM are available in this digital library. Dream 2047, a popular science magazine and an open access periodical, is also archived in Vigyan Prasar Science Portal from volume one issue one onwards. NCERT Online Text Books (http://www.ncert.nic.in/textbooks/testing/Index.htm) Year of Establishment: 1961 Implemented By. National Council of Educational Research and Training (NCERT), New Delhi Supported By. Ministry of Human Resource Development, Government of India Alternative URL. http://www.ncert.nic.in/textbooks/backup/index.htm

404 D Library and Information Science Specific Description. National Council of Educational Research and Training (NCERT) was established by the Government of India in 1961 as an autonomous organization to assist and advise the state and central governments in the implementation of their policies for education, especially to bring about qualitative changes in school education. The NCERT has initiated a national portal where school textbooks, based on the National Curriculum Framework 2005, are freely available on the Internet for students and teachers. This portal provides easy navigation to textbook chapters by title/subject of the book for a particular class. The entire book or individual chapters can be downloaded as per the terms of use as mentioned in the Copyright Notice. Current Status: The service provides easy access to textbooks of all subjects published by NCERT for classes I to XII in Hindi, English and Urdu.

Digital Library of Manuscripts Kalasampada: Digital Library Resources for Indian Cultural Heritage (http://www.ignca.nic.in/dlrich.html) Implemented By. Cultural Informatics Laboratory, Indira Gandhi National Centre for the Arts (IGNCA), New Delhi, India Supported By. Ministry of Communications and Information Technology, Government of India Description. The Indira Gandhi National Centre for the Arts (IGNCA), in collaboration with the Ministry of Communication and Information Technology, initiated a digital library on indigenous cultural heritage named Kalasampada (Digital Library: Resources of Indian Cultural Heritage (DL-RICH)) for the development of a databank of cultural heritage. DLRICH provides online access to digital images of cultural heritage resources such as manuscripts, rare photographs, rare books, rare painting, sculptures, handicrafts, monuments, artifacts, festivals, as well as varieties of textual, graphical, audio-visual and multimedia resources. This portal provides access to different segments of its collection with English interface and English transliterated metadata information. Current Status. Kalasampada facilitates scholars' access to the materials including 272,000 manuscripts, 100,000 slides, thousands of rare books, 4,000 rare photographs, 400 hours of audio and video along with research publications, fifty tutorials produced by the IGNCA. It also hosts a Sanskrit text repository, called Gaudiya Grantha Mandira that covers more than 400 chapters from different oriental texts. Kalasampada received the 'Golden Icon: Award for Exemplary Implementation for e-Governance Initiatives' under the category, Best Documented Knowledge and case study, given by India's Department of Administrative Reforms and Public Grievances in 2005. National Databank on Indian Art and Culture (NDBIAC)(http://ignca.nic.in/ ndb_0001.htm) Implemented By. Indira Gandhi National Centre for the Arts (IGNCA), New Delhi, India Supported By. MCIT and Archeological Survey of India Description: In its second phase of digitization project, INGCA started National Databank on Indian Art and Culture (NDBIAC), a pilot project of Department of Information Technology, Ministry of Communication and Information Technology (MCIT), and

Unit-VIII D 405 Archaeological Survey of India, Government of India with an aim to enhance the accessibility of Indian cultural resources using digital technology. NDBIAC provides access to digitized images and audio-visuals provided by ASI and state archaeology departments. It also gives access to virtual walk throughs of archaeological monuments, back issues of ASI journal "Indian Archaeology - A Review", ASI reports and rare books in Indic languages (Hindi and Sanskrit) and English. Current Status. The project is pilot project and aim to cover over 100,000 visual, 1000 hours of audio and video, 25000 rare books on art and culture and walk-through of some of the archaeological monuments. National Mission for Manuscripts (http://www.namami.org/index.htm) Year of Establishment: 2003 Implemented By. National Mission for Manuscript Supported By. Ministry of Tourism and Culture, Government of India Description: The Department of Culture, and Ministry of Tourism and Culture, Government of India, launched the National Mission for Manuscripts in February 2003 with an aim to locate, document, preserve and render vast collection of manuscripts which are available in variety of themes, textures and aesthetics, scripts, languages, calligraphies, illuminations and illustrations. NMM established a network of 47 MRCs (Manuscript Resource Centres), 32 MCCs (Manuscript Conservation Centres), 32 MPCs (Manuscript Partner Centres ) and more than 200 MCPCs (Manuscript Conservation Partner Centres) across the country for identifying, inventorying, preservation and conservation of endangered documentary heritage collections available in the form of manuscripts. NMM maintains a National Database of Manuscripts named 'Kritisampada'. Current Status. At present total 20 lakh data are available on NMM Website. Muktabodha: Digital Library and Archiving Project (http://www.muktabodhalib.org/digital_library.htm) Year of Establishment: 2003 Implemented By. Muktabodha Indological Research Institute, New Delhi Participating Institution: French Institute of Pondicherry (IFP), Ecole française d'ExtrêmeOrient (EFEO) Supporting Agency. SYDA Foundation, USA Alternate URL. http://www.muktabodhalib.org/SECURE/digital_library_index.htm Description. The Muktabodha Digital Library and Archiving Project is initiated by Muktabodha Indological Research Institute in July 2003 to preserve scriptural texts related to the Tantric and Agamic traditions, as well as India's oral tradition of Vedic chanting and the ritual and philosophical knowledge associated with it. The goal of the Digital Library is to preserve rare Sanskrit manuscripts and texts in multiple digital formats, and make them accessible through website for study worldwide. Current Status. It has preserved paper transcripts of Shaiva Siddhanta, from the French Institute of Pondicherry including 210,000 digitized pages in over 2,000 texts, Vedic manuscripts of Gokarna, 24 volumes of the Shaiva Siddhanta Paripalana Sangha Devakottai in the South Indian scripts, 75 volumes texts of the Kashmir Shaivism.

406 D Library and Information Science Specific Electronic Theses and Dissertation (ETD) ShodhGanga: Indian ETD Repository (http://shodhganga.inflibnet.ac.in/) Year of Establishment: 2010 Implemented By. INFLIBNET Centre Participating Institutions. More than 160 Universities Supported By. University Grants Commission Description. ShodhGanga is a digital repository set-up for submission of electronic version of theses and dissertations by research scholars in universities in India and make them available in open access to the world-wide academic community in response to the UGC Notification (Minimum Standards & Procedure for Award of M.Phil. / Ph.D Degree, Regulation, 2009). ShodhGanga is set-up using Dspace that uses internationally recognized protocols and interoperability standards. 160 Universties have signed MoU with INFLIBNET Centre to join in ShodhGanga project and deposit their theses. INFLIBNET Centre also maintain a repository of approved synopsis submitted by research scholars to the universities for registering themselves for the Ph.D programme called ShodhGangotri (http://shodhgangotri.inflibnet.ac.in/) with an aim to measure trends and directions of research being conducted in Indian universities and to avoid duplication of research. Current Status. ShodhGanga provides access to more than 14500 electronic theses and dissertations from 160 universities. Shodhganga Received the eIndia Jury Choice Award for Best ICT Enabled Higher Education Institute of the Year 2011. ShodhGangotri provides access to more than 1712 synopsis submitted by research scholars from various universities. Vidyanidhi Digital Library (http://www.vidyanidhi.org.in/) Year of Establishment: 2000 Implemented By. Department of Library Science, University of Mysore Supported By. NISSAT, DSIR, Government of India, Ford Foundation and Microsoft India Description. Vidyanidhi is a portal of doctoral research in India. It began as a pilot project in 2000 with support from government, the Ford Foundation and Microsoft India archive of dissertations, as well as a set of resources for doctoral research in India. The Vidyanidhi Digital Library has two layers: a metadata database and the full text of theses. Current Status. More than 5000 full text and 50,000 bibliographic records of theses submitted to the universities in India were hosted in Vidyanidhi. The vidyanidhi website was not functional in March 2014.

Institutional Repositories There are 99 institutional and subject wise repositories in India that are registered in Registry of Open Access Repository (ROAR). Institutional repositories initiated in India can be viewed at http://roar. eprints.org/.

Digital Library of Journals - Initiatives by Scientific Society and Publishers Indian Academy of Sciences (www.ias.ac.in/pubs/journals/) Implemented By. Indian Academy of Sciences (IAS), Bangalore

Unit-VIII D 407 Partner Institutions. Current Science Association, Bangalore; Indian Institute of Sciences, Bangalore; SpringerLink, Germany Supported By. Ministry of Science and Technology, Government of India Description. The Indian Academy of Sciences (IAS) is a scientific academy funded by the Government of India. Digital platform is developed to provide online access to 11 peer reviewed journals with all backfiles and other publications, including reports, newsletter, patrika, year book and annual report etc. published by Indian Academy of Science. Current Status. Access to 11 journals with backfiles Indian National Science Academy (www.insa.ac.in) Implemented By. Indian National Science Academy (INSA), New Delhi Supported By. National Information System for Science and Technology (NISSAT), Department of Scientific and Industrial Research (DSIR), Government of India Description. The Indian National Science Academy (INSA) was established in 1935. It is funded by Government of India. INSA, with support from NISSAT, has initiated ejournal@insa project in 2002 to facilitate conversion of INSA journals from print to digital format and host them online. This portal provides access to current and back volume fulltext literature of INSA journals, organizes scientific discussions, proceedings and monographs annual report, year book etc. Current Status. Access to 7 journals with backfiles NISCAIR Research Journals (http://nopr.niscair.res.in/) Implemented By. NISCAIR Description. NISCAIR has developed Online Periodicals Repository (NOPR) to preserve its 17 research journals, working papers, preprints, technical reports, conference papers and data sets in various digital formats. All publications can be access full-text in PDF format through NOPT platform. IndMed (IndMED@NIC: http://indmed.nic.in) (OpenMED@NIC: http://openmed.nic.in) Implemented By. MEDLARS Centre (IMC), Bibliographic Informatics Division, National Informatics Centre (NIC), New Delhi Supporting Agency. Indian Council of Medical Research (ICMR), Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, Government of India Description. National Informatics Centre (NIC) and Indian Council of Medical Research (ICMR) had collaborated to setup Indian Medlars Centre to provide information support and services to the medical research community. The Centre produced two important resources; the first is IndMed@NIC, which indexes more than 100 prominent biomedical journals of India from 1985 onwards. This bibliographic database is accessible online. The second resource is OpenMed@NIC that provides open access to the full text articles of 108 Indian biomedical journals. Different publishers, mainly learned societies in the respective specialized areas, publish these journals in print-on-paper format. The new project entitles "National Databases of Indian Medical Journals" is in process for maintaining, updating and improvising these two important national resources. Open Journal Access System @ INFLIBNET (http://www.inflibnet.ac.in/ojs/) Implemented By. INFLIBNET Centre Description. Open Journal Access System @ INFLIBET Centre provides digital platform for hosting of electronic version of journals into open access mode with all processes of

408 D Library and Information Science Specific submission, peer-reviewing, editing, layout designing and publishing built into it. It encourages universities and institutions that are publishing journals in print format to use the OJAS @INFLIBNET for hosting electronic version of their journals free-of-cost on server at the INFLIBNET Centre. The OJAS@INFLIBNET provides full-text access to 14 journals published by universities and higher education institutions. Current Status. Access to 14 open access journals Indianjournals.com (www.indianjournals.com) Implemented By. Divan Enterprises, New Delhi Partner Institutions. Academic and Professional Institutions/ Societies in India and other Asian Countries Description. IndianJournals.com provides single window access to multidisciplinary Indian journals published by different scholarly societies and institutions. Current Status. Out of 150 journals, 11 are open access journals. This journal gateway also provides access to subscription-based content. Medknow Publications Pvt Ltd (www.medknow.com/journals.asp) Implemented By. Medknow Publications Private Limited, Mumbai Partner Institutions. Bio-medical Institutions and Scientific Societies in India and other Asian Countries Description. Medknow Publications Private Limited is a publisher of high-quality peerreviewed scholarly open access journals in India. It publishes, maintains and hosts 48+ open access peer reviewed scholarly journals, mainly in the biomedical subject areas on behalf of learned societies and associations. Current Status. Access to 48 journals Kamla-Raj. Enterprises (www.krepublishers.com/KRE-New-J/index.html) Implemented By. Kamla-Raj Enterprises, Delhi Partner Institutions. Academic Institutions and Scholarly Societies in India Description. The Kamla-Raj Enterprises is a Delhi-based publisher established in 1933. Kamla-Raj publishes seven print-based peer-review scholarly journals mainly in the areas of social sciences which are also available in electronic format on open access. These journals are OAI-compliant. The publisher maintains an archive of each of these open access journals starting from volume one. Summary The module, Digital library Initiatives in India, is divided in two parts. This is the first part of the module. It discusses about problems & challenges for development of digital libraries in the country. It then discusses about digital library initiatives and programmes initiated across the India such as digital library of books, digital library of manuscripts, electronic theses & dissertation, institutional repositories, digital library of journals, etc. The second part of the module elaborates on initiatives taken towards library consortia, open courseware, metadata harvesting services.

International Digital Library Initiatives Current examples of international (global) digital library initiatives are the World Digital Library project and the National Libraries Global project [The National Digital Libraries

Unit-VIII D 409 Global is currently being reviewed by the European Digital Library team with a report due in the first quarter of 2010. This report will contribute to a formal decision regarding the future direction of the National Libraries Global project. (Source: Briefing CDNL Secretariat, December 2009)]. The World Digital Library project – coordinated by the Library of Congress and sponsored by UNESCO – makes digital resources from all over the world available from one access point. IFLA supports the World Digital Library initiative since 2006. Under the umbrella of CDNL, the Conference of Directors of National Libraries, the National Library of New Zealand recently developed a prototype for the National Libraries Global project, which serves the same purpose, but focuses on national library collections. At a European level, Europeana, of which the prototype was launched in 2009 - is the project to look at.

INSTITUTIONAL REPOSITORIES An institutional repository is an archive for collecting, preserving, and disseminating digital copies of the intellectual output of an institution, particularly a research institution. An institutional repository can be viewed as a "...a set of services that a university offers to members of its community for the management and dissemination of digital materials created by the institution and its community members." For a university, this includes materials such as monographs, eprints of academic journal articles-both before (preprints) and after (postprints) undergoing peer review-as well as electronic theses and dissertations. An institutional repository might also include other digital assets generated by academics, such as datasets, administrative documents, course notes, learning objects, or conference proceedings. Deposit of material in an institutional repository is sometimes mandated by that institution. Some of the main objectives for having an institutional repository are to provide open access to institutional research output by self-archiving in an open access repository, to create global visibility for an institution's scholarly research, and to store and preserve other institutional digital assets, including unpublished or otherwise easily lost ("grey") literature such as theses, working papers or technical reports.

Origins Digital institutional repositories are document servers enabling researchers to archive their research output. Worldwide institutions are starting to implement digital institutional repositories for digital formats of research. Scholarly output can be born-digital, in which no digitalisation is necessary before the research is included in a digital repository. A digital institutional repository accessible through the Internet can improve the visibility, usage and impact of research conducted at an institution. The origin of the notion of an institutional repository are twofold: n Institutional repositories are partly linked to the notion of digital interoperability, which is in turn linked to the Open Archives Initiative (OAI) and its Open Archives Initiative Protocol for Metadata Harvesting (OAI-PMH). The OAI in turn had its roots in the notion of a "Universal Preprint Service", since superseded by the open access movement.

410 D Library and Information Science Specific Institutional repositories are partly linked to the notion of a digital library, i.e., collecting, housing, classifying, cataloguing, curating, preserving, and providing access to digital content-analogous with the library's conventional function of collecting, housing classifying, curating, preserving and providing access to analog content. In 2003 the function of an institutional repository was coined by Clifford Lynch in relation to universities. He argued that: n ... a university-based institutional repository is a set of services that a university offers to the members of its community for the management and dissemination of digital materials created by the institution and its community members. It is most essentially an organizational commitment to the stewardship of these digital materials, including long-term preservation where appropriate, as well as organization and access or distribution." Besides archiving research output institutional repositories can perform the functions such as knowledge management, research assessment and showcasing an institution's research output. The content of an institutional repository depends on the focus of the institution. Higher education institutions conduct research across multiple disciplines, thus research from a variety of academic subjects. Examples of such digital institutional repositories include the MIT Institutional Repository. A disciplinary repository is subject specific. It holds and provides access to scholarly research in a particular discipline. While there can be disciplinary repositories for one institution, disciplinary repositories are frequently not tied to a specific institution. The PsyDok digital repository for example holds German language research in psychology. SSOAR is an international social science full text-server. n

Open Access Repositories Institutional repositories that provide access to research to users outside the institutional community are one of the recommended ways to achieve the open access vision described in the Budapest Open Access Initiative definition of open access. This is sometimes referred to as the self-archiving or "green" route to open access. Repository 66 is a mashup that indicates the worldwide locations of open access digital repositories. It is based on data provided by ROAR and the OpenDOAR service developed by SHERPA.

Developing an Institutional Repository An institutional repository has been understood as a means to ensure that the published work of scholars is available to the academic community even after increases in subscription fees or budget cuts within libraries. The majority of research scholars do not provide free access to their research output to their colleagues in an organization. Institutional repositories provide scholars with a common platform so that everyone in the institution can contribute scholarly material to promote cross-campus interdisciplinary research. The development of an institutional repository redefines the production and dissemination of scholarly material within an academic community. The contents available on the institute's website usually are removed after a few weeks. An institutional repository can provide a platform to manage institutional information, including web content. Institutional repositories have a number of benefits, including access to resources, visibility of research, and presentations of the contents.

Unit-VIII D 411 If an institution has decided to invest in a repository numerous resources exist to help librarians and other repository managers frame and answer such questions, including "A Librarian's Process for Building an Institutional Repository".

Software The major institutional repository software platforms use a common open standard called OAI-PMH. This standard makes it not just possible to collect and move research output from one platform to another. While a majority of the institutions run institutional repository software on local servers, among new adopters, there is a strong preference towards cloud-based services. A survey commissioned by Duraspace found that 72% of respondents indicated that their institutional repository is a hosted service. Institutions are choosing cloud-based solutions because such providers "enable institutions to easily get started with a hosted software service, with no need to provision local hardware, software, staff, or other infrastructure nor is there any specific technical skill or expertise required". Also important to the decision to go hosted may be the understanding that a hosted institutional repository solution "frees a library from both hardware and software support, allowing staff resources to be directed to other publishing service functions such as consulting and workflow design."

Aggregators The Confederation of Open Access Repositories (COAR) states in its manifesto that "Each individual repository is of limited value for research: the real power of Open Access lies in the possibility of connecting and tying together repositories, which is why we need interoperability. In order to create a seamless layer of content through connected repositories from around the world, open access relies on interoperability, the ability for systems to communicate with each other and pass information back and forth in a usable format. Interoperability allows us to exploit today's computational power so that we can aggregate, data mine, create new tools and services, and generate new knowledge from repository content." Interoperability is achieved in the world of institutional repositories using protocols to which repositories should conform, such as OAI-PMH. This allows search engines and open access aggregators, such as BASE and CORE, to index repository metadata and content and provide value-added services on top of this content. The Digital Commons Network aggregates by discipline some 500 institutional repositories running on the Bepress Digital Commons platform. It includes more that two million full-text objects.

Institutional Repository Projects in India An Institutional Repository (IR) is a digital archive where a university community’s intellectual work is made accessible and preserved for posterity. The concept of IR suggests the tantalizing possibility of greater library influence over the full cycle of scholarly communication on campus, from research through publication, collection, and preservation. Libraries are performing lead role in shaping institutional digital repositories all over the world.

412 D Library and Information Science Specific According to Clifford Lynch “a university-based institutional repository is a set of services that a university offers to the members of its community for the management and dissemination of digital materials created by the institution and its community members. It is most essentially an organizational commitment to the stewardship of these digital materials, including long-term preservation where appropriate, as well as organization and access or distribution.”

Relevance The building of an Institutional Repository for any organization is needed in the present scenario of digital world because of the following certain changes:  n Technological changes; n Significant increase in the overall volume of research; n Increasing need of archival and access to unpublished information bearing objects; n Increasing demand to access knowledge objects from anywhere at anytime; n Increase uncertainty over who will handle the preservation archiving of digital scholarly research materials. The importance of the standard IR project may be summarized as below: 1. It will help to develop a national research repository infrastructure by setting up, populating and linking individual repositories; 2. It will stimulate development of services that draw on research information made available through the repository infrastructure; 3. It will provide a window that gives open access to improve the sponsoring institution’s visibility and status; 4. It will support the open-access model of publication.

Benefits For the Contributor n n n

n

n

Greater citation. Studies have shown that articles freely available on the Internet are cited more often than their paper counterparts. Speed. Faculty members can self-publish their preprints immediately, with the possibility of receiving immediate feedback. Organisation. An institutional repository can contain all of the scholarly work by one faculty member, including material such as preprints, post-prints, presentations, and classroom materials (dependent on copyright restrictions). Instead of being scattered about in different databases, servers, or computer hard drives, this material can be browsed easily in one place by the user, and reused easily by the contributor. Preservation. In order to ensure continued access, digital files need to be refreshed and migrated. Ten years from now, will you be able to open a Microsoft Word file you’ve created today? Depositing a file into an institutional repository means that the burden of ensuring the file can be opened is placed on the curator of the institutional repository, and not on the owner. Ease of use. Although self-submission is possible in our institutional repository, it’s much more likely that all uploading will be done by the library. All that is needed are files to upload and permission to upload it.

Unit-VIII D 413 n

Permanent place. Depositing an item into an institutional repository means that it stays in one place and maintains the same URL.

For the Institution n

n

n

The scholarly material produced by the university is available in one place, reflecting the intellectual achievements of the institution, and serving as a valuable marketing tool. Documents reflecting the institutional history of the university, both scholarly and nonscholarly, are preserved for future use, much like a traditional archive preserves paper material. Material that is not traditionally published is included in the repository, including drafts of unpublished articles or book chapters, unpublished research, student works, learning objects, and creative works.

For the User n n

n

Material in an institutional repository can be found through a search engine. There is no charge to access this material, and there are no subscription fees. Our repository contains material that is best displayed in its original digital format, such as audio files, video files, animations, and data sets. Gray literature, material not easily found through conventional means, will be actively recruited for the repository. This can include material such as working papers, pre-prints, white papers, conference presentations.

Individual Benefits n Wider distribution n Safekeeping n Time

n n n

Showcase Lower technology barrier Persistent URLs

Other Benefits 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Increased visibility to the Library Complete customization of policies and user interface Responsiveness to local user needs and preferences Increased contact with constituents Showcase and preserve scholarly output and historic documents Archive post-prints, preprints (and extra materials) Support teaching and learning Provide curatorial stewardship for disorganized and scattered digital materials Papers will get persistent URL and more cititons No need of maintaining server or back up.

Software for IR  There are various types of Digital Library softwares are available e.g., 1. DSpace (Digital Space), 2. GSDL (Green Stone Digital Library), 3. eprint Archive, 4. Fedora: An Open Source Digital Repository Management (Fedora Itore), 5. Ages Digital Libraries Software (My Ages), 6. AGES Software, 7. CDSware: The CERN Document Server Software, 8. Dienst,

414 D Library and Information Science Specific 9. FirstSearch, 10. Ganesha Digital Library version 3.1 (GDL), 11. Libronix Digital Library System, 12. Roads, 13. ETD-db (Electronic Theses and Dissertations database), 14. LOCKSS (Lots of Copies Keep Stuff Safe), 15. CLOCKSS. As GSDL installation is very easy and stores all types of data like Ph.D theses, faculty publications, lecture notes, student’s dissertations, learning objects, PG level & NET/SET question papers, links to open knowledge objects, project reports, gray literature, unpublished theses, necessary photographs etc. successfully and enables the upload from every terminal with fantastic user interface so we select GSDL for digitization project. Greenstone is a suite of software which has the ability to serve digital library collections and build new collections. It provides a new way of organizing information and publishing it on the Internet or on CD-ROM. Greenstone is produced by the New Zealand Digital Library Project at the University of Waikato, and distributed in cooperation with UNESCO and the Human Info NGO. It is opensource software, available from http://greenstone.org under the terms of the GNU General Public License. The necessary Software and Installation of GSDL include the following three software (version may change) n J2re-1-4_2-07 windows-i586p (URL: http://java.sun.com/j2se/downloads.html) n gsdl2.80-win32 (URL: http://greenstone.org) n Image Magick -6.3.4-4-Q16-Windows-dll

Current Trends in India In  India,  some  elite  educational  and  research institutes (such as Indian Statistical Institute, some CSIR Laboratories, IITs, IIMs etc.) already started their initiatives in building institutional repositories including a few Universities (such as Central University of Hyderabad, University of Delhi.). University Grants Commission already developed a policy document on building University level Institutional Digital Repository (http:// www.ugc.ac.in) in India. Almost all of these initiatives are experimental in nature (except a few such as Librarian’s Digital Library (LDL) of DRTC, ISI, Bangalore) and are not based on research data as far as policy issues, institute-specific requirements, workflow pattern, metadata and other related standards for different kinds of digital documents, multilingual and multi-script documents processing, search and retrieval requirements and user interfaces at various levels are concerned.

Burdwan University Digital Library Project (BUDLP) In case of Burdwan University (30 post graduate departments, 133 colleges (including Medical College), more than 300 faculty members and 50 administrative officers, having distance education and engineering colleges imparting graduate and post graduate education in different subjects) there is no mechanism for holding intellectual output of the University for scholarly communication. The objectives of making Institutional Repository for Burdwan University are to organize and preserve Ph.D theses, faculty publications, lecture notes, student’s dissertations, learning objects, PG level & NET/SET question papers, links to open knowledge objects, project reports etc. In some disciplines, institutional repositories may play significant roles in disseminating both unpublished and published research results. Development of such an Institutional Digital Repository (IDR) requires in-depth study in terms of policy issues, management techniques, workflow pattern, submission procedure, long-term preservation, multi-script records management, global access and retrieval mechanism.

Unit-VIII D 415 After discussing the every policies of IDR in Library Committee meeting we have started the Digital Library Project works at full suing. For this purpose, HP 8300 model Scanner and GSDL have installed and teachers and officers have informed to supply the publications, learning objects, bio-data time to time for uploading the same in Digital Library Project. We have submitted a Digital Library Project to the UGC for financing the same but till now the project is not approved by UGC. After getting the financial assistance from UGC we have a plan to purchase one scanner for each department for upload the materials from their own interface. It will reduce the time span and complexity for uploading. We have already organize a training programme to aware the scanning and uploading in GSDL. Presently we have collected the materials from every department and upload the same in our Digital Library Project. We will host the same in the web very shortly. The repository approach of organizing and consolidating information makes it possible for all of its potential users to access it easily, and also enables information and knowledge sharing. The repository approach also makes it possible for management to organise and access information by specific area of interest, and to make it available to employees more easily in any situation. The main objective of the BUDLP to support information needs of the university stakeholders. It is the way (IR) by which we can promote our research work globally and earn recognition for us and for the University. It also increases the visibility and prestige of the institution. It will provide an alternative digital platform to its stakeholders for publishing preprints, post-prints, working papers, technical reports, conference papers and other kinds of intellectual outputs. From Burdwan University’s view point, Universities across the world will gain a more efficient and cost-effective system of scholarly communication. This type of repository would definitely solve the problems of the researchers, faculties, officers, students by satisfying their diverse needs of information in various ways.

CONTENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS A content management system (CMS) is a software application or set of related programs that are used to create and manage digital content. CMSes are typically used for enterprise content management (ECM) and web content management (WCM). An ECM facilitates collaboration in the workplace by integrating document management, digital asset management and records retention functionalities, and providing end users with rolebased access to the organization's digital assets. A WCM facilitates collaborative authoring for websites. ECM software often includes a WCM publishing functionality, but ECM webpages typically remain behind the organization's firewall. Both enterprise content management and web content management systems have two components: a content management application (CMA) and a content delivery application (CDA). The CMA is a graphical user interface (GUI) that allows the user to control the design, creation, modification and removal of content from a website without needing to know anything about HTML. The CDA component provides the back-end services that support management and delivery of the content once it has been created in the CMA.

416 D Library and Information Science Specific Features of CMSes Features can vary amongst the various CMS offerings, but the core functions are often considered to be indexing, search and retrieval, format management, revision control and publishing. n Intuitive indexing, search and retrieval features index all data for easy access through search functions and allow users to search by attributes such as publication dates, keywords or author. n Format management facilitates turn scanned paper documents and legacy electronic documents into HTML or PDF documents. n Revision features allow content to be updated and edited after initial publication. Revision control also tracks any changes made to files by individuals. n Publishing functionality allows individuals to use a template or a set of templates approved by the organization, as well as wizards and other tools to create or modify content. A CMS may also provide tools for one-to-one marketing. One-to-one marketing is the ability of a website to tailor its content and advertising to a user's specific characteristics using information provided by the user or gathered by the site -- for instance, a particular user's page sequence pattern. For example, if the user visited a search engine and searched for digital camera, the advertising banners would feature businesses that sell digital cameras instead of businesses that sell garden products. Other popular features of CMSes include: n SEO-friendly URLs n Integrated and online help, including discussion boards n Group-based permission systems n Full template support and customizable templates n Easy wizard-based install and versioning procedures n Admin panel with multiple language support n Content hierarchy with unlimited depth and size n Minimal server requirements n Integrated file managers n Integrated audit logs

Choosing a CMS There is almost no limit to the factors that must be considered before an organization decides to invest in a CMS. There are a few basic functionalities to always look for, such as an easy-to-use editor interface and intelligent search capabilities. However, for some organizations, the software they use depends on certain requirements. For example, consider the organization's size and geographic dispersion. The CMS administrator must know how many people will be utilizing the application, whether the CMS will require multilanguage support and what size support team will be needed to maintain operations. It's also important to consider the level of control both administrators and end users will have when using the CMS. The diversity of the electronic data forms used within an organization must also be considered. All types of digital content should be indexed easily.

Unit-VIII D 417

CMS Software Vendors There is a huge number of both free and subscription-based CMS offerings available for personal and enterprise use. The following are just a few examples of CMS platform providers: n SharePoint. A collection of cloud- and web-based technologies that makes it easy to store, share and manage digital information within an organization. n Documentum. Provides tools for storing and retrieving content rapidly, and is known for its fine-grained access control. n M-Files. Uses a meta-tag-based approach to managing electronic documents. n Joomla. A free and open source WCMS built on an MVC framework. Joomla is written in PHP and offers features such as caching, RSS feeds, blogs, search and support for language internationalization. n WordPress. Another free and open source WCMS based on PHP and MySQL. WordPress can be utilized as part of an internet hosting service (WordPress.com), or it can be deployed on a local computer to act as its own web server (WordPress.org). It is highly customizable with a large amount of themes and plugins available. It is immensely popular amongst the blogging community. n DNN. Provides marketers with the content management tools they need to easily access all of their digital assets regardless of where they are stored, publish content to any online channel, personalize it to each visitor and measure its effectiveness. n Oracle WebCenter. Oracle's portfolio of user engagement applications built on their own development framework and offered at a per-CPU licensing cost. Three main products make up the suite: Oracle WebCenter Content, Oracle WebCenter Sites and Oracle WebCenter Portal. One of Oracle's major features is that content can be centrally managed in one location and shared across multiple applications. n Pulse CMS. A proprietary software option designed for small websites that enables a web developer to add content to an existing site and manage it easily and quickly. It does not require a database. It uses Apache with PHP 5 and offers user support for paying customers. n TerminalFour. This company's flagship product, Site Manager, is a proprietary software-based CMS that offers extensive multi-platform support. While the onpremises license can be costly, past updates have been reviewed favorably and it supports a broad user community platform for the exchange of ideas and peer-topeer help. n OpenText. OpenText's ECM Suite and Web Experience Management are aimed at the enterprise and are available both on premises and through the cloud. OpenText specializes in the management of large volumes of content, compliance with regulatory requirements, and mobile and online content management for enterprise use. n Backdrop CMS . A free and open source CMS that is part of the Drupal project and focused on providing affordable CMS for small and medium-sized organizations. On its own, Backdrop offers just the most basic web content management features, but it can be extended with the help of the various modules available.

418 D Library and Information Science Specific

APPLICATION OF ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE Artificial intelligence, defined as intelligence exhibited by machines, has many applications in today's society. More specifically, it is Weak AI, the form of AI where programs are developed to perform specific tasks, that is being utilized for a wide range of activities including medical diagnosis, electronic trading platforms, robot control, and remote sensing. AI has been used to develop and advance numerous fields and industries, including finance, healthcare, education, transportation, and more.

Education The Future of AI in the Classroom One of the more promising innovations is the idea of a personal AI tutor or assistant for each individual student. Because a single teacher can't work with every student at once, AI tutors would allow for students to get extra, one-on-one help in areas of needed growth. AI tutors also eliminate the intimidating idea of tutor labs or human tutors which can cause anxiety and stress for some students. In future classrooms, ambient informatics can play a beneficial role. Ambient informatics is the idea that information is everywhere in the environment and that technologies automatically adjust to your personal preferences. When students sit at their desk, their devices will be able to create lessons, problems, and games to tailor to the specific student's needs, particularly where a student may be struggling, and give immediate feedback. This eliminates the idea of a "one-sizefits-all classroom" as we will no longer have to force students to learn exactly the same material at exactly the same pace. While there are many benefits to the use of AI in the classroom, there are also several dangers that need to be taken into account before implementing them. As far as the future of AI in education, there are many new possibilities due to what has been coined by The New York Times as "The Great AI Awakening." One of these possibilities mentioned by Forbes included the providing of adaptive learning programs, which assess and react to a student's emotions and learning preferences. Another advancement includes the presentation of performance data and enrichment methods on an individual basis. Within curriculum, AI could help determine if there are underlying biases in texts and instructions. For teachers, AI could soon have the power to relay data regarding efficacy of varying learning interventions from a, potentially, global database. As a whole AI has the power to influence education by taking district, state, national, and global data into consideration as it seeks to better individualize learning for all. Although AI can provide many assets to a classroom, many experts still agree that they will not be able to replace teachers altogether. Many teachers fear the idea of AI replacing them in the classroom, especially with the idea of personal AI assistants for each student. The reality is, AI can create a more dystopian environment with revenge effects. This means that technology is inhibiting society from moving forward and causing negative, unintended effects on society. An example of a revenge effect is that the extended use of technology may hinder students' ability to focus and stay on task instead of helping them learn and grow. Also, AI has been known to lead to the loss of both human agency and simultaneity. If students are relying

Unit-VIII D 419 solely on AI tutors composed of algorithms and wires, it reduces their ability to control their own education and learning. Also, the need for AI technologies to work simultaneously may lead to system failures which could ruin an entire school day if we are relying on AI assistants to create lessons for students every day. It is inevitable that AI technologies will be taking over the classroom in the years to come, thus it is essential that the kinks of these new innovations are worked out before teachers decide whether or not to implement them into their daily schedules.

Examples of Robotics in the Library and Archives Activities The field robotics is often described as the subfield of AI that is concerned with perceptual and motor tasks. Robot is a mechanical device which performs automation tasks, either according to direct human supervision or a pre-defined program or a set of general guidelines, using artificial intelligence techniques. (Wikipedia/robotics, 2014). At present robot plays a great role in library activities at the same time in storing materials. Here some examples of how robotics works in library and archives collected from different sources.

Westport Public Library Connecticut's Westport Library recently acquired two robots, Vincent and Nancy, that will be used to help teach coding and computer-programming skills. Let's introduce them through this Youtube link.

Robot librarian designed by Aberystwyth University students Pasi William Sachiti and Ariel Ladegaard, the robotics students at Aberystwyth University who created Hugh, combined existing robot technology with information from the university's online library search facility to create their brainchild. "Hugh", an artificially intelligent library catalogue, will be able to take verbal book requests, work out where the hard copy is and lead students to the relevant bookshelf.

Mansueto Library, University of Chicago The Automated Storage and Retrieval System (ASRS) claims to allow readers access to their desired materials within minutes.

Bodleian Book Storage Facility, University of Oxford, United Kingdom 154 miles of shelving hold over 6.5 million volumes of books and periodicals in this new storage unit where cranes navigate among the uniform boxes.

NAVA Tape library robot, Budapest, Hungary One petabyte (1000 TB) data is stored in this audio-visual library on 1200 IBM Tivoli LTO tapes, retrieved by this automated mechanism upon online request.

National Newspaper Archive, Boston Spa, United Kingdom Millions of newspapers are stored on racks at the British Library's National Newspaper Building. The newly built storage void holds 60 million newspapers and periodicals spanning more than three centuries. The temperature and humidity controlled store is operated by robot cranes and can retrieve newspapers from any time and date.

420 D Library and Information Science Specific AuRoss by (A*STAR) A group of researchers at Singapore's Agency for Science, Technology and Research (A*STAR) have developed a robot that can wander among the stacks at night, scanning shelves for misplaced books. In order to identify and keep track of the books, AuRoSS relies on Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) tags. These little chips are used in everything from office key cards to passports. In recent years, libraries have begun using them to help keep track of books, scanning the spines with hand-held devices. In order for AuRoSS to successfully scan RFID tags, it has to stay at just the right distance away from the shelves.

NCI Tape library robot, Newcomb College Institute of Tulane University NCI is capable of holding 9520 tapes, storing between 13.9 uncompressed and 28.5 compressed Petabytes of data. The time taken for the system to deliver data after a user request depends upon the location of the robot that retrieves tapes, availability of a free tape drive, and the location of the data stored on the 800m plus length of tape. Typically, this delivery occurs between 30 seconds to a few minutes. Advantages of Artificial Intelligence 1. Can take on stressful and complex work that humans may struggle /can not do; 2. Can complete task faster than a human can most likely; 3. To discover unexplored things, i.e. outer space; 4. Less errors and defects; 5. Function is infinite. Disadvantages of Artificial Intelligence 1. Lacks the "human touch". 2. Has the ability to replace human jobs. 3. Can malfunction and do the opposite of what they are programmed to do. 4. Can be misused leading to mass scale destruction. 5. May corrupt younger generation. It is sure that in the near future artificial intelligence will occupy in all the spheres with the introduction of competent models with AI techniques. Library and Information Science will be greatly benefited by the development of the efficient expert system for technical services as well as Information processing and management.

Social Mobile Analytics Cloud (SMAC) SMAC (social, mobile, analytics and cloud) is the concept that the convergence of four technologies is currently driving business innovation. SMAC is the basis for an ecosystem that enables a business to transition from ebusiness to digital business. The four technologies improve business operations and help companies get closer to the customer with minimal overhead and maximum reach. The proliferation of structured and unstructured data created by mobile devices, wearable technology, connected devices, sensors, social media, loyalty card programs and website browsing is creating new business models built on customer-generated data. None of the four technologies can be an afterthought because it's the integration of social, mobile,

Unit-VIII D 421 analytics and cloud together that creates a competitive advantage and new business opportunities.

Evolution and rise of SMAC The term SMAC was coined in 2011 or 2012 to describe the impact of the consumerization of IT. Enterprise computing consisted of one-to-one communication and of software and hardware that lived on premises. The introduction of mobile devices and the increased reliance on cloud computing upended the traditional computing model. The technologies under the SMAC umbrella are as follows: n Social. Social media platforms such as Twitter, Facebook, Instagram and Snapchat have provided businesses with new ways to reach, interact with, target and acquire customers. It has given rise to new job titles such as social media influencer or digital influencer, new marketing tactics such as viral marketing campaigns, and new data sources such as likes, reposts, hashtags and network connections. n Mobile. Mobile technologies and platforms such as the iPhone and the iPad, have changed the way people communicate, shop and work. The introduction of connected devices and wearable devices, both of which rely on cheap sensors to generate and transmit data, are the basis for new business models and new services offered to customers. n Analytics. Data analytics allows businesses to understand how, when and where people consume certain goods and services. It is also used as a predictive indicator for future customer behavior as well as when physical assets, such as parts of a jet engines, will experience degradation. As the cost for processing power and storage decreased, analytics became a top priority for companies. The open source project Apache Hadoop ushered in a new era of analytics called big data. n Cloud. Cloud computing provides a new way to access technology and the data a business needs to quickly respond to changing markets and solve business problems. It ushered in a new way to build infrastructure, platforms and services. Amazon Web Services was one of the big disruptors in this space. While each of the four technologies can affect a business individually, their convergence is proving to be a disruptive force that is transforming businesses and creating entirely new business models for service providers. SMAC isn't the only term that describes this phenomenon. Other groups coined similar terms around the same time. The Aberdeen Group, a technology and services company, came up with the term "SoMoClo" or social media, mobile technology and cloud computing. The consultancy Gartner Inc. described it as the "nexus of forces," consisting of social media, mobile technology, cloud computing and information. Gartner now sees the nexus of forces as a precursor to digital business, which it defines as new business models that blur the physical and digital worlds. The International Data Corporation (IDC) refers to SMAC as "the third platform." The first platform was the mainframe, which began in the late 1950s and continues today. The second platform was the client/server model, a concept central to the role of networking where one program requests a service or resource from another program. The third platform is SMAC, a combination of "technology enablers that allow businesses to accelerate their digital transformation," according to the IDC eBook The Tools Needed to Build a Digitally

422 D Library and Information Science Specific Native Enterprise. The third platform is accelerated by six innovative technologies including augmented and virtual reality, AI systems and robotics, according to IDC. And some refer to SMAC as the fifth wave of computing. The first wave was the mainframe, the second was the personal computer and so on. The core idea is that technology innovation doesn't dismantle an already-established IT architecture; instead, they are cumulative with new technologies built on the wave before it. SMAC is no different. More recently, the internet of things (IoT), a network of connected devices that enables machine to machine communications, is often referenced in relation to SMAC, but exactly where it fits in is still up for debate. IDC considers IoT as one of the six innovation accelerators for the third platform. Some believe IoT belongs under the SMAC umbrella; others see IoT as an extension of the four already-established SMAC pillars.

SMAC and the Enterprise SMAC is the foundation for doing business in a digital economy, where data analytics and information technology are the backbone and the basis for new business models. Major vendors like Amazon, Facebook and Google are often held up as paragons of this new world order. Older companies, sometimes referred to as legacy companies, need to undergo significant transformation, often referred to as "digital transformation," to get there. The transition can be difficult because organizational charts, legacy business processes and legacy technologies, such as early generation CRM systems, often prove to be a hindrance. The legacy infrastructure doesn't become obsolete, but it needs to be adapted if it's going to be of value to a company building digital products and services. To take advantage of SMAC technologies, CIOs and IT executives need to change how their department operates and how the technology is architected. One technique that may help instruct CIOs and IT departments on how to make the transition is bimodal information technology or bimodal IT, a term Gartner coined in 2014. Bimodal IT is a twotiered operations model that enables IT to divide tasks into two modes: processes that are stable, sequential and slow and processes that require an Agile and iterative approach needed to develop digital products and services. Companies are also instituting DevOps teams, a portmanteau of software development and software operations, to bridge two separate departments and increase the pace of building and continuously improving software products and features.

SMAC Framework Although IDC refers to SMAC as the third platform, no single product exists on the market today. Malcolm Frank, executive vice president of strategy and marketing at the technology services company Cognizant, encourages CIOs to build what he calls a "SMAC stack." The term is meant to get CIOs thinking about an integrated stack of technology because the value of SMAC is at its greatest when the four technologies are used together. The key is to integrate complex technologies on the backend but provide an easy-to-use customer or employee interface on the front end that mask the complexity. To knit together a system that leverages SMAC technologies, CIOs can select proprietary or open source products to do so, likely building a hybrid stack. Technologies could include NoSQL technologies and machine learning for analytics, cloud services such as integration platform as a service (iPaaS) to manage integration between services and applications,

Unit-VIII D 423 as well as technology that enables machine to machine communication such as near field communication or Bluetooth low energy beacons to transmit data from a connected device to the cloud. Web APIs can be used to connect social media outlets and cloud services to the platform. The integration of the technologies requires clear policies and guidelines as well as management tools that can automate business processes. The media company Netflix is often cited as an example of a business that has successfully harnessed the power of SMAC. For example, when a Netflix member streams a TV show from the Netflix cloud to their iPad, they are given the option of signing into Netflix with Facebook's social login. After viewing a show, members are given multiple ways to provide social feedback. They can rate content with stars, write reviews and share what they just watched with friends on Facebook or Twitter. Netflix continues to use social media to build and promote its brand. For example, the company creates original content, and by releasing an entire series of episodes at once, it triggers a social media buzz that gets customers talking and builds up a fan base. Customer data is stored in the cloud and Netflix can break down its analysis to such a granular a level that its recommendation engine can personalize suggestions for individual family members who share the same account, a concept known as 1:1 marketing. Proponents of this CRM strategy believe that 1:1 marketing (also called one-off marketing) should be the ultimate goal of every SMAC initiative. Critics worry that 1:1 marketing initiatives that aggregate customer data from disparate sources, especially data that is purchased from data brokers, may violate customer privacy and cause legal problems related to compliance and data sovereignty.

Cloud Computing Cloud computing is the on-demand availability of computer system resources, especially data storage and computing power, without direct active management by the user. The term is generally used to describe data centers available to many users over the Internet. Large clouds, predominant today, often have functions distributed over multiple locations from central servers. If the connection to the user is relatively close, it may be designated an edge server. Clouds may be limited to a single organization (enterprise clouds), or be available to many organizations (public cloud). Cloud computing relies on sharing of resources to achieve coherence and economies of scale. Advocates of public and hybrid clouds note that cloud computing allows companies to avoid or minimize up-front IT infrastructure costs. Proponents also claim that cloud computing allows enterprises to get their applications up and running faster, with improved manageability and less maintenance, and that it enables IT teams to more rapidly adjust resources to meet fluctuating and unpredictable demand. Cloud providers typically use a "pay-as-you-go" model, which can lead to unexpected operating expenses if administrators are not familiarized with cloud-pricing models. The availability of high-capacity networks, low-cost computers and storage devices as well as the widespread adoption of hardware virtualization, service-oriented architecture and autonomic and utility computing has led to growth in cloud computing. By 2019, Linux was the most used type of operating systems used, including in Microsoft's offerings and is thus described as dominant.

424 D Library and Information Science Specific "Cloud computing" was popularized with Amazon.com releasing its Elastic Compute Cloud product in 2006, references to the phrase "cloud computing" appeared as early as 1996, with the first known mention in a Compaq internal document. The cloud symbol was used to represent networks of computing equipment in the original ARPANET by as early as 1977, and the CSNET by 1981-both predecessors to the Internet itself. The word cloud was used as a metaphor for the Internet and a standardized cloudlike shape was used to denote a network on telephony schematics. With this simplification, the implication is that the specifics of how the end points of a network are connected are not relevant for the purposes of understanding the diagram. The term cloud was used to refer to platforms for distributed computing as early as 1993, when Apple spin-off General Magic and AT&T used it in describing their (paired) Telescript and PersonaLink technologies. Cloud computing has been in existence since 2000. In July 2010, Rackspace Hosting and NASA jointly launched an open-source cloudsoftware initiative known as OpenStack. The OpenStack project intended to help organizations offering cloud-computing services running on standard hardware. The early code came from NASA's Nebula platform as well as from Rackspace's Cloud Files platform. As an open source offering and along with other open-source solutions such as CloudStack, Ganeti and OpenNebula, it has attracted attention by several key communities. Several studies aim at comparing these open sources offerings based on a set of criteria. On March 1, 2011, IBM announced the IBM SmartCloud framework to support Smarter Planet. Among the various components of the Smarter Computing foundation, cloud computing is a critical part. On June 7, 2012, Oracle announced the Oracle Cloud. This cloud offering is poised to be the first to provide users with access to an integrated set of IT solutions, including the Applications (SaaS), Platform (PaaS), and Infrastructure (IaaS) layers. In May 2012, Google Compute Engine was released in preview, before being rolled out into General Availability in December 2013. In 2019, it was revealed that Linux is most used on Microsoft Azure.

ONTOLOGY In computer science and information science, an ontology encompasses a representation, formal naming and definition of the categories, properties and relations between the concepts, data and entities that substantiate one, many or all domains of discourse. Every field creates ontologies to limit complexity and organize information into data and knowledge. As new ontologies are made, their use hopefully improves problem solving within that domain. Translating research papers within every field is a problem made easier when experts from different countries maintain a controlled vocabulary of jargon between each of their languages. Since Google started an initiative called Knowledge Graph, a substantial amount of research has used the phrase knowledge graph as a generalized term. Although there is no clear definition for the term knowledge graph, it is sometimes used as synonym for ontology. One common interpretation is that a knowledge graph represents a collection of interlinked descriptions of entities – real-world objects, events, situations or abstract

Unit-VIII D 425 concepts. Unlike ontologies, knowledge graphs, such as Google's Knowledge Graph, often contain large volumes of factual information with less formal semantics. In some contexts, the term knowledge graph is used to refer to any knowledge base that is represented as a graph.

Etymology The compound word ontology combines onto-, from the Greek, on (gen., ontos), i.e. "being; that which is", which is the present participle of the verb, eimí, i.e. "to be, I am", and -logia, i.e. "logical discourse", see classical compounds for this type of word formation. While the etymology is Greek, the oldest extant record of the word itself, the New Latin form ontologia, appeared in 1606 in the work Ogdoas Scholastica by Jacob Lorhard (Lorhardus) and in 1613 in the Lexicon philosophicum by Rudolf Gockel (Goclenius). The first occurrence in English of ontology as recorded by the OED (Oxford English Dictionary, online edition, 2008) came in Archeologia Philosophica Nova or New Principles of Philosophy by Gideon Harvey. What ontologies in both information science and philosophy have in common is the attempt to represent entities, ideas and events, with all their interdependent properties and relations, according to a system of categories. In both fields, there is considerable work on problems of ontology engineering (e.g., Quine and Kripke in philosophy, Sowa and Guarino in computer science), and debates concerning to what extent normative ontology is possible (e.g., foundationalism and coherentism in philosophy, BFO and Cyc in artificial intelligence). Applied ontology is considered a spiritual successor to prior work in philosophy, however many current efforts are more concerned with establishing controlled vocabularies of narrow domains than first principles, the existence of fixed essences or whether enduring objects (e.g., perdurantism and endurantism) may be ontologically more primary than processes. Every field uses ontological assumptions to frame explicit theories, research and applications. For instance, the definition and ontology of economics is a primacy concern in Marxist economics, but also in other subfields of economics. An example of economics relying on information science occurs in cases where a simulation or model is intended to enable economic decisions, such as determining what capital assets are at risk and by how much. Artificial intelligence has retained the most attention regarding applied ontology in subfields like natural language processing within machine translation and knowledge representation, but ontology editors are being used often in a range of fields like education without the intent to contribute to AI. Protege Protege is a Java-based ontology editor that provides the mechanisms to create ontologies and then allows you to save them as plain text, into JDBC-accessible datastores, and as RDF/XML. Installation consists of downloading the tool and then clicking the installer that the Java applet in the installation page recommends for your system.

Semantic Web The Semantic Web is an extension of the World Wide Web through standards by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). The standards promote common data formats and exchange

426 D Library and Information Science Specific protocols on the Web, most fundamentally the Resource Description Framework (RDF). According to the W3C, "The Semantic Web provides a common framework that allows data to be shared and reused across application, enterprise, and community boundaries". The Semantic Web is therefore regarded as an integrator across different content, information applications and systems. The term was coined by Tim Berners-Lee for a web of data (or data web) that can be processed by machines – that is, one in which much of the meaning is machine-readable. While its critics have questioned its feasibility, proponents argue that applications in library and information science, industry, biology and human sciences research have already proven the validity of the original concept. Berners-Lee originally expressed his vision of the Semantic Web as follows: I have a dream for the Web [in which computers] become capable of analyzing all the data on the Web – the content, links, and transactions between people and computers. A "Semantic Web", which makes this possible, has yet to emerge, but when it does, the dayto-day mechanisms of trade, bureaucracy and our daily lives will be handled by machines talking to machines. The "intelligent agents" people have touted for ages will finally materialize. The 2001 Scientific American article by Berners-Lee, Hendler, and Lassila described an expected evolution of the existing Web to a Semantic Web. In 2006, Berners-Lee and colleagues stated that: "This simple idea…remains largely unrealized". In 2013, more than four million Web domains contained Semantic Web markup.

Web 3.0 Tim Berners-Lee has described the semantic web as a component of "Web 3.0". People keep asking what Web 3.0 is. I think maybe when you've got an overlay of scalable vector graphics – everything rippling and folding and looking misty – on Web 2.0 and access to a semantic Web integrated across a huge space of data, you'll have access to an unbelievable data resource … –Tim Berners-Lee, 2006 "Semantic Web" is sometimes used as a synonym for "Web 3.0", though the definition of each term varies. Web 3.0 has started to emerge as a movement away from the centralisation of services like search, social media and chat applications that are dependent on a single organisation to function. Guardian journalist John Harris reviewed the Web 3.0 concept favorably in early 2019 and, in particular, work by Berners Lee on a project called 'Solid', based around personal data stores or 'Pods', over which individuals retain control. Berners Lee has formed a startup, Inrupt, to advance the idea and attract volunteer developers.

Linked Data In computing, linked data (often capitalized as Linked Data) is structured data which is interlinked with other data so it becomes more useful through semantic queries. It builds upon standard Web technologies such as HTTP, RDF and URIs, but rather than using them to serve web pages only for human readers, it extends them to share information in a way that can be read automatically by computers. Part of the vision of linked data is for the Internet to become a global database. Tim Berners-Lee, director of the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C), coined the term in a 2006 design note about the Semantic Web project.

Unit-VIII D 427 Linked data may also be open data, in which case it is usually described as linked open data (LOD)

Principles Tim Berners-Lee outlined four principles of linked data in his "Linked Data" note of 2006, paraphrased along the following lines: 1. Use URIs to name (identify) things. 2. Use HTTP URIs so that these things can be looked up (interpreted, "dereferenced"). 3. Provide useful information about what a name identifies when it's looked up, using open standards such as RDF, SPARQL, etc. 4. Refer to other things using their HTTP URI-based names when publishing data on the Web. Tim Berners-Lee gave a presentation on linked data at the TED 2009 conference. In it, he restated the linked data principles as three "extremely simple" rules: 1. All kinds of conceptual things, they have names now that start with HTTP. 2. If I take one of these HTTP names and I look it up...I will get back some data in a standard format which is kind of useful data that somebody might like to know about that thing, about that event. 3. When I get back that information it's not just got somebody's height and weight and when they were born, it's got relationships. And when it has relationships, whenever it expresses a relationship then the other thing that it's related to is given one of those names that starts with HTTP.

Linked Open Data Linked open data is linked data that is open data. Tim Berners-Lee gives the clearest definition of linked open data in differentiation with linked data. Linked Open Data (LOD) is Linked Data which is released under an open license, which does not impede its reuse for free.

Datasets n

n n n

n n

DBpedia - a dataset containing extracted data from Wikipedia; it contains about 3.4 million concepts described by 1 billion triples, including abstracts in 11 different languages. FOAF - a dataset describing persons, their properties and relationships. GeoNames - provides RDF descriptions of more than 7,500,000 geographical features worldwide. UMBEL - a lightweight reference structure of 20,000 subject concept classes and their relationships derived from OpenCyc, which can act as binding classes to external data; also has links to 1.5 million named entities from DBpedia and YAGO. Wikidata - a collaboratively-created linked dataset that acts as central storage for the structured data of its Wikimedia Foundation sister projects. Global Research Identifier Database (GRID) - an international database of 89,506 institutions engaged in academic research, with 14,401 relationships, models two types of relationships: a parent-child relationship that defines a subordinate association, and a related relationship that describes other associations.

428 D Library and Information Science Specific Dataset Instance and Class Relationships Clickable diagrams that show the individual datasets and their relationships within the DBpedia-spawned LOD cloud (as shown by the figures to the right) are available.

Big Data "Big data" is a field that treats ways to analyze, systematically extract information from, or otherwise deal with data sets that are too large or complex to be dealt with by traditional data-processing application software. Data with many cases (rows) offer greater statistical power, while data with higher complexity (more attributes or columns) may lead to a higher false discovery rate. Big data challenges include capturing data, data storage, data analysis, search, sharing, transfer, visualization, querying, updating, information privacy and data source. Big data was originally associated with three key concepts: volume, variety, and velocity. When we handle big data, we may not sample but simply observe and track what happens. Therefore, big data often includes data with sizes that exceed the capacity of traditional usual software to process within an acceptable time and value. Current usage of the term big data tends to refer to the use of predictive analytics, user behavior analytics, or certain other advanced data analytics methods that extract value from data, and seldom to a particular size of data set. "There is little doubt that the quantities of data now available are indeed large, but that's not the most relevant characteristic of this new data ecosystem." Analysis of data sets can find new correlations to "spot business trends, prevent diseases, combat crime and so on." Scientists, business executives, practitioners of medicine, advertising and governments alike regularly meet difficulties with large data-sets in areas including Internet searches, fintech, urban informatics, and business informatics. Scientists encounter limitations in e-Science work, including meteorology, genomics, connectomics, complex physics simulations, biology and environmental research. Data sets grow rapidly, in part because they are increasingly gathered by cheap and numerous information-sensing Internet of things devices such as mobile devices, aerial (remote sensing), software logs, cameras, microphones, radio-frequency identification (RFID) readers and wireless sensor networks. The world's technological per-capita capacity to store information has roughly doubled every 40 months since the 1980s; as of 2012, every day 2.5 exabytes (2.5 × 1018) of data are generated. Based on an IDC report prediction, the global data volume will grow exponentially from 4.4 zettabytes to 44 zettabytes between 2013 and 2020. By 2025, IDC predicts there will be 163 zettabytes of data. One question for large enterprises is determining who should own big-data initiatives that affect the entire organization.

Characteristics Big data can be described by the following characteristics: n Volume. The quantity of generated and stored data. The size of the data determines the value and potential insight, and whether it can be considered big data or not. n Variety. The type and nature of the data. This helps people who analyze it to effectively use the resulting insight. Big data draws from text, images, audio, video; plus it completes missing pieces through data fusion. n Velocity. In this context, the speed at which the data is generated and processed to meet the demands and challenges that lie in the path of growth and development.

Unit-VIII D 429

n

Big data is often available in real-time. Compared to small data, big data are produced more continually. Two kinds of velocity related to big data are the frequency of generation and the frequency of handling, recording, and publishing. Veracity. It is the extended definition for big data, which refers to the data quality and the data value. The data quality of captured data can vary greatly, affecting the accurate analysis.

Data Mining Data mining is the process of discovering patterns in large data sets involving methods at the intersection of machine learning, statistics, and database systems. Data mining is an interdisciplinary subfield of computer science and statistics with an overall goal to extract information (with intelligent methods) from a data set and transform the information into a comprehensible structure for further use. Data mining is the analysis step of the "knowledge discovery in databases" process, or KDD. Aside from the raw analysis step, it also involves database and data management aspects, data pre-processing, model and inference considerations, interestingness metrics, complexity considerations, postprocessing of discovered structures, visualization, and online updating. The term "data mining" is a misnomer, because the goal is the extraction of patterns and knowledge from large amounts of data, not the extraction (mining) of data itself. It also is a buzzword and is frequently applied to any form of large-scale data or information processing (collection, extraction, warehousing, analysis, and statistics) as well as any application of computer decision support system, including artificial intelligence (e.g., machine learning) and business intelligence. The book Data mining: Practical machine learning tools and techniques with Java (which covers mostly machine learning material) was originally to be named just Practical machine learning, and the term data mining was only added for marketing reasons. Often the more general terms (large scale) data analysis and analytics - or, when referring to actual methods, artificial intelligence and machine learning - are more appropriate. The actual data mining task is the semi-automatic or automatic analysis of large quantities of data to extract previously unknown, interesting patterns such as groups of data records (cluster analysis), unusual records (anomaly detection), and dependencies (association rule mining, sequential pattern mining). This usually involves using database techniques such as spatial indices. These patterns can then be seen as a kind of summary of the input data, and may be used in further analysis or, for example, in machine learning and predictive analytics. For example, the data mining step might identify multiple groups in the data, which can then be used to obtain more accurate prediction results by a decision support system. Neither the data collection, data preparation, nor result interpretation and reporting is part of the data mining step, but do belong to the overall KDD process as additional steps. The difference between data analysis and data mining is that data analysis is used to test models and hypotheses on the dataset, e.g., analyzing the effectiveness of a marketing campaign, regardless of the amount of data; in contrast, data mining uses machinelearning and statistical models to uncover clandestine or hidden patterns in a large volume of data. The related terms data dredging, data fishing, and data snooping refer to the use of data mining methods to sample parts of a larger population data set that are (or may be)

430 D Library and Information Science Specific too small for reliable statistical inferences to be made about the validity of any patterns discovered. These methods can, however, be used in creating new hypotheses to test against the larger data populations.

Data Harvesting The wide use of the term data harvesting is relatively new, at least when compared to data mining. Data harvesting is similar to data mining, but one of the key differences is that data harvesting uses a process that extracts and analyzes data collected from online sources. The term data harvesting actually goes by other different terms. They include web mining, data scraping, data extraction, web scraping, and many other names. Data harvesting has grown in popularity in part because the term is so descriptive. It derives from the agricultural process of harvesting, wherein a good is collected from a renewable resource. Data found on the internet certainly qualifies as a renewable resource as more is generated every day. To engage in data harvesting, a website is targeted, and the data from that site is extracted. That data can be pretty much anything the harvester wants. It might be simple text found on the page or within the page's code. It could be directory information from a retail site. It might even be a series of images and videos. Or it could be all of those items at once. There is no single method that data harvesting follows. Some methods involve harvesting data through the use of an automated bot, but that's not always the case. Complicating the matter is the fact that some websites will place certain restrictions intended to fight this automated process. This is largely done through Application Programming Interfaces, or APIs. Many social media sites like Twitter and Facebook use APIs to ensure automated programs don't harvest their data, at least not without their permission.

Data Mining and Data Harvesting Both data mining and data harvesting can go hand in hand with an organization's overall data analytics strategy. The tools available to companies make data more accessible than ever before. Between data extracting tools, data munging tools, and more; it's time to put that available data to good use. Some organizations may feel intimidated by the vast amount of data out there, and they may think they don't have the ability to properly analyze and use it to solve problems. Luckily, through data mining and data harvesting advancements, it's easier than ever to collect data and discover those key insights and trends that will improve a company. As you understand how the two terms differ, you'll be able to use them to the best effect. Contact a data expert to find out how Import.io can save your organization the time typically spent on data mining and data harvesting, helping you get the most out of your web data.

U N I T

IX

SYLLABUS v v v

v v v v

v v v

Research – Concept, Purpose, Functions, Scope and Ethics; Types of Research – Basic and Applied, Interdisciplinary and Multidisciplinary. Research Methods: Historical, Descriptive, Experimental and Delphi. Research Design – Selection of Research Problem, Review of Literature; Formulation of Research Problem; Hypothesis – Formulation, Types and Testing; Sampling Techniques. Methods of Data Collection: Questionnaire, Interview, Observation, Library Records, Scales and Checklist. Data Analysis and Interpretation – Presentation of Data; Statistical Methods/ Techniques. Statistical Packages – Spreadsheet, SPSS, Bibexcel, ‘R’ Statistics. Research Report Writing and Citation Tools – Structure, Style, Contents, Guidelines; Style Manuals; Online Citation Tools; Reference Style Management Tools; Anti-plagiarism Tools; Evaluation of Research Report. Metric Studies in LIS – Bibliometrics, Scientometric, Webometrics, Altmetrics; Impact Factors – Journal, Institutional and Authors; h-Index, g-Index, i10 Index. Trends in Library and Information Science Research.

(431)

432 D Library and Information Science Specific

RESEARCH Meaning of Research Searching it again and again means Research. Research is defined as human activity based on intellectual application in the investigation of matter. The primary purpose for applied research is discovering, interpreting, and the development of methods and systems for the advancement of human knowledge on a wide variety of scientific matters of our world and the universe. Research can use the scientific method, but need not do so. n Research is an art of scientific investigation. It is regarded as a systematic efforts to gain new knowledge. n The dictionary meaning of research is “a careful investigation or enquiry especially through search for new facts in any branch of knowledge”. n Definition of Research comprises defining and redefining problems, formulating hypothesis or suggested solutions; collecting, organizing and evaluating data; making deductions and reaching conclusions; and at last carefully testing the conclusions to determine whether they fit the formulating hypothesis. “Research is an organized and systematic way of finding answers to questions” Systematic because there is a definite set of procedures and steps which you will follow. There are certain things in the research process which are always done in order to get the most accurate results.

Characteristics of Research 1. It is a scientific investigation. Research (re-search) means to “search again.’ It connotes patient study and scientific investigation. 2. It develops concepts and the theories. One reason for conducting research is to develop and evaluate concepts and the theories. 3. It expands the limits of knowledge. Basic or pure research attempts to expand the limits of knowledge. It is conducted to verify the acceptability of a given theory or to know more about a certain concept. 4. It cannot be implemented immediately. It does not directly involve the solution to a particular problem, its findings generally cannot be implemented immediately. 5. It is essential tool for good decision making. The task of educational research is to make the information used in decision making more accurate. Educational research is a managerial tool that provides information essential for good decision making. Research in teaching, training, organizing, or management areas of an institution is within the scope of training research. Educational research reduces the risk of making wrong decisions. It is an aid to management judgement, not a substitute for it. In a nutshell characteristics of research are as follows: 1. Objective 2. Reliability 3. Validity 4. Accuracy 5. Credibility 6. Generalizability 7. Empirical Research 8. Systematic 9. Controlled factors 10. Cyclical 11. Logical 12. Replicable

Unit-IX D 433

Aims and Objectives of Research To discover answers to questions through the application of scientific procedures, it’s main aim is to find out the truth which is hidden and which has not been discovered as yet. Though each research study has its own specific purpose, we may think of research objectives as falling into a number of following broad groupings: 1. To gain familiarity with a phenomenon or to achieve new insights into it. (Exploratory or formulative research studies). 2. To portray accurately the characteristics of a particular individual, situation or a group. (Descriptive research studies). 3. To determine the frequency with which something occurs or with which it is associated with something else. (Diagnostic research studies). 4. To test a hypothesis of a causal relationship between variables (hypothesis-testing research studies).

Types of Research Education research methods can be defined as “a systematic ad scientific procedure of data collection, compilation, analysis, interpretation, and implication pertaining to any business problem”. Types of research methods can be classified into several categories according to the nature and purpose of the study and other attributes.

General Classification of Types of Research Methods Types of research methods can be broadly divided into two quantitative and qualitative categories: n Quantitative research “describes, infers, and resolves problems using numbers. Emphasis is placed on the collection of numerical data, the summary of those data and the drawing of inferences from the data”. n Qualitative research, on the other hand, is based on words, feelings, emotions, sounds and other non-numerical and unquantifiable elements. It has been noted that “information is considered qualitative in nature if it cannot be analysed by means of mathematical techniques. This characteristic may also mean that an incident does not take place often enough to allow reliable data to be collected”.

Types of Research Methods According to Nature of the Study Types of the research methods according to the nature of research can be divided into two groups: descriptive and analytical. Descriptive research usually involves surveys and studies that aim to identify the facts. In other words, descriptive research mainly deals with the “description of the state of affairs as it is at present”, and there is no control over variables in descriptive research. Analytical research, on the other hand, is fundamentally different in a way that “the researcher has to use facts or information already available and analyse these in order to make a critical evaluation of the material”.

Types of Research Methods According to the Purpose of the Study According to the purpose of the study, types of research methods can be divided into two categories: applied research and fundamental research. Applied research is also referred to as an action research, and the fundamental research is sometimes called basic or

434 D Library and Information Science Specific pure research. The table below summarizes the main differences between applied research and fundamental research. Similarities between applied and fundamental (basic) research relate to the adoption of a systematic and scientific procedure to conduct the study. DIFFERENCES BETWEEN APPLIED AND FUNDAMENTAL RESEARCH Applied Research Tries to eliminate the theory by adding to the basics of a discipline l Problems are analysed from the point of one discipline l Generalisations are preferred l

l l l

Fundamental Research l l l

Forecasting approach is implemented Assumes that other variables do not change

l

Reports are compiled in a language of technical language of discipline

l

l

Aims to solve a problem by adding to the field of application of a discipline Often several disciplines work together for solving the problem Often researches individual cases without the aim to generalise Aims to say how things can be changed Acknowledges that other variables are constant by changing Reports are compiled in a common language

Types of Research Methods according to Research Design On the basis of research design the types of research methods can be divided into two groups – exploratory and conclusive. Exploratory studies only aim to explore the research area and they do not attempt to offer final and conclusive answers to research questions. Conclusive studies, on the contrary, aim to provide final and conclusive answers to research questions. Table below illustrates the main differences between exploratory and conclusive research designs: Exploratory research Structure Methodology

Loosely structured in design. Are flexible and investigative in methodology.

Hypotheses

Do not involve testing of hypotheses.

Findings

Findings might be topic specific and might not have much relevance outside of researcher’s domain.

Conclusive research Well structured and systematic in design Have a formal and definitive. methodology that needs to be followed and tested. Most conclusive researches are carried out to test the formulated hypotheses Findings are significant as they have a theoretical or applied implication.

Positivism It has to be acknowledged that the positivism research philosophy is difficult to be explained in a precise and succinct manner. This is because there are vast differences between settings in which positivism is used by researchers. The number variations in explaining positivism may be equal to the number of authors who addressed the area of research philosophy. Nevertheless, in its essence, positivism is based on the idea that science is the only way to learn about the truth. As a philosophy, positivism adheres to the view that only “factual” knowledge gained through observation (the senses), including measurement, is trustworthy. In positivism

Unit-IX D 435 studies the role of the researcher is limited to data collection and interpretation  in an objective way. In these types of studies research findings are usually observable and quantifiable. Positivism depends on quantifiable observations that lead to statistical analyses. It has been noted that “as a philosophy, positivism is in accordance with the empiricist view that knowledge stems from human experience. It has an atomistic, ontological view of the world as comprising discrete, observable elements and events that interact in an observable, determined and regular manner”. Moreover, in positivism studies the researcher is independent form the study and there are no provisions for human interests within the study. Crowther and Lancaster (2008) argue that as a general rule, positivist studies usually adopt deductive approach, whereas inductive research approach is usually associated with a phenomenology philosophy. Moreover, positivism relates to the viewpoint that researcher needs to concentrate on facts, whereas phenomenology concentrates on the meaning and has provision for human interest. The five main principles of positivism research philosophy can be summarized as the following: 1. There are no differences in the logic of inquiry across sciences. 2. The research should aim to explain and predict. 3. Research should be empirically observable via human senses. Inductive reasoning should be used to develop statements (hypotheses) to be tested during the research process. 4. Science is not the same as the common sense. The common sense should not be allowed to bias the research findings. 5. Science must be value-free and it should be judged only by logic. The following are a few examples for studies that adhere to positivism research philosophy: n A study into the impact of the global economic crisis of 2007–2009 on the brand equity of US-based listed companies. n An analysis of effects of foreign direct investment on GDP growth in Vietnam. n A study of relationship between diffusion of innovation of mobile applications and saturation of applications in a country. The following table illustrates ontology, epistemology, axiology and typical research methods associated with positivism research philosophy: Ontology

Epistemology

Real, external, independent One true reality (universalism)

Scientific method Observable and measurable facts Law-like generalizations Numbers

Granular (things) Ordered

Causal explanation and prediction as contribution Causal explanation and prediction as contribution

Axiology Value-free research Researcher is detached, neutral and independent of what is researched Researcher maintains objective stance

Typical methods Typically deductive, highly structured, large samples, measurement, typically quantitative method of analysis, but a range of data can be analysed

436 D Library and Information Science Specific Science as an Underlying Ground for Positivism Positivism often involves the use of existing theory to develop hypotheses to be tested during the research process. Science can be specified as a cornerstone in positivism research philosophy.  Specifically, positivism relies on the following aspects of the science. 1. Science is deterministic. Scientific approach is based on assumption that X causes Y under certain circumstances. The role of researcher when following the scientific approach is to discover specific nature of cause and effect relationships. 2. Science is mechanistic. Mechanical nature of scientific approach can be explained in a way that researchers develop hypotheses to be proved or disproved via application of specific research methods. 3. Science uses method. Chosen methods are applied mechanically in order to operationalize theory or hypothesis. Application of methodology involves selection of sample, measurements, analysis and reaching conclusions about hypotheses. 4. Science deals with empiricism. In other words, science only deals with what can be seen or measured. From this perspective, science can be assessed as  objective.

Differences between Positivism and Social Constructionism The key features of positivism and social constructionism philosophical approaches are presented in the following table by Ramanathan. Positivism The observer Human interests Explanations

Must be independent Should be irrelevant Must demonstrate causality

Research progresses through

Hypotheses and deductions

Concepts Units of analysis

Need to be operationalised so that they can be measured Should be reduced to simplest terms

Generalisation through Sampling requires

Statistical probability Large numbers selected randomly

Social Constructionism Is part of what is being observed Are the main drivers of science Aim to increase general understanding of the situation Gather rich data from which ideas are induced Should incorporate stakeholder perspectives May include the complexity of ‘whole’ situations Theoretical abstraction Small numbers of cases chosen for specific reasons

Differences between Positivism and Phenomenology Paradigms Alternatively, the differences between positivist and phenomenology paradigms are best illustrated by Easterby-Smith et al. in the following manner: Positivist Paradigm Basic notions

The world is perceived as external and objective The world is perceived to be socially constructed and subjective

Phenomenology paradigm Independency of the observer. Valuefree approach to science Observer is considered a part of the object of observation. Human interests drives science

Unit-IX D 437 Positivist Paradigm Responsibilities of researcher

Most suitable research methods

Focusing on facts Causalities and fundamental laws are searched Phenomenon are reduced to the simplest elements Hypotheses formulation and testing them Concepts have to be operationalized

Sampling

Samples have to be large

Phenomenology paradigm To be focusing on meanings Aiming to understand the meaning of events Exploring the totality of each individual case Ideas are developed by induction from data Using several methods in order to different aspects of phenomena Small samples are analyzed in a greater depth or over longer period of time

RESEARCH METHODS Historical Method of Research The past is not a dead past, but it is still living in the present. History is an argument with the past. Hence the past has a casual relation to the present. The study of past has a great role to play in the society. Because, the impact of traditions and social institutions of the past also affects the present. The past which a historian studies is directly related to present. Therefore, a proper assessment of the social influences and regularities requires the resort to historical method of research. Historical method of research is a systematic body of principles and rules designed to aid effectively in gathering the source materials of history, appraising them critically and presenting a synthesis of the results obtained. According to R. F. Clark, “Historical method of research is a system of right procedure for the attainments of historical truth”. The following are the three major operations in historical method. (a) The search for material on which to work, for sources of heuristic information. (b) The appraisement of the material or sources from the view point of criticism value. (c) The formal statement of the findings, of heuristic and criticism. This includes the assembling of a body of historical data and their presentation in terms of objective truth and significance.

Purpose and Values of Historical Research (1) The first and foremost purpose is to gain a clearer perspective of the past and the present. The present problems are understandable only on the basis of their past. (2) It helps us to know the role which library played in the progress of society. (3) It helps to arrive at an accurate account of the past. (4) This study provides important information concerning the effects of certain past library practices and may suggest programs for future action, based upon the evaluation of these past experiences. (5) Helps in avoiding the mistakes of past.

438 D Library and Information Science Specific Steps in the Historical Research The steps involved in undertaking research are not different from other forms of research, but the nature of the subject matter presents a researcher some peculiar problems and requires him to apply some special standards and techniques. In general following steps are involved. (1) Selection of the problem (2) Formulation of hypothesis (3) Collection of data (4) Interpretation and reporting findings

Sources Used in Historical Method of Research The sources used in historical method of research are usually classified as follows:

1. Deliberate Sources These are those data in which there has been a conscious effort to record some event or preserve information. Such sources range from the brief chronological notes on the pillars to paintings or to the extended diaries and autobiographies. They also include material like myths and folk-songs which are deliberately passed down from generation to generation by the wording of mouth to keep the materials alive. The deliberate sources presents a subjective view of events. But despite this personal bias, this type of sources preserve an individual impression of that source.

2. Inadvertent Sources These types of data provide information even though that was not the original intent of the sources. Archaeologists who develop descriptions of cultures based on artifacts they are using inadvertent sources. This type of sources is being used for something other than it intended, therefore, such a source must be an objective piece of evidence or data.

3. Primary Sources Primary sources are eye-witness accounts. This can be an animate source, that is a person reporting an experience which happened to him or in which he participated. Or it can be an inanimate source, such as the physical artifacts are found in museums or a set of proceedings such as films or records, or it can be verbal material like the official transcripts or minutes of a meeting or symposium. Any one who records events, records a personal version with all the possibilities for selective perception, selective recall, and conscious and unconscious distortion psychological research has demonstrated. In brief, the primary source is the fact that the source is the minimum one removed from the even itself; it does not to the accuracy in the absolute sense or truth of the sources. Primary historical resources are as follows: (a) Records and documents written by actual participants, or eye-witness of an event. Such type of documentary sources are: constitution, charters, laws, court decision, official records and minutes, autobiographies, letters, diaries, genealogies, contracts, deeds, wills, permits, licenses affidavits, depositions, declarations, proclamations, certificates, lists, bills, receipts, handbills, newspapers and magazines, advertisements, maps, paintings, diagrams, books, pamphlets, catalogues, films,

Unit-IX D 439

(b)

(c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h)

pictures, paintings, inscriptions, recordings, magnetic tapes, transcriptions, drawings, teacher and student files, samples of student work surveys, and research reports. Historical sites, roads, pyramids, fortifications of the ruined buildings or whole buildings, furniture, human remains-tools clothing, food utensils, pottery armory, weapons and machinery and fine arts, museums, pieces of many kinds. Orally transmitted materials, such as folklore, legends, ballads, tales, sagas, traditions, customs, manners, burials, social institutions and languages. Handwritten material such as papyrus rolls, bricks bearing cuneiform writings, vellum, parchment paper, manuscripts biographies, memories, diaries etc. Durable kinds of artistic materials not written in the ordinary sense, such as inscriptions backed upon clay, chiselled stones, monuments, stamps, coins, woven tapestries, vases, scenic or portrait sculptures, historical paintings. Printed books, periodicals, papers and literature. Motion pictures, films, microfilms, recording including radios, TV, VCR. Personal observations.

Secondary Sources The secondary sources are those which record an event that was never actually witnessed by the reporter. Secondary sources are atleast two steps removed from the event. Obviously, there are two basic differences between primary and secondary sources. First the primary sources are directly tied to the event and the secondary sources are not. Secondly, the secondary sources introduce atleast one other individual into the production of the data resulting in selective perception, selective recall and conscious and unconscious distortions.

Limitations of Historical Method (a) Lack of reliable and adequate data. The more distinct the past the greater are the difficulties of getting at relevant facts unless records have been carefully preserved. (b) Second relates to the method of keeping records containing information useful to many types of work and this researcher intimate in particular aspect of events, will have to look many documents. Records are not always kept in order. So a great deal of patience and perseverance is necessary otherwise he will not be able to get facts. (c) Calculation and measurement are not possible in the method.

Descriptive Method of Research The descriptive method or research in contrast of historical method of research is present oriented, whereas historical method is past oriented. Historical method is concerned with the past and descriptive method is concerned with the present and it describes and interprets what existed at present. It is primarily concerned with relationship or conditions that exist, practices that prevail, beliefs, point of views or attitudes that are held, processes that are going on, effects are that are being felt or trends that are developing. Therefore, this method of research is suitable for researcher who believes that the data required to resolve the research problems do not exist, yet the settings in which those data could be generated to exist.

440 D Library and Information Science Specific This method is extensively used in physical and natural sciences, for example, when Physics measures, Biology classifies, Zoology dissects, and Geology studies the rocks.

Types of Descriptive Method of Research Following are the various types of descriptive method of research:

1. Survey Studies Survey studies is commonly used in behavioural sciences. It gathers data from a relatively large number of cases at a particular time and is not concerned with characteristics of the individual. Survey studies are mainly designed to determine the nature of the existing state of affairs. The purpose of this type of studies is to determine the frequency of occurrence of a particular event. Educators are always in need of the data gathered by this means they are always in need of simple facts which illustrate a particular situation.

2. The Case Study It is widely used method of research in the behavioural sciences and examples of its use can be found in sociology, psychology, anthropology and education. Case studies of individuals carried out by professionally qualified persons. Case studies is carried out in great depth by trained and experienced persons and it reveals data in a way provided by no other form of research. It is also an extremely useful method used to study rare of unusual cases of human behaviour being especially valuable in the study of handicapped subjects and those suffering from rare physical conditions. Two types of methods are most popular in case studies. (a) Clinical method (b) Biographical method.

3. Development Studies Development studies are concerned not only with the present status and interrelation of variables in a situation but also with changes which occur with the passage of time. The recorded data are considered with the view to determining what has happened in the past and what is happening now either for its own sake or with a view to predicting what is likely happen in the future. In conclusion we may say that scientists do not generally regard the descriptive research as research of high order. But the type of information procured by this method is in wide demand and is capable or rendering important service. Descriptive method has certain limitations, because all problems cannot satisfy each of the required criteria. On the whole, descriptive research method is the simplest approach of research and is applicable to a number of social problems especially in under-developed countries. The research method may be quite useful to identify objectives and to point to ways in which they be reached.

Experimental Research Method Experimental method of research is a most sophisticated, exacting and powerful method for discovering and developing the organized body of knowledge. Experimental method is the classical method of science laboratory, where elements manipulated certain stimuli,

Unit-IX D 441 treatments or environmental conditions and observe how the condition or behaviour of the subject is affected or changed. In experimentation research, the investigator controls (manipulates) certain independent variables and observes the changes which take place in the form of dependent variables. In its broader meaning, an experiment may be considered as a way of organizing the collection of evidence so as to permit one to make inferences about tenability of hypothesis. Thus experimental research method is concerned with testing the casual hypothesis. This method helps the experimenter to test the reality of the problem under controlled conditions or variables.

Various Steps of Experimental Method of Research The experimental method of research consists of the following steps:

1. Selection of Problem The research problem must be stated in clear, precise and conceptual terms. Initial statement of the hypothesis must be made in precise and conceptual terms. The variables must also be conceptualized. The independent variable should also be decided and the plan for its gradual manipulation be chalked out. In brief, selecting the problem there some steps are involved such as statement of the research problem, determination that the experimental approach is appropriate, specification of the independent variable, specification of the levels of the independent variables, specification of full range of potential dependent variable, initial statement of hypothesis, etc.

2. Selecting the Setting Setting refers to the background in which the phenomenon is to be studied. In case of an experiment in a laboratory, the setting has to be artificially created by the experimenter. The following features may be helpful in good setting. First, the situation must contain the phenomenon to be studied. Secondly the phenomenon must occur in sufficiently pure form to enable the researcher to execute his project. Thirdly, the researcher must the power to manipulate the independent variable.

3. Pilot Study The test that is administered to the subject, before the independent variable is applied is called pre-test of pilot study. In case of interview schedule, a pre-test is undertaken to be sure that the questions will be as meaningful to the average respondent as to the investigator. It also enables the investigator vis-a-vis realities and may pose problems which the investigator had not even thought of earlier. He will be able to know the various causative factors involved in the nature and working of the organization chosen for research, the extent of cooperation or resistance he is likely to face.

The Merits of Experimental Formulation (a) The cause and effect relation is more clearly determined in experimental formulation (b) It is more accurate and precise (c) It is an ideal method for testing a casual hypothesis (d) It is considered as the most scientific method.

442 D Library and Information Science Specific Categories of Experimental Designs Experimental designs are broadly classified in to the following categories:

(1) After-only or Post test-only Design This is carried out under the social conditions or phenomenon that are not at all under control of the physical or natural conditions. For this type two groups of individual are chosen. The two groups are assumed to be equivalent at the start of a study. The groups may be of similar thinking, similar occupation or similar age. For e.g. if two similar groups A and B are taken. The experimental group A is exposed to the casual variable say ‘x’ and the control group B is kept constant. After experiment is over one can notice that the independent ‘x’ effects the dependent variable ‘y’ in the experimental group A. On the other hand no changes are found in the control group B. The study of cause and effect carried out after the experiment is over, is known as ‘afteronly’ or post test-only’ experimental design. This method may not always be reliable, because the effect on ‘y’ is not always by ‘x’. It may also be caused by an external factor or by joint interaction of ‘x’ with another external factor.

(2) Before-After or Pretest-Post Test Design In this type of controlled experiment, all the groups are selected, observed and measured before experimentation. In other words, the effect is measured both before and after the exposure of group/groups to experiment, and it may use one or several groups. Main limitation of this design is that during experiment a group may be influenced by the external factors in a different way than the other group, for there is nothing to ensure uniform change.

(3) Ex-facto Design In this design, the investigator selects two or more groups. In one group an event has taken place, while in other event has not taken place. Through comparative study, the investigator proceeds from the present to the past. Thus it is the experimentation in reverse. The basic difference between the two methods mentioned earlier and this method is that in this the past is studied through the present, while in other two the study is about the future from the past. An ex-post facto study was conducted by G. Edward Evans on “Book selection and usage in academic Libraries”. The selection and usage of materials was examined on the basis of (i) Faculty selection, (ii) Librarian selection, (iii) Blanket order approval.

Delphi The Delphi method is a forecasting process framework based on the results of multiple rounds of questionnaires sent to a panel of experts. Several rounds of questionnaires are sent out to the group of experts, and the anonymous responses are aggregated and shared with the group after each round. The experts are allowed to adjust their answers in subsequent rounds, based on how they interpret the "group response" that has been provided to them. Since multiple rounds of questions are asked and the panel is told what the group thinks as a whole, the Delphi method seeks to reach the correct response through consensus.

Unit-IX D 443

Understanding the Delphi Method The Delphi method was originally conceived in the 1950s by Olaf Helmer and Norman Dalkey of the Rand Corporation. The name refers to the Oracle of Delphi, a priestess at a temple of Apollo in ancient Greece known for her prophecies. The Delphi method allows experts to work towards a mutual agreement by conducting a circulating series of questionnaires and releasing related feedback to further the discussion with each subsequent round. The experts’ responses shift as rounds are completed based on the information brought forth by other experts participating in the analysis. The Delphi method is a process of arriving at group consensus by providing experts with rounds of questionnaires, as well as the group response before each subsequent round.

How the Delphi Method Works? First, the group facilitator selects a group of experts based on the topic being examined. Once all participants are confirmed, each member of the group is sent a questionnaire with instructions to comment on each topic based on their personal opinion, experience, or previous research. The questionnaires are returned to the facilitator who groups the comments and prepares copies of the information. A copy of the compiled comments is sent to each participant, along with the opportunity to comment further. At the end of each comment session, all questionnaires are returned to the facilitator who decides if another round is necessary or if the results are ready for publishing. The questionnaire rounds can be repeated as many times as necessary to achieve a general sense of consensus.

The Advantages and Disadvantages of the Delphi Method The Delphi method seeks to aggregate opinions from a diverse set of experts, and it can be done without having to bring everyone together for a physical meeting. Since the responses of the participants are anonymous, individual panelists don't have to worry about repercussions for their opinions. Consensus can be reached over time as opinions are swayed, making the method very effective. However, while the Delphi method allows for commentary from a diverse group of participants, it does not result in the same sort of interactions as a live discussion. A live discussion can sometimes produce a better example of consensus, as ideas and perceptions are introduced, broken down and reassessed. Response times with the Adelphi method can be long, which slows the rate of discussion. It is also possible that the information received back from the experts will provide no innate value.

RESEARCH DESIGN Decisions regarding what, where, when, how much, by what means concerning an enquiry or a research study constitute a research design. In fact, the research design is the conceptual structure within which research is conducted. It constitutes the blue print for the collection, measurement and analysis of data. As such the design includes an outline of what the researcher will do from writing the hypothesis and its operational implications to the final analysis of data.

444 D Library and Information Science Specific It is the arrangement of conditions for collection and analysis of data in a manner that aims to combine relevance to the research purpose with economy in procedure.

Features of a Research Design We can state the important features of a research design as under. (1) It is a plan that specifies the sources and types of information relevant to the research problem. (2) It is a strategy specifying which approach will be used for gathering and analysing the data. (3) It also includes the time and cost budgets since most studies are done under these two constraints. In brief, research design must contain: (a) a clear statement of the research problem, (b) procedures and techniques to be used for gathering information, (c) the population to be studied, and (d) method to be used in processing and analysing data.

Need for Research Design Research design is needed because it facilitates the smooth sailing of the various research operations, thereby making research as efficient as possible yielding maximum information with minimum expenses of effort, time and money. Just as for better, economical, and attractive constructing of a house, we need a blueprint, prepared by an expert architect, similarly we need a research design or a plan in advance of data collection and analysis for our research project. Research design stands for advanced planning of the methods to be adopted for collecting the relevant data and the techniques to be used in their analysis, keeping in view the objective of the research and the availability of staff, time and money. Preparation of the research design should be done with great care as any error in it may upset the entire Project Research design, in fact, has a great bearing on the reliability of the results arrived at and as such constitutes the firm foundation of the entire edifice to the research work. Even then the need for a well thought out research design is not realised by many persons. The importance which this problem deserves is not given to it. As a result many researches do not serve the purpose for which they are undertaken. In fact, they may even give misleading conclusions. Thoughtlessness in designing the research project may result in rendering the research exercise futile. It is, therefore, imperative that an efficient and appropriate design must be prepared before starting research operations. The design helps the researcher to organise his ideas in a form whereby it will be possible for him to look for flaws and inadequacies. Such a design can even be given to others for their comments and critical evaluation. In the absence of such a course of action, it will be difficult for the critic to province a comprehensive review of the proposed study.

Hypothesis Hypothesis is usually considered as the principal instrument in research. Formation of hypothesis is one of the steps in the process of research. Hypothesis is in a sense a type of supposition or assumption when researcher observes and the point of start is hypothesis. It is a generalization in a form of proposition and formed by the process of induction i.e.,

Unit-IX D 445 reasoning. Inductive inference helps to arrive at the general principles of statement. Thus a hypothesis may be a free creation of scientific imagination. The main function of hypothesis is to suggest new experiments and observations. Ordinarily, when one talks about hypothesis, it simply means a mere assumption or some supposition to be proved or disproved. But for a researcher, hypothesis is a formal question that he intends to resolve. Thus hypothesis may be defined as a proposition or a set of propositions set forth as an explanation for the occurrence of some specified group of phenomena either asserted merely as a provisional conjecture to guide some investigation or accepted as highly probable in the light of established facts. Quite often a research hypothesis is a predictive statement, capable of being tested by scientific methods, that relates an independent variable to some dependent variable.

Various Characteristics of Hypothesis 1. Clear and Precise. If the hypothesis is not clear and precise the inferences drawn of its basic cannot be taken as reliable. 2. Testable. A hypothesis should be capable of being tested. Some prior study may be done by researcher in order to make hypothesis a testable one. A hypothesis is testable if other deductions can be made from it which, in turn, can be confirmed or disproved by observation. 3. Simple. A hypothesis should be stated as far as possible in most simple terms so that the same is easily understandable by all concerned. But one must remember that simplicity of hypothesis has nothing to do with its significance. 4. Limited in Scope. A hypothesis should be limited in scope and must be specific. A researcher must remember that narrower hypotheses are generally more testable and he should develop such hypothesis. 5. Consistent. Hypothesis should be consistent with most known facts, i.e. it must be consistent with a substantial body of established facts. In other words, it should be one which judges accept as being the most likely. 6. Amenable. Hypothesis should be amenable to testing within a reasonable time. One should not use even an excellent hypothesis, if the same cannot be tested in reasonable time for one cannot spend a life time collecting data to test it. 7. Explanatory. Hypothesis must explain the facts that gave rise to the need for explanation. This means that by using the hypothesis plus other known and accepted generalization, one should be able to deduce the original problem condition. Thus hypothesis must actually explain what it claims to explain; it should have empirical references. 8. Hypothesis should state relationship between if it happens to be a relational hypothesis.

Types of Hypothesis (1) An inductive hypothesis is a generalisation based on observation (2) Deductive hypothesis is derived from theory (3) A research hypothesis states the expected relationship (or difference) between variables (4) A non-directional hypothesis indicates that a relationship or difference exists; a directional hypothesis indicates nature of relationship of difference.

446 D Library and Information Science Specific (5) A null hypothesis states that there will be no relationship (or difference) between variables, and that only relationship found will be a chance relationship, not a true one.

Criteria for Formulation of Hypothesis TRAVERS suggested following criteria of hypothesis 1. Hypothesis should be Clearly and Precisely Stated The clear statement of hypothesis generally involves concise technical language and definition of terms that are better defined that those in common language. 2. Hypothesis should be Testable Hypothesis should be formulated in such a way that they can be tested and verified. If the hypothesis were not testable, it would be impossible either to confirm or contradict hypothesis and, therefore, will not help researcher in drawing conclusions (a) Hypothesis should state expected relationships between variables (b) Hypothesis should be limited in scope: as hypothesis of global significance are not usable as they are not specific and simple for testing and drawing conclusions. (c) Hypothesis should be consistent with most known facts. Hypothesis should not be inconsistent with a substantial body of established facts. They should be grounded in the well established theories and laws. (d) Hypothesis should be stated as far as possible in simple terms: because it not only makes its meaning clear to others, but also help in their testability. Hypothesis should not make use of the vague terms or constituents that do not convey the intended meaning to the reader. (e) Hypothesis selected should be amenable to testing within a reasonable time.

Utility and Importance of Hypothesis in Research The main function of hypothesis is to suggest new experiments and observations. In fact many experiments are carried out with the deliberate object of testing hypothesis. Decision makers often face situations wherein they are interested in testing hypothesis on the basis of available information and then takes decisions on the basis of such testing. Thus we may conclude that a hypothesis states what we are looking for and it is a proposition which can be put to test to determine its validity. Thus the utility and importance of hypothesis in research may be summed up as follows. 1. It Gives Points to the Enquiry Hypothesis makes the enquiry more specific and to the point. The research has to proceed along certain lines only. In the absence of hypothesis the researcher is like a sailor on the vast uncharted sea without compass or radar. 2. It Helps in Deciding the Direction to Proceed This point may well be followed if we refer to our illustration in the beginning of the discussions about hypothesis. Just as a person proceeding in the right direction is likely to reach ultimately to his goal even if the actual path is not known to him. In the same way a scientist with proper hypothesis can arrive at right conclusions in the long run. He may follow one method after the other but at last he must evolve a method that will provide final conclusions about the hypothesis.

Unit-IX D 447 3. It Helps in Selecting Pertinent Facts When we are studying a phenomena, we come across a number of factors. Every aspect of the problem can not be studied, as it would take us no where. We have to study only those factors that are relevant to our study. It requires the process of delimiting and singling out pertinent facts, and hypothesis is essential for this purpose. To take an example, let us suppose an enquiry is to be made to find whether there is any correlation between delinquency and economic status of the family. This necessarily limits our study to delinquents only. Besides, we have to study only the economic aspect of the family of delinquents. Other aspects viz., social, religious, political, etc. have to be left out. Naturally it will make our study more specific and pointed, than if we had to study every aspect of life of each boy and his family. P.V. Young has rightly remarked, the use of hypothesis prevents a blind search and indiscriminate gathering of masses of data which may later prove irrelevant to the problem under study. 4. It Helps in Drawing Specific Conclusions Hypothesis is useful not only in proceeding in our study on right lines, it is also important in drawing proper conclusions. According to Goode and Hatt, without hypothesis the research is unfocused, a random, empirical wandering. The results can not be stated as facts with clear meanings. Hypothesis is necessary to link between theory and investigations, which lead to discovery of addition to knowledge.

Sampling Techniques A finite subset of the population, selected from it with the objective of investigating its properties is called a sample and the number of units in the sample is known as the sample size. Sampling is a tool which enables us to draw conclusions about the characteristics of the population after studying only those objects or items that are included in the sample. The main objectives of the sampling theory are : (i) To obtain the optimum results, i.e., the maximum information about the characteristics of the population with the available sources at our disposal in terms of time, money and manpower by studying the sample values only. (ii) To obtain the best possible estimates of the population parameters.

Census Method In the census method, we resort to 100% inspection of the population and enumerate each and every unit of the population. In the sample method we inspect only a selected representative and adequate fraction (finite subset) of the population and after analysing the results of the sample data we draw conclusions about the characteristics of the population. The census method seems to provide more accurate and exact information as compared to sample enumeration as the information is collected from each and every unit of the population. Moreover, it affords more extensive and detailed study.

Limitations (i) The complete enumeration of the population requires lot of time, money, manpower and administrative personnel. As such this method can be adopted only by the government and big organisations who have vast resources at their disposal.

448 D Library and Information Science Specific (ii) Since the entire population is to be enumerated, the census method is usually very time consuming. If the population is sufficiently large, then it is possible that the processing and the analysis of the data might take so much time that when the results are available, they are not of much use because of changed conditions.

Merits 1. Speed, i.e., less time. Since only a part of the population is to be inspected and examined, the sample method results in considerable amount of saving in time and labour. There is saving in time not only in conducting the sampling enquiry but also in the processing, editing and analysing the data. This is very sensitive and important point for the statistical investigations where the results are urgently and quickly needed. 2. Economy, i.e., Reduced Cost of the Enquiry. The sample method is much more economical than a complete census. In a sample enquiry, there is reduction in the cost of collection of the information, administration, transport, training and man hours. Although, the labour and the expenses of obtaining information per unit are generally large in a sample enquiry than in the census method, the overall expenses of a sample survey are relatively much less, since only a fraction of the population is to be enumerated. This is particularly significant in conducting socio-economic surveys in developing countries with budding economies who cannot afford a complete census because of lack of finances. 3. Administrative Convenience. A complete census requires a very huge administrative set up involving lot of personnel, trained investigators and above all the co-ordination between the various operating agencies. On the other hand, the organisation and administration of a sample survey is relatively much convenient as it requires less personnel staff and the field of enquiry is also limited. 4. Reliability. In the census, the sampling errors are completely absent. If the nonsampling errors are also absent, the results would be 100% accurate. On the other hand, a sample enquiry contains both sampling and non-sampling errors. In spite of this weakness, a carefully designed and scientifically executed sample survey gives results which are more reliable than those obtained from a complete census. This is because of the following reasons: (i) It is always possible to ascertain the extent of sampling error and degree of reliability of the results. Even the desired degree of accuracy can be achieved through sampling using different devices. (ii) The non-sampling errors, such as due to measuring and recording observations, inaccuracy or incompleteness of information, location of units, non-response or incomplete response, training of investigators, interpretation of questions, bias of the investigators, etc., are of a more serious nature in a complete census. In a sample survey, these errors can be effectively controlled and minimised by (i) employing highly qualified, skilled and trained personnel, (ii) imparting adequate training to the investigators for conducting the enquiry, (iii) better supervision, (iv) using more sophisticated equipment and statistical techniques for the processing and analysis of the relatively limited data. 5. Greater Scope. It appears that there is possibility of obtaining detailed information only in a complete census where each and every unit in the population is

Unit-IX D 449 enumerated. But in practice because of our limitations in any statistical enquiry in terms of time, money and man hours and because of the fact that sampling procedure results in considerable savings in time, money and labour it is possible to obtain more detailed and exhaustive information from the limited few units selected in the sample.

Errors in Statistics In Statistics, the word ‘error’ is used to denote the difference between the true value and the estimated or approximated value. In other words ‘error’ refers to the difference between the true value of a population parameter and its estimate provided by an appropriate sample statistic computed by some statistical device. Errors arise due to the following reasons: (i) Approximations in measurements, e.g., the heights of individuals may be approximated to 10th of a centimeter, age may be measured correct to nearest month, weight may be measured correct to 10th of a kilogram, distance may be measured correct to the nearest metre and so on. Thus, in all such measurements, there is bound to be a difference between the observed value and the true value. (ii) Approximations in rounding of the figures to the nearest hundreds, thousands, millions, etc., or in the rounding of decimals. (iii) The biases due to faulty collection and analysis of the data and biases in the presentation and interpretation of the results. (iv) Personal biases of the investigators and so on. The inaccuracies or errors in any statistical investigation, i.e., in the collection, processing, analysis and interpretation of the data may be broadly classified as follows : (i) Sampling Errors and (ii) Non-Sampling Errors. (i) Sampling Errors. In a sample survey, since only a small portion of the population is studied, its results are bound to differ from the census results and thus have a certain amount of error. This error would always be there no matter that the sample is drawn at random and that it is highly representative. This error is attributed to fluctuations of sampling and is called sampling error. Sampling error is due to the fact that only a subset of the population (i.e., sample) has been used to estimate the population parameters and draw inferences about the population. Thus, sampling error is present only in a sample survey and is completely absent in census method. Sampling errors are primarily due to the following reasons : 1. Faulty selection of the sample. Some of the bias is introduced by the use of defective sampling technique for the selection of a sample, e.g., purposive or judgement sampling in which the investigator deliberately selects a representative sample to obtain certain results. This bias can be overcome by strictly adhering to a simple random sample or by selecting a sample at random subject to restrictions which while improving the accuracy are of such nature that they do not introduce bias in the results. 2. Substitution. If difficulties arise in enumerating a particular sampling unit included in the random sample, the investigators usually substitute a convenient member of the population. This obviously leads to some bias since the characteristics possessed by the substituted unit will usually be different from those possessed by the unit originally included in the sample.

450 D Library and Information Science Specific 3. Faulty demarcation of sampling units. Bias due to defective demarcation of sampling units is particularly significant in area surveys such as agricultural experiments in the field or crop cutting surveys, etc. In such surveys, while dealing with border line cases, it depends more or less on the discretion of the investigator whether to include them in the sample or not. 4. Error due to bias in the estimation method. Sampling method consists in estimating the parameters of the population by appropriate statistics computed from the sample. Improper choice of the estimation techniques might introduce the error. For example, in simple random sampling, if x1, x2, ...., xn are observations on the n sampled units, then the sample variance. s2 =

1 n

n

2 å ( xi - x ) i =1

is a biased estimator of the population variance s2 while an unbiased estimate of s2 is given by n 1 2 å ( x4 - x ) n - 1 i =1 5. Variability of the population. Sampling error also depends on the variability or heterogeneity of the population to be sampled. (ii) Non-Sampling Errors. Non-sampling errors are not attributed to chance and are a consequence of certain factors which are within human control. In other words, they are due to certain causes which can be traced and may arise at any stage of the enquiry, viz., planning and execution of the survey and collection, processing and analysis of the data. Non-sampling errors are thus present both in census surveys as well as sample surveys. Obviously, non-sampling errors will be of large magnitude in a census survey than in a sample survey because they increase with the increase in the number of units to be examined and enumerated. It is very difficult to prepare an exhaustive list of all the sources of non-sampling errors. We enumerate below some of the important factors responsible for non-sampling errors in any survey (census or sample). 1. Faulty planning, including vague and faulty definitions of the population or the statistical units to be used, incomplete list of population-members (i.e., incomplete frame in case of sample survey). 2. Vague and imperfect questionnaire which might result in incomplete or wrong information. 3. Defective methods of interviewing and asking questions. 4. Vagueness about the type of the data to be collected. 5. Exaggerated or wrong answers to the questions which appeal to the pride or prestige or self-interest of the respondents. For example, a person may overstate his education or income or understate his age or he may give wrong statements to safeguard his self-interest. 6. Personal bias of the investigator. 7. Lack of trained and qualified investigators and lack of supervisory staff. 8. Failure of respondents’ memory to recall the events or happenings in the past. 9. Non-response and Inadequate or Incomplete Response. Bias due to non-response results if in a house-to-house survey the respondent is not available in spite

s2 =

Unit-IX D 451 of repeated visits by the investigator or if the respondent refuses to furnish the information. Incomplete response error is introduced if the respondent is unable to furnish information on certain questions or if he is unwilling or even refuses to answer certain questions. 10. Improper Coverage. If the objectives of the survey are not precisely stated in clear cut terms, this may result in (i) the inclusion in the survey of certain units which are not to be included or (ii) the exclusion of certain units which were to be included in the survey under the objectives. For example, in a census to determine the number of individuals in the age group, say, 15 years to 55 years, more or less serious errors may occur in deciding whom to enumerate unless particular community or area is not specified and also the time at which the age is to be specified. 11. Compiling Errors, i.e., wrong calculations or entries made during the processing and analysis of the data. Various operations of data processing such as editing and coding of the responses, punching of cards, tabulation and summarising the original observations made in the survey are a potential source of error. Compilation errors are subject to control through verification, consistency checks etc. 12. Publication Errors. Publication errors, i.e., the errors committed during presentation and printing of tabulated results are basically due to two sources. The first refers to the mechanics of publication - the proofing error and the like. The other, which is of a more serious nature, lies in the failure of the survey organisation to point out the limitations of the statistics. Biased and Unbiased Errors. In any statistical investigation whether a complete census or a sample survey, the statistical errors can also be classified as: (i) Biased Errors and (ii) Unbiased Errors. (I) Biased Errors. Biased errors creep in because of : (1) Bias on the part of the enumerator or investigator whose personal beliefs and prejudices are likely to affect the results of the enquiry. (2) Bias in the measuring instrument or the equipment used for recording the observations. (3) Bias due to faulty collection of the data and in the statistical techniques and the formulae used for the analysis of the data. (4) Respondents’ bias. An appeal to the pride or prestige of an individual introduces a bias called prestige bias by virtue of which he may upgrade his education, occupation, income etc., or understate his age, thus resulting in wrong answers. Moreover, respondents may furnish wrong information to safeguard their personal interests. For example, for income-tax purposes, a person may give an understatement of his salary or income or assets. (5) Bias due to non-response. (6) Bias in the Technique of Approximations. If, while rounding off, each individual value is either approximated to next highest or lowest number so that all the errors move in the same direction, there is bias for overstatement or understatement respectively. For example, if the figures are to be rounded off to the next highest or lowest hundred, then each of the values 305 and 396 will be recorded as 400 and 300 respectively.

452 D Library and Information Science Specific Owing to their nature, the biased errors have a tendency to grow in magnitude with an increase in the number of the observations and hence are also known as Cumulative Errors. Thus, the magnitude of the biased errors is directly proportional to the number of observations. (II) Unbiased Errors. The errors are termed as unbiased errors if the estimated or approximated values are likely to err on either side, i.e., if the chances of making an over-estimate is almost same as the chance of making an under-estimate. Since these errors move in both the directions, the errors in one direction are more or less neutralised by the errors in the opposite direction and consequently the ultimate result is not much affected. For example, if the individual values, say, 385, 415, 355, 445 are rounded to the nearest complete unit, i.e., hundred, each one of them would be recorded as 400. In this case, the values 385 and 355 give over estimating errors of magnitudes 15 and 45 respectively while the values 415 and 445 give under-estimating errors of magnitudes 15 and 45 respectively and in the ultimate result (approximation) they get neutralised. Thus, if the number of observations is quite large, these unbiased errors will not affect the final result much. Since the errors in one direction compensate for the errors in the other direction, unbiased errors are also termed as compensatory errors. Thus we observe that the unbiased errors do not grow with the increase in the number of observations but they have a tendency to get neutralised and are minimum in the ultimate analysis and the magnitude of the unbiased errors is inversely proportional to the number of items.

METHODS OF DATA COLLECTION Based on the research paradigm and the chosen research method, there are a series of data generation methods that can be used. Most of the times, several data generation methods are used for the same study.

Interviews Interviews can be suitable for: n obtaining detailed information on a specific topic; n asking questions that are complex, or open-ended, or whose order and logic might need to be different for different people; n explore emotions, experiences or feelings that cannot be easily observed or described via pre-defined questionnaire responses; n investigate sensitive issues. Interviews are widely used in case studies and ethnographies, but can also be used in surveys, action research and research through design.

Types of Interviews n n n

structured semi-structured unstructured

Unit-IX D 453

Interview Preparation n n n

gathering background information on the interviewees and their context. drawing a list of topics/questions to be sent to your interviewees as a preparation for the interview. carrying out at least one practice interview with a colleague, if you have never done a research interview before.

Scheduling n n

you must communicate the interviewee the purpose of the interview and the likely duration, and decide on a date, time and place. leave enough time between interviews to allow writing up your notes.

Recording n

taking notes

n

audio recording

n

video recording

Conducting the Interview n n n n n n n n n n

introduce yourself and your research ask for permission to record the interview give the interviewee assurances about anonymity and confidentiality make some introductory conversation to put the interviewee at ease start with simple, factual questions about the interviewee's work environment use aids: photographs, ads, screenshots, websites use prompts, probes and checks try to be non-judgemental and keep a neutral tone in conclusion, invite the interviewee to talk about any points that were not addressed thank the interviewee and ask him/her if they agree to check your summary or transcription of the interview later on.

Transcribing n n n

plan to make notes immediately after the interview. transcribe the conversation from audio/video recordings; it can take up to 5 h to transcribe 1 h of interview, so plan carefully! send the script to the interviewee for a check.

Internet-based Interviews n

video link

n

VoIP

n

email

Advantages and Disadvantages of Interviews Advantages n good at dealing with topics in depth and in detail n they are flexible n the interviewees tend to prefer a conversation to a dry questionnaire

454 D Library and Information Science Specific Disadvantages n n n n

time consuming can be unreliable, misleading require good social skills not appropriate for making generalizations.

Questionnaires A questionnaire is a predefined set of questions, assembled in a pre-determined order. n they are frequently associated with surveys, but they are used in interviews as well; n they are handy when we are trying to collect information from large numbers of people; Questionnaires can be: n self-administered n researcher administered The question content and wording, together with the order of the questions, are extremely important. Adapting - or getting inspiration from - existing questionnaires might prove very useful. According to (Peterson, 2000), each question should be: n brief n relevant n unambiguous n specific n objective

Question Types n n

open questions (a blank space is left for respondents to fill) closed questions (a pre-defined range of answers is provided)

Format of Questions and Responses n n n n n

yes/no answers quantity questions agree/disagree with a statement degree of agreement/disagreement - Likert scale scale questions

Semantic Differential Scale n n

list questions rank order questions

Layout and Structure n n n

introduction (purpose of the research, sponsor, return address and date by which it should be returned) confidentiality matters instructions

Unit-IX D 455 n n n n n

logical order of questions demographic questions at the end clear layout adequate font Pretest and pilot

Validity and reliability Internet-delivered questionnaires: n via email n web-based

Observation n n n n

can be used within any research strategy; it can take various shapes and use different senses and/or equipment; covert research - the fact that they are observed is not known to the participants overt - the participants are informed about the observation taking place

Systematic Observation n n n n

the type of events to be observed, the frequency and duration are decided in advance; it usually involves counting or timing, so it leads to the generation of quantitative data; using an observation schedule from the literature might prove useful; multiple observers can work on the study, if they are properly trained and use a common observation schedule.

Participant Observation n

the researcher takes part in the situation under study, in order to experience life from the perspective of participants.

Types of Participation n n n n

complete observer complete participant participant-observer practitioner-researcher

DATA ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION Data is the elementary facts which constitute our knowledge according to their relation and our interest. Data is the term used to refer to the raw numbers (facts and figures) which are thrown out from the occurrence of any event – physical, social, economic, corporate, geographical, individual and all miscellaneous kinds of events that have the potential to throw out numbers and figures. In our daily life, we come across figures, statistics and statements of all sorts. These could be anything ranging form, India’s

456 D Library and Information Science Specific exports of various commodities to different countries, to the travel plans of any executive. In fact, rarely can we do without facts and figures. Figures, statistics, statements, etc. relating to any event are termed as data. Bills, receipts, vouchers, readings while conducting an experiment, production of trucks in India etc., are all examples of what constitute data. But data, as such, is of very little use unless it is organised. Bills and receipts are of little use unless they are organised in a proper form, such as journals, ledgers etc. Data, when organised in a form, from which we can make interpretations, is information. In fact, the very objective of any data is to assist us in obtaining the required information.

Acquisition and Interpretation of Data Haphazard data makes little sense and is of no use. Decision makers in an organisation rarely find enough time to go through entire details of any report - be it the daily production report or the sales forecast. Hence, what is required, is to effectively present the data in such a manner that they are able to draw upon the information which they require with the least of effort and time. Thus, effective organisation and presentation of data is of prime importance.

Data Interpretation The act of organising and interpreting data to get meaningful information is data interpretation. The interpretation of data is the process through which inferences are drawn about the data available for analysis. Decision-making is seldom done without any survey or research. Hence, interpretation and analysis of the data thus obtained is most important for the decisionmaking process. Data Interpretation vs. Problem Solving. Each of the problems in Problem Solving questions has a basic concept and there is a specific methodology available to tackle them. Data Interpretation requires only the concept of arithmetic and statistics. It majorly deals with the comparison of numbers and is not formulae-based. In Data Interpretation, culling out the requisite data is the first step.

Data Representation The numerical data pertaining to any situation can be presented in the form of : 1. Numerical data tables. It’s the easiest way of presenting data but it does not show trends effectively. 2. Line graphs. It is easy to spot trends in the given data, though it is difficult to read the actual values. 3. Bar charts. The data is shown in blocks and direct comparison of actual values is very easy. 4. Pie charts. Data that is expressed as percentages is best represented in pie charts. 5. Caselet form. It is the most difficult and raw form for data interpretation. 6. Geometrical diagrams. Knowledge of geometry, such as formulae for circumference, area of circle etc. helps.

Unit-IX D 457

Quantitative and Qualitative Data Data, which can be expressed in numbers, are quantitative data, while those which express virtue or quality in an observation, are known as qualitative data.

Numerical Data Table Any statistical data pertaining to any kind of situation can be generally represented in the form of a table. It is one of the easiest and the most accurate way of presenting data in a non-graphical manner. It correlates two things or measures at a time. The difficulty associated with this type of data representation is that it requires much closer reading as compared to other forms of data representation like bar graphs and pie charts and hence they are comparatively complicated and time consuming to interpret. The calculations which are done on the basis of numerical table to draw inferences are easy in terms of formulae but they are lengthy and take lots of time. The following examples will explain in detail the way of representing data in numerical table form and how various useful inferences can be drawn from these tables. Example 1. The financial statements of an individual company of a section of the industry are normally represented in the form of a table. The representation could be for a particular year or for a period of time. The following table represents such a data table. WORKING RESULTS OF ALL PUBLIC SECTOR AND FOREIGN BANKS FOR THE YEAR 1999-2000 (Figures in Rs. Crores) Particulars

Public Sector Banks

Foreign Banks

(a) Income (i + ii) ( i) Interest Income ( ii) Other Income

53665 46620 7045

6083 4969 1114

(b) Expenditure (i + ii + iii + iv) ( i) Interest expended ( ii) Provisions & Contingencies ( ii i) Wage Bill (iv) Other Operating expenses

54036 30961 7940 11136 3999

5335 3184 828 461 862

(c) Profit ( i) Operating Profit ( ii) Net Profit

7569 (–)371

1576 748

505845

47547

(d) Total Assets

The given table represents the financial information of two sectors for the year 19992000 for the Indian Banking System. This is actually a picture of the financial results for the year. One can calculate various financial ratios from the above. n The operating profit as a percentage of the Total Assets for the Foreign Banks and for the Public Sector Banks can be found. n The Return On Total Assets (ROTA) which is a financial ratio and which is defined as the Net Profit as a percentage of the Total Asset. ROTA in case of Foreign Banks is 1.57.

458 D Library and Information Science Specific It can be seen that the Public Sector Banks made Net Loss where as the foreign banks made Net Profit, also Wage bill has been less in case of the Foreign banks. n If the above data is given for successive years, comparison of various components of the data over the years can be made. Example 2. n

PRICES OF VARIOUS COMPONENTS AT VARIOUS VOLUMES IN RS./COMPONENT 1000 units

2000 units

3000 units

4000 units

Component 1

8

7

6

5

Component 2

10

10

10

10

Component 3

15

10

5

5

Component 4

9

8

7

6

The table highlights how prices vary with increasing volumes for each component. We can deduce following from the above table. n How many units of each component can we get for a given sum (try for Rs. 1000)? n How much will it cost to buy a given volume of the above components ? n If a product is composed of a combination of the above components, we can understand how many units of the product we can buy for a given sum of money. n For the above mentioned product, we can find out how much a given volume would cost. n If a trader was buying the above components and selling us the product, we can find out his profit margin if we know the selling price. Example 3. The following table shows the time table of a train. RAILWAY TIMETABLE - GITANJALI EXPRESS Cities Mumbai Igatpuri N a sik B husa va l Ako la Nagpur Durg Jamshedpur Kolk ata

Arrival times (hrs.)

Departure times (hrs).

Cumulative mileages (kms.)

11:00 14:50 17:10 22:40 00:05 01:00 04:15 06:25

09.00 11:02 14:55 17:12 22:45 00:15 01:02 04:28 –

0 80 281 391 730 800 845 995 1100

The above is also a type of data representation but is in the timetable form. However, very interesting information can be interpreted from the above table. One can obtain : n The average speed between the stations. The average speed of the train between the stations =

distance covered time taken in hrs.

Unit-IX D 459 e.g., the average speed of the train between Mumbai and Igatpuri 80 – 0 80 kms = approx. = 40 kms/hour approx. 11 : 02 – 09 : 00 2 hrs. n Similarly the average speed between the other stations, for parts of the journey as well as the complete journey can be calculated. n The relative distance between the stations and the relative travelling time. n The portion of waiting time in the total travel time Example 4. The data pertaining to the production of two wheelers in India is represented below :

=

PRODUCTION OF TWO-WHEELERS IN INDIA Years

Scooters

Motor Cycles

Mopeds

Total

1995-96 1996-97 1997-98 1998-99

642083 725735 766620 833802

302520 429037 430366 461955

449688 445694 406081 460398

1394291 1600466 1603067 1756155

1225895

809087

621035

2656017

1999-2000

The above table pertains to the data on the production of two-wheelers, year wise, from 1995-96 to 1999-2000. Further, the table also divides the production of two-wheelers by categories viz., Scooters, Motor Cycles and Mopeds. Thus it is possible to get a picture of the production of different types of two-wheelers in India over a span of five years. The above table can be subjected to the following interpretations: l Contribution of each type of two-wheeler towards the total, in a given year or, for that matter, successive years. e.g., the contribution of scooters in terms of the percentage of the total production in 1999-2000 was =

Production of Scooters × 100 Total Production of two wheelers in India

1225895 × 100 = 46.16% 2656017 Rate of growth in each type of two-wheeler, at the same time growth rate of the total sector over the successive years. e.g., growth of the Motorcycles in India from 1998-99 to 1999-2000

=

l

=

(Prodn. of Motorcycles in 1999-2000 – Prodn. of Motorcycles in 1998-99) ´ 100 (Production of Motorcycles in the year 1998-99)

809087 – 461955 × 100 = 75.14% 461955 l Given the installed capacity, one can deduce the capacity utilization. e.g., if the installed capacity of the two wheelers was 3000000 in the year 19992000

=

Capacity utilization =

2656017 × 100 = 88.53% 3000000

460 D Library and Information Science Specific l

The trends of growth over the years for each type of two-wheeler and total production of two-wheelers. It can be observed from the table that production of scooters has shown a continuously increasing trends from year 1995-96 to 1999-2000. Even the production of Motorcycles and total two-wheelers production show the same trend whereas production of Mopeds has shown decreasing trend from year 199596 to 1997-98 and then increasing trend from 1997-98 to 1999-2000.

Solved Examples Directions: For examples 1 to 5, refer to the following tables. TABLE X : USE OF PESTICIDES FOR PUBLIC HEALTH (IN TONNES) 1996

1997

1998

1999

2000

BHC DDT Ma lathion

5600 7000 500

6000 8000 700

6650 7176 1000

7030 7176 1000

12000 6000 1000

Total

13100

14700

14826

15206

19000

TABLE Y : USE OF PESTICIDES FOR AGRICULTURE (IN TONNES) 1996

1997

1998

1999

2000

BHC DDT Ma lathion Others

15300 2000 430 19242

18340 3970 750 19477

18500 2934 640 20173

17500 1294 875 16984

16640 2450 943 19855

Total

36972

42537

42247

36653

39888

Example 1. The trend followed by the use of pesticides in Agriculture can be best described as (A) Continuously increasing (B) Continuously decreasing (C) Fluctuating (D) None of these Solution. (C) After checking the figures of total pesticides in Agriculture, we see that it increased from 36972 in year 1996 to 42537 in year 1997 and then decreased in year 1998 and also in year 1999 and then again increased in year 2000. Hence, it shows fluctuating trend. Example 2. On an average, roughly what percent of the total pesticide use for Public Health was Malathion ? (A) 5.47% (B) 5.48% (C) 5.49% (D) 5.50% Solution. (A) Total pesticides used for Public Health in the 5 years = 13100 + 14700 + 14826 + 15206 + 19000 = 76832 tonnes Total Malathion used in the five years = 500 + 700 + 1000 + 1000 + 1000 = 4200 \ Average % =

4200 × 100 = 5.47% 76832

Unit-IX D 461 Example 3. The use of BHC, DDT and Malathion in Agriculture was ‘X’ percent of total pesticides used in Agriculture in 1998. Then ‘X’ was approximately (A) 46% (B) 47% (C) 48% (D) 50% Solution. (D) (42247 – 20173) × 100 = 52% (approx.) 42247 Example 4. Total BHC used in Public Health in the last 2 years as a percent of total BHC used in Public Health and Agriculture in the last 2 years was about : (A) 36% (B) 38% (C) 40% (D) 41% Solution. (A) Total BHC used in Public Health in 1999 & 2000 = 7030 + 12000 = 19030 Total BHC used in 1999 & 2000 = Sum of BHC used for Public Health and BHC used for Agriculture = 7030 + 12000 + 17500 + 16640 = 53170. 19030 ´ 100 = 36% approx. Then, required % = 53170 Example 5. The peak use of DDT for both Public Health and Agriculture together was in which year ? (A) 1996 (B) 1997 (C) 1998 (D) 1999

X=

Solution. (B) Use of DDT in 1996 = 7000 + 2000 = 9000 tonnes Use of DDT in 1997 = 8000 + 3970 = 11970 tonnes Use of DDT in 1998 = 7176 + 2934 = 10110 tonnes Use of DDT in 1999 = 7176 + 1294 = 8470 tonnes Use of DDT in 2000 = 6000 + 2450 = 8450 tonnes Hence the peak use was 11970 tonnes in the year 1997. Directions. For examples 6 to 7, refer to the following table : PROJECTED AVAILABILITY AND DEMAND FOR STEEL (FOR THE PERIOD 2004-2005 AND 2012-2013) (*000 tonnes) 2004-2005

2012-2013

Sr. No.

Category

Demand

Availability

Demand

Availability

1. 2. 3.

S ha pes F la ts Railway Material

6960 4360 400

5725 5020 550

9745 6300 450

9360 6600 560

Example 6. The what percentage growth is in the demand for Railway Material over the eight year period from 2004-2005 to 2012-2013 ? (A) 10.5% (B) 11.5% (C) 12.5% (D) 13.5%

462 D Library and Information Science Specific Solution. (C) Percentage growth in demand (Demand in 2012 - 2013) ± (Demand in 2004 - 2005) ´ 100 = Demand in 2004 - 2005 450 – 400 = × 100 = 12.5% 400 Example 7. The percentage change in shortfall of shapes over the eight year period from 2004-2005 to 2012-2013 is expected to be (A) 69% (B) 71% (C) 72% (D) 75% Solution. (A) Shortfall in shapes in 2004-2005 = (6960-5725) 1000 = 1235000 Shortfall in shapes in 2012-2013 = (9745-9360) 1000 = 385000 1235 – 385 \ Percentage decrease = × 100 = 68.83% º 69% 1235

Graphical Representation and Mapping of Data 1. Cartesian Graph or Line Graph The Cartesian or Line Graph indicates the variation of a parameter with respect to another. The parameters are calibrated on X and Y axes. For example, with the ‘year’ plotted on the X axis, variation of ‘imports’, ‘exports’, ‘shipments’ etc. as the other parameter can be plotted on the Y axis. Characteristics. The line graph simplifies the data interpretation, as it is a pictorial presentation of data and is therefore very useful for determining trends and rate of change. The slope of the line graph helps in comparing the magnitude of change between any two consecutive points on the graph. Steeper the slope, greater is the change in magnitude between the two consecutive points. Note : The slope of the graph indicates the absolute growth and not the percentage growth. Methods. 1. Simple Average Growth is found out by Simple Interest Methods. 2. Cumulative means the increase or growth by accumulation or successive addition of parts or elements. 3. Cumulative Average Growth Rate (CAGR) is different from simple average growth in the sense that, simple average growth is the growth between two points of measurement or time. 4. Cumulative Average Growth Rate is found by Compound Interest Method. Hence, increase in each period is accounted while calculating the increase in the next period. Illustrative Examples Example 1. On many occasions the data can be represented on a number of graphs which may be interrelated. The data regarding the transfer of resources from centre to states is indicated in the following three graphs.

Unit-IX D 463 A. TOTAL RECEIPTS OF CENTRE (RS. CRORE) 300000 250000 200000 150000 100000 50000 0 1996

1997

1998

1999

2000

2001

2002

B. TRANSFER OF RESOURCES FROM CENTRE TO STATE (RS. CRORE) 100000 90000 80000 70000 60000 50000 40000 30000 20000 10000 0 1996

1997

1998

1999

2000

2001

2002

C. RESOURCES FROM STATES TO CENTRE (RS. CRORE) 30000 25000 20000 15000 10000 5000 0 1996

1997

1998

1999

2000

2001

2002

In the illustration given, the data pertains to the flow of resources to Centre and States during the period 1996-2002. Additional data can be derived from the above graphs. e.g., The Net Transfers from Centre to State = Transfer of Resources from Centre to States – Resources from States to Centre. (In a particular year or period). The Net Transfers from Centre to State in 2001 = 80000-20000 = Rs. 60000 crores

464 D Library and Information Science Specific Solved Examples Directions. For examples 1 to 5, refer to the line graph given below : The given Cartesian Graph shows the Total Revenues v/s Period and Net Profit (Loss) v/s Period of Indian Airlines. 1992-931993-941994-951995-961996-971997-981998-991999-2000 2000-01 2001-02 Total Revenue 40.4

47.4

44. 89

56. 84

70. 05

70. 61

98. 05

111. 17

Net Profit/Loss 1. 85

2. 28

–4. 67

–4. 54

0. 01

1. 04

1. 01

7. 79

132. 85 152. 36 14. 32

20. 73

Revenue – Expenses = Net Profit (Loss)

180 160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 -20

1992-93 1993-94 1994-95 1995-96 1996-97 1997-98 1998-99

19992000

2000-01 2001-02

Example 1. If the growth rate, as was observed between the financial years 2000-01 and 2001-02, was maintained, then what is the total revenue for the year ending 2002-2003 would be approximately in Rs. crore: (A) 170 (B) 171.88 (C) 175 (D) 180 Solution. (B) 152.36 – 132.85 Percentage change in revenue in 2001-2002 was × 100 = 12.81% 152.36 (100 +12.81) Revenue for 2002-2003 would be 152.36 × = 171.88. 100 Example 2. In which year was the Net profit as a percentage of the Total Revenue highest? (A) 2001-2002 (B) 1999-2000 (C) 1997-1998 (D) 1998-1999 Solution. (A) Profit as a percentage of the revenue was over 10% in 2 years. i.e., 2000-2001 and 20012002 whereby the percentage are 10.78 and 13.61 respectively. Example 3. In how many years of total revenue and Net Profit (Loss) were similar for each year except between the financial years. (A) 1 year (B) 2 years (C) 3 years (D) 4 years Solution. (B) Compare the slopes (rise/decline) of the two graphs. For all the years they rise or fall simultaneously. Thus, we can say that between 1992-93 and 1993-94, and 1997-98 and 1998-99, Net Profit (Loss) remains same and Total Revenue increases.

Unit-IX D 465 Example 4. In how many years did Indian Airlines show a loss ? (A) 3 years (B) 2 years (C) 4 years (D) 1 year Solution. (B) The negative figures in the graph of Net Profit (Loss) v/s Period indicate the loss. The graph goes below zero in 1994-1995 and 1995-1996. Example 5. The highest percentage of growth in the total revenue was recorded between which financial years (A) 1998-99 (B) 1999-2000 (C) 1995-1996 (D) 1993-1994 Solution. (A) Highest percentage growth is indicated by the steepest rise in the graph of Revenue v/ s Period for successive years. In this the steeper rise is midway, 1997-1998 and continues upto part of 1998-1999.

2. Bar Charts In this method of data representation, the data is plotted on the X and Y axes as bars. This method of data interpretation is more or less similar to the one in Cartesian Graphs except that the data plotted on Cartesian Graphs is continuous whereas in Bar Chart the data is discrete. Also, a single point denoted in the line graph is represented by an entire bar in the bar chart. They have one advantage over line graphs that is they are much more accurate since they do not involve any interpolation or extrapolation between two points & data measurement. Presentation of data in this format makes comparative evaluation of parameters very easy.

Kinds of Bar Chart There are three main types of Bar Charts to represent data. Illustrations I, II and III illustrate three different types of Bar Charts. I. Stacked Bar Chart Illustrative Example. FOREIGN INVESTMENT FLOWS (US $ MN)

This compares the contribution of each value to the total across categories. In this, one can get the total of the categories as well as the individual figures. From this kind of representation, the same kind of conclusions can be arrived at as in Clustered Bar Chart.

466 D Library and Information Science Specific II. 100% Stacked Bar Illustrative Example. FOREIGN INVESTMENT FLOWS (US $ MN)

This compares values of different categories of data by the percentage contribution to the total. The percentages are given clearly, hence it is easy to derive the contribution of each category. In the figure, the amount of investment is clearly indicated. In the absence of this, given the total investment flow figures for the years, it would be easy to estimate the amount of foreign investment flows by each category. III. Clustered Bar Chart. Illustrative Example: FOREIGN INVESTMENT FLOWS (US $ MN)

This is the simplest type of Bar Chart. It compares values across categories. Thus, from the above figure, one can see that the values of the Portfolio Investment and Direct Investments have been compared for specific years. From this one can easily arrive at the following : l The increase or decrease in the Foreign Investment over the period with the rate of total increase or decrease (as well as for each category). l The highest and the lowest values of the foreign investment flows by category and year.

Unit-IX D 467 l l

Contribution of each category of investment in the total foreign investment flows for the years. The Foreign Investment trend (total & for each category) over the years.

Solved Examples Directions. For examples 1 to 5, refer the bar chart : INDIA’S FOREIGN TRADE IN RS. CRORE 16000 14000 12000 10000 Import

8000

Export

6000 4000 2000 0 1995-96

1996-97

1997-98

1998-99

1999-2000

Example 1. Approximately, what was the percentage change in trade gap (imports-exports) between 1998-99 and 1999-2000 ? (A) 17% (B) 18% (C) 19% (D) 20% Solution. (A) There has been a decrease in trade gap between 1998-99 and 1999-2000 Trade gap in 1998-99 = 13,500 – 7000 = 6,500 Trade gap in 1999-2000 = 14,000 – 8600 = 5400 6500 – 5400 × 100 6500 = 16.92% @ 17% Example 2. The percentage increase in trade gap between 1996-97 and 1997-98 was approximately (A) 173% (B) 174% (C) 175% (D) 176%

Percentage decrease =

Solution. (C) Trade gap in 1996-97 = 9000 – 6600 = 2400 Trade gap in 1997-98 = 13000 – 6400 = 6600 Percentage increase in trade gap =

Trade gap in 97-98 - Trade gap in 96-97 × 100 Trade gap in 96-97

=

6600 – 2400 4200 × 100 = × 100 = 175% 2400 2400

468 D Library and Information Science Specific Example 3. If oil imports constituted 20% of the total imports in 1997-98, then what percent of the trade gap was due to oil (assuming that no oil is exported) ? (A) 30% (B) 40% (C) 50% (D) 60% Solution. (B) 20 × 13000 = Rs. 2600 crore, Trade gap in 1997-98 = 6600 100 2600 Hence, percentage of trade gap due to oil = × 100 6600 = 39.39% @ 40% . Example 4. The percentage increase in imports between 1995-96 and 1999-2000 was (A) 25% (B) 50% (C) 75% (D) 100% Solution. (D) Imports in 1995-96 = 7000 crore rupees Imports in 1999-2000 = 14000 crore rupees Imports in 1999-2000 – Imports in 1995-96 Percentage increase in imports = ×100% Imports in 1995-96

Oil imports in 1997-98 =

14000 – 7000 ×100 7000 7000 = × 100 = 100% 7000 Alternately, imports have doubled in size from 1995-96 to 1999-2000. Hence there is a 100% increase.

Therefore, increase in imports =

Example 5. Which of the following is true ? 1. In all the years, exports are greater than imports. 2. Trade gap is continuously increasing 3. Trade gap is continuously decreasing. 4. The rate of increase of exports has always been greater than that of imports. 5. The trade gap first increases and then exhibits a decreasing trend. (A) only 5 (B) 1, 3 and 5 (C) 1, 2 and 3 (D) 2 and 3 Solution. (D) 1. In all years imports are greater than exports. 2. and 3. There is no definite pattern related to trade gap. 4. This is not true. 5. From careful observation only this statement is true.

3. Histogram A histogram is a plot that lets you discover, and show, the underlying frequency distribution (shape) of a set of continuous data. This allows the inspection of the data for its underlying distribution (e.g., normal distribution), outliers, skewness, etc. An example of a histogram, and the raw data it was constructed from, is shown below:

Unit-IX D 469

5.0

Frequency

4.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Age

36 67

25 45

38 22

46 48

55 91

68 46

72 52

55 61

36 58

38 55

Construct a Histogram from a Continuous Variable To construct a histogram from a continuous variable you first need to split the data into intervals, called bins. In the example above, age has been split into bins, with each bin representing a 10-year period starting at 20 years. Each bin contains the number of occurrences of scores in the data set that are contained within that bin. For the above data set, the frequencies in each bin have been tabulated along with the scores that contributed to the frequency in each bin (see below): Bin 20-30 30-40 40-50 50-60 60-70 70-80 80-90 90-100

Frequency 2 4 4 5 3 1 0 1

Scores Included in Bin 25,22 36,38,36,38 46,45,48,46 55,55,52,58,55 68,67,61 72 91

Notice that, unlike a bar chart, there are no "gaps" between the bars (although some bars might be "absent" reflecting no frequencies). This is because a histogram represents a continuous data set, and as such, there are no gaps in the data (although you will have to decide whether you round up or round down scores on the boundaries of bins). Choosing the Correct Bin Width There is no right or wrong answer as to how wide a bin should be, but there are rules of thumb. You need to make sure that the bins are not too small or too large. Consider the

470 D Library and Information Science Specific histogram we produced earlier (see above): the following histograms use the same data, but have either much smaller or larger bins, as shown below: 3.0

10.0

2.0

Frequency

Frequency

8.0

1.0

6.0 4.0 2.0

0

0 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Bins too small

20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Bins too large

We can see from the histogram on the left that the bin width is too small because it shows too much individual data and does not allow the underlying pattern (frequency distribution) of the data to be easily seen. At the other end of the scale is the diagram on the right, where the bins are too large, and again, we are unable to find the underlying trend in the data. In a histogram, it is the area of the bar that indicates the frequency of occurrences for each bin. This means that the height of the bar does not necessarily indicate how many occurrences of scores there were within each individual bin. It is the product of height multiplied by the width of the bin that indicates the frequency of occurrences within that bin. One of the reasons that the height of the bars is often incorrectly assessed as indicating frequency and not the area of the bar is due to the fact that a lot of histograms often have equally spaced bars (bins), and under these circumstances, the height of the bin does reflect the frequency.

4. Pie Charts In this method, the total quantity in question is distributed over a total angle of 360º, which is one complete circle or a pie. Unlike the bar charts where the variable can be plotted on two co-ordinates X and Y, here the data can be plotted with respect to only one parameter. Hence, its usage is restricted. It is best used when data pertaining to shares of various parts of a particular quantity are to be shown. This method is also useful for representing proportions or percentages of various elements with respect to the total quantity. Any angle which has its vertex at the centre of the circle is called a central angle. The shaded region shown in the pie-chart in Illustration (1) is called a sector. Illustrative Examples Example 1. The given pie charts give the shares of various companies manufacturing personal computers in the total worldwide market both value-wise and unit-wise at the same point of time. From

Unit-IX D 471 these two pie-charts, one can obtain information on the relative sizes of various companies both production-wise and sales-wise. Unit price of each computer can be arrived at and different market values of various brands can be determined. 2000 WORLD-WIDE SHIPMENT OF PERSONAL COMPUTERS $ 11.6 billion

7,068,000 units Commodore 15%

Commodore 8%

IBM 10% Sinclair 8%

Apple 11%

IBM 28%

Others 38%

Tandy 6%

Texas Instr. 12% Tandy 6%

Apple 14%

HP 6% Others 38%

The pie-charts find more usage as a supplementary form of data representation. They are very often used in combination with the other forms of data representation like line graphs and bar charts. Example 2. Let’s take a look at revenue scenario of the Internet Services Providers (ISP) market in the U.S. The following table gives an overview of the same for the year 1999. Market Segment

ISP Revenues in US $ million

Percentage of Total

Corporate

4945

36%

Small Business

2516

19%

Consumer

6091

45%

Total

13552

100%

Central Angle

36 × 360 = 129.6° 100 19 × 360 = 68.4° 100 45 × 360 = 162° 100 360°

The above data can be easily plotted on the pie chart as given below and can be subjected to interpretation.

Consumer 6091 (45%)

Corporate 4945 (36%) 162º

129.6° 68.4º

Small Business 2516 (19%)

472 D Library and Information Science Specific In the Pie chart above, it can be seen that the data can be plotted easily representing values as well as in terms of percentage of the total value. By visual observation itself, one can conclude that in the US market for the year 1999, the revenue from the Consumers market was the largest and constitutes 45% of the Total revenue generated. Similarly, revenue from the Small Business market formed the smallest of the revenue generated and was 19% of the Total. Since the data in a pie chart is spread over 360 degrees, the data can be subjected to geometrical calculations in a circle. The central angle for the components can be easily calculated since 100% of the quantity is spread over 360 degrees of the pie and thus 1% = 3.6 degrees. In the above example, the central angle for the sector of Consumer market will be equal to 3.6 × 45 = 162 degrees. An arc can be measured in degrees. The entire circle is 360 degrees and thus the sector area can be calculated with respect to the corresponding central angle of the sector.

Solved Examples Directions. For example 1 to 5. The following pie charts show the sales for Dunlop in the year 1999-2000. Sales By Location of Company (in million pounds) Others 22

EEC 420

Sales By Product (in million pounds) Engineering 95

Britain 618

Sports 96

Industrial 231 Tyres 897

AsiaAustralia 212

N. America 159

Africa 138

Consumers 204 Plantation 46

Example 1. Sales in other countries remaining the same, if sales in Britain and the EEC countries were to double, then what can be said about their market share ? (A) Increase 9.02% (B) Decrease 9.02% (C) Increase 8.02% (D) Decrease 8.02% Solution. (C) Definitely with the doubling of sales in Britain and EEC countries along with the sales in other countries remaining constant, their market share is going to increase. Total share = (420 + 618) × 2 + 22 + 212 + 159 + 138 = 2607 420 New EEC share = 2 × × 100 = 32.22% 2607 420 Old EEC share = ×100 = 26.77% , therefore increase in share = 5.45% 1569

Unit-IX D 473 2 ´ 618 ×100 = 47.41% 2607 618 Britain’s old share = × 100 = 39.39% 1569 Therefore increase in its share = 8.02% . Example 2. If in the next year the sales of sports goods were expected to double assuming that the total sales do not change, what would be the percentage share of sports goods in the total sales ? (A) 12.24% (B) 13.24% (C) 14.24% (D) 15.24%

Britain’s new share =

Solution. (A) Total sales = 1569 million Sports goods sales next year = 2 × 96 = 192 million 192 Therefore % share of sports goods sales = × 100 = 12.24% 1569 Example 3. If in the subsequent year, consumer products are to increase their share by 7 percent, then assuming that the total sales remain constant, the consumer sales would have to increase by how many million pounds ? (A) 102 (B) 105 (C) 107 (D) 110 Solution. (D) 204 × 100 = 13% 1569 Let increase in consumer products sales = X million. Therefore if the share of consumer products increases by 7% then. 204 + X × 100 = 20 Þ X = 109.80 @ 110 1569 Example 4. Sales in Britain accounted for approximately what percent of Dunlop’s total sales ? (A) 30% (B) 40% (C) 50% (D) 60%

Currently, share of consumer products =

Solution. (B) Percentage share of Britain in Dunlop’s total sales = =

Sales in Britain × 100 Total Sales

618 ×100 = 39.39% @ 40% 1569

Example 5. If 20% of the tyre sales were in the EEC countries, what was the value of the sales of other products in the EEC countries in millions of pounds ?

474 D Library and Information Science Specific (A) 240.6 million pounds (C) 225 million pounds

(B) 244.5 million pounds (D) 230 million pounds

Solution. (A) 20 × 897 = 179.4 million 100 EEC sales = 420 million = Tyres sales + sales of other products \ 420 million = 179.4 million + sales of other products Sales of other products in EEC = 420 – 179.4 = 240.6 million pounds.

If 20% of tyre sale =

STATISTICAL PACKAGES Spreadsheet A spreadsheet is an interactive computer application for organization, analysis and storage of data in tabular form. Spreadsheets developed as computerized analogs of paper accounting worksheets. The program operates on data entered in cells of a table. Each cell may contain either numeric or text data, or the results of formulas that automatically calculate and display a value based on the contents of other cells. A spreadsheet may also refer to one such electronic document. Spreadsheet users can adjust any stored value and observe the effects on calculated values. This makes the spreadsheet useful for “what-if” analysis since many cases can be rapidly investigated without manual recalculation. Modern spreadsheet software can have multiple interacting sheets, and can display data either as text and numerals, or in graphical form. Besides performing basic arithmetic and mathematical functions, modern spreadsheets provide built-in functions for common financial and statistical operations. Such calculations as net present value or standard deviation can be applied to tabular data with a pre-programmed function in a formula. Spreadsheet programs also provide conditional expressions, functions to convert between text and numbers, and functions that operate on strings of text. Spreadsheets have replaced paper-based systems throughout the business world. Although they were first developed for accounting or bookkeeping tasks, they now are used extensively in any context where tabular lists are built, sorted, and shared. LANPAR, available in 1969, was the first electronic spreadsheet on mainframe and time sharing computers. LANPAR was an acronym: LANguage for Programming Arrays at Random. VisiCalc was the first electronic spreadsheet on a microcomputer, and it helped turn the Apple II computer into a popular and widely used system. Lotus 1-2-3 was the leading spreadsheet when DOS was the dominant operating system. Excel now has the largest market share on the Windows and Macintosh platforms. A spreadsheet program is a standard feature of an office productivity suite; since the advent of web apps, office suites now also exist in web app form. Web based spreadsheets are a relatively new category.

Unit-IX D 475

SPSS Software package used for interactive, or batched, statistical analysis. Long produced by SPSS Inc., it was acquired by IBM in 2009. The current versions (2015) are named IBM SPSS Statistics. The software name originally stood for Statistical Package for the Social Sciences (SPSS), reflecting the original market, although the software is now popular in other fields as well, including the health sciences and marketing. SPSS is a widely used program for statistical analysis in social science. It is also used by market researchers, health researchers, survey companies, government, education researchers, marketing organizations, data miners, and others. The original SPSS manual (Nie, Bent & Hull, 1970) has been described as one of “sociology’s most influential books” for allowing ordinary researchers to do their own statistical analysis. In addition to statistical analysis, data management (case selection, file reshaping, creating derived data) and data documentation (a metadata dictionary is stored in the datafile) are features of the base software. Statistics included in the base software: n Descriptive statistics. Cross tabulation, Frequencies, Descriptives, Explore, Descriptive Ratio Statistics n Bivariate statistics. Means, t-test, ANOVA, Correlation (bivariate, partial, distances), Nonparametric tests, Bayesian n Prediction for numerical outcomes. Linear regression n Prediction for identifying groups. Factor analysis, cluster analysis (two-step, Kmeans, hierarchical), Discriminant n Geo spatial analysis, simulation n R extension (GUI), Python The many features of SPSS Statistics are accessible via pull-down menus or can be programmed with a proprietary 4GL command syntax language. Command syntax programming has the benefits of reproducible output, simplifying repetitive tasks, and handling complex data manipulations and analyses. Additionally, some complex applications can only be programmed in syntax and are not accessible through the menu structure. The pull-down menu interface also generates command syntax: this can be displayed in the output, although the default settings have to be changed to make the syntax visible to the user. They can also be pasted into a syntax file using the “paste” button present in each menu. Programs can be run interactively or unattended, using the supplied Production Job Facility. Additionally a “macro” language can be used to write command language subroutines. A Python programmability extension can access the information in the data dictionary and data and dynamically build command syntax programs. The Python programmability extension, introduced in SPSS 14, replaced the less functional SAX Basic “scripts” for most purposes, although SaxBasic remains available. In addition, the Python extension allows SPSS to run any of the statistics in the free software package R. From version 14 onwards, SPSS can be driven externally by a Python or a VB.NET program using supplied “plug-ins”. (From Version 20 onwards, these two scripting facilities, as well as many scripts, are included on the installation media and are normally installed by default.)

476 D Library and Information Science Specific SPSS Statistics places constraints on internal file structure, data types, data processing, and matching files, which together considerably simplify programming. SPSS datasets have a two-dimensional table structure, where the rows typically represent cases (such as individuals or households) and the columns represent measurements (such as age, sex, or household income). Only two data types are defined: numeric and text (or “string”). All data processing occurs sequentially case-by-case through the file (dataset). Files can be matched one-to-one and one-to-many, but not many-to-many. In addition to that casesby-variables structure and processing, there is a separate Matrix session where one can process data as matrices using matrix and linear algebra operations.

BibExcel BibExcel is designed to assist a user in analysing bibliographic data, or any data of a textual nature formatted in a similar manner. The idea is to generate data files that can be imported to Excel, or any program that takes tabbed data records, for further processing. This tool-box includes a number of tools, some of them visible in the window and others hide behind the menues. Don’t try to learn them all at once. Better to start with what you want to accomplish and then try out the tools for that purpose. Many of the tools can be used in combination to achieve the desired result.

R (Programming Language) Statistics R is a programming language and free software environment for statistical computing and graphics supported by the R Foundation for Statistical Computing. The R language is widely used amo ng stati sticians and data mi ners for developing statisti cal software and data analysis. Polls, data mining surveys, and studies of scholarly literature databases show substantial increases in popularity; as of July 2019, R ranks 20th in the TIOBE index, a measure of popularity of programming languages. A GNU package, source code for the R software environment is written primarily in C, Fortran and R itself, and is freely available under the GNU General Public License. Pre-compiled binary versions are provided for various operating systems. Although R has a command line interface, there are several graphical user interfaces, such as RStudio, an integrated development environment. R is an implementation of the S programming language combined with lexical scooping semantics, inspired by Scheme. S was created by John Chambers in 1976, while at Bell Labs. There are some important differences, but much of the code written for S runs unaltered. R was created by Ross Ihaka and Robert Gentleman at the University of Auckland, New Zealand, and is currently developed by the R Development Core Team (of which Chambers is a member). R is named partly after the first names of the first two R authors and partly as a play on the name of S. The project was conceived in 1992, with an initial version released in 1995 and a stable beta version in 2000.

Statistical Features R and its libraries implement a wide variety of statistical and graphical techniques, including linear and nonlinear modelling, classical statistical tests, time-series analysis, classification, clustering, and others. R is easily extensible through functions and extensions, and the R community is noted for its active contributions in terms of packages.

Unit-IX D 477 Many of R’s standard functions are written in R itself, which makes it easy for users to follow the algorithmic choices made. For computationally intensive tasks, C, C++, and Fortran code can be linked and called at run time. Advanced users can write C, C++, Java, .NET or Python code to manipulate R objects directly. R is highly extensible through the use of user-submitted packages for specific functions or specific areas of study. Due to its S heritage, R has stronger object-oriented programming facilities than most statistical computing languages. Extending R is also eased by its lexical scooping rules. Another strength of R is static graphics, which can produce publication-quality graphs, including mathematical symbols. Dynamic and interactive graphics are available through additional packages. R has Rd, its own LaTeX-like documentation format, which is used to supply comprehensive documentation, both online in a number of formats and in hard copy.

RESEARCH REPORT WRITING AND CITATION TOOLS Research Report Writing Mostly, research work is presented in a written form. The practical utility of research study depends heavily on the way it is presented to those who are expected to act on the basis of research findings. Research report is a written document containing key aspects of research project. Research report is a medium to communicate research work with relevant people. It is also a good source of preservation of research work for the future reference. Many times, research findings are not followed because of improper presentation. Preparation of research report is not an easy task. It is an art. It requires a good deal of knowledge, imagination, experience, and expertise. It demands a considerable time and money.

Definitions 1. In simple words. Research report is the systematic, articulate, and orderly presentation of research work in a written form. 2. We can also define the term as. Research report is a research document that contains basic aspects of the research project. 3. In the same way, we can say. Research report involves relevant information on the research work carried out. It may be in form of hand-written, typed, or computerized.

Report Format There is no one best format for all reports. Format depends on several relevant variables. One must employ a suitable format to create desirable impression with clarity. Report must be attractive. It should be written systematically and bound carefully. A report must use the format (often called structure) that best fit the needs and wants of its readers. Normally, following format is suggested as a basic outline, which has sufficient flexibly to meet the most situations.

478 D Library and Information Science Specific Research report is divided into three parts as: I. First Part (Formality Part) (i) Cover page (ii) Title page (iii) Certificate or statement (iv) Index (brief contents) (v) Table of contents (detailed index) (vi) Acknowledgement (vii) List of tables and figures used (viii) Preface/forwarding/introduction (ix) Summary report II. Main Report (Central Part of Report) (i) Statement of objectives (ii) Methodology and research design (iii) Types of data and its sources (iv) Sampling decisions (v) Data collection methods (vi) Data collection tools (vii) Fieldwork (viii) Analysis and interpretation (including tables, charts, figures, etc.) (ix) Findings (x) Limitations (xi) Conclusions and recommendations (xii) Any other relevant detail III. Appendix (Additional Details) (i) Copies of forms used (ii) Tables not included in findings (iii) A copy of questionnaire (iv) Detail of sampling and rate of response (v) Statement of expenses (vi) Bibliography – list of books, magazines, journals, and other reports (vii) Any other relevant information

Key Considerations/Factors While preparing research report, following issues must be considered: (i) Objectives (ii) Type of problem/subject (iii) Nature and type of research (iv) Audience or users of research work (v) Size of report

Unit-IX D 479 (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) (x) (xi) (xii)

Form of writing – handwritten, typed, or computerized. Time and cost Language Contents of report Order of contents Number of copies Format – type and size of paper; lengths width, and depth of report; and pattern of writing including paragraph, indent, numbering, font size and type, colouring, etc. (xiii) Binding (for soft, and, particularly, for hard copy) – type, quality of material, colour, etc., related issues.

Citation Tools A citation is a reference to a published or unpublished source. More precisely, a citation is an abbreviated alphanumeric expression embedded in the body of an intellectual work that denotes an entry in the bibliographic references section of the work for the purpose of acknowledging the relevance of the works of others to the topic of discussion at the spot where the citation appears. Generally the combination of both the in-body citation and the bibliographic entry constitutes what is commonly thought of as a citation (whereas bibliographic entries by themselves are not). References to single, machine-readable assertions in electronic scientific articles are known as nanopublications, a form of microattribution. Citations have several important purposes: to uphold intellectual honesty (or avoiding plagiarism), to attribute prior or unoriginal work and ideas to the correct sources, to allow the reader to determine independently whether the referenced material supports the author's argument in the claimed way, and to help the reader gauge the strength and validity of the material the author has used. As Roark and Emerson have argued, citations relate to the way authors perceive the substance of their work, their position in the academic system, and the moral equivalency of their place, substance, and words. Despite these attributes, many drawbacks and shortcoming of citation practices have been reported, including for example honorary citations, circumstantial citations, discriminatory citations, selective and arbitrary citations. The forms of citations generally subscribe to one of the generally accepted citations systems, such as the Oxford, Harvard, MLA, American Sociological Association (ASA), American Psychological Association (APA), and other citations systems, because their syntactic conventions are widely known and easily interpreted by readers. Each of these citation systems has its advantages and disadvantages. Editors often specify the citation system to use. Bibliographies, and other list-like compilations of references, are generally not considered citations because they do not fulfill the true spirit of the term: deliberate acknowledgement by other authors of the priority of one's ideas. n Wikipedia AutoReferencer, Microsoft word tool to convert embedded links to wikitext n OABOT, a tool that finds open-access links for citations n Citoid: A tool built into both Visual Editor and source editor that attempts to build a full citation based on a URL.

480 D Library and Information Science Specific n n n n

n

n n n n

n n n

Citer: Converts a DOI, ISBN, OCLC, or Google Books URL into a citation and shortened footnote. It also can generate citations for many news websites. reFill: Uses Citoid to replace all bare URLs on a Wikipedia page with filled {{cite web}} templates. DOI Wikipedia reference generator: Converts a digital object identifier (DOI) into {{cite journal}}. Wikipedia citation tool for Google Books: Converts a Google Books URL into {{cite book}}. Wikipedia has thousands of bare URL citations that could be completed using this tool. Biomedical citation maker by User: Badgettrg. Converts a Pubmed ID (PMID), DOI, PMCID , NCT to {{cite journal}}, {{cite pmid}}, or simple wikiformatting for all journals indexed by PubMed. Bookmarklet is available. Adds links to ACP Journal Club and Evidence-Based Medicine comments if present. Diberri Template builder: Converts URL, DrugBank ID, HGNC ID, PubMed ID, PubMed Central ID or PubChem ID to full citation. DTU Informatics PMID to Cite journal: Converts a PubMed ID (PMID) into a {{cite journal}}. Wikipedia-References-Creator: A Firefox addon for creation of references (output changeable). RefScript: A bookmarklet that generates references with a single click. Works with a few news websites (BBC, Daily Mail, Daily Mirror, Daily Telegraph, Huffington Post, Huffington Post Canada, New York Times, Washington Post, Boston Globe, Times of India, Financial Times, The Economist, Business Week, Ars Technica, TG Daily) and it can learn any other newspaper or website. WebRef: A bookmarklet automating the filling of the {{cite web}} template. MakeRef: A form for creating various {{cite}} templates. Citation Hunt: A tool for browsing snippets of Wikipedia articles that lack citations.

METRIC STUDIES IN LIS Bibliometrics Bibliometrics is the use of statistical methods to analyse books, articles, and other publications. Bibliometric methods are frequently used in the field of library and information science. The sub-field of bibliometrics which concerns itself with the analysis of scientific publications is called scientometrics. Citation analysis is a commonly used bibliometric method which is based on constructing the citation graph, a network or graph representation of the citations between documents. Many research fields use bibliometric methods to explore the impact of their field, the impact of a set of researchers, the impact of a particular paper, or to identify particularly impactful papers within a specific field of research. Bibliometrics also has a wide range of other applications, such as in descriptive linguistics, the development of thesauri, and evaluation of reader usage. The Research HUB published a full-length freely accessible Bibliometric Analysis video tutorial playlist.

Unit-IX D 481 Historically, bibliometric methods have been used to trace relationships amongst academic journal citations. Citation analysis, which involves examining an item’s referring documents, is used in searching for materials and analyzing their merit. Citation indices, such as Institute for Scientific Information’s Web of Science, allow users to search forward in time from a known article to more recent publications which cite the known item. Data from citation indexes can be analyzed to determine the popularity and impact of specific articles, authors, and publications. Using citation analysis to gauge the importance of one’s work, for example, is a significant part of the tenure review process. Information scientists also use citation analysis to quantitatively assess the core journal titles and watershed publications in particular disciplines; interrelationships between authors from different institutions and schools of thought; and related data about the sociology of academia. Some more pragmatic applications of this information includes the planning of retrospective bibliographies, “giving some indication both of the age of material used in a discipline, and of the extent to which more recent publications supersede the older ones”; indicating through high frequency of citation which documents should be archived; comparing the coverage of secondary services which can help publishers gauge their achievements and competition, and can aid librarians in evaluating “the effectiveness of their stock”. There are also some limitations to the value of citation data. They are often incomplete or biased; data has been largely collected by hand (which is expensive), though citation indexes can also be used; incorrect citing of sources occurs continually; thus, further investigation is required to truly understand the rationale behind citing to allow it to be confidently applied. Bibliometrics are now used in quantitative research assessment exercises of academic output which is starting to threaten practice based research. The UK government has considered using bibliometrics as a possible auxiliary tool in its Research Excellence Framework, a process which will assess the quality of the research output of UK universities and on the basis of the assessment results, allocate research funding. This has met with significant scepticism and, after a pilot study, looks unlikely to replace the current peer review process. Other bibliometrics applications include: creating thesauri; measuring term frequencies; as metrics in scientometric analysis, exploring grammatical and syntactical structures of texts; measuring usage by readers; quantifying value of online media of communication. The term bibliométrie was first used by Paul Otlet in 1934 and defined as “the measurement of all aspects related to the publication and reading of books and documents.” The anglicised version bibliometrics was first used by Alan Pritchard in a paper published in 1969, titled Statistical Bibliography or Bibliometrics? He defined the term as “the application of mathematics and statistical methods to books and other media of communication”. Citation analysis has a long history, the Science Citation Index began publication in 1961 and Derek J. de Solla Price discussed the citation graph describing the network of citations in his 1965 article “Networks of Scientific Papers”. However this was done initially manually until large scale electronic databases and associated computer algorithms were able to cope with the vast numbers of documents in most bibliometric collections. The first such algorithm for automated citation extraction and indexing was by CiteSeer.

482 D Library and Information Science Specific Google’s PageRank is based on the principle of citation analysis. Patent citation maps are also based upon citation analysis (in this case, the citation of one patent by another). However, one has to keep in mind that Humans have been publishing and citing since very early in history with individual works containing citations that date back as far as antiquity.

Scientometrics Scientometrics is the field of study which concerns itself with measuring and analysing scientific literature. Scientometrics is a sub-field of bibliometrics. Major research issues include the measurement of the impact of research papers and academic journals, the understanding of scientific citations, and the use of such measurements in policy and management contexts. In practice there is a significant overlap between scientometrics and other scientific fields such as information systems, information science, science of science policy, sociology of science, and metascience. Modern scientometrics is mostly based on the work of Derek J. de Solla Price and Eugene Garfield. The latter created the Science Citation Index and founded the Institute for Scientific Information which is heavily used for scientometric analysis. A dedicated academic journal, Scientometrics, was established in 1978. The industrialization of science increased the quantity of publications and research outcomes and the rise of the computers allowed effective analysis of this data. While the sociology of science focused on the behavior of scientists, scientometrics focused on the analysis of publications. Accordingly, scientometrics is also referred to as the scientific and empirical study of science and its outcomes. Later, around the turn of the century, evaluation and ranking of scientists and institutions came more into the spotlights. Based on bibliometric analysis of scientific publications and citations, the Academic Ranking of World Universities (“Shanghai ranking”) was first published in 2004 by the Shanghai Jiao Tong University. Impact factors became an important tool to choose between different journals and the rankings such as the Academic Ranking of World Universities and the Times Higher Education World University Rankings (THE-ranking) became a leading indicator for the status of universities. The h-index became an important indicator of the productivity and impact of the work of a scientist. However, alternative author-level indicators has been proposed (see for example). Around the same time, interest of governments in evaluating research for the purpose of assessing the impact of science funding increased. As the investments in scientific research were included as part of the U.S. American Recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (ARRA), a major economic stimulus package, programs like STAR METRICS were set up to assess if the positive impact on the economy would actually occur.

Webometrics The science of webometrics (also cybermetrics) tries to measure the World Wide Web to get knowledge about the number and types of hyperlinks, structure of the World Wide Web and usage patterns. According to Björneborn and Ingwersen (2004), the definition of webometrics is “the study of the quantitative aspects of the construction and use of information resources, structures and technologies on the Web drawing on bibliometric and informetric approaches.” The term webometrics was first coined by Almind and

Unit-IX D 483 Ingwersen (1997). A second definition of webometrics has also been introduced, “the study of web-based content with primarily quantitative methods for social science research goals using techniques that are not specific to one field of study” (Thelwall, 2009), which emphasizes the development of applied methods for use in the wider social sciences. The purpose of this alternative definition was to help publicize appropriate methods outside of the information science discipline rather than to replace the original definition within information science. One relatively straightforward measure is the “Web Impact Factor” (WIF) introduced by Ingwersen (1998). The WIF measure may be defined as the number of web pages in a web site receiving links from other web sites, divided by the number of web pages published in the site that are accessible to the crawler. However the use of WIF has been disregarded due to the mathematical artifacts derived from power law distributions of these variables. Other similar indicators using size of the institution instead of number of webpages have been proved more useful.

Altmetrics In scholarly and scientific publishing, altmetrics are non-traditional bibliometrics proposed as an alternative or complement to more traditional citation impact metrics, such as impact factor and h-index. The term altmetrics was proposed in 2010, as a generalization of article level metrics, and has its roots in the #altmetrics hashtag. Although altmetrics are often thought of as metrics about articles, they can be applied to people, journals, books, data sets, presentations, videos, source code repositories, web pages, etc. Altmetrics use public APIs across platforms to gather data with open scripts and algorithms. Altmetrics did not originally cover citation counts, but calculate scholar impact based on diverse online research output, such as social media, online news media, online reference managers and so on. It demonstrates both the impact and the detailed composition of the impact. Altmetrics could be applied to research filter, promotion and tenure dossiers, grant applications and for ranking newly-published articles in academic search engines.

IMPACT FACTORS n

n n n

The impact factor (IF) is a measure of the frequency with which the average article in a journal has been cited in a particular year. It is used to measure the importance or rank of a journal by calculating the times it’s articles are cited. How Impact Factor is Calculated? The calculation is based on a two-year period and involves dividing the number of times articles were cited by the number of articles that are citable. Calculation of 2010 IF of a journal: – A = the number of times articles published in 2008 and 2009 were cited by indexed journals during 2010. – B = the total number of “citable items” published in 2008 and 2009. – A/B = 2010 impact factor 

484 D Library and Information Science Specific

h-index The h-index is an author-level metric that attempts to measure both the productivity and citation impact of the publications of a scientist or scholar. The index is based on the set of the scientist’s most cited papers and the number of citations that they have received in other publications. The index can also be applied to the productivity and impact of a scholarly journal as well as a group of scientists, such as a department or university or country. The index was suggested in 2005 by Jorge E. Hirsch, a physicist at UC San Diego, as a tool for determining theoretical physicists’ relative quality and is sometimes called the Hirsch index or Hirsch number.

Citations

Definition and Purpose

More than h c itations Citations = papers = h

First h papers

Papers

h-index from a plot of decreasing citations for numbered papers. The h-index is defined as the maximum value of h such that the given author/journal has published h papers that have each been cited at least h times. The index is designed to improve upon simpler measures such as the total number of citations or publications. The index works properly only for comparing scientists working in the same field; citation conventions differ widely among different fields.

Calculation Formally, if f is the function that corresponds to the number of citations for each publication, we compute the h-index as follows. First we order the values of f from the largest to the lowest value. Then, we look for the last position in which f is greater than or equal to the position (we call h this position). For example, if we have a researcher with 5 publications A, B, C, D, and E with 10, 8, 5, 4, and 3 citations, respectively, the h-index is equal to 4 because the 4th publication has 4 citations and the 5th has only 3. In contrast, if the same publications have 25, 8, 5, 3, and 3 citations, then the index is 3 because the fourth paper has only 3 citations. f(A)=10, f(B)=8, f(C)=5, f(D)=4, f(E)=30’ ! h-index=4 f(A)=25, f(B)=8, f(C)=5, f(D)=3, f(E)=30’ ! h-index=3 If we have the function f ordered in decreasing order from the largest value to the lowest one, we can compute the h-index as follows: h-index (f) = {\displaystyle \max _{i}\min(f(i),i)}

Unit-IX D 485 The Hirsch index is analogous to the Eddington number, an earlier metric used for evaluating cyclists. The h-index serves as an alternative to more traditional journal impact factor metrics in the evaluation of the impact of the work of a particular researcher. Because only the most highly cited articles contribute to the h-index, its determination is a simpler process. Hirsch has demonstrated that h has high predictive value for whether a scientist has won honors like National Academy membership or the Nobel Prize. The hindex grows as citations accumulate and thus it depends on the “academic age” of a researcher.

g-index The g-index is an index for quantifying productivity in science, based on publication record (an author-level metric). It was suggested in 2006 by Leo Egghe. The index is calculated based on the distribution of citations received by a given researcher’s publications, such that given a set of articles ranked in decreasing order of the number of citations that they received, the g-index is the unique largest number such that the top g2 articles received together at least g citations. It can be equivalently defined as the largest number n of highly cited articles for which the average number of citations is at least n. This is in fact a rewriting of the definition. The g-index is an alternative for the older h-index, which does not average the numbers of citations. The h-index only requires a minimum of n citations for the least-cited article in the set and thus ignores the citation count of very highly cited papers. Roughly, the effect is that h is the number of papers of a quality threshold that rises as h rises; g allows citations from higher-cited papers to be used to bolster lower-cited papers in meeting this threshold. Therefore, in all cases g is at least h, and is in most cases higher. However, unlike the h-index, the g-index saturates whenever the average number of citations for all published papers exceeds the total number of published papers; the way it is defined, the g-index is not adapted to this situation. The g-index has been characterized in terms of three natural axioms by Woeginger (2008). The simplest of these three axioms states that by moving citations from weaker articles to stronger articles, one’s research index should not decrease. Like the h-index, the g-index is a natural number and thus lacks in discriminatory power. Therefore, Tol (2008) proposed a rational generalisation.

i10-INDEX I10-Index is a sole metrics design and develop by Google Scholar and used in Google’s My Citations feature. It can be defined as follows: i10-Index = The number of publications with at least 10 citations.

TRENDS IN LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE RESEARCH Research is a prime developmental activity of any discipline and profession including the profession of librarianship. LIS research helps in identifying issues that affect the growth and development of librarianship as well as that of the LIS education. The genesis and development of LIS research in India may be traced back to the year 1924 when Dr. S.R.

486 D Library and Information Science Specific Ranganathan joined this profession. His seminal contribution to various facets of LIS enriched the discipline and elevated its status from art to a discipline in social sciences. Library Science which was started as a school now grown up to a full fledged department renamed and called as Library and Information Science. In due course of time many universities in India including open universities have introduced M.Phil and Ph.D. programmes in LIS. Now LIS has become a full fledged discipline like other social science’s discipline and enriching itself day by day. Research initiatives in Library and Information Science are also increasing day by day. Research in Library and Information enables to know the needs and expectations of the actual and potential users. The extent of user’s satisfaction or dissatisfaction could only be known through research. The most important advantage of LIS research is to improve the status of LIS professionals. In India LIS has changed its traditional mode of providing services to the users into a new scenario. In LIS, as other fields requires constant innovation and research so that new techniques can be discovered and the same can be applied for uplifting its professionals. Major changes in the trends related to LIS research commence during 1980 to 1990 where there was a continuous shift of research related to various areas from traditional based systems to machine operated systems. In LIS traditional manual techniques started declining and new ICT enabled techniques started growing for serving users. LIS in global scenario has reached up to a superior level and the professionals of LIS have started working towards the practical aspects of modern libraries.

LIS Research Dr. D.B. Krishna Rao was the first research scholar to obtain Ph.D. degree in LIS from the University of Delhi in 1957 under the able guidance of Dr. S.R. Ranganathan. For nearly two decades no other university in the country seems to have either introduced Ph.D. programme or conferred a Ph.D. Degree. It was Punjab University, Chandigarh which turned out the second Ph.D. in 1977. He was Dr. Pandey S.K. Sharma who was awarded Ph.D. under the supervision of Dr. J.S. Sharma. Trends of Choosing Research Area in Library and Information Science During 2009 to 2012.

Academic Libraries “Libraries are the heart of any Academic Institution” rightly quoted by Dr. S. Radhakrishnan, former President of India. Academic library serve the informational needs of the students and teachers of its parent institution. Seven theses have been found related to the working conditions of University Libraries. Some of the notable areas are, Analysis of web based library services in University Libraries in India; Growth and Development of Journals in economics with special reference to E- Journals: A study of the Libraries of central universities in Delhi; A study of organizational structure of University Library in Rajasthan; Development of University libraries in Gujarat state: A study; Engineering College Library System: A futuristic study of College Libraries under the jurisdiction of University of Pune; Development and management of Engineering College Libraries in Western Vidharba region: An analytical study; An evaluative study of information sources and services in University Libraries of Punjab and An evaluative study of transit from print to e-print journals and their effect on Library services in University Libraries of Western U.P. Most of the topics found under this area are related to the analysis of university libraries in terms of applicability of Latest advancement in

Unit-IX D 487 the field of Library and Information Science because there are continuous demands from the students and faculty members to improve academic library services. Research in this area is also necessary to formulate certain ways to cope with the current demands of users in the age of information explosion. 1. Bibliometrics. Under this area four topics have been found and these are, Contribution of Parsis to Gujarati Literature: Bibliography and Bibliometrics Study; a web retrieval model for Bibliographic information based on morphological analysis of Marathi; Literature from Vidharbha in Marathi (1975-1999): a survey and bibliometric study. The studies are basically regarding the bibliometric analysis of literature of particular area. 2. Citation Analysis. Two M.Phil. Dissertations, Citation Analysis of selected EJournals in Library and Information Science: a comparative study and Citation Analysis of Law Journals are found related to citation analysis. These studies are related to citation analysis of journals of Library and Information Science. 3. Computer Applications in Libraries. Two M.Phil. Dissertations, Citation Analysis of selected E- Journals in Library and Information Science: a comparative study and Citation Analysis of Law Journals are found related to citation analysis. These studies are related to citation analysis of journals of Library and Information Science. 4. Computer Applications in Libraries. Computer machines are very important devices to control any system. In libraries the increasing use of computer systems in providing automated and networking services inspired library professionals to research into those aspects which are necessary to provide quality services to the users. In this area, a lot research is already done or is going on in many Universities like Nagpur University, Pune University and Delhi University. Some of the topics which have been found under this area are, A Study of Multimedia resources in selected libraries of Delhi: a study; Computerization of Library catalogue and OPAC services of Institutions of Higher Learning in Maharashtra; Application of Library Software’s in Technical Universities of UP with special reference to Roorkee and Pant Nagar: A critical study; A study of Library Software used in Health Science College Libraries in Maharashtra and Free/ Open verses commercial software: A study of some selected library management software; Problem and prospects of Library Automation in select central university libraries in Delhi: a comparative study. Research in this area is not only related to the computerization of Library Activities with the help of software, but related to developing an Information retrieval system for easy and effective Information access. Research in this area shows that computerized information retrieval system is very important for executing Library activities. Thus research in this area is required to discover new ways to make computerized library activities more user friendly to operate and execute. 5. Cost Benefit Analysis. Cost benefit analysis is very important tool to analyze the usability of any system in terms of the cost involved. One thesis entitled ‘Costing and Cost benefit Analysis of Academic Libraries’ is found and it indicates that cost benefit analysis is one of the important area for management of Libraries but this area is not being taken for research by LIS research scholars very frequently. 6. Digital Library. Digital Libraries use latest techniques to render library services in today’s Information and Communication Technology environment. Much research is going on relating to this area but few research scholars are studying

488 D Library and Information Science Specific

7.

8.

9.

10.

about the technology involved in creating digital libraries. The main focus of research under this area is only on finding out the initiatives of digitization in libraries and the related aspects. Three titles have been found related to this area such as, Digitization and Open Access initiatives: A study of special libraries in national capital region; Trends and development of Digital Libraries in scientific and research institutions in Delhi: a comparative study and Design and development of digital database of homeopathic information resources in India: a plan proposal. Information Handling and Management. Libraries preserve knowledge for the knowledge seekers and it is very important to research about new ways in the field of Information Handling and Management. Some of the major research topics in this area are, Evaluation of Library Services of engineering Colleges in Kota region; Information Services and their efficacy of Science Libraries in Pune Metropolitan area: A Critical study; Provision of Library and Information Services for the Visually Impaired in India: A study; Information management in Akashwani and Doordarshan Kendras of Madhya Pradesh: Bhopal, Indore, Gwaliar and Jabalpur; An Assessment of the services of college Libraries in the context of changing information scenario with special reference to Mizoram; Status of information services and health awareness among the rural women of Sagar district: A study; Information Resource Management of Engineering College Libraries in West Bengal, A study of data retrieval techniques of online databases available in libraries of central universities in India and Quality Management Practices in University Libraries of Uttar Pradesh: A study. These studies indicate that research is very important in this area to find better ways of handling of whatever the library and Information centers possess, so that it will be easy for the users to use libraries. Information Sources and Services. Information is scanned, stored and presented in such a way that it will be easy for a user to locate and use it. Two topics have been found related to this area entitled “Utilisation of information sources in drugs and pharmaceutical laboratories and their linkages with industries in Karnataka: Designing information system” and Marketing of information products and services in selected libraries of Chandigarh region: a study. Both the researches are related to information services, marketing and utilization in depth. This area requires more research to find new information sources and services. Information and Communication Technology (ICT). ICT has influenced each and every sphere of human activity. LIS field is also greatly influenced by it. Two topics have been found relating to ICT applications in Libraries. These are, “Impact of Information technology on the services provided by the Library and Information Centers attached to the Council of Scientific and Industrial Research Laboratories to support research and development” and “Trend and Impact of Modern Communication Technology in Biomedical Information Centers and Libraries in Western India”. This area is important to know ICT effect on libraries as well as to know about new prospect for handling library activities using ICT. Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Issues. One topic has been found relating to this area entitled “Legal Aspects of Information with special reference to India” which reflects the IPR issues in digital libraries. Research is required in this area to know about the Intellectual Property Rights Issues related to digital libraries and ways to manage them.

Unit-IX D 489 11. Internet Applications in Library. Internet is incomparable and helpful at any time. Internet is a virtual life or it is a life beyond real life. In libraries of the today’s world internet is playing its part very well to expand the service area of libraries. A lot of research is going on relating to the applications of Internet in today’s library activities such as, Internet and its use by the faculty members of the University of Delhi: a study; Evaluation of web- based online public access catalogues of Indian Institutes of Technology Libraries in India: a study; A study of Web Interface in Library management software system: a study; Design and development of webenabled online directory of Library and information Science teachers in India. More research in this area is required to assess internet applications to Libraries. 12. Open Access and E-Journals. Open access and E- journals have become important topics for research in almost every University. Some of the topics covered under this area are, Open sources movement in India with special reference to digital library software: a study; Use of Electronic Journals in Agriculture Libraries by the Agricultural Scientists in Delhi; Electronic Journals: a study of UGC Infonet EJournals Consortium with special reference to University Libraries in Delhi: a study; Use of E- Journals by users of ICMR labs in Delhi; Use of E- Journals in the field of chemistry by faculty members and research scholars in select university libraries in Delhi: a study; Use of resources in the field of geography by the users in select university libraries in Delhi; Electronic resources: A survey of current practices in university libraries in Delhi and Electronic resources in Physics in selected libraries in Delhi. Open Access resources are becoming popular because of their unrestricted access. Research in this area is important to find better service conditions for users. 13. Performance Appraisal. Performance Appraisal plays a very important part to assess working capabilities of employees of any organization. Three topics have been found which are related to this area such as, Skill development among LIS Professionals in Electronic Environment: A study of selected special Libraries in Delhi; Job environment and life style of Library professional of Orissa: a socio economic study and a comparative study of performance measurement of R&D and special Libraries. Research in this area is important to ensure better service conditions for library professionals so that they may give maximum output from their routine work. 14. Public Libraries. Public libraries play a very important role in dissemination information to the people of community. It gives free information services for the lifelong learning of its patrons. In this area some research has been done so far. Notable topics are, Information management in Public Libraries of Tehran: a study in the changing environment and the role of Village Libraries in development: A case study of Mizoram North Eastern Hill University, Shillong. It is found that a few researchers have taken this area for research and more research is required in this field. 15. Thesaurus. Two topics have been found out of which first one is regarding creation of Bilingual Thesaurus of LIS: A pragmatic and thematic approach and the other is ‘Thesaurus of LIS in Gujarati’. It indicates that there is a slow speed for taking thesaurus as a theme of Ph.D. research. 16. User Studies. Users are the most important component of a Library system because without users there is of no use of collecting, processing and managing informational

490 D Library and Information Science Specific content. Many topics have been found which are related to user studies or its related area. It has become a prominent area to work and pursue a Ph.D. Main topics are Reading Habits among Science college teachers in Vidarbha region; Information Seeking behavior of researchers in Bio Sciences of the University of Chhattisgarh; Information seeking behaviour and reading habits of high court lawyers of Madhya Pradesh; Information needs and Information seeking behaviour of professionals in medical field: A case study of Jammu and Kashmir State, Information seeking behaviour and reading habit of secondary student in changing academic environment: a case study on Saharanpur district and A study of Information needs and information seeking behaviour of vertenary scientists in University and Research Institutes of Haryana, Uttaranchal and Uttar Pradesh; Information seeking behaviour of faculty members and research scholars with reference to Punjabi Literature: An analytical study and Information seeking behaviour of managers working in financial institutions in India: A study. This area has been in trend for PhD research. 17. University Grants Commission’s Role in Promoting Libraries in India. One topic has been found regarding relating to this area and it is “The role of University Grants Commission in the development of the University Libraries of the Gujarat State: A study”. A few researchers are taking University Grants Commission’s role in promoting libraries as a topic for their study.

U N I T

X

SYLLABUS v v v v v v v v v v

Academic Library and Information System. Public Library and Information System. Special Library and Information System. Health Science Library and Information System. Corporate Library and Information System. Agricultural Library and Information System. Engineering and Technological Library and Information System. Archive, Museums and Oriental Libraries. Community Information System. Information Services and System for Persons with Disability, Children and Women.

(491)

492 D Library and Information Science Specific

ACADEMIC LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SYSTEM An academic library is a library that is attached to a higher education institution and serves two complementary purposes: to support the curriculum, and to support the research of the university faculty and students. It is unknown how many academic libraries there are worldwide. An academic and research portal maintained by UNESCO links to 3,785 libraries. According to the National Center for Education Statistics, there are an estimated 3,700 academic libraries in the United States. In the past, the material for class readings, intended to supplement lectures as prescribed by the instructor, has been called reserves. In the period before electronic resources became available, the reserves were supplied as actual books or as photocopies of appropriate journal articles. Modern academic libraries generally also provide access to electronic resources. Academic libraries must determine a focus for collection development since comprehensive collections are not feasible. Librarians do this by identifying the needs of the faculty and student body, as well as the mission and academic programs of the college or university. When there are particular areas of specialization in academic libraries, these are often referred to as niche collections. These collections are often the basis of a special collection department and may include original papers, artwork, and artifacts written or created by a single author or about a specific subject. There is a great deal of variation among academic libraries based on their size, resources, collections, and services. The Harvard University Library is considered to be the largest strict academic library in the world, although the Danish Royal Library-a combined national and academic library-has a larger collection. Another notable example is the University of the South Pacific which has academic libraries distributed throughout its twelve member countries. The University of California operates the largest academic library system in the world, it manages more than 34 million items in 100 libraries on ten campuses.

PUBLIC LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SYSTEM In library and information science research, information can be seen as a consumable product that can only be consumed together with certain information delivery systems and/or services. The satisfaction of library users is a function of the quality of information product(s) received, the quality of information system and library services provided to access the information product. Therefore, satisfaction is a function of three main sourcesquality of the information product, the information system and the services that make the information product available. These three levels of measure of satisfaction are defined by the information resources, facilities and services in this study. These sources of satisfaction, when properly harnessed may contribute to users' overall satisfaction. The accuracy, completeness, precision, and relevance of the information materials obtained from public library by a user are measures of the product performance. The public library is established to provide materials, which communicate experience and ideas from one person to another and make them easily and freely available to all

Unit-X D 493 people. The public library is a local centre of information that makes all kinds of knowledge and information readily available to its users. It is established, supported and funded by the community, either through local, regional or national government or through some other form of community organizations. It provides access to knowledge, information and works of imagination through a range of resources and services. It is equally available to all members of the community regardless of race, nationality, age, gender, religion, language, disability, employment status and educational attainment (Aboyade, 1984). People in all works of life use the public library resources, facilities and services. These users include pupils, students, teachers, scholars, scientists, business executives, government officials and even dropouts. Large numbers of people also turn to public libraries to satisfy their desire for knowledge or to obtain materials for some kind of leisure-time activities. A library may meet user's information needs by acquiring, organising and making available relevant information resources backed by appropriate facilities and delivered by means best known to them, which could be manual or through Information and Communication Technologies (ICTs). For any public library to perform well and meet the needs of the users on this modern time, it is necessary for the public library to embrace the use of information and communication technology. The role of ICT in the effective utilization of libraries has been stressed in literature, particularly in academic libraries. In a survey conducted by Ojo and Akande (2005), it was gathered that students use internet sources and e-mail more than other sources. Other electronic information resources used by students in the order of importance include CD-ROM, e-Journal, etc. A lot of academic information can be received using electronic resources both inside and outside the library. This may be the reason why they are more popular compared to other resources. However, lack of computer and IT skills, time consuming, limited access to computer terminal and too much information retrieval, using electronic resources, often detracts from doing work (Ojo & Akande, 2005). These challenges among users may deter them from using electronic information sources. To this Omekwu (2001) stated that the success of online searching depends on the ability of the user or the information scientist to perform the search in the best possible way. However, the performance of libraries has been hindered by: (i) Lack of infrastructure. (ii) Lack of adequate finance. Danuta (1996) asserted that finance is a major resource for organizational effectiveness and without it nothing meaningful will be achieved. It should be borne in mind right from the onset that computerization of library operations like acquisition and circulation control is an expensive venture, and a time consuming process. Also, Ikem and Ajala (2004) noted that the problem of funding is the major constraint of ICT application in libraries. According to them, the problem of funding is more than just acquiring the hard and software but updating and maintenance are very crucial in order to sustain it. (iii) Unavailability of local communication experts and computer communicating internally. Testing and installation of gadgets in a computer-based system, skilled and experienced personnel are needed on a permanent basis who can convert the existing manual bibliographic data into machine readable form. (iv) Installation and maintenance involve foreign currency limitations, bad telephone lines, and reluctance of telecommunication officers to license moderns. Moreover networks have their inherent problems which sometimes affect the decision of individual and organizations.

494 D Library and Information Science Specific Public library exits to satisfy users. In this context, users' satisfaction refers to how users judge the services of public libraries. Indeed, it refers to whether users of public libraries get the desired information resources, facilities and services expected to be provided by the public libraries. Hence, in recent times, evaluating users' satisfaction with the information resources, facilities and services of public libraries has become a major concern and an integral part of library and information science practitioners (Ogunsola, 2004). This is because the ultimate aim of all libraries as a service oriented organization is to satisfy the needs of its clients. Thus, users' satisfaction with the information resources, facilities and services provided by libraries whether public or academic has become the melting pot of the present day librarianship and information science (Saliu, 2002). In this regard, the International Federation of Library Association (IFLA) set the minimum standards for information resources, facilities and services to be provided by public libraries (IFLA, 2001). The information resources include fiction books, non-fiction books, textbooks, newspaper/magazines, pictures and posters, records and tapes, audio and video, toys, CD-ROM and Braille materials. Facilities to be provided include reading tables adequate enough for users, sitting chairs, book shelves, library space, fans, lighting, ventilation, flooring, restaurant, location of exit point, notice board/bulletin, photocopiers, vehicle parking space, computers, carrels, periodical racks, circulation desks and other facilities that would make users comfortable for reading (IFLA, 2001). While the services include community information services, recreational activities, reference services, storytelling, reading competition, career information, customer care, adult literacy education, mobile library services, and services to prisoners, online internet search, among others (IFLA, 2001). While these information resources, facilities and services are important in the public library services, the extent to which they satisfy users' information needs is fundamentally more important. This is because the ultimate goal of public libraries is to bring about higher users' satisfaction. Thus, it becomes pertinent to determine the extent to which users are satisfied with the information resources, facilities and services of public libraries. Public libraries generally serve a wide range of users, which include adult males and females, young adults, children, the visually impaired and other groups of people in the communities where they are located. Due to this fact, public libraries have vital roles to play in information dissemination at the grassroots to meet the information needs of each of these groups. The importance of public library in our society today is being underscored by a number of convergent trends which include, increase in school enrolment at the primary, secondary and tertiary levels. Thus, public libraries must be proactive, vibrant and abreast of the latest developments in information dissemination to maintain relevance and keep up with the multifarious needs and expectations of library users. It is therefore important that the public library should be able to provide the right materials to meet the information needs of users.

SPECIAL LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SYSTEM Special Library Special Library: The libraries that are run by private businesses and public organizations, including hospitals, museums, research laboratories, law firms, and many government

Unit-X D 495 departments and agencies, fall into this category. Branches of a large academic or research libraries dealing with particular subjects are also usually called "special libraries": they are generally associated with one or more academic departments.

Definition The special library is concerned with the literature of a particular subject or group of subjects. According to R. Astall, "special libraries serve a specialist clientele, located within a single establishment or group, and all engaged in working towards one common purpose". The Association of Special Libraries and Information Bureau (ASLIB) defined special library as "a department/ faculty responsible for the acquisition, indexing, and distribution (dissemination) of recorded knowledge directly concerned with the work of a specialized organization or a special group of users". In simple, a special library exists as a service unit within an organization having nonlibrary objectives. Special libraries may be designated in different ways such as scientific library, technical library, etc. It may also be designated by subject as agriculture library, medical library, etc. in relation to its parent institution as research organization, government agency and similar others.

Objectives The objectives of the special library in general are determined by those of the parent organizations which established it. Mainly it is "putting knowledge to work" and it exists to serve its parent organization. Therefore the aim of a special library is to further the interests of its parent body by means of the following(i) Provides information service, which enable the members of the organization to keep track of the significant developments in their field of interest; (ii) The librarian searches literature exhaustively and brings it to the notice of the organization; (iii) Provides information pin pointedly, exhaustively and promptly, thereby saving time of the users; (iv) Provides inspiration and stimulation to users by means of balanced collections and fine services.

Collections Collections of the special libraries are developed to support their information services, both current and retrospective. It contains collections of unique materials to support the needs of advanced and highly specialized scholarship including internally generated information and information available from sources outside the parent organization. These collections may include rare manuscripts, pamphlets and books, scientific documents, important printings of literary works, regional histories, original musical scores, journals, technical and research reports, translations, dissertations, patents, abstracts, directories, or other distinctive scholarly resources.

Services As the collection of special libraries may contain many rare and valuable materials, their use is typically confined to the library buildings. It also may or may not be accessible to some identified part of the general public. Special libraries also often publish scholarly

496 D Library and Information Science Specific materials in their collections, sponsored lectures, colloquia, and arrange exhibitions of their most important holdings. Information service is an integral part of the special libraries. The nature and extent of information services offered by the individual special libraries varies according to the need of its primary users and according to its own resources in staff and collections. At the minimal level of information service it disseminates information and materials; answers reference questions, directs users to appropriate sources, and deals with such simple current awareness services as periodical routing. At the intermediate level, it offers literature searches, prepares bibliographies, selects and transmits research materials and provides current awareness services such as acquisition bulletins. At the maximums level it offers evaluative and comprehensive literature searches and more complex current awareness services such as Selective Dissemination of Information (SDI) services. Many institutions make a distinction between circulating libraries (where materials are expected and intended to be loaned to patrons, institutions, or other libraries) and collecting libraries (where the materials are selected on a basis of their nature or subject matter). Many modern libraries are a mixture of both, as they contain a general collection for circulation, and a reference collection which is often more specialized, as well as restricted to the library premises. In addition to providing materials, libraries also provide the services of librarians who are experts at finding and organizing information and at interpreting information needs.

Health Science Library and Information System A health or medical library is designed to assist physicians, health professionals, students, patients, consumers, medical researchers, and information specialists in finding health and scientific information to improve, update, assess, or evaluate health care. Medical libraries are typically found in hospitals, medical schools, private industry, and in medical or health associations. A typical health or medical library has access to MEDLINE, a range of electronic resources, print and digital journal collections, and print reference books. The influence of open access (OA) and free searching via Google and PubMed has a major impact on the way medical libraries operate. The United States National Library of Medicine (NLM) is the largest biomedical library in the world, and collects and provides access to some of the best health information in the world (due to its linkage to the National Institutes of Health). The NLM maintains numerous medical and genomic databases, searchable via its Entrez search system, including MEDLINE (PubMed) and OMIM (a genetic traits database). The largest medical library in Europe is the German National Library of Medicine (ZB MED), which also has collections in the fields of nutrition, agriculture, and environmental science. ZB MED operates as the official European supplier of full texts in response to searches conducted in the NLM's bibliographic databases such as PubMed, and also operates its own search portals.

Accreditation To become accredited, every American and Canadian college of medicine, nursing, dentistry, pharmacy, veterinary medicine, or public health is required to have a health or medical library appropriate to the needs of the school, as specified by an accrediting body, such as the Liaison Committee on Medical Education (LCME)'s standards. These

Unit-X D 497 accreditation standards include having qualified library staff on hand to answer reference questions, and provide training in using electronic resources. Some academic medical libraries are located in the same building as the general undergraduate library but most are located near or in the medical college or faculty.

Trends In support of open access to the journal literature, the U.S. NLM established an online library of digital journal articles, PubMed Central (PMC), which will soon be supplemented by a UK version. NLM works with the National Network of Libraries of Medicine (NN/LM) to provide regional medical library support in the United States, while its consumer health information service MEDLINEplus offers free access to health information, images, and interactive tutorials. Many countries like Australia, Canada, and the United Kingdom have well-developed medical libraries, though nothing quite as evolved as the U.S. NLM.

Medical Librarians Medical librarians are skilled professionals who assist with resources and research in the medical professions. The focus of the medical librarian is to emphasize the use of evidence based research and practice. This can be for both medical research or medical practice. As well the medical librarian is expected be a resource for assisting with publishing and presentation of research. Medical librarians use web based resources to conduct research and help generate evidence based approaches to healthcare. Organizations such as the MLA set standards for what a medical librarian should follow in practice.

Associations The Medical Library Association (MLA) is a Chicago-based advocate for library professionals and health sciences libraries - primarily in the United States. MLA maintains an online list of ALA-accredited library school programs for those who would like to pursue a master's degree in library and information studies in the US and Canada (MLIS). It furthermore administers the U.S credentialing organization for medical librarians, the Academy of Health Information Professionals (AHIP). The main network for medical libraries in the United States is the National Network of Libraries of Medicine (NNLM). The Special Libraries Association has a Medical Section of the Biomedical and Life Science Division, which serves as a forum for Division members who are engaged or interested in the exchange of information in the biomedical and health sciences, and the acquisition, organization, dissemination, and use of such information in all formats. In Canada, health librarians and libraries are represented by the Canadian Health Libraries Association. Australia have the Health Libraries Australia Group of the Australian Library and Information Association and the Victorian state based Health Libraries Inc. In 2013, HLA introduced a PD Specialisation in 2013 leading to Association post nominals on demonstration of ongoing professional development in the field of health librarianship. A list of health libraries in Australia may by found on the website of the National Library of Australia. In 2015, Australia is undertaking a Census of health libraries and librarianship aiming to identify the full industry, locations, organisations, roles, and staff employed.

498 D Library and Information Science Specific The first specialist "Health Librarianship Essentials" tertiary training commenced in April 2015 at the Queensland University of Technology supported by HLA. In the United Kingdom, medical (or health) librarians are represented by the Health Libraries Group of the Chartered Institute of Library and Information Professionals. CILIP. Health Libraries Group. The medical and health libraries of the German-speaking countries Germany, Austria and Switzerland are represented by the Medical Libraries Association Arbeitsgemeinschaft fuer Medizinisches Bibliothekswesen (AGMB). There are similar, if smaller, national groups in many European countries and these groups and individual health librarians and libraries are represented by the European Association for Health Information and Libraries (EAHIL) since 1987. For those librarians who work in very specialised subject areas, there are associations and networks which focus on their subject areas, and an example of such an organisation is Elisad, the European Association of Libraries and Information Services on Addictions. Elisad The International Federation of Library Associations and Institutions (IFLA) has a Health and Biosciences Libraries Section. The last International Congress on Medical Librarianship (ICML) was in Brisbane in 2009.

CORPORATE LIBRARY A corporate library is a special library serving the staff at a corporation. The information services provided by corporate libraries save employees time, and can aid in competitive intelligence work. By offering a corporate library to employees, the corporation is able to encourage learning and give people opportunities for growth and development that may not be offered elsewhere. Corporate libraries also offer the opportunity for employees to share ideas in regards work related tasks or special projects needing to be completed. Corporations began to establish their own specialized libraries around the year 1900. One major issue in corporate libraries relates to the difficulty of putting a dollar value on the intangible services the library provides to its parent company. The librarian at a corporate library should be prepared to justify the return on investment of an organization hosting such a library. In terms of size, they are seldom very large, and most library departments employ fewer than five full-time staff.

AGRICULTURAL LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SYSTEM Prof. M S SWAMINATHAN LIBRARY is one of the largest and the finest agrobiological libraries in South East Asia housing a total of 3.75 lakh plus publications including 1,32,000 books / monographs / bulletins, 2,21,600 journals / reports , 15,160 post graduate theses, 7,683 Hindi books , 28,500 news letters etc. Access of 24 Online Journals available on LAN. The Library has, on its role, 2000 members, viz., students, scientists and technical

Unit-X D 499 staff. It also serves about 8,000 visitors every year. The Library functions as the depository of FAO, IDRC and AVRDC publications and also as the National Depository for CGIAR institutes publications. The Library has on its role 2000 member viz. students, scientists and technical staff. It also serves about 2500 visitors every year. The Library functions as the depository of Food and Agricultural Organization (FAO), and Consultant Group of International Agricultural Research (CGIAR) institutes’ publications. The library has student facility wing / reading halls having 15 PCs with Wi-Fi connectivity and internet and e-mail facility. The name of IARI LIBRARY has been changed to "Prof. M.S. SWAMINATHAN LIBRARY" as an honour to our most eminent scientist "Prof M.S. Swaminathan"

Books IARI Library is one of the largest and the finest agro biological libraries in South East Asia housing total of 3,34,128 publications including books / monographs, journals reports, bulletins, post graduate theses and other reference materials etc.

Serials The Library is subscribing 116 Foreign Periodicals , 185 Indian journals and advances annual reviews and procured journals / serials through gifts and exchanges (out of which 30 journals are online), 47 Advances & Annual Reviews, 650 newsletters. Exchange relationship is maintained with 65 institutions globally and nationally by sending 152 annual reports, ICAR journals and society publications.

AGRIS Project IARI Library was declared as an input center for National Agricultural Research Database (NARD) under AGRIS Project. The Library was assigned the job of scanning, articles from 10 most important Indian journals. The input was done in ISO format using AGRIN methodology.

Reference, Circulation and Stack Maintenance Apart from approximately 2000 registered members, the Library is serving approximately 150 to 200 users per day coming from different agricultural universities / ICAR Institutes. Document Delivery is given with in three days through e-mail. Membership of DELNET and INFLIBNET has been taken for better Document Delivery Service and Networking.

CD-ROM workstation Providing CD-ROM services. 15 user terminals are provided to users in CD-ROM workstation of the library. These databases are accessible through LAN for Scientists / Students / Users of IARI.

E-Language Lab Language lab was established with seating capacity of about 50 participants to facilitate language classes for foreign students with modern facilities like 30 computers Pentium V with internet facility, interactive board, visualizers, interactive panel ,head phones etc. A Two hour regular classes of English language for IARI students are being conducted every day in the evening. The language lab is used for conducting trainings, Summer

500 D Library and Information Science Specific and Winter School Courses of different divisions and Directorate for the benefit of Scientists/Technical staff.

C-DAC Project A memorandum was signed with C-DAC (Ministry of Information Technology, Govt. of India) on 4th September 2004 to digitize old documents. These books are accessible through “Digital Library of India”. The first phase of the above project ended on 31st March, 2007.

CeRA (Consortium for eResources in Agriculture) Project of NAIP (World Bank) Online Access of Approx. 2380 e-Journals is provided on LAN to scientific community , Students and other users of the institute to create e-access culture among scientists/ teachers in ICAR Institutes/Agricultural Universities.

e-Granth Project of NAIP (World Bank) Prof. M S Swaminathan Library as lead centre created Online Public Access Catalog (OPAC) of resources of 36 libraries with “Online Computer Library Center ” (OCLC) partnership, digitized important institutional repositories of IARI, IVRI and UAS, Bangalore . Strengthened capacity building for library and information management system.

ENGINEERING AND TECHNOLOGICAL LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SYSTEM The Central Library, NITD was established in the year 2012 (10 June 2012) in Dwarka to facilitate the access to information resources to faculty and students of the Institute. It moved to its present location IAMR Campus, Narela Institutional Area on 18th February 2014. All the faculty members, students and staff of the Institute are entitled to access all the library facilities and services. The library is growing rapidly with exponential increase in number and type of collection to serve the information needs of the clientele in the field of Engineering, Science & Technology. It has very good reading room facility with proper ventilation and natural lighting. Library has a rich collection in the field of Engineering and Science & Technology including mathematics, Physics, Chemistry, Polymer Science, and Environmental Sciences and also in the field of Humanities and Social Science including English and Economics.

General Conduct & Motto of the Library The main objective of our Library is to support the research and educational activities of the Institute. It involves content development, acquisition, technical services, providing Institutional repositories, inter-library loan, etc. Library is doing best effort for providing study material either books, journals, e-journals, general study material to its member. Our motto is to provide polite, friendly and efficient services without any discrimination among the users.

Unit-X D 501

LIBRARY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM The Library uses LIBSYS 7 software package which is an integrated multi-user library automation management system that supports all in-house activities of the library. The Library have RFID (Radio Frequency Identifier) based Automation system and Circulation system (self Check-in/Check-out). The database of the entire library acquisitions is being updated on regular basis along with details of recently acquired books. Also, Library has WebOPAC facility under which all the bibliographic details of the library collection can be accessed from Internet 24×7 on all week days by the users.

RFID Implementation in the Library The Library has implemented the Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) System in the year 2014. It is the best automated library automation system used across the World and is very effective way of managing Library resources. Some of the major benefits of the RFID system include self check-out/Check-in facility of books by the users, to control theft, to track the misplaced reading material, sorting, inventory accuracy, stock verification procedures, security control, material handling, video surveillance, people counter, Smart Card issuance, etc. RFID is a combination of radio -frequency-based technology and microchip technology. The information contained on microchips in the tags affixed to library materials is read using radio frequency technology regardless of item orientation or alignment. RFID helps to reduce valuable staff time spent on scanning barcodes while charging and discharging items.

COMMUNITY INFORMATION SYSTEM A community information system is a computer-based information services designed to meeting the current information needs of people and public agencies and to prepare the community for full participation in rapidly changing communication environments. As a civic service, access is free and open to everyone in the community for their personal, non-commercial use. Available material can include local, state, and federal government documents and services, business and consumer information, medical and legal information, access to libraries' collections and services, public school and higher education curriculum material, calendars, and course listings, directories of social services. Each community can provide information services tailored to reflect the unique needs of its citizens.

Where are some examples? COIN, Columbia Online Information Network, is one of the largest in the state. Laclede Access, located near Lebanon, and ORION in Springfield are other examples of this sort of service.

Why community information systems? Everyone not only needs but has a right to information. The world economy is rapidly becoming an information-based economy, and all citizens, regardless of social, economic, or educational status, must be able to participate successfully in this information age. It

502 D Library and Information Science Specific is estimated that 90% of the world's information will be available electronically by the year 2000 and communities must be prepared to compete and prosper in this environment. Community Information Systems are one way to provide online access to a community.

Where is this information? Electronic information lives on computers and computers are literally everywhere. A community information system coordinates and organizes public access to computerbased information for all citizens. Information can come from Australia, Europe, Africa, Maine, California or your neighbor.

How do people and electronic information come together? It takes a computer to talk to another computer. Consequently, people need a computer of terminal with a modem to link to this service. Home , office, public library, school, public buildings, malls -- any time and any place people and computers come together -- access is possible. This puts the power in each individual's hands to decide what and how much information is needed.

When do people need information? A question can arise at any time and people's schedules are irregular and busy. Computers don't sleep, so information is available any time it's convenient. Who might use a community information system? Opportunities abound for children and adults to expand their awareness, develop friendships, and trade ideas with others in their city, their state, their country and on their planet. Students and teachers can communicate with others around the world and can access resources not available locally. Local government can provide information to keep the community informed. Social Service agencies can provide timely information to their constituents.

What can you do to get started? Identify community leaders and organizations that would be interested in coming together to provide a wide variety of essential resources to the people they all serve.

INFORMATION SERVICES AND SYSTEM FOR PERSONS WITH DISABILITY The Government of India formulated the National Policy for Persons with Disabilities in February 2006 which deals with Physical, Educational & Economic Rehabilitation of persons with disabilities. In addition the policy also focuses upon rehabilitation of women and children with disabilities, barrier free environment, social security, research etc. The National Policy recognizes that Persons with Disabilities are valuable human resource for the country and seeks to create an environment that provides them equal opportunities, protection of their rights and full participation in society.

Unit-X D 503

Focus of the Policy The focus of the policy is on the following 1. Prevention of Disabilities. Since disability, in a large number of cases, is preventable, the policy lays a strong emphasis on prevention of disabilities. It calls for programme for prevention of diseases, which result in disability and the creation of awareness regarding measures to be taken for prevention of disabilities during the period of pregnancy and thereafter to be intensified and their coverage expanded. 2. Rehabilitation Measures. Rehabilitation measures can be classified into three distinct groups: a. Physical rehabilitation, which includes early detection and intervention, counseling & medical interventions and provision of aids & appliances. It will also include the development of rehabilitation professionals. b. Educational rehabilitation including vocational education and c. Economic rehabilitation for a dignified life in society. 3. Women with disabilities. Women with disabilities require protection against exploitation and abuse. Special programmes will be developed for education, employment and providing of other rehabilitation services to women with disabilities keeping in view their special needs. Special educational and vocation training facilities will be setup. Programmes will be undertaken to rehabilitate abandoned disabled women/ girls by encouraging their adoption in families, support to house them and impart them training for gainful employment skills. The Government will encourage the projects where representation of women with disabilities is ensured at least to the extent of twenty five percent of total beneficiaries. 4. Children with Disabilities. Children with disabilities are the most vulnerable group and need special attention. The Government would strive to: n Ensure right to care, protection and security for children with disabilities; n Ensure the right to development with dignity and equality creating an enabling environment where children can exercise their rights, enjoy equal opportunities and full participation in accordance with various statutes. n Ensure inclusion and effective access to education, health, vocational training along with specialized rehabilitation services to children with disabilities. n Ensure the right to development as well as recognition of special needs and of care, and protection of children with severe disabilities. Barrier-free environment. Barrier-free environment enables people with disabilities to move about safely and freely, and use the facilities within the built environment. The goal of barrier free design is to provide an environment that supports the independent functioning of individuals so that they can participate without assistance, in every day activities. Therefore, to the maximum extent possible, buildings / places / transportation systems for public use will be made barrier free. Issue of Disability Certificates. The Government of India has notified guidelines for evaluation of the disabilities and procedure for certification. The Government will ensure that the persons with disabilities obtain the disability certificates without any difficulty in the shortest possible time by adoption of simple, transparent and client-friendly procedures.

504 D Library and Information Science Specific Social Security. Disabled persons, their families and care givers incur substantial additional expenditure for facilitating activities of daily living, medical care, transportation, assistive devices, etc. Therefore, there is a need to provide them social security by various means. Central Government has been providing tax relief to persons with disabilities and their guardians. The State Governments / U.T. Administrations have been providing unemployment allowance or disability pension. The State Governments will be encouraged to develop a comprehensive social security policy for persons with disabilities. Promotion of Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs). The National Policy recognizes the NGO sector as a very important institutional mechanism to provide affordable services to complement the endeavors of the Government. The NGO sector is a vibrant and growing one. It has played a significant role in the provisions of services for persons with disabilities. Some of the NGOs are also undertaking human resource development and research activities. Government has also been actively involving them in policy formulation, planning, implementation, monitoring and has been seeking their advice on various issues relating to persons with disabilities. Interaction with NGOs will be enhanced on various disability issues regarding planning, policy formulation and implementation. Networking, exchange of information and sharing of good practices amongst NGOs will be encouraged and facilitated. Steps will be taken to encourage and accord preference to NGOs working in the underserved and inaccessible areas. Reputed NGOs shall also be encouraged to take up projects in such areas. Collection of regular information on Persons with Disabilities. There is a need for regular collection, compilation and analysis of data relating to socio-economic conditions of persons with disabilities. The National Sample Survey Organization has been collecting information on Socio-economic conditions of persons with disabilities on regular basis once in ten years since 1981. The Census has also started collection of information on persons with disabilities from the Census-2001. The National Sample Survey Organization will have to collect the information on persons with disabilities at least once in five years. The differences in the definitions adopted by the two agencies will be reconciled. Research. For improving the quality of life of persons with disabilities, research will be supported on their socio-economic and cultural context, cause of disabilities, early childhood education methodologies, development of user-friendly aids and appliances and all matters connected with disabilities which will significantly alter the quality of their life and civil society's ability to respond to their concerns. Wherever persons with disabilities are subjected to research interventions, their or their family member or caregiver's consent is mandatory. Sports, Recreation and Cultural life. The contribution of sports for its therapeutic and community spirit is undeniable. Persons with disabilities have right to access sports, recreation and cultural facilities. The Government will take necessary steps to provide them opportunity for participation in various sports, recreation and cultural activities.

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

(505)

506 D Library and Information Science Specific 1. Reviews and surveys are ____ examination of information and literature on a particular subject or topic. (A) general (B) critical (C) analytical (D) content 2. _________ information system related to mostly government sponsored projects and programmes such as nuclear energy missions, space research and like. (A) Discipline oriented (B) Mission oriented (C) Problem oriented (D) Information oriented 3. The two vital components of communication are : physical media and ______ carried by the media for the communication. (A) technology (B) contents (C) experts (D) institutions 4. Information is made up of ______ (A) paper print (B) number (C) symbolic elements (D) microform 5. Knowledge is which form of information? (A) Unorganized (B) Organized (C) Raw (D) Statistical 6. Large scale of information world wide resulted in the (A) technology events (B) information society (C) trade practice (D) research and development 7. Information or knowledge that is packed in documents can be broadly grouped under how many categories? (A) four (B) two (C) five (D) three 8. Which one is not a characteristic of information society? (A) Information is used as an economic resource. (B) It is possible to identify greater use of information among society. (C) It is spread all over. (D) The development of an information sector within the economy. 9. Who developed the term information society?

(A) Ranganathan (C) Fritz Machlup

(B) Beesman (D) J.H. Shera

10. Which of the following is not covered under Intellectual Property Rights? (A) Copyrights (B) Patents (C) Trade marks (D) Thesaurus 11. Information science is a discipline that investigates (A) the properties and behaviour of information (B) the forces governing the flow of information (C) the means for processing of information for optimal uses (D) all of these 12. Invisible colleges are (A) networks of people interested in the same subject (B) help in communication (C) neither (A) nor (B) (D) both (A) and (B) 13. What is the essential aspect of information service? (A) Retrieval of information (B) Storage of information (C) Collection of information (D) Communication of information 14. An example of a communication channel is (A) context (B) face-to-face conversation (C) noise (D) none of the above 15. Which is the real process to gain knowledge from information? (A) Information, data, knowledge (B) Information, knowledge, data (C) Data, information, knowledge (D) Data, knowledge, information 16. What is knowledge in character and size? (A) Stable and dimensional (B) Stable and multidimensional (C) Dynamic and dimensional (D) Dynamic and multidimensional 17. An Invisible college is a typical example of (A) Informal channels of communication (B) Formal channels of communication

Multiple Choice Questions D 507 (C) Both (A) and (B) (D) None of the above 18. In which country was the word information first used? (A) USA (B) France (C) UK (D) Italy 19. The information is treated as (A) power (B) resource (C) product (D) all the above 20. What is most important thing for research and development programmes of a country now a days? (A) Subject (B) Document (C) Books (D) Information 21. Information is (A) raw data (B) organized data (C) input data (D) unorganised data 22. In modern time, all human are centered (A) se lf (C) business

the activities of the on (B) information (D) computer

23.Information may be categorized into following three parts (A) logical, analytical and statistical (B) analytical, statistical and systematic (C) systematic, analytical and descriptive (D) statistical, descriptive and analytical 24.Which of the following is not the attribute of information? (A) It has no colour and no physical form (B) It is dynamic, but not still (C) It can be explained (D) It cannot be evaluated 25.The data which have been processed into a form that is meaningful to the recipient is known as (A) data (B) information (C) knowledge (D) intelligence 26.Who amongst the following tried to differentiate between information and knowledge in context to information theory? (A) Shannon (B) Weaver (C) Brookes (D) Yovits 27. What has made the development more speedy than ever before? (A) Information (B) Knowledge

(C) Books and Periodicals (D) The person himself 28. Which theory of information is concerned with the flow of information? (A) Shanon theory (B) Stochastic theory (C) Mathematical theory (D) Brooks theory 29. Today information is regarded as (A) wealth (B) commodity (C) product (D) all the above 30. The backwardness of any country with respect to socio-e conomic spheres is mainly due to lack of (A) adequate information (B) adequate information specially in Science & Technology (C) adequate information in engineering (D) adequate information in all disciplines 31. Entropy is a measure of (A) Degree of relevance of information (B) Quantity of irrelevant information (C) Degree of uncertainty in information (D) Degree of certainty in information 32. A country rich in information is rich in which of the following sphere? (A) Social sphere (B) Industrial sphere (C) Political sphere (D) Socio-economic spheres 33. The countries which are doing effective use of information are (A) economically developed countries (B) economically weak countries (C) e conomically unde r deve lopment countries (D) non-developed countries 34. Who gave the question D1 (S) ® (S + DS) for information theory? (A) Shannon (B) Yovits (C) Weaver (D) Brookes 35. How Stochastic equation of information is solved? (A) by statistical rules (B) by dynamic rules (C) by statistical and dynamic rules (D) none of the above

508 D Library and Information Science Specific 36. What is information Science as a discipline ? (A) A study of the use of information (B) A study of sources and development of information (C) A study of complex multidisciplinary subject (D) All the above 37. Who enunciated Mathematical theory of information? (A) Shannon and Weaver (B) W. Weaver (C) James Mills (D) D. T. Foskette 38. COM stands for (A) Computerised Management (B) Computer output microfilm (C) Computer Management (D) None of the above 39. Who enunciated Semantic theory of information? (A) Shanon (B) Weaver (C) Fairthorne (D) Fayol 40. Who produced the following definition of Information Science—Information Science is the discipline that deals with the processes of storing and transferring of information. (A) Encyclopaedia Britanica (B) Ranganathan (C) Encyclopaedia Americana (D) J. H. Shera 41. Who suggested that information is data of value for decision making? (A) Shannon and Weaver (B) Whittemore and Yovits (C) Brookes and Weaver (D) Yovits and Shannon 42. In which year Shannon and Weaver enunciated the Mathematical theory of information? (A) 1939 (B) 1948 (C) 1959 (D) 1969 43. Who suggested that the amount of information in a message is dependent on the size of the words contained in the message? (A) Shannon and Weaver (B) Weaver and Hookes

(C) Shannon and Brookes (D) Weaver and Borden 44. In which theory of information, the information is increased by the prior knowledge of recipient? (A) Brookes theory (B) Semantic theory (C) Mathematical theory (D) Whittemore theory 45. ‘Libraries as Gateways to Knowledge’ is the title of the document (A) National Information Policy, 1986 (B) Information Technology Act, 2000 (C) National Knowledge Commission on Libraries, 2007 (D) None of the above 46. What have been influenced by advances of information in the society? (A) Living standards (B) Patterns of work and leisure (C) The education system and market places (D) All the above 47. A society in which information rather than material flows constitute most of its communication and control is known as (A) rich society (B) industrial society (C) electronic society (D) information society 48. To which country the credit is given to coin the term information society? (A) USA (B) France (C) Japan (D) India 49. The high growth of information is known as (A) information growth (B) exponential information (C) information explosion (D) information implosion 50. What is called information society? (A) the society in which all the functions are related (B) the society which depends on information for all its developments (C) the society in which the information is being marketed

Multiple Choice Questions D 509 (D) the society which is based on information 51. Why the term Information society was coined? (A) because there is large scale use of information (B) because wide cross section of people use information on large scale (C) be cause the information is being used at every place (D) none of the above 52. Due to the emergence of the term information science, the name of American Documentation Institute was changed to which of the following? (A) American Institute of Documentation (B) American Society of Information Science (C) Information Centre of USA (D) American Information Institute 53. Who is the propounder of the term information transfer? (A) Ranganathan (B) J. Martin (C) Beesman (D) Calvin Moores 54. Handling of information in the sense of production is called as (A) information industry (B) information marketing (C) information production (D) information explosion 55. What is called the circle of information from creator to users of the information? (A) Cycle (B) Information cycle (C) Exchange cycle (D) Information transfer cycle 56. What is called the society in which large scale use of information in all the areas is being done by a wide cross section of people ? (A) Information society (B) Modern society (C) Information science society (D) Information culture 57. A period predominantly centered on information activities is known as (A) information span (B) information age

(C) information explosion (D) information period 58. What is the meaning of transfer of information? (A) Extension of information (B) Communication of information (C) Dissemination of information (D) Communication of information for the need of the users 59. What has been accepted as a boon for storing a huge amount of information? (A) The books (B) Periodicals (C) Computer (D) Networking 60. Who expressed knowledge in a simple mathematical equation k(s) + D1 = k (s + Ds) ? (A) Fritz Machlup (B) B.C. Brooks (C) N.J. Belkin (D) C.E. Shannon 61. Linear model of communication in knowledge based on Aristotles’ model of communication was proposed by (A) Juger Heberman (B) A.J. Wells (C) C.E. Shannon & W. Weaver (D) G. Gerbner 62. Where the information is collected? (A) In books (B) In periodicals (C) In mass media (D) In conventional and non-conve ntional documents 63. What are the processes involved in the Information Transfer cycle? (A) Generation and collection (B) Storage and dissemination (C) Retrieval and the use (D) All the above 64. What are those activitie s which are mainly undertaken with the specific objective of creating or generating information? (A) Governmental activities (B) Surveys and censuses (C) Research and development activities (D) Other activities 65. What is called that process by which the information described and presented in the documents are stored?

510 D Library and Information Science Specific (A) (B) (C) (D)

Storage of information Collection of information Dissemination of information Retrieval of information

(A) (B) (C) (D)

Audiovisuals Floppies CD-ROMs and Disks All the above

66. Why R&D organisations in all the subjects are established specifically? (A) For development of the country (B) For creating information (C) For storing information (D) For dissemination of information

73. What are the two modes of communication of information? (A) Formal and informal (B) Primary and secondary (C) Simple and operational (D) Denudation and distillation

67. Information is generated by which of the following processes? (A) By human activities undertaken by individuals or by organisations (B) By events that happen or take place (C) By incidents that happen or take place (D) By all the above

74. As per Indian Copyright Law, copyright is granted for (A) Fifty years after the book is published (B) Fifty years after the death of the author (C) Sixty years after the book is published (D) Sixty years after the death of the author

68. Information is not produced by which of the following? (A) Research and development (B) Surveys and censuses (C) School and libraries (D) Government activities 69. What are the methods of dissemination of information? (A) Subject bibliographies and documentation lists (B) Current Awareness service and SDI (C) Abstracting and Indexing services (D) Translation service and all of the above 70. Which one is the most important problem being faced by Institutional Repositories for archiving the documents? (A) Availability (B) Rarity (C) Copyright issues (D) Author’s resistance 71. What is called the communication in which information is disseminated from person to person? (A) Printed communication (B) Non-printed communication (C) Oral communication (D) Verbal communication 72. Besides the computer what are the other mediums of storing information?

75. What does the term retrieval of information mean? (A) Getting again information from the collection (B) Getting again the information (C) Storing the information again in the collection (D) Information is disseminated 76. What is that process by which a new idea/ invention is disseminated to the members of social structure? (A) Information handling (B) Information transfer (C) Information communication (D) Information dissemination 77. What is communication of information? (A) Process of transmitting the information (B) Process of disseminating of information (C) Process of retrieval of information (D) Process of scanning of information 78. Now a days we all of us are facing an other problem alongwith information explosion, what is that problem? (A) Information age (B) Information society (C) Information pollution (D) Information growth

Multiple Choice Questions D 511 79. What is formal communication of information? (A) Printed mode of transfer (B) Non-printed mode of transfer (C) Verbal mode of transfer (D) Oral mode of transfer

87. What is mass media communication of information? (A) Audio-visual (B) Telephone (C) Film, radio and television (D) Mass communication media

80. What is called the process of sending information from one person to the other? (A) Communication (B) Dissemination (C) Exchange (D) Transmission

88. What information is called when it is represented by the communicator? (A) Communication (B) Message (C) Channel (D) Data

81. Where was the practice of defining intellectual property started? (A) American States (B) United States (C) Italian City States (D) Soviet Union States 82. What is called the communication from generation to generation? (A) Oral communication (B) Verbal communication (C) Wireless communication (D) Tele communication 83. What are informal channels of information communication? (A) Written mediums (B) Oral mediums (C) Written as well as oral mediums (D) None of these 84. What is intellectual property? (A) Books (B) All reading material (C) Intellectual thoughts (D) The books written by authors 85. Who are the most essential persons, in between whom the process of communication of information is over? (A) Source and receiver (B) Communication and recipient (C) Channel and message (D) Message and recipient 86. ‘Half-life’ in Information Science relates to (A) Rate of obsolescence (B) Rate of growth (C) Degree of scatter (D) Information explosion

89. What are included essentially in intellectual property? (A) Products (B) Creations (C) Products and creations of mind (D) None of these 90. Intellectual property rights are treated like (A) standard (B) patents (C) copyright (D) specifications 91. National Knowledge Commission was launched under the chairmanship of (A) Nandan Nilekani (B) Deepak Nayar (C) Sam Pitroda (D) Ashok Ganguli 92. When the Patent Bill in India was enacted ? (A) 1947 (B) 1951 (C) 1970 (D) 1980 93. In addition to RRRLF which one is the second organisation which contributed in establishing the Library and Information Policy in India? (A) ALA (B) MLA (C) IFLA (D) FID 94. When were the intellectual property rights first enacted in India? (A) 1850 (B) 1856 (C) 1858 (D) 1860 95. Why the First International Copyright Conference in 1886 was organised? (A) To secure ancient buildings (B) To secure archeological buildings (C) To secure libraries (D) To secure literary and artistic work

512 D Library and Information Science Specific 96. Where was first International Copyright Conference in 1886 held? (A) Rome (B) Berne (C) London (D) Paris 97. How information policy can be defined? (A) It is an arrangement to correct Information (B) It is an arrangement to manage information (C) It is an arrangement of managing, directing, and developing the information (D) None of these 98. The act enacted in India in 1856 on intellectual property rights was based on (A) American Patent Law 1810 (B) British Patent Law 1852 (C) The Patent Bill (D) The Design Act of 1911 99. Where was the Second Inte rnational Copyright Conference held in 1952? (A) Geneva (B) London (C) New York (D) Paris 100. The initiation, selection, exploration, formulation, collection and presentation are two stages of which model of information seeking behaviour (A) Ellis Model (B) Krikelas Model (C) Kuhlthou Model (D) Wilson Model 101. Which one organisation is working on intellectual property at international level? (A) WIPO (B) UNESCO (C) IFLA (D) FID 102. Which organisation applied Library and Information Policy in India at national level? (A) UGC (B) Ministry of Education (C) NISSAT (D) RRRLF 103. Where is the head quarter of Patent Information System in India? (A) Pune (B) Mumbai (C) Nagpur (D) Delhi 104. Which organisation constituted the National Committee for Library and Information Policy in India?

(A) (B) (C) (D)

UGC Education Department NISSAT Cultural Department

105. Who was the Chairman of ‘National Policy on Library & Information Systems’ (1986)? (A) D. N. Banerjee (B) D. P. Chattopadhyay (C) Sam Pitroda (D) Kalpana Dasgupta 106. When was library and information committee established? (A) 1980 (B) 1985 (C) 1986 (D) 1987 107. Who was the Chairman of National Library Committee of India? (A) B. S. Jha (B) C. D. Deshmukh (C) S. Mudaliar (D) K. P. Sinha 108. The term Information Service is an improvised name of (A) administration (B) documentation (C) bibliography (D) active reference service 109. Who coined the term information retrieval ? (A) S. R. Ranganathan (B) Faradane (C) Calvin Moors (D) Lancaster 110. Who said that information is product and process both? (A) S. C. Bradford (B) J. Martin (C) Ranganathan (D) Foskett 111. Match the following: List A 1. Data 2. Information 3. Knowledge (A) 1-b, 2-a, 3-c (C) 1-d, 2-c, 3-d

List B a. Years b. Cotton c. Cloth d. Seed (B) 1-c, 2-b, 3-d (D) 1-a, 2-d, 3-b

112. “Communication is a social interaction involving the transmission of meanings through the use of symbols.” This statement is given by

Multiple Choice Questions D 513 (A) (B) (C) (D)

Egar Dale Gist P. Druckar Alan. M. Turing

113. The main objective of national policy on information is/are (A) to collect information related to scientific, technical and other developmental activities of the country (B) to provide computer facilities for fast information access and retrieval (C) to encourage international co-operation in the use of information (D) all of the above 114. Social & Psychological barriers are (A) Reluctance to cooperate with information specialists (B) Unwillingness to changes (C) Unhappiness over discipline & procedure (D) All of the above 115. An invention may satisfy the conditions of novelty, inventiveness and usefulness but it may not qualify for a patent under the situations (A) An invention which is frivolous or which claims anything obviously contrary to well established natural laws e.g., different types of perpetual motion machines. (B) An invention whose intended use or exploitation would be contrary to public order or morality or which causes serious prejudice to human, animal or plant life or health or to the environment e.g., a process for making brown sugar will not be patented. (C) The mere discovery of a scientific principle or formulation of an abstract theory e.g., Raman effect and Theory of Relativity cannot be patented. (D) All of the above 116. The essential requirements for the registration of design is/are (A) The design should be new or original, not previously published or used in any country before the date of application for registration. The novelty may reside in the application of a known shape or pattern to a new subject matter.

(B) The design should relate to features of shape, configuration, pattern or ornamentation applied or applicable to an article. (C) The design should be applied or applicable to any article by any industrial process. (D) All of the above 117. Photocopying, micro copying, duplicating and in-plant printing comes under (A) Micrographic technology (B) Reprographic technology (C) Communication technology (D) Computer technology 118. Information is also regarded as a ‘commodity’ because (A) continuum ranging from raw data to finished information, its regulation will be affected in the future by the value of information as it is taken by tax authorities (B) planning commission and policy making greatly depend upon the availability of information for planning and policy making (C) information in like an inexhaustible and renewable source of energy (D) none of the above 119. Institutional barriers are (A) Status (B) Hierarchical structure (C) Secrecy (D) All of the above 120. Who categorised information source into conventional, non-conventional, neo-conventional and micro documents? (A) Ranganathan (B) Bradford (C) Grogan (D) Henson 121. Persons working as classifiers, cataloguers, reference officers, indexers, abstractors etc. involved in creating tools for information storage and retrieval are know as information (A) processors (B) disseminators (C) recorders (D) retrievers 122. About National Information Policy the incorrect statement is

514 D Library and Information Science Specific (A) Provision for the preparation and production of learning and teaching kits. (B) Assessment of manpower needs in terms of types, quantity, levels for the next ten years, keeping in view the fast-changing information environment. (C) Encouraging fundamental and applied research and development in library and information science. (D) Attracting candidates who have poor academic record and not interested in information, motivation and aptitude. 123. Information is generated by activities (A) Surveys & Censuses (B) Research & Development (C) Activities of Government (D) All of the above 124. The services of providing current information is known as (A) short communication (B) current awareness services (C) dissemination of information (D) none of the above 125. The author of Communication is (A) O. Frank (B) E.D. Johnson (C) L.R. Mc Colvin (D) W.J. Murison 126. Why Shanon-Weaver Model of information is criticized? (A) Being too mathematical (B) Being Unidirectional (C) Being primarily suited to electronic communication (D) All the above 127. Data may be converted into information by (A) observation (B) experiment (C) analysing (D) collection 128. In mode rn socie ty all activitie s are centred on (A) knowledge (B) information (C) both (D) none of these 129. Match the following: List A: Organisation 1. National Physical Laboratory 2. Meteorological dept. 3. State and Central Govt. department

List B: Type of information generated a. Statistical and descriptive b. Journals and Research Reports c. Statistical information tables etc. d. Social Science reports (A) 1-a, 2-b, 3-d (B) 1-b, 2-c, 3-a (C) 1-c, 2-d, 3-b (D) 1-d, 2-a, 3-c 130. Match the following: List A: Types of users of Information 1. Teachers 2. Government officials 3. Students 4. Professionals List B: Purpose a. Decision making b. To pursue academic work c. Pursue their vocation d. To impart education (A) 1-a, 2-b, 4-d (B) 1-b, 2-c, 3-d, 4-a (C) 1-c, 2-d, 3-a, 4-b (D) 1-d, 2-a, 3-b, 4-c 131. Inference Engine is a part of which information system? (A) Management information System (B) Decision Support System (C) Expert System (D) Open System 132. Growth of information beyond a manageable limit is (A) exponential growth (B) decline growth (C) increased growth (D) explosion of information 133. Which of the following is not the prerequisite for a National Information Policy? (A) Legislative Frame work (B) Production of National Bibliography (C) Advisory and Administrative body (D) ICT infrastructure facilities 134. World Intellectual Property Organization is related to (A) UNESCO (B) United Nations (C) U.S. Organization (D) International Law Organization 135. Who coined the term ‘informatics’? (A) Mikhailov (B) Chernyi (C) Gilyarevaskii (D) All the above

Multiple Choice Questions D 515 136. The information is also called ‘power’, a ‘commodity’ and a (A) knowledge (B) data (C) resource (D) none of these 137. Who defines that, “information is knowledge communicated concerning some particular fact, subject or event”. (A) D. Bell (B) Oxford English Dictionary (C) S. C. Blumenthal (D) None of the above 138. In recent decades demand for information has considerably increased due to (A) social changes and reorganisation (B) technological innovation (C) growth in education and research (D) on account of all above 139. Match the following: List A 1. Channel

List B a. Mode of communicating messages through signals, symbols, text, etc. 2. Media b. Persons who receive and use information 3. Source c. Carriers that disseminate information or knowledge 4. Recipient d. Carries messages of contents of information e. Carries knowledge (A) 1-b, 2-a, 3-c, 4-e (B) 1-c, 2-d, 3-a, 4-b (C) 1-d, 2-e, 3-b, 2-c (D) 1-a, 2-b, 3-c, 4-d 140. Redundancy of information is (A) Unnecessary and should be eliminated (B) Unnecessary but cannot be avoided (C) Necessary and some times useful (D) Necessary and always desirable 141. The barriers to communication and information flow are (A) language problem (B) over population (C) tradition boundedness (D) all the above 142. Match the following: List A 1. Sound documents

2. Audio-visual documents 3. Digital Videodisc 4. CD- PROM List B a. Combining images and sound b. Laser video-disc use for movies c. Allows users to copy information from a CD-ROM disc d. Sound records, sound taps e. Optical Digital Data Disc (A) 1-d, 2-a, 3-b, 4-c (B) 1-a, 2-b, 3-c, 4-d (C) 1-b, 2-c, 3-d, 4-a (D) 1-c, 2-d, 3-a, 4-b 143. Which one is the most important problem being faced by Institutional Repositories for archiving the documents? (A) Availability (B) Rarity (C) Copyright issues (D) Author’s resistance 144. Universal Bibliographic Control (U.B.C.) was primarily launched by (A) F.I.D. (B) I.F.L.A. (C) I.C.S.U. (D) A.L.A. 145. Which is not a near synonym term to information? (A) Ideas (B) Data (C) Catalogue (D) Facts 146. Arrange the following according to chronological order : (i) Universal Copyright convention (ii) Berne Convention (iii) Indian Copyright Act (iv) WIPO Copyright Act Codes : (A) (B) (C) (D)

(ii), (iv), (iii), (i) (iii), (ii), (iv), (i) (i), (iii), (ii), (iv) (ii), (i), (iii), (iv)

147. Informal communication among knowledgeable persons is known as (A) Invisible College (B) Information Gatekeeper (C) Communication Gatekeeper (D) Knowledge Management

516 D Library and Information Science Specific 148. Match the following : List-A List-B (Terms) (Forms of Communication) (a) Invisible College 1. Physical carrier (b) Noise 2. Formal channel (c) Medium 3. Barrier (d) Document 4. Informal channel Code: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) 1 2 3 4 (B) 2 1 3 4 (C) 4 3 2 1 (D) 4 3 1 2 149. Match the following : List-A List-B (a) National Library of India 1. 1984 Act, 1948 (b) National Policy on 2. 1951 Library and Information System (c) Committee on National 3. 1972 Policy on Library and Information System (c) Indian National 4. 1945 Scientific Documentation centre Code: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) 1 3 4 2 (B) 4 3 2 1 (C) 4 3 1 2 (D) 4 1 2 3 150. Match the following : List-A List-B (a) The Design Act 1. 1995 (b) The Copyright Act 2. 1911 (c) The Patents Act 3. 1957 (d) Trade related Intellectual 4. 1970 Property Rights Code: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) 2 4 3 1 (B) 2 3 4 1 (C) 3 1 4 2 (D) 1 2 3 4 151. Regarding IPR which statement is not correct (A) Berne convention

(B) Universal copyright convention (C) Paris convention (D) Chicago summit 152. Match the following List-A (a) Audio-visual communication (b) Verbal communication (c) Telecommunication (d) Mass-Media of communication Code: (a) (b) (A) 2 4 (B) 2 1 (C) 2 3 (D) 3 2

: List-B 1. computer based library system 2. film scripts 3. television 4. encyclopedias

(c) 1 4 1 1

(d) 3 3 4 4

153. Assertion (A): National Information Policy is a set of decisions taken by government, through set laws and regulations. Reason (R): The primary objective of a National Information Policy is to achieve a progressive upliftment of the socio-economic development of the country through the provision of access to and availability of information and knowledge with speed. Codes: (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true (D) (A) is true, but (R) is false 154. Assertion (A): Information is the product of different human activities and events. Reason (R): Activities may be done by an individual or may be by gove rnme nt organisations. Codes: (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true (D) (A) is true, but (R) is false 155. Assertion (A): Information centres are developed for selling electronic media. Reason (R): In information centres, computerised collection & storage, machine indexing and abstracting, computerised

Multiple Choice Questions D 517 databases, online search facilities etc. are introduced. Codes: (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true (D) (A) is true, but (R) is false 156. Assertion (A): Communication is a process that involves words and non-verbal signals, a sender, receiver and medium of transmission. Reason (R): Communication problems can arise if the sender chooses an inappropriate code or medium for the message and the receiver cannot decode it. Codes: (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true (D) (A) is true, but (R) is false 157. Assertion (A): The main communication barriers include environment, language, culture, perception. Reason (R): Barriers can be overcome by paying attention to the context of communication, selecting the right medium and by trying to see things the way the receiver does. Codes: (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true (D) (A) is true, but (R) is false 158. Assertion (A): Electrocopying means the conversion of machine readable materials into printed materials form using document image processing and OCR technology. Reason (R): It is violation of copyright to convert without prior permission items owned by third parties into machine readable form and to store them on a database. Codes: (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true (D) (A) is true, but (R) is false 159. ‘Fair use’ is the norm for determining the legality of

(A) producing the second edition of a book (B) photocopying an entire book (C) making available a book to another library on inter-library loan (D) prescribing a book as a text book 160. Assertion (A): Electronic access to information is becoming easy day by day. Reason (R): The printed materials pouring out of the world presses do not show any decline. Codes: (A) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not a correct explanation of (A) (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 161. Arrange the following in chronological sequence (I) Digital Millennium Copyright Act (II) Right to Information Act. (India) (III) Information Technology Act (India) (IV) Indian Copyright Act Codes: (A) (IV), (I), (III), (II) (B) (IV), (II), (III), (I) (C) (I), (IV), (II), (III) (D) (II), (III), (I), (IV) 162. NICRYS is information system for (A) Machine tools (B) Food science (C) Crystallography (D) Drugs 163. What are the major driving forces behind an ‘Information society’? (i) R T I (ii) I. C. T. (iii) Internet (iv) I. T. ACT Codes : (A) (ii) & (i) are correct (B) (ii) & (iv) are correct (C) (i) & (iv) are correct (D) (ii) & (iii) are correct 164. Major problems of ‘Information Communication Technology’ are (i) Information overload (ii) Information insecurity (iii) Lack of innovative technologies (iv) Lack of control over communication Codes: (A) (ii) and (iv) are correct

518 D Library and Information Science Specific (B) (i) and (iv) are correct (C) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct (D) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct 165. In the infor mati on transfe r c ycle s, internet is acting as (i) Primary Publisher (ii) Secondary Publisher (iii) Tertiary Publisher (iv) Primary Distributor Codes : (A) (i), (iii) and (iv) are correct (B) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct (C) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are correct (D) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct 166. According to Machlup the difference between information and knowledge is (A) Inf ormat ion i ncre ase s w ith u se , whereas knowledge is constant. (B) Information is stimulatory, whereas knowledge is practical. (C) Information is shareable, whereas knowledge is one’s property. (D) Inform ati on is p ie c e me al, fragmented, particular, whereas knowledge is structured, coherent and universal. 167. Assertion (A): Library & Information centres are knowledge/management centres. Reason (R): Libraries handle tacit knowledge. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) (A) is partially true, but (R) is false (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 168. Assertion (A): Information Literacy is a basic skill essential for work environment in 21st century. Reason (R): Information Literacy helps to train the users to make use of ICT. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is true, but (R) is false (D) (A) is false, but (R) is true 169. Assertion (A): LIS profession is not considered at par with medical and legal professions.

Reason (R): There is no constitutional body for LIS profession like Medical Council of India (MCI) and Bar Council of India (BCI). Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 170. Assertion (A): The exclusive rights conferred by Intellectual property rights can generally be transferred / licenced to third parties. Reason (R): The creators want to make monetary benefits out of their intellectual product. Codes : (A) (A) is true but (R) is false (B) (A) is false but (R) is true (C) Both (A) & (R) are true (D) Both (A) & (R) are false 171. Assertion (A): Information Society is one where all citizens are educated. Reason (R): Society of which more than 50% population is involved in information activities. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A) (B) Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A) (C) Both (A) and (R) are false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 172. What is the correct order of SCONUL’s “Se ve n Pi llar M ode l of Inform ati on Skills” ? (i) Recognise information need (ii) Construct strategies for locating (iii) Compare and evaluate (iv) Locate and access Codes : (A) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) (B) (ii), (iii), (iv), (i) (C) (i), (ii), (iv), (iii) (D) (ii), (iii), (i), (iv) 173. Which of the following are the problems of present information environment? (i) Information indiscipline (ii) Information literacy

Multiple Choice Questions D 519 (iii) Information overload (iv) Information technology Codes : (A) (i), (iii) are correct (B) (i) and (iv) are correct (C) (ii) and (iv) are correct (D) (i) and (ii) are correct 174. Match the following : List – I List – II a. William Martin i. Little Science Big Science b. Alvin Toffler ii. Information society c. Eric J de iii. Documentation Solla Price d. S.C. Bradford iv. The Third Wave Codes: a b c d (A) ii iv iii i (B) iv ii iii i (C) ii iv i iii (D) i iv ii iii 175. The propounder of ‘Demand Theory’ for book selection is: (A) R.N. Collison (B) F.K.W. Drury (C) H. Hains (D) L.R. McColvin 176. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Information i. Social contribution to information the GNP of a nation b. Information that ii. Technological changes human information activity c. Information that iii. Economic establishes information interaction between government and people d. Information that iv. Political forms a modern information society Codes: a b c d (A) iii i iv ii (B) i iii iv ii (C) iv ii i iii (D) ii iii iv i

Read the passage below and answer the questions based on understanding of the passage. (Question Nos. 177–181) : Communication media have evolved along with technological transformations and progress. Man’s inborn need to communicate led to the first medium for the global transmission of information – the printing press, followed by the rotary printing press. But the need for information has always been in continuous growth, so that inventions such as telegraph had to be adopted for information transmission by waves. Indeed, the radio was one of the society’s great technological and democratizing advances. But there is no doubt that television has succeeded in making McLuhan’s idea of the existence of a television tribe a reality. Large companies, which control access to information by methods that are close to being a monopoly, wage fierce battles in order to control mass media, especially television. The “fourth power’ collects, disseminates and preserves a great quantity of information. This information is thematically diverse and exists in a wide variety of formats and media. In order to control such an important business asset, almost all television broadcasters have set a documentation service that is responsible for satisfying journalists’ information needs and for the maintenance of the firm’s intellectual and cultural heritage. Documentation centres are just the visible aspects of a great documentation web involving different classes of documents, varied media and the diverse requirements of end users. The computerization of documentation structures is a reality that is sustained by a constant exchange of information between documentalists and communication scientists, aimed at enabling the preservation of information and access to this information by means of a standard set of parameters. The thematic descriptors must describe, viewed and referred content in the audiovisual documents with precision. Thematic identification has a special importance since it is the usual method for accessing information. For these fields, different

520 D Library and Information Science Specific television companies use different proprietary ad hoe tools, with thesauri being the formula employed to control vocabulary. There have also been experiments aimed at developing effective tools based on faceted classifications. The fact that audiovisual information has to be analysed from two different perspectives in order to understand the challenges offered by this kind of document should be considered. The visual and the sonorous sometimes are complementary, and consequently must be studied and analysed by the information manager. Sound and visual tracks do often collaborate to create a joint informative message, but it is also very common the case where both contribute to create quite different meanings. 177. The first medium for global transmission of information was (A) Radio (B) Printing Press (C) Television (D)Telegraph 178. The intellectual and cultural heritage of television broadcasting firms is maintained by (A) Communication media (B) Journalists (C) Television (D) Setting up a documentation service 179. A standard set of parameters is needed for (A) Establishing documentation centres (B) Meeting diverse requirements of users (C) Preservation and access to information (D) Exchange of documents 180. For organizing information, television companies use tools such as (A) Thesauri (B) Faceted classification (C) Non-faceted classification (D) Thematic descriptors 181. Aud io-vi sual info rmati on has to be analysed for (A) Information management (B) Understanding the challenges offered by such documents

(C) Collaborating sound and visual tracks (D) Locating information from different places 182. First time efforts for the development of libraries in India were made (A) S. R. Ranganathan (B) S. Radhakrishnan (C) Sayaji Rao Gaekwad I (D) Sayaji Rao Gaekwad II 183. The use of CD-ROMs in the library significantly relates to which of the following Laws ? (A) First Law of Library Science (B) Second Law of Library Science (C) Fourth Law of Library Science (D) Fifth Law of Library Science 184. Resources sharing among libraries was prompted by the factors (A) Price escalation (B) Information explosion (C) Both (A) and (B) (D) None of the above 185. The Library Association (UK) is now the component of (A) ASLIB (B) CILIP (C) ALA (D) None of these 186. Which of the following professional Associations does not exist now? (A) IFLA (B) FID (C) ALA (D) IASLIC 187. Library Legislation refers to the development of (A) Academic Libraries (B) Special Libraries (C) Public Libraries (D) None of the above 188. IASLIC was founded in the year (A) 1955 (B) 1965 (C) 1975 (D)1985 189. Which Bibliometrics Law describes the frequency of publication by authors in a given field? (A) Lotka’s Law (B) Zipf’s Law (C) Bradford’s Law (D)None of these 190. Number of States in India which have enacted Public Library Legislation till date is (A) Seven (B) Ten (C) Thirteen (D)Ninetee n

Multiple Choice Questions D 521 191. ‘Five Laws of Library Science’ was first published in (A) 1925 (B) 1930 (C) 1931 (D)1933 192. NAAC stands for (A) National Accreditation and Authority Council (B) Northern Accreditation and Authorities Committee (C) National Assessment and Accreditation Council (D) Northern Assessment and Accreditation Council 193. Who is the Father of Library Movement in USA? (A) F. W. Lancaster (B) Paul Wasserman (C) Melvil Dewey (D) Samuel Sweet Green 194. ‘Union List’ is the record of (A) Library members living in a Union Territory (B) Periodicals available in a group of libraries (C) Library unions located in a Union Territory (D) List of members of a Library Union 195. In “Spiral of Scientific Method”, Zenith marks (A) Facts (B) Empirical laws (C) Fundamental laws (D) Deduced laws 196. Which library is authorized to receive books under ‘Delivery of Books Act’? (A) National Science Library, Delhi (B) National Library, Kolkatta (C) State Central Library, Mumbai (D) Parliament Library, Delhi 197. All Union Institute for Scientific and Technical Information (VINITI) was established in (A) 1952 (B) 1953 (C) 1954 (D)1956 198. Amendment to ‘Delivery of Books (Public Libraries) and Newspapers Act’ was enacted in India in the year

(A) 1952 (C) 1956

(B) 1954 (D) 1962

199. Zipf’s Law deals with (A) Scattering of articles in a subject (B) Productivity of authors in terms of scientific papers (C) Frequency of occurrence of words in a text (D) Law of book selection 200. Jubilee Project is associated with what? (A) Evaluation of electronic information services (B) Public library survey (C) Strategic management of libraries (D) Scale development 201. The publisher of “Information Power : Building Partnership for Learning” is (A) AASL (B) AECT (C) ALA (D) ILA 202. In 1974, Zurkowski used for the first time which of the following term? (A) Digital Literacy (B) Media Literacy (C) Computer Literacy (D) Information Literacy 203. Which one of the following is not a virtual library? (A) Without walls. (B) With distributed physical locations. (C) Providing integrated and unified remote access to geographically distributed collections. (D) Which does not exist in reality. 204. The UK Information Highways for Information and Collaborative Research is (A) BLAISE (B) UKERNA (C) Super JANET (D) BIDS 205. Who defined “to be information literate, a person must be able to recognize when information is needed and have the ability to locate, evaluate and use effectively the needed information”? (A) SLA (B) ALA (C) IFLA (D) CILIP 206. Semantic differential scale is concerned with (A) Pool of items (B) Selection from two opposite positions (C) Five point scale (D) Selection from a check list

522 D Library and Information Science Specific 207. Which State Public Library Act has the provision to collect library fund through land tax? (A) Tamil Nadu (B) Karnataka (C) Andhra Pradesh (D) Maharashtra 208. Association of College and Research Libraries (ACRL) (USA) is a (A) Division of American Library Association (B) Independent Association for Academic & Research Libraries (C) Division of Special Libraries Association (USA) (D) Division of IFLA 209. Which of the following is not an implication of Fourth Law of Library Science? (A) Classified arrangement (B) Stack-room-guides (C) Issue Methods (D) Rural Library Services 210. INSDOC has been merged with NISCOM and is now known as (A) DELNET (B) NISCAIR (C) DESIDOC (D)NASSDOC 211. In which year headquarter of FID was shifted from Brussels to The Hague? (A) 1925 (B) 1928 (C) 1930 (D) 1934 212. Who gave the sixth law of library science “Every reader his/her freedom”? (A) Walt Crawford (B) Michael Gorman (C) James R. Rettig (D) Lenart Bjorneborn 213. Where was the first library noticed in India? (A) Taxila (B) Nalanda (C) Vallabhi (D) Sravasti 214. Who published the journal international classification? (A) IFLA (B) UNESCO (C) ISKO (D) ALA

217. Which law of Library Science relates to the growth of libraries? (A) Forth law (B) First law (C) Second law (D) Fifth law 218. UAP stands for which of the following? (A) United Academy of Publication (B) Universal Association of Publishers (C) Universal Availability of Publications (D) Universal Association of Publishers 219. The five laws of Library Science were published in the book form in the year (A) 1924 (B) 1931 (C) 1928 (D) 1930 220. Library Technology Report is a publication of (A) ALA (B) IASLIC (C) LA (D) ILA 221. ABGILA is a quarterly publication of (A) Assam Library Association (B) Andhra Desa Library Association (C) Indian Library Association (D) Raja Ram Mohan Roy Foundation 222. The Librarian Day is celebrated on (A) 15th Sep (B) 24th Nov (C) 11th Dec (D) 12th Aug 223. The World Information Report 1997/1998 was brought out by (A) IFLA (B) FID (C) ICSU (D) UNESCO 224. The first library school was started by (A) Melvin Dewey (B) Charles Williamson (C) John Macfarlane (D) William Allenson Borden 225. UNESCO launched UNISIST programme in (A) 1970 (B) 1972 (C) 1975 (D) 1978 226. AGRIS became operational in 1975 and sponsored by (A) WHO (B) FAO (C) ILO (D) IAEA

215. Which association in India awards teachers in LIS? (A) IATLIS (B) ILA (C) IASLIC (D) SIS

227. The Population Information Network (POPIN) was established with the support of (A) FAO (B) CARIS (C) UNISIST (D) IDRC

216. Where is the headquarter of SLA? (A) Alexandria, Virginia (B) Lagos (C) Shimla (D) New Delhi

228. Which Law of library science emphasises on the growth of children and adults?

Multiple Choice Questions D 523 (A) First Law (C) Fifth law

(B) Second law (D) Fourth law

229. Which Law of library science is satisfied by organising extension services? (A) First law (B) Second law (C) Third law (D) Fifth law 230. The name of the Journal published by DRTC is (A) Indian Library Science Abstract (B) Library Science with a slant to Documentation (C) Annuals of Library Science and Documentation (D) None of the above 231. The DRTC was started in 1962 at (A) Hyderabad (B) Mumbai (C) Banglore (D) Delhi 232. Which Law of library science emphasises on weeding of unuseful books from the library? (A) Second law (B) Third law (C) Fourth law (D) Fifth law 233. Resource sharing is a part of (A) Library cooperation (B) Library administration (C) Library management (D) Library cataloguing 234. What is the meaning of inter library loan? (A) Loan of library (B) Loan of books (C) Loan of money (D) Loan of books from other libraries 235. Shared cataloguing is an example of (A) union catalogue (B) centralized cataloguing (C) resource sharing (D) inter library loan 236. Inter Library Resources centre established in India at (A) J.N.U. New Delhi (B) National Information Centre (C) INSDOC (D) DELNET 237. The person who first started to work for library development in India was (A) Ranganathan (B) Dikinson (C) W. Borden (D) Viswanathan 238. FID was founded by (A) Paul otlet and Herri La Fontaine

(B) Ranganathan and Bhattacharya (C) Venkataraman and Neelaeghan (D) Sayers and Batty 239. Which of the following is not a part of resource sharing? (A) Acquisition of books (B) Circulation of books (C) Personnel management (D) Collection management 240. Library movement in India was started in the year (A) 1900 (B) 1905 (C) 1910 (D) 1915 241. What must be essential in member libraries for sharing in networking system? (A) Ambition of cooperation (B) Earnesty of actively engaged (C) Both the above (D) None of the above 242. What is Bold Model in resource sharing? (A) Resources related to tools (B) Services related to tools (C) Books related to tools (D) Books and other reading material 243. What has made networking such a convenient and effective process today? (A) Information technology (B) Computer (C) Satellite (D) Telecommunication 244. What is called the arrangement in which two or more than two institutions work together to share their resources with each other? (A) Unified system (B) Resource sharing (C) Networking system (D) Information system 245. The Association for Information management was formerly known as (A) Association for Special Libraries and Information Bureux (ASLIB) (B) LA of UK (C) ALA (D) IASLIC 246. Staff exchange is the part of (A) resource sharing (B) personnel management

524 D Library and Information Science Specific (C) cooperative cataloguing (D) inter library loan 247. W. Bordan started refresher course for librarians in Baroda State in the year (A) 1911 (B) 1912 (C) 1910 (D) 1915 248. Whether staff exchange is being done in the libraries of India (A) N o (B) Not possible (C) Ye s (D) Held in past 249. Who was called by Siyaji Rao Gaikwad III for improving the conditions of Baroda state’s libraries? (A) A. Dikinson (B) Foskett (C) W. Bordan (D) Browne 250. Now a days what is the meaning of library networking? (A) Information and computer network (B) Computer network (C) Traditional network (D) Information network 251. What is the first component of a Library Act? (A) Finance (B) Library Committee (C) Preliminaries (D) Top management 252. In 1928, where Dr. Ranganathan was working? (A) A student at London School of Librarianship (B) Libration of the University of Madras (C) Lecturer in Mathematics at University of Madras (D) Professor in Delhi University 253. The fifth law of Library Science says that (A) library grows slowly (B) library does not grow (C) library is a growing organism (D) library is a growing organisation 254. There is no provision of matching grant in which State’s Library Act? (A) Madras (B) Andhra Pradesh (C) W. Bengal (D) Karnataka 255. Who amongst the following librarian was called by Punjab university? (A) A. Dikinson (B) W. Borden (C) A. Pannizi (D) P. Charles

256. What are called the set of norms, percepts and guides to good practice in librarianship? (A) Five Laws (B) Five Laws of Library Science (C) Colon Classification (D) Canons of Cataloging 257. JOCLAI is: (A) Joint Council of Library and Information Science (B) Journal of Cataloguing and Information Science (C) Joint Council of Library Association of India (D) None of the above 258. ‘No library is self sufficient in terms of its resources to meet the needs of its users’ this statement leads libraries towards (A) formation of Library Society (B) need of Scientific Management (C) library Cooperation and re source sharing (D) enactment of Library Legislation 259. What do you mean by Library Act? (A) It means to prepare law (B) It means to prepare format of law or legislation (C) It means to make library services compulsory (D) It means to prepare rules for librarie s 260. Resource Sharing is not possible in area of (A) library functions (B) library material (C) library users (D) library services 261. The centenary of the FID was celebrated in the year (A) 1985 (B) 1987 (C) 1992 (D) 1995 262. In which State of India, the first Public Library Act in 1948 was passed? (A) Madras (B) Maharashtra (C) Karnataka (D) Andhra Pradesh 263. Match the following: List A 1. Maharashtra Public Libraries Act

List B (a) 1960

Multiple Choice Questions D 525 2. Andhra Pradesh Public (b) 1965 Libraries Act 3. Karnataka Public (c) 1989 Libraries Act 4. Kerala Public (d) 1967 Libraries Act (e) 1975 (A) 1 - (d), 2 - (a), 3 - (b), 4 - (c) (B) 1 - (b), 2 - (c), 3 - (d), 4 - (a) (C) 1 - (c), 2 - (b), 3 - (e), 4 - (d) (D) 1 - (e), 2 - (b), 3 - (c), 4 - (a) 264. Hunte r Commission e mphasize d on which of the following? (A) Establishment of public libraries (B) Establishment of school libraries (C) Establishment of schools (D) Establishment of school and college libraries 265. Which organisation established Delhi Public Library in 1950 in India? (A) National Library of India (B) Government of India (C) Government of Delhi (D) Government of India and UNESCO 266. Who thought first about library legislation in India? (A) Borden (B) P.N. Kaula (C) Ranganathan (D) Kesavan 267. When library act was enacted in England ? (A) 1850 (B) 1825 (C) 1800 (D) 1900 268. The oldest and largest library association in India is (A) LA (B) ALA (C) ILA (D) IASLIC 269. Which commission was first set up by British Government for the development of libraries in India? (A) Kothari Commission (B) Hunter Commission (C) Robert Commission (D) Sadler Commission 270. Inter Library Resource Centre was established in the premises of Jawaharlal Nehru University by (A) INSDOC (B) CSS (C) NASSDOC (D) Delhi University 271. When Calcutta Public Library was established ?

(A) 1836 (C) 1850

(B) 1890 (D) 1845

272. Which was the first Public Libraries Act in India? (A) Andhra Pradesh Public Libraries Act (B) Madras Public Libraries Act (C) Karnataka Public Libraries Act (D) Maharashtra Public Libraries Act 273. Whose name is related with Imperial Library Act? (A) M. K. Gandhi (B) J. L. Nehru (C) Lord Curzon (D) Lord Minto 274. When American Library Association (ALA) was established (A) 1850 (B) 1890 (C) 1880 (D) 1876 275. The Hunter Commission was setup in India in the year (A) 1880 (B) 1882 (C) 1907 (D) 1917 276. When was library act in Russia enacted? (A) 1850 (B) 1961 (C) 1921 (D) 1876 277. Inter Library Resource Centre (ILRC) established in 1975 is located at (A) Mumbai (B) Kolkata (C) Chennai (D) Delhi 278. When Imperial Library Act was passed? (A) 1905 (B) 1902 (C) 1900 (D) 1907 279. Perry Committee in Great Britain was set up for (A) college libraries (B) university libraries (C) public libraries (D) school libraries 280. Which organisation se t up Ranganathan Committee (1957)? (A) Government of India (B) CSIR (C) UGC (D) Ministry of Education

the

281. Why was Wadia Committee (1967) set up ? (A) University libraries (B) New techniques of library services (C) For university education (D) New techniques of library training

526 D Library and Information Science Specific 282. Extension services in the libraries are the ultimate objective to enjoy the benefit of library service. This definition was given by (A) Calvin Moorse (B) McColvin (C) Ranganathan (D) Foskette

290. Who was the chairman of Working Group on Libraries? (A) K. P. Sinha (B) V. K. R. V. Rao (C) C. D. Deshmukh (D) Dr. Ranganathan

283. Mudaliar Commission in India was specially setup for the development of education in (A) secondary education (B) higher education (C) primary education (D) education for all

291. Who was awarded first Ph.D. degree in Library Science by Delhi University? (A) D. B. Krishnarao (B) S. R. Ranganathan (C) P. N. Kaula (D) Pandey S. K. Sharma

284. Kenyan Committee in Great Britain was set up for the development of which type of libraries? (A) School libraries (B) Public libraries (C) College libraries (D) Special libraries 285. Which of the following commissions was first set up in free India for the development of education and libraries? (A) Ranganathan Commission (B) Kothari Commission (C) UGC (D) Radhakrishnan Commission 286. The provision of study centres, timing of stories, exhibitions, etc. to illiterate persons is the form of which service of the libraries ? (A) Additional services (B) Reference services (C) Extension services (D) Information services 287. Who was the chairman of Library Advisory Committee (1957)? (A) Ranganathan (B) Kothari (C) Radhakrishnan (D) K. P. Sinha 288. The Working Group on Libraries was set up by whom to study about the libraries in India ? (A) Planning Commission (B) UGC (C) Education Department (D) Government of India 289. When Mudaliar Commission was set up? (A) 1955 (B) 1952 (C) 1956 (D) 1963

292. International Information System on Research in Documentation (ISORID) was established by (A) UNESCO (B) IDRC (C) ICSU (D) OECD 293. In which university, the first school in librarianship was started? (A) New York State University (B) Columbia University (C) Oxford University (D) Washington University 294. Which university awarded first Ph.D. degree in library science? (A) Calcutta University (B) Delhi University (C) Bombay University (D) Madras University 295. Which university of India first changed the Diploma course to degree course in Library Science? (A) Delhi University (B) BHU, Varanasi (C) Madras University (D) AMU, Aligarh 296. In which university of India, the first Diploma Course in Library Science was started in 1937 by Dr. Ranganathan? (A) Madras University (B) BHU, Varanasi (C) AMU, Aligarh (D) Delhi University 297. Which Law of Library Science advocates the universalisation and democratisation of library service? (A) First Law (B) Second Law (C) Third Law (D) Fourth Law 298. Which university first started M.Lib. Sc. course in India? (A) Madras University

Multiple Choice Questions D 527 (B) BHU, Varanasi (C) Delhi University (D) AMU, Aligarh 299. Dr. S. R. Ranganathan was President of Indian Library Association in the year (A) 1942-1944 (B) 1944-1953 (C) 1953-1960 (D) 1960-1962 300. Dr. S. R. Ranganathan was appointed librarian of the University of Madras in (A) 1923 (B) 1925 (C) 1926 (D) 1930 301. Which of the following is the largest and oldest library association in the world? (A) Indian Library Association (B) American Library Association (C) Library Association (UK) (D) IASLIC 302. What is called service occupation? (A) A man earns money (B) A man earns money by serving others (C) A man serves other (D) A man earns money by selling his services to others 303. The status of a university librarian was said equivalent to whom by Sadler Commission (1917)? (A) Vice Chancellor (B) Library Committee (C) Professor (D) Principal 304. Whether librarianship is a profession? (A) Yes, as the librarian serves different types of the users, and gets salary (B) No, as the librarian is not qualified, and gets salary (C) Yes, as the librarian is the senior most member, and gets salary (D) Yes, as the librarian is the incharge of the library, and gets salary 305. In which year second Ph.D. degree in library science was awarded to Pandey S.K. Sharma ? (A) 1977, Punjab University (B) 1967, Vikram University (C) 1977, Aligarh University (D) 1967, Delhi University 306. Where is the head quarter of American Library Association?

(A) New York (C) Philadelphia

(B) Washington (D) Chicago

307. What course in library science is being imparted by INSDOC? (A) Ph.D. degree (B) M.Lib. I.Sc. (C) M. Phil. (D) Associateship in information science 308. What is the aim of a profe ssional organisation ? (A) Development of professional techniques (B) Functions like the labour organisation (C) Functions for its members for their development (D) Functions as employment exchange 309. What is the meaning of profession? (A) Operations executed with the help of others (B) Operations executed oneself (C) Occupational operations executed with the help of others (D) None of the above 310. When was American Library Association established? (A) 1876 (B) 1872 (C) 1875 (D) 1880 311. What course in library science is being imparted by DRTC? (A) B.Lib. Sc. degree (B) Master degree (C) MSLIS and Research degree (D) Associateship 312. ‘Kalanidhi’ a national information system and data bank for arts, humanities and cultural heritage was setup by (A) ICCR (B) ICHR (C) ICPR (D) IGNCA 313. What was the original name of British Library Association? (A) BLA (B) Library Association (UK) (C) Association of British Library (D) Library Association 314. When was Special Library Association constituted in USA? (A) 1894 (B) 1902 (C) 1900 (D) 1909 315. When Carnegie Medal was first started by Library Association?

528 D Library and Information Science Specific (A) 1930 (C) 1938

(B) 1935 (D) 1933

316. What is called the National Library Association? (A) Association of library personnels of national level (B) National level Association of persons engaged in library profession (C) Association of library personnels of many nations (D) An association of library personnels whose leader is of national level 317. When was Library Association in England set up? (A) 1876 (B) 1877 (C) 1874 (D) 1872 318. Who was the se cond pe rson with Ranganathan who did efforts for setting up ILA? (A) Viswanathan (B) P. N. Kaula (C) Keshvan (D) Bulner 319. What is the name of national library association of India? (A) Indian Library Association (B) Libraries of India Association (C) Association of Libraries in India (D) Library Association of India 320. Which of the following library associations was first set up at state level? (A) UP Library Association (B) Madras Library Association (C) Delhi Library Association (D) Maharashtra Library Association 321. What is the name of quarterly journal of ILA? (a) ILA Journal (b) ILA Bulletin (c) Library Literature (d) Quarterly Journal of ILA 322. Why Andrew Carnegi is famous? (A) Carnegi endowment (B) For staff formula (C) Library (D) Library classifier 323. According to the First law, the location of the library should be (A) At a central place (B) At long distance

(C) At nearer place (D) At outsider place 324. When ILA organised its Golden Jubilee? (A) 1972 (B) 1973 (C) 1983 (D) 1982 325. Who took active part in constituting ILA ? (A) Radhakrishnan (B) K. B. Sinha (C) Swaminathan (D) Ranganathan 326. Where was the first one year P.G. Diploma Course in Library Scie nce in India started ? (A) Calcutta University (B) Madras University (C) Banaras Hindu University (D) Delhi University 327. When IASLIC was setup in India? (A) 1952 (B) 1948 (C) 1955 (D) 1965 328. The birth centenary of S. R. Ranganathan was celebrated in India in the year (A) 1987 (B) 1989 (C) 1990 (D) 1992 329. IASLIC is an association of which type of libraries? (A) Academic libraries (B) Public libraries (C) Special libraries (D) School librarie s 330. Who established the first school of Library Science education in U.S.A.? (A) Melvil Dewey (B) William A Borden (C) E.C. Richardson (D) None of the above 331. Dr. S.R. Ranganathan was appointed National Research Professor of Library Science in (A) 1960 (B) 1962 (C) 1965 (D) 1966 332. First Indian University that started the M.Lib.Sc. and M.Phil. courses is (A) University of Delhi (B) Calcutta University (C) Aligarh Muslim University (D) Madras University 333. The Interagency Development Research Information System (IDRTS) data base is available through

Multiple Choice Questions D 529 (A) IDRC (C) OECD

(B) ICSU (D) UNISIST

334. What is the full form of IASLIC? (A) Indian Association of Special Library Centres (B) International Association of Special Libraries (C) International Association of School Library Centres (D) Indian Association of Special Libraries & Information Centres 335. Name the Indian institutions offering Library and Information Science education for special Libraries. (A) DRTC, Bangalore (B) INSDOC, New Delhi (C) Both (A) and (B) (D) None of the above 336. Dr. ary at (A) (B) (C) (D)

Ranganathan was appointed honorprofessor of Library Science in 1947 Madras University Banaras Hindu University Delhi University None of the above

337. In which year was the first School of Library Science in U.S.A. started? (A) 1880 (B) 1887 (C) 1890 (D) 1910 338. Name the institution in India that offers courses in Library Science for women candidates only. (A) SNDT Women’s University, Mumbai (B) IT College Lucknow (C) Both (A) and (B) (D) None of the above 339. How JOCLAI is composed of? (A) ILA and IASLIC (B) IATLIS, GILA, ILA (C) Associations of state levels (D) With the help of Associations of national and state levels 340. What is ABGILA? (A) Periodical of library science (B) Current serial (C) Library (D) Association of library science

341. LASLIC was founded in …… at ……… : (A) 1955, Kolkata (B) 1935, New Delhi (C) 1942, Mumbai (D) 1950, Lucknow 342. When was COMLA setup? (A) 1968 (B) 1972 (C) 1974 (D) 1980 343. When was ABGILA started? (A) 1955 (B) 1949 (C) 1950 (D) 1954 344. Which one is the library association of international level? (A) ILA (B) BLA (C) ALA (D) IFLA 345. Where is the head quarter of IFLA? (A) London (B) New York (C) France (D) The Hague 346. In which country was COMLA constituted? (A) India (B) Britain (C) France (D) Nigeria 347. ILA is a member of (A) FID (B) IFLA and COMLA (C) UNESCO (D) None of the above 348. Who was se le cte d first Pre side nt of COMLA ? (A) C.A. Cutter (B) Melvil Dewey (C) Anthony Pannizi (D) K.C. Harison 349. Who was first President of IFLA? (A) Issac Collijn (B) T. Viswanathan (C) S.R. Ranganathan (D) Swaminathan 350. When was the publication of ABGILA stopped? (A) 1949 (B) 1955 (C) 1953 (D) 1957 351. What is the name of News Bulletin of FID that is being published since 1973? (A) FID News Bulletin (B) Journal of FID (C) FID Bulletin of Current News (D) FID News Journal 352. When was the name of FID changed to International Federation of Documentation and Information?

530 D Library and Information Science Specific (A) 1925 (C) 1942

(B) 1931 (D) 1935

353. Who started to think first about universal bibliographical control? (A) ALA (B) IFLA (C) FID (D) ILA 354. What is the name of prize, that was declared by FID to promote researches in the field of classification? (A) Dewey Award for Classification (B) Dewey Award in UDC Research (C) Ranganathan Award for Classification Research (D) Ranganathan Award for Research 355. What was the early name of FID? (A) International Institute of Bibliography (B) Institute of Directory (C) Documentation Institute (D) Institute for Documentation 356. The name of FID is related to which of the following? (A) AACR (B) Library of Congress (C) UDC (D) British Museum 357. Achievements in Science and Technology (1962-) is an annual review started by (A) VINITI (B) INSDOC (C) BLAISE (D) NLM 358. Where is the head quarter of FID? (A) London (B) New York (C) Paris (D) Hague 359. There is a subcommittee FID/ET of FID, what does ET mean in it? (A) Education and Teaching (B) Education and Training (C) Electrical Technology (D) English Translation 360. Who are related with the establishment of FID ? (A) Dewey (B) Sayers and McColvin (C) Margret Mann (D) Paul Otlet and Henry La Fontane 361. Which organisation established UNESCO? (A) ALA (B) UNO (C) World Science Centre (D) Government of USA

362. What is the name of software package developed by UNESCO? (A) Sanjay (B) Librarian (C) CDS/ISIS (D) Maitreyee 363. Who publishe d UNISIST Re fe re nce Manual? (A) ISO (B) BSO (C) UNESCO (D) IFLA 364. Which organisation promoted Information Exchange system of science and technology policy? (A) UNIDO (B) UNESCO (C) IAEA (D) ILO 365. General Information Programme (PGI) was started by (A) IFLA (B) FID (C) UNESCO (D) ALA 366. Which is the parent organisation of UNISIST ? (A) UNESCO (B) UNO (C) FAO (D) UNIDO 367. UNESCO celebrated which year as International Book year? (A) 1970 (B) 1972 (C) 1975 (D) 1974 368. Five laws of Library Science are a set of norms to good practice in (A) society (B) libraries (C) librarianship (D) library science 369. Which law of the Library Science indicates that the documents of the library should be brought out to the notice of the users? (A) First law (B) Second law (C) Third law (D) Fourth law 370. Match the following: List A 1. Melvil Dewey 2. S. C. Bradford 3. S. R. Ranganathan 4. Paul Otlet (A) (B) (C) (D)

1-(c), 1-(b), 1-(a), 1-(d),

List B (a) India (b) London (c) U.S.A. (d) China (e ) Belgium 2-(b), 3-(a), 4-(e) 2-(d), 3-(e), 4-(a) 2-(c), 3-(b), 4-(d) 2-(a), 3-(e), 4-(b)

371. In which law of Library Science, the concept of ‘Child and Adult Growth’ has been discussed?

Multiple Choice Questions D 531 (A) First law (C) Third law

(B) Second law (D) Fifth law

372. The Tamil Nadu (Madras) Public Libraries Act provides for Library cess to be levied by (A) State Government (B) Local Government (C) Central Government (D) None of these 373. Reading centres, story hours, exhibitions and reading to illiterates are forms of (A) extension service (B) service of a public library (C) Both (A) and (B) (D) none of the above 374. The model Public Library Act was presented by S. R. Ranganathan in 1930 at (A) All Asia Educational Conference (B) Andhra Desh Library Association Conference (C) India Public Library Conference (D) Madras Library Association Conference 375. Which organisation e stablishe d UNESCO? (A) ALA (B) UNO (C) Government of USA (D) World Science Centre 376. Extension service is a special feature of (A) university library (B) college library (C) public library (D) all the libraries 377. Which term was coined by Ranganathan for mobile library? (A) Moving library (B) Library on wheels (C) Librarchine (D) All the above 378. In which state Public Libraries Act has no provision for matching grant? (A) West Bengal (B) Andhra Pradesh (C) Maharashtra (D) Karnataka 379. Assertion (A). A Library legislation provides proper governance and management.

Reason (R). It ensures free public library service to all irrespective of caste, creed and sex. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is true, but (R) is false (D) (A) is false, but (R) is true 380. Arrange the following in the chronological sequence of their development. (i) ISBD (ii) CCF (iii) UNIMARC (iv) MARC Codes : (A) (iv), (ii), (i), (iii) (B) (iv), (i), (ii), (iii) (C) (iii), (ii), (iv), (i) (D) (i), (iv), (ii), (iii) 381. Arrange the following professional Associations according to the year of their establishment: (i) ILA (ii) IASLIC (iii) ALA (iv) ASLIB Codes : (A) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) (B) (iii), (iv), (i), (ii) (C) (iv), (iii), (ii), (i) (D) (i), (iii), (ii), (iv) 382. When UNESCO was established as an agency? (A) 1945 (B) 1946 (C) 1950 (D) 1955 383. Who has signed an MoU for Accreditation of Teacher Education Institutions in India? (A) NAAC and UGC (B) NCTE and NAAC (C) UGC and NCTE (D) NCTE and IGNOU 384. What is the name of prize, that was declared by FID to promote researches in the field of classification? (A) FID News Bulletin (B) Journal of FID (C) FID News Journal (D) FID Bulletin of Current News 385. Resource sharing among libraries was prompted by the factors (A) Price escalation (B) Information explosion

532 D Library and Information Science Specific (C) Both (A) and (B) (D) None of the above 386. The Library Association (UK) is now the component of (A) ASLIB (B) CILIP (C) ALA (D) None of these 387. International classification of library was done by (A) J.D. Brown (B) H.E. Bliss (C) F. Rider (D) Melvil Dewey 388. Who was the director of the seminar of UNESCO’s second public libraries meeting, held in 1950? (A) Cyril O. Houle (B) B. Powell (C) Ranganathan (D) Yvonne Oddon 389. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Library of Congress (i) 1952 (b) INSDOC (ii) 1954 (c) Delivery of Books Act (iii) 1903 (d) Imperial Library, Calcutta (iv) 1800 Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (B) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (C) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (D) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 390. Arrange the following Laws of Library Science as given by Ranganathan: (i) Save the time of the reader (ii) Books are for use (iii) Every book has its reader (iv) Every Reader has his book Codes : (A) (ii), (iv), (iii), (i) (B) (iv), (ii), (i), (iii) (C) (ii), (i), (iv), (iii) (D) (iii), (ii), (i), (iv) 391. Arrange the following Public Library Acts according to their year of enactment : (i) Pondicherry (ii) Madras (iii) Haryana (iv) Orissa Codes : (A) (iv), (iii), (i), (ii) (B) (ii), (iii), (i), (iv) (C) (ii), (i), (iv), (iii) (D) (iii), (ii), (i), (iv)

392. Arrange the following in chronological order: (i) Fayzee Committee (ii) K. P. Sinha Committee (iii) Chattopadhyaya Committee (iv) Radhakrishnan Committee Codes : (A) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) (B) (iv), (iii), (i), (ii) (C) (i), (iv), (ii), (iii) (D) (iii), (i), (ii), (iv) 393. Arrange the following in chronological order: (i) ISBD (ii) MARC (iii) CCF (iv) Resource De scription and Access (RDA) Codes : (A) (ii), (i), (iii), (iv) (C) (iii), (iv), (i), (ii)

(B) (i), (iv), (iii), (ii) (D) (ii), (iv), (i), (iii)

394. Assertion (A). According to the fifth Law of Library Science, Library is a growing organization. Reason (R). All resources of library are supposed to grow. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are false (D) Both (A) and (R) are true 395. Identify the correct order as per year of establishment (i) ASLIB (ii) IATLIS (iii) SLA (iv) ALA Codes : (A) (iv), (iii), (i), (ii) (B) (iv), (ii), (i), (iii) (C) (ii), (i), (iv), (iii) (D) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) 396. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) AACR-1 (i) 1978 (b) AACR-2 (ii) 1967 (c) ALA code (iii) 1934 (d) CCC (iv) 1939

Multiple Choice Questions D 533 Codes : (A) (B) (C) (D)

(a) (iv) (ii) (i) (ii)

(b) (ii) (i) (iii) (i)

(c) (iii) (iii) (iv) (iv)

(d) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii)

397. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Books in print (i) Bibliography of periodicals (b) Ulrich (ii) Trade International Bibliography Periodical Directory (c) World of (iii) Biographical Learning source (d) Who’s Who (iv) Directory in India Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (B) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (C) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (D) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) 398. Match the following : List – I List – II (A) NTC (i) UK (B) ITC (ii) India (C) BLDSC (iii) Netherlands (D) NISCAIR (iv) USA Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (B) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (C) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (D) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 399. Assertion (A). ISBDs were devised by UNESCO. Reason (R). They are the standards for all types of bibliographic activities. Codes: (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 400. Assertion (A). Provision of services outside the library regular service centre or outlet is essential to reach more and more patrons.

Reason (R). Library extension services help libraries to cover larger population of patrons. (A) (A) is true but (R) is false (B) (A) is false but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 401. Arrange the following chronologically according to their year of Birth (I) S.R. Ranganathan (II) Melvil Dewey (III) C.A. Cutter (IV) B.S. Kesvan Codes : (A) (II), (I), (IV), (III) (B) (I), (III), (IV), (II) (C) (III), (II), (I), (IV) (D) (IV), (I), (II), (III) 402. Arrange the following according to their development (I) CCC (II) ISBD (III) CCF (IV) MARC II Codes : (A) (I), (IV), (II), (III) (B) (I), (II), (IV), (III) (C) (I), (IV), (III), (II) (D) (IV), (II), (III), (I) 403. Which are the face ts re lating INFLIBNET? (i) CALIBER (ii) PLANNER (iii) UGC-INFONET (iv) SOUL Of these : (A) (i), (iii) and (iv) are related (B) (i), (ii) and (iii) are related (C) (iii), (ii) and (i) are related (D) all of these are related

to

404. Match the following and choose the correct answer from the codes given below List – I List – II (a) Asiatic Society 1. Kolkata Library (b) Connemara 2. Chennai Public Library (c) Khuda Bux 3. Patna Oriental Library (d) Saraswati Mahal 4. Tanjore Library

534 D Library and Information Science Specific Codes : (a) (A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 1 (D) 2

(b) 2 3 2 1

(c) 3 4 4 3

(d) 4 1 3 4

405. In the library legislation in India (i) The first library legislation was enacted in 1948 in Madras (ii) The Sinha Committee (Advisory Committee) set up by the Government of India in 1957 (iii) Recommendations of Chattopadhyaya committee set up by the Government of India in 1986 (iv) The model Public Library Act was presented by S.R. Ranganthan in 1911 Codes: (A) only (i) and (ii) are correct (B) only (i) and (iii) are correct (C) only (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct (D) None of the above are correct 406. Various characteristics of Library and Information networks is/are (A) Equal Opportunity of Access (B) Interdependence (C) Standards and Quality (D) All of the above 407. Assertion (A): In 1933 with the efforts of Dr. Ranganathan Indian Library Association was founded on legal basis. Reason (R): The ILA aims at establishing high standards of librarianship and library services in the country. Codes: (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 408. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Carnegie Medal (i) Best reference work (b) Wheatley (ii) Outstanding Medal index (c) Besterman (iii) Outstanding Medal bibliography (d) McColvin (iv) Best children’s Medal work

Codes : (a) (A) (ii) (B) (iv) (C) (iii) (D) (ii)

(b) (iii) (ii) (ii) (iii)

(c) (iv) (iii) (i) (i)

(d) (i) (i) (iv) (iv)

409. Arrange the following in chronological order: (i) Google incorporated (ii) Amazon launched (iii) Facebook founded (iv) Launch of the first generation i-phone and the kindle Codes: (A) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) (B) (ii), (i), (iii), (iv) (C) (iii), (ii), (i), (iv) (D) (ii), (iii), (i), (iv) 410. Match the following : List – I List – II (Product of Library (Period) Association Publishing Ltd.) (a) Applied Social Index (i) Quarterly and Abstracts (b) Journal of (ii) Bi-Monthly Librarianship (c) Current Technology (iii) Bi-weekly Index (d) Library and (iv) Monthly Information Science Abstracts Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (B) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (C) (ii) (ii) (i) (iv) (D) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) 411. Assertion (A): User education is constituted of the four interrelated components. Reason (R): Library orientation and bibliographic instruction form the basic components of user education Codes: (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 412. “Library user should have access to more materials or services providing level service at level cost, increased service at

Multiple Choice Questions D 535 level cost, or much more service at less cost”. This statement was given by (A) Kaula (B) Allen Kent, Bhargava (C) Dr. Ranganathan (D) J. Powell 413. Assertion (A): Library association are learned societies. Reason (R): Their aim is to provide a common forum for library professionals for exchange of information, ideas, experiences and expertise, work for the betterment of salaries, grades, service conditions, status etc. of library professionals. Codes: (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 414. There is a subcommittee FID/ET of FID, what does ET mean in it? (A) Education and Teaching (B) Education and Training (C) English Translation (D) Electrical Technology 415. The salient features of Model Library and Information Services Act in 1995 was (i) Start Library and Information Service, based on a State Policy. (ii) Constitution of State Library and Information Services. (iii) Accountability of Public Expenditure and Services. (iv) Constitution of Local Library Authority (LLA) for each city and one for each district. Codes: (A) only (i) and (ii) are correct (B) only (i) and (iii) are correct (C) only (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct (D) only (ii) and (iv) are correct 416. Arrange the following in correct order (i) First Ph.D in LIS in India (ii) LIS education in India started (iii) IT and its impact on LIS education and Library Management seminar (iv) Se minar on LIS e ducation in the internet era

Codes: (A) (ii), (iii), (i), (B) (i), (ii), (iv), (C) (ii), (i), (iv), (D) (ii), (i), (iii),

(iv) (iii) (iii) (iv)

417. Arrange the following in correct order (i) Karnataka Public Libraries Act (ii) Madras Public Libraries Act (iii) Haryana Public Libraries Act (iv) Andhra Pradesh Public Libraries Act Codes: (A) (ii), (i), (iv), (iii) (B) (iv), (ii), (iii), (i) (C) (ii), (iv), (i), (iii) (D) (ii), (iii), (iv), (i) 418. Arrange the following in chronological order: (i) DRTC Bangalore (ii) Connemara Public Library (iii) Sarswati Mahal Library (iv) Khuda Baksha Oriental Public Library Codes: (A) (i), (iv), (iii), (ii) (B) (ii), (iii), (iv), (i) (C) (ii), (iv), (iii), (i) (D) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) 419. Arrange the following cataloguing and Bibliographic description standards in chronological order: (i) MARC (ii) ISBD (iii) CCF (iv) AACR-II Codes: (A) (i), (iii), (ii), (iv) (B) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) (C) (ii), (i), (iv), (iii) (D) (i), (iv), (iii), (ii) 420. What is the name of prize, that was declared by FID to promote researches in the field of classification? (A) Dewey Award in UDC Research (B) Dewey Award for Classification (C) Ranganathan Award for Classification (D) Ranganathan Award for Research 421. Report of the Kaula committee on Curriculum Development in Library and Information Science education was published in (A) 1991 (B) 1993 (C) 1987 (D) 1996

536 D Library and Information Science Specific 422. Baroda school was started by (A) W.A. Borden (B) Sayaji Rao Gaikwad II (C) Sardar Patel (D) Ranganathan

(B) The Punjab library Association (C) The Madras library Association (D) The Baroda library Association

423. The IATLIS with ILA and IAS LIC organised jointly a National seminar in October 1987 on (A) Library science and importance of internet (B) Curriculum design of library science at university level (C) Hundred years of library science education and its future (D) None of the above 424. The All-India Library Association was formed in (A) 1939 (B) 1935 (C) 1929 (D) 1933 425. The first Andhra library started (A) about the year 1898 in the village of Kumudavalli in the West-Godavari district. (B) about the year 1898 in the village of Pudduvalli in the Ganjam district. (C) about the year 1898 in the village of Chidupalli in the Ganjam district. (D) none of the above 426. The Madras Library Association was founded on (A) 31st January, 1928 (B) 30th January, 1930 (C) 15th January, 1945 (D) 15th January, 1935 427. The first law of Laws of library science focuses on (A) user and the usable item (B) on usable item (C) on general appeal (D) on the organisation 428. The first British Indian Province to think of a library system was (A) Bengal (B) Punjab (C) United Province (D) Bihar 429. ‘Mode rn Librarian’ pe riodical launched by (A) The Bengal library Association

was

430. From the given objectives, the main objectives of extension services is/are (A) an attempt to turn the library in to a social centre which encourages reading. (B) its aim is to convert non-readers in to readers. (C) to make maximum use of library resources. (D) All of the above 431. “There are two good things in life – freedom of thought and freedom of action.” This statement fulfils the requirement of (A) First new law of library science (B) Second new law of library science (C) Third new law of library science (D) Fourth new law of library science 432. ‘Honour the past and create the future’ is statement of (A) First new law of library science (B) Second new law of library science (C) Third new law of library science (D) Fifth new law of library science 433. Encyclopedia of library and information science is published by (A) H.W. Wilson (B) R.R. Bowker (C) Marcel Dekker (D) Andrew Deutsch 434. Who has published the monthly journal ‘The Library World’? (A) Krishan Kumar (B) J.D. Brown (C) H.W. Wilson (D) K. Navlavi 435. UNESCO’s second public libraries meeting, the seminar on the Role of Libraries in Adult Education, was held at (A) The Hague (B) London (C) Stadsbibliotek of Malmo, Sweden (D) Brussels 436. In which year did A.W. Borden start a refresher course for librarians in India? (A) 1905 (B) 1910 (C) 1912 (D) 1913

Multiple Choice Questions D 537 437. Who contributed on the systematic use of user’s education? (A) S.S.Green (B) Melvil Dewey (C) E.J. Coates (D) Patricia B. Knapp

445. Of the following libraries in India, which one is the oldest library? (A) Asiatic Society Library, Bombay (B) Connemara Public Library, Madras (C) Delhi Public Library, Delhi (D) National Library of India, Calcutta

438. Who said ‘some books are to be tasted, others to be swallowed and some few to be chewed and digested’? (A) John Milton (B) William Jones (C) Francis Bacon (D) Benjamin Franklin

446. Calcutta Public Library was established during (A) 15th Century (B) 16th Century (C) 19th Century (D) 20th Century

439. DDC 22nd edition is published by (A) Forest Press (B) OCLC (C) IFLA (D) UNESCO 440. The book ‘Library Administration’ was brought out by Ranganathan in (A) 1925 (B) 1933 (C) 1931 (D) 1935 441. User education may be provided in four interrelated areas which are (A) user’s awareness, user studies, library orientation, bibliographic instruction (B) user’s awareness, library orientation, inter-profiling, bibliographic instruction (C) aptitude test of the users, use of cataloguing, inter-profiling, user’s awarene ss (D) bibliographic instruction, library orientation, computer literacy, user’s awareness 442. The first centre to use computer in the library and information activities in India is (A) DESIDOC (B) INSDOC (C) DRTC (D) UGC 443. LA is the Library Association of (A) Manipur (B) Andhra Pradesh (C) Great Britain (D) Canada 444. Three great achievements in U.S.A. were noticed i.e. enunciation of DDC classification scheme, formation of American Library Association and the publication of 1st Journal of the librarianship in the year (A) 1857 (B) 1859 (C) 1876 (D) 1

447. Who is regarded as father of bibliography? (A) Paul Otlet (B) Conrad Gesner (C) J.C. Brunet (D) A.C. Foshket 448. Linear model of communication in knowledge based on Aristotles’s model of communication was proposed by (A) Juger Heberman (B) A.J. Wells (C) C.E. Shannon and W. Weaver (D) G. Gerbner 449. National Library Week in India is being celebrated annually since (A) 1914 (B) 1933 (C) 1950 (D) 1968 450. Maulana Abul Kalam Azad, the then Union Education Minister formally declared one of the following libraries open to the public on 2nd February, 1953 (A) Connemara Public Library (B) Delhi Public Library (C) National Library, Calcutta (D) Saraswathi Mahal Library, Tanjore 451. Match the following List-I

List-II

(a) Zipf's Law (i) Law of Scattering (b) Eugene Garfield (ii) Measurement of word frequency (c) Bradford's; Law (iii) Measurement of Author Productivity (d) Lotka's Law (iv) Impact factor Codes : (a) (b) (A) (i) (iii) (B) (ii) (iv) (C) (i) (iv) (D) (iv) (iii)

(c) (iv) (i) (ii) (i)

(d) (ii) (iii) (iii) (ii)

538 D Library and Information Science Specific 452. Match the following List - I List (a) The Right to Information (i) Act of India (b) Universal Declaration (ii) of Human Rights (c) Information (iii) Technology Act. (India) (d) Digital Millennium Act (iv) Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (C) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (D) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) 453. Match the following : List I (a) Library of Congress (b) INSDOC (c) Delivery of Books Act (d) Imperial Lib., Calcutta Codes : (a) (b) (c) (A) (ii) (i) (iii) (B) (i) (iii) (ii) (C) (iv) (i) (ii) (D) (i) (ii) (iii)

- II 2000 2005 1948 1998

List II (i) 1952 (ii) 1954 (iii) 1903 (iv) 1800 (d) (iv) (iv) (iii) (iv)

454. Who are related with the establishment of FID? (A) Dewey (B) Sayers and McColvin (C) Margret Mann (D) Paul Otlet and Henry La Fontane 455. The name of FID is related to which of the following? (A) AACR (B) British Museum (C) UDC (D) Library of Congress 456. In which country COMLA was constituted? (A) India (B) Britain (C) Pakistan (D) Nigeria 457. Match the following : List – I (a) Obligation of the State

List – II (i) First Law

(b) Shelf Arrangement (ii) Second Law & Catalogue (c) Open Access & (iii) Third Law Shelf Arrangement (d) Library location/ (iv) Fourth Law hours Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (B) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (C) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (D) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) 458. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Bradford (i) Citation indexing (b) Lotka (ii) Distribution of articles published in periodicals (c) Zipf (iii) Scientific productivity of author (d) Garfield (iv) Frequency of word occurrence in a text Codes: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (D) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) 459. Assertion (A): Demand is the only governing factor in Book selection. Reason (R): Patrons’ requirements govern building library collections. Codes : (A) (A) is true and (R) is false (B) (A) is false and (R) is true (C) (A) and (R) both are true (D) (A) and (R) both are false 460. Assertion (A): A Library legislation provides proper governance and management. Reason (R): It ensures free public library service to all irrespective of caste, creed and sex. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is true, but (R) is false (D) (A) is false, but (R) is true

Multiple Choice Questions D 539 461. Assertion (A): Libraries are changing in the wake of emerging ICT environment. Reason (R): Libraries are adopting new competencies to operate services in the environment of information super highways. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) (A) is true but (R) is false (C) (A) is false but (R) is true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 462. Assertion (A): In fifth law, the word used in ‘organism’ not ‘organisation’. Reason (R): Libraries grow in collection size, human resources, physical facilities and services from time to time. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A) (B) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A) (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 463. Assertion (A): Provision of services outside the library regular service centre or outlet is essential to reach more and more patrons. Reason (R): Library extension services help libraries to cover larger population of patrons. Codes : (A) (A) is true but (R) is false (B) (A) is false but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 464. Assertion (A): A bibliographic utility is an organization that offers bibliographic services to subscribing libraries. Reason (R): Library of Congress is a bibliographic utility. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 465. Assertion (A): According to the fifth Law of Library Science, Library is a growing organization.

Reason (R): All resources of library are supposed to grow. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are false (D) Both (A) and (R) are true 466. Assertion (A): Information Literacy provides training to use maximum resources available in a library. Reason (R): Information Literacy always aims at specific group of users. Codes : (A) (A) is false, but (R) is true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) (A) is true, but (R) is false 467. Assertion (A): There is need for Library Legislation in all States of India. Reason (R): To make Public Library System independent and without political influence. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false (C) Both (A) and (R) are false (D) (A) is false, but (R) is true 468. Assertion (A): Dr. S.R. Ranganathan has been called ‘Father of Library and Information Science’ in India. Reason (R): Library Science education in India was started by Dr. S.R. Ranganathan. Codes : (A) (A) is false but (R) is true (B) (A) is true but (R) is false (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 469. Arrange the following events of Public Library movement in chronological order : (i) Enactment of Press and Registration of Books Act (ii) Establishment of the Punjab Library, Lahore (iii) Constitution of Fyzee Committee (iv) De clarati on of I mpe rial Li brary (Calcutta) as National Library of India

540 D Library and Information Science Specific Codes : (A) (i) (B) (i) (C) (ii) (D) (iv)

(iii) (ii) (iii) (i)

(iv) (iii) (iv) (iii)

(ii) (iv) (i) (ii)

470. Arrange the following Associations according to their year of formation : (i) ASLIB (ii) LA (iii) ALA (iv) SLA Codes : (A) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (B) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (C) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (D) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) 471. Arrange the following in chronological sequence : (I) Digital Millennium Copyright Act (II) Right to Information Act (India) (III) Information Technology Act (India) (IV) Indian Copyright Act Codes : (A) (IV), (I), (III), (II) (B) (IV), (II), (III), (I) (C) (I), (IV), (II), (III) (D) (II), (III), (I), (IV) 472. Which one is the First Law of library science enunciated by Ranganathan? (A) Books are for use (B) Every reader his book (C) Every book its reader (D) Save the time of the reader 473. ASLIB is a library, association of which country? (A) India (B) England (C) USSR (D) USA 474. ASLIB is a library association of which kind of libraries? (A) Special (B) Academic (C) National (D)Public 475. When ASLIB was established in England? (A) 1914 (B) 1926 (C) 1934 (D) 1944 476. Which one is not the publication of ASLIB? (A) ASLIB Proceeding (Monthly) (B) ASLIB Newsletter (Monthly) (C) Journal of Documentation (Quarterly)

(D) Bulletin of Library and Information Science (Quarterly) 477. Arrange the following according to their year of emergence : (i) RDC (ii) ALA Code (iii) FRBR (iv) AACR1 Codes : (A) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) (B) (iv), (i), (ii), (iii) (C) (i), (ii), (iv), (iii) (D) (i), (iv), (ii), (iii) 478. When COMLA was setup? (A) 1970 (B) 1972 (C) 1975 (D) 1980 479. Who was first President of IFLA? (A) Issac Kulizan (B) T. Viswanathan (C) S.R. Ranganatan (D) W.C.B. Sayers 480. What is the full form of UNESCO? (A) Union Scientific Company (B) Union of Scientific and Cultural Organization (C) United Education, Science and Culture Organization (D) United Nations Educational Scientific and Cultural Organization 481. Arrange the following according to their year of enactment in India : (i) Freedom of Information Act (ii) Right to Information Act (iii) Copyright Act (Revised) (iv) Information Technology Act Codes : (A) (iv), (ii), (i), (iii) (B) (iii), (iv), (i), (ii) (C) (ii), (iii), (iv), (i) (D) (i), (iv), (ii), (iii) 482. Arrange the following according to their year of origin : (i) Bradford’s Law (ii) Lotka’s Law (iii) Statistical Bibliography (iv) Zipf’s Law Codes : (A) (i), (iii), (iv), (ii) (B) (i), (ii), (iv), (iii) (C) (iv), (iii), (i), (ii) (D) (iii), (ii), (iv), (i) 483. Arrange the following Public Library Acts according to their year of enactment : (i) Uttar Pradesh PL Act (ii) Arunachal Pradesh PL Act (iii) Orissa PL Act (iv) Gujarat PL Act

Multiple Choice Questions D 541 Codes : (A) (iv), (iii), (i), (ii) (B) (ii), (iii), (i), (iv) (C) (ii), (i), (iv), (iii) (D) (iii), (ii), (i), (iv) 484. Who were involved in Public Library Movement in India? (i) Sayaji Rao Gaekwad II (ii) C.D. Deshmukh (iii) S. Radhakrishnan (iv) S.R. Ranganathan Codes : (A) (i) & (iii) are correct (B) (ii) & (iv) are correct (C) (i) & (iv) are correct (D) (ii) & (iii) are correct 485. No w t he name of ASLIB has be e n changed as (A) Association for Information Management. (B) Association of Special Libraries and Information Centres (C) Association of Special Libraries (D) Association of Libraries 486. Which of the following functions are analysed by ALA as reference service functions? (i) Consultation function (ii) Guidance function (iii) Instruction function (iv) Bibliographic function Codes : (A) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct (B) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are correct (C) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct (D) (i), (iii) and (iv) are correct 487. Which one is the library association of international level? (A) ALA (B) IFLA (C) IFA (D) I LA 488. Identify the correct order of the LIS Associations as per their year of establishment (A) CLA, ALA, SLA, IASLIC (B) ALA, SLA, CLA, IASLIC (C) SLA, IASLIC, ALA, CLA (D) CLA, SLA, IASLIC, ALA

Read the passage given below and answer the questions based on your understanding of the passage. (Question Nos. 489-493) In the late 1990s the publishing world launched a new system into the information and publishing world called Digital Object Identifiers (DOIs). DOIs are alphanumeric character strings that identify objects in an electronic environment. DOIs are universal, unique and permanent identification tags for online content that is registered in an online directory. DOIs can cover any form of digital files such as text, image, video, audio or even software. DOIs can also cover many levels of content. For example, it might tag an entire book, a chapter in the book, illustrations, individual sentences, or perhaps the book’s index. It is a system that identifies creation endeavours and uniquely marks the content of these items. It is intended to individualize information units on the Web. DOIs can be placed in a variety of places, such as in the object itself, in an information structure that contains the object, on a Web page that describes the element, in a database or as an entry in an indexing system. The identifier tags have no intrinsic meaning, as a classification code does. They are content labels, each being unique and without duplicates. The identifiers are stored in a directory that allows the lookup of the current Internet address of the copyright owner and where the information now resides. The author, publisher or current owner is responsible for maintaining the response page, which presents data about the information item and the conditions of its use. The directory of DOIs routes inquiries to the up-to-date sites on the Internet for accessing the content of the object. When addresses change, the directory will route the query to where the content is currently located or to where information is given concerning how to obtain it. Over time, when objects move around or change ownership, the directory keeps tabs on these changes. Although the major purpose of the DOI system is the management of intellectual property, indexing and abstracting services, as well as document delivery services will find DOIs a useful tool.

542 D Library and Information Science Specific 489. What are DOIs? (A) DOIs are numbers which identify object in traditional environment. (B) DOIs are identifiers consisting of alphanumeric characte r strings for printed materials. (C) DOIs are alphanumeric character strings for electronic serials. (D) DOIs are alphanumeric character strings for electronic sources of information available on-line. 490. What are the materials covered by DOIs ? (A) DOIs cover books and journals. (B) DOIs cover texts, images, audio visual materials in digital form. (C) DOIs cover electronically available S & T information. (D) DOIs cover digital format in US and Europe only. 491. Do DOIs play any role in grouping of information sources? (A) DOIs constitute the eclassification scheme to group sources of information. (B) DOIs are not class numbers as such and have nothing to do with arrangement. (C) DOIs play the dual role of identifying and grouping. (D) DOIs are only like traditional class numbers in e-form. 492. What is the major purpose of DOI system ? (A) To organise e-resources on the Net. (B) To manage intellectual property. (C) To provide bibliographic description of digitized resources. (D) To control free access to eresources 493. How does DOI system operate? (A) Routes inquiries to designated Document Supply Libraries. (B) Routes inquires to up to date sites of digital libraries. (C) Routes inquiries to national e-resources depositories. (D) Routes inquiries to relevant sites on the Net.

494. CONPOLIS (India) was set up in the year (A) 1985 (B) 1986 (C) 1987 (D) 1988 495. Equal sign = is used in UDC to indicate (A) Form (B) Time (C) Language (D) Space 496. Which sources would you consult to know the “Impact Factor” of Journal publications? (i) Web of Science (ii) Science Direct (iii) SCOPUS (iv) EBSCO Codes : (A) (i) and (iv) (B) (ii) and (iii) (C) (i) and (iii) (D) (iii) and (iv) 497. Which of the following are review type services? (i) Current Awareness (ii) Trend Reports (iii) News Clippings (iv) State of the Art Report Codes : (A) (i), (ii), (iii) are correct (B) (i), (iii), (iv) are correct (C) (ii) & (iv) are correct (D) (ii) & (iii) are correct 498. Vocabulary in a database is controlled by (i) Thesaurus files (ii) Import files (iii) Standard files (iv) Authority files Codes : (A) (i) and (ii) are correct (B) (iii) and (iv) are correct (C) (i) and (iii) are correct (D) (ii) and (iii) are correct 499. The Relative Index is found in (A) DDC (B) CC (C) UDC (D) BC 500. E-Journal articles can be identified with the help of (A) Digital Journal Identifier (B) Journal Source Identifier (C) Journal Article Identifier (D) Digital Object Identifier 501. “Shodhganga” is a repository of (A) E – Resources (B) E – Thesis (C) E – Journals (D) E – Books

Multiple Choice Questions D 543 502. Who of the following is not the author of any reference book? (A) C.M. Winchell (B) William A Katz (C) Louis Shores (D) Maurice B. Line 503. Science Citation Index is published by (A) Thomson Reuters (B) H.W. Wilson (C) Whitaker (D) R.R. Bowker 504. “Facts on File” can be grouped under (A) Primary source (B) Secondary source (C) Tertiary source (D) None of the above 505. Access to back volumes of E-journals is known as (A) Random Access (B) Perpetual Access (C) Online Access (D) Retrospective Access 506. Name of the President of Sri Lanka can be found in (A) International who’s who (B) Stateman’s Yearbook (C) Who’s who in the world (D) Wilson Biographies 507. BUBL link is a (A) Data base (B) OPAC (C) Subject gate way (D) Portal 508. Denis Grogan divided documents into (A) five categories (B) three categories (C) four categories (D) two categories 509. What are documentary sources of information? (A) Which are available in print media (B) Which are available in periodical form (C) Which are available in book form (D) None of these 510. Today which type of information sources are most useful? (A) Reference sources (B) Non-documentary sources (C) Documentary sources (D) Both the documentary and non-documentary

511. Hanson divided the information sources into how many categories? (A) Two (B) Three (C) Nine (D) Six 512. Which of the following types of information sources is mass media? (A) Reference source (B) Non-documentary (C) Documentary (D) None of these 513. To get information by conversation to the colleagues is a type of information source (A) non-documentary (B) formal (C) informal (D) conversation 514. Information centres fall in which category of non-documentary sources? (A) Formal (B) Informal (C) Audo-visual (D) Oral 515. The sources which are used to obtain the answer of the queries of the users in libraries are called as (A) reading material (B) information sources (C) source (D) reference source 516. Which of the following kinds of information source are patents? (A) Primary (B) Secondary (C) Tertiary (D) Auxiliary 517. The information contained in tertiary sources are based on which of the following? (A) Primary sources (B) Secondary sources (C) Quaternary sources (D) Primary and secondary sources 518. Pamphle ts fall in which cate gory of sources of information? (A) Primary (B) Secondary (C) Tertiary (D) Reference 519. Cover to cover translation is treated as (A) selective dissemination of information (B) current awareness services (C) on demand services (D) anticipatory services

544 D Library and Information Science Specific 520. Primary sources of information are those, which (A) have all types information (B) have fundamental facts of research (C) have first information (D) have research report 521. What is the main aim of re fe re nce sources ? (A) Produce the general facts (B) Produce the special facts (C) Produce both types of above facts (D) Produce required facts 522. Which of the following is not the secondary source of information? (A) Indexing periodical (B) Abstracting periodical (C) Bibliography (D) Bibliography of bibliographies 523. Research periodicals are which category of sources? (A) Primary (B) Secondary (C) Tertiary (D) Non-documentary 524. Which of the following is the primary source of information? (A) Bibliography (B) Encyclopaedia (C) Hand written articles (D) Dictionary 525. Which of the following are not the secondary sources? (A) Encyclopaedia (B) Digest (C) Thesis (D) Text book 526. Which of the following is not the primary source of information? (A) Research paper (B) Standard (C) Patent (D) Indexing periodical 527. Translation of documents fall in which category of sources? (A) Secondary (B) Primary (C) Tertiary (D) Non-documentary 528. Abstracting and indexing periodicals fall in which category of sources of information? (A) Tertiary (B) Secondary (C) Primary (D) None of these

529. Which category of sources of information are directories? (A) Primary (B) Secondary (C) Tertiary (D) Documentary 530. What is reference source? (A) That provides answer of the queries (B) In which reading material is contained (C) In which specific type of information is contained (D) Which are used to obtain specific type of information 531. In how many volumes ‘New Encyclopaedia Britannica’ (15th, ed.) was published? (A) 25 (B) 28 (C) 30 (D) 32 532. What is more suitable to call dictionaries, encyclopaedia, directories, etc.? (A) Documents (B) Source of information (C) Sources only (D) Reference sources 533. Which edition of the ‘New Encyclopaedia Britannica’ is known as the scholar’s edition ? (A) 11th (B) 10th (C) 12th (D) 15th 534 Why the evaluation of reference source is essential for the libraries? (A) To know its usability and utility for the library (B) To check the scholarship and expertise of the authors (C) To observe the specific material contained in it (D) To know its merits and demerits 535. The first e dition Britannica’ appeared (A) 1761 (C) 1769

of ‘Encyclopaedia in the year (B) 1768 (D) 1771

536. What are called to the compilations, specifically designed to provide items of information in most convenient form? (A) Sources (B) Documents (C) Reference sources (D) Information sources 537. Encyclopaedia Americana is published from (A) Chicago (B) Los Angeles (C) New York (D) None of these

Multiple Choice Questions D 545 538. Which one of the following is not the characteristic of a reference source? (A) It has true and authentic information (B) The author of the same is a scholar and a man of high position (C) It has number of pages upto 300 only (D) It’s price is very high 539. In how many parts New Encyclopaedia Britannica is published? (A) Two (B) Three (C) Four (D) Five 540. Bibliographic coupling was first advocated by (A) B. K. Sen (B) M. M. Kessler (C) S. C. Bradford (D) S. R. Ranganathan 541. New Encyclopaedia Britannica is published from (A) New York (B) London (C) Chicago (D) Paris 542. If the answer of the query of a user is obtained from a subject expert in place of sources, then that is also called a reference source. (A) Ye s (B) N o (C) Confusion (D) None of these 543. The word ‘Encyclopaedia’ was first used in modern sense in 1559 by (A) Marcus Terentius (B) Paul Scalich (C) Pierre Bayle (D) Louis Moreri 544. Encyclopaedia Americana consists (A) 20 volumes (B) 25 volumes (C) 28 volumes (D) 30 volumes 545. Who is the publisher of Encyclopaedia Americana? (A) Marcel Dekker (B) Grolier (C) McGraw Hill (D) Colliers 546. What is containe d in part 3 of New Encyclopaedia Britannica? (A) Index (B) Outline of the knowledge (C) Contemporary references (D) List 547. Which source would you consult to get the latest information on controversies about the venue for Tata's 'Nano'?

(A) (B) (C) (D)

New Encyclopedia Britannica Asian Recorder India : A reference annual Whitekar's Almanac

548. In how many volumes Micropaedia of New Encylopaedia Britannica is published? (A) 2 (B) 10 (C) 19 (D) 12 549. An E-book which does not require an internet connection to access its contents is (A) Web book (B) Palm book (C) Electronic Ink e-book (D) Digital book 550. Emerald full text Database is published from (A) USA (B) Germany (C) France (D) U.K. 551. Which one is the most suitable source for finding out background of Ajanta Arts? (A) Almanac (B) Encyclopaedia (C) Year book (D) Dictionary 552. What is the use of Propaedia of New Encyclopaedia Britannica? (A) Alphabetical method (B) Current index (C) Subject index (D) Classified subject index 553. Which encyclopaedia is most popular in the world? (A) Encyclopaedia Americana (B) Encyclopaedia Britannica (C) McGraw Hill Encyclopaedia of Science and Technology (D) Encyclopaedia of Library and Information Science 554. Who is the publisher of Encyclopaedia of Library and Information Science? (A) Bowker & Company (B) H. W. Wilson Company (C) M. Dekker (D) H. W. Wilson 555. Which type of information is contained in the encyclopaedia? (A) Current information (B) Historical information (C) Details about the authors

546 D Library and Information Science Specific (D) Information on all topics alphabetically 556. Who are the editors of Encyclopaedia of Library and Information Science? (A) M. Dekkar and S. P. Sen (B) Allen Kent and Herold Lancer (C) H. W. Wilson and R. R. Bowker (D) P. A. Atharten and E. Garfield 557. Oxford English dictionary and Webster’s third new international dictionary fall in the group of (A) Prescriptive dictionaries (B) Descriptive dictionaries (C) Abridged dictionaries (D) Pocket dictionaries 558. Which part of New Encyclopaedia Britannica is useful for ready references? (A) Macropaedia (B) Propaedia (C) Micropaedia (D) Premedia 559. The person who propounded One place theory” in classification is (A) Dewey (B) Cutter (C) Brown (D) Bliss 560. Who is the publisher of Biographical Dictionary of Scientists? (A) R. R. Bowker (B) H. W. Wilson (C) ALA (D) Harper Collins 561. From which language the term dictionary had been taken? (A) French (B) Latin (C) Greek (D) Hibru 562. The Principle of Local Variation is mainly applicable in (A) Cataloguing (B) Reference service (C) Circulation (D)Acquisition 563. Retrospective search service is a type of (A) referral service (B) responsive service (C) CAS (D) SDI 564. Which are called geographical sources of information? (A) Which provides the information concerned with geography (B) Which has the list of the books of geography

(C) Which describes the subject of geography (D) Which provides geography of whole of the world 565. ‘Guiness Book of World Records’ is published from (A) Delhi (B) New York (C) London (D) Washington 566. The function of Library classification is to achieve (A) Order (B) Filling (C) Helpful sequence (D) Arrangement 567. Which one is the most suitable source to know the history of a word? (A) Encyclopaedia (B) Dictionary (C) Directory (D) Bibliography 568. Oxford English Dictionary and Webster’s Third New International Dictionary are which types of dictionaries? (A) Pocket dictionary (B) Precise dictionary (C) Language dictionary (D) Descriptive dictionary 569. Who is the publisher of “Universities Hand Book: India”? (A) National Book Trust, Delhi (B) University Grants Commission (C) Association of Indian Universities (D) Indian Library Association 570. Glossary, Lexicon, Thesaurus and Vocabulary are the terms, that can be used for which source? (A) Encyclopaedia (B) Directory (C) Dictionary (D) Reference source 571. Which of the following organisation provides information relating to Defence Science and Defence Studies? (A) INSDOC (B) NASSDOC (C) DESIDOC (D) SENDOC. 572. Who edits Dictionary of National Biography ? (A) Ranganathan (B) S. P. Sen (C) Durgadas (D) P. N. Kaula 573. What is called compiler of a dictionary? (A) Dictionary producer (B) Lexicographer (C) Bibliographer (D) Biographer

Multiple Choice Questions D 547 574. Lexicography is the art/science of preparing which reference sources? (A) Directory (B) Dictionary (C) Biographical source (D) Encyclopaedia 575. “Publishers’ Weekly” is published by (A) H. W. Wilson, New York (B) R. R. Bowker, London (C) American Library Association, Chicago (D) Aslib, London 576. In which two parts, the biographical sources are categorized? (A) Personal and single biographies (B) Collective and retrospective biographies (C) Personal and collective biographies (D) Personal and specific biographies 577. What is the suitable reference source to know about the information of a particular place? (A) Directory (B) Gazetteer (C) Encyclopaedia (D) Yearbook 578. Which one is the most suitable source of information to find out the astronomical information? (A) Encyclopaedia (B) Directory (C) Yearbook (D) Almanac 579. What is geographical reference source Globe? (A) Circular presentation of surface of the earth (B) The map prepared on sphere (C) Photo of the earth (D) None of the above 580. What do you call a collection of maps, tables, charts, etc.? (A) Globe (B) Gazetteer (C) Atlas (D) Map 581. What is the suitable reference to find out the list of historical monuments of Delhi? (A) Atlas (B) Gazetteer (C) Guide Book (D) Globe 582. What is called that geographical source which is a repre se ntation of certain boundaries of the earth on a flat surface showing countries, oceans, etc.?

(A) Globe (C) Atlas

(B) Map (D) None of these

583. The geographical sources are categorized into which of the following? (A) Globes, Gazetteers and travel guides (B) Atlase s, Globe s, Gaze tte e rs and travel guides (C) Maps, Atlases, Globes, Gazetteers and travel guides (D) Maps and Atlases 584. Collective biographies are also called (A) biographical dictionary (B) who’s who (C) biographical dictionary, who’s who both (D) biographical dictionary, who’s who and directory 585. The geographical dictionary of places in which the names are arranged alphabetically, is known as (A) Atlas (B) Globe (C) Gazetteer (D) Guide book 586. Biographies of the librarians shall be which type of biography? (A) Specific (B) Collective (C) Personal (D) Single 587. Match the following: List A List B (1) Conference (a) Primary proceeding (2) Reviews (b) Tertiary (3) Directories (c) Secondary (4) Books (d) Conventional (A) 1 (b), 2 (d), 3 (a), 4 (c) (B) 1 (a), 2 (c), 3 (b), 4 (d) (C) 1 (c), 2 (a), 3 (d), 4 (b) (D) 1 (d), 2 (b), 3 (c), 4 (a) 588. What do you mean by biographical source of information? (A) Which has biographies of all the public (B) Which has biographies of great persons (C) Which has biographies of markable persons of any field (D) Which has biographies of the persons 589. A gazette provides the information about which of the following?

548 D Library and Information Science Specific (A) (B) (C) (D)

Monuments Ancient documents History of various monuments Government orders and notices

590. What is the difference between ye ar books and almanacs? (A) They are similar and closely related to each other (B) They are same in scope and use (C) They have fixed periodicity and are published every year (D) They are equal in coverage also 591. The serial publications which contain brief, pinpointed answers of the queries are called (A) reference sources (B) sources (C) ready reference sources (D) information sources 592. How entries are arranged in a directory? (A) Alphabetical (B) Classified (C) Alphabetical and classified both (D) Alphabetical or classified 593. The list which provides the names and addresses of persons or organisations, is called (A) encyclopaedia (B) directory (C) manual (D) year book 594. What is the suitable reference source to find out the information about Vanasthally Vidyapeeth? (A) Directory (B) Year book (C) Dictionary (D) Encyclopaedia 595. What is called the source that provides current information limited to a particular specific subject in descriptive and statistical form? (A) Year book (B) Hand book (C) Directory (D) Encyclopaedia 596. The source which is a calender of months and days containing astronomical and nautical information about the sun, moon, tides, anniversaries and so on, is known as (A) year book (B) manual (C) almanac (D) directory 597. Which are called ready reference sources? (A) Guides to statistical sources

(B) Directories, hand books, manuals (C) Year books and annuals (D) All the above sources 598. The term directory can be also used for (A) list of periodicals (B) list of news papers (C) list of events (D) all of these 599. Ready reference sources are those which are (A) published annually and cover information about present year (B) published annually and cover information about the whole year (C) published annually and cover information about the previous year (D) published annually 600. What is the meaning of almanac? (A) Annual compendium of statistics and facts (B) Annual compendium of statistics and current facts only (C) Annual compendium of statistics and facts both current and retrospective (D) Annual compendium of current and retrospective facts 601. What is the basic purpose of a year book? (A) Record annual activities of a country (B) Re cord annual activitie s of an organisation (C) Record annual activities of a subject (D) All the above 602. What is an almanac? (A) It is a source of information (B) It is a reference source (C) It is one of the re ady re fe re nce sources (D) None of the above 603. Year books are also known as (A) hand book (B) annual (C) directory (D) dictionary 604. Who is the publisher of Asian Recorder? (A) Academic Press (B) Bowker and Company (C) Mc Millan and Co (D) K. K. Thomas 605. What is a hand book? (A) Deals with established knowledge but not the new developments

Multiple Choice Questions D 549 (B) Deals with new developments (C) Deals with established knowledge (D) Deals with established knowledge as well as with new developments 606. What is Library Literature? (A) Indexing Journal (B) List of books of library science (C) Abstracting periodical (D) Directory of sources of library science 607. What is called that ready reference source which can be referred for guidance in any occupation, art or study? (A) Year book (B) Manual (C) Hand book (D) Treatise 608. Which one is the publication of Delhi Library Association? (A) Index India (B) Indian Press Index (C) Indian Books in Print (D) Index Guide 609. What is the publication frequency of Books in Print? (A) Monthly (B) Weekly (C) Annually (D) Quarterly 610. An almanac covers the compendium of which period? (A) Present year (B) Past year (C) Past year along with retrospective too (D) None of the above 611. Asian Recorder is published from (A) New Delhi (B) Colombo (C) Beijing (D) Islamabad 612 What is the publication frequency of Keesings Record of World Events? (A) Weekly (B) Yearly (C) Monthly (D) Quarterly 613. Out of the following sources, which have the similar features? (A) Hand books and manuals (B) Hand books, manuals and guide books (C) Hand books, manuals, guide books, source books (D) None of the above 614. Who is the publisher of Library Literature? (A) Marcel Dekker (B) H.W. Wilson (C) Grolier (D) Library of Congress

615. What is the meaning of concordance? (A) Collection of phrases (B) Language dictionary (C) Collection of words (D) Index of the terms of a book or an author in order of alphabets 616. What is Keesing’s Record of World Events? (A) Directory (B) Hand book (C) News Summary (D) Guide book 617. What is the meaning of hand book? (A) A book which is handy to use (B) As handy to carry it conveniently in hand (C) A small book or a treatise giving useful facts (D) All of the above 618. What is India. A Reference Annual? (A) Year book (B) Almanac (C) Guide book (D) Hand book 619. For what the statistical sources are useful? (A) For agriculture, economics, production etc. (B) For study, teaching and research (C) To establish industries (D) For taking all types of decisions 620. Who publishes University News Literature? (A) UGC (B) NISSAT (C) AIU (D) INFLIBNET 621. What is called the source which provide bibliographical description of the books? (A) Catalogue (B) Bibliography (C) Book list (D) Book catalogue 622. Who publishes Publisher’s Weekly? (A) R. R. Bowker (B) Academic Press (C) H. W. Wilson (D) Whitekar 623. Table 6 of the Auxiliary tables in DDC (20th edn.) (A) Sub divisions of languages (B) Sub divisions of literatures (C) Languages (D) Person 624. Whether dictionaries and encyclopaedias having statistical information may be called as statistical sources? (A) Yes, as they have statistical information (B) Not possible

550 D Library and Information Science Specific (C) No, they can not be called (D) None of the above 625. Who is the publisher of Books in Print? (A) McMillan Company (B) Bowker Company (C) Wilson Company (D) ASLIB 626. What do you mean by statistical sources? (A) Which provide any type of information (B) Which provide statistical information (C) Which provide all the information (D) All the above 627. Who publishes Annuals of Library Science and Documentation? (A) ILA (B) INSDOC (C) DRTC (D) IASLIC 628. Statistical sources provide us (A) numerical data to answer queries (B) numerical data to answer queries with-How many or How much (C) numerical data (D) all the above 629. What is World of Learning? (A) Directory (B) Encyclopaedia (C) Dictionary (D) Year book 630. The idea of Thesaurofacet was developed by (A) G. Bhattacharya (B) S. R. Ranganathan (C) Jean Aitchison (D) Derek Austin 631. Which is the suitable reference source to find out information about qualities of heavy water? (A) Year book (B) Directory (C) Hand book (D) Almanac

(B) Indexing Service (C) Bibliography (D) Documentation List 635. ‘Science Citation Index’ (SCI) was started by (A) B. C. Vickery (B) Eugene Garfield (C) John Hariss (D) none of the above 636. What is trade bibliography? (A) List of author bibliography (B) List of special bibliography (C) List of books in print or for sale compiled by a publisher (D) List of books of trade library 637. Subject bibliographies are maintained by which section of the library? (A) Periodical (B) Acquisition (C) Technical (D) Reference 638. The systematic list of documents relating to a specific field of knowledge is called (A) analytical bibliography (B) subject bibliography (C) author bibliography (D) national bibliography 639. What is National Bibliography? (A) List of books of National Library (B) List of books published in a particular nation (C) List of books written by national government (D) List of books on a nation

633. Who publishes World of Learning? (A) Times of India (B) MacMillan (C) Europa Publications (D) McGraw Hill

640. Match the following: List A List B (1) Official (a) Established hand book knowledge (2) Advances (b) Knit to fit (3) Recreation and (c) Current trends hobbies in development (4) Hand book/ (d) Staff car rules Manual (A) 1 (a), 2 (d), 3 (c), 4 (b) (B) 1 (d), 2 (c), 3 (b), 4 (a) (C) 1 (b), 2 (a), 3 (d), 4 (c) (D) 1 (c), 2 (b), 3 (a), 4 (d)

634. What is Reader’s Guide to Periodical Literature ? (A) Abstracting service

641. Konard Gasner is known as the father of (A) documentation (B) indexing (C) bibliography (D) abstracting

632. What is the appropriate source to find out information about newspapers and their distribution? (A) UN Statistical Year book (B) AP Year book (C) Press in India (D) Manorama Year book

Multiple Choice Questions D 551 642. Who used the word bibliography first? (A) Dewey (B) Ranganathan (C) Margrett Mann (D) Louis Jacob de Saint Charles 643. The term bibliography was derived form (A) Latin word (B) Greek word (C) French word (D) Roman word 644. What is personal bibliography? (A) Title bibliography (B) Author bibliography (C) Author index (D) List of works by and on a person 645. Match the following: List A (1) Encyclopaedia (a) Britannica (2) Europa (b) Publications (London)

(3) John Hariss (4) Paul Otlet

(A) (B) (C) (D)

1 1 1 1

(d), 2 (c), 3 (c), 2 (b), 3 (a), 2 (d), 3 (b), 2 (a), 3

List B Documentation

First Encyclopaedia having articles written by subject specialist (c) The World of Learning (d) First edition appeared in three volumes in 1771 (b), 4 (a) (a), 4 (d) (c), 4 (b) (d), 4 (c)

646. What is a bibliography? (A) List of trades (B) List of books (C) List of periodicals (D) Organised list of documents 647. Analytical bibliography deals with (A) physical aspect of the book (B) analysis of subject (C) classified list of books (D) none of the above 648. Libraries are primarily concerned with which type of bibliography? (A) Textual (B) Regional (C) Systematic (D) Historical 649. ‘Grey Literature’ means (A) classified documents (B) unpublished documents

(C) archival documents (D) audio-visual material 650. What is the main source of obtaining access of current literature of a subject or a field? (A) Abstracting periodical (B) Indexing periodical (C) Documentation list (D) Indexing and abstracting periodicals both 651. At present by which system B.N.B. derives Subject Index Entries? (A) POPSI (B) PRECIS (C) Chain Indexing (D) KWIC 652. The union catalogue is a list of (A) all material of a special library (B) all material of national library (C) all material of a library (D) all books of more than one library 653. Gazetteer of India was first published by (A) Ministry of Education and Social Welfare (B) Ministry of Information and Broadcasting (C) Ministry of Home Affairs (D) Controller of Publications 654. What is called the mixed catalogue of libraries? (A) Inventory (B) Mixed catalogue (C) Catalogue (D) Union catalogue 655. Which one of the following materials are not included in I.N.B.? (A) Government publications (B) Maps (C) First issue of periodicals (D) Books 656. Who is the publisher of I.N.B.? (A) National Library, Calcutta (B) Central Science Library, New Delhi (C) INSDOC, New Delhi (D) Central Reference Library, Calcutta 657. Which one is the union catalogue? (A) Ulrich’s International Periodical Directory (B) Periodicals Directory (C) New Serials Titles (D) NUCSSI

552 D Library and Information Science Specific 658. B.N.B. belongs to which country? (A) India (B) France (C) U.S.A. (D) United Kingdom 659. B.N.B. uses which classification scheme? (A) DDC (B) CC (C) UDG (D) LC 660. In which year I.N.B. was first published? (A) 1953 (B) 1956 (C) 1957 (D) 1960 661. Which kind of information sources is union catalogue? (A) Tertiary (B) Intermediate (C) Secondary (D) Primary 662. How many languages’ books are covered in I.N.B.? (A) 9 (B) 13 (C) 11 (D) 17 663. In UDC the symbol (colon) is used to represent (A) Coordination (B) Extension (C) Relation (D) Sub grouping 664. Since which year B.N.B. is being published ? (A) 1955 (B) 1950 (C) 1953 (D) 1958 665. What is the frequency of B.N.B.? (A) Weekly (B) Annual (C) Quarterly (D) Monthly

(B) Industrial Art Index (C) Business Periodical Index (D) Applied Science Index 670. What does indexing periodical provide us ? (A) List of documents (B) Whole bibliographical descriptions of documents (C) Whole bibliographical descriptions of articles (D) List of articles 671. Who publishes the periodical published in the field of medical science, i.e. Index Medicus ? (A) National Library of America (B) American Library Association (C) National Library of Medicine of USA (D) Library of Congress 672. What is obtained by users from indexing and abstracting periodicals? (A) List of the interested subject (B) Whole literature of the interested subject (C) Current literature of the interested subject (D) Selected literature of the interested subject 673. Who publishes INIS Atom Index? (A) INIS (Vienna) (B) LC (C) ICSU (D) AGRIS

666. Since when the Science Citation Index is being published? (A) Since 1948 (B) Since 1963 (C) Since 1965 (D) Since 1969

674. Who is the publisher of Applied Science and Technology Index? (A) R. R. Bowker (B) LA (UK) (C) H. W. Wilson (D) ALA

667. Routing of periodicals is a (A) current awareness service (B) selective dissemination of information service (C) information retrieval service (D) reference service

675. CD-ROM version of Science Citation Index is being published since when? (A) Since 1975 (B) Since 1970 (C) Since 1965 (D) Since 1988

668. Who publishes the indexing periodical of science subject Current Contents? (A) IFLA (B) Institute for Scientific Information (C) American Library Association (D) FID 669. What was the name of the Applied Science and Technology Index before 1958? (A) Science and Technology Index

676. The indexing periodicals present the bibliographical description of which information sources? (A) Primary sources (B) Reference sources (C) Tertiary sources (D) Secondary sources 677. What does abstracting service provide us? (A) Abstracts of articles (B) Whole bibliographical descriptions of articles

Multiple Choice Questions D 553 (C) Whole bibliographical descriptions alongwith abstracts of articles (D) Whole bibliographical sources 678. From which year Index Medicus is being published? (A) Since 1965 (B) Since 1960 (C) Since 1962 (D) Since 1980 679. What is the subject scope of INIS Atom Index ? (A) Technology (B) Science (C) Atomic science (D) Atomic Energy 680. What is called the online edition of Index Medicus? (A) Medicle (B) MEDline (C) MEDLARS (D) Med online 681. The Mathematical Reviews is published by whom? (A) Indian Mathematical Society (B) American Mathematical Society (C) Academy of Sciences of India (D) Calcutta Mathematical Society 682. The publication of Physics Abstracts was started with the name of (A) Physical Science Index (B) Science Abstracts (C) Science & Technology Abstracts (D) Technology Abstracts 683. Wall-Picture principle is one of the principles of (A) Facet sequence (B) Mnemonic sequence (C) Helpful sequence (D) Geographical sequence 684. Which one is the first indexing periodical ? (A) Philosophical Transactions (B) Chemiscess Zentrablest (C) Journal des Scavens (D) Chemical Abstracts 685. What is Chemical Abstracts? (A) Reference service (B) Abstracting service (C) Indexing service (D) Documentation service 686. What is the frequency of Chemical Abstracts ? (A) Weekly (B) Annual (C) Monthly (D) Fortnightly

687. There are five indexes of Biological abstracts, i.e. author index, biosystematic index, generic index and concept index. What is the fifth one? (A) Subject index (B) Atom index (C) Relative index (D) Word index 688. What is the publication frequency of Physics Abstracts? (A) Weekly (B) Bimonthly (C) Fortnightly (D) Monthly 689. Who publishes the Biological Abstracts? (A) Bioscience Information Service (B) Bioscience Ministry, USA (C) Bioscience Survey of America (D) Science and Technology Department, USA 690. Who publishes Physics Abstracts? (A) Institution of Engineering and Technology (B) American Physics Society (C) Institute of Scientific Information (D) Institute of Bibliography 691. Which type of service Mathematical Reviews is? (A) Documentation (B) Reprography (C) Indexing (D) Abstracting 692. What is the publication frequency of Biological Abstracts? (A) Weekly (B) Bimonthly (C) Biweeky (D) Monthly 693. What is the short name of Bioscience Information Service? (A) ISOBS (B) BIOSIS (C) Bioinfos (D) BIS 694. Who is publisher of Chemical Abstracts? (A) Indian Chemical Society (B) American Chemical Society (C) Bowker and Co. (D) H. W. Wilson and Co. 695. Chemical Abstracts is the abstracting service of which level? (A) Regional level (B) National level (C) International level (D) Local level 696. What is called database? (A) Printed information sources (B) Non-paper information sources

554 D Library and Information Science Specific (C) Non-printed information sources (D) Electronic forms of printed sources 697. The entries in Indian Science Abstracts are classified according to which classification scheme? (A) DDC (B) LC (C) UDC (D) CC

706. What was the title of LISA previously? (A) Library Science Abstracts (B) Literature Search Academy (C) Library and Information Science Abstracts (D) Library and Information Science Academy

698. LISA is arranged according to which classification scheme? (A) UDC (B) CC (C) DDC (D) Special scheme of classification

707. SCOPUS is a/an (A) Indexing Database (B) Numerical Database (C) Full Text Database (D) Abstract and Citation Database

699. E-document is the abbreviation of which term? (A) English-documents (B) Economics-documents (C) Engineering-documents (D) Electronic-documents

708. LISA stands for which of the following? (A) Library Science Abstracts (B) Literature Search Academy (C) Library and Information Science Abstracts (D) Library and Information Science Academy

700. What is the publication frequency of Indian Science Abstracts published by INSDOC? (A) Weekly (B) Quarterly (C) Monthly (D) Fortnightly 701. Indian Library Science Abstracts is published by whom? (A) ALA (B) INSDOC (C) DESIDOC (D) IASLIC 702. Which of the following is the abstracting service? (A) ERIC (B) LISA (C) Excerpta (D) Medline 703. How communication of information is done from E-documents? (A) Self reading (B) Reading by a reader (C) By communication media (D) By electronic media 704. Who is publisher of LISA? (A) Library Association (B) British Library (C) Indian Library Association (D) American Library Association 705. What is the meaning of E-documents? (A) All documents other than printed (B) Non-paper documents (C) In electronic form such as Cassettes, CD-ROMs, etc. (D) Audio-visual tools

709. Indian Science Abstracts is published by whom? (A) ILA (B) INSDOC (C) DST (D) DESIDOC 710. What are numeric databases? (A) Which have all kinds of numerals (B) Which have numeric information (C) Which have statistical information (D) Which have numerals 711. Databases are bibliographic databases, because (A) they have bibliographic details of documents (B) they have details about source documents (C) bibliography is presented (D) they have record of bibliographic description 712. What is the function of reference database ? (A) Provide references (B) Indicate sources (C) Indicate references with abstracts (D) Provide abstracts 713. What is the base of online searching? (A) Information sources (B) Databases (C) Microforms (D) Books

Multiple Choice Questions D 555 714. Which of the following is the source database? (A) The New York Times Via NEXIS (B) MEDLARS (C) WILSON LINE Indexing (D) Database produced by ERIC 715. Bibliographic databases can mainly be grouped into two categories? (A) Word and meaning databases (B) Numeric and digital databases (C) Bibliographic and information databases (D) Reference and source databases 716. What is called the database which provides access of full text? (A) Bibliographic database (B) Full text databases (C) Numeric database (D) Reference database 717. Mostly databases are prepared for (A) periodicals (B) books (C) abstracting and indexing periodicals (D) abstracting periodicals only 718. What are called source databases? (A) Contain references (B) Contain abstracts (C) Contain sources in addition to full text (D) Indicate references

(C) Chemical Abstracts (D) Biological Abstracts 722. What are called databases which contain statistical data in the form of tables? (A) Numeric databases (B) Property databases (C) Textual databases (D) Full text databases 723. What is not essential about the periodicals indexed in the database evaluation? (A) Whether all the periodicals are taken or not (B) Whether the rules regarding the use of database are given or not (C) Whether the ISBD number is given or not (D) Whether the addresses of publishers are recorded or not with their short names 724. Which type of database is CD-ROMs services like trade journals on disks? (A) Reference database (B) Graphic database (C) Full text database (D) Directory kind database 725. The databases are evaluated like the printed sources? (A) Ye s (B) N o (C) There is some other criteria also (D) It is done by other type of evaluation

719. What is bibliographic database? (A) Collection of data (B) List of books (C) Collection of catalogue entries (D) Collection of documents in machine readable form

726. Which of the following is a primary source of information? (A) Union Catalogue (B) Current content list (C) State of the art report (D) Manuscript

720. Which is not correct about bibliographic databases? (A) They contain bibliographic details of reference sources (B) These have details about source documents (C) These are of two kinds (D) Self observation of original documents of cited sources is done

727. Ranganathan has divided documents into (A) two categories (B) four categories (C) three categories (D) five categories

721. MEDLARS prepares which database? (A) Index Medicus (B) Physics Abstracts

728. From the following list which is not primary source of information? (A) Patent (B) Standards (C) Abstracting periodicals (D) Research papers 729. Which of the following is not considered as documents? (A) Manuscript (B) Book (C) Inscription (D) Periodical

556 D Library and Information Science Specific 730. From of the following list which is tertiary documents? (A) Research papers (B) Thesis (C) List of abstracting service (D) Abstracting service 731. Social Science Citation Index is published by (A) NASSDOC, New Delhi (B) H. W. Wilson, New Delhi (C) Institute for Scientific Information, Philadelphia (D) INSDOC, New Delhi 732. C. W. Hanson divides documents into (A) two categories (B) four categories (C) five categories (D) six categories 733. The document which is not tertiary is (A) Directory of R&D Institutions (B) Chemical Abstract (C) Current Research Projects in CSIR Laboratories (D) World Bibliography of Bibliographies 734. Denis Grogan divides documents into (A) two categories (B) four categories (C) three categories (D) five categories 735. Articles published in research journals are (A) reference sources (B) primary sources (C) secondary sources (D) tertiary sources 736. Identify the primary document from the following (A) Bibliography (B) Directory (C) Dictionary (D) Research report 737. Which is not the secondary source of information? (A) India: A Reference Annual (B) Hand book of Libraries (C) Patent (D) Abstracting periodical 738. Which of the following is a primary source of information?

(A) Hand book (B) Encyclopaedia (C) News Paper

(D) Book

739. Identify the secondary documents from the following (A) Standards (B) Journals (C) Patents (D) Directory of Research organisations 740. From the following list which is not the secondary source of information? (A) Encyclopaedia (B) Text book (C) Statistical Hand book (D) Thesis 741. Match the following: List A List B (1) Persons (a) Encyclopaedias (2) Places (b) Statesman year book (3) Facts about (c) Geographical a country dictionaries, atlas, maps, Gazetteers etc. (4) Background (d) Who’s who, information Biographical and subject dictionaries (A) 1 (d), 2 (c), 3 (b), 4 (a) (B) 1 (c), 2 (b), 3 (a), 4 (d) (C) 1 (a), 2 (d), 3 (c), 4 (b) (D) 1 (b), 2 (a), 3 (d), 4 (c) 742. Match the following: List A List B (1) Words/Phrases (a) Who’s who, meaning and bibliographical usages, dictionary synonyms, antonyms etc. (2) Technical Terms (b) Bibliographics, in different indexes, subjects abstracts, etc. (3) Literature (c) Technical references dictionaries special glossaries (4) Persons (d) Language dictionaries Thesaurus

Multiple Choice Questions D 557 Codes: (A) 1 (d), 2 (c), 3 (B) 1 (b), 2 (a), 3 (C) 1 (a), 2 (b), 3 (D) 1 (c), 2 (d), 3

(b), 4 (a) (d), 4 (c) (c), 4 (d) (a), 4 (b)

743. Polychotomy means division into (A) Many (B) Two (C) Five (D) Ten 744. Cannon of Context belongs to (A) Idea plane (B) Verbal plane (C) Notational plane (D) Intellectual plane 745. ‘Europa Year Book: A World Survey’ is published from (A) Paris (B) New York (C) London (D) Chicago 746. British National Bibliography is a (A) primary source of information (B) secondary source of information (C) tertiary source of information (D) none of the above 747. “India: A Reference Annual” is an example of (A) directory (B) hand book (C) year book (D) statistical source 748. From which country ‘Country Contents’ is being published? (A) U. K. (B) India (C) U. S. A. (D) Canada 749. The International Encyclopaedia of Social Sciences is in (A) 15 volumes (B) 16 volumes (C) 17 volumes (D) 18 volumes 750. Which service demands for the creation of ‘user’s profile’? (A) CAS (B) Information Retrieval (C) SDI (D) Reference services 751. Who is the publisher of ‘International Encyclopaedia of Social Sciences’? (A) Macmillan Reference USA (B) Oxford University Press (C) McGraw Hill (D) R. R. Bowker

752. ‘Europa Year Book: A World Survey’ is an annual publication of (A) Statistical office, London (B) Europa publication, London (C) Oxford University Press (D) None of the above 753. Library Herald is published from (A) Kolkata (B) Bangalore (C) Delhi (D) Lucknow 754. To find out of the name of any research institution in any country, we see in (A) Common Wealth Universities Year Book (B) Universities Hand Book (C) World of Learning (D) Statesman’s Year book 755. The second edition of the Oxford English Dictionary was published in (A) 1930 (B) 1960 (C) 1980 (D) 1989 756. ‘Asian Recorder’ is published by (A) R. R. Bowker (B) H. W. Wilson (C) K. K. Thomos (D) Asian Recorder and Publications 757. The origin of the word ‘Vocabulary’ is from a word ‘Vocabulariam’ in (A) Greek (B) Latin (C) French (D) None of these 758. The term ‘Thesaurus’ has its origin in (A) Greek (B) Latin (C) Arabic (D) French 759. Which year book contains information regarding Indian Universities? (A) Europa Year Book (B) Statesman Year Book (C) Common Wealth Universities Year Book (D) None of the above 760. Which of the following services are provided through indexing & abstracting service? (A) SDI service (B) Document delivery services (C) Retrospective Information service (D) None of these

558 D Library and Information Science Specific 761. Current awareness service BIOSIS is a (A) Local service (B) Regional service (C) National service (D) International service 762. The term ‘Dictionary’ is derived from the word ‘Dictionarium’ in (A) Greek (B) Latin (C) French (D) Hebrew 763. ‘Universities Hand Book’ is published from (A) Delhi (B) Kolkata (C) Mumbai (D) Lucknow 764. The computerised form of Engineering Index is known as (A) engineering comdex (B) COMPENDEX (C) online engineering index (D) computerized engineering index 765. Who is the publisher of ‘Year Book of International Organisation’? (A) American Library Association (B) International Federation of Library Association (C) Union of International Association (D) Library Associations 766. Who is the publisher of ‘Dictionary of Scientific Research Institutions in India? (A) University Grants Commission (B) INSDOC (C) UNESCO (D) I.C.A.R. 767. ‘Britannica Book of the Year’ is published from (A) Chicago (B) New York (C) London (D) Washington 768. Gazetteers are popularly known as (A) a geographical dictionary (B) directory of place names (C) statistical atlas (D) hand book of maps 769. Dictionary of National Biography (U. K.) has been published in (A) 12 volumes (B) 18 volumes (C) 20 volumes (D) 60 volumes 770. Who is publisher of ‘Biographical Dictionary of Scientists’? (A) Harper Collins (B) Bowker

(C) ALA (D) None of the above 771. ‘India who’s who’ is published by (A) Indian Press (B) Publication Division (C) INFA Publications (D) Sahitya Akademi 772. Times of India Directory and Year book including who’s who ceased publication in (A) 1980 (B) 1984 (C) 1986 (D) 1990 773. ‘Keesing’s Record of World Events’ is published from (A) Mumbai (B) London (C) New York (D) New Delhi 774. Digital Reference Service can be offered through (A) FAX (B) OPAC (C) Ask your librarian (D) Consortia 775. ‘Facts on File’ is a (A) Weekly list (C) Monthly

(B) Fortnightly (D) Quarterly

776. Generally the information sources are divided mainly into following categories: (A) Primary and secondary (B) Reference and information sources (C) Documentary and non-documentary (D) Books and periodicals 777. According to Grogan which of the following is the division of sources of information? (A) Primary, secondary and tertiary (B) Primary, secondary and higher (C) Conventional, non-conventional and new (D) New, ancient and modern 778. Who amongst the following categorized information sources into conventional, non-conventional, neo-conventional and micro documents? (A) Ranganathan (B) C. A. Cutten (C) Grogan (D) Henson 779. The systematic subject approach to documents on shelves can be provided through (A) Alphabetical arrangement (B) Classified arrangement (C) Classified alphabetic arrangement (D) Alphabetical classed arrangement

Multiple Choice Questions D 559 780. What are called those sources which are available chiefly in printed form? (A) Reference sources (B) Documentary sources (C) Information sources (D) Non-documentary sources

788. Which of the following is not providing encyclopedia type of information? (A) Encyclopedia of Associations (B) Compton’s Encyclopedia (C) Worldbook Encyclopedia (D) Encyclopedia Americana

781. In which two categories, the non-documentary sources are grouped? (A) Formal and informal (B) Books and periodicals (C) General and specific (D) Ancient and new

789. Match the following : List I List II (a) Books in (i) Bibliography print of periodicals (b) Ulrich (ii) Trade International Bibliography Periodical Directory (c) World of (iii) Biographical Learning source (d) Who’s Who (iv) Directory in India Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (B) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (C) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (D) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii)

782. Relational Database is (A) A work which has some relationship to another work (B) A symbol representing relationship between two concepts (C) Manipulation commands which relate records in different fields (D) All of the above 783. ‘Segmentation’ is associated with (A) Reference Service (B) Market Survey Report (C) Digest Service (D) Indexing Service 784. Roget’s International Thesaurus is a (A) Classic reference Book (B) Book of Synonyms (C) List of Standard Terms (D) List of Scientific Terms 785. Information about scale and projection can be found in (A) Encyclopaedias (B) Hand books of Manuals (C) Geographical sources (D) Directories 786. Which of the following is not a part of word treatment in language dictionaries? (A) Gloss (B) Vernacular (C) Etymology (D) Grammatical information 787. Which of the following has stopped publishing in the print from since 2012? (A) Europa World Yearbook (B) Times of India Directory (C) New Encyclopedia Britannica (D) Keesing’s Contemporary Archives

790. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Bibliography (i) Pe rsons (b) Yearbook (ii) Words (c) Dictionary (iii) Current information (d) Biography (iv) Books Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (D) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) 791. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) Whitaker’s (i) Year of starting Almanack ‘Publishers Weekly’ (b) Ulrich’s (ii) Availability International of V 50 of Periodicals ‘Library Journal’ Directory (c) National (iii) Information on Union Catalogue discontinuation

560 D Library and Information Science Specific of Scientific Serials in India (D) Data India Codes : (a) (A) (iv) (B) (ii) (C) (iii) (D) (i)

(b) (i) (iv) (ii) (iv)

of New Encyclopaedia Britannica (iv) Astronomical information (c) (ii) (i) (i) (ii)

(d) (iii) (iii) (iv) (iii)

792. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) J. Thompson (i) Basic Statistics for Libraries (b) S. Halkett of (ii) Planning of J Laing Ac ade m ic and Research Buildings (c) William A Katz (iii) Dictionary of anonymous and pseudonymous literature (d) K.D. Metcalfe (iv) Introduction to reference work Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) (B) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (C) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (D) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) 793. Assertion (A): INDEST conceived J-Gate as a customized gate for e-journals subscribed by the member libraries. Reason (R): J-Gate provides a common access platform for all its members to search and share resources subscribed by the member libraries. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation (B) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the correct explanation (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 794. Assertion (A): Indexing periodical retrieves information, which includes brief summary of the article.

Reason (R): It provides list of articles alongwith the title, authors and other bibliographic details. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is true, but (R) is false (D) (A) is false, but (R) are true 795. Assertion (A): Data base is a collection of interrelated data stored together. Reason (R): It is an organised, integrated collection of data. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are false (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) (A) is true, but (R) is false 796. Assertion (A): Electronic access to information is becoming easy day by day. Reason (R): The printed materials pouring out of the world presses do not show any decline. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not a correct explanation of (A) (B) (A) is true but (R) is false (C) (A) is false but (R) is true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 797. Assertion (A): Primary source is one in which information is original. Reason (R): Secondary sources repack the original information. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) (A) is true but (R) is false (C) (A) is false but (R) is true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 798. Assertion (A): LISA is a primary source of information. Reason (R): All primary sources provide original information. Codes : (A) (A) is false, but (R) is true (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false (C) Both (A) and (R) are false (D) Both (A) and (R) are true 799. Assertion (A): Primary Sources provide most authentic information for research.

Multiple Choice Questions D 561 Reason (R): Primary sources are highly unorganized as far as access is concerned. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A) (B) Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A) (C) (A) is false but (R) is true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 800. Assertion (A): Present decade has accepted E-journals as channels of scholarly communications. Reason (R): E-publications have added enormous quantity of literature but affected the Quality of research. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A) (B) Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A) (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D)Both (A) and (R) are false 801. Assertion (A): ‘Encyclopaedia is the queen of all reference sources’. Reason (R): Encyclopaedias are more suitable for finding trend information. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false (C) (A) is false but (R) is true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 802. Assertion (A): Users can have access to large number of e-journals. Reason (R): Users are not aware of using e-journals. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A) (C) (A) is false, (R) is true (D) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A) 803. Assertion (A): Book selection must be done judiciously. Reason (R): Resource sharing is the need of the hour. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not the correct statement of (A)

(B) (A) is false, but (R) is true (C) (A) is true, but (R) is false (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 804. Assertion (A): Primary sources provide most authentic information for research. Reason (R): Primary sources are highly unorganised. Codes : (A) (A) is false, but (R) is true (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false (C) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A) (D) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A) 805. Assertion (A): Present decade has accepted E-journals as channels of fast communication. Reason (R): E-publications have added enormous quantity of literature but affected the quality of research. Codes : (A) (A) is true but (R) is false. (B) (A) is false but (R) is true. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation (D) Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not a correct explanation 806. Assertion (A): E-publications have added enormous quantity of literature but adversely affected the quality of literature. Reason (R): Present decade has accepted E-publication as channels of fast communication. Codes : (A) (A) is true (R) is false (B) (A) is false, but (R) is correct (C) Both (A) & (R) are false (D) Both (A) & (R) are true 807. Assertion (A): Encyclopedias are not relevant for finding geographically information. Reason (R): Encyclopedias are the substitute for all categories of reference sources. Codes : (A) (A) is false but (R) is true (B) Both (A) and (R) are true (C) Both (A) and (R) are false (D) (A) is true but (R) is false

562 D Library and Information Science Specific 808. Arrange the following according to their year of publication (i) New Encyclopaedia Britannica (ii) Encyclopaedia Americana (iii) Encyclopaedia of Library & Information Science (iv) McGraw Hill Encyclopaedia of Science & Technology Codes : (A) (ii), (i), (iv), (iii) (B) (i), (ii), (iv), (iii) (C) (iii), (i), (iv), (ii) (D) (ii), (iv), (i), (iii) 809. Which of the following are ‘geographical sources’ (i) Maps (ii) Atlase s (iii) Encyclopaedias (iv) Yearbooks Codes : (A) (i) & (ii) are correct (B) (iii) & (iv) are correct (C) (ii) & (iii) are correct (D) (ii) & (iv) are correct 810. Arrange the following publications according to their year of origin. (i) Social Science Citation Index (ii) L I S A (iii) Library Literature and Information Science (iv) Library Journal Codes : (A) (i), (iii), (iv), (ii) (B) (ii), (i), (iii), (iv) (C) (iv), (iii), (ii), (i) (D) (iii), (ii), (iv), (i) 811. Bibliographical coupling is related to (A) Bibliometric studies (B) Bibliography compilation (C) Modes of subject formation (D) Vocabulary control 812. When the answer of a reference question is provided within half an hour, then it is called (A) very short range reference service (B) short range reference service (C) reference service (D) long range reference service 813. Which of the following is the method of providing reference service? (A) Information provision on demand (B) Information provision in anticipation of demand

(C) Both (A) and (B) (D) Neither (A) nor (B) 814. Who gave first the concept of Ready Reference service? (A) M. Hutchins (B) C. M. Vinthel (C) Ranganathan (D) Lois Shores 815. ‘Search strategy is the looking mirror in the dark’ is stated by (A) S. R. Ranganathan (B) W. A. Katz (C) James I. Wyre (D) Calvin Moores 816. Who enunciated the concept of Technological Gatekeepers? (A) Dewey (B) T. J. Allen (C) Ranganathan (D) Calvin Moores 817. What are referral services? (A) In which the answers of the question are given directly. (B) In which the answers of the queries are given very fast. (C) In which recommendation is done for the source. (D) In which the source is provided. 818. To se arch about the addre ss of an organisation is called (A) SDI (B) CAS (C) short range reference service (D) long range reference service 819. Auto abstracting involves use of computers to (A) structure the content of an abstract (B) prepare indicative abstract (C) pickup significant words (D) arrange words in order 820. The concept of Management by Objectives was propounded by (A) Drucker (B) Maslow (C) Herzberg (D) Locke 821. What is provided by referral services to the users? (A) These establish contact of user to reference sources (B) The se e stablish contact be twee n document and user (C) These establish contact between the user and the institution

Multiple Choice Questions D 563 (D) These establish contact with reference centre 822. What is called referral centre? (A) Which provides answer of the queries indirectly. (B) Which provides answer of the queries directly. (C) Which directs towards the source of the reference query. (D) Which provides source directly. 823. Which form of reference service is very much useful to a new man of the library? (A) Orientation (B) Long range reference service (C) Introduction (D) Ready reference service 824. What is not essential in the libraries for providing referral service to the users? (A) Library catalogues (B) Directory of institutions (C) Union catalogues (D) Encyclopaedias 825. What are two kinds of reference service? (A) CAS and SDI (B) Indexing and abstracting services (C) Short range and long range reference services (D) None of the above 826. What is called the finding of the address of an institution? (A) Short Range Reference Service (B) CAS (C) Long Range Reference Service (D) SDI 827. Reference interview is organised between whom? (A) Document and reader (B) Document and library staff (C) Reader and document (D) Reader and reference staff 828. What is the other name of short range reference service? (A) Long range reference service (B) Ready reference service (C) Responsing reference service (D) Anticipatory reference service 829. Who provides referral services? (A) Documentation centre

(B) Information centre (C) Reference centre (D) Referral centre 830. What facilitates identification of a published document with all its bibliographical details ? (A) Abstracting services (B) Indexing services (C) Information services (D) Reference service 831. Which one of the following is not the bibliographical service? (A) CAS (B) Indexing services (C) Reprography (D) SDI 832. JSTOR is an online system for archiving and accessing academic journals. It is located in (A) Germany (B) UK (C) USA (D)Budapest 833. What is the essential aspect of the information service? (A) Retrieval of information (B) Storage of information (C) Collection of information (D) Communication of information 834. Which one is not the factor that have contributed to the launching of indexing and abstracting services? (A) Language barriers (B) Diversity of publications (C) Enormous growth in published literature (D) Information handling 835. CAS, SDI, Indexing & Abstracting and Literature searching services fall under which category of service? (A) Bibliographical service (B) Reference service (C) Indexing service (D) Reprography service 836. What is called that service which provides essential information to its users out of the large amount of literature? (A) Reference service (B) Information service (C) Documentation service (D) Referral service

564 D Library and Information Science Specific 837. Which one is not indexing service ? (A) Applied Science and Technology Index (B) Atom Index (C) Current Technology Index (1962) (D) Current Indexing to Scientific & Technical Literature (1967)

844. The sentences should be written in which tense while writing an abstract of an article ? (A) In any tense (B) In present tense (C) In past tense (D) In future tense

838. Which services are the links between the originator of information and the ultimate user ? (A) Reference service (B) Reprography service (C) Indexing and abstracting services (D) Information service

845. A condensation that presents the objective, scope and findings of a document is known as (A) summary (B) abstract (C) digest (D) synopsis

839. How many types of information services generally are being provided in the libraries these days? (A) 5 (B) 8 (C) 6 (D) 12 840. What type of indexing & abstracting and literature search services are? (A) Retrospective information service (B) Current awareness service (C) Current information service (D) Selective dissemination of information service 841. Which one of the following is not the information service? (A) Indexing service (B) Translation service (C) Mobile service (D) Abstracting service 842. What are called those services which basically guide the users of the libraries to the bibliographical documents where in their required information is likely to be available ? (A) Bibliographical services (B) Reference services (C) Indexing services (D) Abstracting services 843. In which library service, the provision of abstracting, indexing and translation service is done in the libraries? (A) Abstracting service (B) Information service (C) Reference service (D) Translation service

846. In which language, the first national level abstracting periodical was published after the World War Second? (A) English (B) French (C) Urdu (D) Greek 847. In which country, the first abstracting periodical was published? (A) India (B) England (C) USA (D) France 848. What type of information services are CAS and SDI? (A) Retrospective information service (B) Current information service (C) Current awareness service (D) Selected dissemination of information service 849. Which one purpose is not essential to organise indexing and abstracting services ? (A) Diversity of publications (B) Language barriers (C) Availability of publications (D) Scattering of literature 850. Up to how much words, the size of the abstract must be according to Borko and Bernier? (A) 50-150 (B) 500-570 (C) 250-500 (D) 1-1000 851. The first abstracting journal is (A) Philosophical Transactions (B) Chemisches Zentrablatt (C) Chemical Abstracts (D) Journal des scavans 852. A list arranged systematically providing enough details about each item is known as

Multiple Choice Questions D 565 (A) bibliography (C) catalogue

(B) list (D) index

853. Which abstracting service is provided by American Chemical Society of USA? (A) Current Chemical Abstracts (B) American Chemical Society Journal (C) Chemical Abstracts (D) Journal of Chemical Society 854. Indexing periodicals are grouped under which sources? (A) Basic sources (B) Secondary sources (C) Tertiary sources (D) Primary sources 855. Which one is the first abstracting periodical published in India? (A) Science Abstracts (B) Social Science Abstracts (C) Indian Science Abstracts (D) Indian Social Science Abstracts 856. Which one is not the quality of the best abstract? (A) Reliability (B) Authority (C) Brevity (D) Applicability 857. What is the name of international abstracting service in the field of mathematical subjects ? (A) Mathematical Bulletin (B) Mathematical Journal (C) Journal of Mathematics (D) Mathematical Review 858. What is Index India? (A) Reprographic service (B) Translation service (C) Abstracting service (D) Indexing service 859. What are two names of the current information services? (A) CAS and SDI (B) Retrospective and current (C) Reference and Referral (D) Indexing and abstracting 860. In which type of library service, the display of newly acquired books and journals fall ? (A) SDI (B) CAS (C) Reference service (D) Information service

861. What is called that service which intends to meet the current approach of the users? (A) CAS (B) Abstracting (C) Indexing (D) SDI 862. It is customary for any special library to provide some kind of CAS to its users. What is this service called? (A) CAS (B) In house CAS (C) Commercially provided CAS (D) SDI 863. CAS basically is a process of dissemination of which type of information? (A) Retrospective (B) Important information (C) Required information (D) Current information 864. What is the best example of Research in Progress Bulletins? (A) Current Research Information System (USA) (B) Current Research Information (USA) (C) Current Research (USA) (D) Research Bulletin 865. What is the most important characteristic of CAS? (A) Speed of current information (B) Speed of availability of information (C) Speed with which current information is made available to the users (D) Current information availability 866. Current Awareness Service (CAS) was introduced in the year (A) 1940 (B) 1945 (C) 1950 (D) 1955 867. The routing of periodicals is which service in the library? (A) SDI (B) Indexing service (C) CAS (D) Abstracting service 868. What is basically CAS? (A) A process of dissemination of information (B) A process of information (C) A process of dissemination of current information (D) A simple information service

566 D Library and Information Science Specific 869. Which one is not the step of organising CAS in the libraries? (A) SDI (B) Current content lists (C) Routing of articles (D) Preparation of documentation lists

877. SDI is one of the part of which service? (A) Current awareness service (B) Reference service (C) Current information service (D) Retrospective information service

870. In which two categories CAS is grouped? (A) In house CAS and out house CAS (B) In house CAS and commercially provided CAS (C) Current CAS and retrospective CAS (D) Computer based CAS and computerized CAS

878. The meaning of the Boolean expression A NOT B is to such a set, which has (A) elements of A (B) elements of B (C) elements of A which are not the elements of B (D) elements of B which are not the elements of A

871. What is called that service in which the computer was used to provide CAS? (A) Computerized CAS (B) Computer based CAS (C) SDI (D) Computerized SDI

879. What is user’s profile? (A) A statement for using the library (B) A list of useful files (C) A statement of the information requirement of an user (D) A list of users

872. What is the best example of Contents by Journals service? (A) Current Contents (B) Index Medics (C) MEDLARS (D) Atom index

880. Whether matching of the user profile and document profile may be done manually. (A) Ye s (B) N o (C) Yes with the help of special devices (D) No, never can be done in any case

873. What is variant form of CAS service? (A) SDI service (B) Indexing service (C) Current service (D) Abstractive Service 874. Indexing system in which the coordination of terms is done at the search stage was first introduced by (A) S.R. Ranganathan (B) Derek Austin (C) Morfiner Taube (D) H.P. Luhn 875. Which one is not the important component of SDI system? (A) Users represented by profiles (B) Document profiles (C) Computer hardware and software (D) A list of useful citations 876. User’s profile is an important component of which service? (A) CAS (B) SDI (C) Reference service (D) Documentation service

881. When Luhn developed SDI service? (A) 1972 (B) 1961 (C) 1965 (D) 1962 882. Feedback mechanism is a part of which service ? (A) Reprography service (B) CAS (C) Translation service (D) SDI 883. Who developed computer based SDI service ? (A) H. P. Luhn (B) J. D. Brown (C) H. E. Bliss (D) E. Garfield 884. Which one is not the Boolean Operator? (A) NI L (B) NOT (C) AND (D) OR 885. SDI was first formulated by whom? (A) Calvin Moores (B) S. C. Bradford (C) H. P. Luhn (D) E. Garfield 886. What does SDI stand for? (A) Selective Dissemination of Information (B) Science Development of India (C) Selected Dissemination of Indexing (D) Selected Developer of Information

Multiple Choice Questions D 567 887. Who was George Boole? (A) Politician (B) Mathematician (C) Information scientist (D) Library science scientist 888. Feedback is one of the essential aspect of which service? (A) Bibliographic service (B) Circulation system (C) SDI service (D) Reference service 889. What is matched with features of the documents in SDI service? (A) Document’s profile (B) User’s profile (C) Database (D) Information sources 890. What is called that process which establishes contact between users and the information database? (A) Interface (B) Off-line (C) On-line (D) Modem 891. What is called that report which provides an account of the general direction of research in the subject based on a review of the documents on current developments? (A) Trend report (B) State of the art report (C) Progress report (D) Annual report 892. Trend report is a highly useful product for what? (A) Dissemination of information (B) Storage of information (C) Analysis and consolidation of information (D) Storage and dissemination of information 893. Trend reports fall in the category of which source of information? (A) State of the art Report (B) Library Report (C) Annual Report (D) Progress Report 894. The meaning of the Boolean expression A OR B is to such set, which has (A) elements of both A and B (B) elements of B only

(C) elements of A only (D) all of these 895. Out of the following International organisations which organisation also produces trend reports? (A) UNESCO (B) IFLA (C) FID (D) ICSU 896. An increase in the level of ‘specificity’ of indexing languages results in increase in (A) Recall (B) Precision (C) Noise (D) both recall and precision 897. What is the main purpose of a trend report? (A) To provide information on a particular subject (B) To provide the specific information requirements (C) To fulfill the specific information requirements on a particular subject (D) To fulfill the specific information requirements 898. What are those services which are provided through on-line process via computer to the users? (A) On-line services (B) Current awareness service (C) Selective dissemination of information (D) None of the above 899. What is called that report, in which the survey of the important documents and articles related with a subject is published in a year? (A) Information report (B) Trend report (C) Annual report (D) Progress report 900. By whom trend reports are generally produced in house? (A) By research organisations (B) By social institutions (C) By academic institutions (D) By R&D organisations 901. What is the meaning of a trend report? (A) It presents the progress of the development of a specific subject (B) It presents the progress of a specific subject

568 D Library and Information Science Specific (C) It presents progress as well as trend of the subject (D) None of these 902. What is called that file which describes users of SDI service and their subject interests? (A) Document’s profile (B) User’s profile (C) Matching profile (D) SDI profile 903. What type of service is the DIALOG? (A) Reference service (B) On-line service (C) Fast service (D) Off-line service 904. Who publishes World Index of Scientific Translations? (A) Library of Congress (B) European Translation Centre (C) INSDOC (D) National Translation Centre 905. What is the present name of on-line form of MEDLARS? (A) DIALOG (B) MEDLINE (C) Index Medicus (D) Medico 906. When was European Translation Centre established? (A) 1958 (B) 1959 (C) 1960 (D) 1985 907. On-line service is most popular & successful with the help of (A) DIALOG (B) AGRICOLA (C) BRS (D) ORBIT 908. The International Translation Centre is located at (A) London (B) Paris (C) Delhi (D) Brussels 909. Which centre has been established as International Translation centre? (A) National Translation centre (B) European Translation centre (C) American Translation centre (D) Indian Translation centre 910. How have the process of on-line services become possible? (A) Due to linkage to processor of the computer (B) Due to networking

(C) Due to provision of connectivity of many terminals to the processor of the computer (D) Due to computer 911. Which one of the following is the publication of BLLD related with translation services? (A) BLLD announcement (B) BLLD review (C) Journal in Translation (D) None of these 912. European Translation Centre is established in (A) Paris (B) Viena (C) Delft (D) Rome 913. What is called the getting direct access of the files contained in the central processor attached with many terminals of the central processor of the computer? (A) On-line services (B) Compute r acce ss (C) File access (D) Direct access 914. Through which on-line service the beginning of getting access from databases via computer was held? (A) ORBIT (B) MEDLARS (C) MEDLINE (D) None of these 915. What is called the service in which the mechanism for making the contents of documents in languages not known to the user ? (A) Translation service (B) SDI (C) Indexing service (D) CAS 916. Which of the model is not based on the analysis of the subject? (A) Citation Indexing (B) PRECIS (C) Chain Indexing (D) Uniterm Indexing 917. Through which agency DIALOG on-line service is being provided? (A) LOCKHEAD (B) Library of Congress, USA (C) National Library of Medicine, USA (D) SDC 918. When NTC was established in USA? (A) 1953 (B) 1955 (C) 1959 (D) 1962

Multiple Choice Questions D 569 919. What is called the production of a document in the same size and shape? (A) Microform copy (B) Facsimile copy (C) Short form copy (D) Large form copy 920. INSDOC translates cover to cover translation of which language? (A) Italian (B) English (C) French (D) Russian 921. Which one is not the problem concerned with translation services in India? (A) Rapid changes in the panel of translators (B) The qualifications of the translators are not parallel (C) Lack of essential translation institutes (D) The number of translators is very high 922. UNESCO is providing translation services through which publication? (A) Translation Monthly (B) Word Trans Index (C) Index Translationam (D) Journals of Translations 923. What is the meaning of duplication? (A) To make single copy of document (B) To make many copies of document (C) To make large number of copies (D) To make small sized copies 924. Index Translationam is published by (A) International Federation of Translators (B) UNESCO (C) United Nation’s Organisation (D) H. W. Wilson Company 925. What is Xerography? (A) Wet process of reprography (B) One process of reprography (C) Name of a machine (D) None of these 926. Which monthly publication of translation is being published by INSDOC? (A) Indian Translation Journal (B) National Index of Translations (C) Translationam (D) National Translations 927. Which one is not the important duplicating technique?

(A) (B) (C) (D)

Offset duplication Stencil duplication Spirit duplication Type duplication

928. Which organisation has been mainly providing translation services in India? (A) NASSDOC (B) SENDOC (C) INSDOC (D) DESIDOC 929. What is the meaning of reprography? (A) Chitting of a document (B) To make so many copies of a document (C) Reproduction of copies of a document (D) To make single copy of a document 930. Which institution does not provide translation services in India? (A) Indian Statistical Institute, Calcutta (B) Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore (C) ALA (D) INSDOC 931. Who is the author of ‘Systematic Indexing’ ? (A) E.J. Coates (B) J. Kaiser (C) C.A. Cutter (D) J.W. Metcalfe 932. Which types of light rays are exposed on the paper in Thermofax reprographic process? (A) General rays (B) Infrared Rays (C) X-Rays (D) Ultraviolet Rays 933. Xerox is the name of (A) the use of paper in making copies (B) a scientist (C) a machine (D) process of making copies of the document 934. How the process of Electrostatic Macro copying is completed? (A) By electric discharge (B) By photo conductors charged electrically (C) By the action of light on electrically charged photo conductors (D) None of these 935. What do you mean by micrography? (A) Same size of a document (B) Miniaturisation of a document

570 D Library and Information Science Specific (C) Enlargement of a document (D) None of these 936. What is the size of a replica of a document after the micro copying? (A) It becomes small size (B) It becomes large size (C) It remains the same (D) None of these 937. Browne charging system is for (A) Classification (B) Indexing (C) Cataloging (D) Circulation 938. The copy of a document is made on which type of paper in macro copying? (A) On ordinary paper (B) On tracing paper (C) On transparent plastic material (D) All the above 939. What is the main component for copying in electrostatic method? (A) Two cameras (B) A specially designed camera (C) Electric charge (D) Camera 940. What is the size of a replica of a document after the copying process? (A) Same size (B) Big size of the original (C) Small size of the original (D) All the above 941. What type of sensitive material is used in Silver Halide process? (A) Chemical compound (B) Silver halide (C) Silver nitrate (D) Diazonium 942. Macro copying is a method of making how many copies of a document quickly and economically? (A) In small number (B) In large number (C) 100 copies (D) Only one copy 943. Which two methods of copying are popular these days? (A) Macro and Micro copying (B) Photostat and Xerox (C) Photo and Cheeting (D) Vertical and horizontal

944. Which one is not the technique of macro copying? (A) Electrostatic (B) Diazographic (C) Thermographic (D) Offset 945. What is not the principal characteristic of Silver Halide Process? (A) It is a wet process (B) Both sided documents can be reproduced (C) Copies obtained are permanent in nature (D) Copies made by this process are not expensive 946. What is called the camera which is used in micrography technique? (A) Precision camera (B) Microfilm camera (C) Coloured camera (D) Ordinary camera 947. Reference service connects users with (A) publishers (B) important libraries (C) documents available in the library that help in locating specific information (D) the book seller 948. Reference service is a “Personalised Service to each reader in helping him to find the documents answering his interest at the moment pinpointedly, exhaustively and expeditiously.” This definition has been propounded by (A) James I. Wyer (B) William B. Childs (C) S. R. Ranganathan (D) Margret Hutchins 949. According to S. R. Ranganathan, Reference Service is (A) specialised service (B) personal service (C) service on demand (D) anticipatory service 950. Preparation, service and assimilation are the main stages involved in (A) initiation (B) user education (C) reference service (D) bibliography

Multiple Choice Questions D 571 951. Desirableness of personal contact between reader and library material was stressed by (A) H. P. Luhn (B) Derek Austein (C) Samuel S. Green (D) S. C. Bradford 952. “Ready reference service is reference service finished in a very short time in a moment if possible.” Stated by (A) S. R. Ranganathan (B) Margret Hutchins (C) George S. Bohn (D) Richard J. Beeler 953. Short Range and Long Range Services are two types of (A) documentation service (B) information service (C) reference service (D) none of the above 954. Conservative, Liberal and moderate theories of reference service are given by (A) S. R. Ranganathan (B) Samuel Rothstein (C) James I. Wyre (D) Samuel S. Green 955. Which of the following services are finished in a very short time, in a moment if possible ? (A) Long Range Reference Service (B) Ready Reference Service (C) User Education (D) Initiation 956. Reference Service is of (A) two types (B) three types (C) four types (D) five types 957. Answering technical enquiries, referral service, compilation and bibliographies, retrospective search, document back-up, and translation service are offered as (A) responsive services (B) anticipatory services (C) both (A) and (B) (D) none of these 958. The term ‘Index’ has been derived from the Latin word Indicare which means (A) to search (B) to organise

(C) to indicate (D) to retrieve 959. How the use of Library can be maximised ? (A) Application of Computers (B) User Education (C) Reference Service (D) Current Awareness Service 960. The concept of ‘Stopword’ list is relevant in the context of (A) Uniform Indexing (B) Citation Indexing (C) Chain Indexing (D) Keyword Indexing 961. When was the concept of selective dissemination of information (SDI) introduced? (A) 1948 (B) 1958 (C) 1960 (D) 1962 962. State who amongst the following persons is the originator of computer based SDI. (A) Mortimer Taube (B) H. P. Luhn (C) E. Garfield (D) B. C. Vickery 963. In a College Library, ‘Library Orientation to users’ should be given at the (A) beginning of each academic year (B) end of each academic year (C) in middle of each academic year (D) none of the above 964. Selective Dissemination of Information (SDI) introduced (A) creating a ‘user profile’ (B) matching of ‘user profile’ with ‘document index profile’ (C) both (A) and (B) (D) none of the above 965. ‘Initiation Programme to new user’ was coined by (A) P. N. Kaula (B) Jefferson (C) S. R. Ranganathan (D) C.W. Hanson 966. “Web of Science” is (A) A Citation Index (B) A Bibliography (C) An Abstracting Service (D) All of the above

572 D Library and Information Science Specific 967. How many different phases through which the SDI system functions? (A) 2

(B) 3

(C) 4

(D) 5

968. Traits de Documentation was brought out by Paul Otlet in (A) 1905 (B) 1934 (C) 1940 (D) 1948 969. The Credit for the invention of computer based citation indexing goes to (A) F. W. Lancaster (B) H. P. Luhn (C) E. Garfield (D) C. A. Mooers 970. Read the following example and indicate the name of the indexing system used : ‘Remuneration of teachers in French universities.’ The index headings are set as the following two lines : France Universities l Teachers l Remuneration Universities l France Teachers l Remuneration (A) Chain procedure (B) POPSI (C) PRECIS (D) KWIC 971. Passive Documentation is also termed as (A) documentation service (B) documentation practice (C) documentation work (D) documentation programme 972. Indexing and Abstracting Services come under (A) Responsive Services (B) Anticipatory Services (C) Selective Dissemination of Information (D) Current Awareness Service 973. Translationum Indicarum is published by (A) National Library, Calcutta (B) BLLD (C) UNESCO (D) None of these 974. Active Documentation is also called (A) documentation work (B) documentation service (C) documentation practice (D) documentation programme

975. Translation does not help to overcome (A) communication gap (B) language barrier (C) information explosion (D) scattering of documents 976. Match the following : List I List II (a) C.A. Cutter (i) Bibliographic Classification (b) J.D. Brown (ii) Expansive Classification (c) S.R. (iii) Subject Ranganathan Classification (d) H.E. Bliss (iv) Colon Classification Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (B) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (C) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (D) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) 977. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) User (i) Bibliographic orientation service (b) Information (ii) Reference repackaging service (c) Translation (iii) Digest series (d) Indexing (iv) Support service Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (B) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (C) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (D) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) 978. Kardex is adopted in libraries for (A) Recording of news clippings (B) Recording of serials (C) Recording of books (D) Filing of cards 979. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Chain indexing i. Derek Austin b. Relational ii. S R Ranganathan indexing c. Subject Indexing iii. J.E.L. Farradane d. PRECIS iv. E. J. Coats

Multiple Choice Questions D 573 Codes: a (A) i (B) ii (C) i (D) ii

b ii iii ii iv

c iv iv iii i

d iii i iv iii

980. Assertion (A): An indexing language is an artificial language as it uses controlled vocabulary. Reason (R): It provides different relationships between terms. (A) Both (A) and (R) are false (B) Both (A) and (R) are true (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 981. Assertion (A): An indexing language is much more than a list of index terms that are acceptable to users. Reason (R): An indexing language helps users discriminate between terms and reduces ambiguity in the language. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the correct explanation (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true (D) (A) is true, but (R) is false 982. Assertion (A): Deacidification is a measure to preserve documents in any medium. Reason (R): Digital preservation needs a different preservation care. Codes : (A) (A) is false, but (R) is true (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 983. Assertion (A): SDI is a user oriented current information service. Reason (R): It is an alerting service directed towards groups. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false

984. Assertion (A): Online services incur heavy investment at the initial stage. Reason (R): Online services are costlier than print services. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false (C) (A) is false but (R) is true (D)Both (A) and (R) are false 985. Assertion (A): Abstracting services facilitate literature review. Reason (R): Literature review summarises major findings of various studies. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 986. Assertion (A): An indexing language is an artificial language and it uses controlled vocabulary. Reason (R): Controlled vocabulary provides relation between and among terms. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 987. Assertion (A): Informative abstracts provide a concise summary of the subject content of an article. Reason (R): These are title-oriented than finding-oriented. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) (A) is true but (R) is false (C) (A) is false but (R) is true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 988. Arrange the following Indexing; Systems in the order of their origin : (i) POPSI (ii) PRECIS (iii) Chain Indexing (iv) KWIC Codes : (A) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (B) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (C) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) (D) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii)

574 D Library and Information Science Specific 989. Arrange the following bibliographies according to their date of origin : (i) Indian National Bibliography (ii) Cumulative Book Index (iii) Book In Print (iv) British National Bibliography Codes : (A) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (D) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) 990. What will be the correct sequence of books on the shelves bearing the following class numbers? (i) 2 : 8’N4 (ii) 2 : 8a (iii) 2 : 81 (iv) 2 : 81a Codes : (A) (i), (iv), (iii), (ii) (B) (i), (ii), (iv), (iii) (C) (iii), (i), (iv), (ii) (D) (ii), (i), (iv), (iii) 991. Which of the following is an isolate? (A) Geography (B) Medicine (C) Botany (D) France 992. What does mnemonics mean? (A) Aid to memory (B) Alphabetical device (C) Empty digit (D) None of these 993. How many Auxiliaries are there in UDC? (A) 3 (B) 8 (C) 5 (D) 10 994. Emptying device is used in CC to provide (A) alternative arrangement (B) hospitality in array (C) hospitality in chain (D) flexibility 995. The classes belonging to same array are said to be (A) basic class (B) subordinated class (C) coordinated class (D) canonical class 996. International Classification Scheme was first published in the year (A) 1958 (B) 1964 (C) 1962 (D) 1965

997. Who is the deviser of Bibliographic Classification (BC)? (A) H. E. Bliss (B) S. R. Ranganathan (C) J. D. Brown (D) S. C. Bradford 998. Which of the following schedules have no canonical classes? (A) R (Philosophy) (B) C (Physics) (C) B (Mathematics) (D) L (Medicine) 999. Who invented ‘POPSI’? (A) A. Neelameghan (B) S. R. Ranganathan (C) Ganesh Bhattacharya (D) None of these 1000. The main classes B (Mathematics) to M (Useful Arts) are the subdivisions of which broad class of CC? (A) Mathematics (B) Political science (C) Social science (D) Natural science 1001. Paul Otlet and Henry La Fontaine are related to (A) DDC (B) BC (C) UDC (D) CC 1002. In class number L185-74 : 4 : 7, by which method LI85-74 is obtained? (A) Subject device (B) Phase Relation (C) Super-Imposition (D) Common Isolate device 1003. What is meant by Modes of Formation of Subjects? (A) Origin of new subjects (B) Acquisition of new subjects (C) Development of new subjects (D) None of the above 1004. The ordinal value of the digit delta (D) lies between which main classes? (A) Medicine and Useful Arts (B) Linguistics and Religion (C) Literature and Linguistics (D) Useful Arts and Fine Arts 1005. Who coined the term ‘Modes of Formation of Subjects’?

Multiple Choice Questions D 575 (A) (B) (C) (D)

W. C. B. Sayers Melvil Dewey S. R. Ranganathan A. Neelmeghan

1006. In the schedule of V (History), what is V:19? (A) Basic class (B) Coordinate class (C) Host class (D) Canonical class 1007. POPSI is a (A) Key-word based indexing system (B) Post-coordinate indexing system (C) Pre-coordinate indexing system (D) Citation indexing system 1008. In the schedule of main class 2 (Library Science), from where M (Matter) facet is taken? (A) The same schedule (B) Generallia (C) Bibliography (D) Generally bibliography 1009. The primary basic subject ‘Bio-Chemistry’ is formed by (A) fission (B) distillation (C) lamination (D) fusion 1010. What is PRECIS? (A) Post-coordinate indexing system (B) Pre-coordinate indexing system (C) Preserved context indexing system (D) None of these 1011. What is the common face t in main classes of Biology, Zoology and Botany? (A) Problem facet (B) Time facet (C) Personality facet (D) Matter facet 1012. Modes of Formation is a part of (A) cataloguing (B) documentation (C) classification (D) computer science 1013. What is the full expansion of POPSI? (A) Postulates of permuted subject Indexing (B) Postulate based permuted subject Indexing

(C) Postulate operated subject Indexing (D) None of these 1014. What does P2 represent in CC? (A) Second Round Personality (B) Second Level Property (C) Second Level Personality (D) Second Round Property 1015. What is the main class of the title Drug Habits according to CC? (A) Psychology (B) Sociology (C) History (D) Law 1016. Which of the following does not give extrapolation? (A) Empty digit device (B) Sector device (C) Gap device (D) Common Isolate device 1017. Which main class divide s all main classes of the schedule of CC into two parts? (A) O (Literature) (B) D (Spiritual Experience and Mysticism) (C) 2 (Library science) (D) M (Useful Arts) 1018. In the schedule of O (Literature), P4 represents Work Facet, if the serial number of a book written by an author is 17, what will be the Work Facet number? (A) 25 (B) 31 (C) 16 (D) 21 1019. Which of the following notations and digits have been used in UDC? (A) 26 Roman Capitals, 10 Arabic numerals (B) 23 Roman Capitals, 26 Roman smalls, 10 Arabic numerals and D (C) 26 Roman Capitals, 23 Roman smalls, 10 Arabic numerals and D (D) 26 Roman Capitals, 23 Roman smalls, 10 Arabic numerals 1020. In main class V (History), Personality facet is taken from which of the following? (A) Common Isolates (B) Time Isolates (C) Space Isolates (D) Language Isolates

576 D Library and Information Science Specific 1021. The title History of Library Science is a case of which of the following? (A) Common Isolate (B) Phase relation (C) History-Main class (D) Science 1022. Mathematics for Engineers is the example of which phase relation in CC? (A) Comparison (B) Bias (C) General (D) Influence 1023. In the schedule of X (Economics), which is proper way of using components in Personnel management? (A) Still more concrete, More concrete, Least concrete (B) Least concrete, Still more concrete, More concrete (C) Least concrete, More concrete, Still more concrete (D) More concrete, Still more concrete, Least concrete 1024. What name was given by Ranganathan to the rule which is used in the context of first order division of the major discipline such as classification, cataloguing, book selection, etc.? (A) Theories (B) Principles (C) Laws (D) Canons 1025. KWIC indexing technique is based on (A) citation (B) title (C) abstract (D) full text 1026. Which is not the part of SCI? (A) Citation Index (B) Source Index (C) Permuterm Subject Index (D) Alphabetical Author Index 1027. Who said that catalogue is a list of books which is arranged on some definite plan? (A) C. A. Cutter (B) A. Pannizi (C) W. C. B. Sayers (D) S. R. Ranganathan 1028. What is meaning of the word cannon regarding cataloguing? (A) Application of rules to cataloguing (B) Application of scientific rules to cataloguing (C) Application of specific normative principles to cataloguing (D) Application of specific theories to cataloguing

1029. How Ranganathan had succeeded in making cataloguing a science? (A) By establishing canons of cataloguing (B) By establishing normative principles for cataloguing (C) By establishing normative principles and canons (D) None of the above 1030. Whose name is related with the Science Citation Index? (A) Eugene Garfield (B) J. E. L. Farradane (C) J. Keiser (D) Frank Shepard 1031. To what Seymour Lubetzky is related by his contributions? (A) Cataloguing (B) Computer science (C) Reference service (D) Classification 1032. Canon of currency is the canon of (A) idea plane (B) notational plane (C) verbal plane (D) none of the above 1033. The name of Miss Margarett Mann is mainly related with which of the following? (A) Documentation (B) Cataloguing (C) Classification (D) Management 1034. AACR stands for which of the following? (A) Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules (B) Anglo-American Centre for Research (C) American Authority of Cataloguing Rules (D) Anglo-American Classification Research 1035. Who was the deviser of British Museum Code? (A) A. Pannizi (B) D. M. Noris (C) C. A. Cutter (D) None of these 1036. How many Normative Principles are formulated by Ranganathan regarding cataloguing? (A) 6 (B) 9 (C) 2 (D) 8 1037. Which principle of cataloguing suggests that new additions must be classified

Multiple Choice Questions D 577 and catalogued according to new pattern? (A) Law of Parsimony (B) Law of Symmetry (C) Law of Interpretation (D) Principle of Osmosis 1038. Which one is the last canon formulated by Ranganathan? (A) Cannon of Ascertainability (B) Cannon of Currency (C) Cannon of Permanence (D) Cannon of Recall value 1039. Most of the Sacred books, old books and medieval books come under the (A) anonymous work (B) synonymous work (C) pseudonymous word (D) sacred work 1040. Machine Readable Cataloguing (MARC) was started in year (A) 1962 (B) 1966 (C) 1975 (D) 1985 1041. Which te rm was first use d Ranganathan for cataloguing? (A) Cataloguing of Periodicals (B) Cooperative Cataloguing (C) Cataloguing-in-Publications (D) Pre-natal Cataloguing

by

1042. Who started the programme of MARC? (A) Library of Congress (B) British Library London (C) ALA (D) IFLA 1043. Who devised Classified Catalogue Code (CCC)? (A) Melvil Dewey (B) C. A. Cutter (C) A. Pannizi (D) S. R. Ranganathan 1044. Which of the following is the first Normative Principle of cataloguing propounded by Ranganathan? (A) Law of symmetry (B) Law of impartiality (C) Law of interpretation (D) Law of parsimony 1045. Who amongst the following has written the book History of Cataloguing and Cataloguing Methods?

(A) (B) (C) (D)

C. A. Cutter D. M. Noris Margaret Mann S. R. Ranganathan

1046. The first edition of ALA Code was published in the year (A) 1897 (B) 1939 (C) 1968 (D) 1895 1047. Which of the following is a Pseudo name? (A) Surya Kant Tripathi Nirala (B) Prem Chand (C) Jai Shanker Prasad (D) Shakespeare 1048. Which National Library is related with AACR-I? (A) Library of Congress (B) National Library of India (C) State Lenin Library (D) British Museum 1049. NPAC programme is related with (A) inter library loan (B) network (C) management (D) cooperative cataloguing 1050. Who started Shared Cataloguing? (A) Library of Congress (B) National Library of India (C) Imperial Library (D) British Museum 1051. How many levels of descriptions AACRII provides? (A) 8 (B) 6 (C) 3 (D) 5 1052. AACR was propounded in the year (A) 1905 (B) 1908 (C) 1912 (D) 1915 1053. In which of the following countries the system of Sheaf catalogue was introduced? (A) USA (B) India (C) Holland (D) France 1054. ICCP was sponsored by (A) UNESCO (B) ALA (C) IFLA (D) FID 1055. What is the classified catalogue? (A) Title catalogue (B) Dictionary catalogue

578 D Library and Information Science Specific (C) Subject catalogue (D) Author catalogue 1056. The name of the author of a book is not known, what we call the work? (A) Antonyms (B) Pseudonyms (C) Anonyms (D) Fictitious work 1057. Cataloguing in Publication programme was introduced by (A) Library of Congress (B) National Library of India (C) Imperial Library (D) British Museum

(CIP)

1058. Card form of the catalogue was originated in (A) USA (B) India (C) France (D) England 1059. Which of the following organisations is not related with AACR-I? (A) Canadian Library Association (B) British Library Association (C) American Library Association (D) Indian Library Association 1060. In which year AACR-II came out? (A) 1977 (B) 1978 (C) 1976 (D) 1965 1061. Which library first introduced the printed catalogue? (A) British Museum (B) Lenin State (C) Imperial Library (D) Library of Congress 1062. Library of Congress Subject Headings List (LCSH) was originated by (A) LC (B) SC (C) BC (D) CC 1063. What is Chain Procedure? (A) Method of deriving subject headings (B) Method of making chains (C) Method of deriving links (D) Method of making subject entries 1064. According to AACR-II, the size of the book in physical description area is preceded by which of the following? (A) Colon (B) Semi-colon (C) Comma (D) Full Stop

1065. Dr. Ranganathan’s Chain Procedure is meant for (A) Subject cataloguing (B) Cataloguing (C) Classification (D) Deriving subject headings 1066. National Library of India uses which code of cataloguing to catalogue the books? (A) CCC (B) AACR-II (C) AACR-I (D) AACR-I and AACR-II 1067. What is called the catalogue which represents the collection of number of libraries? (A) Title Catalogue (B) Subject Catalogue (C) Author Catalogue (D) Union Catalogue 1068. Details about the book such as title, author, publisher, place and year of publication, pages, etc. are called (A) imprint (B) collation (C) annotations (D) bibliographical data 1069. What is false link in Chain procedure? (A) That ends on an alphabet (B) That ends on a numeral (C) That ends on a phase relation only (D) That ends on a connective symbol and phase relation 1070. The alphabetical part of Classified Catalogue consists of (A) main entry (B) all added entries (C) all added word entries (D) cross reference entry 1071. What are called main entries, class index entries and cross reference entries? (A) Author and subject entries (B) Subject entries (C) Class number in CCC (D) None of the above 1072. Sears List of Subject Headings (SLSH) is mainly used in which types of libraries? (A) Small libraries (B) College libraries

Multiple Choice Questions D 579 (C) Academic libraries (D) Special libraries 1073. Missing link in Chain Procedure is the link on which (A) there is no phase relation (B) there is no number (C) there is no connective symbol (D) there is no subject 1074. The function of Library classification is to achieve (A) Order (B) Filing (C) Helpful sequence (D) Arrangement 1075. According to which code, each individual element is enclosed by circular brackets? (A) AACR-I (B) CCC (C) ALA Code (D) AACR-II 1076. Name catalogue is variant of (A) Author catalogue (B) Card catalogue (C) Subject catalogue (D) Title catalogue 1077. How University Grants Commission, India will be rendered according to AACR-II? (A) India, University Grants Commission (B) India, University (Grants Commission) (C) INDIA (University Grants Commission) (D) University Grants Commission, India 1078. What is called the sum of all the areas and elements, which are used to describe, identify or retrieve any document or a publication of information content? (A) Bibliographic description (B) Bibliographic details (C) Bibliographic data (D) Bibliographic record 1079. The terms record form, record structure, readable form are synonymously equivalent to (A) bibliographic record (B) record format (C) computer format (D) bibliographic description

1080. How bibliographic record may be viewed? (A) As a package of data (B) Format of entry (C) As a tool for data (D) Record format 1081. Where tracing is rendered in CCC? (A) On the front of the main entry (B) In the middle of the main entry (C) On the back of the main entry (D) In the bottom of main entry 1082. Who developed the chain indexing? (A) D. J. Foskett (B) E. J. Coates (C) S. R. Ranganathan (D) D. Austin 1083. Ministry of Education, Government of West Bengal will be rendered according to CCC as (A) Ministry of Education (West Bengal) (B) West Bengal, (Education (Ministry of-) (C) West Bengal, Ministry of Education (D) WEST BENGAL, EDUCATION (Ministry of -) 1084. If there are four authors of a book, then the main entry according to AACR-II will be rendered under (A) first author (B) second author (C) title (D) none of these 1085. If the name of the author is assumed by himself to conceal his identity, it will be called (A) antonym (B) pseudonym (C) personal name (D) alternative name 1086. What is character in the string of formats? (A) Any symbol representing a letter of the alphabet (B) Any symbol representing a digit (C) Any symbol representing a sign (D) All the above 1087. What is not correct about Internal/Local formats? (A) They do not have to conform to any external standards

580 D Library and Information Science Specific (B) They can be changed specifically as per need of the system (C) They are internal or local to a software system (D) The designers of this system cannot adopt any convention they wish 1088. What are the main components for exchange formats? (A) Rules (B) Content designators (C) A defined physical structure (D) All the above 1089. Canon of sought heading relates to (A) classification (B) cataloguing (C) documentation (D) none of these 1090. What is the meaning of bibliographic record of document? (A) Data package related with the document (B) Recording documentation (C) Recording of the document (D) None of the above 1091. What are two types of exchange format? (A) Local and International formats (B) Local and National formats (C) Internal and Interchange formats (D) Internal and External formats 1092. What is the major problem for designers of exchange format? (A) Lack of international standards (B) Lack of international agreement on standard for designing (C) Lack of international agreement on standards for bibliographic record (D) All the above 1093. The formats use d to e xchange the records between the systems are called as (A) local formats (B) bibliographic formats (C) exchange formats (D) internal formats 1094. Which of the following cataloguing codes is based on ICCP? (A) Vatican Code (B) AACR-I (C) Rules for dictionary catalogue (D) Classified catalogue code (CCC)

1095. The system which is designed specifically for the transfer of machine readable bibliographic data between systems is called as (A) exchange format (B) bibliographic record format (C) bibliographic record (D) record format 1096. What may be termed as the greatest achie ve me nt contributing to the standardisation of bibliographic records? (A) Development of ISBDs (B) CCF (C) MARC format (D) ICCP (Paris) 1097. Which page of the book is the chief source of information for cataloguing? (A) Half-title page (B) Back of title page (C) Title page (D) Over flow page 1098. The international information format for exchanging information of cataloguing is called as (A) MARC (B) CCF (C) ISBD (D) UNIMARK 1099. Why it was necessary to apply standards in the field of Library and Information Science? (A) To bring uniformity in operations, processes, products and services & tools (B) To develop the field of library & information science (C) To establish standards in library and information services (D) None of the above 1100. What is the full form of ISSN? (A) International Scientific Serial Number (B) Indian Scientific Serial Number (C) International Standard Serial Number (D) Indian Standard Serial Number 1101. Which of the following codes has the provision for giving place and name of publisher? (A) AACR-2 (B) CCC

Multiple Choice Questions D 581 (C) British Museum catalogue code (D) Cutter’s Rules for Dictionary catalogue 1102. Which of the following standards is recognised internationally to give bibliographical information of the documents regarding the cataloguing? (A) ISSM (B) ISDS (C) ISBN (D) ISBD 1103. Which is not the inner form of the catalogue? (A) Classified Catalogue (B) Name Catalogue (C) Book form of the catalogue (D) Dictionary catalogue 1104. ISBD stands for (A) Indian System for Bibliographical Description (B) International Standard for Bibliographical Description (C) Indian Standard for Books and Documents (D) Indian Standard for Bibliographies and Documents 1105. Canon of Prepotence is concerned with (A) classification (B) cataloguing (C) reference service (D) information service 1106. Which organisation is mainly responsible in propounding and developing International Standard Bibliographic Description (ISBD)? (A) FID (B) IFLA (C) ICSU (D) UNESCO 1107. What is the alternative name of chain procedure? (A) Class Index Entries (B) Sought link (C) Chain Indexing (D) None of the above 1108. Dr. Ranganathan designed which of the following methods for deriving subject headings? (A) List of subject headings (B) Chain procedure (C) POPSI (D) PRECIS

1109. What is pre-coordinate indexing? (A) It coordinate s the te rms be fore searching (B) It coordinates the terms at the time of preparing index (C) It does not coordinate (D) It coordinate s the te rms afte r searching 1110. The Record Level of how many characters is in CCF record format? (A) 18 (B) 24 (C) 19 (D) 27 1111. What is the full name of CCF? (A) Common Communication Format (B) Compulsory Communication Force (C) Classified Catalogue Format (D) Common Catalogue Format 1112. What is used in the structure of CCF? (A) ISO 2709 (B) ISO 99 (C) ISO 2000 (D) None of these 1113. What are 3 factors of the structure of MARC-II? (A) Structure, Form, Size (B) Word, Structure, Sentence (C) Structure, Contents, Descriptors (D) Structure, Colour, Form 1114. A library catalogue must function as a retrieval tool. For this purpose, it must provide (A) all required entries (B) tracing in the main entry (C) detailed description of book (D) entries in the AACR format 1115. CCF was developed and distributed by (A) FID (B) ICSU (C) UNESCO (D) IFLA 1116. How many parts are there in each format of CCF? (A) 8 (B) 4 (C) 9 (D) 5 1117. What is the third area of Format structure of MARC-II other than these two i.e. Leader and Record Directory? (A) Descriptors (B) Operators (C) Role operators (D) Variable field 1118. What are the two main kinds of methods of indexing?

582 D Library and Information Science Specific (A) Pre-Coordinate and Post-coordinate Indexing (B) Chain and Uniterm Indexing (C) PRECIS and POPSI Indexing (D) Primary and Secondary Indexing 1119. The index entries and references are brought together in PRECIS indexing by (A) sequence (B) alphabetical (C) letter by letter (D) word by word 1120. Which of the following is the post-coordinate indexing? (A) PRECIS (B) SLIC (C) Peek-a-boo (D) POPSI 1121. Match the following: List A (1) MARC format (2) CCF (3) UNIMARC (4) Reference Manual

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e ) (f) (A) 1 (a), 2 (b), 3 (c), 4 (d) (B) 1 (b), 2 (d), 3 (e), 4 (a) (C) 1 (c), 2 (e), 3 (a), 4 (b) (D) 1 (d), 2 (a), 3 (b), 4 (c)

List B UNISIST LC ISO UNESCO IFLA ICSU

1122. The role operators in PRECIS are arranged by (A) by postulates (B) autonomy of indexer (C) schedules of a classification scheme (D) system provided by concerned author 1123. Which of the following is not an objective of the library catalogue? (A) To bring together entries for the work of an author (B) To bring together entries for the different editions of a work (C) To bring together entries for different books on a theme (D) To bring together entries for different works of a publisher 1124. M. Taube propounded which type of indexing in 1950? (A) Chain indexing (B) Post-coordinate indexing (C) Pre-coordinate indexing (D) Uniterm indexing 1125. Who developed Uniterm indexing system?

(A) Calvin Moores (C) H. P. Luhn

(B) Allen Kent (D) M. Taube

1126. The interposed operators in PRECIS are represented by (A) numerals (B) Greek symbols (C) Roman smalls (D) Roman symbols 1127. Who developed the concept of coordinate indexing? (A) E. J. Coates (B) C. A. Cutter (C) M. Taube (D) S. R. Ranganathan 1128. Whose name is related with PRECIS indexing? (A) M. Taube (B) Deric Austin (C) Ranganathan (D) E. J. Coates 1129. Which of the following not a quality of a good notation? (A) Brevity (B) Simplicity (C) Flexibility (D) Hospitality 1130. The KWIC indexing method is based on (A) title (B) full text (C) abstracts (D) citation 1131. Dictionary catalogue consists of (A) only author entries (B) only title entries (C) all types of entries in one alphabetical order (D) only subject entries 1132. Who developed KWIC indexing system? (A) H. P. Luhn (B) Allen Kent (C) Calvin Moores (D) M. Taube 1133. Who developed chain indexing? (A) H. P. Luhn (B) E. J. Coates (C) D. Austin (D) S. R. Ranganathan 1134. See references are shown in SLSH by (A) x (B) x x (C) both (D) none of these 1135. Which of the following is meant for bringing together the related documents of same subjects at one place? (A) Classification (B) Cataloguing (C) Indexing (D) Documentation 1136. The role operator zero (0) is meant for what in PRECIS? (A) Action

Multiple Choice Questions D 583 (B) Agent of transitive action (C) Location (D) Agent of intransitive action 1137. Which of the following are the types of Thesauri? (A) Controlled and Free language Thesauri (B) Real and artifactual Thesauri (C) Subject and Language Thesauri (D) Primary and Secondary Thesauri 1138. The indexes and indexing services fall under (A) computer service (B) selective dissemination of service (C) general library service (D) current awareness service 1139. In which order, the list of words is arranged in Thesaurus? (A) Alphabetical (B) Numerical (C) Classified (D) Dictionary wise 1140. Why it is essential to control over the terms in the indexing language? (A) For controlling the synonymous terms (B) For representing the relation in the concepts (C) For both the above (D) For none of the above 1141. Which one is the third step in POPSI? (A) Display of component term (B) Display of subject index entries (C) Selection of approach term (D) Display of material 1142. What is the manner of arrangement of subject headings in Library of Congress Subject Headings List (LCSH)? (A) Word by word (B) Sentence by sentence (C) Letter by letter (D) Classified 1143. In which manner the subject headings are printed in SLSH? (A) In dark ink (B) In italics (C) In capitals (D) In ink 1144. Which name is given to controlled vocabulary?

(A) (B) (C) (D)

Classification Dictionary Thesaurus Vocabulary control

1145. Sear’s List of Subject Headings (SLSH) is mainly useful for (A) small and medium libraries (B) special libraries (C) academic libraries (D) college libraries 1146. The databases which contain a mixture of textual and numerical data (such as annual reports), handbook data, telephone directory, railway time table directory are called (A) numeric (B) full text (C) text-numeric (D) multimedia 1147. The number of elements in the Call Number is (A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5 1148. What is that thesauri that allow only one term to denote a concept for the purpose of indexing and searching? (A) Primary Thesauri (B) Language Thesauri (C) Controlled Thesauri (D) Free Language Thesauri 1149. Databases include information stored in a mixture of different types of media, including for instance sound, video, pictures, text, hypertext and animation are called (A) multimedia databases (B) bibliographics databases (C) numeric databases (D) textual databases 1150. In which of the following categories Thesauri is counted? (A) Controlled indexing languages (B) Basic indexing languages (C) Natural indexing languages (D) None of the above 1151. The database which provides access of full text of a document is called (A) numeric (B) full text (C) reference (D) bibliographic

584 D Library and Information Science Specific 1152. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Dewey decimal (i) 1933 classification (b) Colon classifi- (ii) 1876 cation (c) Rider's (iii) 1905 International classification (d) Universal (iv) 1961 decimal classification Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (B) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (C) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) (D) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) 1153. Match the following : List - I (a) Key Word Indexing (i) (b) Citation Indexing (ii) (c) Uniterm Indexing (iii) (d) SLIC Indexing (iv) Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (B) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (C) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) (D) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv)

List - II J. R. Sharp H. P. Luhn E. Garfield M. Taube

1154. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Theory of (i) Farmington Knowledge Plan (b) IS : 1553-1960 (ii) Metadata Format (c) Resource Sharing (iii) Library Building (d) TEI (iv) Epistemology Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (B) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (C) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (D) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) 1155. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) C.A. Cutter (i) Bibliographic classification

(b) H.E. Bliss

(ii) Expansive classification (c) J.D. Brown (iii) Universal classification (d) Paul Otlet (iv) Subject & Henry classification LaFontaine Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (D) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) 1156. Match the following : List - I (a) International Conference on Cataloguing Principles (b) International Meeting of Cataloguing Experts (c) International Symposium of Bibliographic Exchange format (d) First CCF Users meeting Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (B) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (C) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (D) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii)

List - II (i) 1969

(ii) 1961 (iii) 1990

(iv) 1978

1157. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) AACR-1 (i) 1978 (b) AACR-2 (ii) 1967 (c) ALA code (iii) 1934 (d) CCC (iv) 1949 Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) (B) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (C) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (D) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) 1158. Match the following : List – I List (a) Elements of (i) Library Classification (b) Little Science (ii) Big Science

– II D. J. Desolla Price S.R. Ranganathan

Multiple Choice Questions D 585 (c) Documentation (d) Subject Approach to Information Codes : (a) (b) (A) (ii) (i) (B) (iii) (ii) (C) (iv) (ii) (D) (i) (ii)

(iii) D.J. Fosket (iv) S.C. Bradford

(c) (iv) (i) (iii) (iii)

(d) (iii) (iv) (i) (iv)

1159. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Ibid (i) in the work cited (b) Op.cit (ii) same as above (c) Loc.cit (iii) in the same pages (d) Vide (iv) se e Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (B) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (C) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (D) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) 1160. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Asian (i) Location of Recorder specific of specific volume of journal (b) Union (ii) Articles on Green Catalogue of Revolution Scientific Serials (c) Books-in-Print (iii) Obituary of Dev Anand (d) Social Science (iv) Availability of Index books Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (B) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (C) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (D) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) 1161. Match the following : List-I List-II (A) ibid (i) se e (B) loc.cit (ii) previously cited

(C) op.cit

(D) vide Codes : (a) (b) (A) (i) (ii) (B) (ii) (i) (C) (iii) (iv) (D) (iv) (iii)

(iii) same re fe re nce ci te d im me d iately above (iv) the same place cited (c) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i)

(d) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii)

1162. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) C.A. Catter (i) Selective Listing (b) Kaiser (ii) Thingpartmaterialaction (c) J.R. Sharp (iii) Concrete and proce ss (d) D. J. Coates (iv) Syndetic cataloguing Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (B) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (C) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (D) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) 1163. Match the following List – I a. Classification b. Cataloguing c. Subject Heading d. Library Science Abstracts Codes : (a) (b) (c) (A) ii i iv (B) ii iii iv (C) iv iii i (D) ii iv i

: List – II i. LISA ii. UDC iii. AACR iv. LCSH

(d) iii i ii iii

1164. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Means of improving i. Preservation operations and services b. Preparation ii. Standards of to-do-list c. Performance iii. Time guidelines management

586 D Library and Information Science Specific d.

Reinforce the spines of books Codes: a b c (A) iv iii ii (B) iv ii iii (C) ii iv iii (D) iii ii i

iv. Evaluation

d i i i iv

1165. Assertion (A): In Library classification, an empty digit helps in enterpolation between two consecutive ordinal numbers. Reason (R): An empty digit is a digit with ordinal value but no semantic value. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not a correct explanation (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 1166. Assertion (A): In Colon classification, ‘2’ represents mother country and '44' represents India. A given library in India can use '2' or '44' for India. But, the rules allow for a choice. Reason (R): The above is a case of violation of Canon of homonyms. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the correct explanation (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 1167. Assertion (A): Dewey Decimal is an enumerative scheme of classification. Reason (R): The scheme has developed several devices and is no more an enumerative scheme of classification. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) (A) is not true, but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1168. Assertion (A): ISBDs were devised by UNESCO. Reason (R): They are the standards for all types of bibliographic activities. (A) (A) is false but (R) is true (B) (A) is true but (R) is false

(C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1169. Assertion (A): Web OPAC is a computerised library catalogue available to the patrons online. Reason (R): It can be searched by the users within the four walls of the library only. (A) (A) is true but (R) is false (B) (A) is false but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1170. Assertion (A): In Colon Classification, 2 represents mother country and 44 represents India. A given library in India can use 2 or 44 for India. Reason (R): The above is in conformity with Canon of Homonym. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A) (B) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A) (C) (A) is true, but (R) is false (D) (A) is false, but (R) is true 1171. Assertion (A): In library classification, an empty digit helps in interpolation between two consecutive ordinal numbers. Reason (R): An empty digit is a digit with ordinal value but no semantic value. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A) (B) Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not a correct explanation of (A) (C) (A) is true, but (R) is false (D) (A) is false, but (R) is true 1172. Assertion (A): CC and UDC are most suitable classification schemes for special libraries. Reason (R): Most of the special libraries are using either CC or UDC for collection organization. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Multiple Choice Questions D 587 (B) Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A) (C) (A) is false but (R) is true (D)(A) true, but (R) is false 1173. Assertion (A): “Name Authority File” should be used in a library. Reason (R): All works of an author should be collocated. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) Both (A) and (R) true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A) (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1174. Assertion (A): Classification plays a significant role in online retrieval. Reason (R): Classification played an important role in manual system. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) (A) is false, but (R) is true 1175. Assertion (A): Browne charging system is simple and less time consuming. Reason (R): There is permanent issue record available. Codes : (A) (A) is false, but (R) is true (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1176. Assertion (A): Colon classification is an enumerative classification scheme. Reason (R): Colon classification has adopted analytico-synthetic approach for the construction of class number Codes : (A) (A) is false, but (R) is true (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1177. Assertion (A): Knowledge is growing exponentially. Reason (R): Number of researchers have increased. Codes : (A) Both (A) & (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false

(C) (A) is false but (R) is true (D) (A) is true but (R) is false 1178. Wall-Picture principle is one of the principles of (A) Facet sequence (B) Mnemonic sequence (C) Helpful sequence (D) Geographical sequence 1179. Assertion (A): The array of classes 11, 12, 13 and the array of classes 31, 32, 33 are said to be collateral arrays. Reason (R): They are derived from the original universe ‘O’. Codes : (A) (A) is false, (R) is true (B) (A) is true, (R) is false (C) Both (A) & (R) are true (D) Both (A) & (R) are false 1180. Arrange the following; Online Systems in the order of their origin (i) ERIC (ii) MEDLINE (iii) OCLC (iv) MARC Codes : (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (B) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (C) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (D) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) 1181. Arrange the following books in order of their publication : (i) Classified Catalogue Code (ii) Prolegomena to Library Classification (iii) Five Laws of Library Science (iv) Colon Classification Codes : (A) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (B) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (C) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (D) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) 1182. Arrange the following schemes of classification according to their year of origin : (i) Colon Classification (ii) Expansive Classification (iii) Universal Decimal Classification (iv) Dewey Decimal Classification Codes : (A) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (B) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (C) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) (D) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii)

588 D Library and Information Science Specific 1183. Arrange the following principles and canons according to the ir le vels as enunciated by Dr. S. R. Ranganathan : (i) Principles of Cataloguing (ii) General Normative Principles (iii) Laws of Library Science (iv) Canons of Cataloguing Codes : (A) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (D) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) 1184. Arrange the following in the chronological sequence of their development. (i) ISBD (ii) CCF (iii) FRBR (iv) MARC Codes : (A) (i), (ii), (iv), (iii) (B) (iv), (i), (ii), (iii) (C) (iii), (ii), (iv), (i) (D) (i), (iv), (ii), (iii) 1185. Arrange the following according to their development (I) CCC (II) ISBD (III) CCF (IV) MARC II Codes : (A) (I), (IV), (II), (III) (B) (I), (II), (IV), (III) (C) (I), (IV), (III), (II) (D) (IV), (II), (III), (I) 1186. Arrange the following in chronological order (i) ISBD (ii) MARC (iii) CCF (iv) RDA Codes : (A) (ii), (i), (iii), (iv) (B) (i), (iv), (iii), (ii) (C) (iii), (iv), (i), (ii) (D) (ii), (iv), (i), (iii) 1187. Arrange the following subjects in ascending order according to their DDC numbers : (i) Horticulture (ii) Public Administration (iii) Metaphysics (iv) Botany Codes : (A) (i), (iv), (iii), (ii) (B) (iii), (ii), (iv), (i) (C) (ii), (iii), (i), (iv) (D) (iv), (ii), (i), (iii) 1188. What will be the correct sequence of books on the shelves bearing the following class numbers?

(i) 2:51 (ii) 232 (iii) 2;46 (iv) 2’N65 Codes : (A) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) (B) (ii), (i), (iii), (iv) (C) (iv), (i), (iii), (ii) (D) (iii), (iv), (ii), (i) 1189. Arrange the following classification schemes according to their year of first publication : (i) DDC (ii) CC (iii) UDC (iv) LC Codes : (A) (i), (iv), (iii), (ii) (B) (i), (iv), (ii), (iii) (C) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) (D) (ii), (i), (iv), (iii) 1190. The connecting symbol used for super imposition device in CC (6th Edn) is (A) Colon (B) Hyphen (C) Pius (D) Parenthesis 1191. The complete bibliographic details in MARC are available in (A) Leader (B) Control fields (C) Variable fields (D) Record directing 1192. Which one is not a canon (as given by Ranganathan) (A) Canon of Comprehensiveness (B) Canon of Consistence (C) Canon of Context (D) Canon of currency 1193. The input Centre for INIS in India is (A) DRDO (B) DSIR (C) TFIR (D) BARC 1194. The provision of phase relations in DDC was made available from (A) 14 th edition (B) 2nd edition th (C) 7 edition (D) 11 th edition 1195. The Boolean operator ‘AND’ is related to (A) Productive (B) Additive (C) Logical Difference (D) None of the above 1196. Dewey Decimal classification is now looked after by (A) Lake Placid Club (B) Library of Congress

Multiple Choice Questions D 589 (C) OCLC (D) Classification Research Group 1197. A type of indexing where terms are coordinated prior to searching (A) Post coordinate indexing (B) Pre coordinate indexing (C) Uniterm indexing (D) None of the above 1198. UNIMARC was developed under the umbrella of (A) OCLC (B) IFLA (C) UNESCO (D) None of the above 1199. 260 tag in MARC format marks (A) The edition (B) The publication information (C) The physical description (D) A topical subject heading 1200. Which one is not a Canon (as given by Ranganthan)? (A) Canon of Comprehensiveness (B) Canon of Consistence (C) Canon of Context (D) Canon of Currency 1201. ZBB was developed by (A) R. D. Stuart (B) S. Ranganathan (C) Peter A. Pyhrr (D) C. V. Good

R.

1202. PERT was developed by (A) The Navy special project office (B) Booz-Allen Hamelton (C) Both (A) and (B) (D) None of the above 1203. What are the three levels of management ? (A) First, second and third (B) Primary, secondary and tertiary (C) Top, middle and operational (D) Top, middle and low 1204. What is the main function of middle management? (A) The planning of organisation (B) Involving in routine ope rational work of the organisation (C) To involve in planning as well as in routine operational work (D) None of the above

1205. Which of the following has its objective to get maximum output? (A) Personal planning (B) Management (C) Industrial administration (D) Public administration 1206. A small group of managers responsible for total management in the organisation is called (A) low management (B) scientific management (C) top management (D) operational management 1207. Measurement of performance of a service in relation to cost is (A) cost according (B) cost analysis (C) cost effectiveness (D) performance analysis 1208. Organisation is a group of individuals joined together to (A) accomplish individual goals (B) accomplish some common objectives (C) carry on assigned tasks (D) help each other 1209. Which level management is responsible for execution of activities, supervision and monitoring? (A) Top (B) Middle (C) Operational (D) None of these 1210. The catch word “POSDCORB” was adopted by (A) Henery Fayol (B) Luther Gulick (C) F. W. Taylor (D) J. W. Schulze 1211. The main aim of the Scientific Management is centred on (A) organisational structure (B) duties of senior staff (C) motivation to staff (D) production, efficiency and precautions 1212. The function of elements of management are planning, organizing, staffing, direction coordination, reporting and (A) co-operating (B) correcting (C) budgeting (D) none of these 1213. Cost benefit analysis means (A) Value for money

590 D Library and Information Science Specific (B) Performance evaluation based on cost (C) Finding out unit cost (D) Performance evaluation based on inputs 1214. Programme Evaluation and Review Techniques (PERT) and Critical Path Method (CPM) are used in improving quality in (A) organisation (B) modern management (C) budgeting (D) reporting 1215. What is the (A) Manage (B) Manage (C) Manage (D) Manage

meaning of MBO? through the objectives through the performance through the processes through the functions

1216. Which of the following acronym represents the functional elements of scientific management? (A) POSTCORD (B) POSBCORB (C) PODSCROB (D) POSDCORB 1217. Who propounded management theory of human relations? (A) A. Moslo (B) E. Mayo (C) McGregor (D) E. Herzberg 1218. Management by objectives is the managerial behaviour that emphasizes on getting specific aims— who gave this definition of MBO? (A) Luther Gullick (B) Allen (C) Handerson (D) Henry Fayol 1219. Organisational Chart show the structure of an organisation in the way (A) vertical and linear (B) horizontal and vertical (C) horizontal and circular (D) vertical and circular 1220. What is the full form of MBO? (A) Modern Budget Operation (B) Modern Bibliographic Organisation (C) Management by Objectives (D) Management by Organisation 1221. Theory X and Theory Y relate to (A) Planning (B) Motivation (C) Innovation (D) None of these 1222. Who coined the term POSDCORB? (A) Henri Fayol (B) Max Weber

(C) Gulick and Urwick (D) Wilson and Tauber 1223. Who is the propounder of industrial, social-psychological and human behaviour theories of management? (A) E. Mayo (B) E. Herzberg (C) McGregor (D) A. Moslo 1224. Who first propounded the concept of MBO? (A) Henry Fayol (B) E. Mayo (C) P. Drucker (D) L. Brandis 1225. ‘Quality Circles’ in organization is used in (A) Personnel Estimation (B) Personnel Evaluation (C) Management Control (D) Participative Management 1226. What is the time period of scientific management? (A) Before 1960 (B) 1880-1917 (C) 1917-1950 (D) After 1950 1227. Henry Fayol is concerned with which school of thoughts? (A) Classical (B) Decision (C) Social system (D) Human relations 1228. Who classified scientific principles of management with library management? (A) Ranganathan (B) E. J. Evans (C) B. P. Singh (D) Derik Austin 1229. McGre gor is conce rne d with which school of thoughts of management? (A) Human behaviour (B) Classical (C) Scientific management (D) Human relations 1230. The concept of motivation is mainly psychological. It relates to those forces operating within individual employee or subordinate which impel hum to act in certain ways, who defines: (A) Dale S. Beach (B) Mc Farland (C) E. J. Evans (D) Derik Austin 1231. What is not the meaning of decision making? (A) Determine the objects (B) To come to a result

Multiple Choice Questions D 591 (C) Identification of policies (D) Taking work from the workers 1232. Match the following: List A List B (1) Scientific (A) Espritde crops Management (2) Unity of (B) Peter Drucker command (3) Management by (C) Factor or objectives planning (4) Forecasting (D) Production, efficiency and prevention of waste (e ) budgeting (A) 1 (A), 2 (e), 3 (D), 4 (B) (B) 1 (C), 2 (B), 3 (A), 4 (D) (C) 1 (D), 2 (A), 3 (B), 4 (C) (D) 1 (e), 2 (D), 3 (C), 4 (A) 1233. What is the second step in decision making process? (A) Identification of the problem (B) Making list of curriculums (C) Definite objective values (D) Selecting the result 1234. Likert name is associated with (A) style of leadership (B) decision making theory (C) theory of motivation (D) none of the above 1235. ‘Scalar Chain’ shows (A) Authority Structure (B) Scale of Performance of Staff (C) Chain for locating racks (D) A link in the chain 1236. The premier institution for prescribing standards in India is (A) Institution of Indian Standards (B) University Grants Commission (C) Indian Standards Information Centre (D) Bureau of Indian Standards 1237. What is the focus of planning? (A) Organisation (B) Decision making (C) Administration (D) Coordination 1238. Who has the right to take decisions in the libraries?

(A) (B) (C) (D)

All the workers of the library Incharges of sections Librarian Assistant librarian

1239. ‘Theory Y’ lays emphasis on (A) play rather than work (B) control on worker (C) close supervision (D) less external control, more self control 1240. What are the guidelines for planning of a library system? (A) BIS standard (B) Five laws of library science (C) Law of interpretation (D) Principle of osmosis 1241. Douglas McGregor is known for the (A) Theory X & Theory Y (B) Two Factor Theory (C) Management grid (D) Theory of Leadership 1242. Scaler chain shows (A) Authority structure (B) Scale of performance of staff (C) Chain for locating racks (D) A link in the chain 1243. What do you know about span of Control? (A) The number of activities that a manager can effectively manage (B) Strict control over the staff by the manager (C) Various types of controlling the organisation (D) The area of the organisation to be controlled 1244. What is the meaning of organisational structure of the libraries? (A) Structure of the library (B) Structure of the parental body of the library (C) Structure of library building (D) Blue print of the structure of the library 1245. Who propounded 10 principles of organization? (A) Gulick (B) Heart (C) Sprit (D) Brain

592 D Library and Information Science Specific 1246. When two or more basic subjects having same relational approach form a specific subject, the relation is termed as (A) Speciater relation (B) Co-ordinate relation (C) Phase relation (D) Hierarchical relation 1247. Transformation of traditional libraries to hybrid / digital libraries is (A) Crisis Management (B) Re-engineering (C) Change Management (D) Project Management 1248. The stages in the product life cycle curve are (A) Introduction, Growth, Maturity, Decline (B) Introduction, Growth, Maturity, Profit (C) Growth, Maturity, Profit, Decline (D) Introduction, Growth, Maturity, Saturation 1249. Who amongst the following considered organisation as a machine? (A) Wilson and Tauber (B) Luther Gullick (C) Henry Fayol (D) Anderson 1250. What is called the graphic presentation of the organisational structure? (A) Organisation (B) Organisation chart (C) Graphic chart (D) Flow chart 1251. What does the two letters CO represent in the acronym POSDCORB? (A) Cooperation (B) Coordination (C) Corporation (D) C o m m u n i c a tion 1252. How many principles are there for designing organisational structure? (A) 10 (B) 7 (C) 9 (D) 8 1253. If management is the spirit of the organisation, then what is organisation of the library? (A) Head (B) Heart (C) Spirit (D) Brain

1254. Which one is the most simple and oldest organisational structure? (A) Line organisation (B) Line and staff organisation (C) Departmentation (D) Operational organisation 1255. The principle of Scaler Chain represents which hierarchical order of the staff? (A) Left to right order (B) Top to bottom order (C) Right to left order (D) Bottom to top order 1256. What is called that element of management which deals with analysing the activities and programmes of libraries to design organisation structure? (A) Direction (B) Planning (C) Organisation (D) Staffing 1257. Remainder stands for (A) books which were ordered but not received (B) outdated books which are out of demand (C) very old books (D) low discount on the above 1258. The system which does not have input/ output or the environment is called (A) open system (B) closed system (C) system (D) good system 1259. What are the on-line products and services now-a-days available in libraries and information centres? (A) Books, periodicals and bibliographies (B) CD-ROM, DVD, Diskettes, etc. (C) LAN, OPACS, INTERNET, E-Mail (D) All the above 1260. Which of the following activities is the activity of marketing? (A) Promotion (B) Prices (C) Motivation (D) Sale 1261. The planning of the library building is a team work, who amongst the following should not be the member of Building Committee of the library? (A) Librarian (B) Architect (C) Library Committee (D) Assistant Librarian

Multiple Choice Questions D 593 1262. What is the most important element of organisation of the libraries? (A) Library (B) Library building (C) Finance (D) Report 1263. GOC stands for (A) Goods Order Committee (B) Government Office Committee (C) Government Order Committee (D) Good Offices Committee 1264. Whether library is a system. (A) Yes, it has its sections as the system has (B) Library is separate from a system (C) Quite impossible (D) No, it can not be a system 1265. The system is a set of some units which have (A) no relation (B) some interrelations (C) no organisation in them (D) no attraction between them 1266. For keeping records of periodicals ‘Three Card system’ is devised by (A) Remington Rand of India Ltd. (B) I.B.M. (C) S. R. Ranganathan (D) Broune 1267. Which of the following is false about a system? (A) It is a set of components (B) It also interacts with its environment (C) It is influenced by environment (D) It is operational by the environment 1268. Conceptual skill is related to the (A) supervisory managers (B) top managers (C) middle managers (D) all the above 1269. What is essential for smooth running of a system? (A) The change should be done in the staff of the system (B) The study about the system should be done at time to time (C) The change should be done in the aims of the system (D) The stability should be established in function of the system

1270. What is information marketing? (A) Marketing of books (B) Marketing of library periodicals (C) Marketing of library product and services (D) Marketing of library services 1271. Now-a-days what types of items are being procured in modern libraries? (A) Books only (B) Periodicals only (C) Thesis, microforms, audiovisual, floppies, discs, etc. (D) All the above 1272. Why do the acquisition of periodicals poses a number of problems in Indian libraries? (A) The loss in their transaction (B) Their acquisition involves payment of subscription in advance (C) They have some special features and problems (D) All the above 1273. What is the meaning of Modular form of library building? (A) One hall is constructed at every story (B) The building is in the form of model (C) The building has circular rooms (D) The area of the rooms may be increased or decreased 1274. Which of the following is not the characteristic of a periodical publication? (A) It is a regular publication (B) It appears in parts or volumes at regular intervals (C) It has a distinguishing numbers for each successive volume (D) All the above 1275. Which of the following pairs is not correct about the types of books? (A) General and Reference books (B) Simple and Composite books (C) Single and Reference books (D) Hand books and Text books 1276. What are the problems and difficulties with reference to acquisition work of the periodicals? (A) Problems in selection (B) Problems in ordering

594 D Library and Information Science Specific (C) Problems in receiving (D) Problems in accessioning 1277. What is the meaning of Neo-conventional documents in the libraries by Ranganathan? (A) Audios, Visuals, Microforms, etc. (B) Books and periodicals (C) Standards, specifications, patents, data, etc. (D) None of the above 1278. The team planning for library building consists of (A) the library authority (B) the librarian (C) the architect (D) all the above 1279. What are very important categories of documents in a library’s collection, particularly in research libraries? (A) Pamphlets (B) Periodicals (C) Patents (D) Specifications 1280. What are the norms prescribe d by UNESCO for a book as a document in the library? (A) A book has at least 49 pages (B) The thickness should be 15 to 4 cm (C) The height of the book should be 22 to 32 cms (D) All the above 1281. What is called serial publication? (A) Published after a definite period of time (B) Published after a definite period of time by the same name (C) Published at time to time (D) Published by different names at different times 1282. What is the main and important task regarding the documents for collection development in the libraries? (A) Selection of the documents (B) Acquisition of the documents (C) Accession of the documents (D) Procurement of the documents 1283. Now-a-days which types of material have been entered in the main stream of collection development in the libraries? (A) Pamphlets (B) Periodicals (C) Print materials (D) Non-print materials

1284. What is the purpose of Standards and Specifications? (A) To ensure uniformity and reliability (B) To promote standardisation and quality control (C) To simply production and distribution (D) All the above 1285. To whom the weightage is given in selecting the documents for library? (A) Theory of management (B) Types of documents (C) Selection principles (D) Demand principles 1286. What are called the documents which are bound in paper and the information contained in them may not be available from any other source? (A) Serials (B) Books (C) Pamphlets (D) Periodicals 1287. If the value of profits is more as compared to the cost involved, then what will be the position of the system? (A) The system is suitable (B) Balanced equally (C) Neither suitable nor misfit (D) The system is misfit 1288. Main criticism on classical and scientific schools of management is that they (A) neglect individual personality (B) do not consider intra-organisational conflicts (C) emphasize the formal aspects of organisation (D) all the above 1289. Acquisition work of the documents comprised (A) selection and procurement (B) selection and accessioning (C) selection, procurement and technical processing (D) selection, procurement and accessioning 1290. Time and cost factors are included in (A) system approach (B) programme evaluation and review technique (C) Gantt chart (D) work analysis

Multiple Choice Questions D 595 1291. What are the major types of non-print materials for the libraries? (A) Machine readable forms (B) Audio-visuals (C) Microforms (D) All the above

1299. The term scientific management was coined by (A) Louis Brandeis (B) Luthans (C) Taylor (D) Mayo

1292. What is called that document which contains descriptions of technical requirements for a product, material, process or service which are designed to meet the purchaser’s particular needs? (A) Patent (B) Pamphlet (C) Specification (D) Standard

1300. In which system of placing order for serial publications one Bottom card is prepared for each serial? (A) Three cards system (B) Two cards system (C) One card system (D) Kardex system

1293. What is recently developed computer based material which has become very important to modern libraries for collection development? (A) Bibliographic databases (B) Patents (C) CD-ROMs (D) Specification 1294. What is called that document which is formulated by agreement, authority or custom of sponsors to define a product, material, process, quality, construction, operating characteristics, performance, etc.? (A) Standard (B) Patents (D) Pamphlet (D) Specification 1295. Standards and specification should be collected by the libraries of (A) political field (B) social field (C) academic field (D) industrial field 1296. The 3 cards system is mainly used in the libraries for (A) circulation of books (B) serial selection (C) book selection (D) acquisition and control of serials 1297. In Demand Theory, the demand is differentiated according to (A) variety of the documents (B) value of the documents (C) volume of the documents (D) all the above 1298. The sources of finance for university library is/are (A) university budget (B) UGC grant

(C) State Govt. grant (D) all the above

1301. Which of the following is a systematic maintenance of the income and expenditure flow on records? (A) Reporting (B) Auditing (C) Budgeting (D) Accounting 1302. Which of the following is the useful and best method of acquisition of serial publications in the libraries? (A) One card system (B) Four cards system (C) Three cards system (D) Multi cards system 1303. In library science, what is the meaning of marketing? (A) Selling of library products (B) Selling of books (C) Selling library services (D) Selling of library products and services 1304. The term cost in cost benefit analysis of a system is meant (A) cost involved in terms of human resources (B) cost involved in terms of materials (C) cost involved in terms of equipments (D) all the above 1305. To coordinate the activitie s of an organisation and direct them towards previously established objectives’ this is the purpose of (A) motivation (B) directing (C) planning (D) none of the above 1306. Theory X and Theory Y is developed by (A) Peter Drucker

596 D Library and Information Science Specific (B) Douglas McGregor (C) Abraham Maslow (D) None of the above

(B) only periodicals (C) books and periodicals (D) nothing

1307. Which of the following methods is enunciated by Ranganathan? (A) Three cards system (B) New York system (C) Kardex system (D) One card system

1315. Neena E. Browne was mainly associated with which operation of the library? (A) Library accessioning (B) Classification (C) Library work (D) Cataloguing

1308. “Management by objectives” is introduced by (A) R. N. Anthony (B) Peter Drucker (C) Koontz (D) Lutehr Gullick

1316. What is the chief record in the library? (A) Catalogue (B) Accession register (C) Collection register (D) Shelf List

1309. 3 cards system was introduced by (A) S. R. Cutter (B) Ranganathan (C) Neeno E. Browne (D) Melvil Dewey 1310. Job description help the organisation to (A) select the right person for the right job (B) give more power to the supervisors (C) decide the salary structure (D) all the above 1311. Which laws of library scie nce of Ranganathan are helpful in formulating the principle s of se lection of documents? (A) I, II, and III laws (B) II, III and IV laws (C) III, IV and V laws (D) IV, V and I laws 1312. Job costs is (A) covering labour and material used for different jobs (B) covering the costs of different specific processes (C) covering the cost of specific items being processed (D) none of the above 1313. Who invented the Browne system of circulation of books? (A) Ranganathan (B) Neena E. Browne (C) James Duft Brown (D) Classification 1314. The stock verification in the libraries is done to verify the physical position of (A) books and periodicals

1317. Kardex system is used for record keeping of which types of documents? (A) Books (B) Serial publications (C) Books and serial publications both (D) Maps 1318. Newark system of circulation was first started from which country? (A) India (B) England (C) France (D) USA 1319. How many registration files are needed for Newark system of circulation? (A) 5 (B) 2 (C) 6 (D) 8 1320. What necessitated the use of marketing techniques in libraries? (A) The rising cost of the information products (B) The change in information demand of the users (C) Increasing threat from the emerging information industry (D) All the above 1321. Which of the following methods of financial estimation is the most suitable for a university library? (A) Per capita and methods of details (B) Per capita method (C) Proportional method (D) Proportional with the combination of any one method 1322. In the present time, stock verification is a (A) beneficial task (B) useless task (C) useful task (D) nothing

Multiple Choice Questions D 597 1323. What is the use of Browne system in the libraries? (A) Circulation of serials to the users (B) Selection of books (C) Circulation of books to the users (D) Classification of books 1324. Which method is more beneficial in cost benefit analysis of a system? (A) Diary method (B) One card method (C) Brown method (D) Critical path method 1325. Who developed the Newark system of circulation of books for the libraries? (A) M. Newark (B) New York city (C) New York state (D) Newark Library 1326. How may percentage of the total money of the budget is to be spent on the binding of the books of the library? (A) 20% (B) 7% (C) 4%

(D) 2½%

1327. The first component i.e. Group Identifier of ISBN represents (A) Title of the book (B) Publisher’s group (C) National or geographical group (D) National, geographical, language and any other group 1328. What is the full form of ISBN? (A) International Standard Book Number (B) Indian Standard Bibliographic Number (C) International Standard Bibliographic Number (D) Indian Standard Book Number 1329. What was the name of the number which was started first in UK for documents? (A) Standard Book Number (B) International Book Number (C) Serial Book Number (D) Book Number 1330. A modulus of how many bases, the check digit is calculated with weights 10 to 2 for a ISBN of a book? (A) 14 (B) 11 (C) 8 (D) 9

1331. Why accession register in the libraries is prepared? (A) To register the book (B) To register the books and periodicals (C) For accessing the books in a order in which they are received in the library (D) To registe r e very ite m which is brought in the library 1332. What is called the computer implemented planning and control system designed to help top management in planning, problem solving, decision making and control of organisational process? (A) PMEST (B) CPM (C) COP (D) PERT 1333. What is called the survey of the actual work done during the preceding year with a view to informing the authorities and others about the achievements made by the library? (A) Annual stock (B) Annual report (C) Annual statistics (D) Annual verification 1334. In which country the provision of providing some standard number to the document was started first? (A) Great Britain (B) USA (C) Germany (D) India 1335. Later after getting recognition internationally, what name was given to SBN? (A) NI S (B) ISBN (C) IBN (D) SNB 1336. What are the main functions of the maintenance work of the collection of the documents in the libraries? (A) Stock verification, binding, vigilance (B) Dusting and shelf rectification (C) Shelving and locating of documents (D) All the above functions 1337. ISBN of a book has how many digits? (A) 17 (B) 14 (C) 10 (D) 12 1338. What is the meaning of maintenance work of the documents in the libraries? (A) Housing the collection in the selves (B) Maintaining an order of arrangement of the documents

598 D Library and Information Science Specific (C) Saving the documents in the library (D) Providing class number to the documents 1339. ISBN is (A) system of giving a unique number to a book (B) system of giving a not changeable number to a book (C) system which differentiates one book from the other (D) all the above 1340. What is human resource management? (A) Managing the staff to accomplish various operations (B) Managing the human as resources to accomplish various operations (C) Managing the resources only (D) Managing the staff only 1341. If the ISBN of a book is 025463-104-5, the check digit of the book is (A) 27 (B) 463 (C) 108 (D) 5 1342. Ranganathan proposed what name to the cataloguing of the books before they are sending to the libraries? (A) Pre-natal cataloguing (B) Cataloguing in source (C) Post-natal cataloguing (D) Cataloguing in publication 1343. What is the full form of CIP? (A) Catalogue in Pretoria (B) Classification in publication (C) Cataloguing in Publication (D) Classification, Indexing and Preserving 1344. What is third one in the trinity of a library alongwith users and documents? (A) Staff (B) Material (C) Building (D) Workers 1345. A modulus of how many bases, the check digit is calculated with weights 8 to 2 for a ISSN of a serial publication? (A) 19 (B) 11 (C) 15 (D) 16 1346. The manageme nt of the human resources for providing better services in the libraries is called (A) Human Resource Arrangement (B) Human Resource Management

(C) Human Resource Organisation (D) Human Resource Administration 1347. What is the full form of ISSN? (A) Indian Standard Service Number (B) International Serial Standard Number (C) International Standard Serial Number (D) Indian Standard Serial Number 1348. Match the following: List A (1) S. R. (a) Ranganathan (2) Remington (b) Rand of India Ltd. (3) L. R. McColvin (c) (4)

(A) (B) (C) (D)

List B Demand Theory Three card system

KARDEX system Peter Phyor (d) PPBS Budgeting (e ) Zero based budgeting system 1 (b), 2 (c), 3 (a), 4 (e) 1 (c), 2 (b), 3 (d), 4 (a) 1 (d), 2 (a), 3 (e), 4 (b) 1 (a), 2 (c), 3 (b), 4 (c)

1349. In the beginning, CIP programme was started by (A) British Library (B) Library of Congress (C) British Museum (D) Imperial Library 1350. Who establishes contact of the users to the documents? (A) Reference service (B) Catalogue (C) Building (D) Staff of the library 1351. Which one uses ISSN? (A) Ulrich International Periodical Directory (B) British National Bibliography (C) Indian National Bibliography (D) Library Literature 1352. The ISSN is a (A) unique number to a serial (B) unique number to a book (C) unique number which identifies a particular serial

Multiple Choice Questions D 599 (D) numbe r by which the se rial is femilon 1353. Now-a-days what is called to staff of the libraries? (A) Staffing (B) Human workers (C) Staff (D) Human resources 1354. How many digits does the ISSN of a serial publication, have? (A) 9 (B) 8 (C) 11 (D) 7 1355. What does a job description provide for an employee of the library? (A) A full understanding about the reading material (B) A full understanding of the activities to be performed (C) A full understanding about the qualifications (D) A full understanding of the working of the library 1356. Selection of periodical is conditioned by three factors: demand, supply and (A) space (B) manpower (C) availability (D) finance 1357. The task of job analysis of each personnel of the library is done by (A) observation of the authorities (B) questionnaire method (C) interview of the staff (D) all the above 1358. Library Authority indicates (A) governing body (B) librarian (C) library members (D) none of the above 1359. What are the steps involved in the recruitment process for the libraries? (A) Planning of recruitment (B) Induction of selected candidates into the library (C) Selecting candidates for the posts (D) All the above 1360. Who was the father of human relation move me nt which late r be came organisational behaviour? (A) Rensis Likert (B) Elton Mayo (C) Barnard (D) None of these

1361. The process which means to employ persons to work in an organisation to fit into positions with a well defined job description is (A) selection (B) recruitment (C) service (D) employment 1362. To emphasize the activities of library Information centres, which of the following budget is suitable? (A) Line-By-Line Budgeting (B) Formula Budgeting (C) Lumpsum (D) Programme Budgeting 1363. What is essential of the following for the purpose of recruitment, training needs and later for performance evaluation of the personnel of the libraries? (A) Job analysis (B) Job satisfaction (C) Job description (D) Class analysis 1364. The advocates of system theory are Che ste r Barnard, George Humans, Philip Selznica and (A) Abraham Maslow (B) McGregor (C) Herbert Simon (D) None of these 1365. What is the meaning of job description? (A) Description of all the persons of the library (B) Description of the working of one person (C) Description of the functions for a particular post (D) Description of functions, duties, responsibilities and experiences of a person 1366. Demand Theory of Book Selection was coined by (A) Melvil Deway (B) Drury (C) S. R. Ranganathan (D) McColvin 1367. What is identified by performance evaluation of the staff? (A) A system is good or not (B) System is competent or not (C) A service has been providing to maximum users or not (D) How a syste m/se rvice has be en functioning

600 D Library and Information Science Specific 1368. A minimum amount per head of population is allocated in (A) proportional method (B) method of details (C) per capital method (D) both (A) and (C) 1369. A person who like every one else in an organisation and have personnel needs and hopes is called as (A) chief (B) leader (C) master (D) main 1370. PPBS stands for (A) planning–programming budgeting system (B) plan–programme budget system (C) period programme budget system (D) none of the above 1371. Cost benefit analysis is (A) finding out value for money (B) performance evaluation based on repayment of loan (C) selling costly items at reasonable price (D) performance evaluation based on benefit in relation to input 1372. What do you know about performance evaluation? (A) Evaluation of the staff members (B) Collective evaluation of the works done by staff members (C) Evaluation of the work separately done by staff members (D) Evaluation of the work done by staff members 1373. Zero based budgeting means (A) budgeting based on previous years expenses (B) budgeting afresh (C) budgeting without (D) performance budget 1374. When the term performance evaluation was first started? (A) 1955 (B) 1950 (C) 1962 (D) 1959 1375. Operating budget means (A) proposed expenses (B) statement of estimated revenues and expenditures for a given period of time

(C) budgeting without fund (D) none of the above 1376. What is called the task of a leader? (A) Leadership (B) Librarianship (C) Taskship (D) Ship 1377. Preparation of library budget without considering previous year’s budget is known as (A) performance budget (B) budget-in-detail (C) zero–based budget (D) none of the above 1378. The Contingency Model of leader was developed by (A) Fiddler (B) Alexender (C) Lincert (D) Robert House 1379. Who developed the Path-Goal theory of leadership? (A) Lincert (B) Robert House (C) Alexender (D) Fiedler 1380. Which other name is given to performance evaluation? (A) Performance appraisal (B) Library appraisal (C) Staff appraisal (D) Ability appraisal 1381. What is called the process which is used for evaluating the performance of workers on the job? (A) Performance evaluation (B) Performance rating (C) Performance profit (D) Performance marking 1382. What do you know about financial management? (A) The basic knowledge of the finances (B) Study of principles and practices involved with finance (C) Knowledge of the items in which finances are to be expend (D) All the above 1383. What is essential to have for a manager of an organisation to be successful in management? (A) Management (B) Power (C) Efficiency (D) Authority 1384. What is budget? (A) Annual estimate of income and expenditure

Multiple Choice Questions D 601 (B) Annual estimate of expenditure (C) Annual estimate of income (D) Annual estimate of income and expenditure for future year 1385. Which one of the following is not the principle of Delegation of Authority? (A) Assignment of duties in terms of result expected (B) Parity of authority and irresponsibility (C) Clarification of limits of authority (D) Solutioness of accountability 1386. What is called the managerial practice of getting things done through others by sharing authority with them? (A) Delegation of power (B) Delegation of work (C) Delegation of authority (D) Delegation of service 1387. Which of the following budgeting system is most suitable for a university library? (A) zero based budgeting (B) performance budgeting (C) planning programming budgeting (D) formula budgeting 1388. Which of the following is the traditional method of performance evaluation of the staff? (A) Ranking method (B) Graphic scale method (C) Forced Distribution method (D) Incident method 1389. What spect (A) A (C) A

is financial management with reto management? branch (B) A part tool (D) A process

1390. Which of the following is not the method of performance evaluation of the selection of the staff in libraries? (A) Ability test (B) Intelligence test (C) Proficiency test (D) Physical test 1391. The Delegation of Authority may also be called as (A) delegation of power (B) delegation of responsibility (C) delegation of duties (D) delegation of services

1392. What is not correct about authority? (A) It is an important managerial practice of getting things done (B) It implies the existence of responsibility (C) It is the right or power conferred on an individual (D) All the above 1393. How is the performance evaluation done in incident method? (A) On the bases of qualities of staff members (B) On the bases of occurring an incident (C) On the basis of academic qualifications of staff members (D) On the basis of behaviour of staff members 1394. Statistics concerning library/information centre resource cover three aspects: Finance, collection and (A) readers (B) staff (C) furniture (D) equipments 1395. Which commission recommended 6.5% of the total budget of a university for its library? (A) Kothari Commission (B) Radhakrishnan Commission (C) Ranganathan Committee (D) Sinha Committee 1396. When Zero Based Budget was first prepared? (A) 1972 (B) 1966 (C) 1963 (D) 1970 1397. The name of Peter Phyor is linked with which budgeting system? (A) Performance budget (B) Formula (C) PPBS (D) Zero-based 1398. Which of the following skills a librarian should have? (A) Analytical and planning skills (B) Planning and organisation skills (C) Organisation and control skills (D) All the above 1399. Which of the following Commision recommended 25 rupees for one student and 300 rupees for one teacher for any university library?

602 D Library and Information Science Specific (A) (B) (C) (D)

Sinha Committee Kothari Commission Ranganathan Committee Radhakrishnan Commission

1400. What is the effective and important tool of financial manage me nt of an organisation? (A) Budget (B) Finance (C) Income (D) Expenditure 1401. What is called the budgeting of a year without thinking about past year? (A) PPBS (B) Zero Based Budget (C) Performance Budget (D) Forecast Budget 1402. What is called that method of budgeting which is concerned with the necessities of the future instead of the past of the workers? (A) Programming budget (B) Line budget (C) Formula budget (D) Zero Based budget 1403. Who de velope d PPBS Te chnique of budgeting? (A) Rand Corporation (B) World Bank (C) Defence Department of USA (D) International Monetary Fund 1404. What is recurring expenditure in the libraries? (A) Expenses on books (B) Expenses on electricity (C) Other expenses (D) Expenses on electricity 1405. What is the base of expenditure of libraries in Programming Budget? (A) Programmes (B) Performance (C) Functions of the staff (D) Items 1406. What is the main source of income for public libraries? (A) UGC (B) Library cess (C) Government (D) Gifts/donations 1407. Which of the following is the suitable method of budgeting for a university library?

(A) (B) (C) (D)

Zero Based Budget Performance Budget Programming Budget Formula Budget

1408. What is the source of income for public libraries in those states where legislation have been enacted? (A) State government (B) Library cess (C) Donations and gifts (D) UGC 1409. In the beginning PERT technique was used in (A) constructions programmes (B) railway programmes (C) re se arch and de ve lopme nt programmes (D) irrigation programmes 1410. Which of the following is not the function of annual report? (A) It keeps the authorities informed by the progress or short comings (B) It serves as an excellent publicity material giving total view (C) It serves as a valuable historical record of a library (D) All the above 1411. Zero Based Budget emphasises more on (A) present activities (B) past activities (C) retrospective activities (D) all activities 1412. Which of the following are informed about authorities by the annual report of the libraries? (A) Failures (B) Activities and Achievements (C) Factors responsible to above (D) All the above 1413. PERT is a method of (A) collecting data (B) job analysis (C) system analysis (D) class analysis 1414. How many percentage of the total money of the budget is to be spent on the salaries of the staff of the library? (A) 20% (B) 45% (C) 50% (D) 75% 1415. Which of the following is a network technique?

Multiple Choice Questions D 603 (A) PERT (C) MBO

(B) MIS (D) OR

1416. What are two parts of annual report of the library? (A) Analytical and systematic (B) Primary and secondary (C) Descriptive and statistical (D) Upper and lower 1417. The most of the money of the library budget is spent on (A) building (B) books and periodicals (C) books (D) salaries of the staff 1418. What is called the systematic gathering, recording and analysing of data about problems relating to marketing of goods and services? (A) Marketing technique (B) Marketing limitations (C) Marketing sales (D) Marketing analysis 1419. Match the following: List A List B (1) Budget (a) Indicating expenditure or on non-recurring items (2) Capital (b) Expenditure Budget related to on going items (3) Finance (c) A plan of expected spending and income (4) Recurring (d) Capital involved Expenditure in a project (A) 1 (c), 2 (a), 3 (d), 4 (b) (B) 1 (a), 2 (b), 3 (c), 4 (d) (C) 1 (b), 2 (c), 3 (a), 4 (d) (D) 1 (d), 2 (a), 3 (b), 4 (d) 1420. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Principles of (i) F. W. Taylor Management (b) Functions of (ii) Abraham Management Maslow (c) Theory of (iii) Luther Gullick Hierarchy of needs

(d) System School (iv) Henry Fayol of Management Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (B) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (C) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (D) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) 1421. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Father of Scientific (i) Henry Fayol Management (b) Father of (ii) Elton Mayo Administration (c) Father of Human (iii) F. Hertzberg Relations School (d) Father of Corporate(iv) F.W. Taylor Strategy Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (B) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (C) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (D) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) 1422. Match the following : List I List II (a) Henry Fayol (i) Hierarchy Ne eds (b) F.W. Taylor (ii) Theory X and Theory Y (c) Abraham (iii) Classical Maslow Theory (d) Douglas (iv) Scientific McGregor Management Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (B) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (C) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (D) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) 1423. Match the following : List-I (a) Small set of dependent activities that form longest path of activity network

List-II (i) PERT

604 D Library and Information Science Specific (b) Delighting the customer by fully meeting their needs (c) Interconnecting networks depicting tasks, duration and dependency (d) Making better forecasts, judgements and advice Codes : (a) (b) (c) (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (B) (ii) (iv) (i) (C) (iii) (iv) (ii) (D) (iv) (ii) (i)

(ii) CPM

(iii) Delphi

(iv) TQM

(d) (iv) (iii) (i) (iii)

1424. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) Transaction (i) Lower Level Processing Managers (b) Operational (ii) Clerical Staff control (c) Management (iii) Top Level control Managers (d) Strategic (iv) Middle Level Planning Managers Codes : (A) (B) (C) (D)

(a) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i)

(b) (ii) (i) (ii) (ii)

(c) (iv) (iv) (iii) (iv)

(d) (i) (iii) (i) (iii)

1425. Match the following : List-I (a) Classical School (b) X & Y Theory (c) Newark Charging System (d) MBO Codes : (a) (A) (i) (B) (iii) (C) (ii) (D) (iii)

(b) (iii) (iv) (iv) (ii)

List-II (i) John cotton Danna (ii) Henry Fayol (iii) Peter Drucker

(iv) Douglas McGregor (c) (iv) (i) (i) (iv)

(d) (ii) (ii) (iii) (i)

1426. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) Budget prepared (i) Formula using previous Budget period budget (b) Budget based (ii) Zero-based on norms and budget standards (c) Budget planned (iii) Incremental integrating number Budget of techniques (d) Budget prepared (iv) Planning identifying programming current tasks budgeting independent of system previous year Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (B) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (C) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (D) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 1427. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Directory i. Information Please Almanac b. Annuals ii. Keesing’s Record of World Events c. Bibliography iii. Encyclopaedia of Associations d. News paper iv. Publishers’ Digest Weekly Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) iii i iv ii (B) i iii iv ii (C) iii ii iv i (D) iv i ii iii 1428. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Theory of i. Factor of Motivation planning b. Unity of ii. Efficiency Command and waste pre vention c. MBO iii. Maslow d. Forecasting iv. Peter Drucker

Multiple Choice Questions D 605 Codes : (a) (A) i (B) iv (C) iii (D) iii

(b) ii i ii iv

(c) iii ii iv i

(d) iv iii i ii

1429. Match the following : List – I (Budgetary technique) a.

Line

b. c.

Formula PPBS

d.

Zerobased Codes : (a) (A) ii (B) iii (C) iv (D) i

(b) i ii iii iv

List – II (Limitation of budgetary technique) i. De tail e d info rmation required ii. Time consuming iii. Do no t p e rm it variation iv. Do not sugge st future (c) iv i i ii

(d) iii iv ii iii

1430. Match the following : List – I a. Collateral classe s

List – II i. Class comprising two or more entitie s b. Multiple classes ii. Cl ass e s o f t he same orde r but not belonging to one in the same order c. Chain of classes iii. A subje ct fixe d wi th othe rs in the universal of subject d. Co-ordinate iv. A sequence of classe s classes made up of any giv e n class and its universe Codes: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) ii iv i iii (B) i iii ii iv (C) ii i iv iii (D) i iv ii iii

1431. Assertion (A): Performance measurement is necessary to support decision making in libraries and information centres. Reason (R): Right decision at a right time helps libraries and information centres to achieve goals. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A). (B) Both (A) and (R) are false. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not a correct explanation of (A). (D) (A) is false, but (R) is true. 1432. Assertion (A): Introduction of TQM in libraries is not possible. Reason (R): It requires open, cooperative culture and employees responsiveness for customer satisfaction. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 1433. Assertion (A): Marketing of Information products is the need of the day. Reason (R): Information is a resource which consumes lot of time and money. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 1434. As sert io n (A ): Tr aining me tho ds through brain storming stimulate idea generation. Reason (R): Training methods do not provide opportunity to unskilled to become skilled. Codes : (A) (A) is false but (R) is true. (B) Both (A) and (R) are false. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) (A) is true but (R) is false. 1435. Assertion (A): TQM promotes the way in which a library is organised and perform its ICT functions. Reason (R): TQM is seen as a hindrance to library and information services.

606 D Library and Information Science Specific Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) Both (A) and (R) are false. (C) (A) is false and (R) is true. (D) (A) is true and (R) is false. 1436. Which of the following are Schools of Management thought? (i) Scientific Management School (ii) Human Behavioural School (iii) Classical School (iv) School of Authority Codes : (A) (ii) and (iv) are correct (B) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct (C) (iii) and (iv) are correct (D) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct 1437. Methods and Techniques of Human Resource Planning includes (i) Selection and Recruitment (ii) Induction and Placement (iii) Quality Management (iv) Performance Evaluation Codes : (A) (i), (iv) & (ii) are correct. (B) (iv), (iii) & (i) are correct. (C) (i), (ii) & (iv) are correct. (D) (iii) and (i) are correct. 1438. Which of the following are ISDN services? (i) RSS (ii) Teletext (iii) Voice mail (iv) Video conference Codes : (A) (i), (iii) and (iv) are correct (B) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct (C) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are correct (D) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct 1439. The basic characteristics of a system are (i) Interrelated components (ii) Independent and can stand alone (iii) Arranged in hierarchical order (iv) Inputs, processes, outputs & feed back Codes : (A) (i), (ii), (iii) are correct (B) (i), (ii), (iv) are correct (C) (ii), (iii), (iv) are correct (D) (i), (iii), (iv) are correct

1440. The general image file formats are : (i) TIFF (ii) JPEG (iii) MPEG (iv) P NG Codes : (A) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct (B) (i), (iii) and (iv) are correct (C) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct (D) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are correct 1441. The process of configuring the disks into tracks and sectors is called (A) Booting (B) Formatting (C) Labelling (D) All the above 1442. World Wide Web was first designed by (A) Charles Babbage (B) F.W. Lancaster (C) Ted Nelson (D) Tim Berner’s Lee 1443. Which was the first machine like computer ? (A) Mark-1 (B) Analytical engine (C) Abacus (D) UNIVAC-1 1444. Which is not the characteristic of a computer ? (A) Handling of information (B) Limitless capacity (C) More and more powerful and faster than human (D) Regularly working without direction 1445. Who designed analytical engine? (A) Charles Babbage (B) Pascal (C) James watt (D) Boyl 1446. Which function in not related with the computer? (A) Information retrieval (B) Information storage (C) Reference service (D) Dissemination of information 1447. The computers which get the information in the form of letters, numerals and signs are called (A) Analog computers (B) Digital computers (C) Hybrid computers (D) Super computers

Multiple Choice Questions D 607 1448. Calculating machine is developed by (A) Shakuntala Devi (B) Pascal (C) Calcutta University (D) Ranganathan 1449. Use of integrated circuits was made in (A) First Generation Computers (B) Second Generation Computers (C) Third Generation Computer (D) Fourth Generation Computers 1450. The Network Topology in which nodes are connected to a central hub is known as (A) Ring Topology (B) Bus Topology (C) Star Topology (D) Mesh Topology 1451. When computer was applied first in India ? (A) 1954 (B) 1957 (C) 1956 (D) 1961 1452. Computer is not called as which one of the following? (A) Artificial intelligence (B) Micro processor (C) Data processor (D) Data interpreter 1453. What is the heart of micro-computers? (A) Micro-processor (B) CPU (C) ALU (D) RAM 1454. Which agency used computer first in India ? (A) National Library Calcutta (B) INSDOC (C) DRTC (D) ISI, Calcustta 1455. Transistors were used in which generation of computers? (A) First generation (B) Second generation (C) Third generation (D) None of these 1456. Which type of computers are most suitable for use in the libraries? (A) Analog (B) Super (C) Digital (D) Hybrid 1457. Physical components of the computers are called as (A) software (B) hardware (C) humanware (D) none of these

1458. Linux is an example of (A) Application software (B) System software (C) Library software(D) All of these 1459. Internet’s POP3 and X400 are the (A) E-mail systems (B) DOT systems (C) UNIX shell (D) T.C.P. 1460. What is the most popular language of the computer? (A) Machine language (B) Assembly language (C) High level language (D) Low level language 1461. High level language refers to which language ? (A) Programming language (B) Machine language (C) Assembly language (D) Low level language 1462. Even though ‘Xerography’ is a photocopying method, but it is called (A) Diazographic (B) Thermographic (C) Electrofax (D) Electrostatic 1463. Which one of the following is not a switching system? (A) Packet (B) Circuit (C) Router (D) Message 1464. Result obtained in computers, is called (A) software (B) hardware (C) output (D) input 1465. Identify the correct order as per increasing data storage capacity : (A) CDROM, DVD, Cartridge, BlueRay Disc (B) DVD, Cartridge, BlueRay Disc, CDROM (C) Cartridge, CDROM, DVD, BlueRay Disc (D) BlueRay Disc, DVD, Cartridge, CDROM 1466. What is that network structure called in which transmission from one central node is sent to other nodes? (A) Star structure (B) Hierarchical structure (C) Ring structure (D) Bus structure 1467. In which topology of networks, bus network structure is very useful?

608 D Library and Information Science Specific (A) LAN (C) WAN

(B) MAN (D) I N

(A) VDU (C) Monitor

(B) CPU (D) Keyboard

1468. There are two categories of computers viz., (A) mini and micro computers (B) super and ordinary computers (C) analog and digital computers (D) general and special computers

1477. The concept of artificial intelligence is related with (A) First generation computers (B) Second generation computers (C) Fourth generation computers (D) Fifth generation computers

1469. The major components of information technology are (A) computer technology (B) communication technology (C) reprographic and micrographic technology (D) all the above

1478. What is Byte in Computers? (A) A tool of computer (B) Language (C) Hardware (D) Measurement of the memory

1470. What are three types of basic languages used in computer programming? (A) Zero, low and high levels (B) COBOL, BASIC, PROLOG (C) FORTRAN, PL/I, SNOWBOL (D) Machine, Assembly and high level languages 1471. A network system, in which all the computer nodes are connected only by one cable, is called (A) Ring structure (B) Star structure (C) Bus structure (D) Hierarchical structure 1472. Which is the high level language of computer? (A) Machine language (B) English Language (C) FORTRAN (D) Assembly language 1473. ‘Natural Language’ refers to (A) programming language (B) machine language (C) spoken language (D) assembly language 1474. In reference of computers, windows are (A) hardware (B) software (C) windows for reference (D) none of these 1475. CPU in a computer is the part of (A) Hardware (B) Humanware (C) Output (D) Software 1476. Where does the internal memory part of computer rest in?

1479. The number of basic hardware parts in the Word Processor is (A) 4 (B) 5 (C) 6 (D) 7 1480. Which of the following software is useful for word processing? (A) DBASE (B) WordStar (C) LIBSYS (D) CDS/ISIS 1481. Transistors with integrated circuits are used in computers for their CPU in (A) First generation computers (B) Third generation computers (C) Fourth generation computers (D) Fifth generation computers 1482. NICNET and INDONET are the networks of which category? (A) WAN (B) I N (C) LAN (D) MAN 1483. World Wide Web is an facility on (A) NICNET (B) INDONET (C) INTERNET (D) DELNET 1484. FORTRAN stands for what? (A) Formula translation (B) For translation (C) For train (D) For training 1485. The second generation computers use which of their CPU (A) Valves (B) Vacuum tubes (C) Transistors (D) Transistors with integrated circuits 1486. Which language is suitable for computers for scientific and business applications?

Multiple Choice Questions D 609 (A) PASCAL (C) Algol

(B) PL-1 (D) COBOL

1487. Which of the following is first generation of computer? (A) Super computer (B) Mini computer (C) Micro computer (D) UNIVAC-1 1488. RAM may be called as which of the following? (A) Non-volatile memory (B) Volatile memory (C) External memory (D) Internal memory 1489. COM means (A) Computer (B) Catalogue (C) Computer (D) Catalogue

Output Microform On Magnetic tape Output Magnetic tape On Microform

1490. “Lipi” is a dedicated word processor developed by (A) Tata Consultancy (B) CMC (C) CIIL (D) Microsoft 1491. DBMS stands for (A) Data Based Mechanical System (B) Data Based Management System (C) Director Board of Mechanical System (D) Data Based Machine System 1492. How many data can be stored in a CDROM? (A) 600 MB (B) MB 500 (C) MB 2500 (D) MB 5000 1493. In the binary system of numbers, 100 represents the decimal number (A) 12 (B) 7 (C) 4 (D) 5 1494. The first electronic computer called ABC was devised by (A) Howard Read (B) J. P. Eckert (C) Atanasoff and Berry (D) M. Taube 1495. What is full form of CD-Rom? (A) Compact Disk-Read Only Memory (B) Compact Disk-Reading On Machine (C) Compact Disk-Reading Of Material

(D) Compact Disk-Read On Memorandum 1496. UNIVAC-1 was built by (A) Mauchly & Eckert (B) Howard Read (C) M. Taube (D) V. Newman 1497. What is the Ring Network structure? (A) Many computers are connected (B) Many computers are connected with a cable (C) Many computers are connected in a closed loop with a cable (D) Many computers are connected differently 1498. “The node where the user sits before the system and operates is known as (A) Processor Node (B) Switching Node (C) Host Node (D) Terminal Node 1499. What is BASIC with reference to computers ? (A) Core Memory (B) Hardware (C) Model (D) Language 1500. NICNET is an example of (A) LAN (B) MAN (C) WAH (D) Super LAN 1501. When CD-ROM was prepared and made ? (A) 1965 (B) 1985 (C) 1977 (D) 1982 1502. Which of the following is not a programming language? (A) BASIC (B) COBOL (C) FORTRAN (D) ASCII 1503. Visual Display Units (VDU) are used for (A) Storage (B) Output (C) Input (D) Output & Input 1504. RAM is the abbreviation of (A) Random Access Memory (B) Read And Memory (C) Reading Material (D) None of these 1505. CD-ROM is a (A) Name of a computer (B) Magnetic Tap (C) Storage-Medium(D) Programming 1506. What is system software? (A) Set of hardwares (B) Set of programmes

610 D Library and Information Science Specific (C) Set of written programmes (D) Written specially for a particular type of computers 1507. Which one of the following is the lowest unit of information? (A) Bit (B) Megabit (C) Binary (D) Byte 1508. What is the function of CPU? (A) To prepare Programmes (B) Instructions to the computer (C) Computer language (D) It controls all the functions of the computer 1509. Which is not correct about CPU of a computer? (A) It is heart of the computer (B) It is also called processor (C) It is brain of the computer (D) It controls the computer 1510. Chip technology is used in which kind of computer? (A) Mini (B) Micro (C) Main frame (D) Super 1511. The collection of programmes for computer is constituted by (A) Software (B) Hardware (C) Memory (D) System 1512. In which group hardwares of computer are divided? (A) Control unit & Peripherals (B) CPU and Memory unit (C) CPU and Peripherals (D) Hardware & software 1513. How many units are there in CPU of computers? (A) Seven (B) Three (C) Eight (D) Six 1514. What does UNIVAC stand for? (A) Universal computer (B) Universal Automatic Computer (C) Universal Arithmetic Computer (D) United Automatic Computer 1515. Floppies are the media commonly used in (A) Mini computers (B) Micro computers (C) Mainframe computers (D) Super computers

1516. What does ASCII stand for? (A) Anglo Standard Code for Information (B) American Standard Code for Information Interchange (C) American Standards for Information Institutions (D) None of the above 1517. The author of “Principles of Data Base System” is (A) C.J. Datta (B) B.P. Desai (C) J.D. Ulmax (D) J.M. Martin 1518. In which year th UNIVAC-1 was developed ? (A) 1975 (B) 1950 (C) 1951 (D) 1960 1519. What is software for a computer? (A) Set of packages (B) Set of databases (C) Computer system (D) Set of programmes 1520. What is the standard code for representing the textual matter? (A) Pascal (B) ASCII (C) Archie (D) Boolean code 1521. What is Hardware for a computer? (A) Physical components (B) Internal components (C) Outer components (D) Components 1522. The Microchip was invented by (A) INSDOC (B) BARC (C) IBM (D) Intel 1523. When the term information technology was first propounded? (A) In the decade of 1970 (B) In the decade of 1950 (C) In the decade of 1980 (D) In the decade of 1990 1524. What are the popular and widely used output devices in computer? (A) Hard disk and optical disk (B) VDU and printer (C) Computer disk and floppy (D) Floppy and magnetic tape 1525. Information technology is the science of information handling, in which, what is mainly used for processing? (A) Library (B) Computer

Multiple Choice Questions D 611 (C) Information sources (D) Electronic documents 1526. What is ASCII? (A) Computer language (B) Computer’s code (C) Indexing system (D) Company of computers 1527. Which is component of information technology, that was used first? (A) Storage technology (B) Communication technology (C) Network technology (D) Computer technology 1528. CHECMATE software package is used for (A) Mechanism of acquisition (B) Serial control in library (C) Information storage and retrieval (D) Online catalogue preparation 1529. The meaning of information technology is the collection, storage, processing, dissemination and use of information. What is suitability of this definition by your opinion? (A) It is not complete (B) It is not suitable (C) It is very suitable (D) It is suitable 1530. What do you mean by information technology? (A) The use of technology (B) The use of various technologies in the process of information (C) The use of networking in the process of information (D) The use of computer only in the process of information 1531. Data from magnetic tape can be accessed (A) Only randomly (B) Only serially (C) Both randomly and serially (D) None of the above 1532. What are the main components of information technology? (A) Computer technology (B) Network technology (C) Communication technology (D) All the above

1533. CLASS software package is used for (A) Circulation control (B) Online catalogue preparation (C) Mechanism of acquisition (D) Information storage and retrieval 1534. What is full form of GUI regarding computer? (A) Graphic Utility Interaction (B) Graphic Utility Interaction (C) Graphical User Interface (D) Global Users Interaction 1535. What is importance of information technology today for countries such as India? (A) It is a tool (B) It is a boon (C) It is a curse (D) It is useless 1536. What is the main demerit of star structure of the network? (A) Sending message is not possible (B) Other networks can not transmit information in it (C) Other networks can be connected to it (D) Information cannot be stored in it 1537. What is the main role of information technology? (A) In handling of information (B) In storage of information (C) In organisation of information (D) In management of information 1538. What is becoming slowly a medium of electronic printing? (A) Computer (B) Laser printer (C) CD-ROM (D) Floppy 1539. What are application softwares? (A) These are sets of programmes which do the processes of applications (B) These are developed for the functions of an organisation (C) The efficiency of the functions of these is not limited (D) These can be developed self 1540. The data portion of the data base along with the associated index is known as (A) Dictionary (B) File (C) Model (D) Compiler 1541. What is not corre ct about syste m softwares ?

612 D Library and Information Science Specific (A) These are general programmes (B) They affect directly the functions of the computers (C) They can not be used in other computers without revised (D) They are developed by computer manufacturers 1542. Network is an legalized organisation of three or more than three autonomous organisations, this definition of network is given by (A) Ranganathan (B) Stevans (C) John Kelly (D) Stooward 1543. The software which are developed by the users themselves are called (A) System software (B) Application software (C) Users programme (D) Utility software 1544. What is needed for developing a software ? (A) Law level chip (B) High level language (C) Low level language (D) High level circuit 1545. Ventura and Page maker are two popular software for (A) W.P. (B) DTP (C) Office Management (D) File Organisation 1546. What are two kinds of software? (A) System and application softwares (B) System and source softwares (C) Source and reference softwares (D) Small and large softwares 1547. Helvetica and Times are typical names of (A) Printers (B) Type Machines (C) Fonts (D) Computers 1548. Who enunciated the term hypertext? (A) E. Garfield (B) Raj Reddy (C) Ted Nelson (D) Bill Gates 1549. “Hyper Card” was developed by (A) V. Bush (B) Vivekanand (C) Ted Nelson (D) B. Atkinson 1550. The collection of programmes for computer are called (A) Software (B) Hardware (C) Memory (D) System

1551. In how many ways switching system can be established? (A) Six (B) Eight (C) Three (D) One 1552. What do you mean by communication media ? (A) Communication from source (B) Communication from source to user (C) Communication from source to the user via some media (D) Communication from source to the user without any channel 1553. What are called glass fibre, through them the light waves representing electrical pulse are communicated? (A) Twisted wires (B) Coaxial cables (C) Optical fibre (D) Cables 1554. What was invented first in the field of telecommunication? (A) Radio (B) Telegraph (C) Telephone (D) Television 1555. What is not correct about the switching system? (A) It is a tool to control on communication line (B) It increases the utility of communication line of network (C) Four various kinds of tools are available to control on communication line (D) These tools may be prepared easily 1556. What is the use of optical fibre? (A) In telecommunication (B) In satellite (C) In verbal communication (D) In wireless communication 1557. Which type of communication media is being used now a days in telephones, television signals and in high speed faxes? (A) Microwaves (B) Space communication (C) Satellite (D) Optic fibre 1558. The information was first communicated through which media? (A) Via wires (B) Via two wires (C) Via electric (D) Wireless

Multiple Choice Questions D 613 1559. What is called communication channel? (A) Medium of information (B) The medium that relates the sender and user (C) The medium that establishes the contact between the sender and receiver of information (D) Medium of information communication 1560. What is called that cable which has many insulated wires? (A) Copper wires (B) Wires pairs (C) Coaxial wires (D) Optical wires 1561. In long distance communications, such as telephone and televisions, the messages are sent through? (A) Cable (B) Micro waves (C) Optic fibre (D) Twisted wires 1562. Which one is not the communication media ? (A) Coaxial cable (B) Two wires closed line (C) Two wires open line (D) Line of so many wires 1563. Telephone was invented by whom in 1841 in the field of telecommunication? (A) Graham Wind (B) Graham Oddy (C) Graham Bell (D) Graham Link 1564. Which type of switching system is of telephone network? (A) Message switching (B) Circuit switching (C) Packet switching (D) Source switching 1565. Wireless telegraphy was invented by whom, in the end of 19th century? (A) Marconio (B) Remington (C) James watt (D) Adam Brown 1566. What is called the geographical arrangement of computer resources, remote devices, and communication facilities in a network system ? (A) Network analysis (B) Network system (C) Network topology (D) Network of networks 1567. What are the kinds of bandwidth? (A) Narrow, high and lower bands

(B) Narrow, broad and high bands (C) High, lower and medium bands (D) Narrow, Voice and broad bands 1568. What is the meaning of multiplexing in communication process? (A) Process of linking many computers so that only one channel may be used (B) Process of linking many computers (C) Link communication to computer (D) Process of combining the transmission from several devices, into a single data stream that can be transmitted over a single channel 1569. The networks established in India, such as CALIBNET, DELNET, BONET, ADINET, are which category of networks ? (A) LAN (B) MAN (C) WAN (D) I N 1570. Computer network is a system in which (A) Two computers are connected (B) Different types of computers are connected (C) Several computers and terminal devices are connected (D) Two computers are electronically connected 1571. What is called a measure of the amount of information that can be transmitted in a given time? (A) Band (B) Bandwidth (C) Speed (D) Rate 1572. Protocol is that arrangement, which (A) Establish linkage between two computers (B) Govern the interchange of data between two computers (C) Govern the interchange of data between two devices (D) None of the above 1573. Where the volume of the data is relatively low, what is called that band? (A) Narrow band (B) High band (C) Broad band (D) Voice band 1574. A set of rules which allows different devices to hold conversations, what is this called in the field of communication?

614 D Library and Information Science Specific (A) Protocol (C) Treaty

(B) Memorandum (D) Agreement

1575. What is the unit of the rate of communication data on the channel? (A) pbs (B) bbs (C) bsp (D) bps 1576. What is the main aim of multiplexing? (A) To improve the communication channel (B) To make popular to communication channel (C) To disseminate information (D) To increase the efficiency of use of a communication channel 1577. Microwaves, coaxial cables, fibre optic cables and satellites are the examples of which kind of band channel? (A) Voive band (B) Broad band (C) Narrow band (D) High band 1578. In which form E-mail transmits the message or document? (A) In book form (B) In electronic form (C) In printed form (D) In micro form 1579. What facilities are not available in Email service of the computers? (A) Preparation of many copies of the mail (B) Store of mail for delayed delivery (C) Forwarding of the mail (D) Delivery of message to the user at his home 1580. What is the meaning of Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) in transmission system? (A) Obtaining each information (B) Obtaining each information and data (C) Dividing each information and data into small pieces (D) Communicating each information and data 1581. Tell the name of the scientist who developed the ability of communicating information to long distance without wires in 1895? (A) James watt (B) Adrm brown (C) Marconi (D) Graham Bell

1582. How the data are transmitted in microwave transmission? (A) Data signals through symbols are transmitted (B) Data signals are transmitted (C) Data signals are transmitte d through the atmosphere (D) Data signals are sent directly 1583. Which type of protocol is used by interface for Public Data Network (PDN)? (A) X.25 (B) X.12 (C) X.13 (D) X.20 1584. What types of important services are provided by a data communication system ? (A) D-mail only (B) E-mail and voice mail only (C) E-mail, Bulletin Board, voice mail and video-conferencing (D) None of these 1585. What is the meaning of Internet Protocol (IP) ? (A) Transmitting small pieces of information via various paths (B) Transmitting small pieces of information via suitable path (C) Collecting small pieces of information at one place (D) Distributing small pieces of information to different places 1586. What is used by the sender to restrict delivery of the message to authorized reader ? (A) Crossword (B) Password (C) Word (D) Forward 1587. What do you know about wireless communication? (A) Arrangement of transmitting information without wires (B) Arrangement of transmitting information without using any media (C) Arrangement of collecting information (D) Arrangement of transmitting information without using any media 1588. When data signals are bounched from one satellite to an earth station and then to another satellite, this is which type of transmission?

Multiple Choice Questions D 615 (A) (B) (C) (D)

Microwave transmission Satellite transmission Transmission Common transmission

1589. What is correct about E-mail service? (A) Every user is provided one mail box (B) Mail box is the store of information (C) The presence of receiver is not essential at computer (D) The message resides in the mail box until it is read by receiver 1590. When two or more computers are directly linked within a small area such as a room, office or a campus, it is called (A) Local Area Network (B) Metropolitan Area Network (C) Wide Area Network (D) International Network 1591. Through what E-mail service is distributed ? (A) By electric (B) By courier (C) By speed post (D) By Computer and Modem 1592. What is not correct about hypertext system ? (A) It is different from present online retrieval system (B) Any user of this system go forward without leaving his basic reference of foot notes and related material (C) It is not satisfactory system (D) Any user can note references at the time of the process of retrieval 1593. What is the meaning of network system? (A) Two or more networks do work (B) Two or more persons do work jointly for sharing resources (C) Two or more persons, institutions and organisations work jointly for sharing resources of each other (D) Two or more persons do work jointly 1594. How the computers are linked in tree network topology? (A) All computers are linked directly (B) All computers are linked indirectly (C) All computers are linked hierarchically (D) All computers are linked together

1595. What name is given to the network which covers the area of a state, region, nation even of the whole world? (A) LAN (B) MAN (C) WAN (D) I N 1596. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Search Engine (i) Pascal (b) Browser (ii) UNIX (c) Operating (iii) Yahoo System (d) Programming (iv) Netscape Language Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (B) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (C) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (D) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) 1597. Match the following : List – I (a) Web Navigation (i) Element (b) Shift + Tab (ii) (c) ANSI Standard (iii) (d) TELNET (iv) Codes : (a) (A) (i) (B) (iv) (C) (iii) (D) (ii)

(b) (ii) (iii) (iv) (iii)

(c) (iii) (ii) (ii) (i)

List – II Te lecommunication SQL Hyperlink Select the previous link (d) (iv) (i) (i) (iv)

1598. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) HTML File (i) Text Format (b) PDF File (ii) Film Format (c) JPG File (iii) Web Format (d) AVI File (iv) Image Format Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) (B) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (C) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (D) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) 1599. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Altavista (i) Subject search engine

616 D Library and Information Science Specific (b) Lycos (c) Geoindex

(ii) Meta search engine (iii) Regional search engine (d) Savvysearch (iv) General search engine Codes: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) iii ii i iv (B) iii iv ii i (C) iv iii i ii (D) iv i ii iii 1600. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Pen drive (i) C o m m u ni c at i o n device (b) i-Pad (ii) Web server device (c) Wifi Modem (iii) Storage device (d) Cloud (iv) Computing device computing Codes: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) i iii ii iv (B) iii iv i ii (C) iv iii ii i (D) iii ii i iv 1601. Arrange the following according to their year of origin : (i) UNICODE (ii) XML (iii) HTML (iv) SGML Codes : (A) (iv), (iii), (i), (ii) (B) (iii), (iv), (ii), (i) (C) (ii), (iv), (i), (iii) (D) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) 1602. What do you know about automation? (A) A technique to make a system automated (B) A technique to make a system good (C) A technique to make a system of high standard (D) A technique to make a system functioning 1603. What does library automation mean? (A) Principally the use of computers (B) Associated with magnetic tapes (C) Computer based product and services (D) All the above 1604. What is called the state of using computers in the functions, activities and services in the libraries?

(A) (B) (C) (D)

Library operations Automatic Library Library Automation Library functions

1605. What is false statement about library automation? (A) It helps the library staff to be upto-date in their work (B) It helps the librarian in carrying out the work (C) It changes the total functioning of the library (D) It presents a real picture of the library 1606. Which one is not the advantage of automation in libraries? (A) Increased productivity in terms of work and services (B) Participation in networking systems for resources sharing (C) Extension of library services (D) Minimum utility of library material 1607. What was the name by which MEDLARS published before? (A) Medica Index (B) Index Medicus (C) Index of N.L. of Medicine (D) Index of LC 1608. Which one is not the principle of planning of library automation? (A) It must be supported by the management (B) It must be strategic in nature (C) It must be comprehensive in scope (D) It must be disintegrated with administration 1609. UNESCO has developed ________ software for use in libraries. (A) Dbase (B) WS 5 (C) CDS/ISIS (D) LOTUS 1610. What is called that activity of identifying and specifying the goals, and alternative courses of action for accomplishing the mission of the library? (A) Comprehensive planning (B) Planning (C) Management (D) Administration

Multiple Choice Questions D 617 1611. What is identified by planning of automation in the libraries? (A) The time duration of working the task (B) The staff on whom this responsibility rests (C) Tasks to be performed (D) All of the above 1612. Which one is the main abstraction periodical of INSPEC? (A) British Abstracts (B) Physics Abstracts (C) Chemical Abstracts (D) Biological Abstracts 1613. What is the fundamental for the success of automation in libraries? (A) Planning of automation (B) Comprehensive planning of automation (C) Planning of management automation (D) None of the above 1614. By which name MEDLARS is now being provided on online? (A) Index Medicus (B) MEDline (C) Medical Index (D) Medaindex 1615. Who should do the total planning of automation in libraries? (A) Library Committee (B) Staff members in all (C) Librarian only with the help of his staff (D) Authority of the libraries 1616. What type of service DIALOG is? (A) Online (B) Data (C) Network (D) Computer 1617. What is the major component of planning the automation in libraries? (A) The cost factor (B) The staff factor (C) The service factor (D) All the above 1618. What is bibliographic database? (A) Collection of data (B) Collection of catalogue entries (C) List of books (D) Collection of records in machine readable form

1619. Which organisation sponsors ERNET? (A) Electronic Department (B) CSIR (C) UGC (D) Education Department 1620. What is called the arrangement that is a joint effort taken up by two or more organisations to improve their resources and to provide better facilities and services to the members? (A) Resource sharing (B) Sharing material (C) Networking (D) Cooperation 1621. What did help in promoting OPACs? (A) Networking arrangement (B) Library networking arrangement (C) Online library networking arrangement (D) Computer in invention 1622. What is the full form of ERNET? (A) Engineering Network (B) Electronic Research Network (C) Eastern Regional Network (D) Education and Research Network 1623. What do you know about networking? (A) Form of arrangement (B) A temporary arrangement (C) An arrangement that links a group of persons or organisations (D) An arrangement that links a group of persons 1624. What typed of catalogue OPAC is? (A) Catalogue kept in computer (B) Such a catalogue which can search only by computer (C) Catalogue organised in computer, which helps through terminals (D) Catalogue kept in computer, the users search themselves in it 1625. OPACs provide access through which types of inner form of catalogues? (A) Author catalogues (B) Subject and classified catalogues (C) Title catalogues (D) All of the above catalogues 1626. What is mean of ERNET? (A) It is a networking arrangement

618 D Library and Information Science Specific (B) It is a network in the field of research only (C) It is a network in the field of education and research (D) It is a network in the field of education 1627. What does an OPAC provide to the users ? (A) More accessibility (B) More accessibility particularly by title (C) More accessibility particularly by subject (D) More accessibility particularly by author 1628. Books in Print is a national database, which has been developed by (A) DELNET (B) LISTSERV (C) SERVLIST (D) SERVANT 1629. NICNET has four regional nodes in the country where they are (A) Delhi, Madras, Calcutta and Bombay (B) Delhi, Pune, Bhuvneshwar and Ahmedabad (C) Delhi, Pune, Calcutta and Bhuvneshwar (D) Delhi, Pune, Bhuvneshwar and Hyderabad 1630. What was DELNET is name before 1991? (A) Delhi Libraries Network (B) Delivery of Libraries Network (C) Delhi Network (D) None of these 1631. Which one is the network in India, that provided E-mail service first in the country ? (A) DELNET (B) NICNET (C) ERNET (D) INET 1632. What is the full form of NICNET? (A) NICNETWORK (B) National Informatics Centre Network (C) National Information Centre Network (D) National Information Network 1633. What is DELNET? (A) Local Area Network (B) Metropolitan Area Network

(C) National Area Network (D) Local Area Network 1634. DELNET is providing a Current Awareness Service, what is its name? (A) DELSERV (B) LISTSERV (C) SERVLIST (D) SERVANT 1635. DELNET is being promoted and sponsored by which organisation? (A) NISSAT (B) Delhi government (C) CSIR (D) UGC 1636. What is the new name of DELNET? (A) Delivery of Libraries Network (B) Delhi Network (C) Delhi Library Network (D) Developing Libraries Network 1637. What is the main aim of NICNET? (A) Information exchange by central government (B) Information exchange (C) Information exchange between centre and the states (D) Information exchange between two states 1638. Computer network is a system in which (A) Two computers are connected (B) Two computers are electrically connected (C) Two or more computers are electrically connected (D) So many computers are connected 1639. Now what is the main aim of the JANET network? (A) To promote study and teaching of the country (B) To promote study, teaching and research of the country (C) To promote primary education of the country (D) To promote higher education of the country 1640. What is the full form of DELNET? (A) Developing Library Network (B) Delhi Library Network (C) Delhi Library Education and training (D) None of these

Multiple Choice Questions D 619 1641. Which code of cataloguing DELNET adopts? (A) CCC (B) LC (C) AACR-II (D) AACR-I 1642. University Library Network in India is known as (A) DELNET (B) CALIBNET (C) ERNET (D) INFLIBNET 1643. What is the full name of BONET? (A) Bombay Network (B) Bombay Libraries Network (C) Bombay Network of Electronics (D) Bombay Network of Education and Teaching 1644. What was the first aim of establishing JANET network? (A) To provide access of international networks (B) To provide access of public as well as foreign networks (C) To provide access of foreign networks (D) To provide access of public network 1645. Which of the following networks is not primarily for academic purposes? (A) ERNET (B) JANET (C) NICNET (D) INFLIBNET

1650. What is the full form BLAISE? (A) British Library Automated Information Service (B) British Library Association and Information System (C) British Library Association and Information Service (D) British Library Association Information Service 1651. What was the previous name of OCLC? (A) Ohio College Literature Centre (B) Ohio College Library Centre (C) Ohio Centre for Library Cooperation (D) On-line Computer Library Centre 1652. What is the full form of OCLC? (A) On-line College Library Centre (B) On-line Computer Library Centre (C) Ohio College Library Centre (D) Ohio College Literature Center 1653. OCLC is the network of which country? (A) UK (B) USA (C) Bangladesh (D) Germany 1654. By which service JANET provides details of informative materials of all libraries linked in the network? (A) Janet Journal (B) Janet News (C) Janet File (D) Janet database

1646. SIRNET is the abbreviation of (A) Subject Indexing Retrieval Network (B) Social Service Investigation and Research Network (C) Scientific and Industrial Research Network (D) Science and Research Information Network

1655. When OCLC started online services to the users? (A) 1963 (B) 1962 (C) 1971 (D) 1972

1647. JANET is concerned with the scope of which subject? (A) Education (B) Library and research (C) Science (D) Small industry

1657. What is the most important development done by OCLC? (A) The MARC format (B) CD-ROM service (C) Database service (D) Online service

1648. Which one is not the Indian Network? (A) INDONET (B) VIDYANET (C) CALIBNET (D) EURONET 1649. What is the name of acquisition sub system of OCLC? (A) SUBI/OCLC (B) SUB/OCLC (C) SUBY/OCLC (D) SS/OCLC

1656. BLAISE is the network of which country? (A) Nepal (B) France (C) USA (D) England

1658. What does BLAISE provide to the users? (A) On-line transmission of bibliographic records (B) A mainframe facility for catalogue record processing

620 D Library and Information Science Specific (C) Provides access to 10 million records of items (D) All the above

(C) Modem with speed 14000 to 28800 bps (D) All of the above

1659. When the name of OCLC was changed to On-line Computer Library Centre? (A) 1970 (B) 1971 (C) 1984 (D) 1972

1668. ARPANET was the network of which country? (A) England (B) Japan (C) Canada (D) USA

1660. Which one is the largest network system in the world? (A) INFLIBNET (B) OCLC (C) DELNET (D) EURONET

1669. In 1990, Inte rne t be came virtual hypertext network, it is called (A) WWW (B) Gofer (C) Vais (D) FTD

1661. When OCLC was setup in USA? (A) 1972 (B) 1966 (C) 1964 (D) 1967

1670. Internet is the enlargement of which network? (A) JANET (B) ARPANET (C) WLN (D) RLIN

1662. Assertion (A): RDF supports the use and exchange of metadata on the web. Reason (R): Bibliographic standards are the means to create and disseminate secondary information. Codes : (A) (A) is true, (R) is false (B) (A) is false, (R) is true (C) Both (A) & (R) are correct (D) Both (A) & (R) are false 1663. Where is the head quarter of OCLC in USA ? (A) Ohio (B) New York (C) Washington (D) New Jersey 1664. The protocol which has been used in Internet, what is its name? (A) Internet Protocol (B) Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) (C) TCP/IP (D) None of the above 1665. Who mainly provides Internet services in India? (A) Dept. of Electronics (B) CMS Limited (C) NI C (D) VSNL 1666. Which network converted the libraries into virtual libraries? (A) Internet (B) BLAISE (C) Janet (D) I Net 1667. What are the components required to take Internet connection? (A) Personal computer (IBM-PC 486 / Pentium Macintosh) (B) Telephone connection

1671. Which department of USA government set up the Arpanet basically? (A) Department of Commerce (B) Department of Defence (C) State Government of New York (D) Department of Science 1672. What do you know about INTERNET? (A) It is a library (B) In is a management system (C) It is an information system (D) It is network of networks 1673. Internet provides which type of access of information? (A) Direct access of information (B) Off-line access of information (C) On-line access of information (D) Indirect access of information 1674. What is called the set of rules that enables files to be transferred from one computer to the other on the net? (A) FTP (B) PTF (C) TCP (D) I P 1675. What is the name of bulletin board service of Internet? (A) Bulletin board (B) Netware (C) USENET (D) Netware 1676. What types of services, Internet has been providing to its users? (A) E-mail, file transfer, Bulletin board, www (B) Bulletin Board www (C) E-mail and file transfer (D) All the above

Multiple Choice Questions D 621 1677. What is called that language in which web pages are written? (A) Computer language (B) FORTRAN (C) Machine language (D) HTML 1678. What is bulletin board service? (A) It is closely related to E-mail system (B) It has only a single large mail box (C) It is a communication system (D) All the above 1679. The E-mail on Internet is sent to other networks through interconnections? What are called these interconnections? (A) Gateways (B) Password (C) Address (D) Home page 1680. What is the full form of HTML? (A) Hyper Text Markup Language (B) Hyper Text Marking Language (C) Hyper Text Media Language (D) Hindustan Times Machine Language 1681. What is the use of FTP in Internet? (A) Different types of files can be copied (B) Different types of files can be copied from any site (C) Different types of files can be stored (D) Different types of files can be stored in any site 1682. What is the name of mailing list of Internet ? (A) LISTSERV (B) LISTSERVERS (C) DELSERVE (D) SERVLIST 1683. How large databases are searched on Internet? (A) With the help of WAIS (B) With the help of home page (C) With the help of browsing (D) With the help of Golpher 1684. How E-mail is distributed in Internet system? (A) Courier (B) Speed post (C) Air-mail (D) Computer and modem 1685. Why browsing service permits the users?

(A) To disseminate information from remote computers (B) To view information from remote computers without knowing the names of files (C) To remote computers without any disturbances (D) To retrieve information without any disturbances 1686. How VSNL make us me mbe r for Internet ? (A) By providing a Serial number (B) Password which is to identify (C) By providing a Password with one account name (D) By providing an Account name 1687. What is the full from of WAIS? (A) Wide Area Information Service (B) Wide Area Information System (C) Wide Area Integrated system (D) Wide Area Internal System 1688. What is the best way of Internet Connectivity? (A) Dial up connection (B) Telephone connection (C) Use of Modem and telephone line (D) Dial up connection with modem and telephone 1689. What is false about browsing? (A) It is a dynamic service provided by Internet (B) It allows to obtain and display information (C) It is the same as information retrieval (D) It does not provide mechanism to the users 1690. How many components are required to Internet connectivity? (A) Computer, Modem, Telephone line (B) Modem, Programme, Telephone line (C) Computer, Modem (D) Compute r, Mode m, Programme , Telephone line 1691. What is the function of Gopher on Internet ? (A) A software tool which connects a variety of computers

622 D Library and Information Science Specific (B) A software tool which connects a variety of computers and databases (C) A tool to connect the computer to information database (D) A bibliographic tool for searching on Internet 1692. What is called the service that allows an individual to conveniently obtain and display information that is stored on a remote computer? (A) Hacking (B) Browsing (C) Chatting (D) Filing 1693. What is called that protocol which is designed to reach, retrieve and display documents from remote sites on the Internet? (A) Gopher (B) Site (C) Page (D) GUI 1694. The electronic groups that centre around broad topic in the Internet is known as (A) Subscribe serve (B) List serve (C) Mail serve (D) Group serve 1695. Why Internet is facing several problems in browsing and navigating the relevant information? (A) Due to unloading on Internet (B) Due to chatting on Internet (C) Due to over loading of information of Internet (D) Due to hacking on Internet 1696. Which one stateme nt is not correct about metadata? (A) This is nothing but data about data (B) It is different from bibliographic data (C) It refers to any collection of data (D) It is variant form of data 1697. The practice of browsing through the contents of news groups, web or other information services on Internet is known is (A) Surfing (B) Rowing (C) Exploration (D) Navigation 1698. For what, Archie the first of the information retrieval systems was developed by (A) BLAISE (B) MEDLARS (C) Internet (D) DELNET 1699. The programmes that act as an interface between the user and Internet is known as

(A) Browser (B) Service Provider (C) Access Point (D) Protocol 1700. A computer that connects one network to another for the purpose of file transfer is known as (A) Search engine (B) High way (C) Gateway (D) Superway 1701. What is the main function of Archie? (A) Helps to find information located any where on Internet (B) Helps to find information by a Password (C) Help to find information on the www of Internet (D) Helps to find information on Internet 1702. CANSEARCH is a rule based expert system designed to aid (A) Engineers (B) Scientists (C) Technologists (D) Doctors 1703. What is called the information about information and data about data? (A) Microdata (B) Datum (C) Metadata (D) Datas 1704. What is the main aim of metadata? (A) To catalogue all resources (B) To cataloge d some resource s on Internet (C) To catalogue all resources on Internet (D) To catalogue some of the resources 1705. What is the role of information centre? (A) Communication of information (B) Storage and preservation of information (C) Storage and dissemination of information (D) Only to collect information 1706. The information syste ms are be ing organised on which levels? (A) Local and regional (B) National and metropolitan (C) International (D) All the above levels 1707. The main function of DRTC is (A) Research and Training in Library Science (B) Research and Training in classification

Multiple Choice Questions D 623 (C) Research and Training in Documentation (D) None of the above 1708. What are the two types of information in metadata? (A) Basic details about the instructions that hold relevant information (B) Basic details about relevant data se ts (C) Basic details about resources at internet (D) (A) and (B) both 1709. National information centre for Food Science and Technology (NICFST) is located at (A) Varanasi (B) New Delhi (C) Kolkata (D) Mysore 1710. Which organisation promote the concept of National Information system? (A) FID (B) IFLA (C) UNESCO (D) ICSU 1711. What is called that above a and b system which processes bibliographic data and other records of human knowledge and also provides their access to the users? (A) Library system (B) Processing system (C) Information system (D) Data system 1712. Where is science information centre of UGC located? (A) INSDOC (B) IIS (C) DRTC (D) DESIDO 1713. National centre on Bibliography is functioning in India under the support of which organisation? (A) NISSAT (B) INSDOC (C) NI C (D) DRTC 1714. What is mean by NASSDOC? (A) National documentation centre in social sciences (B) Indian documentation centre in services (C) International centre in India for social services (D) Indian documentation centre in services

1715. What does the acronym INSDOC stand for? (A) International Science Documentation (B) Indian National Scientific Documentation centre (C) Indian National Science Documentation Centre (D) International Science Documentation centre 1716. What should be the speed of modem recommended for a Internet connection? (A) 140 to 2800 bps (B) 1400 to 2880 bps (C) 14000 to 28000 bps (D) 14000 to 28800 bps 1717. The NICDAP of NISSAT is concerned with which subject scope? (A) Drugs & Pharmaceuticals (B) Chemical science (C) Drugs only (D) Medical science 1718. Regional and local information centres (units) are the important organs of which organisation? (A) DELNET (B) CALIBNET (C) NISSAT (D) INFLIBNET 1719. The NICLAI of NISSAT is concerned with which subject scope? (A) Leather and allied industry (B) Steel industry (C) Textile industry (D) Leather industry 1720. INIS stands for what? (A) Indian Indexing System (B) International Nuclear Information System (C) International Network for Information Science (D) Information Network in Nuclear Science 1721. Which is an International information storage and retrieval system for nuclear science and technology? (A) AGRIS (B) I NI S (C) NI C (D) Internet 1722. What is the full form of SENDOC? (A) Small Enterprises Documents

624 D Library and Information Science Specific (B) Small Scale Enterprises Documentation Centre (C) Small Enterprises Documentation (D) Science Education National Documentation Centre 1723. Which is the input centre of INIS in India ? (A) INSDOC (B) BARC (C) AGRIS (D) NISSAT 1724. INSDOC is mainly concerned with the documentation activities in which field of the subject? (A) National science (B) Science only (C) Biological science (D) Medical science 1725. Defence Science Journal is published by which centre? (A) SENDOC (B) INSDOC (C) NASSDOC (D) DESIDOC 1726. What is the name of national documentation centre in India in the field of small scale industries? (A) CSIR (B) SENDOC (C) INSDOC (D) DRTC 1727. What is the name of national documentation centre in defence sciences? (A) SENDOC (B) DESIDOC (C) CSIR (D) INSDOC 1728. Indian Science Abstracts is published by which documentation centre? (A) CSIR (B) INSDOC (C) SENDOC (D) DESIDOC 1729. INSDOC was first setup under the administration of which organisation? (A) National Science Library (B) J.N.U. Delhi (C) National Physical Laboratory (D) Indian Institute of Science 1730. The DESIDOC is mainly meant for the field of which discipline? (A) Sciences (B) Electronic (C) Social sciences (D) De fe nce sciences 1731. India is taking part in AGRIS programme through which institution? (A) ICAR (B) ARIC (C) ICMR (D) NISSAT

1732. INIS is the example of (A) Distribute input and centralised output (B) Centralised input and distributed output (C) Centralised input and output (D) Distributed input and output 1733. What does MEDLARS stand for? (A) Medical Literature Analysis and Retrieval System (B) Medium Literature And Retrieval Service (C) Medical Library And Retrieval System (D) Medical Literature and Reprography Service 1734. What is mean by AGRIS? (A) Indian information system of agricultural sciences (B) International information system of agricultural (C) Indian information system of agriculture and technology (D) International information system of agriculture & technology 1735. Which International organisation cooperates INIS programme? (A) IFLA (B) FID (C) IAEA (D) UNESCO 1736. AGRIS information system in agriculture is establishe d on the bases of e quivale nce of which inte rnational organisation? (A) IFLA (B) FID (C) I NI S (D) LC 1737. Which one is the publication of AGRIS? (A) Agriculture Index (B) Agrindex (C) Index Agriculture (D) Agricultural Journal 1738. What is the name of full text database service of INSPEC? (A) Full Text Database Service (B) Electronic Materials Information Service (C) Electronic Information Service (D) Physics Materials Service 1739. Which organisation in Britain organised INSPEC?

Multiple Choice Questions D 625 (A) (B) (C) (D)

British Library Library Association JANET Network Institute of Electrical Engineers

1740. MEDLARS is related with which organisation? (A) Library of Congress (B) British Library (C) National Medical Library of USA (D) National Medical Library of India 1741. 'Granthana' is an official publication of (A) ILA (B) IASLIC (C) RRRLF (D) APLA 1742. Assertion (A): Making information available using GSDL is effective than just putting it on the web'. Reason (R): The information available in digital form can be archived. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the correct explanation (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 1743. Assertion (A): Present day libraries need to develop social networking tools for their library websites. Reason (R): It helps to reach out the patrons where they live and provide service at the point of need. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the correct explanation (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 1744. The British library movement include the following major reports. Identify the correct chronological order of these reports. (i) Me Colvin Report (ii) Kenyen Report (iii) Adams Report (iv) Select Committee Report Codes : (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (B) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (C) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (D) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii)

1745. Arrange the following library automation software according to their date of origin (i) SOUL (ii) KOHA (iii) New GENLIB (iv) LIBSYS Codes : (A) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (B) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (C) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (D) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) 1746. Arrange the following Librarians of National library in chronological order of their service (i) D. R. Kalia (ii) Y. M. Mulay (iii) B. S. Kesavan (iv) K. M. Asadullah Codes : (A) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (B) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (C) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (D) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) 1747. The term ‘Cyberspace’ was first used by (A) Andrew Pollock (B) William Gibson (C) John Postal (D) Joe Flower 1748. RFID Technology is used in (A) Acquisition (B) Serial Control (C) Circulation Control (D) OPAC 1749. The simple Dublin Core Metadata Element Set (DCMES) consists of (A) 10 elements (B) 15 elements (C) 14 elements (D) 18 elements 1750. Assertion (A): XML, just like HTML is a meta language that is capable of containing extendable elements. Reason (R): XML develop and deploy new specific mark up, enabling automatic authoring and processing of networked information. Codes : (A) (A) is false but (R) is true (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the correct explanation (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) Both (A) and (R) are true

626 D Library and Information Science Specific 1751. Assertion (A): Measuring the Internet and in particular the web is a difficult task. Reason (R): Web is considered as a new publishing medium with inadequate editorial process. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the correct explanation (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 1752. Assertion (A): Subject gateways offer the users an alternative to ‘Vacuum Cleaner’ type of search engines, such as Google, Infoseek, Alta Vista etc. Reason (R): Subject Gateways hold manually created records, rich resource description containing relevant information. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the correct explanation (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true

(B) Department of Electronics Library Network (C) Distance Education Library Network (D) Delhi Library Network 1757. Assertion (A): Libraries are facing a threat and are bound to disappear soon. Reason (R): Internet and WWW provide ac ce ss to Oc e ans of inform ati on Worldwide. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1758. Match the following : List -I List-II (a) NASSDOC (i) Defence Science (b) DEVSIS (ii) Social Sciences (c) I NI S (iii) Development Science (d) DESIDOC (iv) Nuclear Science Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (D) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv)

1753. Arrange in chronological order the following persons who were associated with computing history : (i) J. Presper Eckart (ii) John W Mauchly (iii) August Ada (iv) Charles Babbage Codes : (A) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (B) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (C) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (D) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i)

1759. Match the following : List -I (a) CLRI (i) (b) SENDOC (ii) (c) NASSDOC (iii) (d) BARC (iv) Codes : (a) (b) (c) (A) (ii) (i) (iv) (B) (iv) (iii) (i) (C) (iv) (i) (ii) (D) (iii) (i) (iv)

1754. INSDO C has b e e n me rge d wi th NISCOM and is now known as (A) DELNET (B) NISCAIR (C) DESIDOC (D) NASSDOC

1760. In which year AGRIS was established? (A) 1945 (B) 1960 (C) 1970 (D) 1975

1755. What is the name of mailing list of Internet? (A) LISTSERV (B) LISTSERVERS (C) DELSERVE (D) SERVLIST 1756. DELNET stands for (A) Developing Library Network

List-II Hyderabad New Delhi Mumbai Chennai (d) (iii) (ii) (iii) (ii)

1761. How different nodes in a network are connected and how they communicate are determined? (A) By Network Connectivity (B) By Network Topology (C) By Network Compatibility (D) None of the above

Multiple Choice Questions D 627 1762. Assertion (A): Use of microfilming is becoming obsolete day by day. Reason (R): ICT has developed digital technologies, which are quick, cheap and easy to handle. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not a correct explanation (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A) 1763. Arrange the following softwares according to their development : (I) E-Print (II) D-space (III) Greenstone (IV) Koha Codes : (A) (IV), (III), (II), (I) (B) (III), (II), (I), (IV) (C) (I), (II), (III), (IV) (D) (II), (III), (IV), (I) 1764. Match the following : List I List II (a) NTC (i) UK (b) ITC (ii) India (c) BLDSC (iii) Netherlands (d) NISCAIR (iv) USA Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (B) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (C) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (D) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 1765. Arrange the following according to the year of establishments : (i) NICNET (ii) INDONET (iii) INFLIBNET (iv) MALIBNET Codes : (A) (iv), (i), (iii), (ii) (B) (iv), (ii), (i), (iii) (C) (ii), (i), (iv), (iii) (D) (i), (iii), (iv), (ii) 1766. Match the following : List I (a) SENDOC (i) (b) INPADOC (ii) (c) NASSDOC (iii) (d) INSDOC (iv) (NISCAIR)

List II Social Sciences Sciences Pate nts Small Scale Industries

Codes : (A) (B) (C) (D)

(a) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii)

(b) (iii) (ii) (iii) (iv)

(c) (iv) (iii) (i) (i)

(d) (i) (iv) (ii) (ii)

1767. NACLIN is sponsored by (A) INFLIBNET (B) MALIBNET (C) DELNET (D) NICNET 1768. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) CDS/ISIS (i) INSDOC (b) Sanjay (ii) CMC (c) Granthalya (iii) UNESCO (d) Maitrayee (iv) DESIDOC Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (D) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) 1769. ‘RRRLF’ falls under the : (A) Ministry of Human Resource Development (B) Ministry of Information & Broadcasting (C) Ministry of Culture (D) Ministry of Science & Technology 1770. “Internet Public Library” is being maintained by (A) MIT, Massachusetts (B) University of Michigan (C) University of Arizona (D) Drexal University 1771. Arrange the following according to their year of establishment : (i) NI C (ii) DESIDOC (iii) NISCAIR (iv) NASSDOC Codes : (A) (i), (iii), (ii), (iv) (B) (iii), (i), (iv), (ii) (C) (iv), (i), (iii), (ii) (D) (ii), (iv), (i), (iii) 1772. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Textual (i) Pascal representation

628 D Library and Information Science Specific (b) Computer language (c) Network tool (d) Searching technique (a) (b) (A) (iv) (i) (B) (i) (iv) (C) (iii) (ii) (D) (ii) (iv)

(ii) Gopher (iii) Boole an ope rators (iv) ASCI (c) (ii) (iii) (iv) (iii)

(d) (iii) (ii) (i) (i)

1773. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Hubs (i) A physical layer device used to interconnect the media segments of an extended network (b) Repeater (ii) A physical layer device that connects multiple computers e ach v ia a de d icated cable (c) Bus (iii) Multiple bridges Topology known for transfer of dat a b e twe e n different parts (d) Switches (iv) A straight line data highway that carries network informati on from one network station to another Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (B) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (C) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) (D) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) 1774. “Students’ visit to Library is influenced by the availability of Internet”. State “Students’ visit to library” is which kind of variable? (A) Independent Variable (B) Intervening Variable (C) Dependent Variable (D) Intercept Variable 1775. The information network that connects Universities and Colle ges in United Kingdom

(A) JANET (C) OCLC

(B) SERCNET (D) BONET

1776. Internet filtering is (A) A form of censorship (B) Acceptable user policy (C) Access to inappropriate material (D) Blocking internet facility 1777. Which one of the following is a Bulletin Board Service on Internet? (A) Picaso (B) Google talk (C) Blog (D) Oovoo 1778. Virus is a software which can (A) Manipulate data (B) Replicate itself (C) Damage computer (D) All the above 1779. In 1990, Internet has become virtual hype rte xt ne twork syste m, what is called it? (A) WWW (B) FTD (C) GOFER (D) FTD 1780. Radio Frequency Identification is used in library for (i) Circulation of Documents (ii) Cataloguing of Documents (iii) Security of Documents (iv) Acquisition of Documents Codes : (A) (i) and (ii) are correct (B) (ii) and (iv) are correct (C) (iii) and (ii) are correct (D) (i) and (iii) are correct 1781. Assertion (A): INFLIBNET provides document delivery service to all types of libraries in India. Reason (R): Modern technologies made it possible for electronic transmission of required documents. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are correct (B) (A) is wrong, but (R) is correct (C) Both (A) and (R) are wrong (D) (A) is correct and (R) is wrong 1782. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) Vidyanidhi (i) Institutional Repository (b) TKDL (ii) Electronic The ses & Disse rtations

Multiple Choice Questions D 629 (c) DOAJ

(iii) Digital Library of Journals (d) E-Prints @ IISc (iv) Digital Archive Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) (B) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (C) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (D) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) 1783. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) DRUPAL (i) Inte g rate d L ibr ary Manag e ment Software (b) Moodle (ii) Di gital L ibrary Software (c) D space (iii) Co nte nt Manag e me nt Sof tware (d) New Gen Lib (iv) Le arning Manag e me nt Sof tware Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (B) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (C) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (D) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 1784. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) Face Book (i) Vide o Ne tworking site (b) Research Gate (ii) Social Networking site (c) Oovoo (iii) Academic Networking site (d) Flicker (iv) Photo Networking site Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (B) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (C) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (D) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) 1785. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) Guidance to (i) Documentation use RTI Act service (b) Orientation (ii) Referral service

in use of multimedia (c) Providing user (iii) with list of information sources (d) Directing the (iv) user of INFLIBNET to seek needed information Codes : (a) (b) (c) (A) (iii) (ii) (i) (B) (iv) (ii) (iii) (C) (ii) (i) (iv) (D) (iv) (iii) (i)

Informative Literacy

Reference service

(d) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii)

1786. Assertion (A): Indian libraries are making optimum use of social networking. Reason (R): Social networking has wider role in dissemination of information. Codes : (A) (A) is true but (R) is false (B) (A) is false but (R) is true (C) (A) and (R) both are true (D) (A) and (R) both are false 1787. Assertion (A): Metadata hold much promise for information retrieval and access in the digital age. Reason (R): Metadata can save a number of functions including description, resource discovery and management of resources. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1788. Arrange the following IFLA programmes according to their year of commencement : (i) UBC (ii) UAP (iii) ISBD (iv) International MARC Office Codes : (A) (i), (iv), (iii), (ii) (B) (ii), (iv), (i), (iii) (C) (iv), (i), (ii), (iii) (D) (iii), (i), (ii), (iv)

630 D Library and Information Science Specific 1789. Arrange the following in order of their year of establishment (i) I NI S (ii) AGRIS (iii) MEDLARS (iv) UNESCO Codes : (A) (iii), (iv), (i), (ii) (B) (ii), (iv), (i), (iii) (C) (iv), (iii), (ii), (i) (D) (i), (ii), (iv), (iii) 1790. Match the following : List – I List – II a. File transfer i. Data transmission protocol capacity b. Multimedia ii. Integration of text, colour sound and animation c. Bandwidth iii. Bulletin Board d. Electronic iv. Internet Notice Board Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) iv ii i iii (B) i iii ii iv (C) ii i iv iii (D) i iv ii iii 1791. Match the following : List – I List – II a. ISDN i. Web page b. URL ii. Video Conferencing c. Firewall iii. Internet Standard for Information Transmission d. HTTP iv. Protecting unauthorized access internet Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) iii iv i ii (B) iv i iii ii (C) ii i iv iii (D) i iii ii iv 1792. Match the following : List – I List – II a. OCLC i. Bio-Med b. INFLIBNET ii. Web-Dewey c. IISC iii. N-List d. NLM iv. Digital Library of India

Codes : (a) (A) ii (B) iii (C) iv (D) i

(b) iii i ii iii

(c) iv ii iii iv

(d) i iv i ii

1793. Metadata Dublin core refers to (A) Data elements in database (B) Bibliographic elements in database (C) Field elements in database (D) Subject elements in database 1794. The national convention regularly organized by DELNET is known as (A) CALIBER (B) ICDL (C) NACLIN (D) DELNETCON 1795. Report on ‘the development of digital libraries of the past decade’ is categorized as (A) Review Report (B) Trend Report (C) Research Report (D) State of the art report 1796. Digital library function incorporate : (i) Creating and capturing (ii) Storage and management (iii) Search and access (iv) Abstracting and reviewing Codes : (A) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct (B) (i), (iii) and (iv) are correct (C) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are correct (D) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct 1797. Which topology of computer network provides faster server access? (i) BUS Network Topology (ii) RING Network Topology (iii) MULTIPLE RING Network Topology (iv) STAR Network Topology Codes : (A) (i) and (ii) are correct (B) (i) and (iii) are correct (C) (ii) and (iii) are correct (D) (ii) and (iv) are correct 1798. AGRIS information system in agriculture is e stablishe d on the basis of e quivale nce of which inte rnational organisation? (A) IFLA (B) FID (C) I NI S (D) LC

Multiple Choice Questions D 631 1799. Assertion (A): Internet can replace libraries. Reason (R): Google searches will satisfy the maximum users needs. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 1800. What is the meaning of automation in present time? (A) Use of any type of machine (B) Use of networking (C) Use of computers (D) Use of robots 1801. What do you know about research? (A) A method to obtain solution of the problem (B) A descriptive method to obtain solution of the problem (C) A systematic method to obtain solution of the problem (D) A systematic method to obtain tentative solution of the problem 1802. What is the main aim of research? (A) To discover nothing (B) To discover answer to question (C) To discover answer (D) To discover answer to question by scientific procedures 1803. What are the two broad categories of research ? (A) Primary and secondary (B) Basic and applied (C) Pure and applied (D) Historical and experimental 1804. A priori research has been divided into following categories (A) Pure and applied impure (B) Pure research and applied research (C) Observational research and empirical research (D) None of the above 1805. Normally research is carried out in four stages, the first is (A) Collection of data (B) Analysis of data (C) Generalization (D) Identification of a problem

1806. What is undertaken when problem is formulated? (A) Observation on the problem (B) Collection of data (C) Analysis of data (D) Solution of the problem 1807. What do you know about basic research ? (A) Search for broad principles without objectives (B) Search without nothing (C) Search for new thing (D) Search for a solution 1808. What type of research is the Chain Procedure of Ranganathan? (A) Basic research (B) Applied research (C) Solo research (D) Pure research 1809. Research in modern times is carried out mainly in (A) Universities (B) Industrial organisations (C) Government organisations (D) All the above 1810. What type of research is the Edition’s work on bulb? (A) Basic research (B) Applied research (C) Pure research (D) Fundamental research 1811. Which type of research is being done now-days? (A) Basic research (B) Applied research (C) Basic & Applied research (D) Fundamental research 1812. What type of research is the Five Laws of Library Science of Dr. Ranganathan? (A) Applied research (B) Pure research (C) Basic research (D) Experimental research 1813. Search for the information for research normally starts with (A) Tertiary sources (B) Documentary sources (C) Secondary sources (D) Primary sources

632 D Library and Information Science Specific 1814. Empirical research is (A) Which gives same result at every place (B) It is type of fundamental research (C) A process of research (D) None of the above 1815. What type of research is the discovery of electricity? (A) Basic research (B) Applied research (C) Pure research (D) Fundamental research 1816. Pure research provides a ground for (A) Applied research (B) Oriental research (C) Fundamental research (D) Survey research 1817. Research design gives the (A) Procedure for designing tools (B) Blue print of research activity (C) Technique of research (D) Procedure of research 1818. What is the main aim of applied research? (A) To apply performance of research in use (B) To develop theories (C) To develop modules (D) None of these 1819. What is the meaning of research design? (A) Planning of research (B) Working of research (C) Tool or research (D) Process of research 1820. Which technique is not applied in Bibliometry ? (A) Measurement (B) Localization (C) Hierarchy (D) Calculation 1821. The research on a particular problem with some object is called (A) Pure research (B) Fundamental research (C) Basic research (D) Applied research 1822. Pure re se arch is an inve stigation conducted by (A) An individual

(B) Two persons (C) A group of persons (D) An organisation 1823. A plan of study which a researcher make s and unde rtakes the work is known as (A) Research problem (B) Research design (C) Research report (D) Research formulation 1824. The Spiral of Scientific Method studies which of the following? (A) Trends of subject (B) Trends of research (C) Organisation of subject (D) None of these 1825. What is the true sequence of cardinal points on the spiral of scientific method? (A) De scende nt, Ze nith, Asce ndent, Nadir, Ascendent (B) Asce ndent, Desce ndent, Zenith, Nadir, Descendent (C) Nadir, Ascendent, Zenith, Descendent, Nadir (D) None of these 1826. What do you know about hypothesis? (A) Solution to a problem (B) Tentative solution to a problem (C) Blue print of a research project (D) Tool for data collection 1827. The main aim of Research Design is the (A) Identify objectives (B) Gathering data (C) Formulation of Hypothesis (D) Control variance in research 1828. On Spiral or Scientific Method, the cardinal points Zenith to Descendent contains (A) Fundamental laws (B) Deductive phase (C) Hypothesizing phase (D) Empirical laws 1829. The spiral of scientific method signifies which of the following? (A) Steps and phrase s in scie ntific method (B) Formulation of hypothesis in scientific method

Multiple Choice Questions D 633 (C) Formulation of subjects (D) Formulation of knowledge 1830. On Spiral of Scientific Method, the cardinal points Descendant to Nadir contains (A) Fundamental Phase (B) Deductive Phase (C) Verification Phase (D) Hypothesis Phase 1831. On Spiral of Scientific Method, the cardinal points Nadir to Ascendent contains (A) Empirical laws (B) Fundamental laws (C) Deductive laws (D) Original laws 1832. The Spiral of Scientific method is devised by (A) H. E. Bliss (B) Dewey (C) Ranganathan (D) Cutter 1833. What does Zenith mark in the spiral? (A) Fundamental laws (B) Empirical laws (C) Original laws (D) All laws 1834. Verifiability is one of the important elements of which method of research? (A) Scientific method (B) Social method (C) Historical method (D) Survey method 1835. On Spiral of Scientific Method, the cardinal points Ascendent to Zenith contains (A) Empirical laws (B) Fundamental (C) Hypothesizing phase (D) Original laws 1836. What is interview method of collection of data ? (A) Data collection by face to face (B) Data collection by Questionnaire (C) Data collection by Schedule (D) None of the above 1837. What is the testing criteria for hypothesis? (A) Hypothesis must be established (B) Hypothesis must be the same (C) Hypothesis must be quite right (D) Hypothesis must tally with experience and observations

1838. Which two methods of data collection are closely connected? (A) Scheduled and Questionnaire (B) Case study and experimental (C) Observation and Scheduled (D) Interview and Questionnaire 1839. In which type of research hypothesis is occasionally used? (A) Applied (B) Experimental (C) Historical (D) Observational 1840. In which method of data collection the questions are answered by user in his writing? (A) Scheduled method (B) Questionnaire (C) Experimental (D) Case study 1841. Questionnaire is widely used tool in which type of research? (A) Survey research (B) Experimental research (C) Historical research (D) Case study research 1842. Questionnaire is meant for what? (A) Data collection (B) Data analysis (C) Data interpretation (D) Data representation 1843. A questionnaire designed in advance is known as (A) Structured (B) Modified (C) Closed (D) Unstructured 1844. What does hypothesis become after verification? (A) Research problem (B) Theory or principles (C) Formulation (D) Solution of the problem 1845. The use of principles of Mathematics and statistics in the field of library and information science, is called (A) Bibliometry (B) Librametry (C) Biometry (D) Librachine 1846. To select certain number of students from a whole class to study a particular phenomena, is known as (A) Purposive sampling (B) Random sampling

634 D Library and Information Science Specific (C) Stratified sampling (D) Select sampling 1847. Which is the principal method of research in social science? (A) Historical method (B) Descriptive method (C) Scientific method (D) Social science method 1848. Stratified sampling is a combination of which of the following? (A) Quota and Random (B) Quota and cluster (C) Random and cluster (D) Purposive and Random 1849. What is the first step in the methodology of research? (A) Solution to the problem (B) Collection of the data (C) Analysis of data (D) Formulation & identification of the problem 1850. Cranifield research studies and carried out to study (A) Catalogue (B) Classification (C) Indexing (D) Abstracting 1851. Bibliometry can not be called as which one of the following? (A) Quantitative science (B) Scientometrics (C) Infometrics (D) Documentrics 1852. The Laws of Statistical regularity and inertia are related to (A) Law of osmosis (B) Law of sampling (C) Law of scattering (D) Law of symmetry 1853. Which one is second step in research methods? (A) Formulation of the hypothesis (B) Formulation of the problem (C) Collection of data (D) Analysis of data 1854. If the size of the sample is very small which method of sampling gives better results? (A) Stratified (B) Purposive (C) Random (D) Census

1855. How did biologists, physicists and astronomers accumulate knowledge? (A) By systematic growth (B) By systematic analysis (C) By systematic synthesis (D) By systematic observations 1856. Historical method of research can be applied (A) Only in history (B) Only in literary history (C) In all subjects (D) In science subjects 1857. In which of the following, Four-Cell design is used? (A) In case studies (B) In obse rvations (C) In surveys (D) In historical method 1858. What is mean by Content Analysis research ? (A) Analysis of past documents and material (B) Research on the problem of social life (C) Related with contents (D) None of above 1859. What do you know about descriptive research? (A) Is a typical interpretation & analysis of data (B) Is a common collection of data (C) Is a random selection of data (D) None of the above 1860. Internal and external criticism are the important elements of which method of research? (A) Scientific method (B) Historical method (C) Descriptive method (D) Comparative method 1861. In which discipline, the de scriptive method is extensively used? (A) In sciences only (B) Biological sciences (C) Physical and natural sciences (D) Social sciences 1862. Experimental method of research is the same as

Multiple Choice Questions D 635 (A) (B) (C) (D)

Statistical method Scientific method Historical method Descriptive method

1863. Who said that Survey Research is nothing but a type of descriptive research only? (A) F. W. Best (B) Lancaster (C) Ranganathan (D) J.K. Khanna 1864. Controlled group is a term which is used in (A) Survey research (B) Historical research (C) Experimental research (D) Descriptive research 1865. Cranfield research project is an example of (A) Survey Research (B) Historical Research (C) Experimental Research (D) Observation Research 1866. In which method of research, documents are treated as primary sources? (A) Descriptive research (B) Historical research (C) Experimental research (D) Scientific research 1867. Which type of research does not involve the use of experiments? (A) Scientific research (B) Descriptive research (C) Experimental research (D) Historical research 1868. INFROSS is an example of which type of research? (A) Survey (B) Experimentation (C) Case study (D) Observation 1869. Which university in the world awarded first Ph.D. degree in 1930 in library and information sciences? (A) Chicago University (B) Columbia University (C) California University (D) Michigan University 1870. Which one is that step of the process of research, by which the results of the same research are notified to others?

(A) (B) (C) (D)

Hypothesis Problem’s formulation Research Report Sources

1871. The preliminaries in the research report includes (A) Bibliography (B) Introduction (C) Glossary (D) Appendices 1872. What is written on the title page of a research report? (A) Title (B) Author’s name (C) Title with author’s name (D) None of the above 1873. What is the meaning of a research report? (A) It is tool of research (B) It is an effective way of communication (C) It is an normal way of communication (D) It is a means of research 1874. For what purpose, the Council of Library Resources was mainly established in 1956 in USA? (A) To develop the position of library staff (B) To give aid for library science researches (C) To revised the curriculum of library science (D) To give aid for library science education 1875. By the efforts of which of the following persons, librarianship has attained the position of a full fledged subject as Library Science? (A) Melvel Dewey (B) C. A. Cutter (C) D. J. Fosket (D) S. R. Ranganathan 1876. In the format of research report, which one is the first page? (A) Cover page (B) Title page (C) Half title page (D) Verso page 1877. What is meant by research report? (A) Written references (B) Written results (C) Written statement (D) Written description of research

636 D Library and Information Science Specific 1878. Where was the research first started in 1923 in the field of library and information science after williamson’s report? (A) USA (B) UK (C) Canada (D) France

procedures, is called (A) Scientific method (B) Historical method (C) Descriptive method (D) Delphi method

1879. The step of writing research report should be based on (A) Principles of administration (B) Principles of organisation (C) Principles of organisation and presentation (D) Principle of management

1886. Which method of research cannot be used in library and information science subject ? (A) Historical method (B) Survey method (C) Scientific method (D) Delphi method

1880. What are the main sections of the body of a research report? (A) Introduction (B) Statement of the problem (C) Purpose of the study (D) All the above

1887. If we apply Delphi Method of research in library and information sciences, what will be the results? (A) It will solve the problems (B) It will present a tentative solution (C) It will help in the administration (D) It will predict future developments

1881. Research report should be written in (A) English language (B) Mother language (C) Simple language (D) Strong language 1882. The Delphi method of research was first developed in USA to predict what? (A) Future developments related with country (B) Future developments in all the areas of the country (C) Future developments in all the areas of the country (D) Future developments in library and information sciences 1883. In which field of library science the case study method of research cannot be used? (A) Library Management System Analysi s (B) Cost-benefit analysis (C) Cost-effectiveness (D) Library Budget 1884. What is the main aim of Delphi method of research? (A) Refining of judgemental data (B) Addition of summarized data (C) Analysis of collected data (D) Collection of historical data 1885. The method of research which one is comprised of a group of modified survey

1888. When was Delphi method developed? (A) In 1997 (B) 1950s (C) In 1962 (D) 1952 1889. What (A) It (B) It (C) It (D) It

is is is is is

mean by Delphi method? a programming language a computer programme a method of research a tool for research

1890. Delphi method is primarily concerned with (A) Data analysis (B) Data interpretation (C) Data collection (D) Data recognition 1891. What will be the benefit of applying historical method of research in the study of libraries? (A) Limitations of the present in comparison to past are known (B) The e fficiencies of the staff are known (C) The library provides better services (D) It increases the collection of the library 1892. D I S I S S stands for (A) Demographic Information System and Service (B) Design of Information Service in Social Sciences

Multiple Choice Questions D 637 (C) Depth Information Service in Sciences (D) Distributed Information System in Social Studies 1893. Delphi method is related with (A) Forecasting trends (B) Mathematics (C) Palmistry (D) Astronomy 1894. In which country the Delphi method for research was first developed? (A) India (B) France (C) Germany (D) USA 1895. The term librametrics was formally introduced in 1948 by (A) W. C. B. Sayers (B) E. J. Coates (C) S. R. Ranganathan (D) D. J. Faskette 1896. What is called the statistical and mathematical anal analysis of bibliographies and literature of a subject? (A) Librametric (B) Bibliometry (C) Bibliographics (D) Symmetries 1897. Which one is the field, in which the Bibliometry cannot be used? (A) Growth of knowledge and Trends in research (B) Identify users of different subjects (C) Qualifications and efficiencies of library staff (D) Ethics of storage and weeding out of books from the library 1898. What are two parts of Bibliometry? (A) Descriptive and evaluated (B) Analytic and communicated (C) Quantitative and qualitative (D) Deductive and inductive 1899. What is Bibliometry? (A) It is a tool/technique of information management (B) It is an element of information management (C) It is a function of library work (D) It is a service of information management 1900. What was the name give n Ranganathan to Bibliometry?

by

(A) Librametry (B) Librachine (C) Scientometrics (D) Documentrics 1901. Who used first the term Bibliometry? (A) S. C. Bradford (B) Alan Pritchard (C) James Boyd (D) A. Neelmegham 1902. External and Internal criticism implies in (A) Historical Research (B) Survey Research (C) Experimental Research (D) Applied Research 1903. Assertion (A): Library Science has been called Science because it has good application of scientific tools and techniques as is applicable in natural science and physical science. Reason (R): Experimental method of research has good scope in library science. Code : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not a correct explanation (B) Both (A) and (R) are true (C) (A) is false but (R) is true (D) (A) is true but (R) is false 1904. Assertion (A): Hypothesis are essential in all types of research. Reason (R): Objectives can fulfil the purpose of hypothesis. Code : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) (A) is false but (R) is true (C) (A) is true and (R) is false (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1905. Assertion (A): Skillful use of research procedures is an art, their appropriate application is research. Reason (R): Systematically conducted research leads to generalisation. Code : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are true but (A) is not a correct explanation (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 1906. Assertion (A): Like other scientists, the social scientists can obtain relevant information by conducting experiments,

638 D Library and Information Science Specific interviewing people, observing people and reviewing relevant literature. Reason (R): Social Scientists can't be so rigorous as can be of natural scientists. Code : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not a correct explanation (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1907. Assertion (A): Research results lead to propound new laws, theories and principles. Reason (R): Laws, principles and theories are the result of scientific research. Code : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not a correct explanation (C) (A) is false and (R) is true (D) (A) is true and (R) is false 1908. Gotam's book 'Nyasutra' has given the fo llo wing fo ur ste p s o f s cie ntif ic research. Arrange them in proper order. (i) Aptavakshya (Verification/ Testing) (ii) Upaman (Camparison) (iii) Anuman (Inference) (iv) Pratyaksha (Perception) Codes : (A) (ii) (B) (i) (C) (iv) (D) (iv)

(iv) (iv) (ii) (iii)

(i) (ii) (iii) (ii)

(iii) (iii) (i) (i)

1909. A research design is (A) A series of guide posts (B) A series of sampling (C) A hypothetical statement (D) A controller of variance 1910. In a questionnaire, questionnaire on age, income and gender are the examples of (A) Dependent variables (B) Intervening variables (C) Independent variables (D) Manipulation variables 1911. Assertion (A): With large collection of documents, recall can be measured properly.

Reason (R): The proper estimation of maximum recall for a query requires detailed knowledge of all the documents in the collection. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the correct explanation (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 1912. Which of the following is a term used for working assumption of a solution to a problem? (A) Research (B) Hypothesis (C) Bibliography (D) Thesis 1913. Assertion (A): Median is simply the middle value when the data have been arranged in ascending or descending order. Reas on ( R) : M e di an re f e r s t o t he middle value in a distribution. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1914. Arrange the structure of the Research report in correct order : (i) Table of contents (ii) Appendices (iii) Text (iv) Title page Codes : (A) (iii), (i), (iv), (ii) (B) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) (C) (ii), (iii), (iv), (i) (D) (iv), (i), (iii), (ii) 1915. Mean, Median and Mode are (A) Measure of Central tendency (B) Measure of deviation (C) Measure of Information System (D) Measure of Sampling 1916. Assertion (A): A sample is the representation of a whole. Reason (R): The sample is subjected to observation and analysis. (A) (A) is false but (R) is true (B) (A) is true but (R) is false (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false

Multiple Choice Questions D 639 1917. Arrange the following steps in research in the sequence of their occurrence : (I) Report writing (II) Research design (III) Collection of data (IV) Analysis of data Codes : (A) (III), (IV), (II), (I) (B) (I), (III), (IV), (II) (C) (II), (III), (IV), (I) (D) (IV), (II), (III), (I) 1918. Assertion (A): Like social scientists, the natural scientists can also collect data by conducting experiments, interviewing/observing people and reviewing literature. Reason (R): Social scientists cannot be as objective as can be natural scientists. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1919. Arrange the following in a logical sequence : (i) Formulation of a hypothesis (ii) Data analysis (iii) Selection of sample (iv) Report writing Codes : (A) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) (B) (iv), (ii), (i), (iii) (C) (ii), (i), (iv), (iii) (D) (i), (iii), (ii), (iv) 1920. Experimental research is generally oriented towards (A) Past (B) Prese nt (C) Future (D) Past and Present 1921. Assertion (A): Historical research cannot be regarded scientific as it lacks replication and reliability. Reason (R): Historical research is truly scientific as it is based on criticism. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true

(B) (A) is true, but (R) is false (C) (A) is false but (R) is true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1922. Assertion (A): Hypotheses are essential in all types of research. Reason (R): Research can be conducted without hypotheses. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A) (B) Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A) (C) (A) is false but (R) is true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1923. Assertion (A): All research results lead to propounding of new laws, theories and principles. Reason (R): Laws, Principles and Theorie s are the result of Scientific Research. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A) (B) Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A) (C) (A) is false but (R) is true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1924. Arrange the following in correct order : (i) Deductive phase (ii) Empirical phase (iii) Verification phase (iv) Hypothesizing phase Codes : (A) (i), (ii), (iv), (iii) (B) (iv), (i), (ii), (iii) (C) (iii), (i), (iv), (ii) (D) (ii), (iv), (i), (iii) 1925. Which of the following tests can be employed for hypothesis testing? (A) F – test (B) Chi – square test (C) t – test (D) All of the above 1926. Which of the following is not related to case study approach in a research design? (A) Indepth Study (B) Study of one/limited cases (C) General study (D) Little concern about generalisation to a large population

640 D Library and Information Science Specific 1927. Idiographic hypothesis is directed towards predicting the behaviour of (A) An Individual (B) Group of People (C) Masses (D) People from same school of thought 1928. In the process of reasoning when we start with a specific statement, and conclude to a general statement, it is called (A) Deductive Reasoning (B) Inductive Reasoning (C) Abnormal Reasoning (D) Transcendental Reasoning 1929. Solomon Four group design is related to (A) Field studies (B) Pretest-post test control group design (C) Data Analysis Model (D) Statistical Technique 1930. Research is conducted to (i) Generate new knowledge (ii) Develop a theory (iii) Develop communication skills (iv) Re-interpret existing knowledge Codes : (A) (i), (iii) and (ii) are correct (B) (iii), (ii) and (i) are correct (C) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct (D) (i), (iii) and (iv) are correct 1931. Assertion (A): Many libraries have no written collection development policy and yet have sound collection. Reason (R): Demand driven collection plays a strong role in having a sound collection. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1932. Assertion (A): Collection of audio materials is less used in Academic Librarie s. Reason (R): People consider these materials intellectually less sound and fit only for recreation purpose.

Codes : (A) (A) is false, but (R) is true (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false (C) (A) is true and (R) is partially true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1933. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) Cole and Eales (i) Statistical Bibliography (b) Hume (ii) Scientometrics (c) Pritchard (iii) Statistical Analysi s (d) T. Braun (iv) Bibliometrics Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (B) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (C) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (D) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) 1934. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) Thurston scale (i) Shari ng ind ividual preference in a group (b) Semantic (ii) Group of Judges Differential Scale (c) Likert Scale (iii) Se le c tion fr om two opposite position (d) Sociometric (iv) Intensity scale structure Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) (D) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) 1935. Assertion (A): Random samples are not representative of the whole population. Reason (R): Random numbers are used in forming a random sample. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 1936. Which of the following variable cannot be expressed in quantitative terms?

Multiple Choice Questions D 641 (A) (B) (C) (D)

Socio-Economic status Marital status Numerical Aptitude Professional Attitude

1937. Eugene Garfield is primarily associated with (A) Coordinate Indexing (B) PRECIS (C) Citation Indexing (D) POPSI 1938. Which of the following are the scientists’ approach according to Melvin J Voigt (1961)? (i) Current Approach (ii) Everyday Approach (iii) Exhaustive Approach (iv) ‘Catching up’ or ‘brushing up’ approach Codes: (A) (ii), (iii) and (iv) (B) (i), (iii) and (iv) (C) (i), (ii) and (iv) (D) (i), (ii) and (iii) 1939. Assertion (A): Qualitative measures must be made quantifiable in order to be convincing. Reason (R): Qualitative measures are a necessary complement to quantitative measures. Codes: (A) (A) is true, (R) is false (B) (A) is false, (R) is true (C) Both (A) & (R) are true (D) Both (A) & (R) are false 1940. Match the following : List–I List–II a. Mean i. Most freque ntly occurring value b. Mode ii. Average c. Median iii. Measure of dispersion d. Standard iv. Middle Value Deviation Codes: a (A) iii (B) ii (C) iv (D) ii

b iv i iii iii

c i iv i iv

d ii iii ii i

1941. Who opened National Library of India free for the public? (A) Dr. Radhakrishnan (B) Pt. Jawahar Lal Nehru (C) Dr. Rajendra Prasad (D) Maulana Abdul Kalam Azad 1942. Bibliothec Nationale is the national library of which country? (A) France (B) Portgal (C) Spain (D) Germany 1943. How many libraries are getting books from the publishers according to Delivery of Books Act in India? (A) Seven (B) Six (C) Three (D) Four 1944. In which city of USA, Library of Congress is located? (A) New York (B) Columbia (C) Washington (D) Washington D.C. 1945. Where is National Medical Library of India is located? (A) Delhi (B) Calcutta (C) Bombay (D) Madras 1946. What is the name of national library of Russia? (A) State Lenin Library (B) National Library (C) National Library of Russia (D) Moscow Public Library 1947. Where is the national library for blind and handicapped in India located? (A) New Delhi (B) Dehradun (C) Chennai (D) Calcutta 1948. The name of Anthony Pannizi is related to which library? (A) British Library (B) Imperial Library (C) Library of Congress (D) British Museum 1949. What should be the main aim of a college library? (A) Promotion of researches (B) Promote the reading habits of students (C) Satisfy the entertainment needs of the students

642 D Library and Information Science Specific (D) Support the teaching programmes of the college 1950. Which one of the following libraries does not obtain the books vide the Delivery of Books Act? (A) Delhi Public Library, Madras (B) Conamora Public Library, Madras (C) Asiatic Society Library, Bombay (D) Raja Rammohan Ray Library, Calcutta 1951. What do you know about special library? (A) Which specialized on a particular subject (B) Which is specialized on a particular subject or a group of subjects (C) Which is specialized on a particular group of subjects (D) None of these

(C) London University Library, U.K (D) Delhi University, Library, India 1957. Library Services and Construction Act, 1964 was for the development of libraries of which country? (A) USA (B) Canada (C) France (D) India 1958. Which type of libraries have a very vital role to play these days to meet a variety of multidimensional demands of information and knowle dge of students, teachers and researches? (A) Special library (B) Research library (C) University library (D) College library

1952. Who has been generally the secretary of library committees in academic libraries? (A) Principal (B) Registrar (C) Librarian (D) Professor Incharge

1959. Which one is not the aim of school libraries ? (A) Make the students literate (B) Awake the intellectual power of the students (C) Make the moral character of the students (D) Awake the ambition of sports of the students

1953. What are called academic libraries? (A) In which e ducational books are stored (B) In which education is provided (C) Libraries established in universities (D) All libraries of academic institutions

1960. Library is the heart of all the university work according to (A) D. S. Kothari (B) K. P. Sinha (C) S. Radhakrishnan (D) S. R. Ranganathan

1954. The aim of which type of libraries is to promote the academic and researchistic needs of the users? (A) Public library (B) College library (C) Special library (D) University library

1961. Which type of libraries are the libraries established in schools? (A) Academic (B) Public (C) Specific (D) Mobile

1955. Which types of libraries are established in higher education institutions? (A) Special libraries (B) University libraries (C) College libraries (D) Research libraries 1956. Which one university library is the largest in the world? (A) New York University Library, USA (B) Harvard University Library, USA

1962. What are called those libraries which exist in a wide variety of organisation, most of them being units of larger organisations? (A) Public libraries (B) Special libraries (C) Variety libraries (D) Academic 1963. To promote the research activities is an important function of (A) College libraries (B) University Library (C) Public Libraries (D) None of the above

Multiple Choice Questions D 643 1964. What is called the libraries of digital documents, artifacts and needs? (A) Document library (B) Digital library (C) Record library (D) Virtual library 1965. Which of the following statements can be considered as advantage of class libraries in a school? (A) They limit the number of books a child to select from (B) They increase the number of copies required (C) They do not require cataloguing and classification (D) They permit a better integration of books into teaching 1966. The demand of users in special libraries mainly is through the (A) Author of the book (B) Publisher of the book (C) Subject of the book (D) Title of the book 1967. What are called those libraries in which services are fully automated and all resources are in digitised form? (A) Virtual libraries (B) Digital libraries (C) Electronic libraries (D) Libraries without walls 1968. The college library differs form a university library in the following ways. (A) It is usually smaller than the University library (B) It has fewer research material (C) Both of the above (D) Neither of the above 1969. ______ scheme for classification consists of a large schedule enumerating most of the subjects of the past, the present and the anticipatable future, and in addition a few schedules of common isolates and also some schedules of special isolates. (A) Almost Faceted (B) Rigidly Facted (C) Enumerative (D) Almost Enumerative

1970. Tata Consultancy Library falls under the category of (A) Office Library (B) Public Library (C) Small Library (D) Special Library 1971. What kind of library is the library of National Physical Laboratory? (A) Technical library (B) Public library (C) Academic library(D) Special library 1972. The Unive rsity Library of Mumbai (Bombay) was established in (A) 1857 (B) 1858 (C) 1859 (D) 1880 1973. The library for blind and handicapped located at Dehradun, what kind of library is this? (A) Public Library (B) Special library (C) Academic library(D) Blind library 1974. Who are freshman for the library? (A) Those come to library first (B) Those come first time in the library (C) Those came first time to make use of the library (D) Those who are fresh minded 1975. The library with little or no physical process of reading materials, reading space or supporting staff is called (A) Virtual library (B) Library without walls (C) Digital library (D) Computer library 1976. Those who come to make use of the libraries are called (A) Members of the library (B) Readers of the library (C) Users of the library (D) Scholars of the library 1977. What is not the merit of the digital libraries? (A) Ability to view for several persons at a time (B) Ability to view the content at the home or office (C) There is no need to reside the library in the building (D) It provides source of information in physical form

644 D Library and Information Science Specific 1978. What is used in accessing a virtual library? (A) Check card (B) Bottom card (C) Hyper card (D) Identity card 1979. The libraries whose resources are in both electronic and conventional forms, and functions are fully automated with CDROMs networking, are called (A) Electronic library (B) Digital library (C) CD-ROMs library (D) Virtual library 1980. Into how many categories users of the libraries have been divided by Dr. S. R. Ranganathan? (A) 5 (B) 6 (C) 7 (D) 8 1981. What was the main and important problem of the libraries today, which has been solved by digital libraries? (A) Spacing problem (B) Problem of sources (C) Staff problem (D) Working problem 1982. In which media, the model of a virtual library system can be created? (A) Hypertex (B) Hypertext (C) Multimedia (D) Hypermedia 1983. What is the basic problem of virtual library system? (A) Include all the resources of a library (B) Include all the resources of a library in hyper card (C) Do not include all the resources of a library in hypercard (D) None of these 1984. What are the methods of user’s studies? (A) Measurement of use (B) Surveys of the users (C) Community profiles (D) All of these 1985. Which college experimented user’s education for the first time? (A) Graduate school of Librarianship (B) Simpons College (C) Montieth college (D) Ohio college

1986. What does behaviour studies of the users reveal? (A) Scientists spend their full time in searching (B) Scientists spend half of the time of their working hours in searching (C) Scientists spend most of the time of their working hours in searching (D) Scientists spend more time of their working hours in searching 1987. How many types of user’s studies are there, what are their names? (A) Behaviour and use studies (B) Behaviour studies (C) Behaviour, use and information flow studies (D) None of the above 1988. What is called that user’s study which is conducted to find out the pattern of flow of information in the communication system? (A) Behaviour studies (B) Use studies (C) Information flow studies (D) None of the above 1989. _________ number denotes the number which is used for fixing the position of an entity in a sequence. (A) Ordinal (B) Cardinal (C) Indicator (D) Class 1990. What is called that user’s study which is conducted to find out the pattern to overall interaction of the user’s community with the communication system? (A) Behaviour studies (B) Use studies (C) Information flow studies (D) None of the above 1991. User’s education is relate with (A) W. C. B. Sayers (B) P. Knapp (C) Ranganathan (D) M. Dewey 1992. What is called that users study which is conducted to find out the use of any communication media such as primary or secondary periodical? (A) Behaviour studies (B) Use studies (C) Information flow studies (D) None of the above

Multiple Choice Questions D 645 1993. What is user’s study? (A) Study of library (B) Study of the users of the library (C) Study of utility (D) Study of the needs of the users 1994. What is the meaning of measurement of use? (A) Use of documents by readers within the library (B) Number of readers who used library in any way (C) Number of readers who used library in any way (D) All the above 1995. Who was the chairman of University Education Commission (1948)? (A) S. R. Ranganathan (B) S. Radhakrishnan (C) C. D. Deshmukh (D) D. S. Kothari

2000. Why it is essential to study user’s need for information? (A) To assess the needs for books of users (B) To assess the needs for periodicals of users (C) To assess the needs for all reading materials of users (D) To assess their approach to seek the use of documents 2001. Library is the heart of the institution according to (A) D. S. Kothari (B) Mudaliar (C) S. Radhakrishan (D) C. D. Deshmukh 2002. The library for the people, of the people and by the people is called (A) General library (B) Personal library (C) People library (D) Public library

1996. In which type of libraries, surveys of the users, have been very useful? (A) In Public libraries (B) In university libraries (C) In academic and special libraries (D) In special libraries

2003. What is the correct categorisation of libraries ? (A) Public, Academic, Special (B) Public, Academic, Personal (C) National, Regional and International (D) Public, Specific and National

1997. What is called that method of user’s studies which is undertaken to assess the information gathering habits of library users? (A) Surveys of the users (B) Community profiles (C) Measurement of use (D) All the above

2004. What is Raja Rammohan Roy Foundation? (A) It is a library (B) It is an agency for assistance to the libraries (C) It is a library association (D) It is an governmental agency for assistance to the libraries

1998. According to UGC Library Committee, the librarians are grouped under which category of library staff? (A) Professional (B) Semi-Professional (C) Administrative (D) Academic

2005. On which date Lord Curzon declared open the new Imperial Library for the public? (A) On 30 January, 1903 (B) On 31 January, 1904 (C) On 30 August, 1910 (D) On 2 October, 1905

1999. Who are academic users of the libraries? (A) Students only (B) Students, teachers, researchers and public (C) Students, teachers and researchers (D) Teacher only

2006. Where was the first public library setup in India? (A) Punjab (B) Bombay (C) Madras (D) Calcutta 2007. Who was the chairman of NAPLIS committee appointed on October, 1985? (A) D. P. Chattopadhyay (B) P. N. Kaula

646 D Library and Information Science Specific (C) A. Neelameghan (D) K. A. Issac 2008. Who was the first librarian of new Imperial Library? (A) Hari Nath Dey (B) W. Borden (C) MacFarlane (D) B. S. Keshvan 2009. Where was the first All India Public Libraries Conference held? (A) Madras (B) New Delhi (C) Lucknow (D) Calcutta 2010. Which of the following material would you not expect to find in a public library? (A) Audio-cassettes (B) News Papers (C) Patents (D) Maps 2011. From where McFarlane came to India for looking after the new Imperial Library? (A) Library of Congress, USA (B) British Museum, London (C) State Linen Library, Moscow (D) None of these 2012. In which year the Calcutta Public Library was mixed up into Imperial Library? (A) 1962 (B) 1902 (C) 1905 (D) 1912 2013. American Center Library and British Council Library come under the category of (A) Special Libraries (B) Public Libraries (C) Foreign Libraries (D) Embassy Libraries 2014. The name of which Viceroy is concerned with Imperial library? (A) Lord Minto (B) Lord Wellington (C) Lord Curzon (D) Lord Mountbetton 2015. Which committee commission described Public Libraries as “Stagnating pools of Books”? (A) Fyzee committee (B) Ranganathan committee (C) Sinha committee (D) Kothari commission 2016. When the first public library was setup in Calcutta? (A) 1835 (B) 1870 (C) 1905 (D) 1972

2017. Which clause of the constitution of India is related with the establishment of National Library? (A) 26 (B) 50 (C) 62 (D) 67 2018. Which one is not the depository library in India? (A) Asiatic Society Library, Bombay (B) Conamara Public Library, Madras (C) National Library of India, Calcutta (D) Delhi University Library, Delhi 2019. What is called the library which is established by the central government at a central place? (A) Central library (B) National library (C) Public library (D) Central Public library 2020. Which one is the largest Public Library of South East India? (A) Andhra Pradesh Public Library (B) Madras Public Library (C) Delhi Public Library (D) Calcutta Public Library 2021. What is the importance of the day of 14th August, 1850 in the development of British Library? (A) Public Library Act got government asse nt (B) An open access was started in British Museum (C) British National Bibliography was started to publish (D) Establishment of British Library system 2022. Under which act, National Library of India receives book? (A) Registration of Books Act, 1887 (B) Delivery of Books Act, 1954 (C) The Copy Right Act, 1985 (D) Revision Act, 1976 2023. Which one is not the function of a National library? (A) It collects all publications published in the country (B) It publishes national bibliography (C) It represents national bibliography (D) It provides assistance to all libraries of the country

Multiple Choice Questions D 647 2024. John McFarlane was the first librarian of which library? (A) Delhi Public Library (B) Imperial Library (C) Raja Rammohan Library (D) Khudabaksha library 2025. Which one of the following is not the characteristic of the national library? (A) It is central library of the country (B) It is sponsored by the grant of central government (C) It is only copyright library (D) Its readers are the specific persons of the nation 2026. Delhi Public Library was set up in 1951 by (A) National Library (B) Government of India (C) Government of Delhi (D) Government of India with UNESCO 2027. In which year British Library was established? (A) 1985 (B) 1980 (C) 1965 (D) 1973 2028. What type of collection is in India office Library? (A) Books published in India (B) MSS (C) All published and MSS (D) None of these 2029. National libraries, which store the books obtained through the Delivery of Books Act, also are called as (A) Library of Books (B) Depository library (C) Books library (D) Repertory library 2030. On which date Pandit Nehru inaugurated Delhi Public Library in Delhi? (A) 27th October, 1951 (B) 28th December, 1951 (C) 5th January, 1961 (D) 25th May, 1964 2031. What is the name of national library of England? (A) National library (B) British Library

(C) British Museum (D) National Library of UK 2032. Where India Office Library is located? (A) France (B) Great Britain (C) USA (D) Canada 2033. Which one is not the national library in India? (A) Khudabaksha Orie ntal Library, Patna (B) Sarswati Mahal Manuscripts Library, Tanjore (C) Delhi Public Library, Delhi (D) National Science Library, New Delhi 2034. What is the name of national library of USA ? (A) American National Library (B) Library of Congress (C) Library of America (D) National Library of USA 2035. How many books are essential to send by the publishers to National Library vide this Delivery of Books Act? (A) 2 (B) 6 (C) 4 (D) 8 2036. What type of libraries is Khudabaksha Library, Patna? (A) Public library (B) Special library (C) District library (D) National library 2037. When the National Library of India became open to the general public? (A) On February 1, 1953 (B) On August 17, 1950 (C) On January 30, 1950 (D) On October 5, 1956 2038. What was the past name of British Library ? (A) British Library of England (B) British Archives (C) British Museum (D) British National Library 2039. By which Act, National Library of India gets the books from the publishers? (A) The Press and Registration Act, 1952 (B) Delivery of Books Act, 1954 (C) Copyright Act, 1985 (D) Registration of Books Act, 1887 2040. When Library of Congress was established?

648 D Library and Information Science Specific (A) 1800 (C) 1805

(B) 1987 (D) 1882

2041. Surveys of the users of the libraries are conducted for what? (A) To assess the information gathering habits of users (B) To assess their approach to seek the use of documents (C) To assess the extent of reliance of collection in libraries (D) All the above 2042. Which organisation prepared the draft of Library and information science national policy? (A) Indian Library Association (B) Indian Association of special Libraries and Information centres (C) Indian Association of Teachers in Library and Information centres (D) Raja Rammohan Roy Library Foundation 2043. Which foundation was setup by Raja Rammohan Roy Library? (A) Foundation for library improvement (B) Library Foundation (C) RRRLF (D) LF of RRR 2044. For what UGC Library Committee put a formula for e xpe nse s of pe r capita method ? (A) For subscribing library periodicals (B) Four maintain the library building (C) For purchasing of books and other reading material (D) For salary of library staff 2045. Which is the publication of RRRLF? (A) RRRLF Bulletin (B) Library Review (C) Grathna (D) RRRLF Journal 2046. What does RRRLF stand for (A) Rajaram Roy Library Foundation (B) Rajaraman Library foundation (C) Raja Rammohan Roy Library Foundation (D) Raja Ram Mohan Roy Library Foundation 2047. Where Raja Rammohan Roy Library is situated? (A) Delhi (B) Ahmedabad (C) Calcutta (D) Bangalore

2048. Assertion (A): Migration is the primary strategy used by most organisations for digital archiving. Reason (R): Migration preserves the physical presence, content, functionality and context of the digital object. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the correct explanation (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation (A) is true but (R) is false (A) is false but (R) is true 2049. Arrange the following committees/commissions according to their year of formation (i) National Library Review Committee (ii) Library Advisory Commission (iii) Sinha Committee on Public Libraries (iv) Working group on libraries (Planning Commission) Codes : (A) (iii) (B) (ii) (C) (iv) (D) (i)

(ii) (iii) (ii) (iv)

(iv) (iv) (i) (iii)

(i) (i) (iii) (ii)

2050. Match the following List-I List-II (a) The Electronic (i) USA Library (b) Library Herald (ii) Germany (c) Library Trends (iii) United Kingdom (d) International (iv) India Classification Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (B) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (C) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (D) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) 2051. Whic h nati onal ag e ncy i n Indi a is assigning the ISBN? (A) Raja Ram Mohan Roy National Education Resource Centre (B) Delhi Public Library (C) Federation of Publishers in India (D) National Library of India 2052. Assertion (A): In contemporary digital environme nt, IPR become the focal point.

Multiple Choice Questions D 649 Reason (R): Many fold increase of unfair use of I.P. Codes : (A) (A) and (R) are true (B) (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is true and (R) is false (D) (A) is false and (R) is true 2053. Assertion (A): Library automation is at a slow pace in Indian Libraries. Reason (R): Lack of U.G.C. (India) support lead to this situation. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 2054. Assertion (A): Para-professional staff support the professional staff in Library routines. Reason (R): Para-professional staff acquire skill by experience. Codes : (A) (A) is false, but (R) is true (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false (C) Both (A) and (R) are false (D) Both (A) and (R) are true 2055. Public Library Law has already been passed in the following States. Identify the correct chronological order in which they were enacted. (i) Uttaranchal (Uttarakhand) (ii) Orissa (iii) Gujarat (iv) Haryana Codes : (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (C) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (D) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) 2056. ISBN consists of (A) 6 digits (C) 13 digits

(B) 8 digits (D) 15 digits

2057. Arrange the following States chronologically according to year of enactment of Library Legislation. (i) Tamil Nadu (ii) U.P. (iii) Gujarat (iv) Mizoram Codes : (A) (iv), (iii), (i), (ii) (B) (ii), (iv), (iii), (i) (C) (i), (iv), (iii), (ii) (D) (i), (ii), (iv), (iii)

2058. Match the following : List -I List-II (a) Fumigation (i) Acquisition (b) Building library (ii) Preservation collection (c) Kardex (iii) Re fe r e nce se rvice (d) Information (iv) Registration of Desk Periodicals Code: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (D) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) 2059. ISBN changed from 10 digits to 13 from (A) January, 2007 (B) January, 2008 (C) January, 2006 (D) January, 2005 2060. Public Library Manifesto was developed by (A) Delhi Public Library (B) UNESCO (C) RRRLF (D) IFLA 2061. The significance of the year 2011 for LIS education in India is (A) Golden Jubilee year (B) Platinum Jubilee year (C) Diamond Jubilee year (D) Centenary year 2062. Which libraries are functioning as depository libraries? (i) Delhi Public Library (ii) Connemara Public Library (iii) British Council Library (iv) Central Reference Library Codes : (A) (i), (iii), (iv) are correct (B) (i) and (iii) are correct (C) (i) and (ii) are correct (D) (ii) and (iii) are correct 2063. Two or more collections classified according to one and the same scheme and displaying uniform sequence of classes is called ______ sequence. (A) APUPA (B) parallel (C) filiatory (D) helpful 2064. Assertion (A): There is need to continuous evaluation and appreciation of value of libraries.

650 D Library and Information Science Specific Reason (R): There is economic pressure on public budget. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is true, but (R) is false (D) (A) is false, but (R) is true

2068. Where the first M. Phil. programme in Library and Information Science was started in India? (A) University of Madras (B) University of Delhi (C) University of Mysore (D) University of Bombay

2065. Assertion (A): System analysis identifies the flow of work. Reason (R): System analysis is not necessary if the library is automated. Codes : (A) (A) is false, but (R) is true (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false (C) Both (A) and (R) are false (D) Both (A) and (R) are true

2069. Assertion (A): LIS Education in India achieved a landmark of 100 years but quality is compromised. Reason (R): Unplanned proliferation of LI S sc hoo ls and ope n le arni ng programmes. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) are (R) are false (C) (A) is false (R) is true (D) (A) is true (R) is false

2066. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) RRRLF (i) Delhi (b) Connemara (ii) Patna Public Library (c) NISCAIR (iii) Kolkata (d) Khuda Baksh (iv) Chennai Oriental Public Library Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (D) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) 2067. Match the following : List – I (a) Konnemara Public Library (b) Khudabaksha Oriental Public Library (c) Asiatic Society Library (d) National Library (India) Code : (a) (b) (c) (A) (iv) (ii) (i) (B) (iv) (i) (ii) (C) (iii) (ii) (i) (D) (iii) (i) (iv)

List – II (i) Patna (ii) Kolkata

(iii) Chennai (iv) Mumbai

(d) (iii) (iii) (iv) (ii)

2070. Assertion (A): LIS education is not uniform throughout India. Reason (R): Adoption of UGC model syllabus is not mandatory, Local LIS requirements varies. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 2071. Assertion (A): Though information is considered as a commodity, Libraries are not sound in finances. Reason (R): All types of Libraries have failed in promoting information as a commodity. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 2072. ‘Parry Committee’ (UK) was set up to advise (A) School Libraries (B) Public Libraries (C) Special Libraries (D) University Libraries 2073. Assertion (A): Distance education for LIS courses is gaining ground in India. Reason (R): Majority of people prefer it as an alternative channel of education.

Multiple Choice Questions D 651 Codes : (A) (A) is true but (R) is false (B) (A) is false but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are correct (D) Both (A) and (R) are wrong 2074. Arrange the following in a chronological or de r acc ordi ng to the i r y e ar of establishment (i) Library of Congress (ii) NISCAIR (iii) Delivery of Books Act (iv) National Library of India Codes : (A) (iii), (iv), (ii), (i) (B) (ii), (iii), (i), (iv) (C) (i), (iv), (iii), (ii) (D) (iv), (i), (iii), (ii) 2075. Match the following : List – I List – II a. B.S. Kesvan i. School of librarianship b. Paul Otlet ii. National Library of India c. W.C.B. Sayers iii. UDC d. M. Taube iv. Unite rm Inde xing Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) ii iii i iv (B) iii ii i iv (C) ii iii iv i (D) iv ii iii i 2076. Raja Rammohan Roy Library Foundation (RRRLF) was established by (A) Indian Library Association (B) Department of Culture, Govt. of India (C) Govt. of West Bengal (D) Ministry of Home Affairs, Govt. of India 2077. Which one of the following is not a recommendation of National Knowledge Commission (India)? (A) Preparation of a National Census of Library (B) Encourage greater community participation in library management (C) Raja Rammohan Roy library foundation to act as the National co-ordination agency

(D) Facilitate donation and mainte nance of private collection 2078. Which of the following are not partners of National Programme on Technology Enhanced Learning (NPTEL)? (i) IIT Madras (ii) IIT Delhi (iii) IIIT Bangalore (iv) NIT Rourkela Codes : (A) (iii) and (iv) (B) (i) and (iv) (C) (ii) and (iii) (D) (i) and (ii) 2079. ______ is a system of ordinal numbers representing the classes in a scheme of library classification. (A) Notation (B) Numbers (C) Digits (D) Symbols 2080. “Control, Disease, Malaria, Brain” indicates that it is (A) Raw Title (B) Expressive Title (C) Kernel Title (D) Transformed Title Direction (Q.no. 2081-2085): Read the passage given below, and answer the questions based on your understanding of the passage: Information is a resource whose generation consumes time and money and whose use conserves time and money. The industrial environment in India is making a quantum jump in the field of technology absorption and innovation. New companies, both in the public and private sector, have been started in the past two years and most of the monopoly business is coming to an end. In other words, the industrial environment is becoming more and more competitive. Information is one of the major resources which will help the company win a competitive edge. Electronics industry is both an important and competitive industry. It has grown 514% from 1970, with an average growth rate of 15% per annum. It is hoped that by 1990 the computer industry would be a Rs. 665 crore sector. There are more than 100 companies in India now manufacturing computers. The survival in this industry by a company largely depends on its openness to adopt new

652 D Library and Information Science Specific technologies, introduce state-of-the art products, new marketing strategies etc. For this the company needs information on the technology, environment and competition. The types of information generally sought by a company include economic information, legal information, information on personnel relations, public relations, technology trends, market trends etc. 2081. Industrial environment in India is making a quantum jump because (A) Information is a resource whose generation consumes time (B) Information is a resource whose generation is money (C) Information is a resource that consumes money and time (D) Information absorptions and innovation in the field of the technology 2082. Monopoly in business is coming to an end because of a (A) Information (B) Money flow (C) Competitiveness (D) Lack of information 2083. Information is a major resource which (A) helps company to lose money (B) helps company to achieve popularity (C) helps company to have an edge in competition (D) helps company to gain better manpower 2084. Electronics industry is both an important and competent industry as it (A) is growing at the rate of 15% (B) is growing at the rate of 500% (C) is growing at the rate of 14% (D) is not growing at all 2085. The types of information usually sought by companies are (A) economic and legal information (B) information on personnel relation (C) information on technology and market trends (D) all the above

Direction (Q.no. 2086-2090): Read the passage given below, and answer the question based on your understanding of the passage. To meet the challenge of change, much thought is currently being given to information studies, curricula and the requirement of a more broad-based education for the information scientist of the present. A developing country like India cannot afford to neglect these aspects of manpower training which is crucial to the success of development efforts. In the context of proliferation of literature, the information professional can hardly keep track of the information requirements of his clientele, unless he is well versed in modern information handling methods. Manpower for our libraries and information centres is presently drawn from library schools run by the universities and two sp e cialis e d info rmatio n sc ie nce programmes offered by the DRTC and NISCAIR. Certain studies have revealed that “professionals trained by special institutes are far better in the information fields than their colleagues, the products of the Unive rsity Departments.” It is pertinent at this point to design and formulate curricula in respect of the various levels of training to be imparted. Any consideration of the system of training to be meted out has to be at par with the present set up, function and purpose of the existing information centres. 2086. Now a days much thought is given for (A) Curriculum requirements (B) Broad based education (C) Information scientists (D) All the above 2087. India cannot afford to neglect the aspects of manpower training because (A) of proliferation of library schools (B) of in-sufficient provision of library schools (C) they are crucial to the success of development (D) they are not crucial for the success of development

Multiple Choice Questions D 653 2088. Specialized information science education institutes produce better professionals as (A) library schools fail to produce good professionals (B) library schools are unable to meet the demands of the society (C) they have better curricula and infrastructure (D) they do not have good curricula 2089. LIS education is now pertinent to (A) design curricula (C) have status quo in curricula (B) follow existing curricula (D) reduce the curricula 2090. Training for librarianship must be at par (A) with the old set up (B) with the future set up (C) with the present set up (D) with the previous set up Direction (Q.no. 2091-2095): Read the p as sage giv en belo w an d ans wer th e questions based on your understanding of the passage. Digital devices measure and display discrete quantities. Most clocks, for example are analog in nature and have hands that sweep along a continuous scale as do the needles on speedometers Digital clocks, however, display discrete numbers standing for the time. The numbers are either there or they are not, and they click into position virtually instantaneously. In fact, speed and accuracy are distinguishing features of most digital devices, because analog equipment comes in a poor second on both counts. A valid comparison can be made between slide rules, which are analog, and pocket calculators, which are digital. Accepts information in a unitary form, i.e ., le tte rs, symbols and numbe rs. These may represent anything the computer user wishes. All calculations and processing of the incoming data are done on the digital computer. Thus, all the mathematical rules and functions may be applied and the results are printed out in conventional letters, symbols or

numbers. Thus, these are general purpose computers suitable for information processing in general. “Hybrid” computers have been developed to take advantage of the strength of both analog and digital devices. Typically, analog computers will measure physical quantities such as temperature or pressure and then relay the data to digital compute rs, which, be cause of the ir greater speed and accuracy, can perform statistical computations on the data easily. The output is then displayed in a convenient form for the human beings responsible for conducting or monitoring the operation in question. Because of their unique capabilities for symbol manipulation, digital computers loom for more important in applied information science than the other types, and it is to them that we shall be referring when we speak of computers from now on. 2091. The distinguishing features of digital devices are : (i) Speed (ii) Accuracy (iii) Timeliness (iv) Easy to Carry (A) (i) and (ii) (B) (ii) and (iv) (C) (iv), (iii) and (i) (D) (ii), (iii) and (iv) 2092. Digital clocks are analog in nature because (A) they have two hands (B) their hands sweep along on a continuous scale (C) they show time (D) display discrete numbers standing for time 2093. Hybrid computers are developed to take advantage of (A) strength of analog devices (B) strength of digital devices (C) strength of both analog and digital devices (D) strength of none of the above 2094. Analog computers measure physical quantities because of (A) the temperature and accuracy (B) their greater speed and accuracy (C) the human beings (D) the complexities in operations

654 D Library and Information Science Specific 2095. Digital computers assume more importance in applied information science becauseof (A) the lack of capabilities for symbol manipulation (B) the capabilities for symbol manipulation (C) the capabilities for digital manipulation (D) the lack of capabilities for digital manipulation Direction (Q.no. 2096-2100): Read the passage given below, and answer the question based on your understanding of the passage: To survive, thrive and beat the competition in today’s brutally competitive world, one has to manage the future. Managing the future means managing the information. In order to manage the information, in order to deliver high quality information to the decision makers at the right time, in order to automate the process of data collection, collation and refinement, organizations have to make Information Technology (IT) an ally, harness its full potential and use it in the best way possible. We have seen that in today’s competitive business environment, the key resource of every organization is information. If the organization does not have an efficient and e ffective mechanism that enables it to give the decision-makers the right information at the right time, then the chances of that organization succeeding in the next millennium are very remote. The three fundamental characteristics of information are accuracy, relevancy and timeliness. The information has to be accurate, it must be relevant for the decision-maker and it must be available to the decision-maker when he needs it. Any organization that has the mechanism to collect, collate, analyse and present high quality information to its employees, ‘thus enabling them to make better decisions, will always be one step ahead of the competition. Today, the time available for an organization to react to the changing market trends is very short. To

survive, the organization must always be on its toes, gathering and analysing the data-both internal and external. Any mechanism that will automate this information gathering and analysis process will enhance the chances of the organization to beat the competition. 2096. Which factors force organisation to use IT to harness information? (A) Explosion of sources of information (B) Availability of latest information on real time basis (C) Time, volume and complex nature of information on real time basis (D) Information needs of users are inter-disciplinary in nature 2097. Major obstacle in taking accurate futuristic decisions is (A) availability of more information (B) cut-throat competition (C) Everchanging socio-economic and political situations (D) Globalisation 2098. Which is the most appropriate tool to make better use of information? (A) Well qualified and experienced information professional (B) Depth classification and indexing (C) Experts in domain knowledge (D) Information technology 2099. What is the critical characteristic of information delivery system for making its use effective? (A) Efficient channels of communication system (B) Ability to develop appropriate information products (C) Right information, delivered at right time (D) Developing quality photocopying and fax facility 2100. What is the crucial decision for an organization to take to beat the competition? (A) To create a mechanism to access, organise and process information within an organisation (B) To establish a separate department for acquiring and processing information

Multiple Choice Questions D 655 (C) To strengthen the libraries already existing in the organisation (D) To collaborate with university and national and international information systems. 2101. The f undame ntal e quati on of Inf ormat ion Scie nce has be e n put forward by (A) Michael Buckland (B) Robert Brooks (C) Marc Porat (D) Wersig Gernot 2102. Source, Message, Transmitter and receiver are the components of communication model developed by (A) Shannon - Weaver (B) Schramm (C) Lasswell (D) George Gerbner 2103. Who said that Knowledge is of two kinds. We know a subject ourselves or we know where we can find information about it? (A) S.R. Ranganathan (B) W.C. Berwick Sayers (C) Samuel Johnson (D) H.E. Bliss 2104. The acronym for Association for Information Management is (A) IAMA (B) AIM (C) ASLIB (D) IIM 2105. Census Atlas National Volume is an example of __________ Atlas. (A) Local (B) Historical (C) Demographic (D) Anthropological 2106. COMPENDEX is the on-line Database on the subject (A) Physics (B) Commerce and Export (C) Analytical Chemistry (D) Engineering 2107. Routing of periodicals is (A) CAS (B) SDI (C) Indexing Service (D) Abstracting Service 2108. The subject ‘Research Methodology’ has been formed by which of the following modes?

(A) Fusion (B) Distillation (C) Fission (D) Loose Assemblage 2109. Boolean Logic was propounded by (A) B.C. Wickery (B) S.C. Bradford (C) J. Buckland (D) George Boole 2110. ‘IMCE’ Stands for (A) International Meeting of Cataloguing Experts (B) International Meeting of Computer Experts (C) International Meeting of Communication Experts (D) International Meeting of Classification Experts 2111. An indispensable function of Thesaurus is (A) Knowledge representation (B) Problem Solving (C) Representation of relationship between concepts (D) Knowledge Engineering 2112. ‘Book Number’ helps in (A) Individualising the book within the same class number (B) Individualising the book among the books with same authors (C) Individualising among the books with same year of publication (D) Knowing the subject of the book 2113. The library budget prepared without considering the previous years budget is (A) Zerobased Budget (B) Performance Budget (C) Line item Budget (D) Lumpsum Budget 2114. The abbreviation MB to state the storage capacity refers to (A) Megabytes (B) Million bits (C) Million bytes (D) Megabits 2115. Data about data is known as (A) Micro Data (B) Database (C) Metadata (D) Databank 2116. The concept of Micro photography was developed by (A) John Gutenberg (B) Chester Cardson

656 D Library and Information Science Specific (C) John Benjimen Dancer (D) Ohi Battle 2117. Which among the following is a digital library software used in the creation of an inhouse digital library (A) LIBSYS (B) Greenstone (C) Alice for Windows (D) Micro CDS / ISIS 2118. SSDC referred to the National Documentation Centre now known as (A) DESIDOC (B) SENDOC (C) NISCOM (D) NASSDOC 2119. Annual Co nve nti on of INFL IBNET organised to discuss the progress of the library automation and library services is known as (A) ISCON (B) NACLIN (C) CALIBER (D) INFONET 2120. Formulation of Research Hypothesis implies (A) Creating a legal basis for research (B) Enunciation of Postulates (C) Enumeration of Canons (D) Formation of tentative generalization 2121. The Study of Epistemology deals with I. Modes of formation of subjects II. Classification of Knowledge III. Cataloguing of composite books IV. Origin, Source and nature of Knowledge In the types of items, there may be more than one answer. Identity the correct combination (A) I and II are correct (B) II and III are correct (C) I, II and III are correct (D) II and IV are correct 2122. The Compact Disk is conceptually referred to as I. Magnetic Storage II. Compact Storage III. Optical Storage IV. All the above In the type of items, there may be more than one answer. Identity the correct combination (A) I, II and III are correct

(B) II and III are correct (C) I and III are correct (D) II and IV are correct 2123. Match the following List - 1 List - 2 (Abbreviations) (Meaning) I. Ibid a. Se e II. Loc. cit. b Previously cited III. Op. cit c. Same reference cited immediately above IV. Vide d. The same place cited Codes : (A) I-a, II-b, III - c, IV-d (B) I-b, II-a, III - d, IV-c (C) I-c, II-d, III - b, IV-a (D) I-d, II-c, III-a, IV-b 2124. Match the following List-1 (Types of users of information) I. Students II. Professionals III. Government Officials IV. Teachers List-2 (Purpose of use of information) a. Decision Making b. To impart Knowledge c. To prepare for the course programme d. To pursue their respective vocation Codes : (A) I-c, II-d, III-a, IV-b (B) I-d, II-a, III - b, IV-c (C) I-c, II-c, III - d, IV-a (D) I-b, II-b, III - c, IV-d 2125. Match the following List-1 (Writing List-2 Materials) (Place of Origin) I. Clay Tablet a. Algeria / Babylonia II. Palm Leaves b. Egypt III. Paper c. Ninveh IV. Papyrus d. China e. India Codes: (A) I-c, II-b, III-a, IV-c (B) I-d, II-e, III-a, IV-c

Multiple Choice Questions D 657 (C) I-c, II-e, III-d, IV-b (D) I-c, II-b, III-a, IV-d 2126. Match the following List-1 (Database) List-2 (Supplier) I. ERIC a. American Chemical Society, USA II. C A Search b. Bowker & Saur London III. Books in Print c. R R Bowker USA IV. LISA d. National Institute of Education, USA Codes : (A) I - d, II - a, III - c, IV - b (B) I - d, II - b, III - a, IV - c (C) I - b, II - c, III - a, IV - d (D) I - a, II - d, III - b, IV - b 2127. Match the following List - 1 List - 2 I. ILRC (Inter a. Science and Library Technology Resource Centre) II. NISSAT b. Indexing Service III. Journal of Librarianship c. UK IV. IMS Atomindex d. Delhi Codes : (A) I-a, II-b, III-b, IV-c (B) I-b, II-c, III-a, IV-d (C) I-d, II-a, III- c, IV-b (D) I-c, II-d, III- d, IV-a 2128. Match the following List - 1 List - 2 I. POPSI a. P M Roget II. Citation b. H P Luhn Indexing III. Key word c. Eugene Garfield Indexing IV. Thesaurus d. G. Bhattacharyya Codes : (A) I - b, II - d, III - a, IV - c (B) I - c, II - d, III - a, IV - b (C) I - d, II - c, III - b, IV - a (D) I - a, II - b, III - d, IV - c 2129. Match the following List - 1 List - 2 I. DDC a. J.D. Brown

II. Expansive Classification III. Subject Classification IV. Bibliographic classification Codes : (A) I - b, II - d, III (B) I - c, II - b, III (C) I - a, II - b, III (D) I - c, II - d, III

-

b.

H.E. Bliss

c.

Melvil Dewey

d.

C.A. Cutter

c, IV a, IV d, IV a, IV

-

a d c b

2130. Match the following List - 1 (Technical Terms) I. Thesaurus II. Windows III. Microprocessors IV. Software List - 2 (Meaning) a. Collection of programmes for the Computer System b. A revolving Disc on which data is stored c. A graphical user interface created as DOS Extension by Microsoft d. A multi user Operating System e. A classified dictionary of synonyms Codes : (A) I-b, II- d, III-c, IV-a (B) I-c, II-e, III-a, IV-d (C) I-e, II-c, III - b, IV-a (D) I-c, II-d, III-a, IV-b 2131. Match the following List - 1 List - 2 I. Browser a. Google II. Operating b. ‘C’ System III. Programming c. Internet Explorer Language IV. Search Engine d. Windows Codes : (A) I-a, II-c, III - b, IV-d (B) I-c, II-b, III - d, IV-a (C) I-c, II-d, III - b, IV-a (D) I-d, II-b, III - c, IV-a 2132. Match the following List - 1 List - 2 I. I NI S a. Ohio II. AGRIS b. Delhi III. OCLC c. Vienna IV. NICNET d. Rome

658 D Library and Information Science Specific Codes : (A) I-c, II-a, III-b, IV-d (B) I-b, II-d, III-c, IV-a (C) I-d, II-c, III-a, IV-b (D) I-c, II- d, III-a, IV- b 2133. Match the following List - 1 List - 2 I. Observation a. Knowledge (Se nses) II. Organization (Logical Relation) b. Data / Ideas III. Learning and c. Wisdom Assimilation IV. Judgement d. Information Correlation (application of content) Codes : (A) I-d, II-a, III - c, IV-b (B) I-c, II-b, III - d, IV-a (C) I-a, II-c, III - b, IV-d (D) I-b, II- d, III-a, IV-c 2134. Match the following List - 1 List - 2 I. Mysticism a. Y7 II. Useful Arts b. Y III. Sociology c. A IV. Anthropology d. M Codes : (A) I-c, II- d, III - b, IV-a (B) I-d, II-b, III - c, IV-a (C) I-b, II-c, III - d, IV-a (D) I-a, II-d, III - c, IV-b 2135. Assertion (A): Library cooperation is the prime need of the day. Reason (R): It is impossible for an individual library to meet all the requirements of its users. (A) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation (B) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation (C) A is true but R is false (D) A is false but R is true 2136. Which one of the following pairs is NOT correctly matched? (A) The difference between the highest and lowest values of a variable_____ Range. (B) The value of a variable which divides the area under the frequency curve

into two equal parts _____ Median. (C) The result when the sum of all the items in the series is divided by the number of items in the series _____ Mean. (D) The value of a variable for which the frequency is maximum _____ Probability. 2137. Assertion (A): Arrangement of documents by subject will satisfy more users. Reason (R): Many users search for documents by title. (A) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation (B) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation (C) A is true but R is false (D) A is false but R is true 2138. Assertion (A): A special library serves a specialist clientele. Reason (R): The collection of special library is relatively narrow in scope (A) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation (B) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation (C) A is true but R is false (D) A is false but R is true 2139. Assertion (A): Copyright Act safeguards the interest of the author. Reason (R): This Act is essential to maximise the circulation of documents. (A) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation (B) Both A and R are true but R is not the correct explanation (C) A is true but R is false (D) A is false but R is true 2140. Identify the correct chronological order in which they were setup (A) NASSDOC, RRRLF, DRTC, INSDOC (B) RRRLF, INSDOC, NASSDOC, DRTC (C) INSDOC, DRTC, NASSDOC, RRRLF (D) DRTC, INSDOC, NASSDOC, RRRLF 2141. Arrange the following units of storage capacity in increasing order of magnitude. Use the code given below : I. Gigabyte II. Kilobyte III. Terabyte IV. Megabyte

Multiple Choice Questions D 659 Code : (A) IV, II, III, I (C) III, IV, I, II

(B) I, III, II, IV (D) II, IV, I, III

2142. Based on the years of establishment arrange the following in chronological order. Use the code given below : I. ASLIB II. ALA III. ILA IV. IFLA Code : (A) III, IV, II, I (B) I, IV, HI, II (C) II, I, IV, III (D) IV, I, III, II 2143. Identify the correct order in which the commissions were set up. Use the code given below : I. Roy Committee on State Universities Review II. Radhakr ishnan Commis sion on Education III. Kothari Commission on Education IV. Mudliar Commission of Secondary Education Code : (A) I, IV, III, II (B) IV, III, I, II (C) III, II, I, IV (D) II, IV, III, I 2144. Arrange the following components in order in which they were used in computers. Use the code given below : I. Transistors II. Vaccum Tubes III. Large Scale Integrated Circuit IV. Very Large Scale Integrated Circuit Code : (A) I, III, II, IV (B) II, I, III, IV (C) II, III, IV, I (D) IV, I, III, II

2147. Library Literature is a (A) Primary source of information (B) Secondary source of information (C) Tertiary source of information (D) Literary source of information 2148. The frequency of Data India is (A) Weekly (B) Fortnightly (C) Monthly (D) Bi-monthly 2149. BERNE CONVENTION is conce rne d with (A) Translations (B) Copyright (C) Pate nts (D) Standards 2150. The Indian State which enacted the library legislation in the year 1948 is (A) Kerala (B) Meghalaya (C) Tamil Nadu (Madras) (D) Rajasthan 2151. The concept of SDI (Selective Dissemination of Information) was enunciated by (A) Derek Austin (B) D.J. Foskett (C) H.P. Luhn (D) B.C. Vickery 2152. Current Awareness Bulletin is (A) Primary Source (B) Annual Report (C) Trend Report (D) Information Product 2153. In 1966, the MARC as a pilot project was launched by (A) OCLC (B) American Library Association (C) Library of Congress (D) The British Library

2145. National Library Week in India is being celebrated annually since (A) 1914 (B) 1933 (C) 1950 (D) 1968

2154. SAARC documentation centre was established in (A) 1975 (B) 1979 (C) 1982 (D) 1994

2146. Maulana Abul Kalam Azad, the then Union Education Minister formally declared one of the following libraries open to the public on 2nd February, 1953 (A) Connemara Public Library (B) Delhi Public Library (C) National Library, Calcutta (D) Saraswathi Mahal Library, Tanjore

2155. Ranganathan’s canons of classification as grouped into three planes of work are (A) Idea, Verbal and Number (B) Idea, Verbal and Notational (C) Natural, Artificial and Computer (D) Number, Common Isolate and Connecting Symbol 2156. The first block in ISBN is a (A) Geographic Identifier

660 D Library and Information Science Specific (B) Title Identifier (C) Publisher Identifier (D) Author Identifier 2157. Theory X and Theory Y were formulated by (A) Douglas Murray McGregor (B) Peter Drucker (C) Abraham Maslow (D) F W Taylor 2158. The method for reducing the physical size of a block of information is called (A) Information Reduction (B) Data Compression (C) Data Retrieval (D) Information Size 2159. Which one of the following is a volatile memory? (A) RAM (B) CD-ROM (C) Hard Disk (D) Floppy Disk 2160. LYCOS is a (A) search engine (B) programming language (C) database (D) database vendor 2161. The ability to travel between electronic documents using any number of alternative paths to find relevant information is known as (A) Linking (B) Browsing (C) Searching (D) Navigating 2162. A questionnaire designed with openended questions is known as (A) Unstructured (B) Flexible (C) Closed (D) Structured 2163. Non-Sampling Errors (NSE) are referred to as the errors of (A) Probability (B) Quantification (C) Ratio (D) Measurement 2164. Delhi Public Library was established in (A) 1950 (B) 1951 (C) 1952 (D) 1953 2165. Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) cover: 1. Pate nts 2. Copyright 3. Computer Programmes 4. Censorship

(A) (B) (C) (D)

1 1 2 3

and and and and

2 3 3 4

are are are are

correct correct correct correct

2166. The libraries identified by INFLIBNET to act as Document Delivery Centres are : 1. University of Hyderabad Library 2. Lucknow University Library 3. Gauhati University Library 4. Punjab University Library, Chandigarh (A) 1 and 2 are correct (B) 1 and 3 are correct (C) 1 and 4 are correct (D) 2 and 4 are correct 2167. Which of the following are trade bibliographies? 1. Books-in-Print 2. Indian National Bibliography 3. Indian Books-in-Print 4. British National Bibliography (A) 1 and 2 are correct (B) 2 and 3 are correct (C) 1 and 3 are correct (D) 2 and 4 are correct 2168. Which of the following are maintained to provide Selective Dissemination of Information (SDI) service? 1. Author Profile 2. Library Profile 3. Document Profile 4. User Profile (A) 1 and 2 are correct (B) 2 and 3 are correct (C) 3 and 4 are correct (D) 1 and 4 are correct 2169. Which of the following are modes of formation of subjects? 1. Classification 2. Agglomeration 3. Denudation 4. Division (A) 1 and 2 are correct (B) 1 and 3 are correct (C) 2 and 3 are correct (D) 2 and 4 are correct 2170. The components in delegation of authority are :

Multiple Choice Questions D 661 1. 2. 3. 4. (A) (B) (C) (D)

Authority Leadership Responsibility Accountability 1, 2 and 3 are correct 2, 3 and 4 are correct 1, 3 and 4 are correct 1, 2 and 4 are correct

2171. The following are used as transmission media for voice/data communication : 1. Copper wire 2. Plastic wire 3. Optic wire 4. Co-axial cables (A) 1, 2 and 3 are correct (B) 2, 3 and 4 are correct (C) 1, 3 and 4 are correct (D) 1, 2 and 4 are correct 2172. Which of the following are web browsers? 1. Yahoo 2. Google 3. Netscape 4. Internet Explorer (A) 1 and 2 are correct (B) 2 and 3 are correct (C) 1 and 4 are correct (D) 3 and 4 are correct 2173. The stages in research process are : 1. Theory 2. Axiom 3. Law 4. Hypothesis (A) 1, 2, 3 and 4 are correct (B) 4, 1, 3 and 2 are correct (C) 2, 3, 4 and 1 are correct (D) 3, 1, 4 and 2 are correct 2174. A library which is considered as the National Library of the United States is 1. Library of Congress 2. Smithsonian Library 3. Located at New York 4. Located at Washington, DC (A) 1 and 2 are correct (B) 2 and 3 are correct (C) 1 and 3 are correct (D) 1 and 4 are correct 2175. The theories relating to motivation are: 1. Feyol theory 2. Maslow theory 3. Drucker theory 4. McGregor Theory X and Theory Y

(A) (B) (C) (D)

1, 2 and 3 are correct 1, 3 and 4 are correct 2 and 4 are correct 2, 3 and 4 are correct

2176. Which of the following are library networks? 1. INTERNET 2. DELNET 3. NICNET 4. OCLC (A) 1 and 2 are correct (B) 2 and 4 are correct (C) 1 and 3 are correct (D) 1 and 4 are correct 2177. The national level associations for special libraries are : 1. Association for Information Management (ASLIB) 2. Society for Information Scie nce (SIS) 3. Chartered Institute of Library and Information Professionals (CILIP) 4. Indian Association of Special Librarie s and I nfo rmatio n Ce nte rs (IASLIC) (A) 1 and 3 are correct (B) 2 and 3 are correct (C) 1 and 4 are correct (D) 3 and 4 are correct 2178. The following are used as tools for vocabulary control in indexing 1. Dictionary 2. Thesaurus 3. List of Subject Headings 4. ISBD (A) 1 and 2 are correct (B) 1 and 3 are correct (C) 2 and 3 are correct (D) 2 and 4 are correct 2179. The following States in India do not have library legislation : 1. Bihar 2. Manipur 3. Meghalaya 4. Maharashtra (A) 1 and 2 are correct (B) 2 and 3 are correct (C) 1 and 3 are correct (D) 2 and 4 are correct 2180. List - I List - II (Forms of (Medium/Type/ communication) Theory) (a) Communication 1. Radio Barrier

662 D Library and Information Science Specific (b) Communication 2. Shannon Medium and Weaver (c) Communication Model 3. Formal (d) Communication 4. Noise Channel Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) 1 2 3 4 (B) 4 1 2 3 (C) 2 3 4 1 (D) 3 2 1 4 2181. List - I List - II (Library Act) (Year of Enactment) (a) Andhra Pradesh 1. 1964 Public Libraries Act (b) Maharashtra 2. 1967 Public Libraries Act (c) West Bengal Libraries Act 3. 1960 (d) Karnataka 4. 1979 Public Libraries Act Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) 3 2 3 1 (B) 2 3 4 1 (C) 3 2 4 1 (D) 1 2 3 4 2182. List - I (Reference Books) (a) Universities Handbook (b) National Union Catalogue of Scientific Serials in India (NUCSSI) (c) Library and Information Science Abstracts (LISA) (d) Cumulative Book Index (CBI) List - II (Publisher) 1. Indian National Scientific Documentation Centre (INSDOC) 2. Bowker - Saur 3. H.W. Wilson 4. Association of Indian Universities Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) 4 3 2 1 (B) 1 2 3 4 (C) 2 3 4 1 (D) 4 1 2 3 2183. List - I List - II (Types of Indexing) (Author) (a) Chain Indexing 1. Derek Austin

(b) Uniterm Indexing (c) PRECIS (d) Citation Indexing Code : (a) (b) (A) 3 4 (B) 3 1 (C) 1 2 (D) 2 3

2. Eugene Garfield 3. S R Ranganathan 4. Mortimer Taube (c) 1 2 3 4

2184. List - I (Modes of Subject Formation) (a) Fusion 1. (b) Distillation 2. (c) Loose Assemblage (d) Lamination Code : (a) (b) (A) 3 4 (B) 4 1 (C) 3 4 (D) 2 3

3. 4. (c) 2 2 1 4

(d) 2 4 4 1 List - II (Subject) Management Mat hemat ics for Engineers Library classification Bio-physics (d) 1 3 2 1

2185. List - I List - II (Publishers) (Publications) (a) Library Trends 1. NISSAT (b) Information 2. Institute for Today and Scientific Tomorrow Information (ISI) (c) Science Citation 3. University Index Microfilm International (UMI) (d) Dissertations 4. University of Abstracts Illinois International Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) 4 1 2 3 (B) 1 2 3 4 (C) 2 3 4 1 (D) 3 4 1 2 2186. List - I (Items) (a) Vacuum Tube

List - II (Usage) 1. Op tic al Sto rage Device

Multiple Choice Questions D 663 (b) Floppy Disk

2.

(c) CD-ROM

3.

(d) Transistors

4.

Code : (a) (A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 3 (D) 1

(b) 4 1 2 2

(c) 1 2 4 3

Used in First Generation Computers Used in Second Generation Computers Magnetic Storage Device (d) 3 3 1 4

2187. List - I (Networks/ Institutions) (a) OCLC 1. (b) JANET 2. (c) ERNET 3. (d) International 4. Development Research Center Code: (a) (b) (c) (A) 4 3 2 (B) 1 2 3 (C) 3 1 4 (D) 2 1 3

List - II (Location) UK Canada USA India

(d) 1 4 2 4

2188. List - I List - II (Reference Book (Name of the Category) Reference Book) (a) Directory 1. Information Please Almanac (b) Annual 2. Keesing’s Record of World Events (c) Bibliography 3. Encyclopaedia of Associations (d) News Digest 4. Publisher’s Weekly Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) 3 1 4 2 (B) 1 3 4 2 (C) 3 2 4 1 (D) 4 1 2 3 2189. List - I (Reference Books) (a) World of Learning

List - II (Arrangement) 1. Alphabetical

(b) Sears List of 2. Classified Subject Headings (c) Roget’s 3. Geographical International Thesaurus (d) Indian National 4. Topical Bibliography Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) 3 1 4 2 (B) 4 1 2 3 (C) 1 2 3 4 (D) 2 3 4 1 2190. Which among the following is considered as an informal channel of Information Communication? (A) Journals (B) Textbooks (C) Invisible Colleges (D) Technical Reports 2191. Which one of the following is not correctly matched? (A) Books in Print Trade Bibliography (B) Cummulative Books published Book Index in English language (C) British Books R.R. Bowker in Print (D) National INB Bibliography 2192. URL stands for (A) Uniform Resource Locator (B) Universal Resource Locator (C) Unified Resource Locator (D) Uniform Reference Locator 2193. Zero Based Budgeting system was propounded by (A) Peter Drucker (B) Edward Evans (C) Allen Kent (D) Peter Phyrr 2194. A series of interconnected documents stored on the Internet is called (A) We bsites (B) Domain Name (C) Home Page (D) Web Page

664 D Library and Information Science Specific 2195. The first All India Conference of Librarians in 1918 was held at (A) Baroda (B) Calcutta (C) Madras (D) Lahore 2196. If two citations are cited together, it is known as (A) Double citation (B) Twin citation (C) Co-citation (D) Controlled citation 2197. Grey Literature means (A) The literature published by a publisher named as “Grey Publisher” (B) The literature which is not published and is not available through normal book selling channels (C) The literature published and made available in Grey shades (D) The literature which is published and made available through special publishers 2198. The smallest unit of data in a database is (A) Record (B) File (C) Field (D) Table 2199. The term ‘Bandwidth’ refers to (A) The amount of data that can be sent through communication media (B) The amount of data in a multimedia file (C) The speed of transmission of data (D) Number of bands available in a computer 2200. Which of the following factors is not considered in the making of a library budget? (A) The size of the organization (B) The type of users (C) The collection (D) The age of library employees 2201. Which of the following significant development had a profound impact on Library Automation? (1) Invention of Microchip of INTEL (2) Union catalogue of NISCAIR (3) MARC developed by Library of Congress (4) BLAISE of British Library Code: (A) Only 1 (B) Only 1 and 4

(C) Only 2 (D) all of the above 2202. Which statement is/are true regarding position of Library Acts in India? (1) It is in process (2) It is ready to pass (3) There is no possibility in near future (4) Satisfactory improving. Code: (A) All the four (B) Only 3 (C) Only 1 and 3 (D) Only 4 2203. Procedure involved in creating a compute-rised catalogue is/are (1) Acquisition of suitable hardware & software; Preparation of worksheets. (2) Ge ne r ating m achine re adab le records. (3) Added entries or indexes including references (4) Printing of the catalogue. The correct order is (A) 2, 3, 1, 4 (B) 1, 2, 3, 4 (C) 3, 2, 1, 4 (D) 3, 1, 2, 4 2204. Which statement/s is true regarding selective Disse mination of Information? (1) Existing user profile is matched with incoming document profile (2) Exis ting do cume nt p rofile s are matched with interest profile. (3) Prope r fee d back me chanism is operationalise. Code: (A) Only 1 (B) Only 2 (C) Only 3 (D) Only 1, 2 and 3 2205. Arrange the following in chronological sequence I. Digital Millennium Copyright Act II. Right to Information Act (India) III. Information Technology Act (India) IV. Indian Copyright Act Code: (A) (IV) (I) (III) (II) (B) (IV) (II) (III) (I) (C) (I) (IV) (II) (III) (D) (II) (III) (I) (IV)

Multiple Choice Questions D 665 2206. Match the List-I with List-II List-I List-II (a) Library Week of India (i) 1931 (b) RRRLF (Foundation (ii) 1972 year) (c) Publication of Five (iii) 14-20 Laws of Library November Science (d) Headquarters of (iv) New Delhi NASSDOC (v) Bangaluru Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (B) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (C) (v) (iv) (iii) (i) (D) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) 2207. Which is/are of the following statement/s true? (1) Lancester proposed the concept of Paper society (2) The or y X and Y was giv e n by Douglus McGeorger. (3) Sayers categorised the documents in four types (4) Concept of Scientific Management was introduced by Fayol. Codes: (A) Only 1, 2 and 4 (B) Only 4 (C) Only 1 and 4 (D) Only 2 2208. Match the List-I with List-II List-I List-II (a) Xerographic (i) List of Users process (b) User profile (ii) I NI S (c) Study Abroad (iii) Electrostatic process (d) Atom index (iv) Handbook (v) Statement on user interest Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (v) (iv) (ii) (B) (v) (iii) (iv) (ii) (C) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (D) (v) (iii) (i) (iv)

2209. Match the following List-I List-II (a) R.K. Commission (i) 1952-53 (b) Mudaliar Commission (ii) 1992 (c) Kothari Commission (iii) 1964 (d) Karnataka State (iv) 1979 University Review Committee (v) 1948 Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (v) (i) (iii) (iv) (B) (i) (v) (iii) (iv) (C) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (D) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) 2210. Match the following List-I List-II (Association) (Headquarters) (a) INFLIBNET (i) Chicago (b) RRRLF (ii) Ahmedabad (c) ALA (iii) Kolkata Codes : (a) (b) (c) (a) (b) (c) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (B) (iii) (i) (ii) (C) (ii) (iii) (i) (D) (iii) (ii) (i) 2211. Match the following List-I List-II (Networks) (Managing Authority) (a) ERNET (i) University Grants Commission (b) INFLIBNET (ii) Ministry of Railway (c) RAILNET (iii) Department of Telecommunications (iv) Railways Manufacturing division Codes : (a) (b) (c) (a) (b) (c) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (B) (ii) (iii) (ii) (C) (ii) (i) (iii) (D) (iii) (i) (ii) 2212. Match the following (State) (Establishment of Public Library Act) (a) Tamil Nadu (i) 1967 (b) Andhra Pradesh (ii) 1965 (c) Karnataka (iii) 1948 (d) Maharashtra (iv) 1960

666 D Library and Information Science Specific Codes : (a) (A) (iii) (B) (i) (C) (ii) (D) (iii)

(b) (iv) (ii) (i) (iv)

(c) (ii) (iii) (iii) (i)

(d) (i) (iv) (iv) (ii)

2213. Assertion (A): ISBDs were devised by UNESCO. Reason (R): They are the standards for all types of bibliographic activities. (A) (A) is false but (R) is true. (B) (A) is true but (R) is false. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 2214. Assertion (A): Web OPAC is a computerised library catalogue available to the patrons online. Reason (R): It can be searched by the users within the four walls of the library only. (A) (A) is true but (R) is false. (B) (A) is false but (R) is true. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 2215. Assertion (A): Electronic access to information is becoming easy day by day. Reason (R): The printed materials pouring out of the world presses do not show any decline. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not a correct explanation of (A). (B) (A) is true but (R) is false. (C) (A) is false but (R) is true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 2216. Assertion (A): Libraries are changing in the wake of emerging ICT environment. Reason (R): Libraries are adopting new competencies to operate services in the environment of information super highways. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) (A) is true but (R) is false. (C) (A) is false but (R) is true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 2217. Assertion (A): In fifth law, the word used in ‘organism’ not ‘organisation’.

Reason (R): Libraries grow in collection size, human resources, physical facilities and services from time to time. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A). (B) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A) (C) (A) is true but (R) is false. (D) (A) is false but (R) is true. 2218. Assertion (A): Provision of services outside the library regular service centre or outlet is essential to reach more and more patrons. Reason (R): Library extension services help libraries to cover larger population of patrons. (A) (A) is true but (R) is false. (B) (A) is false but (R) is true. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 2219. Arrange the following softwares according to their development : I. E-Print II. D-space III. Greenstone IV. Koha (A) (IV) (III) (II) (I) (B) (III) (II) (I) (IV) (C) (I) (II) (III) (IV) (D) (II) (III) (IV) (I) 2220. Arrange the following chronologically according to their year of Birth : I. S.R. Ranganathan II. Melvil Dewey III. C.A. Cutter IV. B.S. Kesvan (A) (II) (I) (IV) (III) (B) (I) (III) (IV) (II) (C) (III) (II) (I) (IV) (D) (IV) (I) (II) (III) 2221. Arrange the following chronologically according to their development : I. Punched Card II. Floppy Disc III. Magnetic Disc IV. Optical Disc (A) (II) (III) (I) (IV) (B) (I) (III) (II) (IV) (C) (I) (II) (III) (IV) (D) (IV) (I) (II) (III)

Multiple Choice Questions D 667 2222. Arrange the following according to their development : I. CCC II. ISBD III. CCF IV. MARC II (A) (I) (IV) (II) (III) (B) (I) (II) (IV) (III) (C) (I) (IV) (III) (II) (D) (IV) (II) (III) (I) 2223. The Spiral of scientific method involves the following steps in correct sequence: I. Zenith II. Ascendant III. Nadir IV. Descendant (A) (I) (III) (II) (IV) (B) (II) (III) (I) (IV) (C) (III) (II) (I) (IV) (D) (I) (IV) (III) (II) 2224. Match the following List-I List-II (a) AACR-1 (i) 1978 (b) AACR-2 (ii) 1967 (c) ALA code (iii) 1934 (d) CCC (iv) 1949 Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) (B) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (C) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (D) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) 2225. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Books in print (i) Bibliography of periodicals (b) Ulrich Intern- (ii) Trade Bibliography ational Periodical Directory (c) World of (iii) Biographical Learning source (d) Who’s Who (iv) Directory in India Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (B) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (C) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (D) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii)

2226. Which statement/s is/are correct? (1) Information is regarded as a commodity. (2) It is like an inexhaustible and renewable source of energy. Code : (A) Only 1 (B) Only 2 (C) Both 1 & 2 (D) None of the above 2227. Which of the following services is designated to identify the most suitable documents to a specific user? (i) Document Delivery Service (ii) Selective Dissemination of Information (iii) Internet Link Service Code : (A) Only (i) (B) Only (ii) (C) (i) and (ii) both (D) None of the above 2228. According to de finition of UNESCO document, __________ is made up of symbolic elements, communicating scientific and technical knowledge irrespective of their nature (numerical, textual, graphic etc.), material carrier and form of presentation. (A) information (B) data (C) intelligence (D) books 2229. What is the philosophy behind the concept of resource sharing in libraries? (i) “Access” to information resources available in the libraries. (ii) “Equivalence” which means libraries should not only rece ive but should also give. Code : (A) Only (i) (B) Only (ii) (C) (i) and (ii) both (D) None of the above 2230. Which is not a objective of INFLIBNET? (i) to establish gateways for on-line accessing of information. (ii) to optimise information resource utilisation through resource sharing. (iii) to evolve national network of librarie s.

668 D Library and Information Science Specific (iv) reference, legal and maintenance services. (A) (i) and (ii) only (B) (i) and (iii) only (C) (i) and (iv) only (D) (iv) only 2231. The Library Legislation should take care of the following point– (i) Accessibility of information to all sections of the people and provision of finances and the modus operandi for expenditure. (ii) Arrangement of a reporting system of the activities of various public libraries. (iii) An establishment of institutional network to provide care & preserverdocuments. Code : (A) Only (i) (B) Only (ii) and (iii) (C) Only (i) and (iii) (D) All of the above 2232. The important feature/s of Karnataka Public Libraries Act, 1965 is/are (i) Constitution of Local Library Authorities for the cities & districts. (ii) Provision for creating an independent Department of Public Libraries, with a professional as its head. (iii) Provision for Copyright Collection of state. Code : (A) Only (i) and (ii) (B) Only (ii) and (iii) (C) Only (i) and (ii) (D) All of the above 2233. The helpful factor/s of Library Cess is/ are (i) Library Cess makes it imperative on the government to actively consider the e stablishme nt and mainte nance of libraries. (ii) The provision for library cess has a greater impact as a democratic right of citizens to contribute to the development as well as to get access to library facilities. (iii) It gives provision for financial management.

Code : (A) Only (i) (B) Only (ii) (C) (i) and (ii) both (D) None of the above 2234. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Study of acquisition, (i) Intellectual handling & commuproperty nication of information (b) Author’s right to (ii) Documenclaim ownership tation of a created work. (c) Information stores (iii) Database on computer files, & accessible via a remote terminal & telecommunication link. Codes : (a) (b) (c) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (B) (ii) (i) (iii) (C) (iii) (i) (ii) (D) (ii) (iii) (i) 2235. Match the following List-I List-II (a) A packaged carrier of (i) Book information & knowledge (b) A recorded message, (ii) Information irrespective of physical form or content (c) Organised informa- (iii) Knowledge tion irrespective of physical form. (iv) User Codes : (a) (b) (c) (a) (b) (c) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (B) (iv) (iii) (i) (C) (i) (ii) (iv) (D) (ii) (iii) (i) 2236. Which statement(s) is/are NOT true for encyclopaedia? (i) These are looked for concise literature (ii) They attempt to provide essential historical background to the topic of inquiry (iii) The generally present information in an impartial manner, giving all the view point on the subjects.

Multiple Choice Questions D 669 Code : (A) Only (i) and (ii) are not correct. (B) Only (i) and (iii) are not correct (C) only (ii) and (iii) are not correct (D) All are not true 2237. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Family health (i) Establishing Handbooks knowledge (b) Handbooks (ii) Baking book (c) Cooking (iii) Where there is recipes no doctor Handbooks (d) Official (iv) Knit to fit Handbooks (v) Staff car rules. Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (i) (ii) (v) (B) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (C) (v) (i) (ii) (iii) (D) (i) (iii) (ii) (v) 2238. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Arrangement (i) Accuracy, Reliability (b) Authority (ii) Clear & Legible type faces (c) Index (iii) Alphabetical or Classified (d) Typography (iv) ‘see’ & ‘see also’ references Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) (B) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (C) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (D) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) 2239. Kessing’s Record of World Events is a News Digest consisting of (i) news summary providing records of national & international current affairs with updates. (ii) factual, objective reference source based on press, broadcasts, official & other sources (iii) main texts which contains coherent & systemic coverage of a par-

ticular country or topic tracing recent developments. Code : (A) Only (i) and (ii) (B) Only (ii) and (iii) (C) All of the above (D) None of the above 2240. The connecting symbol for the time element in U.D.C. is (A) dot (.) (B) semi colon (;) (C) plus (+) (D) double inverted comma (” ”) 2241. Which statement is TRUE regarding telecommunication? (i) In transmission media of telecommunication, the greater the bandwidth, the greater the rate at which data can be transmitted. (ii) Commonly used performance measurement of a telecommunications link is its band width. (iii) The transmission media used in telecommunications networks very both physically & in their carrying capacity. (A) Only (i) and (ii) (B) Only (i) and (iii) (C) Only (ii) and (iii) (D) All of the above 2242. The switching system technology used in value-added network like Telenet, which provide libraries with connections to many database search services is (i) Packet switching (ii) Message switching (iii) Circuit switching Code : (A) Only (i) and (ii) (B) Only (ii) and (iii) (C) only (iii) (D) None of the above 2243. The advantage/s of packet switching over circuit & message switching is/are (i) transmission economies & shared utilisation (ii) high quality & error reduced service (iii) speed changing & procedures conversions

670 D Library and Information Science Specific Code : (A) Only (i) and (ii) (B) Only (ii) and (iii) (C) Only (i) and (ii) (D) All of the above 2244. Which multiplexing technique is used to split a channel into several discrete narrower ones for simultaneous but separated transmission? (A) Frequency Division Multiplexing (B) Time Division Multiplexing (C) Interval Telecom Multiplexing (D) None of the above 2245. The advantage/s of Hypertext as compared to computer system is/are (i) a single framework to handle free text, semantic nets & data (ii) data structures have user-oriented semantics (iii) it does not require programming skills. Code : (A) (i) and (ii) (B) (ii) and (iii) (C) (i) and (iii) (D) None of these 2246. Which is not a function of school library? (A) ge ne rating c uriosit y & inte re st among students & teachers about the material available in library (B) to generate confidence interest in libraries for getting information (C) lending & keeping track of books and other documents to the needs & interests of teachers & students. (D) to serve as a central & comprehensive collection of national output, acquired through legal deposits, gifts or exchange. 2247. Which is a true statement regarding College library finance & budget? (A) No country in the world is able to provide 100% subsidy to higher education (B) No College can afford to provide all books needed by students pursuing higher level courses (C) Raj Commission recommended 20% of the college budget for the maintenance & development of library (D) All of the above

2248. Which organisation/s is/are promoting user education in India? (A) INSDOC, Ne w D e lhi & DRTC, Banglore (B) BIS, New Delhi & DRTC, Banglore (C) INSDOC, New Delhi & BIS (D) IARI, New Delhi & BIS 2249. Match the following : List – I List – II (Hypothesis) (Characteristics) a. Null i. Statement of expectations b. Working ii. Relational (Directional) propositions c. Explanatory iii. No re lation be tween variables d. Descriptive iv. Existence of variables Codes : a b c d (A) i iv ii iii (B) iii iv ii i (C) iii ii i iv (D) iii i ii iv 2250. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Formatted (i) the shape, size & general make-up (b) Methodology (ii) the science of method (c) Tentative (iii) the nature of an experiment, trial or attempt made or done provisionally. Codes : (a) (b) (c) (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (B) (ii) (iii) (i) (C) (i) (ii) (iii) (D) (ii) (i) (iii) 2251. OCLC is (i) Online Computer Library Centre (ii) At Dublin (Ohio) (iii) At New York (iv) Ohio College Library Centre (A) (i) and (ii) are correct (B) (i) and (iii) are correct (C) (iii) and (iv) are correct (D) (ii) and (iv) are correct

Multiple Choice Questions D 671 2252. Pre-coordinate indexing system is followed in (i) Chain Indexing (ii) POPSI (iii) UNITERM (iv) PRECIS (A) (i) and (iv) are correct (B) (i) (ii) and (iii) are correct (C) (i) (ii) and (iv) are correct (D) (ii) and (iv) are correct 2253. ADONIS is a (i) Bibliographic database only (ii) Numerical database only (iii) Full text database (iv) None of the above (A) (i) and (ii) are correct (B) (ii) and (iii) are correct (C) (iii) is correct (D) (iv) is correct 2254. Hypothesis is a (i) Solution to the problems (ii) Statements of assumption (iii) Statement to be tested (iv) Fact (A) (i) and (iii) are correct (B) (ii) and (iii) are correct (C) (i) and (ii) are correct (D) (i) and (iv) are correct 2255. The first library science school in the world was started (i) By Melvil Dewey (ii) At Columbia University, New York (USA) (iii) By W.C. Berwick Sayers (iv) At London University, London (UK) (A) (i) and (ii) are correct (B) (i) and (iv) are correct (C) (ii) and (iii) are correct (D) (iii) and (iv) are correct 2256. Primary sources include: (i) Thesis (ii) Patent (iii) Abstracting Periodical (iv) Periodical article (A) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct (B) (i), (iii) and (iv) are correct (C) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct (D) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are correct

2257. Shannon and Weaver are associated with: (i) Mathematical theory of communication (ii) Models of communication (iii) Theories of Management (iv) Library software packages (A) (i) and (ii) are correct (B) (i) and (iii) are correct (C) (ii) and (iii) are correct (D) (ii) and (iv) are correct 2258. The decision to make or not to make an entry under a subject term is governed by the (A) Canon of Ascertainability (B) Canon of Prepotence (C) Canon of Sought Heading (D) Canon of Context 2259. ‘Span of control’ refers to (A) The numbers of subordinates to be supervised (B) Exercise strict control staff (C) Duration over which the control is to be exercised (D) The area which is to be controlled 2260. Assertion (A): Classification as a tool for organisation of knowledge will continue to persist. Reason (R): In the age of e-documents classification is redundant. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) (A) is correct and (R) is false (C) (R) is correct (A) is false (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 2261. Assertion (A): Collection development should be judiciously done. Reason (R): Almost all libraries have limited resources Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation (B) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the right explanation (C) (A) is true, but (R) is false (D) (A) is false, but (R) is true 2262. Assertion (A): No single library connect all the demands of the users Reason (R): Resource sharing is the need of the day

672 D Library and Information Science Specific Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are false (B) Both (A) and (R) are correct (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true (D) (R) is false, but (A) is true 2263. Assertion (A): Library catalogues meet most of the approaches of the users. Reason (R): Catalogues include all the details of the document Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) (A) is true but (R) are false (C) Both are partially true (D) (R) is true, and (A) is false 2264. Assertion (A): Information can be obtained from several sources other than the libraries. Reason (R): Library science is narrower in scope than information science Codes : (A) (A) is false and (R) are true (B) (R) is false and (A) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are false (D) Both (A) and (R) are true 2265. The catalogue codes were developed in the order as (A) Anglo American Code (Joint Code), Rules for Dictionary catalogue, ALA rules for author and title entries, AACRI (B) Rules for Dictionary catalogue, ALA Rules for author and title entries, AACRI, Anglo American Code (Joint Code) (C) Rule s for dictio nary catal ogue , Anglo American Code (Joint Code) ALA rules for author and title entries, AACRI (D) ALA rules for author and title entries, AACRI, Rules for Dictionary catalogue, Anglo American Code 2266. Which is the correct sequence of the following in the chronological order of publication (A) 14 th edition of D.D.C., 1st edition of C.C., Rider’s International Classification, Broad System of Ordering. (B) 1st edition of C.C., 14th edition of D.D.C., Broad System of Ordering, Rider’s International Classification

(C) Rider’s International classification, 1st edition of C.C., Broad System of Ordering, 14th edition of D.D.C. (D) 1st edition of C.C., Rider’s International Classification, 14th edition of D.D.C, Broad System of Ordering 2267. Identify the development in following Library Software in correct chronological sequence (A) Sanjaya, Libsys, SLIM, SOUL (B) SLIM, Libsys, SOUL, Sanjaya (C) Libsys, Sanjaya, SOUL, SLIM (D) Sanjaya, SOUL, SLIM, Libsys 2268. Select the right chronological sequence of information systems, as per their year of establishment (A) IMS, AGRIS, NISSAT, Patent Information System (India) (B) AGRIS, NISSAT, IMS, Patent Information System (India) (C) Patent Information System (India), IMS, AGRIS, NISSAT (D) NISSAT, AGRIS, IMS, Patent Information System (India) 2269. Select the right sequence of the following devices according to their storage capacity in descending order (A) CD, DVD, Floppy Disc, Punched Card (B) Floppy Disc, Punched Card, CD, DVD (C) Punched Card, Floppy Disc, CD, DVD (D) DVD, CD, Floppy Disc, Punched Card 2270. Select the right sequence of contribution of classificationists in the chronological order (A) Francis Bacon, W.T. Harris, Melvil Dewey, J.D. Brown (B) W.T. Harris, Francis Bacon, Melvil Dewey, J.D. Brown (C) Francis Bacon, Melvil Dewey, J.D. Brown, W.T. Harris (D) Francis Bacon, J.D. Brown, W.T. Harris, Melvil Dewey 2271. Arrange the contributors in management in the proper chronological order: (i) Peter Drucker (ii) Henry Gantt

Multiple Choice Questions D 673 (iii) Ishikawa (iv) Juran Code: (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (A) Peter Drucker, Henry Gantt, Juran, Ishikawa (B) Henry Gantt, Peter Drucker, Juran, Ishikawa (C) Henry Gantt, Juran, Ishikawa, Peter Drucker, (D) Ishikawa, Henry Gantt, Juran, Peter Drucker 2272. Arrange the following in the chronological sequence (i) CCF (ii) Metadata (iii) ISBD (iv) MARC Code: (A) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (B) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (C) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (D) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) 2273. Match the following (a) Zipf’s Law (i) Impact factor (b) Lotka’s Law (ii) Circulation Statistics (c) Bradford’s Law (iii) Au thor Pr oductivity (d) Eugene Garfield (iv) Word frequency (v) Scattering Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (iv) (v) (i) (B) (v) (i) (iv) (ii) (C) (iv) (iii) (v) (i) (D) (iii) (iv) (v) (ii) 2274. Match the following List- I List- II (a) SOUL (i) DESIDOC (b) WINI SIS (ii) ALGORITHM (c) SANJAY (iii) Informatics (India) (d) SLIM (iv) INFLIBNET (v) UNESCO Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (i) (v) (ii) (B) (iv) (v) (i) (ii) (C) (ii) (iii) (i) (v) (D) (ii) (iii) (ii) (i)

2275. Match the following List- I (a) Kothari Commission (b) Radhakrishnan Commission (c) Mehrotra Commission (d) Fyzee Commission List- II (i) Status and Pay scales of librarians (ii) Public Library System (iii) Library Budget as a percentage of organisation budget (iv) Importance of library in Academic Institutions (v) Special libraries Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (i) (v) (ii) (B) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (C) (ii) (iii) (i) (v) (D) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) 2276. Match the following List- I List- II (a) Translation (i) BLDSC Service (b) Information (ii) DELNET Repackaging Service (c) Document (iii) ITC Delivery Service (d) Library (iv) Information Networking Analysis Centre (IAC) (v) DRTC Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (B) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (C) (v) (iv) (ii) (i) (D) (iii) (v) (iv) (ii) 2277. Match the following List-I List- II (a) Z39.50 (i) Standard for Document Description (b) ISO 9000 (ii) Standard for Library Building (c) ISO 2709 (iii) Information Retrieval (d) ISBD(G) (iv) Quality Related Standards (v) Bibliographic Record Structure

674 D Library and Information Science Specific Code : (a) (A) (iii) (B) (iv) (C) (v) (D) (iv)

(b) (iv) (v) (iv) (iii)

(c) (v) (ii) (ii) (v)

(d) (i) (iii) (i) (ii)

2278. Match the following List-I List- II (a) Classarus (i) Jean Aitchison (b) Relative Index (ii) J. L. Ferradane (c) Thesauro facet (iii) S. R. Ranganathan (d) Relational (iv) G. Bhattacharya Indexing (v) Melville Dewey Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (i) (ii) (v) (B) (iv) (v) (i) (ii) (C) (ii) (v) (i) (iii) (D) (iii) (ii) (i) (v) 2279. Match the following List-I List- II (a) CCF (i) OCLC (b) UNIMARC (ii) American Library Association (c) DUBLIN COKE (iii) Library of Congress (d) USMARC (iv) Unesco (v) IFLA Code: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (v) (iv) (i) (iii) (B) (iv) (v) (i) (iii) (C) (iii) (v) (iv) (ii) (D) (ii) (iv) (v) (i) 2280. Match the following List- I List- II (a) Management (i) Fission Service (b) Biophysics (ii) Distillation (c) Gandhiana (iii) Agglomeration (d) Life Sciences (iv) Clustering (v) Fusion Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (v) (iv) (iii) (B) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (C) (iv) (v) (ii) (i) (D) (iii) (v) (i) (ii)

2281. Match the following List- I List- II (Library Act) (Year of Enactment) (a) Madras Public (i) 1.1965 Libraries Act (b) West Bengal Public (ii) 2.1960 Libraries Act (c) Andhra Pradesh Public Libraries Act (iii) 3. 1948 (d) Karnataka Public Libraries Act (iv) 4. 1979 Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (B) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (C) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (D) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) 2282. Match the following List- I (Publication) (a) AGRINDEX (b) ATOMINDEX

(c) Physics Abstracts (d) INDEX MEDICUS Code : (a) (b) (c) (A) (iv) (i) (iii) (B) (i) (iii) (iv) (C) (iii) (iv) (i) (D) (i) (ii) (iii)

List-II (Institution/ System) (i) INSPEC (ii) National Library of Medicine (iii) AGRIS (iv) IMS (d) (ii) (ii) (ii) (iv)

2283. Match the following List- I List- II (Contribution) (Organisation) (a) Public Library (i) DRTC Manifesto (b) POPSI (ii) Library of Congress (c) UDC (iii) UNESCO (d) MARC (iv) FID Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (C) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (D) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i)

Multiple Choice Questions D 675 2284. Match the following List- I (Medium/ List- II Connectivity) (Type) (a) Fax (i) Optical Storage (b) CD-ROM (ii) Magnetic Storage (c) Floppy Disk (iii) Sw itc hing Sy stem (d) Circuit (iv) Image transmission Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (B) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (C) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (D) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) 2285. Fundamental facts of research are available in (A) Primary sources (B) Secondary sources (C) Tertiary sources (D) None of the above 2286. POSDCORB coined by (A) Fayol (B) Maslow (C) Gulic (D) Ranganathan 2287. OCLC Project, MARC Project are the examples of (A) Co-operative storage of materials (B) Co-operative Acquisition of materials (C) Co-operative processing of materials (D) Co-operative sharing of materials 2288. Peter Phyrr developed this technique (A) PPBS (B) Line by Line Budget (C) Zero Based Budgeting (D) Performance Budget 2289. The unit for measuring the speed of the transmission of the data is called (A) Baud (B) Protocol (C) HTTP (D) RAM 2290. Dublin core is related to (A) Metadata (B) MARC (C) ISBD (D) CCF 2291. “God has chosen me as an instrument, the honour done to me should act as an incentive to the younger generation to devote their lives whole heartedly to

library science and service”. Whose quotation is this? (A) B. S. Kesavan (B) Melvil Dewey (C) S. R. Ranganathan (D) W. C. B Sayers 2292. Routing of periodicals is considered as (A) CAS (B) SDI (C) Translation service (D) Indexing and Abstracting service 2293. A statement that is to be tested in research is called (A) Problem (B) Assumption (C) Hypothesis (D) All of these 2294. ISDN stands for (A) International Standard Digital Network (B) International Standard Distributed Network (C) Integrated Services Digital Network (D) Inte grate d Se rvice s Distribute d Network 2295. The following is the search engine for scientific information only (A) Google (B) SCIRUS (C) Yahoo (D) Alta Vista 2296. One of the following has designed models of communication (A) Shannon and Weaver (B) Ranganathan and Neelmeghan (C) Losswell and Gerbher (D) Blake and Mouton 2297. OAI stands for (A) Open Access Initiatives (B) Open Archives Initiatives (C) On-line Archives Initiatives (D) On-line Access Initiatives 2298. Maslow’s theory is related to (A) Motivation (B) Leadership (C) Maturity (D) Scientific Management 2299. CALIBER is sponsored by (A) INFLIBNET (B) DELNET (C) AGRINET (D) CALIBNET 2300. Headquarters of UNESCO is (A) Washington (B) Paris (C) London (D) The Hague

676 D Library and Information Science Specific 2301. The se docu me nt s are not p rimary sources (A) Thesis (B) Pate nts (C) Conference Papers (D) Reference Books 2302. World of Learning is (A) A Bibliography (B) An Abstract (C) An Encyclopaedia (D) A Directory 2303. Headquarters of IFLA is located in (A) Paris (B) Washington (C) London (D) The Hague 2304. National Library for Visual handicapped is situated in (A) Mumbai (B) Mysore (C) New Delhi (D) Dehradun 2305. The first page of Website is known as (A) Cover Page (B) Home Page (C) Title Page (D) Half Title Page 2306. Blog is a (A) Off-line Journal (C) Web Directory (B) Internet Journal (D) Search Engine 2307. This literature is not published and not available through normal book selling channels. (A) Grey Literature (B) Text Books (C) Journals (D) None of the above 2308. The owner of Internet is (A) American Mathematical Society (B) Department of Science and Technology, Government of India (C) British Standard Institute (D) None of the above 2309. Library as a living system “takes a new matter, casts off old matter, changes in size and takes ne w shape s and term”. Whose quotation is this? (A) B.S. Kesavan (B) Melvil Dewey (C) S.R. Ranganathan (D) W.C.B. Sayers 2310. Handling of Information in the sense of production is called

(A) (B) (C) (D)

Information Information Information Information

Marketing Industry Production Revolution

2311. SCOPUS is a (A) Full Text Database (B) Abstracts and Citation Database (C) Numerical Database (D) None of the above 2312. “Choice of books is whose quotation is (A) Melvil Dewey (C) C.A. Cutter

an unending work” this? (B) W.C.B. Sayers (D) H.E. Bliss

2313. Which of the following is not an Open Source Software? (A) Green Stone (B) D-Space (C) Plone (D) Delmark 2314. NACLIN is sponsored by (A) INFLIBNET (B) DELNET (C) AGRINET (D) CALIBNET 2315. The latest State, which enacted Public Libraries Act is (A) Bihar (B) Uttaranchal (C) Uttar Pradesh (D) Orissa 2316. UNISIST, a proje ct of UNESCO was launched in this year (A) 1994 (B) 1972 (C) 1958 (D) 2001 2317. The term “Information Science” came into existence in this year (A) 1988 (B) 1959 (C) 1961 (D) 1975 2318. ‘Dublin Core Metadata’ consists of (A) 11 elements (B) 13 elements (C) 10 elements (D) 15 elements 2319. System school of Management is based on the contribution of (A) Taylor (B) Gilberts (C) Fayol (D) Urwick 2320. “The high purpose of Book Selection is to provide the right book to the right reader at the right time”. Whose quotation is this? (A) Francis Drury (B) H.E. Bliss (C) Melvil Dewey (D) C.A. Cutter 2321. ‘The Wheat loan Educational Exchange Programme’ was initiated in

Multiple Choice Questions D 677 (A) 1951 (C) 1981

(B) 1972 (D) 1999

2322. Weeding of unuseful books from the library is emphasized by this law of library science (A) Second (B) Third (C) Fourth (D) Fifth 2323. Assertion (A): In survey research, the commonly used techniques for gathering data are questionnaire, the interview and the observational techniques. Reason (R): These are least effective for collecting data about perceptions, beliefs, attitudes, etc. of persons. Codes : (A) (A) is true and (R) is false (B) (A) is false and (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 2324. Assertion (A): Information is a resource whose generation consumes time and money. Reason (R): Information is a resource where we consume time and money. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the right explanation of (A) (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the right explanation of (A) (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 2325. Assertion (A): Information Literacy is necessary for the users. Reason (R): It promotes the use of libraries and information centres. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 2326. Assertion (A): Evaluation of information is necessary. Reason (R): Anybody can write on internet. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are false (B) Both (A) and (R) are true (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true

2327. Assertion (A): Libraries have no scope for the growth and development in future. Reason (R): E-resources can be used anywhere anytime. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is false but (R) is true (D) (A) is true but (R) is false 2328. Assertion (A): Several methods can be devised for assisting librarians to keep abreast of developments in his field to maintain efficiency. Reason (R): Seminars, conferences, workshops can solve the purpose. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A) (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A) (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 2329. Assertion (A): Stock verification is essential in the collection development for libraries. Reason (R): It is a time consuming process. Codes : (A) (A) is true but (R) is false (B) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the right explanation of (A) (C) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the right explanation of (A) (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 2330. Assertion (A): Organization chart can be a useful management tool. Reason (R): It gives clear picture of the formal line s of communication within the library. Codes : (A) (A) is true but (R) is false (B) (A) is false but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 2331. Assertion (A): ISBD (S) is concerned with the serial publications. Reason (R): It is not used for the serials which have ceased their publication.

678 D Library and Information Science Specific Codes: (A) (A) is true but (R) is false (B) (A) is false but (R) is true (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 2332. Arrange the following research steps according to the sequence of their occurrence, (i) Formulation of hypothesis of research (ii) Designing of data and analysis plan (iii) Selection of data gathering method (iv) Report writing Codes : (A) (iii), (ii), (i), (iv) (B) (i), (iii), (ii), (iv) (C) (iii), (i), (iv), (ii) (D) (ii), (iv), (i), (iii) 2333. Identify the development in the following library softwares in correct chronological sequence. Codes : (A) CDS/ISIS, SOUL, Green Stone, DSpace (B) D-Space, SOUL, CDS/ISIS, Green Stone (C) Green Stone, CDS/ISIS, D-Space, SOUL (D) SO UL, D-Spac e , Gre e n Stone , CDS/ISIS 2334. Identify the chronological order of the following Public Libraries Acts, (i) Andhra Pradesh Public Libraries Act (ii) Karnataka Public Libraries Act (iii) Haryana Public Libraries Act (iv) Maharashtra Public Libraries Act Codes : (A) (ii), (iv), (iii), (i) (B) (i), (ii), (iv), (iii) (C) (iii), (ii), (i), (iv) (D) (iv), (iii), (i), (ii) 2335. Identify the chronological order of the following Cataloguing Codes : (i) AACR II (ii) CCC (iii) A A Code (iv) ALA Code Codes : (A) (iii), (iv), (i), (ii) (B) (ii), (iv), (iii), (i) (C) (iii), (ii), (iv), (i) (D) (iv), (i), (ii), (iii)

2336. Arrange the following in chronological order of their origin : (i) Unix (ii) MS-DOS (iii) Linux (iv) Windows Codes : (A) (iv), (ii), (iii), (i) (B) (ii), (i), (iv), (iii) (C) (i), (iii), (iv), (ii) (D) (iii), (i), (iv), (ii) 2337. Identify the correct chronological order in which the following networks were launched, (i) NICNET (ii) ERNET (iii) DELNET (iv) INDONET Codes : (A) (iii), (iv), (ii), (i) (B) (i), (iii), (iv), (ii) (C) (ii), (i), (iii), (iv) (D) (iv), (iii), (i), (ii) 2338. Arrange the following management developments chronologically (i) Synthesis Period (ii) Scientific Period (iii) Human Relation (iv) Pre-Scientific Period Codes : (A) (iii), (i), (ii), (iv) (B) (iv), (ii), (iii), (i) (C) (i), (iv), (ii), (iii) (D) (ii), (i), (iv), (iii) 2339. Match the following List - I (a) Simplex (b) Half Duplex (c) Full Duplex (d) Asynchronous transmission List - II (i) Communication channel is used in both the directions but only in one direction at a time. (ii) Communication channel is used in one direction (iii) Bits of information are transmitted continuously (iv) The communication channel is used in both the directions at the same time (v) Information is sent at random intervals with start and stop bits for each batch of information

Multiple Choice Questions D 679 Code: (a) (A) (ii), (B) (i), (C) (v), (D) (iv),

(b) (c) (i), (iv), (iv), (iii), (ii), (i), (v), (iii),

(d) (v) (ii) (iii) (ii)

2340. Match the following List - I (a) Taylor (b) Maslow (c) McGregor (d) Argyris

Code: (a) (A) (iii), (B) (iv), (C) (iii), (D) (v),

(b) (iv), (i), (i), (iv),

List - II (i) Theory of Motivation (ii) X and Y Theory (iii) Scie ntific Management (iv) Immaturity / Maturity Theory (v) Leadership Style (c) (ii), (v), (ii), (iii),

(d) (i) (iii) (iv) (i)

2341. Match the following List - I List - II (a) SOUL (i) INFOTEK (b) LIBSYS (ii) ALGORITHM (c) SLIM (iii) UNESCO (d) WINI SIS (iv) INFLIBNET (v) DESIDOC Code: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (v) (iv) (i) (B) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (C) (v) (iv) (i) (iii) (D) (i) (iii) (v) (ii) 2342. Match the following List - I List - II (a) Fyzee (i) Library Budget Committee (b) Knowledge (ii) Status and Commission Payscales of librarians (c) Mahrotra (iii) Public Libraries Committee (d) Kothari (iv) Knowledge Commission Society (v) Importance of Library in academic institutions

Code: (a) (b) (c) (A) (i), (iv), (iii), (B) (iv), (ii), (v), (C) (v), (ii), (iv), (D) (iii), (iv), (ii),

(d) (v) (iii) (iii) (i)

2343. Match the following List -I List-II (a) Protocol (i) Java (b) Language (ii) Internet Explorer (c) Browser (iii) Altavista (d) Search Engine (iv) Dos (v) HTTP Code: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv), (v), (i), (iii) (B) (v), (i), (ii), (iii) (C) (ii), (iv), (v), (i) (D) (i), (v), (iv), (ii) 2344. Match the following List -I List-II (a) I NI S (i) Institute of Electrical Engine ering, UK (b) AGRIS (ii) International Atomic Energy Agency, Vienna (c) MEDLINE (iii) Agricultural Organization of UN, Rome (d) INSPEC (iv) National Library of Medicine, USA Code: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii), (ii), (i), (iv) (B) (ii), (iii), (iv), (i) (C) (iv), (ii), (iii), (i) (D) (ii), (i), (iii), (iv) 2345. Match the following List -I List-II (a) Paul Otlet (i) List of subject heading (b) Fermont Rider (ii) Role operators (c) George Boole (iii) National Library (d) Minie Sears (iv) International Classification (v) Unive rsal De cimal Cl ass ific ation

680 D Library and Information Science Specific Code: (a) (b) (c) (A) (iii), (i), (v), (B) (v), (iv), (ii), (C) (iv), (v), (i), (D) (i), (iv), (iii),

(d) (iv) (i) (ii) (v)

2346. “Search strategy is the mirror in the dark”. Whose quotation is this? (A) Kartz (B) Ranganathan (C) Bliss (D) Cutter 2347. INDEST is a (A) Bibliography (B) Consortium

(B) Consortium (D) Dictionary

2348. ISBN now consists of (A) 10 digits (B) 13 digits (C) 15 digits (D) 8 digits 2349. Which Association was established in 1876? (A) LA (B) ALA (C) ILA (D) IASLIC 2350. Encyclopaedia of library and Information Science is published by (A) H. W. Wilson (B) R. R. Bowker (C) Marcel Dekker (D) Andrew Deutsch 2351. This particular law of library science gives emphasis on the delegation of the government to enact library legislation in their respective states (A) First Law (B) Second Law (C) Third Law (D) Fourth Law 2352. Assertion (A): Research is a total process consisting of a series of steps. Reason (R): Sometimes, several steps are carried out simultaneously. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are True (B) Both (A) and (R) are False (C) (A) is True and (R) is False (D) (R) is True and (A) is False 2353. Assertion (A): Now a days marketing of information products is necessity. Reason (R): Information is an important source. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are True

(B) (A) is True but (R) is False (C) (A) is False but (R) is True (D) Both (A) and (R) are False 2354. Assertion (A): Internet is an important tool for the dissemination of information. Reason (R): Large number of open sources are available Codes : (A) (A) is True but (R) is False (B) (A) is False but (R) is True (C) Both (A) and (R) are True (D) Both (A) and (R) are False 2355. Assertion (A): Libraries of tomorrow will become more information service oriented centres. Reason (R): They would require more powerful tools for storage and retrieval of information. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are True and (R) is the correct explanation of (A) (B) Both (A) and (R) are True but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A) (C) (A) is True but (R) is False (D) (A) is False but (R) is True 2356. Assertion (A): Training programme for library and information professionals can be de ve lo pe d on the li ne s of proportional education and continuing education. Reason (R): Continuing e ducation programme must take care of information demands of the clientele of the parent organisation from time to time. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are True, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A) (B) Both (A) and (R) are False (C) (A) is False and (R) is True (D) (A) is True and (R) is False 2357. Assertion (A): Dewey Decimal classification is popularly used in libraries with large collections. Reason (R): It is being regularly updated Codes : (A) (A) is True but (R) is False (B) (A) is False but (R) is True (C) Both (A) and (R) are False (D) Both (A) and (R) are True

Multiple Choice Questions D 681 2358. Assertion (A): Book selection must be done judiciously. Reason (R): Resource sharing is the need of the day. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are True and (R) is the correct explanation of (A) (B) Both (A) and (R) are False (C) Both (A) and (R) are True but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A) (D) (A) is False but (R) is True 2359. Arrange the following in the chronological sequence of their development. (i) Pascal (ii) Cobol (iii) Fortran (iv) Basic Codes : (A) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) (B) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (C) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) (D) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) 2360. Arrange the following catalogue codes according to the year of publication. (i) Classified catalogue code (ii) AA code (iii) AACR II (iv) Basic Codes : (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (B) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (C) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (D) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) 2361. Arrange the following according to the work flow (A) Dissemination, Selection, Processing, Acquisition (B) Selection, Processing, Acquisition, Dissemination (C) Selection, Acquisition, Processing, Dissemination (D) Processing, Acquisition, Dissemination, Selection 2362. Arrange the following according to the preferred order of sources for information, (i) Colophon (ii) Outside the issue (iii) Title Page (iv) Preface Codes : (A) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (D) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii)

2363. Identify the correct chronological order in which they were set up (A) ILA, IASLIC, APLA, IATLIS (B) APLA, ILA, IASLIC, IATLIS (C) IASLIC, ILA, IATLIS, APLA (D) IATLIS, IASLIC, ILA, APLA 2364. Match the following List - I List (a) Pre-scientific Period (i) (b) Scientific Period (ii) (c) Human Relations (iii) (d) Synthesis (iv) (v) Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iii) (iv) (v) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (C) (iii) (iv) (v) (ii) (D) (ii) (iii) (v) (iv)

- II Pre 1927 Pre 1880 1880-1927 1927-1950 1950-2007

2365. Match the following List - I List - II (a) OCLC (i) City (b) INFLIBNET (ii) International (c) CALIBNET (iii) Regional (d) ASTINFO (iv) National Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (B) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (C) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (D) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) 2366. Match the following List - I (a) Biological Abstracts (b) Statesmen Yearback (c) Indian Science Abstracts (d) Cumulative Book List List - II (i) H. W. Wilson (ii) NISCAIR (iii) Institute of Scientific Information (iv U N Statistical Office Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (B) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (C) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) (D) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv)

682 D Library and Information Science Specific 2367. Match the following List - I List - II (a) B. S. Kesavan (i) Cataloguing Rules (b) W. C. B. Sayers (ii) National Library (c) C. A. Cutter (iii) School of Librarianship (d) J. D. Brown (iv) List of Subject Headings (v) Subject Classification Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (v) (iii) (ii) (i) (B) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (C) (ii) (iii) (i) (v) (D) (v) (ii) (iv) (i) 2368. Match the following List - I List - II (a) NISCAIR (i) MINISIS (b) DESIDOC (ii) Libsys (c) IDRC (iii) Granthalaya (d) INFOTEK (iv) SANJAY (v) SLIM Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (v) (iii) (iv) (B) (i) (ii) (v) (iv) (C) (iii) (ii) (i) (v) (D) (iii) (v) (i) (ii) 2369. Match the following List-I (a) Journal of Librarianship (b) Herald of Library Science (c) Library Herald (d) Library Literature Codes : (a) (b) (A) (ii) (iv) (B) (iv) (iii) (C) (iii) (ii) (D) (ii) (i)

(c) (i) (i) (v) (iv)

List - II (i) Delhi (ii) London (iii) New York (iv) Lucknow (v) Canada (d) (iii) (v) (iv) (iii)

2370. Match the following List - I List - II (a) Blake (i) Chart technique

(b) Gantt (c) Maslow (d) Me Gregor

Codes : (a) (b) (A) (ii) (iii) (B) (ii) (i) (C) (iii) (iv) (D) (i) (iv)

(ii) Leadership Style (iii) Maturity/Immaturity Theory (iv) Motivation Theory (v) Theory X and Y (c) (v) (iv) (ii) (iii)

(d) (iv) (v) (i) (ii)

2371. Match the following List - I List - II (a) I NI S (i) 1950 (b) AGRIS (ii) 1970 (c) INPADOC (iii) 1972 (d) OCLC (iv) 1974 (v) 1967 Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (iii) (ii) (v) (B) (ii) (iv) (iii) (v) (C) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (D) (ii) (iii) (v) (iv) 2372. Match the following List - I List - II (a) Search Engine (i) PASCAL (b) Browser (ii) UNIX (c) Operating System (iii) Yahoo (d) Programming (iv) Netscape Language (v) HTTP Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iv) (v) (ii) (B) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (C) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (D) (iv) (ii) (i) (v) 2373. Match the following List - I List - II (a) Pre-natal (i) Shared Cataloguing Cataloguing Programme (b) NPAC (ii) Library of Congress (c) CIP (iii) NUCSSI (d) Union (iv) S. R. Ranganathan Catalogue

Multiple Choice Questions D 683 Codes : (a) (b) (A) (iii) (ii) (B) (iv) (i) (C) (i) (iv) (D) (ii) (iii)

(c) (i) (ii) (iii) (i)

(d) (iv) (iii) (ii) (iv)

2374. Match the following List - I List - II (a) Subject indexing (i) P.M. Rogget (b) Keyboard indexing (ii) H. P. Luhn (c) Automated indexing (iii) H. Ohlman (d) SLIC indexing (iv) M.E. Sears (v) S.L. MeNold Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (ii) (iv) (ii) (B) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (C) (ii) (i) (v) (iv) (D) (v) (iii) (iv) (ii) 2375. Herzberg’s is two factor theory deals with (A) Staff recruitment (B) Leadership (C) Decision making (D) Motivation 2376. Raja Rammohan Roy Library Foundation: (i) Promotes public libraries (ii) Located at Mumbai (iii) Promotes school libraries (iv) Located at Kolkata (A) (i) and (ii) are correct (B) (i) and (iv) are correct (C) (i) and (iii) are correct (D) (iii) and (iv) are correct 2377. The “Principle of Literary Warrant” was propounded by (A) S.R. Ranganathan (B) W. Hulme (C) Melvil Dewey (D) Derek De Solla Price 2378. Pre-natal Cataloguing means (A) Simplified Cataloguing (B) Pre-Publication Cataloguing (C) Selective Cataloguing (D) Shared Cataloguing 2379. The author who defined Reference Service as the “Process of establishing

contact between a reader and his documents in a personal way” is (A) WA. Katz (B) L. Shores (C) M. Hutchins (D) S.R. Ranganathan 2380. Identify the odd one (A) LISA (B) Psychological Abstracts (C) Index Medicus (D) World of Learning 2381. WIPO stands for (A) World Information and Patents Organisation (B) World Intellectual Property Organisation (C) World International Property Organisation (D) World Information Protection Organisation 2382. Which of the following is not correctly matched? (A) DELNET - Telecommunication Network (B) Digital Library - Print Material (C) Thesaurus - List of Descriptors (D) ISBN - Serial Number 2383. An entry in an Abstracting Journal consists of (A) Bibliographic citation (B) An abstract and bibliographic citation (C) Annotation (D) Bibliographic citation, an abstract and initials of the abstractor 2384. Technological Gatekeeper is : (i) An informal channel (ii) A term coined by T.J. Allen (iii) A formal channel (iv) A term coined by Derek De J. Solla Price (A) (i) and (ii) are correct (B) (i) and (iii) are correct (C) (ii) and (iii) are correct (D) (iii) and (iv) are correct 2385. ‘Who’s who in India’, an irregular publication is published by (A) Business Press, Bombay

684 D Library and Information Science Specific (B) Sterling, New Delhi (C) Tradesman & Men Asia, Delhi (D) Sahitya Samsad, Calcutta 2386. In which of the following network topologies, all the computers are connected to acentral computer (A) Ring (B) Star (C) Bus (D) Peer to Peer 2387. If the size of the study population is ve ry small, the following sampling method will give better results (A) Purposive (B) Stratified (C) Random (D) Census 2388. Formatting a document in Computer means (A) Editing the content (B) Changing the appearance (C) Adding new content (D) Changing the font size only 2389. Which of the following search devices will lead to an increase in the Recall output? (A) Boolean ‘And’ (B) Boolean ‘Not’ (C) Proximity Operators (D) Truncation 2390. Orientation of library users is a kind of (A) Reference Service (B) Referral Service (C) Current Awareness Service (D) Selective Dissemination of Information Service 2391. Informal Communication among knowledgeable persons is known as (A) Invisible College (B) Information Gatekeeper (C) Communication Gatekeeper (D) Knowledge Management 2392. Which of the following are produced by Institute of Scientific Information (i) Science Citation Index (ii) Current Contents (iii) Index Medicus (iv) Atom Index (A) (i), (ii) and (iii) (B) (i) and (ii) only (C) (ii) and (iii) only (D) (i) and (iv) only

2393. The term ‘Precision’ to measure the performance of Information Retrieval Systems, was suggested by (A) S.R. Ranganathan (B) F.W. Lancastere (C) Cyril Cleverdon (D) H.P. Luhn 2394. The GMD in a catalogue entry according to AACR-II revised edition is given (A) After the title proper (B) Before the title (C) After the statement of responsibility (D) Before the statement of responsibility 2395. Assertion (A): Computerisation of Public Libraries in India is slow. Reason (R): Non-availability of re sources. (A) (A) is true but (R) is false (B) (R) is true but (A) is false (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 2396. Assertion (A): Reference service is the hub of all library activities. Reason (R): It is provided in the shortest possible time. (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false (B) (R) is true, but (A) is false (C) Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not the right explanation of (A) (D) Both (A) and (R) are true, and (R) is the right explanation 2397. Assertion (A): Systems analysis identifies the flow of work. Reason (R): Systems analysis is not necessary if the library is to be automated. (A) Both (A) and (R) are correct (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is true and (R) is false (D) (R) is true and (A) is false 2398. Assertion (A): Users can have access to large number of E-journals through consortia. Reason (R): Users are not aware of using web-resources. (A) (A) is false and (R) is true (B) (A) is true and (R) is false

Multiple Choice Questions D 685 (C) Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not the right explanation of (A) (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 2399. Assertion (A): Historical, Descriptive and Experimental Methods are scientific methods. Reason (R): A scientific method is one that adopts a logical and systematic procedure. (A) (A) is true but (R) is false (B) Both (A) and (R) are true (C) (A) is false but (R) is true (D) Both (A) and (R) are true, but (R) is not the correct explanation 2400. The chronological sequence of the technology is (A) Te le phone , Te le vision, Sate llite Communication, INTERNET (B) Telephone, Satellite Communication, Television, INTERNET (C) Telephone, Television, INTERNET, Satellite Communication (D) Telephone, INTERNET, Television, Satellite Communication 2401. A candidate should do before finalising a topic of research is/are (i) the topic selected is relevant to the society. (ii) it is likely to add to the existing stock of knowledge (iii) the topic should be innovative at least in part if not as whole Code : (A) Only (i) and (ii) (B) Only (i) and (iii) (C) Only (ii) and (iii) (D) All of the above 2402. Which is not a component of a Research plan? (A) Title, Problem, Area and Scope of the study (B) Hypothesis, Concepts, Methodology, Data collection (C) Analysis, Interpretation, Report and Bibliography (D) Zero-base planning, Hyperaction and Finance 2403. Which of the following applies to a Universe with many strata are constructed

scientifically giving due weightage to considerations of homogeneity, exclusivity and comprehensive coverage? (i) Random sampling (ii) Stratified sampling (iii) Representative sampling Code : (A) Only (i) (B) Only (ii) (C) Only (i) and (ii) (D) Any of the above 2404. Match the following List-I List-II (a) A written or spoken (i) Testimony statement (b) Numerical values (ii) Scaling assigned to precode pairs of positive & negative replies (c) Analysis of the (iii) Secondary already existing analysis data collected initially for some other purpose. (iv) Rating scale Codes : (a) (b) (c) (a) (b) (c) (A) (ii) (iii) (i) (B) (iii) (ii) (i) (C) (i) (iv) (iii) (D) (ii) (i) (iii) 2405. In sampling size determination, a sampling method, in which n is the sample size, s is the standard deviation of the population and SE (x) is the standard error of the mean, then the formula to determine the sample size will be (A) n =

SE(x )2 S

(B) n =

(C) n =

S2 ´ (x )2 SE

(D) n =

S2

[SE (x )]2 S´ x 1

[SE(x )] 2

2406. Case study method is an important technique in Library & Information Science research because it (i) is intensive in nature (ii) helps in formulate hypothesis (iii) is very comprehensive and of immense value in making questionnaires & schedules.

686 D Library and Information Science Specific Code : (A) Only (i) and (ii) (B) Only (i) and (iii) (C) Only (ii) and (iii) (D) All of the above 2407. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Based on metric (i) Sociometric concept (b) Based on quanti- (ii) Quantitative fication (c) Internal scale in (iii) Interval scale which an absolute zero point exists (iv) Ratio scale Codes : (a) (b) (c) (a) (b) (c) (A) (i) (ii) (iv) (B) (i) (iii) (ii) (C) (iv) (iii) (ii) (D) (iii) (ii) (iv) 2408. Which is not properly matched? (A) condensation–act of making a book, speech, report etc. (B) Acentuation–to emphasize something in any contest (C) Abstraction–an idea of a quality as separate from object (D) Typology–a collection of wrong fonts and alphabets 2409. The technique/s involved in delimiting the problem is/are (i) A statement of the problem in a general way (ii) understanding the nature of the problem. (iii) surveying the available literature Code : (A) Only (i) and (ii) (B) Only (i) and (iii) (C) Only (ii) and (iii) (D) All of the above 2410. Match the following List-I List-II (a) The positive square (i) Standard root of variance deviation (b) Middle most obser- (ii) Median vation in series (c) Most frequent (iii) Mode observation in series

f1x1 ´ (d) Geometric Mean

f 2x 2 ´

(iv) n

... f n xn Codes : (a) (A) (iv) (B) (i) (C) (i) (D) (ii)

(b) (i) (iv) (ii) (i)

(c) (ii) (ii) (iii) (iii)

(d) (iii) (iii) (iv) (iv)

2411. Match the following List-I (a) The test of a thesis (i) (b) Explanation of a (ii) theory (c) A printed scholarly (iii) study of one theme (d) Art of writing (iv) Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (C) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) (D) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv)

List-II Rhetoric Monograph Exposition Dissertation

2412. Which is a wrong statement? (A) A research report consists of the preliminaries, the middle and the end (B) The core is preceded by preliminarie s co mprising t he t itl e page acknowled-gements, table of contents and introduction. (C) End part contains the appendices and bibliography (D) A pie chart can be used for bar graph representation of data in Library and Information Services. 2413. Books of Unknown or doubtful authorship is known as (A) Apograph (B) Incunabulla (C) Apocryphal books (D) Blue Books 2414. Match the following List-I List-II (a) MEDLINE (i) USA (b) AGRICOLA (ii) UK (c) INFOTERRA (iii) Nairobi (d) ICDET (iv) UK

Multiple Choice Questions D 687 Codes : (a) (A) (i) (B) (iv) (C) (ii) (D) (ii)

(b) (ii) (iii) (iii) (iii)

(c) (iii) (i) (i) (i)

(d) (iv) (ii) (iv) (iv)

2415. Match the following List-I List-II (a) VIKRAM (i) New Delhi (b) NICNET (ii) New Delhi (c) INDONET (iii) Hyderabad (d) IACS (iv) Kolkata Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (C) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (D) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) 2416. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Douglas i. Scientific McGregor Management School b. Abraham ii. Theory of Maslow Authority Structure c. F.W. Taylor iii. Self Actualisation Ne eds d. Max Weber iv. Theory X and Theory Y Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) iv iii i ii (B) ii iii i iv (C) iii iv ii i (D) i iv ii iii 2417. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Ist generation (i) Vacuum Tubes (1946-60) (b) 2nd generation (ii) Transistors (1960-64) (c) 3rd generation (iii) Integrated (1965-1970) circuits (d) 4th generation (iv) large scale IC (1971-85)

Codes : (a) (A) (i) (B) (ii) (C) (iv) (D) (ii)

(b) (ii) (iii) (iii) (iv)

(c) (iii) (i) (i) (i)

(d) (iv) (iv) (ii) (iii)

2418. Match the following List-I (Package) List-II (Vendor) (a) LIBSYS (i) Libsys Corporation (b) LIBMAN (ii) Datapro Consultancy (c) ULYSIS (iii) Wipro Infotech (d) SALIM (iv) Uptron India Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (B) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (C) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (D) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) 2419. Match the following List-I List-II (a) E.J. Coates (i) KWIC (b) H.P. Luhn (ii) Things, Property Material Action (c) Derek Austin (iii) Concrete and process (d) J. Kaiser (iv) PRECIS Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (C) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (D) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) 2420. Match the following List-I List-II (a) NTC (i) UK (b) ITC (ii) India (c) BLDSC (iii) Netherlands (d) NISCAIR (iv) USA Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (B) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (C) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (D) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

688 D Library and Information Science Specific 2421. Match the following List-I (a) Elements of Library(i) Classification (b) Little Science Big (ii) Science (c) Documentation (iii) (d) Subject Approach (iv) to Information Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (B) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (C) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) (D) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

List-II D.J. Desolla Price S.R. Ranganathan D.J. Fosket S.C. Bradford

2422. Match the following List-I List-II (a) British Museum Act (i) 1972 (b) British Library Act (ii) 1759 (c) Imperial Library Act (iii) 1902 Codes : (a) (b) (c) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (B) (i) (iii) (ii) (C) (ii) (i) (iii) (D) (ii) (iii) (i) 2423. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Choice (i) IFLA (b) International (ii) IASLIC Cataloguing (c) ILSA (iii) LA (UK) (d) Journal of (iv) ALA Librarianship Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (B) (ii) (iii) (i) (ii) (C) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) (D) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) 2424. Match the following List-I List-II (a) RLA (i) Rajasthan (b) MALA (ii) Chennai (c) COMLA (iii) The Hauge (d) IFLA (iv) Nigeria

Codes : (a) (A) (i) (B) (iii) (C) (i) (D) (i)

(b) (ii) (ii) (ii) (ii)

(c) (iii) (iv) (iv) (iv)

(d) (iv) (i) (iii) (iii)

2425. Match the following List-I List-II (a) ALA (i) USA (b) ILA (ii) India (c) LA (UK) (iii) UK (d) IFLA (iv) Netherland Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) (C) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (D) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) 2426. Select the right sequence of contribution of classificationists in the chronological order (A) Francis Bacon, W.T. Harris, Melvil Dewey, J.D. Brown (B) W.T. Harris, Francis Bacon, Melvil Dewey, J.D. Brown (C) Francis Bacon, Melvil Dewey, J.D. Brown, W.T. Harris (D) Francis Bacon, J.D. Brown, W.T. Harris, Melvil Dewey 2427. Arrange the contributors in management in the proper chronological order: (i) Peter Drucker (ii) Henry Gantt (iii) Ishikawa (iv) Juran Code: (A) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) (B) (ii), (i), (iv) (iii) (C) (ii), (iv), (i) (iii) (D) (iii), (ii), (iv) (i) 2428. Match the following (a) Zipf’s Law (i) (b) Lotka’s Law (ii) (c) Bradford’s Law (d) Eugene Garfield

Impact factor Circulation Statistics (iii) Science Journal (iv) Word frequency

Multiple Choice Questions D 689 Codes : (a) (A) (ii) (B) (v) (C) (iv) (D) (iii)

(b) (iv) (i) (iii) (iv)

(c) (v) (iv) (v) (v)

2429. Match the following List-I (a) SOUL (i) (b) WINISIS (ii) (c) SANJAY (iii) (d) SLIM (iv) (v) Codes : (a) (b) (c) (A) (iv) (v) (i) (B) (v) (iii) (iv) (C) (iv) (v) (ii) (D) (v) (iv) (i)

(d) (i) (ii) (i) (ii) List-II DESIDOC ALGORITHM Informatics (India) INFLIBNET UNESCO (d) (ii) (i) (iii) (ii)

2430. In the facet formula of Main Class Literature (O) of Colon Classification no connecting symbol is used in between [P2] and [P3]. What maybe the logic behind it. (A) the two represent different levels of personality (B) the two are represented by different species of digit (C) It is a printing mistake (D) Canon of Prepotence demands it 2431. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Z39.50 (i) Standard for Document Description (b) ISO 9000 (ii) Standard for Library Building (c) ISO 2709 (iii) Information Retrieval (d) ISBD(G) (iv) Quality Related Standards (v) Bibliographic Record Structure Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (iv) (v) (i) (B) (iv) (v) (ii) (iii) (C) (v) (iv) (ii) (i) (D) (iv) (iii) (v) (ii)

2432. Subject indexing systems were developed in the order as (A) Chain indexing, Systematic indexing, PRECIS, COMPASS (B) Systematic indexing, Chain indexing, PRECIS, COMPASS (C) Sy ste m ati c i nde x ing , P RECI S, Chain indexing, COMPASS (D) Systematic indexing, COMPASS, Chain indexing, PRECIS 2433. Arrange the following associations in the order of year of establishment (A) SIS, IASLIC, IATLIS, ILA (B) IASLIC, ILA, SIS, IATLIS (C) ILA, SIS, IASLIC, IATLIS (D) ILA, IASLIC, IATLIS, SIS 2434. Arrange the following Acts according to year of enactment (A) Copyright Act, The Patent Act, Information Tech. Act, IPR Act (B) The Patent Act, Copyright Act, Information Tech. Act, IPR Act (C) Copyright Act, IPR Act, The patent Act, Information Tech. Act (D) Copyright Act, The Patent Act, IPR Act, Information Tech. Act 2435. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Conventional (i) Pate nts (b) Neo-conventional (ii) Printed Books (c) Non-conventional (iii) Satellite imageries (d) Meta documents (iv) Audio-visual material Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (C) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) (D) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) 2436. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Library is a (i) Kothari people's University (b) Library is a (ii) Urquart growing organisation (c) Library can be (iii) Ranganathan useful to society

690 D Library and Information Science Specific (d) Library is the heart of the University Codes : (a) (b) (c) (A) (iv) (iii) (ii) (B) (iv) (i) (iii) (C) (ii) (iv) (iii) (D) (iv) (ii) (i)

(iv) Sayajirao Gayakwad

(d) (i) (ii) (i) (iii)

2437. Match the following List-I List-II (a) P. Wassermann (i) Line of thinking (b) P. Atherton (ii) Foundation of Education for Librarianship (c) J.H. Shera (iii) Ne w Librarianship (d) Maurice (iv) Putting B. Line knowledge to work Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (C) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (D) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) 2438. In Colon Classification facet formula for Posteriori sing Common Isolate (PCI) Personality is (CI), (P) (P2): (E) In it (P) is to be got by (A) P2 of Literature (O) (B) P2 of Law (Z) (C) P2 of Generalia Bibliography (a) (D) P2 of History(V) 2439. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Theory of X & Y (i) Frederic Taylor (b) Scientific (ii) Ouchi management (c) Need hierarchy (iii) A. Maslow (d) Theory Z (iv) D. Mc Grager Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (B) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (C) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (D) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii)

2440. Match the following List-I List-II (a) UDC (i) H.E. Bliss (b) DDC (ii) C.A. Cutter (c) Expansive (iii) Otlat and classification La Fontane (d) Bibliographic (iv) M. Dewey classification Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) (B) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (C) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (D) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 2441. Match the following List-I List-II (a) British Library (i) Russia (b) Bibliotheque National (ii) USA (c) Lenin Library (iii) UK (d) Library of Congress (iv) France Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (B) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (C) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (D) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) 2442. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Windows (i) A revolving disc on which data is stored (b) Microprocessor(ii) It is used for processing of text (c) Word (iii) Collection of processor programmes for computer system (d) Software (iv) A graphical user interface working as DOS Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (B) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (C) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (D) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 2443. Which of the Canons of Cataloguing prescribes that the information found on

Multiple Choice Questions D 691 title and its overflow pages should be used for preparing main entry? (A) Canon of Context (B) Canon of Prepotence (C) Canon of Ascertain ability (D) Canon of Sought Heading 2444. [PI] in C.C. Under Main Class (O) Literature represents (A) Author Facet (B) Form Facet (C) Language Facet (D) Work Facet 2445. Which of the following Laws of Library Science indicates the right of the books (documents) that their existence in the library should be brought to the notice of users (A) Second Law (B) Third Law (C) Fourth Law (D) Fifth Law 2446. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Software (i) Key board (b) Hardware (ii) CD (c) Storage Device (iii) SOUL (d) I/O Device (iv) CPU Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (D) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) 2447. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Planning (i) Delegation of authority (b) Staffing (ii) Audit (c) Control (iii) Promotion (d) Organising (iv) Resource management Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (C) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) (D) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) 2448. What is the true sequence of cardinal points on the spiral of scientific method? (A) De scende nt, Ze nith, Asce ndent, Nadir, Ascendent (B) Asce ndent, Desce ndent, Zenith, Nadir, Descendent

(C) Nadir, Ascendent, Zenith, Descendent, Nadir (D) None of these 2449. Arrange the following Associations according to the year of establishment. (A) ALA, CILIP (LA), Special Library Association, ASLIB (B) CILIP (LA), ALA, Special Library Association, ASLIB (C) ALA, Special Library Association, ASLIB, CILIP (LA) (D) ASLIB, ALA, CILIP (LA), Special Library Association 2450. Arrange the following Standards according to the year of their introduction. (A) ISBN, ICCP, CCF, ISDS (B) CCF, ICCP, ISBN, ISDS (C) ICCP, ISBN, ISDS, CCF (D) ISDS, ISBN, ICCP, CCF 2451. Identify the correct order of the evolution of the following storage devices (A) DVD, Magnetic tape, Floppy, CD (B) CD, DVD, Magnetic tape, Floppy (C) Floppy, CD, DVD, Magnetic tape (D) Magnetic tape, Floppy, CD, DVD 2452. Identify the correct order of evolution of computers (A) PC-XT, PC-AT, Main frame, Micro (B) PC-AT, PC-XT, Main frame, Micro (C) Micro, PC-AT, PC-XT, Main frame (D) Main frame, Micro, PC-AT, PC-XT 2453. Identify the correct order of evolution of the following storage order. (A) Paper, Micro card, Magnetic tape, Clay tablet (B) Clay tablet, Paper, Micro card, Magnetic tape (C) Micro card, Magnetic tape, Clay tablet, Paper (D) Magnetic tape, Clay tablet, Paper, Micro card 2454. Identify the correct chronological order in which the following were established (A) National Library of India (Kolkata), Delhi Public Library, Documentation Research and Training Centre, Raja Ram Mohan Roy Library Foundation

692 D Library and Information Science Specific (B) Delhi Public Library, Documentation Research and Training Centre, Raja Ram Mohan Roy Library Foundation, National Library of India (Kolkata) (C) Do cume ntation Re s e ar ch and Training Centre, Raja Ram Mohan Roy Library Foundation, National Library of India (Kolkata), Delhi Public Library (D) Raja Ram Mohan Roy Library Foundation, National Library of India (Kolkata), Delhi Public Library, Do cume ntation Re s e ar ch and Training Centre 2455. Which one of the sequences is in ascending order? (A) Bytes, Gigabytes, Megabytes, Terrabytes (B) Bytes, Megabytes, Gigabytes, Terrabytes (C) Bytes, Terrabytes, Megabytes, Gigabytes (D) Megabytes, Bytes, Terrabytes, Gigabytes 2456. Which of the following would be the correct chronological sequence? (A) Bibliometrics, Informetrics, Librametry, Webometrics (B) Librametry, Bibliometrics, Informetrics, Webometrics (C) Librametry, Informetrics, Bibliometrics, Webometrics (D) Bibliometrics, Informetrics, Web-ometrics, Librametry 2457. Arrange the physical forms of catalogue in the chronological sequence (A) Re gister, Sheaf Catalogue, Card Catalogue, OP AC (B) Sheaf Catalogue, Re gister, Card Catalogue, OP AC (C) Card Catalogue, Sheaf Catalogue, Register, OP AC (D) Sheaf Catalogue, Card Catalogue, Register, OP AC 2458. Match the following List-I List-II (Term) (Forms of Communication) (a) Invisible college (i) Physical carrier

(b) Noise (c) Medium (d) Document Code: (a) (b) (A) (i) (ii) (B) (ii) (i) (C) (iv) (iii) (D) (iv) (iii)

(ii) Formal channel (iii) Barrier (iv) Informal channel (c) (iii) (iii) (ii) (i)

2459. Match the following List-I (Work) (a) Subject (i) Classification (b) Thesaurofacet (ii) (c) Classified (iii) Catalogue Code (d) Rules for (iv) Dictionary Catalogue Code: (a) (b) (c) (A) (iii) (i) (iv) (B) (ii) (iii) (i) (C) (iv) (ii) (iii) (D) (i) (ii) (iii)

(d) (iv) (iv) (i) (ii) List-II (Author) J. Atchinson C.A. Cutter J.D. Brown S.R. Ranganathan

(d) (ii) (iv) (i) (iv)

2460. Match the following List-I List-II (Research Methods) (Type) (a) Content (i) Data Collection Analysis Tool (b) Questionnaire (ii) Qualitative Methods of Analysis (c) Observation (iii) Methods of Research (d) Case Study (iv) Direct Method Code: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (B) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (C) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (D) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) 2461. Match the following List-I (a) Maharashtra Public Libraries Act (b) Gujarat Public Libraries Act

List-II (i) 2004 (ii) 2005

Multiple Choice Questions D 693 (c) Orissa Public (iii) 1967 Libraries Act (d) West Bengal Public (iv) 1988 Libraries Act (v) 1979 Code: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (B) (ii) (v) (iv) (iii) (C) (iii) (i) (ii) (v) (D) (v) (ii) (iv) (iii) 2462. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Scientific (i) Esprit de crops Management (b) Unity of (ii) Peter Drucker Command (c) Management (iii) Factor of Planning by Objectives (d) Forecasting (iv) Efficiency and Waste Prevention Code: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (B) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (C) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (D) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) 2463. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Search Engine (i) Internet Explorer (b) Subject (ii) Dogpile Gateway (c) Net Browser (iii) FTP (d) Meta Search (iv) SOSIG Engine (v) Altavista Code: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (B) (v) (iv) (i) (ii) (C) (v) (i) (ii) (iii) (D) (v) (i) (iv) (ii) 2464. Match the following List-I List-II (a) ERNET (i) Japan (b) JANET (ii) Global (c) RLIN (iii) India (d) OCLC (iv) United Kingdom (v) USA

Code: (a) (A) (v) (B) (iv) (C) (iii) (D) (iii)

(b) (iv) (v) (iv) (ii)

(c) (i) (i) (v) (iv)

(d) (ii) (ii) (ii) (v)

2465. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Origin of a word (i) World of Learning (b) Synonyms (ii) Dictionary of for a word Etymology (c) How to install (iii) Encyclopedia a gadget (d) Address of (iv) Manual Oxford University (v) Thesaurus Code: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (v) (iv) (iii) (B) (v) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (v) (iv) (i) (iii) (D) (ii) (v) (iv) (i) 2466. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Nehru Memorial (i) Chennai Museum Library (b) Connemara Public (ii) Pune Library (c) Bhandarkar Oriental (iii) Patna Research Institute Library (d) Khudabaksh (iv) Delhi Oriental Library (v) Allahabad Code: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (v) (iv) (ii) (B) (v) (iv) (i) (ii) (C) (v) (ii) (iv) (i) (D) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) 2467. Match the in following List-I List-II (a) IFLA (i) Science Citation Index (b) Unesco (ii) First search (c) OCLC (iii) Pate nt Inform ation (d) ISI (iv) Public Library Manifesto

694 D Library and Information Science Specific (v) Unive r sal Avai lability of Publications Code: (a) (A) (iii) (B) (iv) (C) (v) (D) (v)

(b) (iv) (iii) (iv) (i)

(c) (ii) (i) (ii) (iv)

(d) (i) (ii) (i) (ii)

2468. Match the following List-I List-II (a) E-Mail (i) Bulletin Board (b) FTP (ii) Remote Log In (c) TELNET (iii) Library Network (d) USENET (iv) Moving/Downloading Files (v) Exchanging Message Code: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A)(iv) (iii) (v) (i) (B)(v) (iv) (ii) (i) (C)(ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (D)(v) (i)(iv) (iii) 2469. Match the following List-I List-II (a) MS-DOS (i) Multi-User Operating System (b) UNIX (ii) DTP Software (c) Excel (iii) DBMS (d) Pagemaker (iv) Single User Operating System (v) Spreadsheet Software Code: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (v) (i) (ii) (B) (v) (i) (ii) (iii) (C) (iii) (i) (ii) (v) (D) (iv) (i) (v) (ii) 2470. Who is the chairman of National Knowledge Commission? (A) Dr. Sukhadeo Thorat (B) Dr. M.S. Swaminathan (C) Dr. Bhalchandra Mungekar (D) Sam Pitroda 2471. Who has not changed its name? (A) Library Association, U.K (B) ALA

(C) ASLIB (D) IFLA 2472. Which of the following is not correct? (A) Maslow’s need analysis is useful for understanding motivation of employees. (B) Theory Z is the contribution of Japanese style of Management. (C) Money is the most powerful motivating agent. (D) Mission of an organisation is essentially abstract. 2473. NISCAIRE is a Part of (A) DST (C) DSIR (B) ISRO (D) CSIR 2474. Use of Microfilming is considerably reduced due to (A) Problems of Preservation of microfilms. (B) Need for use microfilm reader. (C) Availability of better Technology in the form of digitization. (D) High cost involved in it. 2475. Opaque paper is a (A) Ultra-white paper (B) Ultra-white thin paper (C) Transparent paper (D) Non-Transparent paper 2476. Which of the following is a public domain database (A) IMS (B) AGRIS (C) Chemical Abstracts (D) MEDLINE 2477. In which Library Service barcode technology is used (A) Stock verification (B) Library Security (C) Circulation (D) Reference Service 2478. One of the following journal is published in U.K. (A) Library Quarterly (B) Program (C) Libri (D) Herald of Library Science 2479. ‘Fair use’ is a term most relevant to (A) Intellectual Property Rights (B) Books borrowed for home reading (C) Copyright (D) Use of reference books

Multiple Choice Questions D 695 2480. Which of the following does not fall into the category of pre-coordinate indexing (A) Chain indexing (B) Uniform indexing (C) LCSH (D) Sear’s List of Subject Headings 2481. Dublin core is (A) A set of core activities of a National library (B) Collection of metadata elements (C) Network for the city of Dublin (D) Revised version of MARC 2482. ‘Best is the enemy of the Good’ is said by (A) Drury (B) Urquart (C) Foskett (D) Shera 2483. Which of the following is not associated with communication system? (A) Receiver (B) Sender (C) Channel (D) Entropy 2484. One of the following is not an open source software (A) D’space (B) Windows (C) Green-stone (D) Linux 2485. DESIDOC is documentation centre for (A) Indigenous Knowledge (B) Defence Science (C) Rural Development (D) Khadi & Village Industries 2486. Questionnaire is a (A) Research method (B) Measurement Technique (C) Tool for data collection (D) All the above 2487. Mean, Median and mode are (A) Measures of deviation (B) Ways of sampling (C) Measures of central tendency (D) None of the above 2488. ‘Cranfield Studies’ are an example of (A) Survey Research (B) Experimental Research (C) Historical Research (D) Case Study 2489. Assertion (A): As the level of recall increases, precision tends to decrease. Reason (R): Recall and precision tend to vary inversely.

Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) (A) is true but (R) is false (C) Both are partially true (D) (R) is true but (A) is false 2490. Assertion (A): Operators using ‘AND’, ‘OR’ and ‘NOT’ are mostly used in online IR. Reason (R): User interfaces cannot transform the natural language input into Boolean search Query Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) (A) is true but (R) is false (C) (R) is true but (A) is false (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 2491. Assertion (A): Maximization of the use of documents is the motto of the library. Reason (R): Maximization of the use of documents in the library satisfies the Fifth Law of library Science. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (R) is true but (A) is false 2492. Assertion (A): User profile is an essential component of SDI service. Reason (R): SDI is a personalized current awareness service. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are false (C) Both are partially true (D) (A) is true but (R) is false 2493. Assertion (A): AACR 2 like CCC can satisfy all approaches of the users. Reason (R): Both AACR 2 and CCC are comprehensive cataloguing codes. Codes : (A) (A) is true but (R) is false (B) (R) is true but (A) is false (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 2494. Assertion (A): Document transfer and information transfer are not the same. Reason (R): Assimilation of the content of the document by the user constitutes information transfer.

696 D Library and Information Science Specific Codes : (A) (A) is true and (R) is false (B) (R) is true but (A) is false (C) Both (A) and (R) are true (D) Both (A) and (R) are false 2495. Assertion (A): ISO 9000 is a quality framework which calls for documentation to adopt TQM in a Library. Reason (R): ISO 9000 is a valuable component of TQM Codes : (A) (A) is true and (R) is false (B) (R) is true but (A) is false (C) Both (A) and (R) are false (D) Both (A) and (R) are true 2496. Assertion (A): Consortia cannot provide an effective strategy to increase the buying power of individual librarie s. Reason (R): Consortia arrangement saves the funds of the libraries in developing their information sources. Codes : (A) (A) is false but (R) is true (B) (A) is true but (R) is false (C) Both (A) and (R) are false (D) Both (A) and (R) are true 2497. Arrange the following in the order of computer generations : (i) Integrated circuit (ii) Transistor (iii) Vacuum Tube (iv) Chip Codes : (A) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) (B) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (C) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (D) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) 2498. Match the following List-I (a) BLAISE project (b) MARC project (c) Union Catalogue project (d) Microchip List-II (i) Library of congress (ii) Intel (iii) Insdoc (iv) British Library

Codes : (a) (b) (A) (iii) (ii) (B) (i) (ii) (C) (iv) (i) (D) (ii) (iii)

(c) (iv) (iii) (iii) (i)

(d) (i) (iv) (ii) (iv)

2499. Which is the correct logical sequence of the following (A) Information, knowledge, data, wisdom (B) Knowledge, Information, wisdom, data (C) Data, knowledge, information, wisdom (D) Data, information, knowledge, wisdom 2500. Impact factor is devised by (A) Eugene Garfield (B) Alan Pritchard (C) David Hume (D) Louis Brandeis 2501. Match the following items given in List - I and List - II. List-I List-II (a) Principles of (i) Berwick Sayers librarianship (b) Practical (ii) S.R. Ranganathan guidelines for classification (c) Rules for (iii) D.J. Urquart Dictionary cataloguing (d) Five Laws of (iv) C.A. Cutter library science Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (B) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (C) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (D) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) 2502. Match the following items given in List - I and List - II List-I List-II (a) Informatique (i) English (b) Informatik (ii) Italian (c) Informatica (iii) French (d) Informatics (iv) German

Multiple Choice Questions D 697 Codes : (a) (A) (iii) (B) (ii) (C) (iv) (D) (iii)

(b) (iv) (i) (iii) (i)

(c) (ii) (iv) (i) (ii)

(d) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv)

2503. Match the following List - I and List - II List-I (a) Bibliographic (i) description

items given in

List-II Current Awareness Service (b) Short-range (ii) Post reference service Coordinating Indexing (c) SDI (iii) Abstract (d) Uniterm (iv) Ready Refer Source Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (B) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (C) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (D) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i)

2504. Arrange the following according to their increasing storage capacity. (i) CD - ROM (ii) Floppy disks (iii) DVD Codes : (a) (b) (c) (a) (b) (c) (A) (iii) (i) (ii) (B) (ii) (i) (iii) (C) (ii) (iii) (i) (D) (i) (iii) (ii) 2505. Match the following items given in ListI and List-II List-I List-II (a) DDC 19th edition (i) John Camaroni (b) DDC 20th edition (ii) Melvil Dewey (c) DDC 21st edition (iii) John Mitchell (d) DDC 22nd edition (iv) Benjamin Custer Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) (B) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (C) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (D) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i)

2506. Match the following items given in List-I and List-II List-I List-II (a) Nascent Micro (i) Colon thought classification (b) Access points (ii) Motivation (c) Physiological (iii) Documentaneeds tion (d) Analytic-synthetic (iv) AACR II classification Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (B) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (C) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (D) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 2507. Match the following List-I List-II (a) SHE (i) Nuclear energy (b) MESH (ii) Education (c) ERIC (iii) Medicine (d) I NI S (iv) Engineering Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (B) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (C) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (D) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 2508. In UDC"S IME (1993) two new symbols have been added, i.e., (see also) and (A) ::(double colon) (B) + (plus) (C) = (parallel division) (D) * (asterisk) 2509. The digit * (asterisk) +(Plus) “(double inverted comma) and? (backward arrow) in CC 7th ed. have __________ value. (A) anterior sing (B) posterior sing (C) cardinal (D) real 2510. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Five Laws of (i) C.D. Needham Library Science (b) Subject approach(ii) S. R. to Information Ranganathan (c) Organising (iii) B. C. Vickery Knowledge in and A Vickery. Libraries

698 D Library and Information Science Specific (d) Information (iv) A. C. Fastet Science in theory and practice Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (B) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (C) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (D) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) 2511. Match the following List-I (a) Melvil Dewey (b) Berwick Sayers (c) B. S. Kesavan (d) Paul Otlet Codes : (a) (b) (c) (A) (ii) (iv) (i) (B) (iv) (iii) (i) (C) (ii) (iii) (iv) (D) (ii) (i) (iii)

(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

List-II Belgium USA Britain India

(d) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv)

2512. Match the following List-I List-II (a) UBC (i) FID (b) UDC (ii) IFLA (c) MARC (iii) ASTINFO (d) Document (iv) Library of Supply System Congress Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (B) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (C) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (D) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) 2513. Match the following List-I List-II (Types of document/ (Institution) inf. Centre) (a) Mission Oriented (i) Patent information System (b) Social Science (ii) DESIDOC Oriented (c) Science Subject (iii) NISSAT Oriented (d) Material (iv) NASSDOC Oriented

Codes : (a) (A) (iii) (B) (iv) (C) (i) (D) (ii)

(b) (iv) (iii) (ii) (iii)

(c) (ii) (ii) (iii) (iv)

(d) (i) (i) (iv) (i)

2514. The British library movement includes the following major reports. Identify the correct chronological order of these reports. (i) Mc Colvin Report (ii) Kenyen Report (iii) Adams Report (iv) Select Committee Report Codes : (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (B) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (C) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (D) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) 2515. Arrange the following library automation software according to their date of origin (i) SOUL (ii) KOHA (iii) New GENLIB (iv) LIBSYS Codes : (A) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (B) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (C) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (D) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) 2516. Arrange the following Online Systems in the order of their origin: (i) ERIC (ii) MEDLINE (iii) OCLC (iv) MARC Codes : (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (B) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (C) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (D) (iv) (iii) (i) (iv) 2517. Arrange the following Indexing Systems in the order of their origin: (i) POPSI (ii) PRECIS (iii) Chain Indexing (iv) KWIC Codes : (A) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (B) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (C) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) (D) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii)

Multiple Choice Questions D 699 2518. Gotam's book 'Nyasutra' has given the following four steps of scientific research. Arrange them in proper order. (i) Aptavakshya (Verification/Testing) (ii) Upaman (Camparison) (iii) Anuman (Inference) (iv) Pratyaksha (Perception) Codes : (A) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (B) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (C) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) (D) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) 2519. Arrange the following Librarians of National library in chronological order of their service (i) D. R. Kalia (ii) Y. M. Mulay (iii) B. S. Kesavan (iv) K. M. Asadullah Codes : (A) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (B) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (C) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (D) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) 2520. Arrange the following Library Associations according to their year of their establishment: (i) ILA (ii) IASLIC (iii) IFLA (iv) ALA Codes : (A) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (B) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (C) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (D) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) 2521. Match the following: List-I List-II (Library Act) (Year of Enactment) (a) Orissa (i) 2005 (b) Goa (ii) 2005 (c) Uttaranchal (iii) 2002 (d) Uttar Pradesh (iv) 1993 Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (C) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (D) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv)

2522. Arrange the following sources according to their date of origin: (i) Social Science Index (ii) Library Literature (iii) Indian Library and Information Science Abstracts (iv) Lib rary and Info rmat ion Scie nce Abstracts Codes : (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (B) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) (C) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) (D) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) 2523. Arrange the following committees/commissions according to their year of formation: (i) National Library Review Committee (ii) Library Advisory Commission (iii) Sinha Committee on Public Libraries (iv) Working group on libraries (Planning Commission) Codes : (A) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (D) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) 2524. Match the following List-I List-II (a) The Electronic Library (i) USA (b) Library Herald (ii) Germany (c) Library Trends (iii) U.K. (d) International Classification (iv) India Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (B) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (C) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (D) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) 2525. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Principles of (i) F.W. Taylor Management (b) Functions of (ii) Abraham Management Maslow (c) Theory of Hierarchy (iii) Luther of needs Gullick

700 D Library and Information Science Specific (d) System School of (iv) Henry Management Fayol Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (B) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (C) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (D) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) 2526. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Dewey decimal (i) 1933 classification (b) Colon classification (ii) 1876 (c) Rider's International (iii) 1905 classification (d) Universal decimal (iv) 1961 classification Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (B) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (C) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) (D) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) 2527. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Search Engine (i) Pascal (b) Browser (ii) UNIX (c) Operating System (iii) Yahoo (d) Programming Language (iv) Netscape Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (B) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (C) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (D) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) 2528. In the 7th ed of CC the connecting symbol for phase relation (A) dot ( . ) (B) amphersand (&) (C) zero (0) (D) colon ( : ) 2529. If the fundame ntal cate gory e nergy manifest itself more than once in one and in the same specific subject, the sequence of the two energy isolates is

to be fixed on a general principle of (A) Act and –Action, Actor-Tool Principle (B) Wall Picture Principle (C) Whole Organ Principle (D) Cow and Calf Principle 2530. Match the following List-I (Library Act)

List-II (Year of Enactment) (i) 1965

(a) Madras Public Libraries Act (b) West Bengal (ii) 1960 Public Libraries Act (c) Andhra Pradesh (iii) 1948 Public Libraries Act (d) Karnataka Public (iv) 1979 Libraries Act Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (B) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (C) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (D) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii)

2531. Match the following List-I List-II (Publication) (Institution/ system) (a) AGRINDEX (i) INSPEC (b) ATOMINDEX (ii) National Library of Medicine (c) Physics (iii) AGRIS Abstracts (d) INDEX (iv) I NI S MEDICUS Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) (B) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (C) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (D) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 2532. Match the following List-I List-II (Contribution) (Organisation) (a) Public Library (i) DRTC Manifesto (b) POPSI (ii) Library of Congress

Multiple Choice Questions D 701 (c) UDC (d) MARC Codes : (a) (A) (i) (B) (ii) (C) (iii) (D) (iv)

(iii) UNESCO (iv) FID (b) (ii) (i) (i) (ii)

(c) (iii) (iii) (iv) (iii)

(d) (iv) (iv) (ii) (i)

2533. Match the following List-I List-II (Medium/ (Type) Connectivity) (a) Fax (i) Optical Storage (b) CD-ROM (ii) Magnetic Storage (c) Floppy Disk (iii) Switching System (d) Circuit (iv) Image transmission Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (B) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (C) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (D) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) 2534. Arrange the following catalogue codes according to the year of publication (i) Classified catalogue code (ii) AA code (iii) AACR II (iv) RDC Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (B) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (C) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (D) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) 2535. Arrange the following according to the work flow (A) Dissemination, Selection, Processing, Acquisition (B) Selection, Processing, Acquisition, Dissemination (C) Selection, Acquisition, Processing, Dissemination (D) Processing, Acquisition, Dissemination, Selection

2536. Arrange the following according to the preferred order of sources for information (i) Colophon (ii) Outside the issue (iii) Title Page (iv) Preface Codes : (A) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (D) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) 2537. Identify the correct chronological order in which they were set up (A) ILA, IASLIC, APLA, IATLIS (B) APLA, ILA, IASLIC, IATLIS (C) IASLIC, ILA, IATLIS, APLA (D) IATLIS, IASLIC, ILA, APLA 2538. Match the following List-I (a) Pre-scientific Period (i) (b) Scientific Period (ii) (c) Human Relations (iii) (d) Synthesis (iv) (v) Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iii) (iv) (v) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (C) (iii) (iv) (v) (ii) (D) (ii) (iii) (v) (iv)

List-II Pre 1927 Pre 1880 1880-1927 1924-1933 1950-2007

2539. In CC to combine the facets (PMEST) the facet indicators used are (A) co mma, se mico lon, co lon, do t, apostrophe (B) common, colon, bracket, double colon, dot (C) comma, colon, double colon, dot, apostrophe (D) none of the above 2540. Match the following List-I (a) OCLC (i) (b) INFLIBNET (ii) (c) CALIBNET (iii) (d) ASTINFO (iv)

List-II City International Regional National

702 D Library and Information Science Specific Codes : (a) (A) (ii) (B) (ii) (C) (iii) (D) (iii)

(b) (i) (iv) (ii) (i)

(c) (iv) (i) (iv) (ii)

(d) (iii) (iii) (i) (iv)

2541. Match the following List-I (a) Biological (i) Abstracts (b) Statesmen (ii) Yearback (c) Indian Science (iii) Abstracts (d) Cumulative Book List Codes : (a) (b) (A) (i) (iii) (B) (iii) (iv) (C) (iv) (ii) (D) (ii) (iii)

List-II H.W. Wilson NISCAIR

Institute of Scientific Information (iv) U.N. Statistical Office

(c) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i)

(d) (ii) (i) (i) (iv)

2542. Match the following List-I List-II (a) B.S. Kesavan (i) Cataloguing Rules (b) W.C.B. Sayers (ii) National Library (c) C.A. Cutter (iii) School of Librarianship (d) J.D. Brown (iv) List of Subject Headings (v) Subject Classification Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (v) (iii) (ii) (i) (B) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (C) (ii) (iii) (i) (v) (D) (v) (ii) (iv) (i) 2543. Match the following List-I (a) Journal of Librarianship (b) Herald of Library Science

List-II (i) Delhi (ii) London

(c) Library Herald (d) Library Literature Codes : (a) (A) (ii) (B) (iv) (C) (iii) (D) (ii)

(b) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i)

(c) (i) (i) (v) (iv)

(iii) New York (v) Lucknow (vi) Canada (d) (iii) (v) (iv) (iii)

2544. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Blake (i) Chart technique (b) Gantt (ii) Leadership Style (c) Maslow (iii) Maturity/ Immaturity Theory (d) Mc Gregor (iv) Motivation Theory (v) Theory X and Y Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (iii) (v) (iv) (B) (ii) (i) (iv) (v) (C) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (D) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) 2545. Match the following List-I List-II (a) I NI S (i) 1950 (b) AGRIS (ii) 1970 (c) INPADOC (iii) 1972 (d) OCLC (iv) 1974 (v) 1967 Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (iii) (ii) (v) (B) (ii) (i) (iv) (v) (C) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (D) (ii) (iii) (v) (iv) 2546. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Search Engine (i) PASCAL (b) Browser (ii) UNIX (c) Operating System (iii) Yahoo (d) Programming (iv) Netscape Language (v) HTTP

Multiple Choice Questions D 703 Codes : (a) (A) (i) (B) (iv) (C) (iii) (D) (iv)

(b) (iv) (iii) (iv) (ii)

(c) (v) (ii) (ii) (i)

(d) (ii) (i) (i) (v)

2547. Match the following List-I (a) Pre-natal (i) Cataloguing (b) NPAC (ii) (c) CIP (d) Union Catalogue Codes : (a) (b) (A) (iii) (ii) (B) (iv) (i) (C) (i) (iv) (D) (ii) (iii)

List-II Shared Cataloguing Programme Library of Congress (iii) NUCSSI (iv) S.R. Ranganathan

(c) (i) (ii) (iii) (i)

(d) (iv) (iii) (ii) (iv)

2548. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Subject (i) P.M. Rogget indexing (b) Keyboard (ii) H.P. Luhn indexing (c) Automated (iii) H. Ohlman indexing (d) SLIC indexing (iv) M.E. Sears (v) S.L.Mc Nold Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (ii) (iv) (ii) (B) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (C) (ii) (i) (v) (iv) (D) (v) (ii) (iv) (ii) 2549. Arrange different codes according to year of origin (A) Anthony Pannizi code , Cutte r's rules for dictionary catalogue, Classified catalogue code, Anglo American cat. Rules-II (B) Anthony Pannizi code, Classified catalogue code, Cutter's rules of dictionary catalogue, Anglo American cat. Rules-II

(C) Anthony Pannizi code, Anglo American cat. Rules-II, Classified catalogue code, Cutter's rules for dictionary catalogue (D) Anthony Pannizi code , Cutte r's rules of dictionary catalogue, Anglo American cat. Rules-II classified catalogue code 2550. Arrange the following according to the year of publication (A) Encyclopaedia Britannica, Encyclopaedia Americana, Encyclopaedia of Library & Information science, McGraw-Hill Encyclopedia of Science & Technology (B) Encyclopaedia Britannica, Encyclopaedia of Library & Information Science, McGraw-Hill Encyclopaedia of Science & Technology, Encyclopaedia Americana (C) Encyclopaedia Britannica, Encyclopaedia Americana, McGraw-Hill Encyclopaedia of Science & Technology, Encyclopaedia of Library & Information science (D) Encyclopaedia Britannica, McGrawHill Encyclopedia of Science & Technology, Encyclopaedia Americana, Encyclopaedia of Library & Information Science 2551. Arrange the following associations in the order of year of establishment (A) SIS, IASLIC, IATLIS, ILA (B) IASLIC, ILA, SIS, IATLIS (C) ILA, SIS, IASLIC, IATLIS (D) ILA, IASLIC, IATLIS, SIS 2552. Arrange the following Act according to year of enactment (A) Copyright Act, The patent Act, information Tech. Act, IPR Act (B) The patent Act, copyright Act, information Tech. Act, IPR Act (C) Copyright Act, IPR Act, The patent Act, information Tech. Act (D) Copyright Act, The patent Act, IPR Act, information Tech. Act 2553. Arrange different codes according to year of origin

704 D Library and Information Science Specific (A) Ant hony Pannizi cod e , c utte r’s rules for dictionary catalogue, classified catalogue code, Anglo American cat. Rules-II (B) Anthony Pannizi code, classified catalogue code, cutter’s rules of dictionary catalogue, Anglo American cat. Rules-II (C) Anthony Pannizi code, Anglo American cat. Rules-II, classified catalogue code, cutter’s rules for dictionary catalogue (D) Ant hony Pannizi cod e , c utte r’s rules of dictionary catalogue Anglo American cat. Rules-II classified catalogue code 2554. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Conventional (i) Pate nts (b) Neo-conventional (ii) Printed Books (c) Non-conventional (iii) Sate llite imageries (d) Meta documents (iv) Audio- visual material Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (C) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) (D) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) 2555. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Library is a (i) Kothari people’s University (b) Library is a (ii) Urquart growing organisation (c) Library can be (iii) Ranganathan useful to society (d) Library is the heart(iv) Sayajirao of the University Gayakwad Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (B) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) (C) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) (D) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) 2556. Match the following List-I (a) P. Wassermann

List-II (i) Line of thinking

(b) P. Atherton

(c) J.H. Shera (d) Maurice B. Line

Codes : (a) (b) (A) (i) (ii) (B) (ii) (i) (C) (iv) (iii) (D) (iii) (iv)

(c) (iii) (iii) (i) (ii)

2557. Match the following List-I (a) Theory of X & Y (b) Scientific management (c) Need hierarchy (d) Theory Z Codes : (a) (b) (c) (A) (iii) (ii) (i) (B) (iv) (iii) (ii) (C) (ii) (i) (iv) (D) (iv) (i) (iii)

(ii) Foundation of Education for Librarianship (iii) Ne w Librarianship (iv) Putting knowledge to work (d) (iv) (iv) (ii) (i) List-II (i) Frederic Taylor (ii) Ouchi (iii) A. Maslow (iv) D. Me Grager (d) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii)

2558. Match the following List-I List-II (a) UDC (i) H.E. Bliss (b) DDC (ii) C.A. Cutter (c) Expansive (iii) Otlat and classification La Fontane (d) Bibliographic (iv) M. Dewey classification Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) (B) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (C) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (D) (i) (i) (iii) (iv) 2559. Match the following List-I List-II (a) British Library (i) Russia (b) Bibliotheque National (ii) USA (c) Lenin Library (iii) UK (d) Library of Congress (iv) France

Multiple Choice Questions D 705 Codes : (a) (A) (iv) (B) (i) (C) (iii) (D) (iii)

(b) (iii) (ii) (iv) (iv)

(c) (i) (iii) (i) (ii)

(d) (ii) (iv) (ii) (i)

2560. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Windows (i) A revolving disc on which data is stored (b) Microprocessor (ii) It is used for processing of text (c) Wordprocessor (iii) Collection of programmes for computer system (d) Software (iv) A graphical user interface working as Dos Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (B) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (C) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (D) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 2561. Match the following List-I List-II (Year (Library Act) of Enactment) (a) Orissa (i) 2006 (b) Goa (ii) 2005 (c) Uttaranchal (iii) 2001 (d) Uttar Pradesh (iv) 1994 Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (C) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (D) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) 2562. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Software (i) Key board (b) Hardware (ii) CD (c) Storage Device (iii) SOUL (d) I/O Device (iv) CPU Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (D) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i)

2563. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Planning (i) Delegation of authority (b) Staffing (ii) Audit (c) Control (iii) Promotion (d) Organising (iv) Resource management Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (C) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) (D) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) Direction (Q.no. 2564-2568): Read the p as sage given belo w, an d ans wer th e Q uest io ns th at f ol l ow b as ed on y our understanding of the passage : The growth of the Internet and its ubiquitous use in study and work creates new areas of concern. Town (2003) notes the problem of information illiteracy within higher education: Students are relying uniformly on the web and show a lack of understanding about the resources available to them “because all the information is in the same place”. The web may have “changed everything” but in doing so it has created a new problem of information illiteracy; that of false confidence in the Internet as a complete information resource (Town, 2003). There is such a proliferation of content across such a range of areas, available with such immediacy that the she e r vo lum e of informat ion can se e m ov e rwhe lm ing . Fo r s uffe re rs o f this “Information anxiety” the simplicity of the Google search interface must act as a claiming tonic. It is not demanding of the information seeker in the formation of search terms and almost always produces vast numbers of hits. It even helps out with your spelling. Faced with such a bewildering array of electronic sources of information the ease and immediacy of retrieval becomes as important as the quality of the resources re trie ve d . This may be the mo st significant challenge to the information profession in the information society, to

706 D Library and Information Science Specific map and s ignp ost the infor mati on landscape. This has been the traditional ro le o f t he l ibr arian and w hil st t he information domain is changing the core principles of the profession remain as important to society as ever.

seem overwhelming and may cause “Information anxiety”. (D) It is easy to find relevant and useful information across a range of areas from the web without getting oneself bewildered.

2564. (A) The growth of the Internet and its ubiquitous use in study and work creates new areas of concern. The most important one being information illiteracy in higher education. (B) The growth of the Internet enables people pursuing higher education. Information literate helps them in their study and work. (C) Internet use in higher education promotes information literacy and provides complete information resource. (D) Students who use the Internet gain real confidence in the Internet as a complete information source.

2567. (A) The most significant challenge to the information profession in information society is to map and signpost the information landscape. This has been the traditional role of the librarian and whilest the information domain is changing the core principles of the profession remain as important to society. (B) The Internet does not pose significant challenges to the information profession. (C) The role of librarians is not to map and signpost the information landscape. (D) While the information domain is changing the core principles of the profession also should change.

2565. (A) Information once recorded into the web remains static and can be utilized by the users of the web as and when they need it. (B) The Web may have “changed everything”, but in doing so it has created a new problem of information illiteracy; that of false confidence in the internet as a complete information resource. (C) The student of higher education may re ly comple te ly on Interne t re sources. (D) Students who completely rely on the Internet uniformly do not lack understanding about the resources available to them. 2566. (A) The large volume of content available on Internet across a range of areas does not create any “Information anxiety” in the users of the Internet. (B) Information available on the Web across subject areas is of manageable proportions and does not bewilder the users of the Internet. (C) There is proliferation of content across such range of areas, available with such immediacy that the sheer volume of information can

2568. (A) Retrieving pe rtinent information from the Internet is not demanding of the information seeker in the formulation of search terms and almost always produces vast number of hits. (B) There is no user friendly search engine to help the information seeker to acce ss pe rtinent information necessary for his work. (C) The quality of information retrieved from the Internet is of high precision and does not pose problems to the user. (D) ‘Information anxiety’ created by the bewildering nature of Internet is made simple by the user friendly qu ali ty asso ciate d wi th G oog le se arch inte rface . This inte rface ac ts as a tonic and he l ps t he inform ati on se e k e r e ve n wi th spelling. Direction (Q.no. 2569-2572): Read the passage below and answer the questions that follow based on your understanding of the passage. There are many driving forces for the introduction of good records management

Multiple Choice Questions D 707 procedures within organisations. Some of the reasons are driven by negative factors such as liability, disaster recovery and protection against breach of intellectual property rights. Others are positive, such as more effective operation of administrative procedures, continuity and more efficient use of resources such as people and space. We can start with legal obligations. Government departments and many non-departmental public bodies are required to keep records to a particular standard under the Public Records Acts. All limited companies are required to keep basic business records under the Companies Acts and particular industries such as the oil industry, pharmaceutical companies and financial advisers are covered by specific regulations which govern record keeping. Companies that sell services or manufacture products for sale to the general public are increasingly aware of the dangers of litigation that can arise if a product is implicated in injury or death of a customer. In many cases the defence against litigation is centred around records that can demonstrate that the company was not negligent and that it was working to the best practice of the time when the problem occurred. This protection against litigation is becoming increasingly important in the public sector as government departments and agencies are becoming more accountable to the general public. Some industries are based on intellectual property whether this be music, written work, videos, trade marks or patents. Protection against theft of intellectual property depends almost entirely on keeping the relevant records and protecting them against damage. Ownership of property depends on written title deeds. Contracts are another valuable asset that need to be managed and kept in suitable conditions. A key role for records managers in many or gani sat ions is pro te c tion of vit al records. This helps to ensure effective recovery from disasters. This is especially important in information intensive activities such as finance, research and devel-

opment, sales and marketing. Precautions such as keeping off-site copies of documents and adequate protection against fire, flood and theft fall within the remit of records management. For many organisations the only tangible evidence of their past existence is the business records and archives. The history of a company can play an important part in its ongoing sense of identity and records can play a significant role in this process. The benefits of this sense of continuity may not be as easy to qualify but they are nonetheless important. Minutes of board meetings and of departmental groups and committees can provide a useful commentary on the company and an indication of its future direction. These factors can be particularly relevant during a period of change, such as that following a merger, take-over or change of ownership. Finally, records management is a key to e ffe ctive use of re source s within an organisation. 2569. The positive factors warranting records management in organisations are : 1. Efficient use of resources 2. Effective operation of procedures 3. Easy management 4. Quick management (A) 1 and 4 are correct (B) 3 and 4 are correct (C) 1 and 3 are correct (D) 1 and 2 are correct 2570. Ownership of property depends on (A) Companies Act (B) Public Records Act (C) Contracts (D) Written Title Deeds 2571. Which of the following statements is incorrect? (A) Protection against litigation is not important (B) Contracts are valuable assets that need to be managed (C) Business records and archives are the only tangible evidence of their past incidence (D) Liability is a driving force towards the need for good records management 2572. Which of the following statements is correct

708 D Library and Information Science Specific (A) Protection against theft of intellectual property does not depend on maintenance of records (B) Precaution against fire, flood and theft does not fall with the remit of records management (C) Records can play a significant role in the history of a company (D) Records need not be maintained to a particular standard Direction (Q.no. 2573-2577): Read the passage given below, and answer the question based on your understanding of the passage Stock verification implies the physical check-up of the articles on record. It is a common practice in big busine ss houses and government departments to resort to annual stock-taking in order to assess the profit or loss. They try to find out as to what has been sold out and what has been left behind so that a proper quantity of a particular item may be procured for future sale. There is a practice to differentiate between stock and store articles. More importance is attached to stock articles since these are of permanent value and are likely to remain longer in use whereas the store articles are consumable. An analogous example can be cited by referring to two kinds of leaves i.e. earned and casual leaves allowed to employe e s. The forme r can be cumulate d whereas the latter cannot be cumulated since it is consumable and lapsable. Naturally, more importance is attached to the former one. Every employee tries to avail of the casual leave first before he requests for earned leave. The similar distinction is made between stock and store or stationery articles. A typewriter is a stock article while a pencil is a store article since the latter is likely to be used up soon. So little importance is attached to the store or stationery articles. The underlying idea behind this differentiation is the awareness of the sense of property which is a gift of the capitalist economy. 2573. “Stock verification is a common practice in the following agencies only”.

Choose the correct answer to justify it (A) libraries, government offices and hospitals (B) libraries, government offices and residences (C) libraries, government offices and business houses (D) go ve rnme nt o ffic e s, bu sine ss houses and hotels 2574. “Annual stock taking is usually done in order to assess profit and loss” Choose the correct answer to justify it (A) The statement is false (B) The statement is true (C) The statement is partially true only (D) None of the above statements are correct 2575. Choose the correct answer from the following (A) Stock articles are consumables (B) Stock articles remain no longer in use (C) Stock articles are not permanent (D) Stock article s are of pe rmane nt value 2576. Choose the correct answer from the following (A) Casual leaves of employees are not consumable (B) Casual leaves are subject to cumulation (C) Casual leaves are not subject to cumulation (D) Casual leaves are not lapsable 2577. Choose the right answer from the following The type writer is a stock article because (A) It is a consumable; (B) Little importance is attached to it; (C) It is not a stationary article; (D) It is to be used up soon. 2578. Match the following : List – I List – II a. User Education i. James I Wyer b. Conservative, ii. Patricia B. Liberal and Knapp Moderate Theory of Reference Service

Multiple Choice Questions D 709 c.

Minimum, iii. Eugene P. Middling and Sheehy Maximum Theories of Reference Service d. Guide to iv. Samuel Reference Book Rothstein Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) ii i iv iii (B) i ii iv iii (C) iii ii iv i (D) iv iii i ii 2579. Match the following : List – I List – II a. W. Edward i. Quality Control Deming Circles b. Joseph M. Juranii. TQM c. Armand V. iii. Planning, Control, Feigenbaum Improvement d. Kaoru iv. Plan, Do, Ishikava Check, Act (PDCA) Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) ii iii iv i (B) iv ii i iii (C) iii iv i ii (D) iv iii ii i 2580. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Encyclopaedia i. Secondary of Associations sources b. Whitaker’s ii. Primary Almanac sources c. LISA iii. Directories d. Economic Times iv. Yearbooks Codes : (a) (A) iii (B) iv (C) ii (D) i

(b) iv iii i iv

(c) i i iv iii

(d) ii ii iii ii

2581. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Books in Print i. National Bibliography b. Social Science ii. Trade A Bibliography Bibliography

of Doctoral Dissertations c. Asian Social Science Bibliography d. Cumulative Book Index Codes : (a) (A) ii (B) i (C) iv (D) iii

(b) i iii i ii

(c) iv ii ii i

iii. National & Trade Bibliography iv. Subject Bibliography (d) iii iv iii iv

2582. Match the following : List – I a. Dictionary

List – II i. Foreign Language ii. Synonymous terms iii. Words, Synonyms iv. Specific subjects

b. Glossary c.

Thesaurus

d. Lexicon Codes : (a) (A) iii (B) iv (C) i (D) ii

(b) iv iii ii iv

(c) ii i iv iii

(d) i ii iii i

2583. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Curriculum Developi. 2001 ment Committee (P.N. Kaula) b. Curriculum Development ii. 1992 Committee (C.R. Karrisidappa) c. Working Group iii. 1910 on Libraries d. Library Movement iv. 1964 in Baroda Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) ii i iv iii (B) i ii iv iii (C) iv ii iii i (D) iii iv ii i 2584. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Current Biography i. Russia

710 D Library and Information Science Specific b. Index Translationum c. VINITI d. Library Trends Codes : (a) (b) (c) (A) iii iv i (B) iv i ii (C) i ii iii (D) ii iii iv

ii. University of Illinois iii. U.S.A. iv. UNESCO (d) ii iii iv i

2585. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Herbert i. The Elements Hicks of Administration b. F.W. Taylor ii. The Management of Organisation c. Henry Fayol iii. Scientific Management d. Colonel L. iv. Administrative Urwick Management Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) i iv ii iii (B) iv ii iii i (C) ii iii iv i (D) iii iv i ii 2586. Assertion (A) : In the study of History, as an academic discipline, a primary source is an artefact, a document, a recording or other source of information that was created during the event or immediately after the event. Reason (R) : Primary sources are conside re d as original material or evidences about the topic and are fundamental to history. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 2587. Assertion (A) : Indian National Bibliography is the most comprehensive source of Indian publications. Reason (R) : National Library of Kolkata is entitled to receive one copy of each Indian publication under Delivery of Book Act.

Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 2588. Assertion (A) : As per the generally accepted principles of construction of statistical tabulation, every table should have a clear, concise and adequate title so as to make the table intelligible without reference to the text and this title should always be placed just below the body of the table. Reason (R) : A statistical table which reflects its title just above the table and supply information about several interrelated characteristics of data makes the table unwield and inconvenient. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) Both (A) and (R) are false. (C) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (D) (A) is false, but (R) is true. 2589. Assertion (A) : Knowledge Management involves a number of assets and value added to them. Reason (R) : Knowledge Management is the core activity of information transfer. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (B) (A) is true, but (R) is partially true. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) (A) is partially true but (R) is true. 2590. Assertion (A) : According to Horton and Merchant, information is a commodity like other resources. Reason (R) : Information is a tangible commodity. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (B) Both (A) and (R) are false. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) (A) is false, (R) is true. 2591. Assertion (A) : Reference section in a Library became insignificant. Reason (R) : The Web. 2.0 services replaces the reference desk services.

Multiple Choice Questions D 711 Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true. (C) Both (A) and (R) are false. (D) (A) is false and (R) is true. 2592. Assertion (A) : Newspaper Digests are the best sources of information to get current and authentic information like books. Reason (R) : These sources are compiled by going through various newspapers. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) (A) is partially true but (R) is true. (C) Both (A) and (R) are false. (D) (A) is true but (R) is partially true. 2593. Assertion (A) : Encyclopaedias have been regarded as the substitute of all categories of reference sources as these provide all types of information. Reason (R) : Encyclopaedias provide comprehensive information on all aspects which otherwise are scattered in di ffe r e nt cat e gor ie s of re f e re nce sources. Codes : (A) (R) is true but (A) is false. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true. (C) (A) is true but (R) is false. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 2594. Assertion (A) : Chi-square is an important non-parametric test which does not require rigid assumptions in respect of the type of population being studied. Reason (R) : Since c2 is a nonparametric test, it requires only the degrees of fre edom (implicitly, the size of the population) for using the test. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true. (C) (A) is false but (R) is true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 2595. Assertion (A) : Information is commodity. Reason (R) : Commodity is a marketable item produced to satisfy human

wants or needs. Codes : (A) (A) is false, and (R) is true. (B) (R) is false and (A) is true. (C) Both (A) and (R) are false. (D) Both (A) and (R) are true. Read the passage given below and answer the questions based on your understanding of the passage (Q. No. 2596-2600) : According to Wikipedia ‘social media’ is me dia designe d to be disseminated through social interaction, created using highly accessible and scalable publishing techniques. According to search engine partner, the term social media describes media that is posed by the user and can take many different forms. Some type of social media are forums, me ssag e b oard s, blo gs, wik is and podcarts. Social media applications include Google, Facebook and You tube. In social media, communication takes place through messages, status updates, voice chats etc. or through photos/vide os sharing, game s, virtual goods etc. Antony Mayfield in his e-book titled ‘What is Social Media’ ? has defined social media as online media, which encourages contributions and feedback from everyone who is interested, is open to feedback and participation, is a two way conversation, allows communities to form quickly and communicate effectively to share common interests and thrive on their connectedness. The growth of social media is phenomenal. It is being used by all netizens all over the world to a great extent in all areas including business, government, fashion etc. A research conducted by the Institute for Prospective Technological Studies (IPTS) indicates that high take up of social media application outside formal educational settings provides new opportunities for innovation and modernisation. With this growing trend, political leaders have also realized its importance as an effective tool to spread awareness and to reach out their voters. Democratic presidential candidate Barack Obama used it during the Presidential

712 D Library and Information Science Specific elections. Since then, social media is being highly used by a number of politicians all over the world. Myspace has more than 7400 discussion groups related to politics. According to a survey by manpower, 29% of the companies in America and 20% of companies worldwide have a social media policy. People even update themselves through micro-blogging on every aspect of human life including the natural and human diasters. In China, Twitter became the first media in the world to break the news of the Wenzhou earthquake. Social media is being used in fashion industry as well to generate interest in a brand through publicity across online communities and websites. India is one of the most culturally, linguistically and genetically diverse regions having more than one billion people. It is ranked third in Asia in terms of the internet users and quite a number of them are using social media. In fact, approximate ly 60 mil lions t o 65 mi llio ns netizens in India open most of their time on social media/networking sites. 2596. Who defined social media as ‘online media’ which encourages contributions and feedback from everyone who is interested ? (A) Wikepedia (B) Institute for Prospective Technological Studies (IPTS) (C) Myspace (D) Antony Myfield 2597. Who used the social media for conversing during recent Presidential Election in U.S.A. ? (A) Jimmy Carter (B) Barack Obama (C) George Bush (D) John F. Kennedy 2598. In China, which social media became the first media to break the news of earthquake ? (A) Facebook (B) Youtube (C) Twitter (D) Myzamana 2599. In Asia, which country is ranked third in terms of using social media by the people ?

(A) China (C) Japan

(B) Pakistan (D) India

2600. Which social website has more than 7400 discussion groups relate to politics ? (A) Orkut (B) Myspace (C) Facebook (D) Twitter 2601. Who started Reference Service in India, for the first time? (A) W. A. Borden (B) A. D. Dickinson (C) B. S. Kesavan (D) Ranganathan 2602. ‘That reference service is the contact between the right reader and the right book at the right time and in the right personal way’ is stated by (A) D.J. Foskett (B) S.R. Ranganathan (C) James I. Wyer (D) A.L.A. Glossary of Library Terms 2603. Personal assistance to the user in getting his desired document/information is called (A) user education (B) selective dissemination of information (C) reference service (D) current awareness service 2604. In which year reference service was started in USA? (A) 1873 (B) 1875 (C) 1905 (D) 1872 2605. Who was the first Librarian to use the phrase ‘reference interview’? (A) J. C. M. Hanson (B) J. Mills (C) S. R. Ranganathan (D) Margaret Hutchins 2606. How many steps are taken in answering a reference question? (A) 4 (B) 9 (C) 7 (D) 10 2607. In India, the first book on reference service was written by (A) S. R. Ranganathan (B) P. N. Kaula (C) B. S. Kesavan (D) Fazal Elahi

Multiple Choice Questions D 713 2608. In which university library of India, the post of reference librarian was first created in 1937 ? (A) B.H.U. (B) Calcutta (C) A.M.U. (D) Madras 2609. Who had given the ‘Minimal, Middling and Maximum’ theories of reference service? (A) C. M. Winchell (B) S. R. Ranganathan (C) James I Wyer (D) S. Rothstein 2610. Time is very important factor between which of the following? (A) Indexing & abstracting services (B) Reference & documentation services (C) Short range & long range reference services (D) CAS and SDI services 2611. Who is the author of “Subject Catalogue”? (A) E. J. Coates (B) J. Kaiser (C) C. A. Cutter (D) J. W. Metcalfe 2612. In cataloguing, the square brackets [ ] are used (A) to enclose information taken from outside (B) to enclose the details of printed / manufacturer (C) to enclose series statements (D) to enclose statement of accompanying material 2613. Which Section of AACR – II (R) deals with serial publications? (A) Part – A, Section – 3 (B) Part – B, Section – 3 (C) Part – A, Section – 12 (D) Part – B, Section – 12 2614. A version of KWIC augmented with author/name is called (A) WADEX (B) KWOC (C) KWAC (D) KWIC 2615. ‘CODEN’ is connected with (A) Books (B) Serials (C) Reports (D) Gray Literature 2616. Corollary for Second Law of Library Science is (A) Books for all

(B) Free Books Service (C) Free Library Service (D) Books every where 2617. National Knowledge Network is to be implemented by (A) National Knowledge Commission (B) Information and Library Network (C) National Information Centre (D) Department of Information Technology 2618. Z39.50 is a standard for (A) Communication formats (B) Search and Retrieval services (C) Cataloguing Web Resources (D) Library Management Services 2619. In context to modulation, PCM stands for (A) Pulse Code Modulation (B) Phase Control Modulation (C) Popular Code Modulation (D) Penultimate Code Modulation 2620. ISO 9000 standard denotes the (A) consistence conformance of a product or service to a given set of standard or expectations (B) Total customer satisfaction (C) Representation of stakeholders issue s (D) Detaile d list of measuring te chniques 2621. As specified by AACR-II (R), the source of information for machine readable data file is (A) Internal user label (B) Title page (C) Colophone (D) Title frame 2622. When a source referred to once in the footnote is referred to again and between them no other reference (i.e. citation) intervenes, then the footnote uses the abbreviation (A) Ibid (B) Id (C) Op.Cit (D) None of the above 2623. What is information? (A) Product of different types of human activities and events

714 D Library and Information Science Specific (B) Human thoughts (C) Process of achieving knowledge (D) Explosion of knowledge 2624. Who said that Information is product and process both? (a) Foskett (b) J. Martin (c) Ranganathan (d) S. C. Bradford 2625. When was the word Information first used? (A) 1959 (B) 1949 (C) 1960 (D) 1952 2626. Knowledge can be synonymised as which of the following? (A) Organised body of information (B) Organised body of facts (C) Books and documents (D) Data and information 2627. Which is the real process of gaining knowledge from information? (A) Data, knowledge and information (B) Information, knowledge and data (C) Data, information and knowledge (D) Information, data and knowledge 2628. Information can be categorized into which of the following three parts? (A) Analytical, statistical and systematic (B) Logical, analytical and statistical (C) Systematic, analytical and descriptive (D) Statistical, descriptive and analytical 2629. Modes of formation of subject is the part of which process of the library? (A) Accessioning (B) Classification (C) Documentation (D) Cataloguing 2630. The organisation of information and knowledge is done in the libraries by (A) documentation (B) classification (C) cataloguing (D) information service 2631. If we compare information and knowledge with yarn and the process of preparing cloth by it, then the information will be equivalent to

(A) yarn (C) cloth

(B) cotton (D) weaving

2632. Complex subjects are obtained by which mode of formation of subjects? (A) Fission (B) Cluster (C) Loose Assemblage (D) Fusion 2633. Pure subjects are obtained by which of the following mode of formation of subjects? (A) Denudation (B) Fusion (C) Fission (D) Distillation 2634. Who gave the term Modes of formation of subjects? (A) J. Martin (B) Ranganathan (C) D. J. Foskett (D) S. C. Bradford 2635. Oceanography is obtained by which mode for formation of subjects? (A) Fusion (B) Cluster (C) Dissection (D) Distillation 2636. Formation of chains is due to the result of which mode of formation of subjects? (A) Denudation (B) Fusion (C) Dissection (D) Fission 2637. Who devised first bibliographic classification scheme? (A) Bacon (B) Dewey (C) Bliss (D) Gesner 2638. The subjects such as Natural Sciences, Social Science, Humanities are obtained by which mode of formation of subjects? (A) Agglomeration (B) Cluster (C) Denudation (D) Distillation 2639. What is the (A) Division (B) Division (C) Division (D) Division

meaning of Decachotomy? into two into five into ten into hundred

2640. Basic subjects are obtained by which mode of formation of subjects? (A) Fission (B) Fusion (C) Distillation (D) Denudation 2641. The subjects such as Bio-chemistry or Bio-technology are the examples of generation of new subjects by which of the following mode of formation of subjects? (A) Fusion (B) Fission

Multiple Choice Questions D 715 (C) Loose Assemblage (D) Cluster 2642. Which of the following is meant for bringing together the related documents of same subject at one place? (A) Classification (B) Cataloguing (C) Indexing (D) Documentation 2643. The mode by which a thing can be rolled into a ball or together in a round manner is called (A) agglomeration (B) fission (C) fusion (D) denudation 2644. Flowering plants and non-flowering plants is the provision obtained by which mode of formation of subjects? (A) Denudation (B) Dissection (C) Lamination (D) Fission 2645. The classification of things according to size, colour, etc. is called (A) natural classification (B) artificial classification (C) logical classification (D) library classification 2646. Cluster was formerly known as which mode of formation of subjects? (A) Denudation (B) Fission (C) Loose Assemblage (D) Subjects bundle 2647. The proce sse s of dichotomy or decachotomy in classification are related with which of the following? (A) Tree of Pypheri (B) Method of Residue (C) PMEST (D) Chain Procedure 2648. Who was the first scholar of book classification? (A) Dewey (B) Bacon (C) Harris (D) Ranganathan 2649. Who wrote the book Prolegomena? (A) Melvil Dewey (B) P. B. Mangla (C) H. E. Bliss (D) S. R. Ranganathan 2650. The name of Gesner is related to which of the following?

(A) (B) (C) (D)

Classification Cataloguing Book Selection Management

2651. What is called that theory which was marked by the recognition and separation of three planes of work? (A) Semantic theory of classification (B) Dynamic theory of classification (C) Advanced theory of classification (D) Brookes theory of information 2652. Who wrote the book Grammar to Classification? (A) S. R. Ranganathan (B) C. A. Cutter (C) W. C. B. Sayers (D) Melvil Dewey 2653. Which is the olde st classification scheme in the following? (A) UDC (B) DDC (C) EC (D) CC 2654. Method of Residue is to find out (A) personality facet (B) matter facet (C) energy facet (D) time facet 2655. When two or more canons or principles of classification lead to conflicting or equally valid alternate decisions, what helps in deciding the situation? (A) Five Laws of Library Science (B) Basic Laws (C) Canons of classification (D) Normative Principle 2656. Who is the Chief Architect of the Dynamic Theory of Library Classification? (A) Richardsen (B) Ranganathan (C) Dewey (D) Bacon 2657. What are three planes of work which are recognised by dynamic theory of classification? (A) Idea, verbal and notational planes (B) Verbal, oral and notational planes (C) Oral, verbal and written planes (D) Verbal, written and printed planes 2658. The book Prolegomena is related with which subject? (A) Classification (B) Cataloguing (C) Management (D) Book selection

716 D Library and Information Science Specific 2659. Who de vise d Decimal Classification Scheme (DDC)? (A) Melvil Dewey (B) Ranganathan (C) W. C. B. Sayers (D) H. E. Bliss 2660. APUPA pattern is related with which process? (A) Classification (B) Cataloguing (C) Acquisition (D) Documentation 2661. Who wrote the book Manual of Library Classification and Shelf Arrangement? (A) James Duff Brown (B) C. A. Cutter (C) W. C. B. Sayers (D) H. E. Bliss 2662. What is the role of canons propounded by Ranganathan in classification? (A) These day down the principles for classification (B) These deal with the details of the arrangement of the isolates (C) These lay down the rhythm of classification (D) These lay down the process of work in the idea plane 2663. Canons for idea, verbal and notional planes formulated by Ranganathan are called the cannons of (A) facet sequence (B) catalogue (C) classification (D) helpful sequence 2664. How many canons are formulated by Ranganathan for classification? (A) 35 (B) 20 (C) 39 (D) 43 2665. What is the most significant contribution to the theory of classification enunciated by Ranganathan? (A) Postulates of Analytico-synthetic scheme (B) Postulates of PMEST (C) Postulates of facet analysis (D) All the above 2666. What do you know about the Principle of Literary Warrant? (A) Literature justifies a place for a subject in a classification scheme

(B) A classification scheme also provides a main class to literature (C) Literature is the only subject which can get a place in classification scheme (D) Literature cannot provide a place for a subject in a classification scheme 2667. Cow-calf, whole organ, act-and-actionactor-tool, these are 3 principles of Facet sequence, which one is the fourth principle? (A) Principle of PMEST (B) Principle of Parsimoni (C) Wall-picture principle (D) Principle of Osmosis 2668. Which one principle of helpful sequence is the most popular and has much utility in classification? (A) Later in time (B) Alphabetical sequence (C) Literary warrant (D) Increasing complexity 2669. What is called the sequence in which five fundamental categories of a subject are arranged according to their decreasing concreteness? (A) Helpful sequence (B) Facet sequence (C) Cardinal sequence (D) Ordinal sequence 2670. Principle of Literary Warrant was enunciated by (A) A. Hulme (B) C. A. Cutter (C) Ranganathan (D) Bliss 2671. The number of principles of Facet sequence formulated by Dr. Ranganathan are (A) 4 (B) 3 (C) 7 (D) 9 2672. Cannon of characteristic is a cannon of which plane? (A) Idea plane (B) Notational plane (C) Verbal plane (D) Classification 2673. UNITERM Indexing Syste m was invented by (A) C. Moores (B) H. P. Luhn (C) M. Taube (D) Allen Kent

Multiple Choice Questions D 717 2674. The first edition of DDC was published in the year (A) 1872 (B) 1874 (C) 1876 (D) 1880

2684. In which classification scheme Zero (0) is the only indicator digit? (A) DDC (B) SC (C) CC (D) UDC

2675. Equal sign = is used in UDC to indicate (A) Form (B) Time (C) Language (D) Space

2685. Science Citation Index was brought out by (A) Institute for Scientific Information, Princeton (B) Institute for Scientific Information, Philadelphia (C) Institute for Social and Scientific Information (D) None of the above

2676. CCF stands for (A) Common Cataloguing Format (B) Common Classification Format (C) Common Communication Format (D) None of the above 2677. Controlled vocabulary in indexing is called (A) dictionary of synonymous (B) list of subject heading (C) a thesaurus (D) language of synonymous 2678. Who is the deviser of DDC? (A) Melvil Dewey (B) J. D. Brown (C) Ranganathan (D) C. A. Cutter 2679. Who developed PRECIS? (A) E. J. Coates (B) H. P. Luhn (C) Derek Austin (D) D. J. Foskett 2680. What is the name of the Index of DDC? (A) Main Index (B) Subject Index (C) Relative Index (D) Index 2681. The mode of formation of subjects ‘Fission’ gives (A) canonical subjects (B) coordinate subject (C) basic subjects (D) subordinate subjects 2682. P-notes are used in which of the following classification scheme? (A) CC (B) DDC (C) UDC (D) SC 2683. A scheme, mostly used in libraries is (A) UDC (B) DDC (C) CC (D) SC

2686. How hospitality in chain can be taken? (A) Alphabetical device (B) Octave device (C) Gap device (D) Superimposition device 2687. Which of the following classification scheme does not enumerate compound subjects? (A) DDC (B) CC (C) SC (D) LC 2688. Which of the following types of schedules CC provides? (A) Form divisions (B) Common Isolates (C) Auxiliary tables (D) Standard Sub-divisions 2689. Which type of scheme is UDC? (A) Freely Faceted (B) Almost Faceted (C) Almost Enumerative (D) Enumerative 2690. Which of the following is the complex subject? (A) Study of Classification (B) Study of Public Libraries (C) Study of Library Science (D) Study of Classification & Cataloguing

718 D Library and Information Science Specific

ü

ANSWERS

1. (B)

2. (B)

3. (B)

11. (D)

12. (D)

13. (D)

21. (B)

22. (B)

23. (D)

4. (C)

5. (B)

6. (B)

7. (D)

8. (C)

9. (C)

10. (D)

14. (B)

15. (C)

16. (D)

17. (A)

18. (A)

19. (D)

20. (D)

24. (D)

25. (B)

26. (C)

27. (A)

28. (B)

29. (D)

30. (B)

31. (C)

32. (D)

33. (A)

34. (D)

35. (C)

36. (D)

37. (B)

38. (B)

39. (C)

40. (A)

41. (B)

42. (B)

43. (A)

44. (B)

45. (C)

46. (D)

47. (D)

48. (C)

49. (C)

50. (D)

51. (B)

52. (B)

53. (C)

54. (A)

55. (D)

56. (A)

57. (B)

58. (D)

59. (C)

60. (A)

61. (C)

62. (D)

63. (D)

64. (C)

65. (A)

66. (B)

67. (D)

68. (C)

69. (D)

70. (A)

71. (C)

72. (D)

73. (A)

74. (D)

75. (A)

76. (B)

77. (A)

78. (C)

79. (A)

80. (A)

81. (C)

82. (A)

83. (C)

84. (B)

85. (B)

86. (A)

87. (C)

88. (B)

89. (C)

90. (C)

91. (C)

92. (C)

93. (A)

94. (B)

95. (D)

96. (B)

97. (C)

98. (B)

99. (A)

100. (C)

101. (A)

102. (D)

103. (C)

104. (B)

105. (B)

106. (B)

107. (A)

108. (B)

109. (C)

110. (B)

111. (A)

112. (B)

113. (D)

114. (D)

115. (D)

116. (D)

117. (B)

118. (A)

119. (D)

120. (A)

121. (D)

122. (D)

123. (D)

124. (B)

125. (B)

126. (A)

127. (C)

128. (B)

129. (B)

130. (B)

131. (C)

132. (D)

133. (B)

134. (B)

135. (D)

136. (C)

137. (B)

138. (D)

139. (B)

140. (A)

141. (D)

142. (A)

143. (C)

144. (B)

145. (C)

146. (D)

147. (A)

148. (C)

149. (C)

150. (B)

151. (D)

152. (A)

153. (A)

154. (A)

155. (C)

156. (A)

157. (A)

158. (C)

159. (B)

160. (A)

161. (A)

162. (C)

163. (D)

164. (C)

165. (D)

166. (D)

167. (B)

168. (C)

169. (A)

170. (C)

171. (B)

172. (C)

173. (C)

174. (B)

175. (B)

176. (A)

177. (B)

178. (B)

179. (C)

180. (A)

181. (B)

182. (D)

183. (D)

184. (C)

185. (B)

186. (B)

187. (C)

188. (A)

189. (A)

190. (D)

191. (C)

192. (C)

193. (D)

194. (B)

195. (C)

196. (B)

197. (A)

198. (C)

199. (C)

200. (A)

201. (C)

202. (D)

203. (B)

204. (C)

205. (B)

206. (B)

207. (B)

208. (A)

209. (D)

210. (B)

211. (D)

212. (C)

213. (D)

214. (C)

215. (A)

216. (A)

217. (D)

218. (C)

219. (B)

220. (A)

221. (C)

222. (D)

223. (C)

224. (A)

225. (B)

226. (B)

227. (C)

228. (C)

229. (C)

230. (B)

231. (C)

232. (D)

233. (A)

234. (D)

235. (C)

236. (A)

237. (A)

238. (A)

239. (C)

240. (C)

241. (C)

242. (B)

243. (A)

244. (C)

245. (A)

246. (A)

247. (A)

248. (A)

249. (C)

250. (C)

251. (C)

252. (B)

253. (C)

254. (C)

255. (A)

256. (B)

257. (C)

258. (C)

259. (B)

260. (C)

261. (D)

262. (A)

263. (A)

264. (D)

265. (D)

266. (C)

267. (A)

268. (B)

269. (B)

270. (C)

271. (A)

272. (B)

273. (C)

274. (D)

275. (B)

276. (C)

277. (D)

278. (B)

279. (B)

280. (C)

281. (D)

282. (B)

283. (A)

284. (D)

285. (D)

286. (C)

287. (D)

288. (A)

289. (B)

290. (B)

291. (A)

292. (A)

293. (B)

294. (B)

295. (D)

296. (A)

297. (B)

298. (C)

299. (B)

300. (A)

301. (B)

302. (A)

303. (C)

304. (A)

305. (A)

306. (D)

307. (D)

308. (C)

309. (C)

310. (A)

311. (C)

312. (D)

313. (B)

314. (D)

315. (B)

316. (B)

317. (B)

318. (D)

319. (A)

320. (B)

321. (B)

322. (A)

323. (A)

324. (C)

325. (D)

326. (B)

327. (C)

328. (D)

329. (C)

330. (A)

331. (B)

332. (A)

333. (A)

334. (D)

335. (C)

336. (C)

337. (B)

338. (C)

339. (D)

340. (A)

341. (A)

342. (B)

343. (B)

344. (D)

345. (D)

346. (D)

347. (B)

348. (D)

349. (A)

350. (B)

351. (A)

352. (B)

353. (B)

354. (C)

355. (A)

356. (C)

357. (A)

358. (D)

359. (B)

360. (D)

361. (B)

362. (C)

363. (C)

364. (B)

365. (C)

366. (A)

367. (B)

368. (B)

369. (C)

370. (A)

371. (D)

372. (A)

373. (A)

374. (A)

375. (B)

376. (C)

377. (B)

378. (A)

379. (A)

380. (A)

Multiple Choice Questions D 719 381. (B)

382. (B)

383. (A)

384. (A)

385. (C)

386. (B)

387. (C)

388. (A)

389. (C)

390. (A)

391. (B)

392. (C)

393. (A)

394. (D)

395. (A)

396. (D)

397. (A)

398. (A)

399. (C)

400. (C)

401. (C)

402. (B)

403. (D)

404. (A)

405. (C)

406. (D)

407. (C)

408. (B)

409. (B)

410. (D)

411. (C)

412. (B)

413. (C)

414. (A)

415. (C)

416. (D)

417. (C)

418. (C)

419. (A)

420. (C)

421. (B)

422. (A)

423. (C)

424. (D)

425. (A)

426. (A)

427. (B)

428. (B)

429. (B)

430. (D)

431. (D)

432. (D)

433. (C)

434. (B)

435. (C)

436. (B)

437. (D)

438. (C)

439. (B)

440. (D)

441. (A)

442. (B)

443. (C)

444. (C)

445. (D)

446. (C)

447. (B)

448. (C)

449. (D)

450. (C)

451. (B)

452. (B)

453. (C)

454. (D)

455. (C)

456. (D)

457. (A)

458. (B)

459. (C)

460. (A)

461. (A)

462. (A)

463. (C)

464. (B)

465. (C)

466. (A)

467. (B)

468. (B)

469. (B)

470. (A)

471. (A)

472. (B)

473. (B)

474. (A)

475. (A)

476. (D)

477. (B)

478. (B)

479. (A)

480. (D)

481. (B)

482. (D)

483. (A)

484. (C)

485. (A)

486. (B)

487. (B)

488. (A)

489. (D)

490. (B)

491. (B)

492. (C)

493. (B)

494. (A)

495. (C)

496. (C)

497. (C)

498. (B)

499. (A)

500. (D)

501. (B)

502. (D)

503. (A)

504. (B)

505. (B)

506. (C)

507. (C)

508. (B)

509. (A)

510. (B)

511. (A)

512. (B)

513. (C)

514. (A)

515. (D)

516. (A)

517. (D)

518. (A)

519. (B)

520. (B) 530. (D)

521. (B)

522. (D)

523. (A)

524. (C)

525. (C)

526. (D)

527. (C)

528. (B)

529. (C)

531. (D)

532. (D)

533. (A)

534. (A)

535. (B)

536. (C)

537. (C)

538. (C)

539. (B)

540. (B)

541. (C)

542. (A)

543. (B)

544. (D)

545. (B)

546. (B)

547. (C)

548. (B)

549. (D)

550. (D)

551. (B)

552. (D)

553. (B)

554. (C)

555. (D)

556. (B)

557. (B)

558. (B)

559. (C)

560. (D)

561. (B)

562. (A)

563. (B)

564. (A)

565. (B)

566. (C)

567. (B)

568. (D)

569. (C)

570. (C)

571. (C)

572. (B)

573. (B)

574. (B)

575. (B)

576. (B)

577. (B)

578. (D)

579. (A)

580. (C)

581. (C)

582. (B)

583. (C)

584. (D)

585. (C)

586. (B)

587. (B)

588. (C)

589. (D)

590. (D)

591. (C)

592. (C)

593. (B)

594. (A)

595. (A)

596. (C)

597. (D)

598. (D)

599. (C)

600. (C)

601. (D)

602. (C)

603. (B)

604. (D)

605. (D)

606. (D)

607. (B)

608. (B)

609. (C)

610. (C)

611. (A)

612. (C)

613. (C)

614. (B)

615. (D)

616. (C)

617. (D)

618. (A)

619. (D)

620. (C)

621. (B)

622. (A)

623. (C)

624. (A)

625. (B)

626. (B)

627. (B)

628. (B)

629. (A)

630. (C)

631. (C)

632. (C)

633. (C)

634. (B)

635. (B)

636. (C)

637. (D)

638. (B)

639. (B)

640. (B)

641. (C)

642. (D)

643. (B)

644. (D)

645. (A)

646. (D)

647. (A)

648. (C)

649. (B)

650. (D)

651. (B)

652. (D)

653. (B)

654. (D)

655. (B)

656. (D)

657. (D)

658. (D)

659. (A)

660. (C)

661. (C)

662. (B)

663. (C)

664. (B)

665. (A)

666. (C)

667. (A)

668. (B)

669. (B)

670. (C)

671. (C)

672. (C)

673. (A)

674. (C)

675. (D)

676. (A)

677. (C)

678. (B)

679. (D)

680. (B)

681. (B)

682. (B)

683. (A)

684. (C)

685. (B)

686. (A)

687. (A)

688. (C)

689. (A)

690. (A)

691. (D)

692. (A)

693. (B)

694. (B)

695. (C)

696. (D)

697. (C)

698. (D)

699. (D)

700. (D)

701. (D)

702. (B)

703. (B)

704. (A)

705. (C)

706. (A)

707. (D)

708. (C)

709. (B)

710. (B)

711. (A)

712. (B)

713. (B)

714. (A)

715. (D)

716. (B)

717. (C)

718. (C)

719. (D)

720. (A)

721. (A)

722. (A)

723. (C)

724. (A)

725. (C)

726. (D)

727. (B)

728. (C)

729. (C)

730. (C)

731. (C)

732. (A)

733. (C)

734. (C)

735. (B)

736. (D)

737. (C)

738. (C)

739. (D)

740. (D)

741. (A)

742. (A)

743. (A)

744. (A)

745. (C)

746. (B)

747. (C)

748. (C)

749. (C)

750. (C)

751. (A)

752. (B)

753. (C)

754. (C)

755. (D)

756. (D)

757. (B)

758. (B)

759. (C)

760. (C)

761. (D)

762. (B)

763. (A)

764. (B)

765. (C)

766. (B)

767. (A)

768. (A)

769. (D)

770. (A)

771. (C)

772. (C)

773. (B)

774. (B)

775. (A)

776. (C)

777. (A)

778. (A)

779. (B)

780. (B)

781. (A)

782. (C)

783. (B)

784. (A)

785. (C)

786. (A)

787. (C)

788. (A)

789. (C)

790. (C)

791. (A)

792. (B)

793. (A)

794. (A)

795. (C)

796. (B)

797. (A)

798. (A)

799. (C)

800. (A)

720 D Library and Information Science Specific 801. (A)

802. (B)

803. (A)

804. (D)

805. (C)

806. (D)

807. (B)

808. (B)

809. (A)

810. (C)

811. (B)

812. (B)

813. (C)

814. (C)

815. (B)

816. (B)

817. (C)

818. (C)

819. (A)

820. (A)

821. (D)

822. (C)

823. (A)

824. (D)

825. (C)

826. (A)

827. (D)

828. (B)

829. (D)

830. (B)

831. (C)

832. (C)

833. (D)

834. (D)

835. (A)

836. (B)

837. (B)

838. (C)

839. (B)

840. (A)

841. (C)

842. (A)

843. (B)

844. (C)

845. (B)

846. (B)

847. (D)

848. (B)

849. (C)

850. (D)

851. (D)

852. (D)

853. (C)

854. (B)

855. (C)

856. (D)

857. (D)

858. (D)

859. (A)

860. (B)

861. (A)

862. (B)

863. (D)

864. (C)

865. (C)

866. (C)

867. (C)

868. (C)

869. (D)

870. (B) 880. (A)

871. (C)

872. (A)

873. (A)

874. (B)

875. (D)

876. (B)

877. (A)

878. (C)

879. (C)

881. (B)

882. (D)

883. (A)

884. (A)

885. (C)

886. (A)

887. (B)

888. (C)

889. (B)

890. (C)

891. (A)

892. (C)

893. (A)

894. (D)

895. (A)

896. (D)

897. (C)

898. (A)

899. (B)

900. (D)

901. (C)

902. (B)

903. (B)

904. (B)

905. (B)

906. (C)

907. (A)

908. (C)

909. (B)

910. (C)

911. (C)

912. (C)

913. (A)

914. (B)

915. (A)

916. (B)

917. (A)

918. (A)

919. (B)

920. (D)

921. (D)

922. (C)

923. (C)

924. (B)

925. (A)

926. (B)

927. (D)

928. (C)

929. (C)

930. (C)

931. (B)

932. (B)

933. (C)

934. (C)

935. (B)

936. (B)

937. (D)

938. (D)

939. (B)

940. (A)

941. (B)

942. (A)

943. (A)

944. (D)

945. (D)

946. (B)

947. (C)

948. (C)

949. (D)

950. (C)

951. (D)

952. (A)

953. (C)

954. (C)

955. (B)

956. (A)

957. (B)

958. (C)

959. (C)

960. (D)

961. (B)

962. (B)

963. (A)

964. (C)

965. (C)

966. (A)

967. (C)

968. (B)

969. (B)

970. (C)

971. (A)

972. (B)

973. (C)

974. (A)

975. (C)

976. (A)

977. (D)

978. (A)

979. (B)

980. (B)

981. (B)

982. (C)

983. (A)

984. (A)

985. (C)

986. (A)

987. (B)

988. (A)

989. (A)

990. (D)

991. (D)

992. (A)

993. (C)

994. (D)

995. (B)

996. (D)

997. (A)

998. (D)

999. (C) 1000. (D)

1001. (C)

1002. (C)

1003. (D)

1004. (D)

1005. (C)

1006. (C)

1007. (B)

1008. (B)

1009. (D) 1010. (C)

1011. (A)

1012. (C)

1013. (B)

1014. (C)

1015. (B)

1016. (D)

1017. (B)

1018. (D)

1019. (B) 1020. (C)

1021. (A)

1022. (B)

1023. (A)

1024. (D)

1025. (B)

1026. (B)

1027. (A)

1028. (B)

1029. (C) 1030. (A)

1031. (A)

1032. (C)

1033. (B)

1034. (A)

1035. (A)

1036. (A)

1037. (D)

1038. (D)

1039. (A) 1040. (B)

1041. (D)

1042. (A)

1043. (D)

1044. (C)

1045. (B)

1046. (B)

1047. (A)

1048. (B)

1049. (D) 1050. (A)

1051. (C)

1052. (B)

1053. (C)

1054. (C)

1055. (C)

1056. (C)

1057. (A)

1058. (C)

1059. (D) 1060. (B)

1061. (A)

1062. (A)

1063. (A)

1064. (A)

1065. (A)

1066. (C)

1067. (D)

1068. (D)

1069. (D) 1070. (B)

1071. (C)

1072. (A)

1073. (B)

1074. (C)

1075. (A)

1076. (B)

1077. (A)

1078. (D)

1079. (B) 1080. (A)

1081. (C)

1082. (C)

1083. (D)

1084. (C)

1085. (B)

1086. (D)

1087. (D)

1088. (D)

1089. (B) 1090. (A)

1091. (C)

1092. (D)

1093. (C)

1094. (B)

1095. (A)

1096. (A)

1097. (C)

1098. (C)

1099. (A) 1100. (C)

1101. (A)

1102. (D)

1103. (C)

1104. (B)

1105. (B)

1106. (B)

1107. (D)

1108. (B)

1109. (B) 1110. (B)

1111. (A)

1112. (A)

1113. (C)

1114. (A)

1115. (C)

1116. (C)

1117. (D)

1118. (A)

1119. (B) 1120. (A)

1121. (B)

1122. (B)

1123. (D)

1124. (D)

1125. (D)

1126. (C)

1127. (C)

1128. (B)

1129. (D) 1130. (A)

1131. (C)

1132. (A)

1133. (D)

1134. (A)

1135. (A)

1136. (A)

1137. (B)

1138. (C)

1139. (C) 1140. (C)

1141. (A)

1142. (A)

1143. (A)

1144. (C)

1145. (A)

1146. (A)

1147. (B)

1148. (B)

1149. (D) 1150. (A)

1151. (B)

1152. (D)

1153. (D)

1154. (C)

1155. (A)

1156. (A)

1157. (B)

1158. (A)

1159. (A) 1160. (C)

1161. (C)

1162. (B)

1163. (B)

1164. (A)

1165. (B)

1166. (A)

1167. (A)

1168. (A)

1169. (A) 1170. (B)

1171. (A)

1172. (B)

1173. (B)

1174. (D)

1175. (B)

1176. (A)

1177. (A)

1178. (A)

1179. (B) 1180. (C)

1181. (C)

1182. (C)

1183. (B)

1184. (B)

1185. (A)

1186. (A)

1187. (B)

1188. (D)

1189. (A) 1190. (B)

1191. (C)

1192. (A)

1193. (D)

1194. (D)

1195. (A)

1196. (C)

1197. (B)

1198. (B)

1199. (B) 1200. (A)

1201. (C)

1202. (A)

1203. (C)

1204. (B)

1205. (B)

1206. (C)

1207. (B)

1208. (B)

1209. (B) 1210. (B)

Multiple Choice Questions D 721 1211. (D)

1212. (C)

1213. (A)

1214. (B)

1215. (A)

1216. (D)

1217. (B)

1218. (C)

1219. (A) 1220. (C)

1221. (B)

1222. (C)

1223. (A)

1224. (C)

1225. (D)

1226. (D)

1227. (A)

1228. (B)

1229. (D) 1230. (B)

1231. (D)

1232. (B)

1233. (B)

1234. (A)

1235. (A)

1236. (D)

1237. (B)

1238. (C)

1239. (D) 1240. (A)

1241. (A)

1242. (A)

1243. (A)

1244. (D)

1245. (A)

1246. (C)

1247. (C)

1248. (A)

1249. (A) 1250. (B)

1251. (A)

1252. (A)

1253. (D)

1254. (A)

1255. (D)

1256. (C)

1257. (B)

1258. (C)

1259. (B) 1260. (A)

1261. (D)

1262. (B)

1263. (D)

1264. (A)

1265. (B)

1266. (C)

1267. (D)

1268. (B)

1269. (D) 1270. (C)

1271. (D)

1272. (D)

1273. (A)

1274. (D)

1275. (D)

1276. (D)

1277. (C)

1278. (D)

1279. (B) 1280. (D)

1281. (B)

1282. (B)

1283. (D)

1284. (D)

1285. (C)

1286. (C)

1287. (A)

1288. (A)

1289. (D) 1290. (B)

1291. (D)

1292. (B)

1293. (A)

1294. (A)

1295. (D)

1296. (D)

1297. (D)

1298. (D)

1299. (A) 1300. (D)

1301. (C)

1302. (C)

1303. (D)

1304. (D)

1305. (C)

1306. (B)

1307. (A)

1308. (B)

1309. (B) 1310. (D)

1311. (A)

1312. (C)

1313. (B)

1314. (D)

1315. (C)

1316. (B)

1317. (B)

1318. (D)

1319. (B) 1320. (D)

1321. (B)

1322. (A)

1323. (C)

1324. (D)

1325. (D)

1326. (D)

1327. (D)

1328. (A)

1329. (A) 1330. (B)

1331. (C)

1332. (D)

1333. (B)

1334. (A)

1335. (B)

1336. (D)

1337. (C)

1338. (B)

1339. (D) 1340. (B)

1341. (D)

1342. (A)

1343. (C)

1344. (A)

1345. (B)

1346. (B)

1347. (C)

1348. (A)

1349. (B) 1350. (D)

1351. (A)

1352. (C)

1353. (D)

1354. (B)

1355. (B)

1356. (D)

1357. (D)

1358. (A)

1359. (A) 1360. (B)

1361. (B)

1362. (D)

1363. (C)

1364. (C)

1365. (D)

1366. (D)

1367. (C)

1368. (B)

1369. (B) 1370. (A)

1371. (D)

1372. (B)

1373. (B)

1374. (B)

1375. (B)

1376. (A)

1377. (C)

1378. (C)

1379. (D) 1380. (A)

1381. (A)

1382. (D)

1383. (D)

1384. (D)

1385. (D)

1386. (C)

1387. (A)

1388. (D)

1389. (A) 1390. (D)

1391. (A)

1392. (D)

1393. (B)

1394. (B)

1395. (B)

1396. (D)

1397. (C)

1398. (B)

1399. (C) 1400. (A)

1401. (B)

1402. (D)

1403. (A)

1404. (B)

1405. (A)

1406. (B)

1407. (A)

1408. (B)

1409. (C) 1410. (D)

1411. (C)

1412. (C)

1413. (B)

1414. (C)

1415. (A)

1416. (C)

1417. (D)

1418. (A)

1419. (A) 1420. (C)

1421. (B)

1422. (A)

1423. (B)

1424. (B)

1425. (C)

1426. (A)

1427. (A)

1428. (C)

1429. (C) 1430. (C)

1431. (A)

1432. (C)

1433. (C)

1434. (D)

1435. (D)

1436. (D)

1437. (C)

1438. (C)

1439. (D) 1440. (C)

1441. (B)

1442. (D)

1443. (C)

1444. (D)

1445. (A)

1446. (C)

1447. (B)

1448. (B)

1449. (C) 1450. (C)

1451. (C)

1452. (D)

1453. (A)

1454. (D)

1455. (B)

1456. (C)

1457. (B)

1458. (D)

1459. (A) 1460. (C)

1461. (A)

1462. (D)

1463. (C)

1464. (C)

1465. (C)

1466. (A)

1467. (A)

1468. (C)

1469. (D) 1470. (D)

1471. (B)

1472. (C)

1473. (D)

1474. (B)

1475. (A)

1476. (B)

1477. (D)

1478. (D)

1479. (B) 1480. (B)

1481. (B)

1482. (A)

1483. (C)

1484. (A)

1485. (C)

1486. (B)

1487. (D)

1488. (B)

1489. (A) 1490. (B)

1491. (B)

1492. (A)

1493. (C)

1494. (C)

1495. (A)

1496. (A)

1497. (C)

1498. (D)

1499. (D) 1500. (C)

1501. (D)

1502. (D)

1503. (B)

1504. (A)

1505. (C)

1506. (C)

1507. (A)

1508. (D)

1509. (D) 1510. (B)

1511. (A)

1512. (C)

1513. (B)

1514. (B)

1515. (B)

1516. (B)

1517. (C)

1518. (C)

1519. (D) 1520. (B)

1521. (A)

1522. (D)

1523. (A)

1524. (B)

1525. (B)

1526. (B)

1527. (B)

1528. (B)

1529. (C) 1530. (B)

1531. (D)

1532. (D)

1533. (A)

1534. (C)

1535. (B)

1536. (B)

1537. (A)

1538. (D)

1539. (B) 1540. (B)

1541. (D)

1542. (B)

1543. (C)

1544. (B)

1545. (D)

1546. (A)

1547. (C)

1548. (C)

1549. (D) 1550. (A)

1551. (C)

1552. (C)

1553. (C)

1554. (B)

1555. (D)

1556. (A)

1557. (A)

1558. (A)

1559. (C) 1560. (C)

1561. (B)

1562. (D)

1563. (C)

1564. (B)

1565. (A)

1566. (C)

1567. (D)

1568. (D)

1569. (B) 1570. (C)

1571. (B)

1572. (C)

1573. (A)

1574. (A)

1575. (D)

1576. (B)

1577. (B)

1578. (B)

1579. (D) 1580. (C)

1581. (C)

1582. (C)

1583. (A)

1584. (C)

1585. (B)

1586. (B)

1587. (A)

1588. (B)

1589. (B) 1590. (A)

1591. (D)

1592. (C)

1593. (C)

1594. (C)

1595. (C)

1596. (A)

1597. (C)

1598. (B)

1599. (C) 1600. (B)

1601. (A)

1602. (A)

1603. (D)

1604. (C)

1605. (D)

1606. (C)

1607. (B)

1608. (D)

1609. (C) 1610. (A)

1611. (D)

1612. (D)

1613. (B)

1614. (B)

1615. (C)

1616. (A)

1617. (A)

1618. (D)

1619. (A) 1620. (C)

722 D Library and Information Science Specific 1621. (C)

1622. (D)

1623. (C)

1624. (C)

1625. (B)

1626. (C)

1627. (C)

1628. (A)

1629. (D) 1630. (A)

1631. (A)

1632. (B)

1633. (B)

1634. (B)

1635. (A)

1636. (D)

1637. (C)

1638. (C)

1639. (B) 1640. (D)

1641. (C)

1642. (D)

1643. (B)

1644. (B)

1645. (B)

1646. (C)

1647. (B)

1648. (D)

1649. (C) 1650. (A)

1651. (B)

1652. (B)

1653. (B)

1654. (B)

1655. (C)

1656. (D)

1657. (A)

1658. (C)

1659. (B) 1660. (B)

1661. (D)

1662. (C)

1663. (A)

1664. (C)

1665. (D)

1666. (A)

1667. (D)

1668. (D)

1669. (A) 1670. (B)

1671. (B)

1672. (D)

1673. (C)

1674. (A)

1675. (C)

1676. (D)

1677. (D)

1678. (D)

1679. (A) 1680. (A)

1681. (B)

1682. (B)

1683. (A)

1684. (D)

1685. (B)

1686. (C)

1687. (B)

1688. (D)

1689. (D) 1690. (D)

1691. (B)

1692. (B)

1693. (A)

1694. (C)

1695. (C)

1696. (D)

1697. (A)

1698. (C)

1699. (A) 1700. (C)

1701. (A)

1702. (D)

1703. (C)

1704. (C)

1705. (C)

1706. (D)

1707. (B)

1708. (D)

1709. (D) 1710. (C)

1711. (C)

1712. (A)

1713. (A)

1714. (A)

1715. (B)

1716. (D)

1717. (A)

1718. (C)

1719. (A) 1720. (B)

1721. (C)

1722. (B)

1723. (B)

1724. (B)

1725. (D)

1726. (B)

1727. (B)

1728. (B)

1729. (C) 1730. (D)

1731. (B)

1732. (C)

1733. (A)

1734. (D)

1735. (C)

1736. (C)

1737. (B)

1738. (B)

1739. (A) 1740. (C)

1741. (C)

1742. (B)

1743. (C)

1744. (A)

1745. (A)

1746. (B)

1747. (B)

1748. (B)

1749. (B) 1750. (B)

1751. (A)

1752. (B)

1753. (D)

1754. (B)

1755. (B)

1756. (A)

1757. (B)

1758. (B)

1759. (C) 1760. (C)

1761. (B)

1762. (D)

1763. (B)

1764. (A)

1765. (D)

1766. (D)

1767. (C)

1768. (D)

1769. (C) 1770. (D)

1771. (D)

1772. (A)

1773. (B)

1774. (C)

1775. (A)

1776. (A)

1777. (C)

1778. (D)

1779. (A) 1780. (D)

1781. (B)

1782. (A)

1783. (C)

1784. (C)

1785. (D)

1786. (B)

1787. (C)

1788. (D)

1789. (A) 1790. (A)

1791. (C)

1792. (A)

1793. (A)

1794. (C)

1795. (B)

1796. (A)

1797. (D)

1798. (C)

1799. (B) 1800. (C)

1801. (D)

1802. (D)

1803. (B)

1804. (B)

1805. (D)

1806. (A)

1807. (A)

1808. (B)

1809. (D) 1810. (B)

1811. (B)

1812. (C)

1813. (A)

1814. (A)

1815. (A)

1816. (A)

1817. (B)

1818. (A)

1819. (A) 1820. (A)

1821. (D)

1822. (A)

1823. (B)

1824. (C)

1825. (C)

1826. (B)

1827. (D)

1828. (A)

1829. (A) 1830. (C)

1831. (A)

1832. (C)

1833. (A)

1834. (A)

1835. (C)

1836. (A)

1837. (D)

1838. (A)

1839. (C) 1840. (B)

1841. (A)

1842. (A)

1843. (A)

1844. (B)

1845. (A)

1846. (A)

1847. (C)

1848. (D)

1849. (D) 1850. (C)

1851. (D)

1852. (B)

1853. (C)

1854. (B)

1855. (B)

1856. (C)

1857. (B)

1858. (A)

1859. (A) 1860. (B)

1861. (C)

1862. (B)

1863. (A)

1864. (C)

1865. (B)

1866. (B)

1867. (B)

1868. (A)

1869. (A) 1870. (C)

1871. (B)

1872. (C)

1873. (B)

1874. (B)

1875. (D)

1876. (B)

1877. (D)

1878. (A)

1879. (C) 1880. (D)

1881. (C)

1882. (C)

1883. (D)

1884. (A)

1885. (D)

1886. (C)

1887. (D)

1888. (B)

1889. (C) 1890. (B)

1891. (A)

1892. (B)

1893. (A)

1894. (D)

1895. (C)

1896. (B)

1897. (C)

1898. (A)

1899. (A) 1900. (A)

1901. (B)

1902. (A)

1903. (A)

1904. (A)

1905. (C)

1906. (A)

1907. (B)

1908. (C)

1909. (B) 1910. (C)

1911. (C)

1912. (B)

1913. (A)

1914. (D)

1915. (A)

1916. (C)

1917. (C)

1918. (C)

1919. (D) 1920. (C)

1921. (D)

1922. (C)

1923. (C)

1924. (D)

1925. (D)

1926. (C)

1927. (A)

1928. (B)

1929. (B) 1930. (C)

1931. (C)

1932. (C)

1933. (B)

1934. (B)

1935. (B)

1936. (D)

1937. (C)

1938. (D)

1939. (C) 1940. (B)

1941. (D)

1942. (A)

1943. (D)

1944. (D)

1945. (A)

1946. (A)

1947. (B)

1948. (D)

1949. (D) 1950. (D)

1951. (B)

1952. (C)

1953. (D)

1954. (D)

1955. (C)

1956. (B)

1957. (A)

1958. (C)

1959. (D) 1960. (C)

1961. (A)

1962. (B)

1963. (B)

1964. (B)

1965. (B)

1966. (C)

1967. (B)

1968. (C)

1969. (A) 1970. (D)

1971. (D)

1972. (A)

1973. (B)

1974. (B)

1975. (A)

1976. (C)

1977. (D)

1978. (C)

1979. (A) 1980. (B)

1981. (A)

1982. (D)

1983. (D)

1984. (D)

1985. (A)

1986. (B)

1987. (C)

1988. (A)

1989. (A) 1990. (A)

1991. (B)

1992. (B)

1993. (D)

1994. (D)

1995. (B)

1996. (C)

1997. (A)

1998. (A)

1999. (C) 2000. (D)

2001. (C)

2002. (D)

2003. (A)

2004. (D)

2005. (A)

2006. (D)

2007. (A)

2008. (C)

2009. (A) 2010. (C)

2011. (B)

2012. (B)

2013. (D)

2014. (C)

2015. (C)

2016. (A)

2017. (C)

2018. (D)

2019. (B) 2020. (C)

2021. (A)

2022. (B)

2023. (C)

2024. (B)

2025. (D)

2026. (D)

2027. (D)

2028. (C)

2029. (B) 2030. (A)

2031. (B)

2032. (B)

2033. (C)

2034. (B)

2035. (C)

2036. (D)

2037. (A)

2038. (C)

2039. (B) 2040. (A)

Multiple Choice Questions D 723 2041. (D)

2042. (D)

2043. (C)

2044. (D)

2045. (C)

2046. (C)

2047. (C)

2048. (B)

2049. (D) 2050. (A)

2051. (A)

2052. (A)

2053. (C)

2054. (D)

2055. (B)

2056. (C)

2057. (C)

2058. (B)

2059. (A) 2060. (B)

2061. (D)

2062. (C)

2063. (B)

2064. (A)

2065. (C)

2066. (C)

2067. (D)

2068. (B)

2069. (A) 2070. (C)

2071. (A)

2072. (D)

2073. (C)

2074. (C)

2075. (A)

2076. (B)

2077. (C)

2078. (A)

2079. (A) 2080. (C)

2081. (D)

2082. (C)

2083. (B)

2084. (B)

2085. (D)

2086. (D)

2087. (C)

2088. (C)

2089. (A) 2090. (C)

2091. (A)

2092. (D)

2093. (C)

2094. (B)

2095. (B)

2096. (A)

2097. (A)

2098. (D)

2099. (C) 2100. (A)

2101. (B)

2102. (A)

2103. (C)

2104. (C)

2105. (C)

2106. (D)

2107. (A)

2108. (B)

2109. (D) 2110. (A)

2111. (C)

2112. (A)

2113. (A)

2114. (A)

2115. (C)

2116. (C)

2117. (B)

2118. (D)

2119. (C) 2120. (D)

2121. (D)

2122. (B)

2123. (C)

2124. (A)

2125. (C)

2126. (A)

2127. (C)

2128. (C)

2129. (D) 2130. (C)

2131. (C)

2132. (D)

2133. (D)

2134. (A)

2135. (A)

2136. (D)

2137. (B)

2138. (A)

2139. (C) 2140. (C)

1241. (D)

2142. (C)

2143. (D)

2144. (B)

2145. (D)

2146. (C)

2147. (C)

2148. (A)

2149. (B) 2150. (C)

2151. (C)

2152. (C)

2153. (C)

2154. (D)

2155. (D)

2156. (A)

2157. (A)

2158. (A)

2159. (A) 2160. (A)

2161. (A)

2162. (A)

2163. (B)

2164. (B)

2165. (A)

2166. (C)

2167. (C)

2168. (C)

2169. (C) 2170. (C)

2171. (C)

2172. (D)

2173. (B)

2174. (D)

2175. (C)

2176. (B)

2177. (C)

2178. (C)

2179. (C) 2180. (B)

2181. (A)

2182. (D)

2183. (A)

2184. (B)

2185. (A)

2186. (A)

2187. (C)

2188. (A)

2189. (A) 2190. (C)

2191. (B)

2192. (A)

2193. (D)

2194. (A)

2195. (D)

2196. (C)

2197. (B)

2198. (C)

2199. (C) 2200. (D)

2201. (A)

2202. (B)

2203. (B)

2204. (D)

2205. (A)

2206. (A)

2207. (D)

2208. (A)

2209. (A) 2210. (C)

2211. (D)

2212. (A)

2213. (A)

2214. (A)

2215. (B)

2216. (A)

2217. (A)

2218. (C)

2219. (B) 2220. (C)

2221. (C)

2222. (A)

2223. (C)

2224. (D)

2225. (A)

2226. (C)

2227. (B)

2228. (A)

2229. (C) 2230. (D)

2231. (D)

2232. (D)

2233. (D)

2234. (B)

2235. (A)

2236. (D)

2237. (A)

2238. (A)

2239. (D) 2240. (B)

2241. (D)

2242. (C)

2243. (D)

2244. (A)

2245. (D)

2246. (D)

2247. (D)

2248. (A)

2249. (D) 2250. (C)

2251. (A)

2252. (B)

2253. (C)

2254. (B)

2255. (A)

2256. (C)

2257. (A)

2258. (A)

2259. (A) 2260. (B)

2261. (B)

2262. (B)

2263. (A)

2264. (D)

2265. (C)

2266. (D)

2267. (C)

2268. (C)

2269. (D) 2270. (A)

2271. (A)

2272. (A)

2273. (C)

2274. (B)

2275. (B)

2276. (B)

2277. (A)

2278. (B)

2279. (B) 2280. (A)

2281. (A)

2282. (C)

2283. (C)

2284. (A)

2285. (A)

2286. (C)

2287. (C)

2288. (C)

2289. (A) 2290. (A)

2291. (C)

2292. (A)

2293. (C)

2294. (C)

2295. (B)

2296. (A)

2297. (B)

2298. (A)

2299. (A) 2300. (B)

2301. (A)

2302. (C)

2303. (D)

2304. (D)

2305. (A)

2306. (B)

2307. (A)

2308. (D)

2309. (C) 2310. (B)

2311. (B)

2312. (C)

2313. (D)

2314. (B)

2315. (C)

2316. (B)

2317. (B)

2318. (D)

2319. (D) 2320. (A)

2321. (A)

2322. (D)

2323. (A)

2324. (C)

2325. (B)

2326. (B)

2327. (C)

2328. (A)

2329. (B) 2330. (C)

2331. (A)

2332. (B)

2333. (A)

2334. (B)

2335. (A)

2336. (B)

2337. (C)

2338. (B)

2339. (C) 2340. (C)

2341. (B)

2342. (D)

2343. (B)

2344. (B)

2345. (D)

2346. (A)

2347. (B)

2348. (B)

2349. (B) 2350. (A)

2351. (B)

2352. (B)

2353. (A)

2354. (A)

2355. (A)

2356. (D)

2357. (B)

2358. (C)

2359. (B) 2360. (B)

2361. (C)

2362. (C)

2363. (A)

2364. (B)

2365. (B)

2366. (B)

2367. (B)

2368. (D)

2369. (D) 2370. (B)

2371. (B)

2372. (C)

2373. (B)

2374. (B)

2375. (D)

2376. (B)

2377. (B)

2378. (B)

2379. (A) 2380. (D)

2381. (B)

2382. (B)

2383. (B)

2384. (A)

2385. (A)

2386. (B)

2387. (A)

2388. (A)

2389. (D) 2390. (A)

2391. (A)

2392. (B)

2393. (B)

2394. (A)

2395. (A)

2396. (C)

2397. (C)

2398. (C)

2399. (C) 2400. (A)

2401. (D)

2402. (D)

2403. (B)

2404. (C)

2405. (B)

2406. (D)

2407. (D)

2408. (D)

2409. (D) 2410. (C)

2411. (B)

2412. (D)

2413. (C)

2414. (A)

2415. (A)

2416. (A)

2417. (A)

2418. (C)

2419. (B) 2420. (A)

2421. (A)

2422. (C)

2423. (D)

2424. (C)

2425. (A)

2426. (A)

2427. (A)

2428. (C)

2429. (A) 2430. (B)

2431. (A)

2432. (B)

2433. (D)

2434. (D)

2435. (B)

2436. (A)

2437. (D)

2438. (D)

2439. (D) 2440. (B)

2441. (C)

2442. (A)

2443. (A)

2444. (A)

2445. (B)

2446. (D)

2447. (D)

2448. (A)

2449. (A) 2450. (C)

2451. (D)

2452. (D)

2453. (B)

2454. (A)

2455. (B)

2456. (B)

2457. (A)

2458. (A)

2459. (A) 2460. (B)

724 D Library and Information Science Specific 2461. (C)

2462. (A)

2463. (B)

2464. (C)

2465. (D)

2466. (D)

2467. (C)

2468. (B)

2471. (B)

2472. (C)

2473. (D)

2474. (A)

2475. (D)

2476. (B)

2477. (C)

2478. (B)

2469. (D) 2470. (D) 2479. (C) 2480. (B)

2481. (B)

2482. (B)

2483. (D)

2484. (B)

2485. (B)

2486. (C)

2487. (C)

2488. (B)

2489. (A) 2490. (C)

2491. (C)

2492. (A)

2493. (C)

2494. (A)

2495. (D)

2496. (A)

2497. (B)

2498. (C)

2499. (D) 2500. (A)

2501. (A)

2502. (A)

2503. (A)

2504. (B)

2505. (D)

2506. (A)

2507. (B)

2508. (C)

2509. (A) 2510. (A)

2511. (C)

2512. (B)

2513. (A)

2514. (C)

2515. (A)

2516. (C)

2517. (A)

2518. (C)

2519. (B) 2520. (D)

2521. (B)

2522. (D)

2523. (D)

2524. (A)

2525. (C)

2526. (D)

2527. (A)

2528. (B)

2529. (A) 2530. (A)

2531. (C)

2532. (C)

2533. (A)

2534. (B)

2535. (C)

2536. (C)

2537. (A)

2538. (B)

2539. (A) 2540. (B)

2541. (B)

2542. (B)

2543. (D)

2544. (B)

2545. (B)

2546. (C)

2547. (B)

2548. (B)

2549. (A) 2550. (C)

2551. (D)

2552. (D)

2553. (A)

2554. (B)

2555. (A)

2556. (D)

2557. (D)

2558. (B)

2559. (C) 2560. (A)

2561. (B)

2562. (D)

2563. (D)

2564. (A)

2565. (B)

2566. (C)

2567. (A)

2568. (D)

2569. (C) 2570. (D)

2571. (D)

2572. (A)

2573. (C)

2574. (A)

2575. (D)

2576. (C)

2577. (C)

2578. (A)

2579. (D) 2580. (A)

2581. (A)

2582. (A)

2583. (A)

2584. (A)

2585. (C)

2586. (C)

2587. (B)

2588. (B)

2589. (B) 2590. (A)

2591. (D)

2592. (B)

2593. (C)

2594. (B)

2595. (D)

2596. (D)

2597. (B)

2598. (C)

2599. (D) 2600. (B)

2601. (D)

2602. (B)

2603. (C)

2604. (B)

2605. (D)

2606. (C)

2607. (A)

2608. (D)

2609. (C) 2610. (C)

2611. (A)

2612. (A)

2613. (C)

2614. (A)

2615. (B)

2616. (A)

2617. (C)

2618. (B)

2619. (A) 2620. (A)

2621. (A)

2622. (A)

2623. (A)

2624. (B)

2625. (C)

2626. (A)

2627. (C)

2628. (D)

2629. (B) 2630. (D)

2631. (A)

2632. (C)

2633. (D)

2634. (B)

2635. (B)

2636. (A)

2637. (C)

2638. (A)

2639. (C) 2640. (B)

2641. (B)

2642. (A)

2643. (A)

2644. (B)

2645. (B)

2646. (D)

2647. (A)

2648. (B)

2649. (D) 2650. (D)

2651. (B)

2652. (C)

2653. (B)

2654. (A)

2655. (A)

2656. (B)

2657. (A)

2658. (A)

2659. (A) 2660. (A)

2661. (A)

2662. (C)

2663. (C)

2664. (D)

2665. (D)

2666. (C)

2667. (C)

2668. (A)

2669. (B) 2670. (A)

2671. (A)

2672. (A)

2673. (C)

2674. (C)

2675. (C)

2676. (C)

2677. (A)

2678. (A)

2679. (C) 2680. (C)

2681. (C)

2682. (B)

2683. (B)

2684. (A)

2685. (B)

2686. (D)

2687. (B)

2688. (B)

2689. (B) 2690. (D)

MODEL PAPERS (Revised Pattern) Model Paper-1 Note : This paper contains hundred (100) Objective type questions, each question carrying two (2) marks. Attempt all of them. 1. Name the scientist who said that Information Science is cluster of many disciplines where in the central core is ‘Information’. (A) B.C. Brooks (B) Fritz Machlup (C) Daniel Bell (D) N.J. Belkin

7. Who had given the 'Minimal, Middling and Maximum' theories of reference service? (A) C. M. Winchell (B) S. R. Ranganathan (C) James I Wyer (D) S. Rothstein

2. Which committee recommended that imperial library be designated as copyright library ? (A) Fayzee Committee, 1939 (B) Richey Committee, 1926 (C) Statham Committee, 1932 (D) Sadler Committee, 1916

8. “Biotechnology” is formed as a result of (A) Fusion (B) Lamination (C) Fission (D) Agglomeration 9. Relational Database is (A) A work which has some relationship to another work (B) A symbol representing relationship between two concepts (C) Manipulation commands which relate records in different fields (D) All of the above

3. FID was dissolved in the year (A) 2002 (B) 2005 (C) 2000 (D) 2003 4. The use of CD-ROMs in the library significantly relates to which of the following Laws ? (A) First Law of Library Science (B) Second Law of Library Science (C) Fourth Law of Library Science (D) Fifth Law of Library Science 5. Which Source would you consult to get the latest information on contravercies about the venue for Tata’s ‘Nano’ ? (A) New Encyclopedia Britannica (B) Asian Recorder (C) India : A reference annual (D) Whitekar's Almanac 6. BUBL link is a (A) Data base (C) Subject gate way

(B) OPAC (D) Portal

10. Which one is not a canon (as given by Ranganathan) (A) Canon of Comprehensiveness (B) Canon of Consistence (C) Canon of Context (D) Canon of currency 11. ZBB was developed by (A) R. D. Stuart (B) S. R. Ranganathan (C) Peter A. Pyhrr (D) C. V. Good 12. PERT was developed by (A) The Navy special project office (B) Booz-Allen Hamelton (C) Both (A) and (B) (D) None of the above

(725)

726 D Library and Information Science Specific 13. The term 'hyper text' was coined by (A) Ted Nelson (B) Charles Babbage (C) Tim Berner Lee (D) Tay Vaughan 14. The 12 rules for relational database were given by (A) Larvy Page (B) Linus Tolward (C) J. Bill Gates (D) e. f. Codd 15. The complete bibliographic details in MARC are available in (A) Leader (B) Control fields (C) Variable fields (D) Re cord directing 16. Conversion of barcode into electrical signals is done by (A) Scanners (B) CRT (C) Photo sensor (D) UNICODE 17. Bibliographic coupling was first advocated by (A) B. K. Sen (B) M. M. Kessler (C) S. C. Bradford (D) S. R. Ranganathan 18. External and Internal criticism implies in (A) Historical Research (B) Survey Research (C) Experimental Research (D) Applied Research 19. 'Granthana' is an official publication of (A) ILA (B) IASLIC (C) RRRLF (D) APLA 20. 'Millian Book Project' was initiated by (A) Pittsburg University (B) Carnegie Mellon University (C) MIT, USA (D) Michigan University 21. Assertion (A) : Making information available using GSDL is effective than just putting it on the web'. Reason (R) : The information available in digital form can be archived. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the correct explanation. (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true

22. Assertion (A) : Migration is the primary strategy used by most organisations for digital archiving. Reason (R) : Migration preserves the physical presence, content, functionality and context of the digital object. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the correct explanation. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation. (C) (A) is true but (R) is false (D) (A) is false but (R) is true 23. Assertion (A) : In Library classification, an empty digit helps in enterpolation between two consecutive ordinal numbers. Reason (R) : An empty digit is a digit with ordinal value but no semantic value. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not a correct explanation. (C) (A) is true but (R) is false. (D) (A) is false but (R) is true. 24. Assertion (A) : In Colon classification, ‘2’ represents mother country and ‘44’ represents India. A given library in India can use ‘2’ or ‘44’ for India. But, the rules allow for a choice. Reason (R) : The above is a case of violation of Canon of homonyms. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the correct explanation. (C) (A) is true but (R) is false. (D) (A) is false but (R) is true. 25. Assertion (A) : Present day libraries need to develop social networking tools for their library websites. Reason (R) : It helps to reach out the patrons where they live and provide service at the point of need. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the correct explanation. (C) (A) is true but (R) is false. (D) (A) is false but (R) is true. 26. Assertion (A) : Library Science has been called Science because it has good application of scientific tools and techniques

Model Papers D 727 as is applicable in natural science and physical science. Reason (R) : Experimental method of research has good scope in library science. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not a correct explanation. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true. (C) (A) is false but (R) is true. (D) (A) is true but (R) is false. 27. Assertion (A) : Hypothesis are essential in all types of research. Reason (R) : Objectives can fulfil the purpose of hypothesis. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) (A) is false but (R) is true. (C) (A) is true and (R) is false. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 28. Assertion (A) : Skillful use of research procedures is an art, their appropriate application is research. Reason (R) : Systematically conducted research leads to generalisation. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true but (A) is not a correct explanation. (C) (A) is true but (R) is false. (D) (A) is false but (R) is true. 29. Assertion (A) : Like other scientists, the social scientists can obtain relevant information by conducting experiments, interviewing people, observing people and reviewing relevant literature. Reason (R) : Social Scientists can't be so rigorous as can be of natural scientists. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not a correct explanation. (C) (A) is true but (R) is false. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 30. Assertion (A) : Research results lead to propound new laws, theories and principles. Reason (R) : Laws, principles and theories are the result of scientific research. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true but (A) is not a correct explanation. (C) (A) is false and (R) is true. (D) (A) is true and (R) is false.

31. The British library movement include the following major reports. Identify the correct chronological order of these reports. (i) Me Colvin Report (ii) Kenyen Report (iii) Adams Report (iv) Select Committee Report Codes : (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (B) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (C) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (D) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) 32. Arrange the following library automation software according to their date of origin (i) SOUL (ii) KOHA (iii) New GENLIB (iv) LIBSYS Codes : (A) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (B) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (C) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (D) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) 33. Arrange the following; Online Systems in the order of their origin (i) ERIC (ii) MEDLINE (iii) OCLC (iv) MARC Codes : (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (B) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (C) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (D) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) 34. Arrange the following Indexing; Systems in the order of their origin : (i) POPSI (ii) PRECIS (iii) Chain Indexing (iv) KWIC Codes : (A) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (B) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (C) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) (D) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) 35. Gotam's book ‘Nyasutra’ has given the following four steps of scientific research. Arrange them in proper order. (i) Aptavakshya (Verification/ Testing) (ii) Upaman (Camparison) (iii) Anuman (Inference) (iv) Pratyaksha (Perception) Codes : (A) (ii) (iv) (B) (i) (iv)

(i) (ii)

(iii) (iii)

728 D Library and Information Science Specific (C) (iv) (D) (iv)

(ii) (iii)

(iii) (ii)

(i) (i)

36. Arrange the following Librarians of National library in chronological order of their service (i) D. R. Kalia (ii) Y. M. Mulay (iii) B. S. Kesavan (iv) K. M. Asadullah Codes : (A) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (B) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (C) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (D) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) 37. Arrange the following Library Associations according to their year of their establishment (i) ILA (ii) IASLIC (iii) IFLA (iv) ALA Codes : (A) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (B) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (C) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (D) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) 38. Arrange the following reference sources according to their date of publication (i) Encyclopedia of Library and Information Science (ii) Me Graw Hill Encyclopedia of Science and Technology (iii) Encyclopedia Americana (iv) Encyclopedia Britannica Codes : (A) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (B) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (C) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (D) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) 39. What are the major driving forces behind an ‘Information society’ ? (i) R T I (ii) I. C. T. (iii) Internet (iv) I. T. ACT Codes : (A) (ii) & (i) are correct (B) (ii) & (iv) are correct (C) (i) & (iv) are correct (D) (ii) & (iii) are correct 40. Arrange the following committees/commissions according to their year of formation

(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

National Library Review Committee Library Advisory Commission Sinha Committee on Public Libraries Working group on libraries (Planning Commission)

Codes : (A) (iii) (ii) (B) (ii) (iii) (C) (iv) (ii) (D) (i) (iv)

(iv) (iv) (i) (iii)

(i) (i) (iii) (ii)

41. Match the following List-I

List-II

(a) Zipf's Law (i) Law of Scattering (b) Eugene Garfield (ii) Measurement of word frequency (c) Bradford's; Law (iii) Measurement of Author Productivity (d) Lotka's Law (iv) Impact factor Codes : (a) (b) (A) (i) (iii) (B) (ii) (iv) (C) (i) (iv) (D) (iv) (iii)

(c) (iv) (i) (ii) (i)

(d) (ii) (iii) (iii) (ii)

42. Match the following List-I List-II (a) The Electronic (i) USA Library (b) Library Herald (ii) Germany (c) Library Trends (iii) United Kingdom (d) International (iv) India Classification Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (B) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (C) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (D) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) 43. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Principles of (i) F. W. Taylor Management (b) Functions of (ii) Abraham Management Maslow (c) Theory of (iii) Luther Gullick Hierarchy of needs

Model Papers D 729 (d) System School (iv) Henry Fayol of Management Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (B) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (C) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (D) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) 44. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Dewey decimal (i) 1933 classification (b) Colon (ii) 1876 classification (c) Rider's (iii) 1905 International classification (d) Universal (iv) 1961 decimal classification Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (B) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (C) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) (D) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) 45. Match the following List-I List-II (a) Search Engine (i) Pascal (b) Browser (ii) UNIX (c) Operating (iii) Yahoo System (d) Programming (iv) Netscape Language Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (B) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (C) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (D) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) After almost 10 years of more liberal policies, there have been increasing concerns among policymakers academics, and industry analysts about the impacts of liberalization on IT use and production. While the former “market reserve policy” has been widely studied, the impacts of more recent policy have not yet been fully analyzed. This article is a further contri-

bution to the evaluation of this policy from the point of view of IT diffusion, the development Local industry, technological capabilities, and foreign trade. It argues that despite the fact that Brazil did not become an international player in global IT markets, continued state involvement has produced substantial fruits. It has revealed local capabilities in areas that require highly skilled professionals rather than unskilled labor, as the conventional international product cycle in the international division of labor would suggest. Greenhouse policy in the past led the Brazilian IT sector to invest “significantly in the accumulation of technological capabilities and develop important backward linkages”. The user-supplier relations established by local firms in areas like banking automation still engender important reserach and development (R&D) efforts, contributing to the diffusion of IT in line with local needs. Also, the previous existence of both industrial capacity and a skilled workforce has become a driving force in attracting new foreign direct investment in IT production in Brazil to serve the Latin American market. 46. The policy makers of Brazil are primarily Concerned with (A) Liberalisation and computer Industry. (B) Brazil's failure in becoming international player in IT (C) Impact of liberalisations an IT use and product. (D) Instability of Brazilian Politics. 47. What are the professional skills required to meet the global market ? (A) Un skilled, suitable to local labor needs (B) Semi skilled suitable to global needs (C) Skilled suitable to global needs (D) Highly skilled suitable to local needs 48. What was the significance of "Gre en House Policy" of Brazil ? (A) Investment in R and D sector (B) Investment in IT sector (C) Investment in Banking sector (D) Investment in global market 49. Effects of customization in different sectors of Brazilian industry are : (A) Wide study of “Market reserve policy”

730 D Library and Information Science Specific (B) Development of local industry (C) Diffusion of IT in line with local needs (D) Attracting new foreign direct investment 50. What is the driving force that attracted foreign investment in Brazil ? (A) Organised and automated Banking Sector (B) Industrial capacity and skilled work force (C) Important development in R and D sector (D) Adoption of Green House policy. 51. The quotation ‘Where is the Wisdom, We Lost in Knowledge…” is by (A) John Keats (B) M. P. Carter (C) T. S. Eliot (D) Marshall McLuhan 52. Entropy is a measure of (A) Degree of relevance of information (B) Quantity of irrelevant information (C) Degree of uncertainty in information (D) Degree of certainty in information 53. CONPOLIS (India) was set up in the year (A) 1985 (B) 1986 (C) 1987 (D) 1988 54. First time efforts for the development of libraries in India were made (A) S. R. Ranganathan (B) S. Radhakrishnan (C) Sayaji Rao Gaekwad I (D) Sayaji Rao Gaekwad II 55. An E-book which does not require an internet connection to access its contents is (A) Web book (B) Palm book (C) Electronic Ink e-book (D) Digital book

(B) S. R. Ranganathan (C) James I. Wyer (D) R. Emery 58. The input Centre for INIS in India is (A) DRDO (B) DSIR (C) TFIR (D)BARC 59. The provision of phase relations in DDC was made available from (A) 14 th edition (B) 2nd edition th (C) 7 edition (D) 11 th edition 60. RDA stands for (A) Resource Description Agency (B) Reference Description and Access (C) Reference Description Agency (D) Resource Description and Access 61. Cost benefit analysis means (A) Value for money (B) Performance evaluation based on cost (C) Finding out unit cost (D) Pe rformance evaluation base d on inputs 62. Which nat ional ag e nc y in India is assigning the ISBN ? (A) Raja Ram Mohan Roy National Education Resource Centre (B) Delhi Public Library (C) Federation of Publishers in India (D) National Library of India 63. The term ‘Cyberspace’ was first used by (A) Andrew Pollock (B) William Gibson (C) John Postal (D) Joe Flower 64. RFID Technology is used in (A) Acquisition (B) Serial Control (C) Circulation Control (D) OPAC

56. Emerald full text Database is published from (A) USA (B) Germany (C) France (D) U.K.

65. The Boolean operator ‘AND’ is related to (A) Productive (B) Additive (C) Logical Difference (D) None of the above

57. Who propounded ‘Conservative, moderate and liberal theories of reference service’ ? (A) William A Katz

66. The process of configuring the disks into tracks and sectors is called (A) Booting (B) Formatting (C) Labelling (D) All the above

Model Papers D 731 67. A research design is (A) A series of guide posts (B) A series of sampling (C) A hypothetical statement (D) A controller of variance 68. In a questionnaire, questionnaire on age, income and gender are the examples of (A) Dependent variables (B) Intervening variables (C) Independent variables (D) Manipulation variables 69. The simple Dublin Core Metadata Element Set (DCMES) consists of (A) 10 elements (B) 15 elements (C) 14 elements (D) 18 elements 70. ‘Libraries as Gateways to Knowledge’ is the title of the document (A) National Information Policy, 1986 (B) Information Technology Act, 2000 (C) National Knowledge Commission on Libraries, 2007 (D) None of the above 71. Assertion (A) : INDEST conceived J-Gate as a customized gate for e-journals subscribed by the member libraries. Reason (R) : J-Gate provides a common access platform for all its members to search and share resources subscribed by the member libraries. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the correct explanation. (C) (A) is true but (R) is false. (D) (A) is false but (R) is true. 72. Assertion (A) : XML, just like HTML is a meta language that is capable of containing extendable elements. Reason (R) : XML develop and deploy new specific mark up, enabling automatic authoring and processing of networked information. Codes : (A) (A) is false but (R) is true. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the correct explanation. (C) (A) is true but (R) is false. (D) Both (A) and (R) are true.

73. Assertion (A) : Measuring the Internet and in particular the web is a difficult task. Reason (R) : Web is considered as a new publishing medium with inadequate editorial process. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the correct explanation. (C) (A) is true but (R) is false. (D) (A) is false but (R) is true. 74. Assertion (A) : An indexing language is an artificial language as it uses controlled vocabulary. Reason (R) : It provides different relationships between terms. (A) Both (A) and (R) are false. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true. (C) (A) is true but (R) is false. (D) (A) is false but (R) is true. 75. Assertion (A) : With large collection of documents, recall can be measured properly. Reason (R) : The proper estimation of maximum recall for a que ry requires detailed knowledge of all the documents in the collection. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the correct explanation. (C) (A) is true but (R) is false. (D) (A) is false but (R) is true. 76. Assertion (A) : In contemporary digital environment, IPR become the focal point. Reason (R) : Many fold increase of unfair use of I.P. Codes : (A) (A) and (R) are true. (B) (A) and (R) are false. (C) (A) is true and (R) is false. (D) (A) is false and (R) is true. 77. Assertion (A) : Library automation is at a slow pace in Indian Libraries. Reason (R) : Lack of U.G.C. (India) support lead to this situation.

732 D Library and Information Science Specific Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) Both (A) and (R) are false. (C) (A) is true but (R) is false. (D) (A) is false but (R) is true. 78. Assertion (A) : The development of Institutional Repositories in India is at a slow pace. Reason (R) : This can be attributed to the non-availability of open source software and lack of interest among the LIS professionals. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) Both (A) and (R) are false. (C) (A) is true but (R) is partially true. (D) (A) is false and (R) is true. 79. Assertion (A) : Subject gateways offer the users an alternative to ‘Vacuum Cleaner’ type of search engines, such as Google, Infoseek, Alta Vista etc. Reason (R) : Subje ct Gate ways hold manually created records, rich resource description containing relevant information. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the correct explanation. (C) (A) is true but (R) is false. (D) (A) is false but (R) is true. 80. Assertion (A) : Para-professional staff support the professional staff in Library routines. Reason (R) : Para-professional staff acquire skill by experience. Codes : (A) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (C) Both (A) and (R) are false. (D) Both (A) and (R) are true. 81. Public Library Law has already be en passed in the following States. Identify the correct chronological order in which they were enacted. (i) Uttaranchal (Uttarakhand) (ii) Orissa (iii) Gujarat (iv) Haryana

Codes : (A) (i) (B) (iv) (C) (ii) (D) (iii)

(ii) (ii) (iii) (ii)

(iii) (i) (iv) (i)

(iv) (iii) (i) (iv)

82. Arrange in chronological order the following persons who were associated with computing history : (i) J. Presper Eckart (ii) John W Mauchly (iii) August Ada (iv) Charles Babbage Codes : (A) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (B) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (C) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (D) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) 83. Arrange the following events of Public Library movement in chronological order: (i) Enactment of Press and Registration of Books Act (ii) Establishment of the Punjab Library, Lahore (iii) Constitution of Fyzee Committee (iv) De clarati on of I mpe rial Li brary (Calcutta) as National Library of India Codes : (A) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (B) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (C) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (D) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) 84. Arrange the following layers of OSI model in the sequence in which they function : (i) Network Layer (ii) Physical Layer (iii) Transport Layer (iv) Data Link Layer Codes : (A) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (B) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (C) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (D) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 85. Arrange the following four quadrants of spiral of scientific method in their logical order: (i) Ascendant (ii) Nadir

Model Papers D 733 (iii) Zenith (iv) Descendent Codes : (A) (iv) (i) (B) (i) (iii) (C) (iii) (ii) (D) (ii) (i)

(iii) (iv) (i) (iii)

(ii) (ii) (iv) (iv)

86. Arrange the following books in order of their publication : (i) Classified Catalogue Code (ii) Prolegamena to Library Classification (iii) Five Laws of Library Science (iv) Colon Classification Codes : (A) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (B) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (C) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (D) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) 87. Arrange the following bibliographie s according to their date of origin : (i) Indian National Bibliography (ii) Cumulative Book Index (iii) Book In Print (iv) British National Bibliography Codes : (A) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (D) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) 88. Arrange the following schemes of classification according to their year of origin : (i) Colon Classification (ii) Expansive Classification (iii) Universal Decimal Classification (iv) Dewey Decimal Classification Codes : (A) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (B) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (C) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) (D) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) 89. Arrange the following principles and canons according to their levels as enunciated by Dr. S. R. Ranganathan : (i) Principles of Cataloguing (ii) General Normative Principles (iii) Laws of Library Science (iv) Canons of Cataloguing

Codes : (A) (i) (B) (ii) (C) (ii) (D) (i)

(iv) (iii) (i) (iv)

(iii) (iv) (iv) (ii)

90. Arrange the following cording to their year of (i) ASLIB (ii) LA (iii) ALA (iv) SLA Codes : (A) (iii) (ii) (iv) (B) (ii) (iv) (i) (C) (iii) (i) (iv) (D) (iv) (i) (iii)

(ii) (i) (iii) (iii) Associations acformation :

(i) (iii) (ii) (ii)

91. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Little Science, (i) S.C. Bradfold Big Science (b) Documentation (ii) William Martin (c) The Third Wave (iii) Eric J de Solla Price (d) The Information (iv) Alwin Toffler Society Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (C) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (D) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) 92. Match the following : List - I (a) Key Word Indexing (b) Citation Indexing (c) Uniterm Indexing (d) SLIC Indexing Codes : (a) (b) (c) (A) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (iv) (i) (iii) (D) (i) (iii) (ii)

(i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

List - II J. R. Sharp H. P. Luhn E. Garfield M. Taube

(d) (i) (ii) (ii) (iv)

93. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Web Navigation (i) Te le co mmuniElement cation (b) Shift + Tab (ii) SQL

734 D Library and Information Science Specific (c) ANSI Standard (d) TELNET Codes : (a) (A) (i) (B) (iv) (C) (iii) (D) (ii)

(b) (ii) (iii) (iv) (iii)

(c) (iii) (ii) (ii) (i)

(iii) Hyperlink (iv) Select the previous link (d) (iv) (i) (i) (iv)

94. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Mcfee (i) DOAJ (b) Directory (ii) Antivirus (c) Personal Web (iii) Vendor on pages Internet (d) Amazon.com (iv) Blogs Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (B) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (C) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (D) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) 95. Match the following : List - I (a) Theory of (i) Knowledge (b) IS : 1553-1960 (ii)

List - II Farmington Plan Metadata Format (c) Resource Sharing (iii) Library Building (d) TEI (iv) Epistomology Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (B) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (C) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (D) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv)

Read the passage given below, and answer the questions based on your understanding of the passage : Rolland Munro describes accountability as an informal giving that is part of everyday conversation, as well as more formal transactions generally involving some sort of documentary artifact (what we archivists refer to as a “record”). He notes that the authors move “between accounts as stories, explanations and reasons for conduct on the one hand and accounts

as coded representations, records, often in the form of numbers, on the other hand”. Each of these modes mediates the other in what he refers to as “accountability relationships.” “Distributions of materials and devices are as much as effect of the giving and calling for accounts, as they are integral to the business of producing and consuming accounts”. Records are both intermediaries in the accountability process and evidence of it. In our daily language we often refer to accountability as something that must be achieved, rather than as something that is done informally yet continuously. The difference here is between viewing accountability as a thing represented by an artifact, such as a record, and thinking about accountability as a process in which people and records must interact to achieve accountability. In this latter view, the focus on accountability becomes an analysis of the methods people use to engage in accountability relations. 96. Rolland Munro described accountability as (A) Classified documentary artifacts (B) Formal artifacts only (C) Unpublished and published documents (D) Informal, formal and documentary records 97. The phrase ‘record keeping’ is associated with (A) Computer programmers (B) Archivists (C) Chartered Accountants (D) Office Managers 98. What integral components Munro has identified for accounting in the business ? (A) Records and Codes (B) Documentary archives (C) Materials and devices (D) Legal Regulations 99. In general usage accountability means (A) Something done informally (B) Something achieved

Model Papers D 735 (C) Something done continuously (D) All of the above 100. Accountability, which is represented by an artifact, includes

ü

(A) (B) (C) (D)

Process, Records, People Theory, Practice, Records Theory, Practice, People People, Records, Accounts

ANSWERS

1. (B)

2. (B)

3. (A)

4. (D)

5. (C)

6. (A)

7. (C)

8. (A)

9. (C)

10. (C)

11. (C)

12. (A)

13. (A)

14. (D)

15. (C)

16. (A)

17. (B)

18. (A)

19. (B)

20. (B)

21. (B)

22. (C)

23. (B)

24. (D)

25. (C)

26. (A)

27. (A)

28. (C)

29. (A)

30. (B)

31. (A)

32. (D)

33. (B)

34. (A)

35. (B)

36. (B)

37. (D)

38. (A)

39. (D)

40. (D)

41. (B) 51. (C)

42. (A) 52. (C)

43. (C) 53. (A)

44. (D) 54. (D)

45. (A) 55. (D)

46. (C) 56. (D)

47. (C) 57. (C)

48. (B) 58. (D)

49. (C) 59. (D)

50. (B) 60. (D)

61. (A)

62. (A)

63. (B)

64. (B)

65. (B)

66. (B)

67. (B)

68. (C)

69. (B)

70. (C)

71. (A)

72. (D)

73. (B)

74. (B)

75. (B)

76. (A)

77. (A)

78. (C)

79. (B)

80. (D)

81. (C)

82. (D)

83. (B)

84. (C)

85. (C)

86. (C)

87. (A)

88. (B)

89. (B)

90. (A)

91. (B)

92. (D)

93. (C)

94. (A)

95. (C)

96. (D)

97. (B)

98. (C)

99. (D)

100. (A)

736 D Library and Information Science Specific

Model Paper-2 Note : This paper contains hundred (100) Objective type questions, each question carrying two (2) marks. Attempt all of them. 1. Which set of rules is applicable for exchange of files over Internet ? (A) FTP/IP (B) HTTP (C) HTML (D) HYPERLINK 2. The first printed works are called (A) Impensis (B) Incunabula (C) Impression (D) Imprimatur 3. CCF stands for (A) Common Communication Format (B) Centre for Communication Format (C) Committee for Communication Format (D) Common Curriculum Format 4. Resources sharing among libraries was prompted by the factors (A) Price escalation (B) Information explosion (C) Both (A) and (B) (D) None of the above 5. The Library Association (UK) is now the component of (A) ASLIB (B) CILIP (C) ALA (D) None of these 6. Which of the following professional Associations does not exist now ? (A) IFLA (B) FID (C) ALA (D) IASLIC 7. Real Time Access refers to (A) Access in advance (B) Access after some time (C) Access when searched for (D) None of the above 8. Theory X and Theory Y relate to (A) Planning (B) Motivation (C) Innovation (D) None of the above 9. Dewey De cimal classification is now looked after by (A) Lake Placid Club

(B) Library of Congress (C) OCLC (D) Classification Research Group 10. INSDOC has been merged with NISCOM and is now known as (A) DELNET (B) NISCAIR (C) DESIDOC (D)NASSDOC 11. World Wide Web was first designed by (A) Charles Babbage (B) F.W. Lancaster (C) Ted Nelson (D) Tim Berner’s Lee 12. ISBN consists of (A) 6 digits (C) 13 digits

(B) 8 digits (D) 15 digits

13. Bibliographical coupling is related to (A) Bibliometric studies (B) Bibliography compilation (C) Modes of subject formation (D) Vocabulary control 14. Dublin core meta data consists of (A) 15 elements (B) 10 elements (C) 25 elements (D) 08 elements 15. A type of indexing where terms are coordinated prior to searching (A) Post coordinate indexing (B) Pre coordinate indexing (C) Uniterm indexing (D) None of the above 16. Use of integrated circuits was made in (A) First Generation Computers (B) Second Generation Computers (C) Third Generation Computer (D) Fourth Generation Computers 17. The Network Topology in which nodes are connected to a central hub is known as (A) Ring Topology (B) Bus Topology (C) Star Topology (D) Mesh Topology

Model Papers D 737 18. Which of the following is a term used for working assumption of a solution to a problem ? (A) Research (B) Hypothesis (C) Bibliography (D) Thesis 19. Computer Memory is measured in (A) Bytes (B) Kilobytes (C) Megabytes (D) All of the above 20. DELNET stands for (A) Developing Library Network (B) Department of Electronics Library Network (C) Distance Education Library Network (D) Delhi Library Network 21. Assertion (A) : Demand is the only governing factor in Book selection. Reason (R) : Patrons’ requirements govern building library collections. Codes : (A) (A) is true and (R) is false. (B) (A) is false and (R) is true. (C) (A) and (R) both are true. (D) (A) and (R) both are false. 22. Assertion (A) : An indexing language is much more than a list of index terms that are acceptable to users. Reason (R) : An indexing language helps users discriminate between terms and reduces ambiguity in the language. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is not the correct explanation. (B) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation. (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (D) (A) is true, but (R) is false. 23. Assertion (A) : Libraries are facing a threat and are bound to disappear soon. Reason (R) : Internet and WWW provide ac ce ss to Oc e ans of inform ati on Worldwide. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 24. Assertion (A) : Deacidification is a measure to preserve documents in any medium.

Reason (R) : Digital preservation needs a different preservation care. Codes : (A) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 25. Assertion (A) : SDI is a user oriented current information service. Reason (R) : It is an alerting service directed towards groups. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 26. Assertion (A) : Indexing periodical retrieves information, which includes brief summary of the article. Reason (R) : It provides list of articles alongwith the title, authors and other bibliographic details. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) Both (A) and (R) are false. (C) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (D) (A) is false, but (R) are true. 27. Assertion (A) : Median is simply the middle value when the data have been arranged in ascending or descending order. Reason (R) : Median refers to the middle value in a distribution. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (C) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 28. Assertion (A) : Data base is a collection of interrelated data stored together. Reason (R) : It is an organised, integrated collection of data. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are false. (B) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) (A) is true, but (R) is false.

738 D Library and Information Science Specific 29. Assertion (A) : Dewey Decimal is an enumerative scheme of classification. Reason (R) : The scheme has developed several devices and is no more an enumerative scheme of classification. Codes : (A) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (B) (A) is not true, but (R) is true. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 30. Assertion (A) : A Library legislation provides proper governance and management. Reason (R) : It ensures free public library service to all irrespective of caste, creed and sex. Codes : (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) Both (A) and (R) are false. (C) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (D) (A) is false, but (R) is true. 31. Arrange the following in the chronological sequence of their development. (i) ISBD (ii) CCF (iii) FRBR (iv) MARC Codes : (A) (i), (ii), (iv), (iii) (B) (iv), (i), (ii), (iii) (C) (iii), (ii), (iv), (i) (D) (i), (iv), (ii), (iii) 32. Arrange the following secondary publications according to the beginning of their publication in chronological order. (i) Biological Abstracts (ii) Chemical Abstracts (iii) LISA (iv) Index Medicus Codes : (A) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) (B) (i), (iii), (ii), (iv) (C) (ii), (i), (iii), (iv) (D) (iii), (i), (iv), (ii) 33. Arrange the following States chronologically according to year of enactment of Library Legislation. (i) Tamil Nadu (ii) U.P. (iii) Gujarat (iv) Mizoram Codes : (A) (iv), (iii), (i), (ii) (B) (ii), (iv), (iii), (i) (C) (i), (iv), (iii), (ii) (D) (i), (ii), (iv), (iii) 34. Arrange the following chronologically according to their use in computers :

(i) Vacuum tube (ii) Microchip (iii) Integrated circuits (iv) Transistors Codes : (A) (i), (iii), (ii), (iv) (B) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) (C) (i), (iv), (iii), (ii) (D) (ii), (iv), (iii), (i) 35. Arrange the following professional Associations according to the year of their establishment : (i) ILA (ii) IASLIC (iii) ALA (iv) ASLIB Codes : (A) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) (B) (iii), (iv), (i), (ii) (C) (iv), (iii), (ii), (i) (D) (i), (iii), (ii), (iv) 36. Arrange the following according to chronological order : (i) Universal Copyright convention (ii) Berne Convention (iii) Indian Copyright Act (iv) WIPO Copyright Act Codes : (A) (ii), (iv), (iii), (i) (B) (iii), (ii), (iv), (i) (C) (i), (iii), (ii), (iv) (D) (ii), (i), (iii), (iv) 37. Arrange the structure of the Research report in correct order : (i) Table of contents (ii) Appendices (iii) Text (iv) Title page Codes : (A) (iii), (i), (iv), (ii) (B) (i), (ii), (iii), (iv) (C) (ii), (iii), (iv), (i) (D) (iv), (i), (iii), (ii) 38. Arrange the following schemes of classification according to their year of publication : (i) CC (ii) DDC (iii) LC (iv) UDC Codes : (A) (ii), (i), (iii), (iv) (B) (ii), (iii), (iv), (i) (C) (i), (ii), (iv), (iii) (D) (iv), (iii), (ii), (i) 39. Match the following List - I List - II (a) The Right to Information (i) 2000 Act of India (b) Universal Declaration (ii) 2005 of Human Rights

Model Papers D 739 (c) Information (iii) 1948 Technology Act. (India) (d) Digital Millennium Act (iv) 1998 Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (C) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (D) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) 40. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Father of Scientific (i) Henry Fayol Management (b) Father of (ii) Elton Mayo Administration (c) Father of Human (iii) F. Hertzberg Relations School (d) Father of Corporate (iv) F.W. Taylor Strategy Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (B) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (C) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (D) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) 41. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) C.A. Cutter (i) Bibliographic classification (b) H.E. Bliss (ii) Expansive classification (c) J.D. Brown (iii) Universal classification (d) Paul Otlet (iv) Subject & Henry classification LaFontaine Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (D) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) 42. Match the following : List - I (a) International Conference on Cataloguing Principles (b) International Meeting of Cataloguing Experts

List - II (i) 1969 (ii) 1961

(c) International Symposium of Bibliographic Exchange format (d) First CCF Users meeting Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (B) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (C) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (D) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii)

(iii) 1990

(iv) 1978

43. Match the following : List -I List-II (a) NASSDOC (i) Defence Science (b) DEVSIS (ii) Social Sciences (c) I NI S (iii) Development Science (d) DESIDOC (iv) Nuclear Science Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (D) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) 44. Match the following : List -I List-II (a) CLRI (i) Hyderabad (b) SENDOC (ii) New Delhi (c) NASSDOC (iii) Mumbai (d) BARC (iv) Chennai Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (B) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (C) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (D) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) 45. Match the following : List -I List-II (a) Fumigation (i) Acquisition (b) Building library (ii) Preservation collection (c) Kardex (iii) Reference service (d) Information (iv) Registration of Desk Periodicals Code: (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (B) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (C) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (D) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii)

740 D Library and Information Science Specific Read the passage given below, and answer the questions based on your understanding of the passage. (Question Nos. 46-50) Invention is the creation of an idea that can be translated to practice. It is also the process of bringing new technology into being. Invention is goal directed, the process is orderly, and it is essentially an intellectual process. An inventor is generally not a big reservoir of existing knowledge or of past failures. A substantial part of a scientist’s time is spent in collecting facts. The greater a scientist’s familiarity with the great scientific works, the greater will be his own power of invention. Ingenuity is the younger brother of imagination. Theoretical creation is an intermediate step between invention and discovery. A scientist who is familiar with a number of methods attached to a problem, is most likely to solve the greatest number of problems. Invention is the basic ingredient of innovation. Innovation is of two kinds, i.e., in product and service. It is a slow process. Innovations which started several years ago may bear fruit now. Innovation involves the bringing of an invention into commercial use. In some cases, invention and innovation merge into one another. Invention and innovation have been the foundations of industrial development in most advanced countries. Innovation bring about competition and competition brings about efficiency. Of the total innovation process, research is only a part. Research may invent, but invention can only be utilized by the complicated and complex process of innovation. Innovation is more often the result of recognizing and adapting an idea than of invention a new one. Utilization of technical information including research outputs can result in an industrial innovation. Innovators achieve success, but not imitations. In the past, innovation came from individual scientists. Individual inventors were responsible for innovation. In modern industry it is rarely the case, teams of scientists are really responsible

for inventions and innovations. Success in invention and innovation depends not only on originality and imagination but also on knowing what and how to invent and innovate. 46. What is an invention ? (A) It is the idea that has the characteristics of application. (B) A theoretical idea regardless of application. (C) A discovery that does not lead to new technology. (D) A process bereft of use. 47. An invention involves (A) Co lle c tio n & app lic atio n o f past data. (B) Simply an e ffort to e xpl ore past knowledge. (C) Redefining knowledge of the past. (D) Exploiting past knowledge and newly collected facts. 48. Industrial development and competitive environment are possible when (A) Invention follows innovation (B) Invention leads to innovation (C) Invention prevents innovation (D) Invention has little practical use 49. Invention is carried out at present (A) by an individual researcher with little originality and imagination. (B) by an individual researcher with high level imagination. (C) by a group of researchers with adequate originality and imagination. (D) by industrialists to achieve success in business. 50. What is innovation ? (A) Innovation is a theoretical process. (B) Innovation conceals invention. (C) Innovation is a process of application of invention. (D) Innovation provides data for invention. 51. Linear model of communication in knowledge based on Aristotles’ model of communication was proposed by (A) Juger Heberman (B) A.J. Wells

Model Papers D 741 (C) C.E. Shannon & W. Weaver (D) G. Gerbner 52. ISBN changed from 10 digits to 13 from (A) January, 2007 (B) January, 2008 (C) January, 2006 (D)January, 2005 53. Library Legislation refers to the development of (A) Academic Libraries (B) Special Libraries (C) Public Libraries (D) None of the above 54. IASLIC was founded in the year (A) 1955 (B) 1965 (C) 1975 (D)1985 55. Which Bibliometrics Law describes the frequency of publication by authors in a given field ? (A) Lotka’s Law (B) Zipf’s Law (C) Bradford’s Law (D)No ne o f t he above 56. Which one of the following protocols is used in transferring file over internet ? (A) POP (B) FTP (C) SMTP (D)TCP/IP 57. Transistors were used in which generation of computers ? (A) First generation (B) Second generation (C) Third generation (D) None of the above 58. Linux is an example of (A) Application software (B) System software (C) Library software (D) All of the above 59. UNIMARC was developed under the umbrella of (A) OCLC (B) IFLA (C) UNESCO (D)None of these 60. How different nodes in a network are connected and how they communicate are determined ? (A) By Network Connectivity (B) By Network Topology (C) By Network Compatibility (D) None of the above

61. World Cat is maintained by (A) Library of Congress (B) Online Computer Library Center (C) American Library Association (D) None of the above 62. Number of States in India which have enacted Public Library Legislation till date is (A) Seven (B) Ten (C) Thirteen (D)Sixteen 63. When a source referred to once in the footnote is referred to again and between them no other reference (i.e. citation) intervenes, then the footnote uses the abbreviation (A) Ibid (B) Id (C) Op.Cit (D)None of these 64. Indexing system in which the coordination of terms is done at the search stage was first introduced by (A) S.R. Ranganathan (B) Derek Austin (C) Morfiner Taube (D)H.P. Luhn 65. Index Medicus is brought out as printed publication (A) Quarterly (B) Monthly (C) Weekly (D) Has ceased publication 66. Which publication was not authored by S.R. Ranaganathan ? (A) Prolegomena to library classification (B) Reference Service (C) Ramanujan : The man and the Mathematician (D) Living with Books 67. JSTOR is an online system for archiving and accessing academic journals. It is located in (A) Germany (B) UK (C) USA (D)Budapest 68. 260 tag in MARC format marks (A) The edition (B) The publication information (C) The physical description (D) A topical subject heading 69. Mean, Median and Mode are (A) Measure of Central tendency

742 D Library and Information Science Specific (B) Measure of deviation (C) Measure of Information System (D) Measure of Sampling 70. ‘Five Laws of Library Science’ was first published in (A) 1925 (B) 1930 (C) 1931 (D)1933 71. Assertion (A) : ISBDs were devised by UNESCO. Reason (R) : They are the standards for all types of bibliographic activities. (A) (A) is false but (R) is true. (B) (A) is true but (R) is false. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 72. Assertion (A) : Web OPAC is a computerised library catalogue available to the patrons online. Reason (R) : It can be searched by the users within the four walls of the library only. (A) (A) is true but (R) is false. (B) (A) is false but (R) is true. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 73. Assertion (A) : A sample is the representation of a whole. Reason (R) : The sample is subjected to observation and analysis. (A) (A) is false but (R) is true. (B) (A) is true but (R) is false. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 74. Assertion (A) : Electronic access to information is becoming easy day by day. Reason (R) : The printed materials pouring out of the world presses do not show any decline. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not a correct explanation of (A). (B) (A) is true but (R) is false. (C) (A) is false but (R) is true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 75. Assertion (A) : Use of microfilmming is becoming obsolete day by day. Reason (R) : ICT has developed digital technologies, which are quick, cheap and easy to handle.

(A) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not a correct explanation. (B) Both (A) and (R) are false. (C) (A) is true but (R) is false. (D) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A). 76. Assertion (A) : Libraries are changing in the wake of emerging ICT environment. Reason (R) : Libraries are adopting new competencies to operate services in the environment of information super highways. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) (A) is true but (R) is false. (C) (A) is false but (R) is true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 77. Assertion (A) : In fifth law, the word used in ‘organism’ not ‘organisation’. Reason (R) : Libraries grow in collection size, human resources, physical facilities and services from time to time. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the correct explanation of (A). (B) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A). (C) (A) is true but (R) is false. (D) (A) is false but (R) is true. 78. Assertion (A) : Primary source is one in which information is original. Reason (R) : Secondary sources repack the original information. (A) Both (A) and (R) are true. (B) (A) is true but (R) is false. (C) (A) is false but (R) is true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 79. Assertion (A) : Loose Assemblage is the process of linking toge the r diffe rent classe s. Reason (R) : This mode was formerly known as subject bundle. (A) (A) is false but (R) is true. (B) (A) is true but (R) is false. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 80. Assertion (A) : Provision of services outside the library regular service centre or outlet is essential to reach more and more patrons.

Model Papers D 743 Reason (R) : Library extension services help libraries to cover larger population of patrons. (A) (A) is true but (R) is false. (B) (A) is false but (R) is true. (C) Both (A) and (R) are true. (D) Both (A) and (R) are false. 81. Arrange the following in chronological sequence : (I) Digital Millennium Copyright Act (II) Right to Information Act. (India) (III) Information Technology Act (India) (IV) Indian Copyright Act Codes : (A) (IV), (I), (III), (II) (B) (IV), (II), (III), (I) (C) (I), (IV), (II), (III) (D) (II), (III), (I), (IV) 82. Arrange the following States according to the year of enactment of library legislation : (I) Pondicherry (II) Orissa (III) Rajasthan (IV) Karnataka Codes : (A) (IV), (I), (III), (II) (B) (IV), (II), (III), (I) (C) (IV), (III), (I), (II) (D) (I), (III), (II), (IV) 83. Arrange the following softwares according to their development : (I) E-Print (II) D-space (III) Greenstone (IV) Koha Codes : (A) (IV), (III), (II), (I) (B) (III), (II), (I), (IV) (C) (I), (II), (III), (IV) (D) (II), (III), (IV), (I) 84. Arrange the following steps in research in the sequence of their occurrence : (I) Report writing (II) Research design (III) Collection of data (IV) Analysis of data Codes : (A) (III), (IV), (II), (I) (B) (I), (III), (IV), (II)

(C) (II), (III), (IV), (I) (D) (IV), (II), (III), (I) 85. Arrange the following chronologically according to their year of Birth (I) S.R. Ranganathan (II) Melvil Dewey (III) C.A. Cutter (IV) B.S. Kesvan Codes : (A) (II), (I), (IV), (III) (B) (I), (III), (IV), (II) (C) (III), (II), (I), (IV) (D) (IV), (I), (II), (III) 86. Arrange the following chronologically according to their development : (I) Punched Card (II) Floppy Disc (III) Magnetic Disc (IV) Optical Disc Codes : (A) (II), (III), (I), (IV) (B) (I), (III), (II), (IV) (C) (I), (II), (III), (IV) (D) (IV), (I), (II), (III) 87. Arrange the following according to their development (I) CCC (II) ISBD (III) CCF (IV) MARC II Codes : (A) (I), (IV), (II), (III) (B) (I), (II), (IV), (III) (C) (I), (IV), (III), (II) (D) (IV), (II), (III), (I) 88. The spiral of scientific method involves the following steps in correct sequence : (I) Zenith (II) Ascendant (III) Nadir (IV) Descendant Codes : (A) (I), (III), (II), (IV) (B) (II), (III), (I), (IV) (C) (III), (II), (I), (IV) (D) (I), (IV), (III), (II)

744 D Library and Information Science Specific 89. Match the following

List I (a) AACR-1 (b) AACR-2 (c) ALA code (d) CCC Codes : (a) (b) (A) (iv) (ii) (B) (ii) (i) (C) (i) (iii) (D) (ii) (i)

92. Match the following :

List II (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

List I

1978 1967 1934 1949

(c) (iii) (iii) (iv) (iv)

(d) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii)

90. Match the following :

List I

List II

(a) Books in print (b) Ulrich International Periodical Directory (c) World of Learning (d) Who’s Who in India Codes : (a) (b) (A) (ii) (i) (B) (i) (ii) (C) (iii) (i) (D) (i) (iii)

(i) Bibliography of periodicals (ii) Trade Bibliography

(iii) Biographical source (iv) Directory

(c) (iv) (iii) (iv) (iv)

(d) (iii) (iv) (ii) (ii)

91. Match the following :

List I (a) Henry Fayol (b) F.W. Taylor (c) Abraham Maslow (d) Douglas McGregor Codes : (a) (b) (A) (iii) (iv) (B) (i) (ii) (C) (iv) (iii) (D) (i) (iv)

List II (i) Hierarchy Ne eds (ii) Theory X and Theory Y (iii) Classical Theory (iv) Scientific Management (c) (i) (iii) (ii) (iii)

(d) (ii) (iv) (i) (ii)

List II

(a) E.J. Coates (b) H.P. Luhn

(i) KWIC (ii) Things, Property, Material, Action (c) Derek Austin(iii) Concrete and process (d) J. Kaiser (iv) PRECIS Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (A) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (B) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (C) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (D) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) 93. Match the following :

List I (a) NTC (b) ITC (c) BLDSC (d) NISCAIR Codes : (a) (b) (A) (iv) (iii) (B) (ii) (i) (C) (i) (iii) (D) (i) (ii)

List II (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

UK India Netherlands USA

(c) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii)

(d) (ii) (iii) (iv) (iv)

94. Match the following :

List I (Subjects) (a) India (b) Agriculture of wheat (c) Biochemistry (d) Biological Sciences Codes : (a) (b) (A) (iv) (ii) (B) (i) (iii) (C) (iv) (iii) (D) (ii) (iv)

List II (Modes of Formation) (i) Agglomeration (ii) Lamination (iii) Fusion (iv)Denudation

(c) (iii) (ii) (i) (iii)

(d) (i) (iv) (ii) (i)

95. Match the following : List I List II (a) Elements of Library(i) D.J. Desolla Classification Price

Model Papers D 745 (b) Little Science Big Science (c) Documentation (d) Subject Approach to Information Codes : (a) (b) (A) (ii) (i) (B) (iii) (ii) (C) (iv) (ii) (D) (i) (ii)

(ii) S.R. Ranganathan (iii) D.J. Fosket (iv) S.C. Bradford

(c) (iv) (i) (iii) (iii)

(d) (iii) (iv) (i) (iv)

Read the passage given below and answer the questions based on your understanding of the passage. (Question Nos. 96-100) In the late 1990s the publishing world launched a new system into the information and publishing world called Digital Object Identifiers (DOIs). DOIs are alphanumeric character strings that identify objects in an electronic environment. DOIs are universal, unique and permanent identification tags for online content that is registered in an online directory. DOIs can cover any form of digital files such as text, image, video, audio or even software. DOIs can also cover many levels of content. For example, it might tag an entire book, a chapter in the book, illustrations, individual sentences, or perhaps the book’s index. It is a system that identifies creation endeavours and uniquely marks the content of these items. It is intended to individualize information units on the Web. DOIs can be placed in a variety of places, such as in the object itself, in an information structure that contains the object, on a Web page that describes the element, in a database or as an entry in an indexing system. The identifier tags have no intrinsic meaning, as a classification code does. They are content labels, each being unique and without duplicates. The identifiers are stored in a directory that allows the lookup of the current Internet address of the copyright owner and where the information now resides. The author, publisher or current owner is responsible for maintaining the response page, which presents data about the information item and the conditions of its use.

The directory of DOIs routes inquiries to the up-to-date sites on the Internet for accessing the content of the object. When addresses change, the directory will route the query to where the content is currently located or to where information is given concerning how to obtain it. Over time, when objects move around or change ownership, the directory keeps tabs on these changes. Although the major purpose of the DOI system is the management of intellectual property, indexing and abstracting services, as well as document delivery services will find DOIs a useful tool. 96. What are DOIs ? (A) DOIs are numbe rs which identify object in traditional environment (B) DOIs are identifiers consisting of alphanume ric character strings for printed materials. (C) DOIs are alphanumeric character strings for electronic serials. (D) DOIs are alphanumeric character strings for electronic sources of information available on-line. 97. What are the materials covered by DOIs ? (A) DOIs cover books and journals. (B) DOIs cover texts, images, audio visual materials in digital form. (C) DOIs cover electronically available S & T information. (D) DOIs cover digital format in US and Europe only. 98. Do DOIs play any role in grouping of information sources ? (A) DOIs constitute the eclassification scheme to group sources of information. (B) DOIs are not class numbers as such and have nothing to do with arrangement. (C) DOIs play the dual role of identifying and grouping. (D) DOIs are only like traditional class numbers in e-form. 99. What is the major purpose of DOI system ? (A) To organise e-resources on the Net.

746 D Library and Information Science Specific (B) To manage intellectual property. (C) To provide bibliographic description of digitized resources. (D) To control free access to eresources. 100. How does DOI system operate ? (A) Routes inquiries to designated Document Supply Libraries.

ü

(B) Routes inquires to up to date sites of digital libraries. (C) Routes inquiries to national e-resources depositories (D) Routes inquiries to relevant sites on the Net.

ANSWERS

1. (B)

2. (B)

3. (A)

4. (C)

5. (B)

6. (B)

7. (C)

8. (B)

9. (C)

10. (B)

11. (D)

12. (C)

13. (B)

14. (A)

15. (B)

16. (C)

17. (C)

18. (B)

19. (D)

20. (A)

21. (C)

22. (B)

23. (C)

24. (C)

25. (A)

26. (A)

27. (A)

28. (C)

29. (B)

30. (A)

31. (B)

32. (A)

33. (C)

34. (C)

35. (B)

36. (D)

37. (D)

38. (C)

39. (B)

40. (B)

41. (A) 51. (C)

42. (A) 52. (A)

43. (B) 53. (C)

44. (A) 54. (A)

45. (B) 55. (A)

46. (A) 56. (B)

47. (A) 57. (B)

48. (B) 58. (D)

49. (C) 59. (B)

50. (C) 60. (B)

61. (B)

62. (D)

63. (A)

64. (B)

65. (D)

66. (D)

67. (C)

68. (B)

69. (A)

70. (C)

71. (A)

72. (A)

73. (C)

74. (B)

75. (D)

76. (A)

77. (A)

78. (A)

79. (C)

80. (C)

81. (A)

82. (B)

83. (B)

84. (C)

85. (C)

86. (B)

87. (C)

88. (B)

89. (B)

90. (C)

91. (A)

92. (B)

93. (A)

94. (A)

95. (A)

96. (D)

97. (B)

98. (B)

99. (C)

100. (B)

PREVIOUS YEARS’ PAPERS

(747)

748 D Library and Information Science Specific

June, 2015 LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE Paper-II Note :

This paper contains fifty (50) objective type questions, each question carrying two (2) marks. Attempt all the questions.

1. S.M.C.R communication model was developed by : (1) David K Berlo (2) Harold Lasswell (3) W. Schramm (4) Charles Osgood 2. Who suggested the ‘Seven Lamps of Conduct’ as must for library professional ? (1) Joint Council of Library Association in India (JOCLAI) (2) Indian Library Association (3) S.R. Ranganathan (4) R.L. Mettal 3. DARE, which is a UNESCO database, provides information for : (1) Social Sciences (2) Applied Sciences (3) Law (4) Pure Sciences 4. Which type of information need can be satisfied with Review and State - of - the - Art Reports ? (1) Everyday (2) Exhaustive (3) Current (4) Catching up 5. The Principle which states that if the facet B in a subject will not be operative without the concept behind A is conceded then B should follow A is known as : (1) Principle of later in time (2) Principle of gradual evolution (3) Principle of bottom upwards (4) Wall - picture principle 6. The principle which states ‘that between two or more possible alternatives bearing on a particular phenomenon the one leading to overall economy is to be preferred’ is known as :

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

(1) Law of symmetry (3) Law of Osmosis (2) Law of Parsimony (4) Law of Impartiality The records associated with genealogy file might reasonably be arranged in a (1) Clustered files (2) Tree - structured files (3) Hashed files (4) Indexed files What is the purpose of cookies ? (1) Identify Users on the server (3) Connects database (2) Act as buffer store (4) Develops dynamic webpages “Rank × frequency = constant” formula describes the essence of : (1) Impact factor (2) Zipf’s Law (3) Fuzzy query (4) Lotka Law Name the Indian Librarian who was honoredwith the title of ‘Khan Bahadur’ in 1935 by the British Government ? (1) S.R. Ranganathan (2) B.S. Kesavan (3) K. M. Asadullah (4) K. Issac NALANDA, the digital library is an initiation of : (1) DRTC (2) IISC Bangalore (3) National Institute of Technology, Calicut (4) NISCAIR

Previous Years’ Papers D 749 12. Six Sigma in quality management was developed by : (1) Motorola (2) IBM (3) Honeywell (4) GENPACT 13. In Binary Number System digit ‘11’ is represented by : (1) 1010 (2) 00001011 (3) 110011 (4) 00010110 14. Arrange the following elements of ISBN in proper order : (a) Check Digit (b) Registration Group Element (c) Publication Element (d) Registrant Element Codes : (1) (a), (c), (b), (d) (2) (c), (a), (d), (b) (3) (d), (b), (a), (c) (4) (b), (d), (c), (a) 15. Identify the correct sequence of user tasks that are supported by the structure of FRBR, RDA, 0.2 version : (1) Identify, Select, Obtain, Find (2) Find, Identify, Select, Obtain (3) Select, Identify, Find, Obtain (4) Find, Select, Identify, Obtain 16. Which of the following are formal means of communication ? (a) Adhoc talks (b) Reports (c) Blogs (d) Meetings Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. (2) (b) and (c) are correct. (3) (b) and (d) are correct. (4) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. 17. Identify parts of social science citation Index. (a) Corporate Index (b) Permuterm Subject Index (c) Source Index (d) Title Index Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct.

18.

19.

20.

21.

(3) (c), (d) and (a) are correct. (4) (d), (a) and (b) are correct. Which of the following display racks are used to display print periodical publications? (a) Kardex (b) Steptype (c) Pigeon hole type (d) Inclined type Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct (3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (b) and (d) are correct Which of the following elements are associated with Dervin’s Model of Information Seeking Behaviour ? (a) Situation (b) Extracting (c) Gap (d) Browsing Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (b) and (c) are correct. (3) (a) and (c) are correct. (4) (b) and (d) are correct. Which of the following are the salient features of UDC - IME ? (a) Minimum three digits in a class number (b) Main Class 4 is vacant (c) Notation is independent of any Language or scripts (d) More suitable to micro documents Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. (2) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. (3) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (a), (c) and (d) are correct. Which of the following are advantageous features of Portable Document Format (PDF)? (a) More compatibility (b) Easy Editing (c) Supports image format (d) Good compression ratio

750 D Library and Information Science Specific

22.

23.

24.

25.

Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (b) and (c) are correct. (3) (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (d) and (a) are correct. Which of the following sampling techniques offer an ‘equal probability selection method’? (a) Simple random sampling (b) Quota sampling (c) Purposive sampling (d) Proportional stratified sampling Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (b) and (c) are correct. (3) (a) and (c) are correct. (4) (a) and (d) are correct. Identify the three information activities presented by James Krikelas (1983) as the foundation of his ISB model: (a) Information gathering (b) Information Seeking (c) Information computing (d) Information giving Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. (2) (b), (d) and (a) are correct. (3) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (a), (c) and (d) are correct. Arrange in sequence the following state Public Library Acts according to the year of their enactment. (a) West Bengal (b) Orissa (c) Arunachal Pradesh (d) Karnataka Codes : (1) (d), (a), (b), (c) (2) (b), (a), (d), (c) (3) (c), (b), (d), (a) (4) (d), (b), (c), (a) Arrange the following books by S.R. Ranganathan according to their publication year.

(a) Colon classification (b) Elements of library classification (c) Philosophy of library classification (d) Prolegomena to library classification Codes : (1) (a), (d), (b), (c) (2) (c), (d), (b), (a) (3) (b), (c), (d), (a) (4) (d), (c), (b), (a) 26. Arrange the following in the order of their development : (a) DOS (b) MACOS (c) LINUX (d) UBUNTO Codes : (1) (a), (b), (c), (d) (2) (b), (c), (d), (a) (3) (a), (c), (b), (d) (4) (b), (d), (a), (c) 27. Identify the correct chronological order in which the following were established : (1) National Library of India (Kolkata), Delhi Public Library, Documentation Research and Training Centre, Raja Ram Mohan Roy Library Foundation (2) Delhi Public Library, Documentation Research and Training Centre, Raja Ram Mohan Roy Library Foundation, National Library of India (Kolkata) (3) Documentation Research and Training Centre, Raja Ram Mohan Roy Library Foundation, Delhi Public Library, National Library of India (Kolkata) (4) Raja Ram Mohan Roy Library Foundation, National Library of India (Kolkata), Delhi Public Library, Documentation Research and Training Centre 28. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) W.Edward (i) Quality Control Deming Circles (b) Elton Mayo (ii) Statistical Process and others Control (c) Kaoru (iii) Hawthorne Ishikawa Studies (d) Shigeo Shingo (iv) Zero defect

Previous Years’ Papers D 751 Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (2) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (3) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) (4) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) 29. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) A pictograph that (i) Petroglyphs stands for an individual word (b) A pictograph that (ii) Petrograms stands for an individual idea (c) Pictographs drawn (iii) Ideogram or painted on rocks (d) Pictographs incised (iv) Logogram or carved on rocks Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (2) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (3) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (4) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) 30. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Ecological Theory (i) Sanda of Human Erdelez Information Behaviour (b) Everyday Life (ii) Williamson Information Seeking (c) Information (iii) Nicholas Encountering J. Belkin (d) Anamalous (iv) Reijo State of Knowledge Sarolainen (ASK) Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (2) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (3) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (4) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii)

31. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Annals of Library (i) and Information Studies (b) Journal of (ii) Information Management (c) Herald of (iii) Library Science (d) Library Herald (iv)

S.R.E.L.S , Bangalore Delhi Library Association NISCAIR, Delhi P.N. Kaula Endowment, Lucknow

Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (2) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (3) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (4) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) 32. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Barack Hussein (i) Gazetteer Obama-II (b) GDP Growth (ii) Who is who in last year (c) Universities in U.K. (iii) Year Book (d) Area of Ganjam (iv) World of District Learning Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (2) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (3) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (4) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) 33. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Illiad (i) “Collective collection” of world libraries (b) Questionpoint (ii) Cost effective training and staff development programme

752 D Library and Information Science Specific (c) Webjunction (d) World Cat

(iii) High quality reference service (iv) Interlibrary loan operation

Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (2) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (3) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (4) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) 34. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Nominal scale (i) Temperature measurement (b) Ordinal scale (ii) Gender as variable (c) Interval scale (iii) Ranking of library services (d) Ratio scale (iv) Mass of a body Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (2) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (3) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (4) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) 35. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) My SQL (i) Language (b) Apache (ii) Server (c) Perl (iii) User Interface (d) API (iv) RDBMS Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) (2) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (3) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (4) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) 36. Match the following : List - I List - IIList - II (a) Real time (i) Bulletin Boards communication (b) Telnet (ii) Subscribe-d Membership

(c) USENET

37.

38.

39.

40.

(iii) Video conferencing (iv) Remote Login

(d) Listserv Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (2) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (3) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (4) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) Assertion (A) : Computers are tools that can help to create more Knowledge. Reason (R) : Knowledge is mechanical hence developed in computers. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true. Assertion (A) : Users need to have training in accessing to a large number of E- journals through consortia. Reason (R) : Most of the users are not aware of using Web - resources. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) Both (A) and (R) are true. Assertion (A) : There is no need for distinct geographical sources like Gazetteers, maps, atlas, etc. Reason (R) : Some of the general reference sources like encyclopaedias, yearbooks, almanacs also include geographical information. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false but (R) is true. Assertion (A) : Boolean Logic allows a user to logically relate multiple concepts together to define what information is needed.

Previous Years’ Papers D 753

41.

42.

43.

44.

Reason (R) : If the operators (AND, OR, NOT) are interpreted in their normal interpretation, they act too restrictive or too general. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (3) (A) is true and (R) is false. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) (A) is false and (R) is true. Assertion (A) : While using OP AC user need to have some understanding of inverted files and search strategies. Reason (R) : Online catalogues place the responsibility for a search strategy on the user. Codes : (1) (A) is true but (R) is false. (2) Both (A) and (R) are true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true. Assertion (A) : Median is simply the middle value when the data have been arranged in an ascending or descending order. Reason (R) : Median refers to the middle value in a distribution. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) Both (A) and (R) are true. Assertion (A) : Open access publication model involves zero cost. Reason (R) : Open access increases the visibility of the publication, as they are available to the users for free access. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) (A) is true but (R) is false. (3) (A) is false but (R) is true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A) : Questionnaire is often used in surveys as the primary data collection tool. Reason (R) : Questionnaires prevent personal contact with respondents.

Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false but (R) is true. 45. Assertion (A) : When the data is skewed, the arithmetic mean calculated is misleading. Reason (R) : Even when the data is skewed, the arithmetic mean gives some valuable information but needs to be interpreted in right manner. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) Both (A) and (R) are true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true. Read the passage given below and answer the questions based on your understanding of the passage (Question nos. 46-50) In British Columbia (B.C.) there are no public libraries on reserve, and the libraries that do exist on reserve are generally small, underfunded band council collections, and band school libraries. In Ontario, the provincial government contributes to the development of public libraries in First Nations Communities. However in 20012002, only 52 of 141 First Nation libraries in Ontario received operating grants, and because the operating grants are based on population size many small communities are underfunded. Among First Nations Communities, libraries are not always a priority when there are pressing needs in the areas of rights and title claims, infrastructure, education, and health. A First Nations library worker explains: “We need all our money to fund our land claims. If we don’t have land, we don’t have community. If we don’t have community, we don’t need a library.” The Library Services for Saskatchewan’s Aboriginal Peoples Committee is composed of Aboriginal and public sector representatives who meet six times a year to advise on the

754 D Library and Information Science Specific implementation of the recommendations. Public libraries in urban centers tend not to differentiate between Aboriginal people and the general population. As a consequence urban Aboriginal peoples are often not well served. There are exceptions, such as the Albert Library branch of the Regina Public Library and the Spadina branch of the Toronto Public that work. 46. Which of the following reflects the position of libraries In British Columbia ? (1) There are no libraries on reserve. (2) Public libraries on reserve are under funded. (3) Band school libraries exist on reserve. (4) There are 141 First Nations libraries. 47. In Ontario in 2001 - 2002 : (1) Only 52 first Nations libraries existed (2) Only 141 first nations libraries received operating grants (3) Many small communities are underfunded (4) Majority of First Nations libraries received operating grants 48. Among First Nations Communities (1) libraries are always priority

ü

(2) sometimes rights and title claims are pressing needs (3) there are no pressing needs for education and health (4) they need a library even when they do not have land 49. Which of the following is true about public libraries in urban centres ? (1) Public libraries in urban centres tend to differentiate between aboriginal people and the general population (2) Urban aboriginal people are often well served by public library (3) The Albert library branch of the Rijina public library does not work closely with local urban aboriginal communities. (4) Spadina Branch of the Toronto Public library works closely with local aboriginal communities. 50. Which of the following is not true about the library services for Saskatchewan’s Aboriginal Peoples Committee ? (1) It has aboriginal representatives (2) It has public sector representatives (3) They meet once a year (4) They advise on the implementation of the recommendation.

ANSWERS

1. (1)

2. (4)

3. (1)

4. (4)

5. (4)

6. (2)

7. (2)

8. (1)

9. (2)

10. (3)

11. (3)

12. (1)

13. (2)

14. (4)

15. (2)

16. (3)

17. (1)

18. (2)

19. (3)

20. (3)

21. (3)

22. (4)

23. (1&2)

24. (1)

25. (1)

26. (1)

27. (1)

28. (1)

29. (3)

30. (1)

31. (2) 41. (2)

32. (2) 42. (4)

33. (1) 43. (3)

34. (3) 44. (3)

35. (2) 45. (2)

36. (2) 46. (3)

37. (2) 47. (3)

38. (4) 48. (2)

39. (4) 49. (4)

40. (1) 50. (3)

Previous Years’ Papers D 755

June, 2015 LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE Paper-III Note :

This paper contains seventy five (75) objective type questions of two (2) marks each. All questions are compulsory.

1. The protection of copyright in the care of films, photographs, anonymous, pseudonymous publications and works of governments, the 60 year period is counted from : (1) the date of birth of creator (2) year following the death of creator (3) the date of publication (4) as per statement of author 2. International Standard Music Number (ISMN) for print music is promoted, coordinated and supervised by : (1) International Agency for ISMN, London (2) International Standards Agency for Music, Sydney (3) Standards Agency for Music International, Paris (4) The International ISMN Agency, Berlin 3. In which year the WIPO Copyright Treaty was adopted ? (1) 1995 (2) 1996 (3) 1997 (4) 1998 4. Which one of the following data bases has not originated from USA ? (1) BIOSIS (2) MEDLARS (3) Chemical Abstracts (4) INSPEC 5. The knowledge to which we have valid, conscious, introspective access under all circumstances is called : (1) Explicit knowledge (3) Tacit knowledge (2) Semi tacit knowledge (4) Predictive knowledge 6. ‘Working Papers’ fall under the category of: (1) Books (2) Monographs (3) News papers (4) Grey Literature

7. Who developed the theory of Information Supply and Indexing based on five axioms (doctorines) such as - definability; order; sufficient degree of order; predictability; and Fidelity ? (1) Rubert Fugmann (2) William Cooper (3) E. Garfield (4) Calvin Moores 8. Which of the viceroys was associated with the imperial library Act. (1) Lord Curzon (2) Lord Minto (3) Lord Willington (4) Lord Vipin 9. Identify the full form of the acronym FAIFE (IFLA) (1) Full-text Access to Information for Free Expression (2) Full-text Access to Internet for Free Eresources (3) Free Archives on Internet for Free Expression (4) Freedom of Access to Information and Freedom of Expression 10. Boolean Logic was propunded by : (1) P.K. Boole (2) G.R. Boole (3) K.S. Boole (4) George Boole 11. The ‘Other Title Information’ in statement of Responsibility Area in AACR II is preceded by a : (1) Semicolon (2) Hyphen (3) Dash (4) Colon 12. The term ‘Partial Comprehension’ in the Theory of Classification is known as : (1) Denudation (2) Fission (3) Lamination (4) Agglomeration kind -I 13. According to AACR-2 the source from which the title proper is taken is known as :

756 D Library and Information Science Specific

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

(1) Chief Source of Information (2) Preferred Source of Information (3) Prescribed Source of Information (4) Referred Source of Information SYNTOL stands for : (1) Syntactic Term On Line (2) Syntagmatic Term On Line (3) Syntagmatic Organisation Language (4) Syntactic Organising Language Herzberg’s ‘two factor theory’ deals with : (1) Staff recruitment (2) Leadership (3) Decision making (4) Motivation In ‘Open System Interconnect (OSI) Model’ the layer between ‘Network’ and ‘Physical’ is (1) Data link (2) Transport (3) Application (4) Presentation The term indicating a distinct intellectual or artistic creation is : (1) Item (2) Title (3) Expression (4) Work In a questionnaire, an item that directs participants to different follow-up questions depending on their response is called : (1) Contingency question (2) Response set (3) Secondary question (4) Filter question Lok Sabha Secretariate Library Service is called as : (1) Lok Sabha Library (2) Legislators Library Services (3) LARRDIS (4) M.P. Library Services The term literary warrant was introduced by : (1) W.B. Sayers (2) S.R. Ranganathan (3) Melvil Dewey (4) E.W. Hulmes Sarda Ranganathan chair in Library science was announced in 1957 at the centenary celebration of : (1) University of Delhi (2) University of Madras (3) University of Bombay (4) Banaras Hindu University

22. Identify the statements which are true about E-Books in an online environment : (a) E-books are dependent on equipment to be used (b) E-books offer seamless access (c) All publishers produce the e-books equivalent of their print books (d) E-books allows highlighting of contents. Codes : (1) (a), (b), (c) are correct (2) (b), (c), (d) are correct (3) (a), (c), (d) are correct (4) (a), (b), (d) are correct 23. Which of the following are examples of collaborate virtual reference service ? (a) Ask A Librarian (b) Wikis (c) Folksonomies (d) Question Point : 24/7 Reference Codes : (1) (b) and (c) are correct (2) (a) and (b) are correct (3) (a) and (d) are correct (4) (a) and (c) are correct 24. Which of the following institutions are established by Dr. S.R. Ranganathan ? (a) INSDOC, Delhi (b) DRTC, Bangalore (c) Sarada Ranganathan Endowment, Bangalore (d) National Library, Kolkata Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (b) and (d) are correct (3) (a) and (c) are correct (4) (b) and (c) are correct 25. Descriptive technologies required to add meaning to the content of web documents include : (a) Resource Description Framework (RDF) (b) RFID (c) Extensible Markup Language (XML) (d) Barcode Technology Codes : (1) (b) and (c) are correct

Previous Years’ Papers D 757

26.

27.

28.

29.

(2) (a) and (c) are correct (3) (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a) and (b) are correct Which of the following devices may be used for securing extrapolation in chain ? (a) Decimal fraction device (b) Gap device (c) Inversion device (d) Isolate indicator device Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct (3) (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a) and (c) are correct Which of the following are social book marking services ? (a) Facebook (b) Dropbox (c) Favorites (d) Delicious Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct (3) (a) and (c) are correct (4) (b) and (d) are correct Web - Junction is : (a) a place where Public Library Staff gather to build knowledge, skills and support that they need to power relevant vibrant Libraries; (b) on Online Learning Community launched by OLLC in 2003 for Library staff; (c) providing free training resources on Library Management technology and services; (d) an offline platform that provides handson training in web-based applications to LIS students only of USA. Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct (3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (b) and (d) are correct The search in a Boolean query may be expanded by the following methods : (a) Using thesaurus or list of related terms

(b) Stemming or reduction of a word to its root form (c) Using literals (d) Specifying number of terms Codes : (1) (a) and (d) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct (3) (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a) and (b) are correct 30. RDA replaces the General Material Designations and the class of materials are to represented by: (a) Content type (b) Carrier type (c) Media type (d) Context type Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct (3) (a), (b) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (c) and (d) are correct 31. Which of the following are features of Micro subjects ? (a) A basic subject with isolate ideas (b) Subject of great extension and small intension (c) Subject of small extension and greater intension (d) Subject usually embodied in the form of an article in a periodical, or a part or chapter or section of a book Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (c) and (a) are correct (3) (c) and (d) are correct (4) (b) and (d) are correct 32. Which of the following are the features of “Folksonomy” ? (a) Keyword indexing (b) Collaborative tagging (c) Posts in chronological order (d) Audio files Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (a) and (c) are correct (3) (b) and (d) are correct (4) (c) and (d) are correct

758 D Library and Information Science Specific 33. Which of the following concepts are related to each other ? (a) Unity of command (b) Factor of planning (c) Espirit de crops (d) Management by objectives Codes : (1) (c) and (d) are correct (2) (a) and (c) are correct (3) (b) and (d) are correct (4) (a) and (b) are correct 34. Which of the following are synchronous communication tools ? (a) Instant Masseging (b) Blog (c) Video conferencing (d) Bulletin Board Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (a) and (c) are correct (3) (b) and (c) are correct (4) (b) and (d) are correct 35. Net - Neutrality in India : (a) is the outcome of the absence of any law governing net-neutrality in India; (b) requires that all internet users be treated differently and unfairly by user, content, site platform, application, type of attached equipment or mode of communication; (c) is emerged due to reported violation of the net-neutrally principles by the Indian ISPs; (d) came to public debate after a mobile Telephony Service Provider in India announced to levy additional charges for making voice calls (VoIP) from its network using apps like, ‘whats app’, skype, etc. Codes : (1) (a), (c) and (d) are correct (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct (3) (a), (b) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (b) and (c) are correct 36. ‘Information Filtering System’ is primarily designed for :

37.

38.

39.

40.

(a) unstructured or semi- structured data; (b) delivery of information to people who need it; (c) removal and selection of data or an object from an incoming stream for a given profile; (d) location and inclusion of data or object in the stream. Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct (3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (b) and (d) are correct The arithmetic mean is the most commonly used statistical mean to measure : (a) Average (b) Central tendency of data (c) Sum of data points (d) Nature of distribution of data Codes : (1) (a) and (c) are correct (2) (a) and (b) are correct (3) (c) and (d) are correct (4) (b) and (d) are correct Which of the following organizations are associated with the development of public libraries ? (a) UNESCO (b) RRRLF (c) INFLIB NET (d) DRTC Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (a) and (d) are correct (3) (c) and (d) are correct (4) (b) and (d) are correct Which of the following are access authentication methods for digital collection ? (a) Shibboleth (b) Open ID (c) Open URL (d) Counter Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (a) and (c) are correct (3) (b) and (c) are correct (4) (b) and (d) are correct Identify the principles of PRECIS : (a) Context dependency

Previous Years’ Papers D 759 (b) Formalisation (c) Modulation (d) One-to-one relationship Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (3) (a) and (d) are correct (2) (a) and (c) are correct (4) (b) and (d) are correct 41. Arrange the following according to the year of first publication : (a) Medical Subject Headings (b) Sears List of Subject Headings (c) Library of Congress Subject Headings (d) AGROVOC Codes : (1) (b), (a), (d), (c) (2) (c), (b), (a), (d) (3) (b), (a), (c), (d) (4) (a), (c), (d), (b) 42. Arrange the following codes of ethics in the order of their development : (a) Librarian’s Canons of Ethics, First code of ethics for Librarianship in USA. (b) Code of Ethics - ALA. (c) Code of Professional Conduct - LA, UK (d) Code of Ethics for Librarians and Information workers - IFLA Codes : (1) (a), (b), (c), (d) (2) (b), (a), (c), (d) (3) (d), (b), (a), (c) (4) (c), (a), (b), (d) 43. Identify the correct sequence of entities in Group 1 of Functional Requirements of Bibliographic Records (FRBR). RDA 0.2 version : (1) Expression, Works, Items, Manifestation (2) Works, Items, Expression, Manifestation (3) Works, Expression, Manifestation, Item (4) Works, Expression, Item, Manifestation 44. Arrange the following landmarks in the Library Movement of India in proper sequence: (a) First All India Library Conference (Calcutta) (b) First All India Public Library Conference (Madras)

45.

46.

47.

48.

(c) First Public Library Act Enacted in Madras (d) First Library Association in India (Andhra Desa Library Association) Codes : (1) (d), (b), (a), (c) are correct (2) (b), (d), (c), (a) are correct (3) (c), (b) (d), (a) are correct (4) (a), (c), (b), (d) are correct Arrange the following steps given in sample Design in proper sequence : (a) Source List (b) Size of the sample (c) Sampling unit (d) Parameters of Interest Codes : (1) (c), (a), (b), (d) (2) (d), (b), (c), (a) (3) (b), (d), (a), (c) (4) (a), (c), (d), (b) Arrange the following libraries according to their year of foundation : (a) Bibliotheque nationale de France (b) British Library (c) Imperial Library (d) Library of Congress Codes : (1) (a), (b), (c), (d) (2) (a), (c), (d), (b) (3) (a), (c), (b), (d) (4) (a), (d), (c), (b) Arrange in chronological order the following initiatives of the UGC for the Development of academic Libraries in India : (a) Sponsor of National Information Centres (b) Matching Gants for College Libraries (c) Appointment of Library Committee on ‘University and College Libraries’ (Chairman : S.R. Ranganathan) (d) Establishment of Information and Library Network (INFLIBNET) Codes : (1) (c), (b), (a), (d) (2) (b), (a), (c), (d) (3) (c), (a), (b), (d) (4) (d), (b), (a), (c) Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Update (i) Association of (A magazine) College and Research Libraries

760 D Library and Information Science Specific (b) Information (ii) American Library Outlook (an online Association digital magazine) (c) Reference and (iii) Special Library User Service Association Quarterly (RUSQ) (USA) (d) Choice (iv) Chartered (A monthly Institute of journal) Information Library and Professionals (CILIP) Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (2) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (3) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (4) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) 49. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Loose (i) Organometallic Assemblage Chemistry (b) Agglomeration (ii) Physics for Engineers (c) Fusion (iii) Indology (d) Clustering (iv) Natural Sciences Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (2) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (3) (i) (iii) (iv) (iv) (4) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) 50. Match the following : List-I List - II (a) Indian Electronic (i) Ekaswa Thesis and Dissertation Database (b) Database of Indian (ii) TKDL Experts (c) Indian Patent (iii) Shodhganga database (d) Database of Indian (iv) Vidwan Ancient Knowledge Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (2) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (3) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (4) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i)

51. Match the following MARC 21 elements with corresponding tags List - I List - II (a) Personal Main Entry (i) 700 (b) Personal Subject Heading (ii) 245 (c) Personal Added Entry (iii) 100 (d) Bibliographic Title (iv) 600 Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (2) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (3) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (4) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) 52. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) Physical Description (i) 3 XX (b) Mair i Entry Level (ii) 1 XX (c) Control Fields (iii) 70 X to 75 X (d) Added Entry (iv) 00 X Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) (2) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (3) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (4) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) 53. Match the following : List -I List-II (a) Folksonomy (i) Timi Wu (b) Web log (ii) Thomas Vander Wai (c) Net Neutrality (iii) Tim Berners Lee (d) Semantic Web (iv) John Barger Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (2) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (3) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (4) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) 54. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) NATIS (i) IFLA (b) NIP/NITS (ii) Dept. of Culture, Govt. of India (c) CONPOLIS, 1985 (iii) UNESCO

Previous Years’ Papers D 761 (d) National Policy (iv) Raja Ram Mohan on Library and Roy Library Information Foundation System (India) 1986 Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (2) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (3) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) (4) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) 55. Match the following : List-I List - II (a) Elton Mayo (i) Scientific School (b) Henry Fayol (ii) Behavioural School (c) Abraham (iii) Classical Style of Maslow Management (d) F.W. Taylor (iv) Human Relations School Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (2) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (3) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (4) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) 56. Match the following : List -I List - II (a) Web page (i) Navigation (b) Web server (ii) Internet storage (c) Web site (iii) HTML Doc. (d) Web browser (iv) Collection of pages Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (2) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (3) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (4) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) 57. Match the following : List-I List - II (a) Central Tendency (i) Ratio Scale (b) Regression Curve (ii) Delphi Method (c) Refinement of (iii) Mean Judgement (d) Absolute (iv) Relationship zero point between two variables

Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (2) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (3) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (4) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) 58. Assertion (A) : There is no difference between knowledge management and Information Management. Reason (R) : Knowledge and Information are sometimes used synonymously and inter changeably. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false (2) Both (A) and (R) are true (3) (A) is false but (R) is true (4) Both (A) and (R) are false 59. Assertion (A) : Keeping one’s skills and knowledge current is the ethical obligation of a reference librarian. Reason (R) : It is the responsibility of the reference librarian to satisfy the current information needs of users. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true (2) (A) is true but (R) is false (3) (A) is false but (R) is true (4) Both (A) and (R) are false 60. Assertion (A) : The controlled vocabulary system is more difficult to search than the natural language system. Reason (R) : A natural language system has the major advantage that it is completely specific. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true (2) Both (A) and (R) are false (3) (A) is true but (R) is false (4) (A) is false but (R) is true 61. Assertion (A) : The Anomalous State of Knowledge (ASK) model is based on the understanding that, given such an anomaly the user is probably unable to state precisely what is needed to resolve the lack of information. Reason (R) : The ASK can be used to formulate an appropriate search strategy.

762 D Library and Information Science Specific

62.

63.

64.

65.

Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true (2) Both (A) and (R) are false (3) (A) is true but (R) is false (4) (A) is false but (R) is true Assertion (A) : FRAD defines its users some what more narrowly than FRBR. Reason (R) : Functional Requirement for Authority Data (FRAD) takes the same entitles found in FRBR and extends them to the authority context. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true (3) (A) is true and (R) is false (2) Both (A) and (R) are false (4) (A) is false and (R) is true Assertion (A) : The implication of the Recall Precision curve is that if we try to improve Recall, we can only do so at the expense of precision. Reason (R) : Recall precision curve represents the average performance of any given system. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (3) (A) is true but (R) is false. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) (A) is false but (R) is true. Assertion (A) : Pre Coordinate systems are basically one - place systems. Reason (R) : Pre Coordinate systems avoid the need for the citation or significance order. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true (2) Both (A) and (R) are false (3) (A) is true but (R) is false (4) (A) is false but (R) is true Assertion (A) : If the library is to be automated, system analysis is not needed. Reason (R) : System analysis identifies the flow of work. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true (2) (A) is false but (R) is true (3) Both (A) and (R) are false (4) (A) is true but (R) is false

66. Assertion (A) : Web-OPAC is a computerized library catalogue available to the readers on-line. Reason (R) : It can be searched by the users within the four walls of the library only. Codes : (1) (A) is true but (R) is false (2) (A) is false but (R) is true (3) Both (A) and (R) are true (4) Both (A) and (R) are false 67. Assertion (A) : Structured Query Language (SQL) is a query language used for accessing and modifying information in a database. Reason (R) : SQL allows precise specification of the value for attributes of terms to be retrieved. Codes : (1) (A) is false and (R) is true (2) (A) is true and (R) is false (3) Both (A) and (R) are true (4) Both (A) and (R) are false 68. Assertion (A) : LOCKSS is a peer to peer preservation system based on the existence of multiple low cost persistent caches of e - Journals, contents hosted at, different institutions licensed to “own” such content. Reason (R) : Participating institutions cooperate through Membership in the LOCKSS Alliance, which is a collaborative network based on the Commercial software model. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false (2) (A) is false but (R) is true (3) Both (A) and (R) are true (4) Both (A) and (R) are false 69. Assertion (A) : The Central ideas guiding Qualitative research are same as those in Quntitative research. Reason (R) : An essential feature of Qualitative research is the recognition and analysis of different perspectives. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true (2) Both (A) and (R) are false (3) (A) is true but (R) is false (4) (A) is false but (R) is true

Previous Years’ Papers D 763 70. Assertion (A) : The h-index of a scientist is 10, if 10 of his/her papers have at least 10 citations each. Reason (R) : h-index is the only measure to assess a researcher’s output. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false (2) (A) is false but (R) is true (3) Both (A) and (R) are true (4) Both (A) and (R) are false 71. Assertion (A) : One-way ANOVA is a technique used to compare means of three or more samples. Reason (R) : The two group case can be covered by a t-test. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true (2) (A) is true but (R) is false (3) (A) is false but (R) is true (4) Both (A) and (R) are false 72. Assertion (A) : While taking ‘dumb’ page image and producing ‘smart’ e-text that is added to collection of a digital library, Optical Character Recognition (OCR) does not need any manual intervention. Reason (R) : Optical Character Recognition (OCR) process is entirely automatic. Codes : (1) (A) is true but (R) is false (2) (A) is false but (R) is true (3) Both (A) and (R) is true (4) Both (A) and (R) are false

ü

73. Assertion (A) : RSS feeds automatically allow to view breaking news content from any number of web sites in single interface. Reason (R) : RSS feeds are not helpful to offer user alert services. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are false (2) Both (A) and (R) are true (3) (A) is false, but (R) is true (4) (A) is true, but (R) is false 74. Assertion (A) : Word of mouth is one of the promotion techniques which does not require any money to be spent if used for the promotion if LIS products and services. Reason (R) : Word of mouth technique is hardly used in libraries. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true (2) Both (A) and (R) are false (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true 75. Assertion (A) : Marketing segmentation helps libraries in achieving their goals and objectives as it is easy to decide which type of library service is needed by which type of user. Reason (R) : Libraries do not do segmentation of their users to apply marketing strategy in promoting LIS products and services. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) is true (2) Both (A) and (R) is false (3) (A) is true but (R) is false (4) (R) is true but (A) is false

ANSWERS

1. (3)

2. (4)

3. (2)

4. (4)

5. (1)

6. (4)

7. (1)

8. (1)

9. (4)

10. (1)

11. (1)

12. (4)

13. (1)

14. (3)

15. (4)

16. (1)

17. (4)

18. (1)

19. (3)

20. (4)

21. (2)

22. (4)

23. (3)

24. (4)

25. (2)

26. (1)

27. (4)

28. (1)

29. (4)

30. (1)

31. (3)

32. (1)

33. (2)

34. (2)

35. (1)

36. (1)

37. (2)

38. (1)

39. (1)

40. (3)

41. (2)

42. (1)

43. (3)

44. (1)

45. (1)

46. (4)

47. (1)

48. (3)

49. (1)

50. (3)

51. (3)

52. (1)

53. (3)

54. (3)

55. (1)

56. (1)

57. (4)

58. (3)

59. (1)

60. (4)

61. (3) 71. (1)

62. (1) 72. (2)

63. (1) 73. (4)

64. (3) 74. (1)

65. (2) 75. (3)

66. (1)

67. (3)

68. (1)

69. (4)

70. (1)

764 D Library and Information Science Specific

December, 2015 LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE Paper-II Note :

This paper contains fifty (50) objective type questions, each question carrying two (2) marks. Attempt all the questions.

1. The Class Index entries which are derived from the class number of a document in classified catalogue are based upon : (1) Unsought Links (2) Missing Links (3) False Links (4) Sought Links 2. Mode of formation of subject ‘Oceanography’ is : (1) Distilization (2) Cluster (3) Agglomeration (4) Loose Assemblage 3. ‘Half-life’ in Information Science relates to : (1) Rate of obsolescence (2) Rate of growth (3) Degree of scatter (4) Information explosion 4. As per Indian Copyright Law, Copyright is granted for (Literary Work) (1) Fifty years after the book is published (2) Fifty years after the death of the author (3) Sixty years after the book is published (4) Sixty years after the death of the author 5. Who chaired the Committee set up in October 1984 to formulate the ‘National Policy for Library and Information System’ constituted by the Dept. of Culture, Govt. of India? (1) Dr. S.R. Ranganathan (2) Dr. C.D. Deshmukh (3) B.S. Kesavan (4) Prof. D.P. Chattopadhya 6. Ratnasagar, Ratnaranjaka and Ratnodadhi Library buildings were the part of (1) Vikramashila Learning Centre (2) Takshashila Learning Centre (3) Nalanda Learning Centre (4) Vallabhi Learning Centre 7. What type of information sources are Almanacs ?

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

(1) Ready Reference(2) Dictionary (3) Directory (4) Bibliographies Which of the following is not an essential feature of a e-book ? (1) Mostly cost effective (2) Scope for online purchase (3) Search information at ease (4) Access at slow pace A database contains 100 records on a particular topic. A search was conducted and 80 records were retrieved. Of the 80 records retrieved, 60 were relevant. What is the recall ? (1) 60 (2) 75 (3) 45 (4) 80 Who was the teacher of S.R. Ranganathan at London ? (1) J.D. Brown (2) A. Panizzi (3) W.B.C. Sayers (4) Melvil Dewey The seven basic statistical tools for quality control was advocated by : (1) Joseph Jurnan (2) Phillip Kotler (3) Kauro Ishikawa (4) C.A. Cutter Which layer of ‘OSI’ Model occurs between ‘Network’ and ‘Physical’ ? (1) Data Link (2) Transport (3) Session (4) Presentation ‘Number Twenty (20)’ is represented in binary digit as : (1) 00111100 (2) 00001010 (3) 0001110 (4) 00010100 Action research is : (1) An applied research (2) A Longitudinal research (3) A research carried out to solve immediate problems (4) Simulative research

Previous Years’ Papers D 765 15. Lotka’s Law relates to : (1) Scattering of Periodicals (2) Obsolescence of Literature (3) Seepage of Information (4) Scientific Productivity 16. According to Dr. S.R. Ranganathan ‘Library Civics and Hygiene’ means (a) Library behaviour (b) Library Layout (c) Physique of Book (d) Care of Book Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. (2) (d), (b) and (c) are correct. (3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. 17. Which of the following are not the Working Groups under National Mission on Libraries ? (a) National Census of Libraries, Content Creation and Community Information Centres. (b) Setting up of National Virtual Library, Networking and ICT Applications in Libraries. (c) Library and Information Science Research, Development and Accreditation. (d) Upgradation of the Existing Academic Libraries, University and Research Libraries. Codes : (1) (a), (b) are correct. (2) (b), (c) are correct. (3) (c), (d) are correct. (4) (a), (d) are correct. 18. Which among the following are true about publication element of ISBN ? (a) Variable Length (b) Upto 5' digits (c) Fixed Length (d) Upto 6 digits Codes : (1) (a), (d) are correct. (2) (a), (b), (d) are correct. (3) (b), (c), (d) are correct. (4) (a), (c) are correct. 19. Which of the following are uses of work analysis ? (a) Simplifying the procedures (b) Line of authority (c) Improvement in various processes

20.

21.

22.

23.

(d) Unity of Command Codes : (1) (b), (d) are correct. (2) (a), (b), (c) are correct. (3) (a), (d) are correct. (4) (a), (c) are correct. Which of the following are Impact Printers? (a) InkJet (b) Line (c) Dot Matrix (d) Laser (1) (b), (c) are correct. (2) (a), (b), (c) are correct. (3) (a), (d) are correct. (4) (c), (d) are correct. Following are some of the problems with “Difficult Materials” usually faced by the users as advocated by Dr. S.R. Ranganathan: (a) Books with different numbers. (b) Books with different styles and standards. (c) Books in various forms of exposition. (d) Books with different sizes and colours. Codes : (1) (a) and (c) are correct. (2) (b) and (d) are correct. (3) (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (b) and (c) are correct. According to Dr. S.R. Ranganathan, which of the following items are not considered as fugitive materials ? (a) Newspaper-clippings (b) Books (c) Pamphlets (d) Reports Codes : (1) (a) and (c) are correct. (3) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (b) and (d) are correct. (4) (b) and (c) are correct. Which of the following are the demerits of MBO System ? (a) Superior-subordinate relationships (b) Over simplification (c) More coordination (d) All variables are not taken into account Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct.

766 D Library and Information Science Specific

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

(2) (a) and (d) are correct. (3) (b) and (c) are correct. (4) (b) and (d) are correct. In Classified Catalogue Code of Ranganathan the conflict of authorship includes (a) Person versus Person (b) Person versus Corporate body (c) Government versus Institution (d) Person versus Publisher Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. (2) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. (3) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (d), (c) and (a) are correct. Which of the services are being offered by National Library, Kolkata ? (a) Lending (b) Bibliographic (c) NL connect (d) Online reference services Codes : (1) (a), (b) are correct. (2) (a), (d) are correct. (3) (b), (d) are correct. (4) (c), (d) are correct. Which of the following are the level of problems in communication process identified by Warren Weaver ? (a) Technical (b) Semantic (c) Effective (d) Interpreter Codes : (1) (a), (c), (d) are correct. (2) (a), (b), (c) are correct. (3) (b), (c), (d) are correct. (4) (a), (b), (d) are correct. Which of the following are special features of geographical sources ? (a) scale (b) revision (c) rpm (d) projections Codes : (1) (a) and (d) are correct. (2) (a) and (b) are correct. (3) (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (a) and (c) are correct. Arrange in sequence the evolution of Intel Processors : (a) Pentium (b) 8008 (c) 486 TM CPU (d) 80286

29.

30.

31.

32.

33.

Codes : (1) (d), (b), (c), (a) (2) (b), (d), (c), (a) (3) (c), (b), (a), (d) (4) (a), (d), (b), (c) Arrange in sequence the basic components of MBO system : (a) Conducting reviews (b) Setting objectives (c) Appraising performance (d) Developing action plans Codes : (1) (b), (a), (c) and (d) (2) (b), (d), (a) and (c) (3) (a), (b), (d) and (c) (4) (c), (a), (d) and (b) Arrange the following in chronological order : (a) ISBD (b) MARC (c) CCF (d) RDA Codes : (1) (a), (c), (d), (b) (3) (c), (b), (a), (d) (2) (b), (a), (c), (d) (4) (d), (a), (b), (c) Arrange the following Public Libraries Acts according to their year of enactment : (a) Maharashtra Public Libraries Act (b) Karnataka Public Libraries Act (c) Odisha Public Libraries Act (d) Mizoram Public Libraries Act Codes : (1) (c), (a), (b), (d) (2) (b), (a), (c), (d) (3) (a), (b), (d), (c) (4) (b), (a), (d), (c) Identify the correct sequence according to the year of first publication : (1) Library and Information Science Abstract, Biological Abstract, Chemical Abstract (2) Chemical Abstract, Biological Abstract, Library and Information Science Abstract (3) Biological Abstract, Chemical Abstract, Library and Information Science Abstract (4) Chemical Abstract, Library and Information Science Abstract, Biological Abstract Arrange the following publications of S.R. Ranganathan in their year of first publication : (a) Reference Service (b) Colon Classification

Previous Years’ Papers D 767 (c) Five Laws of Library Science (d) Prolegomena to Library Classification Codes : (1) (c), (a), (b), (d) (2) (a), (b), (d), (c) (3) (c), (b), (d), (a) (4) (b), (c), (a), (d) 34. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) Indcat (i) Access for e-resources (b) Shodhganga (ii) Digital Library Consortium (c) N-list (iii) Indian ETD repository (d) UGC Infonet (iv) Online Union Catalogue of Indian Universities Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (2) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (3) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (4) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) 35. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) Rules for Dictionary (i) S.R. Catalogue Ranganathan (b) PMEST (ii) Kaiser (c) Systematic Indexing (iii) Cutter (d) Nested Phrase (iv) T.C. Carven Indexing System Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv (2) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (3) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (4) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) 36. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) Likert type (i) Test of significance of the difference between variables (b) Chi-square (ii) Test of Measurement (c) ANOVA (iii) Summation Scale

(d) Test of (iv) Test of significance Validity Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (2) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (3) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (4) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) 37. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) Turnitin (i) Electronic Resource Management Software (b) Drupal (ii) Usage Statistics Software (c) CORAL (iii) Antiplagiarism Software (d) SUSHI (iv) Content Management Software Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (2) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (3) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (4) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) 38. Match the following : List-I List-II (a) Nadir to (i) Verification phase Ascendant (b) Ascendant (ii) Deductive phase to Zenith (c) Zenith to (iii) Hypothesing phase Descendant (d) Descendant (iv) Empirical phase to Nadir Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (2) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (3) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (4) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) 39. Match the following Intellectual Property Rights Acts of India with the year of their enactment : List-I List-II (a) The Design Act (i) 1970 (b) The Copyright Act (ii) 1958

768 D Library and Information Science Specific

40.

41.

42.

43.

(c) The Trade and (iii) 1911 Merchandise Mark Act (d) The Patents Act (iv) 1957 Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (2) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (3) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (4) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) Assertion (A): Inter-library loan services are still a necessity in the information explosion regime. Reason (R): None of the libraries are self sufficient with respect to their holding. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) true. (2) (A) is true and (R) is false. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) (A) is false and (R) is true. Assertion (A): Open Access Publication Model involves zero cost. Reason (R): Open Access increases the visibility of the publication, as they are available to the users for free. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (3) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A): Controlled Vocabulary based on Indexing requires intellectual ability to assign keywords to the thought contents of the documents in such a way that these selected terms could effectively represent the contents. Reason (R): Retrieval Systems based on Natural Language-based Indexing such as Google gives maximum precision. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (3) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A): Buying e-Journals are advantageous to a Library as Librarians do not have to follow up the missing issues.

Reason (R): Perpetual access takes care of missing issues. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (3) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 44. Assertion (A): The Product of the relative frequency of occurrence of a word and its rank is equal to a constant. Reason (R): The above statement is known as Bradford’s Law of scattering. Codes : (1) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (2) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 45. Assertion (A): Most of the institutions around the world use’impact factors’for measuring institutional productivity. Reason (R): All the articles published in an ‘Impact factor’ Journals will be of equal quality. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (3) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Read the passage given below and answer the questions based on your understanding of the passage (Questions No. 46-50). The vital role played by information and communication technologies in the development of digital environment revolutionized the way libraries handle information for centuries. The ICTs offer increased efficiency in terms of time, human resources and cost; improved quality of information, greater flexibility and responsiveness, increased access and sharing, enhanced degree of user interaction to specific information, review and modify the needs as per the situation. More specifically the Internet takes firm roots in information storage, processing and dissemination and provides global access. The users prefer the ease of use, portability, affordability and access to a wide range of subjects on the net over the rule bound library environment. However,

Previous Years’ Papers D 769 on the other hand, electronic environment is not rosy, as it appears to be. The major issue is content organization. The information is poorly structured on the web while libraries have successful methods for information processing and retrieval. The content mapping, semantic web and ontology are under experimental stages for the purpose of effective organization and retrieval of web resources. Hence, users are apparently in need of librarians to assist them to access pertinent and precise information. Therefore it is high time for library professionals to remodel themselves and act as aggregators, and knowledge managers through web based services tailormade to the user information requirements. In this context, Six Sigma applications have an immense value. Service is the ability of an organisation to constantly and consistently exceed the customer’s expectations. Improving customer service in libraries involves making a commitment to assess users’ needs and developing action plans that implement user friendly processes. LICs are implementing the same through user studies or surveys to ascertain the level of user satisfaction, seek their opinions and suggestions and improve their service base based on the findings. However, they are not documenting the policies, processes, procedures and important tools of these programmes. Further, they don’t have a mechanism to identify the latent and dormant users and their needs. This shows that there is a necessity to apply proved management techniques like Six Sigma to analyse the current service programmes and to suggest for their improvement. It is a fact that there is vast difference between the desired and perceived information needs of library users. The traditional metrics have limitations and hence

ü

adoption of Six Sigma is useful as it measures quality capability. 46. What is the impact of ICTs on Library and Information Centres ? (1) All libraries are digitized (2) Increased manpower (3) Improved Finances (4) Enhanced information access and sharing 47. What is the user’s preference in networked environment ? (1) Exhaustive information (2) Access to diversified information at ease. (3) Cost effective information (4) Both (1) and (3) 48. Why do the user needs assistance from librarian to access information on the Web ? (1) Semantically connected (2) Ontologically structured (3) Poorly structured (4) Inaccurate information 49. What is to be done to improve customer service in Library and Information Centres ? (1) Assess user needs (2) User friendly processes (3) Strategic policies (4) Both (1) and (2) 50. How Six Sigma does lead to quality service in libraries ? (1) Assess the quality of service. (2) Perceives user needs. (3) Suggests tools and techniques to organize data. (4) Provides tailor made services.

ANSWERS

1. (4)

2. (2)

3. (1)

4. (4)

5. (4)

6. (3)

7. (1)

8. (4)

9. (1)

10. (3)

11. (3)

12. (1)

13. (4)

14. (3)

15. (4)

16. (3)

17. (3)

18. (1)

19. (4)

20. (1)

21. (4)

22. (2)

23. (4)

24. (1)

25. (1)

26. (2)

27. (1)

28. (2)

29. (2)

30. (2)

31. (4) 41. (3)

32. (2) 42. (2)

33. (3) 43. (2)

34. (4) 44. (2)

35. (1) 45. (2)

36. (2) 46. (4)

37. (4) 47. (2)

38. (2) 48. (3)

39. (4) 49. (4)

40. (1) 50. (1)

770 D Library and Information Science Specific

December, 2015 LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE Paper-III Note :

This paper contains seventy five (75) objective type questions of two (2) marks each. All questions are compulsory.

1. Digital collection developed for capturing the intellectual output of a single or multi institution is called as : (1) Digital Library (2) Digital archive (3) Digital repository (4) Digital publishing 2. INFLIBNET initiative for ‘Integrated e-content ports : Gateway to All Learners’ is named as : (1) e-PG Pathshala (2) IR@ INFLIBNET (3) INFOPORT (4) e-Acharya 3. International Literacy Day is celebrated on : (1) 8th July (2) 9th August th (3) 8 September (4) 18th September 4. SCONUL stands for : (1) The Council of National and University Libraries (2) Scientific National University Libraries (3) The Scientific Conference on National and University Libraries (4) The Standing Conference on National and University Libraries 5. The key factor that enforces uniformity throughout retrieval system is : (1) Controlled vocabulary (2) Search strategy (3) User profile (4) Database 6. Which of the following is not an example of non-random sampling ? (1) Snowball Sampling (2) Convenience Sampling (3) Quota and Purposive Sampling (4) Census

7. According to S.R. Ranganathan, the reference service aimed at freshman is called : (1) General Help to General Reader (2) Short Range Reference Service (3) Long Range Reference Service (4) Initiation 8. Which one of the following is the implementing agency for ‘capacity building’ activity of National Mission on Libraries ? (1) Delhi Public Library (2) Raja Ram Mohan Roy Library Foundation (3) National Library of India (4) Documentation, Research and Training Centre 9. When an author has not registered his/her work under copyright but legally proceeded over dispute of ownership. What is the validity of ownership ? (1) No ownership without Registration (2) It may not be legally tenable (3) Ownership is automatic (4) Both (1) and (2) are correct 10. “Guide for the Preparation and Publication of Abstracts” was published by : (1) IFLA (2) FID (3) OCLC (4) UNESCO 11. What type of directory is the “Times of India Directory and Yearbook including Who’s Who” ? (1) General (2) Special (3) Professional (4) Trade 12. Folksonomy is a : (1) System in which users apply public tag to microdocuments only.

Previous Years’ Papers D 771

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

(2) System in which users apply public tag to online items. (3) System in which users do not apply public tag to online items. (4) System in which users apply public tag to only print items. What is intercalation in UDC ? (1) Prefix of auxiliary (3) Infix of auxiliary (2) Suffix of auxiliary (4) Super-impose The first order of division of classes in DDC is based on : (1) Jewett’s system of classification (2) System of Paris Book Sellers (3) The Fixed Location System (4) Francis Bacon’s three fountains of learning Identify the service that is made available through Web 3.0 Technologies : (1) Message Board (2) FOAF (3) Flikr (4) Mashup Who propounded the ‘theory of human relation’ ? (1) Renis Likert (2) Elton Mayo (3) Barnard (4) None of the above What is Dynamic HTML ? (1) Asynchronous Web Development Technique (2) Collection of technologies to create interactive, animated website (3) Dynamic Web Page (4) Digital Signal Processor Which one is not used as transmission media for voice/data communication ? (1) Copper wire (2) Co-axial cables (3) Plastic wire (4) Optic wire Ministry of Education, Government of Delhi will be rendered according to Classified Catalogue Code (CCC) as : (1) Ministry of Education (Delhi) (2) Delhi, (Education (Ministry of -)

20.

21.

22.

23.

24.

(3) Delhi, Ministry of Education (4) DELHI, EDUCATION (Ministry of -) Which of the following memories has the shortest access time ? (1) Optical Memory (2) Magnetic Core Memory (3) RAM (4) Cache Memory Page Maker is an example of : (1) Operating System (2) Electronic Spread Sheet (3) Geometrical Software (4) Publishing Software Which of the following are the Special Auxiliaries of Universal Decimal Classification (Medium Edition 1993) ? (a) Point of view .00 (b) Materials –03 (c) Point-not series .0/.9 (d) Hyphen series –1/ –9 Codes : (1) (a) and (d) are correct (3) (c) and (d) are correct (2) (a) and (c) are correct (4) (b) and (d) are correct Which of the following are linear models of communication ? (a) Dance’s Helical model (b) Lasswell model (c) W. Schramm’s Interactive model (d) Becker’s Mosaic model Codes : (1) (a) and (c) are correct (2) (c) and (d) are correct (3) (b) and (c) are correct (4) (a) and (d) are correct A copyright law usually aims at the following features : (a) Stimulate creative authorship (b) Public availability of intellectual works (c) Freedom of access to information (d) Profit making by publishers

772 D Library and Information Science Specific

25.

26.

27.

28.

Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (a) and (c) are correct (3) (b) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (b) and (c) are correct By 2002, which of the following states have enacted their respective Public Library Acts? (a) Haryana (b) Uttar Pradesh (c) Mizoram (d) Rajasthan Codes : (1) (a) and (c) are correct (2) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (3) (b) and (d) are correct (4) (c) and (d) are correct Which of the following types of publications are excluded in INB ? (a) Maps (b) First issue of periodical (c) Newspapers (d) Books in regional languages Codes : (1) (b) and (c) are correct (2) (c) and (d) are correct (3) (a) and (c) are correct (4) (d) and (a) are correct Which of the following are the elements of marketing mix ? (a) Selling (b) Place (c) Purchasing (d) Product Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct (3) (c) and (d) are correct (4) (b) and (d) are correct ALA’s newly labelled Public Awareness Campaign “Libraries Transform” launched by ALA President Sari Feldman aims to focus on : (a) the critical role the Public Libraries play in digital age; (b) the change of perception that libraries are just quiet places to do research, find book and read;

(c) transforming the lives of all through education and life-long learning; (d) to undermine the role of school, academic and special libraries; Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (2) (a), (b) and (d) are correct (3) (b), (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (c) and (d) are correct 29. Which of the following are the synthetic features of ‘Dewey Decimal classification’ ? (a) Relative Index (b) Enumeration of Schedules (c) Tables (d) Add to Instruction Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct (3) (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (c) and (d) are correct 30. Which of the following are the management theories related to motivation ? (a) Maslow Theory of Needs (b) Drucker Theory (c) McGreger Theory of X and Y (d) Fayol Theory Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct (3) (a), (b) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (c) and (d) are correct 31. Which of the following are the techniques of Total Quality Management (TQM) ? (a) Quality circles (b) Empowerment (c) Bureaucratic set up (d) Participative management Codes : (1) (a), (c) and (d) are correct (2) (a), (b) and (d) are correct (3) (b), (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (c) and (b) are correct

Previous Years’ Papers D 773 32. Which of the following are the parts of a URL (Universal Resource Locator) ? (a) Protocol (b) Media Access Control (c) Domain name (d) Path Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct (3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct (4) (b) and (c) are correct 33. Which of the following tools index cited references ? (a) D - Space (b) SCOPUS (c) JCCC (d) Google Scholar Codes : (1) (a) and (c) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct (3) (a) and (d) are correct (4) (b) and (d) are correct 34. Null hypothesis is based on which of the following assumptions ? (a) No relationship between the two variables in the total population (b) Relationship between the two variables in the total population (c) Variables are related after having statistically rejected (d) Variables are related before statistical analysis Codes : (1) (a) and (d) are correct (2) (a) and (c) are correct (3) (a) and (b) are correct (4) (b) and (d) are correct 35. The ancient Nalanda learning center had which of the following buildings for libraries ? (a) Ratnasagara (b) Ratnaranjaka (c) Ratangarbha (d) Ratnamanjari Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct (3) (c) and (d) are correct (4) (d) and (a) are correct

36. Identify the correct sequence of the Abraham Maslow’s hierarchy of needs : (a) Esteem (b) Belonging (c) Safety (d) Physiological Codes : (1) (b), (c), (d) and (a) (2) (c), (b), (d) and (a) (3) (d), (b), (c) and (a) (4) (d), (c), (b) and (a) 37. According to S.R. Ranganathan the steps in classifying documents include the following analysis of the title. Arrange the steps in the sequential order : (a) Expressive title (b) Kernel title (c) Analysed title (d) Transformed title Codes : (1) (a), (b), (c) and (d) (2) (b), (c), (d) and (a) (3) (c), (d), (a) and (b) (4) (d), (a), (b) and (c) 38. Arrange the following units of computer memory in an ascending order : (a) Zettabyte (b) Exabyte (c) Yottabyte (d) Petabyte Codes : (1) (a), (b), (d) and (c) (2) (b), (c), (a) and (d) (3) (d), (b), (a) and (c) (4) (c), (a), (b) and (d) 39. Arrange in sequence the following steps involved in testing a hypothesis according to C.R. Kothari. (a) Selecting random sample and computing appropriate value (b) Calculating and comparing the pr ob ability (c) Selecting significant level (d) Making formal statement Codes : (1) (b), (c), (d) and (a) (2) (a), (b), (c) and (d) (3) (c), (a), (b) and (d) (4) (d), (c), (a) and (b)

774 D Library and Information Science Specific 40. Arrange the following Acts according to the year of their respective enactments : (a) Digital Millennium Copyright Act (b) Right to Information Act (India) (c) Information Technology Act (India) (d) Indian Copyright Act Codes : (1) (d), (a), (c) and (b) (2) (d), (b), (c) and (a) (3) (a), (d), (b) and (c) (4) (b), (c), (a) and (d) 41. Arrange in sequence the following repository libraries according to their year of establishment : (a) Connemera Public Library, Chennai (b) Delhi Public Library, Delhi (c) Asiatic Society Library, Mumbai (d) Central Reference Library, Kolkata Codes : (1) (d), (a), (c) and (b) (2) (a), (b), (c) and (d) (3) (b), (d), (a) and (c) (4) (c), (a), (b) and (d) 42. Arrange the following Catalogue Codes according to their first publication year : (1) CCC, AA code, ALA code, AACR-I (2) ALA code, CCC, AA code, AACR-I (3) AA code, ALA code, CCC, AACR-I (4) AACR-I, CCC, AA code, ALA code 32. Arrange in sequence the steps involved in Browne Charging Procedure : (a) Stamping the date slip (b) Identification of borrower (c) Slipping the book card in reader’s ticket (d) Arrange cards in juxta position Codes : (1) (a), (d), (b) and (c) (2) (b), (c), (a) and (d) (3) (c), (b), (d) and (a) (4) (d), (a), (c) and (b) 44. Arrange in sequence the following E-Journal Consortia in India according to their year of establishment :

(a) National Knowledge Resource Consortium (b) IIM Library Consortium (c) Consortium for e-Resources in Agriculture (d) INDEST-AICTE Consortium Codes : (1) (c), (a), (d) and (b) (2) (a), (d), (b) and (c) (3) (b), (d), (c) and (a) (4) (d), (b), (a) and (c) 45. Match the following : List -I List - II (a) Protocols (i) Work Station (b) Device Drivers (ii) Electronic/Radio Signals (c) Node (iii) Manages Network Services (d) Transmission (iv) Languages that Media allow computers to communicate Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (2) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (3) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) (4) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) 46. Match the following : List -I List - II (a) Bus (i) Nodes connected to hub (b) Star (ii) Each node connects to every other (c) Ring (iii) Nodes connected to backbone (d) Mesh (iv) Each node connected to the next Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) (2) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) (3) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (4) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii)

Previous Years’ Papers D 775 47. Match the following : List - I (a) Readers (i) Advisory Service (b) Referral Service (ii)

List - II Market Survey Report Preparation of Trend Report (c) Review Service (iii) Helping reader in selection of right book (d) Digest Service (iv) Directing the user to the source of information Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (2) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (3) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (4) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) 48. Match the following organizations with their contribution to information literacy : List - I List - II (a) CILIP (i) Information Literacy Model of Eight Competencies (b) SCONUL (ii) Guidelines for Information Literacy for Life Long Learning (c) ACRL (iii) Information Literacy Competency Standards for Higher Education (d) IFLA (iv) Seven Pillars of Information Literacy Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (2) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (3) (ii) (iv) (i) (ii) (4) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) 49. Match the following Information Seeking Behaviour models with corresponding theories : List - I List - II (a) Wilson Model (i) Tailored to of ISB Electronic Envir o n m en t - t h e

process consists of eight sub-processes. (b) Derrin’s Model (ii) Association of of ISB feelings, thoughts and actions but not cognitive. (c) Kuhlthous Model (iii) Sense making of ISB approachbased on situation, gap and outcomethree key elements. (d) Marchioninis (iv) Three fold view ISB Model on information seeking context, system and information sources. Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (2) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (3) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (4) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) 50. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Descriptive (i) Critical evaluation of research available facts or information (b) Applied (ii) Surveys and fact research finding enquiries (c) Empirical (iii) Relies on experience or research observation alone (d) Analytical (iv) Finding a solution to an research immediate social problem Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (2) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) (3) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) (4) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii)

776 D Library and Information Science Specific 51. Match the following : List -1 List - II (a) Day book system (i) Each per book (b) Ledger system (ii) Browne system (c) One card (iii) Note down transactions (d) Two card system (iv) One page per borrower Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (2) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (3) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (4) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 52. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Nominal Data (i) Level of satisfaction regarding library facilities (b) Ordinal Data (ii) Frequency of use of internet by different user groups (c) Interval Data (iii) Ranking of library services by users (d) Ratio (iv) Gender details of library users Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (2) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (3) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (4) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) 53. Match the following : List - I List - II (Commissions) (Opinions) (a) D.S. Kothari (i) It is right and Commission proper that university should provide great libraries. (b) Radhakrishnan (ii) The library is Commission second to instructional staff.

(c) Calcutta Commission

(d) Truman’s Commission

(iii) Nothing could be more damaging to a department than neglecting its library. (iv) The library is the heart of university work.

Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (2) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (3) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (4) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) 54. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Books in print (i) Prouest (b) The stateman’s (ii) Microsoft year book (c) Ulrich’s (iii) Palgrave International Mac Millan Periodical Directory (d) Encarta (iv) R.R. Bowker Encyclopedia Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (2) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (3) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (4) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) 55. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Statistical (i) Pitcharard Analysis (b) Statistical (ii) S.R. Ranganathan Bibliography (c) Librametry (iii) E.W. Hume (d) Bibliometrics (iv) Francil Cole Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (2) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (3) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (4) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv)

Previous Years’ Papers D 777 56. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) F. Rider (i) FRBR (b) E.J. Coates (ii) Citation Indexing (c) IFLA (iii) International classification (d) Eugene Garfield (iv) BTI Indexing Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (2) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (3) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (4) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) 56. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Browne (i) OCLC (b) SWOT analysis (ii) Digital Library Software (c) Worldcat (iii) Charging System (d) Greenstone (iv) Management Practice Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) (2) (iv) (i) (iv) (iii) (3) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (4) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) 58. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Cumulative (i) Bibliography of Books in Print Periodicals (b) Ulrich (ii) Trade International bibliography Periodical Directory (c) World of (iii) Biographical Learning source (d) Who’s Who (iv) Directory in India Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (2) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (3) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (4) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii)

59. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Bibliographic (i) E-mail to user service with links to latest e-journals (b) Alert service (ii) Translated copy of a document (c) Condensation (iii) Compilation of service audio records by a singer (d) Support service (iv) Abstracting selected and analysed information Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) (2) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (3) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (4) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) 60. Assertion (A): LIS professionals are ultimately bestowed with the responsibility of building the image of the profession. Reason (R): The measure of the image is the service they render and not their financial gains. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) (A) is true but (R) is false. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) (A) is false but (R) is true. 61. Assertion (A): Five Laws of Library Science are the normative principles that are capable of countering any problem faced by the Librarians. Reason (R): Normative principles are not only considered to be the correct way of doing something, but also determines norms or standards in day-today library practice. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are false. (2) (A) is true and (R) is false. (3) (A) is false and (R) is true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are true.

778 D Library and Information Science Specific 62. Assertion (A): A recent feature that have been incorporated to Integrated Library Management Software is self-checking or self-issue of books option in the circulation module using RFID technology. Reason (R): Application of RFID technology is economically viable and suitable to all types of libraries. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) (A) is true, and (R) is false. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 63. Assertion (A): POP is the main internet standard for electronic mail transmission. Reason (R): The Post Office Protocol (POP) is a protocol used by local e-mail clients to retrieve e-mail from a remote server over TCP/IP connection. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true. 64. Assertion (A): Institutional Repositories (IRs) no more remain an inaccessible resource for the contemporary researchers as they not only open up their scholarly output to the entire world, but also maximized their visibility and impact of these outputs. Reason (R): Repositories adhere to an internationally agreed set of technical standards by which they pose the metadata of each item and their contents on the Web and as such are interoperable. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true. 65. Assertion (A): An example for an array of geographical divisions can be Asia, India, Bihar, Patna. Reason (R): An Array is a series of coordinate sub-divisions which are obtained by dividing a class or division according to a single characteristics.

66.

67.

68.

69.

Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false but (R) is true. Assertion (A): Increased access to digital documents led to substantial increase in Plagarism. Reason (R): Most of the people are ignorant of the procedures in citing the digital documents. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true. Assertion (A): Information reflects the synergic combination of medium and message. Reason (R): There is no difference between conduit and content. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false but (R) is true. Assertion (A): The Library users have easy and more access to information in networked environment than in print environment. Reason (R): There is no distortion from barriers to communication process in networked environment. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) (A) is true but (R) is false. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) (A) is false but (R) is true. Assertion (A): UDC is more suitable for special libraries compared to DDC scheme of classification. Reason (R): UDC can better accommodate new complex subjects compared to DDC. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false.

Previous Years’ Papers D 779 (3) (A) is true but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false but (R) is true. 70. Assertion (A) : In DDC only ‘Add to’ device provides an opportunity to expand a given number. Reason (R): DDC is a purely enumerative scheme of classification without synthetic features. Codes : (1) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (2) (A) is true and (R) is false. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 71. Assertion (A): Impact factor is the only method for evaluating the performance of an individual researcher. Reason (R): Impact factor helps Libraries in their Journal subscription. Codes : (1) (A) is true and (R) is false. (2) (A) is false but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) Both (A) and (R) are true. 72. Assertion (A): All public libraries in India are maintained from cess. Reason (R): UNESCO Manifesto recommended that public libraries should be “maintained wholly from public funds”. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false but (R) is true.

ü

73. Assertion (A): FRBR is very important development towards global sharing of information. Reason (R): FRBR outlines the relationship between many different interpretations or expressions. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are false. (2) Both (A) and (R) are true. (3) (A) is true but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false and (R) is true. 74. Assertion (A) : Most Information Retrieval (IR) systems that used qualitative research techniques explored information seeking and retrieval behaviour of users. Reason (R): The qualitative research methods help to explore human behaviour. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are false. (2) (A) is false and (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) (A) is true and (R) is false. 75. Assertion (A): AACR - 2 instructs that no information should be added to catalogue from other than the title page. Reason (R): The main source of cataloguing information is the “Title Page” and the “Verso of the title page”. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) (A) is true but (R) is false. (3) (A) is false but (R) is true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false.

ANSWERS

1. (3)

2. (4)

3. (3)

4. (4)

5. (1)

6. (4)

7. (4)

8. (2)

9. (3)

10. (4)

11. (1)

12. (2)

13. (3)

14. (4)

15. (2)

16. (2)

17. (2)

18. (3)

19. (4)

20. (4)

21. (4)

22. (3)

23. (3)

24. (1)

25. (1)

26. (3)

27. (4)

28. (1)

29. (3)

30. (1)

31. (2)

32. (3)

33. (4)

34. (2)

35. (1)

36. (4)

37. (1)

38. (3)

39. (4)

40. (1)

41. (4)

42. (3)

43. (2)

44. (3)

45. (1)

46. (3)

47. (4)

48. (2)

49. (1)

50. (2)

51. (2)

52. (4)

53. (2)

54. (4)

55. (1)

56. (1)

57. (3)

58. (1)

59. (4)

60. (1)

61. (4) 71. (2)

62. (3) 72. (4)

63. (4) 73. (2)

64. (1) 74. (3)

65. (4) 75. (3)

66. (1)

67. (3)

68. (2)

69. (1)

70. (2)

780 D Library and Information Science Specific

July, 2016 LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE Paper-II Note :

This paper contains fifty (50) objective type questions, each question carrying two (2) marks. Attempt all the questions.

1. Who identified the eight central values of librarianship ? (1) Margaret Mann (2) Michael Gorman (3) David Hume (4) S.R. Ranganathan 2. Which of the following organization declared 17th May as “World Information Society Day” ? (1) IFLA (2) World Summit on the Information Society (WSIS) (3) World Health Organization (WHO) (4) UNESCO 3. ‘Bibliographic Coupling’ was first advocated by (1) B.K. Sen (2) S.R. Ranganathan (3) M.M. Kessler (4) S.C. Bradford 4. By which mode ‘Management Science’ and ‘Research Methodology’ are formed ? (1) Agglomeration (2) Fusion (3) Cluster (4) Distillation 5. ‘Prefix’ element of ISBN consists of _____ number of digits. (1) 3 (2) 5 (3) 4 (4) 2 6. Who defined notation as shorthand sign ? (1) S.R. Ranganathan (2) Benjamin A. Custer (3) Immanuel Kant (4) E.C. Richardson 7. Which of the search strategy is useful to increase recall output ? (1) Proximity operators (2) Boolean operators ‘NOT’ (3) Truncation (4) Boolean operators ‘AND’

8. The ‘Right to Information Bill’ was enacted by the Parliament of India on (1) 5th May 2005 (2) 15th June 2005 (3) 12th October 2005 (4) 22nd June 2005 9. Who was the first Director of Raja Ram Mohan Roy Library Foundation ? (1) B.S. Kesvan (2) D.R. Kalia (3) B.P. Barua (4) S. Bashruddin 10. In Ranganathan’s terminology ‘Latent Facet’ is a (1) Facet added at the end (2) Hidden Facet (3) Important Facet (4) Current of all Facets 11. ‘Transactional Model of Communication’ was suggested by (1) Peter Drucker (2) George Zipf (3) Dean Barnlund (4) A.C. Kessler 12. Research Methodology involving the construction of theory through analysis of data is known as (1) Sampling Theory (2) Grounded Theory (3) Ideal Theory (4) Basic Theory 13. Chapter 12 of AACR-2 has changed its name in AACR-2R, 2002. Identify the changed name. (1) Integrated Resources (2) Continuing Resources (3) Periodical Resources (4) Online Resources 14. Identify the persons who contributed to the development of TQM.

Previous Years’ Papers D 781

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

a. Philip B. Crosby b. Kaoru Ishikawa c. Joseph Juran d. Michael Gorman Codes : (1) a, b, c are correct. (2) b, c, d are correct. (3) a, c, d are correct. (4) a, b, d are correct. Identify the correct statements associated with Universal Decimal Classification Scheme (UDC) a. It is faceted classification scheme. b. Paul Otlet and Henry La Fontaine are associated with it. c. It has relative index. d. It uses pure notation. Codes : (1) a, b are correct. (2) b, c are correct. (3) c, d are correct. (4) a, d are correct. In which of the following studies, a researcher is required to examine some specific subpopulation, as they change time ? (1) Trend Study (2) Cohort Study (3) Cross Sectional Study (4) Panel Studies Which of the following are associated with UNESCO Programme ? a. General Information Programme (PGI) b. World Scientific Information System (UNISIST) c. Universal Availability of Publications (UAP) d. International Standard Bibliographic Description (ISBD) Codes : (1) a, b are correct. (2) a, c are correct. (3) a, d are correct. (4) b, c are correct. Collection development principles are given by : a. C.A. Cutter b. Melvil Dewey c. S.R. Ranganathan d. B.S. Kesvan Codes : (1) a, b are correct. (2) b, c are correct. (3) c, d are correct. (4) b, d are correct. ‘Product lifecycle’ is helpful in : a. deciding marketing strategies best fitted to particular stages in the development of service activities.

b.

maintaining that all products or services follow distinctive pattern overtime. c. dealing with the historical aspect of the product. d. dealing with the stages of product lifecycle. Codes : (1) a, b, d are correct. (2) a, b, c are correct. (3) b, c, d are correct. (4) a, c, d are correct. 20. PMEST in colon classification of S.R. Ranganathan is a. Decreasing order of concreteness b. Decreasing order of association c. Decreasing order of classification d. Decreasing order of fundamental categories (1) a, b are correct (2) a, d are correct (3) a, c are correct (4) b, d are correct 21. Information under section 2(f) of the ‘Right to Information Act, 2005’ means any material in any form, thus include a. Records, Documents, Memos, E-mails, Papers b. Opinions, Advices, Press Releases, Circulars, Samples c. Orders, Log books, Contracts, Reports d. Book Chapters, Journal Articles, Sale Deeds, Reprints, Snapshots of Consort Codes : (1) a, c and d are correct. (2) b, c and d are correct. (3) a, b and d are correct. (4) a, b and c are correct. 22. The objectives of Metadata are : a. Unique identification b. Authentification of records c. To eliminate the duplicate record. d. To arrange the collection. Codes : (1) a and d are correct. (2) a and b are correct. (3) b and d are correct. (4) a and c are correct.

782 D Library and Information Science Specific 23. Identify the following Institutional Archives/Repositories available free : a. Project MUSE b. Web of Science c. e-prints d. Open DOAR Codes : (1) a and b are correct. (2) b and d are correct. (3) c and d are correct. (4) a and c are correct. 24. Identify the following basic steps as advocated by William Edwards for implementing TQM : a. Assessment of organisation’s culture and training process for the top management. b. Formation of Quality Council. c. Dissemination of information through established communication system and integration of TQM tools, techniques and training. d. Filtering and censoring Information. Codes : (1) b, c and d are correct. (2) a, b and c are correct. (3) a, c and d are correct. (4) a, b and d are correct. 25. Identify the Audio File Format for Digital libraries : a. .tif b. .jfif c. .aif d. .ra Codes : (1) c and d are correct. (2) b and d are correct. (3) a and b are correct. (4) b and c are correct. 26. The available options for extending Wiki vary depending on the software that runs the site. Identify the correct options available to users using “Media Wiki”. a. GISWiki kWBreadCrumbs b. Bibwiki c. YouTube Tag and FireStats d. pbwikiGS Codes : (1) a, b and c are correct.

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

(2) b, c and d are correct. (3) a, c and d are correct. (4) a, b and d are correct. Deliberate Sampling is known as a. Purposive Sampling b. Sequential Sampling c. Probability Sampling d. Non-probability Sampling Codes : (1) a and d are correct (2) a and c are correct (3) a, b and d are correct (4) b, c and d are correct Arrange the following indexing journals according to the year of their first publication : a. Engineering Index, New York b. Humanities Index, New York c. Index Medicus, Bethesda d. Agrindex, Rome Codes : (1) d, c, a and b (2) c, b, d and a (3) a, c, b and d (4) c, a, b and d Arrange the following Dublin core elements in descending order : a. Contributor b. Identifier c. Relation d. Right Codes : (1) d, c, b, a (2) a, d, b, c (3) a, b, d, c (4) a, b, c, d Identify the correct elements of ‘AIDA’ model in Marketing Communication. (1) Attraction, Investigation, Direction, Action (2) Attention, Intuition, Desire, Acquisition (3) Attention, Interest, Desire, Action (4) Abstract, Institution, Diversity, Action Arrange the following museums according to the year of their establishment : a. Nehru Memorial Museum and Library, Delhi b. National Museum, Delhi c. Indian Museum, Calcutta d. National Gandhi Museum, Delhi

Previous Years’ Papers D 783 Codes : (1) d, a, c, b (2) c, b, d, a (3) b, c, d, a (4) a, d, c, b 32. Arrange the following international standards developed in the broader context of ‘Information Organisation’ in their respective year of development : a. ISO-999 b. ISO-214 c. ISO-2788 d. ISO-5963 Codes : (1) c, b, d, a (2) a, b, c, d (3) b, c, d, a (4) d, c, b, a 33. Match the following : List – I List - II a. Pareto Chart i. Pictorian representation of stages in a process b. Fish Bone ii. Tool of recording Diagram variables c. Flow chart iii. Identifies the intensity of each problem in the production line d. Check-sheet iv. Identifies the relationship between the defects or problems and their root causes Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) i iii iv ii (2) iv i ii iii (3) iii iv ii i (4) iii iv i ii 34. Match the following : List – I List - II a. New Gen Lib i. 1984 b. LIBSYS ii. 2000 c. Koha iii. 2005 d. Open Biblio iv. 2002 Codes : a b c d (1) ii i iii iv (2) ii i iv iii (3) iii i ii iv (4) iv iii ii i

35. Match the following : List – I List - II a. Gujarat Public i. 1965 Libraries Act b. Chhattisgarh Public ii. 1993 Libraries Act c. Karnataka Public iii. 2009 Libraries Act d. Goa Public Libraries iv. 2001 Act Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) i iv iii ii (2) ii i iv iii (3) iv ii iii i (4) iv iii i ii 36. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Key to a given i. Abstract collection b. Key to literary ii. Index sources on a subject c. Representation iii. Catalogue of subject concept d. Condensation of a iv. Bibliography document Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) iv ii iii i (2) iii ii i iv (3) iii iv ii i (4) i iii ii iv 37. Match the following : List – I List – II (AACR-II) (Connecting Symbols) a. The size of the i. Colon document b. Statement of ii. Plus Responsibility c. Between place and iii. Semicolon the name of the publishers d. Accompanying iv. Diagonal material slash Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) i iii iv ii (2) ii iv iii i (3) iv iii i ii (4) iii iv i ii

784 D Library and Information Science Specific 38. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Subject i. J. Atchinson Classification b. Thesaurofacet ii. S.R. Ranganathan c. Classaurus iii. J.D. Brown d. APUPA iv. G. Bhattacharya Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) iv iii ii i (2) i ii iii iv (3) iii i iv ii (4) ii iv i iii 39. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Classical School i. John Cotton Dana b. X and Y Theory ii. Henry Fayol c. Newark iii. Peter Drucker Charging System d. MBO iv. Douglas McGregor Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) i iii iv ii (2) iii iv i ii (3) ii iv i iii (4) iii ii iv i 40. Assertion (A) : Selection of e-resources requires utmost care and caution in order to make the same user-centric. Reason (R) : Availability of seamless online products in the market coupled with abundant internet resources at no cost made the e-resources redundant. Codes : (1) (A), is false, but (R) is true. (2) Both (A) and (R) false. (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (4) Both (A) and (R) true. 41. Assertion (A) : Results from popular web search engines are usually having high recall, but an indexing database can provide high precision. Reason (R) : Indexing databases use controlled vocabulary which is a carefully selected list of words and phrases which are used to tag units of information (document or work) so that they may be more easily retrieved.

42.

43.

44.

45.

Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) is true. (2) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) (R) is true, but (A) is false. Assertion (A) : Management is the efficiency in climbing the ladder of success. Reason (R) : Leadership determines whether the ladder is leaning towards right wall. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A) : Web 2.0 is a good set of economic, social and technological trend that collectively form the basis of the next generation of the Internet. Reason (R) : More than just the latest technology buzzword, Web 2.0 is a transformative force that is propelling libraries towards a new way to offer services. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A) : Consortia subscriptions are not always beneficial to libraries as publishers bundle irrelevant titles to inflate the number of titles for better price during negotiations. Reason (R) : In bundled titles, libraries have not to pay for the titles which are not core to them. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (R) is true, but (A) is false. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A) : Chain procedure is a systematic and almost mechanical method of deriving subject headings.

Previous Years’ Papers D 785 Reason (R) : It does not always operate well only with a faceted scheme of classification. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) Both (A) and (R) are true. Read the passage given below and answer the questions based on your understanding of the passage (Question Nos. 46 – 50) : One of the major features of the World Wide Web is the capability to create links between pages. These links are often viewed as analogues of citations in scientific publications (e.g. ROUSSEAU, 1997; BJORNEBORN & INGWERSEN, 2001; CRONIN, 2001). Links can lead to a different site or may lead to a page in the same site. Links for which the source and the target of the page are within the same site or domain are called self-links. Instead of counting self-links, we count self-sitations - the number of pages on the site having a link or links pointing to the same site. The difference between self-links and self-sitations is that for self-sitations a page with several self-links is counted with multiplicity one. The reason for counting selfsitations instead of self-links is technical: commercial search engines report the number of pages with self-links and not the number of selflinks. The term-sitation has been coined by ROUSSEAU (1997). In this paper we develop the measures self-linking and self-linked, which correspond to the classical measures for journals : self-citing and self-cited. We calculate these rates for a number of academic institutions on the Web. Self-links seems to be more problematic than selfcitations (of authors in scientific

ü

publications), because self-links are often inserted for navigational purposes. 46. Self-links denote : (1) Links between two websites. (2) Links between two authors. (3) Links between source and the target of the page within the same site or domain. (4) Links between two articles written by two different authors. 47. Commercial search engines report (1) the number of pages with self-links (2) the number of self-links (3) the number of sites (4) the total number of total citations 48. Self-linking and self-linked measures calculate their rates for (1) Number of academic institutions on the web (2) Number of websites on the web (3) Number of databases available on a given site (4) Number of subject gateways on the web 49. Links in domain can lead to a. different site on www b. page in the same site c. page in the different sites d. all available e-documents Codes : (1) a and c are correct. (2) a and b are correct. (3) b and d are correct. (4) c and d are correct. 50. Reason for counting self-sitations is (1) Academic (2) Classificatory (3) Technical (4) Non-technical

ANSWERS

1. (2)

2. (2)

3. (3)

4. (4)

5. (1)

6. (4)

7. (3)

8. (2)

9. (3)

10. (2)

11. (3)

12. (2)

13. (2)

14. (1)

15. (1)

16. (2)

17. (1)

18. (2)

19. (1)

20. (2)

21. (4)

22. (2)

23. (3)

24. (2)

25. (1)

26. (1)

27. (1)

28. (4)

29. (1)

30. (3)

31. (2)

32. (1)

33. (4)

34. (3)

35. (4)

36. (3)

37. (4)

38. (3)

39. (3)

40. (3)

41. (1)

42. (3)

43. (3)

44. (1)

45. (1)

46. (3)

47. (1)

48. (1)

49. (2)

50. (3)

786 D Library and Information Science Specific

July, 2016 LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE Paper-III Note :

This paper contains seventy five (75) objective type questions of two (2) marks each. All questions are compulsory.

1. Which law of the Library Science, as enunciated by Dr. Ranganathan, covered the words children, blind and the crippled, artisans, neo-literates, farmers, factory workers, and many more under the ambience of Public Library Service ? (1) First Law (2) Second Law (3) Fourth Law (4) Fifth Law 2. Chapter – 9 of AACR-2 has changed its name in AACR 2R 2002. Identify the changed name. (1) Computer Files (2) Electronic Resources (3) Machine Readable Data Files (4) Computer Resources 3. Which of the following Associations had suggested that, for every 3000 persons there should be one public library and India with 1.2 billion population requires 3,30,000 libraries ? (1) IASLIC (2) IFLA (3) ALA (4) ASLIB 4. Who, among the following, had visualized the establishment of Village Knowledge Centres (VKCs) in 2.3 lakh Panchayats to empower the villagers with knowledge ? (1) Jawaharlal Nehru (2) Dr. S.R. Ranganathan (3) Dr. Abdul Kalam (4) C.V. Raman 5. In1930, who theorized that reference work may be conservative, moderate and liberal ? (1) James I. Wyer (2) William A. Katz (3) S.R. Ranganathan (4) S. Rothestein

6. The term ‘Exponential Growth’ refers to (1) Linear Growth (2) Normal mode of distribution (3) Geometric Progression (4) Arithmetic Progression 7. Which of the following sections of the ‘Right to Information Act’, 2005 (India) grants exemption from disclosure of information ? (1) Section – 5(2) (2) Section – 6 (3) Section – 8 (4) Section – 11 8. The World Digital Library (WDL) is an international collaboration led by (1) IFLA, with support of Library of Congress (2) CILIP, with support of UNESCO (3) CILIP, with support of IFLA (4) Library of Congress, with support of UNESCO 9. Which of the following is the first book authored by S.R. Ranganathan ? (1) Library Manual (2) Five laws of Library Science (3) Prolegomena to Library Classification (4) Colon Classification 10. Journalseek is an : (1) Online database covering academic journals articles (2) Online database covering abstracts (3) Online database of freely available journal information (4) Subscription agent for freely available journals 11. Which of the following type of publication is/are included in the INB ? (1) Guides to Textbooks

Previous Years’ Papers D 787

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

(2) Maps (3) The first issue of a periodical (4) Back volumes of periodicals Who has been referred as ‘First Grammarian of library classification’ ? (1) S.R. Ranganathan (2) E.W. Hulme (3) Melvil Dewey (4) W.C.B. Sayers 760 tag in MARC format marks (1) the Edition (2) the Publication Information (3) Main Series Entry (4) A Topical Subject Heading The ‘12 Rules for Relational Database’ were given by (1) Edgar F. Codd (2) Larvy Page (3) J. Bill Gates (4) Linus Tolward Which among the following is free Audio Book Site ? (1) Ebrary (2) Virtua (3) Google Books (4) Librivox Bench marking, SWOT analysis and Environmental Scanning activities should occur continually and consistently in Library’s strategic planning process to ensure that (1) the organisation is competitive and enabled to meet future needs as they occur. (2) not to modify or update mission statements of the organisation periodically. (3) to keep the library stakeholders under cloud about the forward movement of the organisation. (4) to derecognise the faster movement of technology. The term ‘Gang Plank’ is associated with _____ administrative principle. (1) Remuneration (2) Stability of Tenure (3) Scalar Chain (4) Division of Labour ‘Instagram’ is acquired by _____. (1) Whatsapp (2) Yahoo (3) Facebook (4) Google

19. An e-resource consortium ‘CeRA’ is working in the field of (1) Agriculture (2) Astronomy (3) Astrophysics (4) Anthropology 20. LOCKOSS (software), an international community initiative by (1) MIT Library (2) Stanford University (3) University of Waikato (4) University of Southampton 21. Identify the principal findings of Vilfredo Pareto study on application of ‘Pareto Chart’ in social research. a. Small percentage of population accounted for a large proportion of wealth. b. 80% of results are due to 20% causes and 80% of the profit of an organisation came from 20% of its products. c. Large percentage of population accounted for a small proportion of wealth. d. 20% of causes are responsible for 80% of quality problems. Codes : (1) a, b and d are correct. (2) a, b and c are correct. (3) b, c and d are correct. (4) a, c and d are correct. 22. Which of the following important objectives included in 29 objectives laid down by RRRLF for its operation ? a. To promote library movement in the country. b. To enunciate a national library policy and to work towards its adoption by the central and state governments. c. To propagate the adoption of library legislation in the country. d. To maintain a database of qualified librarians. Codes : (1) a, b and c are correct. (2) b, c and d are correct. (3) a, c and d are correct. (4) a, b and d are correct.

788 D Library and Information Science Specific 23. Identify the key features of Emptying Digit from the following : a. Helps in intrapolation between two consecutive ordinal numbers. b. Deprives the preceding digit of its semantic value in a digit group. c. Deprives the preceding digit of its semantic value in a digit group but does not retain the ordinal value allotted to it. d. When it occurs as an initial digit, then it deems semantically poor digit. Codes : (1) a and c are correct. (2) a and b are correct. (3) a and d are correct. (4) b and d are correct. 24. Which of the following are not published by US National Library of Medicine ? a. eMedicine b. Pubmeth c. PubMed d. Medline Plus Codes : (1) a and b are correct. (2) a and d are correct. (3) c and d are correct. (4) b and d are correct. 25. ‘E-Shodh Sindhu’ emerged by the merger of a. INDEST b. INFONET c. NICNET d. N-LIST Codes : (1) a, c, d are correct. (2) a, b, c are correct. (3) b, c, d are correct. (4) a, b, d are correct. 26. Identify the websites for best practices : as viewed by June L. Power : a. Library Success b. Second Life Library 2.0 c. LISNews.org d. Bloomington Delivery Service Codes : (1) a, c, d are correct. (2) a, b, c are correct.

27.

28.

29.

30.

(3) b, c, d are correct. (4) a, b, d are correct. Identify the principles for the implementation of the canon of helpful sequence : a. Principle of spatial contiguity b. Principle of increasing literary warrant c. Principle of modulation d. Principle of enumeration Codes : (1) a and b are correct. (2) a and c are correct. (3) b and d are correct. (4) a and d are correct. Identify the popular modes of staff development practised in libraries : a. Planned rotation b. Deputing staff to conferences and seminars c. Sponsoring for refresher courses d. Making them members of other libraries Codes : (1) a, b, c are correct. (2) b, c, d are correct. (3) a, b, d are correct. (4) a, c, d are correct. In thesaurus SN (Scope Note) provides a. related terms b. restriction in usage of description c. brief descriptions of sense or framework in which the terms should be used d. clarification of ambiguity Codes : (1) a, b and c are correct. (2) a, b and d are correct. (3) b, c and d are correct. (4) a, c and d are correct. A sound marketing plan contains a. an analysis of macro-environment b. a SWOT analysis c. a brief statement of mission d. an analysis of advertising

Previous Years’ Papers D 789

31.

32.

33.

34.

Codes : (1) a, b and c are correct. (2) a, c and d are correct. (3) b, c and d are correct. (4) a, b and d are correct. LANs are distinguished from other types of Networks by the following characteristics : a. Full time connectivity to local service. b. Unlimited geographic operation. c. Data transfer rate. d. Low cost and cabling transmission media. Codes : (1) b, c, d are correct. (2) a, b, c are correct. (3) a, c, d are correct. (4) a, b, d are correct. Which of the following are the different layers of UNIX operating system ? a. Kernel b. Shell c. Format d. Application Codes : (1) a, b and d are correct. (2) b, c and d are correct. (3) a, c and d are correct. (4) a, b and c are correct. Identify the web 3.0 features from the following : a. Blogs b. Folksonomy c. Semantic web d. Net vibes Codes : (1) a and b are correct. (2) c & d are correct. (3) b & d are correct. (4) a & d are correct. Identify the characteristics of Library 1.0 : a. User tagging b. Read only catalogue c. Print newsletter mailed out d. Information as conversation

35.

36.

37.

38.

Codes : (1) a and c are correct. (2) b and d are correct. (3) b and c are correct. (4) c and d are correct. Identify the correct sequence of the facet formula for book number as propounded by S.R. Ranganathan : a. Evaluation b. Langauge c. Year d. Form Codes : (1) b, d, c and a (2) b, a, d and c (3) b, c, d and a (4) d, a, c and b Arrange the following biographical sources according to the year of their first publication : a. Current Biography, H.W. Wilson b. Webster’s Biographical Dictionary, G & C Marriam Company c. Chamber’s Biographical Dictionary d. International Who’s Who, Europa Codes : (1) c, b, a and d (2) c, d, b and a (3) d, b, c and a (4) a, c, d and b Arrange the following committee/commissions in ascending order : a. Kothari Commission b. Radhakrishnan Commision c. K.P. Sinha Committee d. Ranganathan Committee Codes : (1) a, b, d, c (2) b, d, c, a (3) d, b, a, c (4) c, a, b, d Arrange the following events according to their year of occurrence : a. Establishment of Documentation Research and Training Centre b. First meeting of Classification Research Group, London c. Publication of Broad System of Ordering (BSO) d. Formation of FID/CA

790 D Library and Information Science Specific

39.

40.

41.

42.

43.

Codes : (1) a, b, d, c (2) d, b, c, a (3) d, b, a, c (4) d, c, a, b Arrange the following classification schemes according to their chronological sequence : a. Subject classification b. Expansive classification c. Broad system of ordering d. Bibliographic classification Codes : (1) a, b, c and d (2) b, a, d and c (3) c, a, b and d (4) d, c, b and a Arrange the following bibliographies according to their first publication : a. Indian National Bibliography b. British Books in Print (Whitaker) c. British National Bibliography d. Books in print (Bowker) Codes : (1) b, d, c and a (2) b, d, a and c (3) d, b, c and a (4) d, c, a and b Arrange the following according to their year of establishment : a. DESINET b. JANET c. RLIN d. INDONET Codes : (1) b, c, d and a (2) a, d, c and b (3) c, b, a and d (4) d, c, b and a Arrange the following information encountering (IE) steps that occur during an IE experience as developed by Sanda Erdelez : a. Examining b. Returning c. Slopping d. Capturing Codes : (1) c, b, d and a (2) c, a, d and b (3) a, d, c and b (4) b, c, d and a Arrange the following steps of index construction in proper order : a. Index scoring b. Item selection c. Index validation d. Examination of empirical relationships

44.

45.

46.

47.

Codes : (1) a, b, c, d (2) a, c, d, b (3) b, d, a, c (4) b, a, c, d Match the following : List – I List – II (File (Extension) Content in dBase) a. .DBF i. Database Memo file b. .DBK ii. Database file c. .DBO iii. Database backup file d. .DBT iv. Command and procedure object file Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) ii iv i iii (2) ii iii iv i (3) iv ii i iii (4) i iii iv ii Match the following : List – I List – II a. Descriptive Metadata i. MOA2 b. Structural Metadata ii. EAD c. Administrative iii. OWL + DC Metadata d. Semantic Metadata iv. MARC Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) iv ii i iii (2) ii iii iv i (3) iv ii iii i (4) iv iii ii i Match the following : List – I List – II a. Arunachal Pradesh Public i. 1960 Libraries Act b. Orissa Public Libraries Act ii. 1979 c. West Bengal Public iii. 2009 Libraries Act d. Andhra Pradesh iv. 2001 Public Libraries Act Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) ii i iv iii (2) iii ii i iv (3) iv iii ii i (4) iii iv ii i Match the following : List – I List – II a. IFLA i. Dublin b. OCLC ii. Toronto

Previous Years’ Papers D 791 c. RLIN iii. Palo Alto d. UTLAS iv. The Hague Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) iv i iii ii (2) i ii iii iv (3) ii i iv iii (4) iii iv ii i 48. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Narrative account i. Trend Report of the progress of any given field of study b. Systematic view of ii. Review recent developments c. Systematic iii. Compendium condensation of a written work d. Short summary of iv. Digest the main points of a larger work Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) ii i iii iv (2) iii iv ii i (3) iii i ii iv (4) iv i iii ii 49. Match the following authors with the subjects they are associated with : List – I List – II a. Peter Suber i. Management b. H.E. Bliss ii. Information Technology c. Henry Fayol iii. Classification d. Tim Berners Lee iv. Open Access Movement Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) iv iii i ii (2) iii ii i iv (3) i iii iv ii (4) ii iv iii i 50. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Invenio i. Course Management System b. Moodle ii. Content Management System

c.

Share Point

d.

PhpMyAdmn

iii. Digital Library System iv. Web Database Management

Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) iii i ii iv (2) iv i ii iii (3) ii i iii iv (4) iv iii ii i 51. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Histogram i. Signs and symbols b. Bar Charts ii. Data in Circle c. Pie Chart iii. Length of the bar d. Pictogram iv. Frequency distribution Codes : a b c d (1) iv iii ii i (2) iii iv ii i (3) i iii ii iv (4) ii i iii iv 52. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Facebook i. Video Networking site b. Research Gate ii. Social Networking site c. Oovoo iii. Academic Networking site d. Flickr iv. Photo Networking site Codes : a b c d (1) i iii ii iv (2) iv i ii iii (3) ii iii i iv (4) iii iv i ii 53. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Qualitative i. Studies different research units or culture or social groups

792 D Library and Information Science Specific b.

Quantitative research

c.

Longitudinal research

d.

Comparative research

ii. Describes reality as experienced by groups, communities, individuals, etc. iii. Employs measurement and statistical analysis iv. Study of the problem or phenomenon over a period of time

Codes : a b c d (1) i iv iii ii (2) ii iii iv i (3) iii ii i iv (4) iv i ii iii 54. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Ezproxy i. A community awareness programme b. Geek the ii. Access and Library authentification software c. Outside the iii. Online learning box place for libraries d. Web junction iv. Library focussed community entertainment initiative Codes : a b c d (1) ii i iv iii (2) ii i iii iv (3) iv iii ii i (4) iii i iv ii 55. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Bhuvan 3D i. Operating System b. Ubuntu ii. ERMS c. Urkund iii. Geoportal d. CORAL iv. Anti-plagiarism software

Codes : a b c d (1) i iv iii ii (2) iv ii i iii (3) iii i iv ii (4) iii iv ii i 56. Match the following : List – I List – II (Examples) (Type of Relation) a. Relation between i. Influencing Political Science with history b. Geopolitics ii. Intra-array general relation c. Medical iii. Bias Jurisprudence d. Chemical iv. General relation between silver and gold Codes : a b c d (1) ii iii iv i (2) i iv ii iii (3) iv i iii ii (4) iv i ii iii 57. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Super-imposition i. Treatment of eye Device disease in children b. Subject Device ii. Use of ‘1’ for Unity, God, World c. Systems & iii. Agricultural Specials countries d. Mnemonic iv. British – India Device Codes : a b c d (1) iv iii i ii (2) iv iii ii i (3) ii iii i iv (4) i iv ii iii

Previous Years’ Papers D 793 58. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Abstractor i. Credible Authors and Publishers b. Classifier ii. Strong subject base and command over language c. Reference iii. Thought contents Librarian of documents d. Collection iv. Inquisitive Development and good Manager psychologists Codes : a b c d (1) ii iv i iii (2) ii iii iv i (3) iii ii iv i (4) iv ii iii i 59. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Greenpilot i. Library of Congress b. Kalasampada ii. Indira Gandhi National Centre for Arts c. Gallica iii. German National Library of Medicine d. SACO iv. Bibliotheque Nationale de France Codes : a b c d (1) i ii iii iv (2) ii iv i iii (3) iii ii i iv (4) iii ii iv i 60. Assertion (A) : In recent time, it is easier to copy and paste the contents from a digital document for which people knowingly avoid to credit the source. Hence, increased access to digital documents has provided a means for increase of plagiarism. Reason (R) : Software-assisted detection tools like iThenticate, Turnitin, etc. now al-

61.

62.

63.

64.

low vast collections of online documents to be compared to each other making successful detection of plagiarism. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are false. (2) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (3) (R) is true, but (A) is false. (4) Both (A) and (R) are true. Assertion (A) : Maximum use of library resources is the motto of the library. Reason (R) : It satisfies the fifth law of library science. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true. Assertion (A) : Not all bibliographic records require a uniform title. Reason (R) : Most published works are published only once and are never republished and translated. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true. Assertion (A) : A controlled vocabulary may take some form of classification scheme. Reason (R) : In a controlled vocabulary semantically related terms are not linked. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true. Assertion (A) : RDA replaces the General Material Designations (GMD). Reason (R) : The problem with the GMDs was inconsistent categorization. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) (A) is true, but (R) is false.

794 D Library and Information Science Specific

65.

66.

67.

68.

69.

(3) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A) : Precision is the fraction of the documents retrieved that are relevant to the user’s information need. Reason (R) : In practical situations, recall and precision are always inversely related. Codes : (1) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (2) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A) : Dictionary catalogue is very easy to consult. Reason (R) : Dictionary catalogue consists of author and title entries only. Codes : (1) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (2) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A) : Authority work deals with formulation and recording of authorised access points. Reason (R) : Without authority control, the burden is placed on user. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true. Assertion (A) : Google search is considered as the biggest threat to contemporary libraries. Reason (R) : Now-a-days, users taking help from Reference Librarian for factual queries has considerably decreased. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true. Assertion (A) : Commercial Library Management Softwares need to be discouraged in

libraries to make the contemporary librarians free from the dictate of commercial vendors. Reason (R) : Open source softwares (OSS) are more flexible and are free from much recurring expenditure and wider user base of OSS helps in problem solving better. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true. 70. Assertion (A) : Online survey tools such as Survey Monkey and Question Pro have made data collection, analysis and result extraction much easier and simpler. Reason (R) : Though these tools are being used widely without any doubt in recent time, but social research cannot rely always on the results from an online survey because of their inherent limitations. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (4) (R) is true, but (A) is false. 71. Assertion (A) : Technical writing, style manuals and citation standards are essential in structuring the research report. Reason (R) : The quality of research can be achieved only by standardizing the structure of a research report. Codes : (1) (A) is true and (R) is false. (2) (A) is false and (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 72. Assertion (A) : Total quality in organization usually depends upon the skill and competency of library staff. Reason (R) : Quality management is an information-based management system where professional education alone helps the employee to take decisions judiciously.

Previous Years’ Papers D 795 Codes : (1) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are true. (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 73. Assertion (A) : Libraries must have a well defined collection development policy to make their collection balanced, rational and user-friendly. Reason (R) : Exponential growth of e-resources, their spiralling cost and decreasing budget of libraries have made consortium based system imminent. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true. 74. Assertion (A) : There are no problems in a retrieval system in which indexers use natu-

ü

ral language terms to describe subject matter. Reason (R) : The complete text of a document may be stored in a machine readable form. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true. 75. Assertion (A) : There is no distinction between needs and demands for information services. Reason (R) : In many situations, the nonactive users of a given information service may greatly outnumber the active users. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true.

ANSWERS

1. (2)

2. (2)

3. (2)

4. (3)

5. (1)

6. (3)

7. (3)

8. (4)

9. (2)

10. (3)

11. (3)

12. (4)

13. (3)

14. (1)

15. (4)

16. (1)

17. (3)

18. (3)

19. (1)

20. (2)

21. (1)

22. (1)

23. (2)

24. (1)

25. (4)

26. (2)

27. (1)

28. (1)

29. (3)

30. (1)

31. (3)

32. (1)

33. (2)

34. (3)

35. (1)

36. (*)

37. (2)

38. (3)

39. (2)

40. (3)

41. (3)

42. (2)

43. (3)

44. (2)

45. (1)

46. (4)

47. (1)

48. (1)

49. (1)

50. (1)

51. (1)

52. (3)

53. (2)

54. (1)

55. (3)

56. (3)

57. (1)

58. (2)

59. (4)

60. (4)

66. (2)

67. (1)

68. (4)

69. (1)

70. (1)

61. (3)

62. (1)

63. (3)

64. (1)

65. (3)

71. (1)

72. (3)

73. (1)

74. (4)

75. (4)

* No option is correct.

796 D Library and Information Science Specific

January, 2017 LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE Paper-II Note :

This paper contains fifty (50) objective type questions, each question carrying two (2) marks. Attempt all the questions.

1. Number of working days of National Library of India in a year (1) 350 days (2) 360 days (3) 362 days (4) 365 days 2. Lotka’s law deals with (1) Frequency of occurrence of words in a text. (2) Productivity of authors in terms of scientific papers. (3) Scattering of articles over different journals. (4) Growth of articles in journals. 3. The large volumes of high velocity, complex and variable data are termed as (1) Big data (2) Linked data (3) Semantic data (4) Ontology-based data 4. Sony unveiled the first Blu-ray Disc (BD) prototypes in (1) September 1982 (2) August 1985 (3) October 2000 (4) November 2005 5. ISO 26324 : 2012 is a standard for (1) RFID in Libraries (2) DOI (3) Dublin Core (4) Inter Library Transaction 6. ISO 2108 standard is related to : (1) International Standard Serial Number (2) International Standard Book Number (3) International Technical Report Number (4) International Standard for Patents Number 7. The Browne charging system does not include

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

(1) Reader’s ticket (2) Book card (3) Date slip (4) Transaction slip In CC ‘1’ is used for Unity, God, World, First in evolution etc. as a (1) Seminal mnemonic (2) Schedule mnemonic (3) Alphabetical mnemonic (4) Syntactical mnemonic Identify the mode of formation of the subject ‘Agriculture of Corn’ : (1) Agglomeration (2) Denudation (3) Fusion (4) Lamination The number of successive characteristics forming the basis of its derivation from the Universe of Knowledge is known as (1) Order of an array (2) Order of a class (3) Open array (4) Collateral array What is the third part of colon classification? (1) Schedules (2) Rules (3) Classic and sacred books (4) Index Subject entry which refers from the name of a class to its class number is known as (1) Class Index Entry (2) Consolidated Entry (3) Cross Reference Entry (4) Subject Analytical Entry The license for accessing the’Europa World of Learning Online’ is available through (1) Routledge – (Taylor and Francis) (2) SpringerOpen (3) Sage Publications (4) Elsevier

Previous Years’ Papers D 797 14. What is periodicity of ‘Annals of Library and Information Studies’ published by NISCAIR, India ? (1) Monthly (2) Bi-monthly (3) Quarterly (4) Bi-annual 15. ‘Facet publishing’ is a division of (1) American Library Association (2) Canadian Library Association (3) Chartered Institute of Library and Information Professionals (4) International Federation of Library Associations 16. Who differentiated information and knowledge in the following way ? “Information is piecemeal, fragmented, particular; whereas knowledge is structural, coherent and universal” (1) B.C. Brooks and N.J. Belkin (2) S.G. Faibisoff and D.P. Ely (3) F. Machlup and U. Mansfield (4) J.H. Shera 17. Which of the following key terms of references assigned to National Knowledge Commission (NKC) constituted in June 2005 under the Chairmanship of Sam Pitroda for preparing a blue print to reform knowledgerelated institutions and their infrastructure? (a) Build Excellence in Education System and increase India’s competitive advantage in the field of knowledge. (b) Establishment of one “Knowledge Pool” (KP) in each state capital and to check the drop-out rate of school going children in a acquiring knowledge. (c) Promote creation of knowledge in S & T Labs and improve management of institutions engaged in IPR activities. (d) Promote knowledge applications in Agriculture and Industry and use of knowledge capabilities in making Government effective, transparent, and accountable. Codes : (1) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (2) (a), (b) and (d) are correct.

18.

19.

20.

21.

22.

(3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. In which of the following places the zonal offices of RRRLF are located ? (a) Delhi (b) Trivendrum (c) Mumbai (d) Hyderabad Codes : (1) (a) and (d) are correct. (2) (a) and (c) are correct. (3) (b) and (d) are correct. (4) (b) and (c) are correct. Which of the following can be used to measure the research output of an individual ? (a) h-index (b) benchmark (c) g-index (d) Bookmarks Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (b) and (c) are correct. (3) (a) and (c) are correct. (4) (c) and (d) are correct. Identify from the following the Silver Halide process used in reprography : (a) Exposure (b) Miniature (c) Developing (d) Rinsing Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (d), (b) and (c) are correct. Identify the type of ‘metadata’ held by D space for archiving contents : (a) Descriptive (b) Configured (c) Structural (d) Administrative Codes : (1) (a), (b), (c) are correct. (2) (b), (c), (d) are correct. (3) (a), (b), (d) are correct. (4) (a), (c), (d) are correct. Which of the following are ‘Special Auxiliary Subdivisions’ of UDC ? (a) Apostrophe (b) Sub-grouping (c) Colon (d) Point-naught Codes : (1) (a) and (d) are correct.

798 D Library and Information Science Specific

23.

24.

25.

26.

(2) (a) and (b) are correct. (3) (b) and (c) are correct. (4) (c) and (d) are correct. What are the constituent elements of Simon’s Flow Chart that are the components of management system ? (a) Planning (b) Staffing (c) Motivating (d) Innovating Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. (2) (a), (c) and (d) are correct. (3) (d), (b) and (c) are correct. (4) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. Which of the following are the characteristics of not-for-profit organizations according to Edward G. Evans ? (a) Financial sources derived from outside funding sources rather than from sales of service. (b) Have clear indicator of effect i.e. profit or loss. (c) Organizations are public rather than private. (d) Funding preferences for collaborative projects. Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. (2) (a), (c) and (d) are correct. (3) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. Which of the following are the criteria for defined open standard in W3C (2006) ? (a) Transparency and Impartiality (b) Maintenance and Relevance (c) Availability and Openness (d) Security and Preservation Codes : (1) (a), (b), (d) are correct. (2) (b), (c), (d) are correct. (3) (a), (c), (d) are correct. (4) (a), (b), (c) are correct. A Blog usually provides (a) a commentary on a particular subject. (b) a personal online diary.

(c) an online brand advertising of a particular individual or company. (d) an exclusive pre-paid publishing tool and non-instructional and non-illustrative resource for the scribes. Codes : (1) (a), (c) and (d) are correct. (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (3) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. (4) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. 27. Which of the following are pillars of information literacy according to SCONUL seven pillars of information literacy ? (a) Find (b) Gather (c) Identify (d) Manage Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. 28. Identify from the following, the digital library projects were implemented by C-DAC (Agency) Noida : (a) Creation of Vidwan database (b) Print your own book – Mobile Digital Library (c) Creation of Shodhsindhu (d) Creation of Digital Library of Books in President House Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (b) and (c) are correct. (3) (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (b) and (d) are correct. 29. Which of the following are the objectives of RRRLF ? (a) To act as referal centre (b) To act as clearing house (c) To promote reading habit (d) To promote library movement Codes : (1) (a), (b) are correct. (2) (b), (c) are correct. (3) (a), (d) are correct. (4) (c), (d) are correct.

Previous Years’ Papers D 799 30. Identify the sequence of the ‘title’ and ‘statement of responsibility’ area from the following : (a) Title proper (b) Parallel title (c) General Material Designation (GMD) (d) Statement of responsibility Codes : (1) (a), (c), (b) and (d) (2) (c), (b), (a) and (d) (3) (d), (c), (b) and (a) (4) (b), (a), (c) and (d) 31. Arrange the following according to their year of origin/publication : (a) Cause and effect diagram (b) MBO (c) Pareto Principle (d) POSDCORB Codes : (1) (a), (b), (c), (d) (2) (b), (c), (d), (a) (3) (c), (d), (a), (b) (4) (d), (a), (b), (c) 32. Arrange the following Public Libraries Acts’ according to their year of enactment : (a) Gujarat Public Libraries Act (b) Chhattisgarh Public Libraries Act (c) Goa Public Libraries Act (d) Rajasthan Public Libraries Act Codes : (1) (a), (c), (b), (d) (2) (d), (b), (a), (c) (3) (c), (a), (d), (b) (4) (d), (b), (c), (a) 33. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Sample i. Height, weight b. Variable ii. Cluster c. Range iii. Square root of variance d. Standard iv. Difference in score deviation distribution Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) iii ii i iv (2) ii i iv iii (3) i iii ii iv (4) iv ii i iii 34. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Basic Research i. Problem of gaps in periodical collec-

tion in J.N.U. Library b. Applied ii. Use of measureResearch ment technique in Library Science c. Action Research iii. Use of Library in public schools in Delhi d. Survey Research iv. Five laws of Library Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) iv ii i iii (2) ii iv i iii (3) iii ii iv i (4) i ii iii iv 35. Match the following States with their corresponding E-Government initiatives : List – I List – II a. Kerala i. Akshaya b. M.P. (Dhar) ii. Banglar Mukh c. Maharashtra iii. Gyandoot d. West Bengal iv. Information Junction Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) i iii iv ii (2) ii i iii iv (3) iv iii ii i (4) iii ii iv i 36. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Web of Science i. Chemical Abstract Service (CAS) b. Web Junction ii. Elsevier c. Scopus iii. OCLC d. SciFinder iv. Thomas Reuters Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) ii iii i iv (2) iv i iii ii (3) iii iv ii i (4) iv iii ii i 37. Match the following : List – I List – II a. ABCD i. Georgia (USA) b. KOHA ii. New Zealand c. Weblis iii. Brazil d. Evergreen iv. Poland

800 D Library and Information Science Specific Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) iii ii iv i (2) iv ii i iii (3) iii iv i ii (4) i ii iv iii 38. Match the following : List – I List – II a. Library Finance i. Regular Grant b. Non-plan Grant ii. Funds given for building, Infrastructure & Machinery c. Non-Recurring iii. Sources of Income Grant and Expenditure d. Plan Grant iv. Funds given for project under annual / 5 year plan Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) ii iii i iv (2) i iv iii ii (3) iii i ii iv (4) ii i iv iii 39. Match the following Main Entry fields with their corresponding tag as are given numbers in MARC 21 : List – I List – II a. 100 i. Main Entry – Uniform Title b. 110 ii. Main Entry – Meeting Name c. 111 iii. Main Entry – Personal Name d. 130 iv. Main Entry – Corporate Name Codes : a b c d a b c d (1) iii iv ii i (2) iv iii ii i (3) i iii iv ii (4) ii iv i iii 40. Assertion (A) : There is a connection between the concept of uncertainty and relevance in IR. Reason (R) : In IR both uncertainty and relevance are totally ruled out as part of query document matching. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true.

41.

42.

43.

44.

(3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A) : Electronic indexing and abstracting services are not advantageous over print. Reason (R) : Electronic indexes work on much the same principles as print. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) Both (A) and (R) are true. Assertion (A) : The efforts of contemporary libraries in using static A-Z lists (as a part of their ERM system) to facilitate access for users who wanted to limit their searches to e-content has failed to yield results. Reason (R) : Such lists maintained locally are, by necessity, more detailed and elaborate, as increase of titles made the maintenance of such lists more labour intensive and complicated. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A) : Libraries contribute to capacity building, which is essential to community development. Reason (R) : Library programmes and services can influence a person’s desire for lifelong learning, which is an important component of capacity building. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true (3) Both (A) and (R) are true (4) Both (A) and (R) are false Assertion (A) : A collaborative culture is an important condition for knowledge transfer between individuals. Reason (R) : Knowledge transfer do not require individuals to come together to interact, exchange, and share ideas and knowledge with one another.

Previous Years’ Papers D 801 Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true (3) Both (A) and (R) are true (4) Both (A) and (R) are false 45. Assertion (A) : Right to Information Act in India mandates timely response to citizen requests for information sought. Reason (R) : The basic object of the Right to Information Act is to empower the citizens, promote transparency and accountability. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true (3) Both (A) and (R) are true (4) Both (A) and (R) are false Read the passage given below and answer the questions based on your understanding of the passage. (Question Nos. 46 – 50) The idea and phrase “serious leisure’ comes from Stebbins’ interviewees, who used the word “serious” to underline the extent of their passion for a favourite leisure activity. In this case, the term embodies positive qualities such as importance and sincerity, rather than negative traits such as gravity or anxiety. Whereas casual leisure supplies pleasure, and project-base leisure delivers a temporary reward, serious leisure generates deep and enduring sensations of fulfilment. There are six defining characteristics to all serious leisure. First, there is the occasional need to persevere, as when mountain climbers push through exhaustion to reach a peak. Second, is that of finding a leisure career in the activity, with turning points and a sense of advancement. Third, serious leisure takes significant personal effort based on specially acquired knowledge, training, experience, or skill. In this quality, serious leisure is the opposite of its casual counterpart, which requires

no expertise. Fourth, there are eight durable benefits or outcomes to serious leisure: self-actualization, selfenrichment, self-expression, regeneration or renewal of self, feelings of accomplishment, enhancement of self-image, social interaction and belongingness, and lasting physical products of the activity. Fifth, serious leisure participants tend to identify strongly with their chosen pursuits, and may be quick to assert their affiliation. Sixth, a unique ethos, or spirit of the community, exists around each serious leisure activity. There are three main types of serious leisure : amateurism, volunteering, and hobbies. Amateurs operate in the fields of art, science, sport, and entertainment. 46. One of the six defining characteristics of serious leisure is (1) amateurism (2) requires no expertise (3) pleasure (4) spirit of the community 47. One of the three main types of serious leisure is (1) hobbies (2) sport (3) entertainment (4) art 48. Which is not one of the eight durable benefits of serious leisure ? (1) Self-expression (2) Renewal of self (3) Social interaction (4) Unique ethos 49. The word ‘serious’ is the phrase ‘serious leisure’ expresses the idea of (1) gravity (2) anxiety (3) sincerity (4) pleasure sensations 50. A temporary reward comes from (1) casual leisure (2) project-based leisure (3) serious leisure (4) enduring sensations of fulfilment

802 D Library and Information Science Specific

ü

ANSWERS

1. (3)

2. (2)

3. (1)

4. (3)

5. (2)

6. (2)

7. (4)

8. (1)

9. (4)

10. (2)

11. (3)

12. (1)

13. (1)

14. (3)

15. (3)

16. (3)

17. (3)

18. (2)

19. (3)

20. (3)

21. (4)

22. (1)

23. (1)

24. (2)

25. (4)

26. (3)

27. (2)

28. (4)

29. (*)

30. (1)

31. (3)

32. (3)

33. (2)

34. (1)

35. (1)

36. (4)

37. (1)

38. (3)

39. (1)

40. (1)

41. (2)

42. (1)

43. (3)

44. (1)

45. (3)

46. (4)

47. (1)

48. (4)

49. (3)

50. (2)

* All

Previous Years’ Papers D 803

January, 2017 LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE Paper-III Note :

This paper contains seventy five (75) objective type questions of two (2) marks each. All questions are compulsory.

1. Index Indiana, an index to Indian Periodical Literature is being compiled by (1) Central Reference Library, Kolkata (2) National Library of India (3) NISCAIR (4) IASLIC 2. According to OCLC research report ‘Know your community and its needs’ is the rephrasing of which law of Ranganathan ? (1) First Law (2) Second Law (3) Third Law (4) Fourth Law 3. Identify the document which is published by H.W. Wilson. (1) Europa World Yearbook 55th ed. 2014 (2) The International Who’s Who 78th ed. 2014 (3) Sears list of subject Headings 20th ed. 2010 (4) Ulrich’s Periodicals Directory 53rd ed. 2015 4. ‘Open Journal System’ is an example of which of the following open access models? (1) Green (2) Red (3) Gold (4) Platinum 5. When was the final ‘ISBD Consolidation Edition’ published by IFLA ? (1) 2008 (2) 2009 (3) 2010 (4) 2011 6. According to S.R. Ranganathan the canons for chain are (1) Canon of Ascertainability (2) Canon of Recall Value (3) Canon of array and filitary sequence (4) Canon of decreasing extension and modulation

7. In Colon Classification (6th edition) ‘LB’ denotes (1) Special (2) System (3) Canonical Class (4) Rounds 8. According to AACR 2R who will be considered for the access point of the Main Entry for the document entitled ‘Adventures of Tom Sawyer by Mark Twain; rewritten for young readers by Felix Sutton. (1) Sawyer, Tom (2) Twain, Mark (3) Mark Twain (4) Sutton, Felix 9. ‘Time and Motion’ study was enunciated by ______. (1) Edward Evans (2) Frank and Lillian Gilbreth (3) Harrington Emerson (4) G. McGregor 10. Which RFID component is attached to the Book/item for identification ? (1) Barcode (2) Antenna (3) Reader (4) Tag 11. What is RJ45 ? (1) A network cable connector (2) A node (3) An electronic coupler (4) A video display unit 12. SIP, the communication protocol for signalling and controlling multimedia communication stands for (1) Signalling Information Protocol (2) Internet Session Protocol (3) Sound Initiation Protocol (4) Session Initiation Protocol 13. The Fifth Anniversary of the general release of OCLC World Share Management Service

804 D Library and Information Science Specific

14.

15.

16.

17.

18.

– the first-ever cloud-based Cooperative Library Management System (that selected 500 libraries spanning six continents) was celebrated on : (1) July 01, 2015 (2) July 03, 2015 (3) May 01, 2016 (4) August 12, 2016 Which of the following is a measure of dispersion ? (1) Geometric mean (2) Median (3) Mode (4) Root Mean Square Deviation If ‘r’ is a rank of a word and ‘f’ is its frequency then rf = c, where ‘c’ is a constant. Which law is this ? (1) Bradford’s law (2) Lotka’s law (3) Narain’s law (4) Zipf’s law VIDWAN (INFLIBNET) is (1) an open source software (2) an Association of Intellectuals (3) a Programming Language (4) a Database of Experts and a network of Researchers and Scientists at national level Which of the following rights are granted for ‘Literary works’ according to Copyright Law of India ? (a) To make translation (b) To use in reporting current events (c) To make any adaptation (d) To use for the purpose of research Codes : (1) (a) and (c) are correct. (2) (a) and (b) are correct. (3) (b) and (c) are correct. (4) (b) and (d) are correct. Identify from the following the features of tacit knowledge : (a) Resides in human mind (b) Cannot be articulated (c) Tangible (d) Easily accessible Codes : (1) (a) and (c) are correct. (2) (b) and (c) are correct.

19.

20.

21.

22.

(3) (a) and (b) are correct. (4) (c) and (d) are correct. Which of the following are the examples of Web-based learning and education ? (a) Answer Tips (b) Moodle (c) Revish (d) Campus bug Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. (2) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. (3) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (a), (c) and (d) are correct. Which of the following are the two sections stated in ‘IFLA Digital Reference Guidelines’ ? (a) Collaborative Virtual Reference (b) The Administration of Digital Reference Service (c) The Practice of Digital Reference (d) Online Tools for Libraries Codes : (1) (a) and (c) are correct. (2) (b) and (c) are correct. (3) (b) and (d) are correct. (4) (a) and (d) are correct. Which of the following sites are offered by Britannica Library, a product of Encyclopaedia Britannica ? (a) Children (b) Young Adult (c) Patron (d) Reference Centre Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. (2) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. (3) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (d), (c) and (a) are correct. Identify the key attributes of ‘Digest’ from the following : (a) Significant ideas on one document area arranged separately in an unhelpful sequence. (b) A Methodically arranged compendium or summary of literary, historical, legal, scientific or other written matters. (c) Informative in nature and contains brief description of more than one document.

Previous Years’ Papers D 805

23.

24.

25.

26.

(d) Often prepared by a non-subject specialist without understanding and assimilating the contents of documents. Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (a) and (c) are correct. (3) (a) and (d) are correct. (4) (b) and (c) are correct. Which of the following communication channels are used frequently in Virtual Reference Service ? (a) Bulletin Board (b) Instant Messaging (c) R.S.S. (d) Voice-Over-I.P. Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct (3) (b) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (b) and (d) are correct Identify the affinitive/associative relationship of the following : (a) Genus-Species (b) Translations (c) Genetic (d) Concurrent Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct (3) (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a) and (d) are correct Which of the following are the components of a master database in acquisition system/ module ? (a) Membership Master (b) Vendor Master (c) Currency master (d) Transaction master Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. (3) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (b) and (c) are correct. Which of the following are types of random samples ? (a) Cluster sampling (b) Purposive sampling (c) Stratified sampling (d) Systematic sampling

27.

28.

29.

30.

31.

Codes : (1) (a), (c) and (d) are correct. (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (3) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. (4) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. Who among the following devised the ‘Critical Path Method’ ? (a) Morgan R. Walker (b) Clank Sedore (c) Blake William (d) James E. Kelley Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (a) and (d) are correct. (3) (b) and (c) are correct. (4) (c) and (d) are correct. Which of the following databases are available for scientific community free of cost ? (a) Inspec (b) ERIC (c) IEEE Xplore (d) PubMed Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (a) and (c) are correct. (3) (b) and (d) are correct. (4) (c) and (d) are correct. Which of the following are protocol standards ? (a) z39.50 (b) z39.71 (c) z39.05 (d) z39.81 Codes : (1) (a), (b), (c) are correct. (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. Which of the following are the Semantic Web technologies ? (a) SKOS (b) AJAX (c) SPARQL (d) UTF Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (a) and (c) are correct (3) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (4) (b), (c) and (d) are correct Which of the following are the features of Operations Research ? (a) Aid in decision making

806 D Library and Information Science Specific (b) Handles decision tables (c) Optimization of Performance (d) Used as motivational technique Codes : (1) (a), (b) are correct (2) (a), (c) are correct (3) (b), (d) are correct (4) (c), (d) are correct 32. Which of the following are discrete distributions ? (a) Beta (b) Exponential (c) Geometric (d) Poisson Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct (3) (a) and (c) are correct (4) (c) and (d) are correct 33. Identify the criteria for evaluation of qualitative research : (a) Objectivity (b) Reliability (c) Divisibility (d) Validity Codes : (1) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. 34. TRAILS-9 is (a) A process or an assessment tool for real time assessment of Information Literacy Skill of the student-learners. (b) A tool or process used by the School Librarians to produce evidence of Library’s impact on student achievements to share with stake-holders. (c) A tool to adjudge the quality of library services offered, but not to demonstrate the value of the Library’s contribution. (d) A tool funded by ILILE (Institute for Library & Information Literacy Education) based on Ohio-K12 Library Academic Content Standards. Codes : (1) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (2) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. (3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (a), (b) and (c) are correct.

35. Which of the following are the sources to lookup for DOI ? (a) Central Search List (b) DOI Handbook (c) Registration Agencies (d) Search results using a search engine Codes : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (c) and (d) are correct (3) (a) and (c) are correct (4) (a) and (d) are correct 36. Arrange in sequence the following types of activity according to Ellis’s model of information-seeking behaviour : (a) Browsing (b) Chaining (c) Differentiating (d) Extracting Codes : (1) (a), (b), (c), (d) (2) (b), (a), (c), (d) (3) (c), (d), (b), (a) (4) (d), (a), (b), (c) 37. Arrange in sequence the evolution of reference service : (a) Reference work with subject specialization. (b) Aid Reader/Assistance to Reader (c) Long Range Reference Service. (d) ‘Personal relation between librarians and readers’ Codes : (1) (b), (c), (d), (a) (2) (a), (c), (b), (d) (3) (d), (b), (a), (c) (4) (c), (d), (b), (a) 38. Arrange the following class numbers according to Colon Classification, 6th edition (a) 2 (b) 2 Ob T (c) 2 ‘N (d) 2k Codes : (1) (d), (a), (b) and (c) (2) (a), (b), (d) and (c) (3) (b), (a), (c) and (d) (4) (c), (b), (a) and (d) 39. Arrange in sequence the following phases of disaster planning according to guidelines/principles of IFLA : (a) Preparedness (b) Prevention (c) Recovery (d) Response

Previous Years’ Papers D 807

40.

41.

42.

43.

Codes : (1) (a), (b), (c), (d) (2) (b), (a), (d), (c) (3) (c), (a), (b), (d) (4) (d), (c), (b), (a) Arrange the following bibliographic utilities according to their year of origin : (a) Ohio College Library Center (b) Washington Library Network (c) UTLAS (d) RLIN Codes : (1) (a), (b), (c), (d) (2) (a), (c), (d), (b) (3) (a), (b), (d), (c) (4) (a), (d), (c), (b) Arrange the steps of Big 6 skill information literacy model in correct order as given by M. Eisenberg and B. Berkowitz. (a) Evaluation (b) Location and Access (c) Information seeking strategies (d) Synthesis Codes : (1) (a), (b), (d) and (c) (2) (b), (a), (c) and (d) (3) (c), (b), (d) and (a) (4) (b), (a), (d) and (c) Arrange the following committees according to their year of Constitution ? (a) Committee on National Network System for University Libraries. (b) K.P. Sinha Committee (c) Review Committee on Library and Information Science (d) D.P. Chattopadhyaya Committee on National Policy of Library and Information Services. Codes : (1) (b), (c), (d), (a) (2) (c), (d), (a), (b) (3) (d), (a), (b), (c) (4) (a), (b), (c), (d) Arrange in sequence the following components of Tom Wilson’s Expanded Model in sequential order of their occurrence : (a) Information seeking behaviour (b) Context of information need (c) Passive attention and search (d) Intervening variables

44.

45.

46.

47.

Codes : (1) (b), (d), (a), (c) (2) (a), (b), (d), (c) (3) (c), (b), (d), (a) (4) (a), (c), (b), (d) Match the following : List – I List – II (a) David Ellis (i) Process (b) James Krikelas (ii) Complex (c) Tom Wilson (iii) Descriptive (d) Alan Foster (iv) Cognitive Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (2) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (3) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (4) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) Match the following management concepts with their corresponding propounders : List – I List – II (a) Quality Trilogy (i) Philip B. Process Crosby (b) Quality (ii) W. Edwards Management Deming Maturity Grid (c) 14 points for (iii) J.M. Juran management (d) Fishbone diagram (iv) Kaoru Ishikawa Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) (2) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (3) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (4) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Maslow, A (i) Two factor theory (b) Alderfer, C.P. (ii) Acquired-needs theory (c) Frederick (iii) ERG Theory Herzberg (d) David (iv) Hierarchy of McClelland needs Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (2) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (3) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (4) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Instagram (i) Facebook

808 D Library and Information Science Specific (b) Face Time (ii) Apple (c) Tumbir (iii) Google (d) Picasa (iv) Yahoo Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) (2) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) (3) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) (4) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) 48. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Crowd Funding (i) Public assistance through donations (b) Crowd sourcing (ii) Collaborative milieu of knowledge dissemination (c) Hathi Trust (iii) Re-setting priorities due to financial constraints (d) Social and (iv) Collaborative Cultural hubs huge collection of digital resources Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (2) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (3) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (4) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) 49. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Portico (i) Preserves scholarly publications in dark archives to be accessed under emergent situation (b) Lockss (ii) Non-profit service that allows libraries to collect e-contents for digital preservation (c) Clockss (iii) Non-profit digital preservation service for participating libraries (d) Chorus (iv) Clearinghouse for the open resources of the U.S.

Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (2) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (3) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (4) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) 50. Match the following Library Automation Software Products with their corresponding developers : List – I List – II (a) Genesis G4 (i) Innovative Interfaces (b) VERSO (ii) ExLibris (c) Aleph (iii) Auto Graphics (d) Millennium (iv) Library Resource Management System Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (2) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (3) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (4) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) 51. Match the following Gateways with their corresponding subjects : List – I List – II (a) AHDS (i) Urban Design (b) ALTIS (ii) Forestry Food, Veterinary & Agricultural Sciences (c) NOVAGate (iii) Hospitality, Leisure, Sports & Tourism (d) RUDI (iv) Arts and Humanities Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (2) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (3) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (4) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 52. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Meta-analysis (i) The most theoretical form of desk research, clarify terms, concepts (b) Conceptual (ii) To assess the analysis extent to which concepts and issues are mentioned or not

Previous Years’ Papers D 809 (c) Content analysis

(d) Bibliometric analysis

(iii) Quantitative methods for describing and analysis patterns of recorded communication (iv) Quantitative data by statistical analysis

Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (2) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (3) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (4) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) 53. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Nominal Scale (i) Places events in order and exhibits their relation (b) Ordinal Scale (ii) Classifies Objec t s /Obser v ations (c) Ratio Scale (iii) Involves Judges to rank items into categories (d) Differential (iv) Represents the Scale actual amount of variable – theoretically unobtainable Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (2) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (3) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (4) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) 54. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Impact Factor (i) Cited during the current year (b) SNIP (ii) Duration of citations to article in a journal (c) Immediacy (iii) Cited during the Factor recent two years (d) Cited Half Life (iv) Citation based on the number of citations in a field

Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (2) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (3) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (4) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) 55. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Systematic (i) Population Sample specified by traits, discretionary and inexpensive (b) Stratified Sample(ii) Scattered population (c) Cluster Sample (iii) Het er ogeneous Population (d) Quota Sample (iv) Too large population Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (2) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (3) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) (4) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) 56. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Ibid (i) See (b) Loc.Cit. (ii) Previously used reference (c) Op.Cit. (iii) Same reference cited immediately above (d) Vide (iv) Same page cited (in the place cited) Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (2) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (3) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (4) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) 57. Match the type of services suitable for the queries given below : List – I List – II (a) Alert service (i) Can I have details of Lok Sabha elections 2009 ? (b) Documentation (ii) Who won service Wimbledon Singles in 2015 ? (c) Retrospective (iii) Let me Know the Search Service forthcoming con-

810 D Library and Information Science Specific

(d) Reference service

ferences on Green Libraries ? (iv) Let me have a comprehensive list of articles published on genome in 2016.

Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (2) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (3) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (4) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) 58. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) W.A. Katz (i) Documentation and Information (b) B. Guha (ii) Introduction to reference work 2 V. (c) S. Seetharama (iii) Documentation and its facets (d) S.R. Ranganathan (iv) Information Consolidation and repackaging: Framework, Methodology, Planning Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (2) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (3) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (4) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) 59. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) Literary Warrant (i) Melvil Dewey (b) Alternative (ii) H.E. Bliss Location (c) Decimal Fraction (iii) S.R. Notation Ranganathan (d) Seminal Mnemonics (iv) E.W. Hulme Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (2) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (3) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (4) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) 60. Match the following symbols/signs used in UDC standard edition :

Signs/Symbols Meaning ® (a) ® Double arrow (i) Examples of combination (b) à Diamond (ii) Including (c) Square (iii) See also (d) @ Approximately (iv) subdivide as equal to Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) (2) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (3) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (4) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) 61. Match the following : List – I List – II (a) The Crisis in (i) Michael Cataloguing Gorman (b) Headings and (ii) Raymond Canons : Comparative Knox Olding Study of Five Catalogue Codes (c) Our Enduring (iii) Andrew D. Values : Osborn Librarianship in the 21st century (d) Readings in (iv) S.R. library Cataloguing Ranganathan Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (2) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (3) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (4) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) 62. Assertion (A) : ‘Information Economy’ which is based on the premise that, information has economic value and as such requires an ‘Information Market Place’ in which such value can be exchanged, holds no good in the contemporary information age. Reason (R) : Information as a valuable resource occupies a slum dwelling in the town of economics, as this economic reality runs counter to the popular and historic notion that, “information is free”. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false.

Previous Years’ Papers D 811 63. Assertion (A) : Libraries should serve as a local centre of information and knowledge and be a local gateway to national and global knowledge. Reason (R) : Libraries must modernize their collection, services and collaborate with other institutions to develop a communitybased information system. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 64. Assertion (A) : Some modern users are quite apprehensive about virtual reference service chat. Reason (R) : They fear negative judgements from librarians and advisors arising from the content of the chat transcript. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 65. Assertion (A) : In recent years, the explosion of information in electronic format has placed a significant burden on the small public libraries. Reason (R) : E-resources are expensive, both in licensing cost and in the technology needed to support them to which small public libraries can hardly afford. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 66. Assertion (A) : In the digital environment, the University libraries in India need not build their reference collection. Reason (R) : ‘Question Point’ of OCLC provides a complete virtual reference management system for subscription. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false.

67.

68.

69.

70.

(2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) Both (A) and (R) are true. Assertion (A) : Libraries market their products and services to overcome the problems of under-utilization of their information resources and services. Reason (R) : Libraries are under-utilized because they do not provide access to electronic resources. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A) : In RDA the ‘rule of 3”, to provide upto three authors, is now the main instruction. Reason (R) : RDA does not encourage access to the names of persons and corporate bodies important to the users. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A) : Application of six sigma in library management is a quality programme that improves customers’ experience and lowers costs. Reason (R) : Six phases of sigma are necessary in all library operations. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A) : A library needs to generate a satisfied customer base which is supportive of library programmes. Reason (R) : If a library’s resources and services are measured upto customer’s expectations, then repeat use cannot be ensured. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false.

812 D Library and Information Science Specific (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 71. Assertion (A) : Podcasting, once an obscure method of spreading information, has become a recognised medium for distributing audio contents – be it corporate or for personal use. Reason (R) : Podcasts, though similar to radio programs, are primarily audio files which the listeners can play at their convenience, using devices that have become more common than portable broadcast receivers. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 72. Assertion (A) : Open-ended questions are suitable to glean more and candid information from the respondents seeking on a specific aspect. Reason (R) : Open-ended questions provide an opportunity to go beyond the closed option of ‘yes’ or ‘No’ as it enables to express one’s own ideas more candidly. Codes : (1) Both (A) and (R) are false. (2) Both (A) and (R) are true. (3) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (4) (A) is true, but (R) is false. 73. Assertion (A) : An information literate generally has the potential to determine the nature and extent of the information needed.

ü

1. 11. 21. 31. 41. 51. 61.

(1) (1) (2) (2) (3) (3) (1)

71. (3) * All

Reason (R) : An information literate can define and articulate the need better than an information illiterate. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 74. Assertion (A) : Majority of State Public Library Acts enacted from 1990s have provision for Library fund with contributions from State and Central Governments. Reason (R) : Library Cess is inadequate to manage public libraries. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) Both (A) and (R) are true. 75. Assertion (A) : Most of the LIS professionals in India are yet to recognise fully the significance of Web-based OPAC services. Reason (R) : Although some libraries in India have started to develop their own websites and portals with enhanced features of Web-based OPACs, but none of these libraries are yet to have their library page and lack federated search facilities. Codes : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false.

ANSWERS 2. 12. 22. 32. 42. 52. 62.

(2) (4) (4) (4) (1) (4) (3)

72. (2)

3. 13. 23. 33. 43. 53. 63.

(3) (*) (3) (1) (1) (1) (3)

4. (4) 14. (4) 24. (3) 34. (2) 44. (3) 54. (1) 64. (3)

5. (4) 15. (4) 25. (4) 35. (2) 45. (1) 55. (1) 65. (3)

73. (3)

74. (4)

75. (1)

6. 16. 26. 36. 46. 56. 66.

(4) (4) (1) (2) (3) (1) (2)

7. 17. 27. 37. 47. 57. 67.

(2) (1) (2) (3) (2) (4) (1)

8. 18. 28. 38. 48. 58. 68.

(4) (3) (3) (1) (2) (3) (4)

9. 19. 29. 39. 49. 59. 69.

(2) (1) (4) (2) (4) (1) (1)

10. 20. 30. 40. 50. 60. 70.

(4) (2) (2) (3) (1) (1) (1)

Previous Years’ Papers D 813

November, 2017 LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE Paper-II Note :

This paper contains fifty (50) objective type questions, each question carrying two (2) marks. Attempt all the questions.

1. DELNET was initially supported by : (1) RRRLF (2) NISSAT (3) NIC (4) INSDOC 2. Who wrote the Foreword to the first edition of ‘The Five Laws of Library Science’ ? (1) B.I. Palmer (2) Henry E. Bliss (3) P.S. Sivaswamy Aiyer (4) W.C. Berwick Sayers 3. ‘Keesing’s Record of World Events’ is published from : (1) London (2) France (3) Germany (4) Japan 4. The ‘Letter by Letter’ Method of alphabetization in Dictionary catalogue is known as : (1) Nothing before something (2) Something before nothing (3) All through (4) Something after more 5. International Standard Name Identifier (ISNI) consists of : (1) 10 digits (2) 12 digits (3) 13 digits (4) 16 digits 6. Identify the symbol of ‘Spiritual Experience and Mysticism’ as given by CC : (1) D (2) S (3) 4 (4) MZA 7. Which of the following is indicated in the third digit of DDC Third Summary ? (1) Schedule (2) Class (3) Section (4) Division 8. ‘Cannon of Reticence’ is a canon for : (1) Idea Plane (2) Verbal Plane

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

(3) Notational Plane (4) Both Idea and Notational Planes Positive Correlation occurs when : (1) Two variables move in opposite direction (2) Both variables move in a zigzag way (3) Two variables move in the same direction (4) Both variables are constant Ex post Facto study is a type of : (1) Diagnostic design (2) Quasi-experimental design (3) Descriptive design (4) Historical design Who proposed Big Six Information Literacy Skills ? (1) C.D. Ferguson (2) G. Dunsire (3) E.A. Fox (4) M.B. Eisenberg and R.E. Berkowitz Which of the following statements are wrong with reference to INB ? (a) Excludes musical scores (b) First appeared in 1951 (c) Classified part follows CC, but DDC numbers assigned at the bottom (d) The main entries are in Roman Script Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct (3) (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a) and (d) are correct The protection of non-personal data in Transborder Data Flow uses which of the following legal instruments ?

814 D Library and Information Science Specific

14.

15.

16.

17.

(a) Copyright (b) Patent (c) Bandwidth (d) Trademark Code : (1) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct (3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (b) and (d) are correct From which universities S.R. Ranganathan was awarded D. Litt (Honoris Causa) ? (a) University of Delhi (b) University of Madras (c) University of London (d) University of Pittsburgh Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (a) and (c) are correct (3) (b) and (c) are correct (4) (a) and (d) are correct Information about recent floods in Bihar can be found in : (a) Asian Recorder (b) Data India (c) India; a reference annual (d) Statistical Abstract, India Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (a) and (c) are correct (3) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (4) (b), (c) and (d) are correct Which of the following questions fall under the category of ready reference service ? (a) Population of Varanasi (b) Height of Qutub Minar (c) Concept of Symbiosis (d) Collection development in university libraries Code : (1) (a), (b) and (d) are correct (2) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (3) (b), (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (c) and (d) are correct Identify the basic parts of Colon Classification :

(a) Rules (b) Schedule of classification (c) Schedule of classics and sacred books (d) Geographical schedule Code : (1) (a), (b) and (d) are correct (2) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (3) (b), (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (c) and (d) are correct 18. Identify the budget heads of non-recurring budget : (a) Periodical subscription (b) Maintenance of equipment (c) Building extension (d) Infrastructure development Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct (3) (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (c) and (d) are correct 19. Which of the following are non-parametric tests ? (a) Anova test (b) Spearman correlation coefficient (c) Z test (d) Chi-Square test Code : (1) (b) and (d) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct (3) (a), (b) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (b) and (c) are correct 20. Which of the following are work analysis techniques according to Edward Evans ? (a) PERT - CPM (b) GANTT - Charts (c) Operation research (d) Cost - effectiveness Code : (1) (d) and (b) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct (3) (a) and (c) are correct (4) (c) and (d) are correct

Previous Years’ Papers D 815 21. Transborder Data Flow includes (in the definition given by United Nations) movements across national boundaries : (a) Machine-readable data for processing, storage or retrieval (b) Media products (mass diffusion) (c) Machine - readable data or magnetic tapes (d) Machine - readable data on discs Code : (1) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct (3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (b) and (d) are correct 22. Which of the following are the Canons for characteristics as enunciated by S.R. Ranganathan ? (a) Canon of relevance (b) Canon of Permanance (c) Canon of differentiation (d) Canon of Interpetation in Chain Code : (1) (b), (c), (d) are correct (2) (a), (b), (c) are correct (3) (a), (c), (d) are correct (4) (a), (b), (d) are correct 23. Arrange the following libraries in the chronological sequence of their emergence : (a) Rampur Raza Library, UP (b) Asiatic Society Library, Bombay (c) Connemara Public Library, Chennai (d) Sarasvati Mahal Library, Tanjore Code : (1) (a), (b), (c), (d) (2) (b), (c), (d), (a) (3) (c), (d), (a), (b) (4) (d), (c), (b), (a) 24. Arrange the following printing technologies according to their emergence : (a) Movable type (b) Dot-Matrix printer (c) Woodblock printing (d) Screen printing Code : (1) (d), (c), (b) and (a)

25.

26.

27.

28.

(2) (c), (a), (d) and (b) (3) (c), (d), (b) and (a) (4) (d), (a), (b) and (c) Arrange the following steps of digital preservation in their sequential order : (a) Refreshing (b) Encapsulation (c) Emulation (d) Data archiving Code : (1) (c), (b), (d), (a) (2) (d), (b), (a), (c) (3) (a), (d), (b), (c) (4) (a), (c), (b), (d) Arrange in sequence the following steps followed in Programming : (a) Programme Code (b) Programme Documentation (c) Program Test (d) Programme Design Code : (1) (a), (b), (c), (d) (2) (d), (a), (c), (b) (3) (b), (c), (d), (a) (4) (d), (c), (b), (a) Arrange the following Open Access Initiatives/Policy Statements according to the year of their adoption/declaration at international level. (a) The Coalition of Open Access Policy Institutions (COAPI) (b) The Berlin Declaration on Open Access to Knowledge in the Sciences and Humanities (BDOAKS and H) (c) The Budapest Open Access Initiatives (BOAI) (d) Scholarly Publishing and Academic Resources Coalition (SPARC) Code : (1) (a), (b), (c), (d) (2) (d), (c), (b), (a) (3) (b), (a), (d), (c) (4) (c), (d), (b), (a) Match the following indexing/abstracting publications with the corresponding institution. List - I List - II (a) Indian Citation Index (i) ICMR (b) INSPEL (ii) ICAR (Retrospective, 1970) (c) Med Ind (iii) Diva Enterprises, Delhi

816 D Library and Information Science Specific (d) Indian Animal (iv) NASSDOC Science Abstracts Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (2) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (3) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (4) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) 29. Match the following terms with the corresponding authors who coined them : List - I List - II (a) Knowledge Economy (i) Mikhailov, Chernyi and Gilyarevskii (b) Documentation (ii) Calvin Mooers (c) Informatics (iii) Paul Otlet (d) Information Retrieval (iv) Peter Drucker Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (2) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (3) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (4) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) 30. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Bibliography (i) Number of people recently died of dengue in Delhi (b) Biography (ii) Number of volumes of a book (c) Statistical (iii) Number of Source siblings of Mahatma Gandhi (d) Newspaper (iv) Number of Digest primary schools in Mumbai Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (2) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (3) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (4) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i)

31. Match the fundamental categories with corresponding examples : List - I List - II (a) Asia (i) Matter (b) Book Selection (ii) Personality (c) Microfilms (iii) Energy (d) University Libraries (iv) Space Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (2) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (3) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (4) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) 32. Match the following ACI symbols (CC 6th edition) with their corresponding Isolates : List - I List - II (a) p (i) Conference (b) k (ii) Encyclopedia (c) w (iii) Biography (d) n (iv) Serials Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) (2) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (3) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) (4) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) 33. Match the following NISO (National Information Standard Organisation) standards with their corresponding descriptions applicable to Libraries : List - I List - II (a) Z39.2 (i) Guidelines for Abstracts (b) Z39.4 (ii) ISSN (c) Z39.9 (iii) Guidelines for Indexes and Related Information Retrieval devices (d) Z39.14 (iv) Information for interchange format Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (2) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (3) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) (4) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv)

Previous Years’ Papers D 817 34. Match the following devices with their mediums/system : List - I List - II (a) Pen drive (i) Web server device (b) I-pad (ii) Communication device (c) Wi-fi modem (iii) Tablet run on iOS mobile operating system (d) Cloud (iv) Storage device computing Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (2) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (3) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (4) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) 35. Match the following Web tools with their corresponding features : List - I List - II (a) Web 1.0 (i) People Centric and participat ive/bi-d irec tional (b) Web 2.0 (ii) Linking and Integrating Global files (c) Web 3.0 (iii) Man-Machine Interaction with critical mass of participation and use of Al (d) Web 4.0 (iv) Static and monodirectional Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (2) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (3) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (4) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) 36. Match the following research methods with their corresponding explanation : List - I List - II (a) Formalized (i) Interpretation of research abstract ideas

(b) Conceptual research (c) Descriptive theory (d) Fundamental research

(ii) Survey and fact finding enquiries (iii) Formulation of (iv) Substantial structure and hypothesis to be tested

Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (2) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (3) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (4) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) 37. Assertion (A) : Extending the library’s reach through strategic partnership, collaborative relationship is an important goal for any academic library. Reason (R) : Partnerships do not allow participating organisations to yield efficiency. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 38. Assertion (A) : Science rests itself upon a series of postulates or assumptions which are themselves fundamentally unproved and unprovable. Reason (R) : One can only assert that these postulates are true, can believe them, but cannot prove them as they deal with the validity of human knowledge. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 39. Assertion (A) : Implementation of TQM in Libraries is quite challenging. Reason (R) : Some of the key essentials, like open and cooperative culture and employees responsiveness for customer’s satisfaction, required for successful implementation of TQM, are very much noticed in a library.

818 D Library and Information Science Specific

40.

41.

42.

43.

Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A) : Web 2.0 has wholly wiped out the digital divide, particularly with regard to individual ability, access to and engagement with technology. Reason (R) : Use of Web 2.0 in learning and teaching is still in an embryonic state. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A) : It is not economical to store and read video data from secondary storage devices. Reason (R) : Video data require enormous disk storage as image compression ratio is high. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true (3) Both (A) and (R) are true (4) Both (A) and (R) are false Assertion (A) : Participatory action research follows the conventional model of pure research in which members of the communities under study are treated as passive subjects. Reason (R) : In participatory action research no member of the communities under study participate throughout the research process. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A) : The mean is a measure of dispersion. Reason (R) : The mean is based on every obervation and is representative of the whole population.

Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) Both (A) and (R) are true. (3) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 44. Assertion (A) : Access to e-collection of a library via Login and password recognition is mostly used than access via IP-address. Reason (R) : Access via IP-address presents a challenge in controlling the distribution of password to non-affiliates. Code : (1) (A) is true, and (R) is false (2) Both (A) and (R) are true (3) (A) is false and (R) is true (4) Both (A) and (R) are false 45. Assertion (A) : Interlibrary loan departments in libraries will be affected in positive ways by the development of Massive Digital Libraries. Reason (R) : Because the increased availability of online resources will considerably reduce the need for sending books through traditional mail resulting in the decrease of the workloads of the inter-library loan departments. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) Both (A) and (R) are true. (3) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Read the passage given below and answer the questions based on your understanding of the passage. (Question Nos. 46 - 50). The medical community is not homogeneous. We have a wide range of kinds of work and, hence, we have a wide range of kinds of needs for information. Therefore, solutions for better access by investigators to information that they need might not help practicing physicians at all. Science in medicine and the practice of medicine differ greatly. How they differ was described succinctly by Peter Mere Latham well over a century ago : “Medicine is a

Previous Years’ Papers D 819 strange mixture of speculation and action. We have to cultivate a science and to exercise an art. The calls of science are upon our leisure and our choice; the calls of practice are of daily emergence and necessity”. Latham’s point is well made, but it is not quite detailed enough for our considerations here. Let me sketch out how the information needs of investigators and physicians differ. (1) An investigator usually poses one question (or faces one problem) at a time and works on it for a long period. A physician constantly faces a quick succession of problems that call for rapid solutions. (2) The investigator’s problem is usually narrow and readily defined. The problems dealt with by the physician tend to be highly various and fogged by many uncertainties. (3) An investigator’s earnings are not tightly coupled to how he spends time from minute to minute and hour to hour. A physician’s earnings are tightly coupled to every day’s working hours and how they are spent. These differences lead to differences in kinds of information needs and searches. (1) The investigator tends to need an exhaustive search of information sources (“the literature”) but at infrequent intervals. The time available for the search is relatively large and can be carried out at relatively low cost in “purchase” and in “time-cost”. (2) The physician needs quick access to valid information of immediate and high utility. The time available for a search is small. The “time-cost” for a search is high. The physician has to work mainly with thoroughly digested concepts and with most of the needed data carried in his head; the brain has a very rapid access time. Additional facts needed for clinical decisions must be accessed very rapidly.

Both investigator and physician occasionally have needs like those of the other. The investigator may need quick access to a small and specific piece of technical information; the physician may be willing occasionally to embark on a broad search to deal with a rare problem. Further, both have ongoing needs for general awareness of new developments that may come eventually to have high utility. These differences seem to me to determine how investigators and physicians use or do not use various kinds of information materials and sources. Investigators tend to use reports of specific and individual research effortsjournal articles. They tend to carry out searches themselves or to assign them to close professional associates. They have time to assess and to digest individual papers. Synoptic information, such as that in review articles, is used mainly for orientation to a new problem. 46. How do Peter Mere Latham differentiate calls of ‘Science’ (in Medicine) from that of the ‘practice’ (of medicine) ? (1) The calls of science are upon one’s leisure and choice, where as the calls of practice are of daily emergence. (2) ‘Medicine’ is a non exotic mixture of certainty, while practice of medicine is an infrequent phenomenon. (3) Science is not a study of the natural world, where as practice is based on facts learned through a formal study. (4) Science is not a method of reconciling practical ends with scientific laws, where as ‘practice’ do not allow repeated exercise to make one proficient. 47. How Lathams differentiates the information needs of Investigators from that of Physicians. (1) An Investigator unconventionally faces with multiple problems at a single point

820 D Library and Information Science Specific of time and works on it for a long period, while a physician constantly faces slow-witted succession of problems that hardly warrant rapid solution. (2) An investigator ordinarily faces one question/problem at a time which is usually narrow and rapidly defined, while a physician constantly faces a quick succession of varied problems fogged by many uncertainties. (3) Earnings of an Investigator are strictly coupled to how he spends time from minute to minute, whereas a Physician’s earnings are not tightly coupled to every day working hours. (4) Information needs of Investigators are solely academic, where as the needs of Physicians are both academic and utilitarian. 48. Who tends to need quick access to valid Information of immediate and high quality ? (1) An Investigator (2) A Screwball (3) A Physician (4) A Teacher

ü

49. Why ‘time cost’ for a search made by a Physician is higher ? (1) Slow access to invalid Information. (2) Access to information that are distant in need and of less utility. (3) Exhaustive search of information sources. (4) Rapid access to high quality information needed for clinical decision. 50. Why the Investigators tend to carryout searches themselves ? (1) They have time to assess and digest individual papers. (2) They are unaware of appropriate information sources. (3) They have no access to information/literature they need. (4) They cannot afford time to search, identify, and digest the articles of high quality.

ANSWERS

1. (2)

2. (3)

3. (1)

4. (3)

5. (4)

6. (1)

7. (3)

8. (2)

9. (3)

10. (2)

11. (4)

12. (2)

13. (4)

14. (4)

15. (1)

16. (2)

17. (2)

18. (3)

19. (1)

20. (1)

21. (3)

22. (2)

23. (1)

24. (2)

25. (4)

26. (2)

27. (2)

28. (2)

29. (3)

30. (3)

31. (1)

32. (2)

33. (1)

34. (2)

35. (1)

36. (4)

37. (1)

38. (3)

39. (1)

40. (2)

41. (2)

42. (4)

43. (3)

44. (4)

45. (2)

46. (1)

47. (2)

48. (3)

49. (4)

50. (1)

Previous Years’ Papers D 821

November, 2017 LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE Paper-III Note :

This paper contains seventy five (75) objective type questions of two (2) marks each. All questions are compulsory.

1. Identify the author of ‘Essays of an Information Scientist’ from among the following. (1) F.W. Lancaster (2) Derek J. de Solla Price (3) Eugene Garfield (4) B.C. Vickery 2. Who has coined the term ‘Information Society’ from the following ? (1) B.C. Brookes (2) Fritz Machlup (3) B.C. Vickery (4) N.J. Belkin 3. Dance’s Helical Spiral communication model is a : (1) Classical (2) Linear (3) Non-Linear (4) Multi-dimensional 4. What was the theme of IFLA World Library and Information Congress 2017 ? (1) Connections. Collaboration. Community (2) Dynamic Libraries : Access, Development and Transformation (3) Libraries, Citizens, Societies : Confluence for knowledge (4) Libraries. Solidarity. Society 5. Which of the following is a collaborative network of Reference Librarians ? (1) World Cat (2) eSS (3) Question Point (4) Global Scholar 6. Resource Description and Access (RDA) is divided into how many sections ? (1) 9 (2) 10 (3) 11 (4) 12 7. p, q, r in the schema of operators in PRECIS belong to :

8.

9.

10.

11.

(1) Core elements (2) Extra-core concepts (3) Dependent elements (4) Special classes of action According to APA Style Manual, a section at the end of a paper that includes information that is too detailed for the text of the paper itself and would “burden the reader” or be “distracting” or “in appropriate” is called : (1) Appendix (2) Bibliography (3) References (4) Tables Who coined the word “Management theory jungle” ? (1) Henry Fayol (2) F.W. Taylor (3) Heinz Weihrich (4) Harold Koontz Which of the following cases require the application of a new ISSN ? (1) Change in publisher (2) Change in publication medium and title (3) Change in location of publication (4) Change in editorial policy Which of the following organisations have introduced “Dig by”- a new mobile application available as a part of ‘Worldshare Management Service’ ? (1) Library of Congress (2) NISCAIR (3) OCLC (4) UTLAS

822 D Library and Information Science Specific 12. Percentage (%) sign is used in an URL to represent : (1) Space (2) Date (3) Time (4) Person 13. FRBRoo version 2 is based on : (1) FRBR model alone (2) FRAD model alone (3) FRBR and FRAD models only (4) FRBR, FRAD and FRSAD models 14. Which one of the following is not Image format ? (1) TIFF (2) MPEG (3) JPEG (4) GIF 15. Which of the following does not come under the domain of Descriptive bibliometrics (Descriptive Studies) ? (1) Geographical Distribution of Documents (2) Nature of Information Conveyed (3) Subject Distribution (4) Medium of Communication 16. ‘Half-life’ in the context of literary growth is used to indicate : (1) Rate of obsolescence (2) Rate of growth (3) Degree of scatter (4) Information explosion 17. Which sampling method is not suitable, if unit members are homogenous ? (1) Simple random (2) Cluster (3) Stratified (4) Systematic 18. Hermeneutics, principle is primarily related with : (1) Interpretation of texts (2) Interrelation between data and knowledge (3) Human experience (4) Human behaviour 19. How many Working Groups are constituted under National Mission on Libraries, India? (1) Two (2) Three (3) Four (4) Five

20. Who is responsible for development and maintenance of UGC official website ? (1) MHRD (2) Do E (3) NIC (4) INFLIBNET 21. Which of the following are the necessary elements of an information society ? (a) Confidentiality (b) Vulnerability (c) Integrity (d) Availability Code : (1) (b), (c) and (d) are correct (2) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (b) and (d) are correct 22. Which of the following components are essential for National Information Policy ? (a) Legislation framework (b) E-Journal consortium (c) Digital repositories (d) National bibliography Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (a) and (d) are correct (3) (b) and (c) are correct (4) (b) and (d) are correct 23. SWAYAM, the free online education was developed by : (a) IIT, Madras (b) AICTE (c) IIM, Ahmedabad (d) MHRD, Govt. of India Code : (1) (b) and (d) are correct (2) (c) and (d) are correct (3) (a) and (b) are correct (4) (a) and (d) are correct 24. Which of the following are the activities of National Mission on Libraries ? (a) CIP Project (b) Capacity Building (c) Library Assistance Programme (d) Setting up of Model Libraries

Previous Years’ Papers D 823 Code : (1) (a) and (d) are correct (2) (b) and (d) are correct (3) (b) and (c) are correct (4) (c) and (d) are correct 25. Which of the following indicate the purpose of reference list in a thesis / dissertation ? (a) Allows author to credit the work of others that directly influenced the present work. (b) Gives interested readers the information necessary to identify and retrieve the sources. (c) An expansive list that covers works that are consulted. (d) Recommends to the interested readers the works that are not cited in the text. Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct (3) (c) and (d) are correct (4) (b) and (d) are correct 26. Which of the following are the products of Chemical Abstract services ? (a) Sci Finder (b) Sci Val (c) Methods Now (d) Analytical Services Code : (1) (a) and (c) are correct (2) (b) and (d) are correct (3) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (4) (b), (c) and (d) are correct 27. Which of the following roles does a library have in the information transfer cycle ? (a) Information organization and control (b) Primary distribution (c) Secondary Publication (d) Secondary distribution Code : (1) (b) and (d) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct

(3) (a) and (d) are correct (4) (a) and (b) are correct 28. Who among the following are associated with established theories of reference service ? (a) C.M. Winchell (b) James I Wyer (c) Daniel Brophy (d) Samuel Rothstein Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (b) and (d) are correct (3) (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a) and (c) are correct 29. Which of the following are related to ‘Sugamya Pustakalaya’ ? (a) An online platform that makes accessible the content available to ‘print disabled people’. (b) Created by Department of Empowerment of persons with disabilities (Divyangjan) Ministry of Social Justice and Empowerment, GOI. (c) Powered by TCS Access. (d) Maintained by National Association for the Blind (India). Code : (1) (a), (b) and (d) are correct (2) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (3) (b), (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a), (c) and (d) are correct 30. ‘Entropy’ in the context of ‘Information Science’ is : (a) Measure which cannot be normalised by dividing it by information length. (b) Measure of unpredictability of the state or equivalently, of its average information content. (c) Average amount of information produced by a probabilistics stochastic source of data. (d) Way to measure diversity. Code : (1) (a), (b) and (d) are correct

824 D Library and Information Science Specific

31.

32.

33.

34.

(2) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct (4) (b), (c) and (d) are correct Controlled vocabularies fall broadly into following categories : (a) Subject Heading Lists (b) Thesauri (c) Folksonomies (d) Ontologies Code : (1) (a) and (c) are correct (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct (3) (a), (b) and (d) are correct (4) (c) and (d) are correct Which of the following are the components of a barcode symbol ? (a) Antenna (b) Quiet zone (c) Transponder (d) Start character Code : (1) (a) and (c) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct (3) (b) and (d) are correct (4) (a) and (d) are correct ‘Embargo’ in the context of ‘Book Trade’ is : (a) a limitation on access, to older resources by the publishers. (b) perpetual ban on the access of the given resources of a publisher. (c) a limitation on access to resources placed by publishers. (d) a limitation on access to the resources usually to prevent the cancellation of individual subscription. Code : (1) (c) and (d) are correct (2) (a) and (b) are correct (3) (a) and (c) are correct (4) (a), (c) and (d) are correct Which of the following are Research Information Management System ? (a) Pure (b) Quetext (c) Converis (d) VIVO

Code : (1) (a), (b) and (d) are correct (2) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct (4) (b), (c) and (d) are correct 35. Which of the following are the open access initiatives of INFLIBNET ? (a) Shodhganga (b) e-Shodh Sindhu (c) Infoport (d) IndCat Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct (2) (b) and (c) are correct (3) (c) and (d) are correct (4) (a) and (c) are correct 36. Which of the following are embedded processors ? (a) Micro Controller (b) Digital Signal Processor (c) Cor 2 extreme (d) Intel Xeon Code : (1) (a), (b) and (d) are correct (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct (3) (a), (b) and (c) are correct (4) (a), (c) and (d) are correct 37. Jubilee (JISC User Behaviour in Information Seeking : Longitudinal Evaluation of Electronic Information Services ) seeks to : (a) Predict, monitor and characterise ISB in relation to EIS (Electronic Information Services). (b) Provide illuminative and contextual pictures built up overtime to users and non-users. (c) Evaluate materials of rarity in nature. (d) Adjudge the quality of hard copies of ereference tools served to readers in a given library over a period of time. Code : (1) (c) and (d) are correct (2) (a) and (b) are correct

Previous Years’ Papers D 825

38.

39.

40.

41.

(3) (b) and (c) are correct (4) (a) and (d) are correct Arrange the following state Public Library Acts according to their year of enactment : (a) Chhattisgarh Public Libraries Act (b) Haryana Public Libraries Act (c) Orissa Public Libraries Act (d) Lakshadweep Public Libraries Act Code : (1) (b), (c), (d), (a) (2) (d), (b), (c), (a) (3) (c), (b), (d), (a) (4) (a), (b), (c), (d) Arrange in sequence the following public libraries according to their year of origin. (a) Connemara Public Library (b) Delhi Public Library (c) Calcutta Public Library (d) Baroda Central Library Code : (1) (c), (a), (d), (b) (2) (c), (d), (b), (a) (3) (a), (b), (d), (c) (4) (a), (d), (b), (c) Arrange the following laws / principles from lower to higher level as propounded by S.R. Ranganathan. (a) Fundamental Laws (b) Canons (c) Principles (d) Basic Laws Code : (1) (c), (b), (a), (d) (2) (a), (b), (c), (d) (3) (b), (d), (a), (c) (4) (d), (c), (b), (a) Arrange year-wise development of the following indexing systems : (a) Relational Indexing by J.E.L. Farradane (b) Chain Indexing by S.R. Ranganathan (c) Subject Indexing by J.E. Coates (d) PRECIS by Derek Austin

42.

43.

44.

45.

Code : (1) (b), (a), (c), (d) (2) (a), (b), (c), (d) (3) (c), (d), (b), (a) (4) (d), (c), (a), (b) Arrange, from among the following, the areas of access-points in their proper sequence as given in ISBD. (a) Notes (b) Series (c) Edition (d) Material Specific details Code : (1) (a), (b), (c), (d) (2) (c), (d), (b), (a) (3) (b), (c), (d), (a) (4) (d), (c), (b), (a) Arrange the following connecting symbols of CC- 6th ed. according to their increasing ordinal value : (a) ) (arrester) (b) ® (backward arrow) (c) ® (forward arrow) (d) 0 (zero) Code : (1) (b), (c), (d), (a) (2) (a), (b), (c), (d) (3) (c), (d), (b), (a) (4) (d), (a), (c), (b) Identify the correct sequence of indicator digits of Intra Facet Phase Relation as used in CC (6th edition). (1) j k m n r (2) j k m r o (3) i j k m n (4) j k m n q Arrange in sequence the following subject classes according to their occurance in the schedules of DDC, 21st Ed. (a) Food Technology (b) Public Finance (c) General Encyclopaedias (d) Bibliographies Code : (1) (d), (b), (c), (a) (2) (d), (c), (b), (a)

826 D Library and Information Science Specific

46.

47.

48.

49.

(3) (c), (b), (a), (d) (4) (c), (a), (b), (d) Arrange in sequence the Maslow’s hierarchy of needs : (a) Social (b) Esteem (c) Physiological (d) Safety Code : (1) (c), (d), (a), (b) (2) (d), (b), (a), (c) (3) (d), (a), (c), (b) (4) (c), (a), (b), (d) Arrange in sequence the following document titles alphabetically word by word : (a) Bookfinder (b) Bookkeeping made simple (c) Book bytes (d) Books that changed the world Code : (1) (a), (b), (c), (d) (2) (b), (c), (d), (a) (3) (c), (a), (b), (d) (4) (c), (d), (a), (b) Arrange the steps of the 8W’S Literacy Model in correct order as given by Annette Lamb : (a) Webbing (b) Wishing (c) Wondering (d) Weaving Code : (1) (c), (a), (b) and (d) (2) (b), (a), (c) and (d) (3) (c), (a), (d) and (b) (4) (c), (b), (a) and (d) Match the following sources with their corresponding functions : List - I List - II (a) Counter (i) Tracking e-resources usage statistics (b) Affinity string (ii) Impact factor (c) Link resolver (iii) Tracking online usage by user categories

(d) Journal of citation report

(iv) Number of times users’ connectivity to a resource

Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (2) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) (3) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (4) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) 50. Match the following consortiums with their corresponding locations : List - I List - II (a) UGC-DAE (i) Manesar Consortium (Gurgaon) (b) ERMED-India (ii) Gandhinagar, Consortium (Ahmedabad) (c) DeLCON-DBT’s (iii) Indore E-Library Consortium (d) e-Shodh Sindhu (iv) New Delhi Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (2) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (3) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (4) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) 51. Match the following leading Abstracting and Indexing tools/Databases with their corresponding Publishers/Content Providers : List - I List - II (a) LISA (i) NISCAIR (b) ILSA (ii) EBSCO (c) LISTA (iii) IASLIC (d) Indian Science (iv) ProQuest Abstracts Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (2) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (3) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (4) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii)

Previous Years’ Papers D 827 52. Match the following threats to ‘information society’ with the corresponding concept : List - I List - II (a) Compromises (i) Confiscation of intellectual equipment or Property information (b) Deliberate (ii) Unauthorized acts of theft access to data (c) Deliberate acts (iii) Piracy of information extortion (d) Deliberate acts (iv) Blackmail of of espionage information or trespass disclosure. Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (2) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) (3) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (4) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) 53. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Political Map (i) Features of land (b) Route Map (ii) Roads and bridges, etc. (c) Physical Map (iii) Limiting territorial boundaries (d) Thematic Map (iv) Mining, agriculture, etc. Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (2) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (3) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (4) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) 54. The MARC Field 264 has different second indicator values to indicate separate data elements in RDA. Match these second indicator values with the respective data elements : List - I List - II (a) –0 (i) Distribution statement

(b) –1 (c) –2 (d) –3

(ii) Publication statement (iii) Manufacture statement (iv) Production statement

Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (2) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (3) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) (4) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 55. Match the following mechanisms of information processing with corresponding service as given by S. Seetharama : List - I List - II (a) Announcement (i) Translation Service (b) Evaluation (ii) Current Awareness Service (c) Document (iii) Indexing Service access (d) Accretion (iv) State-of-the-art report Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (2) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (3) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (4) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) 56. Match the following queries with corresponding type of reference service : List - I List - II (a) Communication (i) Asynchronous with Library reference service Staff through VoIP (b) Reference query (ii) Online reference through e-mail service (c) Use of (iii) Virtual Reference e-resources Desk seeking answers (d) Webforms (iv) Reference interview

828 D Library and Information Science Specific Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (2) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) (3) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) (4) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) 57. Match the following with corresponding explanation : List - I List - II (a) Embargo (i) Publisher’s list of new titles (b) Big Deal (ii) Authorization for regular shipment of new editions of specific products (c) Front List (iii) Publisher’s restriction one-resource access (d) Standing order (iv) large bundled e-journal package of single publisher on discounted price Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (2) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (3) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (4) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) 58. Match the following NISO (National Information Standard Organisation) standards with their corresponding descriptions applicable to Libraries : List - I List - II (a) Z 39.41 (i) Dublin core Metadata Element set (b) Z 39.63 (ii) Syntax for Digital Object Identifier (DOI) (c) Z 39.84 (iii) Inter library loan data elements

(d) Z 39.85

(iv) Printed information on spines

Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (2) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (3) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (4) (ii) (i) (iii) (iv) 59. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Counter (i) Article metric (b) PLoS ALMs (ii) Author metric (c) ORC ID (iii) All metric (d) Social Media (iv) Journal metric citations Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (2) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (3) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) (4) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) 60. Match the following Office Products with their corresponding Producers/Organizations : List - I List - II (a) Open Office (i) IBM (b) MS-Office (ii) Apache Foundation (c) Lotus Note (iii) Apple (d) iWork (iv) Microsoft Corporation Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (2) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (3) (i) (iv) (iii) (ii) (4) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) 61. Match the following statements with corresponding research process : List - I List - II (a) What is the (i) Hypothesis role of MOOCs

Previous Years’ Papers D 829 in imparting LIS education ? (b) EDUCAUSE (ii) Analytical (2013) “Selective statement institutions can be democratized via MOOCs”. (c) MOOCs (iii) Formulation of programmes the problem will replace distance Learning in LIS (d) Though MOOCs (iv) Literature study is advantageous, majority respondents preferred distance learning Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (2) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (3) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) (4) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) 62. Match the following Online Survey Development Cloud based Software Applications/tools with their corresponding founders : List - I List - II (a) Survey Monkey (i) Christian Vanek and Scott Mc Daniel(Colorado, USA) (b) Type Form (ii) Gordon TanBrisbane (Austria) (c) Client Heartbeat (iii) Robert Munoz and David OkunievBarcelona (Spain) (d) Survey Gizmo (iv) Ryan FinleySanmateo, California (USA)

Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (2) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (3) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (4) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) 63. Match the following with their corresponding year of launching : List - I List - II (a) National Mission (i) 2003 on Manuscripts (b) National Mission (ii) 2007 on Libraries (c) National Mission (iii) 2012 on Monuments and Antiquities (d) National (iv) 2010 Knowledge Network Code : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (2) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (3) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (4) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) 64. Assertion (A) : The copyright system, born and bred for print technology, faces a technological revolution in its environment. Reason (R) : The old print technology’s broadcast model of one to many communication is replaced with many to many global connectivity. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 65. Assertion (A) : Avoidance of difficult reference questions are usually an outcome of momentary panic in the face of a seemingly impenetrable question. Reason (R) : Reference never adhere to few helpful tips such as developing handy-referral systems, both with in and outside the

830 D Library and Information Science Specific

66.

67.

68.

69.

reference area, and fail to establish a context for the questions to counter such panic attack. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) Both (A) and (R) are true. Assertion (A) : In collection development, pamphlets do not require frequent review like books and journals. Reason (R) : Pamphlet’s information value is likely to be short lived, their physical format is usually flimsy and subject to rapid deterioration. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A) : The content-based indexing techniques enable identification of wanted persons in photographs of crowds. Reason (R) : The content-based indexing system uses all sorts of characteristics of the image to guess what it is about. Code : (1) (A) is true but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false but (R) are true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) Both (A) and (R) are true. Assertion (A) : In Gold Open Access, costs are not transferred to authors. Reason (R) : Gold Open Access journals publish peer-reviewed articles without paid subscription barriers for their readers. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Assertion (A) : In recent years, QR codes have become ubiquitous and may replace the use of bar codes.

Reason (R) : QR is a two - dimensional code with large capacity for storage. These codes hold information both horizontally and vertically and can be scanned by users with their smart phones at ease. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 70. Assertion (A) : Librarians usually prefer to provide access to e-content for the users via a proxy server, allowing authorized library users to access content from outside the physical confines of a library. Reason (R) : Proxy-server access is possible without IP-address recognition. Code : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true. 71. Assertion (A) : ‘Web Assembly’, a standard that enables applications to run securely in browsers (without the use of Plug-ins) is a people-friendly application in using Web. Reason (R) : A web language transforms the way people use their devices and the web making applications are more accessible to people at ease all over the globe. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) Both (A) and (R) are true. (3) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 72. Assertion (A) : Grounded Theory methods in Qualitative research start from same set of assumptions as traditional Quantitative research design. Reason (R) : The inductive nature of these Grounded Theory methods allows the key issues emerge rather than force them into pre conceived categories.

Previous Years’ Papers D 831 Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) Both (A) and (R) are true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true. 73. Assertion (A) : The fundamental need of a hypothesis is to guide sound research. Reason (R) : Without hypothesis, research is focused and do not become a random empirical wandering. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 74. Assertion (A) : Traditional Knowledge Resource Classification(TKRC) is an innovative structured classification system useful for the systematic arrangement, dissemination and retrieval of all subjects. Reason (R) : It is structured, based on International Patent Classification.

Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) Both (A) and (R) are true. (3) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 75. Identify the resource sharing and document delivery principles as given by IFLA. (a) Each country should accept responsibility for providing access to its own publications to any other country. (b) Supplying libraries should accept requests submitted in hardcopy only. (c) From the moment a library dispatches an item to a requesting library until it returns the supplying library is responsible for any loss or damage incurred. (d) Each country should aim to develop an efficient national resource sharing system. Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (b) and (c) are correct. (3) (a) and (d) are correct. (4) (b) and (d) are correct.

832 D Library and Information Science Specific

ü

ANSWERS

1. (3)

2. (2)

3. (3)

4. (4)

5. (3)

6. (2)

7. (3)

8. (1)

9. (4)

10. (2)

11. (3)

12. (1)

13. (4)

14. (2)

15. (2)

16. (1)

17. (2)

18. (1)

19. (3)

20. (4)

21. (3)

22. (2)

23. (1)

24. (2)

25. (1)

26. (1)

27. (3)

28. (2)

29. (2)

30. (4)

31. (3)

32. (3)

33. (1)

34. (3)

35. (4)

36. (1)

37. (2)

38. (1)

39. (1)

40. (1)

41. (1)

42. (2)

43. (2)

44. (1)

45. (2)

46. (1)

47. (3)

48. (3)

49. (3)

50. (1)

51. (1)

52. (4)

53. (3)

54. (1)

55. (2)

56. (3)

57. (1)

58. (3)

59. (2)

60. (2)

61. (1)

62. (2)

63. (1)

64. (3)

65. (1)

66. (2)

67. (4)

68. (2)

69. (2)

70. (3)

71. (2)

72. (4)

73. (1)

74. (3)

75. (3)

Previous Years’ Papers D 833

July, 2018 LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE Paper-II Note :

This paper contains hundred (100) objective type questions of two (2) marks each. All questions are compulsory.

1. What is the meaning of the term “Information Iceberg” ? (1) 1/3 Non-Visible and 2/3 Visible (2) 1/3 Visible and 2/3 Non-Visible (3) 1/4 Non-Visible and 3/4 Visible (4) 1/4 Visible and 3/4 Non-Visible 2. What is the name of the committee responsible for Indian standards related to libraries ? (1) TC 46 (2) MSD 5 (3) BIS - LIB (4) Z 39 3. ‘World Book and Copyright Day’ is celebrated on : (1) 22nd August (2) 23rd April (3) 23rd March (4) 20th March 4. “To make at least one in every household eliterate” is thrust area of policy (# 7) included in : (1) National Knowledge Commission, 2005 (2) National Policy on Information Technology, 2012 (3) National Education Policy, 1992 (4) National Policy on Library and Information Systems, 1986 5. Identify which one of the Five Laws of Library Science that Ranganathan remarked as ‘trivial truism’ in his writing “Library Science and Scientific Method”. (1) First Law (2) Second Law (3) Third Law (4) Fifth Law 6. ‘Wikipedia’ owned by the non-profit “Wikipedia Foundation” was launched on January 15, 2001 by :

(1) (2) (3) (4)

Jimmy Wells and Larry Sanger Jimmy Wells and Vincent J. Aceto Larry Sanger and W. Kathy William A. Ford and W. Kathy

7. ‘Anukriti’ is a : (1) Bibliographic India Website (2) Indexing India Website (3) Translating India Website (4) Abstracting India Website 8. Ezproxy is a product of : (1) UTLAS (2) OCLC (3) RLIN (4) Library of Congress 9. Which of the following is not a classical model of information retrieval ? (1) Boolean (2) Cluster (3) Probabilistic (4) Vector-space 10. Who criticized the concept of main entry as ‘a relic of outdated technology’ ? (1) Michael Gorman (2) Robert L. Maxwell (3) Pat Oddy (4) Tom Delsey 11. Identify the odd one out : (1) Reference entry (2) Centred entry (3) Analytical entry (4) Added entry

834 D Library and Information Science Specific 12. ‘Path-Goal Theory of Leader Effectiveness’ is developed by : (1) Douglas McGregor (2) William Ouchi (3) Robert House (4) Abraham Maslow 13. ‘Ambra’ an innovative open source plateform (for publishing open access resource articles) is developed by : (1) OCLC (2) DOAJ (3) PLOS (4) WDL 14. The term ‘Weblog’ was coined by : (1) E. Williams (2) Jack Dorsey (3) Jorn Barger (4) Peter Merholz 15. Which of the following is not file hosting service ? (1) One Drive (2) Google Drive (3) Live Drive (4) Xbox Live 16. VuFind is the tool used for : (1) Library Automation (2) Digital Library System (3) Library Resource Discovery System (4) Institutional Repository 17. Which one is the correct ‘Binary number’ for Decimal ‘115’ ? (1) 1100011 (2) 1010111 (3) 1111111 (4) 1110011 18. Research method based on the consensus opinions of panel of experts and judgements is known as : (1) Historical method (2) Case study method (3) Delphi method (4) Interview method 19. A probability which is not associated with the occurrence of an event is expressed as a number between : (1) +1 and –1 (2) 1 and < 1 (3) –1 and 0 (4) 0 and 1

20. What is the name of the initiative taken by the UGC to provide a 24×7 online store house of all academic awards issued by different academic institutions all over the country ? (1) National Mission on Education Through Information and Communication Technology (NMEICT) (2) National Academic Depository (NAD) (3) HEI Online Registration Portal (4) Swayam Prabha 21. Wersig and Neveling gave which of the following approaches for defining information ? (a) The Action Approach (b) The Message Approach (c) The Process Approach (d) The Structural Approach Code : (1) (a), (b), (c) are correct. (2) (b), (c), (d) are correct. (3) (a), (c), (d) are correct. (4) (a), (b), (d) are correct. 22. Why a Library Association should have a code of “professional conduct” ? (a) Prescribes standards of behavior expected for the member (b) Sets out standards and duties which a professional is expected to observe (c) Standards can be used as a point of reference while dealing with disciplined procedures against members (d) Standards help to demean the image of the Association and de-ameliorate funding and ensure better functioning of libraries. Code : (1) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (3) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. (4) (a), (c) and (d) are correct.

Previous Years’ Papers D 835 23. Which of the following states do not have provision of library cess in their respective Public Library Acts ? (a) West Bengal (b) Tamil Nadu (c) Kerala (d) Manipur Code : (1) (a) and (d) are correct. (2) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. (3) (b) and (c) are correct. (4) (b) and (d) are correct. 24. National Knowledge Commission (2005) had the following members from the library and Information profession : (a) P.B. Mangla (b) C.R. Karisiddappa (c) Kalpana Das Gupta (d) A.R.D. Prasad Code : (1) (a), (b), (c) are correct. (2) (a), (b), (d) are correct. (3) (a), (c), (d) are correct. (4) (b), (c), (d) are correct. 25. Which of the following are the features of Classic IR Model ? (a) documents are represented by index terms (b) all terms are equally useful (c) index term cannot be weighted (d) there is an assumption that terms are mutually independent Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (c) and (d) are correct. (3) (a) and (c) are correct. (4) (a) and (d) are correct. 26. Vocabulary in a data base is controlled by : (a) Thesaurus Files (b) Import Files (c) Standard Files (d) Authority Files

Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (c) and (d) are correct. (3) (a) and (d) are correct. (4) (b) and (c) are correct. 27. Pre-coordinate indexing systems comprise : (a) NEPHIS (b) SLIC (c) Peek-a-boo (d) Edge-Notched card Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (a) and (d) are correct. (3) (b) and (c) are correct. (4) (c) and (d) are correct. 28. Identify the correct statement from the following : (a) In uniterm indexing system, terms are recorded in numerical file according to the system known as terminal digit posting. (b) Main activities of TREC are devided into Routing and Tracks (c) Recall and precision tend to vary in searching (d) False drops in post coordinate indexing system cannot be eliminated Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (c) and (d) are correct. (3) (a) and (c) are correct. (4) (b) and (d) are correct. 29. What will be the correct filing order of the following documents classified according to Colon classification, (6th reprint edition) ? (a) 23.44 Academic library system in India (b) 23; 43 : 51.44 Classification of books in academic libraries in India (c) 23 : 62 Lending services in academic libraries (d) 23n4451, N82 Journal of Academic Libraries (published from New Delhi since 1982)

836 D Library and Information Science Specific Code : (1) (b), (c), (a), (d) (3) (b), (c), (d), (a)

(2) (d), (b), (c), (a) (4) (d), (a), (c), (b)

30. According to Ranganathan’s classified catalogue code (5th edition), in which among the following cases the initial article is to be omitted ? (a) In rendering the name of a conference (b) In rendering the name of a government (c) In rendering the name of a series (d) In rendering the name of an institution Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (b) and (d) are correct. (3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. 31. Which of the following theories are related to motivation of employees : (a) Theory ‘Z’ of the Japanese style of Management propounded by William Ouchi (b) Theory ‘X’ and Theory ‘Y’ of Douglas McGregar (c) Max Weber’s Theory of Bureaucratic Management (d) Maslow’s hierarchy of Needs Theory Code : (1) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. (2) (b), (c), (d) are correct. (3) (a), (b), (c) are correct. (4) (a), (c), (d) are correct. 32. Identify the ways in which the library can benefit from the TQM as stated by Jurow and Barnard : (a) Breaking down interdepartmental barriers. (b) Redefining the beneficiaries of library services as internal customers (staff) and external customers (patrons). (c) More inclined to short-term goals and defiant to changes to suit users needs. (d) Reaching a state of continuous improvement.

Code : (1) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (3) (a), (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. 33. Identify the cases that require an application for a new ISSN number : (a) Change in the publication’s medium (b) Change in publisher (c) Change in the frequency of publication (d) Change in publication title Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (c) and (d) are correct. (3) (a) and (d) are correct. (4) (b) and (c) are correct. 34. Identify the key salient traits of Soft data : (a) human intelligence (b) certain and definite (c) opinions and contradictions (d) no scope for constructive criticisms Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (c) and (d) are correct. (3) (a) and (c) are correct. (4) (b) and (d) are correct. 35. Identify the components of ‘LAMP’ given below : (a) Linux (b) Acrobat (c) MYSQL (d) Pearl Code : (1) (b) and (c) are correct. (2) (a) and (c) are correct. (3) (a) and (d) are correct. (4) (b) and (d) are correct. 36. Identify the features of proprietary software : (a) Continuity and Development (b) Ease of use (c) Transparency (d) Documentation and Support

Previous Years’ Papers D 837 Code : (1) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. (2) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (3) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. (4) (a), (c) and (d) are correct. 37. Which of the following research methods are used in a study of scattering of periodicals ? (a) Biobibliometric study (b) Bibliometric study (c) Citation analysis study (d) Altmetric study Code : (1) (a) and (d) are correct. (2) (b) and (c) are correct. (3) (a) and (c) are correct. (4) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. 38. Information seeking behavior (ISB) essentially refers to and concerned with : (a) De-recognition of some needs perceived by the user. (b) The strategies and actions undertaken to locate discrete knowledge elements. (c) The experiment conducted on usefulness of library collection with reference to a nonpurposive and conscious need of a particular piece of information. (d) Interactive utilization of three basic resources such as people, information and system. Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (c) and (d) are correct. (3) (a) and (c) are correct. (4) (b) and (d) are correct. 39. A virtual library : (a) Presupposes a physical existence. (b) Collection of resources available on one or more computer systems with a single interface or entry point to the collection. (c) Does not provide access to entire content of a (digital) library via internet.

(d) Provides user assistance services such as reference, inter library loan, etc. Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (b) and (c) are correct. (3) (b) and (d) are correct. (4) (a) and (c) are correct. 40. Which of the following are review type services ? (a) Current Awareness List (b) Trend Reports (c) News clippings (d) State of the Art Report Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (a) and (d) are correct. (3) (b) and (d) are correct. (4) (b) and (c) are correct. 41. Match the following Sections of Copyright Act 1957 (India) with their correct explanation : List - I List - II (a) Section 55 (i) Offence of infringement of copyright (b) Section 63 (ii) Enhanced penalty on second and subsequent convictions (c) Section 63A (iii) Civil remedies for infringement of copyright (d) Section 64 (iv) Power of police to seize infringing copies Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (2) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) (3) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (4) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) 42. Match the following intellectual property rights concepts with their relevant features :

838 D Library and Information Science Specific List - I (a) Copyright

List - II (i) Commercial source indicators and distinctive signs (b) Patents (ii) A treaty between Government and inventor (c) Trade Secrets (iii) Economic rights (d) Trademarks (iv) Information used in operation of a business invaluable to afford the potential economic utility Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (2) (iii) (ii) (iv) (i) (3) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (4) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) 43. Match the President of IFLA with his/her tenure : List - I List - II (a) Sinikka Sipila (i) 2015 - 2017 (b) Ellen Tise (ii) 2017 - 2019 (c) Donna Scheeder (iii) 2011 - 2013 (d) Gloria Perez Salmeron (iv) 2013 - 2015 Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (2) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (3) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) (4) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) 44. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Library Journal (i) Reed Business Information (b) Library (ii) Emerald Group Quarterly Publishing Ltd (c) Library Review (iii) John Hopkins University Press (d) Library Trends (iv) University of Chicago Press

Codes : (a) (1) (i) (2) (iv) (3) (i) (4) (iv)

(b) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii)

(c) (iii) (iii) (ii) (ii)

(d) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i)

45. Match the following queries with their appropriate category of reference sources : List - I List - II (a) Enrolment of stu(i) Year Book dents in a university (b) Weather of (ii) Statistical Denmark sources (c) Number of forei- (iii) Directory gners visited World Book Fair in 2016 (d) Number of Hospi- (iv) Geographical tals in Singapore sources Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (2) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (3) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (4) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) 46. Match the following titles with their class numbers according to CC 6th edition : List - I List - II (a) Small pox (i) L293 : 46 (b) Fever (ii) L : 414 (c) Diabetics (iii) L35 : 4261 (d) Malaria (iv) L : 4231 Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii) (2) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) (3) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (4) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii) 47. Match the following Search Engines with their corresponding subjects/or scientific research discovery information they offer :

Previous Years’ Papers D 839 List - I (a) Vadlo

List - II (i) Web resources including Twitter and Job Posting (b) Mamma (ii) Life Science Literature (c) Athenus (iii) World’s Known Living Languages (d) Ethnologue (iv) Science and Engineering Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (2) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (3) (ii) (iv) (iii) (i) (4) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) 48. Match the following number of Anteriorising common isolates (Applicable before space facet) of colon classification (6th reprint edition) with their correct terms : List - I List - II (Number) (Term) (a) Y1 (i) Synopsis (b) Y3 (ii) Case study (c) Y7 (iii) Digest (d) Y8 (iv) Program of instruction Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (2) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) (3) (i) (ii) (iv) (iii) (4) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 49. Match the following MARC fields with their corresponding descriptions : List - I List - II (a) 020 (i) Electronic Location and Access (b) 250 (ii) Edition Statement (c) 440 (iii) Series (d) 856 (iv) ISBN

Codes : (a) (1) (i) (2) (iv) (3) (iv) (4) (ii)

(b) (ii) (ii) (iii) (i)

(c) (iii) (iii) (ii) (iv)

(d) (iv) (i) (i) (iii)

50. Match the following popular social networking sites with their corresponding founders : List - I List - II (a) Blog (i) Tim Vanderhook and Justin Timberlake (b) Wikis (ii) Google (c) Linkedin (iii) Word Cunningham (d) Myspace (iv) Reid Hoffman and his friends Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (2) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (3) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (4) (iii) (i) (iv) (ii) 51. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Chester Carlton (i) e - Book (b) Brewstu Kable (ii) Xerox Copier (c) Michael S. Hart (iii) NDLTD (d) Edward Fox (iv) Internet Archive Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (2) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (3) (iv) (i) (iii) (ii) (4) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 52. Match the following domains of application with their corresponding metadata schemes : List - I List - II (a) ETD domain (i) METS (b) Image domain (ii) CCO (c) Cultural objects (iii) ConCore (d) Learning objects (iv) VRA-Core

840 D Library and Information Science Specific Codes : (a) (1) (i) (2) (i) (3) (iii) (4) (i)

(b) (ii) (ii) (ii) (iv)

(c) (iii) (iv) (i) (ii)

(d) (iv) (iii) (iv) (iii)

53. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Infomix (i) Image software (b) Omni page (ii) Remote login software (c) Tiff viewer (iii) DBMS software (d) Team viewer (iv) OCR software Codes : (a) (1) (ii) (2) (iii) (3) (i) (4) (iv)

(b) (i) (iv) (ii) (iii)

(c) (iii) (i) (iii) (ii)

(d) (iv) (ii) (iv) (i)

54. Match the following : List - I List - II (Term) (Explanation) (a) Data mart (i) Specific analytic technique that examining large preexisting databases in order to generate new information. (b) Data silo (ii) Systems that integrate data from databases across an entire enterprise, used to guide decisions. (c) Data ware- (iii) Is a lower-cost, house scaled-down version of a data warehouse that can be implemented in a much shorter time. (d) Data mining (iv) Stand alone data stores available for a specific function.

Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (2) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (3) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (4) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) 55. Match the following terms with their corresponding descriptors : List - I List - II (a) Term List (i) Ontologies (b) Categories (ii) System software (c) Relationship List (iii) Taxonomy (d) Emulators (iv) Glossaries Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (2) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) (3) (iv) (i) (ii) (iii) (4) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) 56. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Muktabodha (i) Research Gate (b) Net First (ii) Online citation and reference management tool (c) Zotero (iii) Abstracting and indexing database of OCLC (d) R.G. Score (iv) Digital Library of Indology Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (2) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) (3) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (4) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv) 57. Match the following communication concepts with corresponding explanations : List - I List - II (a) Kinesics commu-(i) Use of touch to nication communication (b) Haptics commu-(ii) Use of Interpernication sonal space

Previous Years’ Papers D 841 (c) Proxemics (iii) Facial Exprescommunication sion, gestures, eye movement (d) Iconics (iv) Interpretation of communication symbolism Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (i) (iii) (ii) (iv) (2) (iii) (iv) (ii) (i) (3) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) (4) (iii) (i) (ii) (iv) 58. Match the following : List - I List - II Types of Research Focus (a) Ethnographic (i) Present events (b) Evaluative (ii) Social behaviour (c) Descriptive (iii) Causation (d) Experimental (iv) Judgement about quality Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (ii) (iv) (i) (iii) (2) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (3) (ii) (iii) (iv) (i) (4) (iv) (ii) (i) (iii) 59. Match the following : List - I List - II Countries Name of the Library (a) Egypt (i) Library of Ashurbanipal (b) Turkey (ii) Villa of Papyri (c) Italy (iii) Library of Pergamum (d) Iraq (iv) Royal Library of Alexandria Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (ii) (iii) (i) (2) (iv) (iii) (ii) (i) (3) (i) (iii) (iv) (ii) (4) (iii) (ii) (i) (iv)

60. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Dr. Zakir (i) Indian Institute of Husain Library Science, Bangalore (b) J.R.D. Tata (ii) Jamia Millia Library Islamia, Delhi (c) Sayaji Rao (iii) IIM, Ahmedabad Gaekwad Library (d) Vikram Sara- (iv) B.H.U. Varanasi bhai Library Codes : (a) (b) (c) (d) (1) (iv) (iii) (i) (ii) (2) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii) (3) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (4) (ii) (iii) (i) (iv) 61. Arrange the following IPR related Acts in India according to their year of enactment : (a) The Copy Right Act (b) The Design Act (c) Information Technology Act (d) Trade and Merchandise Marks Act Code : (1) (a), (b), (d), (c) (2) (b), (a), (d), (c) (3) (c), (b), (d), (a) (4) (d), (a), (b), (c) 62. Arrange the following Padma Shri award recipients in chronological of their year of the award : (a) Bellari Shamanna Kesavan (b) Shiyali Ramamrita Ranganathan (c) Prithvi Nath Kaula (d) Iyyanki Venkata Ramanayya Code : (1) (a), (b), (c) and (d) (2) (a), (d), (b) and (c) (3) (b), (a), (d) and (c) (4) (b), (d), (a) and (c) 63. Arrange the following Public Libraries Acts according to their year of enactment : (a) Bihar Public Libraries Act (b) Uttaranchal Public Libraries Act

842 D Library and Information Science Specific (c) Haryana Public Libraries Act (d) Orissa Public Libraries Act Code : (1) (b), (d), (a), (c) (2) (a), (b), (c), (d) (3) (d), (c), (b), (a) (4) (c), (d), (b), (a) 64. Arrange the following laws of Library Science enunciated by S.R. Ranganathan in a sequence as recorded by L.S. Connaway and I.M. Faniel for OCLC Project. (a) Library is a growing organism (b) Save the time of the readers (c) Books are for use (d) Every book its reader Code : (1) (b), (c), (d), (a) (2) (c), (d), (a), (b) (3) (a), (b), (c), (d) (4) (d), (a), (b), (c) 65. Arrange the following Information Sources according to their first year of Publication : (a) Ulrich’s International Periodical Directory (b) Guide to Indian Periodical Literature (c) Library Literature (d) Indian Science Abstracts Code : (1) (a), (c), (b), (d) (2) (b), (c), (d), (a) (3) (c), (a), (b), (d) (4) (d), (a), (b), (c) 66. Arrange the following according to the year of their first publication : (a) Bibliotheca Universalis by Konard Gesner (b) Catalogue of Books in the 15th century by the British Museum (c) The Bibliographic Instructive Rare Books by G.E. Bura (d) Union catalogue of learned periodical Publications in South Asia by S.R. Ranganathan

Code : (1) (a), (b), (d), (c) (3) (a), (c), (b), (d)

(2) (b), (a), (d), (c) (4) (d), (a), (c), (b)

67. Arrange the following e-book sites according to the chronological order of their origin : (a) Project Gutenberg (b) Open Library (c) Google Books (d) DOAB Code : (1) (a), (c), (b), (d) (2) (b), (a), (c), (d) (3) (c), (b), (d), (a) (4) (d), (c), (a), (b) 68. Arrange the following entities according to FRBR Model : (a) Item (b) Expression (c) Work (d) Manifestation Code : (1) (c), (b), (d), (a) (2) (d), (a), (b), (c) (3) (c), (d), (a), (b) (4) (c), (a), (b), (d) 69. Find out the correct sequence of the following forms of Main Class Literature according to Colon Classification (sixth reprint edition) : (1) Poetry, Fiction, Campu, Oration (2) Poetry, Fiction, Oration, Campu (3) Poetry, Oration, Fiction, Campu (4) Fiction, Poetry, Campu, Oration 70. Which of the following Sections Constitute the parts of main entry according to CCC (Ed.5) ? (a) Leading Section (b) Title Section (c) Format Section (d) Note Section Code : (1) (a), (b) and (c) are correct. (2) (a), (b) and (d) are correct. (3) (b), (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (a), (c) and (d) are correct.

Previous Years’ Papers D 843 71. Which of the following are the features of Vector Space Model IR ? (a) Complex model based on non-linear algebra (b) Term weights are not binary (c) Allows computing a continuous degree of similarity between queries and documents (d) Do not allow ranking documents according to their possible relevance Code : (1) (a) and (b) are correct. (2) (b) and (c) are correct. (3) (c) and (d) are correct. (4) (a) and (d) are correct. 72. Arrange the following work components of WINISIS according to the order of sequence of approach : (a) FST (b) FDT (c) Print Format (d) Worksheet Code : (1) (b), (d), (c), (a) (2) (b), (c), (d), (a) (3) (a), (b), (c), (d) (4) (d), (c), (b), (a) 73. Arrange the following according to their year of origin : (a) Myspace (b) MOSAIC (c) Friendster (d) Blogger Code : (1) (b), (c), (a), (d) (2) (a), (d), (c), (b) (3) (b), (d), (c), (a) (4) (d), (b), (c), (a) 74. Arrange the filters as proposed by Robert S. Tylor that may be employed by Librarians to approximate the higher information needs of individuals. (a) Personal characteristics of the inquirer (b) Relationship of inquiry description to file organisation (c) Objective and motivation (d) Determination of the subject

Code : (1) (c), (a), (b), (d) (2) (d), (c), (a), (b) (3) (a), (c), (b), (d) (4) (d), (b), (a), (c) 75. Arrange the names of the following librarians of Library of Congress in the chronological order of their period of service in LC : (a) Carla Hayden (b) John James Beckley (c) James H. Billington (d) George Waterston Code : (1) (b), (d), (c), (a) (2) (a), (b), (c), (d) (3) (a), (b), (d), (c) (4) (b), (a), (d), (c) 76. Assertion (A) : Information, not data, is the fundamental fuel of the current Big Data Phenomenon. Reason (R) : The reason behind the quick expansion of Big Data is the extensive degree to which data are created, shared and utilised in recent times. Code : (1) (A) is false but (R) is true. (2) (R) is false but (A) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) Both (A) and (R) are true. 77. Assertion (A) : Preprint archives, such as arxiv and SSRN rapidly achieved prominence in the field of scholarly communication. Reason (R) : These archives contain Preprint along with DOI. Code : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (4) (A) is true, but (R) is false. 78. Assertion (A) : There has been a demand for data exchange between library catalogues and databases with records of documentary information.

844 D Library and Information Science Specific Reason (R) : Interoperatability leads to information reuse as a requisite to access data, and takes into account quality, contents, knowledge, products and services. Code : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false but (R) is true. 79. Assertion (A) : Inclusion of DOAJ implies the quality of an open access journals. Reason (R) : DOAJ is an online directory that indexes and provides access to open access and peer viewed journals. Besides DOAJ has tightened the listing criteria. Code : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is false but (R) is true. (4) (A) is true but (R) is false. 80. Assertion (A) : In the Information Retrieval domain, Probabilistic Model is becoming unpopular. Reason (R) : Probabilistic Model fails to provide accurate estimate for the first run probabilities since index terms are not weighted and terms are assumed mutually independent. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) Both (A) and (R) are true. (3) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 81. Assertion (A) : System effectiveness may be evident while evaluating an IR system but cost effectiveness may not be satisfactory. Reason (R) : A cost effectiveness study of an IR system is the evaluation in terms of how to satisfy the users’ information requirements in the most efficient and economical way. Code : (1) (A) is false but (R) is true.

(2) (A) is true but (R) is false. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 82. Assertion (A) : Principle of canonical sequence is mainly followed to arrange the array of subjects in a classification scheme. Reason (R) : This principle sets the proviso that when subjects in an array of subjects are traditionally referred to in a specific sequence, it will be convenient to conform to this traditional sequence. Code : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) (A) is false but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) (A) is true but (R) is false. 83. Assertion (A) : TREC is credited for bringing the concept of the evaluation of IR system. Reason (R) : TREC series of IR experiment has drawn attention of the LIS professionals all over the world for providing an open testing event and standard evaluation scenario. Code : (1) Both (A) and (R) are false. (2) Both (A) and (R) are true. (3) (A) is false but (R) is true. (4) (A) is true but (R) is false. 84. Assertion (A) : As is true for an organisation, effective leadership is crucial for success, as poor managerial leadership may mar the organisational goals. Reason (R) : Patterns of poor managerial leadership create low morale, poor organisational climate, distrust towards supervisors among subordinates, lack of team work and consensus building and shared goals, etc. which are the clear indicators of a wrong person attained a managerial leadership position.

Previous Years’ Papers D 845 Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 85. Assertion (A) : Netiquette mandates that you do your best to act within the laws of cyberspace and society. Reason (R) : Failing to respect others privacy and impolite way of communication in considered breach of Netiquette. Code : (1) Both (A) and (R) are false. (2) Both (A) and (R) are true. (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false, but (R) is true. 86. Assertion (A) : Serial crisis led to the formation of library consortia around the world. Reason (R) : Serial crisis arises due to the situation in which budget of the library for subscription of Journals remains static in spite of rising subscription cost of Journals which in turn affect the collection development policy of the libraries. Code : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true. (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true but (R) is false. (4) (A) is false but (R) is true. 87. Assertion (A) : Plagarism is the wrongful appreciation and stealing and publication of another author’s language, thought, ideas or expressions. Reason (R) : Plagarism is in itself a crime, and thus constitute copyright infringement. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are false. (4) Both (A) and (R) are true. 88. Assertion (A) : The Mendeley is one of the most preferred online reference managers

which can store bibliographic records as well as full text documents and help in creating bibliographical references in any popular citation style like APA, MLA, or Chicago style. Reason (R) : Web-based solutions related to online reference management have become freely available to the global researchers engaged in collaborative research project. Code : (1) Both (A) and (R) are false. (2) Both (A) and (R) are true. (3) (A) is false but (R) is true. (4) (A) is true but (R) is false. 89. Assertion (A) : Dr. Eugene Garfields original invention still continues to serve as a reliable and efficient guide to the sprawling world of research. Reason (R) : Garfield was not only honored for his work in developing the field of Citation Analysis, but also his subsequent contribution in founding ISI (1960) that developed and launched SCI (1964) consequently led to the development of numerous citation databases of first order including ‘Web of Science’, all of which brought him an idiomatic identity in the research world till the date. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 90. Assertion (A) : In technical writing, style manuals and citation standards are essential in structuring and maintaining uniformity of research report. Reason (R) : The Quality of research can be achieved only by standardising the structure of research report, but not by the content. Code : (1) Both (A) and (R) are true.

846 D Library and Information Science Specific (2) Both (A) and (R) are false. (3) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (4) (R) is true, but (A) is false. 91. Assertion (A) : Delphi Techniques in Social Science Research do not give weightage to consensus. Reason (R) : Consensus opinions expressed by the panel of experts is valuable in drawing inferences. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (R) and (A) are false. 92. Assertion (A) : In social research, a high proportion of refusals to answer a research always occurs solely due to inadequate interview instructions or poor interview training. Reason (R) : Within the questionnaire or interview, even a substantive number of questions often remain unanswered making difficult for the researcher to state an exact figure and forcing him to restudy the questions carefully as fault might lie upon a poor transition. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 93. Assertion (A) : In recent times, it is easier to copy, and paste the contents from a digital documents for which people knowingly avoid to credit the sources. Increased access to digital documents has provided a means for increase of plagiarism. Reason (R) : Software assisted detection tools like ithenticate, turnitin etc. now allow vast collection of online documents to be compared to each other making successful detection of plagiarism.

Code : (1) Both (A) and (R) are false. (2) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (3) (R) is true, but (A) is false. (4) Both (A) and (R) are true. 94. Assertion (A) : F.W. Lancaster’s cocksure prediction of a paperless society by the end of 20th century holds no good. Reason (R) : Transition from print dominance to paperless ascendancy, change from scroll to codex and introduction of movable type were not only the few historical shifts, but were also hugely significant innovations. Inspite of rapid technological changes, the future libraries will still accommodate a very large print collection. However, the propelling vision of an informationdriven paperless society, though seems inevitable to avoid space, staff, and cost crunch, may buy more time to become a reality. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. 95. Assertion (A) : The curriculum of LIS education in India is mostly unsteady as local LIS requirements vary. Reason (R) : Adoption of UGC model syllabus is not mandatory for the LIS schools in India. Code : (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false. (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true. (3) Both (A) and (R) are true. (4) Both (A) and (R) are false. Read the following passage carefully and answer the questions based on your understanding (Q. 96 - 100) : In the agentic sociocognitive view, people are self-organizing, proactive, self-reflecting, and self-regulating, not just reactive organisms shaped and shepherded by external events.

Previous Years’ Papers D 847 People have the power to influence their own actions to produce certain results. The capacity to exercise control over one’s thought processes, motivation, affect, and action operates through mechanisms of personal agency. Human agency has been conceptualized in at least three different ways - as either autonomous agency, mechanically reactive agency or emergent interactive agency. The notion that humans operate as entirely independent agents has few serious advocates, although it is sometimes invoked in caricatures of cognitive theories of human behaviour. The tools for the exercise of agency are derived, in large part, from experiences but what is created by their generative use is not reducible to those experiences. Human action, being socially situated, is the product of a dynamic interplay of personal and situational influences. A second approach to the self system is to construe it as mechanically reactive agency. It is an internal system through which external influences operate mechanistically on action, but individuals exert no motivative, self-reflective, self-reactive, creative or directive influence on the process. The self system is merely a repository for implanted structures and a conduit for external influences. The more dynamic models operating holistically include multilevel neural networks. However, a diverse mix of parallel distributed neural activity cannot remain fragmented. It requires an integrative system. Given the proactive nature of human functioning, such a system must have agentic capabilities as well as integrative reactive ones. Agentic functions get lodged in a hidden network operating without any consciousness. Consciousness is the very substance of phenomenal and functional mental life. It provides the information base for thinking about events, planning, constructing courses of action and reflecting on the adequacy of one’s thinking and actions. There is an important difference between being conscious of the experiences one is undergoing, and consciously producing given experiences. For example, consciousness of one’s heart rate and consciously

and intentionally doing things known to elevate one’s heart rate illustrate the difference between passive undergoing and agentic doing. The purposive accessing and deliberative processing of information to fashion efficacious courses of action represent the functional consciousness. Consciousness cannot be reduced to an epiphenomenon of the output of a mental process realized mechanically at nonconscious lower levels. In the connectionist line of theorizing, sensory organs deliver up information through their diverse pathways to the hidden network acting as the cognitive agent that does the construing, planning, motivating and regulating. However, stripped of consciousness and agentic capability of decision and action, people are mere automatons undergoing actions devoid of any subjectivity, conscious regulation, phenomenological life, or personal identity. 96. In the agentic socio-cognitive view, “human action” is the product of : (1) A dynamic interplay of personal and situational influences (2) Personal determinants and mechanisms of human functioning (3) Social bespoke and practices (4) Schematic processing of experiences and memory representation 97. Why the second approach to the ‘self system’ is construed by the author as “mechanically reactive agency” ? (1) An external system through which internal influences operate mechanically. (2) An internal system through which external influences operate mechanically on action having no directive influence exerted by the individuals on process. (3) An external system through which external influences operate mechanically on action. (4) An external system through which external influences operate in which individuals exert direct influence on the process.

848 D Library and Information Science Specific 98. According to the agentic view of “Personality”, what does the ‘self system’ meant to the author ? (1) A Repository for implanted structures and a conduit for internal influences. (2) A Repository for implanted structures and a conduit for external influences. (3) An archive for preserving unusual human instincts. (4) A Pen-stock to restrict the flow of unusual and instant human behaviour. 99. What does ‘consciousness’ conceptually meant to the author ? (1) A demonstration of physical condition based on situation (2) The very substance of phenomenal and functional mental life

ü

(3) The rigid state of mental condition. (4) A Spiritual state of mind 100. How does the author differentiate between “passive undergoing” and “agentic doing” ? (1) Conscious of the experiences one is undergoing and consciously producing given experiences. (2) Conscious of the experiences one is undergoing, but fail to use the given experiences. (3) Conscious of the past experience and their wrongful use irrelevant to need. (4) Unconscious of the experience and their non-intentional use.

ANSWERS

1. (*)

2. (2)

3. (2)

4. (2)

5. (1)

6. (1)

7. (3)

8. (2)

9. (2)

10. (1)

11. (2)

12. (3)

13. (3)

14. (3)

15. (4)

16. (3)

17. (4)

18. (3)

19. (4)

20. (2)

21. (2)

22. (3)

23. (1)

24. (3)

25. (4)

26. (3)

27. (1)

28. (3)

29. (4)

30. (3)

31. (1)

32. (4)

33. (3)

34. (3)

35. (2)

36. (1)

37. (2)

38. (4)

39. (3)

40. (3)

41. (2)

42. (2)

43. (*)

44. (3)

45. (4)

46. (2)

47. (4)

48. (1)

49. (2)

50. (1)

51. (1)

52. (4)

53. (2)

54. (4)

55. (4)

56. (1)

57. (4)

58. (1)

59. (2)

60. (2)

61. (*)

62. (3)

63. (4)

64. (1)

65. (1)

66. (3)

67. (1)

68. (1)

69. (2)

70. (2)

71. (2)

72. (1)

73. (3)

74. (2)

75. (1)

76. (4)

77. (4)

78. (1)

79. (1)

80. (2)

81. (3)

82. (1)

83. (3)

84. (3)

85. (2)

86. (1)

87. (4)

88. (2)

89. (3)

90. (3)

91. (2)

92. (2)

93. (4)

94. (2)

95. (3)

96. (1)

97. (2)

98. (2)

99. (2)

100. (1)

* The marks have been awarded to all the Candidates against the question(s)

vvv

Previous Years’ Papers D 849

December, 2019 LIBRARY AND INFORMATION SCIENCE Paper-II Note :

This paper contains hundred (100) objective type questions of two (2) marks each. All questions are compulsory.

1. KB e-depot is maintained by (1) National Library of India (2) National Library of Netherland (3) National Library of Germany (4) Library of Congress, USA 2. An attempt to make a computer resource unavailable to its intended user is called (1) Denial-of-service attack (2) Virus attack (3) Worm attack (4) Bot-net attack 3. Which of the following is an example of ‘Information Padding’? (1) Inclusion of a source in the bibliography which is relevant to your work and duly consulted (2) Inclusion of a source in the bibliography though not consulted, but required for further reading (3) Adding of necessary words or information to a speech or piece of work making the same more shorter (4) Adding of gratuitous and impertinent words or information to a work or piece of writing or speech extraneously making the same more longer 4. Which of the following information seeking behaviour model explains initiation, selection, exploration, formulation, collection and presentation? (1) Kuhlthau's Model (2) Ellis’ Model (3) Wil1son‘s Model (4) Krikelas Model 5. Which of the following is an example of ‘microblogging? (1) Word press (2) Blogspot (3) Live journal (4) Twitter

6. ‘Research in Progress‘ database developed by INFLIBNET is known as (1) Vidyanidhi (2) Shodhganga (3) Shodhgangotri (4) NDL 7. Identify the points related to Edward Deming’s 14-points philosophy of TQM (i) Fair Wages (ii) Division of Labour (iii) Break Down Barriers (iv) Eliminate Exhortation Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (iii) and (iv) are correct (2) (i) and (ii) are correct (3) (i) and (iii) are correct (4) (ii) and (iv) are correct 8. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Barcode (i) Ray Theories Technology Ray tag (b) RFID Technology (ii) Sir William Herschel (c) QR code (iii) Norman Joseph Woodland and Bernard Silver (d) Biometric (iv) Denson Wave Technology Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (a)-(ii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(iii) (2) (a)-(iii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iv), (d)-(ii) (3) (a)-(iv), (b)-(iii), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii) (4) (a)-(iv), (b)-(i), (c)-(ii), (d)-(iii) 9. Ex-Libris is an example of which type of cloud computing? (1) Software as a service

850 D Library and Information Science Specific

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

(2) Infrastructure as a service (3) Platform as a service (4) Network as a service Which of the following technologies use electronic waves at radio frequency for data transmission? (1) Li-fi (2) Wi-fi (3) Optical cables (4) Twisted pairs Assertion (A) : Glossary is an alphabetical list of technical terms on a particular subject. Reason (R) : There is no difference between disciplinespecific terms and general terms. In the context of these two statements, which one of the following is true? (1) (A) is false, but (R) is true (2) (A) is true, but (R) is false (3) Both (A) and (R) are true (4) Both (A) and (R) are false Assertion (A) : Web search engines get their information by crawling from site to site. Reason (R) : The "Spider" checks for the standard file name spider. Avi, addressed to it before sending certain information back to be indexed In the context of these two statements, which one of the following is true? (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true (3) Both (A) and (R) are false (4) Both (A) and (R) are true ‘Altmetric’ is not related to (1) A record of bibliographic data on a subject (2) A record of attention (3) A measure of dissemination (4) An indicator of influence and impact Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Fundamentals of (i) A.J. Walford Reference Service (b) Introduction to (ii) S. R. Reference Works Ranganathan (c) Reference Service (iii) F. N. Cheney and W J Williams

15.

16.

17.

18.

19.

20.

21.

(d) Guide to (iv) Williham A Reference Books Katz Choose the correct answer from the followingg options (1) (a)-(ii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iv), (d)-(iii) (2) (a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii) (3) (a)-(iv), (b)-(ii), (c)-(iii), (d)-(i) (4) (a)-(iii), (b)-(ii), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i) Which Network protocol is involved in the execution of ping? (1) TCP (2) ARP (3) ICMP (4) BOOTP INFOTERA is a global environmental information network of (1) UNDP (2) UNISIST (3) UNEP (4) OECD Conservative, moderate and liberal theories of reference service are propounded by (1) S.R. Ranganathan (2) James I. Wyer (3) W.A. Katz (4) Krishan Kumar Universal Bibliographic Control and International MARC (UBCIM) is a core activity of (1) IFLA (2) UNESCO (3) OCLC (4) ALA Which of the following publications are excluded from the scope of Indian National Bibliography? (i) Maps (ii) Guide to textbooks (iii) First issue of a new periodical (iv) Musical scores Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct (2) (i), (iii) and (iv) are correct (3) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are correct (4) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct Dublin Core Metadata Element set version 1.1 consists of (1) Fifteen elements (2) Eighteen elements (3) Twenty elements (4) Twenty two elements Which of the budget methods emphasizes on identi?cation of program objectives and the measurement of results?

Previous Years’ Papers D 851

22.

23.

24.

25.

26.

27.

28.

(1) ZBB (2) Line Budgeting (3) Item budgeting (4) PPBS Which of the following ‘Change Management Model' has three stages namely, unfreezing, changing and refreezing’? (1) Mary Parker Follett’s Model (2) Kurt Lewin’s Model (3) Henry Mintzberg’s Model (4) Lillion Gilberth’s Model Bibframe 2.0 organises bibliographic information into three core levels of abstraction. Choose the correct answer from the options given below (1) Work, Instance, Item (2) Work, Item, Agents (3) Work, Agents, Events (4) Events, Instance, Subjects Arrange the following phases of Six Sigma in their correct sequence (i) Define (ii) Measure (iii) Analyze (iv) Improve Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i), (iii), (iv) and (ii) (2) (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) (3) (iii), (i), (ii) and (iv) (4) (iii), (iv), (i) and (ii) “Haptics” is a form of non-verbal communication that uses (1) Facial expression (2) Touch-to-communicate (3) Interpersonal space (4) Interpretation of symbols The g-index was proposed by (1) Jorge Hirsch (2) Bill Smith (3) Leo Egghe (4) Olle Persson In universal decimal classification (Abridged English 3rd edition) symbol indicates (1) Relation sign (2) Common auxiliaries of place (3) Common auxiliaries of Race and Nationality (4) Common auxiliaries of Time Match the following types of questions with corresponding explanations :

29.

30.

31.

32.

List - I (a) Ranking item questions (b) Ambigous questions (c) Dichotomous questions (d) Structural questions List - II (i) When the language of questions is such that it may be interpreted in more than one way (ii) When answer to a question has been preconceived and classified into possible groups (iii) Questions are given to record the preference of the respondent (iv) When reply to a question is given in form of one of the two alternatives Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (a)-(iii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iv), (d)-(ii) (2) (a)-(ii), (b)-(iii), (c)-(iv), (d)-(i) (3) (a)-(i), (b)-(ii), (c)-(iii), (d)-(iv) (4) (a)-(iv), (b)-(ii), (c)-(i), (d)-(iii) Which of the following are Web-Zine? (i) Email Magazine (ii) E-conference (iii) On-line Bulletin (iv) Electronic News Letter Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i), (iii) and (iv) are correct (2) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct (3) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are correct (4) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct Annual publication, listing a set of events forthcoming in the next year is known as (1) Almanac (2) Yearbook (3) Directory (4) Handbook What is the range for getting Gold level of certification under leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED)? (1) 40 - 49 (2) 50 - 59 (3) 60 - 79 (4) 80 + Arrange the following States in ascending order of the year of enactment of thel1 iespectne public Library Acts

852 D Library and Information Science Specific

33.

34.

35.

36.

37.

(i) Kerala (ii) Chattisgarh (iii) Goa (iv) Uttarakhand/Uttaranchal Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i), (iii), (iv), (ii) (2) (ii), (iii), (i), (iv) (3) (iv), (i), (ii), (iii) (4) (iii), (iv), (i), (ii) Assertion (A) : As the level of Recall decreases, the precision increases. Reason (R) : Recall and Precision are not always inversely correlated. In the context of these two statements, which one of the following is true? (1) (A) is false, but (R) is true (2) (A) is true, but (R) is false (3) Both (A) and (R) are true (4) Both (A) and (R) are false Duraspace provides cloud-based services related to (i) D-space (ii) NewGen Lib (iii) E-Prints (iv) Fedora Commons Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i) and (ii) are correct (2) (ii) and (iii) are correct (3) (iii) and (iv) are correct (4) (i) and (iv) are correct Which of the following consortium supports e-resources exclusively for health sciences? (1) CeRA (2) HELLVET (3) FORSA (4) NKRC ‘Index Indiana’ is (1) An index to Indian language periodical literature (2) An index to library science literature only (3) An index to English Language literature (4) An index to Reference material The UK Committee on RDA (UKCOR) aims to: (i) Represent the interests of LIS professional community of third world countries with regard to RDA (ii) Contribute to the RDA development program and to the maintenance and governance of RDA

38.

39.

40.

41.

42.

(iii) Ensure that representatives of the RDA European region are briefed on the position of the UK Community regarding all aspects of governance, development and maintenance of RDA (iv) Support implementation and development of RDA in UK Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct (2) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are correct (3) (i), (iii) and (iv) are correct (4) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct Arrange the following Library Associations according to ascending order of their year of establishment (i) IFLA (ii) SLA (iii) CILIP (iv) ALA Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (iv), (ii), (i), (iii) (2) (ii), (iv), (i), (iii) (3) (iv), (i), (ii), (iii) (4) (iii), (ii), (iv), (i) CANMARC and US-MARC are merged together with (1) CCF (2) UNIMARC (3) UK-MARC (4) MARC-2 1 According to S.R. Ranganatan "Wherever telescoping of array is done, the canon of Hierarchy is violated. This violation is deliberately done to satisfy (1) Law of Parsimony (2) Law of Local Variation (3) Law of Symmetry (4) Law of Interpretation Patent information system is located at (1) Kanpur (2) Lucknow (3) Nagpur (4) Hyderabad Which of the following steps are involved in the selection of documents for digitization? (i) Checking for copyright (ii) Checking the research significance of the document (iii) Checking for price (iv) Checking the condition of document

Previous Years’ Papers D 853

43.

44.

45.

46.

47.

48.

49.

Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct (2) (i), (iii) and (iv) are correct (3) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct (4) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are correct Assertion (A) : Big Data is a product of data being generated constantly, automatically, and rapidly. Reason (R) : Due to the omnipresence of personal computing devices and smart phones, individuals generate massive amount of data through e-commerce, e-communication, social media, online searches and GPS Navigation. In the context of these two statements, which one of the following is true? (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false (2) (A) is false, but (R) is true (3) Both (A) and (R) are true (4) Both (A) and (R) are false ISBD was created and is maintained by (1) OCLC (2) UNESCO (3) IFLA (4) Library of Congress Which layer of the OSI Model is mostly concerned with the syntax of the data? (1) Session layer (2) Presentation layer (3) Network layer (4) Data link layer Who proposed ‘General System Theory of Communication’? (1) Robert T. Craig (2) W.R. Ashby (3) Shannon and Weaver (4) Ludwig Von Bertalanffy Physical arrangement of computers in a Network is called (1) Topology (2) Routing (3) Bandwidth (4) Switching Which digital library software was developed at Cornell University? (1) FEDORA (2) E-Prints (3) GSDL (4) D-Space Loss of signal power as light travel down the fibre is called (1) Attenuation (2) Propagation (3) Scattering (4) Interpretation

50. Who was the first Librarian of National Library of India after independence? (1) K.M. Asadullah (2) D.R. Kalia (3) B.S. Kesavan (4) Kalpana Dasgupta 51. Identify the committee charged with the responsibility for Indian standards related to libraries (1) Z-39 (2) TC-46 (3) BIS-LIB (4) MSD-5 52. Match the following number of Table-1 : Standard Subdivions of Dewey Decimal Classification (19th Edition) with their correct terms : List - I List - II (a) 0202 (i) Organizations and management (b) 0142 (ii) Synopses (c) 06 (iii) Schools and Courses (d) 071 (iv) Etymology Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (a)-(iv), (b)-(iii), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i) (2) (a)-(ii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iii), (d)-(iv) (3) (a)-(ii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(iii) (4) (a)-(iii), (b)-(ii), (c)-(i), (d)-(iv) 53. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) OCLC (i) The Hague, Netherland (b) INIS (ii) Washington DC, USA (c) IFLA (iii) Viena, Austria (d) MEDLARS (iv) Dublin, Ohio Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (a)-(iv), (b)-(iii), (c)-(i), (d)-(ii) (2) (a)-(ii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iii), (d)-(iv) (3) (a)-(iii), (b)-(ii), (c)-(iv), (d)-(i) (4) (a)-(iii), (b)-(i), (c)-(ii), (d)-(iv) 54. Identify the electronic depository in which Librarians of the participating institutions have the right to put their words in managing the depository (1) Portico (2) LOCKSS (3) CLOCKSS (4) PubMed

854 D Library and Information Science Specific 55. Which of the following is a technique of nonprobability sampling? (1) J udgemental sampling (2) Simple Random Sampling (3) Stratified Random Sampling (4) Cluster Sampling 56. Assertion (A) : INFLIBNET provides electronic document delivery service to all types of libraries in India. Reason (R) : Due to inadequate ICT infrastructure, most of the libraries are not in a position to provide electronic document delivery service, to their clientele. In the context of these two statements, which one of the following is true? (1) Both (A) and (R) are true (2) (A) is true, but (R) is false (3) Both (A) and (R) are false (4) (A) is false but (R) is true 57. Which are the factors responsible for deterioration of Library Materials? (i) Biological Factor (ii) Electromagnetic Factor (iii) Chemical Factor (iv) Environmental Factor Choose the correct answer from the options given below : (1) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct (2) (i), (iii) and (iv) are correct (3) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are correct (4) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct 58. ‘Indian Library Review' is a blog of (1) IASLIC (2) NISCAIR (3) INFLIBNET (4) National Library of India 59. Under RRRLF Financial Assistance Matching scheme, assistance is shared on matching basis between RRRLF and developed States as per the given ratio (1) 70 : 30 (2) 60 : 40 (3) 90 : 10 (4) 50 : 50 60. Which of the following routes is critical in CPM? (1) Shortest route (2) Longest route (3) Routes having simple activities (4) Routes having less important activity

61. Arrange the correct sequence of the following facets of Boook Number according to Colon Classification (sixth reprint edition) (i) Language Number (ii) Volume Number (iii) Copy Number (iv) Form Number Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i), (iv), (ii) and (iii) (2) (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) (3) (iv), (i), (iii) and (ii) (4) (i), (iii), (ii) and (iv) 62. Match the following : List - I List - II (a) Judgemental (i) Based on ability of Sampling the researcher to divide the sampling population into groups (b) Snowball (ii) Selecting a sample Sampling using networks (c) Cluster (iii) Each element in Sampling the population is given on equal and independent chance of selection (d) Simple (iv) Identification of Random person who can Sampling provide the best information Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (a)-(iv), (b)-(ii), (c)-(i), (d)-(iii) (2) (a)-(iii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i) (3) (a)-(ii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iii)- (d)-(iv) (4) (a)-(i), (b)-(ii), (c)-(iv), (d)-(iii) 63. Who among the following are the editors of ALA Glossary of Library and Information Science Fourth Edition? (i) Michael Levine – Clark (ii) Philip Babcock Gove (iii) Toni M. Carter (iv) L.M. Harrod Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i) and (ii) are correct

Previous Years’ Papers D 855 (2) (ii) and (iii) are correct (3) (i) and (iii) are correct (4) (i) and (iv) are correct 64. Identify the publication years of different editions of AACR (i) 1967 (ii) 1970 (iii) 1978 (iv) 1988 Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct (2) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct (3) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are correct (4) (i), (iii) and (iv) are correct 65. The concept of ‘Information Encountering (IE) was introduced in the domain information behaviour literature by Sanda Erdelez in 1997, where she proposed a conceptual framework for facilitating systematic study of IE. Identify the three key elements proposed by Erdelez in her study (i) Characteristics of the information user (ii) Characteristics of information seeking habit (iii) Characteristics of information environment (iv) Characteristics of encountered information Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct (2) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are correct (3) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct (4) (i), (iii) and (iv) are correct 66. Which of the following are not the publications of Ministry of Information and Broadcasting. Government of India (i) Economic and Political Weekly (ii) University News (iii) Yojana (iv) Vigyan Pragati Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct (2) (i), (iii) and (iv) are correct (3) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct (4) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are correct

67. There is no significant difference in the proportion of male and female librarians in the study population is an example of (1) Hypothesis of point prevalence (2) Null-hypothesis (3) Hypothesis of association (4) Hypothesis of difference 68. Which of the following are the high-level classes or entities in the BIBFRAME model? (i) Work (ii) Instance (iii) Item (iv) Author Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct (2) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct (3) (i), (iii) and (iv) are correct (4) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are correct 69. What is ‘Epilogue in a thesis? (1) First Chapter (2) Final Chapter (3) Title Page (4) Appendix 70. Arrange the following information networks according to their year of launching (i) NICNET (ii) NKN (iii) INFLIBNET (iv) ERNET Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (ii), (iii), (i), (iv) (2) (i), (iv), (iii), (ii) (3) (iii), (iv), (ii), (i) (4) (i), (iii), (ii), (iv) 71. Identify the former Librarians of National Library of India from the names given below (i) D.N. Banerjee (ii) Kalpana Dasgupta (iii) R.K. Dasgupta (iv) K.M. Asadullah Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i) and (ii) are correct (2) (ii) and (iv) are correct (3) (i) and (iii) are correct (4) (iii) and (iv) are correct 72. In data transfer process, which of the following is used for strengthening the signals (1) Firewalls (2) Hubs (3) Switching packets (4) Repeater

856 D Library and Information Science Specific 73. Arrange the following according to their increasing storage capacity (i) Exabyte (ii) Zettabyte (iii) Petabyte (iv) Yottabyte Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (iv), (ii), (i), (iii) (2) (iii), (i), (ii), (iv) (3) (iii) (i)- (iv), (ii) (4) (iv), (iii), (i), (ii) 74. Match the following notation of second summary of DDC (19th Edition) with their correct terms : List - I List - II (a) 110 (i) Ethics (Moral Philosophy) (b) 120 (ii) Epistemology Causation, Human kind (c) 160 (iii) Meta Physics (d) 170 (iv) Logic Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (a)-(iv), (b)-(iii), (c)-(ii), (d)-(i) (2) (a)-(iii), (b)-(ii), (c)-(i), (d)-(iv) (3) (a)-(ii), (b)-(iii), (c)-(iv), (d)-(i) (4) (a)-(iii), (b)-(ii), (c)-(iv), (d)-(i) 75. The method of communication in which transmission takes place in both the directions, but only in one direction at a time is called (1) Simplex (2) Full Duplex (3) Half Duplex (4) Two-wire Circuits 76. Assertion (A) : The ‘Schedule tool‘ of survey method helps the researcher to get information mostly from illiterates respondents. Reason (R) : In the schedule method, the onus of filling up of the questionnaire usually lies with the respondents. In the context of these two statements, which one of the following is true? (1) (A) is true, but (R) is false (2) Both (A) and (R) are true (3) (A) is false, but (R) is true (4) Both (A) and (R) are false 77. Identify the services of OCLC from the following

78.

79.

80.

81.

(i) Infoport (ii) OJAS (iii) First search (iv) Question point Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i) and (ii) are correct (2) (ii) and (iv) are correct (3) (i) and (iii) are correct (4) (iii) and (iv) are correct Match the following authors with their corresponding books. List - I List - II (a) A. Broadfield (i) The foundations of Education for Librarianshi (b) J .H. Shera (ii) A Philosophy of Librarianship (c) Pierce Butler (iii) Library Power : A New Philosophy of Libraria: (d) James Thomson (iv) Introduction to Library Science Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (a)-(i), (b)-(iii), (c)-(iv), (d)-(ii) (2) (a)-(iv), (b)-(i), (c)-(iii), (d)-(i) (3) (a)-(iii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iv), (d)-(ii) (4) (a)-(ii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iv), (d)-(iii) Which of the following are network protocols? (i) UDP (ii) SMTP (iii) TCP (iv) Telnet Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i), (ii) and (iv) are correct (2) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are correct (3) (i), (iii) and (iv) are correct (4) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct Who is the creator of "R" statistics? (1) Dale H. Bent and H.E. Garrett (2) Norman H. Nie and C. Had (3) Ross Inaka and Robert Gentleman (4) Harold Cramer and John C Which of the following are Reference Style Management tools?

Previous Years’ Papers D 857

82.

83.

84.

85.

86.

(i) Stata (ii) Ref works (iii) Mendeley (iv) Zotero Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i), (ii) and (iii) are correct (2) (ii), (iii) and (iv) are correct (3) (i) and (ii) are correct (4) (i) and (iv) are correct Who popularized the term ‘Bib]iomania'? (1) Ted Nelson (2) Thomas Frognall Dibdin (3) George Kingsley Zipf (4) Theodore Besterman Who authored the book entitled ‘Putting Knowledge to work‘? (1) Pauline Atherton (2) Herman M. Weisman (3) S.C. Bradford (4) J .S. Brown Identify the name of ‘Editor-in-Chief’ of Dewey Decimal Classification and Edition 23 (1) P. Green (2) J. Martin (3) Joan S. Mitchell (4) A. Kent The UK Committee on RDA (UKCOR) is supported by (i) CILIP (ii) The British Library (iii) OCLC (iv) UNESCO Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (i) and (iii) are correct (2) (ii) and (iv) are correct (3) (i) and (iv) are correct (4) (i) and (ii) are correct Arrange the following layers of Tiwana's KMS Architecture in order (i) Interface layer (ii) Application layer (iii) Access and Authentication layer (iv) Collaborative, intelligence and Filtering Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (ii), (iii), (iv), (i) (2) (iv), (ii), (iii), (i) (3) (i), (iii), (iv), (ii) (4) (iii), (iv), (i), (ii)

87. Assertion (A) : Consortia-based subscription of online resources now a days has become a practice in most of the University Libraries in India Reason (R) : Spiraling cost of publications, optimal utilization of resources at least efforts and cost coupled with growing expectations of users, have made such subscription redundant In the context of these two statements which one of the following is true? (1) (A) is false, but (R) is true (2) (A) is true, but (R) is false (3) Both (A) and (R) are true (4) Both (A) and (R) is false 87. Who introduced the term ‘Literary Warrant‘? (1) S.R. Ranganathan (2) Wyndham Hulme (3) Melvil Dewey (4) J.D. Brown 89. Match the following protocols with their creators : List - I List - II (a) HTTP (i) Eric Rescoria and Allan M. Schiffman (b) SHTTP (ii) Tim Berners – Lee (c) FTP (iii) Robert E. Kahn and Vintoerf (d) SMTP (iv) Abhay Bhusan Choose the correct answer from the following options : (1) (a)-(ii), (b)-(iv), (c)-(i), (d)-(iii) (2) (a)-(ii), (b)-(iii), (c)-(i), (d)-(iv) (3) (a)-(ii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iv), (d)-(iii) (4) (a)-(iv), (b)-(i), (c)-(ii), (d)-(iii) 90. Which of the following devices is used to connect di?erent network segments and manage the traffic between them? (1) Switch (2) Gateway (3) Bridge (4) Repeater Comprehension: Read the passage given below and answer the questions which follow. Science provides the answer as to how to perform certain operations in order to secure given

858 D Library and Information Science Specific ends. But such knowledge is a two-edged sword. The same processes that led to the manufacture of aniline dyes set in motion physiological processes that ended in death for many of those who helped manufacture the dyes. The development of superior methods of keeping records, basic to the growth of social science, may also be the means of strenghtening the grip of a repressive political dictatorship. Today the use of radioactiveisotope therapy promises much for the reduction of disease, but these isotopes are products of the same scientific knowledge which produced the atomic bomb and which has made possible the even more destructive hydrogen bomb. Science as a mehod gives power, but this is a power which may be used for disapproved as Well as approved ends. Science, then can (1) offer a method of solving problems, i.e., of achieving values; (2) offer alternative methods, so that relative costs can be calculated; (3) provide a means for predicting What the order consequences of a given course of action may be. If, for example, it is desired to clear a slum, it is good to be able not only to predict the financial and emotional costs of the specific program but also to know what other effects the slum clearance will have upon the community. This is a task to which only the scientific method may be successful applied. Since science operates as a technique of problem solving, and since problems in this sense are formulated upon the basis of vaue judgements, then it is clear science and values are interrelated. 91. Which destructive product is made up by the use of radioactive - isotope‘? (1) Machine Gun (2) Hydrogen Bomb (3) Robot (4) Pistol 92. What is the benefit of ‘Radioactive Isotope Therapy“? (1) Reduction of anxiety (2) Reduction of stress (3) Reduction of Disease (4) Reduction of psycho-fear 93. Which kind of process led to death for many who helped manufacture of the dyes? (1) Motion physiological process (2) Electromechanical process

(3) Cognitive process (4) Psychological process 94. Which of the following strengthens the grip of a repressive political dictatorship? (1) Superior method of keeping records (2) Static in growth of social sciences (3) Inferior method of documentation (4) Fair political practice 95. Problems are formulated upon the basis of (1) Market survey (2) Value Judgment (3) Review of literature (4) Pilot study Read the following passage carefully and answer the questions that follow. The term User Education is used interchangeably wvith ‘library instruction‘, library orientation" and ‘bibliographic instruction". Neelameghan distinguishes user education, user orientation and user assistance. Roberts and Blandy prefer a broad term: library instruction. User education is a coniprehensive service and a process of making the user self-reliant in locating, sorting and repacking inforniation. This process niay require two strategies: for general exposure, and for specific subject oriented – bibliographic instruction. The first visit to the library is inostly casual and in a sense this requires niore frequent ineetings with the user. By the 1850s, US librarians instructed patrons on library use Sainuel Greens attempt to initiate a reference desk in the public library in the 1870s. Louis Shores library- college inovement in the 19205 and Patricia Knapp's l\Iontieth College prograniine in the 1960s are all significant. In 1949 the three-stage user education progrannne proposed by the UK library associations University and Research Section was a landniark. Ranganathan prescribed the role of an interlnediary as a user-friendly reference librarian, Boon Fjallbrant and Stevenson Hopkins, Roberts and Blandy and others have inade extensive historical assessments. Progress was slow, partly due to the probleru of defining its place in the services: it was lost in the inforniational function or reference service. While lectures, tours and seniinars are traditional

Previous Years’ Papers D 859 methods, prograrniued learning, teaching machines, audiovisual tools and coinputer assisted learning (CAL) are the recent advances. User education is not inerely a library tour or a brochure, it includes searching databases (local and global) and generally niaking the user less dependent on others. A variety of media are used. One-to-one instruction is simple but expensive. Orientation by inforrnal tour is traditional and effective, but it is tiine-consuining and too general, and can cause boredoin. Printed inaterials (Leaflet, handout) describe services, tools and search strategies, but need frequent revision and inay not be used. Displaying of posters, diagranis, etc can teaching skills, but requires a inediator. In workbooks, the audience is involved, which enables learning at the individual's pace and the educator can know the effect of learning. 96. What is Roberts and Blandy's most preferred term for ‘User Education‘? (1) Library orientation (2) Bibliographic instruction (3) Library instruction (4) User assistance 97. What are the traditional methods of imparting user education?

(1) Lectures, tours and seminars (2) Teaching machines (3) Audio-visual tools (4) Programmed learning 98. Three stage of user education programme was proposed by (1) S.R. Ranganathan (2) University and Research Section, UK Library Association (3) Samuel Green (4) Indian Library Association 99. User education as a service aims to (1) Aid in understanding non-bibliographic instruction (2) Use appropriate referral source (3) Rely upon intermediary service (4) Make the user self-reliant in locating, sorting and repackaging information 100. Which of the following type of ‘user-instruction‘ is relatively a costly proposition and less time consuming? (1) One to many instruction (2) Informal tour (3) One to one instruction (4) Classroom instruction

860 D Library and Information Science Specific

ü

ANSWERS

1. (2)

2. (1)

3. (4)

4. (1)

5. (4)

6. (3)

7. (1)

8. (2)

9. (1)

10. (2)

11. (2)

12. (1)

13. (1)

14. (4)

15. (3)

16. (3)

17. (2)

18. (2)

19. (4)

20. (1)

21. (4)

22. (2)

23. (1)

24. (2)

25. (2)

26. (3)

27. (4)

28. (1)

29. (1)

30. (1)

31. (3)

32. (1)

33. (2)

34. (4)

35. (2)

36. (1)

37. (2)

38. (1)

39. (4)

40. (1)

41. (3)

42. (3)

43. (3)

44. (3)

45. (2)

46. (4)

47. (1)

48. (1)

49. (1)

50. (3)

51. (4)

52. (3)

53. (1)

54. (3)

55. (1)

56. (4)

57. (2)

58. (4)

59. (4)

60. (2)

61. (1)

62. (1)

63. (3)

64. (4)

65. (3)

66. (3)

67. (2)

68. (1)

69. (2)

70. (2)

71. (2)

72. (4)

73. (2)

74. (4)

75. (3)

76. (1)

77. (4)

78. (4)

79. (4)

80. (3)

81. (2)

82. (2)

83. (1)

84. (3)

85. (4)

86. (3)

87. (2)

88. (2)

89. (3)

90. (3)

91. (2)

92. (3)

93. (1)

94. (1)

95. (2)

96. (3)

97. (1)

98. (2)

99. (4)

100. (3)

mmm